Christmas Jokes

December 18, 2009

How did Santa get lost on Christmas Eve? “He got mis-sled,

” What music does Frosty the Snowman fear? “Heavy melt-al music,”

If you have a fear of Santa Claus coming down your chimney at Christmas, are you suffering from Santaclaustrophobia?


What do angry mice send at Christmas?
Cross mouse cards.


Every Christmas I get a horrendous pain that stays for a week. Then my mother-in-law goes back to her own house.


Father: Did you see Father Christmas this year, son?
Son: No it was too dark to see him, but I heard what he said when he stubbed his toes on the edge of my bed.


I don’t care who you are, get those reindeer and that sleigh off my roof.


Fred: What kind of Christmas did you have?
Tom: Oh, the same as last year, thirty minutes eating turkey, mince pies and Christmas pudding, followed by three days in bed recovering.


Steve: What’s your father getting for Christmas?
Dave: Bald and fat.


Who used to take presents to the famous detective, Sherlock Holmes?
Santa Clues.


What do gorillas sing at Christmas?
Jungle Bells, Jungle Bells…


Joe: Did you get many Christmas presents?
Jack: I sure did. A lot more than my four brothers.
Joe: Why was that?
Jack: On Christmas morning I got up two hours before them.
 

Never mind the star – get those camels off my lawn!


Just before Christmas, an honest politician, a generous lawyer and Santa Claus were riding in the elevator of a very posh hotel. Just before the doors opened they all noticed a $20 bill lying on the floor. Which one picked it up?
Santa of course, because the other two don’t exist!


Q. Why was Santa’s little helper depressed?
A. Because he had low elf esteem.


Why does Santa have 3 gardens?
A. So he can ho-ho-ho.


Q. What’s red and white and gives presents to good little fish on Christmas?
A. Sandy Claws.


Santa’s New Contract For 2000 A new contract for Santa has been negotiated…Please read the following carefully.
I regret to inform you that, effective immediately, I will no longer be able to serve the Southern United States on Christmas Eve. Due to the overwhelming current population of the Earth, my contract was re-negotiated by North American Fairies and Elves Local 209. I now only serve certain areas of Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Wisconsin and Michigan. I also get longer breaks for milk and cookies, so keep that in mind. However, I am certain that your children will be in good hands with your local replacement that happens to be my third cousin, Bubba Claus. His side of the family is from the South Pole. He shares my goal of delivering toys to all good boys and girls however, there are a few differences between us.
They are as follows:
1. There is no danger of a Grinch stealing your presents from Bubba. He has a gun rack on his sleigh and a bumper sticker that reads “This sleigh insured by Smith & Wesson”.
2. Instead of milk and cookies, Bubba Claus prefers children to leave RC cola and pork rinds (or a moon pie) on the fireplace. And Bubba doesn’t smoke a pipe. He dips a little snuff, though, so please have an empty spit can handy.
3. Bubba’s sleigh is pulled by floppy-eared, flying coon dogs instead of reindeer. I made the mistake of loaning him a couple of my reindeer one time and Blitzen’s head now overlooks Bubba’s fireplace.
4. You won’t hear “On Comet, on Cupid…” when Bubba Claus arrives. Instead you will hear “On Earnhardt, on Wallace, on Martin and Labonte. On Rudd, on Jarrett, on Elliot and Petty.”
5. “Ho, Ho, Ho!” has been replaced by “Yee Haw!” And you also are likely to hear Bubba’s elves respond “I hear’d dat!”
6. As required by Southern highway laws, Bubba Claus’ sleigh does have Yosemite Sam mud flaps with the words “Back Off”. The last I heard, it has other decorations as well. One is a Chevy logo with lights that race through the letters and the other is a caricature of me (Santa Claus) going wee-wee on the Tooth Fairy.
7. The usual Christmas movie classics such as “Miracle on 34th Street” and “It’s a Wonderful Life” will not be shown in your viewing area. Instead you will see “Ernest Saves Christmas” and “Smoky and the Bandit IV” featuring Burt Reynolds as Bubba Claus and dozens of state patrol cars crashing into each other.
8. Bubba Claus doesn’t wear a belt. If I were you, I’d make sure that you, the wife and the kids turn the other way when he bends over to put the presents under the tree.
9. Don’t look for the traditional stocking items this year either. Instead of chocolates and candy canes, children in the South can expect to find beef jerky, Vienna sausages and a can of Spam.
10. Toys will be assembled by Bubba Claus’s elves in his Freedom Homes doublewide workshop.
11. And finally, lovely Christmas songs such as Rudolph the Red-nosed Reindeer” and “Santa Claus is Coming to Town” will be replaced. “Bubba Shot the Jukebox” and “Grandma Got Run Over by a Reindeer” will be played repeatedly on radio stations all over the South.

Sincerely yours, Santa Claus


Santa Claus brings poor Rudolph to the vet. He says to the vet, “Doctor, please do something for my Rudolph. His nose won’t light up.” The vet walks out of the room and returns with a pet carrier. He places the pet carrier next to the reindeer, opens it and out steps a cat. The cat walks around the reindeer and sniffs it. The cat then walks back into the carrier. The animal doctor takes it out of the room and returns. He hands Santa Claus the bill. Santa gasps, “$350 dollars! You didn’t do anything for my Rudolph and you’re charging me $350 dollars?” The vet shrugged and replied, “That’s the usual charge. $50 dollars for the office visit and $300 dollars for the CAT SCAN.”


There was once a great czar in Russia named Rudolph the Red. He stood looking out the windows of is palace one day while his wife, the Czarina Katerina, sat nearby knitting. He turned to her and said, “Look my dear, it has begun to rain!” Without even looking up from her knitting she replied, “It’s too cold to rain. It must be sleeting.” The Czar shook his head and said, “I am the Czar of all the Russias, and Rudolph the Red knows rain, dear!”


A 4-year-old boy was asked to give the meal blessing before Christmas dinner. The family members bowed their heads in expectation. He began his prayer, thanking God for all his friends, naming them one by one. Then he thanked God for Mommy, Daddy, brother, sister, Grandma, Grandpa, and all his aunts and uncles. Then he began to thank God for the food. He gave thanks for the turkey, the dressing, the fruit salad, the cranberry sauce, the pies, the cakes, even the Cool Whip.
Then he paused, and everyone waited– and waited. After a long silence, the young fellow looked up at his mother and asked, “If I thank God for the broccoli, won’t he know that I’m lying?”


Santa Claus needed a vacation. He decided to go to Texas because it was warm and he had heard that the people were friendly. As soon as he arrived in town, people began to point and say, “Look! The big red one! Isn’t he someone famous?” Santa thought, “Gee, I’ll never get any rest if people start asking to sit on my lap and try to tell me things they want.” So he decided to disguise himself. He bought a cowboy outfit complete with cowboy boots and cowboy hat. “No one will know me now– I look just like everyone else!” He thought happily. As soon as Santa started walking down the street people began to point and say, “Look! It’s that famous Christmas personality!” Santa rushed around a corner to hide. “It’s my beard!” he thought. “They recognize me because of my long white beard!” So Santa went to a barbershop and had his beard shaved off. “I really look like everybody else now!” Santa thought. So he walked down the street with a big smile on his face. Suddenly a man shouted “It’s him! It’s him! Look everybody!” Santa couldn’t believe it. He was sure that no one would recognize him. So Santa walked up to the man and said, “How did you recognize me?” The man looked at Santa and said, “You? I don’t know you– but isn’t that four-legged guy with the big red nose behind you, Rudolph?”

What do you call Santa’s helpers?
Subordinate Clauses.


I wish you a Merry Christmas
And a Happy New Year,
A stocking full of presents
And a fridge full of beer.


Christmas – a holiday during which neither the past nor the future is of as much interest as the present.


What do you get if you cross a cat with Father Christmas?
Santa Claws.


Who carries a sack and bites people?
Santa Jaws.


What did Santa get when he crossed a reindeer with a piece of wood?
A hat rack.


How does santa begin a joke?
“This one will sleigh you….”


Mummy, here’s your Christmas present. A box of your favorite chocolates.
Thanks, but the box is half empty.
Well, they’re my favorite chocolates too.


What did the fireman’s wife get for Christmas?
A ladder in her stocking


Santa’s elves are just a bunch of subordinate Clauses. 


Knock, knock.
Who\’s there?
Wanda Witch.
Wanda Witch who?
Wanda Witch you a Merry Christmas.


What do fish sing at Christmas?
Shark, the herald angels sing.


Which dog gives you Christmas presents?
Santa Paws.


What does Mrs. Claus use to make her cakes?
Elf-raising flour.


Knock, knock.
Who\’s there?
Raptor.
Raptor who?
Raptor presents before Christmas.


Knock, knock.
Who\’s there?
Hector.
Hector who?
\”Hector halls with boughs of holly.\”


What do you call someone who claps their hands when the contestants in a Christmas quiz show get the right answer?
Santapplause.


I wouldn\’t say he is stupid, but he thinks that Christmas Eve is a tug of war that is held at Christmas.


What do you call a man who claps his hands at Christmas time?
Santapplause.


Where do snowmen dance?
At a snowball.


The Magic of Oz

September 6, 2009
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Magic of Oz
 
 
 
  A Faithful Record of the Remarkable Adventures of Dorothy
      and Trot and the Wizard of Oz, together with the
       Cowardly Lion, the Hungry Tiger and Cap'n Bill,
           in their successful search for a Magical
              and Beautiful Birthday Present for
                     Princess Ozma of Oz
 
 
 
by
 
L. Frank Baum
 
"Royal Historian of Oz"
 
 
 
Contents
 
   --To My Readers--
   1.  Mount Munch
   2.  The Hawk
   3.  Two Bad Ones
   4.  Conspirators
   5.  A Happy Corner of Oz
   6.  Ozma's Birthday Presents
   7.  The Forest of Gugu
   8.  The Li-Mon-Eags Make Trouble
   9.  The Isle of the Magic Flower
  10.  Stuck Fast
  11.  The Beasts of the Forest of Gugu
  12.  Kiki Uses His Magic
  13.  The Loss of the Black Bag
  14.  The Wizard Learns the Magic Word
  15.  The Lonesome Duck
  16.  The Glass Cat Finds the Black Bag
  17.  A Remarkable Journey
  18.  The Magic of the Wizard
  19.  Dorothy and the Bumble Bees
  20.  The Monkeys Have Trouble
  21.  The College of Athletic Arts
  22.  Ozma's Birthday Party
  23.  The Fountain of Oblivion
 
 
 
 
To My Readers
 
 
Curiously enough, in the events which have taken place in the last few
years in our "great outside world," we may find incidents so marvelous
and inspiring that I cannot hope to equal them with stories of The Land
of Oz.
 
However, "The Magic of Oz" is really more strange and unusual than
anything I have read or heard about on our side of The Great Sandy
Desert which shuts us off from The Land of Oz, even during the past
exciting years, so I hope it will appeal to your love of novelty.
 
A long and confining illness has prevented my answering all the good
letters sent me--unless stamps were enclosed--but from now on I hope to
be able to give prompt attention to each and every letter with which my
readers favor me.
 
Assuring you that my love for you has never faltered and hoping the Oz
Books will continue to give you pleasure as long as I am able to write
them, I am
 
Yours affectionately,
 
  L. FRANK BAUM,
  "Royal Historian of Oz."
  "OZCOT"
  at HOLLYWOOD
  in CALIFORNIA
  1919
 
 
 
 
1.  Mount Munch
 
 
On the east edge of the Land of Oz, in the Munchkin Country, is a big,
tall hill called Mount Munch.  One one side, the bottom of this hill
just touches the Deadly Sandy Desert that separates the Fairyland of Oz
from all the rest of the world, but on the other side, the hill touches
the beautiful, fertile Country of the Munchkins.
 
The Munchkin folks, however, merely stand off and look at Mount Munch
and know very little about it; for, about a third of the way up, its
sides become too steep to climb, and if any people live upon the top of
that great towering peak that seems to reach nearly to the skies, the
Munchkins are not aware of the fact.
 
But people DO live there, just the same.  The top of Mount Munch is
shaped like a saucer, broad and deep, and in the saucer are fields
where grains and vegetables grow, and flocks are fed, and brooks flow
and trees bear all sorts of things.  There are houses scattered here
and there, each having its family of Hyups, as the people call
themselves.  The Hyups seldom go down the mountain, for the same reason
that the Munchkins never climb up: the sides are too steep.
 
In one of the houses lived a wise old Hyup named Bini Aru, who used to
be a clever Sorcerer.  But Ozma of Oz, who rules everyone in the Land
of Oz, had made a decree that no one should practice magic in her
dominions except Glinda the Good and the Wizard of Oz, and when Glinda
sent this royal command to the Hyups by means of a strong-winged Eagle,
old Bini Aru at once stopped performing magical arts.  He destroyed
many of his magic powders and tools of magic, and afterward honestly
obeyed the law.  He had never seen Ozma, but he knew she was his Ruler
and must be obeyed.
 
There was only one thing that grieved him.  He had discovered a new and
secret method of transformations that was unknown to any other
Sorcerer.  Glinda the Good did not know it, nor did the little Wizard
of Oz, nor Dr. Pipt nor old Mombi, nor anyone else who dealt in magic
arts.  It was Bini Aru's own secret.  By its means, it was the simplest
thing in the world to transform anyone into beast, bird or fish, or
anything else, and back again, once you know how to pronounce the
mystical word: "Pyrzqxgl."
 
Bini Aru had used this secret many times, but not to cause evil or
suffering to others.  When he had wandered far from home and was
hungry, he would say: "I want to become a cow--Pyrzqxgl!" In an instant
he would be a cow, and then he would eat grass and satisfy his hunger.
All beasts and birds can talk in the Land of Oz, so when the cow was no
longer hungry, it would say: "I want to be Bini Aru again: Pyrzqxgl!"
and the magic word, properly pronounced, would instantly restore him to
his proper form.
 
Now, of course, I would not dare to write down this magic word so
plainly if I thought my readers would pronounce it properly and so be
able to transform themselves and others, but it is a fact that no one
in all the world except Bini Aru, had ever (up to the time this story
begins) been able to pronounce "Pyrzqxgl!" the right way, so I think it
is safe to give it to you.  It might be well, however, in reading this
story aloud, to be careful not to pronounce Pyrzqxgl the proper way,
and thus avoid all danger of the secret being able to work mischief.
 
Bini Aru, having discovered the secret of instant transformation, which
required no tools or powders or other chemicals or herbs and always
worked perfectly, was reluctant to have such a wonderful discovery
entirely unknown or lost to all human knowledge.  He decided not to use
it again, since Ozma had forbidden him to do so, but he reflected that
Ozma was a girl and some time might change her mind and allow her
subjects to practice magic, in which case Bini Aru could again
transform himself and others at will,--unless, of course, he forgot how
to pronounce Pyrzqxgl in the meantime.
 
After giving the matter careful thought, he decided to write the word,
and how it should be pronounced, in some secret place, so that he could
find it after many years, but where no one else could ever find it.
 
That was a clever idea, but what bothered the old Sorcerer was to find
a secret place.  He wandered all over the Saucer at the top of Mount
Munch, but found no place in which to write the secret word where
others might not be likely to stumble upon it.  So finally he decided
it must be written somewhere in his own house.
 
Bini Aru had a wife named Mopsi Aru who was famous for making fine
huckleberry pies, and he had a son named Kiki Aru who was not famous at
all.  He was noted as being cross and disagreeable because he was not
happy, and he was not happy because he wanted to go down the mountain
and visit the big world below and his father would not let him.  No one
paid any attention to Kiki Aru, because he didn't amount to anything,
anyway.
 
Once a year there was a festival on Mount Munch which all the Hyups
attended.  It was held in the center of the saucer-shaped country, and
the day was given over to feasting and merry-making.  The young folks
danced and sang songs; the women spread the tables with good things to
eat, and the men played on musical instruments and told fairy tales.
 
Kiki Aru usually went to these festivals with his parents, and then sat
sullenly outside the circle and would not dance or sing or even talk to
the other young people.  So the festival did not make him any happier
than other days, and this time he told Bini Aru and Mopsi Aru that he
would not go.  He would rather stay at home and be unhappy all by
himself, he said, and so they gladly let him stay.
 
But after he was left alone Kiki decided to enter his father's private
room, where he was forbidden to go, and see if he could find any of the
magic tools Bini Aru used to work with when he practiced sorcery.  As
he went in Kiki stubbed his toe on one of the floor boards.  He
searched everywhere but found no trace of his father's magic.  All had
been destroyed.
 
Much disappointed, he started to go out again when he stubbed his toe
on the same floor board.  That set him thinking.  Examining the board
more closely, Kiki found it had been pried up and then nailed down
again in such a manner that it was a little higher than the other
boards.  But why had his father taken up the board?  Had he hidden some
of his magic tools underneath the floor?
 
Kiki got a chisel and pried up the board, but found nothing under it.
He was just about to replace the board when it slipped from his hand
and turned over, and he saw something written on the underside of it.
The light was rather dim, so he took the board to the window and
examined it, and found that the writing described exactly how to
pronounce the magic word Pyrzqxgl, which would transform anyone into
anything instantly, and back again when the word was repeated.
 
Now, at first, Kiki Aru didn't realize what a wonderful secret he had
discovered; but he thought it might be of use to him and so he took a
piece of paper and made on it an exact copy of the instructions for
pronouncing Pyrzqxgl.  Then he folded the paper and put it in his
pocket, and replaced the board in the floor so that no one would
suspect it had been removed.
 
After this Kiki went into the garden and sitting beneath a tree made a
careful study of the paper.  He had always wanted to get away from
Mount Munch and visit the big world--especially the Land of Oz--and the
idea now came to him that if he could transform himself into a bird, he
could fly to any place he wished to go and fly back again whenever he
cared to.  It was necessary, however, to learn by heart the way to
pronounce the magic word, because a bird would have no way to carry a
paper with it, and Kiki would be unable to resume his proper shape if
he forgot the word or its pronunciation.
 
So he studied it a long time, repeating it a hundred times in his mind
until he was sure he would not forget it.  But to make safety doubly
sure he placed the paper in a tin box in a neglected part of the garden
and covered the box with small stones.
 
By this time it was getting late in the day and Kiki wished to attempt
his first transformation before his parents returned from the festival.
So he stood on the front porch of his home and said:
 
"I want to become a big, strong bird, like a hawk--Pyrzqxgl!" He
pronounced it the right way, so in a flash he felt that he was
completely changed in form.  He flapped his wings, hopped to the porch
railing and said: "Caw-oo!  Caw-oo!"
 
Then he laughed and said half aloud: "I suppose that's the funny sound
this sort of a bird makes.  But now let me try my wings and see if I'm
strong enough to fly across the desert."
 
For he had decided to make his first trip to the country outside the
Land of Oz.  He had stolen this secret of transformation and he knew he
had disobeyed the law of Oz by working magic.  Perhaps Glinda or the
Wizard of Oz would discover him and punish him, so it would be good
policy to keep away from Oz altogether.
 
Slowly Kiki rose into the air, and resting on his broad wings, floated
in graceful circles above the saucer-shaped mountain-top.  From his
height, he could see, far across the burning sands of the Deadly
Desert, another country that might be pleasant to explore, so he headed
that way, and with strong, steady strokes of his wings, began the long
flight.
 
 
 
 
2.  The Hawk
 
 
Even a hawk has to fly high in order to cross the Deadly Desert, from
which poisonous fumes are constantly rising.  Kiki Aru felt sick and
faint by the time he reached good land again, for he could not quite
escape the effects of the poisons.  But the fresh air soon restored him
and he alighted in a broad table-land which is called Hiland.  Just
beyond it is a valley known as Loland, and these two countries are
ruled by the Gingerbread Man, John Dough, with Chick the Cherub as his
Prime Minister.  The hawk merely stopped here long enough to rest, and
then he flew north and passed over a fine country called Merryland,
which is ruled by a lovely Wax Doll.  Then, following the curve of the
Desert, he turned north and settled on a tree-top in the Kingdom of
Noland.
 
Kiki was tired by this time, and the sun was now setting, so he decided
to remain here till morning.  From his tree-top he could see a house
near by, which looked very comfortable.  A man was milking a cow in the
yard and a pleasant-faced woman came to the door and called him to
supper.
 
That made Kiki wonder what sort of food hawks ate.  He felt hungry, but
didn't know what to eat or where to get it.  Also he thought a bed
would be more comfortable than a tree-top for sleeping, so he hopped to
the ground and said: "I want to become Kiki Aru again--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
Instantly he had resumed his natural shape, and going to the house, he
knocked upon the door and asked for some supper.
 
"Who are you?" asked the man of the house.
 
"A stranger from the Land of Oz," replied Kiki Aru.
 
"Then you are welcome," said the man.
 
Kiki was given a good supper and a good bed, and he behaved very well,
although he refused to answer all the questions the good people of
Noland asked him.  Having escaped from his home and found a way to see
the world, the young man was no longer unhappy, and so he was no longer
cross and disagreeable.  The people thought him a very respectable
person and gave him breakfast next morning, after which he started on
his way feeling quite contented.
 
Having walked for an hour or two through the pretty country that is
ruled by King Bud, Kiki Aru decided he could travel faster and see more
as a bird, so he transformed himself into a white dove and visited the
great city of Nole and saw the King's palace and gardens and many other
places of interest.  Then he flew westward into the Kingdom of Ix, and
after a day in Queen Zixi's country went on westward into the Land of
Ev.  Every place he visited he thought was much more pleasant than the
saucer-country of the Hyups, and he decided that when he reached the
finest country of all he would settle there and enjoy his future life
to the utmost.
 
In the land of Ev he resumed his own shape again, for the cities and
villages were close together and he could easily go on foot from one to
another of them.
 
Toward evening he came to a good Inn and asked the inn-keeper if he
could have food and lodging.
 
"You can if you have the money to pay," said the man, "otherwise you
must go elsewhere."
 
This surprised Kiki, for in the Land of Oz they do not use money at
all, everyone being allowed to take what he wishes without price.  He
had no money, therefore, and so he turned away to seek hospitality
elsewhere.  Looking through an open window into one of the rooms of the
Inn, as he passed along, he saw an old man counting on a table a big
heap of gold pieces, which Kiki thought to be money.  One of these
would buy him supper and a bed, he reflected, so he transformed himself
into a magpie and, flying through the open window, caught up one of the
gold pieces in his beak and flew out again before the old man could
interfere.  Indeed, the old man who was robbed was quite helpless, for
he dared not leave his pile of gold to chase the magpie, and before he
could place the gold in a sack in his pocket the robber bird was out of
sight and to seek it would be folly.
 
Kiki Aru flew to a group of trees and, dropping the gold piece to the
ground, resumed his proper shape, and then picked up the money and put
it in his pocket.
 
"You'll be sorry for this!" exclaimed a small voice just over his head.
 
Kiki looked up and saw that a sparrow, perched upon a branch, was
watching him.
 
"Sorry for what?" he demanded.
 
"Oh, I saw the whole thing," asserted the sparrow.  "I saw you look in
the window at the gold, and then make yourself into a magpie and rob
the poor man, and then I saw you fly here and make the bird into your
former shape.  That's magic, and magic is wicked and unlawful; and you
stole money, and that's a still greater crime.  You'll be sorry, some
day."
 
"I don't care," replied Kiki Aru, scowling.
 
"Aren't you afraid to be wicked?" asked the sparrow.
 
"No, I didn't know I was being wicked," said Kiki, "but if I was, I'm
glad of it.  I hate good people.  I've always wanted to be wicked, but
I didn't know how."
 
"Haw, haw, haw!" laughed someone behind him, in a big voice; "that's
the proper spirit, my lad!  I'm glad I've met you; shake hands."
 
The sparrow gave a frightened squeak and flew away.
 
 
 
 
3.  Two Bad Ones
 
 
Kiki turned around and saw a queer old man standing near.  He didn't
stand straight, for he was crooked.  He had a fat body and thin legs
and arms.  He had a big, round face with bushy, white whiskers that
came to a point below his waist, and white hair that came to a point on
top of his head.  He wore dull-gray clothes that were tight fitting,
and his pockets were all bunched out as if stuffed full of something.
 
"I didn't know you were here," said Kiki.
 
"I didn't come until after you did," said the queer old man.
 
"Who are you?" asked Kiki.
 
"My name's Ruggedo.  I used to be the Nome King; but I got kicked out
of my country, and now I'm a wanderer."
 
"What made them kick you out?" inquired the Hyup boy.
 
"Well, it's the fashion to kick kings nowadays.  I was a pretty good
King--to myself--but those dreadful Oz people wouldn't let me alone.
So I had to abdicate."
 
"What does that mean?"
 
"It means to be kicked out.  But let's talk about something pleasant.
Who are you and where did you come from?"
 
"I'm called Kiki Aru.  I used to live on Mount Munch in the Land of Oz,
but now I'm a wanderer like yourself."
 
The Nome King gave him a shrewd look.
 
"I heard that bird say that you transformed yourself into a magpie and
back again.  Is that true?"
 
Kiki hesitated, but saw no reason to deny it.  He felt that it would
make him appear more important.
 
"Well--yes," he said.
 
"Then you're a wizard?"
 
"No; I only understand transformations," he admitted.
 
"Well, that's pretty good magic, anyhow," declared old Ruggedo.  "I
used to have some very fine magic, myself, but my enemies took it all
away from me.  Where are you going now?"
 
"I'm going into the inn, to get some supper and a bed," said Kiki.
 
"Have you the money to pay for it?" asked the Nome.
 
"I have one gold piece."
 
"Which you stole.  Very good.  And you're glad that you're wicked.
Better yet.  I like you, young man, and I'll go to the inn with you if
you'll promise not to eat eggs for supper."
 
"Don't you like eggs?" asked Kiki.
 
"I'm afraid of 'em; they're dangerous!" said Ruggedo, with a shudder.
 
"All right," agreed Kiki; "I won't ask for eggs."
 
"Then come along," said the Nome.
 
When they entered the inn, the landlord scowled at Kiki and said:
 
"I told you I would not feed you unless you had money."
 
Kiki showed him the gold piece.
 
"And how about you?" asked the landlord, turning to Ruggedo.  "Have you
money?"
 
"I've something better," answered the old Nome, and taking a bag from
one of his pockets he poured from it upon the table a mass of
glittering gems--diamonds, rubies and emeralds.
 
The landlord was very polite to the strangers after that.  He served
them an excellent supper, and while they ate it, the Hyup boy asked his
companion:
 
"Where did you get so many jewels?"
 
"Well, I'll tell you," answered the Nome.  "When those Oz people took
my kingdom away from me--just because it was my kingdom and I wanted to
run it to suit myself--they said I could take as many precious stones
as I could carry.  So I had a lot of pockets made in my clothes and
loaded them all up.  Jewels are fine things to have with you when you
travel; you can trade them for anything."
 
"Are they better than gold pieces?" asked Kiki.
 
"The smallest of these jewels is worth a hundred gold pieces such as
you stole from the old man."
 
"Don't talk so loud," begged Kiki, uneasily.  "Some one else might hear
what you are saying."
 
After supper they took a walk together, and the former Nome King said:
 
"Do you know the Shaggy Man, and the Scarecrow, and the Tin Woodman,
and Dorothy, and Ozma and all the other Oz people?"
 
"No," replied the boy, "I have never been away from Mount Munch until I
flew over the Deadly Desert the other day in the shape of a hawk."
 
"Then you've never seen the Emerald City of Oz?"
 
"Never."
 
"Well," said the Nome, "I knew all the Oz people, and you can guess I
do not love them.  All during my wanderings I have brooded on how I can
be revenged on them.  Now that I've met you I can see a way to conquer
the Land of Oz and be King there myself, which is better than being
King of the Nomes."
 
"How can you do that?" inquired Kiki Aru, wonderingly.
 
"Never mind how.  In the first place, I'll make a bargain with you.
Tell me the secret of how to perform transformations and I will give
you a pocketful of jewels, the biggest and finest that I possess."
 
"No," said Kiki, who realized that to share his power with another
would be dangerous to himself.
 
"I'll give you TWO pocketsful of jewels," said the Nome.
 
"No," answered Kiki.
 
"I'll give you every jewel I possess."
 
"No, no, no!" said Kiki, who was beginning to be frightened.
 
"Then," said the Nome, with a wicked look at the boy, "I'll tell the
inn-keeper that you stole that gold piece and he will have you put in
prison."
 
Kiki laughed at the threat.
 
"Before he can do that," said he, "I will transform myself into a lion
and tear him to pieces, or into a bear and eat him up, or into a fly
and fly away where he could not find me."
 
"Can you really do such wonderful transformations?" asked the old Nome,
looking at him curiously.
 
"Of course," declared Kiki.  "I can transform you into a stick of wood,
in a flash, or into a stone, and leave you here by the roadside."
 
"The wicked Nome shivered a little when he heard that, but it made him
long more than ever to possess the great secret.  After a while he said:
 
"I'll tell you what I'll do.  If you will help me to conquer Oz and to
transform the Oz people, who are my enemies, into sticks or stones, by
telling me your secret, I'll agree to make YOU the Ruler of all Oz, and
I will be your Prime Minister and see that your orders are obeyed."
 
"I'll help do that," said Kiki, "but I won't tell you my secret."
 
The Nome was so furious at this refusal that he jumped up and down with
rage and spluttered and choked for a long time before he could control
his passion.  But the boy was not at all frightened.  He laughed at the
wicked old Nome, which made him more furious than ever.
 
"Let's give up the idea," he proposed, when Ruggedo had quieted
somewhat.  "I don't know the Oz people you mention and so they are not
my enemies.  If they've kicked you out of your kingdom, that's your
affair--not mine."
 
"Wouldn't you like to be king of that splendid fairyland?" asked
Ruggedo.
 
"Yes, I would," replied Kiki Aru; "but you want to be king yourself,
and we would quarrel over it."
 
"No," said the Nome, trying to deceive him.  "I don't care to be King
of Oz, come to think it over.  I don't even care to live in that
country.  What I want first is revenge.  If we can conquer Oz, I'll get
enough magic then to conquer my own Kingdom of the Nomes, and I'll go
back and live in my underground caverns, which are more home-like than
the top of the earth.  So here's my proposition: Help me conquer Oz and
get revenge, and help me get the magic away from Glinda and the Wizard,
and I'll let you be King of Oz forever afterward."
 
"I'll think it over," answered Kiki, and that is all he would say that
evening.
 
In the night when all in the Inn were asleep but himself, old Ruggedo
the Nome rose softly from his couch and went into the room of Kiki Aru
the Hyup, and searched everywhere for the magic tool that performed his
transformations.  Of course, there was no such tool, and although
Ruggedo searched in all the boy's pockets, he found nothing magical
whatever.  So he went back to his bed and began to doubt that Kiki
could perform transformations.
 
Next morning he said:
 
"Which way do you travel to-day?"
 
"I think I shall visit the Rose Kingdom," answered the boy.
 
"That is a long journey," declared the Nome.
 
"I shall transform myself into a bird," said Kiki, "and so fly to the
Rose Kingdom in an hour."
 
"Then transform me, also, into a bird, and I will go with you,"
suggested Ruggedo.  "But, in that case, let us fly together to the Land
of Oz, and see what it looks like."
 
Kiki thought this over.  Pleasant as were the countries he had visited,
he heard everywhere that the Land of Oz was more beautiful and
delightful.  The Land of Oz was his own country, too, and if there was
any possibility of his becoming its King, he must know something about
it.
 
While Kiki the Hyup thought, Ruggedo the Nome was also thinking.  This
boy possessed a marvelous power, and although very simple in some ways,
he was determined not to part with his secret.  However, if Ruggedo
could get him to transport the wily old Nome to Oz, which he could
reach in no other way, he might then induce the boy to follow his
advice and enter into the plot for revenge, which he had already
planned in his wicked heart.
 
"There are wizards and magicians in Oz," remarked Kiki, after a time.
"They might discover us, in spite of our transformations."
 
"Not if we are careful," Ruggedo assured him.  "Ozma has a Magic
Picture, in which she can see whatever she wishes to see; but Ozma will
know nothing of our going to Oz, and so she will not command her Magic
Picture to show where we are or what we are doing.  Glinda the Good has
a Great Book called the Book of Records, in which is magically written
everything that people do in the Land of Oz, just the instant they do
it."
 
"Then," said Kiki, "there is no use our attempting to conquer the
country, for Glinda would read in her book all that we do, and as her
magic is greater than mine, she would soon put a stop to our plans."
 
"I said 'people,' didn't I?" retorted the Nome.  "The book doesn't make
a record of what birds do, or beasts.  It only tells the doings of
people.  So, if we fly into the country as birds, Glinda won't know
anything about it."
 
"Two birds couldn't conquer the Land of Oz," asserted the boy,
scornfully.
 
"No; that's true," admitted Ruggedo, and then he rubbed his forehead
and stroked his long pointed beard and thought some more.
 
"Ah, now I have the idea!" he declared.  "I suppose you can transform
us into beasts as well as birds?"
 
"Of course."
 
"And can you make a bird a beast, and a beast a bird again, without
taking a human form in between?"
 
"Certainly," said Kiki.  "I can transform myself or others into
anything that can talk.  There's a magic word that must be spoken in
connection with the transformations, and as beasts and birds and
dragons and fishes can talk in Oz, we may become any of these we desire
to.  However, if I transformed myself into a tree, I would always
remain a tree, because then I could not utter the magic word to change
the transformation."
 
"I see; I see," said Ruggedo, nodding his bushy, white head until the
point of his hair waved back and forth like a pendulum.  "That fits in
with my idea, exactly.  Now, listen, and I'll explain to you my plan.
We'll fly to Oz as birds and settle in one of the thick forests in the
Gillikin Country.  There you will transform us into powerful beasts,
and as Glinda doesn't keep any track of the doings of beasts we can act
without being discovered."
 
"But how can two beasts raise an army to conquer the powerful people of
Oz?" inquired Kiki.
 
"That's easy.  But not an army of PEOPLE, mind you.  That would be
quickly discovered.  And while we are in Oz you and I will never resume
our human forms until we've conquered the country and destroyed Glinda,
and Ozma, and the Wizard, and Dorothy, and all the rest, and so have
nothing more to fear from them."
 
"It is impossible to kill anyone in the Land of Oz," declared Kiki.
 
"It isn't necessary to kill the Oz people," rejoined Ruggedo.
 
"I'm afraid I don't understand you," objected the boy.  "What will
happen to the Oz people, and what sort of an army could we get
together, except of people?"
 
"I'll tell you.  The forests of Oz are full of beasts.  Some of them,
in the far-away places, are savage and cruel, and would gladly follow a
leader as savage as themselves.  They have never troubled the Oz people
much, because they had no leader to urge them on, but we will tell them
to help us conquer Oz and as a reward we will transform all the beasts
into men and women, and let them live in the houses and enjoy all the
good things; and we will transform all the people of Oz into beasts of
various sorts, and send them to live in the forests and the jungles.
That is a splendid idea, you must admit, and it's so easy that we won't
have any trouble at all to carry it through to success."
 
"Will the beasts consent, do you think?" asked the boy.
 
"To be sure they will.  We can get every beast in Oz on our
side--except a few who live in Ozma's palace, and they won't count."
 
 
 
 
4.  Conspirators
 
 
Kiki Aru didn't know much about Oz and didn't know much about the
beasts who lived there, but the old Nome's plan seemed to him to be
quite reasonable.  He had a faint suspicion that Ruggedo meant to get
the best of him in some way, and he resolved to keep a close watch on
his fellow-conspirator.  As long as he kept to himself the secret word
of the transformations, Ruggedo would not dare to harm him, and he
promised himself that as soon as they had conquered Oz, he would
transform the old Nome into a marble statue and keep him in that form
forever.
 
Ruggedo, on his part, decided that he could, by careful watching and
listening, surprise the boy's secret, and when he had learned the magic
word he would transform Kiki Aru into a bundle of faggots and burn him
up and so be rid of him.
 
This is always the way with wicked people.  They cannot be trusted even
by one another.  Ruggedo thought he was fooling Kiki, and Kiki thought
he was fooling Ruggedo; so both were pleased.
 
"It's a long way across the Desert," remarked the boy, "and the sands
are hot and send up poisonous vapors.  Let us wait until evening and
then fly across in the night when it will be cooler."
 
The former Nome King agreed to this, and the two spent the rest of that
day in talking over their plans.  When evening came they paid the
inn-keeper and walked out to a little grove of trees that stood near by.
 
"Remain here for a few minutes and I'll soon be back," said Kiki, and
walking swiftly away, he left the Nome standing in the grove.  Ruggedo
wondered where he had gone, but stood quietly in his place until, all
of a sudden, his form changed to that of a great eagle, and he uttered
a piercing cry of astonishment and flapped his wings in a sort of
panic.  At once his eagle cry was answered from beyond the grove, and
another eagle, even larger and more powerful than the transformed
Ruggedo, came sailing through the trees and alighted beside him.
 
"Now we are ready for the start," said the voice of Kiki, coming from
the eagle.
 
Ruggedo realized that this time he had been outwitted.  He had thought
Kiki would utter the magic word in his presence, and so he would learn
what it was, but the boy had been too shrewd for that.
 
As the two eagles mounted high into the air and began their flight
across the great Desert that separates the Land of Oz from all the rest
of the world, the Nome said:
 
"When I was King of the Nomes I had a magic way of working
transformations that I thought was good, but it could not compare with
your secret word.  I had to have certain tools and make passes and say
a lot of mystic words before I could transform anybody."
 
"What became of your magic tools?" inquired Kiki.
 
"The Oz people took them all away from me--that horrid girl, Dorothy,
and that terrible fairy, Ozma, the Ruler of Oz--at the time they took
away my underground kingdom and kicked me upstairs into the cold,
heartless world."
 
"Why did you let them do that?" asked the boy.
 
"Well," said Ruggedo, "I couldn't help it.  They rolled eggs at
me--EGGS--dreadful eggs!--and if an egg even touches a Nome, he is
ruined for life."
 
"Is any kind of an egg dangerous to a Nome?"
 
"Any kind and every kind.  An egg is the only thing I'm afraid of."
 
 
 
 
5.  A Happy Corner of Oz
 
 
There is no other country so beautiful as the Land of Oz.  There are no
other people so happy and contented and prosperous as the Oz people.
They have all they desire; they love and admire their beautiful girl
Ruler, Ozma of Oz, and they mix work and play so justly that both are
delightful and satisfying and no one has any reason to complain.  Once
in a while something happens in Oz to disturb the people's happiness
for a brief time, for so rich and attractive a fairyland is sure to
make a few selfish and greedy outsiders envious, and therefore certain
evil-doers have treacherously plotted to conquer Oz and enslave its
people and destroy its girl Ruler, and so gain the wealth of Oz for
themselves.  But up to the time when the cruel and crafty Nome,
Ruggedo, conspired with Kiki Aru, the Hyup, all such attempts had
failed.  The Oz people suspected no danger.  Life in the world's nicest
fairyland was one round of joyous, happy days.
 
In the center of the Emerald City of Oz, the capital city of Ozma's
dominions, is a vast and beautiful garden, surrounded by a wall inlaid
with shining emeralds, and in the center of this garden stands Ozma's
Royal Palace, the most splendid building ever constructed.  From a
hundred towers and domes floated the banners of Oz, which included the
Ozmies, the Munchkins, the Gillikins, the Winkies and the Quadlings.
The banner of the Munchkins is blue, that of the Winkies yellow; the
Gillikin banner is purple, and the Quadling's banner is red.  The
colors of the Emerald City are of course green.  Ozma's own banner has
a green center, and is divided into four quarters.  These quarters are
colored blue, purple, yellow and red, indicating that she rules over
all the countries of the Land of Oz.
 
This fairyland is so big, however, that all of it is not yet known to
its girl Ruler, and it is said that in some far parts of the country,
in forests and mountain fastnesses, in hidden valleys and thick
jungles, are people and beasts that know as little about Ozma as she
knows of them.  Still, these unknown subjects are not nearly so
numerous as the known inhabitants of Oz, who occupy all the countries
near to the Emerald City.  Indeed, I'm sure it will not be long until
all parts of the fairyland of Oz are explored and their peoples made
acquainted with their Ruler, for in Ozma's palace are several of her
friends who are so curious that they are constantly discovering new and
extraordinary places and inhabitants.
 
One of the most frequent discoverers of these hidden places in Oz is a
little Kansas girl named Dorothy, who is Ozma's dearest friend and
lives in luxurious rooms in the Royal Palace.  Dorothy is, indeed, a
Princess of Oz, but she does not like to be called a princess, and
because she is simple and sweet and does not pretend to be anything but
an ordinary little girl, she is called just "Dorothy" by everybody and
is the most popular person, next to Ozma, in all the Land of Oz.
 
One morning Dorothy crossed the hall of the palace and knocked on the
door of another girl named Trot, also a guest and friend of Ozma.  When
told to enter, Dorothy found that Trot had company, an old sailor-man
with one wooden leg and one meat leg, who was sitting by the open
window puffing smoke from a corn-cob pipe.  This sailor-man was named
Cap'n Bill, and he had accompanied Trot to the Land of Oz and was her
oldest and most faithful comrade and friend.  Dorothy liked Cap'n Bill,
too, and after she had greeted him, she said to Trot:
 
"You know, Ozma's birthday is next month, and I've been wondering what
I can give here as a birthday present.  She's so good to us all that we
certainly ought to remember her birthday."
 
"That's true," agreed Trot.  "I've been wondering, too, what I could
give Ozma.  It's pretty hard to decide, 'cause she's got already all
she wants, and as she's a fairy and knows a lot about magic, she could
satisfy any wish."
 
"I know," returned Dorothy, "but that isn't the point.  It isn't that
Ozma NEEDS anything, but that it will please her to know we've
remembered her birthday.  But what shall we give her?"
 
Trot shook her head in despair.
 
"I've tried to think and I can't," she declared.
 
"It's the same way with me," said Dorothy.
 
"I know one thing that 'ud please her," remarked Cap'n Bill, turning
his round face with its fringe of whiskers toward the two girls and
staring at them with his big, light-blue eyes wide open.
 
"What is it, Cap'n Bill?"
 
"It's an Enchanted Flower," said he.  "It's a pretty plant that stands
in a golden flower-pot an' grows all sorts o' flowers, one after
another.  One minute a fine rose buds an' blooms, an' then a tulip, an'
next a chrys--chrys--"
 
"--anthemum," said Dorothy, helping him.
 
"That's it; and next a dahlia, an' then a daffydil, an' on all through
the range o' posies.  Jus' as soon as one fades away, another comes, of
a different sort, an' the perfume from 'em is mighty snifty, an' they
keeps bloomin' night and day, year in an' year out."
 
"That's wonderful!" exclaimed Dorothy.  "I think Ozma would like it."
 
"But where is the Magic Flower, and how can we get it?" asked Trot.
 
"Dun'no, zac'ly," slowly replied Cap'n Bill.  "The Glass Cat tol' me
about it only yesterday, an' said it was in some lonely place up at the
nor'east o' here.  The Glass Cat goes travelin' all around Oz, you
know, an' the little critter sees a lot o' things no one else does."
 
"That's true," said Dorothy, thoughtfully.  "Northeast of here must be
in the Munchkin Country, and perhaps a good way off, so let's ask the
Glass Cat to tell us how to get to the Magic Flower."
 
So the two girls, with Cap'n Bill stumping along on his wooden leg
after them, went out into the garden, and after some time spent in
searching, they found the Glass Cat curled up in the sunshine beside a
bush, fast sleep.
 
The Glass Cat is one of the most curious creatures in all Oz.  It was
made by a famous magician named Dr. Pipt before Ozma had forbidden her
subjects to work magic.  Dr. Pipt had made the Glass Cat to catch mice,
but the Cat refused to catch mice and was considered more curious than
useful.
 
This astonished cat was made all of glass and was so clear and
transparent that you could see through it as easily as through a
window.  In the top of its head, however, was a mass of delicate pink
balls which looked like jewels but were intended for brains.  It had a
heart made of blood-red ruby.  The eyes were two large emeralds.  But,
aside from these colors, all the rest of the animal was of clear glass,
and it had a spun-glass tail that was really beautiful.
 
"Here, wake up,"  said Cap'n Bill.  "We want to talk to you."
 
Slowly the Glass Cat got upon its feed, yawned and then looked at the
three who stood before it.
 
"How dare you disturb me?" it asked in a peevish voice.  "You ought to
be ashamed of yourselves."
 
"Never mind that," returned the Sailor.  "Do you remember tellin' me
yesterday 'bout a Magic Flower in a Gold Pot?"
 
"Do you think I'm a fool?  Look at my brains--you can see 'em work.  Of
course I remember!" said the cat.
 
"Well, where can we find it?"
 
"You can't.  It's none of your business, anyhow.  Go away and let me
sleep," advised the Glass Cat.
 
"Now, see here," said Dorothy; "we want the Magic Flower to give to
Ozma on her birthday.  You'd be glad to please Ozma, wouldn't you?"
 
"I'm not sure," replied the creature.  "Why should I want to please
anybody?"
 
"You've got a heart, 'cause I can see it inside of you," said Trot.
 
"Yes; it's a pretty heart, and I'm fond of it," said the cat, twisting
around to view its own body.  "But it's made from a ruby, and it's hard
as nails."
 
"Aren't you good for ANYthing?" asked Trot.
 
"Yes, I'm pretty to look at, and that's more than can be said of you,"
retorted the creature.
 
Trot laughed at this, and Dorothy, who understood the Glass Cat pretty
well, said soothingly:
 
"You are indeed beautiful, and if you can tell Cap'n Bill where to find
the Magic Flower, all the people in Oz will praise your cleverness.
The Flower will belong to Ozma, but everyone will know the Glass Cat
discovered it."
 
This was the kind of praise the crystal creature liked.
 
"Well," it said, while the pink brains rolled around, "I found the
Magic Flower way up in the north of the Munchkin Country where few
people live or ever go.  There's a river there that flows through a
forest, and in the middle of the forest there is a small island on
which stands the gold pot in which grows the Magic Flower."
 
"How did you get to the island?" asked Dorothy.  "Glass cats can't
swim."
 
"No, but I'm not afraid of water," was the reply.  "I just walked
across the river on the bottom."
 
"Under the water?" exclaimed Trot.
 
The cat gave her a scornful look.
 
"How could I walk OVER the water on the BOTTOM of the river?  If you
were transparent, anyone could see YOUR brains were not working.  But
I'm sure you could never find the place alone.  It has always been
hidden from the Oz people."
 
"But you, with your fine pink brains, could find it again, I s'pose,"
remarked Dorothy.
 
"Yes; and if you want that Magic Flower for Ozma, I'll go with you and
show you the way."
 
"That's lovely of you!" declared Dorothy.  "Trot and Cap'n Bill will go
with you, for this is to be their birthday present to Ozma.  While
you're gone I'll have to find something else to give her."
 
"All right.  Come on, then, Cap'n," said the Glass Cat, starting to
move away.
 
"Wait a minute," begged Trot.  "How long will we be gone?"
 
"Oh, about a week."
 
"Then I'll put some things in a basket to take with us," said the girl,
and ran into the palace to make her preparations for the journey.
 
 
 
 
6.  Ozma's Birthday Presents
 
 
When Cap'n Bill and Trot and the Glass Cat had started for the hidden
island in the far-off river to get the Magic Flower, Dorothy wondered
again what she could give Ozma on her birthday.  She met the Patchwork
Girl and said:
 
"What are you going to give Ozma for a birthday present?"
 
"I've written a song for her," answered the strange Patchwork Girl, who
went by the name of "Scraps," and who, through stuffed with cotton, had
a fair assortment of mixed brains.  "It's a splendid song and the
chorus runs this way:
 
  I am crazy;
  You're a daisy,
    Ozma dear;
  I'm demented;
  You're contented,
    Ozma dear;
  I am patched and gay and glary;
  You're a sweet and lovely fairy;
  May your birthdays all be happy,
    Ozma dear!"
 
 
"How do you like it, Dorothy?" inquired the Patchwork Girl.
 
"Is it good poetry, Scraps?" asked Dorothy, doubtfully.
 
"It's as good as any ordinary song," was the reply.  "I have given it a
dandy title, too.  I shall call the song: 'When Ozma Has a Birthday,
Everybody's Sure to Be Gay, for She Cannot Help the Fact That She Was
Born.'"
 
"That's a pretty long title, Scraps," said Dorothy.
 
"That makes it stylish," replied the Patchwork Girl, turning a
somersault and alighting on one stuffed foot. "Now-a-days the titles
are sometimes longer than the songs."
 
Dorothy left her and walked slowly toward the place, where she met the
Tin Woodman just going up the front steps.
 
"What are you going to give Ozma on her birthday?" she asked.
 
"It's a secret, but I'll tell you," replied the Tin Woodman, who was
Emperor of the Winkies.  "I am having my people make Ozma a lovely
girdle set with beautiful tin nuggets.  Each tin nugget will be
surrounded by a circle of emeralds, just to set it off to good
advantage.  The clasp of the girdle will be pure tin!  Won't that be
fine?"
 
"I'm sure she'll like it," said Dorothy.  "Do you know what I can give
her?"
 
"I haven't the slightest idea, Dorothy.  It took me three months to
think of my own present for Ozma."
 
The girl walked thoughtfully around to the back of the palace, and
presently came upon the famous Scarecrow of Oz, who has having two of
the palace servants stuff his legs with fresh straw.
 
"What are you going to give Ozma on her birthday?" asked Dorothy.
 
"I want to surprise her," answered the Scarecrow.
 
"I won't tell," promised Dorothy.
 
"Well, I'm having some straw slippers made for her--all straw, mind
you, and braided very artistically.  Ozma has always admired my straw
filling, so I'm sure she'll be pleased with these lovely straw
slippers."
 
"Ozma will be pleased with anything her loving friends give her," said
the girl.  "What I'M worried about, Scarecrow, is what to give Ozma
that she hasn't got already."
 
"That's what worried me, until I thought of the slippers," said the
Scarecrow.  "You'll have to THINK, Dorothy; that's the only way to get
a good idea.  If I hadn't such wonderful brains, I'd never have thought
of those straw foot-decorations."
 
Dorothy left him and went to her room, where she sat down and tried to
think hard.  A Pink Kitten was curled up on the window-sill and Dorothy
asked her:
 
"What can I give Ozma for her birthday present?"
 
"Oh, give her some milk," replied the Pink Kitten; "that's the nicest
thing I know of."
 
A fuzzy little black dog had squatted down at Dorothy's feet and now
looked up at her with intelligent eyes.
 
"Tell me, Toto," said the girl; "what would Ozma like best for a
birthday present?"
 
The little black dog wagged his tail.
 
"Your love," said he.  "Ozma wants to be loved more than anything else."
 
"But I already love her, Toto!"
 
"Then tell her you love her twice as much as you ever did before."
 
"That wouldn't be true," objected Dorothy, "for I've always loved her
as much as I could, and, really, Toto, I want to give Ozma some
PRESENT, 'cause everyone else will give her a present."
 
"Let me see," said Toto.  "How would it be to give her that useless
Pink Kitten?"
 
"No, Toto; that wouldn't do."
 
"Then six kisses."
 
"No; that's no present."
 
"Well, I guess you'll have to figure it out for yourself, Dorothy,"
said the little dog.  "To MY notion you're more particular than Ozma
will be."
 
Dorothy decided that if anyone could help her it would be Glinda the
Good, the wonderful Sorceress of Oz who was Ozma's faithful subject and
friend.  But Glinda's castle was in the Quadling Country and quite a
journey from the Emerald City.
 
So the little girl went to Ozma and asked permission to use the Wooden
Sawhorse and the royal Red Wagon to pay a visit to Glinda, and the girl
Ruler kissed Princess Dorothy and graciously granted permission.
 
The Wooden Sawhorse was one of the most remarkable creatures in Oz.
Its body was a small log and its legs were limbs of trees stuck in the
body.  Its eyes were knots, its mouth was sawed in the end of the log
and its ears were two chips.  A small branch had been left at the rear
end of the log to serve as a tail.
 
Ozma herself, during one of her early adventures, had brought this
wooden horse to life, and so she was much attached to the queer animal
and had shod the bottoms of its wooden legs with plates of gold so they
would not wear out.  The Sawhorse was a swift and willing traveler, and
though it could talk if need arose, it seldom said anything unless
spoken to.  When the Sawhorse was harnessed to the Red Wagon there were
no reins to guide him because all that was needed was to tell him where
to go.
 
Dorothy now told him to go to Glinda's Castle and the Sawhorse carried
her there with marvelous speed.
 
"Glinda," said Dorothy, when she had been greeted by the Sorceress, who
was tall and stately, with handsome and dignified features and dressed
in a splendid and becoming gown, "what are you going to give Ozma for a
birthday present?"
 
The Sorceress smiled and answered:
 
"Come into my patio and I will show you."
 
So they entered a place that was surrounded by the wings of the great
castle but had no roof, and was filled with flowers and fountains and
exquisite statuary and many settees and chairs of polished marble or
filigree gold.  Here there were gathered fifty beautiful young girls,
Glinda's handmaids, who had been selected from all parts of the Land of
Oz on account of their wit and beauty and sweet dispositions.  It was a
great honor to be made one of Glinda's handmaidens.
 
When Dorothy followed the Sorceress into this delightful patio all the
fifty girls were busily weaving, and their shuttles were filled with a
sparkling green spun glass such as the little girl had never seen
before.
 
"What is it, Glinda?" she asked.
 
"One of my recent discoveries," explained the Sorceress.  "I have found
a way to make threads from emeralds, by softening the stones and then
spinning them into long, silken strands.  With these emerald threads we
are weaving cloth to make Ozma a splendid court gown for her birthday.
You will notice that the threads have all the beautiful glitter and
luster of the emeralds from which they are made, and so Ozma's new
dress will be the most magnificent the world has ever seen, and quite
fitting for our lovely Ruler of the Fairyland of Oz."
 
Dorothy's eyes were fairly dazed by the brilliance of the emerald
cloth, some of which the girls had already woven.
 
"I've never seen ANYthing so beautiful!" she said, with a sigh.  "But
tell me, Glinda, what can I give our lovely Ozma on her birthday?"
 
The good Sorceress considered this question for a long time before she
replied.  Finally she said:
 
"Of course there will be a grand feast at the Royal Palace on Ozma's
birthday, and all our friends will be present.  So I suggest that you
make a fine big birthday cake of Ozma, and surround it with candles."
 
"Oh, just a CAKE!" exclaimed Dorothy, in disappointment.
 
"Nothing is nicer for a birthday," said the Sorceress.
 
"How many candles should there be on the cake?" asked the girl.
 
"Just a row of them," replied Glinda, "for no one knows how old Ozma
is, although she appears to us to be just a young girl--as fresh and
fair as if she had lived but a few years."
 
"A cake doesn't seem like much of a present," Dorothy asserted.
 
"Make it a surprise cake," suggested the Sorceress.  "Don't you
remember the four and twenty blackbirds that were baked in a pie?
Well, you need not use live blackbirds in your cake, but you could have
some surprise of a different sort."
 
"Like what?" questioned Dorothy, eagerly.
 
"If I told you, it wouldn't be YOUR present to Ozma, but MINE,"
answered the Sorceress, with a smile.  "Think it over, my dear, and I
am sure you can originate a surprise that will add greatly to the joy
and merriment of Ozma's birthday banquet."
 
Dorothy thanked her friend and entered the Red Wagon and told the
Sawhorse to take her back home to the palace in the Emerald City.
 
On the way she thought the matter over seriously of making a surprise
birthday cake and finally decided what to do.
 
As soon as she reached home, she went to the Wizard of Oz, who had a
room fitted up in one of the high towers of the palace, where he
studied magic so as to be able to perform such wizardry as Ozma
commanded him to do for the welfare of her subjects.
 
The Wizard and Dorothy were firm friends and had enjoyed many strange
adventures together.  He was a little man with a bald head and sharp
eyes and a round, jolly face, and because he was neither haughty nor
proud he had become a great favorite with the Oz people.
 
"Wizard," said Dorothy, "I want you to help me fix up a present for
Ozma's birthday."
 
"I'll be glad to do anything for you and for Ozma," he answered.
"What's on your mind, Dorothy?"
 
"I'm going to make a great cake, with frosting and candles, and all
that, you know."
 
"Very good," said the Wizard.
 
"In the center of this cake I'm going to leave a hollow place, with
just a roof of the frosting over it," continued the girl.
 
"Very good," repeated the Wizard, nodding his bald head.
 
"In that hollow place," said Dorothy, "I want to hide a lot of monkeys
about three inches high, and after the cake is placed on the banquet
table, I want the monkeys to break through the frosting and dance
around on the table-cloth.  Then, I want each monkey to cut out a piece
of cake and hand it to a guest."
 
"Mercy me!" cried the little Wizard, as he chuckled with laughter.  "Is
that ALL you want, Dorothy?"
 
"Almost," said she.  "Can you think of anything more the little monkeys
can do, Wizard?"
 
"Not just now," he replied.  "But where will you get such tiny monkeys?"
 
"That's where you're to help me," said Dorothy.  "In some of those wild
forests in the Gillikin Country are lots of monkeys."
 
"Big ones," said the Wizard.
 
"Well, you and I will go there, and we'll get some of the big monkeys,
and you will make them small--just three inches high--by means of your
magic, and we'll put the little monkeys all in a basket and bring them
home with us.  Then you'll train them to dance--up here in your room,
where no one can see them--and on Ozma's birthday we'll put 'em into
the cake and they'll know by that time just what to do."
 
The Wizard looked at Dorothy with admiring approval, and chuckled again.
 
"That's really clever, my dear," he said, "and I see no reason why we
can't do it, just the way you say, if only we can get the wild monkeys
to agree to it."
 
"Do you think they'll object?" asked the girl.
 
"Yes; but perhaps we can argue them into it.  Anyhow it's worth trying,
and I'll help you if you'll agree to let this Surprise Cake be a
present to Ozma from you and me together.  I've been wondering what I
could give Ozma, and as I've got to train the monkeys as well as make
them small, I think you ought to make me your partner."
 
"Of course," said Dorothy; "I'll be glad to do so."
 
"Then it's a bargain," declared the Wizard.  "We must go to seek those
monkeys at once, however, for it will take time to train them and we'll
have to travel a good way to the Gillikin forests where they live."
 
"I'm ready to go any time," agreed Dorothy.  "Shall we ask Ozma to let
us take the Sawhorse?"
 
The Wizard did not answer that at once.  He took time to think of the
suggestion.
 
"No," he answered at length, "the Red Wagon couldn't get through the
thick forests and there's some danger to us in going into the wild
places to search for monkeys.  So I propose we take the Cowardly Lion
and the Hungry Tiger.  We can ride on their backs as well as in the Red
Wagon, and if there is danger to us from other beasts, these two
friendly champions will protect us from all harm."
 
"That's a splendid idea!" exclaimed Dorothy.  "Let's go now and ask the
Hungry Tiger and the Cowardly Lion if they will help us.  Shall we ask
Ozma if we can go?"
 
"I think not," said the Wizard, getting his hat and his black bag of
magic tools.  "This is to be a surprise for her birthday, and so she
mustn't know where we're going.  We'll just leave word, in case Ozma
inquires for us, that we'll be back in a few days."
 
 
 
 
7.  The Forest of Gugu
 
 
In the central western part of the Gillikin Country is a great tangle
of trees called Gugu Forest.  It is the biggest forest in all Oz and
stretches miles and miles in every direction--north, south, east and
west.  Adjoining it on the east side is a range of rugged mountains
covered with underbrush and small twisted trees.  You can find this
place by looking at the Map of the Land of Oz.
 
Gugu Forest is the home of most of the wild beasts that inhabit Oz.
These are seldom disturbed in their leafy haunts because there is no
reason why Oz people should go there, except on rare occasions, and
most parts of the forest have never been seen by any eyes but the eyes
of the beasts who make their home there.  The biggest beasts inhabit
the great forest, while the smaller ones live mostly in the mountain
underbrush at the east.
 
Now, you must know that there are laws in the forests, as well as in
every other place, and these laws are made by the beasts themselves,
and are necessary to keep them from fighting and tearing one another to
pieces.  In Gugu Forest there is a King--an enormous yellow leopard
called "Gugu"--after whom the forest is named.  And this King has three
other beasts to advise him in keeping the laws and maintaining
order--Bru the Bear, Loo the Unicorn and Rango the Gray Ape--who are
known as the King's Counselors.  All these are fierce and ferocious
beasts, and hold their high offices because they are more intelligent
and more feared then their fellows.
 
Since Oz became a fairyland, no man, woman or child ever dies in that
land nor is anyone ever sick.  Likewise the beasts of the forests never
die, so that long years add to their cunning and wisdom, as well as to
their size and strength.  It is possible for beasts--or even people--to
be destroyed, but the task is so difficult that it is seldom attempted.
Because it is free from sickness and death is one reason why Oz is a
fairyland, but it is doubtful whether those who come to Oz from the
outside world, as Dorothy and Button-Bright and Trot and Cap'n Bill and
the Wizard did, will live forever or cannot be injured.  Even Ozma is
not sure about this, and so the guests of Ozma from other lands are
always carefully protected from any danger, so as to be on the safe
side.
 
In spite of the laws of the forests there are often fights among the
beasts; some of them have lost an eye or an ear or even had a leg torn
off.  The King and the King's Counselors always punish those who start
a fight, but so fierce is the nature of some beasts that they will at
times fight in spite of laws and punishment.
 
Over this vast, wild Forest of Gugu flew two eagles, one morning, and
near the center of the jungle the eagles alighted on a branch of a tall
tree.
 
"Here is the place for us to begin our work," said one, who was
Ruggedo, the Nome.
 
"Do many beasts live here?" asked Kiki Aru, the other eagle.
 
"The forest is full of them," said the Nome.  "There are enough beasts
right here to enable us to conquer the people of Oz, if we can get them
to consent to join us.  To do that, we must go among them and tell them
our plans, so we must now decide on what shapes we had better assume
while in the forest."
 
"I suppose we must take the shapes of beasts?" said Kiki.
 
"Of course.  But that requires some thought.  All kinds of beasts live
here, and a yellow leopard is King.  If we become leopards, the King
will be jealous of us.  If we take the forms of some of the other
beasts, we shall not command proper respect."
 
"I wonder if the beasts will attack us?" asked Kiki.
 
"I'm a Nome, and immortal, so nothing can hurt me," replied Ruggedo.
 
"I was born in the Land of Oz, so nothing can hurt me," said Kiki.
 
"But, in order to carry out our plans, we must win the favor of all the
animals of the forest."
 
"Then what shall we do?" asked Kiki.
 
"Let us mix the shapes of several beasts, so we will not look like any
one of them," proposed the wily old Nome.  "Let us have the heads of
lions, the bodies of monkeys, the wings of eagles and the tails of wild
asses, with knobs of gold on the end of them instead of bunches of
hair."
 
"Won't that make a queer combination?" inquired Kiki.
 
"The queerer the better," declared Ruggedo.
 
"All right," said Kiki.  "You stay here, and I'll fly away to another
tree and transform us both, and then we'll climb down our trees and
meet in the forest."
 
"No," said the Nome, "we mustn't separate.  You must transform us while
we are together."
 
"I won't do that," asserted Kiki, firmly.  "You're trying to get my
secret, and I won't let you."
 
The eyes of the other eagle flashed angrily, but Ruggedo did not dare
insist.  If he offended this boy, he might have to remain an eagle
always and he wouldn't like that.  Some day he hoped to be able to
learn the secret word of the magical transformations, but just now he
must let Kiki have his own way.
 
"All right," he said gruffly; "do as you please."
 
So Kiki flew to a tree that was far enough distant so that Ruggedo
could not overhear him and said: "I want Ruggedo, the Nome, and myself
to have the heads of lions, the bodies of monkeys, the wings of eagles
and the tails of wild asses, with knobs of gold on the ends of them
instead of bunches of hair--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
He pronounced the magic word in the proper manner and at once his form
changed to the one he had described.  He spread his eagle's wings and
finding they were strong enough to support his monkey body and lion
head he flew swiftly to the tree where he had left Ruggedo.  The Nome
was also transformed and was climbing down the tree because the
branches all around him were so thickly entwined that there was no room
between them to fly.
 
Kiki quickly joined his comrade and it did not take them long to reach
the ground.
 
 
 
 
8.  The Li-Mon-Eags Make Trouble
 
 
There had been trouble in the Forest of Gugu that morning.  Chipo the
Wild Boar had bitten the tail off Arx the Giraffe while the latter had
his head among the leaves of a tree, eating his breakfast.  Arx kicked
with his heels and struck Tirrip, the great Kangaroo, who had a new
baby in her pouch.  Tirrip knew it was the Wild Boar's fault, so she
knocked him over with one powerful blow and then ran away to escape
Chipo's sharp tusks.  In the chase that followed a giant porcupine
stuck fifty sharp quills into the Boar and a chimpanzee in a tree threw
a cocoanut at the porcupine that jammed its head into its body.
 
All this was against the Laws of the Forest, and when the excitement
was over, Gugu the Leopard King called his royal Counselors together to
decide how best to punish the offenders.
 
The four lords of the forest were holding solemn council in a small
clearing when they saw two strange beasts approaching them--beasts the
like of which they had never seen before.
 
Not one of the four, however, relaxed his dignity or showed by a
movement that he was startled.  The great Leopard crouched at full
length upon a fallen tree-trunk.  Bru the Bear sat on his haunches
before the King; Rango the Gray Ape stood with his muscular arms
folded, and Loo the Unicorn reclined, much as a horse does, between his
fellow-councillors.  With one consent they remained silent, eyeing with
steadfast looks the intruders, who were making their way into their
forest domain.
 
"Well met, Brothers!" said one of the strange beasts, coming to a halt
beside the group, while his comrade with hesitation lagged behind.
 
"We are not brothers," returned the Gray Ape, sternly.  "Who are you,
and how came you in the forest of Gugu?"
 
"We are two Li-Mon-Eags," said Ruggedo, inventing the name.  "Our home
is in Sky Island, and we have come to earth to warn the forest beasts
that the people of Oz are about to make war upon them and enslave them,
so that they will become beasts of burden forever after and obey only
the will of their two-legged masters."
 
A low roar of anger arose from the Council of Beasts.
 
"WHO'S going to do that?" asked Loo the Unicorn, in a high, squeaky
voice, at the same time rising to his feet.
 
"The people of Oz," said Ruggedo.
 
"But what will WE be doing?" inquired the Unicorn.
 
"That's what I've come to talk to you about."
 
"You needn't talk!  We'll fight the Oz people!" screamed the Unicorn.
"We'll smash 'em; we'll trample 'em; we'll gore 'em; we'll--"
 
"Silence!" growled Gugu the King, and Loo obeyed, although still
trembling with wrath.  The cold, steady gaze of the Leopard wandered
over the two strange beasts.  "The people of Oz," said he, "have not
been our friends; they have not been our enemies.  They have let us
alone, and we have let them alone.  There is no reason for war between
us.  They have no slaves.  They could not use us as slaves if they
should conquer us.  I think you are telling us lies, you strange
Li-Mon-Eag--you mixed-up beast who are neither one thing nor another."
 
"Oh, on my word, it's the truth!" protested the Nome in the beast's
shape.  "I wouldn't lie for the world; I--"
 
"Silence!" again growled Gugu the King; and somehow, even Ruggedo was
abashed and obeyed the edict.
 
"What do you say, Bru?" asked the King, turning to the great Bear, who
had until now said nothing.
 
"How does the Mixed Beast know that what he says is true?" asked the
Bear.
 
"Why, I can fly, you know, having the wings of an Eagle," explained the
Nome.  "I and my comrade yonder," turning to Kiki, "flew to a grove in
Oz, and there we heard the people telling how they will make many ropes
to snare you beasts, and then they will surround this forest, and all
other forests, and make you prisoners.  So we came here to warn you,
for being beasts ourselves, although we live in the sky, we are your
friends."
 
The Leopard's lip curled and showed his enormous teeth, sharp as
needles.  He turned to the Gray Ape.
 
"What do YOU think, Rango?" he asked.
 
"Send these mixed beasts away, Your Majesty," replied the Gray Ape.
"They are mischief-makers."
 
"Don't do that--don't do that!" cried the Unicorn, nervously.  "The
stranger said he would tell us what to do.  Let him tell us, then.  Are
we fools, not to heed a warning?"
 
Gugu the King turned to Ruggedo.
 
"Speak, Stranger," he commanded.
 
"Well," said the Nome, "it's this way: The Land of Oz is a fine
country.  The people of Oz have many good things--houses with soft
beds, all sorts of nice-tasting food, pretty clothes, lovely jewels,
and many other things that beasts know nothing of.  Here in the dark
forests the poor beasts have hard work to get enough to eat and to find
a bed to rest in.  But the beasts are better than the people, and why
should they not have all the good things the people have?  So I propose
that before the Oz people have the time to make all those ropes to
snare you with, that all we beasts get together and march against the
Oz people and capture them.  Then the beasts will become the masters
and the people their slaves."
 
"What good would that do us?" asked Bru the Bear.
 
"It would save you from slavery, for one thing, and you could enjoy all
the fine things of Oz people have."
 
"Beasts wouldn't know what to do with the things people use," said the
Gray Ape.
 
"But this is only part of my plan," insisted the Nome.  "Listen to the
rest of it.  We two Li-Mon-Eags are powerful magicians.  When you have
conquered the Oz people we will transform them all into beasts, and
send them to the forests to live, and we will transform all the beasts
into people, so they can enjoy all the wonderful delights of the
Emerald City."
 
For a moment no beast spoke.  Then the King said: "Prove it."
 
"Prove what?" asked Ruggedo.
 
"Prove that you can transform us.  If you are a magician transform the
Unicorn into a man.  Then we will believe you.  If you fail, we will
destroy you."
 
"All right," said the Nome.  "But I'm tired, so I'll let my comrade
make the transformation."
 
Kiki Aru had stood back from the circle, but he had heard all that was
said.  He now realized that he must make good Ruggedo's boast, so he
retreated to the edge of the clearing and whispered the magic word.
 
Instantly the Unicorn became a fat, chubby little man, dressed in the
purple Gillikin costume, and it was hard to tell which was the more
astonished, the King, the Bear, the Ape or the former Unicorn.
 
"It's true!" shorted the man-beast.  "Good gracious, look what I am!
It's wonderful!"
 
The King of Beasts now addressed Ruggedo in a more friendly tone.
 
"We must believe your story, since you have given us proof of your
power," said he.  "But why, if you are so great a magician, cannot you
conquer the Oz people without our help, and so save us the trouble?"
 
"Alas!" replied the crafty old Nome, "no magician is able to do
everything.  The transformations are easy to us because we are
Li-Mon-Eags, but we cannot fight, or conquer even such weak creatures
as the Oz people.  But we will stay with you and advise and help you,
and we will transform all the Oz people into beasts, when the time
comes, and all the beasts into people."
 
Gugu the King turned to his Counselors.
 
"How shall we answer this friendly stranger?" he asked.
 
Loo the former Unicorn was dancing around and cutting capers like a
clown.
 
"On my word, your Majesty," he said, "this being a man is more fun than
being a Unicorn."
 
"You look like a fool," said the Gray Ape.
 
"Well, I FEEL fine!" declared the man-beast.
 
"I think I prefer to be a Bear," said Big Bru.  "I was born a Bear, and
I know a Bear's ways.  So I am satisfied to live as a Bear lives."
 
"That," said the old Nome, "is because you know nothing better.  When
we have conquered the Oz people, and you become a man, you'll be glad
of it."
 
The immense Leopard rested his chin on the log and seemed thoughtful.
 
"The beasts of the forest must decide this matter for themselves," he
said.  "Go you, Rango the Gray Ape, and tell your monkey tribe to order
all the forest beasts to assemble in the Great Clearing at sunrise
to-morrow.  When all are gathered together, this mixed-up Beast who is
a magician shall talk to them and tell them what he has told us.  Then,
if they decide to fight the Oz people, who have declared war on us, I
will lead the beasts to battle."
 
Rango the Gray Ape turned at once and glided swiftly through the forest
on his mission.  The Bear gave a grunt and walked away.  Gugu the King
rose and stretched himself.  Then he said to Ruggedo: "Meet us at
sunrise to-morrow," and with stately stride vanished among the trees.
 
The man-unicorn, left alone with the strangers, suddenly stopped his
foolish prancing.
 
"You'd better make me a Unicorn again," he said.  "I like being a man,
but the forest beasts won't know I'm their friend, Loo, and they might
tear me in pieces before morning."
 
So Kiki changed him back to his former shape, and the Unicorn departed
to join his people.
 
Ruggedo the Nome was much pleased with his success.
 
"To-morrow," he said to Kiki Aru, "we'll win over these beasts and set
them to fight and conquer the Oz people.  Then I will have my revenge
on Ozma and Dorothy and all the rest of my enemies."
 
"But I am doing all the work," said Kiki.
 
"Never mind; you're going to be King of Oz," promised Ruggedo.
 
"Will the big Leopard let me be King?" asked the boy anxiously.
 
The Nome came close to him and whispered:
 
"If Gugu the Leopard opposes us, you will transform him into a tree,
and then he will be helpless."
 
"Of course," agreed Kiki, and he said to himself: "I shall also
transform this deceitful Nome into a tree, for he lies and I cannot
trust him."
 
 
 
 
9.  The Isle of the Magic Flower
 
 
The Glass Cat was a good guide and led Trot and Cap'n Bill by straight
and easy paths through all the settled part of the Munchkin Country,
and then into the north section where there were few houses, and
finally through a wild country where there were no houses or paths at
all.  But the walking was not difficult and at last they came to the
edge of a forest and stopped there to make camp and sleep until morning.
 
From branches of trees Cap'n Bill made a tiny house that was just big
enough for the little girl to crawl into and lie down.  But first they
ate some of the food Trot had carried in the basket.
 
"Don't you want some, too?" she asked the Glass Cat.
 
"No," answered the creature.
 
"I suppose you'll hunt around an' catch a mouse," remarked Cap'n Bill.
 
"Me?  Catch a mouse!  Why should I do that?" inquired the Glass Cat.
 
"Why, then you could eat it," said the sailor-man.
 
"I beg to inform you," returned the crystal tabby, "that I do not eat
mice.  Being transparent, so anyone can see through me, I'd look nice,
wouldn't I, with a common mouse inside me?  But the fact is that I
haven't any stomach or other machinery that would permit me to eat
things.  The careless magician who made me didn't think I'd need to
eat, I suppose."
 
"Don't you ever get hungry or thirsty?" asked Trot.
 
"Never.  I don't complain, you know, at the way I'm made, for I've
never yet seen any living thing as beautiful as I am.  I have the
handsomest brains in the world.  They're pink, and you can see 'em
work."
 
"I wonder," said Trot thoughtfully, as she ate her bread and jam, "if
MY brains whirl around in the same way yours do."
 
"No; not the same way, surely," returned the Glass Cat; "for, in that
case, they'd be as good as MY brains, except that they're hidden under
a thick, boney skull."
 
"Brains," remarked Cap'n Bill, "is of all kinds and work different
ways.  But I've noticed that them as thinks that their brains is best
is often mistook."
 
Trot was a little disturbed by sounds from the forest, that night, for
many beasts seemed prowling among the trees, but she was confident
Cap'n Bill would protect her from harm.  And in fact, no beast ventured
from the forest to attack them.
 
At daybreak they were up again, and after a simple breakfast Cap'n Bill
said to the Glass Cat:
 
"Up anchor, Mate, and let's forge ahead.  I don't suppose we're far
from that Magic Flower, are we?"
 
"Not far," answered the transparent one, as it led the way into the
forest, "but it may take you some time to get to it."
 
Before long they reached the bank of a river.  It was not very wide, at
this place, but as they followed the banks in a northerly direction it
gradually broadened.
 
Suddenly the blue-green leaves of the trees changed to a purple hue,
and Trot noticed this and said:
 
"I wonder what made the colors change like that?"
 
"It's because we have left the Munchkin Country and entered the
Gillikin Country," explained the Glass Cat.  "Also it's a sign our
journey is nearly ended."
 
The river made a sudden turn, and after the travelers had passed around
the bend, they saw that the stream had now become as broad as a small
lake, and in the center of the Lake they beheld a little island, not
more than fifty feet in extent, either way.  Something glittered in the
middle of this tiny island, and the Glass Cat paused on the bank and
said:
 
"There is the gold flower-pot containing the Magic Flower, which is
very curious and beautiful.  If you can get to the island, your task is
ended--except to carry the thing home with you."
 
Cap'n Bill looked at the broad expanse of water and began to whistle a
low, quavering tune.  Trot knew that the whistle meant that Cap'n Bill
was thinking, and the old sailor didn't look at the island as much as
he looked at the trees upon the bank where they stood.  Presently he
took from the big pocket of his coat an axe-blade, wound in an old
cloth to keep the sharp edge from cutting his clothing.  Then, with a
large pocket knife, he cut a small limb from a tree and whittled it
into a handle for his axe.
 
"Sit down, Trot," he advised the girl, as he worked.  "I've got quite a
job ahead of me now, for I've got to build us a raft."
 
"What do we need a raft for, Cap'n?"
 
"Why, to take us to the island.  We can't walk under water, in the
river bed, as the Glass Cat did, so we must float atop the water."
 
"Can you make a raft, Cap'n Bill?"
 
"O' course, Trot, if you give me time."
 
The little girl sat down on a log and gazed at the Island of the Magic
Flower.  Nothing else seemed to grow on the tiny isle.  There was no
tree, no shrub, no grass, even, as far as she could make out from that
distance.  But the gold pot glittered in the rays of the sun, and Trot
could catch glimpses of glowing colors above it, as the Magic Flower
changed from one sort to another.
 
"When I was here before," remarked the Glass Cat, lazily reclining at
the girl's feet, "I saw two Kalidahs on this very bank, where they had
come to drink."
 
"What are Kalidahs?" asked the girl.
 
"The most powerful and ferocious beasts in all Oz.  This forest is
their especial home, and so there are few other beasts to be found
except monkeys.  The monkeys are spry enough to keep out of the way of
the fierce Kalidahs, which attack all other animals and often fight
among themselves."
 
"Did they try to fight you when you saw 'em?" asked Trot, getting very
much excited.
 
"Yes.  They sprang upon me in an instant; but I lay flat on the ground,
so I wouldn't get my legs broken by the great weight of the beasts, and
when they tried to bite me I laughed at them and jeered them until they
were frantic with rage, for they nearly broke their teeth on my hard
glass.  So, after a time, they discovered they could not hurt me, and
went away.  It was great fun."
 
"I hope they don't come here again to drink,--not while we're here,
anyhow," returned the girl, "for I'm not made of glass, nor is Cap'n
Bill, and if those bad beasts bit us, we'd get hurt."
 
Cap'n Bill was cutting from the trees some long stakes, making them
sharp at one end and leaving a crotch at the other end.  These were to
bind the logs of his raft together.  He had fashioned several and was
just finishing another when the Glass Cat cried: "Look out!  There's a
Kalidah coming toward us."
 
Trot jumped up, greatly frightened, and looked at the terrible animal
as if fascinated by its fierce eyes, for the Kalidah was looking at
her, too, and its look wasn't at all friendly.  But Cap'n Bill called
to her: "Wade into the river, Trot, up to your knees--an' stay there!"
and she obeyed him at once.  The sailor-man hobbled forward, the stake
in one hand and his axe in the other, and got between the girl and the
beast, which sprang upon him with a growl of defiance.
 
Cap'n Bill moved pretty slowly, sometimes, but now he was quick as
could be.  As the Kalidah sprang toward him he stuck out his wooden leg
and the point of it struck the beast between the eyes and sent it
rolling upon the ground.  Before it could get upon its feet again the
sailor pushed the sharp stake right through its body and then with the
flat side of the axe he hammered the stake as far into the ground as it
would go.  By this means he captured the great beast and made it
harmless, for try as it would, it could not get away from the stake
that held it.
 
Cap'n Bill knew he could not kill the Kalidah, for no living thing in
Oz can be killed, so he stood back and watched the beast wriggle and
growl and paw the earth with its sharp claws, and then, satisfied it
could not escape, he told Trot to come out of the water again and dry
her wet shoes and stockings in the sun.
 
"Are you sure he can't get away?" she asked.
 
"I'd bet a cookie on it," said Cap'n Bill, so Trot came ashore and took
off her shoes and stockings and laid them on the log to dry, while the
sailor-man resumed his work on the raft.
 
The Kalidah, realizing after many struggles that it could not escape,
now became quiet, but it said in a harsh, snarling voice:
 
"I suppose you think you're clever, to pin me to the ground in this
manner.  But when my friends, the other Kalidahs, come here, they'll
tear you to pieces for treating me this way."
 
"P'raps," remarked Cap'n Bill, coolly, as he chopped at the logs, "an'
p'raps not.  When are your folks comin' here?"
 
"I don't know," admitted the Kalidah.  "But when they DO come, you
can't escape them."
 
"If they hold off long enough, I'll have my raft ready," said Cap'n
Bill.
 
"What are you going to do with a raft?" inquired the beast.
 
"We're goin' over to that island, to get the Magic Flower."
 
The huge beast looked at him in surprise a moment, and then it began to
laugh.  The laugh was a good deal like a roar, and it had a cruel and
derisive sound, but it was a laugh nevertheless.
 
"Good!" said the Kalidah.  "Good!  Very good!  I'm glad you're going to
get the Magic Flower.  But what will you do with it?"
 
"We're going to take it to Ozma, as a present on her birthday."
 
The Kalidah laughed again; then it became sober.  "If you get to the
land on your raft before my people can catch you," it said, "you will
be safe from us.  We can swim like ducks, so the girl couldn't have
escaped me by getting into the water; but Kalidahs don't go to that
island over there."
 
"Why not?" asked Trot.
 
The beast was silent.
 
"Tell us the reason," urged Cap'n Bill.
 
"Well, it's the Isle of the Magic Flower," answered the Kalidah, "and
we don't care much for magic.  If you hadn't had a magic leg, instead
of a meat one, you couldn't have knocked me over so easily and stuck
this wooden pin through me."
 
"I've been to the Magic Isle," said the Glass Cat, "and I've watched
the Magic Flower bloom, and I'm sure it's too pretty to be left in that
lonely place where only beasts prowl around it and no else sees it.  So
we're going to take it away to the Emerald City."
 
"I don't care," the beast replied in a surly tone.  "We Kalidahs would
be just as contented if there wasn't a flower in our forest.  What good
are the things anyhow?"
 
"Don't you like pretty things?" asked Trot.
 
"No."
 
"You ought to admire my pink brains, anyhow," declared the Glass Cat.
"They're beautiful and you can see 'em work."
 
The beast only growled in reply, and Cap'n Bill, having now cut all his
logs to a proper size, began to roll them to the water's edge and
fasten them together.
 
 
 
 
10.  Stuck Fast
 
 
The day was nearly gone when, at last, the raft was ready.
 
"It ain't so very big," said the old sailor, "but I don't weigh much,
an' you, Trot, don't weigh half as much as I do, an' the glass pussy
don't count."
 
"But it's safe, isn't it?" inquired the girl.
 
"Yes; it's good enough to carry us to the island an' back again, an'
that's about all we can expect of it."
 
Saying this, Cap'n Bill pushed the raft into the water, and when it was
afloat, stepped upon it and held out his hand to Trot, who quickly
followed him.  The Glass Cat boarded the raft last of all.
 
The sailor had cut a long pole, and had also whittled a flat paddle,
and with these he easily propelled the raft across the river.  As they
approached the island, the Wonderful Flower became more plainly
visible, and they quickly decided that the Glass Cat had not praised it
too highly.  The colors of the flowers that bloomed in quick succession
were strikingly bright and beautiful, and the shapes of the blossoms
were varied and curious.  Indeed, they did not resemble ordinary
flowers at all.
 
So intently did Trot and Cap'n Bill gaze upon the Golden Flower-pot
that held the Magic Flower that they scarcely noticed the island itself
until the raft beached upon its sands.  But then the girl exclaimed:
"How funny it is, Cap'n Bill, that nothing else grows here excep' the
Magic Flower."
 
Then the sailor glanced at the island and saw that it was all bare
ground, without a weed, a stone or a blade of grass.  Trot, eager to
examine the Flower closer, sprang from the raft and ran up the bank
until she reached the Golden Flower-pot.  Then she stood beside it
motionless and filled with wonder.  Cap'n Bill joined her, coming more
leisurely, and he, too, stood in silent admiration for a time.
 
"Ozma will like this," remarked the Glass Cat, sitting down to watch
the shifting hues of the flowers.  "I'm sure she won't have as fine a
birthday present from anyone else."
 
"Do you 'spose it's very heavy, Cap'n?  And can we get it home without
breaking it?" asked Trot anxiously.
 
"Well, I've lifted many bigger things than that," he replied; "but
let's see what it weighs."
 
He tried to take a step forward, but could not lift his meat foot from
the ground.  His wooden leg seemed free enough, but the other would not
budge.
 
"I seem stuck, Trot," he said, with a perplexed look at his foot.  "It
ain't mud, an' it ain't glue, but somethin's holdin' me down."
 
The girl attempted to lift her own feet, to go nearer to her friend,
but the ground held them as fast as it held Cap'n Bill's foot.  She
tried to slide them, or to twist them around, but it was no use; she
could not move either foot a hair's breadth.
 
"This is funny!" she exclaimed. "What do you 'spose has happened to us,
Cap'n Bill?"
 
"I'm tryin' to make out," he answered.  "Take off your shoes, Trot.
P'raps it's the leather soles that's stuck to the ground."
 
She leaned down and unlaced her shoes, but found she could not pull her
feet out of them.  The Glass Cat, which was walking around as naturally
as ever, now said:
 
"Your foot has got roots to it, Cap'n, and I can see the roots going
into the ground, where they spread out in all directions.  It's the
same way with Trot.  That's why you can't move.  The roots hold you
fast."
 
Cap'n Bill was rather fat and couldn't see his own feet very well, but
he squatted down and examined Trot's feet and decided that the Glass
Cat was right.
 
"This is hard luck," he declared, in a voice that showed he was uneasy
at the discovery.  "We're pris'ners, Trot, on this funny island, an'
I'd like to know how we're ever goin' to get loose, so's we can get
home again."
 
"Now I know why the Kalidah laughed at us," said the girl, "and why he
said none of the beasts ever came to this island.  The horrid creature
knew we'd be caught, and wouldn't warn us."
 
In the meantime, the Kalidah, although pinned fast to the earth by
Cap'n Bill's stake, was facing the island, and now the ugly expression
which passed over its face when it defied and sneered at Cap'n Bill and
Trot, had changed to one of amusement and curiosity.  When it saw the
adventurers had actually reached the island and were standing beside
the Magic Flower, it heaved a breath of satisfaction--a long, deep
breath that swelled its deep chest until the beast could feel the stake
that held him move a little, as if withdrawing itself from the ground.
 
"Ah ha!" murmured the Kalidah, "a little more of this will set me free
and allow me to escape!"
 
So he began breathing as hard as he could, puffing out his chest as
much as possible with each indrawing breath, and by doing this he
managed to raise the stake with each powerful breath, until at last the
Kalidah--using the muscles of his four legs as well as his deep
breaths--found itself free of the sandy soil.  The stake was sticking
right through him, however, so he found a rock deeply set in the bank
and pressed the sharp point of the stake upon the surface of this rock
until he had driven it clear through his body.  Then, by getting the
stake tangled among some thorny bushes, and wiggling his body, he
managed to draw it out altogether.
 
"There!" he exclaimed, "except for those two holes in me, I'm as good
as ever; but I must admit that that old wooden-legged fellow saved both
himself and the girl by making me a prisoner."
 
Now the Kalidahs, although the most disagreeable creatures in the Land
of Oz, were nevertheless magical inhabitants of a magical Fairyland,
and in their natures a certain amount of good was mingled with the
evil.  This one was not very revengeful, and now that his late foes
were in danger of perishing, his anger against them faded away.
 
"Our own Kalidah King," he reflected, "has certain magical powers of
his own.  Perhaps he knows how to fill up these two holes in my body."
 
So without paying any more attention to Trot and Cap'n Bill than they
were paying to him, he entered the forest and trotted along a secret
path that led to the hidden lair of all the Kalidahs.
 
While the Kalidah was making good its escape Cap'n Bill took his pipe
from his pocket and filled it with tobacco and lighted it.  Then, as he
puffed out the smoke, he tried to think what could be done.
 
"The Glass Cat seems all right," he said, "an' my wooden leg didn't
take roots and grow, either.  So it's only flesh that gets caught."
 
"It's magic that does it, Cap'n!"
 
"I know, Trot, and that's what sticks me.  We're livin' in a magic
country, but neither of us knows any magic an' so we can't help
ourselves."
 
"Couldn't the Wizard of Oz help us--or Glinda the Good?" asked the
little girl.
 
"Ah, now we're beginnin' to reason," he answered.  "I'd probably
thought o' that, myself, in a minute more.  By good luck the Glass Cat
is free, an' so it can run back to the Emerald City an' tell the Wizard
about our fix, an' ask him to come an' help us get loose."
 
"Will you go?" Trot asked the cat, speaking very earnestly.
 
"I'm no messenger, to be sent here and there," asserted the curious
animal in a sulky tone of voice.
 
"Well," said Cap'n Bill, "you've got to go home, anyhow, 'cause you
don't want to stay here, I take it.  And, when you get home, it
wouldn't worry you much to tell the Wizard what's happened to us."
 
"That's true," said the cat, sitting on its haunches and lazily washing
its face with one glass paw.  "I don't mind telling the Wizard--when I
get home."
 
"Won't you go now?" pleaded Trot.  "We don't want to stay here any
longer than we can help, and everybody in Oz will be interested in you,
and call you a hero, and say nice things about you because you helped
your friends out of trouble."
 
That was the best way to manage the Glass Cat, which was so vain that
it loved to be praised.
 
"I'm going home right away," said the creature, "and I'll tell the
Wizard to come and help you."
 
Saying this, it walked down to the water and disappeared under the
surface.  Not being able to manage the raft alone, the Glass Cat walked
on the bottom of the river as it had done when it visited the island
before, and soon they saw it appear on the farther bank and trot into
the forest, where it was quickly lost to sight among the trees.
 
Then Trot heaved a deep sigh.
 
"Cap'n," said she, "we're in a bad fix.  There's nothing here to eat,
and we can't even lie down to sleep.  Unless the Glass Cat hurries, and
the Wizard hurries, I don't know what's going to become of us!"
 
 
 
 
11.  The Beasts of the Forest of Gugu
 
 
That was a wonderful gathering of wild animals in the Forest of Gugu
next sunrise.  Rango, the Gray Ape, had even called his monkey
sentinels away from the forest edge, and every beast, little and big,
was in the great clearing where meetings were held on occasions of
great importance.
 
In the center of the clearing stood a great shelving rock, having a
flat, inclined surface, and on this sat the stately Leopard Gugu, who
was King of the Forest.  On the ground beneath him squatted Bru the
Bear, Loo the Unicorn, and Rango the Gray Ape, the King's three
Counselors, and in front of them stood the two strange beasts who had
called themselves Li-Mon-Eags, but were really the transformations of
Ruggedo the Nome, and Kiki Aru the Hyup.
 
Then came the beasts--rows and rows and rows of them!  The smallest
beasts were nearest the King's rock throne; then there were wolves and
foxes, lynxes and hyenas, and the like; behind them were gathered the
monkey tribes, who were hard to keep in order because they teased the
other animals and were full of mischievous tricks.  Back of the monkeys
were the pumas, jaguars, tigers and lions, and their kind; next the
bears, all sizes and colors; after them bisons, wild asses, zebras and
unicorns; farther on the rhinoceri and hippopotami, and at the far edge
of the forest, close to the trees that shut in the clearing, was a row
of thick-skinned elephants, still as statues but with eyes bright and
intelligent.
 
Many other kinds of beasts, too numerous to mention, were there, and
some were unlike any beasts we see in the menageries and zoos in our
country.  Some were from the mountains west of the forest, and some
from the plains at the east, and some from the river; but all present
acknowledged the leadership of Gugu, who for many years had ruled them
wisely and forced all to obey the laws.
 
When the beasts had taken their places in the clearing and the rising
sun was shooting its first bright rays over the treetops, King Gugu
rose on his throne.  The Leopard's giant form, towering above all the
others, caused a sudden hush to fall on the assemblage.
 
"Brothers," he said in his deep voice, "a stranger has come among us, a
beast of curious form who is a great magician and is able to change the
shapes of men or beasts at his will.  This stranger has come to us,
with another of his kind, from out of the sky, to warn us of a danger
which threatens us all, and to offer us a way to escape from that
danger.  He says he is our friend, and he has proved to me and to my
Counselors his magic powers.  Will you listen to what he has to say to
you--to the message he has brought from the sky?"
 
"Let him speak!" came in a great roar from the great company of
assembled beasts.
 
So Ruggedo the Nome sprang upon the flat rock beside Gugu the King, and
another roar, gentle this time, showed how astonished the beasts were
at the sight of his curious form.  His lion's face was surrounded by a
mane of pure white hair; his eagle's wings were attached to the
shoulders of his monkey body and were so long that they nearly touched
the ground; he had powerful arms and legs in addition to the wings, and
at the end of his long, strong tail was a golden ball.  Never had any
beast beheld such a curious creature before, and so the very sight of
the stranger, who was said to be a great magician, filled all present
with awe and wonder.
 
Kiki stayed down below and, half hidden by the shelf of rock, was
scarcely noticed.  The boy realized that the old Nome was helpless
without his magic power, but he also realized that Ruggedo was the best
talker.  So he was willing the Nome should take the lead.
 
"Beasts of the Forest of Gugu," began Ruggedo the Nome, "my comrade and
I are your friends.  We are magicians, and from our home in the sky we
can look down into the Land of Oz and see everything that is going on.
Also we can hear what the people below us are saying.  That is how we
heard Ozma, who rules the Land of Oz, say to her people: 'The beasts in
the Forest of Gugu are lazy and are of no use to us.  Let us go to
their forest and make them all our prisoners.  Let us tie them with
ropes, and beat them with sticks, until they work for us and become our
willing slaves.'  And when the people heard Ozma of Oz say this, they
were glad and raised a great shout and said: 'We will do it!  We will
make the beasts of the Forest of Gugu our slaves!'"
 
The wicked old Nome could say no more, just then, for such a fierce
roar of anger rose from the multitude of beasts that his voice was
drowned by the clamor.  Finally the roar died away, like distant
thunder, and Ruggedo the Nome went on with his speech.
 
"Having heard the Oz people plot against your liberty, we watched to
see what they would do, and saw them all begin making ropes--ropes long
and short--with which to snare our friends the beasts.  You are angry,
but we also were angry, for when the Oz people became the enemies of
the beasts they also became our enemies; for we, too, are beasts,
although we live in the sky.  And my comrade and I said: 'We will save
our friends and have revenge on the Oz people,' and so we came here to
tell you of your danger and of our plan to save you."
 
"We can save ourselves," cried an old Elephant.  "We can fight."
 
"The Oz people are fairies, and you can't fight against magic unless
you also have magic," answered the Nome.
 
"Tell us your plan!" shouted the huge Tiger, and the other beasts
echoed his words, crying: "Tell us your plan."
 
"My plan is simple," replied Ruggedo.  "By our magic we will transform
all you animals into men and women--like the Oz people--and we will
transform all the Oz people into beasts.  You can then live in the fine
houses of the Land of Oz, and eat the fine food of the Oz people, and
wear their fine clothes, and sing and dance and be happy.  And the Oz
people, having become beasts, will have to live here in the forest and
hunt and fight for food, and often go hungry, as you now do, and have
no place to sleep but a bed of leaves or a hole in the ground.  Having
become men and women, you beasts will have all the comforts you desire,
and having become beasts, the Oz people will be very miserable.  That
is our plan, and if you agree to it, we will all march at once into the
Land of Oz and quickly conquer our enemies."
 
When the stranger ceased speaking, a great silence fell on the
assemblage, for the beasts were thinking of what he had said.  Finally
one of the walruses asked:
 
"Can you really transform beasts into men, and men into beasts?"
 
"He can--he can!" cried Loo the Unicorn, prancing up and down in an
excited manner.  "He transformed ME, only last evening, and he can
transform us all."
 
Gugu the King now stepped forward.
 
"You have heard the stranger speak," said he, "and now you must answer
him.  It is for you to decide.  Shall we agree to this plan, or not?"
 
"Yes!" shouted some of the animals.
 
"No!" shouted others.
 
And some were yet silent.
 
Gugu looked around the great circle.
 
"Take more time to think," he suggested.  "Your answer is very
important.  Up to this time we have had no trouble with the Oz people,
but we are proud and free, and never will become slaves.  Think
carefully, and when you are ready to answer, I will hear you."
 
 
 
 
12.  Kiki Uses His Magic
 
 
Then arose a great confusion of sounds as all the animals began talking
to their fellows.  The monkeys chattered and the bears growled and the
voices of the jaguars and lions rumbled, and the wolves yelped and the
elephants had to trumpet loudly to make their voices heard.  Such a
hubbub had never been known in the forest before, and each beast argued
with his neighbor until it seemed the noise would never cease.
 
Ruggedo the Nome waved his arms and fluttered his wings to try to make
them listen to him again, but the beasts paid no attention.  Some
wanted to fight the Oz people, some wanted to be transformed, and some
wanted to do nothing at all.
 
The growling and confusion had grown greater than ever when in a flash
silence fell on all the beasts present, the arguments were hushed, and
all gazed in astonishment at a strange sight.
 
For into the circle strode a great Lion--bigger and more powerful than
any other lion there--and on his back rode a little girl who smiled
fearlessly at the multitude of beasts.  And behind the Lion and the
little girl came another beast--a monstrous Tiger, who bore upon his
back a funny little man carrying a black bag.  Right past the rows of
wondering beasts the strange animals walked, advancing until they stood
just before the rock throne of Gugu.
 
Then the little girl and the funny little man dismounted, and the great
Lion demanded in a loud voice:
 
"Who is King in this forest?"
 
"I am!" answered Gugu, looking steadily at the other.  "I am Gugu the
Leopard, and I am King of this forest."
 
"Then I greet Your Majesty with great respect," said the Lion.
"Perhaps you have heard of me, Gugu.  I am called the 'Cowardly Lion,'
and I am King of all Beasts, the world over."
 
Gugu's eyes flashed angrily.
 
"Yes," said he, "I have heard of you.  You have long claimed to be King
of Beasts, but no beast who is a coward can be King over me."
 
"He isn't a coward, Your Majesty," asserted the little girl, "He's just
cowardly, that's all."
 
Gugu looked at her.  All the other beasts were looking at her, too.
 
"Who are you?" asked the King.
 
"Me?  Oh, I'm just Dorothy," she answered.
 
"How dare you come here?" demanded the King.
 
"Why, I'm not afraid to go anywhere, if the Cowardly Lion is with me,"
she said.  "I know him pretty well, and so I can trust him.  He's
always afraid, when we get into trouble, and that's why he's cowardly;
but he's a terrible fighter, and that's why he isn't a coward.  He
doesn't like to fight, you know, but when he HAS to, there isn't any
beast living that can conquer him."
 
Gugu the King looked at the big, powerful form of the Cowardly Lion,
and knew she spoke the truth.  Also the other Lions of the forest now
came forward and bowed low before the strange Lion.
 
"We welcome Your Majesty," said one.  "We have known you many years
ago, before you went to live at the Emerald City, and we have seen you
fight the terrible Kalidahs and conquer them, so we know you are the
King of all Beasts."
 
"It is true," replied the Cowardly Lion; "but I did not come here to
rule the beasts of this forest.  Gugu is King here, and I believe he is
a good King and just and wise.  I come, with my friends, to be the
guest of Gugu, and I hope we are welcome."
 
That pleased the great Leopard, who said very quickly:
 
"Yes; you, at least, are welcome to my forest.  But who are these
strangers with you?"
 
"Dorothy has introduced herself," replied the Lion, "and you are sure
to like her when you know her better.  This man is the Wizard of Oz, a
friend of mine who can do wonderful tricks of magic.  And here is my
true and tried friend, the Hungry Tiger, who lives with me in the
Emerald City."
 
"Is he ALWAYS hungry?" asked Loo the Unicorn.
 
"I am," replied the Tiger, answering the question himself.  "I am
always hungry for fat babies."
 
"Can't you find any fat babies in Oz to eat?" inquired Loo, the Unicorn.
 
"There are plenty of them, of course," said the Tiger, "but
unfortunately I have such a tender conscience that it won't allow me to
eat babies.  So I'm always hungry for 'em and never can eat 'em,
because my conscience won't let me."
 
Now of all the surprised beasts in that clearing, not one was so much
surprised at the sudden appearance of these four strangers as Ruggedo
the Nome.  He was frightened, too, for he recognized them as his most
powerful enemies; but he also realized that they could not know he was
the former King of the Nomes, because of the beast's form he wore,
which disguised him so effectually.  So he took courage and resolved
that the Wizard and Dorothy should not defeat his plans.
 
It was hard to tell, just yet, what the vast assemblage of beasts
thought of the new arrivals.  Some glared angrily at them, but more of
them seemed to be curious and wondering.  All were interested, however,
and they kept very quiet and listened carefully to all that was said.
 
Kiki Aru, who had remained unnoticed in the shadow of the rock, was at
first more alarmed by the coming of the strangers than even Ruggedo
was, and the boy told himself that unless he acted quickly and without
waiting to ask the advice of the old Nome, their conspiracy was likely
to be discovered and all their plans to conquer and rule Oz be
defeated.  Kiki didn't like the way Ruggedo acted either, for the
former King of the Nomes wanted to do everything his own way, and made
the boy, who alone possessed the power of transformations, obey his
orders as if he were a slave.
 
Another thing that disturbed Kiki Aru was the fact that a real Wizard
had arrived, who was said to possess many magical powers, and this
Wizard carried his tools in a black bag, and was the friend of the Oz
people, and so would probably try to prevent war between the beasts of
the forest and the people of Oz.
 
All these things passed through the mind of the Hyup boy while the
Cowardly Lion and Gugu the King were talking together, and that was why
he now began to do several strange things.
 
He had found a place, near to the point where he stood, where there was
a deep hollow in the rock, so he put his face into this hollow and
whispered softly, so he would not be heard:
 
"I want the Wizard of Oz to become a fox--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
The Wizard, who had stood smilingly beside his friends, suddenly felt
his form change to that of a fox, and his black bag fell to the ground.
Kiki reached out an arm and seized the bag, and the Fox cried as loud
as it could:
 
"Treason!  There's a traitor here with magic powers!"
 
Everyone was startled at this cry, and Dorothy, seeing her old friend's
plight, screamed and exclaimed: "Mercy me!"
 
But the next instant the little girl's form had changed to that of a
lamb with fleecy white wool, and Dorothy was too bewildered to do
anything but look around her in wonder.
 
The Cowardly Lion's eyes now flashed fire; he crouched low and lashed
the ground with his tail and gazed around to discover who the
treacherous magician might be.  But Kiki, who had kept his face in the
hollow rock, again whispered the magic word, and the great lion
disappeared and in his place stood a little boy dressed in Munchkin
costume.  The little Munchkin boy was as angry as the lion had been,
but he was small and helpless.
 
Ruggedo the Nome saw what was happening and was afraid Kiki would spoil
all his plans, so he leaned over the rock and shouted: "Stop,
Kiki--stop!"
 
Kiki would not stop, however.  Instead, he transformed the Nome into a
goose, to Ruggedo's horror and dismay.  But the Hungry Tiger had
witnessed all these transformations, and he was watching to see which
of those present was to blame for them.  When Ruggedo spoke to Kiki,
the Hungry Tiger knew that he was the magician, so he made a sudden
spring and hurled his great body full upon the form of the Li-Mon-Eag
crouching against the rock.  Kiki didn't see the Tiger coming because
his face was still in the hollow, and the heavy body of the tiger bore
him to the earth just as he said "Pyrzqxgl!" for the fifth time.
 
So now the tiger which was crushing him changed to a rabbit, and
relieved of its weight, Kiki sprang up and, spreading his eagle's
wings, flew into the branches of a tree, where no beast could easily
reach him.  He was not an instant too quick in doing this, for Gugu the
King had crouched on the rock's edge and was about to spring on the boy.
 
From his tree Kiki transformed Gugu into a fat Gillikin woman, and
laughed aloud to see how the woman pranced with rage, and how
astonished all the beasts were at their King's new shape.
 
The beasts were frightened, too, fearing they would share the fate of
Gugu, so a stampede began when Rango the Gray Ape sprang into the
forest, and Bru the Bear and Loo the Unicorn followed as quickly as
they could.  The elephants backed into the forest, and all the other
animals, big and little, rushed after them, scattering through the
jungles until the clearing was far behind.  The monkeys scrambled into
the trees and swung themselves from limb to limb, to avoid being
trampled upon by the bigger beasts, and they were so quick that they
distanced all the rest.  A panic of fear seemed to have overtaken the
forest people and they got as far away from the terrible Magician as
they possibly could.
 
But the transformed ones stayed in the clearing, being so astonished
and bewildered by their new shapes that they could only look at one
another in a dazed and helpless fashion, although each one was greatly
annoyed at the trick that had been played on him.
 
"Who are you?" the Munchkin boy asked the Rabbit; and "Who are you?"
the Fox asked the Lamb; and "Who are you?" the Rabbit asked the fat
Gillikin woman.
 
"I'm Dorothy," said the woolly Lamb.
 
"I'm the Wizard," said the Fox.
 
"I'm the Cowardly Lion," said the Munchkin boy.
 
"I'm the Hungry Tiger," said the Rabbit.
 
"I'm Gugu the King," said the fat Woman.
 
But when they asked the Goose who he was, Ruggedo the Nome would not
tell them.
 
"I'm just a Goose," he replied, "and what I was before, I cannot
remember."
 
 
 
 
13.  The Loss of the Black Bag
 
 
Kiki Aru, in the form of the Li-Mon-Eag, had scrambled into the high,
thick branches of the tree, so no one could see him, and there he
opened the Wizard's black bag, which he had carried away in his flight.
He was curious to see what the Wizard's magic tools looked like, and
hoped he could use some of them and so secure more power; but after he
had taken the articles, one by one, from the bag, he had to admit they
were puzzles to him.  For, unless he understood their uses, they were
of no value whatever.  Kiki Aru, the Hyup boy, was no wizard or
magician at all, and could do nothing unusual except to use the Magic
Word he had stolen from his father on Mount Munch.  So he hung the
Wizard's black bag on a branch of the tree and then climbed down to the
lower limbs that he might see what the victims of his transformations
were doing.
 
They were all on top of the flat rock, talking together in tones so low
that Kiki could not hear what they said.
 
"This is certainly a misfortune," remarked the Wizard in the Fox's
form, "but our transformations are a sort of enchantment which is very
easy to break--when you know how and have the tools to do it with.  The
tools are in my Black Bag; but where is the Bag?"
 
No one knew that, for none had seen Kiki Aru fly away with it.
 
"Let's look and see if we can find it," suggested Dorothy the Lamb.
 
So they left the rock, and all of them searched the clearing high and
low without finding the Bag of Magic Tools.  The Goose searched as
earnestly as the others, for if he could discover it, he meant to hide
it where the Wizard could never find it, because if the Wizard changed
him back to his proper form, along with the others, he would then be
recognized as Ruggedo the Nome, and they would send him out of the Land
of Oz and so ruin all his hopes of conquest.
 
Ruggedo was not really sorry, now that he thought about it, that Kiki
had transformed all these Oz folks.  The forest beasts, it was true,
had been so frightened that they would now never consent to be
transformed into men, but Kiki could transform them against their will,
and once they were all in human forms, it would not be impossible to
induce them to conquer the Oz people.
 
So all was not lost, thought the old Nome, and the best thing for him
to do was to rejoin the Hyup boy who had the secret of the
transformations.  So, having made sure the Wizard's black bag was not
in the clearing, the Goose wandered away through the trees when the
others were not looking, and when out of their hearing, he began
calling, "Kiki Aru!  Kiki Aru!  Quack--quack!  Kiki Aru!"
 
The Boy and the Woman, the Fox, the Lamb, and the Rabbit, not being
able to find the bag, went back to the rock, all feeling exceedingly
strange.
 
"Where's the Goose?" asked the Wizard.
 
"He must have run away," replied Dorothy.  "I wonder who he was?"
 
"I think," said Gugu the King, who was the fat Woman, "that the Goose
was the stranger who proposed that we make war upon the Oz people.  If
so, his transformation was merely a trick to deceive us, and he has now
gone to join his comrade, that wicked Li-Mon-Eag who obeyed all his
commands."
 
"What shall we do now?" asked Dorothy.  "Shall we go back to the
Emerald City, as we are, and then visit Glinda the Good and ask her to
break the enchantments?"
 
"I think so," replied the Wizard Fox.  "And we can take Gugu the King
with us, and have Glinda restore him to his natural shape.  But I hate
to leave my Bag of Magic Tools behind me, for without it I shall lose
much of my power as a Wizard.  Also, if I go back to the Emerald City
in the shape of a Fox, the Oz people will think I'm a poor Wizard and
will lose their respect for me."
 
"Let us make still another search for your tools," suggested the
Cowardly Lion, "and then, if we fail to find the Black Bag anywhere in
this forest, we must go back home as we are."
 
"Why did you come here, anyway?" inquired Gugu.
 
"We wanted to borrow a dozen monkeys, to use on Ozma's birthday,"
explained the Wizard.  "We were going to make them small, and train
them to do tricks, and put them inside Ozma's birthday cake."
 
"Well," said the Forest King, "you would have to get the consent of
Rango the Gray Ape, to do that.  He commands all the tribes of monkeys."
 
"I'm afraid it's too late, now," said Dorothy, regretfully.  "It was a
splendid plan, but we've got troubles of our own, and I don't like
being a lamb at all."
 
"You're nice and fuzzy," said the Cowardly Lion.
 
"That's nothing," declared Dorothy.  "I've never been 'specially proud
of myself, but I'd rather be the way I was born than anything else in
the whole world."
 
 
The Glass Cat, although it had some disagreeable ways and manners,
nevertheless realized that Trot and Cap'n Bill were its friends and so
was quite disturbed at the fix it had gotten them into by leading them
to the Isle of the Magic Flower.  The ruby heart of the Glass Cat was
cold and hard, but still it was a heart, and to have a heart of any
sort is to have some consideration for others.  But the queer
transparent creature didn't want Trot and Cap'n Bill to know it was
sorry for them, and therefore it moved very slowly until it had crossed
the river and was out of sight among the trees of the forest.  Then it
headed straight toward the Emerald City, and trotted so fast that it
was like a crystal streak crossing the valleys and plains.  Being
glass, the cat was tireless, and with no reason to delay its journey,
it reached Ozma's palace in wonderfully quick time.
 
"Where's the Wizard?" it asked the Pink Kitten, which was curled up in
the sunshine on the lowest step of the palace entrance.
 
"Don't bother me," lazily answered the Pink Kitten, whose name was
Eureka.
 
"I must find the Wizard at once!" said the Glass Cat.
 
"Then find him," advised Eureka, and went to sleep again.
 
The Glass Cat darted up the stairway and came upon Toto, Dorothy's
little black dog.
 
"Where's the Wizard?" asked the Cat.
 
"Gone on a journey with Dorothy," replied Toto.
 
"When did they go, and where have they gone?" demanded the Cat.
 
"They went yesterday, and I heard them say they would go to the Great
Forest in the Munchkin Country."
 
"Dear me," said the Glass Cat; "that is a long journey."
 
"But they rode on the Hungry Tiger and the Cowardly Lion," explained
Toto, "and the Wizard carried his Black Bag of Magic Tools."
 
The Glass Cat knew the Great Forest of Gugu well, for it had traveled
through this forest many times in its journeys through the Land of Oz.
And it reflected that the Forest of Gugu was nearer to the Isle of the
Magic Flower than the Emerald City was, and so, if it could manage to
find the Wizard, it could lead him across the Gillikin Country to where
Trot and Cap'n Bill were prisoned.  It was a wild country and little
traveled, but the Glass Cat knew every path.  So very little time need
be lost, after all.
 
Without stopping to ask any more questions the Cat darted out of the
palace and away from the Emerald City, taking the most direct route to
the Forest of Gugu.  Again the creature flashed through the country
like a streak of light, and it would surprise you to know how quickly
it reached the edge of the Great Forest.
 
There were no monkey guards among the trees to cry out a warning, and
this was so unusual that it astonished the Glass Cat.  Going farther
into the forest it presently came upon a wolf, which at first bounded
away in terror.  But then, seeing it was only a Glass Cat, the Wolf
stopped, and the Cat could see it was trembling, as if from a terrible
fright.
 
"What's the matter?" asked the Cat.
 
"A dreadful Magician has come among us!" exclaimed the Wolf, "and he's
changing the forms of all the beasts--quick as a wink--and making them
all his slaves."
 
The Glass Cat smiled and said:
 
"Why, that's only the Wizard of Oz.  He may be having some fun with you
forest people, but the Wizard wouldn't hurt a beast for anything."
 
"I don't mean the Wizard," explained the Wolf.  "And if the Wizard of
Oz is that funny little man who rode a great Tiger into the clearing,
he's been transformed himself by the terrible Magician."
 
"The Wizard transformed?  Why, that's impossible," declared the Glass
Cat.
 
"No; it isn't.  I saw him with my own eyes, changed into the form of a
Fox, and the girl who was with him was changed to a woolly Lamb."
 
The Glass Cat was indeed surprised.
 
"When did that happen?" it asked.
 
"Just a little while ago in the clearing.  All the animals had met
there, but they ran away when the Magician began his transformations,
and I'm thankful I escaped with my natural shape.  But I'm still
afraid, and I'm going somewhere to hide."
 
With this the Wolf ran on, and the Glass Cat, which knew where the big
clearing was, went toward it.  But now it walked more slowly, and its
pink brains rolled and tumbled around at a great rate because it was
thinking over the amazing news the Wolf had told it.
 
When the Glass Cat reached the clearing, it saw a Fox, a Lamb, a
Rabbit, a Munchkin boy and a fat Gillikin woman, all wandering around
in an aimless sort of way, for they were again searching for the Black
Bag of Magic Tools.
 
The Cat watched them a moment and then it walked slowly into the open
space.  At once the Lamb ran toward it, crying:
 
"Oh, Wizard, here's the Glass Cat!"
 
"Where, Dorothy?" asked the Fox.
 
"Here!"
 
The Boy and the Woman and the Rabbit now joined the Fox and the Lamb,
and they all stood before the Glass Cat and speaking together, almost
like a chorus, asked: "Have you seen the Black Bag?"
 
"Often," replied the Glass Cat, "but not lately."
 
"It's lost," said the Fox, "and we must find it."
 
"Are you the Wizard?" asked the Cat.
 
"Yes."
 
"And who are these others?"
 
"I'm Dorothy," said the Lamb.
 
"I'm the Cowardly Lion," said the Munchkin boy.
 
"I'm the Hungry Tiger," said the Rabbit.
 
"I'm Gugu, King of the Forest," said the fat Woman.
 
The Glass Cat sat on its hind legs and began to laugh.  "My, what a
funny lot!" exclaimed the Creature.  "Who played this joke on you?"
 
"It's no joke at all," declared the Wizard.  "It was a cruel, wicked
transformation, and the Magician that did it has the head of a lion,
the body of a monkey, the wings of an eagle and a round ball on the end
of his tail."
 
The Glass Cat laughed again.  "That Magician must look funnier than you
do," it said.  "Where is he now?"
 
"Somewhere in the forest," said the Cowardly Lion.  "He just jumped
into that tall maple tree over there, for he can climb like a monkey
and fly like an eagle, and then he disappeared in the forest."
 
"And there was another Magician, just like him, who was his friend,"
added Dorothy, "but they probably quarreled, for the wickedest one
changed his friend into the form of a Goose."
 
"What became of the Goose?" asked the Cat, looking around.
 
"He must have gone away to find his friend," answered Gugu the King.
"But a Goose can't travel very fast, so we could easily find him if we
wanted to."
 
"The worst thing of all," said the Wizard, "is that my Black Bag is
lost.  It disappeared when I was transformed.  If I could find it I
could easily break these enchantments by means of my magic, and we
would resume our own forms again.  Will you help us search for the
Black Bag, Friend Cat?"
 
"Of course," replied the Glass Cat.  "But I expect the strange Magician
carried it away with him.  If he's a magician, he knows you need that
Bag, and perhaps he's afraid of your magic.  So he's probably taken the
Bag with him, and you won't see it again unless you find the Magician."
 
"That sounds reasonable," remarked the Lamb, which was Dorothy.  "Those
pink brains of yours seem to be working pretty well to-day."
 
"If the Glass Cat is right," said the Wizard in a solemn voice,
"there's more trouble ahead of us.  That Magician is dangerous, and if
we go near him he may transform us into shapes not as nice as these."
 
"I don't see how we could be any WORSE off," growled Gugu, who was
indignant because he was forced to appear in the form of a fat woman.
 
"Anyway," said the Cowardly Lion, "our best plan is to find the
Magician and try to get the Black Bag from him.  We may manage to steal
it, or perhaps we can argue him into giving it to us."
 
"Why not find the Goose, first?" asked Dorothy.  "The Goose will be
angry at the Magician, and he may be able to help us."
 
"That isn't a bad idea," returned the Wizard.  "Come on, Friends; let's
find that Goose.  We will separate and search in different directions,
and the first to find the Goose must bring him here, where we will all
meet again in an hour."
 
 
 
 
14.  The Wizard Learns the Magic Word
 
 
Now, the Goose was the transformation of old Ruggedo, who was at one
time King of the Nomes, and he was even more angry at Kiki Aru than
were the others who shapes had been changed.  The Nome detested
anything in the way of a bird, because birds lay eggs and eggs are
feared by all the Nomes more than anything else in the world.  A goose
is a foolish bird, too, and Ruggedo was dreadfully ashamed of the shape
he was forced to wear.  And it would make him shudder to reflect that
the Goose might lay an egg!
 
So the Nome was afraid of himself and afraid of everything around him.
If an egg touched him he could then be destroyed, and almost any animal
he met in the forest might easily conquer him.  And that would be the
end of old Ruggedo the Nome.
 
Aside from these fears, however, he was filled with anger against Kiki,
whom he had meant to trap by cleverly stealing from him the Magic Word.
The boy must have been crazy to spoil everything the way he did, but
Ruggedo knew that the arrival of the Wizard had scared Kiki, and he was
not sorry the boy had transformed the Wizard and Dorothy and made them
helpless.  It was his own transformation that annoyed him and made him
indignant, so he ran about the forest hunting for Kiki, so that he
might get a better shape and coax the boy to follow his plans to
conquer the Land of Oz.
 
Kiki Aru hadn't gone very far away, for he had surprised himself as
well as the others by the quick transformations and was puzzled as to
what to do next.  Ruggedo the Nome was overbearing and tricky, and Kiki
knew he was not to be depended on; but the Nome could plan and plot,
which the Hyup boy was not wise enough to do, and so, when he looked
down through the branches of a tree and saw a Goose waddling along
below and heard it cry out, "Kiki Aru!  Quack--quack!  Kiki Aru!" the
boy answered in a low voice, "Here I am," and swung himself down to the
lowest limb of the tree.
 
The Goose looked up and saw him.
 
"You've bungled things in a dreadful way!" exclaimed the Goose.  "Why
did you do it?"
 
"Because I wanted to," answered Kiki.  "You acted as if I was your
slave, and I wanted to show these forest people that I am more powerful
than you."
 
The Goose hissed softly, but Kiki did not hear that.
 
Old Ruggedo quickly recovered his wits and muttered to himself: "This
boy is the goose, although it is I who wear the goose's shape.  I will
be gentle with him now, and fierce with him when I have him in my
power."  Then he said aloud to Kiki:
 
"Well, hereafter I will be content to acknowledge you the master.  You
bungled things, as I said, but we can still conquer Oz."
 
"How?" asked the boy.
 
"First give me back the shape of the Li-Mon-Eag, and then we can talk
together more conveniently," suggested the Nome.
 
"Wait a moment, then," said Kiki, and climbed higher up the tree.
There he whispered the Magic Word and the Goose became a Li-Mon-Eag, as
he had been before.
 
"Good!" said the Nome, well pleased, as Kiki joined him by dropping
down from the tree.  "Now let us find a quiet place where we can talk
without being overheard by the beasts."
 
So the two started away and crossed the forest until they came to a
place where the trees were not so tall nor so close together, and among
these scattered trees was another clearing, not so large as the first
one, where the meeting of the beasts had been held.  Standing on the
edge of this clearing and looking across it, they saw the trees on the
farther side full of monkeys, who were chattering together at a great
rate of the sights they had witnessed at the meeting.
 
The old Nome whispered to Kiki not to enter the clearing or allow the
monkeys to see them.
 
"Why not?" asked the boy, drawing back.
 
"Because those monkeys are to be our army--the army which will conquer
Oz," said the Nome.  "Sit down here with me, Kiki, and keep quiet, and
I will explain to you my plan."
 
Now, neither Kiki Aru nor Ruggedo had noticed that a sly Fox had
followed them all the way from the tree where the Goose had been
transformed to the Li-Mon-Eag.  Indeed, this Fox, who was none other
than the Wizard of Oz, had witnessed the transformation of the Goose
and now decided he would keep watch on the conspirators and see what
they would do next.
 
A Fox can move through a forest very softly, without making any noise,
and so the Wizard's enemies did not suspect his presence.  But when
they sat down by the edge of the clearing, to talk, with their backs
toward him, the Wizard did not know whether to risk being seen, by
creeping closer to hear what they said, or whether it would be better
for him to hide himself until they moved on again.
 
While he considered this question he discovered near him a great tree
which had a hollow trunk, and there was a round hole in this tree,
about three feet above the ground.  The Wizard Fox decided it would be
safer for him to hide inside the hollow tree, so he sprang into the
hole and crouched down in the hollow, so that his eyes just came to the
edge of the hole by which he had entered, and from here he watched the
forms of the two Li-Mon-Eags.
 
"This is my plan," said the Nome to Kiki, speaking so low that the
Wizard could only hear the rumble of his voice.  "Since you can
transform anything into any form you wish, we will transform these
monkeys into an army, and with that army we will conquer the Oz people."
 
"The monkeys won't make much of an army," objected Kiki.
 
"We need a great army, but not a numerous one," responded the Nome.
"You will transform each monkey into a giant man, dressed in a fine
uniform and armed with a sharp sword.  There are fifty monkeys over
there and fifty giants would make as big an army as we need."
 
"What will they do with the swords?" asked Kiki.  "Nothing can kill the
Oz people."
 
"True," said Ruggedo.  "The Oz people cannot be killed, but they can be
cut into small pieces, and while every piece will still be alive, we
can scatter the pieces around so that they will be quite helpless.
Therefore, the Oz people will be afraid of the swords of our army, and
we will conquer them with ease."
 
"That seems like a good idea," replied the boy, approvingly.  "And in
such a case, we need not bother with the other beasts of the forest."
 
"No; you have frightened the beasts, and they would no longer consent
to assist us in conquering Oz.  But those monkeys are foolish
creatures, and once they are transformed to Giants, they will do just
as we say and obey our commands.  Can you transform them all at once?"
 
"No, I must take one at a time," said Kiki.  "But the fifty
transformations can be made in an hour or so.  Stay here, Ruggedo, and
I will change the first monkey--that one at the left, on the end of the
limb--into a Giant with a sword."
 
"Where are you going?" asked the Nome.
 
"I must not speak the Magic Word in the presence of another person,"
declared Kiki, who was determined not to allow his treacherous
companion to learn his secret, "so I will go where you cannot hear me."
 
Ruggedo the Nome was disappointed, but he hoped still to catch the boy
unawares and surprise the Magic Word.  So he merely nodded his lion
head, and Kiki got up and went back into the forest a short distance.
Here he spied a hollow tree, and by chance it was the same hollow tree
in which the Wizard of Oz, now in the form of a Fox, had hidden himself.
 
As Kiki ran up to the tree the Fox ducked its head, so that it was out
of sight in the dark hollow beneath the hole, and then Kiki put his
face into the hole and whispered: "I want that monkey on the branch at
the left to become a Giant man fifty feet tall, dressed in a uniform
and with a sharp sword--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
Then he ran back to Ruggedo, but the Wizard Fox had heard quite plainly
every word that he had said.
 
The monkey was instantly transformed into the Giant, and the Giant was
so big that as he stood on the ground his head was higher than the
trees of the forest.  The monkeys raised a great chatter but did not
seem to understand that the Giant was one of themselves.
 
"Good!" cried the Nome.  "Hurry, Kiki, and transform the others."
 
So Kiki rushed back to the tree and putting his face to the hollow,
whispered:
 
"I want the next monkey to be just like the first--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
Again the Wizard Fox heard the Magic Word, and just how it was
pronounced.  But he sat still in the hollow and waited to hear it
again, so it would be impressed on his mind and he would not forget it.
 
Kiki kept running to the edge of the forest and back to the hollow tree
again until he had whispered the Magic Word six times and six monkeys
had been changed to six great Giants.  Then the Wizard decided he would
make an experiment and use the Magic Word himself.  So, while Kiki was
running back to the Nome, the Fox stuck his head out of the hollow and
said softly: "I want that creature who is running to become a
hickory-nut--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
Instantly the Li-Mon-Eag form of Kiki Aru the Hyup disappeared and a
small hickory-nut rolled upon the ground a moment and then lay still.
 
The Wizard was delighted, and leaped from the hollow just as Ruggedo
looked around to see what had become of Kiki.  The Nome saw the Fox but
no Kiki, so he hastily rose to his feet.  The Wizard did not know how
powerful the queer beast might be, so he resolved to take no chances.
 
"I want this creature to become a walnut--Pyrzqxgl!" he said aloud.
But he did not pronounce the Magic Word in quite the right way, and
Ruggedo's form did not change.  But the Nome knew at once that
"Pyrzqxgl!" was the Magic Word, so he rushed at the Fox and cried:
 
"I want you to become a Goose--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
But the Nome did not pronounce the word aright, either, having never
heard it spoken but once before, and then with a wrong accent.  So the
Fox was not transformed, but it had to run away to escape being caught
by the angry Nome.
 
Ruggedo now began pronouncing the Magic Word in every way he could
think of, hoping to hit the right one, and the Fox, hiding in a bush,
was somewhat troubled by the fear that he might succeed.  However, the
Wizard, who was used to magic arts, remained calm and soon remembered
exactly how Kiki Aru had pronounced the word.  So he repeated the
sentence he had before uttered and Ruggedo the Nome became an ordinary
walnut.
 
The Wizard now crept out from the bush and said: "I want my own form
again--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
Instantly he was the Wizard of Oz, and after picking up the hickory-nut
and the walnut, and carefully placing them in his pocket, he ran back
to the big clearing.
 
Dorothy the Lamb uttered a bleat of delight when she saw her old friend
restored to his natural shape.  The others were all there, not having
found the Goose.  The fat Gillikin woman, the Munchkin boy, the Rabbit
and the Glass Cat crowded around the Wizard and asked what had happened.
 
Before he explained anything of his adventure, he transformed them
all--except, of course, the Glass Cat--into their natural shapes, and
when their joy permitted them to quiet somewhat, he told how he had by
chance surprised the Magician's secret and been able to change the two
Li-Mon-Eags into shapes that could not speak, and therefore would be
unable to help themselves.  And the little Wizard showed his astonished
friends the hickory-nut and the walnut to prove that he had spoken the
truth.
 
"But--see here!"--exclaimed Dorothy.  "What has become of those Giant
Soldiers who used to be monkeys?"
 
"I forgot all about them!" admitted the Wizard; "but I suppose they are
still standing there in the forest."
 
 
 
 
15.  The Lonesome Duck
 
 
Trot and Cap'n Bill stood before the Magic Flower, actually rooted to
the spot.
 
"Aren't you hungry, Cap'n?" asked the little girl, with a long sigh,
for she had been standing there for hours and hours.
 
"Well," replied the sailor-man, "I ain't sayin' as I couldn't EAT,
Trot--if a dinner was handy--but I guess old folks don't get as hungry
as young folks do."
 
"I'm not sure 'bout that, Cap'n Bill," she said thoughtfully.  "Age
MIGHT make a diff'rence, but seems to me SIZE would make a bigger
diff'rence.  Seeing you're twice as big as me, you ought to be twice as
hungry."
 
"I hope I am," he rejoined, "for I can stand it a while longer.  I do
hope the Glass Cat will hurry, and I hope the Wizard won't waste time
a-comin' to us."
 
Trot sighed again and watched the wonderful Magic Flower, because there
was nothing else to do.  Just now a lovely group of pink peonies budded
and bloomed, but soon they faded away, and a mass of deep blue lilies
took their place.  Then some yellow chrysanthemums blossomed on the
plant, and when they had opened all their petals and reached
perfection, they gave way to a lot of white floral balls spotted with
crimson--a flower Trot had never seen before.
 
"But I get awful tired watchin' flowers an' flowers an' flowers," she
said impatiently.
 
"They're might pretty," observed Cap'n Bill.
 
"I know; and if a person could come and look at the Magic Flower just
when she felt like it, it would be a fine thing, but to HAVE TO stand
and watch it, whether you want to or not, isn't so much fun.  I wish,
Cap'n Bill, the thing would grow fruit for a while instead of flowers."
 
Scarcely had she spoken when the white balls with crimson spots faded
away and a lot of beautiful ripe peaches took their place.  With a cry
of mingled surprise and delight Trot reached out and plucked a peach
from the bush and began to eat it, finding it delicious.  Cap'n Bill
was somewhat dazed at the girl's wish being granted so quickly, so
before he could pick a peach they had faded away and bananas took their
place.  "Grab one, Cap'n!" exclaimed Trot, and even while eating the
peach she seized a banana with her other hand and tore it from the bush.
 
The old sailor was still bewildered.  He put out a hand indeed, but he
was too late, for now the bananas disappeared and lemons took their
place.
 
"Pshaw!" cried Trot.  "You can't eat those things; but watch out,
Cap'n, for something else."
 
Cocoanuts next appeared, but Cap'n Bill shook his head.
 
"Ca'n't crack 'em," he remarked, "'cause we haven't anything handy to
smash 'em with."
 
"Well, take one, anyhow," advised Trot; but the cocoanuts were gone
now, and a deep, purple, pear-shaped fruit which was unknown to them
took their place.  Again Cap'n Bill hesitated, and Trot said to him:
 
"You ought to have captured a peach and a banana, as I did.  If you're
not careful, Cap'n, you'll miss all your chances.  Here, I'll divide my
banana with you."
 
Even as she spoke, the Magic Plant was covered with big red apples,
growing on every branch, and Cap'n Bill hesitated no longer.  He
grabbed with both hands and picked two apples, while Trot had only time
to secure one before they were gone.
 
"It's curious," remarked the sailor, munching his apple, "how these
fruits keep good when you've picked 'em, but dis'pear inter thin air if
they're left on the bush."
 
"The whole thing is curious," declared the girl, "and it couldn't exist
in any country but this, where magic is so common.  Those are limes.
Don't pick 'em, for they'd pucker up your mouth and--Ooo! here come
plums!" and she tucked her apple in her apron pocket and captured three
plums--each one almost as big as an egg--before they disappeared.
Cap'n Bill got some too, but both were too hungry to fast any longer,
so they began eating their apples and plums and let the magic bush bear
all sorts of fruits, one after another.  The Cap'n stopped once to pick
a fine cantaloupe, which he held under his arm, and Trot, having
finished her plums, got a handful of cherries and an orange; but when
almost every sort of fruit had appeared on the bush, the crop ceased
and only flowers, as before, bloomed upon it.
 
"I wonder why it changed back," mused Trot, who was not worried because
she had enough fruit to satisfy her hunger.
 
"Well, you only wished it would bear fruit 'for a while,'" said the
sailor, "and it did.  P'raps if you'd said 'forever,' Trot, it would
have always been fruit."
 
"But why should MY wish be obeyed?" asked the girl.  "I'm not a fairy
or a wizard or any kind of a magic-maker."
 
"I guess," replied Cap'n Bill, "that this little island is a magic
island, and any folks on it can tell the bush what to produce, an'
it'll produce it."
 
"Do you think I could wish for anything else, Cap'n and get it?" she
inquired anxiously.
 
"What are you thinkin' of, Trot?"
 
"I'm thinking of wishing that these roots on our feet would disappear,
and let us free."
 
"Try it, Trot."
 
So she tried it, and the wish had no effect whatever.
 
"Try it yourself, Cap'n," she suggested.
 
Then Cap'n Bill made the wish to be free, with no better result.
 
"No," said he, "it's no use; the wishes only affect the Magic Plant;
but I'm glad we can make it bear fruit, 'cause now we know we won't
starve before the Wizard gets to us."
 
"But I'm gett'n' tired standing here so long," complained the girl.
"If I could only lift one foot, and rest it, I'd feel better."
 
"Same with me, Trot.  I've noticed that if you've got to do a thing,
and can't help yourself, it gets to be a hardship mighty quick."
 
"Folks that can raise their feet don't appreciate what a blessing it
is," said Trot thoughtfully.  "I never knew before what fun it is to
raise one foot, an' then another, any time you feel like it."
 
"There's lots o' things folks don't 'preciate," replied the sailor-man.
"If somethin' would 'most stop your breath, you'd think breathin' easy
was the finest thing in life.  When a person's well, he don't realize
how jolly it is, but when he gets sick he 'members the time he was
well, an' wishes that time would come back.  Most folks forget to thank
God for givin' 'em two good legs, till they lose one o' 'em, like I
did; and then it's too late, 'cept to praise God for leavin' one."
 
"Your wooden leg ain't so bad, Cap'n," she remarked, looking at it
critically.  "Anyhow, it don't take root on a Magic Island, like our
meat legs do."
 
"I ain't complainin'," said Cap'n Bill.  "What's that swimmin' towards
us, Trot?" he added, looking over the Magic Flower and across the water.
 
The girl looked, too, and then she replied.
 
"It's a bird of some sort.  It's like a duck, only I never saw a duck
have so many colors."
 
The bird swam swiftly and gracefully toward the Magic Isle, and as it
drew nearer its gorgeously colored plumage astonished them.  The
feathers were of many hues of glistening greens and blues and purples,
and it had a yellow head with a red plume, and pink, white and violet
in its tail.  When it reached the Isle, it came ashore and approached
them, waddling slowly and turning its head first to one side and then
to the other, so as to see the girl and the sailor better.
 
"You're strangers," said the bird, coming to a halt near them, "and
you've been caught by the Magic Isle and made prisoners."
 
"Yes," returned Trot, with a sigh; "we're rooted.  But I hope we won't
grow."
 
"You'll grow small," said the Bird.  "You'll keep growing smaller every
day, until bye and bye there'll be nothing left of you.  That's the
usual way, on this Magic Isle."
 
"How do you know about it, and who are you, anyhow?" asked Cap'n Bill.
 
"I'm the Lonesome Duck," replied the bird.  "I suppose you've heard of
me?"
 
"No," said Trot, "I can't say I have.  What makes you lonesome?"
 
"Why, I haven't any family or any relations," returned the Duck.
 
"Haven't you any friends?"
 
"Not a friend.  And I've nothing to do.  I've lived a long time, and
I've got to live forever, because I belong in the Land of Oz, where no
living thing dies.  Think of existing year after year, with no friends,
no family, and nothing to do!  Can you wonder I'm lonesome?"
 
"Why don't you make a few friends, and find something to do?" inquired
Cap'n Bill.
 
"I can't make friends because everyone I meet--bird, beast, or
person--is disagreeable to me.  In a few minutes I shall be unable to
bear your society longer, and then I'll go away and leave you," said
the Lonesome Duck.  "And, as for doing anything, there's no use in it.
All I meet are doing something, so I have decided it's common and
uninteresting and I prefer to remain lonesome."
 
"Don't you have to hunt for your food?" asked Trot.
 
"No.  In my diamond palace, a little way up the river, food is
magically supplied me; but I seldom eat, because it is so common."
 
"You must be a Magician Duck," remarked Cap'n Bill.
 
"Why so?"
 
"Well, ordinary ducks don't have diamond palaces an' magic food, like
you do."
 
"True; and that's another reason why I'm lonesome.  You must remember
I'm the only Duck in the Land of Oz, and I'm not like any other duck in
the outside world."
 
"Seems to me you LIKE bein' lonesome," observed Cap'n Bill.
 
"I can't say I like it, exactly," replied the Duck, "but since it seems
to be my fate, I'm rather proud of it."
 
"How do you s'pose a single, solitary Duck happened to be in the Land
of Oz?" asked Trot, wonderingly.
 
"I used to know the reason, many years ago, but I've quite forgotten
it," declared the Duck.  "The reason for a thing is never so important
as the thing itself, so there's no use remembering anything but the
fact that I'm lonesome."
 
"I guess you'd be happier if you tried to do something," asserted Trot.
"If you can't do anything for yourself, you can do things for others,
and then you'd get lots of friends and stop being lonesome."
 
"Now you're getting disagreeable," said the Lonesome Duck, "and I shall
have to go and leave you."
 
"Can't you help us any," pleaded the girl.  "If there's anything magic
about you, you might get us out of this scrape."
 
"I haven't any magic strong enough to get you off the Magic Isle,"
replied the Lonesome Duck.  "What magic I possess is very simple, but I
find it enough for my own needs."
 
"If we could only sit down a while, we could stand it better," said
Trot, "but we have nothing to sit on."
 
"Then you will have to stand it," said the Lonesome Duck.
 
"P'raps you've enough magic to give us a couple of stools," suggested
Cap'n Bill.
 
"A duck isn't supposed to know what stools are," was the reply.
 
"But you're diff'rent from all other ducks."
 
"That is true."  The strange creature seemed to reflect for a moment,
looking at them sharply from its round black eyes.  Then it said:
"Sometimes, when the sun is hot, I grow a toadstool to shelter me from
its rays.  Perhaps you could sit on toadstools."
 
"Well, if they were strong enough, they'd do," answered Cap'n Bill.
 
"Then, before I do I'll give you a couple," said the Lonesome Duck, and
began waddling about in a small circle.  It went around the circle to
the right three times, and then it went around to the left three times.
Then it hopped backward three times and forward three times.
 
"What are you doing?" asked Trot.
 
"Don't interrupt.  This is an incantation," replied the Lonesome Duck,
but now it began making a succession of soft noises that sounded like
quacks and seemed to mean nothing at all.  And it kept up these sounds
so long that Trot finally exclaimed:
 
"Can't you hurry up and finish that 'cantation?  If it takes all summer
to make a couple of toadstools, you're not much of a magician."
 
"I told you not to interrupt," said the Lonesome Duck, sternly.  "If
you get TOO disagreeable, you'll drive me away before I finish this
incantation."
 
Trot kept quiet, after the rebuke, and the Duck resumed the quacky
muttering.  Cap'n Bill chuckled a little to himself and remarked to
Trot in a whisper: "For a bird that ain't got anything to do, this
Lonesome Duck is makin' consider'ble fuss.  An' I ain't sure, after
all, as toadstools would be worth sittin' on."
 
Even as he spoke, the sailor-man felt something touch him from behind
and, turning his head, he found a big toadstool in just the right place
and of just the right size to sit upon.  There was one behind Trot,
too, and with a cry of pleasure the little girl sank back upon it and
found it a very comfortable seat--solid, yet almost like a cushion.
Even Cap'n Bill's weight did not break his toadstool down, and when
both were seated, they found that the Lonesome Duck had waddled away
and was now at the water's edge.
 
"Thank you, ever so much!" cried Trot, and the sailor called out: "Much
obliged!"
 
But the Lonesome Duck paid no attention.  Without even looking in their
direction again, the gaudy fowl entered the water and swam gracefully
away.
 
 
 
 
16.  The Glass Cat Finds the Black Bag
 
 
When the six monkeys were transformed by Kiki Aru into six giant
soldiers fifty feet tall, their heads came above the top of the trees,
which in this part of the forest were not so high as in some other
parts; and, although the trees were somewhat scattered, the bodies of
the giant soldiers were so big that they quite filled the spaces in
which they stood and the branches pressed them on every side.
 
Of course, Kiki was foolish to have made his soldiers so big, for now
they could not get out of the forest.  Indeed, they could not stir a
step, but were imprisoned by the trees.  Even had they been in the
little clearing they could not have made their way out of it, but they
were a little beyond the clearing.  At first, the other monkeys who had
not been enchanted were afraid of the soldiers, and hastily quitted the
place; but soon finding that the great men stood stock still, although
grunting indignantly at their transformation, the band of monkeys
returned to the spot and looked at them curiously, not guessing that
they were really monkeys and their own friends.
 
The soldiers couldn't see them, their heads being above the trees; they
could not even raise their arms or draw their sharp swords, so closely
were they held by the leafy branches.  So the monkeys, finding the
giants helpless, began climbing up their bodies, and presently all the
band were perched on the shoulders of the giants and peering into their
faces.
 
"I'm Ebu, your father," cried one soldier to a monkey who had perched
upon his left ear, "but some cruel person has enchanted me."
 
"I'm your Uncle Peeker," said another soldier to another monkey.
 
So, very soon all the monkeys knew the truth and were sorry for their
friends and relations and angry at the person--whoever it was--who had
transformed them.  There was a great chattering among the tree-tops,
and the noise attracted other monkeys, so that the clearing and all the
trees around were full of them.
 
Rango the Gray Ape, who was the Chief of all the monkey tribes of the
forest, heard the uproar and came to see what was wrong with his
people.  And Rango, being wiser and more experienced, at once knew that
the strange magician who looked like a mixed-up beast was responsible
for the transformations.  He realized that the six giant soldiers were
helpless prisoners, because of their size, and knew he was powerless to
release them.  So, although he feared to meet the terrible magician, he
hurried away to the Great Clearing to tell Gugu the King what had
happened and to try to find the Wizard of Oz and get him to save his
six enchanted subjects.
 
Rango darted into the Great Clearing just as the Wizard had restored
all the enchanted ones around him to their proper shapes, and the Gray
Ape was glad to hear that the wicked magician-beast had been conquered.
 
"But now, O mighty Wizard, you must come with me to where six of my
people are transformed into six great giant men," he said, "for if they
are allowed to remain there, their happiness and their future lives
will be ruined."
 
The Wizard did not reply at once, for he was thinking this a good
opportunity to win Rango's consent to his taking some monkeys to the
Emerald City for Ozma's birthday cake.
 
"It is a great thing you ask of me, O Rango the Gray Ape," said he,
"for the bigger the giants are the more powerful their enchantment, and
the more difficult it will be to restore them to their natural forms.
However, I will think it over."
 
Then the Wizard went to another part of the clearing and sat on a log
and appeared to be in deep thought.
 
The Glass Cat had been greatly interested in the Gray Ape's story and
was curious to see what the giant soldiers looked like.  Hearing that
their heads extended above the tree-tops, the Glass Cat decided that if
it climbed the tall avocado tree that stood at the side of the
clearing, it might be able to see the giants' heads.  So, without
mentioning her errand, the crystal creature went to the tree and, by
sticking her sharp glass claws in the bark, easily climbed the tree to
its very top and, looking over the forest, saw the six giant heads,
although they were now a long way off.  It was, indeed, a remarkable
sight, for the huge heads had immense soldier caps on them, with red
and yellow plumes and looked very fierce and terrible, although the
monkey hearts of the giants were at that moment filled with fear.
 
Having satisfied her curiosity, the Glass Cat began to climb down from
the tree more slowly.  Suddenly she discerned the Wizard's black bag
hanging from a limb of the tree.  She grasped the black bag in her
glass teeth, and although it was rather heavy for so small an animal,
managed to get it free and to carry it safely down to the ground.  Then
she looked around for the Wizard and seeing him seated upon the stump
she hid the black bag among some leaves and then went over to where the
Wizard sat.
 
"I forgot to tell you," said the Glass Cat, "that Trot and Cap'n Bill
are in trouble, and I came here to hunt you up and get you to go and
rescue them."
 
"Good gracious, Cat!  Why didn't you tell me before?" exclaimed the
Wizard.
 
"For the reason that I found so much excitement here that I forgot Trot
and Cap'n Bill."
 
"What's wrong with them?" asked the Wizard.
 
Then the Glass Cat explained how they had gone to get the Magic Flower
for Ozma's birthday gift and had been trapped by the magic of the queer
island.  The Wizard was really alarmed, but he shook his head and said
sadly:
 
"I'm afraid I can't help my dear friends, because I've lost my black
bag."
 
"If I find it, will you go to them?" asked the creature.
 
"Of course," replied the Wizard.  "But I do not think that a Glass Cat
with nothing but pink brains can succeed when all the rest of us have
failed."
 
"Don't you admire my pink brains?" demanded the Cat.
 
"They're pretty," admitted the Wizard, "but they're not regular brains,
you know, and so we don't expect them to amount to much."
 
"But if I find your black bag--and find it inside of five minutes--will
you admit my pink brains are better than your common human brains?"
 
"Well, I'll admit they're better HUNTERS," said the Wizard,
reluctantly, "but you can't do it.  We've searched everywhere, and the
black bag isn't to be found."
 
"That shows how much you know!" retorted the Glass Cat, scornfully.
"Watch my brains a minute, and see them whirl around."
 
The Wizard watched, for he was anxious to regain his black bag, and the
pink brains really did whirl around in a remarkable manner.
 
"Now, come with me," commanded the Glass Cat, and led the Wizard
straight to the spot where it had covered the bag with leaves.
"According to my brains," said the creature, "your black bag ought to
be here."
 
Then it scratched at the leaves and uncovered the bag, which the Wizard
promptly seized with a cry of delight.  Now that he had regained his
Magic Tools, he felt confident he could rescue Trot and Cap'n Bill.
 
Rango the Gray Ape was getting impatient.  He now approached the Wizard
and said:
 
"Well, what do you intend to do about those poor enchanted monkeys?"
 
"I'll make a bargain with you, Rango," replied the little man.  "If you
will let me take a dozen of your monkeys to the Emerald City, and keep
them until after Ozma's birthday, I'll break the enchantment of the six
Giant Soldiers and return them to their natural forms."
 
But the Gray Ape shook his head.
 
"I can't do it," he declared.  "The monkeys would be very lonesome and
unhappy in the Emerald City and your people would tease them and throw
stones at them, which would cause them to fight and bite."
 
"The people won't see them till Ozma's birthday dinner," promised the
Wizard.  "I'll make them very small--about four inches high, and I'll
keep them in a pretty cage in my own room, where they will be safe from
harm.  I'll feed them the nicest kind of food, train them to do some
clever tricks, and on Ozma's birthday I'll hide the twelve little
monkeys inside a cake.  When Ozma cuts the cake the monkeys will jump
out on to the table and do their tricks.  The next day I will bring
them back to the forest and make them big as ever, and they'll have
some exciting stories to tell their friends.  What do you say, Rango?"
 
"I say no!" answered the Gray Ape.  "I won't have my monkeys enchanted
and made to do tricks for the Oz people."
 
"Very well," said the Wizard calmly; "then I'll go.  Come, Dorothy," he
called to the little girl, "let's start on our journey."
 
"Aren't you going to save those six monkeys who are giant soldiers?"
asked Rango, anxiously.
 
"Why should I?" returned the Wizard.  "If you will not do me the favor
I ask, you cannot expect me to favor you."
 
"Wait a minute," said the Gray Ape.  "I've changed my mind.  If you
will treat the twelve monkeys nicely and bring them safely back to the
forest, I'll let you take them."
 
"Thank you," replied the Wizard, cheerfully.  "We'll go at once and
save those giant soldiers."
 
So all the party left the clearing and proceeded to the place where the
giants still stood among the trees.  Hundreds of monkeys, apes, baboons
and orangoutangs had gathered round, and their wild chatter could be
heard a mile away.  But the Gray Ape soon hushed the babel of sounds,
and the Wizard lost no time in breaking the enchantments.  First one
and then another giant soldier disappeared and became an ordinary
monkey again, and the six were shortly returned to their friends in
their proper forms.
 
This action made the Wizard very popular with the great army of
monkeys, and when the Gray Ape announced that the Wizard wanted to
borrow twelve monkeys to take to the Emerald City for a couple of
weeks, and asked for volunteers, nearly a hundred offered to go, so
great was their confidence in the little man who had saved their
comrades.
 
The Wizard selected a dozen that  seemed intelligent and good-tempered,
and then he opened his black bag and took out a queerly shaped dish
that was silver on the outside and gold on the inside.  Into this dish
he poured a powder and set fire to it.  It made a thick smoke that
quite enveloped the twelve monkeys, as well as the form of the Wizard,
but when the smoke cleared away the dish had been changed to a golden
cage with silver bars, and the twelve monkeys had become about three
inches high and were all seated comfortably inside the cage.
 
The thousands of hairy animals who had witnessed this act of magic were
much astonished and applauded the Wizard by barking aloud and shaking
the limbs of the trees in which they sat.  Dorothy said: "That was a
fine trick, Wizard!" and the Gray Ape remarked: "You are certainly the
most wonderful magician in all the Land of Oz!"
 
"Oh, no," modestly replied the little man.  "Glinda's magic is better
than mine, but mine seems good enough to use on ordinary occasions.
And now, Rango, we will say good-bye, and I promise to return your
monkeys as happy and safe as they are now."
 
The Wizard rode on the back of the Hungry Tiger and carried the cage of
monkeys very carefully, so as not to joggle them.  Dorothy rode on the
back of the Cowardly Lion, and the Glass Cat trotted, as before, to
show them the way.
 
Gugu the King crouched upon a log and watched them go, but as he bade
them farewell, the enormous Leopard said:
 
"I know now that you are the friends of beasts and that the forest
people may trust you.  Whenever the Wizard of Oz and Princess Dorothy
enter the Forest of Gugu hereafter, they will be as welcome and as safe
with us as ever they are in the Emerald City."
 
 
 
 
17.  A Remarkable Journey
 
 
"You see," explained the Glass Cat, "that Magic Isle where Trot and
Cap'n Bill are stuck is also in this Gillikin Country--over at the east
side of it, and it's no farther to go across-lots from here than it is
from here to the Emerald City.  So we'll save time by cutting across
the mountains."
 
"Are you sure you know the way?" asked Dorothy.
 
"I know all the Land of Oz better than any other living creature knows
it," asserted the Glass Cat.
 
"Go ahead, then, and guide us," said the Wizard.  "We've left our poor
friends helpless too long already, and the sooner we rescue them the
happier they'll be."
 
"Are you sure you can get 'em out of their fix?" the little girl
inquired.
 
"I've no doubt of it," the Wizard assured her.  "But I can't tell what
sort of magic I must use until I get to the place and discover just how
they are enchanted."
 
"I've heard of that Magic Isle where the Wonderful Flower grows,"
remarked the Cowardly Lion.  "Long ago, when I used to live in the
forests, the beasts told stories about the Isle and how the Magic
Flower was placed there to entrap strangers--men or beasts."
 
"Is the Flower really wonderful?" questioned Dorothy.
 
"I have heard it is the most beautiful plant in the world," answered
the Lion.  "I have never seen it myself, but friendly beasts have told
me that they have stood on the shore of the river and looked across at
the plant in the gold flower-pot and seen hundreds of flowers, of all
sorts and sizes, blossom upon it in quick succession.  It is said that
if one picks the flowers while they are in bloom they will remain
perfect for a long time, but if they are not picked they soon disappear
and are replaced by other flowers.  That, in my opinion, make the Magic
Plant the most wonderful in existence."
 
"But these are only stories," said the girl.  "Has any of your friends
ever picked a flower from the wonderful plant?"
 
"No," admitted the Cowardly Lion, "for if any living thing ventures
upon the Magic Isle, where the golden flower-pot stands, that man or
beast takes root in the soil and cannot get away again."
 
"What happens to them, then?" asked Dorothy.
 
"They grow smaller, hour by hour and day by day, and finally disappear
entirely."
 
"Then," said the girl anxiously, "we must hurry up, or Cap'n Bill an'
Trot will get too small to be comf'table."
 
They were proceeding at a rapid pace during this conversation, for the
Hungry Tiger and the Cowardly Lion were obliged to move swiftly in
order to keep pace with the Glass Cat.  After leaving the Forest of
Gugu they crossed a mountain range, and then a broad plain, after which
they reached another forest, much smaller than that where Gugu ruled.
 
"The Magic Isle is in this forest," said the Glass Cat, "but the river
is at the other side of the forest.  There is no path through the
trees, but if we keep going east, we will find the river, and then it
will be easy to find the Magic Isle."
 
"Have you ever traveled this way before?" inquired the Wizard.
 
"Not exactly," admitted the Cat, "but I know we shall reach the river
if we go east through the forest."
 
"Lead on, then," said the Wizard.
 
The Glass Cat started away, and at first it was easy to pass between
the trees; but before long the underbrush and vines became thick and
tangled, and after pushing their way through these obstacles for a
time, our travelers came to a place where even the Glass Cat could not
push through.
 
"We'd better go back and find a path," suggested the Hungry Tiger.
 
"I'm s'prised at you," said Dorothy, eyeing the Glass Cat severely.
 
"I'm surprised, myself," replied the Cat.  "But it's a long way around
the forest to where the river enters it, and I thought we could save
time by going straight through."
 
"No one can blame you," said the Wizard, "and I think, instead of
turning back, I can make a path that will allow us to proceed."
 
He opened his black bag and after searching among his magic tools drew
out a small axe, made of some metal so highly polished that it
glittered brightly even in the dark forest.  The Wizard laid the little
axe on the ground and said in a commanding voice:
 
  "Chop, Little Axe, chop clean and true;
  A path for our feet you must quickly hew.
  Chop till this tangle of jungle is passed;
  Chop to the east, Little Axe--chop fast!"
 
 
Then the little axe began to move and flashed its bright blade right
and left, clearing a way through vine and brush and scattering the
tangled barrier so quickly that the Lion and the Tiger, carrying
Dorothy and the Wizard and the cage of monkeys on their backs, were
able to stride through the forest at a fast walk.  The brush seemed to
melt away before them and the little axe chopped so fast that their
eyes only saw a twinkling of the blade.  Then, suddenly, the forest was
open again, and the little axe, having obeyed its orders, lay still
upon the ground.
 
The Wizard picked up the magic axe and after carefully wiping it with
his silk handkerchief put it away in his black bag.  Then they went on
and in a short time reached the river.
 
"Let me see," said the Glass Cat, looking up and down the stream, "I
think we are below the Magic Isle; so we must go up the stream until we
come to it."
 
So up the stream they traveled, walking comfortably on the river bank,
and after a while the water broadened and a sharp bend appeared in the
river, hiding all below from their view.  They walked briskly along,
however, and had nearly reached the bend when a voice cried warningly:
"Look out!"
 
The travelers halted abruptly and the Wizard said: "Look out for what?"
 
"You almost stepped on my Diamond Palace," replied the voice, and a
duck with gorgeously colored feathers appeared before them.  "Beasts
and men are terribly clumsy," continued the Duck in an irritated tone,
"and you've no business on this side of the River, anyway.  What are
you doing here?"
 
"We've come to rescue some friends of ours who are stuck fast on the
Magic Isle in this river," explained Dorothy.
 
"I know 'em," said the Duck.  "I've been to see 'em, and they're stuck
fast, all right.  You may as well go back home, for no power can save
them."
 
"This is the Wonderful Wizard of Oz," said Dorothy, pointing to the
little man.
 
"Well, I'm the Lonesome Duck," was the reply, as the fowl strutted up
and down to show its feathers to best advantage.  "I'm the great Forest
Magician, as any beast can tell you, but even I have no power to
destroy the dreadful charm of the Magic Isle."
 
"Are you lonesome because you're a magician?" inquired Dorothy.
 
"No; I'm lonesome because I have no family and no friends.  But I like
to be lonesome, so please don't offer to be friendly with me.  Go away,
and try not to step on my Diamond Palace."
 
"Where is it?" asked the girl.
 
"Behind this bush."
 
Dorothy hopped off the lion's back and ran around the bush to see the
Diamond Palace of the Lonesome Duck, although the gaudy fowl protested
in a series of low quacks.  The girl found, indeed, a glistening dome
formed of clearest diamonds, neatly cemented together, with a doorway
at the side just big enough to admit the duck.
 
"Where did you find so many diamonds?" asked Dorothy, wonderingly.
 
"I know a place in the mountains where they are thick as pebbles," said
the Lonesome Duck, "and I brought them here in my bill, one by one and
put them in the river and let the water run over them until they were
brightly polished.  Then I built this palace, and I'm positive it's the
only Diamond Palace in all the world."
 
"It's the only one I know of," said the little girl; "but if you live
in it all alone, I don't see why it's any better than a wooden palace,
or one of bricks or cobble-stones."
 
"You're not supposed to understand that," retorted the Lonesome Duck.
"But I might tell you, as a matter of education, that a home of any
sort should be beautiful to those who live in it, and should not be
intended to please strangers.  The Diamond Palace is my home, and I
like it.  So I don't care a quack whether YOU like it or not."
 
"Oh, but I do!" exclaimed Dorothy.  "It's lovely on the outside, but--"
Then she stopped speaking, for the Lonesome Duck had entered his palace
through the little door without even saying good-bye.  So Dorothy
returned to her friends and they resumed their journey.
 
"Do you think, Wizard, the Duck was right in saying no magic can rescue
Trot and Cap'n Bill?" asked the girl in a worried tone of voice.
 
"No, I don't think the Lonesome Duck was right in saying that,"
answered the Wizard, gravely, "but it is possible that their
enchantment will be harder to overcome than I expected.  I'll do my
best, of course, and no one can do more than his best."
 
That didn't entirely relieve Dorothy's anxiety, but she said nothing
more, and soon, on turning the bend in the river, they came in sight of
the Magic Isle.
 
"There they are!" exclaimed Dorothy eagerly.
 
"Yes, I see them," replied the Wizard, nodding.  "They are sitting on
two big toadstools."
 
"That's queer," remarked the Glass Cat.  "There were no toadstools
there when I left them."
 
"What a lovely flower!" cried Dorothy in rapture, as her gaze fell on
the Magic Plant.
 
"Never mind the Flower, just now," advised the Wizard.  "The most
important thing is to rescue our friends."
 
By this time they had arrived at a place just opposite the Magic Isle,
and now both Trot and Cap'n Bill saw the arrival of their friends and
called to them for help.
 
"How are you?" shouted the Wizard, putting his hands to his mouth so
they could hear him better across the water.
 
"We're in hard luck," shouted Cap'n Bill, in reply.  "We're anchored
here and can't move till you find a way to cut the hawser."
 
"What does he mean by that?" asked Dorothy.
 
"We can't move our feet a bit!" called Trot, speaking as loud as she
could.
 
"Why not?" inquired Dorothy.
 
"They've got roots on 'em," explained Trot.
 
It was hard to talk from so great a distance, so the Wizard said to the
Glass Cat:
 
"Go to the island and tell our friends to be patient, for we have come
to save them.  It may take a little time to release them, for the Magic
of the Isle is new to me and I shall have to experiment.  But tell them
I'll hurry as fast as I can."
 
So the Glass Cat walked across the river under the water to tell Trot
and Cap'n Bill not to worry, and the Wizard at once opened his black
bag and began to make his preparations.
 
 
 
 
18.  The Magic of the Wizard
 
 
He first set up a small silver tripod and placed a gold basin at the
top of it.  Into this basin he put two powders--a pink one and a
sky-blue one--and poured over them a yellow liquid from a crystal vial.
Then he mumbled some magic words, and the powders began to sizzle and
burn and send out a cloud of violet smoke that floated across the river
and completely enveloped both Trot and Cap'n Bill, as well as the
toadstools on which they sat, and even the Magic Plant in the gold
flower-pot.  Then, after the smoke had disappeared into air, the Wizard
called out to the prisoners:
 
"Are you free?"
 
Both Trot and Cap'n Bill tried to move their feet and failed.
 
"No!" they shouted in answer.
 
The Wizard rubbed his bald head thoughtfully and then took some other
magic tools from the bag.
 
First he placed a little black ball in a silver pistol and shot it
toward the Magic Isle.  The ball exploded just over the head of Trot
and scattered a thousand sparks over the little girl.
 
"Oh!" said the Wizard, "I guess that will set her free."
 
But Trot's feet were still rooted in the ground of the Magic Isle, and
the disappointed Wizard had to try something else.
 
For almost an hour he worked hard, using almost every magic tool in his
black bag, and still Cap'n Bill and Trot were not rescued.
 
"Dear me!" exclaimed Dorothy, "I'm 'fraid we'll have to go to Glinda,
after all."
 
That made the little Wizard blush, for it shamed him to think that his
magic was not equal to that of the Magic Isle.
 
"I won't give up yet, Dorothy," he said, "for I know a lot of wizardry
that I haven't yet tried.  I don't know what magician enchanted this
little island, or what his powers were, but I DO know that I can break
any enchantment known to the ordinary witches and magicians that used
to inhabit the Land of Oz.  It's like unlocking a door; all you need is
to find the right key."
 
"But 'spose you haven't the right key with you." suggested Dorothy;
"what then?"
 
"Then we'll have to make the key," he answered.
 
The Glass Cat now came back to their side of the river, walking under
the water, and said to the Wizard: "They're getting frightened over
there on the island because they're both growing smaller every minute.
Just now, when I left them, both Trot and Cap'n Bill were only about
half their natural sizes."
 
"I think," said the Wizard reflectively, "that I'd better go to the
shore of the island, where I can talk to them and work to better
advantage.  How did Trot and Cap'n Bill get to the island?"
 
"On a raft," answered the Glass Cat.  "It's over there now on the
beach."
 
"I suppose you're not strong enough to bring the raft to this side, are
you?"
 
"No; I couldn't move it an inch," said the Cat.
 
"I'll try to get it for you," volunteered the Cowardly Lion.  "I'm
dreadfully scared for fear the Magic Isle will capture me, too; but
I'll try to get the raft and bring it to this side for you."
 
"Thank you, my friend," said the Wizard.
 
So the Lion plunged into the river and swam with powerful strokes
across to where the raft was beached upon the island.  Placing one paw
on the raft, he turned and struck out with his other three legs and so
strong was the great beast that he managed to drag the raft from off
the beach and propel it slowly to where the Wizard stood on the river
bank.
 
"Good!" exclaimed the little man, well pleased.
 
"May I go across with you?" asked Dorothy.
 
The Wizard hesitated.
 
"If you'll take care not to leave the raft or step foot on the island,
you'll be quite safe," he decided.  So the Wizard told the Hungry Tiger
and the Cowardly Lion to guard the cage of monkeys until he returned,
and then he and Dorothy got upon the raft.  The paddle which Cap'n Bill
had made was still there, so the little Wizard paddled the clumsy raft
across the water and ran it upon the beach of the Magic Isle as close
to the place where Cap'n Bill and Trot were rooted as he could.
 
Dorothy was shocked to see how small the prisoners had become, and Trot
said to her friends: "If you can't save us soon, there'll be nothing
left of us."
 
"Be patient, my dear," counseled the Wizard, and took the little axe
from his black bag.
 
"What are you going to do with that?" asked Cap'n Bill.
 
"It's a magic axe," replied the Wizard, "and when I tell it to chop, it
will chop those roots from your feet and you can run to the raft before
they grow again."
 
"Don't!" shouted the sailor in alarm.  "Don't do it!  Those roots are
all flesh roots, and our bodies are feeding 'em while they're growing
into the ground."
 
"To cut off the roots," said Trot, "would be like cutting off our
fingers and toes."
 
The Wizard put the little axe back in the black bag and took out a pair
of silver pincers.
 
"Grow--grow--grow!" he said to the pincers, and at once they grew and
extended until they reached from the raft to the prisoners.
 
"What are you going to do now?" demanded Cap'n Bill, fearfully eyeing
the pincers.
 
"This magic tool will pull you up, roots and all, and land you on this
raft," declared the Wizard.
 
"Don't do it!" pleaded the sailor, with a shudder.  "It would hurt us
awfully."
 
"It would be just like pulling teeth to pull us up by the roots,"
explained Trot.
 
"Grow small!" said the Wizard to the pincers, and at once they became
small and he threw them into the black bag.
 
"I guess, friends, it's all up with us, this time," remarked Cap'n
Bill, with a dismal sigh.
 
"Please tell Ozma, Dorothy," said Trot, "that we got into trouble
trying to get her a nice birthday present.  Then she'll forgive us.
The Magic Flower is lovely and wonderful, but it's just a lure to catch
folks on this dreadful island and then destroy them.  You'll have a
nice birthday party, without us, I'm sure; and I hope, Dorothy, that
none of you in the Emerald City will forget me--or dear ol' Cap'n Bill."
 
 
 
 
19.  Dorothy and the Bumble Bees
 
 
Dorothy was greatly distressed and had hard work to keep the tears from
her eyes.
 
"Is that all you can do, Wizard?" she asked the little man.
 
"It's all I can think of just now," he replied sadly.  "But I intend to
keep on thinking as long--as long--well, as long as thinking will do
any good."
 
They were all silent for a time, Dorothy and the Wizard sitting
thoughtfully on the raft, and Trot and Cap'n Bill sitting thoughtfully
on the toadstools and growing gradually smaller and smaller in size.
 
Suddenly Dorothy said: "Wizard, I've thought of something!"
 
"What have you thought of?" he asked, looking at the little girl with
interest.
 
"Can you remember the Magic Word that transforms people?" she asked.
 
"Of course," said he.
 
"Then you can transform Trot and Cap'n Bill into birds or bumblebees,
and they can fly away to the other shore.  When they're there, you can
transform 'em into their reg'lar shapes again!"
 
"Can you do that, Wizard?" asked Cap'n Bill, eagerly.
 
"I think so."
 
"Roots an' all?" inquired Trot.
 
"Why, the roots are now a part of you, and if you were transformed to a
bumblebee the whole of you would be transformed, of course, and you'd
be free of this awful island."
 
"All right; do it!" cried the sailor-man.
 
So the Wizard said slowly and distinctly:
 
"I want Trot and Cap'n Bill to become bumblebees--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
Fortunately, he pronounced the Magic Word in the right way, and
instantly Trot and Cap'n Bill vanished from view, and up from the
places where they had been flew two bumblebees.
 
"Hooray!" shouted Dorothy in delight; "they're saved!"
 
"I guess they are," agreed the Wizard, equally delighted.
 
The bees hovered over the raft an instant and then flew across the
river to where the Lion and the Tiger waited.  The Wizard picked up the
paddle and paddled the raft across as fast as he could.  When it
reached the river bank, both Dorothy and the Wizard leaped ashore and
the little man asked excitedly:
 
"Where are the bees?"
 
"The bees?" inquired the Lion, who was half asleep and did not know
what had happened on the Magic Isle.
 
"Yes; there were two of them."
 
"Two bees?" said the Hungry Tiger, yawning.  "Why, I ate one of them
and the Cowardly Lion ate the other."
 
"Goodness gracious!" cried Dorothy horrified.
 
"It was little enough for our lunch," remarked the Tiger, "but the bees
were the only things we could find."
 
"How dreadful!" wailed Dorothy, wringing her hands in despair.  "You've
eaten Trot and Cap'n Bill."
 
But just then she heard a buzzing overhead and two bees alighted on her
shoulder.
 
"Here we are," said a small voice in her ear.  "I'm Trot, Dorothy."
 
"And I'm Cap'n Bill," said the other bee.
 
Dorothy almost fainted, with relief, and the Wizard, who was close by
and had heard the tiny voices, gave a laugh and said:
 
"You are not the only two bees in the forest, it seems, but I advise
you to keep away from the Lion and the Tiger until you regain your
proper forms."
 
"Do it now, Wizard!" advised Dorothy.  "They're so small that you never
can tell what might happen to 'em."
 
So the Wizard gave the command and pronounced the Magic Word, and in
the instant Trot and Cap'n Bill stood beside them as natural as before
they had met their fearful adventure.  For they were no longer small in
size, because the Wizard had transformed them from bumblebees into the
shapes and sizes that nature had formerly given them.  The ugly roots
on their feet had disappeared with the transformation.
 
While Dorothy was hugging Trot, and Trot was softly crying because she
was so happy, the Wizard shook hands with Cap'n Bill and congratulated
him on his escape.  The old sailor-man was so pleased that he also
shook the Lion's paw and took off his hat and bowed politely to the
cage of monkeys.
 
Then Cap'n Bill did a curious thing.  He went to a big tree and, taking
out his knife, cut away a big, broad piece of thick bark.  Then he sat
down on the ground and after taking a roll of stout cord from his
pocket--which seemed to be full of all sorts of things--he proceeded to
bind the flat piece of bark to the bottom of his good foot, over the
leather sole.
 
"What's that for?" inquired the Wizard.
 
"I hate to be stumped," replied the sailor-man; "so I'm goin' back to
that island."
 
"And get enchanted again?" exclaimed Trot, with evident disapproval.
 
"No; this time I'll dodge the magic of the island.  I noticed that my
wooden leg didn't get stuck, or take root, an' neither did the glass
feet of the Glass Cat.  It's only a thing that's made of meat--like man
an' beasts--that the magic can hold an' root to the ground.  Our shoes
are leather, an' leather comes from a beast's hide.  Our stockin's are
wool, an' wool comes from a sheep's back.  So, when we walked on the
Magic Isle, our feet took root there an' held us fast.  But not my
wooden leg.  So now I'll put a wooden bottom on my other foot an' the
magic can't stop me."
 
"But why do you wish to go back to the island?" asked Dorothy.
 
"Didn't you see the Magic Flower in the gold flower-pot?" returned
Cap'n Bill.
 
"Of course I saw it, and it's lovely and wonderful."
 
"Well, Trot an' I set out to get the magic plant for a present to Ozma
on her birthday, and I mean to get it an' take it back with us to the
Emerald City."
 
"That would be fine," cried Trot eagerly, "if you think you can do it,
and it would be safe to try!"
 
"I'm pretty sure it is safe, the way I've fixed my foot," said the
sailor, "an' if I SHOULD happen to get caught, I s'pose the Wizard
could save me again."
 
"I suppose I could," agreed the Wizard.  "Anyhow, if you wish to try
it, Cap'n Bill, go ahead and we'll stand by and watch what happens."
 
So the sailor-man got upon the raft again and paddled over to the Magic
Isle, landing as close to the golden flower-pot as he could.  They
watched him walk across the land, put both arms around the flower-pot
and lift it easily from its place.  Then he carried it to the raft and
set it down very gently.  The removal did not seem to affect the Magic
Flower in any way, for it was growing daffodils when Cap'n Bill picked
it up and on the way to the raft it grew tulips and gladioli.  During
the time the sailor was paddling across the river to where his friends
awaited him, seven different varieties of flowers bloomed in succession
on the plant.
 
"I guess the Magician who put it on the island never thought that any
one would carry it off," said Dorothy.
 
"He figured that only men would want the plant, and any man who went
upon the island to get it would be caught by the enchantment," added
the Wizard.
 
"After this," remarked Trot, "no one will care to go on the island, so
it won't be a trap any more."
 
"There," exclaimed Cap'n Bill, setting down the Magic Plant in triumph
upon the river bank, "if Ozma gets a better birthday present than that,
I'd like to know what it can be!"
 
"It'll s'prise her, all right," declared Dorothy, standing in awed
wonder before the gorgeous blossoms and watching them change from
yellow roses to violets.
 
"It'll s'prise ev'rybody in the Em'rald City," Trot asserted in glee,
"and it'll be Ozma's present from Cap'n Bill and me."
 
"I think I ought to have a little credit," objected the Glass Cat.  "I
discovered the thing, and led you to it, and brought the Wizard here to
save you when you got caught."
 
"That's true," admitted Trot, "and I'll tell Ozma the whole story, so
she'll know how good you've been."
 
 
 
 
20.  The Monkeys Have Trouble
 
 
"Now," said the Wizard, "we must start for home.  But how are we going
to carry that big gold flower-pot?  Cap'n Bill can't lug it all the
way, that's certain."
 
"No," acknowledged the sailor-man; "it's pretty heavy.  I could carry
it for a little while, but I'd have to stop to rest every few minutes."
 
"Couldn't we put it on your back?" Dorothy asked the Cowardly Lion,
with a good-natured yawn.
 
"I don't object to carrying it, if you can fasten it on," answered the
Lion.
 
"If it falls off," said Trot, "it might get smashed an' be ruined."
 
"I'll fix it," promised Cap'n Bill.  "I'll make a flat board out of one
of these tree trunks, an' tie the board on the lion's back, an' set the
flower-pot on the board."  He set to work at once to do this, but as he
only had his big knife for a tool his progress was slow.
 
So the Wizard took from his black bag a tiny saw that shone like silver
and said to it:
 
  "Saw, Little Saw, come show your power;
  Make us a board for the Magic Flower."
 
 
And at once the Little Saw began to move and it sawed the log so fast
that those who watched it work were astonished.  It seemed to
understand, too, just what the board was to be used for, for when it
was completed it was flat on top and hollowed beneath in such a manner
that it exactly fitted the Lion's back.
 
"That beats whittlin'!" exclaimed Cap'n Bill, admiringly.  "You don't
happen to have TWO o' them saws; do you, Wizard?"
 
"No," replied the Wizard, wiping the Magic Saw carefully with his silk
handkerchief and putting it back in the black bag.  "It's the only saw
of its kind in the world; and if there were more like it, it wouldn't
be so wonderful."
 
They now tied the board on the Lion's back, flat side up, and Cap'n
Bill carefully placed the Magic Flower on the board.
 
"For fear o' accidents," he said, "I'll walk beside the Lion and hold
onto the flower-pot."
 
Trot and Dorothy could both ride on the back of the Hungry Tiger, and
between them they carried the cage of monkeys.  But this arrangement
left the Wizard, as well as the sailor, to make the journey on foot,
and so the procession moved slowly and the Glass Cat grumbled because
it would take so long to get to the Emerald City.
 
The Cat was sour-tempered and grumpy, at first, but before they had
journeyed far, the crystal creature had discovered a fine amusement.
The long tails of the monkeys were constantly sticking through the bars
of their cage, and when they did, the Glass Cat would slyly seize the
tails in her paws and pull them.  That made the monkeys scream, and
their screams pleased the Glass Cat immensely.  Trot and Dorothy tried
to stop this naughty amusement, but when they were not looking the Cat
would pull the tails again, and the creature was so sly and quick that
the monkeys could seldom escape.  They scolded the Cat angrily and
shook the bars of their cage, but they could not get out and the Cat
only laughed at them.
 
After the party had left the forest and were on the plains of the
Munchkin Country, it grew dark, and they were obliged to make camp for
the night, choosing a pretty place beside a brook.  By means of his
magic the Wizard created three tents, pitched in a row on the grass and
nicely fitted with all that was needful for the comfort of his
comrades.  The middle tent was for Dorothy and Trot, and had in it two
cosy white beds and two chairs.  Another tent, also with beds and
chairs, was for the Wizard and Cap'n Bill, while the third tent was for
the Hungry Tiger, the Cowardly Lion, the cage of Monkeys and the Glass
Cat.  Outside the tents the Wizard made a fire and placed over it a
magic kettle from which he presently drew all sorts of nice things for
their supper, smoking hot.
 
After they had eaten and talked together for a while under the
twinkling stars, they all went to bed and the people were soon asleep.
The Lion and the Tiger had almost fallen asleep, too, when they were
roused by the screams of the monkeys, for the Glass Cat was pulling
their tails again.  Annoyed by the uproar, the Hungry Tiger cried:
"Stop that racket!" and getting sight of the Glass Cat, he raised his
big paw and struck at the creature.  The cat was quick enough to dodge
the blow, but the claws of the Hungry Tiger scraped the monkey's cage
and bent two of the bars.
 
Then the Tiger lay down again to sleep, but the monkeys soon discovered
that the bending of the bars would allow them to squeeze through.  They
did not leave the cage, however, but after whispering together they let
their tails stick out and all remained quiet.  Presently the Glass Cat
stole near the cage again and gave a yank to one of the tails.
Instantly the monkeys leaped through the bars, one after another, and
although they were so small the entire dozen of them surrounded the
Glass Cat and clung to her claws and tail and ears and made her a
prisoner.  Then they forced her out of the tent and down to the banks
of the stream.  The monkeys had noticed that these banks were covered
with thick, slimy mud of a dark blue color, and when they had taken the
Cat to the stream, they smeared this mud all over the glass body of the
cat, filling the creature's ears and eyes with it, so that she could
neither see nor hear.  She was no longer transparent and so thick was
the mud upon her that no one could see her pink brains or her ruby
heart.
 
In this condition they led the pussy back to the tent and then got
inside their cage again.
 
By morning the mud had dried hard on the Glass Cat and it was a dull
blue color throughout.  Dorothy and Trot were horrified, but the Wizard
shook his head and said it served the Glass Cat right for teasing the
monkeys.
 
Cap'n Bill, with his strong hands, soon bent the golden wires of the
monkeys' cage into the proper position and then he asked the Wizard if
he should wash the Glass Cat in the water of the brook.
 
"Not just yet," answered the Wizard.  "The Cat deserves to be punished,
so I think I'll leave that blue mud--which is as bad as paint--upon her
body until she gets to the Emerald City.  The silly creature is so vain
that she will be greatly shamed when the Oz people see her in this
condition, and perhaps she'll take the lesson to heart and leave the
monkeys alone hereafter."
 
However, the Glass Cat could not see or hear, and to avoid carrying her
on the journey the Wizard picked the mud out of her eyes and ears and
Dorothy dampened her handkerchief and washed both the eyes and ears
clean.
 
As soon as she could speak the Glass Cat asked indignantly: "Aren't you
going to punish those monkeys for playing such a trick on me?"
 
"No," answered the Wizard.  "You played a trick on them by pulling
their tails, so this is only tit-for-tat, and I'm glad the monkeys had
their revenge."
 
He wouldn't allow the Glass Cat to go near the water, to wash herself,
but made her follow them when they resumed their journey toward the
Emerald City.
 
"This is only part of your punishment," said the Wizard, severely.
"Ozma will laugh at you, when we get to her palace, and so will the
Scarecrow, and the Tin Woodman, and Tik-Tok, and the Shaggy Man, and
Button-Bright, and the Patchwork Girl, and--"
 
"And the Pink Kitten," added Dorothy.
 
That suggestion hurt the Glass Cat more than anything else.  The Pink
Kitten always quarreled with the Glass Cat and insisted that flesh was
superior to glass, while the Glass Cat would jeer at the Pink Kitten,
because it had no pink brains.  But the pink brains were all daubed
with blue mud, just now, and if the Pink Kitten should see the Glass
Cat in such a condition, it would be dreadfully humiliating.
 
For several hours the Glass Cat walked along very meekly, but toward
noon it seized an opportunity when no one was looking and darted away
through the long grass.  It remembered that there was a tiny lake of
pure water near by, and to this lake the Cat sped as fast as it could
go.
 
The others never missed her until they stopped for lunch, and then it
was too late to hunt for her.
 
"I s'pect she's gone somewhere to clean herself," said Dorothy.
 
"Never mind," replied the Wizard.  "Perhaps this glass creature has
been punished enough, and we must not forget she saved both Trot and
Cap'n Bill."
 
"After first leading 'em onto an enchanted island," added Dorothy.
"But I think, as you do, that the Glass Cat is punished enough, and
p'raps she won't try to pull the monkeys' tails again."
 
The Glass Cat did not rejoin the party of travelers.  She was still
resentful, and they moved too slowly to suit her, besides.  When they
arrived at the Royal Palace, one of the first things they saw was the
Glass Cat curled up on a bench as bright and clean and transparent as
ever.  But she pretended not to notice them, and they passed her by
without remark.
 
 
 
 
21.  The College of Athletic Arts
 
 
Dorothy and her friends arrived at the Royal Palace at an opportune
time, for Ozma was holding high court in her Throne Room, where
Professor H. M. Wogglebug, T.E., was appealing to her to punish some of
the students of the Royal Athletic College, of which he was the
Principal.
 
This College is located in the Munchkin Country, but not far from the
Emerald City.  To enable the students to devote their entire time to
athletic exercises, such as boating, foot-ball, and the like, Professor
Wogglebug had invented an assortment of Tablets of Learning.  One of
these tablets, eaten by a scholar after breakfast, would instantly
enable him to understand arithmetic or algebra or any other branch of
mathematics.  Another tablet eaten after lunch gave a student a
complete knowledge of geography.  Another tablet made it possible for
the eater to spell the most difficult words, and still another enabled
him to write a beautiful hand.  There were tablets for history,
mechanics, home cooking and agriculture, and it mattered not whether a
boy or a girl was stupid or bright, for the tablets taught them
everything in the twinkling of an eye.
 
This method, which is patented in the Land of Oz by Professor
Wogglebug, saves paper and books, as well as the tedious hours devoted
to study in some of our less favored schools, and it also allows the
students to devote all their time to racing, base-ball, tennis and
other manly and womanly sports, which are greatly interfered with by
study in those Temples of Learning where Tablets of Learning are
unknown.
 
But it so happened that Professor Wogglebug (who had invented so much
that he had acquired the habit) carelessly invented a Square-Meal
Tablet, which was no bigger than your little finger-nail but contained,
in condensed form, the equal of a bowl of soup, a portion of fried
fish, a roast, a salad and a dessert, all of which gave the same
nourishment as a square meal.
 
The Professor was so proud of these Square-Meal Tablets that he began
to feed them to the students at his college, instead of other food, but
the boys and girls objected because they wanted food that they could
enjoy the taste of.  It was no fun at all to swallow a tablet, with a
glass of water, and call it a dinner; so they refused to eat the
Square-Meal Tablets.  Professor Wogglebug insisted, and the result was
that the Senior Class seized the learned Professor one day and threw
him into the river--clothes and all.  Everyone knows that a wogglebug
cannot swim, and so the inventor of the wonderful Square-Meal Tablets
lay helpless on the bottom of the river for three days before a
fisherman caught one of his legs on a fishhook and dragged him out upon
the bank.
 
The learned Professor was naturally indignant at such treatment, and so
he brought the entire Senior Class to the Emerald City and appealed to
Ozma of Oz to punish them for their rebellion.
 
I do not suppose the girl Ruler was very severe with the rebellious
boys and girls, because she had herself refused to eat the Square-Meal
Tablets in place of food, but while she was listening to the
interesting case in her Throne Room, Cap'n Bill managed to carry the
golden flower-pot containing the Magic Flower up to Trot's room without
it being seen by anyone except Jellia Jamb, Ozma's chief Maid of Honor,
and Jellia promised not to tell.
 
Also the Wizard was able to carry the cage of monkeys up to one of the
top towers of the palace, where he had a room of his own, to which no
one came unless invited.  So Trot and Dorothy and Cap'n Bill and the
Wizard were all delighted at the successful end of their adventure.
The Cowardly Lion and the Hungry Tiger went to the marble stables
behind the Royal Palace, where they lived while at home, and they too
kept the secret, even refusing to tell the Wooden Sawhorse, and Hank
the Mule, and the Yellow Hen, and the Pink Kitten where they had been.
 
Trot watered the Magic Flower every day and allowed no one in her room
to see the beautiful blossoms except her friends, Betsy Bobbin and
Dorothy.  The wonderful plant did not seem to lose any of its magic by
being removed from its island, and Trot was sure that Ozma would prize
it as one of her most delightful treasures.
 
Up in his tower the little Wizard of Oz began training his twelve tiny
monkeys, and the little creatures were so intelligent that they learned
every trick the Wizard tried to teach them.  The Wizard treated them
with great kindness and gentleness and gave them the food that monkeys
love best, so they promised to do their best on the great occasion of
Ozma's birthday.
 
 
 
 
22.  Ozma's Birthday Party
 
 
It seems odd that a fairy should have a birthday, for fairies, they
say, were born at the beginning of time and live forever.  Yet, on the
other hand, it would be a shame to deprive a fairy, who has so many
other good things, of the delights of a birthday.  So we need not
wonder that the fairies keep their birthdays just as other folks do,
and consider them occasions for feasting and rejoicing.
 
Ozma, the beautiful girl Ruler of the Fairyland of Oz, was a real
fairy, and so sweet and gentle in caring for her people that she was
greatly beloved by them all.  She lived in the most magnificent palace
in the most magnificent city in the world, but that did not prevent her
from being the friend of the most humble person in her dominions.  She
would mount her Wooden Sawhorse, and ride out to a farm house and sit
in the kitchen to talk with the good wife of the farmer while she did
her family baking; or she would play with the children and give them
rides on her famous wooden steed; or she would stop in a forest to
speak to a charcoal burner and ask if he was happy or desired anything
to make him more content; or she would teach young girls how to sew and
plan pretty dresses, or enter the shops where the jewelers and
craftsmen were busy and watch them at their work, giving to each and
all a cheering word or sunny smile.
 
And then Ozma would sit in her jeweled throne, with her chosen
courtiers all about her, and listen patiently to any complaint brought
to her by her subjects, striving to accord equal justice to all.
Knowing she was fair in her decisions, the Oz people never murmured at
her judgments, but agreed, if Ozma decided against them, she was right
and they wrong.
 
When Dorothy and Trot and Betsy Bobbin and Ozma were together, one
would think they were all about of an age, and the fairy Ruler no older
and no more "grown up" than the other three.  She would laugh and romp
with them in regular girlish fashion, yet there was an air of quiet
dignity about Ozma, even in her merriest moods, that, in a manner,
distinguished her from the others.  The three girls loved her
devotedly, but they were never able to quite forget that Ozma was the
Royal Ruler of the wonderful Fairyland of Oz, and by birth belonged to
a powerful race.
 
Ozma's palace stood in the center of a delightful and extensive garden,
where splendid trees and flowering shrubs and statuary and fountains
abounded.  One could walk for hours in this fascinating park and see
something interesting at every step.  In one place was an aquarium,
where strange and beautiful fish swam; at another spot all the birds of
the air gathered daily to a great feast which Ozma's servants provided
for them, and were so fearless of harm that they would alight upon
one's shoulders and eat from one's hand.  There was also the Fountain
of the Water of Oblivion, but it was dangerous to drink of this water,
because it made one forget everything he had ever before known, even to
his own name, and therefore Ozma had placed a sign of warning upon the
fountain.  But there were also fountains that were delightfully
perfumed, and fountains of delicious nectar, cool and richly flavored,
where all were welcome to refresh themselves.
 
Around the palace grounds was a great wall, thickly encrusted with
glittering emeralds, but the gates stood open and no one was forbidden
entrance.  On holidays the people of the Emerald City often took their
children to see the wonders of Ozma's gardens, and even entered the
Royal Palace, if they felt so inclined, for they knew that they and
their Ruler were friends, and that Ozma delighted to give them pleasure.
 
When all this is considered, you will not be surprised that the people
throughout the Land of Oz, as well as Ozma's most intimate friends and
her royal courtiers, were eager to celebrate her birthday, and made
preparations for the festival weeks in advance.  All the brass bands
practiced their nicest tunes, for they were to march in the numerous
processions to be made in the Winkie Country, the Gillikin Country, the
Munchkin Country and the Quadling Country, as well as in the Emerald
City.  Not all the people could go to congratulate their Ruler, but all
could celebrate her birthday, in one way or another, however far
distant from her palace they might be.  Every home and building
throughout the Land of Oz was to be decorated with banners and bunting,
and there were to be games, and plays, and a general good time for
every one.
 
It was Ozma's custom on her birthday to give a grand feast at the
palace, to which all her closest friends were invited.  It was a
queerly assorted company, indeed, for there are more quaint and unusual
characters in Oz than in all the rest of the world, and Ozma was more
interested in unusual people than in ordinary ones--just as you and I
are.
 
On this especial birthday of the lovely girl Ruler, a long table was
set in the royal Banquet Hall of the palace, at which were place-cards
for the invited guests, and at one end of the great room was a smaller
table, not so high, for Ozma's animal friends, whom she never forgot,
and at the other end was a big table where all of the birthday gifts
were to be arranged.
 
When the guests arrived, they placed their gifts on this table and then
found their places at the banquet table.  And, after the guests were
all placed, the animals entered in a solemn procession and were placed
at their table by Jellia Jamb.  Then, while an orchestra hidden by a
bank of roses and ferns played a march composed for the occasion, the
Royal Ozma entered the Banquet Hall, attended by her Maids of Honor,
and took her seat at the head of the table.
 
She was greeted by a cheer from all the assembled company, the animals
adding their roars and growls and barks and mewing and cackling to
swell the glad tumult, and then all seated themselves at their tables.
 
At Ozma's right sat the famous Scarecrow of Oz, whose straw-stuffed
body was not beautiful, but whose happy nature and shrewd wit had made
him a general favorite.  On the left of the Ruler was placed the Tin
Woodman, whose metal body had been brightly polished for this event.
The Tin Woodman was the Emperor of the Winkie Country and one of the
most important persons in Oz.
 
Next to the Scarecrow, Dorothy was seated, and next to her was Tik-Tok,
the Clockwork Man, who had been wound up as tightly as his clockwork
would permit, so he wouldn't interrupt the festivities by running down.
Then came Aunt Em and Uncle Henry, Dorothy's own relations, two kindly
old people who had a cozy home in the Emerald City and were very happy
and contented there.  Then Betsy Bobbin was seated, and next to her the
droll and delightful Shaggy Man, who was a favorite wherever he went.
 
On the other side of the table, opposite the Tin Woodman was placed
Trot, and next to her, Cap'n Bill.  Then was seated Button-Bright and
Ojo the Lucky, and Dr. Pipt and his good wife Margalot, and the
astonishing Frogman, who had come from the Yip country to be present at
Ozma's birthday feast.
 
At the foot of the table, facing Ozma, was seated the queenly Glinda,
the good Sorceress of Oz, for this was really the place of honor next
to the head of the table where Ozma herself sat.  On Glinda's right was
the Little Wizard of Oz, who owed to Glinda all of the magical arts he
knew.  Then came Jinjur, a pretty girl farmer of whom Ozma and Dorothy
were quite fond.  The adjoining seat was occupied by the Tin Soldier,
and next to him was Professor H. M.  Wogglebug, T.E., of the Royal
Athletic College.
 
On Glinda's left was placed the jolly Patchwork Girl, who was a little
afraid of the Sorceress and so was likely to behave herself pretty
well.  The Shaggy Man's brother was beside the Patchwork Girl, and then
came that interesting personage, Jack Pumpkinhead, who had grown a
splendid big pumpkin for a new head to be worn on Ozma's birthday, and
had carved a face on it that was even jollier in expression than the
one he had last worn.  New heads were not unusual with Jack, for the
pumpkins did not keep long, and when the seeds--which served him as
brains--began to get soft and mushy, he realized his head would soon
spoil, and so he procured a new one from his great field of
pumpkins--grown by him so that he need never lack a head.
 
You will have noticed that the company at Ozma's banquet table was
somewhat mixed, but every one invited was a tried and trusted friend of
the girl Ruler, and their presence made her quite happy.
 
No sooner had Ozma seated herself, with her back to the birthday table,
than she noticed that all present were eyeing with curiosity and
pleasure something behind her, for the gorgeous Magic Flower was
blooming gloriously and the mammoth blossoms that quickly succeeded one
another on the plant were beautiful to view and filled the entire room
with their delicate fragrance.  Ozma wanted to look, too, to see what
all were staring at, but she controlled her curiosity because it was
not proper that she should yet view her birthday gifts.
 
So the sweet and lovely Ruler devoted herself to her guests, several of
whom, such as the Scarecrow, the Tin Woodman, the Patchwork Girl,
Tik-Tok, Jack Pumpkinhead and the Tin Soldier, never ate anything but
sat very politely in their places and tried to entertain those of the
guests who did eat.
 
And, at the animal table, there was another interesting group,
consisting of the Cowardly Lion, the Hungry Tiger, Toto--Dorothy's
little shaggy black dog--Hank the Mule, the Pink Kitten, the Wooden
Sawhorse, the Yellow Hen, and the Glass Cat.  All of these had good
appetites except the Sawhorse and the Glass Cat, and each was given a
plentiful supply of the food it liked best.
 
Finally, when the banquet was nearly over and the ice-cream was to be
served, four servants entered bearing a huge cake, all frosted and
decorated with candy flowers.  Around the edge of the cake was a row of
lighted candles, and in the center were raised candy letters that
spelled the words:
 
          OZMA'S
       Birthday Cake
           from
  Dorothy and the Wizard
 
 
"Oh, how beautiful!" cried Ozma, greatly delighted, and Dorothy said
eagerly: "Now you must cut the cake, Ozma, and each of us will eat a
piece with our ice-cream."
 
Jellia Jamb brought a large golden knife with a jeweled handle, and
Ozma stood up in her place and attempted to cut the cake.  But as soon
as the frosting in the center broke under the pressure of the knife
there leaped from the cake a tiny monkey three inches high, and he was
followed by another and another, until twelve monkeys stood on the
tablecloth and bowed low to Ozma.
 
"Congratulations to our gracious Ruler!" they exclaimed in a chorus,
and then they began a dance, so droll and amusing that all the company
roared with laughter and even Ozma joined in the merriment.  But after
the dance the monkeys performed some wonderful acrobatic feats, and
then they ran to the hollow of the cake and took out some band
instruments of burnished gold--cornets, horns, drums, and the like--and
forming into a procession the monkeys marched up and down the table
playing a jolly tune with the ease of skilled musicians.
 
Dorothy was delighted with the success of her "Surprise Cake," and
after the monkeys had finished their performance, the banquet came to
an end.
 
Now was the time for Ozma to see her other presents, so Glinda the Good
rose and, taking the girl Ruler by her hand, led her to the table where
all her gifts were placed in magnificent array.  The Magic Flower of
course attracted her attention first, and Trot had to tell her the
whole story of their adventures in getting it.  The little girl did not
forget to give due credit to the Glass Cat and the little Wizard, but
it was really Cap'n Bill who had bravely carried the golden flower-pot
away from the enchanted Isle.
 
Ozma thanked them all, and said she would place the Magic Flower in her
boudoir where she might enjoy its beauty and fragrance continually.
But now she discovered the marvelous gown woven by Glinda and her
maidens from strands drawn from pure emeralds, and being a girl who
loved pretty clothes, Ozma's ecstasy at being presented with this
exquisite gown may well be imagined.  She could hardly wait to put it
on, but the table was loaded with other pretty gifts and the night was
far spent before the happy girl Ruler had examined all her presents and
thanked those who had lovingly donated them.
 
 
 
 
23.  The Fountain of Oblivion
 
 
The morning after the birthday fete, as the Wizard and Dorothy were
walking in the grounds of the palace, Ozma came out and joined them,
saying:
 
"I want to hear more of your adventures in the Forest of Gugu, and how
you were able to get those dear little monkeys to use in Dorothy's
Surprise Cake."
 
So they sat down on a marble bench near to the Fountain of the Water of
Oblivion, and between them Dorothy and the Wizard related their
adventures.
 
"I was dreadfully fussy while I was a woolly lamb," said Dorothy, "for
it didn't feel good, a bit.  And I wasn't quite sure, you know, that
I'd ever get to be a girl again."
 
"You might have been a woolly lamb yet, if I hadn't happened to have
discovered that Magic Transformation Word," declared the Wizard.
 
"But what became of the walnut and the hickory-nut into which you
transformed those dreadful beast magicians?" inquired Ozma.
 
"Why, I'd almost forgotten them," was the reply; "but I believe they
are still here in my pocket."
 
Then he searched in his pockets and brought out the two nuts and showed
them to her.
 
Ozma regarded them thoughtfully.
 
"It isn't right to leave any living creatures in such helpless forms,"
said she.  "I think, Wizard, you ought to transform them into their
natural shapes again."
 
"But I don't know what their natural shapes are," he objected, "for of
course the forms of mixed animals which they had assumed were not
natural to them.  And you must not forget, Ozma, that their natures
were cruel and mischievous, so if I bring them back to life they might
cause us a great deal of trouble."
 
"Nevertheless," said the Ruler of Oz, "we must free them from their
present enchantments.  When you restore them to their natural forms we
will discover who they really are, and surely we need not fear any two
people, even though they prove to be magicians and our enemies."
 
"I am not so sure of that," protested the Wizard, with a shake of his
bald head.  "The one bit of magic I robbed them of--which was the Word
of Transformation--is so simple, yet so powerful, that neither Glinda
nor I can equal it.  It isn't all in the word, you know, it's the way
the word is pronounced.  So if the two strange magicians have other
magic of the same sort, they might prove very dangerous to us, if we
liberated them."
 
"I've an idea!" exclaimed Dorothy.  "I'm no wizard, and no fairy, but
if you do as I say, we needn't fear these people at all."
 
"What is your thought, my dear?" asked Ozma.
 
"Well," replied the girl, "here is this Fountain of the Water of
Oblivion, and that's what put the notion into my head.  When the Wizard
speaks that ter'ble word that will change 'em back to their real forms,
he can make 'em dreadful thirsty, too, and we'll put a cup right here
by the fountain, so it'll be handy.  Then they'll drink the water and
forget all the magic they ever knew--and everything else, too."
 
"That's not a bad idea," said the Wizard, looking at Dorothy
approvingly.
 
"It's a very GOOD idea," declared Ozma.  "Run for a cup, Dorothy."
 
So Dorothy ran to get a cup, and while she was gone the Wizard said:
 
"I don't know whether the real forms of these magicians are those of
men or beasts.  If they're beasts, they would not drink from a cup but
might attack us at once and drink afterward.  So it might be safer for
us to have the Cowardly Lion and the Hungry Tiger here to protect us if
necessary."
 
Ozma drew out a silver whistle which was attached to a slender gold
chain and blew upon the whistle two shrill blasts.  The sound, though
not harsh, was very penetrating, and as soon as it reached the ears of
the Cowardly Lion and the Hungry Tiger, the two huge beasts quickly
came bounding toward them.  Ozma explained to them what the Wizard was
about to do, and told them to keep quiet unless danger threatened.  So
the two powerful guardians of the Ruler of Oz crouched beside the
fountain and waited.
 
Dorothy returned and set the cup on the edge of the fountain.  Then the
Wizard placed the hickory-nut beside the fountain and said in a solemn
voice:
 
"I want you to resume your natural form, and to be very
thirsty--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
In an instant there appeared, in the place of the hickory-nut, the form
of Kiki Aru, the Hyup boy.  He seemed bewildered, at first, as if
trying to remember what had happened to him and why he was in this
strange place.  But he was facing the fountain, and the bubbling water
reminded him that he was thirsty.  Without noticing Ozma, the Wizard
and Dorothy, who were behind him, he picked up the cup, filled it with
the Water of Oblivion, and drank it to the last drop.
 
He was now no longer thirsty, but he felt more bewildered than ever,
for now he could remember nothing at all--not even his name or where he
came from.  He looked around the beautiful garden with a pleased
expression, and then, turning, he beheld Ozma and the Wizard and
Dorothy regarding him curiously and the two great beasts crouching
behind them.
 
Kiki Aru did not know who they were, but he thought Ozma very lovely
and Dorothy very pleasant.  So he smiled at them--the same innocent,
happy smile that a baby might have indulged in, and that pleased
Dorothy, who seized his hand and led him to a seat beside her on the
bench.
 
"Why, I thought you were a dreadful magician," she exclaimed, "and
you're only a boy!"
 
"What is a magician?" he asked, "and what is a boy?"
 
"Don't you know?" inquired the girl.
 
Kiki shook his head.  Then he laughed.
 
"I do not seem to know anything," he replied.
 
"It's very curious," remarked the Wizard.  "He wears the dress of the
Munchkins, so he must have lived at one time in the Munchkin Country.
Of course the boy can tell us nothing of his history or his family, for
he has forgotten all that he ever knew."
 
"He seems a nice boy, now that all the wickedness has gone from him,"
said Ozma.  "So we will keep him here with us and teach him our
ways--to be true and considerate of others."
 
"Why, in that case, it's lucky for him he drank the Water of Oblivion,"
said Dorothy.
 
"It is indeed," agreed the Wizard.  "But the remarkable thing, to me,
is how such a young boy ever learned the secret of the Magic Word of
Transformation.  Perhaps his companion, who is at present this walnut,
was the real magician, although I seem to remember that it was this boy
in the beast's form who whispered the Magic Word into the hollow tree,
where I overheard it."
 
"Well, we will soon know who the other is," suggested Ozma.  "He may
prove to be another Munchkin boy."
 
The Wizard placed the walnut near the fountain and said, as slowly and
solemnly as before:
 
"I want you to resume your natural form, and to be very
thirsty--Pyrzqxgl!"
 
Then the walnut disappeared and Ruggedo the Nome stood in its place.
He also was facing the fountain, and he reached for the cup, filled it,
and was about to drink when Dorothy exclaimed:
 
"Why, it's the old Nome King!"
 
Ruggedo swung around and faced them, the cup still in his hand.
 
"Yes," he said in an angry voice, "it's the old Nome King, and I'm
going to conquer all Oz and be revenged on you for kicking me out of my
throne."  He looked around a moment, and then continued: "There isn't
an egg in sight, and I'm stronger than all of you people put together!
I don't know how I came here, but I'm going to fight the fight of my
life--and I'll win!"
 
His long white hair and beard waved in the breeze; his eyes flashed
hate and vengeance, and so astonished and shocked were they by the
sudden appearance of this old enemy of the Oz people that they could
only stare at him in silence and shrink away from his wild glare.
 
Ruggedo laughed.  He drank the water, threw the cup on the ground and
said fiercely:
 
"And now--and now--and--"
 
His voice grew gentle.  He rubbed his forehead with a puzzled air and
stroked his long beard.
 
"What was I going to say?" he asked, pleadingly.
 
"Don't you remember?" said the Wizard.
 
"No; I've forgotten."
 
"Who ARE you?" asked Dorothy.
 
He tried to think.  "I--I'm sure I don't know," he stammered.
 
"Don't you know who WE are, either?" questioned the girl.
 
"I haven't the slightest idea," said the Nome.
 
"Tell us who this Munchkin boy is," suggested Ozma.
 
Ruggedo looked at the boy and shook his head.
 
"He's a stranger to me.  You are all strangers.  I--I'm a stranger to
myself," he said.
 
Then he patted the Lion's head and murmured, "Good doggie!" and the
Lion growled indignantly.
 
"What shall we do with him?" asked the Wizard, perplexed.
 
"Once before the wicked old Nome came here to conquer us, and then, as
now, he drank of the Water of Oblivion and became harmless.  But we
sent him back to the Nome Kingdom, where he soon learned the old evil
ways again.
 
"For that reason," said Ozma, "we must find a place for him in the Land
of Oz, and keep him here.  For here he can learn no evil and will
always be as innocent of guile as our own people."
 
And so the wandering ex-King of the Nomes found a new home, a peaceful
and happy home, where he was quite content and passed his days in
innocent enjoyment.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

A Journey to the Center of the World

August 26, 2009
 
 
 
 
 
               A Journey to the Center of the Earth
 
                            by Jules Verne
 
 
 
 
 
The following version of Jules Verne's "Journey
into the Interior of the Earth" was published by Ward, Lock, &Co.,
Ltd., London, in 1877. This version is believed to be the most
faithful rendition into English of this classic currently in the
public domain. 
 
 
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
                              A JOURNEY
 
                               INTO THE
 
                        INTERIOR OF THE EARTH
 
                                  by
 
                              Jules Verne
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
PREFACE
 
 
 
 
THE "Voyages Extraordinaires" of M. Jules Verne deserve to be made
widely known in English-speaking countries by means of carefully
prepared translations. Witty and ingenious adaptations of the
researches and discoveries of modern science to the popular taste,
which demands that these should be presented to ordinary readers in
the lighter form of cleverly mingled truth and fiction, these books
will assuredly be read with profit and delight, especially by English
youth. Certainly no writer before M. Jules Verne has been so happy in
weaving together in judicious combination severe scientific truth
with a charming exercise of playful imagination.
 
Iceland, the starting point of the marvellous underground journey
imagined in this volume, is invested at the present time with. a
painful interest in consequence of the disastrous eruptions last
Easter Day, which covered with lava and ashes the poor and scanty
vegetation upon which four thousand persons were partly dependent for
the means of subsistence. For a long time to come the natives of that
interesting island, who cleave to their desert home with all that
_amor patriae_ which is so much more easily understood than
explained, will look, and look not in vain, for the help of those on
whom fall the smiles of a kindlier sun in regions not torn by
earthquakes nor blasted and ravaged by volcanic fires. Will the
readers of this little book, who, are gifted with the means of
indulging in the luxury of extended beneficence, remember the
distress of their brethren in the far north, whom distance has not
barred from the claim of being counted our "neighbours"? And whatever
their humane feelings may prompt them to bestow will be gladly added
to the Mansion-House Iceland Relief Fund.
 
In his desire to ascertain how far the picture of Iceland, drawn in
the work of Jules Verne is a correct one, the translator hopes in the
course of a mail or two to receive a communication from a leading man
of science in the island, which may furnish matter for additional
information in a future edition.
 
The scientific portion of the French original is not without a few
errors, which the translator, with the kind assistance of Mr. Cameron
of H. M. Geological Survey, has ventured to point out and correct. It
is scarcely to be expected in a work in which the element of
amusement is intended to enter more largely than that of scientific
instruction, that any great degree of accuracy should be arrived at.
Yet the translator hopes that what trifling deviations from the text
or corrections in foot notes he is responsible for, will have done a
little towards the increased usefulness of the work.
 
F. A. M.
 
The Vicarage,
 
     Broughton-in-Furness
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
                   CONTENTS
 
 
 
 
     I       THE PROFESSOR AND HIS FAMILY
     II      A MYSTERY TO BE SOLVED AT ANY PRICE
     III     THE RUNIC WRITING EXERCISES THE PROFESSOR
     IV      THE ENEMY TO BE STARVED INTO SUBMISSION
     V       FAMINE, THEN VICTORY, FOLLOWED BY DISMAY
     VI      EXCITING DISCUSSIONS ABOUT AN UNPARALLELED EXERCISE
     VII     A WOMAN'S COURAGE
     VIII    SERIOUS PREPARATIONS FOR VERTICAL DESCENT
     IX      ICELAND, BUT WHAT NEXT?
     X       INTERESTING CONVERSATIONS WITH ICELANDIC SAVANTS
     XI      A GUIDE FOUND TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH
     XII     A BARREN LAND
     XIII    HOSPITALITY UNDER THE ARCTIC CIRCLE
     XIV     BUT ARCTICS CAN BE INHOSPITABLE, TOO
     XV      SNÆFFEL AT LAST
     XVI     BOLDLY DOWN THE CRATER
     XVII    VERTICAL DESCENT
     XVIII   THE WONDERS OF TERRESTIAL DEPTHS
     XIX     GEOLOGICAL STUDIES IN SITU
     XX      THE FIRST SIGNS OF DISTRESS
     XXI     COMPASSION FUSES THE PROFESSOR'S HEART
     XXII    TOTAL FAILURE OF WATER
     XXIII   WATER DISCOVERED
     XXIV    WELL SAID, OLD MOLE! CANST THOU WORK
             IN THE GROUND SO FAST?
     XXV     DE PROFUNDIS
     XXVI    THE WORST PERIL OF ALL
     XXVII   LOST IN THE BOWELS OF THE EARTH
     XXVIII  THE RESCUE IN THE WHISPERING GALLERY
     XXIX    THALATTA! THALATTA!
     XXX     A NEW MARE INTERNUM
     XXXI    PREPARATIONS FOR A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY
     XXXII   WONDERS OF THE DEEP
     XXXIII  A BATTLE OF MONSTERS
     XXXIV   THE GREAT GEYSER
     XXXV    AN ELECTRIC STORM
     XXXVI   CALM PHILOSOPHIC DISCUSSIONS
     XXXVII  THE LIEDENBROCK MUSEUM OF GEOLOGY
     XXXVIII THE PROFESSOR IN HIS CHAIR AGAIN
     XXXIX   FOREST SCENERY ILLUMINATED BY ELECTRICITY
     XL      PREPARATIONS FOR BLASTING A PASSAGE
             TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH
     XLI     THE GREAT EXPLOSION AND THE RUSH DOWN BELOW
     XLII    HEADLONG SPEED UPWARD THROUGH THE HORRORS OF DARKNESS
     XLIII   SHOT OUT OF A VOLCANO AT LAST!
     XLIV    SUNNY LANDS IN THE BLUE MEDITERRANEAN
     XLV     ALL'S WELL THAT ENDS WELL
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
A JOURNEY INTO THE INTERIOR OF THE EARTH
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER I.
 
 
 
 
THE PROFESSOR AND HIS FAMILY
 
On the 24th of May, 1863, my uncle, Professor Liedenbrock, rushed
into his little house, No. 19 Königstrasse, one of the oldest streets
in the oldest portion of the city of Hamburg.
 
Martha must have concluded that she was very much behindhand, for the
dinner had only just been put into the oven.
 
"Well, now," said I to myself, "if that most impatient of men is
hungry, what a disturbance he will make!"
 
"M. Liedenbrock so soon!" cried poor Martha in great alarm, half
opening the dining-room door.
 
"Yes, Martha; but very likely the dinner is not half cooked, for it
is not two yet. Saint Michael's clock has only just struck half-past
one."
 
"Then why has the master come home so soon?"
 
"Perhaps he will tell us that himself."
 
"Here he is, Monsieur Axel; I will run and hide myself while you
argue with him."
 
And Martha retreated in safety into her own dominions.
 
I was left alone. But how was it possible for a man of my undecided
turn of mind to argue successfully with so irascible a person as the
Professor? With this persuasion I was hurrying away to my own little
retreat upstairs, when the street door creaked upon its hinges; heavy
feet made the whole flight of stairs to shake; and the master of the
house, passing rapidly through the dining-room, threw himself in
haste into his own sanctum.
 
But on his rapid way he had found time to fling his hazel stick into
a corner, his rough broadbrim upon the table, and these few emphatic
words at his nephew:
 
"Axel, follow me!"
 
I had scarcely had time to move when the Professor was again shouting
after me:
 
"What! not come yet?"
 
And I rushed into my redoubtable master's study.
 
Otto Liedenbrock had no mischief in him, I willingly allow that; but
unless he very considerably changes as he grows older, at the end he
will be a most original character.
 
He was professor at the Johannæum, and was delivering a series of
lectures on mineralogy, in the course of every one of which he broke
into a passion once or twice at least. Not at all that he was
over-anxious about the improvement of his class, or about the degree
of attention with which they listened to him, or the success which
might eventually crown his labours. Such little matters of detail
never troubled him much. His teaching was as the German philosophy
calls it, 'subjective'; it was to benefit himself, not others. He was
a learned egotist. He was a well of science, and the pulleys worked
uneasily when you wanted to draw anything out of it. In a word, he
was a learned miser.
 
Germany has not a few professors of this sort.
 
To his misfortune, my uncle was not gifted with a sufficiently rapid
utterance; not, to be sure, when he was talking at home, but
certainly in his public delivery; this is a want much to be deplored
in a speaker. The fact is, that during the course of his lectures at
the Johannæum, the Professor often came to a complete standstill; he
fought with wilful words that refused to pass his struggling lips,
such words as resist and distend the cheeks, and at last break out
into the unasked-for shape of a round and most unscientific oath:
then his fury would gradually abate.
 
Now in mineralogy there are many half-Greek and half-Latin terms,
very hard to articulate, and which would be most trying to a poet's
measures. I don't wish to say a word against so respectable a
science, far be that from me. True, in the august presence of
rhombohedral crystals, retinasphaltic resins, gehlenites, Fassaites,
molybdenites, tungstates of manganese, and titanite of zirconium,
why, the most facile of tongues may make a slip now and then.
 
It therefore happened that this venial fault of my uncle's came to be
pretty well understood in time, and an unfair advantage was taken of
it; the students laid wait for him in dangerous places, and when he
began to stumble, loud was the laughter, which is not in good taste,
not even in Germans. And if there was always a full audience to
honour the Liedenbrock courses, I should be sorry to conjecture how
many came to make merry at my uncle's expense.
 
Nevertheless my good uncle was a man of deep learning - a fact I am
most anxious to assert and reassert. Sometimes he might irretrievably
injure a specimen by his too great ardour in handling it; but still
he united the genius of a true geologist with the keen eye of the
mineralogist. Armed with his hammer, his steel pointer, his magnetic
needles, his blowpipe, and his bottle of nitric acid, he was a
powerful man of science. He would refer any mineral to its proper
place among the six hundred [l] elementary substances now enumerated,
by its fracture, its appearance, its hardness, its fusibility, its
sonorousness, its smell, and its taste.
 
The name of Liedenbrock was honourably mentioned in colleges and
learned societies. Humphry Davy, [2] Humboldt, Captain Sir John
Franklin, General Sabine, never failed to call upon him on their way
through Hamburg. Becquerel, Ebelman, Brewster, Dumas, Milne-Edwards,
Saint-Claire-Deville frequently consulted him upon the most difficult
problems in chemistry, a science which was indebted to him for
considerable discoveries, for in 1853 there had appeared at Leipzig
an imposing folio by Otto Liedenbrock, entitled, "A Treatise upon
Transcendental Chemistry," with plates; a work, however, which failed
to cover its expenses.
 
To all these titles to honour let me add that my uncle was the
curator of the museum of mineralogy formed by M. Struve, the Russian
ambassador; a most valuable collection, the fame of which is European.
 
Such was the gentleman who addressed me in that impetuous manner.
Fancy a tall, spare man, of an iron constitution, and with a fair
complexion which took off a good ten years from the fifty he must own
to. His restless eyes were in incessant motion behind his full-sized
spectacles. His long, thin nose was like a knife blade. Boys have
been heard to remark that that organ was magnetised and attracted
iron filings. But this was merely a mischievous report; it had no
attraction except for snuff, which it seemed to draw to itself in
great quantities.
 
When I have added, to complete my portrait, that my uncle walked by
mathematical strides of a yard and a half, and that in walking he
kept his fists firmly closed, a sure sign of an irritable
temperament, I think I shall have said enough to disenchant any one
who should by mistake have coveted much of his company.
 
He lived in his own little house in Königstrasse, a structure half
brick and half wood, with a gable cut into steps; it looked upon one
of those winding canals which intersect each other in the middle of
the ancient quarter of Hamburg, and which the great fire of 1842 had
fortunately spared.
 
[1] Sixty-three. (Tr.)
 
[2] As Sir Humphry Davy died in 1829, the translator must be pardoned
for pointing out here an anachronism, unless we are to assume that
the learned Professor's celebrity dawned in his earliest years. (Tr.)
 
It is true that the old house stood slightly off the perpendicular,
and bulged out a little towards the street; its roof sloped a little
to one side, like the cap over the left ear of a Tugendbund student;
its lines wanted accuracy; but after all, it stood firm, thanks to an
old elm which buttressed it in front, and which often in spring sent
its young sprays through the window panes.
 
My uncle was tolerably well off for a German professor. The house was
his own, and everything in it. The living contents were his
god-daughter Gräuben, a young Virlandaise of seventeen, Martha, and
myself. As his nephew and an orphan, I became his laboratory
assistant.
 
I freely confess that I was exceedingly fond of geology and all its
kindred sciences; the blood of a mineralogist was in my veins, and in
the midst of my specimens I was always happy.
 
In a word, a man might live happily enough in the little old house in
the Königstrasse, in spite of the restless impatience of its master,
for although he was a little too excitable - he was very fond of me.
But the man had no notion how to wait; nature herself was too slow
for him. In April, after a had planted in the terra-cotta pots
outside his window seedling plants of mignonette and convolvulus, he
would go and give them a little pull by their leaves to make them
grow faster. In dealing with such a strange individual there was
nothing for it but prompt obedience. I therefore rushed after him.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER II.
 
 
 
 
 
A MYSTERY TO BE SOLVED AT ANY PRICE
 
That study of his was a museum, and nothing else. Specimens of
everything known in mineralogy lay there in their places in perfect
order, and correctly named, divided into inflammable, metallic, and
lithoid minerals.
 
How well I knew all these bits of science! Many a time, instead of
enjoying the company of lads of my own age, I had preferred dusting
these graphites, anthracites, coals, lignites, and peats! And there
were bitumens, resins, organic salts, to be protected from the least
grain of dust; and metals, from iron to gold, metals whose current
value altogether disappeared in the presence of the republican
equality of scientific specimens; and stones too, enough to rebuild
entirely the house in Königstrasse, even with a handsome additional
room, which would have suited me admirably.
 
But on entering this study now I thought of none of all these
wonders; my uncle alone filled my thoughts. He had thrown himself
into a velvet easy-chair, and was grasping between his hands a book
over which he bent, pondering with intense admiration.
 
"Here's a remarkable book! What a wonderful book!" he was exclaiming.
 
These ejaculations brought to my mind the fact that my uncle was
liable to occasional fits of bibliomania; but no old book had any
value in his eyes unless it had the virtue of being nowhere else to
be found, or, at any rate, of being illegible.
 
"Well, now; don't you see it yet? Why I have got a priceless
treasure, that I found his morning, in rummaging in old Hevelius's
shop, the Jew."
 
"Magnificent!" I replied, with a good imitation of enthusiasm.
 
What was the good of all this fuss about an old quarto, bound in
rough calf, a yellow, faded volume, with a ragged seal depending from
it?
 
But for all that there was no lull yet in the admiring exclamations
of the Professor.
 
"See," he went on, both asking the questions and supplying the
answers. "Isn't it a beauty? Yes; splendid! Did you ever see such a
binding? Doesn't the book open easily? Yes; it stops open anywhere.
But does it shut equally well? Yes; for the binding and the leaves
are flush, all in a straight line, and no gaps or openings anywhere.
And look at its back, after seven hundred years. Why, Bozerian,
Closs, or Purgold might have been proud of such a binding!"
 
While rapidly making these comments my uncle kept opening and
shutting the old tome. I really could do no less than ask a question
about its contents, although I did not feel the slightest interest.
 
"And what is the title of this marvellous work?" I asked with an
affected eagerness which he must have been very blind not to see
through.
 
"This work," replied my uncle, firing up with renewed enthusiasm,
"this work is the Heims Kringla of Snorre Turlleson, the most famous
Icelandic author of the twelfth century! It is the chronicle of the
Norwegian princes who ruled in Iceland."
 
"Indeed;" I cried, keeping up wonderfully, "of course it is a German
translation?"
 
"What!" sharply replied the Professor, "a translation! What should I
do with a translation? This _is_ the Icelandic original, in the
magnificent idiomatic vernacular, which is both rich and simple, and
admits of an infinite variety of grammatical combinations and verbal
modifications."
 
"Like German." I happily ventured.
 
"Yes." replied my uncle, shrugging his shoulders; "but, in addition
to all this, the Icelandic has three numbers like the Greek, and
irregular declensions of nouns proper like the Latin."
 
"Ah!" said I, a little moved out of my indifference; "and is the type
good?"
 
"Type! What do you mean by talking of type, wretched Axel? Type! Do
you take it for a printed book, you ignorant fool? It is a
manuscript, a Runic manuscript."
 
"Runic?"
 
"Yes. Do you want me to explain what that is?"
 
"Of course not," I replied in the tone of an injured man. But my
uncle persevered, and told me, against my will, of many things I
cared nothing about.
 
"Runic characters were in use in Iceland in former ages. They were
invented, it is said, by Odin himself. Look there, and wonder,
impious young man, and admire these letters, the invention of the
Scandinavian god!"
 
Well, well! not knowing what to say, I was going to prostrate myself
before this wonderful book, a way of answering equally pleasing to
gods and kings, and which has the advantage of never giving them any
embarrassment, when a little incident happened to divert conversation
into another channel.
 
This was the appearance of a dirty slip of parchment, which slipped
out of the volume and fell upon the floor.
 
My uncle pounced upon this shred with incredible avidity. An old
document, enclosed an immemorial time within the folds of this old
book, had for him an immeasurable value.
 
"What's this?" he cried.
 
And he laid out upon the table a piece of parchment, five inches by
three, and along which were traced certain mysterious characters.
 
Here is the exact facsimile. I think it important to let these
strange signs be publicly known, for they were the means of drawing
on Professor Liedenbrock and his nephew to undertake the most
wonderful expedition of the nineteenth century.
 
[Runic glyphs occur here]
 
The Professor mused a few moments over this series of characters;
then raising his spectacles he pronounced:
 
"These are Runic letters; they are exactly like those of the
manuscript of Snorre Turlleson. But, what on earth is their meaning?"
 
Runic letters appearing to my mind to be an invention of the learned
to mystify this poor world, I was not sorry to see my uncle suffering
the pangs of mystification. At least, so it seemed to me, judging
from his fingers, which were beginning to work with terrible energy.
 
"It is certainly old Icelandic," he muttered between his teeth.
 
And Professor Liedenbrock must have known, for he was acknowledged to
be quite a polyglot. Not that he could speak fluently in the two
thousand languages and twelve thousand dialects which are spoken on
the earth, but he knew at least his share of them.
 
So he was going, in the presence of this difficulty, to give way to
all the impetuosity of his character, and I was preparing for a
violent outbreak, when two o'clock struck by the little timepiece
over the fireplace.
 
At that moment our good housekeeper Martha opened the study door,
saying:
 
"Dinner is ready!"
 
I am afraid he sent that soup to where it would boil away to nothing,
and Martha took to her heels for safety. I followed her, and hardly
knowing how I got there I found myself seated in my usual place.
 
I waited a few minutes. No Professor came. Never within my
remembrance had he missed the important ceremonial of dinner. And yet
what a good dinner it was! There was parsley soup, an omelette of ham
garnished with spiced sorrel, a fillet of veal with compote of
prunes; for dessert, crystallised fruit; the whole washed down with
sweet Moselle.
 
All this my uncle was going to sacrifice to a bit of old parchment.
As an affectionate and attentive nephew I considered it my duty to
eat for him as well as for myself, which I did conscientiously.
 
"I have never known such a thing," said Martha. "M. Liedenbrock is
not at table!"
 
"Who could have believed it?" I said, with my mouth full.
 
"Something serious is going to happen," said the servant, shaking her
head.
 
My opinion was, that nothing more serious would happen than an awful
scene when my uncle should have discovered that his dinner was
devoured. I had come to the last of the fruit when a very loud voice
tore me away from the pleasures of my dessert. With one spring I
bounded out of the dining-room into the study.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER III.
 
 
 
 
 
THE RUNIC WRITING EXERCISES THE PROFESSOR
 
"Undoubtedly it is Runic," said the Professor, bending his brows;
"but there is a secret in it, and I mean to discover the key."
 
A violent gesture finished the sentence.
 
"Sit there," he added, holding out his fist towards the table. "Sit
there, and write."
 
I was seated in a trice.
 
"Now I will dictate to you every letter of our alphabet which
corresponds with each of these Icelandic characters. We will see what
that will give us. But, by St. Michael, if you should dare to deceive
me -"
 
The dictation commenced. I did my best. Every letter was given me one
after the other, with the following remarkable result:
 
     mm.rnlls  esrevel  seecIde
     sgtssmf   vnteief  niedrke
     kt,samn   atrateS  saodrrn
     emtnaeI   nvaect   rrilSa
     Atsaar    .nvcrc   ieaabs
     ccrmi     eevtVl   frAntv
     dt,iac    oseibo   KediiI
 
[Redactor: In the original version the initial letter is an 'm' with
a superscore over it. It is my supposition that this is the
translator's way of writing 'mm' and I have replaced it accordingly,
since our typography does not allow such a character.]
 
When this work was ended my uncle tore the paper from me and examined
it attentively for a long time.
 
"What does it all mean?" he kept repeating mechanically.
 
Upon my honour I could not have enlightened him. Besides he did not
ask me, and he went on talking to himself.
 
"This is what is called a cryptogram, or cipher," he said, "in which
letters are purposely thrown in confusion, which if properly arranged
would reveal their sense. Only think that under this jargon there may
lie concealed the clue to some great discovery!"
 
As for me, I was of opinion that there was nothing at all, in it;
though, of course, I took care not to say so.
 
Then the Professor took the book and the parchment, and diligently
compared them together.
 
"These two writings are not by the same hand," he said; "the cipher
is of later date than the book, an undoubted proof of which I see in
a moment. The first letter is a double m, a letter which is not to be
found in Turlleson's book, and which was only added to the alphabet
in the fourteenth century. Therefore there are two hundred years
between the manuscript and the document."
 
I admitted that this was a strictly logical conclusion.
 
"I am therefore led to imagine," continued my uncle, "that some
possessor of this book wrote these mysterious letters. But who was
that possessor? Is his name nowhere to be found in the manuscript?"
 
My uncle raised his spectacles, took up a strong lens, and carefully
examined the blank pages of the book. On the front of the second, the
title-page, he noticed a sort of stain which looked like an ink blot.
But in looking at it very closely he thought he could distinguish
some half-effaced letters. My uncle at once fastened upon this as the
centre of interest, and he laboured at that blot, until by the help
of his microscope he ended by making out the following Runic
characters which he read without difficulty.
 
"Arne Saknussemm!" he cried in triumph. "Why that is the name of
another Icelander, a savant of the sixteenth century, a celebrated
alchemist!"
 
I gazed at my uncle with satisfactory admiration.
 
"Those alchemists," he resumed, "Avicenna, Bacon, Lully, Paracelsus,
were the real and only savants of their time. They made discoveries
at which we are astonished. Has not this Saknussemm concealed under
his cryptogram some surprising invention? It is so; it must be so!"
 
The Professor's imagination took fire at this hypothesis.
 
"No doubt," I ventured to reply, "but what interest would he have in
thus hiding so marvellous a discovery?"
 
"Why? Why? How can I tell? Did not Galileo do the same by Saturn? We
shall see. I will get at the secret of this document, and I will
neither sleep nor eat until I have found it out."
 
My comment on this was a half-suppressed "Oh!"
 
"Nor you either, Axel," he added.
 
"The deuce!" said I to myself; "then it is lucky I have eaten two
dinners to-day!"
 
"First of all we must find out the key to this cipher; that cannot be
difficult."
 
At these words I quickly raised my head; but my uncle went on
soliloquising.
 
"There's nothing easier. In this document there are a hundred and
thirty-two letters, viz., seventy-seven consonants and fifty-five
vowels. This is the proportion found in southern languages, whilst
northern tongues are much richer in consonants; therefore this is in
a southern language."
 
These were very fair conclusions, I thought.
 
"But what language is it?"
 
Here I looked for a display of learning, but I met instead with
profound analysis.
 
"This Saknussemm," he went on, "was a very well-informed man; now
since he was not writing in his own mother tongue, he would naturally
select that which was currently adopted by the choice spirits of the
sixteenth century; I mean Latin. If I am mistaken, I can but try
Spanish, French, Italian, Greek, or Hebrew. But the savants of the
sixteenth century generally wrote in Latin. I am therefore entitled
to pronounce this, à priori, to be Latin. It is Latin."
 
I jumped up in my chair. My Latin memories rose in revolt against the
notion that these barbarous words could belong to the sweet language
of Virgil.
 
"Yes, it is Latin," my uncle went on; "but it is Latin confused and
in disorder; "_pertubata seu inordinata,_" as Euclid has it."
 
"Very well," thought I, "if you can bring order out of that
confusion, my dear uncle, you are a clever man."
 
"Let us examine carefully," said he again, taking up the leaf upon
which I had written. "Here is a series of one hundred and thirty-two
letters in apparent disorder. There are words consisting of
consonants only, as _nrrlls;_ others, on the other hand, in which
vowels predominate, as for instance the fifth, _uneeief,_ or the last
but one, _oseibo_. Now this arrangement has evidently not been
premeditated; it has arisen mathematically in obedience to the
unknown law which has ruled in the succession of these letters. It
appears to me a certainty that the original sentence was written in a
proper manner, and afterwards distorted by a law which we have yet to
discover. Whoever possesses the key of this cipher will read it with
fluency. What is that key? Axel, have you got it?"
 
I answered not a word, and for a very good reason. My eyes had fallen
upon a charming picture, suspended against the wall, the portrait of
Gräuben. My uncle's ward was at that time at Altona, staying with a
relation, and in her absence I was very downhearted; for I may
confess it to you now, the pretty Virlandaise and the professor's
nephew loved each other with a patience and a calmness entirely
German. We had become engaged unknown to my uncle, who was too much
taken up with geology to be able to enter into such feelings as ours.
Gräuben was a lovely blue-eyed blonde, rather given to gravity and
seriousness; but that did not prevent her from loving me very
sincerely. As for me, I adored her, if there is such a word in the
German language. Thus it happened that the picture of my pretty
Virlandaise threw me in a moment out of the world of realities into
that of memory and fancy.
 
There looked down upon me the faithful companion of my labours and my
recreations. Every day she helped me to arrange my uncle's precious
specimens; she and I labelled them together. Mademoiselle Gräuben was
an accomplished mineralogist; she could have taught a few things to a
savant. She was fond of investigating abstruse scientific questions.
What pleasant hours we have spent in study; and how often I envied
the very stones which she handled with her charming fingers.
 
Then, when our leisure hours came, we used to go out together and
turn into the shady avenues by the Alster, and went happily side by
side up to the old windmill, which forms such an improvement to the
landscape at the head of the lake. On the road we chatted hand in
hand; I told her amusing tales at which she laughed heartilv. Then we
reached the banks of the Elbe, and after having bid good-bye to the
swan, sailing gracefully amidst the white water lilies, we returned
to the quay by the steamer.
 
That is just where I was in my dream, when my uncle with a vehement
thump on the table dragged me back to the realities of life.
 
"Come," said he, "the very first idea which would come into any one's
head to confuse the letters of a sentence would be to write the words
vertically instead of horizontally."
 
"Indeed!" said I.
 
"Now we must see what would be the effect of that, Axel; put down
upon this paper any sentence you like, only instead of arranging the
letters in the usual way, one after the other, place them in
succession in vertical columns, so as to group them together in five
or six vertical lines."
 
I caught his meaning, and immediately produced the following literary
wonder:
 
     I       y       l       o       a       u
     l       o       l       w       r       b
     o       u       ,       n       G       e
     v       w       m       d       r       n
     e       e       y       e       a       !
 
"Good," said the professor, without reading them, "now set down those
words in a horizontal line."
 
I obeyed, and with this result:
 
     Iyloau lolwrb ou,nGe vwmdrn eeyea!
 
"Excellent!" said my uncle, taking the paper hastily out of my hands.
"This begins to look just like an ancient document: the vowels and
the consonants are grouped together in equal disorder; there are even
capitals in the middle of words, and commas too, just as in
Saknussemm's parchment."
 
I considered these remarks very clever.
 
"Now," said my uncle, looking straight at me, "to read the sentence
which you have just written, and with which I am wholly unacquainted,
I shall only have to take the first letter of each word, then the
second, the third, and so forth."
 
And my uncle, to his great astonishment, and my much greater, read:
 
     "I love you well, my own dear Gräuben!"
 
"Hallo!" cried the Professor.
 
Yes, indeed, without knowing what I was about, like an awkward and
unlucky lover, I had compromised myself by writing this unfortunate
sentence.
 
"Aha! you are in love with Gräuben?" he said, with the right look for
a guardian.
 
"Yes; no!" I stammered.
 
"You love Gräuben," he went on once or twice dreamily. "Well, let us
apply the process I have suggested to the document in question."
 
My uncle, falling back into his absorbing contemplations, had already
forgotten my imprudent words. I merely say imprudent, for the great
mind of so learned a man of course had no place for love affairs, and
happily the grand business of the document gained me the victory.
 
Just as the moment of the supreme experiment arrived the Professor's
eyes flashed right through his spectacles. There was a quivering in
his fingers as he grasped the old parchment. He was deeply moved. At
last he gave a preliminary cough, and with profound gravity, naming
in succession the first, then the second letter of each word, he
dictated me the following:
 
     mmessvnkaSenrA.icefdoK.segnittamvrtn
     ecertserrette,rotaisadva,ednecsedsadne
     lacartniiilvIsiratracSarbmvtabiledmek
     meretarcsilvcoIsleffenSnI.
 
I confess I felt considerably excited in coming to the end; these
letters named, one at a time, had carried no sense to my mind; I
therefore waited for the Professor with great pomp to unfold the
magnificent but hidden Latin of this mysterious phrase.
 
But who could have foretold the result? A violent thump made the
furniture rattle, and spilt some ink, and my pen dropped from between
my fingers.
 
"That's not it," cried my uncle, "there's no sense in it."
 
Then darting out like a shot, bowling down stairs like an avalanche,
he rushed into the Königstrasse and fled.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER IV.
 
 
 
 
 
THE ENEMY TO BE STARVED INTO SUBMISSION
 
"He is gone!" cried Martha, running out of her kitchen at the noise
of the violent slamming of doors.
 
"Yes," I replied, "completely gone."
 
"Well; and how about his dinner?" said the old servant.
 
"He won't have any."
 
"And his supper?"
 
"He won't have any."
 
"What?" cried Martha, with clasped hands.
 
"No, my dear Martha, he will eat no more. No one in the house is to
eat anything at all. Uncle Liedenbrock is going to make us all fast
until he has succeeded in deciphering an undecipherable scrawl."
 
"Oh, my dear! must we then all die of hunger?"
 
I hardly dared to confess that, with so absolute a ruler as my uncle,
this fate was inevitable.
 
The old servant, visibly moved, returned to the kitchen, moaning
piteously.
 
When I was alone, I thought I would go and tell Gräuben all about it.
But how should I be able to escape from the house? The Professor
might return at any moment. And suppose he called me? And suppose he
tackled me again with this logomachy, which might vainly have been
set before ancient Oedipus. And if I did not obey his call, who could
answer for what might happen?
 
The wisest course was to remain where I was. A mineralogist at
Besançon had just sent us a collection of siliceous nodules, which I
had to classify: so I set to work; I sorted, labelled, and arranged
in their own glass case all these hollow specimens, in the cavity of
each of which was a nest of little crystals.
 
But this work did not succeed in absorbing all my attention. That old
document kept working in my brain. My head throbbed with excitement,
and I felt an undefined uneasiness. I was possessed with a
presentiment of coming evil.
 
In an hour my nodules were all arranged upon successive shelves. Then
I dropped down into the old velvet arm-chair, my head thrown back and
my hands joined over it. I lighted my long crooked pipe, with a
painting on it of an idle-looking naiad; then I amused myself
watching the process of the conversion of the tobacco into carbon,
which was by slow degrees making my naiad into a negress. Now and
then I listened to hear whether a well-known step was on the stairs.
No. Where could my uncle be at that moment? I fancied him running
under the noble trees which line the road to Altona, gesticulating,
making shots with his cane, thrashing the long grass, cutting the
heads off the thistles, and disturbing the contemplative storks in
their peaceful solitude.
 
Would he return in triumph or in discouragement? Which would get the
upper hand, he or the secret? I was thus asking myself questions, and
mechanically taking between my fingers the sheet of paper
mysteriously disfigured with the incomprehensible succession of
letters I had written down; and I repeated to myself "What does it
all mean?"
 
I sought to group the letters so as to form words. Quite impossible!
When I put them together by twos, threes, fives or sixes, nothing
came of it but nonsense. To be sure the fourteenth, fifteenth and
sixteenth letters made the English word 'ice'; the eighty-third and
two following made 'sir'; and in the midst of the document, in the
second and third lines, I observed the words, "rots," "mutabile,"
"ira," "net," "atra."
 
"Come now," I thought, "these words seem to justify my uncle's view
about the language of the document. In the fourth line appeared the
word "luco", which means a sacred wood. It is true that in the third
line was the word "tabiled", which looked like Hebrew, and in the
last the purely French words "mer", "arc", "mere." "
 
All this was enough to drive a poor fellow crazy. Four different
languages in this ridiculous sentence! What connection could there
possibly be between such words as ice, sir, anger, cruel, sacred
wood, changeable, mother, bow, and sea? The first and the last might
have something to do with each other; it was not at all surprising
that in a document written in Iceland there should be mention of a
sea of ice; but it was quite another thing to get to the end of this
cryptogram with so small a clue. So I was struggling with an
insurmountable difficulty; my brain got heated, my eyes watered over
that sheet of paper; its hundred and thirty-two letters seemed to
flutter and fly around me like those motes of mingled light and
darkness which float in the air around the head when the blood is
rushing upwards with undue violence. I was a prey to a kind of
hallucination; I was stifling; I wanted air. Unconsciously I fanned
myself with the bit of paper, the back and front of which
successively came before my eyes. What was my surprise when, in one
of those rapid revolutions, at the moment when the back was turned to
me I thought I caught sight of the Latin words "craterem,"
"terrestre," and others.
 
A sudden light burst in upon me; these hints alone gave me the first
glimpse of the truth; I had discovered the key to the cipher. To read
the document, it would not even be necessary to read it through the
paper. Such as it was, just such as it had been dictated to me, so it
might be spelt out with ease. All those ingenious professorial
combinations were coming right. He was right as to the arrangement of
the letters; he was right as to the language. He had been within a
hair's breadth of reading this Latin document from end to end; but
that hair's breadth, chance had given it to me!
 
You may be sure I felt stirred up. My eyes were dim, I could scarcely
see. I had laid the paper upon the table. At a glance I could tell
the whole secret.
 
At last I became more calm. I made a wise resolve to walk twice round
the room quietly and settle my nerves, and then I returned into the
deep gulf of the huge armchair.
 
"Now I'll read it," I cried, after having well distended my lungs
with air.
 
I leaned over the table; I laid my finger successively upon every
letter; and without a pause, without one moment's hesitation, I read
off the whole sentence aloud.
 
Stupefaction! terror! I sat overwhelmed as if with a sudden deadly
blow. What! that which I read had actually, really been done! A
mortal man had had the audacity to penetrate! . . .
 
"Ah!" I cried, springing up. "But no! no! My uncle shall never know
it. He would insist upon doing it too. He would want to know all
about it. Ropes could not hold him, such a determined geologist as he
is! He would start, he would, in spite of everything and everybody,
and he would take me with him, and we should never get back. No,
never! never!"
 
My over-excitement was beyond all description.
 
"No! no! it shall not be," I declared energetically; "and as it is in
my power to prevent the knowledge of it coming into the mind of my
tyrant, I will do it. By dint of turning this document round and
round, he too might discover the key. I will destroy it."
 
There was a little fire left on the hearth. I seized not only the
paper but Saknussemm's parchment; with a feverish hand I was about to
fling it all upon the coals and utterly destroy and abolish this
dangerous secret, when the, study door opened, and my uncle appeared.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER V.
 
 
 
 
 
FAMINE, THEN VICTORY, FOLLOWED BY DISMAY
 
I had only just time to replace the unfortunate document upon the
table.
 
Professor Liedenbrock seemed to be greatly abstracted.
 
The ruling thought gave him no rest. Evidently he had gone deeply
into the matter, analytically and with profound scrutiny. He had
brought all the resources of his mind to bear upon it during his
walk, and he had come back to apply some new combination.
 
He sat in his armchair, and pen in hand he began what looked very
much like algebraic formula: I followed with my eyes his trembling
hands, I took count of every movement. Might not some unhoped-for
result come of it? I trembled, too, very unnecessarily, since the
true key was in my hands, and no other would open the secret.
 
For three long hours my uncle worked on without a word, without
lifting his head; rubbing out, beginning again, then rubbing out
again, and so on a hundred times.
 
I knew very well that if he succeeded in setting down these letters
in every possible relative position, the sentence would come out. But
I knew also that twenty letters alone could form two quintillions,
four hundred and thirty-two quadrillions, nine hundred and two
trillions, eight billions, a hundred and seventy-six millions, six
hundred and forty thousand combinations. Now, here were a hundred and
thirty-two letters in this sentence, and these hundred and thirty-two
letters would give a number of different sentences, each made up of
at least a hundred and thirty-three figures, a number which passed
far beyond all calculation or conception.
 
So I felt reassured as far as regarded this heroic method of solving
the difficulty.
 
But time was passing away; night came on; the street noises ceased;
my uncle, bending over his task, noticed nothing, not even Martha
half opening the door; he heard not a sound, not even that excellent
woman saying:
 
"Will not monsieur take any supper to-night?"
 
And poor Martha had to go away unanswered. As for me, after long
resistance, I was overcome by sleep, and fell off at the end of the
sofa, while uncle Liedenbrock went on calculating and rubbing out his
calculations.
 
When I awoke next morning that indefatigable worker was still at his
post. His red eyes, his pale complexion, his hair tangled between his
feverish fingers, the red spots on his cheeks, revealed his desperate
struggle with impossibilities, and the weariness of spirit, the
mental wrestlings he must have undergone all through that unhappy
night.
 
To tell the plain truth, I pitied him. In spite of the reproaches
which I considered I had a right to lay upon him, a certain feeling
of compassion was beginning to gain upon me. The poor man was so
entirely taken up with his one idea that he had even forgotten how to
get angry. All the strength of his feelings was concentrated upon one
point alone; and as their usual vent was closed, it was to be feared
lest extreme tension should give rise to an explosion sooner or later.
 
I might with a word have loosened the screw of the steel vice that
was crushing his brain; but that word I would not speak.
 
Yet I was not an ill-natured fellow. Why was I dumb at such a crisis?
Why so insensible to my uncle's interests?
 
"No, no," I repeated, "I shall not speak. He would insist upon going;
nothing on earth could stop him. His imagination is a volcano, and to
do that which other geologists have never done he would risk his
life. I will preserve silence. I will keep the secret which mere
chance has revealed to me. To discover it, would be to kill Professor
Liedenbrock! Let him find it out himself if he can. I will never have
it laid to my door that I led him to his destruction."
 
Having formed this resolution, I folded my arms and waited. But I had
not reckoned upon one little incident which turned up a few hours
after.
 
When our good Martha wanted to go to Market, she found the door
locked. The big key was gone. Who could have taken it out? Assuredly,
it was my uncle, when he returned the night before from his hurried
walk.
 
Was this done on purpose? Or was it a mistake? Did he want to reduce
us by famine? This seemed like going rather too far! What! should
Martha and I be victims of a position of things in which we had not
the smallest interest? It was a fact that a few years before this,
whilst my uncle was working at his great classification of minerals,
he was forty-eight hours without eating, and all his household were
obliged to share in this scientific fast. As for me, what I remember
is, that I got severe cramps in my stomach, which hardly suited the
constitution of a hungry, growing lad.
 
Now it appeared to me as if breakfast was going to be wanting, just
as supper had been the night before. Yet I resolved to be a hero, and
not to be conquered by the pangs of hunger. Martha took it very
seriously, and, poor woman, was very much distressed. As for me, the
impossibility of leaving the house distressed me a good deal more,
and for a very good reason. A caged lover's feelings may easily be
imagined.
 
My uncle went on working, his imagination went off rambling into the
ideal world of combinations; he was far away from earth, and really
far away from earthly wants.
 
About noon hunger began to stimulate me severely. Martha had, without
thinking any harm, cleared out the larder the night before, so that
now there was nothing left in the house. Still I held out; I made it
a point of honour.
 
Two o'clock struck. This was becoming ridiculous; worse than that,
unbearable. I began to say to myself that I was exaggerating the
importance of the document; that my uncle would surely not believe in
it, that he would set it down as a mere puzzle; that if it came to
the worst, we should lay violent hands on him and keep him at home if
he thought on venturing on the expedition that, after all, he might
himself discover the key of the cipher, and that then I should be
clear at the mere expense of my involuntary abstinence.
 
These reasons seemed excellent to me, though on the night before I
should have rejected them with indignation; I even went so far as to
condemn myself for my absurdity in having waited so long, and I
finally resolved to let it all out.
 
I was therefore meditating a proper introduction to the matter, so as
not to seem too abrupt, when the Professor jumped up, clapped on his
hat, and prepared to go out.
 
Surely he was not going out, to shut us in again! no, never!
 
"Uncle!" I cried.
 
He seemed not to hear me.
 
"Uncle Liedenbrock!" I cried, lifting up my voice.
 
"Ay," he answered like a man suddenly waking.
 
"Uncle, that key!"
 
"What key? The door key?"
 
"No, no!" I cried. "The key of the document."
 
The Professor stared at me over his spectacles; no doubt he saw
something unusual in the expression of my countenance; for he laid
hold of my arm, and speechlessly questioned me with his eyes. Yes,
never was a question more forcibly put.
 
I nodded my head up and down.
 
He shook his pityingly, as if he was dealing with a lunatic. I gave a
more affirmative gesture.
 
His eyes glistened and sparkled with live fire, his hand was shaken
threateningly.
 
This mute conversation at such a momentous crisis would have riveted
the attention of the most indifferent. And the fact really was that I
dared not speak now, so intense was the excitement for fear lest my
uncle should smother me in his first joyful embraces. But he became
so urgent that I was at last compelled to answer.
 
"Yes, that key, chance -"
 
"What is that you are saying?" he shouted with indescribable emotion.
 
"There, read that!" I said, presenting a sheet of paper on which I
had written.
 
"But there is nothing in this," he answered, crumpling up the paper.
 
"No, nothing until you proceed to read from the end to the beginning."
 
I had not finished my sentence when the Professor broke out into a
cry, nay, a roar. A new revelation burst in upon him. He was
transformed!
 
"Aha, clever Saknussemm!" he cried. "You had first written out your
sentence the wrong way."
 
And darting upon the paper, with eyes bedimmed, and voice choked with
emotion, he read the whole document from the last letter to the first.
 
It was conceived in the following terms:
 
     In Sneffels Joculis craterem quem delibat
     Umbra Scartaris Julii intra calendas descende,
     Audax viator, et terrestre centrum attinges.
     Quod feci, Arne Saknussemm. [1]
 
Which bad Latin may be translated thus:
 
"Descend, bold traveller, into the crater of the jokul of Sneffels,
which the shadow of Scartaris touches before the kalends of July, and
you will attain the centre of the earth; which I have done, Arne
Saknussemm."
 
In reading this, my uncle gave a spring as if he had touched a Leyden
jar. His audacity, his joy, and his convictions were magnificent to
behold. He came and he went; he seized his head between both his
hands; he pushed the chairs out of their places, he piled up his
books; incredible as it may seem, he rattled his precious nodules of
flints together; he sent a kick here, a thump there. At last his
nerves calmed down, and like a man exhausted by too lavish an
expenditure of vital power, he sank back exhausted into his armchair.
 
"What o'clock is it?" he asked after a few moments of silence.
 
"Three o'clock," I replied.
 
"Is it really? The dinner-hour is past, and I did not know it. I am
half dead with hunger. Come on, and after dinner -"
 
[1] In the cipher, _audax_ is written _avdas,_ and _quod_ and _quem,_
_hod_ and _ken_. (Tr.)
 
"Well?"
 
"After dinner, pack up my trunk."
 
"What?" I cried.
 
"And yours!" replied the indefatigable Professor, entering the
dining-room.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER VI.
 
 
 
 
 
EXCITING DISCUSSIONS ABOUT AN UNPARALLELED ENTERPRISE
 
At these words a cold shiver ran through me. Yet I controlled myself;
I even resolved to put a good face upon it. Scientific arguments
alone could have any weight with Professor Liedenbrock. Now there
were good ones against the practicability of such a journey.
Penetrate to the centre of the earth! What nonsense! But I kept my
dialectic battery in reserve for a suitable opportunity, and I
interested myself in the prospect of my dinner, which was not yet
forthcoming.
 
It is no use to tell of the rage and imprecations of my uncle before
the empty table. Explanations were given, Martha was set at liberty,
ran off to the market, and did her part so well that in an hour
afterwards my hunger was appeased, and I was able to return to the
contemplation of the gravity of the situation.
 
During all dinner time my uncle was almost merry; he indulged in some
of those learned jokes which never do anybody any harm. Dessert over,
he beckoned me into his study.
 
I obeyed; he sat at one end of his table, I at the other.
 
"Axel," said he very mildly; "you are a very ingenious young man, you
have done me a splendid service, at a moment when, wearied out with
the struggle, I was going to abandon the contest. Where should I have
lost myself? None can tell. Never, my lad, shall I forget it; and you
shall have your share in the glory to which your discovery will lead."
 
"Oh, come!" thought I, "he is in a good way. Now is the time for
discussing that same glory."
 
"Before all things," my uncle resumed, "I enjoin you to preserve the
most inviolable secrecy: you understand? There are not a few in the
scientific world who envy my success, and many would be ready to
undertake this enterprise, to whom our return should be the first
news of it."
 
"Do you really think there are many people bold enough?" said I.
 
"Certainly; who would hesitate to acquire such renown? If that
document were divulged, a whole army of geologists would be ready to
rush into the footsteps of Arne Saknussemm."
 
"I don't feel so very sure of that, uncle," I replied; "for we have
no proof of the authenticity of this document."
 
"What! not of the book, inside which we have discovered it?"
 
"Granted. I admit that Saknussemm may have written these lines. But
does it follow that he has really accomplished such a journey? And
may it not be that this old parchment is intended to mislead?"
 
I almost regretted having uttered this last word, which dropped from
me in an unguarded moment. The Professor bent his shaggy brows, and I
feared I had seriously compromised my own safety. Happily no great
harm came of it. A smile flitted across the lip of my severe
companion, and he answered:
 
"That is what we shall see."
 
"Ah!" said I, rather put out. "But do let me exhaust all the possible
objections against this document."
 
"Speak, my boy, don't be afraid. You are quite at liberty to express
your opinions. You are no longer my nephew only, but my colleague.
Pray go on."
 
"Well, in the first place, I wish to ask what are this Jokul, this
Sneffels, and this Scartaris, names which I have never heard before?"
 
"Nothing easier. I received not long ago a map from my friend,
Augustus Petermann, at Liepzig. Nothing could be more apropos. Take
down the third atlas in the second shelf in the large bookcase,
series Z, plate 4."
 
I rose, and with the help of such precise instructions could not fail
to find the required atlas. My uncle opened it and said:
 
"Here is one of the best maps of Iceland, that of Handersen, and I
believe this will solve the worst of our difficulties."
 
I bent over the map.
 
"You see this volcanic island," said the Professor; "observe that all
the volcanoes are called jokuls, a word which means glacier in
Icelandic, and under the high latitude of Iceland nearly all the
active volcanoes discharge through beds of ice. Hence this term of
jokul is applied to all the eruptive mountains in Iceland."
 
"Very good," said I; "but what of Sneffels?"
 
I was hoping that this question would be unanswerable; but I was
mistaken. My uncle replied:
 
"Follow my finger along the west coast of Iceland. Do you see
Rejkiavik, the capital? You do. Well; ascend the innumerable fiords
that indent those sea-beaten shores, and stop at the sixty-fifth
degree of latitude. What do you see there?"
 
"I see a peninsula looking like a thigh bone with the knee bone at
the end of it."
 
"A very fair comparison, my lad. Now do you see anything upon that
knee bone?"
 
"Yes; a mountain rising out of the sea."
 
"Right. That is Snæfell."
 
"That Snæfell?"
 
"It is. It is a mountain five thousand feet high, one of the most
remarkable in the world, if its crater leads down to the centre of
the earth."
 
"But that is impossible," I said shrugging my shoulders, and
disgusted at such a ridiculous supposition.
 
"Impossible?" said the Professor severely; "and why, pray?"
 
"Because this crater is evidently filled with lava and burning rocks,
and therefore -"
 
"But suppose it is an extinct volcano?"
 
"Extinct?"
 
"Yes; the number of active volcanoes on the surface of the globe is
at the present time only about three hundred. But there is a very
much larger number of extinct ones. Now, Snæfell is one of these.
Since historic times there has been but one eruption of this
mountain, that of 1219; from that time it has quieted down more and.
more, and now it is no longer reckoned among active volcanoes."
 
To such positive statements I could make no reply. I therefore took
refuge in other dark passages of the document.
 
"What is the meaning of this word Scartaris, and what have the
kalends of July to do with it?"
 
My uncle took a few minutes to consider. For one short moment I felt
a ray of hope, speedily to be extinguished. For he soon answered thus:
 
"What is darkness to you is light to me. This proves the ingenious
care with which Saknussemm guarded and defined his discovery.
Sneffels, or Snæfell, has several craters. It was therefore necessary
to point out which of these leads to the centre of the globe. What
did the Icelandic sage do? He observed that at the approach of the
kalends of July, that is to say in the last days of June, one of the
peaks, called Scartaris, flung its shadow down the mouth of that
particular crater, and he committed that fact to his document. Could
there possibly have been a more exact guide? As soon as we have
arrived at the summit of Snæfell we shall have no hesitation as to
the proper road to take."
 
Decidedly, my uncle had answered every one of my objections. I saw
that his position on the old parchment was impregnable. I therefore
ceased to press him upon that part of the subject, and as above all
things he must be convinced, I passed on to scientific objections,
which in my opinion were far more serious.
 
"Well, then," I said, "I am forced to admit that Saknussemm's
sentence is clear, and leaves no room for doubt. I will even allow
that the document bears every mark and evidence of authenticity. That
learned philosopher did get to the bottom of Sneffels, he has seen
the shadow of Scartaris touch the edge of the crater before the
kalends of July; he may even have heard the legendary stories told in
his day about that crater reaching to the centre of the world; but as
for reaching it himself, as for performing the journey, and
returning, if he ever went, I say no - he never, never did that."
 
"Now for your reason?" said my uncle ironically.
 
"All the theories of science demonstrate such a feat to be
impracticable."
 
"The theories say that, do they?" replied the Professor in the tone
of a meek disciple. "Oh! unpleasant theories! How the theories will
hinder. us, won't they?"
 
I saw that he was only laughing at me; but I went on all the same.
 
"Yes; it is perfectly well known that the internal temperature rises
one degree for every 70 feet in depth; now, admitting this proportion
to be constant, and the radius of the earth being fifteen hundred
leagues, there must be a temperature of 360,032 degrees at the centre
of the earth. Therefore, all the substances that compose the body of
this earth must exist there in a state of incandescent gas; for the
metals that most resist the action of heat, gold, and platinum, and
the hardest rocks, can never be either solid or liquid under such a
temperature. I have therefore good reason for asking if it is
possible to penetrate through such a medium."
 
"So, Axel, it is the heat that troubles you?"
 
"Of course it is. Were we to reach a depth of thirty miles we should
have arrived at the limit of the terrestrial crust, for there the
temperature will be more than 2372 degrees."
 
"Are you afraid of being put into a state of fusion?"
 
"I will leave you to decide that question," I answered rather
sullenly. "This is my decision," replied Professor Liedenbrock,
putting on one of his grandest airs. "Neither you nor anybody else
knows with any certainty what is going on in the interior of this
globe, since not the twelve thousandth part of its radius is known;
science is eminently perfectible; and every new theory is soon routed
by a newer. Was it not always believed until Fourier that the
temperature of the interplanetary spaces decreased perpetually? and
is it not known at the present time that the greatest cold of the
ethereal regions is never lower than 40 degrees below zero Fahr.? Why
should it not be the same with the internal heat? Why should it not,
at a certain depth, attain an impassable limit, instead of rising to
such a point as to fuse the most infusible metals?"
 
As my uncle was now taking his stand upon hypotheses, of course,
there was nothing to be said.
 
"Well, I will tell you that true savants, amongst them Poisson, have
demonstrated that if a heat of 360,000 degrees [1] existed in the
interior of the globe, the fiery gases arising from the fused matter
would acquire an elastic force which the crust of the earth would be
unable to resist, and that it would explode like the plates of a
bursting boiler."
 
"That is Poisson's opinion, my uncle, nothing more."
 
"Granted. But it is likewise the creed adopted by other distinguished
geologists, that the interior of the globe is neither gas nor water,
nor any of the heaviest minerals known, for in none of these cases
would the earth weigh what it does."
 
"Oh, with figures you may prove anything!"
 
"But is it the same with facts! Is it not known that the number of
volcanoes has diminished since the first days of creation? and if
there is central heat may we not thence conclude that it is in
process of diminution?"
 
"My good uncle, if you will enter into the legion of speculation, I
can discuss the matter no longer."
 
"But I have to tell you that the highest names have come to the
support of my views. Do you remember a visit paid to me by the
celebrated chemist, Humphry Davy, in 1825?"
 
"Not at all, for I was not born until nineteen years afterwards."
 
"Well, Humphry Davy did call upon me on his way through Hamburg. We
were long engaged in discussing, amongst other problems, the
hypothesis of the liquid structure of the terrestrial nucleus. We
were agreed that it could not be in a liquid state, for a reason
which science has never been able to confute."
 
[1] The degrees of temperature are given by Jules Verne according to
the centigrade system, for which we will in each case substitute the
Fahrenheit measurement. (Tr.)
 
"What is that reason?" I said, rather astonished.
 
"Because this liquid mass would be subject, like the ocean, to the
lunar attraction, and therefore twice every day there would be
internal tides, which, upheaving the terrestrial crust, would cause
periodical earthquakes!"
 
"Yet it is evident that the surface of the globe has been subject to
the action of fire," I replied, "and it is quite reasonable to
suppose that the external crust cooled down first, whilst the heat
took refuge down to the centre."
 
"Quite a mistake," my uncle answered. "The earth has been heated by
combustion on its surface, that is all. Its surface was composed of a
great number of metals, such as potassium and sodium, which have the
peculiar property of igniting at the mere contact with air and water;
these metals kindled when the atmospheric vapours fell in rain upon
the soil; and by and by, when the waters penetrated into the fissures
of the crust of the earth, they broke out into fresh combustion with
explosions and eruptions. Such was the cause of the numerous
volcanoes at the origin of the earth."
 
"Upon my word, this is a very clever hypothesis," I exclaimed, in
spite rather of myself.
 
"And which Humphry Davy demonstrated to me by a simple experiment. He
formed a small ball of the metals which I have named, and which was a
very fair representation of our globe; whenever he caused a fine dew
of rain to fall upon its surface, it heaved up into little
monticules, it became oxydized and formed miniature mountains; a
crater broke open at one of its summits; the eruption took place, and
communicated to the whole of the ball such a heat that it could not
be held in the hand."
 
In truth, I was beginning to be shaken by the Professor's arguments,
besides which he gave additional weight to them by his usual ardour
and fervent enthusiasm.
 
"You see, Axel," he added, "the condition of the terrestrial nucleus
has given rise to various hypotheses among geologists; there is no
proof at all for this internal heat; my opinion is that there is no
such thing, it cannot be; besides we shall see for ourselves, and,
like Arne Saknussemm, we shall know exactly what to hold as truth
concerning this grand question."
 
"Very well, we shall see," I replied, feeling myself carried off by
his contagious enthusiasm. "Yes, we shall see; that is, if it is
possible to see anything there."
 
"And why not? May we not depend upon electric phenomena to give us
light? May we not even expect light from the atmosphere, the pressure
of which may render it luminous as we approach the centre?"
 
"Yes, yes," said I; "that is possible, too."
 
"It is certain," exclaimed my uncle in a tone of triumph. "But
silence, do you hear me? silence upon the whole subject; and let no
one get before us in this design of discovering the centre of the
earth."
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER VII.
 
 
 
 
 
A WOMAN'S COURAGE
 
Thus ended this memorable seance. That conversation threw me into a
fever. I came out of my uncle's study as if I had been stunned, and
as if there was not air enough in all the streets of Hamburg to put
me right again. I therefore made for the banks of the Elbe, where the
steamer lands her passengers, which forms the communication between
the city and the Hamburg railway.
 
Was I convinced of the truth of what I had heard? Had I not bent
under the iron rule of the Professor Liedenbrock? Was I to believe
him in earnest in his intention to penetrate to the centre of this
massive globe? Had I been listening to the mad speculations of a
lunatic, or to the scientific conclusions of a lofty genius? Where
did truth stop? Where did error begin?
 
I was all adrift amongst a thousand contradictory hypotheses, but I
could not lay hold of one.
 
Yet I remembered that I had been convinced, although now my
enthusiasm was beginning to cool down; but I felt a desire to start
at once, and not to lose time and courage by calm reflection. I had
at that moment quite courage enough to strap my knapsack to my
shoulders and start.
 
But I must confess that in another hour this unnatural excitement
abated, my nerves became unstrung, and from the depths of the abysses
of this earth I ascended to its surface again.
 
"It is quite absurd!" I cried, "there is no sense about it. No
sensible young man should for a moment entertain such a proposal. The
whole thing is non-existent. I have had a bad night, I have been
dreaming of horrors."
 
But I had followed the banks of the Elbe and passed the town. After
passing the port too, I had reached the Altona road. I was led by a
presentiment, soon to be realised; for shortly I espied my little
Gräuben bravely returning with her light step to Hamburg.
 
"Gräuben!" I cried from afar off.
 
The young girl stopped, rather frightened perhaps to hear her name
called after her on the high road. Ten yards more, and I had joined
her.
 
"Axel!" she cried surprised. "What! have you come to meet me? Is this
why you are here, sir?"
 
But when she had looked upon me, Gräuben could not fail to see the
uneasiness and distress of my mind.
 
"What is the matter?" she said, holding out her hand.
 
"What is the matter, Gräuben?" I cried.
 
In a couple of minutes my pretty Virlandaise was fully informed of
the position of affairs. For a time she was silent. Did her heart
palpitate as mine did? I don't know about that, but I know that her
hand did not tremble in mine. We went on a hundred yards without
speaking.
 
At last she said, "Axel!"
 
"My dear Gräuben."
 
"That will be a splendid journey!"
 
I gave a bound at these words.
 
"Yes, Axel, a journey worthy of the nephew of a savant; it is a good
thing for a man to be distinguished by some great enterprise."
 
"What, Gräuben, won't you dissuade me from such an undertaking?"
 
"No, my dear Axel, and I would willingly go with you, but that a poor
girl would only be in your way."
 
"Is that quite true?"
 
"It is true."
 
Ah! women and young girls, how incomprehensible are your feminine
hearts! When you are not the timidest, you are the bravest of
creatures. Reason has nothing to do with your actions. What! did this
child encourage me in such an expedition! Would she not be afraid to
join it herself? And she was driving me to it, one whom she loved!
 
I was disconcerted, and, if I must tell the whole truth, I was
ashamed.
 
"Gräuben, we will see whether you will say the same thing tomorrow."
 
"To-morrow, dear Axel, I will say what I say to-day."
 
Gräuben and I, hand in hand, but in silence, pursued our way. The
emotions of that day were breaking my heart.
 
After all, I thought, the kalends of July are a long way off, and
between this and then many things may take place which will cure my
uncle of his desire to travel underground.
 
It was night when we arrived at the house in Königstrasse. I expected
to find all quiet there, my uncle in bed as was his custom, and
Martha giving her last touches with the feather brush.
 
But I had not taken into account the Professor's impatience. I found
him shouting- and working himself up amidst a crowd of porters and
messengers who were all depositing various loads in the passage. Our
old servant was at her wits' end.
 
"Come, Axel, come, you miserable wretch," my uncle cried from as far
off as he could see me. "Your boxes are not packed, and my papers are
not arranged; where's the key of my carpet bag? and what have you
done with my gaiters?"
 
I stood thunderstruck. My voice failed. Scarcely could my lips utter
the words:
 
"Are we really going?"
 
"Of course, you unhappy boy! Could I have dreamed that yon would have
gone out for a walk instead of hurrying your preparations forward?"
 
"Are we to go?" I asked again, with sinking hopes.
 
"Yes; the day after to-morrow, early."
 
I could hear no more. I fled for refuge into my own little room.
 
All hope was now at an end. My uncle had been all the morning making
purchases of a part of the tools and apparatus required for this
desperate undertaking. The passage was encumbered with rope ladders,
knotted cords, torches, flasks, grappling irons, alpenstocks,
pickaxes, iron shod sticks, enough to load ten men.
 
I spent an awful night. Next morning I was called early. I had quite
decided I would not open the door. But how was I to resist the sweet
voice which was always music to my ears, saying, "My dear Axel?"
 
I came out of my room. I thought my pale countenance and my red and
sleepless eyes would work upon Gräuben's sympathies and change her
mind.
 
"Ah! my dear Axel," she said. "I see you are better. A night's rest
has done you good."
 
"Done me good!" I exclaimed.
 
I rushed to the glass. Well, in fact I did look better than I had
expected. I could hardly believe my own eyes.
 
"Axel," she said, "I have had a long talk with my guardian. He is a
bold philosopher, a man of immense courage, and you must remember
that his blood flows in your veins. He has confided to me his plans,
his hopes, and why and how he hopes to attain his object. He will no
doubt succeed. My dear Axel, it is a grand thing to devote yourself
to science! What honour will fall upon Herr Liedenbrock, and so be
reflected upon his companion! When you return, Axel, you will be a
man, his equal, free to speak and to act independently, and free to
--"
 
The dear girl only finished this sentence by blushing. Her words
revived me. Yet I refused to believe we should start. I drew Gräuben
into the Professor's study.
 
"Uncle, is it true that we are to go?"
 
"Why do you doubt?"
 
"Well, I don't doubt," I said, not to vex him; "but, I ask, what need
is there to hurry?"
 
"Time, time, flying with irreparable rapidity."
 
"But it is only the 16th May, and until the end of June --"
 
"What, you monument of ignorance! do you think you can get to Iceland
in a couple of days? If you had not deserted me like a fool I should
have taken you to the Copenhagen office, to Liffender & Co., and you
would have learned then that there is only one trip every month from
Copenhagen to Rejkiavik, on the 22nd."
 
"Well?"
 
"Well, if we waited for the 22nd June we should be too late to see
the shadow of Scartaris touch the crater of Sneffels. Therefore we
must get to Copenhagen as fast as we can to secure our passage. Go
and pack up."
 
There was no reply to this. I went up to my room. Gräuben followed
me. She undertook to pack up all things necessary for my voyage. She
was no more moved than if I had been starting for a little trip to
Lübeck or Heligoland. Her little hands moved without haste. She
talked quietly. She supplied me with sensible reasons for our
expedition. She delighted me, and yet I was angry with her. Now and
then I felt I ought to break out into a passion, but she took no
notice and went on her way as methodically as ever.
 
Finally the last strap was buckled; I came downstairs. All that day
the philosophical instrument makers and the electricians kept coming
and going. Martha was distracted.
 
"Is master mad?" she asked.
 
I nodded my head.
 
"And is he going to take you with him?"
 
I nodded again.
 
"Where to?"
 
I pointed with my finger downward.
 
"Down into the cellar?" cried the old servant.
 
"No," I said. "Lower down than that."
 
Night came. But I knew nothing about the lapse of time.
 
"To-morrow morning at six precisely," my uncle decreed "we start."
 
At ten o'clock I fell upon my bed, a dead lump of inert matter. All
through the night terror had hold of me. I spent it dreaming of
abysses. I was a prey to delirium. I felt myself grasped by the
Professor's sinewy hand, dragged along, hurled down, shattered into
little bits. I dropped down unfathomable precipices with the
accelerating velocity of bodies falling through space. My life had
become an endless fall. I awoke at five with shattered nerves,
trembling and weary. I came downstairs. My uncle was at table,
devouring his breakfast. I stared at him with horror and disgust. But
dear Gräuben was there; so I said nothing, and could eat nothing.
 
At half-past five there was a rattle of wheels outside. A large
carriage was there to take us to the Altona railway station. It was
soon piled up with my uncle's multifarious preparations.
 
"Where's your box?" he cried.
 
"It is ready," I replied, with faltering voice.
 
"Then make haste down, or we shall lose the train."
 
It was now manifestly impossible to maintain the struggle against
destiny. I went up again to my room, and rolling my portmanteaus
downstairs I darted after him.
 
At that moment my uncle was solemnly investing Gräuben with the reins
of government. My pretty Virlandaise was as calm and collected as was
her wont. She kissed her guardian; but could not restrain a tear in
touching my cheek with her gentle lips.
 
"Gräuben!" I murmured.
 
"Go, my dear Axel, go! I am now your betrothed; and when you come
back I will be your wife."
 
I pressed her in my arms and took my place in the carriage. Martha
and the young girl, standing at the door, waved their last farewell.
Then the horses, roused by the driver's whistling, darted off at a
gallop on the road to Altona.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER VIII.
 
 
 
 
 
SERIOUS PREPARATIONS FOR VERTICAL DESCENT
 
Altona, which is but a suburb of Hamburg, is the terminus of the Kiel
railway, which was to carry us to the Belts. In twenty minutes we
were in Holstein.
 
At half-past six the carriage stopped at the station; my uncle's
numerous packages, his voluminous _impedimenta,_ were unloaded,
removed, labelled, weighed, put into the luggage vans, and at seven
we were seated face to face in our compartment. The whistle sounded,
the engine started, we were off.
 
Was I resigned? No, not yet. Yet the cool morning air and the scenes
on the road, rapidly changed by the swiftness of the train, drew me
away somewhat from my sad reflections.
 
As for the Professor's reflections, they went far in advance of the
swiftest express. We were alone in the carriage, but we sat in
silence. My uncle examined all his pockets and his travelling bag
with the minutest care. I saw that he had not forgotten the smallest
matter of detail.
 
Amongst other documents, a sheet of paper, carefully folded, bore the
heading of the Danish consulate with the signature of W.
Christiensen, consul at Hamburg and the Professor's friend. With this
we possessed the proper introductions to the Governor of Iceland.
 
I also observed the famous document most carefully laid up in a
secret pocket in his portfolio. I bestowed a malediction upon it, and
then proceeded to examine the country.
 
It was a very long succession of uninteresting loamy and fertile
flats, a very easy country for the construction of railways, and
propitious for the laying-down of these direct level lines so dear to
railway companies.
 
I had no time to get tired of the monotony; for in three hours we
stopped at Kiel, close to the sea.
 
The luggage being labelled for Copenhagen, we had no occasion to look
after it. Yet the Professor watched every article with jealous
vigilance, until all were safe on board. There they disappeared in
the hold.
 
My uncle, notwithstanding his hurry, had so well calculated the
relations between the train and the steamer that we had a whole day
to spare. The steamer _Ellenora,_ did not start until night. Thence
sprang a feverish state of excitement in which the impatient
irascible traveller devoted to perdition the railway directors and
the steamboat companies and the governments which allowed such
intolerable slowness. I was obliged to act chorus to him when he
attacked the captain of the _Ellenora_ upon this subject. The captain
disposed of us summarily.
 
At Kiel, as elsewhere, we must do something to while away the time.
What with walking on the verdant shores of the bay within which
nestles the little town, exploring the thick woods which make it look
like a nest embowered amongst thick foliage, admiring the villas,
each provided with a little bathing house, and moving about and
grumbling, at last ten o'clock came.
 
The heavy coils of smoke from the _Ellenora's_ funnel unrolled in the
sky, the bridge shook with the quivering of the struggling steam; we
were on board, and owners for the time of two berths, one over the
other, in the only saloon cabin on board.
 
At a quarter past the moorings were loosed and the throbbing steamer
pursued her way over the dark waters of the Great Belt.
 
The night was dark; there was a sharp breeze and a rough sea, a few
lights appeared on shore through the thick darkness; later on, I
cannot tell when, a dazzling light from some lighthouse threw a
bright stream of fire along the waves; and this is all I can remember
of this first portion of our sail.
 
At seven in the morning we landed at Korsor, a small town on the west
coast of Zealand. There we were transferred from the boat to another
line of railway, which took us by just as flat a country as the plain
of Holstein.
 
Three hours' travelling brought us to the capital of Denmark. My
uncle had not shut his eyes all night. In his impatience I believe he
was trying to accelerate the train with his feet.
 
At last he discerned a stretch of sea.
 
"The Sound!" he cried.
 
At our left was a huge building that looked like a hospital.
 
"That's a lunatic asylum," said one of or travelling companions.
 
Very good! thought I, just the place we want to end our days in; and
great as it is, that asylum is not big enough to contain all
Professor Liedenbrock's madness!
 
At ten in the morning, at last, we set our feet in Copenhagen; the
luggage was put upon a carriage and taken with ourselves to the
Phoenix Hotel in Breda Gate. This took half an hour, for the station
is out of the town. Then my uncle, after a hasty toilet, dragged me
after him. The porter at the hotel could speak German and English;
but the Professor, as a polyglot, questioned him in good Danish, and
it was in the same language that that personage directed him to the
Museum of Northern Antiquities.
 
The curator of this curious establishment, in which wonders are
gathered together out of which the ancient history of the country
might be reconstructed by means of its stone weapons, its cups and
its jewels, was a learned savant, the friend of the Danish consul at
Hamburg, Professor Thomsen.
 
My uncle had a cordial letter of introduction to him. As a general
rule one savant greets another with coolness. But here the case was
different. M. Thomsen, like a good friend, gave the Professor
Liedenbrock a cordial greeting, and he even vouchsafed the same
kindness to his nephew. It is hardly necessary to say the secret was
sacredly kept from the excellent curator; we were simply
disinterested travellers visiting Iceland out of harmless curiosity.
 
M. Thomsen placed his services at our disposal, and we visited the
quays with the object of finding out the next vessel to sail.
 
I was yet in hopes that there would be no means of getting to
Iceland. But there was no such luck. A small Danish schooner, the
_Valkyria_, was to set sail for Rejkiavik on the 2nd of June. The
captain, M. Bjarne, was on board. His intending passenger was so
joyful that he almost squeezed his hands till they ached. That good
man was rather surprised at his energy. To him it seemed a very
simple thing to go to Iceland, as that was his business; but to my
uncle it was sublime. The worthy captain took advantage of his
enthusiasm to charge double fares; but we did not trouble ourselves
about mere trifles. .
 
"You must be on board on Tuesday, at seven in the morning," said
Captain Bjarne, after having pocketed more dollars than were his due.
 
Then we thanked M. Thomsen for his kindness, "and we returned to the
Phoenix Hotel.
 
"It's all right, it's all right," my uncle repeated. "How fortunate
we are to have found this boat ready for sailing. Now let us have
some breakfast and go about the town."
 
We went first to Kongens-nye-Torw, an irregular square in which are
two innocent-looking guns, which need not alarm any one. Close by, at
No. 5, there was a French "restaurant," kept by a cook of the name of
Vincent, where we had an ample breakfast for four marks each (2_s_.
4_d_.).
 
Then I took a childish pleasure in exploring the city; my uncle let
me take him with me, but he took notice of nothing, neither the
insignificant king's palace, nor the pretty seventeenth century
bridge, which spans the canal before the museum, nor that immense
cenotaph of Thorwaldsen's, adorned with horrible mural painting, and
containing within it a collection of the sculptor's works, nor in a
fine park the toylike chateau of Rosenberg, nor the beautiful
renaissance edifice of the Exchange, nor its spire composed of the
twisted tails of four bronze dragons, nor the great windmill on the
ramparts, whose huge arms dilated in the sea breeze like the sails of
a ship.
 
What delicious walks we should have had together, my pretty
Virlandaise and I, along the harbour where the two-deckers and the
frigate slept peaceably by the red roofing of the warehouse, by the
green banks of the strait, through the deep shades of the trees
amongst which the fort is half concealed, where the guns are
thrusting out their black throats between branches of alder and
willow.
 
But, alas! Gräuben was far away; and I never hoped to see her again.
 
But if my uncle felt no attraction towards these romantic scenes he
was very much struck with the aspect of a certain church spire
situated in the island of Amak, which forms the south-west quarter of
Copenhagen.
 
I was ordered to direct my feet that way; I embarked on a small
steamer which plies on the canals, and in a few minutes she touched
the quay of the dockyard.
 
After crossing a few narrow streets where some convicts, in trousers
half yellow and half grey, were at work under the orders of the
gangers, we arrived at the Vor Frelsers Kirk. There was nothing
remarkable about the church; but there was a reason why its tall
spire had attracted the Professor's attention. Starting from the top
of the tower, an external staircase wound around the spire, the
spirals circling up into the sky.
 
"Let us get to the top," said my uncle.
 
"I shall be dizzy," I said.
 
"The more reason why we should go up; we must get used to it."
 
"But -"
 
"Come, I tell you; don't waste our time."
 
I had to obey. A keeper who lived at the other end of the street
handed us the key, and the ascent began.
 
My uncle went ahead with a light step. I followed him not without
alarm, for my head was very apt to feel dizzy; I possessed neither
the equilibrium of an eagle nor his fearless nature.
 
As long as we were protected on the inside of the winding staircase
up the tower, all was well enough; but after toiling up a hundred and
fifty steps the fresh air came to salute my face, and we were on the
leads of the tower. There the aerial staircase began its gyrations,
only guarded by a thin iron rail, and the narrowing steps seemed to
ascend into infinite space!
 
"Never shall I be able to do it," I said.
 
"Don't be a coward; come up, sir"; said my uncle with the coldest
cruelty.
 
I had to follow, clutching at every step. The keen air made me giddy;
I felt the spire rocking with every gust of wind; my knees began to
fail; soon I was crawling on my knees, then creeping on my stomach; I
closed my eyes; I seemed to be lost in space.
 
At last I reached the apex, with the assistance of my uncle dragging
me up by the collar.
 
"Look down!" he cried. "Look down well! You must take a lesson
 
in abysses."
 
I opened my eyes. I saw houses squashed flat as if they had all
fallen down from the skies; a smoke fog seemed to drown them. Over my
head ragged clouds were drifting past, and by an optical inversion
they seemed stationary, while the steeple, the ball and I were all
spinning along with fantastic speed. Far away on one side was the
green country, on the other the sea sparkled, bathed in sunlight. The
Sound stretched away to Elsinore, dotted with a few white sails, like
sea-gulls' wings; and in the misty east and away to the north-east
lay outstretched the faintly-shadowed shores of Sweden. All this
immensity of space whirled and wavered, fluctuating beneath my eyes.
 
But I was compelled to rise, to stand up, to look. My first lesson in
dizziness lasted an hour. When I got permission to come down and feel
the solid street pavements I was afflicted with severe lumbago.
 
"To-morrow we will do it again," said the Professor.
 
And it was so; for five days in succession, I was obliged to undergo
this anti-vertiginous exercise; and whether I would or not, I made
some improvement in the art of "lofty contemplations."
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER IX.
 
 
 
 
 
ICELAND! BUT WHAT NEXT?
 
The day for our departure arrived. The day before it our kind friend
M. Thomsen brought us letters of introduction to Count Trampe, the
Governor of Iceland, M. Picturssen, the bishop's suffragan, and M.
Finsen, mayor of Rejkiavik. My uncle expressed his gratitude by
tremendous compressions of both his hands.
 
On the 2nd, at six in the evening, all our precious baggage being
safely on board the _Valkyria,_ the captain took us into a very
narrow cabin.
 
"Is the wind favourable?" my uncle asked.
 
"Excellent," replied Captain Bjarne; "a sou'-easter. We shall pass
down the Sound full speed, with all sails set."
 
In a few minutes the schooner, under her mizen, brigantine, topsail,
and topgallant sail, loosed from her moorings and made full sail
through the straits. In an hour the capital of Denmark seemed to sink
below the distant waves, and the _Valkyria_ was skirting the coast by
Elsinore. In my nervous frame of mind I expected to see the ghost of
Hamlet wandering on the legendary castle terrace.
 
"Sublime madman!" I said, "no doubt you would approve of our
expedition. Perhaps you would keep us company to the centre of the
globe, to find the solution of your eternal doubts."
 
But there was no ghostly shape upon the ancient walls. Indeed, the
castle is much younger than the heroic prince of Denmark. It now
answers the purpose of a sumptuous lodge for the doorkeeper of the
straits of the Sound, before which every year there pass fifteen
thousand ships of all nations.
 
The castle of Kronsberg soon disappeared in the mist, as well as the
tower of Helsingborg, built on the Swedish coast, and the schooner
passed lightly on her way urged by the breezes of the Cattegat.
 
The _Valkyria_ was a splendid sailer, but on a sailing vessel you can
place no dependence. She was taking to Rejkiavik coal, household
goods, earthenware, woollen clothing, and a cargo of wheat. The crew
consisted of five men, all Danes.
 
"How long will the passage take?" my uncle asked.
 
"Ten days," the captain replied, "if we don't meet a nor'-wester in
passing the Faroes."
 
"But are you not subject to considerable delays?"
 
"No, M. Liedenbrock, don't be uneasy, we shall get there in very good
time."
 
At evening the schooner doubled the Skaw at the northern point of
Denmark, in the night passed the Skager Rack, skirted Norway by Cape
Lindness, and entered the North Sea.
 
In two days more we sighted the coast of Scotland near Peterhead,,and
the _Valkyria_ turned her lead towards the Faroe Islands, passing
between the Orkneys and Shetlands.
 
Soon the schooner encountered the great Atlantic swell; she had to
tack against the north wind, and reached the Faroes only with some
difficulty. On the 8th the captain made out Myganness, the
southernmost of these islands, and from that moment took a straight
course for Cape Portland, the most southerly point of Iceland.
 
The passage was marked by nothing unusual. I bore the troubles of the
sea pretty well; my uncle, to his own intense disgust, and his
greater shame, was ill all through the voyage.
 
He therefore was unable to converse with the captain about Snæfell,
the way to get to it, the facilities for transport, he was obliged to
put off these inquiries until his arrival, and spent all his time at
full length in his cabin, of which the timbers creaked and shook with
every pitch she took. It must be confessed he was not undeserving of
his punishment.
 
On the 11th we reached Cape Portland. The clear open weather gave us
a good view of Myrdals jokul, which overhangs it. The cape is merely
a low hill with steep sides, standing lonely by the beach.
 
The _Valkyria_ kept at some distance from the coast, taking a
westerly course amidst great shoals of whales and sharks. Soon we
came in sight of an enormous perforated rock, through which the sea
dashed furiously. The Westman islets seemed to rise out of the ocean
like a group of rocks in a liquid plain. From that time the schooner
took a wide berth and swept at a great distance round Cape
Rejkianess, which forms the western point of Iceland.
 
The rough sea prevented my uncle from coming on deck to admire these
shattered and surf-beaten coasts.
 
Forty-eight hours after, coming out of a storm which forced the
schooner to scud under bare poles, we sighted east of us the beacon
on Cape Skagen, where dangerous rocks extend far away seaward. An
Icelandic pilot came on board, and in three hours the _Valkyria_
dropped her anchor before Rejkiavik, in Faxa Bay.
 
The Professor at last emerged from his cabin, rather pale and
wretched-looking, but still full of enthusiasm, and with ardent
satisfaction shining in his eyes.
 
The population of the town, wonderfully interested in the arrival of
a vessel from which every one expected something, formed in groups
upon the quay.
 
My uncle left in haste his floating prison, or rather hospital. But
before quitting the deck of the schooner he dragged me forward, and
pointing with outstretched finger north of the bay at a distant
mountain terminating in a double peak, a pair of cones covered with
perpetual snow, he cried:
 
"Snæfell! Snæfell!"
 
Then recommending me, by an impressive gesture, to keep silence, he
went into the boat which awaited him. I followed, and presently we
were treading the soil of Iceland.
 
The first man we saw was a good-looking fellow enough, in a general's
uniform. Yet he was not a general but a magistrate, the Governor of
the island, M. le Baron Trampe himself. The Professor was soon aware
of the presence he was in. He delivered him his letters from
Copenhagen, and then followed a short conversation in the Danish
language, the purport of which I was quite ignorant of, and for a
very good reason. But the result of this first conversation was, that
Baron Trampe placed himself entirely at the service of Professor
Liedenbrock.
 
My uncle was just as courteously received by the mayor, M. Finsen,
whose appearance was as military, and disposition and office as
pacific, as the Governor's.
 
As for the bishop's suffragan, M. Picturssen, he was at that moment
engaged on an episcopal visitation in the north. For the time we must
be resigned to wait for the honour of being presented to him. But M.
Fridrikssen, professor of natural sciences at the school of
Rejkiavik, was a delightful man, and his friendship became very
precious to me. This modest philosopher spoke only Danish and Latin.
He came to proffer me his good offices in the language of Horace, and
I felt that we were made to understand each other. In fact he was the
only person in Iceland with whom I could converse at all.
 
This good-natured gentleman made over to us two of the three rooms
which his house contained, and we were soon installed in it with all
our luggage, the abundance of which rather astonished the good people
of Rejkiavik.
 
"Well, Axel," said my uncle, "we are getting on, and now the worst is
over."
 
"The worst!" I said, astonished.
 
"To be sure, now we have nothing to do but go down."
 
"Oh, if that is all, you are quite right; but after all, when we have
gone down, we shall have to get up again, I suppose?"
 
"Oh I don't trouble myself about that. Come, there's no time to lose;
I am going to the library. Perhaps there is some manuscript of
Saknussemm's there, and I should be glad to consult it."
 
"Well, while you are there I will go into the town. Won't you?"
 
"Oh, that is very uninteresting to me. It is not what is upon this
island, but what is underneath, that interests me."
 
I went out, and wandered wherever chance took me.
 
It would not be easy to lose your way in Rejkiavik. I was therefore
under no necessity to inquire the road, which exposes one to mistakes
when the only medium of intercourse is gesture.
 
The town extends along a low and marshy level, between two hills. An
immense bed of lava bounds it on one side, and falls gently towards
the sea. On the other extends the vast bay of Faxa, shut in at the
north by the enormous glacier of the Snæfell, and of which the
_Valkyria_ was for the time the only occupant. Usually the English
and French conservators of fisheries moor in this bay, but just then
they were cruising about the western coasts of the island.
 
The longest of the only two streets that Rejkiavik possesses was
parallel with the beach. Here live the merchants and traders, in
wooden cabins made of red planks set horizontally; the other street,
running west, ends at the little lake between the house of the bishop
and other non-commercial people.
 
I had soon explored these melancholy ways; here and there I got a
glimpse of faded turf, looking like a worn-out bit of carpet, or some
appearance of a kitchen garden, the sparse vegetables of which
(potatoes, cabbages, and lettuces), would have figured appropriately
upon a Lilliputian table. A few sickly wallflowers were trying to
enjoy the air and sunshine.
 
About the middle of the tin-commercial street I found the public
cemetery, inclosed with a mud wall, and where there seemed plenty of
room.
 
Then a few steps brought me to the Governor's house, a but compared
with the town hall of Hamburg, a palace in comparison with the cabins
of the Icelandic population.
 
Between the little lake and the town the church is built in the
Protestant style, of calcined stones extracted out of the volcanoes
by their own labour and at their own expense; in high westerly winds
it was manifest that the red tiles of the roof would be scattered in
the air, to the great danger of the faithful worshippers.
 
On a neighbouring hill I perceived the national school, where, as I
was informed later by our host, were taught Hebrew, English, French,
and Danish, four languages of which, with shame I confess it, I don't
know a single word; after an examination I should have had to stand
last of the forty scholars educated at this little college, and I
should have been held unworthy to sleep along with them in one of
those little double closets, where more delicate youths would have
died of suffocation the very first night.
 
In three hours I had seen not only the town but its environs. The
general aspect was wonderfully dull. No trees, and scarcely any
vegetation. Everywhere bare rocks, signs of volcanic action. The
Icelandic buts are made of earth and turf, and the walls slope
inward; they rather resemble roofs placed on the ground. But then
these roofs are meadows of comparative fertility. Thanks to the
internal heat, the grass grows on them to some degree of perfection.
It is carefully mown in the hay season; if it were not, the horses
would come to pasture on these green abodes.
 
In my excursion I met but few people. On returning to the main street
I found the greater part of the population busied in drying, salting,
and putting on board codfish, their chief export. The men looked like
robust but heavy, blond Germans with pensive eyes, conscious of being
far removed from their fellow creatures, poor exiles relegated to
this land of ice, poor creatures who should have been Esquimaux,
since nature had condemned them to live only just outside the arctic
circle! In vain did I try to detect a smile upon their lips;
sometimes by a spasmodic and involuntary contraction of the muscles
they seemed to laugh, but they never smiled.
 
Their costume consisted of a coarse jacket of black woollen cloth
called in Scandinavian lands a 'vadmel,' a hat with a very broad
brim, trousers with a narrow edge of red, and a bit of leather rolled
round the foot for shoes.
 
The women looked as sad and as resigned as the men; their faces were
agreeable but expressionless, and they wore gowns and petticoats of
dark 'vadmel'; as maidens, they wore over their braided hair a little
knitted brown cap; when married, they put around their heads a
coloured handkerchief, crowned with a peak of white linen.
 
After a good walk I returned to M. Fridrikssen's house, where I found
my uncle already in his host's company.
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER X.
 
 
 
 
 
 
INTERESTING CONVERSATIONS WITH ICELANDIC SAVANTS
 
Dinner was ready. Professor Liedenbrock devoured his portion
voraciously, for his compulsory fast on board had converted his
stomach into a vast unfathomable gulf. There was nothing remarkable
in the meal itself; but the hospitality of our host, more Danish than
Icelandic, reminded me of the heroes of old. It was evident that we
were more at home than he was himself.
 
The conversation was carried on in the vernacular tongue, which my
uncle mixed with German and M. Fridrikssen with Latin for my benefit.
It turned upon scientific questions as befits philosophers; but
Professor Liedenbrock was excessively reserved, and at every sentence
spoke to me with his eyes, enjoining the most absolute silence upon
our plans.
 
In the first place M. Fridrikssen wanted to know what success my
uncle had had at the library.
 
"Your library! why there is nothing but a few tattered books upon
almost deserted shelves."
 
"Indeed!" replied M. Fridrikssen, "why we possess eight thousand
volumes, many of them valuable and scarce, works in the old
Scandinavian language, and we have all the novelties that Copenhagen
sends us every year."
 
"Where do you keep your eight thousand volumes? For my part -"
 
"Oh, M. Liedenbrock, they are all over the country. In this icy
region we are fond of study. There is not a farmer nor a fisherman
that cannot read and does not read. Our principle is, that books,
instead of growing mouldy behind an iron grating, should be worn out
under the eyes of many readers. Therefore, these volumes are passed
from one to another, read over and over, referred to again and again;
and it often happens that they find their way back to their shelves
only after an absence of a year or two."
 
"And in the meantime," said my uncle rather spitefully, "strangers --"
 
"Well, what would you have? Foreigners have their libraries at home,
and the first essential for labouring people is that they should be
educated. I repeat to you the love of reading runs in Icelandic
blood. In 1816 we founded a prosperous literary society; learned
strangers think themselves honoured in becoming members of it. It
publishes books which educate our fellow-countrymen, and do the
country great service. If you will consent to be a corresponding
member, Herr Liedenbrock, you will be giving us great pleasure."
 
My uncle, who had already joined about a hundred learned societies,
accepted with a grace which evidently touched M. Fridrikssen.
 
"Now," said he, "will you be kind enough to tell me what books you
hoped to find in our library and I may perhaps enable you to consult
them?"
 
My uncle's eyes and mine met. He hesitated. This direct question went
to the root of the matter. But after a moment's reflection he decided
on speaking.
 
"Monsieur Fridrikssen, I wished to know if amongst your ancient books
you possessed any of the works of Arne Saknussemm?"
 
"Arne Saknussemm!" replied the Rejkiavik professor. "You mean that
learned sixteenth century savant, a naturalist, a chemist, and a
traveller?"
 
"Just so!"
 
"One of the glories of Icelandic literature and science?"
 
"That's the man."
 
"An illustrious man anywhere!"
 
"Quite so."
 
"And whose courage was equal to his genius!"
 
"I see that you know him well."
 
My uncle was bathed in delight at hearing his hero thus described. He
feasted his eyes upon M. Fridrikssen's face.
 
"Well," he cried, "where are his works?"
 
"His works, we have them not."
 
"What - not in Iceland?"
 
"They are neither in Iceland nor anywhere else."
 
"Why is that?"
 
"Because Arne Saknussemm was persecuted for heresy, and in 1573 his
books were burned by the hands of the common hangman."
 
"Very good! Excellent!" cried my uncle, to the great scandal of the
professor of natural history.
 
"What!" he cried.
 
"Yes, yes; now it is all clear, now it is all unravelled; and I see
why Saknussemm, put into the Index Expurgatorius, and compelled to
hide the discoveries made by his genius, was obliged to bury in an
incomprehensible cryptogram the secret -"
 
"What secret?" asked M. Fridrikssen, starting.
 
"Oh, just a secret which -" my uncle stammered.
 
"Have you some private document in your possession?" asked our host.
 
"No; I was only supposing a case."
 
"Oh, very well," answered M. Fridrikssen, who was kind enough not to
pursue the subject when he had noticed the embarrassment of his
friend. "I hope you will not leave our island until you have seen
some of its mineralogical wealth."
 
"Certainly," replied my uncle; "but I am rather late; or have not
others been here before me?"
 
"Yes, Herr Liedenbrock; the labours of MM. Olafsen and Povelsen,
pursued by order of the king, the researches of Troïl the scientific
mission of MM. Gaimard and Robert on the French corvette _La
Recherche,_ [1] and lately the observations of scientific men who
came in the _Reine Hortense,_ have added materially to our knowledge
of Iceland. But I assure you there is plenty left."
 
"Do you think so?" said my uncle, pretending to look very modest, and
trying to hide the curiosity was flashing out of his eyes.
 
"Oh, yes; how many mountains, glaciers, and volcanoes there are to
study, which are as yet but imperfectly known! Then, without going
any further, that mountain in the horizon. That is Snæfell."
 
"Ah!" said my uncle, as coolly as he was able, "is that Snæfell?"
 
"Yes; one of the most curious volcanoes, and the crater of which has
scarcely ever been visited."
 
"Is it extinct?"
 
"Oh, yes; more than five hundred years."
 
"Well," replied my uncle, who was frantically locking his legs
together to keep himself from jumping up in the air, "that is where I
mean to begin my geological studies, there on that Seffel - Fessel -
what do you call it?"
 
"Snæfell," replied the excellent M. Fridrikssen.
 
This part of the conversation was in Latin; I had understood every
word of it, and I could hardly conceal my amusement at seeing my
uncle trying to keep down the excitement and satisfaction which were
brimming over in every limb and every feature. He tried hard to put
on an innocent little expression of simplicity; but it looked like a
diabolical grin.
 
[1] _Recherche_ was sent out in 1835 by Admiral Duperré to learn the
fate of the lost expedition of M. de Blosseville in the _Lilloise_
which has never been heard of.
 
"Yes," said he, "your words decide me. We will try to scale that
Snæfell; perhaps even we may pursue our studies in its crater!"
 
"I am very sorry," said M. Fridrikssen, "that my engagements will not
allow me to absent myself, or I would have accompanied you myself
with both pleasure and profit."
 
"Oh, no, no!" replied my uncle with great animation, "we would not
disturb any one for the world, M. Fridrikssen. Still, I thank you
with all my heart: the company of such a talented man would have been
very serviceable, but the duties of your profession -"
 
I am glad to think that our host, in the innocence of his Icelandic
soul, was blind to the transparent artifices of my uncle.
 
"I very much approve of your beginning with that volcano, M.
Liedenbrock. You will gather a harvest of interesting observations.
But, tell me, how do you expect to get to the peninsula of Snæfell?"
 
"By sea, crossing the bay. That's the most direct way."
 
"No doubt; but it is impossible."
 
"Why? "
 
"Because we don't possess a single boat at Rejkiavik."
 
"You don't mean to say so?"
 
"You will have to go by land, following the shore. It will be longer,
but more interesting."
 
"Very well, then; and now I shall have to see about a guide."
 
"I have one to offer you."
 
"A safe, intelligent man."
 
"Yes; an inhabitant of that peninsula He is an eiderdown hunter, and
very clever. He speaks Danish perfectly."
 
"When can I see him?"
 
"To-morrow, if you like."
 
"Why not to-day?"
 
"Because he won't be here till to-morrow."
 
"To-morrow, then," added my uncle with a sigh.
 
This momentous conversation ended in a few minutes with warm
acknowledgments paid by the German to the Icelandic Professor. At
this dinner my uncle had just elicited important facts, amongst
others, the history of Saknussemm, the reason of the mysterious
document, that his host would not accompany him in his expedition,
and that the very next day a guide would be waiting upon him.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XI.
 
 
 
 
A GUIDE FOUND TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH
 
In the evening I took a short walk on the beach and returned at night
to my plank-bed, where I slept soundly all night.
 
When I awoke I heard my uncle talking at a great rate in the next
room. I immediately dressed and joined him.
 
He was conversing in the Danish language with a tall man, of robust
build. This fine fellow must have been possessed of great strength.
His eyes, set in a large and ingenuous face, seemed to me very
intelligent; they were of a dreamy sea-blue. Long hair, which would
have been called red even in England, fell in long meshes upon his
broad shoulders. The movements of this native were lithe and supple;
but he made little use of his arms in speaking, like a man who knew
nothing or cared nothing about the language of gestures. His whole
appearance bespoke perfect calmness and self-possession, not
indolence but tranquillity. It was felt at once that he would be
beholden to nobody, that he worked for his own convenience, and that
nothing in this world could astonish or disturb his philosophic
calmness.
 
I caught the shades of this Icelander's character by the way in which
he listened to the impassioned flow of words which fell from the
Professor. He stood with arms crossed, perfectly unmoved by my
uncle's incessant gesticulations. A negative was expressed by a slow
movement of the head from left to right, an affirmative by a slight
bend, so slight that his long hair scarcely moved. He carried economy
of motion even to parsimony.
 
Certainly I should never have dreamt in looking at this man that he
was a hunter; he did not look likely to frighten his game, nor did he
seem as if he would even get near it. But the mystery was explained
when M. Fridrikssen informed me that this tranquil personage was only
a hunter of the eider duck, whose under plumage constitutes the chief
wealth of the island. This is the celebrated eider down, and it
requires no great rapidity of movement to get it.
 
Early in summer the female, a very pretty bird, goes to build her
nest among the rocks of the fiords with which the coast is fringed.
After building the nest she feathers it with down plucked from her
own breast. Immediately the hunter, or rather the trader, comes and
robs the nest, and the female recommences her work. This goes on as
long as she has any down left. When she has stripped herself bare the
male takes his turn to pluck himself. But as the coarse and hard
plumage of the male has no commercial value, the hunter does not take
the trouble to rob the nest of this; the female therefore lays her
eggs in the spoils of her mate, the young are hatched, and next year
the harvest begins again.
 
Now, as the eider duck does not select steep cliffs for her nest, but
rather the smooth terraced rocks which slope to the sea, the
Icelandic hunter might exercise his calling without any inconvenient
exertion. He was a farmer who was not obliged either to sow or reap
his harvest, but merely to gather it in.
 
This grave, phlegmatic, and silent individual was called Hans Bjelke;
and he came recommended by M. Fridrikssen. He was our future guide.
His manners were a singular contrast with my uncle's.
 
Nevertheless, they soon came to understand each other. Neither looked
at the amount of the payment: the one was ready to accept whatever
was offered; the other was ready to give whatever was demanded. Never
was bargain more readily concluded.
 
The result of the treaty was, that Hans engaged on his part to
conduct us to the village of Stapi, on the south shore of the Snæfell
peninsula, at the very foot of the volcano. By land this would be
about twenty-two miles, to be done, said my uncle, in two days.
 
But when he learnt that the Danish mile was 24,000 feet long, he was
obliged to modify his calculations and allow seven or eight days for
the march.
 
Four horses were to be placed at our disposal - two to carry him and
me, two for the baggage. Hams, as was his custom, would go on foot.
He knew all that part of the coast perfectly, and promised to take us
the shortest way.
 
His engagement was not to terminate with our arrival at Stapi; he was
to continue in my uncle's service for the whole period of his
scientific researches, for the remuneration of three rixdales a week
(about twelve shillings), but it was an express article of the
covenant that his wages should be counted out to him every Saturday
at six o'clock in the evening, which, according to him, was one
indispensable part of the engagement.
 
The start was fixed for the 16th of June. My uncle wanted to pay the
hunter a portion in advance, but he refused with one word:
 
"_Efter,_" said he.
 
"After," said the Professor for my edification.
 
The treaty concluded, Hans silently withdrew.
 
"A famous fellow," cried my uncle; "but he little thinks of the
marvellous part he has to play in the future."
 
"So he is to go with us as far as --"
 
"As far as the centre of the earth, Axel."
 
Forty-eight hours were left before our departure; to my great regret
I had to employ them in preparations; for all our ingenuity was
required to pack every article to the best advantage; instruments
here, arms there, tools in this package, provisions in that: four
sets of packages in all.
 
The instruments were:
 
1. An Eigel's centigrade thermometer, graduated up to 150 degrees
(302 degrees Fahr.), which seemed to me too much or too little. Too
much if the internal heat was to rise so high, for in this case we
should be baked, not enough to measure the temperature of springs or
any matter in a state of fusion.
 
2. An aneroid barometer, to indicate extreme pressures of the
atmosphere. An ordinary barometer would not have answered the
purpose, as the pressure would increase during our descent to a point
which the mercurial barometer [1] would not register.
 
3. A chronometer, made by Boissonnas, jun., of Geneva, accurately set
to the meridian of Hamburg.
 
4. Two compasses, viz., a common compass and a dipping needle.
 
5. A night glass.
 
6. Two of Ruhmkorff's apparatus, which, by means of an electric
current, supplied a safe and handy portable light [2]
 
The arms consisted of two of Purdy's rifles and two brace of pistols.
But what did we want arms for? We had neither savages nor wild beasts
to fear, I supposed. But my uncle seemed to believe in his arsenal as
in his instruments, and more especially in a considerable quantity of
gun cotton, which is unaffected by moisture, and the explosive force
of which exceeds that of gunpowder.
 
[1] In M. Verne's book a 'manometer' is the instrument used, of which
very little is known. In a complete list of philosophical instruments
the translator cannot find the name. As he is assured by a first-rate
instrument maker, Chadburn, of Liverpool, that an aneroid can be
constructed to measure any depth, he has thought it best to furnish
the adventurous professor with this more familiar instrument. The
'manometer' is generally known as a pressure gauge. - TRANS.
 
[2] Ruhmkorff's apparatus consists of a Bunsen pile worked with
bichromate of potash, which makes no smell; an induction coil carries
the electricity generated by the pile into communication with a
lantern of peculiar construction; in this lantern there is a spiral
glass tube from which the air has been excluded, and in which remains
only a residuum of carbonic acid gas or of nitrogen. When the
apparatus is put in action this gas becomes luminous, producing a
white steady light. The pile and coil are placed in a leathern bag
which the traveller carries over his shoulders; the lantern outside
of the bag throws sufficient light into deep darkness; it enables one
to venture without fear of explosions into the midst of the most
inflammable gases, and is not extinguished even in the deepest
waters. M. Ruhmkorff is a learned and most ingenious man of science;
his great discovery is his induction coil, which produces a powerful
stream of electricity. He obtained in 1864 the quinquennial prize of
50,000 franc reserved by the French government for the most ingenious
application of electricity.
 
The tools comprised two pickaxes, two spades, a silk ropeladder,
three iron-tipped sticks, a hatchet, a hammer, a dozen wedges and
iron spikes, and a long knotted rope. Now this was a large load, for
the ladder was 300 feet long.
 
And there were provisions too: this was not a large parcel, but it
was comforting to know that of essence of beef and biscuits there
were six months' consumption. Spirits were the only liquid, and of
water we took none; but we had flasks, and my uncle depended on
springs from which to fill them. Whatever objections I hazarded as to
their quality, temperature, and even absence, remained ineffectual.
 
To complete the exact inventory of all our travelling accompaniments,
I must not forget a pocket medicine chest, containing blunt scissors,
splints for broken limbs, a piece of tape of unbleached linen,
bandages and compresses, lint, a lancet for bleeding, all dreadful
articles to take with one. Then there was a row of phials containing
dextrine, alcoholic ether, liquid acetate of lead, vinegar, and
ammonia drugs which afforded me no comfort. Finally, all the articles
needful to supply Ruhmkorff's apparatus.
 
My uncle did not forget- a supply of tobacco, coarse grained powder,
and amadou, nor a leathern belt in which he carried a sufficient
quantity of gold, silver, and paper money. Six pairs of boots and
shoes, made waterproof with a composition of indiarubber and naphtha,
were packed amongst the tools.
 
"Clothed, shod, and equipped like this," said my uncle, "there is no
telling how far we may go."
 
The 14th was wholly spent in arranging all our different articles. In
the evening we dined with Baron Tramps; the mayor of Rejkiavik, and
Dr. Hyaltalin, the first medical man of the place, being of the
party. M. Fridrikssen was not there. I learned afterwards that he and
the Governor disagreed upon some question of administration, and did
not speak to each other. I therefore knew not a single word of all
that was said at this semi-official dinner; but I could not help
noticing that my uncle talked the whole time.
 
On the 15th our preparations were all made. Our host gave the
Professor very great pleasure by presenting him with a map of Iceland
far more complete than that of Hendersen. It was the map of M. Olaf
Nikolas Olsen, in the proportion of 1 to 480,000 of the actual size
of the island, and published by the Icelandic Literary Society. It
was a precious document for a mineralogist.
 
Our last evening was spent in intimate conversation with M.
Fridrikssen, with whom I felt the liveliest sympathy; then, after the
talk, succeeded, for me, at any rate, a disturbed and restless night.
 
At five in the morning I was awoke by the neighing and pawing of four
horses under my window. I dressed hastily and came down into the
street. Hans was finishing our packing, almost as it were without
moving a limb; and yet he did his work cleverly. My uncle made more
noise than execution, and the guide seemed to pay very little
attention to his energetic directions.
 
At six o'clock our preparations were over. M. Fridrikssen shook hands
with us. My uncle thanked him heartily for his extreme kindness. I
constructed a few fine Latin sentences to express my cordial
farewell. Then we bestrode our steeds and with his last adieu M.
Fridrikssen treated me to a line of Virgil eminently applicable to
such uncertain wanderers as we were likely to be:
 
"Et quacumque viam dedent fortuna sequamur."
 
"Therever fortune clears a way,
 
Thither our ready footsteps stray."
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XII.
 
 
 
 
 
A BARREN LAND
 
We had started under a sky overcast but calm. There was no fear of
heat, none of disastrous rain. It was just the weather for tourists.
 
The pleasure of riding on horseback over an unknown country made me
easy to be pleased at our first start. I threw myself wholly into the
pleasure of the trip, and enjoyed the feeling of freedom and
satisfied desire. I was beginning to take a real share in the
enterprise.
 
"Besides," I said to myself, "where's the risk? Here we are
travelling all through a most interesting country! We are about to
climb a very remarkable mountain; at the worst we are going to
scramble down an extinct crater. It is evident that Saknussemm did
nothing more than this. As for a passage leading to the centre of the
globe, it is mere rubbish! perfectly impossible! Very well, then; let
us get all the good we can out of this expedition, and don't let us
haggle about the chances."
 
This reasoning having settled my mind, we got out of Rejkiavik.
 
Hans moved steadily on, keeping ahead of us at an even, smooth, and
rapid pace. The baggage horses followed him without giving any
trouble. Then came my uncle and myself, looking not so very
ill-mounted on our small but hardy animals.
 
Iceland is one of the largest islands in Europe. Its surface is
14,000 square miles, and it contains but 16,000 inhabitants.
Geographers have divided it into four quarters, and we were crossing
diagonally the south-west quarter, called the 'Sudvester Fjordungr.'
 
On leaving Rejkiavik Hans took us by the seashore. We passed lean
pastures which were trying very hard, but in vain, to look green;
yellow came out best. The rugged peaks of the trachyte rocks
presented faint outlines on the eastern horizon; at times a few
patches of snow, concentrating the vague light, glittered upon the
slopes of the distant mountains; certain peaks, boldly uprising,
passed through the grey clouds, and reappeared above the moving
mists, like breakers emerging in the heavens.
 
Often these chains of barren rocks made a dip towards the sea, and
encroached upon the scanty pasturage: but there was always enough
room to pass. Besides, our horses instinctively chose the easiest
places without ever slackening their pace. My uncle was refused even
the satisfaction of stirring up his beast with whip or voice. He had
no excuse for being impatient. I could not help smiling to see so
tall a man on so small a pony, and as his long legs nearly touched
the ground he looked like a six-legged centaur.
 
"Good horse! good horse!" he kept saying. "You will see, Axel, that
there is no more sagacious animal than the Icelandic horse. He is
stopped by neither snow, nor storm, nor impassable roads, nor rocks,
glaciers, or anything. He is courageous, sober, and surefooted. He
never makes a false step, never shies. If there is a river or fiord
to cross (and we shall meet with many) you will see him plunge in at
once, just as if he were amphibious, and gain the opposite bank. But
we must not hurry him; we must let him have his way, and we shall get
on at the rate of thirty miles a day."
 
"We may; but how about our guide?"
 
"Oh, never mind him. People like him get over the ground without a
thought. There is so little action in this man that he will never get
tired; and besides, if he wants it, he shall have my horse. I shall
get cramped if I don't have- a little action. The arms are all right,
but the legs want exercise."
 
We were advancing at a rapid pace. The country was already almost a
desert. Here and there was a lonely farm, called a boër built either
of wood, or of sods, or of pieces of lava, looking like a poor beggar
by the wayside. These ruinous huts seemed to solicit charity from
passers-by; and on very small provocation we should have given alms
for the relief of the poor inmates. In this country there were no
roads and paths, and the poor vegetation, however slow, would soon
efface the rare travellers' footsteps.
 
Yet this part of the province, at a very small distance from the
capital, is reckoned among the inhabited and cultivated portions of
Iceland. What, then, must other tracts be, more desert than this
desert? In the first half mile we had not seen one farmer standing
before his cabin door, nor one shepherd tending a flock less wild
than himself, nothing but a few cows and sheep left to themselves.
What then would be those convulsed regions upon which we were
advancing, regions subject to the dire phenomena of eruptions, the
offspring of volcanic explosions and subterranean convulsions?
 
We were to know them before long, but on consulting Olsen's map, I
saw that they would be avoided by winding along the seashore. In
fact, the great plutonic action is confined to the central portion of
the island; there, rocks of the trappean and volcanic class,
including trachyte, basalt, and tuffs and agglomerates associated
with streams of lava, have made this a land of supernatural horrors.
I had no idea of the spectacle which was awaiting us in the peninsula
of Snæfell, where these ruins of a fiery nature have formed a
frightful chaos.
 
In two hours from Rejkiavik we arrived at the burgh of Gufunes,
called Aolkirkja, or principal church. There was nothing remarkable
here but a few houses, scarcely enough for a German hamlet.
 
Hans stopped here half an hour. He shared with us our frugal
breakfast; answering my uncle's questions about the road and our
resting place that night with merely yes or no, except when he said
"Gardär."
 
I consulted the map to see where Gardär was. I saw there was a small
town of that name on the banks of the Hvalfiord, four miles from
Rejkiavik. I showed it to my uncle.
 
"Four miles only!" he exclaimed; "four miles out of twenty-eight.
What a nice little walk!"
 
He was about to make an observation to the guide, who without
answering resumed his place at the head, and went on his way.
 
Three hours later, still treading on the colourless grass of the
pasture land, we had to work round the Kolla fiord, a longer way but
an easier one than across that inlet. We soon entered into a
'pingstaœr' or parish called Ejulberg, from whose steeple twelve
o'clock would have struck, if Icelandic churches were rich enough to
possess clocks. But they are like the parishioners who have no
watches and do without.
 
There our horses were baited; then taking the narrow path to left
between a chain of hills and the sea, they carried us to our next
stage, the aolkirkja of Brantär and one mile farther on, to Saurboër
'Annexia,' a chapel of ease built on the south shore of the Hvalfiord.
 
It was now four o'clock, and we had gone four Icelandic miles, or
twenty-four English miles.
 
In that place the fiord was at least three English miles wide; the
waves rolled with a rushing din upon the sharp-pointed rocks; this
inlet was confined between walls of rock, precipices crowned by sharp
peaks 2,000 feet high, and remarkable for the brown strata which
separated the beds of reddish tuff. However much I might respect the
intelligence of our quadrupeds, I hardly cared to put it to the test
by trusting myself to it on horseback across an arm of the sea.
 
If they are as intelligent as they are said to be, I thought, they
won't try it. In any case, I will tax my intelligence to direct
theirs.
 
But my uncle would not wait. He spurred on to the edge. His steed
lowered his head to examine the nearest waves and stopped. My uncle,
who had an instinct of his own, too, applied pressure, and was again
refused by the animal significantly shaking his head. Then followed
strong language, and the whip; but the brute answered these arguments
with kicks and endeavours to throw his rider. At last the clever
little pony, with a bend of his knees, started from under the
Professor's legs, and left him standing upon two boulders on the
shore just like the colossus of Rhodes.
 
"Confounded brute!" cried the unhorsed horseman, suddenly degraded
into a pedestrian, just as ashamed as a cavalry officer degraded to a
foot soldier.
 
"_Färja,_" said the guide, touching his shoulder.
 
"What! a boat?"
 
"_Der,_" replied Hans, pointing to one.
 
"Yes," I cried; "there is a boat."
 
"Why did not you say so then? Well, let us go on."
 
"_Tidvatten,_" said the guide.
 
"What is he saying?"
 
"He says tide," said my uncle, translating the Danish word.
 
"No doubt we must wait for the tide."
 
"_Förbida,_" said my uncle.
 
"_Ja,_" replied Hans.
 
My uncle stamped with his foot, while the horses went on to the boat.
 
I perfectly understood the necessity of abiding a particular moment
of the tide to undertake the crossing of the fiord, when, the sea
having reached its greatest height, it should be slack water. Then
the ebb and flow have no sensible effect, and the boat does not risk
being carried either to the bottom or out to sea.
 
That favourable moment arrived only with six o'clock; when my uncle,
myself, the guide, two other passengers and the four horses, trusted
ourselves to a somewhat fragile raft. Accustomed as I was to the
swift and sure steamers on the Elbe, I found the oars of the rowers
rather a slow means of propulsion. It took us more than an hour to
cross the fiord; but the passage was effected without any mishap.
 
In another half hour we had reached the aolkirkja of Gardär
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XIII.
 
 
 
 
 
HOSPITALITY UNDER THE ARCTIC CIRCLE
 
It ought to have been night-time, but under the 65th parallel there
was nothing surprising in the nocturnal polar light. In Iceland
during the months of June and July the sun does not set.
 
But the temperature was much lower. I was cold and more hungry than
cold. Welcome was the sight of the boër which was hospitably opened
to receive us.
 
It was a peasant's house, but in point of hospitality it was equal to
a king's. On our arrival the master came with outstretched hands, and
without more ceremony he beckoned us to follow him.
 
To accompany him down the long, narrow, dark passage, would have been
impossible. Therefore, we followed, as he bid us. The building was
constructed of roughly squared timbers, with rooms on both sides,
four in number, all opening out into the one passage: these were the
kitchen, the weaving shop, the badstofa, or family sleeping-room, and
the visitors' room, which was the best of all. My uncle, whose height
had not been thought of in building the house, of course hit his head
several times against the beams that projected from the ceilings.
 
We were introduced into our apartment, a large room with a floor of
earth stamped hard down, and lighted by a window, the panes of which
were formed of sheep's bladder, not admitting too much light. The
sleeping accommodation consisted of dry litter, thrown into two
wooden frames painted red, and ornamented with Icelandic sentences. I
was hardly expecting so much comfort; the only discomfort proceeded
from the strong odour of dried fish, hung meat, and sour milk, of
which my nose made bitter complaints.
 
When we had laid aside our travelling wraps the voice of the host was
heard inviting us to the kitchen, the only room where a fire was
lighted even in the severest cold.
 
My uncle lost no time in obeying the friendly call, nor was I slack
in following.
 
The kitchen chimney was constructed on the ancient pattern; in the
middle of the room was a stone for a hearth, over it in the roof a
hole to let the smoke escape. The kitchen was also a dining-room.
 
At our entrance the host, as if he had never seen us, greeted us with
the word "_Sællvertu,_" which means "be happy," and came and kissed
us on the cheek.
 
After him his wife pronounced the same words, accompanied with the
same ceremonial; then the two placing their hands upon their hearts,
inclined profoundly before us.
 
I hasten to inform the reader that this Icelandic lady was the mother
of nineteen children, all, big and little, swarming in the midst of
the dense wreaths of smoke with which the fire on the hearth filled
the chamber. Every moment I noticed a fair-haired and rather
melancholy face peeping out of the rolling volumes of smoke - they
were a perfect cluster of unwashed angels.
 
My uncle and I treated this little tribe with kindness; and in a very
short time we each had three or four of these brats on our shoulders,
as many on our laps, and the rest between our knees. Those who could
speak kept repeating "_Sællvertu,_" in every conceivable tone; those
that could not speak made up for that want by shrill cries.
 
This concert was brought to a close by the announcement of dinner. At
that moment our hunter returned, who had been seeing his horses
provided for; that is to say, he had economically let them loose in
the fields, where the poor beasts had to content themselves with the
scanty moss they could pull off the rocks and a few meagre sea weeds,
and the next day they would not fail to come of themselves and resume
the labours of the previous day.
 
"_Sællvertu,_" said Hans.
 
Then calmly, automatically, and dispassionately he kissed the host,
the hostess, and their nineteen children.
 
This ceremony over, we sat at table, twenty-four in number, and
therefore one upon another. The luckiest had only two urchins upon
their knees.
 
But silence reigned in all this little world at the arrival of the
soup, and the national taciturnity resumed its empire even over the
children. The host served out to us a soup made of lichen and by no
means unpleasant, then an immense piece of dried fish floating in
butter rancid with twenty years' keeping, and, therefore, according
to Icelandic gastronomy, much preferable to fresh butter. Along with
this, we had 'skye,' a sort of clotted milk, with biscuits, and a
liquid prepared from juniper berries; for beverage we had a thin milk
mixed with water, called in this country 'blanda.' It is not for me
to decide whether this diet is wholesome or not; all I can say is,
that I was desperately hungry, and that at dessert I swallowed to the
very last gulp of a thick broth made from buckwheat.
 
As soon as the meal was over the children disappeared, and their
elders gathered round the peat fire, which also burnt such
miscellaneous fuel as briars, cow-dung, and fishbones. After this
little pinch of warmth the different groups retired to their
respective rooms. Our hostess hospitably offered us her assistance in
undressing, according to Icelandic usage; but on our gracefully
declining, she insisted no longer, and I was able at last to curl
myself up in my mossy bed.
 
At five next morning we bade our host farewell, my uncle with
difficulty persuading him to accept a proper remuneration; and Hans
signalled the start.
 
At a hundred yards from Gardär the soil began to change its aspect;
it became boggy and less favourable to progress. On our right the
chain of mountains was indefinitely prolonged like an immense system
of natural fortifications, of which we were following the
counter-scarp or lesser steep; often we were met by streams, which we
had to ford with great care, not to wet our packages.
 
The desert became wider and more hideous; yet from time to time we
seemed to descry a human figure that fled at our approach, sometimes
a sharp turn would bring us suddenly within a short distance of one
of these spectres, and I was filled with loathing at the sight of a
huge deformed head, the skin shining and hairless, and repulsive
sores visible through the gaps in the poor creature's wretched rags.
 
The unhappy being forbore to approach us and offer his misshapen
hand. He fled away, but not before Hans had saluted him with the
customary "_Sællvertu._"
 
"_Spetelsk,_" said he.
 
"A leper!" my uncle repeated.
 
This word produced a repulsive effect. The horrible disease of
leprosy is too common in Iceland; it is not contagious, but
hereditary, and lepers are forbidden to marry.
 
These apparitions were not cheerful, and did not throw any charm over
the less and less attractive landscapes. The last tufts of grass had
disappeared from beneath our feet. Not a tree was to be seen, unless
we except a few dwarf birches as low as brushwood. Not an animal but
a few wandering ponies that their owners would not feed. Sometimes we
could see a hawk balancing himself on his wings under the grey cloud,
and then darting away south with rapid flight. I felt melancholy
under this savage aspect of nature, and my thoughts went away to the
cheerful scenes I had left in the far south.
 
We had to cross a few narrow fiords, and at last quite a wide gulf;
the tide, then high, allowed us to pass over without delay, and to
reach the hamlet of Alftanes, one mile beyond.
 
That evening, after having forded two rivers full of trout and pike,
called Alfa and Heta, we were obliged to spend the night in a
deserted building worthy to be haunted by all the elfins of
Scandinavia. The ice king certainly held court here, and gave us all
night long samples of what he could do.
 
No particular event marked the next day. Bogs, dead levels,
melancholy desert tracks, wherever we travelled. By nightfall we had
accomplished half our journey, and we lay at Krösolbt.
 
On the 19th of June, for about a mile, that is an Icelandic mile, we
walked upon hardened lava; this ground is called in the country
'hraun'; the writhen surface presented the appearance of distorted,
twisted cables, sometimes stretched in length, sometimes contorted
together; an immense torrent, once liquid, now solid, ran from the
nearest mountains, now extinct volcanoes, but the ruins around
revealed the violence of the past eruptions. Yet here and there were
a few jets of steam from hot springs.
 
We had no time to watch these phenomena; we had to proceed on our
way. Soon at the foot of the mountains the boggy land reappeared,
intersected by little lakes. Our route now lay westward; we had
turned the great bay of Faxa, and the twin peaks of Snæfell rose
white into the cloudy sky at the distance of at least five miles.
 
The horses did their duty well, no difficulties stopped them in their
steady career. I was getting tired; but my uncle was as firm and
straight as he was at our first start. I could not help admiring his
persistency, as well as the hunter's, who treated our expedition like
a mere promenade.
 
June 20. At six p.m. we reached Büdir, a village on the sea shore;
and the guide there claiming his due, my uncle settled with him. It
was Hans' own family, that is, his uncles and cousins, who gave us
hospitality; we were kindly received, and without taxing too much the
goodness of these folks, I would willingly have tarried here to
recruit after my fatigues. But my uncle, who wanted no recruiting,
would not hear of it, and the next morning we had to bestride our
beasts again.
 
The soil told of the neighbourhood of the mountain, whose granite
foundations rose from the earth like the knotted roots of some huge
oak. We were rounding the immense base of the volcano. The Professor
hardly took his eyes off it. He tossed up his arms and seemed to defy
it, and to declare, "There stands the giant that I shall conquer."
After about four hours' walking the horses stopped of their own
accord at the door of the priest's house at Stapi.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XIV.
 
 
 
 
 
BUT ARCTICS CAN BE INHOSPITABLE, TOO
 
Stapi is a village consisting of about thirty huts, built of lava, at
the south side of the base of the volcano. It extends along the inner
edge of a small fiord, inclosed between basaltic walls of the
strangest construction.
 
Basalt is a brownish rock of igneous origin. It assumes regular
forms, the arrangement of which is often very surprising. Here nature
had done her work geometrically, with square and compass and plummet.
Everywhere else her art consists alone in throwing down huge masses
together in disorder. You see cones imperfectly formed, irregular
pyramids, with a fantastic disarrangement of lines; but here, as if
to exhibit an example of regularity, though in advance of the very
earliest architects, she has created a severely simple order of
architecture, never surpassed either by the splendours of Babylon or
the wonders of Greece.
 
I had heard of the Giant's Causeway in Ireland, and Fingal's Cave in
Staffa, one of the Hebrides; but I had never yet seen a basaltic
formation.
 
At Stapi I beheld this phenomenon in all its beauty.
 
The wall that confined the fiord, like all the coast of the
peninsula, was composed of a series of vertical columns thirty feet
high. These straight shafts, of fair proportions, supported an
architrave of horizontal slabs, the overhanging portion of which
formed a semi-arch over the sea. At. intervals, under this natural
shelter, there spread out vaulted entrances in beautiful curves, into
which the waves came dashing with foam and spray. A few shafts of
basalt, torn from their hold by the fury of tempests, lay along the
soil like remains of an ancient temple, in ruins for ever fresh, and
over which centuries passed without leaving a trace of age upon them.
 
This was our last stage upon the earth. Hans had exhibited great
intelligence, and it gave me some little comfort to think then that
he was not going to leave us.
 
On arriving at the door of the rector's house, which was not
different from the others, I saw a man shoeing a horse, hammer in
hand, and with a leathern apron on.
 
"_Sællvertu,_" said the hunter.
 
"_God dag,_" said the blacksmith in good Danish.
 
"_Kyrkoherde,_" said Hans, turning round to my uncle.
 
"The rector," repeated the Professor. "It seems, Axel, that this good
man is the rector."
 
Our guide in the meanwhile was making the 'kyrkoherde' aware of the
position of things; when the latter, suspending his labours for a
moment, uttered a sound no doubt understood between horses and
farriers, and immediately a tall and ugly hag appeared from the hut.
She must have been six feet at the least. I was in great alarm lest
she should treat me to the Icelandic kiss; but there was no occasion
to fear, nor did she do the honours at all too gracefully.
 
The visitors' room seemed to me the worst in the whole cabin. It was
close, dirty, and evil smelling. But we had to be content. The rector
did not to go in for antique hospitality. Very far from it. Before
the day was over I saw that we had to do with a blacksmith, a
fisherman, a hunter, a joiner, but not at all with a minister of the
Gospel. To be sure, it was a week-day; perhaps on a Sunday he made
amends.
 
I don't mean to say anything against these poor priests, who after
all are very wretched. They receive from the Danish Government a
ridiculously small pittance, and they get from the parish the fourth
part of the tithe, which does not come to sixty marks a year (about
£4). Hence the necessity to work for their livelihood; but after
fishing, hunting, and shoeing horses for any length of time, one soon
gets into the ways and manners of fishermen, hunters, and farriers,
and other rather rude and uncultivated people; and that evening I
found out that temperance was not among the virtues that
distinguished my host.
 
My uncle soon discovered what sort of a man he had to do with;
instead of a good and learned man he found a rude and coarse peasant.
He therefore resolved to commence the grand expedition at once, and
to leave this inhospitable parsonage. He cared nothing about fatigue,
and resolved to spend some days upon the mountain.
 
The preparations for our departure were therefore made the very day
after our arrival at Stapi. Hans hired the services of three
Icelanders to do the duty of the horses in the transport of the
burdens; but as soon as we had arrived at the crater these natives
were to turn back and leave us to our own devices. This was to be
clearly understood.
 
My uncle now took the opportunity to explain to Hans that it was his
intention to explore the interior of the volcano to its farthest
limits.
 
Hans merely nodded. There or elsewhere, down in the bowels of the
earth, or anywhere on the surface, all was alike to him. For my own
part the incidents of the journey had hitherto kept me amused, and
made me forgetful of coming evils; but now my fears again were
beginning to get the better of me. But what could I do? The place to
resist the Professor would have been Hamburg, not the foot of Snæfell.
 
One thought, above all others, harassed and alarmed me; it was one
calculated to shake firmer nerves than mine.
 
Now, thought I, here we are, about to climb Snæfell. Very good. We
will explore the crater. Very good, too, others have done as much
without dying for it. But that is not all. If there is a way to
penetrate into the very bowels of the island, if that ill-advised
Saknussemm has told a true tale, we shall lose our way amidst the
deep subterranean passages of this volcano. Now, there is no proof
that Snæfell is extinct. Who can assure us that an eruption is not
brewing at this very moment? Does it follow that because the monster
has slept since 1229 he must therefore never awake again? And if he
wakes up presently, where shall we be?
 
It was worth while debating this question, and I did debate it. I
could not sleep for dreaming about eruptions. Now, the part of
ejected scoriae and ashes seemed to my mind a very rough one to act.
 
So, at last, when I could hold out no longer, I resolved to lay the
case before my uncle, as prudently and as cautiously as possible,
just under the form of an almost impossible hypothesis.
 
I went to him. I communicated my fears to him, and drew back a step
to give him room for the explosion which I knew must follow. But I
was mistaken.
 
"I was thinking of that," he replied with great simplicity.
 
What could those words mean? - Was he actually going to listen to
reason? Was he contemplating the abandonment of his plans? This was
too good to be true.
 
After a few moments' silence, during which I dared not question him,
he resumed:
 
"I was thinking of that. Ever since we arrived at Stapi I have been
occupied with the important question you have just opened, for we
must not be guilty of imprudence."
 
"No, indeed!" I replied with forcible emphasis.
 
"For six hundred years Snæfell has been dumb; but he may speak again.
Now, eruptions are always preceded by certain well-known phenomena. I
have therefore examined the natives, I have studied external
appearances, and I can assure you, Axel, that there will be no
eruption."
 
At this positive affirmation I stood amazed and speechless.
 
"You don't doubt my word?" said my uncle. "Well, follow me."
 
I obeyed like an automaton. Coming out from the priest's house, the
Professor took a straight road, which, through an opening in the
basaltic wall, led away from the sea. We were soon in the open
country, if one may give that name to a vast extent of mounds of
volcanic products. This tract seemed crushed under a rain of enormous
ejected rocks of trap, basalt, granite, and all kinds of igneous
rocks.
 
Here and there I could see puffs and jets of steam curling up into
the air, called in Icelandic 'reykir,' issuing from thermal springs,
and indicating by their motion the volcanic energy underneath. This
seemed to justify my fears: But I fell from the height of my new-born
hopes when my uncle said:
 
"You see all these volumes of steam, Axel; well, they demonstrate
that we have nothing to fear from the fury of a volcanic eruption."
 
"Am I to believe that?" I cried.
 
"Understand this clearly," added the Professor. "At the approach of
an eruption these jets would redouble their activity, but disappear
altogether during the period of the eruption. For the elastic fluids,
being no longer under pressure, go off by way of the crater instead
of escaping by their usual passages through the fissures in the soil.
Therefore, if these vapours remain in their usual condition, if they
display no augmentation of force, and if you add to this the
observation that the wind and rain are not ceasing and being replaced
by a still and heavy atmosphere, then you may affirm that no eruption
is preparing."
 
"But -"
 
'No more; that is sufficient. When science has uttered her voice, let
babblers hold their peace.'
 
I returned to the parsonage, very crestfallen. My uncle had beaten me
with the weapons of science. Still I had one hope left, and this was,
that when we had reached the bottom of the crater it would be
impossible, for want of a passage, to go deeper, in spite of all the
Saknussemm's in Iceland.
 
I spent that whole night in one constant nightmare; in the heart of a
volcano, and from the deepest depths of the earth I saw myself tossed
up amongst the interplanetary spaces under the form of an eruptive
rock.
 
The next day, June 23, Hans was awaiting us with his companions
carrying provisions, tools, and instruments; two iron pointed sticks,
two rifles, and two shot belts were for my uncle and myself. Hans, as
a cautious man, had added to our luggage a leathern bottle full of
water, which, with that in our flasks, would ensure us a supply of
water for eight days.
 
It was nine in the morning. The priest and his tall Megæra were
awaiting us at the door. We supposed they were standing there to bid
us a kind farewell. But the farewell was put in the unexpected form
of a heavy bill, in which everything was charged, even to the very
air we breathed in the pastoral house, infected as it was. This
worthy couple were fleecing us just as a Swiss innkeeper might have
done, and estimated their imperfect hospitality at the highest price.
 
My uncle paid without a remark: a man who is starting for the centre
of the earth need not be particular about a few rix dollars.
 
This point being settled, Hans gave the signal, and we soon left
Stapi behind us.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XV.
 
 
 
 
 
SNÆFELL AT LAST
 
Snæfell is 5,000 feet high. Its double cone forms the limit of a
trachytic belt which stands out distinctly in the mountain system of
the island. From our starting point we could see the two peaks boldly
projected against the dark grey sky; I could see an enormous cap of
snow coming low down upon the giant's brow.
 
We walked in single file, headed by the hunter, who ascended by
narrow tracks, where two could not have gone abreast. There was
therefore no room for conversation.
 
After we had passed the basaltic wall of the fiord of Stapi we passed
over a vegetable fibrous peat bog, left from the ancient vegetation
of this peninsula. The vast quantity of this unworked fuel would be
sufficient to warm the whole population of Iceland for a century;
this vast turbary measured in certain ravines had in many places a
depth of seventy feet, and presented layers of carbonized remains of
vegetation alternating with thinner layers of tufaceous pumice.
 
As a true nephew of the Professor Liedenbrock, and in spite of my
dismal prospects, I could not help observing with interest the
mineralogical curiosities which lay about me as in a vast museum, and
I constructed for myself a complete geological account of Iceland.
 
This most curious island has evidently been projected from the bottom
of the sea at a comparatively recent date. Possibly, it may still be
subject to gradual elevation. If this is the case, its origin may
well be attributed to subterranean fires. Therefore, in this case,
the theory of Sir Humphry Davy, Saknussemm's document, and my uncle's
theories would all go off in smoke. This hypothesis led me to examine
with more attention the appearance of the surface, and I soon arrived
at a conclusion as to the nature of the forces which presided at its
birth.
 
Iceland, which is entirely devoid of alluvial soil, is wholly
composed of volcanic tufa, that is to say, an agglomeration of porous
rocks and stones. Before the volcanoes broke out it consisted of trap
rocks slowly upraised to the level of the sea by the action of
central forces. The internal fires had not yet forced their way
through.
 
But at a later period a wide chasm formed diagonally from south-west
to north-east, through which was gradually forced out the trachyte
which was to form a mountain chain. No violence accompanied this
change; the matter thrown out was in vast quantities, and the liquid
material oozing out from the abysses of the earth slowly spread in
extensive plains or in hillocky masses. To this period belong the
felspar, syenites, and porphyries.
 
But with the help of this outflow the thickness of the crust of the
island increased materially, and therefore also its powers of
resistance. It may easily be conceived what vast quantities of
elastic gases, what masses of molten matter accumulated beneath its
solid surface whilst no exit was practicable after the cooling of the
trachytic crust. Therefore a time would come when the elastic and
explosive forces of the imprisoned gases would upheave this ponderous
cover and drive out for themselves openings through tall chimneys.
Hence then the volcano would distend and lift up the crust, and then
burst through a crater suddenly formed at the summit or thinnest part
of the volcano.
 
To the eruption succeeded other volcanic phenomena. Through the
outlets now made first escaped the ejected basalt of which the plain
we had just left presented such marvellous specimens. We were moving
over grey rocks of dense and massive formation, which in cooling had
formed into hexagonal prisms. Everywhere around us we saw truncated
cones, formerly so many fiery mouths.
 
After the exhaustion of the basalt, the volcano, the power of which
grew by the extinction of the lesser craters, supplied an egress to
lava, ashes, and scoriae, of which I could see lengthened screes
streaming down the sides of the mountain like flowing hair.
 
Such was the succession of phenomena which produced Iceland, all
arising from the action of internal fire; and to suppose that the
mass within did not still exist in a state of liquid incandescence
was absurd; and nothing could surpass the absurdity of fancying that
it was possible to reach the earth's centre.
 
So I felt a little comforted as we advanced to the assault of Snæfell.
 
The way was growing more and more arduous, the ascent steeper and
steeper; the loose fragments of rock trembled beneath us, and the
utmost care was needed to avoid dangerous falls.
 
Hans went on as quietly as if he were on level ground; sometimes he
disappeared altogether behind the huge blocks, then a shrill whistle
would direct us on our way to him. Sometimes he would halt, pick up a
few bits of stone, build them up into a recognisable form, and thus
made landmarks to guide us in our way back. A very wise precaution in
itself, but, as things turned out, quite useless.
 
Three hours' fatiguing march had only brought us to the base of the
mountain. There Hans bid us come to a halt, and a hasty breakfast was
served out. My uncle swallowed two mouthfuls at a time to get on
faster. But, whether he liked it or not, this was a rest as well as a
breakfast hour and he had to wait till it pleased our guide to move
on, which came to pass in an hour. The three Icelanders, just as
taciturn as their comrade the hunted, never spoke, and ate their
breakfasts in silence.
 
We were now beginning to scale the steep sides of Snæfell. Its snowy
summit, by an optical illusion not unfrequent in mountains, seemed
close to us, and yet how many weary hours it took to reach it! The
stones, adhering by no soil or fibrous roots of vegetation, rolled
away from under our feet, and rushed down the precipice below with
the swiftness of an avalanche.
 
At some places the flanks of the mountain formed an angle with the
horizon of at least 36 degrees; it was impossible to climb them, and
these stony cliffs had to be tacked round, not without great
difficulty. Then we helped each other with our sticks.
 
I must admit that my uncle kept as close to me as he could; he never
lost sight of me, and in many straits his arm furnished me with a
powerful support. He himself seemed to possess an instinct for
equilibrium, for he never stumbled. The Icelanders, though burdened
with our loads, climbed with the agility of mountaineers.
 
To judge by the distant appearance of the summit of Snæfell, it would
have seemed too steep to ascend on our side. Fortunately, after an
hour of fatigue and athletic exercises, in the midst of the vast
surface of snow presented by the hollow between the two peaks, a kind
of staircase appeared unexpectedly which greatly facilitated our
ascent. It was formed by one of those torrents of stones flung up by
the eruptions, called 'sting' by the Icelanders. If this torrent had
not been arrested in its fall by the formation of the sides of the
mountain, it would have gone on to the sea and formed more islands.
 
Such as it was, it did us good service. The steepness increased, but
these stone steps allowed us to rise with facility, and even with
such rapidity that, having rested for a moment while my companions
continued their ascent, I perceived them already reduced by distance
to microscopic dimensions.
 
At seven we had ascended the two thousand steps of this grand
staircase, and we had attained a bulge in the mountain, a kind of bed
on which rested the cone proper of the crater.
 
Three thousand two hundred feet below us stretched the sea. We had
passed the limit of perpetual snow, which, on account of the moisture
of the climate, is at a greater elevation in Iceland than the high
latitude would give reason to suppose. The cold was excessively keen.
The wind was blowing violently. I was exhausted. The Professor saw
that my limbs were refusing to perform their office, and in spite of
his impatience he decided on stopping. He therefore spoke to the
hunter, who shook his head, saying:
 
"_Ofvanför._"
 
"It seems we must go higher," said my uncle.
 
Then he asked Hans for his reason.
 
"_Mistour,_" replied the guide.
 
"_Ja Mistour,_" said one of the Icelanders in a tone of alarm.
 
"What does that word mean?" I asked uneasily.
 
"Look!" said my uncle.
 
I looked down upon the plain. An immense column of pulverized pumice,
sand and dust was rising with a whirling circular motion like a
waterspout; the wind was lashing it on to that side of Snæfell where
we were holding on; this dense veil, hung across the sun, threw a
deep shadow over the mountain. If that huge revolving pillar sloped
down, it would involve us in its whirling eddies. This phenomenon,
which is not unfrequent when the wind blows from the glaciers, is
called in Icelandic 'mistour.'
 
"_Hastigt! hastigt!_" cried our guide.
 
Without knowing Danish I understood at once that we must follow Hans
at the top of our speed. He began to circle round the cone of the
crater, but in a diagonal direction so as to facilitate our progress.
Presently the dust storm fell upon the mountain, which quivered under
the shock; the loose stones, caught with the irresistible blasts of
wind, flew about in a perfect hail as in an eruption. Happily we were
on the opposite side, and sheltered from all harm. But for the
precaution of our guide, our mangled bodies, torn and pounded into
fragments, would have been carried afar like the ruins hurled along
by some unknown meteor.
 
Yet Hans did not think it prudent to spend the night upon the sides
of the cone. We continued our zigzag climb. The fifteen hundred
remaining feet took us five hours to clear; the circuitous route, the
diagonal and the counter marches, must have measured at least three
leagues. I could stand it no longer. I was yielding to the effects of
hunger and cold. The rarefied air scarcely gave play to the action of
my lungs.
 
At last, at eleven in the sunlight night, the summit of Snæfell was
reached, and before going in for shelter into the crater I had time
to observe the midnight sun, at his lowest point, gilding with his
pale rays the island that slept at my feet.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XVI.
 
 
 
 
 
BOLDLY DOWN THE CRATER
 
Supper was rapidly devoured, and the little company housed themselves
as best they could. The bed was hard, the shelter not very
substantial, and our position an anxious one, at five thousand feet
above the sea level. Yet I slept particularly well; it was one of the
best nights I had ever had, and I did not even dream.
 
Next morning we awoke half frozen by the sharp keen air, but with the
light of a splendid sun. I rose from my granite bed and went out to
enjoy the magnificent spectacle that lay unrolled before me.
 
I stood on the very summit of the southernmost of Snæfell's peaks.
The range of the eye extended over the whole island. By an optical
law which obtains at all great heights, the shores seemed raised and
the centre depressed. It seemed as if one of Helbesmer's raised maps
lay at my feet. I could see deep valleys intersecting each other in
every direction, precipices like low walls, lakes reduced to ponds,
rivers abbreviated into streams. On my right were numberless glaciers
and innumerable peaks, some plumed with feathery clouds of smoke. The
undulating surface of these endless mountains, crested with sheets of
snow, reminded one of a stormy sea. If I looked westward, there the
ocean lay spread out in all its magnificence, like a mere
continuation of those flock-like summits. The eye could hardly tell
where the snowy ridges ended and the foaming waves began.
 
I was thus steeped in the marvellous ecstasy which all high summits
develop in the mind; and now without giddiness, for I was beginning
to be accustomed to these sublime aspects of nature. My dazzled eyes
were bathed in the bright flood of the solar rays. I was forgetting
where and who I was, to live the life of elves and sylphs, the
fanciful creation of Scandinavian superstitions. I felt intoxicated
with the sublime pleasure of lofty elevations without thinking of the
profound abysses into which I was shortly to be plunged. But I was
brought back to the realities of things by the arrival of Hans and
the Professor, who joined me on the summit.
 
My uncle pointed out to me in the far west a light steam or mist, a
semblance of land, which bounded the distant horizon of waters.
 
"Greenland!" said he.
 
"Greenland?" I cried.
 
"Yes; we are only thirty-five leagues from it; and during thaws the
white bears, borne by the ice fields from the north, are carried even
into Iceland. But never mind that. Here we are at the top of Snæfell
and here are two peaks, one north and one south. Hans will tell us
the name of that on which we are now standing."
 
The question being put, Hans replied:
 
"Scartaris."
 
My uncle shot a triumphant glance at me.
 
"Now for the crater!" he cried.
 
The crater of Snæfell resembled an inverted cone, the openingof which
might be half a league in diameter. Its depth appeared to be about
two thousand feet. Imagine the aspect of such a reservoir, brim full
and running over with liquid fire amid the rolling thunder. The
bottom of the funnel was about 250 feet in circuit, so that the
gentle slope allowed its lower brim to be reached without much
difficulty. Involuntarily I compared the whole crater to an enormous
erected mortar, and the comparison put me in a terrible fright.
 
"What madness," I thought, "to go down into a mortar, perhaps a
loaded mortar, to be shot up into the air at a moment's notice!"
 
But I did not try to back out of it. Hans with perfect coolness
resumed the lead, and I followed him without a word.
 
In order to facilitate the descent, Hans wound his way down the cone
by a spiral path. Our route lay amidst eruptive rocks, some of which,
shaken out of their loosened beds, rushed bounding down the abyss,
and in their fall awoke echoes remarkable for their loud and
well-defined sharpness.
 
In certain parts of the cone there were glaciers. Here Hans advanced
only with extreme precaution, sounding his way with his iron-pointed
pole, to discover any crevasses in it. At particularly dubious
passages we were obliged to connect ourselves with each other by a
long cord, in order that any man who missed his footing might be held
up by his companions. This solid formation was prudent, but did not
remove all danger.
 
Yet, notwithstanding the difficulties of the descent, down steeps
unknown to the guide, the journey was accomplished without accidents,
except the loss of a coil of rope, which escaped from the hands of an
Icelander, and took the shortest way to the bottom of the abyss.
 
At mid-day we arrived. I raised my head and saw straight above me the
upper aperture of the cone, framing a bit of sky of very small
circumference, but almost perfectly round. Just upon the edge
appeared the snowy peak of Saris, standing out sharp and clear
against endless space.
 
At the bottom of the crater were three chimneys, through which, in
its eruptions, Snæfell had driven forth fire and lava from its
central furnace. Each of these chimneys was a hundred feet in
diameter. They gaped before us right in our path. I had not the
courage to look down either of them. But Professor Liedenbrock had
hastily surveyed all three; he was panting, running from one to the
other, gesticulating, and uttering incoherent expressions. Hans and
his comrades, seated upon loose lava rocks, looked at him with asmuch
wonder as they knew how to express, and perhaps taking him for an
escaped lunatic.
 
Suddenly my uncle uttered a cry. I thought his foot must have slipped
and that he had fallen down one of the holes. But, no; I saw him,
with arms outstretched and legs straddling wide apart, erect before a
granite rock that stood in the centre of the crater, just like a
pedestal made ready to receive a statue of Pluto. He stood like a man
stupefied, but the stupefaction soon gave way to delirious rapture.
 
"Axel, Axel," he cried. "Come, come!"
 
I ran. Hans and the Icelanders never stirred.
 
"Look!" cried the Professor.
 
And, sharing his astonishment, but I think not his joy, I read on the
western face of the block, in Runic characters, half mouldered away
with lapse of ages, this thrice-accursed name:
 
[At this point a Runic text appears]
 
"Arne Saknussemm!" replied my uncle. "Do you yet doubt?"
 
I made no answer; and I returned in silence to my lava seat in a
state of utter speechless consternation. Here was crushing evidence.
 
How long I remained plunged in agonizing reflections I cannot tell;
all that I know is, that on raising my head again, I saw only my
uncle and Hans at the bottom of the crater. The Icelanders had been
dismissed, and they were now descending the outer slopes of Snæfell
to return to Stapi.
 
Hans slept peaceably at the foot of a rock, in a lava bed, where he
had found a suitable couch for himself; but my uncle was pacing
around the bottom of the crater like a wild beast in a cage. I had
neither the wish nor the strength to rise, and following the guide's
example I went off into an unhappy slumber, fancying I could hear
ominous noises or feel tremblings within the recesses of the mountain.
 
Thus the first night in the crater passed away.
 
The next morning, a grey, heavy, cloudy sky seemed to droop over the
summit of the cone. I did not know this first from the appearances of
nature, but I found it out by my uncle's impetuous wrath.
 
I soon found out the cause, and hope dawned again in my heart. For
this reason.
 
Of the three ways open before us, one had been taken by Saknussemm.
The indications of the learned Icelander hinted at in the cryptogram,
pointed to this fact that the shadow of Scartaris came to touch that
particular way during the latter days of the month of June.
 
That sharp peak might hence be considered as the gnomon of a vast sun
dial, the shadow projected from which on a certain day would point
out the road to the centre of the earth.
 
Now, no sun no shadow, and therefore no guide. Here was June 25. If
the sun was clouded for six days we must postpone our visit till next
year.
 
My limited powers of description would fail, were I to attempt a
picture of the Professor's angry impatience. The day wore on, and no
shadow came to lay itself along the bottom of the crater. Hans did
not move from the spot he had selected; yet he must be asking himself
what were we waiting for, if he asked himself anything at all. My
uncle spoke not a word to me. His gaze, ever directed upwards, was
lost in the grey and misty space beyond.
 
On the 26th nothing yet. Rain mingled with snow was falling all day
long. Hans built a but of pieces of lava. I felt a malicious pleasure
in watching the thousand rills and cascades that came tumbling down
the sides of the cone, and the deafening continuous din awaked by
every stone against which they bounded.
 
My uncle's rage knew no bounds. It was enough to irritate a meeker
man than he; for it was foundering almost within the port.
 
But Heaven never sends unmixed grief, and for Professor Liedenbrock
there was a satisfaction in store proportioned to his desperate
anxieties.
 
The next day the sky was again overcast; but on the 29th of June, the
last day but one of the month, with the change of the moon came a
change of weather. The sun poured a flood of light down the crater.
Every hillock, every rock and stone, every projecting surface, had
its share of the beaming torrent, and threw its shadow on the ground.
Amongst them all, Scartaris laid down his sharp-pointed angular
shadow which began to move slowly in the opposite direction to that
of the radiant orb.
 
My uncle turned too, and followed it.
 
At noon, being at its least extent, it came and softly fell upon the
edge of the middle chimney.
 
"There it is! there it is!" shouted the Professor.
 
"Now for the centre of the globe!" he added in Danish.
 
I looked at Hans, to hear what he would say.
 
"_Forüt!_" was his tranquil answer.
 
"Forward!" replied my uncle.
 
It was thirteen minutes past one.
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XVII.
 
 
 
 
 
VERTICAL DESCENT
 
Now began our real journey. Hitherto our toil had overcome all
difficulties, now difficulties would spring up at every step.
 
I had not yet ventured to look down the bottomless pit into which I
was about to take a plunge The supreme hour had come. I might now
either share in the enterprise or refuse to move forward. But I was
ashamed to recoil in the presence of the hunter. Hans accepted the
enterprise with such calmness, such indifference, such perfect
disregard of any possible danger that I blushed at the idea of being
less brave than he. If I had been alone I might have once more tried
the effect of argument; but in the presence of the guide I held my
peace; my heart flew back to my sweet Virlandaise, and I approached
the central chimney.
 
I have already mentioned that it was a hundred feet in diameter, and
three hundred feet round. I bent over a projecting rock and gazed
down. My hair stood on end with terror. The bewildering feeling of
vacuity laid hold upon me. I felt my centre of gravity shifting its
place, and giddiness mounting into my brain like drunkenness. There
is nothing more treacherous than this attraction down deep abysses. I
was just about to drop down, when a hand laid hold of me. It was that
of Hans. I suppose I had not taken as many lessons on gulf
exploration as I ought to have done in the Frelsers Kirk at
Copenhagen.
 
But, however short was my examination of this well, I had taken some
account of its conformation. Its almost perpendicular walls were
bristling with innumerable projections which would facilitate the
descent. But if there was no want of steps, still there was no rail.
A rope fastened to the edge of the aperture might have helped us
down. But how were we to unfasten it, when arrived at the other end?
 
My uncle employed a very simple expedient to obviate this difficulty.
He uncoiled a cord of the thickness of a finger, and four hundred
feet long; first he dropped half of it down, then he passed it round
a lava block that projected conveniently, and threw the other half
down the chimney. Each of us could then descend by holding with the
hand both halves of the rope, which would not be able to unroll
itself from its hold; when two hundred feet down, it would be easy to
get possession of the whole of the rope by letting one end go and
pulling down by the other. Then the exercise would go on again _ad
infinitum_.
 
"Now," said my uncle, after having completed these preparations, "now
let us look to our loads. I will divide them into three lots; each of
us will strap one upon his back. I mean only fragile articles."
 
Of course, we were not included under that head.
 
"Hans," said he, "will take charge of the tools and a portion of the
provisions; you, Axel, will take another third of the provisions, and
the arms; and I will take the rest of the provisions and the delicate
instruments."
 
"But," said I, "the clothes, and that mass of ladders and ropes, what
is to become of them?"
 
"They will go down by themselves."
 
"How so?" I asked.
 
"You will see presently."
 
My uncle was always willing to employ magnificent resources. Obeying
orders, Hans tied all the non-fragile articles in one bundle, corded
them firmly, and sent them bodily down the gulf before us.
 
I listened to the dull thuds of the descending bale. My uncle,
leaning over the abyss, followed the descent of the luggage with a
satisfied nod, and only rose erect when he had quite lost sight of it.
 
"Very well, now it is our turn."
 
Now I ask any sensible man if it was possible to hear those words
without a shudder.
 
The Professor fastened his package of instruments upon his shoulders;
Hans took the tools; I took the arms: and the descent commenced in
the following order; Hans, my uncle, and myself. It was effected in
profound silence, broken only by the descent of loosened stones down
the dark gulf.
 
I dropped as it were, frantically clutching the double cord with one
hand and buttressing myself from the wall with the other by means of
my stick. One idea overpowered me almost, fear lest the rock should
give way from which I was hanging. This cord seemed a fragile thing
for three persons to be suspended from. I made as little use of it as
possible, performing wonderful feats of equilibrium upon the lava
projections which my foot seemed to catch hold of like a hand.
 
When one of these slippery steps shook under the heavier form of
Hans, he said in his tranquil voice:
 
"_Gif akt!_ "
 
"Attention!" repeated my uncle.
 
In half an hour we were standing upon the surface of a rock jammed in
across the chimney from one side to the other.
 
Hans pulled the rope by one of its ends, the other rose in the air;
after passing the higher rock it came down again, bringing with it a
rather dangerous shower of bits of stone and lava.
 
Leaning over the edge of our narrow standing ground, I observed that
the bottom of the hole was still invisible.
 
The same manœuvre was repeated with the cord, and half an hour after
we had descended another two hundred feet.
 
I don't suppose the maddest geologist under such circumstances would
have studied the nature of the rocks that we were passing. I am sure
I did trouble my head about them. Pliocene, miocene, eocene,
cretaceous, jurassic, triassic, permian, carboniferous, devonian,
silurian, or primitive was all one to me. But the Professor, no
doubt, was pursuing his observations or taking notes, for in one of
our halts he said to me:
 
"The farther I go the more confidence I feel. The order of these
volcanic formations affords the strongest confirmation to the
theories of Davy. We are now among the primitive rocks, upon which
the chemical operations took place which are produced by the contact
of elementary bases of metals with water. I repudiate the notion of
central heat altogether. We shall see further proof of that very
soon."
 
No variation, always the same conclusion. Of course, I was not
inclined to argue. My silence was taken for consent and the descent
went on.
 
Another three hours, and I saw no bottom to the chimney yet. When I
lifted my head I perceived the gradual contraction of its aperture.
Its walls, by a gentle incline, were drawing closer to each other,
and it was beginning to grow darker.
 
Still we kept descending. It seemed to me that the falling stones
were meeting with an earlier resistance, and that the concussion gave
a more abrupt and deadened sound.
 
As I had taken care to keep an exact account of our manœuvres with
the rope, which I knew that we had repeated fourteen times, each
descent occupying half an hour, the conclusion was easy that we had
been seven hours, plus fourteen quarters of rest, making ten hours
and a half. We had started at one, it must therefore now be eleven
o'clock; and the depth to which we had descended was fourteen times
200 feet, or 2,800 feet.
 
At this moment I heard the voice of Hans.
 
"Halt!" he cried.
 
I stopped short just as I was going to place my feet upon my uncle's
head.
 
"We are there," he cried.
 
"Where?" said I, stepping near to him.
 
"At the bottom of the perpendicular chimney," he answered.
 
"Is there no way farther?"
 
"Yes; there is a sort of passage which inclines to the right. We will
see about that to-morrow. Let us have our supper, and go to sleep."
 
The darkness was not yet complete. The provision case was opened; we
refreshed ourselves, and went to sleep as well as we could upon a bed
of stones and lava fragments.
 
When lying on my back, I opened my eyes and saw a bright sparkling
point of light at the extremity of the gigantic tube 3,000 feet long,
now a vast telescope.
 
It was a star which, seen from this depth, had lost all
scintillation, and which by my computation should be  46; _Ursa
minor._ Then I fell fast asleep.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XVIII.
 
 
 
 
THE WONDERS OF TERRESTRIAL DEPTHS
 
At eight in the morning a ray of daylight came to wake us up. The
thousand shining surfaces of lava on the walls received it on its
passage, and scattered it like a shower of sparks.
 
There was light enough to distinguish surrounding objects.
 
"Well, Axel, what do you say to it?" cried my uncle, rubbing his
hands. "Did you ever spend a quieter night in our little house at
Königsberg? No noise of cart wheels, no cries of basket women, no
boatmen shouting!"
 
"No doubt it is very quiet at the bottom of this well, but there is
something alarming in the quietness itself."
 
"Now come!" my uncle cried; "if you are frightened already, what will
you be by and by? We have not gone a single inch yet into the bowels
of the earth."
 
"What do you mean?"
 
"I mean that we have only reached the level of the island. long
vertical tube, which terminates at the mouth of the crater, has its
lower end only at the level of the sea."
 
"Are you sure of that?"
 
"Quite sure. Consult the barometer."
 
In fact, the mercury, which had risen in the instrument as fast as we
descended, had stopped at twenty-nine inches.
 
"You see," said the Professor, "we have now only the pressure of our
atmosphere, and I shall be glad when the aneroid takes the place of
the barometer."
 
And in truth this instrument would become useless as soon as the
weight of the atmosphere should exceed the pressure ascertained at
the level of the sea.
 
"But," I said, "is there not reason to fear that this ever-increasing
pressure will become at last very painful to bear?"
 
"No; we shall descend at a slow rate, and our lungs will become
inured to a denser atmosphere. Aeronauts find the want of air as they
rise to high elevations, but we shall perhaps have too much: of the
two, this is what I should prefer. Don't let us lose a moment. Where
is the bundle we sent down before us?"
 
I then remembered that we had searched for it in vain the evening
before. My uncle questioned Hans, who, after having examined
attentively with the eye of a huntsman, replied:
 
"_Der huppe!_"
 
"Up there."
 
And so it was. The bundle had been caught by a projection a hundred
feet above us. Immediately the Icelander climbed up like a cat, and
in a few minutes the package was in our possession.
 
"Now," said my uncle, "let us breakfast; but we must lay in a good
stock, for we don't know how long we may have to go on."
 
The biscuit and extract of meat were washed down with a draught of
water mingled with a little gin.
 
Breakfast over, my uncle drew from his pocket a small notebook,
intended for scientific observations. He consulted his instruments,
and recorded:
 
"Monday, July 1.
 
"Chronometer, 8.17 a.m.; barometer, 297 in.; thermometer, 6° (43°
F.). Direction, E.S.E."
 
This last observation applied to the dark gallery, and was indicated
by the compass.
 
"Now, Axel," cried the Professor with enthusiasm, "now we are really
going into the interior of the earth. At this precise moment the
journey commences."
 
So saying, my uncle took in one hand Ruhmkorff's apparatus, which was
hanging from his neck; and with the other he formed an electric
communication with the coil in the lantern, and a sufficiently bright
light dispersed the darkness of the passage.
 
Hans carried the other apparatus, which was also put into action.
This ingenious application of electricity would enable us to go on
for a long time by creating an artificial light even in the midst of
the most inflammable gases.
 
"Now, march!" cried my uncle.
 
Each shouldered his package. Hans drove before him the load of cords
and clothes; and, myself walking last, we entered the gallery.
 
At the moment of becoming engulfed in this dark gallery, I raised my
head, and saw for the last time through the length of that vast tube
the sky of Iceland, which I was never to behold again.
 
The lava, in the last eruption of 1229, had forced a passage through
this tunnel. It still lined the walls with a thick and glistening
coat. The electric light was here intensified a hundredfold by
reflection.
 
The only difficulty in proceeding lay in not sliding too fast down an
incline of about forty-five degrees; happily certain asperities and a
few blisterings here and there formed steps, and we descended,
letting our baggage slip before us from the end of a long rope.
 
But that which formed steps under our feet became stalactites
overhead. The lava, which was porous in many places, had formed a
surface covered with small rounded blisters; crystals of opaque
quartz, set with limpid tears of glass, and hanging like clustered
chandeliers from the vaulted roof, seemed as it were to kindle and
form a sudden illumination as we passed on our way. It seemed as if
the genii of the depths were lighting up their palace to receive
their terrestrial guests.
 
"It is magnificent!" I cried spontaneously. "My uncle, what a sight!
Don't you admire those blending hues of lava, passing from reddish
brown to bright yellow by imperceptible shades? And these crystals
are just like globes of light."
 
"Ali, you think so, do you, Axel, my boy? Well, you will see greater
splendours than these, I hope. Now let us march: march!"
 
He had better have said slide, for we did nothing but drop down the
steep inclines. It was the facifs _descensus Averni_ of Virgil. The
compass, which I consulted frequently, gave our direction as
southeast with inflexible steadiness. This lava stream deviated
neither to the right nor to the left.
 
Yet there was no sensible increase of temperature. This justified
Davy's theory, and more than once I consulted the thermometer with
surprise. Two hours after our departure it only marked 10° (50°
Fahr.), an increase of only 4°. This gave reason for believing that
our descent was more horizontal than vertical. As for the exact depth
reached, it was very easy to ascertain that; the Professor measured
accurately the angles of deviation and inclination on the road, but
he kept the results to himself.
 
About eight in the evening he signalled to stop. Hans sat down at
once. The lamps were hung upon a projection in the lava; we were in a
sort of cavern where there was plenty of air. Certain puffs of air
reached us. What atmospheric disturbance was the cause of them? I
could not answer that question at the moment. Hunger and fatigue made
me incapable of reasoning. A descent of seven hours consecutively is
not made without considerable expenditure of strength. I was
exhausted. The order to 'halt' therefore gave me pleasure. Hans laid
our provisions upon a block of lava, and we ate with a good appetite.
But one thing troubled me, our supply of water was half consumed. My
uncle reckoned upon a fresh supply from subterranean sources, but
hitherto we had met with none. I could not help drawing his attention
to this circumstance.
 
"Are you surprised at this want of springs?" he said.
 
"More than that, I am anxious about it; we have only water enough for
five days."
 
"Don't be uneasy, Axel, we shall find more than we want."
 
"When?"
 
"When we have left this bed of lava behind us. How could springs
break through such walls as these?"
 
"But perhaps this passage runs to a very great depth. It seems to me
that we have made no great progress vertically."
 
"Why do you suppose that?"
 
"Because if we had gone deep into the crust of earth, we should have
encountered greater heat."
 
"According to your system," said my uncle. "But what does the
thermometer say?"
 
"Hardly fifteen degrees (59° Fahr), nine degrees only since our
departure."
 
"Well, what is your conclusion?"
 
"This is my conclusion. According to exact observations, the increase
of temperature in the interior of the globe advances at the rate of
one degree (1 4/5° Fahr.) for every hundred feet. But certain local
conditions may modify this rate. Thus at Yakoutsk in Siberia the
increase of a degree is ascertained to be reached every 36 feet. This
difference depends upon the heat-conducting power of the rocks.
Moreover, in the neighbourhood of an extinct volcano, through gneiss,
it has been observed that the increase of a degree is only attained
at every 125 feet. Let us therefore assume this last hypothesis as
the most suitable to our situation, and calculate."
 
"Well, do calculate, my boy."
 
"Nothing is easier," said I, putting down figures in my note book.
"Nine times a hundred and twenty-five feet gives a depth of eleven
hundred and twenty-five feet."
 
"Very accurate indeed."
 
"Well?"
 
"By my observation we are at 10,000 feet below the level of the sea."
 
"Is that possible?"
 
"Yes, or figures are of no use."
 
The Professor's calculations were quite correct. We had already
attained a depth of six thousand feet beyond that hitherto reached by
the foot of man, such as the mines of Kitz Bahl in Tyrol, and those
of Wuttembourg in Bohemia.
 
The temperature, which ought to have been 81° (178° Fahr.) was
scarcely 15° (59° Fahr.). Here was cause for reflection.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XIX.
 
 
 
 
 
GEOLOGICAL STUDIES IN SITU
 
Next day, Tuesday, June 30, at 6 a.m., the descent began again.
 
We were still following the gallery of lava, a real natural
staircase, and as gently sloping as those inclined planes which in
some old houses are still found instead of flights of steps. And so
we went on until 12.17, the, precise moment when we overtook Hans,
who had stopped.
 
"Ah! here we are," exclaimed my uncle, "at the very end of the
chimney."
 
I looked around me. We were standing at the intersection of two
roads, both dark and narrow. Which were we to take? This was a
difficulty.
 
Still my uncle refused to admit an appearance of hesitation, either
before me or the guide; he pointed out the Eastern tunnel, and we
were soon all three in it.
 
Besides there would have been interminable hesitation before this
choice of roads; for since there was no indication whatever to guide
our choice, we were obliged to trust to chance.
 
The slope of this gallery was scarcely perceptible, and its sections
very unequal. Sometimes we passed a series of arches succeeding each
other like the majestic arcades of a gothic cathedral. Here the
architects of the middle ages might have found studies for every form
of the sacred art which sprang from the development of the pointed
arch. A mile farther we had to bow or heads under corniced elliptic
arches in the romanesque style; and massive pillars standing out from
the wall bent under the spring of the vault that rested heavily upon
them. In other places this magnificence gave way to narrow channels
between low structures which looked like beaver's huts, and we had to
creep along through extremely narrow passages.
 
The heat was perfectly bearable. Involuntarily I began to think of
its heat when the lava thrown out by Snæfell was boiling and working
through this now silent road. I imagined the torrents of fire hurled
back at every angle in the gallery, and the accumulation of intensely
heated vapours in the midst of this confined channel.
 
I only hope, thought I, that this so-called extinct volcano won't
take a fancy in his old age to begin his sports again!
 
I abstained from communicating these fears to Professor Liedenbrock.
He would never have understood them at all. He had but one idea -
forward! He walked, he slid, he scrambled, he tumbled, with a
persistency which one could not but admire.
 
By six in the evening, after a not very fatiguing walk, we had gone
two leagues south, but scarcely a quarter of a mile down.
 
My uncle said it was time to go to sleep. We ate without talking, and
went to sleep without reflection.
 
Our arrangements for the night were very simple; a railway rug each,
into which we rolled ourselves, was our sole covering. We had neither
cold nor intrusive visits to fear. Travellers who penetrate into the
wilds of central Africa, and into the pathless forests of the New
World, are obliged to watch over each other by night. But we enjoyed
absolute safety and utter seclusion; no savages or wild beasts
infested these silent depths.
 
Next morning, we awoke fresh and in good spirits. The road was
resumed. As the day before, we followed the path of the lava. It was
impossible to tell what rocks we were passing: the tunnel, instead of
tending lower, approached more and more nearly to a horizontal
direction, I even fancied a slight rise. But about ten this upward
tendency became so evident, and therefore so fatiguing, that I was
obliged to slacken my pace.
 
"Well, Axel?" demanded the Professor impatiently.
 
"Well, I cannot stand it any longer," I replied.
 
"What! after three hours' walk over such easy ground."
 
"It may be easy, but it is tiring all the same."
 
"What, when we have nothing to do but keep going down!"
 
"Going up, if you please."
 
"Going up!" said my uncle, with a shrug.
 
"No doubt, for the last half-hour the inclines have gone the other
way, and at this rate we shall soon arrive upon the level soil of
Iceland."
 
The Professor nodded slowly and uneasily like a man that declines to
be convinced. I tried to resume the conversation. He answered not a
word, and gave the signal for a start. I saw that his silence was
nothing but ill-humour.
 
Still I had courageously shouldered my burden again, and was rapidly
following Hans, whom my uncle preceded. I was anxious not to be left
behind. My greatest care was not to lose sight of my companions. I
shuddered at the thought of being lost in the mazes of this vast
subterranean labyrinth.
 
Besides, if the ascending road did become steeper, I was comforted
with the thought that it was bringing us nearer to the surface. There
was hope in this. Every step confirmed me in it, and I was rejoicing
at the thought of meeting my little Gräuben again.
 
By midday there was a change in the appearance of this wall of the
gallery. I noticed it by a diminution of the amount of light
reflected from the sides; solid rock was appearing in the place of
the lava coating. The mass was composed of inclined and sometimes
vertical strata. We were passing through rocks of the transition or
silurian [l] system.
 
"It is evident," I cried, "the marine deposits formed in the second
period, these shales, limestones, and sandstones. We are turning away
from the primary granite. We are just as if we were people of Hamburg
going to Lubeck by way of Hanover!"
 
I had better have kept my observations to myself. But my geological
instinct was stronger than my prudence, and uncle Liedenbrock heard
my exclamation.
 
"What's that you are saying?" he asked.
 
"See," I said, pointing to the varied series of sandstones and
limestones, and the first indication of slate.
 
"Well?"
 
"We are at the period when the first plants and animals appeared."
 
"Do you think so?"
 
"Look close, and examine."
 
I obliged the Professor to move his lamp over the walls of the
gallery. I expected some signs of astonishment; but he spoke not a
word, and went on.
 
Had he understood me or not? Did he refuse to admit, out of self-love
as an uncle and a philosopher, that he had mistaken his way when he
chose the eastern tunnel? or was he determined to examine this
passage to its farthest extremity? It was evident that we had left
the lava path, and that this road could not possibly lead to the
extinct furnace of Snæfell.
 
Yet I asked myself if I was not depending too much on this change in
the rock. Might I not myself be mistaken? Were we really crossing the
layers of rock which overlie the granite foundation?
 
[1]The name given by Sir Roderick Murchison to a vast series of
fossiliferous strata, which lies between the non-fossiliferous slaty
schists below and the old red sandstone above. The system is well
developed in the region of Shropshire, etc., once inhabited by the
Silures under Caractacus, or Caradoc. (Tr.)
 
If I am right, I thought, I must soon find some fossil remains of
primitive life; and then we must yield to evidence. I will look.
 
I had not gone a hundred paces before incontestable proofs presented
themselves. It could not be otherwise, for in the Silurian age the
seas contained at least fifteen hundred vegetable and animal species.
My feet, which had become accustomed to the indurated lava floor,
suddenly rested upon a dust composed of the _debris_ of plants and
shells. In the walls were distinct impressions of fucoids and
lycopodites.
 
Professor Liedenbrock could not be mistaken, I thought, and yet he
pushed on, with, I suppose, his eyes resolutely shut.
 
This was only invincible obstinacy. I could hold out no longer. I
picked up a perfectly formed shell, which had belonged to an animal
not unlike the woodlouse: then, joining my uncle, I said:
 
"Look at this!"
 
"Very well," said he quietly, "it is the shell of a crustacean, of an
extinct species called a trilobite. Nothing more."
 
"But don't you conclude --?"
 
"Just what you conclude yourself. Yes; I do, perfectly. We have left
the granite and the lava. It is possible that I may be mistaken. But
I cannot be sure of that until I have reached the very end of this
gallery."
 
"You are right in doing this, my uncle, and I should quite approve of
your determination, if there were not a danger threatening us nearer
and nearer."
 
"What danger?"
 
"The want of water."
 
"Well, Axel, we will put ourselves upon rations."
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XX.
 
 
 
 
 
THE FIRST SIGNS OF DISTRESS
 
In fact, we had to ration ourselves. Our provision of water could not
last more than three days. I found that out for certain when
supper-time came. And, to our sorrow, we had little reason to expect
to find a spring in these transition beds.
 
The whole of the next day the gallery opened before us its endless
arcades. We moved on almost without a word. Hans' silence seemed to
be infecting us.
 
The road was now not ascending, at least not perceptibly. Sometimes,
even, it seemed to have a slight fall. But this tendency, which was
very trifling, could not do anything to reassure the Professor; for
there was no change in the beds, and the transitional characteristics
became more and more decided.
 
The electric light was reflected in sparkling splendour from the
schist, limestone, and old red sandstone of the walls. It might have
been thought that we were passing through a section of Wales, of
which an ancient people gave its name to this system. Specimens of
magnificent marbles clothed the walls, some of a greyish agate
fantastically veined with white, others of rich crimson or yellow
dashed with splotches of red; then came dark cherry-coloured marbles
relieved by the lighter tints of limestone.
 
The greater part of these bore impressions of primitive organisms.
Creation had evidently advanced since the day before. Instead of
rudimentary trilobites, I noticed remains of a more perfect order of
beings, amongst others ganoid fishes and some of those sauroids in
which palaeontologists have discovered the earliest reptile forms.
The Devonian seas were peopled by animals of these species, and
deposited them by thousands in the rocks of the newer formation.
 
It was evident that we were ascending that scale of animal life in
which man fills the highest place. But Professor Liedenbrock seemed
not to notice it.
 
He was awaiting one of two events, either the appearance of a
vertical well opening before his feet, down which our descent might
be resumed, or that of some obstacle which should effectually turn us
back on our own footsteps. But evening came and neither wish was
gratified.
 
On Friday, after a night during which I felt pangs of thirst, our
little troop again plunged into the winding passages of the gallery.
 
After ten hours' walking I observed a singular deadening of the
reflection of our lamps from the side walls. The marble, the schist,
the limestone, and the sandstone were giving way to a dark and
lustreless lining. At one moment, the tunnel becoming very narrow, I
leaned against the wall.
 
When I removed my hand it was black. I looked nearer, and found we
were in a coal formation.
 
"A coal mine!" I cried.
 
"A mine without miners," my uncle replied.
 
"Who knows?" I asked.
 
"I know," the Professor pronounced decidedly, "I am certain that this
gallery driven through beds of coal was never pierced by the hand of
man. But whether it be the hand of nature or not does not matter.
Supper time is come; let us sup."
 
Hans prepared some food. I scarcely ate, and I swallowed down the few
drops of water rationed out to me. One flask half full was all we had
left to slake the thirst of three men.
 
After their meal my two companions laid themselves down upon their
rugs, and found in sleep a solace for their fatigue. But I could not
sleep, and I counted every hour until morning.
 
On Saturday, at six, we started afresh. In twenty minutes we reached
a vast open space; I then knew that the hand of man had not hollowed
out this mine; the vaults would have been shored up, and, as it was,
they seemed to be held up by a miracle of equilibrium.
 
This cavern was about a hundred feet wide and a hundred and fifty in
height. A large mass had been rent asunder by a subterranean
disturbance. Yielding to some vast power from below it had broken
asunder, leaving this great hollow into which human beings were now
penetrating for the first time.
 
The whole history of the carboniferous period was written upon these
gloomy walls, and a geologist might with ease trace all its diverse
phases. The beds of coal were separated by strata of sandstone or
compact clays, and appeared crushed under the weight of overlying
strata.
 
At the age of the world which preceded the secondary period, the
earth was clothed with immense vegetable forms, the product of the
double influence of tropical heat and constant moisture; a vapoury
atmosphere surrounded the earth, still veiling the direct rays of the
sun.
 
Thence arises the conclusion that the high temperature then existing
was due to some other source than the heat of the sun. Perhaps even
the orb of day may not have been ready yet to play the splendid part
he now acts. There were no 'climates' as yet, and a torrid heat,
equal from pole to equator, was spread over the whole surface of the
globe. Whence this heat? Was it from the interior of the earth?
 
Notwithstanding the theories of Professor Liedenbrock, a violent heat
did at that time brood within the body of the spheroid. Its action
was felt to the very last coats of the terrestrial crust; the plants,
unacquainted with the beneficent influences of the sun, yielded
neither flowers nor scent. But their roots drew vigorous life from
the burning soil of the early days of this planet.
 
There were but few trees. Herbaceous plants alone existed. There were
tall grasses, ferns, lycopods, besides sigillaria, asterophyllites,
now scarce plants, but then the species might be counted by thousands.
 
The coal measures owe their origin to this period of profuse
vegetation. The yet elastic and yielding crust of the earth obeyed
the fluid forces beneath. Thence innumerable fissures and
depressions. The plants, sunk underneath the waters, formed by
degrees into vast accumulated masses.
 
Then came the chemical action of nature; in the depths of the seas
the vegetable accumulations first became peat; then, acted upon by
generated gases and the heat of fermentation, they underwent a
process of complete mineralization.
 
Thus were formed those immense coalfields, which nevertheless, are
not inexhaustible, and which three centuries at the present
accelerated rate of consumption will exhaust unless the industrial
world will devise a remedy.
 
These reflections came into my mind whilst I was contemplating the
mineral wealth stored up in this portion of the globe. These no
doubt, I thought, will never be discovered; the working of such deep
mines would involve too large an outlay, and where would be the use
as long as coal is yet spread far and wide near the surface? Such as
my eyes behold these virgin stores, such they will be when this world
comes to an end.
 
But still we marched on, and I alone was forgetting the length of the
way by losing myself in the midst of geological contemplations. The
temperature remained what it had been during our passage through the
lava and schists. Only my sense of smell was forcibly affected by an
odour of protocarburet of hydrogen. I immediately recognised in this
gallery the presence of a considerable quantity of the dangerous gas
called by miners firedamp, the explosion of which has often
occasioned such dreadful catastrophes.
 
Happily, our light was from Ruhmkorff's ingenious apparatus. If
unfortunately we had explored this gallery with torches, a terrible
explosion would have put an end to travelling and travellers at one
stroke.
 
This excursion through the coal mine lasted till night. My uncle
scarcely could restrain his impatience at the horizontal road. The
darkness, always deep twenty yards before us, prevented us from
estimating the length of the gallery; and I was beginning to think it
must be endless, when suddenly at six o'clock a wall very
unexpectedly stood before us. Right or left, top or bottom, there was
no road farther; we were at the end of a blind alley. "Very well,
it's all right!" cried my uncle, "now, at any rate, we shall know
what we are about. We are not in Saknussemm's road, and all we have
to do is to go back. Let us take a night's rest, and in three days we
shall get to the fork in the road." "Yes," said I, "if we have any
strength left." "Why not?" "Because to-morrow we shall have no
water." "Nor courage either?" asked my uncle severely. I dared make
no answer.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXI.
 
 
 
 
 
COMPASSION FUSES THE PROFESSOR'S HEART
 
Next day we started early. We had to hasten forward. It was a three
days' march to the cross roads.
 
I will not speak of the sufferings we endured in our return. My uncle
bore them with the angry impatience of a man obliged to own his
weakness; Hans with the resignation of his passive nature; I, I
confess, with complaints and expressions of despair. I had no spirit
to oppose this ill fortune.
 
As I had foretold, the water failed entirely by the end of the first
day's retrograde march. Our fluid aliment was now nothing but gin;
but this infernal fluid burned my throat, and I could not even endure
the sight of it. I found the temperature and the air stifling.
Fatigue paralysed my limbs. More than once I dropped down motionless.
Then there was a halt; and my uncle and the Icelander did their best
to restore me. But I saw that the former was struggling painfully
against excessive fatigue and the tortures of thirst.
 
At last, on Tuesday, July 8, we arrived on our hands and knees, and
half dead, at the junction of the two roads. There I dropped like a
lifeless lump, extended on the lava soil. It was ten in the morning.
 
Hans and my uncle, clinging to the wall, tried to nibble a few bits
of biscuit. Long moans escaped from my swollen lips.
 
After some time my uncle approached me and raised me in his arms.
 
"Poor boy!" said he, in genuine tones of compassion.
 
I was touched with these words, not being accustomed to see the
excitable Professor in a softened mood. I grasped his trembling hands
in mine. He let me hold them and looked at me. His eyes were
moistened.
 
Then I saw him take the flask that was hanging at his side. To my
amazement he placed it on my lips.
 
"Drink!" said he.
 
Had I heard him? Was my uncle beside himself? I stared at, him
stupidly, and felt as if I could not understand him.
 
"Drink!" he said again.
 
And raising his flask he emptied it every drop between my lips.
 
Oh! infinite pleasure! a slender sip of water came to moisten my
burning mouth. It was but one sip but it was enough to recall my
ebbing life.
 
I thanked my uncle with clasped hands.
 
"Yes," he said, "a draught of water; but it is the very last - you
hear! - the last. I had kept it as a precious treasure at the bottom
of my flask. Twenty times, nay, a hundred times, have I fought
against a frightful impulse to drink it off. But no, Axel, I kept it
for you."
 
"My dear uncle," I said, whilst hot tears trickled down my face.
 
"Yes, my poor boy, I knew that as soon as you arrived at these cross
roads you would drop half dead, and I kept my last drop of water to
reanimate you."
 
"Thank you, thank you," I said. Although my thirst was only partially
quenched, yet some strength had returned. The muscles of my throat,
until then contracted, now relaxed again; and the inflammation of my
lips abated somewhat; and I was now able to speak. .
 
"Let us see," I said, "we have now but one thing to do. We have no
water; we must go back."
 
While I spoke my uncle avoided looking at me; he hung his head down;
his eyes avoided mine.
 
"We must return," I exclaimed vehemently; "we must go back on our way
to Snæfell. May God give us strength to climb up the crater again!"
 
"Return!" said my uncle, as if he was rather answering himself than
me.
 
"Yes, return, without the loss of a minute."
 
A long silence followed.
 
"So then, Axel," replied the Professor ironically, "you have found no
courage or energy in these few drops of water?"
 
"Courage?"
 
"I see you just as feeble-minded as you were before, and still
expressing only despair!"
 
What sort of a man was this I had to do with, and what schemes was he
now revolving in his fearless mind?
 
"What! you won't go back?"
 
"Should I renounce this expedition just when we have the fairest
chance of success! Never!"
 
"Then must we resign ourselves to destruction?"
 
"No, Axel, no; go back. Hans will go with you. Leave me to myself!"
 
"Leave you here!"
 
"Leave me, I tell you. I have undertaken this expedition. I will
carry it out to the end, and I will not return. Go, Axel, go!"
 
My uncle was in high state of excitement. His voice, which had for a
moment been tender and gentle, had now become hard and threatening.
He was struggling with gloomy resolutions against impossibilities. I
would not leave him in this bottomless abyss, and on the other hand
the instinct of self-preservation prompted me to fly.
 
The guide watched this scene with his usual phlegmatic unconcern. Yet
he understood perfectly well what was going on between his two
companions. The gestures themselves were sufficient to show that we
were each bent on taking a different road; but Hans seemed to take no
part in a question upon which depended his life. He was ready to
start at a given signal, or to stay, if his master so willed it.
 
How I wished at this moment I could have made him understand me. My
words, my complaints, my sorrow would have had some influence over
that frigid nature. Those dangers which our guide could not
understand I could have demonstrated and proved to him. Together we
might have over-ruled the obstinate Professor; if it were needed, we
might perhaps have compelled him to regain the heights of Snæfell.
 
I drew near to Hans. I placed my hand upon his. He made no movement.
My parted lips sufficiently revealed my sufferings. The Icelander
slowly moved his head, and calmly pointing to my uncle said:
 
"Master."
 
"Master!" I shouted; "you madman! no, he is not the master of our
life; we must fly, we must drag him. Do you hear me? Do you
understand?"
 
I had seized Hans by the arm. I wished to oblige him to rise. I
strove with him. My uncle interposed.
 
"Be calm, Axel! you will get nothing from that immovable servant.
Therefore, listen to my proposal."
 
I crossed my arms, and confronted my uncle boldly.
 
"The want of water," he said, "is the only obstacle in our way. In
this eastern gallery made up of lavas, schists, and coal, we have not
met with a single particle of moisture. Perhaps we shall be more
fortunate if we follow the western tunnel."
 
I shook my head incredulously.
 
"Hear me to the end," the Professor went on with a firm voice.
"Whilst you were lying there motionless, I went to examine the
conformation of that gallery. It penetrates directly downward, and in
a few hours it will bring us to the granite rocks. There we must meet
with abundant springs. The nature of the rock assures me of this, and
instinct agrees with logic to support my conviction. Now, this is my
proposal. When Columbus asked of his ships' crews for three days more
to discover a new world, those crews, disheartened and sick as they
were, recognised the justice of the claim, and he discovered America.
I am the Columbus of this nether world, and I only ask for one more
day. If in a single day I have not met with the water that we want, I
swear to you we will return to the surface of the earth."
 
In spite of my irritation I was moved with these words, as well as
with the violence my uncle was doing to his own wishes in making so
hazardous a proposal.
 
"Well," I said, "do as you will, and God reward your superhuman
energy. You have now but a few hours to tempt fortune. Let us start!"
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXII.
 
 
 
 
 
TOTAL FAILURE OF WATER
 
This time the descent commenced by the new gallery. Hans walked first
as was his custom.
 
We had not gone a hundred yards when the Professor, moving his
lantern along the walls, cried:
 
"Here are primitive rocks. Now we are in the right way. Forward!"
 
When in its early stages the earth was slowly cooling, its
contraction gave rise in its crust to disruptions, distortions,
fissures, and chasms. The passage through which we were moving was
such a fissure, through which at one time granite poured out in a
molten state. Its thousands of windings formed an inextricable
labyrinth through the primeval mass.
 
As fast as we descended, the succession of beds forming the primitive
foundation came out with increasing distinctness. Geologists consider
this primitive matter to be the base of the mineral crust of the
earth, and have ascertained it to be composed of three different
formations, schist, gneiss, and mica schist, resting upon that
unchangeable foundation, the granite.
 
Never had mineralogists found themselves in so marvellous a situation
to study nature in situ. What the boring machine, an insensible,
inert instrument, was unable to bring to the surface of the inner
structure of the globe, we were able to peruse with our own eyes and
handle with our own hands.
 
Through the beds of schist, coloured with delicate shades of green,
ran in winding course threads of copper and manganese, with traces of
platinum and gold. I thought, what riches are here buried at an
unapproachable depth in the earth, hidden for ever from the covetous
eyes of the human race! These treasures have been buried at such a
profound depth by the convulsions of primeval times that they run no
chance of ever being molested by the pickaxe or the spade.
 
To the schists succeeded gneiss, partially stratified, remarkable for
the parallelism and regularity of its lamina, then mica schists, laid
in large plates or flakes, revealing their lamellated structure by
the sparkle of the white shining mica.
 
The light from our apparatus, reflected from the small facets of
quartz, shot sparkling rays at every angle, and I seemed to be moving
through a diamond, within which the quickly darting rays broke across
each other in a thousand flashing coruscations.
 
About six o'clock this brilliant fete of illuminations underwent a
sensible abatement of splendour, then almost ceased. The walls
assumed a crystallised though sombre appearance; mica was more
closely mingled with the feldspar and quartz to form the proper rocky
foundations of the earth, which bears without distortion or crushing
the weight of the four terrestrial systems. We were immured within
prison walls of granite.
 
It was eight in the evening. No signs of water had yet appeared. I
was suffering horribly. My uncle strode on. He refused to stop. He
was listening anxiously for the murmur of distant springs. But, no,
there was dead silence.
 
And now my limbs were failing beneath me. I resisted pain and
torture, that I might not stop my uncle, which would have driven him
to despair, for the day was drawing near to its end, and it was his
last.
 
At last I failed utterly; I uttered a cry and fell.
 
"Come to me, I am dying."
 
My uncle retraced his steps. He gazed upon me with his arms crossed;
then these muttered words passed his lips:
 
"It's all over!"
 
The last thing I saw was a fearful gesture of rage, and my eyes
closed.
 
When I reopened them I saw my two companions motionless and rolled up
in their coverings. Were they asleep? As for me, I could not get one
moment's sleep. I was suffering too keenly, and what embittered my
thoughts was that there was no remedy. My uncle's last words echoed
painfully in my ears: "it's all over!" For in such a fearful state of
debility it was madness to think of ever reaching the upper world
again.
 
We had above us a league and a half of terrestrial crust. The weight
of it seemed to be crushing down upon my shoulders. I felt weighed
down, and I exhausted myself with imaginary violent exertions to turn
round upon my granite couch.
 
A few hours passed away. A deep silence reigned around us, the
silence of the grave. No sound could reach us through walls, the
thinnest of which were five miles thick.
 
Yet in the midst of my stupefaction I seemed to be aware of a noise.
It was dark down the tunnel, but I seemed to see the Icelander
vanishing from our sight with the lamp in his hand.
 
Why was he leaving us? Was Hans going to forsake us? My uncle was
fast asleep. I wanted to shout, but my voice died upon my parched and
swollen lips. The darkness became deeper, and the last sound died
away in the far distance.
 
"Hans has abandoned us," I cried. "Hans! Hans!"
 
But these words were only spoken within me. They went no farther. Yet
after the first moment of terror I felt ashamed of suspecting a man
of such extraordinary faithfulness. Instead of ascending he was
descending the gallery. An evil design would have taken him up not
down. This reflection restored me to calmness, and I turned to other
thoughts. None but some weighty motive could have induced so quiet a
man to forfeit his sleep. Was he on a journey of discovery? Had he
during the silence of the night caught a sound, a murmuring of
something in the distance, which had failed to affect my hearing?
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXIII.
 
 
 
 
 
WATER DISCOVERED
 
For a whole hour I was trying to work out in my delirious brain the
reasons which might have influenced this seemingly tranquil huntsman.
The absurdest notions ran in utter confusion through my mind. I
thought madness was coming on!
 
But at last a noise of footsteps was heard in the dark abyss. Hans
was approaching. A flickering light was beginning to glimmer on the
wall of our darksome prison; then it came out full at the mouth of
the gallery. Hans appeared.
 
He drew close to my uncle, laid his hand upon his shoulder, and
gently woke him. My uncle rose up.
 
"What is the matter?" he asked.
 
"_Watten!_" replied the huntsman.
 
No doubt under the inspiration of intense pain everybody becomes
endowed with the gift of divers tongues. I did not know a word of
Danish, yet instinctively I understood the word he had uttered.
 
"Water! water!" I cried, clapping my hands and gesticulating like a
madman.
 
"Water!" repeated my uncle. "Hvar?" he asked, in Icelandic.
 
"_Nedat,_" replied Hans.
 
"Where? Down below!" I understood it all. I seized the hunter's
hands, and pressed them while he looked on me without moving a muscle
of his countenance.
 
The preparations for our departure were not long in making, and we
were soon on our way down a passage inclining two feet in seven. In
an hour we had gone a mile and a quarter, and descended two thousand
feet.
 
Then I began to hear distinctly quite a new sound of something
running within the thickness of the granite wall, a kind of dull,
dead rumbling, like distant thunder. During the first part of our
walk, not meeting with the promised spring, I felt my agony
returning; but then my uncle acquainted me with the cause of the
strange noise.
 
"Hans was not mistaken," he said. "What you hear is the rushing of a
torrent."
 
"A torrent?" I exclaimed.
 
"There can be no doubt; a subterranean river is flowing around us."
 
We hurried forward in the greatest excitement. I was no longer
sensible of my fatigue. This murmuring of waters close at hand was
already refreshing me. It was audibly increasing. The torrent, after
having for some time flowed over our heads, was now running within
the left wall, roaring and rushing. Frequently I touched the wall,
hoping to feel some indications of moisture: But there was no hope
here.
 
Yet another half hour, another half league was passed.
 
Then it became clear that the hunter had gone no farther. Guided by
an instinct peculiar to mountaineers he had as it were felt this
torrent through the rock; but he had certainly seen none of the
precious liquid; he had drunk nothing himself.
 
Soon it became evident that if we continued our walk we should widen
the distance between ourselves and the stream, the noise of which was
becoming fainter.
 
We returned. Hans stopped where the torrent seemed closest. I sat
near the wall, while the waters were flowing past me at a distance of
two feet with extreme violence. But there was a thick granite wall
between us and the object of our desires.
 
Without reflection, without asking if there were any means of
procuring the water, I gave way to a movement of despair.
 
Hans glanced at me with, I thought, a smile of compassion.
 
He rose and took the lamp. I followed him. He moved towards the wall.
I looked on. He applied his ear against the dry stone, and moved it
slowly to and fro, listening intently. I perceived at once that he
was examining to find the exact place where the torrent could be
heard the loudest. He met with that point on the left side of the
tunnel, at three feet from the ground.
 
I was stirred up with excitement. I hardly dared guess what the
hunter was about to do. But I could not but understand, and applaud
and cheer him on, when I saw him lay hold of the pickaxe to make an
attack upon the rock.
 
"We are saved!" I cried.
 
"Yes," cried my uncle, almost frantic with excitement. "Hans is
right. Capital fellow! Who but he would have thought of it?"
 
Yes; who but he? Such an expedient, however simple, would never have
entered into our minds. True, it seemed most hazardous to strike a
blow of the hammer in this part of the earth's structure. Suppose
some displacement should occur and crush us all! Suppose the torrent,
bursting through, should drown us in a sudden flood! There was
nothing vain in these fancies. But still no fears of falling rocks or
rushing floods could stay us now; and our thirst was so intense that,
to satisfy it, we would have dared the waves of the north Atlantic.
 
Hans set about the task which my uncle and I together could not have
accomplished. If our impatience had armed our hands with power, we
should have shattered the rock into a thousand fragments. Not so
Hans. Full of self possession, he calmly wore his way through the
rock with a steady succession of light and skilful strokes, working
through an aperture six inches wide at the outside. I could hear a
louder noise of flowing waters, and I fancied I could feel the
delicious fluid refreshing my parched lips.
 
The pick had soon penetrated two feet into the granite partition, and
our man had worked for above an hour. I was in an agony of
impatience. My uncle wanted to employ stronger measures, and I had
some difficulty in dissuading him; still he had just taken a pickaxe
in his hand, when a sudden hissing was heard, and a jet of water
spurted out with violence against the opposite wall.
 
Hans, almost thrown off his feet by the violence of the shock,
uttered a cry of grief and disappointment, of which I soon under-.
stood the cause, when plunging my hands into the spouting torrent, I
withdrew them in haste, for the water was scalding hot.
 
"The water is at the boiling point," I cried.
 
"Well, never mind, let it cool," my uncle replied.
 
The tunnel was filling with steam, whilst a stream was forming, which
by degrees wandered away into subterranean windings, and soon we had
the satisfaction of swallowing our first draught.
 
Could anything be more delicious than the sensation that our burning
intolerable thirst was passing away, and leaving us to enjoy comfort
and pleasure? But where was this water from? No matter. It was water;
and though still warm, it brought life back to the dying. I kept
drinking without stopping, and almost without tasting.
 
At last after a most delightful time of reviving energy, I cried,
"Why, this is a chalybeate spring!"
 
"Nothing could be better for the digestion," said my uncle. "It is
highly impregnated with iron. It will be as good for us as going to
the Spa, or to Töplitz."
 
"Well, it is delicious!"
 
"Of course it is, water should be, found six miles underground. It
has an inky flavour, which is not at all unpleasant. What a capital
source of strength Hans has found for us here. We will call it after
his name."
 
"Agreed," I cried.
 
And Hansbach it was from that moment.
 
Hans was none the prouder. After a moderate draught, he went quietly
into a corner to rest.
 
"Now," I said, "we must not lose this water."
 
"What is the use of troubling ourselves?" my uncle, replied. "I fancy
it will never fail."
 
"Never mind, we cannot be sure; let us fill the water bottle and our
flasks, and then stop up the opening."
 
My advice was followed so far as getting in a supply; but the
stopping up of the hole was not so easy to accomplish. It was in vain
that we took up fragments of granite, and stuffed them in with tow,
we only scalded our hands without succeeding. The pressure was too
great, and our efforts were fruitless.
 
"It is quite plain," said I, "that the higher body of this water is
at a considerable elevation. The force of the jet shows that."
 
"No doubt," answered my uncle. "If this column of water is 32,000
feet high - that is, from the surface of the earth, it is equal to
the weight of a thousand atmospheres. But I have got an idea."
 
"Well?"
 
"Why should we trouble ourselves to stop the stream from coming out
at all?"
 
"Because --" Well, I could not assign a reason.
 
"When our flasks are empty, where shall we fill them again? Can we
tell that?"
 
No; there was no certainty.
 
"Well, let us allow the water to run on. It will flow down, and will
both guide and refresh us."
 
"That is well planned," I cried. "With this stream for our guide,
there is no reason why we should not succeed in our undertaking."
 
"Ah, my boy! you agree with me now," cried the Professor, laughing.
 
"I agree with you most heartily."
 
"Well, let us rest awhile; and then we will start again."
 
I was forgetting that it was night. The chronometer soon informed me
of that fact; and in a very short time, refreshed and thankful, we
all three fell into a sound sleep.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXIV.
 
 
 
 
 
WELL SAID, OLD MOLE! CANST THOU WORK I' THE GROUND SO FAST?
 
By the next day we had forgotten all our sufferings. At first, I was
wondering that I was no longer thirsty, and I was for asking for the
reason. The answer came in the murmuring of the stream at my feet.
 
We breakfasted, and drank of this excellent chalybeate water. I felt
wonderfully stronger, and quite decided upon pushing on. Why should
not so firmly convinced a man as my uncle, furnished with so
industrious a guide as Hans, and accompanied by so determined a
nephew as myself, go on to final success? Such were the magnificent
plans which struggled for mastery within me. If it had been proposed
to me to return to the summit of Snæfell, I should have indignantly
declined.
 
Most fortunately, all we had to do was to descend.
 
"Let us start!" I cried, awakening by my shouts the echoes of the
vaulted hollows of the earth.
 
On Thursday, at 8 a.m., we started afresh. The granite tunnel winding
from side to side, earned us past unexpected turns, and
 
seemed almost to form a labyrinth; but, on the whole, its direction
seemed to be south-easterly. My uncle never ceased to consult his
compass, to keep account of the ground gone over.
 
The gallery dipped down a very little way from the horizontal,
scarcely more than two inches in a fathom, and the stream ran gently
murmuring at our feet. I compared it to a friendly genius guiding us
underground, and caressed with my hand the soft naiad, whose
comforting voice accompanied our steps. With my reviving spirits
these mythological notions seemed to come unbidden.
 
As for my uncle, he was beginning to storm against the horizontal
road. He loved nothing better than a vertical path; but this way
seemed indefinitely prolonged, and instead of sliding along the
hypothenuse as we were now doing, he would willingly have dropped
down the terrestrial radius. But there was no help for it, and as
long as we were approaching the centre at all we felt that we must
not complain.
 
From time to time, a steeper path appeared; our naiad then began to
tumble before us with a hoarser murmur, and we went down with her to
a greater depth.
 
On the whole, that day and the next we made considerable way
horizontally, very little vertically.
 
On Friday evening, the 10th of July, according to our calculations,
we were thirty leagues south-east of Rejkiavik, and at a depth of two
leagues and a half.
 
At our feet there now opened a frightful abyss. My uncle, however,
was not to be daunted, and he clapped his hands at the steepness of
the descent.
 
"This will take us a long way," he cried, "and without much
difficulty; for the projections in the rock form quite a staircase."
 
The ropes were so fastened by Hans as to guard against accident, and
the descent commenced. I can hardly call it perilous, for I was
beginning to be familiar with this kind of exercise.
 
This well, or abyss, was a narrow cleft in the mass of the granite,
called by geologists a 'fault,' and caused by the unequal cooling of
the globe of the earth. If it had at one time been a passage for
eruptive matter thrown out by Snæfell, I still could not understand
why no trace was left of its passage. We kept going down a kind of
winding staircase, which seemed almost to have been made by the hand
of man.
 
Every quarter of an hour we were obliged to halt, to take a little
necessary repose and restore the action of our limbs. We then sat
down upon a fragment of rock, and we talked as we ate and drank from
the stream.
 
Of course, down this fault the Hansbach fell in a cascade, and lost
some of its volume; but there was enough and to spare to slake our
thirst. Besides, when the incline became more gentle, it would of
course resume its peaceable course. At this moment it reminded me of
my worthy uncle, in his frequent fits of impatience and anger, while
below it ran with the calmness of the Icelandic hunter.
 
On the 6th and 7th of July we kept following the spiral curves of
this singular well, penetrating in actual distance no more than two
leagues; but being carried to a depth of five leagues below the level
of the sea. But on the 8th, about noon, the fault took, towards the
south-east, a much gentler slope, one of about forty-five degrees.
 
Then the road became monotonously easy. It could not be otherwise,
for there was no landscape to vary the stages of our journey.
 
On Wednesday, the 15th, we were seven leagues underground, and had
travelled fifty leagues away from Snæfell. Although we were tired,
our health was perfect, and the medicine chest had not yet had
occasion to be opened.
 
My uncle noted every hour the indications of the compass, the
chronometer, the aneroid, and the thermometer the very same which he
has published in his scientific report of our journey. It was
therefore not difficult to know exactly our whereabouts. When he told
me that we had gone fifty leagues horizontally, I could not repress
an exclamation of astonishment, at the thought that we had now long
left Iceland behind us.
 
"What is the matter?" he cried.
 
"I was reflecting that if your calculations are correct we are no
longer under Iceland."
 
"Do you think so?"
 
"I am not mistaken," I said, and examining the map, I added, "We have
passed Cape Portland, and those fifty leagues bring us under the wide
expanse of ocean."
 
"Under the sea," my uncle repeated, rubbing his hands with delight.
 
"Can it be?" I said. "Is the ocean spread above our heads?"
 
"Of course, Axel. What can be more natural? At Newcastle are there
not coal mines extending far under the sea?"
 
It was all very well for the Professor to call this so simple, but I
could not feel quite easy at the thought that the boundless ocean was
rolling over my head. And yet it really mattered very little whether
it was the plains and mountains that covered our heads, or the
Atlantic waves, as long as we were arched over by solid granite. And,
besides, I was getting used to this idea; for the tunnel, now running
straight, now winding as capriciously in its inclines as in its
turnings, but constantly preserving its south-easterly direction, and
always running deeper, was gradually carrying us to very great depths
indeed.
 
Four days later, Saturday, the 18th of July, in the evening, we
arrived at a kind of vast grotto; and here my uncle paid Hans his
weekly wages, and it was settled that the next day, Sunday, should be
a day of rest.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXV.
 
 
 
 
 
DE PROFUNDIS
 
I therefore awoke next day relieved from the preoccupation of an
immediate start. Although we were in the very deepest of known
depths, there was something not unpleasant about it. And, besides, we
were beginning to get accustomed to this troglodyte [l] life. I no
longer thought of sun, moon, and stars, trees, houses, and towns, nor
of any of those terrestrial superfluities which are necessaries of
men who live upon the earth's surface. Being fossils, we looked upon
all those things as mere jokes.
 
The grotto was an immense apartment. Along its granite floor ran our
faithful stream. At this distance from its spring the water was
scarcely tepid, and we drank of it with pleasure.
 
After breakfast the Professor gave a few hours to the arrangement of
his daily notes.
 
"First," said he, "I will make a calculation to ascertain our exact
position. I hope, after our return, to draw a map of our journey,
which will be in reality a vertical section of the globe, containing
the track of our expedition."
 
"That will be curious, uncle; but are your observations sufficiently
accurate to enable you to do this correctly?"
 
"Yes; I have everywhere observed the angles and the inclines. I am
sure there is no error. Let us see where we are now. Take your
compass, and note the direction."
 
I looked, and replied carefully:
 
[1] tpwgln, a hole; dnw, to creep into. The name of an Ethiopian
tribe who lived in caves and holes. ??????, a hole, and ???, to creep
into.
 
"South-east by east."
 
"Well," answered the Professor, after a rapid calculation, "I infer
that we have gone eighty-five leagues since we started.!
 
"Therefore we are under mid-Atlantic?"
 
"To be sure we are."
 
"And perhaps at this very moment there is a storm above, and ships
over our heads are being rudely tossed by the tempest."
 
"Quite probable."
 
"And whales are lashing the roof of our prison with their tails?"
 
"It may be, Axel, but they won't shake us here. But let us go back to
our calculation. Here we are eighty-five leagues south-east of
Snæfell, and I reckon that we are at a depth of sixteen leagues."
 
"Sixteen leagues?" I cried.
 
"No doubt."
 
"Why, this is the very limit assigned by science to the thickness of
the crust of the earth."
 
"I don't deny it."
 
"And here, according to the law of increasing temperature, there
ought to be a heat of 2,732° Fahr.!"
 
"So there should, my lad."
 
"And all this solid granite ought to be running in fusion."
 
"You see that it is not so, and that, as so often happens, facts come
to overthrow theories."
 
"I am obliged to agree; but, after all, it is surprising."
 
"What does the thermometer say?"
 
"Twenty-seven, six tenths (82° Fahr.)."
 
"Therefore the savants are wrong by 2,705°, and the proportional
increase is a mistake. Therefore Humphry Davy was right, and I am not
wrong in following him. What do you say now?"
 
"Nothing."
 
In truth, I had a good deal to say. I gave way in no respect to
Davy's theory. I still held to the central heat, although I did not
feel its effects. I preferred to admit in truth, that this chimney of
an extinct volcano, lined with lavas, which are non-conductors of
heat, did not suffer the heat to pass through its walls.
 
But without stopping to look up new arguments I simply took up our
situation such as it was.
 
"Well, admitting all your calculations to be quite correct, you must
allow me to draw one rigid result therefrom."
 
"What is it. Speak freely.!
 
"At the latitude of Iceland, where we now are, the radius of the
earth, the distance from the centre to the surface is about 1,583
leagues; let us say in round numbers 1,600 leagues, or 4,800 miles.
Out of 1,600 leagues we have gone twelve!"
 
"So you say."
 
"And these twelve at a cost of 85 leagues diagonally?"
 
"Exactly so."
 
"In twenty days?"
 
"Yes."
 
"Now, sixteen leagues are the hundredth part of the earth's radius.
At this rate we shall be two thousand days, or nearly five years and
a half, in getting to the centre."
 
No answer was vouchsafed to this rational conclusion. "Without
reckoning, too, that if a vertical depth of sixteen leagues can be
attained only by a diagonal descent of eighty-four, it follows that
we must go eight thousand miles in a south-easterly direction; so
that we shall emerge from some point in the earth's circumference
instead of getting to the centre!"
 
"Confusion to all your figures, and all your hypotheses besides,"
shouted my uncle in a sudden rage. "What is the basis of them all?
How do you know that this passage does not run straight to our
destination? Besides, there is a precedent. What one man has done,
another may do."
 
"I hope so; but, still, I may be permitted -"
 
"You shall have my leave to hold your tongue, Axel, but not to talk
in that irrational way."
 
I could see the awful Professor bursting through my uncle's skin, and
I took timely warning.
 
"Now look at your aneroid. What does that say?"
 
"It says we are under considerable pressure."
 
"Very good; so you see that by going gradually down, and getting
accustomed to the density of the atmosphere, we don't suffer at all."
 
"Nothing, except a little pain in the ears."
 
"That's nothing, and you may get rid of even that by quick breathing
whenever you feel the pain."
 
"Exactly so," I said, determined not to say a word that might cross
my uncle's prejudices. "There is even positive pleasure in living in
this dense atmosphere. Have you observed how intense sound is down
here?"
 
"No doubt it is. A deaf man would soon learn to hear perfectly."
 
"But won't this density augment?"
 
"Yes; according to a rather obscure law. It is well known that the
weight of bodies diminishes as fast as we descend. You know that it
is at the surface of the globe that weight is most sensibly felt, and
that at the centre there is no weight at all."
 
"I am aware of that; but, tell me, will not air at last acquire the
density of water?"
 
"Of course, under a pressure of seven hundred and ten atmospheres."
 
"And how, lower down still?"
 
"Lower down the density will still increase."
 
"But how shall we go down then."
 
"Why, we must fill our pockets with stones."
 
"Well, indeed, my worthy uncle, you are never at a loss for an
answer."
 
I dared venture no farther into the region of probabilities, for I
might presently have stumbled upon an impossibility, which would have
brought the Professor on the scene when he was not wanted.
 
Still, it was evident that the air, under a pressure which might
reach that of thousands of atmospheres, would at last reach the solid
state, and then, even if our bodies could resist the strain, we
should be stopped, and no reasonings would be able to get us on any
farther.
 
But I did not advance this argument. My uncle would have met it with
his inevitable Saknussemm, a precedent which possessed no weight with
me; for even if the journey of the learned Icelander were really
attested, there was one very simple answer, that in the sixteenth
century there was neither barometer or aneroid and therefore
Saknussemm could not tell how far he had gone.
 
But I kept this objection to myself, and waited the course of events.
 
The rest of the day was passed in calculations and in conversations.
I remained a steadfast adherent of the opinions of Professor
Liedenbrock, and I envied the stolid indifference of Hans, who,
without going into causes and effects, went on with his eyes shut
wherever his destiny guided him.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXVI.
 
 
 
 
 
THE WORST PERIL OF ALL
 
It must be confessed that hitherto things had not gone on so badly,
and that I had small reason to complain. If our difficulties became
no worse, we might hope to reach our end. And to what a height of
scientific glory we should then attain! I had become quite a
Liedenbrock in my reasonings; seriously I had. But would this state
of things last in the strange place we had come to? Perhaps it might.
 
For several days steeper inclines, some even frightfully near to the
perpendicular, brought us deeper and deeper into the mass of the
interior of the earth. Some days we advanced nearer to the centre by
a league and a half, or nearly two leagues. These were perilous
descents, in which the skill and marvellous coolness of Hans were
invaluable to us. That unimpassioned Icelander devoted himself with
incomprehensible deliberation; and, thanks to him, we crossed many a
dangerous spot which we should never have cleared alone.
 
But his habit of silence gained upon him day by day, and was
infecting us. External objects produce decided effects upon the
brain. A man shut up between four walls soon loses the power to
associate words and ideas together. How many prisoners in solitary
confinement become idiots, if not mad, for want of exercise for the
thinking faculty!
 
During the fortnight following our last conversation, no incident
occurred worthy of being recorded. But I have good reason for
remembering one very serious event which took place at this time, and
of which I could scarcely now forget the smallest details.
 
By the 7th of August our successive descents had brought us to a
depth of thirty leagues; that is, that for a space of thirty leagues
there were over our heads solid beds of rock, ocean, continents, and
towns. We must have been two hundred leagues from Iceland.
 
On that day the tunnel went down a gentle slope. I was ahead of the
others. My uncle was carrying one of Ruhmkorff's lamps and I the.
other. I was examining the beds of granite.
 
Suddenly turning round I observed that I was alone.
 
Well, well, I thought; I have been going too fast, or Hans and my
uncle have stopped on the way. Come, this won't do; I must join them.
Fortunately there is not much of an ascent.
 
I retraced my steps. I walked for a quarter of an hour. I gazed into
the darkness. I shouted. No reply: my voice was lost in the midst of
the cavernous echoes which alone replied to my call.
 
I began to feel uneasy. A shudder ran through me.
 
"Calmly!" I said aloud to myself, "I am sure to find my companions
again. There are not two roads. I was too far ahead. I will return!"
 
For half an hour I climbed up. I listened for a call, and in that
dense atmosphere a voice could reach very far. But there was a dreary
silence in all that long gallery. I stopped. I could not believe that
I was lost. I was only bewildered for a time, not lost. I was sure I
should find my way again.
 
"Come," I repeated, "since there is but one road, and they are on it,
I must find them again. I have but to ascend still. Unless, indeed,
missing me, and supposing me to be behind, they too should have gone
back. But even in this case I have only to make the greater haste. I
shall find them, I am sure."
 
I repeated these words in the fainter tones of a half-convinced man.
Besides, to associate even such simple ideas with words, and reason
with them, was a work of time.
 
A doubt then seized upon me. Was I indeed in advance when we became
separated? Yes, to be sure I was. Hans was after me, preceding my
uncle. He had even stopped for a while to strap his baggage better
over his shoulders. I could remember this little incident. It was at
that very moment that I must have gone on.
 
Besides, I thought, have not I a guarantee that I shall not lose my
way, a clue in the labyrinth, that cannot be broken, my faithful
stream? I have but to trace it back, and I must come upon them.
 
This conclusion revived my spirits, and I resolved to resume my march
without loss of time.
 
How I then blessed my uncle's foresight in preventing the hunter from
stopping up the hole in the granite. This beneficent spring, after
having satisfied our thirst on the road, would now be my guide among
the windings of the terrestrial crust.
 
Before starting afresh I thought a wash would do me good. I stooped
to bathe my face in the Hansbach.
 
To my stupefaction and utter dismay my feet trod only - the rough dry
granite. The stream was no longer at my feet.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXVII.
 
 
 
 
 
LOST IN THE BOWELS OF THE EARTH
 
To describe my despair would be impossible. No words could tell it. I
was buried alive, with the prospect before me of dying of hunger and
thirst.
 
Mechanically I swept the ground with my hands. How dry and hard the
rock seemed to me!
 
But how had I left the course of the stream? For it was a terrible
fact that it no longer ran at my side. Then I understood the reason
of that fearful, silence, when for the last time I listened to hear
if any sound from my companions could reach my ears. At the moment
when I left the right road I had not noticed the absence of the
stream. It is evident that at that moment a deviation had presented
itself before me, whilst the Hansbach, following the caprice of
another incline, had gone with my companions away into unknown depths.
 
How was I to return? There was not a trace of their footsteps or of
my own, for the foot left no mark upon the granite floor. I racked my
brain for a solution of this impracticable problem. One word
described my position. Lost!
 
Lost at an immeasurable depth! Thirty leagues of rock seemed to weigh
upon my shoulders with a dreadful pressure. I felt crushed.
 
I tried to carry back my ideas to things on the surface of the earth.
I could scarcely succeed. Hamburg, the house in the Königstrasse, my
poor Gräuben, all that busy world underneath which I was wandering
about, was passing in rapid confusion before my terrified memory. I
could revive with vivid reality all the incidents of our voyage,
Iceland, M. Fridrikssen, Snæfell. I said to myself that if, in such a
position as I was now in, I was fool enough to cling to one glimpse
of hope, it would be madness, and that the best thing I could do was
to despair.
 
What human power could restore me to the light of the sun by rending
asunder the huge arches of rock which united over my head,
buttressing each other with impregnable strength? Who could place my
feet on the right path, and bring me back to my company?
 
"Oh, my uncle!" burst from my lips in the tone of despair.
 
It was my only word of reproach, for I knew how much he must be
suffering in seeking me, wherever he might be.
 
When I saw myself thus far removed from all earthly help I had
recourse to heavenly succour. The remembrance of my childhood, the
recollection of my mother, whom I had only known in my tender early
years, came back to me, and I knelt in prayer imploring for the
Divine help of which I was so little worthy.
 
This return of trust in God's providence allayed the turbulence of my
fears, and I was enabled to concentrate upon my situation all the
force of my intelligence.
 
I had three days' provisions with me and my flask was full. But I
could not remain alone for long. Should I go up or down?
 
Up, of course; up continually.
 
I must thus arrive at the point where I had left the stream, that
fatal turn in the road. With the stream at my feet, I might hope to
regain the summit of Snæfell.
 
Why had I not thought of that sooner? Here was evidently a chance of
safety. The most pressing duty was to find out again the course of
the Hansbach. I rose, and leaning upon my iron-pointed stick I
ascended the gallery. The slope was rather steep. I walked on without
hope but without indecision, like a man who has made up his mind.
 
For half an hour I met with no obstacle. I tried to recognise my way
by the form of the tunnel, by the projections of certain rocks, by
the disposition of the fractures. But no particular sign appeared,
and I soon saw that this gallery could not bring me back to the
turning point. It came to an abrupt end. I struck against an
impenetrable wall, and fell down upon the rock.
 
Unspeakable despair then seized upon me. I lay overwhelmed, aghast!
My last hope was shattered against this granite wall.
 
Lost in this labyrinth, whose windings crossed each other in all
directions, it was no use to think of flight any longer. Here I must
die the most dreadful of deaths. And, strange to say, the thought
came across me that when some day my petrified remains should be
found thirty leagues below the surface in the bowels of the earth,
the discovery might lead to grave scientific discussions.
 
I tried to speak aloud, but hoarse sounds alone passed my dry lips. I
panted for breath.
 
In the midst of my agony a new terror laid hold of me. In falling my
lamp had got wrong. I could not set it right, and its light was
paling and would soon disappear altogether.
 
I gazed painfully upon the luminous current growing weaker and weaker
in the wire coil. A dim procession of moving shadows seemed slowly
unfolding down the darkening walls. I scarcely dared to shut my eyes
for one moment, for fear of losing the least glimmer of this precious
light. Every instant it seemed about to vanish and the dense
blackness to come rolling in palpably upon me.
 
One last trembling glimmer shot feebly up. I watched it in trembling
and anxiety; I drank it in as if I could preserve it, concentrating
upon it the full power of my eyes, as upon the very last sensation of
light which they were ever to experience, and the next moment I lay
in the heavy gloom of deep, thick, unfathomable darkness.
 
A terrible cry of anguish burst from me. Upon earth, in the midst of
the darkest night, light never abdicates its functions altogether. It
is still subtle and diffusive, but whatever little there may be, the
eye still catches that little. Here there was not an atom; the total
darkness made me totally blind.
 
Then I began to lose my head. I arose with my arms stretched out
before me, attempting painfully to feel my way. I began to run
wildly, hurrying through the inextricable maze, still descending,
still running through the substance of the earth's thick crust, a
struggling denizen of geological 'faults,' crying, shouting, yelling,
soon bruised by contact with the jagged rock, falling and rising
again bleeding, trying to drink the blood which covered my face, and
even waiting for some rock to shatter my skull against.
 
I shall never know whither my mad career took me. After the lapse of
some hours, no doubt exhausted, I fell like a lifeless lump at the
foot of the wall, and lost all consciousness.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXVIII.
 
 
 
 
 
THE RESCUE IN THE WHISPERING GALLERY
 
When I returned to partial life my face was wet with tears. How long
that state of insensibility had lasted I cannot say. I had no means
now of taking account of time. Never was solitude equal to this,
never had any living being been so utterly forsaken.
 
After my fall I had lost a good deal of blood. I felt it flowing over
me. Ah! how happy I should have been could I have died, and if death
were not yet to be gone through. I would think no longer. I drove
away every idea, and, conquered by my grief, I rolled myself to the
foot of the opposite wall.
 
Already I was feeling the approach of another faint, and was hoping
for complete annihilation, when a loud noise reached me. It was like
the distant rumble of continuous thunder, and I could hear its
sounding undulations rolling far away into the remote recesses of the
abyss.
 
Whence could this noise proceed? It must be from some phenomenon
proceeding in the great depths amidst which I lay helpless. Was it an
explosion of gas? Was it the fall of some mighty pillar of the globe?
 
I listened still. I wanted to know if the noise would be repeated. A
quarter of an hour passed away. Silence reigned in this gallery. I
could not hear even the beating of my heart.
 
Suddenly my ear, resting by chance against the wall, caught, or
seemed to catch, certain vague, indescribable, distant, articulate
sounds, as of words.
 
"This is a delusion," I thought.
 
But it was not. Listening more attentively, I heard in reality a
murmuring of voices. But my weakness prevented me from understanding
what the voices said. Yet it was language, I was sure of it.
 
For a moment I feared the words might be my own, brought back by the
echo. Perhaps I had been crying out unknown to myself. I closed my
lips firmly, and laid my ear against the wall again.
 
"Yes, truly, some one is speaking; those are words!"
 
Even a few feet from the wall I could hear distinctly. I succeeded in
catching uncertain, strange, undistinguishable words. They came as if
pronounced in low murmured whispers. The word '_forlorad_' was
several times repeated in a tone of sympathy and sorrow.
 
"Help!" I cried with all my might. "Help!"
 
I listened, I watched in the darkness for an answer, a cry, a mere
breath of sound, but nothing came. Some minutes passed. A whole world
of ideas had opened in my mind. I thought that my weakened voice
could never penetrate to my companions.
 
"It is they," I repeated. "What other men can be thirty leagues under
ground?"
 
I again began to listen. Passing my ear over the wall from one place
to another, I found the point where the voices seemed to be best
heard. The word '_forlorad_' again returned; then the rolling of
thunder which had roused me from my lethargy.
 
"No," I said, "no; it is not through such a mass that a voice can be
heard. I am surrounded by granite walls, and the loudest explosion
could never be heard here! This noise comes along the gallery. There
must be here some remarkable exercise of acoustic laws!"
 
I listened again, and this time, yes this time, I did distinctly hear
my name pronounced across the wide interval.
 
It was my uncle's own voice! He was talking to the guide. And
'_forlorad_' is a Danish word.
 
Then I understood it all. To make myself heard, I must speak along
this wall, which would conduct the sound of my voice just as wire
conducts electricity.
 
But there was no time to lose. If my companions moved but a few steps
away, the acoustic phenomenon would cease. I therefore approached the
wall, and pronounced these words as clearly as possible:
 
"Uncle Liedenbrock!"
 
I waited with the deepest anxiety. Sound does not travel with great
velocity. Even increased density air has no effect upon its rate of
travelling; it merely augments its intensity. Seconds, which seemed
ages, passed away, and at last these words reached me:
 
"Axel! Axel! is it you?"
 
. . . .
 
"Yes, yes," I replied.
 
. . . .
 
"My boy, where are you?"
 
. . . .
 
"Lost, in the deepest darkness."
 
. . . .
 
"Where is your lamp?"
 
. . . .
 
"It is out."
 
. . . .
 
"And the stream?"
 
. . . .
 
"Disappeared."
 
. . . .
 
"Axel, Axel, take courage!"
 
. . . .
 
"Wait! I am exhausted! I can't answer. Speak to me!"
 
. . . .
 
"Courage," resumed my uncle. "Don't speak. Listen to me. We have
looked for you up the gallery and down the gallery. Could not find
you. I wept for you, my poor boy. At last, supposing you were still
on the Hansbach, we fired our guns. Our voices are audible to each
other, but our hands cannot touch. But don't despair, Axel! It is a
great thing that we can hear each other."
 
. . . .
 
During this time I had been reflecting. A vague hope was returning to
my heart. There was one thing I must know to begin with. I placed my
lips close to the wall, saying:
 
"My uncle!"
 
. . . .
 
"My boy!" came to me after a few seconds.
 
. . . .
 
"We must know how far we are apart."
 
. . . .
 
"That is easy."
 
. . . .
 
"You have your chronometer?"
 
. . .
 
"Yes."
 
. . . .
 
"Well, take it. Pronounce my name, noting exactly the second when you
speak. I will repeat it as soon as it shall come to me, and you will
observe the exact moment when you get my answer."
 
"Yes; and half the time between my call and your answer will exactly
indicate that which my voice will take in coming to you."
 
. . . .
 
"Just so, my uncle."
 
. . . .
 
"Are you ready?"
 
. . . .
 
"Yes."
 
. . . . . .
 
"Now, attention. I am going to call your name."
 
. . . .
 
I put my ear to the wall, and as soon as the name 'Axel' came I
immediately replied "Axel," then waited.
 
. . . .
 
"Forty seconds," said my uncle. "Forty seconds between the two words;
so the sound takes twenty seconds in coming. Now, at the rate of
1,120 feet in a second, this is 22,400 feet, or four miles and a
quarter, nearly."
 
. . . .
 
"Four miles and a quarter!" I murmured.
 
. . . .
 
"It will soon be over, Axel."
 
. . . .
 
"Must I go up or down?"
 
. . . .
 
"Down - for this reason: We are in a vast chamber, with endless
galleries. Yours must lead into it, for it seems as if all the clefts
and fractures of the globe radiated round this vast cavern. So get
up, and begin walking. Walk on, drag yourself along, if necessary
slide down the steep places, and at the end you will find us ready to
receive you. Now begin moving."
 
. . . .
 
These words cheered me up.
 
"Good bye, uncle." I cried. "I am going. There will be no more voices
heard when once I have started. So good bye!"
 
. . . .
 
"Good bye, Axel, _au revoir!_"
 
. . . .
 
These were the last words I heard.
 
This wonderful underground conversation, carried on with a distance
of four miles and a quarter between us, concluded with these words of
hope. I thanked God from my heart, for it was He who had conducted me
through those vast solitudes to the point where, alone of all others
perhaps, the voices of my companions could have reached me.
 
This acoustic effect is easily explained on scientific grounds. It
arose from the concave form of the gallery and the conducting power
of the rock. There are many examples of this propagation of sounds
which remain unheard in the intermediate space. I remember that a
similar phenomenon has been observed in many places; amongst others
on the internal surface of the gallery of the dome of St. Paul's in
London, and especially in the midst of the curious caverns among the
quarries near Syracuse, the most wonderful of which is called
Dionysius' Ear.
 
These remembrances came into my mind, and I clearly saw that since my
uncle's voice really reached me, there could be no obstacle between
us. Following the direction by which the sound came, of course I
should arrive in his presence, if my strength did not fail me.
 
I therefore rose; I rather dragged myself than walked. The slope was
rapid, and I slid down.
 
Soon the swiftness of the descent increased horribly, and threatened
to become a fall. I no longer had the strength to stop myself.
 
Suddenly there was no ground under me. I felt myself revolving in
air, striking and rebounding against the craggy projections of a
vertical gallery, quite a well; my head struck against a sharp corner
of the rock, and I became unconscious.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXIX.
 
 
 
 
 
THALATTA! THALATTA!
 
When I came to myself, I was stretched in half darkness, covered with
thick coats and blankets. My uncle was watching over me, to discover
the least sign of life. At my first sigh he took my hand; when I
opened my eyes he uttered a cry of joy.
 
"He lives! he lives!" he cried.
 
"Yes, I am still alive," I answered feebly.
 
"My dear nephew," said my uncle, pressing me to his breast, "you are
saved."
 
I was deeply touched with the tenderness of his manner as he uttered
these words, and still more with the care with which he watched over
me. But such trials were wanted to bring out the Professor's tenderer
qualities.
 
At this moment Hans came, he saw my hand in my uncle's, and I may
safely say that there was joy in his countenance.
 
"_God dag,_" said he.
 
"How do you do, Hans? How are you? And now, uncle, tell me where we
are at the present moment?"
 
"To-morrow, Axel, to-morrow. Now you are too faint and weak. I have
bandaged your head with compresses which must not be disturbed. Sleep
now, and to-morrow I will tell you all."
 
"But do tell me what time it is, and what day."
 
"It is Sunday, the 8th of August, and it is ten at night. You must
ask me no more questions until the 10th."
 
In truth I was very weak, and my eyes involuntarily closed. I wanted
a good night's rest; and I therefore went off to sleep, with the
knowledge that I had been four long days alone in the heart of the
earth.
 
Next morning, on awakening, I looked round me. My couch, made up of
all our travelling gear, was in a charming grotto, adorned with
splendid stalactites, and the soil of which was a fine sand. It was
half light. There was no torch, no lamp, yet certain mysterious
glimpses of light came from without through a narrow opening in the
grotto. I heard too a vague and indistinct noise, something like the
murmuring of waves breaking upon a shingly shore, and at times I
seemed to hear the whistling of wind.
 
I wondered whether I was awake, whether I dreaming, whether my brain,
crazed by my fall, was not affected by imaginary noises. Yet neither
eyes, nor ears could be so utterly deceived.
 
It is a ray of daylight, I thought, sliding in through this cleft in
the rock! That is indeed the murmuring of waves! That is the rustling
noise of wind. Am I quite mistaken, or have we returned to the
surface of the earth? Has my uncle given up the expedition, or is it
happily terminated?
 
I was asking myself these unanswerable questions when the Professor
entered.
 
"Good morning, Axel," he cried cheerily. "I feel sure you are better."
 
"Yes, I am indeed," said I, sitting up on my couch.
 
"You can hardly fail to be better, for you have slept quietly. Hans
and I watched you by turns, and we have noticed you were evidently
recovering."
 
"Indeed, I do feel a great deal better, and I will give you a proof
of that presently if you will let me have my breakfast."
 
"You shall eat, lad. The fever has left you. Hans rubbed your wounds
with some ointment or other of which the Icelanders keep the secret,
and they have healed marvellously. Our hunter is a splendid fellow!"
 
Whilst he went on talking, my uncle prepared a few provisions, which
I devoured eagerly, notwithstanding his advice to the contrary. All
the while I was overwhelming him with questions which he answered
readily.
 
I then learnt that my providential fall had brought me exactly to the
extremity of an almost perpendicular shaft; and as I had landed in
the midst of an accompanying torrent of stones, the least of which
would have been enough to crush me, the conclusion was that a loose
portion of the rock had come down with me. This frightful conveyance
had thus carried me into the arms of my uncle, where I fell bruised,
bleeding, and insensible.
 
"Truly it is wonderful that you have not been killed a hundred times
over. But, for the love of God, don't let us ever separate again, or
we many never see each other more."
 
"Not separate! Is the journey not over, then?" I opened a pair of
astonished eyes, which immediately called for the question:
 
"What is the matter, Axel?"
 
"I have a question to ask you. You say that I am safe and sound?"
 
"No doubt you are."
 
"And all my limbs unbroken?"
 
"Certainly."
 
"And my head?"
 
"Your head, except for a few bruises, is all right; and it is on your
shoulders, where it ought to be."
 
"Well, I am afraid my brain is affected."
 
"Your mind affected!"
 
"Yes, I fear so. Are we again on the surface of the globe?"
 
"No, certainly not."
 
"Then I must be mad; for don't I see the light of day, and don't I
hear the wind blowing, and the sea breaking on the shore?"
 
"Ah! is that all?"
 
"Do tell me all about it."
 
"I can't explain the inexplicable, but you will soon see and
understand that geology has not yet learnt all it has to learn."
 
"Then let us go," I answered quickly.
 
"No, Axel; the open air might be bad for you."
 
"Open air?"
 
"Yes; the wind is rather strong. You must not expose yourself."
 
"But I assure you I am perfectly well."
 
"A little patience, my nephew. A relapse might get us into trouble,
and we have no time to lose, for the voyage may be a long one."
 
"The voyage!"
 
"Yes, rest to-day, and to-morrow we will set sail."
 
"Set sail!" - and I almost leaped up.
 
What did it all mean? Had we a river, a lake, a sea to depend upon?
Was there a ship at our disposal in some underground harbour?
 
My curiosity was highly excited, my uncle vainly tried to restrain
me. When he saw that my impatience was doing me harm, he yielded.
 
I dressed in haste. For greater safety I wrapped myself in a blanket,
and came out of the grotto.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXX.
 
 
 
 
 
A NEW MARE INTERNUM
 
At first I could hardly see anything. My eyes, unaccustomed to the
light, quickly closed. When I was able to reopen them, I stood more
stupefied even than surprised.
 
"The sea!" I cried.
 
"Yes," my uncle replied, "the Liedenbrock Sea; and I don't suppose
any other discoverer will ever dispute my claim to name it after
myself as its first discoverer."
 
A vast sheet of water, the commencement of a lake or an ocean, spread
far away beyond the range of the eye, reminding me forcibly of that
open sea which drew from Xenophon's ten thousand Greeks, after their
long retreat, the simultaneous cry, "Thalatta! thalatta!" the sea!
the sea! The deeply indented shore was lined with a breadth of fine
shining sand, softly lapped by the waves, and strewn with the small
shells which had been inhabited by the first of created beings. The
waves broke on this shore with the hollow echoing murmur peculiar to
vast inclosed spaces. A light foam flew over the waves before the
breath of a moderate breeze, and some of the spray fell upon my face.
On this slightly inclining shore, about a hundred fathoms from the
limit of the waves, came down the foot of a huge wall of vast cliffs,
which rose majestically to an enormous height. Some of these,
dividing the beach with their sharp spurs, formed capes and
promontories, worn away by the ceaseless action of the surf. Farther
on the eye discerned their massive outline sharply defined against
the hazy distant horizon.
 
It was quite an ocean, with the irregular shores of earth, but desert
and frightfully wild in appearance.
 
If my eyes were able to range afar over this great sea, it was
because a peculiar light brought to view every detail of it. It was
not the light of the sun, with his dazzling shafts of brightness and
the splendour of his rays; nor was it the pale and uncertain shimmer
of the moonbeams, the dim reflection of a nobler body of light. No;
the illuminating power of this light, its trembling diffusiveness,
its bright, clear whiteness, and its low temperature, showed that it
must be of electric origin. It was like an aurora borealis, a
continuous cosmical phenomenon, filling a cavern of sufficient extent
to contain an ocean.
 
The vault that spanned the space above, the sky, if it could be
called so, seemed composed of vast plains of cloud, shifting and
variable vapours, which by their condensation must at certain times
fall in torrents of rain. I should have thought that under so
powerful a pressure of the atmosphere there could be no evaporation;
and yet, under a law unknown to me, there were broad tracts of vapour
suspended in the air. But then 'the weather was fine.' The play of
the electric light produced singular effects upon the upper strata of
cloud. Deep shadows reposed upon their lower wreaths; and often,
between two separated fields of cloud, there glided down a ray of
unspeakable lustre. But it was not solar light, and there was no
heat. The general effect was sad, supremely melancholy. Instead of
the shining firmament, spangled with its innumerable stars, shining
singly or in clusters, I felt that all these subdued and shaded
fights were ribbed in by vast walls of granite, which seemed to
overpower me with their weight, and that all this space, great as it
was, would not be enough for the march of the humblest of satellites.
 
Then I remembered the theory of an English captain, who likened the
earth to a vast hollow sphere, in the interior of which the air
became luminous because of the vast pressure that weighed upon it;
while two stars, Pluto and Proserpine, rolled within upon the circuit
of their mysterious orbits.
 
We were in reality shut up inside an immeasurable excavation. Its
width could not be estimated, since the shore ran widening as far as
eye could reach, nor could its length, for the dim horizon bounded
the new. As for its height, it must have been several leagues. Where
this vault rested upon its granite base no eye could tell; but there
was a cloud hanging far above, the height of which we estimated at
12,000 feet, a greater height than that of any terrestrial vapour,
and no doubt due to the great density of the air.
 
The word cavern does not convey any idea of this immense space; words
of human tongue are inadequate to describe the discoveries of him who
ventures into the deep abysses of earth.
 
Besides I could not tell upon what geological theory to account for
the existence of such an excavation. Had the cooling of the globe
produced it? I knew of celebrated caverns from the descriptions of
travellers, but had never heard of any of such dimensions as this.
 
If the grotto of Guachara, in Colombia, visited by Humboldt, had not
given up the whole of the secret of its depth to the philosopher, who
investigated it to the depth of 2,500 feet, it probably did not
extend much farther. The immense mammoth cave in Kentucky is of
gigantic proportions, since its vaulted roof rises five hundred feet
[1] above the level of an unfathomable lake and travellers have
explored its ramifications to the extent of forty miles. But what
were these cavities compared to that in which I stood with wonder and
admiration, with its sky of luminous vapours, its bursts of electric
light, and a vast sea filling its bed? My imagination fell powerless
before such immensity.
 
I gazed upon these wonders in silence. Words failed me to express my
feelings. I felt as if I was in some distant planet Uranus or Neptune
- and in the presence of phenomena of which my terrestrial experience
gave me no cognisance. For such novel sensations, new words were
wanted; and my imagination failed to supply them. I gazed, I thought,
I admired, with a stupefaction mingled with a certain amount of fear.
 
The unforeseen nature of this spectacle brought back the colour to my
cheeks. I was under a new course of treatment with the aid of
astonishment, and my convalescence was promoted by this novel system
of therapeutics; besides, the dense and breezy air invigorated me,
supplying more oxygen to my lungs.
 
It will be easily conceived that after an imprisonment of forty seven
days in a narrow gallery it was the height of physical enjoyment to
breathe a moist air impregnated with saline particles.
 
[1] One hundred and twenty. (Trans.)
 
I was delighted to leave my dark grotto. My uncle, already familiar
with these wonders, had ceased to feel surprise.
 
"You feel strong enough to walk a little way now?" he asked.
 
"Yes, certainly; and nothing could be more delightful."
 
"Well, take my arm, Axel, and let us follow the windings of the
shore."
 
I eagerly accepted, and we began to coast along this new sea. On the
left huge pyramids of rock, piled one upon another, produced a
prodigious titanic effect. Down their sides flowed numberless
waterfalls, which went on their way in brawling but pellucid streams.
A few light vapours, leaping from rock to rock, denoted the place of
hot springs; and streams flowed softly down to the common basin,
gliding down the gentle slopes with a softer murmur.
 
Amongst these streams I recognised our faithful travelling companion,
the Hansbach, coming to lose its little volume quietly in the mighty
sea, just as if it had done nothing else since the beginning of the
world.
 
"We shall see it no more," I said, with a sigh.
 
"What matters," replied the philosopher, "whether this or another
serves to guide us?"
 
I thought him rather ungrateful.
 
But at that moment my attention was drawn to an unexpected sight. At
a distance of five hundred paces, at the turn of a high promontory,
appeared a high, tufted, dense forest. It was composed of trees of
moderate height, formed like umbrellas, with exact geometrical
outlines. The currents of wind seemed to have had no effect upon
their shape, and in the midst of the windy blasts they stood unmoved
and firm, just like a clump of petrified cedars.
 
I hastened forward. I could not give any name to these singular
creations. Were they some of the two hundred thousand species of
vegetables known hitherto, and did they claim a place of their own in
the lacustrine flora? No; when we arrived under their shade my
surprise turned into admiration. There stood before me productions of
earth, but of gigantic stature, which my uncle immediately named.
 
"It is only a forest of mushrooms," said he.
 
And he was right. Imagine the large development attained by these
plants, which prefer a warm, moist climate. I knew that the
_Lycopodon giganteum_ attains, according to Bulliard, a circumference
of eight or nine feet; but here were pale mushrooms, thirty to forty
feet high, and crowned with a cap of equal diameter. There they stood
in thousands. No light could penetrate between their huge cones, and
complete darkness reigned beneath those giants; they formed
settlements of domes placed in close array like the round, thatched
roofs of a central African city.
 
Yet I wanted to penetrate farther underneath, though a chill fell
upon me as soon as I came under those cellular vaults. For half an
hour we wandered from side to side in the damp shades, and it was a
comfortable and pleasant change to arrive once more upon the sea
shore.
 
But the subterranean vegetation was not confined to these fungi.
Farther on rose groups of tall trees of colourless foliage and easy
to recognise. They were lowly shrubs of earth, here attaining
gigantic size; lycopodiums, a hundred feet high; the huge sigillaria,
found in our coal mines; tree ferns, as tall as our fir-trees in
northern latitudes; lepidodendra, with cylindrical forked stems,
terminated by long leaves, and bristling with rough hairs like those
of the cactus.
 
"Wonderful, magnificent, splendid!" cried my uncle. "Here is the
entire flora of the second period of the world - the transition
period. These, humble garden plants with us, were tall trees in the
early ages. Look, Axel, and admire it all. Never had botanist such a
feast as this!"
 
"You are right, my uncle. Providence seems to have preserved in this
immense conservatory the antediluvian plants which the wisdom of
philosophers has so sagaciously put together again."
 
"It is a conservatory, Axel; but is it not also a menagerie?"
 
"Surely not a menagerie!"
 
"Yes; no doubt of it. Look at that dust under your feet; see the
bones scattered on the ground."
 
"So there are!" I cried; "bones of extinct animals."
 
I had rushed upon these remains, formed of indestructible phosphates
of lime, and without hesitation I named these monstrous bones, which
lay scattered about like decayed trunks of trees.
 
"Here is the lower jaw of a mastodon," [1] I said. "These are the
molar teeth of the deinotherium; this femur must have belonged to the
greatest of those beasts, the megatherium. It certainly is a
menagerie, for these remains were not brought here by a deluge. The
animals to which they belonged roamed on the shores of this
subterranean sea, under the shade of those arborescent trees. Here
are entire skeletons. And yet I cannot understand the appearance of
these quadrupeds in a granite cavern."
 
[1] These animals belonged to a late geological period, the Pliocene,
just before the glacial epoch, and therefore could have no connection
with the carboniferous vegetation. (Trans.)
 
"Why?"
 
"Because animal life existed upon the earth only in the secondary
period, when a sediment of soil had been deposited by the rivers, and
taken the place of the incandescent rocks of the primitive period."
 
"Well, Axel, there is a very simple answer to your objection that
this soil is alluvial."
 
"What! at such a depth below the surface of the earth?"
 
"No doubt; and there is a geological explanation of the fact. At a
certain period the earth consisted only of an elastic crust or bark,
alternately acted on by forces from above or below, according to the
laws of attraction and gravitation. Probably there were subsidences
of the outer crust, when a portion of the sedimentary deposits was
carried down sudden openings."
 
"That may be," I replied; "but if there have been creatures now
extinct in these underground regions, why may not some of those
monsters be now roaming through these gloomy forests, or hidden
behind the steep crags?"
 
And as this unpleasant notion got hold of me, I surveyed with anxious
scrutiny the open spaces before me; but no living creature appeared
upon the barren strand.
 
I felt rather tired, and went to sit down at the end of a promontory,
at the foot of which the waves came and beat themselves into spray.
Thence my eye could sweep every part of the bay; within its extremity
a little harbour was formed between the pyramidal cliffs, where the
still waters slept untouched by the boisterous winds. A brig and two
or three schooners might have moored within it in safety. I almost
fancied I should presently see some ship issue from it, full sail,
and take to the open sea under the southern breeze.
 
But this illusion lasted a very short time. We were the only living
creatures in this subterranean world. When the wind lulled, a deeper
silence than that of the deserts fell upon the arid, naked rocks, and
weighed upon the surface of the ocean. I then desired to pierce the
distant haze, and to rend asunder the mysterious curtain that hung
across the horizon. Anxious queries arose to my lips. Where did that
sea terminate? Where did it lead to? Should we ever know anything
about its opposite shores?
 
My uncle made no doubt about it at all; I both desired and feared.
 
After spending an hour in the contemplation of this marvellous
spectacle, we returned to the shore to regain the grotto, and I fell
asleep in the midst of the strangest thoughts.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXI.
 
 
 
 
 
PREPARATIONS FOR A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY
 
The next morning I awoke feeling perfectly well. I thought a bathe
would do me good, and I went to plunge for a few minutes into the
waters of this mediterranean sea, for assuredly it better deserved
this name than any other sea.
 
I came back to breakfast with a good appetite. Hans was a good
caterer for our little household; he had water and fire at his
disposal, so that he was able to vary our bill of fare now and then.
For dessert he gave us a few cups of coffee, and never was coffee so
delicious.
 
"Now," said my uncle, "now is the time for high tide, and we must not
lose the opportunity to study this phenomenon."
 
"What! the tide!" I cried. "Can the influence of the sun and moon be
felt down here?"
 
"Why not? Are not all bodies subject throughout their mass to the
power of universal attraction? This mass of water cannot escape the
general law. And in spite of the heavy atmospheric pressure on the
surface, you will see it rise like the Atlantic itself."
 
At the same moment we reached the sand on the shore, and the waves
were by slow degrees encroaching on the shore.
 
"Here is the tide rising," I cried.
 
"Yes, Axel; and judging by these ridges of foam, you may observe that
the sea will rise about twelve feet."
 
"This is wonderful," I said.
 
"No; it is quite natural."
 
"You may say so, uncle; but to me it is most extraordinary, and I can
hardly believe my eyes. Who would ever have imagined, under this
terrestrial crust, an ocean with ebbing and flowing tides, with winds
and storms?"
 
"Well," replied my uncle, "is there any scientific reason against it?"
 
"No; I see none, as soon as the theory of central heat is given up."
"So then, thus far," he answered, "the theory of Sir Humphry Davy is
confirmed."
 
"Evidently it is; and now there is no reason why there should not be
seas and continents in the interior of the earth."
 
"No doubt," said my uncle; "and inhabited too."
 
"To be sure," said I; "and why should not these waters yield to us
fishes of unknown species?"
 
"At any rate," he replied, "we have not seen any yet."
 
"Well, let us make some lines, and see if the bait will draw here as
it does in sublunary regions."
 
"We will try, Axel, for we must penetrate all secrets of these newly
discovered regions."
 
"But where are we, uncle? for I have not yet asked you that question,
and your instruments must be able to furnish the answer."
 
"Horizontally, three hundred and fifty leagues from Iceland."
 
"So much as that?"
 
"I am sure of not being a mile out of my reckoning."
 
"And does the compass still show south-east?"
 
"Yes; with a westerly deviation of nineteen degrees forty-five
minutes, just as above ground. As for its dip, a curious fact is
coming to light, which I have observed carefully: that the needle,
instead of dipping towards the pole as in the northern hemisphere, on
the contrary, rises from it."
 
"Would you then conclude," I said, "that the magnetic pole is
somewhere between the surface of the globe and the point where we
are?"
 
"Exactly so; and it is likely enough that if we were to reach the
spot beneath the polar regions, about that seventy-first degree where
Sir James Ross has discovered the magnetic pole to be situated, we
should see the needle point straight up. Therefore that mysterious
centre of attraction is at no great depth."
 
I remarked: " It is so; and here is a fact which science has scarcely
suspected."
 
"Science, my lad, has been built upon many errors; but they are
errors which it was good to fall into, for they led to the truth."
 
"What depth have we now reached?"
 
"We are thirty-five leagues below the surface."
 
"So," I said, examining the map, "the Highlands of Scotland are over
our heads, and the Grampians are raising their rugged summits above
us."
 
"Yes," answered the Professor laughing. "It is rather a heavy weight
to bear, but a solid arch spans over our heads. The great Architect
has built it of the best materials; and never could man have given it
so wide a stretch. What are the finest arches of bridges and the
arcades of cathedrals, compared with this far reaching vault, with a
radius of three leagues, beneath which a wide and tempest-tossed
ocean may flow at its ease?"
 
"Oh, I am not afraid that it will fall down upon my head. But now
what are your plans? Are you not thinking of returning to the surface
now?"
 
"Return! no, indeed! We will continue our journey, everything having
gone on well so far."
 
"But how are we to get down below this liquid surface?"
 
"Oh, I am not going to dive head foremost. But if all oceans are
properly speaking but lakes, since they are encompassed by land, of
course this internal sea will be surrounded by a coast of granite,
and on the opposite shores we shall find fresh passages opening."
 
"How long do you suppose this sea to be?"
 
"Thirty or forty leagues; so that we have no time to lose, and we
shall set sail to-morrow."
 
I looked about for a ship.
 
"Set sail, shall we? But I should like to see my boat first."
 
"It will not be a boat at all, but a good, well-made raft."
 
"Why," I said, "a raft would be just as hard to make as a boat, and I
don't see -"
 
"I know you don't see; but you might hear if you would listen. Don't
you hear the hammer at work? Hans is already busy at it."
 
"What, has he already felled the trees?"
 
"Oh, the trees were already down. Come, and you will see for
yourself."
 
After half an hour's walking, on the other side of the promontory
which formed the little natural harbour, I perceived Hans at work. In
a few more steps I was at his side. To my great surprise a
half-finished raft was already lying on the sand, made of a peculiar
kind of wood, and a great number of planks, straight and bent, and of
frames, were covering the ground, enough almost for a little fleet.
 
"Uncle, what wood is this?" I cried.
 
"It is fir, pine, or birch, and other northern coniferae, mineralised
by the action of the sea. It is called surturbrand, a variety of
brown coal or lignite, found chiefly in Iceland."
 
"But surely, then, like other fossil wood, it must be as hard as
stone, and cannot float?"
 
"Sometimes that may happen; some of these woods become true
anthracites; but others, such as this, have only gone through the
first stage of fossil transformation. Just look," added my uncle,
throwing into the sea one of those precious waifs.
 
The bit of wood, after disappearing, returned to the surface and
oscillated to and fro with the waves.
 
"Are you convinced?" said my uncle.
 
"I am quite convinced, although it is incredible!"
 
By next evening, thanks to the industry and skill of our guide, the
raft was made. It was ten feet by five; the planks of surturbrand,
braced strongly together with cords, presented an even surface, and
when launched this improvised vessel floated easily upon the waves of
the Liedenbrock Sea.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXII.
 
 
 
 
 
WONDERS OF THE DEEP
 
On the 13th of August we awoke early. We were now to begin to adopt a
mode of travelling both more expeditious and less fatiguing than
hitherto.
 
A mast was made of two poles spliced together, a yard was made of a
third, a blanket borrowed from our coverings made a tolerable sail.
There was no want of cordage for the rigging, and everything was well
and firmly made.
 
The provisions, the baggage, the instruments, the guns, and a good
quantity of fresh water from the rocks around, all found their proper
places on board; and at six the Professor gave the signal to embark.
Hans had fitted up a rudder to steer his vessel. He took the tiller,
and unmoored; the sail was set, and we were soon afloat. At the
moment of leaving the harbour, my uncle, who was tenaciously fond of
naming his new discoveries, wanted to give it a name, and proposed
mine amongst others.
 
"But I have a better to propose," I said: "Grauben. Let it be called
Port Gräuben; it will look very well upon the map."
 
"Port Gräuben let it be then."
 
And so the cherished remembrance of my Virlandaise became associated
with our adventurous expedition.
 
The wind was from the north-west. We went with it at a high rate of
speed. The dense atmosphere acted with great force and impelled us
swiftly on.
 
In an hour my uncle had been able to estimate our progress. At this
rate, he said, we shall make thirty leagues in twenty-four hours, and
we shall soon come in sight of the opposite shore.
 
I made no answer, but went and sat forward. The northern shore was
already beginning to dip under the horizon. The eastern and western
strands spread wide as if to bid us farewell. Before our eyes lay far
and wide a vast sea; shadows of great clouds swept heavily over its
silver-grey surface; the glistening bluish rays of electric light,
here and there reflected by the dancing drops of spray, shot out
little sheaves of light from the track we left in our rear. Soon we
entirely lost sight of land; no object was left for the eye to judge
by, and but for the frothy track of the raft, I might have thought we
were standing still.
 
About twelve, immense shoals of seaweeds came in sight. I was aware
of the great powers of vegetation that characterise these plants,
which grow at a depth of twelve thousand feet, reproduce themselves
under a pressure of four hundred atmospheres, and sometimes form
barriers strong enough to impede the course of a ship. But never, I
think, were such seaweeds as those which we saw floating in immense
waving lines upon the sea of Liedenbrock.
 
Our raft skirted the whole length of the fuci, three or four thousand
feet long, undulating like vast serpents beyond the reach of sight; I
found some amusement in tracing these endless waves, always thinking
I should come to the end of them, and for hours my patience was vying
with my surprise.
 
What natural force could have produced such plants, and what must
have been the appearance of the earth in the first ages of its
formation, when, under the action of heat and moisture, the vegetable
kingdom alone was developing on its surface?
 
Evening came, and, as on the previous day, I perceived no change in
the luminous condition of the air. It was a constant condition, the
permanency of which might be relied upon.
 
After supper I laid myself down at the foot of the mast, and fell
asleep in the midst of fantastic reveries.
 
Hans, keeping fast by the helm, let the raft run on, which, after
all, needed no steering, the wind blowing directly aft.
 
Since our departure from Port Gräuben, Professor Liedenbrock had
entrusted the log to my care; I was to register every observation,
make entries of interesting phenomena, the direction of the wind, the
rate of sailing, the way we made - in a word, every particular of our
singular voyage.
 
I shall therefore reproduce here these daily notes, written, so to
speak, as the course of events directed, in order to furnish an exact
narrative of our passage.
 
_Friday, August 14_. - Wind steady, N.W. The raft makes rapid way in
a direct line. Coast thirty leagues to leeward. Nothing in sight
before us. Intensity of light the same. Weather fine; that is to say,
that the clouds are flying high, are light, and bathed in a white
atmosphere resembling silver in a state of fusion. Therm. 89° Fahr.
 
At noon Hans prepared a hook at the end of a line. He baited it with
a small piece of meat and flung it into the sea. For two hours
nothing was caught. Are these waters, then, bare of inhabitants? No,
there's a pull at the line. Hans draws it in and brings out a
struggling fish.
 
"A sturgeon," I cried; "a small sturgeon."
 
The Professor eyes the creature attentively, and his opinion differs
from mine.
 
The head of this fish was flat, but rounded in front, and the
anterior part of its body was plated with bony, angular scales; it
had no teeth, its pectoral fins were large, and of tail there was
none. The animal belonged to the same order as the sturgeon, but
differed from that fish in many essential particulars. After a short
examination my uncle pronounced his opinion.
 
"This fish belongs to an extinct family, of which only fossil traces
are found in the devonian formations."
 
"What!" I cried. "Have we taken alive an inhabitant of the seas of
primitive ages?"
 
"Yes; and you will observe that these fossil fishes have no identity
with any living species. To have in one's possession a living
specimen is a happy event for a naturalist."
 
"But to what family does it belong?"
 
"It is of the order of ganoids, of the family of the cephalaspidae;
and a species of pterichthys. But this one displays a peculiarity
confined to all fishes that inhabit subterranean waters. It is blind,
and not only blind, but actually has no eyes at all."
 
I looked: nothing could be more certain. But supposing it might be a
solitary case, we baited afresh, and threw out our line. Surely this
ocean is well peopled with fish, for in another couple of hours we
took a large quantity of pterichthydes, as well as of others
belonging to the extinct family of the dipterides, but of which my
uncle could not tell the species; none had organs of sight. This
unhoped-for catch recruited our stock of provisions.
 
Thus it is evident that this sea contains none but species known to
us in their fossil state, in which fishes as well as reptiles are the
less perfectly and completely organised the farther back their date
of creation.
 
Perhaps we may yet meet with some of those saurians which science has
reconstructed out of a bit of bone or cartilage. I took up the
telescope and scanned the whole horizon, and found it everywhere a
desert sea. We are far away removed from the shores.
 
I gaze upward in the air. Why should not some of the strange birds
restored by the immortal Cuvier again flap their 'sail-broad vans' in
this dense and heavy atmosphere? There are sufficient fish for their
support. I survey the whole space that stretches overhead; it is as
desert as the shore was.
 
Still my imagination carried me away amongst the wonderful
speculations of palaeontology. Though awake I fell into a dream. I
thought I could see floating on the surface of the waters enormous
chelonia, preadamite tortoises, resembling floating islands. Over the
dimly lighted strand there trod the huge mammals of the first ages of
the world, the leptotherium (slender beast), found in the caverns of
Brazil; the merycotherium (ruminating beast), found in the 'drift' of
iceclad Siberia. Farther on, the pachydermatous lophiodon (crested
toothed), a gigantic tapir, hides behind the rocks to dispute its
prey with the anoplotherium (unarmed beast), a strange creature,
which seemed a compound of horse, rhinoceros, camel, and
hippopotamus. The colossal mastodon (nipple-toothed) twists and
untwists his trunk, and brays and pounds with his huge tusks the
fragments of rock that cover the shore; whilst the megatherium (huge
beast), buttressed upon his enormous hinder paws, grubs in the soil,
awaking the sonorous echoes of the granite rocks with his tremendous
roarings. Higher up, the protopitheca - the first monkey that
appeared on the globe - is climbing up the steep ascents. Higher yet,
the pterodactyle (wing-fingered) darts in irregular zigzags to and
fro in the heavy air. In the uppermost regions of the air immense
birds, more powerful than the cassowary, and larger than the ostrich,
spread their vast breadth of wings and strike with their heads the
granite vault that bounds the sky.
 
All this fossil world rises to life again in my vivid imagination. I
return to the scriptural periods or ages of the world, conventionally
called 'days,' long before the appearance of man, when the unfinished
world was as yet unfitted for his support. Then mydream backed even
farther still into the ages before the creation of living beings. The
mammals disappear, then the birds vanish, then the reptiles of the
secondary period, and finally the fish, the crustaceans, molluscs,
and articulated beings. Then the zoophytes of the transition period
also return to nothing. I am the only living thing in the world: all
life is concentrated in my beating heart alone. There are no more
seasons; climates are no more; the heat of the globe continually
increases and neutralises that of the sun. Vegetation becomes
accelerated. I glide like a shade amongst arborescent ferns, treading
with unsteady feet the coloured marls and the particoloured clays; I
lean for support against the trunks of immense conifers; I lie in the
shade of sphenophylla (wedge-leaved), asterophylla (star-leaved), and
lycopods, a hundred feet high.
 
Ages seem no more than days! I am passed, against my will, in
retrograde order, through the long series of terrestrial changes.
Plants disappear; granite rocks soften; intense heat converts solid
bodies into thick fluids; the waters again cover the face of the
earth; they boil, they rise in whirling eddies of steam; white and
ghastly mists wrap round the shifting forms of the earth, which by
imperceptible degrees dissolves into a gaseous mass, glowing fiery
red and white, as large and as shining as the sun.
 
And I myself am floating with wild caprice in the midst of this
nebulous mass of fourteen hundred thousand times the volume of the
earth into which it will one day be condensed, and carried forward
amongst the planetary bodies. My body is no longer firm and
terrestrial; it is resolved into its constituent atoms, subtilised,
volatilised. Sublimed into imponderable vapour, I mingle and am lost
in the endless foods of those vast globular volumes of vaporous
mists, which roll upon their flaming orbits through infinite space.
 
But is it not a dream? Whither is it carrying me? My feverish hand
has vainly attempted to describe upon paper its strange and wonderful
details. I have forgotten everything that surrounds me. The
Professor, the guide, the raft - are all gone out of my ken. An
illusion has laid hold upon me.
 
"What is the matter?" my uncle breaks in.
 
My staring eyes are fixed vacantly upon him.
 
"Take care, Axel, or you will fall overboard."
 
At that moment I felt the sinewy hand of Hans seizing me vigorously.
But for him, carried away by my dream, I should have thrown myself
into the sea.
 
"Is he mad?" cried the Professor.
 
"What is it all about?" at last I cried, returning to myself.
 
"Do you feel ill?" my uncle asked.
 
"No; but I have had a strange hallucination; it is over now. Is all
going on right?"
 
"Yes, it is a fair wind and a fine sea; we are sailing rapidly along,
and if I am not out in my reckoning, we shall soon land."
 
At these words I rose and gazed round upon the horizon, still
everywhere bounded by clouds alone.
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXIII.
 
 
 
 
 
A BATTLE OF MONSTERS
 
_Saturday, August 15_. - The sea unbroken all round. No land in
sight. The horizon seems extremely distant.
 
My head is still stupefied with the vivid reality of my dream.
 
My uncle has had no dreams, but he is out of temper. He examines the
horizon all round with his glass, and folds his arms with the air of
an injured man.
 
I remark that Professor Liedenbrock has a tendency to relapse into an
impatient mood, and I make a note of it in my log. All my danger and
sufferings were needed to strike a spark of human. feeling out of
him; but now that I am well his nature has resumed its sway. And yet,
what cause was there for anger? Is not the voyage prospering as
favourably as possible under the circumstances? Is not the raft
spinning along with marvellous speed?
 
"-You seem anxious, my uncle," I said, seeing him continually with
his glass to his eye.
 
"Anxious! No, not at all."
 
"Impatient, then?"
 
"One might be, with less reason than now."
 
"Yet we are going very fast."
 
"What does that signify? I am not complaining that the rate is slow,
but that the sea is so wide."
 
I then remembered that the Professor, before starting, had estimated
the length of this underground sea at thirty leagues. Now we had made
three times the distance, yet still the southern coast was not in
sight.
 
"We are not descending as we ought to be," the Professor declares.
"We are losing time, and the fact is, I have not come all this way to
take a little sail upon a pond on a raft."
 
He called this sea a pond, and our long voyage, taking a little sail!
 
"But," I remarked, "since we have followed the road that Saknussemm
has shown us -"
 
"That is just the question. Have we followed that road? Did
Saknussemm meet this sheet of water? Did he cross it? Has not the
stream that we followed led us altogether astray?"
 
"At any rate we cannot feel sorry to have come so far. This prospect
is magnificent, and -"
 
"But I don't care for prospects. I came with an object, and I mean to
attain it. Therefore don't talk to me about views and prospects."
 
I take this as my answer, and I leave the Professor to bite his lips
with impatience. At six in the evening Hans asks for his wages, and
his three rix dollars are counted out to him.
 
_Sunday, August 16. _- Nothing new. Weather unchanged. The wind
freshens. On awaking, my first thought was to observe the intensity
of the light. I was possessed with an apprehension lest the electric
light should grow dim, or fail altogether. But there seemed no reason
to fear. The shadow of the raft was clearly outlined upon the surface
of the waves.
 
Truly this sea is of infinite width. It must be as wide as the
Mediterranean or the Atlantic - and why not?
 
My uncle took soundings several times. He tied the heaviest of our
pickaxes to a long rope which he let down two hundred fathoms. No
bottom yet; and we had some difficulty in hauling up our plummet.
 
But when the pick was shipped again, Hans pointed out on its surface
deep prints as if it had been violently compressed between two hard
bodies.
 
I looked at the hunter.
 
"_Tänder,_" said he.
 
I could not understand him, and turned to my uncle who was entirely
absorbed in his calculations. I had rather not disturb him while he
is quiet. I return to the Icelander. He by a snapping motion of his
jaws conveys his ideas to me.
 
"Teeth!" I cried, considering the iron bar with more attention.
 
Yes, indeed, those are the marks of teeth imprinted upon the metal!
The jaws which they arm must be possessed of amazing strength. Is
there some monster beneath us belonging to the extinct races, more
voracious than the shark, more fearful in vastness than the whale? I
could not take my eyes off this indented iron bar. Surely will my
last night's dream be realised?
 
These thoughts agitated me all day, and my imagination scarcely
calmed down after several hours' sleep.
 
_Monday, August 17. -_ I am trying to recall the peculiar instincts
of the monsters of the preadamite world, who, coming next in
succession after the molluscs, the crustaceans and le fishes,
preceded the animals of mammalian race upon the earth. The world then
belonged to reptiles. Those monsters held the mastery in the seas of
the secondary period. They possessed a perfect organisation, gigantic
proportions, prodigious strength. The saurians of our day, the
alligators and the crocodiles, are but feeble reproductions of their
forefathers of primitive ages.
 
I shudder as I recall these monsters to my remembrance. No human eye
has ever beheld them living. They burdened this earth a thousand ages
before man appeared, but their fossil remains, found in the
argillaceous limestone called by the English the lias, have enabled
their colossal structure to be perfectly built up again and
anatomically ascertained.
 
I saw at the Hamburg museum the skeleton of one of these creatures
thirty feet in length. Am I then fated - I, a denizen of earth - to
be placed face to face with these representatives of long extinct
families? No; surely it cannot be! Yet the deep marks of conical
teeth upon the iron pick are certainly those of the crocodile.
 
My eyes are fearfully bent upon the sea. I dread to see one of these
monsters darting forth from its submarine caverns. I suppose
Professor Liedenbrock was of my opinion too, and even shared my
fears, for after having examined the pick, his eyes traversed the
ocean from side to side. What a very bad notion that was of his, I
thought to myself, to take soundings just here! He has disturbed some
monstrous beast in its remote den, and if we are not attacked on our
voyage -
 
I look at our guns and see that they are all right. My uncle notices
it, and looks on approvingly.
 
Already widely disturbed regions on the surface of the water indicate
some commotion below. The danger is approaching. We must be on the
look out.
 
_Tuesday, August 18. _- Evening came, or rather the time came when
sleep weighs down the weary eyelids, for there is no night here, and
the ceaseless light wearies the eyes with its persistency just as if
we were sailing under an arctic sun. Hans was at the helm. During his
watch I slept.
 
Two hours afterwards a terrible shock awoke me. The raft was heaved
up on a watery mountain and pitched down again, at a distance of
twenty fathoms.
 
"What is the matter?" shouted my uncle. "Have we struck land?"
 
Hans pointed with his finger at a dark mass six hundred yards away,
rising and falling alternately with heavy plunges. I looked and cried:
 
"It is an enormous porpoise."
 
"Yes," replied my uncle, "and there is a sea lizard of vast size."
 
"And farther on a monstrous crocodile. Look at its vast jaws and its
rows of teeth! It is diving down!"
 
"There's a whale, a whale!" cried the Professor. "I can see its great
fins. See how he is throwing out air and water through his blowers."
 
And in fact two liquid columns were rising to a considerable height
above the sea. We stood amazed, thunderstruck, at the presence of
such a herd of marine monsters. They were of supernatural dimensions;
the smallest of them would have crunched our raft, crew and all, at
one snap of its huge jaws.
 
Hans wants to tack to get away from this dangerous neighbourhood; but
he sees on the other hand enemies not less terrible; a tortoise forty
feet long, and a serpent of thirty, lifting its fearful head and
gleaming eyes above the flood.
 
Flight was out of the question now. The reptiles rose; they wheeled
around our little raft with a rapidity greater than that of express
trains. They described around us gradually narrowing circles. I took
up my rifle. But what could a ball do against the scaly armour with
which these enormous beasts were clad?
 
We stood dumb with fear. They approach us close: on one side the
crocodile, on the other the serpent. The remainder of the sea
monsters have disappeared. I prepare to fire. Hans stops me by a
gesture. The two monsters pass within a hundred and fifty yards of
the raft, and hurl themselves the one upon the other, with a fury
which prevents them from seeing us.
 
At three hundred yards from us the battle was fought. We could
distinctly observe the two monsters engaged in deadly conflict. But
it now seems to me as if the other animals were taking part in the
fray - the porpoise, the whale, the lizard, the tortoise. Every
moment I seem to see one or other of them. I point them to the
Icelander. He shakes his head negatively.
 
"_Tva,_" says he.
 
"What two? Does he mean that there are only two animals?"
 
"He is right," said my uncle, whose glass has never left his eye.
 
"Surely you must be mistaken," I cried.
 
"No: the first of those monsters has a porpoise's snout, a lizard's
head, a crocodile's teeth; and hence our mistake. It is the
ichthyosaurus (the fish lizard), the most terrible of the ancient
monsters of the deep."
 
"And the other?"
 
"The other is a plesiosaurus (almost lizard), a serpent, armoured
with the carapace and the paddles of a turtle; he is the dreadful
enemy of the other."
 
Hans had spoken truly. Two monsters only were creating all this
commotion; and before my eyes are two reptiles of the primitive
world. I can distinguish the eye of the ichthyosaurus glowing like a
red-hot coal, and as large as a man's head. Nature has endowed it
with an optical apparatus of extreme power, and capable of resisting
the pressure of the great volume of water in the depths it inhabits.
It has been appropriately called the saurian whale, for it has both
the swiftness and the rapid movements of this monster of our own day.
This one is not less than a hundred feet long, and I can judge of its
size when it sweeps over the waters the vertical coils of its tail.
Its jaw is enormous, and according to naturalists it is armed with no
less than one hundred and eighty-two teeth.
 
The plesiosaurus, a serpent with a cylindrical body and a short tail,
has four flappers or paddles to act like oars. Its body is entirely
covered with a thick armour of scales, and its neck, as flexible as a
swan's, rises thirty feet above the waves.
 
Those huge creatures attacked each other with the greatest animosity.
They heaved around them liquid mountains, which rolled even to our
raft and rocked it perilously. Twenty times we were near capsizing.
Hissings of prodigious force are heard. The two beasts are fast
locked together; I cannot distinguish the one from the other. The
probable rage of the conqueror inspires us with intense fear.
 
One hour, two hours, pass away. The struggle continues with unabated
ferocity. The combatants alternately approach and recede from our
raft. We remain motionless, ready to fire. Suddenly the ichthyosaurus
and the plesiosaurus disappear below, leaving a whirlpool eddying in
the water. Several minutes pass by while the fight goes on under
water.
 
All at once an enormous head is darted up, the head of the
plesiosaurus. The monster is wounded to death. I no longer see his
scaly armour. Only his long neck shoots up, drops again, coils and
uncoils, droops, lashes the waters like a gigantic whip, and writhes
like a worm that you tread on. The water is splashed for a long way
around. The spray almost blinds us. But soon the reptile's agony
draws to an end; its movements become fainter, its contortions cease
to be so violent, and the long serpentine form lies a lifeless log on
the labouring deep.
 
As for the ichthyosaurus - has he returned to his submarine cavern?
or will he reappear on the surface of the sea?
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXIV.
 
 
 
 
 
THE GREAT GEYSER
 
_Wednesday, August 19_. - Fortunately the wind blows violently, and
has enabled us to flee from the scene of the late terrible struggle.
Hans keeps at his post at the helm. My uncle, whom the absorbing
incidents of the combat had drawn away from his contemplations, began
again to look impatiently around him.
 
The voyage resumes its uniform tenor, which I don't care to break
with a repetition of such events as yesterday's.
 
Thursday, Aug. 20. - Wind N.N.E., unsteady and fitful. Temperature
high. Rate three and a half leagues an hour.
 
About noon a distant noise is heard. I note the fact without being
able to explain it. It is a continuous roar.
 
"In the distance," says the Professor, "there is a rock or islet,
against which the sea is breaking."
 
Hans climbs up the mast, but sees no breakers. The ocean' is smooth
and unbroken to its farthest limit.
 
Three hours pass away. The roarings seem to proceed from a very
distant waterfall.
 
I remark upon this to my uncle, who replies doubtfully: "Yes, I am
convinced that I am right." Are we, then, speeding forward to some
cataract which will cast us down an abyss? This method of getting on
may please the Professor, because it is vertical; but for my part I
prefer the more ordinary modes of horizontal progression.
 
At any rate, some leagues to the windward there must be some noisy
phenomenon, for now the roarings are heard with increasing loudness.
Do they proceed from the sky or the ocean?
 
I look up to the atmospheric vapours, and try to fathom their depths.
The sky is calm and motionless. The clouds have reached the utmost
limit of the lofty vault, and there lie still bathed in the bright
glare of the electric light. It is not there that we must seek for
the cause of this phenomenon. Then I examine the horizon, which is
unbroken and clear of all mist. There is no change in its aspect. But
if this noise arises from a fall, a cataract, if all this ocean flows
away headlong into a lower basin yet, if that deafening roar is
produced by a mass of falling water, the current must needs
accelerate, and its increasing speed will give me the measure of the
peril that threatens us. I consult the current: there is none. I
throw an empty bottle into the sea: it lies still.
 
About four Hans rises, lays hold of the mast, climbs to its top.
Thence his eye sweeps a large area of sea, and it is fixed upon a
point. His countenance exhibits no surprise, but his eye is immovably
steady.
 
"He sees something," says my uncle.
 
"I believe he does."
 
Hans comes down, then stretches his arm to the south, saying:
 
"_Dere nere!_"
 
"Down there?" repeated my uncle.
 
Then, seizing his glass, he gazes attentively for a minute, which
seems to me an age.
 
"Yes, yes!" he cried. "I see a vast inverted cone rising from the
surface."
 
"Is it another sea beast?"
 
"Perhaps it is."
 
"Then let us steer farther westward, for we know something of the
danger of coming across monsters of that sort."
 
"Let us go straight on," replied my uncle.
 
I appealed to Hans. He maintained his course inflexibly.
 
Yet, if at our present distance from the animal, a distance of twelve
leagues at the least, the column of water driven through its blowers
may be distinctly seen, it must needs be of vast size. The commonest
prudence would counsel immediate flight; but we did not come so far
to be prudent.
 
Imprudently, therefore, we pursue our way. The nearer we approach,
the higher mounts the jet of water. What monster can possibly fill
itself with such a quantity of water, and spurt it up so continuously?
 
At eight in the evening we are not two leagues distant from it. Its
body -dusky, enormous, hillocky - lies spread upon the sea like an
islet. Is it illusion or fear? Its length seems to me a couple of
thousand yards. What can be this cetacean, which neither Cuvier nor
Blumenbach knew anything about? It lies motionless, as if asleep; the
sea seems unable to move it in the least; it is the waves that
undulate upon its sides. The column of water thrown up to a height of
five hundred feet falls in rain with a deafening uproar. And here are
we scudding like lunatics before the wind, to get near to a monster
that a hundred whales a day would not satisfy!
 
Terror seizes upon me. I refuse to go further. I will cut the
halliards if necessary! I am in open mutiny against the Professor,
who vouchsafes no answer.
 
Suddenly Hans rises, and pointing with his finger at the menacing
object, he says:
 
"_Holm._"
 
"An island!" cries my uncle.
 
"That's not an island!" I cried sceptically.
 
"It's nothing else," shouted the Professor, with a loud laugh.
 
"But that column of water?"
 
"_Geyser,_" said Hans.
 
"No doubt it is a geyser, like those in Iceland."
 
At first I protest against being so widely mistaken as to have taken
an island for a marine monster. But the evidence is against me, and I
have to confess my error. It is nothing worse than a natural
phenomenon.
 
As we approach nearer the dimensions of the liquid column become
magnificent. The islet resembles, with a most deceiving likeness, an
enormous cetacean, whose head dominates the waves at a height of
twenty yards. The geyser, a word meaning 'fury,' rises majestically
from its extremity. Deep and heavy explosions are heard from time to
time, when the enormous jet, possessed with more furious violence,
shakes its plumy crest, and springs with a bound till it reaches the
lowest stratum of the clouds. It stands alone. No steam vents, no hot
springs surround it, and all the volcanic power of the region is
concentrated here. Sparks of electric fire mingle with the dazzling
sheaf of lighted fluid, every drop of which refracts the prismatic
colours.
 
"Let us land," said the Professor.
 
"But we must carefully avoid this waterspout, which would sink our
raft in a moment."
 
Hans, steering with his usual skill, brought us to the other
extremity of the islet.
 
I leaped up on the rock; my uncle lightly followed, while our hunter
remained at his post, like a man too wise ever to be astonished.
 
We walked upon granite mingled with siliceous tufa. The soil shivers
and shakes under our feet, like the sides of an overheated boiler
filled with steam struggling to get loose. We come in sight of a
small central basin, out of which the geyser springs. I plunge a
register thermometer into the boiling water. It marks an intense heat
of 325°, which is far above the boiling point; therefore this water
issues from an ardent furnace, which is not at all in harmony with
Professor Liedenbrock's theories. I cannot help making the remark.
 
"Well," he replied, "how does that make against my doctrine?"
 
"Oh, nothing at all," I said, seeing that I was going in opposition
to immovable obstinacy.
 
Still I am constrained to confess that hitherto we have been
wonderfully favoured, and that for some reason unknown to myself we
have accomplished our journey under singularly favourable conditions
of temperature. But it seems manifest to me that some day we shall
reach a region where the central heat attains its highest limits, and
goes beyond a point that can be registered by our thermometers.
 
"That is what we shall see." So says the Professor, who, having named
this volcanic islet after his nephew, gives the signal to embark
again.
 
For some minutes I am still contemplating the geyser. I notice that
it throws up its column of water with variable force: sometimes
sending it to a great height, then again to a lower, which I
attribute to the variable pressure of the steam accumulated in its
reservoir.
 
At last we leave the island, rounding away past the low rocks on its
southern shore. Hans has taken advantage of the halt to refit his
rudder.
 
But before going any farther I make a few observations, to calculate
the distance we have gone over, and note them in my journal. We have
crossed two hundred and seventy leagues of sea since leaving Port
Gräuben; and we are six hundred and twenty leagues from Iceland,
under England. [1]
 
[1] This distance carries the travellers as far as under the Pyrenees
if the league measures three miles. (Trans.)
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXV.
 
 
 
 
 
AN ELECTRIC STORM
 
_Friday, August 21_. - On the morrow the magnificent geyser has
disappeared. The wind has risen, and has rapidly carried us away from
Axel Island. The roarings become lost in the distance.
 
The weather - if we may use that term - will change before long. The
atmosphere is charged with vapours, pervaded with the electricity
generated by the evaporation of saline waters. The clouds are sinking
lower, and assume an olive hue. The electric light can scarcely
penetrate through the dense curtain which has dropped over the
theatre on which the battle of the elements is about to be waged.
 
I feel peculiar sensations, like many creatures on earth at the
approach of violent atmospheric changes. The heavily voluted cumulus
clouds lower gloomily and threateningly; they wear that implacable
look which I have sometimes noticed at the outbreak of a great storm.
The air is heavy; the sea is calm.
 
In the distance the clouds resemble great bales of cotton, piled up
in picturesque disorder. By degrees they dilate, and gain in huge
size what they lose in number. Such is their ponderous weight that
they cannot rise from the horizon; but, obeying an impulse from
higher currents, their dense consistency slowly yields. The gloom
upon them deepens; and they soon present to our view a ponderous mass
of almost level surface. From time to time a fleecy tuft of mist,
with yet some gleaming light left upon it, drops down upon the dense
floor of grey, and loses itself in the opaque and impenetrable mass.
 
The atmosphere is evidently charged and surcharged with electricity.
My whole body is saturated; my hair bristles just as when you stand
upon an insulated stool under the action of an electrical machine. It
seems to me as if my companions, the moment they touched me, would
receive a severe shock like that from an electric eel.
 
At ten in the morning the symptoms of storm become aggravated. The
wind never lulls but to acquire increased strength; the vast bank of
heavy clouds is a huge reservoir of fearful windy gusts and rushing
storms.
 
I am loth to believe these atmospheric menaces, and yet I cannot help
muttering:
 
"Here's some very bad weather coming on."
 
The Professor made no answer. His temper is awful, to judge from the
working of his features, as he sees this vast length of ocean
unrolling before him to an indefinite extent. He can only spare time
to shrug his shoulders viciously.
 
"There's a heavy storm coming on," I cried, pointing towards the
horizon. "Those clouds seem as if they were going to crush the sea."
 
A deep silence falls on all around. The lately roaring winds are
hushed into a dead calm; nature seems to breathe no more, and to be
sinking into the stillness of death. On the mast already I see the
light play of a lambent St. Elmo's fire; the outstretched sail
catches not a breath of wind, and hangs like a sheet of lead. The
rudder stands motionless in a sluggish, waveless sea. But if we have
now ceased to advance why do we yet leave that sail loose, which at
the first shock of the tempest may capsize us in a moment?
 
"Let us reef the sail and cut the mast down!" I cried. "That will be
safest."
 
"No, no! Never!" shouted my impetuous uncle. "Never! Let the wind
catch us if it will! What I want is to get the least glimpse of rock
or shore, even if our raft should be smashed into shivers!"
 
The words were hardly out of his mouth when a sudden change took
place in the southern sky. The piled-up vapours condense into water;
and the air, put into violent action to supply the vacuum left by the
condensation of the mists, rouses itself into a whirlwind. It rushes
on from the farthest recesses of the vast cavern. The darkness
deepens; scarcely can I jot down a few hurried notes. The helm makes
a bound. My uncle falls full length; I creep close to him. He has
laid a firm hold upon a rope, and appears to watch with grim
satisfaction this awful display of elemental strife.
 
Hans stirs not. His long hair blown by the pelting storm, and laid
flat across his immovable countenance, makes him a strange figure;
for the end of each lock of loose flowing hair is tipped with little
luminous radiations. This frightful mask of electric sparks suggests
to me, even in this dizzy excitement, a comparison with preadamite
man, the contemporary of the ichthyosaurus and the megatherium. [1]
 
[1] Rather of the mammoth and the mastodon. (Trans.)
 
The mast yet holds firm. The sail stretches tight like a bubble ready
to burst. The raft flies at a rate that I cannot reckon, but not so
fast as the foaming clouds of spray which it dashes from side to side
in its headlong speed.
 
"The sail! the sail!" I cry, motioning to lower it.
 
"No!" replies my uncle.
 
"_Nej!_" repeats Hans, leisurely shaking his head.
 
But now the rain forms a rushing cataract in front of that horizon
toward which we are running with such maddening speed. But before it
has reached us the rain cloud parts asunder, the sea boils, and the
electric fires are brought into violent action by a mighty chemical
power that descends from the higher regions. The most vivid flashes
of lightning are mingled with the violent crash of continuous
thunder. Ceaseless fiery arrows dart in and out amongst the flying
thunder-clouds; the vaporous mass soon glows with incandescent heat;
hailstones rattle fiercely down, and as they dash upon our iron tools
they too emit gleams and flashes of lurid light. The heaving waves
resemble fiery volcanic hills, each belching forth its own interior
flames, and every crest is plumed with dancing fire. My eyes fail
under the dazzling light, my ears are stunned with the incessant
crash of thunder. I must be bound to the mast, which bows like a reed
before the mighty strength of the storm.
 
(Here my notes become vague and indistinct. I have only been able to
find a few which I seem to have jotted down almost unconsciously. But
their very brevity and their obscurity reveal the intensity of the
excitement which dominated me, and describe the actual position even
better than my memory could do.)
 
Sunday, 23. - Where are we? Driven forward with a swiftness that
cannot be measured.
 
The night was fearful; no abatement of the storm. The din and uproar
are incessant; our ears are bleeding; to exchange a word is
impossible.
 
The lightning flashes with intense brilliancy, and never seems to
cease for a moment. Zigzag streams of bluish white fire dash down
upon the sea and rebound, and then take an upward flight till they
strike the granite vault that overarches our heads. Suppose that
solid roof should crumble down upon our heads! Other flashes with
incessant play cross their vivid fires, while others again roll
themselves into balls of living fire which explode like bombshells,
but the music of which scarcely-adds to the din of the battle strife
that almost deprives us of our senses of hearing and sight; the limit
of intense loudness has been passed within which the human ear can
distinguish one sound from another. If all the powder magazines in
the world were to explode at once, we should hear no more than we do
now.
 
From the under surface of the clouds there are continual emissions of
lurid light; electric matter is in continual evolution from their
component molecules; the gaseous elements of the air need to be
slaked with moisture; for innumerable columns of water rush upwards
into the air and fall back again in white foam.
 
Whither are we flying? My uncle lies full length across the raft.
 
The heat increases. I refer to the thermometer; it indicates . . .
(the figure is obliterated).
 
_Monday, August 24._ - Will there be an end to it? Is the atmospheric
condition, having once reached this density, to become final?
 
We are prostrated and worn out with fatigue. But Hans is as usual.
The raft bears on still to the south-east. We have made two hundred
leagues since we left Axel Island.
 
At noon the violence of the storm redoubles. We are obliged to secure
as fast as possible every article that belongs to our cargo. Each of
us is lashed to some part of the raft. The waves rise above our heads.
 
For three days we have never been able to make each other hear a
word. Our mouths open, our lips move, but not a word can be heard. We
cannot even make ourselves heard by approaching our mouth close to
the ear.
 
My uncle has drawn nearer to me. He has uttered a few words. They
seem to be 'We are lost'; but I am not sure.
 
At last I write down the words: "Let us lower the sail."
 
He nods his consent.
 
Scarcely has he lifted his head again before a ball of fire has
bounded over the waves and lighted on board our raft. Mast and sail
flew up in an instant together, and I saw them carried up to
prodigious height, resembling in appearance a pterodactyle, one of
those strong birds of the infant world.
 
We lay there, our blood running cold with unspeakable terror. The
fireball, half of it white, half azure blue, and the size of a
ten-inch shell, moved slowly about the raft, but revolving on its own
axis with astonishing velocity, as if whipped round by the force of
the whirlwind. Here it comes, there it glides, now it is up the
ragged stump of the mast, thence it lightly leaps on the provision
bag, descends with a light bound, and just skims the powder magazine.
Horrible! we shall be blown up; but no, the dazzling disk of
mysterious light nimbly leaps aside; it approaches Hans, who fixes
his blue eye upon it steadily; it threatens the head of my uncle, who
falls upon his knees with his head down to avoid it. And now my turn
comes; pale and trembling under the blinding splendour and the
melting heat, it drops at my feet, spinning silently round upon the
deck; I try to move my foot away, but cannot.
 
A suffocating smell of nitrogen fills the air, it enters the throat,
it fills the lungs. We suffer stifling pains.
 
Why am I unable to move my foot? Is it riveted to the planks? Alas!
the fall upon our fated raft of this electric globe has magnetised
every iron article on board. The instruments, the tools, our guns,
are clashing and clanking violently in their collisions with each
other; the nails of my boots cling tenaciously to a plate of iron let
into the timbers, and I cannot draw my foot away from the spot. At
last by a violent effort I release myself at the instant when the
ball in its gyrations was about to seize upon it, and carry me off my
feet ....
 
Ah! what a flood of intense and dazzling light! the globe has burst,
and we are deluged with tongues of fire!
 
Then all the light disappears. I could just see my uncle at full
length on the raft, and Hans still at his helm and spitting fire
under the action of the electricity which has saturated him.
 
But where are we going to? Where?
 
* * * *
 
_Tuesday, August 25._ - I recover from a long swoon. The storm
continues to roar and rage; the lightnings dash hither and thither,
like broods of fiery serpents filling all the air. Are we still under
the sea? Yes, we are borne at incalculable speed. We have been
carried under England, under the channel, under France, perhaps under
the whole of Europe.
 
* * * *
 
A fresh noise is heard! Surely it is the sea breaking upon the rocks!
But then . . . .
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXVI.
 
 
 
 
CALM PHILOSOPHIC DISCUSSIONS
 
Here I end what I may call my log, happily saved from the wreck, and
I resume my narrative as before.
 
What happened when the raft was dashed upon the rocks is more than I
can tell. I felt myself hurled into the waves; and if I escaped from
death, and if my body was not torn over the sharp edges of the rocks,
it was because the powerful arm of Hans came to my rescue.
 
The brave Icelander carried me out of the reach of the waves, over a
burning sand where I found myself by the side of my uncle.
 
Then he returned to the rocks, against which the furious waves were
beating, to save what he could. I was unable to speak. I was
shattered with fatigue and excitement; I wanted a whole hour to
recover even a little.
 
But a deluge of rain was still falling, though with that violence
which generally denotes the near cessation of a storm. A few
overhanging rocks afforded us some shelter from the storm. Hans
prepared some food, which I could not touch; and each of us,
exhausted with three sleepless nights, fell into a broken and painful
sleep.
 
The next day the weather was splendid. The sky and the sea had sunk
into sudden repose. Every trace of the awful storm had disappeared.
The exhilarating voice of the Professor fell upon my ears as I awoke;
he was ominously cheerful.
 
"Well, my boy," he cried, "have you slept well?"
 
Would not any one have thought that we were still in our cheerful
little house on the Königstrasse and that I was only just coming down
to breakfast, and that I was to be married to Gräuben that day?
 
Alas! if the tempest had but sent the raft a little more east, we
should have passed under Germany, under my beloved town of Hamburg,
under the very street where dwelt all that I loved most in the world.
Then only forty leagues would have separated us! But they were forty
leagues perpendicular of solid granite wall, and in reality we were a
thousand leagues asunder!
 
All these painful reflections rapidly crossed my mind before I could
answer my uncle's question.
 
"Well, now," he repeated, "won't you tell me how you have slept?"
 
"Oh, very well," I said. "I am only a little knocked up, but I shall
soon be better."
 
"Oh," says my uncle, "that's nothing to signify. You are only a
little bit tired."
 
"But you, uncle, you seem in very good spirits this morning."
 
"Delighted, my boy, delighted. We have got there."
 
"To our journey's end?"
 
"No; but we have got to the end of that endless sea. Now we shall go
by land, and really begin to go down! down! down!"
 
"But, my dear uncle, do let me ask you one question."
 
"Of course, Axel."
 
"How about returning?"
 
"Returning? Why, you are talking about the return before the arrival."
 
"No, I only want to know how that is to be managed."
 
"In the simplest way possible. When we have reached the centre of the
globe, either we shall find some new way to get back, or we shall
come back like decent folks the way we came. I feel pleased at the
thought that it is sure not to be shut against us."
 
"But then we shall have to refit the raft."
 
"Of course."
 
"Then, as to provisions, have we enough to last?"
 
"Yes; to be sure we have. Hans is a clever fellow, and I am sure he
must have saved a large part of our cargo. But still let us go and
make sure."
 
We left this grotto which lay open to every wind. At the same time I
cherished a trembling hope which was a fear as well. It seemed to me
impossible that the terrible wreck of the raft should not have
destroyed everything on board. On my arrival on the shore I found
Hans surrounded by an assemblage of articles all arranged in good
order. My uncle shook hands with him with a lively gratitude. This
man, with almost superhuman devotion, had been at work all the while
that we were asleep, and had saved the most precious of the articles
at the risk of his life.
 
Not that we had suffered no losses. For instance, our firearms; but
we might do without them. Our stock of powder had remained uninjured
after having risked blowing up during the storm.
 
"Well," cried the Professor, "as we have no guns we cannot hunt,
that's all."
 
"Yes, but how about the instruments?"
 
"Here is the aneroid, the most useful of all, and for which I would
have given all the others. By means of it I can calculate the depth
and know when we have reached the centre; without it we might very
likely go beyond, and come out at the antipodes!"
 
Such high spirits as these were rather too strong.
 
"But where is the compass? I asked.
 
"Here it is, upon this rock, in perfect condition, as well as the
thermometers and the chronometer. The hunter is a splendid fellow."
 
There was no denying it. We had all our instruments. As for tools and
appliances, there they all lay on the ground - ladders, ropes, picks,
spades, etc.
 
Still there was the question of provisions to be settled, and I asked
- "How are we off for provisions?"
 
The boxes containing these were in a line upon the shore, in a
perfect state of preservation; for the most part the sea had spared
them, and what with biscuits, salt meat, spirits, and salt fish, we
might reckon on four months' supply.
 
"Four months!" cried the Professor. "We have time to go and to
return; and with what is left I will give a grand dinner to my
friends at the Johannæum."
 
I ought by this time to have been quite accustomed to my uncle's
ways; yet there was always something fresh about him to astonish me.
 
"Now," said he, "we will replenish our supply of water with the rain
which the storm has left in all these granite basins; therefore we
shall have no reason to fear anything from thirst. As for the raft, I
will recommend Hans to do his best to repair it, although I don't
expect it will be of any further use to us."
 
"How so?" I cried.
 
"An idea of my own, my lad. I don't think we shall come out by the
way that we went in."
 
I stared at the Professor with a good deal of mistrust. I asked, was
he not touched in the brain? And yet there was method in his madness.
 
"And now let us go to breakfast," said he.
 
I followed him to a headland, after he had given his instructions to
the hunter. There preserved meat, biscuit, and tea made us an
excellent meal, one of the best I ever remember. Hunger, the fresh
air, the calm quiet weather, after the commotions we had gone
through, all contributed to give me a good appetite.
 
Whilst breakfasting I took the opportunity to put to my uncle the
question where we were now.
 
"That seems to me," I said, "rather difficult to make out."
 
"Yes, it is difficult," he said, "to calculate exactly; perhaps even
impossible, since during these three stormy days I have been unable
to keep any account of the rate or direction of the raft; but still
we may get an approximation."
 
"The last observation," I remarked, "was made on the island, when the
geyser was -"
 
"You mean Axel Island. Don't decline the honour of having given your
name to the first island ever discovered in the central parts of the
globe."
 
"Well," said I, "let it be Axel Island. Then we had cleared two
hundred and seventy leagues of sea, and we were six hundred leagues
from Iceland."
 
"Very well," answered my uncle; "let us start from that point and
count four days' storm, during which our rate cannot have been less
than eighty leagues in the twenty-four hours."
 
"That is right; and this would make three hundred leagues more."
 
"Yes, and the Liedenbrock sea would be six hundred leagues from shore
to shore. Surely, Axel, it may vie in size with the Mediterranean
itself."
 
"Especially," I replied, "if it happens that we have only crossed it
in its narrowest part. And it is a curious circumstance," I added,
"that if my computations are right, and we are nine hundred leagues
from Rejkiavik, we have now the Mediterranean above our head."
 
"That is a good long way, my friend. But whether we are under Turkey
or the Atlantic depends very much upon the question in what direction
we have been moving. Perhaps we have deviated."
 
"No, I think not. Our course has been the same all along, and I
believe this shore is south-east of Port Grauben."
 
"Well," replied my uncle, "we may easily ascertain this by consulting
the compass. Let us go and see what it says."
 
The Professor moved towards the rock upon which Hans had laid down
the instruments. He was gay and full of spirits; he rubbed his hands,
he studied his attitudes. I followed him, curious to know if I was
right in my estimate. As soon as we had arrived at the rock my uncle
took the compass, laid it horizontally, and questioned the needle,
which, after a few oscillations, presently assumed a fixed position.
My uncle looked, and looked, and looked again. He rubbed his eyes,
and then turned to me thunderstruck with some unexpected discovery.
 
"What is the matter?" I asked.
 
He motioned to me to look. An exclamation of astonishment burst from
me. The north pole of the needle was turned to what we supposed to be
the south. It pointed to the shore instead of to the open sea! I
shook the box, examined it again, it was in perfect condition. In
whatever position I placed the box the needle pertinaciously returned
to this unexpected quarter. Therefore there seemed no reason to doubt
that during the storm there had been a sudden change of wind
unperceived by us, which had brought our raft back to the shore which
we thought we had left so long a distance behind us.
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXVII.
 
 
 
 
THE LIEDENBROCK MUSEUM OF GEOLOGY
 
How shall I describe the strange series of passions which in
succession shook the breast of Professor Liedenbrock? First
stupefaction, then incredulity, lastly a downright burst of rage.
Never had I seen the man so put out of countenance and so disturbed.
The fatigues of our passage across, the dangers met, had all to be
begun over again. We had gone backwards instead of forwards!
 
But my uncle rapidly recovered himself.
 
"Aha! will fate play tricks upon me? Will the elements lay plots
against me? Shall fire, air, and water make a combined attack against
me? Well, they shall know what a determined man can do. I will not
yield. I will not stir a single foot backwards, and it will be seen
whether man or nature is to have the upper hand!"
 
Erect upon the rock, angry and threatening, Otto Liedenbrock was a
rather grotesque fierce parody upon the fierce Achilles defying the
lightning. But I thought it my duty to interpose and attempt to lay
some restraint upon this unmeasured fanaticism.
 
"Just listen to me," I said firmly. "Ambition must have a limit
somewhere; we cannot perform impossibilities; we are not at all fit
for another sea voyage; who would dream of undertaking a voyage of
five hundred leagues upon a heap of rotten planks, with a blanket in
rags for a sail, a stick for a mast, and fierce winds in our teeth?
We cannot steer; we shall be buffeted by the tempests, and we should
be fools and madmen to attempt to cross a second time."
 
I was able to develop this series of unanswerable reasons for ten
minutes without interruption; not that the Professor was paying any
respectful attention to his nephew's arguments, but because he was
deaf to all my eloquence.
 
"To the raft!" he shouted.
 
Such was his only reply. It was no use for me to entreat, supplicate,
get angry, or do anything else in the way of opposition; it would
only have been opposing a will harder than the granite rock.
 
Hans was finishing the repairs of the raft. One would have thought
that this strange being was guessing at my uncle's intentions. With a
few more pieces of surturbrand he had refitted our vessel. A sail
already hung from the new mast, and the wind was playing in its
waving folds.
 
The Professor said a few words to the guide, and immediately he put
everything on board and arranged every necessary for our departure.
The air was clear - and the north-west wind blew steadily.
 
What could I do? Could I stand against the two? It was impossible? If
Hans had but taken my side! But no, it was not to be. The Icelander
seemed to have renounced all will of his own and made a vow to forget
and deny himself. I could get nothing out of a servant so feudalised,
as it were, to his master. My only course was to proceed.
 
I was therefore going with as much resignation as I could find to
resume my accustomed place on the raft, when my uncle laid his hand
upon my shoulder.
 
"We shall not sail until to-morrow," he said.
 
I made a movement intended to express resignation.
 
"I must neglect nothing," he said; "and since my fate has driven me
on this part of the coast, I will not leave it until I have examined
it."
 
To understand what followed, it must be borne in mind that, through
circumstances hereafter to be explained, we were not really where the
Professor supposed we were. In fact we were not upon the north shore
of the sea.
 
"Now let us start upon fresh discoveries," I said.
 
And leaving Hans to his work we started off together. The space
between the water and the foot of the cliffs was considerable. It
took half an hour to bring us to the wall of rock. We trampled under
our feet numberless shells of all the forms and sizes which existed
in the earliest ages of the world. I also saw immense carapaces more
than fifteen feet in diameter. They had been the coverings of those
gigantic glyptodons or armadilloes of the pleiocene period, of which
the modern tortoise is but a miniature representative. [1] The soil
was besides this scattered with stony fragments, boulders rounded by
water action, and ridged up in successive lines. I was therefore led
to the conclusion that at one time the sea must have covered the
ground on which we were treading. On the loose and scattered rocks,
now out of the reach of the highest tides, the waves had left
manifest traces of their power to wear their way in the hardest stone.
 
This might up to a certain point explain the existence of an ocean
forty leagues beneath the surface of the globe. But in my opinion
this liquid mass would be lost by degrees farther and farther within
the interior of the earth, and it certainly had its origin in the
waters of the ocean overhead, which had made their way hither through
some fissure. Yet it must be believed that that fissure is now
closed, and that all this cavern or immense reservoir was filled in a
very short time. Perhaps even this water, subjected to the fierce
action of central heat, had partly been resolved into vapour. This
would explain the existence of those clouds suspended over our heads
and the development of that electricity which raised such tempests
within the bowels of the earth.
 
This theory of the phenomena we had witnessed seemed satisfactory to
me; for however great and stupendous the phenomena of nature, fixed
physical laws will or may always explain them.
 
We were therefore walking upon sedimentary soil, the deposits of the
waters of former ages. The Professor was carefully examining every
little fissure in the rocks. Wherever he saw a hole he always wanted
to know the depth of it. To him this was important.
 
We had traversed the shores of the Liedenbrock sea for a mile when we
observed a sudden change in the appearance of the soil. It seemed
upset, contorted, and convulsed by a violent upheaval of the lower
strata. In many places depressions or elevations gave witness to some
tremendous power effecting the dislocation of strata.
 
[1] The glyptodon and armadillo are mammalian; the tortoise is a
chelonian, a reptile, distinct classes of the animal kingdom;
therefore the latter cannot be a representative of the former.
(Trans.)
 
We moved with difficulty across these granite fissures and chasms
mingled with silex, crystals of quartz, and alluvial deposits, when a
field, nay, more than a field, a vast plain, of bleached bones lay
spread before us. It seemed like an immense cemetery, where the
remains of twenty ages mingled their dust together. Huge mounds of
bony fragments rose stage after stage in the distance. They undulated
away to the limits of the horizon, and melted in the distance in a
faint haze. There within three square miles were accumulated the
materials for a complete history of the animal life of ages, a
history scarcely outlined in the too recent strata of the inhabited
world.
 
But an impatient curiosity impelled our steps; crackling and
rattling, our feet were trampling on the remains of prehistoric
animals and interesting fossils, the possession of which is a matter
of rivalry and contention between the museums of great cities. A
thousand Cuviers could never have reconstructed the organic remains
deposited in this magnificent and unparalleled collection.
 
I stood amazed. My uncle had uplifted his long arms to the vault
which was our sky; his mouth gaping wide, his eyes flashing behind
his shining spectacles, his head balancing with an up-and-down
motion, his whole attitude denoted unlimited astonishment. Here he
stood facing an immense collection of scattered leptotheria,
mericotheria, lophiodia, anoplotheria, megatheria, mastodons,
protopithecæ, pterodactyles, and all sorts of extinct monsters here
assembled together for his special satisfaction. Fancy an
enthusiastic bibliomaniac suddenly brought into the midst of the
famous Alexandrian library burnt by Omar and restored by a miracle
from its ashes! just such a crazed enthusiast was my uncle, Professor
Liedenbrock.
 
But more was to come, when, with a rush through clouds of bone dust,
he laid his hand upon a bare skull, and cried with a voice trembling
with excitement:
 
"Axel! Axel! a human head!"
 
"A human skull?" I cried, no less astonished.
 
"Yes, nephew. Aha! M. Milne-Edwards! Ah! M. de Quatrefages, how I
wish you were standing here at the side of Otto Liedenbrock!"
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXVIII.
 
 
 
 
THE PROFESSOR IN HIS CHAIR AGAIN
 
To understand this apostrophe of my uncle's, made to absent French
savants, it will be necessary to allude to an event of high
importance in a palæontological point of view, which had occurred a
little while before our departure.
 
On the 28th of March, 1863, some excavators working under the
direction of M. Boucher de Perthes, in the stone quarries of Moulin
Quignon, near Abbeville, in the department of Somme, found a human
jawbone fourteen feet beneath the surface. It was the first fossil of
this nature that had ever been brought to light. Not far distant were
found stone hatchets and flint arrow-heads stained and encased by
lapse of time with a uniform coat of rust.
 
The noise of this discovery was very great, not in France alone, but
in England and in Germany. Several savants of the French Institute,
and amongst them MM. Milne-Edwards and de Quatrefages, saw at once
the importance of this discovery, proved to demonstration the
genuineness of the bone in question, and became the most ardent
defendants in what the English called this 'trial of a jawbone.' To
the geologists of the United Kingdom, who believed in the certainty
of the fact - Messrs. Falconer, Busk, Carpenter, and others -
scientific Germans were soon joined, and amongst them the forwardest,
the most fiery, and the most enthusiastic, was my uncle Liedenbrock.
 
Therefore the genuineness of a fossil human relic of the quaternary
period seemed to be incontestably proved and admitted.
 
It is true that this theory met with a most obstinate opponent in M.
Elie de Beaumont. This high authority maintained that the soil of
Moulin Quignon was not diluvial at all, but was of much more recent
formation; and, agreeing in that with Cuvier, he refused to admit
that the human species could be contemporary with the animals of the
quaternary period. My uncle Liedenbrock, along with the great body of
the geologists, had maintained his ground, disputed, and argued,
until M. Elie de Beaumont stood almost alone in his opinion.
 
We knew all these details, but we were not aware that since our
departure the question had advanced to farther stages. Other similar
maxillaries, though belonging to individuals of various types and
different nations, were found in the loose grey soil of certain
grottoes in France, Switzerland, and Belgium, as well as weapons,
tools, earthen utensils, bones of children and adults. The existence
therefore of man in the quaternary period seemed to become daily more
certain.
 
Nor was this all. Fresh discoveries of remains in the pleiocene
formation had emboldened other geologists to refer back the human
species to a higher antiquity still. It is true that these remains
were not human bones, but objects bearing the traces of his
handiwork, such as fossil leg-bones of animals, sculptured and carved
evidently by the hand of man.
 
Thus, at one bound, the record of the existence of man receded far
back into the history of the ages past; he was a predecessor of the
mastodon; he was a contemporary of the southern elephant; he lived a
hundred thousand years ago, when, according to geologists, the
pleiocene formation was in progress.
 
Such then was the state of palæontological science, and what we knew
of it was sufficient to explain our behaviour in the presence of this
stupendous Golgotha. Any one may now understand the frenzied
excitement of my uncle, when, twenty yards farther on, he found
himself face to face with a primitive man!
 
It was a perfectly recognisable human body. Had some particular soil,
like that of the cemetery St. Michel, at Bordeaux, preserved it thus
for so many ages? It might be so. But this dried corpse, with its
parchment-like skin drawn tightly over the bony frame, the limbs
still preserving their shape, sound teeth, abundant hair, and finger
and toe nails of frightful length, this desiccated mummy startled us
by appearing just as it had lived countless ages ago. I stood mute
before this apparition of remote antiquity. My uncle, usually so
garrulous, was struck dumb likewise. We raised the body. We stood it
up against a rock. It seemed to stare at us out of its empty orbits.
We sounded with our knuckles his hollow frame.
 
After some moments' silence the Professor was himself again. Otto
Liedenbrock, yielding to his nature, forgot all the circumstances of
our eventful journey, forgot where we were standing, forgot the
vaulted cavern which contained us. No doubt he was in mind back again
in his Johannæum, holding forth to his pupils, for he assumed his
learned air; and addressing himself to an imaginary audience, he
proceeded thus:
 
"Gentlemen, I have the honour to introduce to you a man of the
quaternary or post-tertiary system. Eminent geologists have denied
his existence, others no less eminent have affirmed it. The St.
Thomases of palæontology, if they were here, might now touch him with
their fingers, and would be obliged to acknowledge their error. I am
quite aware that science has to be on its guard with discoveries of
this kind. I know what capital enterprising individuals like Barnum
have made out of fossil men. I have heard the tale of the kneepan of
Ajax, the pretended body of Orestes claimed to have been found by the
Spartans, and of the body of Asterius, ten cubits long, of which
Pausanias speaks. I have read the reports of the skeleton of Trapani,
found in the fourteenth century, and which was at the time identified
as that of Polyphemus; and the history of the giant unearthed in the
sixteenth century near Palermo. You know as well as I do, gentlemen,
the analysis made at Lucerne in 1577 of those huge bones which the
celebrated Dr. Felix Plater affirmed to be those of a giant nineteen
feet high. I have gone through the treatises of Cassanion, and all
those memoirs, pamphlets, answers, and rejoinders published
respecting the skeleton of Teutobochus, the invader of Gaul, dug out
of a sandpit in the Dauphiné, in 1613. In the eighteenth century I
would have stood up for Scheuchzer's pre-adamite man against Peter
Campet. I have perused a writing, entitled Gigan -"
 
Here my uncle's unfortunate infirmity met him - that of being unable
in public to pronounce hard words.
 
"The pamphlet entitled Gigan -"
 
He could get no further.
 
"Giganteo -"
 
It was not to be done. The unlucky word would not come out. At the
Johannæum there would have been a laugh.
 
"Gigantosteologie," at last the Professor burst out, between two
words which I shall not record here.
 
Then rushing on with renewed vigour, and with great animation:
 
"Yes, gentlemen, I know all these things, and more. I know that
Cuvier and Blumenbach have recognised in these bones nothing more
remarkable than the bones of the mammoth and other mammals of the
post-tertiary period. But in the presence of this specimen to doubt
would be to insult science. There stands the body! You may see it,
touch it. It is not a mere skeleton; it is an entire body, preserved
for a purely anthropological end and purpose."
 
I was good enough not to contradict this startling assertion.
 
"If I could only wash it in a solution of sulphuric acid," pursued my
uncle, "I should be able to clear it from all the earthy particles
and the shells which are incrusted about it. But I do not possess
that valuable solvent. Yet, such as it is, the body shall tell us its
own wonderful story."
 
Here the Professor laid hold of the fossil skeleton, and handled it
with the skill of a dexterous showman.
 
"You see," he said, "that it is not six feet long, and that we are
still separated by a long interval from the pretended race of giants.
As for the family to which it belongs, it is evidently Caucasian. It
is the white race, our own. The skull of this fossil is a regular
oval, or rather ovoid. It exhibits no prominent cheekbones, no
projecting jaws. It presents no appearance of that prognathism which
diminishes the facial angle. [1] Measure that angle. It is nearly
ninety degrees. But I will go further in my deductions, and I will
affirm that this specimen of the human family is of the Japhetic
race, which has since spread from the Indies to the Atlantic. Don't
smile, gentlemen."
 
Nobody was smiling; but the learned Professor was frequently
disturbed by the broad smiles provoked by his learned eccentricities.
 
"Yes," he pursued with animation, "this is a fossil man, the
contemporary of the mastodons whose remains fill this amphitheatre.
But if you ask me how he came there, how those strata on which he lay
slipped down into this enormous hollow in the globe, I confess I
cannot answer that question. No doubt in the post-tertiary period
considerable commotions were still disturbing the crust of the earth.
The long-continued cooling of the globe produced chasms, fissures,
clefts, and faults, into which, very probably, portions of the upper
earth may have fallen. I make no rash assertions; but there is the
man surrounded by his own works, by hatchets, by flint arrow-heads,
which are the characteristics of the stone age. And unless he came
here, like myself, as a tourist on a visit and as a pioneer of
science, I can entertain no doubt of the authenticity of his remote
origin."
 
[1] The facial angle is formed by two lines, one touching the brow
and the front teeth, the other from the orifice of the ear to the
lower line of the nostrils. The greater this angle, the higher
intelligence denoted by the formation of the skull. Prognathism is
that projection of the jaw-bones which sharpens or lessons this
angle, and which is illustrated in the negro countenance and in the
lowest savages.
 
The Professor ceased to speak, and the audience broke out into loud
and unanimous applause. For of course my uncle was right, and wiser
men than his nephew would have had some trouble to refute his
statements.
 
Another remarkable thing. This fossil body was not the only one in
this immense catacomb. We came upon other bodies at every step
amongst this mortal dust, and my uncle might select the most curious
of these specimens to demolish the incredulity of sceptics.
 
In fact it was a wonderful spectacle, that of these generations of
men and animals commingled in a common cemetery. Then one very
serious question arose presently which we scarcely dared to suggest.
Had all those creatures slided through a great fissure in the crust
of the earth, down to the shores of the Liedenbrock sea, when they
were dead and turning to dust, or had they lived and grown and died
here in this subterranean world under a false sky, just like
inhabitants of the upper earth? Until the present time we had seen
alive only marine monsters and fishes. Might not some living man,
some native of the abyss, be yet a wanderer below on this desert
strand?
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XXXIX.
 
 
 
 
FOREST SCENERY ILLUMINATED BY ELETRICITY
 
For another half hour we trod upon a pavement of bones. We pushed on,
impelled by our burning curiosity. What other marvels did this cavern
contain? What new treasures lay here for science to unfold? I was
prepared for any surprise, my imagination was ready for any
astonishment however astounding.
 
We had long lost sight of the sea shore behind the hills of bones.
The rash Professor, careless of losing his way, hurried me forward.
We advanced in silence, bathed in luminous electric fluid. By some
phenomenon which I am unable to explain, it lighted up all sides of
every object equally. Such was its diffusiveness, there being no
central point from which the light emanated, that shadows no longer
existed. You might have thought yourself under the rays of a vertical
sun in a tropical region at noonday and the height of summer. No
vapour was visible. The rocks, the distant mountains, a few isolated
clumps of forest trees in the distance, presented a weird and
wonderful aspect under these totally new conditions of a universal
diffusion of light. We were like Hoffmann's shadowless man.
 
After walking a mile we reached the outskirts of a vast forest, but
not one of those forests of fungi which bordered Port Gräuben.
 
Here was the vegetation of the tertiary period in its fullest blaze
of magnificence. Tall palms, belonging to species no longer living,
splendid palmacites, firs, yews, cypress trees, thujas,
representatives of the conifers. were linked together by a tangled
network of long climbing plants. A soft carpet of moss and hepaticas
luxuriously clothed the soil. A few sparkling streams ran almost in
silence under what would have been the shade of the trees, but that
there was no shadow. On their banks grew tree-ferns similar to those
we grow in hothouses. But a remarkable feature was the total absence
of colour in all those trees, shrubs, and plants, growing without the
life-giving heat and light of the sun. Everything seemed mixed-up and
confounded in one uniform silver grey or light brown tint like that
of fading and faded leaves. Not a green leaf anywhere, and the
flowers - which were abundant enough in the tertiary period, which
first gave birth to flowers - looked like brown-paper flowers,
without colour or scent.
 
My uncle Liedenbrock ventured to penetrate under this colossal grove.
I followed him, not without fear. Since nature had here provided
vegetable nourishment, why should not the terrible mammals be there
too? I perceived in the broad clearings left by fallen trees, decayed
with age, leguminose plants, acerineæ, rubiceæ and many other eatable
shrubs, dear to ruminant animals at every period. Then I observed,
mingled together in confusion, trees of countries far apart on the
surface of the globe. The oak and the palm were growing side by side,
the Australian eucalyptus leaned against the Norwegian pine, the
birch-tree of the north mingled its foliage with New Zealand kauris.
It was enough to distract the most ingenious classifier of
terrestrial botany.
 
Suddenly I halted. I drew back my uncle.
 
The diffused light revealed the smallest object in the dense and
distant thickets. I had thought I saw - no! I did see, with my own
eyes, vast colossal forms moving amongst the trees. They were
gigantic animals; it was a herd of mastodons - not fossil remains,
but living and resembling those the bones of which were found in the
marshes of Ohio in 1801. I saw those huge elephants whose long,
flexible trunks were grouting and turning up the soil under the trees
like a legion of serpents. I could hear the crashing noise of their
long ivory tusks boring into the old decaying trunks. The boughs
cracked, and the leaves torn away by cartloads went down the
cavernous throats of the vast brutes.
 
So, then, the dream in which I had had a vision of the prehistoric
world, of the tertiary and post-tertiary periods, was now realised.
And there we were alone, in the bowels of the earth, at the mercy of
its wild inhabitants!
 
My uncle was gazing with intense and eager interest.
 
"Come on!" said he, seizing my arm. "Forward! forward!"
 
"No, I will not!" I cried. "We have no firearms. What could we do in
the midst of a herd of these four-footed giants? Come away, uncle -
come! No human being may with safety dare the anger of these
monstrous beasts."
 
"No human creature?" replied my uncle in a lower voice. "You are
wrong, Axel. Look, look down there! I fancy I see a living creature
similar to ourselves: it is a man!"
 
I looked, shaking my head incredulously. But though at first I was
unbelieving I had to yield to the evidence of my senses.
 
In fact, at a distance of a quarter of a mile, leaning against the
trunk of a gigantic kauri, stood a human being, the Proteus of those
subterranean regions, a new son of Neptune, watching this countless
herd of mastodons.
 
Immanis pecoris custos, immanior ipse. [1]
 
[1] "The shepherd of gigantic herds, and huger still himself."
 
Yes, truly, huger still himself. It was no longer a fossil being like
him whose dried remains we had easily lifted up in the field of
bones; it was a giant, able to control those monsters. In stature he
was at least twelve feet high. His head, huge and unshapely as a
buffalo's, was half hidden in the thick and tangled growth of his
unkempt hair. It most resembled the mane of the primitive elephant.
In his hand he wielded with ease an enormous bough, a staff worthy of
this shepherd of the geologic period.
 
We stood petrified and speechless with amazement. But he might see
us! We must fly!
 
"Come, do come!" I said to my uncle, who for once allowed himself to
be persuaded.
 
In another quarter of an hour our nimble heels had carried us beyond
the reach of this horrible monster.
 
And yet, now that I can reflect quietly, now that my spirit has grown
calm again, now that months have slipped by since this strange and
supernatural meeting, what am I to think? what am I to believe? I
must conclude that it was impossible that our senses had been
deceived, that our eyes did not see what we supposed they saw. No
human being lives in this subterranean world; no generation of men
dwells in those inferior caverns of the globe, unknown to and
unconnected with the inhabitants of its surface. It is absurd to
believe it!
 
I had rather admit that it may have been some animal whose structure
resembled the human, some ape or baboon of the early geological ages,
some protopitheca, or some mesopitheca, some early or middle ape like
that discovered by Mr. Lartet in the bone cave of Sansau. But this
creature surpassed in stature all the measurements known in modern
palæontology. But that a man, a living man, and therefore whole
generations doubtless besides, should be buried there in the bowels
of the earth, is impossible.
 
However, we had left behind us the luminous forest, dumb with
astonishment, overwhelmed and struck down with a terror which
amounted to stupefaction. We kept running on for fear the horrible
monster might be on our track. It was a flight, a fall, like that
fearful pulling and dragging which is peculiar to nightmare.
Instinctively we got back to the Liedenbrock sea, and I cannot say
into what vagaries my mind would not have carried me but for a
circumstance which brought me back to practical matters.
 
Although I was certain that we were now treading upon a soil not
hitherto touched by our feet, I often perceived groups of rocks which
reminded me of those about Port Gräuben. Besides, this seemed to
confirm the indications of the needle, and to show that we had
against our will returned to the north of the Liedenbrock sea.
Occasionally we felt quite convinced. Brooks and waterfalls were
tumbling everywhere from the projections in the rocks. I thought I
recognised the bed of surturbrand, our faithful Hansbach, and the
grotto in which I had recovered life and consciousness. Then a few
paces farther on, the arrangement of the cliffs, the appearance of an
unrecognised stream, or the strange outline of a rock, carne to throw
me again into doubt.
 
I communicated my doubts to my uncle. Like myself, he hesitated; he
could recognise nothing again amidst this monotonous scene.
 
"Evidently," said I, "we have not landed again at our original
starting point, but the storm has carried us a little higher, and if
we follow the shore we shall find Port Gräuben."
 
"If that is the case it will be useless to continue our exploration,
and we had better return to our raft. But, Axel, are you not
mistaken?"
 
"It is difficult to speak decidedly, uncle, for all these rocks are
so very much alike. Yet I think I recognise the promontory at the
foot of which Hans constructed our launch. We must be very near the
little port, if indeed this is not it," I added, examining a creek
which I thought I recognised.
 
"No, Axel, we should at least find our own traces and I see nothing -"
 
"But I do see," I cried, darting upon an object lying on the sand.
 
And I showed my uncle a rusty dagger which I had just picked up.
 
"Come," said he, "had you this weapon with you?"
 
"I! No, certainly! But you, perhaps -"
 
"Not that I am aware," said the Professor. "I have never had this
object in my possession."
 
"Well, this is strange!"
 
"No, Axel, it is very simple. The Icelanders often wear arms of this
kind. This must have belonged to Hans, and he has lost it."
 
I shook my head. Hans had never had an object like this in his
possession.
 
"Did it not belong to some preadamite warrior?" I cried, "to some
living man, contemporary with the huge cattle-driver? But no. This is
not a relic of the stone age. It is not even of the iron age. This
blade is steel -"
 
My uncle stopped me abruptly on my way to a dissertation which would
have taken me a long way, and said coolly:
 
"Be calm, Axel, and reasonable. This dagger belongs to the sixteenth
century; it is a poniard, such as gentlemen carried in their belts to
give the coup _de grace._ Its origin is Spanish. It was never either
yours, or mine, or the hunter's, nor did it belong to any of those
human beings who may or may not inhabit this inner world. See, it was
never jagged like this by cutting men's throats; its blade is coated
with a rust neither a day, nor a year, nor a hundred years old."
 
The Professor was getting excited according to his wont, and was
allowing his imagination to run away with him.
 
"Axel, we are on the way towards the grand discovery. This blade has
been left on the strand for from one to three hundred years, and has
blunted its edge upon the rocks that fringe this subterranean sea!"
 
"But it has not come alone. It has not twisted itself out of shape;
some one has been here before us!
 
"Yes - a man has."
 
"And who was that man?"
 
"A man who has engraved his name somewhere with that dagger. That man
wanted once more to mark the way to the centre of the earth. Let us
look about: look about!"
 
And, wonderfully interested, we peered all along the high wall,
peeping into every fissure which might open out into a gallery.
 
And so we arrived at a place where the shore was much narrowed. Here
the sea came to lap the foot of the steep cliff, leaving a passage no
wider than a couple of yards. Between two boldly projecting rocks
appeared the mouth of a dark tunnel.
 
There, upon a granite slab, appeared two mysterious graven letters,
half eaten away by time. They were the initials of the bold and
daring traveller:
 
[Runic initials appear here]
 
"A. S.," shouted my uncle. "Arne Saknussemm! Arne Saknussemm
everywhere!"
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XL.
 
 
 
 
PREPARATIONS FOR BLASTING A PASSAGE TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH
 
Since the start upon this marvellous pilgrimage I had been through so
many astonishments that I might well be excused for thinking myself
well hardened against any further surprise. Yet at the sight of these
two letters, engraved on this spot three hundred years ago, I stood
aghast in dumb amazement. Not only were the initials of the learned
alchemist visible upon the living rock, but there lay the iron point
with which the letters had been engraved. I could no longer doubt of
the existence of that wonderful traveller and of the fact of his
unparalleled journey, without the most glaring incredulity.
 
Whilst these reflections were occupying me, Professor Liedenbrock had
launched into a somewhat rhapsodical eulogium, of which Arne
Saknussemm was, of course, the hero.
 
"Thou marvellous genius!" he cried, "thou hast not forgotten one
indication which might serve to lay open to mortals the road through
the terrestrial crust; and thy fellow-creatures may even now, after
the lapse of three centuries, again trace thy footsteps through these
deep and darksome ways. You reserved the contemplation of these
wonders for other eyes besides your own. Your name, graven from stage
to stage, leads the bold follower of your footsteps to the very
centre of our planet's core, and there again we shall find your own
name written with your own hand. I too will inscribe my name upon
this dark granite page. But for ever henceforth let this cape that
advances into the sea discovered by yourself be known by your own
illustrious name - Cape Saknussemm."
 
Such were the glowing words of panegyric which fell upon my attentive
ear, and I could not resist the sentiment of enthusiasm with which I
too was infected. The fire of zeal kindled afresh in me. I forgot
everything. I dismissed from my mind the past perils of the journey,
the future danger of our return. That which another had done I
supposed we might also do, and nothing that was not superhuman
appeared impossible to me.
 
"Forward! forward!" I cried.
 
I was already darting down the gloomy tunnel when the Professor
stopped me; he, the man of impulse, counselled patience and coolness.
 
"Let us first return to Hans," he said, "and bring the raft to this
spot."
 
I obeyed, not without dissatisfaction, and passed out rapidly among
the rocks on the shore.
 
I said: "Uncle, do you know it seems to me that circumstances have
wonderfully befriended us hitherto?"
 
"You think so, Axel?"
 
"No doubt; even the tempest has put us on the right way. Blessings on
that storm! It has brought us back to this coast from which fine
weather would have carried us far away. Suppose we had touched with
our prow (the prow of a rudder!) the southern shore of the
Liedenbrock sea, what would have become of us? We should never have
seen the name of Saknussemm, and we should at this moment be
imprisoned on a rockbound, impassable coast."
 
"Yes, Axel, it is providential that whilst supposing we were steering
south we should have just got back north at Cape Saknussemm. I must
say that this is astonishing, and that I feel I have no way to
explain it."
 
"What does that signify, uncle? Our business is not to explain facts,
but to use them!"
 
"Certainly; but -"
 
"Well, uncle, we are going to resume the northern route, and to pass
under the north countries of Europe - under Sweden, Russia, Siberia:
who knows where? -instead of burrowing under the deserts of Africa,
or perhaps the waves of the Atlantic; and that is all I want to know."
 
"Yes, Axel, you are right. It is all for the best, since we have left
that weary, horizontal sea, which led us nowhere. Now we shall go
down, down, down! Do you know that it is now only 1,500 leagues. to
the centre of the globe?"
 
"Is that all?" I cried. "Why, that's nothing. Let us start: march!"
 
All this crazy talk was going on still when we met the hunter.
Everything was made ready for our instant departure. Every bit of
cordage was put on board. We took our places, and with our sail set,
Hans steered us along the coast to Cape Saknussemm.
 
The wind was unfavourable to a species of launch not calculated for
shallow water. In many places we were obliged to push ourselves along
with iron-pointed sticks. Often the sunken rocks just beneath the
surface obliged us to deviate from our straight course. At last,
after three hours' sailing, about six in the evening we reached a
place suitable for our landing. I jumped ashore, followed by my uncle
and the Icelander. This short passage had not served to cool my
ardour. On the contrary, I even proposed to burn 'our ship,' to
prevent the possibility of return; but my uncle would not consent to
that. I thought him singularly lukewarm.
 
"At least," I said, "don't let us lose a minute."
 
"Yes, yes, lad," he replied; "but first let us examine this new
gallery, to see if we shall require our ladders."
 
My uncle put his Ruhmkorff's apparatus in action; the raft moored to
the shore was left alone; the mouth of the tunnel was not twenty
yards from us; and our party, with myself at the head, made for it
without a moment's delay.
 
The aperture, which was almost round, was about five feet in
diameter; the dark passage was cut out in the live rock and lined
with a coat of the eruptive matter which formerly issued from it; the
interior was level with the ground outside, so that we were able to
enter without difficulty. We were following a horizontal plane, when,
only six paces in, our progress was interrupted by an enormous block
just across our way.
 
"Accursed rock!" I cried in a passion, finding myself suddenly
confronted by an impassable obstacle.
 
Right and left we searched in vain for a way, up and down, side to
side; there was no getting any farther. I felt fearfully
disappointed, and I would not admit that the obstacle was final. I
stopped, I looked underneath the block: no opening. Above: granite
still. Hans passed his lamp over every portion of the barrier in
vain. We must give up all hope of passing it.
 
I sat down in despair. My uncle strode from side to side in the
narrow passage.
 
"But how was it with Saknussemm?" I cried.
 
"Yes," said my uncle, "was he stopped by this stone barrier?"
 
"No, no," I replied with animation. "This fragment of rock has been
shaken down by some shock or convulsion, or by one of those magnetic
storms which agitate these regions, and has blocked up the passage
which lay open to him. Many years have elapsed since the return of
Saknussemm to the surface and the fall of this huge fragment. Is it
not evident that this gallery was once the way open to the course of
the lava, and that at that time there must have been a free passage?
See here are recent fissures grooving and channelling the granite
roof. This roof itself is formed of fragments of rock carried down,
of enormous stones, as if by some giant's hand; but at one time the
expulsive force was greater than usual, and this block, like the
falling keystone of a ruined arch, has slipped down to the ground and
blocked up the way. It is only an accidental obstruction, not met by
Saknussemm, and if we don't destroy it we shall be unworthy to reach
the centre of the earth."
 
Such was my sentence! The soul of the Professor had passed into me.
The genius of discovery possessed me wholly. I forgot the past, I
scorned the future. I gave not a thought to the things of the surface
of this globe into which I had dived; its cities and its sunny
plains, Hamburg and the Königstrasse, even poor Gräuben, who must
have given us up for lost, all were for the time dismissed from the
pages of my memory.
 
"Well," cried my uncle, "let us make a way with our pickaxes."
 
"Too hard for the pickaxe."
 
"Well, then, the spade."
 
"That would take us too long."
 
"What, then?"
 
"Why gunpowder, to be sure! Let us mine the obstacle and blow it up."
 
"Oh, yes, it is only a bit of rock to blast!"
 
"Hans, to work!" cried my uncle.
 
The Icelander returned to the raft and soon came back with an iron
bar which he made use of to bore a hole for the charge. This was no
easy work. A hole was to be made large enough to hold fifty pounds of
guncotton, whose expansive force is four times that of gunpowder.
 
I was terribly excited. Whilst Hans was at work I was actively
helping my uncle to prepare a slow match of wetted powder encased in
linen.
 
"This will do it," I said.
 
"It will," replied my uncle.
 
By midnight our mining preparations were over; the charge was rammed
into the hole, and the slow match uncoiled along the gallery showed
its end outside the opening.
 
A spark would now develop the whole of our preparations into activity.
 
"To-morrow," said the Professor.
 
I had to be resigned and to wait six long hours.
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XLI.
 
 
 
 
THE GREAT EXPLOSION AND THE RUSH DOWN BELOW
 
The next day, Thursday, August 27, is a well-remembered date in our
subterranean journey. It never returns to my memory without sending
through me a shudder of horror and a palpitation of the heart. From
that hour we had no further occasion for the exercise of reason, or
judgment, or skill, or contrivance. We were henceforth to be hurled
along, the playthings of the fierce elements of the deep.
 
At six we were afoot. The moment drew near to clear a way by blasting
through the opposing mass of granite.
 
I begged for the honour of lighting the fuse. This duty done, I was
to join my companions on the raft, which had not yet been unloaded;
we should then push off as far as we could and avoid the dangers
arising from the explosion, the effects of which were not likely to
be confined to the rock itself.
 
The fuse was calculated to burn ten minutes before setting fire to
the mine. I therefore had sufficient time to get away to the raft.
 
I prepared to fulfil my task with some anxiety.
 
After a hasty meal, my uncle and the hunter embarked whilst I
remained on shore. I was supplied with a lighted lantern to set fire
to the fuse. "Now go," said my uncle, "and return immediately to us."
"Don't be uneasy," I replied. "I will not play by the way." I
immediately proceeded to the mouth of the tunnel. I opened my
lantern. I laid hold of the end of the match. The Professor stood,
chronometer in hand. "Ready?" he cried.
 
"Ay."
 
"Fire!"
 
I instantly plunged the end of the fuse into the lantern. It
spluttered and flamed, and I ran at the top of my speed to the raft.
 
"Come on board quickly, and let us push off."
 
Hans, with a vigorous thrust, sent us from the shore. The raft shot
twenty fathoms out to sea.
 
It was a moment of intense excitement. The Professor was watching the
hand of the chronometer.
 
"Five minutes more!" he said. "Four! Three!"
 
My pulse beat half-seconds.
 
"Two! One! Down, granite rocks; down with you."
 
What took place at that moment? I believe I did not hear the dull
roar of the explosion. But the rocks suddenly assumed a new
arrangement: they rent asunder like a curtain. I saw a bottomless pit
open on the shore. The sea, lashed into sudden fury, rose up in an
enormous billow, on the ridge of which the unhappy raft was uplifted
bodily in the air with all its crew and cargo.
 
We all three fell down flat. In less than a second we were in deep,
unfathomable darkness. Then I felt as if not only myself but the raft
also had no support beneath. I thought it was sinking; but it was not
so. I wanted to speak to my uncle, but the roaring of the waves
prevented him from hearing even the sound of my voice.
 
In spite of darkness, noise, astonishment, and terror, I then
understood what had taken place.
 
On the other side of the blown-up rock was an abyss. The explosion
had caused a kind of earthquake in this fissured and abysmal region;
a great gulf had opened; and the sea, now changed into a torrent, was
hurrying us along into it.
 
I gave myself up for lost.
 
An hour passed away - two hours, perhaps - I cannot tell. We clutched
each other fast, to save ourselves from being thrown off the raft. We
felt violent shocks whenever we were borne heavily against the craggy
projections. Yet these shocks were not very frequent, from which I
concluded that the gully was widening. It was no doubt the same road
that Saknussemm had taken; but instead of walking peaceably down it,
as he had done, we were carrying a whole sea along with us.
 
These ideas, it will be understood, presented themselves to my mind
in a vague and undetermined form. I had difficulty in associating any
ideas together during this headlong race, which seemed like a
vertical descent. To judge by the air which was whistling past me and
made a whizzing in my ears, we were moving faster than the fastest
express trains. To light a torch under these' conditions would have
been impossible; and our last electric apparatus had been shattered
by the force of the explosion.
 
I was therefore much surprised to see a clear light shining near me.
It lighted up the calm and unmoved countenance of Hans. The skilful
huntsman had succeeded in lighting the lantern; and although it
flickered so much as to threaten to go out, it threw a fitful light
across the awful darkness.
 
I was right in my supposition. It was a wide gallery. The dim light
could not show us both its walls at once. The fall of the waters
which were carrying us away exceeded that of the swiftest rapids in
American rivers. Its surface seemed composed of a sheaf of arrows
hurled with inconceivable force; I cannot convey my impressions by a
better comparison. The raft, occasionally seized by an eddy, spun
round as it still flew along. When it approached the walls of the
gallery I threw on them the light of the lantern, and I could judge
somewhat of the velocity of our speed by noticing how the jagged
projections of the rocks spun into endless ribbons and bands, so that
we seemed confined within a network of shifting lines. I supposed we
were running at the rate of thirty leagues an hour.
 
My uncle and I gazed on each other with haggard eyes, clinging to the
stump of the mast, which had snapped asunder at the first shock of
our great catastrophe. We kept our backs to the wind, not to be
stifled by the rapidity of a movement which no human power could
check.
 
Hours passed away. No change in our situation; but a discovery came
to complicate matters and make them worse.
 
In seeking to put our cargo into somewhat better order, I found that
the greater part of the articles embarked had disappeared at the
moment of the explosion, when the sea broke in upon us with such
violence. I wanted to know exactly what we had saved, and with the
lantern in my hand I began my examination. Of our instruments none
were saved but the compass and the chronometer; our stock of ropes
and ladders was reduced to the bit of cord rolled round the stump of
the mast! Not a spade, not a pickaxe, not a hammer was left us; and,
irreparable disaster! we had only one day's provisions left.
 
I searched every nook and corner, every crack and cranny in the raft.
There was nothing. Our provisions were reduced to one bit of salt
meat and a few biscuits.
 
I stared at our failing supplies stupidly. I refused to take in the
gravity of our loss. And yet what was the use of troubling myself. If
we had had provisions enough for months, how could we get out of the
abyss into which we were being hurled by an irresistible torrent? Why
should we fear the horrors of famine, when death was swooping down
upon us in a multitude of other forms? Would there be time left to
die of starvation?
 
Yet by an inexplicable play of the imagination I forgot my present
dangers, to contemplate the threatening future. Was there any chance
of escaping from the fury of this impetuous torrent, and of returning
to the surface of the globe? I could not form the slightest
conjecture how or when. But one chance in a thousand, or ten
thousand, is still a chance; whilst death from starvation would leave
us not the smallest hope in the world.
 
The thought came into my mind to declare the whole truth to my uncle,
to show him the dreadful straits to which we were reduced, and to
calculate how long we might yet expect to live. But I had the courage
to preserve silence. I wished to leave him cool and self-possessed.
 
At that moment the light from our lantern began to sink by little and
little, and then went out entirely. The wick had burnt itself out.
Black night reigned again; and there was no hope left of being able
to dissipate the palpable darkness. We had yet a torch left, but we
could not have kept it alight. Then, like a child, I closed my eyes
firmly, not to see the darkness.
 
After a considerable lapse of time our speed redoubled. I could
perceive it by the sharpness of the currents that blew past my face.
The descent became steeper. I believe we were no longer sliding, but
falling down. I had an impression that we were dropping vertically.
My uncle's hand, and the vigorous arm of Hans, held me fast.
 
Suddenly, after a space of time that I could not measure, I felt a
shock. The raft had not struck against any hard resistance, but had
suddenly been checked in its fall. A waterspout, an immense liquid
column, was beating upon the surface of the waters. I was
suffocating! I was drowning!
 
But this sudden flood was not of long duration. In a few seconds I
found myself in the air again, which I inhaled with all the force of
my lungs. My uncle and Hans were still holding me fast by the arms;
and the raft was still carrying us.
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XLII.
 
 
 
 
HEADLONG SPEED UPWARD THROUGH THE HORRORS OF DARKNESS
 
It might have been, as I guessed, about ten at night. The first of my
senses which came into play after this last bout was that of hearing.
All at once I could hear; and it was a real exercise of the sense of
hearing. I could hear the silence in the gallery after the din which
for hours had stunned me. At last these words of my uncle's came to
me like a vague murmuring:
 
"We are going up."
 
"What do you mean?" I cried.
 
"Yes, we are going up - up!"
 
I stretched out my arm. I touched the wall, and drew back my hand
bleeding. We were ascending with extreme rapidity.
 
"The torch! The torch!" cried the Professor.
 
Not without difficulty Hans succeeded in lighting the torch; and the
flame, preserving its upward tendency, threw enough light to show us
what kind of a place we were in.
 
"Just as I thought," said the Professor "We are in a tunnel not
four-and-twenty feet in diameter The water had reached the bottom of
the gulf. It is now rising to its level, and carrying us with it."
 
"Where to?"
 
"I cannot tell; but we must be ready for anything. We are mounting at
a speed which seems to me of fourteen feet in a second, or ten miles
an hour. At this rate we shall get on."
 
"Yes, if nothing stops us; if this well has an aperture. But suppose
it to be stopped. If the air is condensed by the pressure of this
column of water we shall be crushed."
 
"Axel," replied the Professor with perfect coolness, "our situation
is almost desperate; but there are some chances of deliverance, and
it is these that I am considering. If at every instant we may perish,
so at every instant we may be saved. Let us then be prepared to seize
upon the smallest advantage."
 
"But what shall we do now?"
 
"Recruit our strength by eating."
 
At these words I fixed a haggard eye upon my uncle. That which I had
been so unwilling to confess at last had to be told.
 
"Eat, did you say?"
 
"Yes, at once."
 
The Professor added a few words in Danish, but Hans shook his head
mournfully.
 
"What!" cried my uncle. "Have we lost our provisions?"
 
"Yes; here is all we have left; one bit of salt meat for the three."
 
My uncle stared at me as if he could not understand.
 
"Well," said I, "do you think we have any chance of being saved?"
 
My question was unanswered.
 
An hour passed away. I began to feel the pangs of a violent hunger.
My companions were suffering too, and not one of us dared touch this
wretched remnant of our goodly store.
 
But now we were mounting up with excessive speed. Sometimes the air
would cut our breath short, as is experienced by aeronauts ascending
too rapidly. But whilst they suffer from cold in proportion to their
rise, we were beginning to feel a contrary effect. The heat was
increasing in a manner to cause us the most fearful anxiety, and
certainly the temperature was at this moment at the height of 100°
Fahr.
 
What could be the meaning of such a change? Up to this time facts had
supported the theories of Davy and of Liedenbrock; until now
particular conditions of non-conducting rocks, electricity and
magnetism, had tempered the laws of nature, giving us only a
moderately warm climate, for the theory of a central fire remained in
my estimation the only one that was true and explicable. Were we then
turning back to where the phenomena of central heat ruled in all
their rigour and would reduce the most refractory rocks to the state
of a molten liquid? I feared this, and said to the Professor:
 
"If we are neither drowned, nor shattered to pieces, nor starved to
death, there is still the chance that we may be burned alive and
reduced to ashes."
 
At this he shrugged his shoulders and returned to his thoughts.
 
Another hour passed, and, except some slight increase in the
temperature, nothing new had happened.
 
"Come," said he, "we must determine upon something."
 
"Determine on what?" said I.
 
"Yes, we must recruit our strength by carefully rationing ourselves,
and so prolong our existence by a few hours. But we shall be reduced
to very great weakness at last."
 
"And our last hour is not far off."
 
"Well, if there is a chance of safety, if a moment for active
exertion presents itself, where should we find the required strength
if we allowed ourselves to be enfeebled by hunger?"
 
"Well, uncle, when this bit of meat has been devoured what shall we
have left?"
 
"Nothing, Axel, nothing at all. But will it do you any more good to
devour it with your eyes than with your teeth? Your reasoning has in
it neither sense nor energy."
 
"Then don't you despair?" I cried irritably.
 
"No, certainly not," was the Professor's firm reply.
 
"What! do you think there is any chance of safety left?"
 
"Yes, I do; as long as the heart beats, as long as body and soul keep
together, I cannot admit that any creature endowed with a will has
need to despair of life."
 
Resolute words these! The man who could speak so, under such
circumstances, was of no ordinary type.
 
"Finally, what do you mean to do?" I asked.
 
"Eat what is left to the last crumb, and recruit our fading strength.
This meal will be our last, perhaps: so let it be! But at any rate we
shall once more be men, and not exhausted, empty bags."
 
"Well, let us consume it then," I cried.
 
My uncle took the piece of meat and the few biscuits which had
escaped from the general destruction. He divided them into three
equal portions and gave one to each. This made about a pound of
nourishment for each. The Professor ate his greedily, with a kind of
feverish rage. I ate without pleasure, almost with disgust; Hans
quietly, moderately, masticating his small mouthfuls without any
noise, and relishing them with the calmness of a man above all
anxiety about the future. By diligent search he had found a flask of
Hollands; he offered it to us each in turn, and this generous
beverage cheered us up slightly.
 
"_Forträfflig,_" said Hans, drinking in his turn.
 
"Excellent," replied my uncle.
 
A glimpse of hope had returned, although without cause. But our last
meal was over, and it was now five in the morning.
 
Man is so constituted that health is a purely negative state. Hunger
once satisfied, it is difficult for a man to imagine the horrors of
starvation; they cannot be understood without being felt.
 
Therefore it was that after our long fast these few mouthfuls of meat
and biscuit made us triumph over our past agonies.
 
But as soon as the meal was done, we each of us fell deep into
thought. What was Hans thinking of - that man of the far West, but
who seemed ruled by the fatalist doctrines of the East?
 
As for me, my thoughts were made up of remembrances, and they carried
me up to the surface of the globe of which I ought never to have
taken leave. The house in the Königstrasse, my poor dear Gräuben,
that kind soul Martha, flitted like visions before my eyes, and in
the dismal moanings which from time to time reached my ears I thought
I could distinguish the roar of the traffic of the great cities upon
earth.
 
My uncle still had his eye upon his work. Torch in hand, he tried to
gather some idea of our situation from the observation of the strata.
This calculation could, at best, be but a vague approximation; but a
learned man is always a philosopher when he succeeds in remaining
cool, and assuredly Professor Liedenbrock possessed this quality to a
surprising degree.
 
I could hear him murmuring geological terms. I could understand them,
and in spite of myself I felt interested in this last geological
study.
 
"Eruptive granite," he was saying. "We are still in the primitive
period. But we are going up, up, higher still. Who can tell?"
 
Ah! who can tell? With his hand he was examining the perpendicular
wall, and in a few more minutes he continued:
 
"This is gneiss! here is mica schist! Ah! presently we shall come to
the transition period, and then -"
 
What did the Professor mean? Could he be trying to measure the
thickness of the crust of the earth that lay between us and the world
above? Had he any means of making this calculation? No, he had not
the aneroid, and no guessing could supply its place.
 
Still the temperature kept rising, and I felt myself steeped in a
broiling atmosphere. I could only compare it to the heat of a furnace
at the moment when the molten metal is running into the mould.
Gradually we had been obliged to throw aside our coats and
waistcoats, the. lightest covering became uncomfortable and even
painful.
 
"Are we rising into a fiery furnace?" I cried at one moment when the
heat was redoubling.
 
"No," replied my uncle, "that is impossible -quite impossible!"
 
"Yet," I answered, feeling the wall, "this well is burning hot."
 
At the same moment, touching the water, I had to withdraw my hand in
haste.
 
"The water is scalding," I cried.
 
This time the Professor's only answer was an angry gesture.
 
Then an unconquerable terror seized upon me, from which I could no
longer get free. I felt that a catastrophe was approaching before
which the boldest spirit must quail. A dim, vague notion laid hold of
my mind, but which was fast hardening into certainty. I tried to
repel it, but it would return. I dared not express it in plain terms.
Yet a few involuntary observations confirmed me in my view. By the
flickering light of the torch I could distinguish contortions in the
granite beds; a phenomenon was unfolding in which electricity would
play the principal part; then this unbearable heat, this boiling
water! I consulted the compass.
 
The compass had lost its properties! it had ceased to act properly!
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XLIII.
 
 
 
 
SHOT OUT OF A VOLCANO AT LAST!
 
Yes: our compass was no longer a guide; the needle flew from pole to
pole with a kind of frenzied impulse; it ran round the dial, and spun
hither and thither as if it were giddy or intoxicated.
 
I knew quite well that according to the best received theories the
mineral covering of the globe is never at absolute rest; the changes
brought about by the chemical decomposition of its component parts,
the agitation caused by great liquid torrents, and the magnetic
currents, are continually tending to disturb it -even when living
beings upon its surface may fancy that all is quiet below. A
phenomenon of this kind would not have greatly alarmed me, or at any
rate it would not have given rise to dreadful apprehensions.
 
But other facts, other circumstances, of a peculiar nature, came to
reveal to me by degrees the true state of the case. There came
incessant and continuous explosions. I could only compare them to the
loud rattle of along train of chariots driven at full speed over the
stones, or a roar of unintermitting thunder.
 
Then the disordered compass, thrown out of gear by the electric
currents, confirmed me in a growing conviction. The mineral crust of
the globe threatened to burst up, the granite foundations to come
together with a crash, the fissure through which we were helplessly
driven would be filled up, the void would be full of crushed
fragments of rock, and we poor wretched mortals were to be buried and
annihilated in this dreadful consummation.
 
"My uncle," I cried, "we are lost now, utterly lost!"
 
"What are you in a fright about now?" was the calm rejoinder. "What
is the matter with you?"
 
"The matter? Look at those quaking walls! look at those shivering
rocks. Don't you feel the burning heat? Don't you see how the water
boils and bubbles? Are you blind to the dense vapours and steam
growing thicker and denser every minute? See this agitated compass
needle. It is an earthquake that is threatening us."
 
My undaunted uncle calmly shook his head.
 
"Do you think," said he, "an earthquake is coming?"
 
"I do."
 
"Well, I think you are mistaken."
 
"What! don't you recognise the symptoms?"
 
"Of an earthquake? no! I am looking out for something better."
 
"What can you mean? Explain?"
 
"It is an eruption, Axel."
 
"An eruption! Do you mean to affirm that we are running up the shaft
of a volcano?"
 
"I believe we are," said the indomitable Professor with an air of
perfect self-possession; "and it is the best thing that could
possibly happen to us under our circumstances."
 
The best thing! Was my uncle stark mad? What did the man mean? and
what was the use of saying facetious things at a time like this?
 
"What!" I shouted. "Are we being taken up in an eruption? Our fate
has flung us here among burning lavas, molten rocks, boiling waters,
and all kinds of volcanic matter; we are going to be pitched out,
expelled, tossed up, vomited, spit out high into the air, along with
fragments of rock, showers of ashes and scoria, in the midst of a
towering rush of smoke and flames; and it is the best thing that
could happen to us!"
 
"Yes," replied the Professor, eyeing me over his spectacles, "I don't
see any other way of reaching the surface of the earth."
 
I pass rapidly over the thousand ideas which passed through my mind.
My uncle was right, undoubtedly right; and never had he seemed to me
more daring and more confirmed in his notions than at this moment
when he was calmly contemplating the chances of being shot out of a
volcano!
 
In the meantime up we went; the night passed away in continual
ascent; the din and uproar around us became more and more
intensified; I was stifled and stunned; I thought my last hour was
approaching; and yet imagination is such a strong thing that even in
this supreme hour I was occupied with strange and almost childish
speculations. But I was the victim, not the master, of my own
thoughts.
 
It was very evident that we were being hurried upward upon the crest
of a wave of eruption; beneath our raft were boiling waters, and
under these the more sluggish lava was working its way up in a heated
mass, together with shoals of fragments of rock which, when they
arrived at the crater, would be dispersed in all directions high and
low. We were imprisoned in the shaft or chimney of some volcano.
There was no room to doubt of that.
 
But this time, instead of Snæfell, an extinct volcano, we were inside
one in full activity. I wondered, therefore, where could this
mountain be, and in what part of the world we were to be shot out.
 
I made no doubt but that it would be in some northern region. Before
its disorders set in, the needle had never deviated from that
direction. From Cape Saknussemm we had been carried due north for
hundreds of leagues. Were we under Iceland again? Were we destined to
be thrown up out of Hecla, or by which of the seven other fiery
craters in that island? Within a radius of five hundred leagues to
the west I remembered under this parallel of latitude only the
imperfectly known volcanoes of the north-east coast of America. To
the east there was only one in the 80th degree of north latitude, the
Esk in Jan Mayen Island, not far from Spitzbergen! Certainly there
was no lack of craters, and there were some capacious enough to throw
out a whole army! But I wanted to know which of them was to serve us
for an exit from the inner world.
 
Towards morning the ascending movement became accelerated. If the
heat increased, instead of diminishing, as we approached nearer to
the surface of the globe, this effect was due to local causes alone,
and those volcanic. The manner of our locomotion left no doubt in my
mind. An enormous force, a force of hundreds of atmospheres,
generated by the extreme pressure of confined vapours, was driving us
irresistibly forward. But to what numberless dangers it exposed us!
 
Soon lurid lights began to penetrate the vertical gallery which
widened as we went up. Right and left I could see deep channels, like
huge tunnels, out of which escaped dense volumes of smoke; tongues of
fire lapped the walls, which crackled and sputtered under the intense
heat.
 
"See, see, my uncle!" I cried.
 
"Well, those are only sulphureous flames and vapours, which one must
expect to see in an eruption. They are quite natural."
 
"But suppose they should wrap us round."
 
"But they won't wrap us round."
 
"But we shall be stifled."
 
"We shall, not be stifled at all. The gallery is widening, and if it
becomes necessary, we shall abandon the raft, and creep into a
crevice."
 
"But the water - the rising water?"
 
"There is no more water, Axel; only a lava paste, which is bearing us
up on its surface to the top of the crater."
 
The liquid column had indeed disappeared, to give place to dense and
still boiling eruptive matter of all kinds. The temperature was
becoming unbearable. A thermometer exposed to this atmosphere would
have marked 150°. The perspiration streamed from my body. But for the
rapidity of our ascent we should have been suffocated.
 
But the Professor gave up his idea of abandoning the raft, and it was
well he did. However roughly joined together, those planks afforded
us a firmer support than we could have found anywhere else.
 
About eight in the morning a new incident occurred. The upward
movement ceased. The raft lay motionless.
 
"What is this?" I asked, shaken by this sudden stoppage as if by a
shock.
 
"It is a halt," replied my uncle.
 
"Is the eruption checked?" I asked.
 
"I hope not."
 
I rose, and tried to look around me. Perhaps the raft itself, stopped
in its course by a projection, was staying the volcanic torrent. If
this were the case we should have to release it as soon as possible.
 
But it was not so. The blast of ashes, scorix, and rubbish had ceased
to rise.
 
"Has the eruption stopped?" I cried.
 
"Ah!" said my uncle between his clenched teeth, "you are afraid. But
don't alarm yourself - this lull cannot last long. It has lasted now
five minutes, and in a short time we shall resume our journey to the
mouth of the crater."
 
As he spoke, the Professor continued to consult his chronometer, and
he was again right in his prognostications. The raft was soon hurried
and driven forward with a rapid but irregular movement, which lasted
about ten minutes, and then stopped again.
 
"Very good," said my uncle; "in ten minutes more we shall be off
again, for our present business lies with an intermittent volcano. It
gives us time now and then to take breath."
 
This was perfectly true. When the ten minutes were over we started
off again with renewed and increased speed. We were obliged to lay
fast hold of the planks of the raft, not to be thrown off. Then again
the paroxysm was over.
 
I have since reflected upon this singular phenomenon without being
able to explain it. At any rate it was clear that we were not in the
main shaft of the volcano, but in a lateral gallery where there were
felt recurrent tunes of reaction.
 
How often this operation was repeated I cannot say. All I know is,
that at each fresh impulse we were hurled forward with a greatly
increased force, and we seemed as if we were mere projectiles. During
the short halts we were stifled with the heat; whilst we were being
projected forward the hot air almost stopped my breath. I thought for
a moment how delightful it would be to find myself carried suddenly
into the arctic regions, with a cold 30° below the freezing point. My
overheated brain conjured up visions of white plains of cool snow,
where I might roll and allay my feverish heat. Little by little my
brain, weakened by so many constantly repeated shocks, seemed to be
giving way altogether. But for the strong arm of Hans I should more
than once have had my head broken against the granite roof of our
burning dungeon.
 
I have therefore no exact recollection of what took place during the
following hours. I have a confused impression left of continuous
explosions, loud detonations, a general shaking of the rocks all
around us, and of a spinning movement with which our raft was once
whirled helplessly round. It rocked upon the lava torrent, amidst a
dense fall of ashes. Snorting flames darted their fiery tongues at
us. There were wild, fierce puffs of stormy wind from below,
resembling the blasts of vast iron furnaces blowing all at one time;
and I caught a glimpse of the figure of Hans lighted up by the fire;
and all the feeling I had left was just what I imagine must be the
feeling of an unhappy criminal doomed to be blown away alive from the
mouth of a cannon, just before the trigger is pulled, and the flying
limbs and rags of flesh and skin fill the quivering air and spatter
the blood-stained ground.
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XLIV.
 
 
 
 
SUNNY LANDS IN THE BLUE MEDITERRANEAN
 
When I opened my eyes again I felt myself grasped by the belt with
the strong hand of our guide. With the other arm he supported my
uncle. I was not seriously hurt, but I was shaken and bruised and
battered all over. I found myself lying on the sloping side of a
mountain only two yards from a gaping gulf, which would have
swallowed me up had I leaned at all that way. Hans had saved me from
death whilst I lay rolling on the edge of the crater.
 
"Where are we?" asked my uncle irascibly, as if he felt much injured
by being landed upon the earth again.
 
The hunter shook his head in token of complete ignorance.
 
"Is it Iceland?" I asked.
 
"_Nej,_" replied Hans.
 
"What! Not Iceland?" cried the Professor.
 
"Hans must be mistaken," I said, raising myself up.
 
This was our final surprise after all the astonishing events of our
wonderful journey. I expected to see a white cone covered with the
eternal snow of ages rising from the midst of the barren deserts of
the icy north, faintly lighted with the pale rays of the arctic sun,
far away in the highest latitudes known; but contrary to all our
expectations, my uncle, the Icelander, and myself were sitting
half-way down a mountain baked under the burning rays of a southern
sun, which was blistering us with the heat, and blinding us with the
fierce light of his nearly vertical rays.
 
I could not believe my own eyes; but the heated air and the sensation
of burning left me no room for doubt. We had come out of the crater
half naked, and the radiant orb to which we had been strangers for
two months was lavishing upon us out of his blazing splendours more
of his light and heat than we were able to receive with comfort.
 
When my eyes had become accustomed to the bright light to which they
had been so long strangers, I began to use them to set my imagination
right. At least I would have it to be Spitzbergen, and I was in no
humour to give up this notion.
 
The Professor was the first to speak, and said:
 
"Well, this is not much like Iceland."
 
"But is it Jan Mayen?" I asked.
 
"Nor that either," he answered. "This is no northern mountain; here
are no granite peaks capped with snow. Look, Axel, look!"
 
Above our heads, at a height of five hundred feet or more, we saw the
crater of a volcano, through. which, at intervals of fifteen minutes
or so, there issued with loud explosions lofty columns of fire,
mingled with pumice stones, ashes, and flowing lava. I could feel the
heaving of the mountain, which seemed to breathe like a huge whale,
and puff out fire and wind from its vast blowholes. Beneath, down a
pretty steep declivity, ran streams of lava for eight or nine hundred
feet, giving the mountain a height of about 1,300 or 1,400 feet. But
the base of the mountain was hidden in a perfect bower of rich
verdure, amongst which I was able to distinguish the olive, the fig,
and vines, covered with their luscious purple bunches.
 
I was forced to confess that there was nothing arctic here.
 
When the eye passed beyond these green surroundings it rested on a
wide, blue expanse of sea or lake, which appeared to enclose this
enchanting island, within a compass of only a few leagues. Eastward
lay a pretty little white seaport town or village, with a few houses
scattered around it, and in the harbour of which a few vessels of
peculiar rig were gently swayed by the softly swelling waves. Beyond
it, groups of islets rose from the smooth, blue waters, but in such
numbers that they seemed to dot the sea like a shoal. To the west
distant coasts lined the dim horizon, on some rose blue mountains of
smooth, undulating forms; on a more distant coast arose a prodigious
cone crowned on its summit with a snowy plume of white cloud. To the
northward lay spread a vast sheet of water, sparkling and dancing
under the hot, bright rays, the uniformity broken here and there by
the topmast of a gallant ship appearing above the horizon, or a
swelling sail moving slowly before the wind.
 
This unforeseen spectacle was most charming to eyes long used to
underground darkness.
 
"Where are we? Where are we?" I asked faintly.
 
Hans closed his eyes with lazy indifference. What did it matter to
him? My uncle looked round with dumb surprise.
 
"Well, whatever mountain this may be," he said at last, "it is very
hot here. The explosions are going on still, and I don't think it
would look well to have come out by an eruption, and then to get our
heads broken by bits of falling rock. Let us get down. Then we shall
know better what we are about. Besides, I am starving, and parching
with thirst."
 
Decidedly the Professor was not given to contemplation. For my part,
I could for another hour or two have forgotten my hunger and my
fatigue to enjoy the lovely scene before me; but I had to follow my
companions.
 
The slope of the volcano was in many places of great steepness. We
slid down screes of ashes, carefully avoiding the lava streams which
glided sluggishly by us like fiery serpents. As we went I chattered
and asked all sorts of questions as to our whereabouts, for L was too
much excited not to talk a great deal.
 
"We are in Asia," I cried, "on the coasts of India, in the Malay
Islands, or in Oceania. We have passed through half the globe, and
come out nearly at the antipodes."
 
"But the compass?" said my uncle.
 
"Ay, the compass!" I said, greatly puzzled. "According to the compass
we have gone northward."
 
"Has it lied?"
 
"Surely not. Could it lie?"
 
"Unless, indeed, this is the North Pole!"
 
"Oh, no, it is not the Pole; but -"
 
Well, here was something that baffled us completely. I could not tell
what to say.
 
But now we were coming into that delightful greenery, and I was
suffering greatly from hunger and thirst. Happily, after two hours'
walking, a charming country lay open before us, covered with olive
trees, pomegranate trees, and delicious vines, all of which seemed to
belong to anybody who pleased to claim them. Besides, in our state of
destitution and famine we were not likely to be particular. Oh, the
inexpressible pleasure of pressing those cool, sweet fruits to our
lips, and eating grapes by mouthfuls off the rich, full bunches! Not
far off, in the grass, under the delicious shade of the trees, I
discovered a spring of fresh, cool water, in which we luxuriously
bathed our faces, hands, and feet.
 
Whilst we were thus enjoying the sweets of repose a child appeared
out of a grove of olive trees.
 
"Ah!" I cried, "here is an inhabitant of this happy land!"
 
It was but a poor boy, miserably ill-clad, a sufferer from poverty,
and our aspect seemed to alarm him a great deal; in fact, only half
clothed, with ragged hair and beards, we were a suspicious-looking
party; and if the people of the country knew anything about thieves,
we were very likely to frighten them.
 
Just as the poor little wretch was going to take to his heels, Hans
caught hold of him, and brought him to us, kicking and struggling.
 
My uncle began to encourage him as well as he could, and said to him
in good German:
 
"_Was heiszt diesen Berg, mein Knablein? Sage mir geschwind!_"
 
("What is this mountain called, my little friend?")
 
The child made no answer.
 
"Very well," said my uncle. "I infer that we are not in Germany."
 
He put the same question in English.
 
We got no forwarder. I was a good deal puzzled.
 
"Is the child dumb?" cried the Professor, who, proud of his knowledge
of many languages, now tried French: "_Comment appellet-on cette
montagne, mon enfant?_"
 
Silence still.
 
"Now let us try Italian," said my uncle; and he said:
 
"_Dove noi siamo?_"
 
"Yes, where are we?" I impatiently repeated.
 
But there was no answer still.
 
"Will you speak when you are told?" exclaimed my uncle, shaking the
urchin by the ears. "_Come si noma questa isola?_"
 
"STROMBOLI," replied the little herdboy, slipping out of Hans' hands,
and scudding into the plain across the olive trees.
 
We were hardly thinking of that. Stromboli! What an effect this
unexpected name produced upon my mind! We were in the midst of the
Mediterranean Sea, on an island of the Æolian archipelago, in the
ancient Strongyle, where Æolus kept the winds and the storms chained
up, to be let loose at his will. And those distant blue mountains in
the east were the mountains of Calabria. And that threatening volcano
far away in the south was the fierce Etna.
 
"Stromboli, Stromboli!" I repeated.
 
My uncle kept time to my exclamations with hands and feet, as well as
with words. We seemed to be chanting in chorus!
 
What a journey we had accomplished! How marvellous! Having entered by
one volcano, we had issued out of another more than two thousand
miles from Snæfell and from that barren, far-away Iceland! The
strange chances of our expedition had carried us into the heart of
the fairest region in the world. We had exchanged the bleak regions
of perpetual snow and of impenetrable barriers of ice for those of
brightness and 'the rich hues of all glorious things.' We had left
over our heads the murky sky and cold fogs of the frigid zone to
revel under the azure sky of Italy!
 
After our delicious repast of fruits and cold, clear water we set off
again to reach the port of Stromboli. It would not have been wise to
tell how we came there. The superstitious Italians would have set us
down for fire-devils vomited out of hell; so we presented ourselves
in the humble guise of shipwrecked mariners. It was not so glorious,
but it was safer.
 
On my way I could hear my uncle murmuring: "But the compass! that
compass! It pointed due north. How are we to explain that fact?"
 
"My opinion is," I replied disdainfully, "that it is best not to
explain it. That is the easiest way to shelve the difficulty."
 
"Indeed, sir! The occupant of a professorial chair at the Johannæum
unable to explain the reason of a cosmical phenomenon! Why, it would
be simply disgraceful!"
 
And as he spoke, my uncle, half undressed, in rags, a perfect
scarecrow, with his leathern belt around him, settling his spectacles
upon his nose and looking learned and imposing, was himself again,
the terrible German professor of mineralogy.
 
One hour after we had left the grove of olives, we arrived at the
little port of San Vicenzo, where Hans claimed his thirteen week's
wages, which was counted out to him with a hearty shaking of hands
all round.
 
At that moment, if he did not share our natural emotion, at least his
countenance expanded in a manner very unusual with him, and while
with the ends of his fingers he lightly pressed our hands, I believe
he smiled.
 
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XLV.
 
 
 
 
ALL'S WELL THAT ENDS WELL
 
Such is the conclusion of a history which I cannot expect everybody
to believe, for some people will believe nothing against the
testimony of their own experience. However, I am indifferent to their
incredulity, and they may believe as much or as little as they please.
 
The Stromboliotes received us kindly as shipwrecked mariners. They
gave us food and clothing. After waiting forty-eight hours, on the 31
st of August, a small craft took us to Messina, where a few days'
rest completely removed the effect of our fatigues.
 
On Friday, September the 4th, we embarked on the steamer Volturno,
employed by the French Messageries Imperiales, and in three days more
we were at Marseilles, having no care on our minds except that
abominable deceitful compass, which we had mislaid somewhere and
could not now examine; but its inexplicable behaviour exercised my
mind fearfully. On the 9th of September, in the evening, we arrived
at Hamburg.
 
I cannot describe to you the astonishment of Martha or the joy of
Gräuben.
 
"Now you are a hero, Axel," said to me my blushing _fiancée,_ my
betrothed, "you will not leave me again!"
 
I looked tenderly upon her, and she smiled through her tears.
 
How can I describe the extraordinary sensation produced by the return
of Professor Liedenbrock? Thanks to Martha's ineradicable tattling,
the news that the Professor had gone to discover a way to the centre
of the earth had spread over the whole civilised world. People
refused to believe it, and when they saw him they would not believe
him any the more. Still, the appearance of Hans, and sundry pieces of
intelligence derived from Iceland, tended to shake the confidence of
the unbelievers.
 
Then my uncle became a great man, and I was now the nephew of a great
man -which is not a privilege to be despised.
 
Hamburg gave a grand fete in our honour. A public audience was given
to the Professor at the Johannæum, at which he told all about our
expedition, with only one omission, the unexplained and inexplicable
behaviour of our compass. On the same day, with much state, he
deposited in the archives of the city the now famous document of
Saknussemm, and expressed his regret that circumstances over which he
had no control had prevented him from following to the very centre of
the earth the track of the learned Icelander. He was modest
notwithstanding his glory, and he was all the more famous for his
humility.
 
So much honour could not but excite envy. There were those who envied
him his fame; and as his theories, resting upon known facts, were in
opposition to the systems of science upon the question of the central
fire, he sustained with his pen and by his voice remarkable
discussions with the learned of every country.
 
For my part I cannot agree with his theory of gradual cooling: in
spite of what I have seen and felt, I believe, and always shall
believe, in the central heat. But I admit that certain circumstances
not yet sufficiently understood may tend to modify in places the
action of natural phenomena.
 
While these questions were being debated with great animation, my
uncle met with a real sorrow. Our faithful Hans, in spite of our
entreaties, had left Hamburg; the man to whom we owed all our success
and our lives too would not suffer us to reward him as we could have
wished. He was seized with the mal de pays, a complaint for which we
have not even a name in English.
 
"_Farval,_" said he one day; and with that simple word he left us and
sailed for Rejkiavik, which he reached in safety.
 
We were strongly attached to our brave eider-down hunter; though far
away in the remotest north, he will never be forgotten by those whose
lives he protected, and certainly I shall not fail to endeavour to
see him once more before I die.
 
To conclude, I have to add that this 'Journey into the Interior of
the Earth' created a wonderful sensation in the world. It was
translated into all civilised languages. The leading newspapers
extracted the most interesting passages, which were commented upon,
picked to pieces, discussed, attacked, and defended with equal
enthusiasm and determination, both by believers and sceptics. Rare
privilege! my uncle enjoyed during his lifetime the glory he had
deservedly won; and he may even boast the distinguished honour of an
offer from Mr. Barnum, to exhibit him on most advantageous terms in
all the principal cities in the United States!
 
But there was one 'dead fly' amidst all this glory and honour; one
fact, one incident, of the journey remained a mystery. Now to a man
eminent for his learning, an unexplained phenomenon is an unbearable
hardship. Well! it was yet reserved for my uncle to be completely
happy.
 
One day, while arranging a collection of minerals in his cabinet, I
noticed in a corner this unhappy compass, which we had long lost
sight of; I opened it, and began to watch it.
 
It had been in that corner for six months, little mindful of the
trouble it was giving.
 
Suddenly, to my intense astonishment, I noticed a strange fact, and I
uttered a cry of surprise.
 
"What is the matter?" my uncle asked.
 
"That compass!"
 
"Well?"
 
"See, its poles are reversed!"
 
"Reversed?"
 
"Yes, they point the wrong way."
 
My uncle looked, he compared, and the house shook with his triumphant
leap of exultation.
 
A light broke in upon his spirit and mine.
 
"See there," he cried, as soon as he was able to speak. "After our
arrival at Cape Saknussemm the north pole of the needle of this
confounded compass began to point south instead of north."
 
"Evidently!"
 
"Here, then, is the explanation of our mistake. But what phenomenon
could have caused this reversal of the poles?"
 
"The reason is evident, uncle."
 
"Tell me, then, Axel."
 
"During the electric storm on the Liedenbrock sea, that ball of fire,
which magnetised all the iron on board, reversed the poles of our
magnet!"
 
"Aha! aha!" shouted the Professor with a loud laugh. "So it was just
an electric joke!"
 
From that day forth the Professor was the most glorious of savants,
and I was the happiest of men; for my pretty Virlandaise, resigning
her place as ward, took her position in the old house on the
Königstrasse in the double capacity of niece to my uncle and wife to
a certain happy youth. What is the need of adding that the
illustrious Otto Liedenbrock, corresponding member of all the
scientific, geographical, and mineralogical societies of all the
civilised world, was now her uncle and mine?
 
 
 
End of A Journey to the Interior of the Earth
by Jules Verne
 

5 Children and It

August 16, 2009
 
 
 
FIVE CHILDREN AND IT
 
 
 
 
E. NESBIT
 
 
 
TO JOHN BLAND
 
My Lamb, you are so very small,
You have not learned to read at all.
Yet never a printed book withstands
The urgence of your dimpled hands.
So, though this book is for yourself,
Let mother keep it on the shelf
Till you can read.  O days that Pass,
That day will come too soon, alas!
 
 
 
CONTENTS
 
 
1.  Beautiful As the Day
2.  Golden Guineas
3.  Being Wanted
4.  Wings
5.  No Wings
6.  A Castle and No Dinner
7.  A Siege and Bed
8.  Bigger Than the Baker's Boy
9.  Grown Up
10.  Scalps
11.  The Last Wish
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER 1
BEAUTIFUL AS THE DAY
 
 
The house was three miles from the station, but before the dusty
hired fly had rattled along for five minutes the children began to
put their heads out of the carriage window and to say, 'Aren't we
nearly there?'  And every time they passed a house, which was not
very often, they all said, 'Oh, is THIS it?'  But it never was,
till they reached the very top of the hill, just past the
chalk-quarry and before you come to the gravel-pit.  And then there
was a white house with a green garden and an orchard beyond, and
mother said, 'Here we are!'
 
'How white the house is,' said Robert.
 
'And look at the roses,' said Anthea.
 
'And the plums,' said Jane.
 
'It is rather decent,' Cyril admitted.
 
The Baby said, 'Wanty go walky'; and the fly stopped with a last
rattle and jolt.
 
Everyone got its legs kicked or its feet trodden on in the scramble
to get out of the carriage that very minute, but no one seemed to
mind.  Mother, curiously enough, was in no hurry to get out; and
even when she had come down slowly and by the step, and with no
jump at all, she seemed to wish to see the boxes carried in, and
even to pay the driver, instead of joining in that first glorious
rush round the garden and the orchard and the thorny, thistly,
briery, brambly wilderness beyond the broken gate and the dry
fountain at the side of the house.  But the children were wiser,
for once.  It was not really a pretty house at all; it was quite
ordinary, and mother thought it was rather inconvenient, and was
quite annoyed at there being no shelves, to speak of, and hardly a
cupboard in the place.  Father used to say that the ironwork on the
roof and coping was like an architect's nightmare.  But the house
was deep in the country, with no other house in sight, and the
children had been in London for two years, without so much as once
going to the seaside even for a day by an excursion train, and so
the White House seemed to them a sort of Fairy Palace set down in
an Earthly Paradise.  For London is like prison for children,
especially if their relations are not rich.
 
Of course there are the shops and the theatres, and Maskelyne and
Cook's, and things, but if your people are rather poor you don't
get taken to the theatres, and you can't buy things out of the
shops; and London has none of those nice things that children may
play with without hurting the things or themselves - such as trees
and sand and woods and waters.  And nearly everything in London is
the wrong sort of shape - all straight lines and flat streets,
instead of being all sorts of odd shapes, like things are in the
country.  Trees are all different, as you know, and I am sure some
tiresome person must have told you that there are no two blades of
grass exactly alike.  But in streets, where the blades of grass
don't grow, everything is like everything else.  This is why so
many children who live in towns are so extremely naughty.  They do
not know what is the matter with them, and no more do their fathers
and mothers, aunts, uncles, cousins, tutors, governesses, and
nurses; but I know.  And so do you now.  Children in the country
are naughty sometimes, too, but that is for quite different
reasons.
 
The children had explored the gardens and the outhouses thoroughly
before they were caught and cleaned for tea, and they saw quite
well that they were certain to be happy at the White House.  They
thought so from the first moment, but when they found the back of
the house covered with jasmine, an in white flower, and smelling
like a bottle of the most expensive scent that is ever given for a
birthday present; and when they had seen the lawn, all green and
smooth, and quite different from the brown grass in the gardens at
Camden Town; and when they had found the stable with a loft over it
and some old hay still left, they were almost certain; and when
Robert had found the broken swing and tumbled out of it and got a
lump on his head the size of an egg, and Cyril had nipped his
finger in the door of a hutch that seemed made to keep rabbits in,
if you ever had any, they had no longer any doubts whatever.
 
The best part of it all was that there were no rules about not
going to places and not doing things.  In London almost everything
is labelled 'You mustn't touch,' and though the label is invisible,
it's just as bad, because you know it's there, or if you don't you
jolly soon get told.
 
The White House was on the edge of a hill, with a wood behind it -
and the chalk-quarry on one side and the gravel-pit on the other. 
Down at the bottom of the hill was a level plain, with queer-shaped
white buildings where people burnt lime, and a big red brewery and
other houses; and when the big chimneys were smoking and the sun
was setting, the valley looked as if it was filled with golden
mist, and the limekilns and oast-houses glimmered and glittered
till they were like an enchanted city out of the Arabian Nights.
 
Now that I have begun to tell you about the place, I feel that I
could go on and make this into a most interesting story about all
the ordinary things that the children did - just the kind of things
you do yourself, you know - and you would believe every word of it;
and when I told about the children's being tiresome, as you are
sometimes, your aunts would perhaps write in the margin of the
story with a pencil, 'How true!' or 'How like life!'and you would
see it and very likely be annoyed.  So I will only tell you the
really astonishing things that happened, and you may leave the book
about quite safely, for no aunts and uncles either are likely to
write 'How true!' on the edge of the story.  Grown-up people find
it very difficult to believe really wonderful things, unless they
have what they call proof.  But children will believe almost
anything, and grown-ups know this.  That is why they tell you that
the earth is round like an orange, when you can see perfectly well
that it is flat and lumpy; and why they say that the earth goes
round the sun, when you can see for yourself any day that the sun
gets up in the morning and goes to bed at night like a good sun as
it is, and the earth knows its place, and lies as still as a mouse. 
Yet I daresay you believe all that about the earth and the sun, and
if so you will find it quite easy to believe that before Anthea and
Cyril and the others had been a week in the country they had found
a fairy.  At least they called it that, because that was what it
called itself; and of course it knew best, but it was not at all
like any fairy you ever saw or heard of or read about.
 
It was at the gravel-pits.  Father had to go away suddenly on
business, and mother had gone away to stay with Granny, who was not
very well.  They both went in a great hurry, and when they were
gone the house seemed dreadfully quiet and empty, and the children
wandered from one room to another and looked at the bits of paper
and string on the floors left over from the packing, and not yet
cleared up, and wished they had something to do.  It was Cyril who
said:
 
'I say, let's take our Margate spades and go and dig in the
gravel-pits.  We can pretend it's seaside.'
 
'Father said it was once,' Anthea said; 'he says there are shells
there thousands of years old.'
 
So they went.  Of course they had been to the edge of the
gravel-pit and looked over, but they had not gone down into it for
fear father should say they mustn't play there, and the same with
the chalk-quarry.  The gravel-pit is not really dangerous if you
don't try to climb down the edges, but go the slow safe way round
by the road, as if you were a cart.
 
Each of the children carried its own spade, and took it in turns to
carry the Lamb.  He was the baby, and they called him that because
'Baa' was the first thing he ever said.  They called Anthea
'Panther', which seems silly when you read it, but when you say it
it sounds a little like her name.
 
The gravel-pit is very large and wide, with grass growing round the
edges at the top, and dry stringy wildflowers, purple and yellow. 
It is like a giant's wash-hand basin.  And there are mounds of
gravel, and holes in the sides of the basin where gravel has been
taken out, and high up in the steep sides there are the little
holes that are the little front doors of the little sand-martins'
little houses.
 
The children built a castle, of course, but castle-building is
rather poor fun when you have no hope of the swishing tide ever
coming in to fill up the moat and wash away the drawbridge, and, at
the happy last, to wet everybody up to the waist at least.
 
Cyril wanted to dig out a cave to play smugglers in, but the others
thought it might bury them alive, so it ended in all spades going
to work to dig a hole through the castle to Australia.  These
children, you see, believed that the world was round, and that on
the other side the little Australian boys and girls were really
walking wrong way up, like flies on the ceiling, with their heads
hanging down into the air.
 
The children dug and they dug and they dug, and their hands got
sandy and hot and red, and their faces got damp and shiny.  The
Lamb had tried to eat the sand, and had cried so hard when he found
that it was not, as he had supposed, brown sugar, that he was now
tired out, and was lying asleep in a warm fat bunch in the middle
of the half-finished castle.  This left his brothers and sisters
free to work really hard, and the hole that was to come out in
Australia soon grew so deep that Jane, who was called Pussy for
short, begged the others to Stop.
 
'Suppose the bottom of the hole gave way suddenly,' she said, 'and
you tumbled out among the little Australians, all the sand would
get in their eyes.'
 
'Yes,' said Robert; 'and they would hate us, and throw stones at
us, and not let us see the kangaroos, or opossums, or blue-gums, or
Emu Brand birds, or anything.'
 
Cyril and Anthea knew that Australia was not quite so near as all
that, but they agreed to stop using the spades and go on with their
hands.  This was quite easy, because the sand at the bottom of the
hole was very soft and fine and dry, like sea-sand.  And there were
little shells in it.
 
'Fancy it having been wet sea here once, all sloppy and shiny,'
said Jane, 'with fishes and conger-eels and coral and mermaids.'
 
'And masts of ships and wrecked Spanish treasure.  I wish we could
find a gold doubloon, or something,' Cyril said.
 
'How did the sea get carried away?' Robert asked.
 
'Not in a pail, silly,' said his brother.  'Father says the earth
got too hot underneath, like you do in bed sometimes, so it just
hunched up its shoulders, and the sea had to slip off, like the
blankets do off us, and the shoulder was left sticking out, and
turned into dry land.  Let's go and look for shells; I think that
little cave looks likely, and I see something sticking out there
like a bit of wrecked ship's anchor, and it's beastly hot in the
Australian hole.'
 
The others agreed, but Anthea went on digging.  She always liked to
finish a thing when she had once begun it.  She felt it would be a
disgrace to leave that hole without getting through to Australia.
 
The cave was disappointing, because there were no shells, and the
wrecked ship's anchor turned out to be only the broken end of a
pickaxe handle, and the cave party were just making up their minds
that the sand makes you thirstier when it is not by the seaside,
and someone had suggested going home for lemonade, when Anthea
suddenly screamed:
 
'Cyril!  Come here!  Oh, come quick!  It's alive!  It'll get away!
Quick!'
 
They all hurried back.
 
'It's a rat, I shouldn't wonder,' said Robert.  'Father says they
infest old places - and this must be pretty old if the sea was here
thousands of years ago.'
 
'Perhaps it is a snake,' said Jane, shuddering.
 
'Let's look,' said Cyril, jumping into the hole.  'I'm not afraid
of snakes.  I like them.  If it is a snake I'll tame it, and it
will follow me everywhere, and I'll let it sleep round my neck at
night.'
 
'No, you won't,' said Robert firmly.  He shared Cyril's bedroom. 
'But you may if it's a rat.'
 
'Oh, don't be silly!' said Anthea; 'it's not a rat, it's MUCH
bigger.  And it's not a snake.  It's got feet; I saw them; and fur!
No - not the spade.  You'll hurt it!  Dig with your hands.'
 
'And let IT hurt ME instead!  That's so likely, isn't it?' said
Cyril, seizing a spade.
 
'Oh, don't!' said Anthea.  'Squirrel, DON'T.  I - it sounds silly,
but it said something.  It really and truly did.'
 
'What?'
 
'It said, "You let me alone".'
 
But Cyril merely observed that his sister must have gone off her
nut, and he and Robert dug with spades while Anthea sat on the edge
of the hole, jumping up and down with hotness and anxiety.  They
dug carefully, and presently everyone could see that there really
was something moving in the bottom of the Australian hole.
 
Then Anthea cried out, 'I'M not afraid.  Let me dig,' and fell on
her knees and began to scratch like a dog does when he has suddenly
remembered where it was that he buried his bone.
 
'Oh, I felt fur,' she cried, half laughing and half crying.  'I did
indeed!  I did!' when suddenly a dry husky voice in the sand made
them all jump back, and their hearts jumped nearly as fast as they
did.
 
'Let me alone,' it said.  And now everyone heard the voice and
looked at the others to see if they had too.
 
'But we want to see you,' said Robert bravely.
 
'I wish you'd come out,' said Anthea, also taking courage.
 
'Oh, well - if that's your wish,' the voice said, and the sand
stirred and spun and scattered, and something brown and furry and
fat came rolling out into the hole and the sand fell off it, and it
sat there yawning and rubbing the ends of its eyes with its hands.
 
'I believe I must have dropped asleep,' it said, stretching itself.
 
The children stood round the hole in a ring, looking at the
creature they had found.  It was worth looking at.  Its eyes were
on long horns like a snail's eyes, and it could move them in and
out like telescopes; it had ears like a bat's ears, and its tubby
body was shaped like a spider's and covered with thick soft fur;
its legs and arms were furry too, and it had hands and feet like a
monkey's.
 
'What on earth is it?' Jane said.  'Shall we take it home?'
 
The thing turned its long eyes to look at her, and said: 'Does she
always talk nonsense, or is it only the rubbish on her head that
makes her silly?'
 
It looked scornfully at Jane's hat as it spoke.
 
'She doesn't mean to be silly,' Anthea said gently; we none of us
do, whatever you may think!  Don't be frightened; we don't want to
hurt you, you know.'
 
'Hurt ME!' it said.  'ME frightened?  Upon my word!  Why, you talk
as if I were nobody in particular.'  All its fur stood out like a
cat's when it is going to fight.
 
'Well,' said Anthea, still kindly, 'perhaps if we knew who you are
in particular we could think of something to say that wouldn't make
you cross.  Everything we've said so far seems to have.  Who are
you?  And don't get angry!  Because really we don't know.'
 
'You don't know?' it said.  'Well, I knew the world had changed -
but - well, really - do you mean to tell me seriously you don't
know a Psammead when you see one?'
 
'A Sammyadd?  That's Greek to me.'
 
'So it is to everyone,' said the creature sharply.  'Well, in plain
English, then, a SAND-FAIRY.  Don't you know a Sand-fairy when you
see one?'
 
It looked so grieved and hurt that Jane hastened to say, 'Of course
I see you are, now.  It's quite plain now one comes to look at
you.'
 
'You came to look at me, several sentences ago,' it said crossly,
beginning to curl up again in the sand.
 
'Oh - don't go away again!  Do talk some more,' Robert cried.  'I
didn't know you were a Sand-fairy, but I knew directly I saw you
that you were much the wonderfullest thing I'd ever seen.'
 
The Sand-fairy seemed a shade less disagreeable after this.
 
'It isn't talking I mind,' it said, 'as long as you're reasonably
civil.  But I'm not going to make polite conversation for you.  If
you talk nicely to me, perhaps I'll answer you, and perhaps I
won't.  Now say something.'
 
Of course no one could think of anything to say, but at last Robert
thought of 'How long have you lived here?' and he said it at once.
 
'Oh, ages - several thousand years,' replied the Psammead.
 
'Tell us all about it.  Do.'
 
'It's all in books.'
 
'You aren't!' Jane said.  'Oh, tell us everything you can about
yourself!  We don't know anything about you, and you are so nice.'
 
The Sand-fairy smoothed his long rat-like whiskers and smiled
between them.
 
'Do please tell!' said the children all together.
 
It is wonderful how quickly you get used to things, even the most
astonishing.  Five minutes before, the children had had no more
idea than you that there was such a thing as a sand-fairy in the
world, and now they were talking to it as though they had known it
all their lives.  It drew its eyes in and said:
 
'How very sunny it is - quite like old times.  Where do you get
your Megatheriums from now?'
 
'What?' said the children all at once.  It is very difficult always
to remember that 'what' is not polite, especially in moments of
surprise or agitation.
 
'Are Pterodactyls plentiful now?' the Sand-fairy went on.
 
The children were unable to reply.
 
'What do you have for breakfast?' the Fairy said impatiently, 'and
who gives it you?'
 
'Eggs and bacon, and bread-and-milk, and porridge and things. 
Mother gives it us.  What are Mega-what's-its-names and
Ptero-what-do-you-call-thems?  And does anyone have them for
breakfast?'
 
'Why, almost everyone had Pterodactyl for breakfast in my time!
Pterodactyls were something like crocodiles and something like
birds - I believe they were very good grilled.  You see it was like
this: of course there were heaps of sand-fairies then, and in the
morning early you went out and hunted for them, and when you'd
found one it gave you your wish.  People used to send their little
boys down to the seashore early in the morning before breakfast to
get the day's wishes, and very often the eldest boy in the family
would be told to wish for a Megatherium, ready jointed for cooking. 
It was as big as an elephant, you see, so there was a good deal of
meat on it.  And if they wanted fish, the Ichthyosaurus was asked
for - he was twenty to forty feet long, so there was plenty of him. 
And for poultry there was the Plesiosaurus; there were nice
pickings on that too.  Then the other children could wish for other
things.  But when people had dinner-parties it was nearly always
Megatheriums; and Ichthyosaurus, because his fins were a great
delicacy and his tail made soup.'
 
'There must have been heaps and heaps of cold meat left over,' said
Anthea, who meant to be a good housekeeper some day.
 
'Oh no,' said the Psammead, 'that would never have done.  Why, of
course at sunset what was left over turned into stone.  You find
the stone bones of the Megatherium and things all over the place
even now, they tell me.'
 
'Who tell you?' asked Cyril; but the Sand-fairy frowned and began
to dig very fast with its furry hands.
 
'Oh, don't go!' they all cried; 'tell us more about it when it was
Megatheriums for breakfast!  Was the world like this then?'
 
It stopped digging.
 
'Not a bit,' it said; 'it was nearly all sand where I lived, and
coal grew on trees, and the periwinkles were as big as tea-trays -
you find them now; they're turned into stone.  We sand-fairies used
to live on the seashore, and the children used to come with their
little flint-spades and flint-pails and make castles for us to live
in.  That's thousands of years ago, but I hear that children still
build castles on the sand.  It's difficult to break yourself of a
habit.'
 
'But why did you stop living in the castles?' asked Robert.
 
'It's a sad story,' said the Psammead gloomily.  'It was because
they WOULD build moats to the castles, and the nasty wet bubbling
sea used to come in, and of course as soon as a sand-fairy got wet
it caught cold, and generally died.  And so there got to be fewer
and fewer, and, whenever you found a fairy and had a wish, you used
to wish for a Megatherium, and eat twice as much as you wanted,
because it might be weeks before you got another wish.'
 
'And did YOU get wet?' Robert inquired.
 
The Sand-fairy shuddered.  'Only once,' it said; 'the end of the
twelfth hair of my top left whisker - I feel the place still in
damp weather.  It was only once, but it was quite enough for me. 
I went away as soon as the sun had dried my poor dear whisker.  I
scurried away to the back of the beach, and dug myself a house deep
in warm dry sand, and there I've been ever since.  And the sea
changed its lodgings afterwards.  And now I'm not going to tell you
another thing.'
 
'Just one more, please,' said the children.  'Can you give wishes
now?'
 
'Of course,' said it; 'didn't I give you yours a few minutes ago?
You said, "I wish you'd come out," and I did.'
 
'Oh, please, mayn't we have another?'
 
'Yes, but be quick about it.  I'm tired of you.'
 
I daresay you have often thought what you would do if you had three
wishes given you, and have despised the old man and his wife in the
black-pudding story, and felt certain that if you had the chance
you could think of three really useful wishes without a moment's
hesitation.  These children had often talked this matter over, but,
now the chance had suddenly come to them, they could not make up
their minds.
 
'Quick,' said the Sand-fairy crossly.  No one could think of
anything, only Anthea did manage to remember a private wish of her
own and jane's which they had never told the boys.  She knew the
boys would not care about it - but still it was better than
nothing.
 
'I wish we were all as beautiful as the day,' she said in a great
hurry.
 
The children looked at each other, but each could see that the
others were not any better-looking than usual.  The Psammead pushed
out its long eyes, and seemed to be holding its breath and swelling
itself out till it was twice as fat and furry as before.  Suddenly
it let its breath go in a long sigh.
 
'I'm really afraid I can't manage it,' it said apologetically; 'I
must be out of practice.'
 
The children were horribly disappointed.
 
'Oh, DO try again!' they said.
 
'Well,' said the Sand-fairy, 'the fact is, I was keeping back a
little strength to give the rest of you your wishes with.  If
you'll be contented with one wish a day amongst the lot of you I
daresay I can screw myself up to it.  Do you agree to that?'
 
'Yes, oh yes!' said Jane and Anthea.  The boys nodded.  They did
not believe the Sand-fairy could do it.  You can always make girls
believe things much easier than you can boys.
 
It stretched out its eyes farther than ever, and swelled and
swelled and swelled.
 
'I do hope it won't hurt itself,' said Anthea.
 
'Or crack its skin,' Robert said anxiously.
 
Everyone was very much relieved when the Sand-fairy, after getting
so big that it almost filled up the hole in the sand, suddenly let
out its breath and went back to its proper size.
 
'That's all right,' it said, panting heavily.  'It'll come easier
to-morrow.'
 
'Did it hurt much?' asked Anthea.
 
'Only my poor whisker, thank you,' said he, 'but you're a kind and
thoughtful child.  Good day.'
 
It scratched suddenly and fiercely with its hands and feet, and
disappeared in the sand.  Then the children looked at each other,
and each child suddenly found itself alone with three perfect
strangers, all radiantly beautiful.
 
They stood for some moments in perfect silence.  Each thought that
its brothers and sisters had wandered off, and that these strange
children had stolen up unnoticed while it was watching the swelling
form of the Sand-fairy.  Anthea spoke first -
 
'Excuse me,' she said very politely to Jane, who now had enormous
blue eyes and a cloud of russet hair, 'but have you seen two little
boys and a little girl anywhere about?'
 
'I was just going to ask you that,' said Jane.  And then Cyril
cried:
 
'Why, it's YOU!  I know the hole in your pinafore!  You ARE Jane,
aren't you?  And you're the Panther; I can see your dirty
handkerchief that you forgot to change after you'd cut your thumb!
Crikey!  The wish has come off, after all.  I say, am I as handsome
as you are?'
 
'If you're Cyril, I liked you much better as you were before,' said
Anthea decidedly.  'You look like the picture of the young
chorister, with your golden hair; you'll die young, I shouldn't
wonder.  And if that's Robert, he's like an Italian organ-grinder. 
His hair's all black.'
 
'You two girls are like Christmas cards, then - that's all - silly
Christmas cards,' said Robert angrily.  'And jane's hair is simply
carrots.'
 
It was indeed of that Venetian tint so much admired by artists.
 
'Well, it's no use finding fault with each other,' said Anthea;
'let's get the Lamb and lug it home to dinner.  The servants will
admire us most awfully, you'll see.'
 
Baby was just waking when they got to him, and not one of the
children but was relieved to find that he at least was not as
beautiful as the day, but just the same as usual.
 
'I suppose he's too young to have wishes naturally,' said Jane. 
'We shall have to mention him specially next time.'
 
Anthea ran forward and held out her arms.
 
'Come to own Panther, ducky,' she said.
 
The Baby looked at her disapprovingly, and put a sandy pink thumb
in his mouth, Anthea was his favourite sister.
 
'Come then,' she said.
 
'G'way long!' said the Baby.
 
'Come to own Pussy,' said Jane.
 
'Wants my Panty,' said the Lamb dismally, and his lip trembled.
 
'Here, come on, Veteran,' said Robert, 'come and have a yidey on
Yobby's back.'
 
'Yah, narky narky boy,' howled the Baby, giving way altogether. 
Then the children knew the worst.  THE BABY DID NOT KNOW THEM!
 
They looked at each other in despair, and it was terrible to each,
in this dire emergency, to meet only the beautiful eyes of perfect
strangers, instead of the merry, friendly, commonplace, twinkling,
jolly little eyes of its own brothers and sisters.
 
'This is most truly awful,' said Cyril when he had tried to lift up
the Lamb, and the Lamb had scratched like a cat and bellowed like
a bull.  'We've got to MAKE FRIENDS with him!  I can't carry him
home screaming like that.  Fancy having to make friends with our
own baby! - it's too silly.'
 
That, however, was exactly what they had to do.  It took over an
hour, and the task was not rendered any easier by the fact that the
Lamb was by this time as hungry as a lion and as thirsty as a
desert.
 
At last he consented to allow these strangers to carry him home by
turns, but as he refused to hold on to such new acquaintances he
was a dead weight and most exhausting.
 
'Thank goodness, we're home!' said Jane, staggering through the
iron gate to where Martha, the nursemaid, stood at the front door
shading her eyes with her hand and looking out anxiously.  'Here!
Do take Baby!'
 
Martha snatched the Baby from her arms.
 
'Thanks be, HE'S safe back,' she said.  'Where are the others, and
whoever to goodness gracious are all of you?'
 
'We're US, of course,' said Robert.
 
'And who's US, when you're at home?' asked Martha scornfully.
 
'I tell you it's US, only we're beautiful as the day,' said Cyril. 
'I'm Cyril, and these are the others, and we're jolly hungry.  Let
us in, and don't be a silly idiot.'
 
Martha merely dratted Cyril's impudence and tried to shut the door
in his face.
 
'I know we LOOK different, but I'm Anthea, and we're so tired, and
it's long past dinner-time.'
 
'Then go home to your dinners, whoever you are; and if our children
put you up to this playacting you can tell them from me they'll
catch it, so they know what to expect!'  With that she did bang the
door.  Cyril rang the bell violently.  No answer.  Presently cook
put her head out of a bedroom window and said:
 
'If you don't take yourselves off, and that precious sharp, I'll go
and fetch the police.'  And she slammed down the window.
 
'It's no good,' said Anthea.  'Oh, do, do come away before we get
sent to prison!'
 
The boys said it was nonsense, and the law of England couldn't put
you in prison for just being as beautiful as the day, but all the
same they followed the others out into the lane.
 
'We shall be our proper selves after sunset, I suppose,' said Jane.
 
'I don't know,' Cyril said sadly; 'it mayn't be like that now -
things have changed a good deal since Megatherium times.'
 
'Oh,' cried Anthea suddenly, 'perhaps we shall turn into stone at
sunset, like the Megatheriums did, so that there mayn't be any of
us left over for the next day.'
 
She began to cry, so did Jane.  Even the boys turned pale.  No one
had the heart to say anything.
 
It was a horrible afternoon.  There was no house near where the
children could beg a crust of bread or even a glass of water.  They
were afraid to go to the village, because they had seen Martha go
down there with a basket, and there was a local constable.  True,
they were all as beautiful as the day, but that is a poor comfort
when you are as hungry as a hunter and as thirsty as a sponge.
 
Three times they tried in vain to get the servants in the White
House to let them in and listen to their tale.  And then Robert
went alone, hoping to be able to climb in at one of the back
windows and so open the door to the others.  But all the windows
were out of reach, and Martha emptied a toilet-jug of cold water
over him from a top window, and said:
 
'Go along with you, you nasty little Eyetalian monkey."
 
It came at last to their sitting down in a row under the hedge,
with their feet in a dry ditch, waiting for sunset, and wondering
whether, when the sun did set, they would turn into stone, or only
into their own old natural selves; and each of them still felt
lonely and among strangers, and tried not to look at the others,
for, though their voices were their own, their faces were so
radiantly beautiful as to be quite irritating to look at.
 
'I don't believe we SHALL turn to stone,' said Robert, breaking a
long miserable silence, 'because the Sand-fairy said he'd give us
another wish to-morrow, and he couldn't if we were stone, could
he?'
 
The others said 'No,' but they weren't at all comforted.
 
Another silence, longer and more miserable, was broken by Cyril's
suddenly saying, 'I don't want to frighten you girls, but I believe
it's beginning with me already.  My foot's quite dead.  I'm turning
to stone, I know I am, and so will you in a minute.'
 
'Never mind,' said Robert kindly, 'perhaps you'll be the only stone
one, and the rest of us will be all right, and we'll cherish your
statue and hang garlands on it.'
 
But when it turned out that Cyril's foot had only gone to sleep
through his sitting too long with it under him, and when it came to
life in an agony of pins and needles, the others were quite cross.
 
'Giving us such a fright for nothing!' said Anthea.
 
The third and miserablest silence of all was broken by Jane.  She
said: 'If we DO come out of this all right, we'll ask the Sammyadd
to make it so that the servants don't notice anything different, no
matter what wishes we have.'
 
The others only grunted.  They were too wretched even to make good
resolutions.
 
At last hunger and fright and crossness and tiredness - four very
nasty things - all joined together to bring one nice thing, and
that was sleep.  The children lay asleep in a row, with their
beautiful eyes shut and their beautiful mouths open.  Anthea woke
first.  The sun had set, and the twilight was coming on.
 
Anthea pinched herself very hard, to make sure, and when she found
she could still feel pinching she decided that she was not stone,
and then she pinched the others.  They, also, were soft.
 
'Wake up,' she said, almost in tears of joy; 'it's all right, we're
not stone.  And oh, Cyril, how nice and ugly you do look, with your
old freckles and your brown hair and your little eyes.  And so do
you all!' she added, so that they might not feel jealous.
 
When they got home they were very much scolded by Martha, who told
them about the strange children.
 
'A good-looking lot, I must say, but that impudent.'
 
'I know,' said Robert, who knew by experience how hopeless it would
be to try to explain things to Martha.
 
'And where on earth have you been all this time, you naughty little
things, you?'
 
'In the lane.'
 
'Why didn't you come home hours ago?'
 
'We couldn't because of THEM,' said Anthea.
 
'Who?'
 
'The children who were as beautiful as the day.  They kept us there
till after sunset.  We couldn't come back till they'd gone.  You
don't know how we hated them!  Oh, do, do give us some supper - we
are so hungry.'
 
'Hungry!  I should think so,' said Martha angrily; 'out all day
like this.  Well, I hope it'll be a lesson to you not to go picking
up with strange children - down here after measles, as likely as
not!  Now mind, if you see them again, don't you speak to them -
not one word nor so much as a look - but come straight away and
tell me.  I'll spoil their beauty for them!'
 
'If ever we DO see them again we'll tell you,' Anthea said; and
Robert, fixing his eyes fondly on the cold beef that was being
brought in on a tray by cook, added in heartfelt undertones -
 
'And we'll take jolly good care we never DO see them again.'
 
And they never have.
 
 
 
CHAPTER 2
GOLDEN GUINEAS
 
 
Anthea woke in the morning from a very real sort of dream, in which
she was walking in the Zoological Gardens on a pouring wet day
without any umbrella.  The animals seemed desperately unhappy
because of the rain, and were all growling gloomily.  When she
awoke, both the growling and the rain went on just the same.  The
growling was the heavy regular breathing of her sister Jane, who
had a slight cold and was still asleep.  The rain fell in slow
drops on to Anthea's face from the wet corner of a bath-towel which
her brother Robert was gently squeezing the water out of, to wake
her up, as he now explained.
 
'Oh, drop it!' she said rather crossly; so he did, for he was not
a brutal brother, though very ingenious in apple-pie beds,
booby-traps, original methods of awakening sleeping relatives, and
the other little accomplishments which make home happy.
 
'I had such a funny dream,' Anthea began.
 
'So did I,' said Jane, wakening suddenly and without warning.  'I
dreamed we found a Sand-fairy in the gravel-pits, and it said it
was a Sammyadd, and we might have a new wish every day, and -'
 
'But that's what I dreamed,' said Robert.  'I was just going to
tell you - and we had the first wish directly it said so.  And I
dreamed you girls were donkeys enough to ask for us all to be
beautiful as the day, and we jolly well were, and it was perfectly
beastly.'
 
'But CAN different people all dream the same thing?' said Anthea,
sitting up in bed, 'because I dreamed all that as well as about the
Zoo and the rain; and Baby didn't know us in my dream, and the
servants shut us out of the house because the radiantness of our
beauty was such a complete disguise, and -'
 
The voice of the eldest brother sounded from across the landing.
 
'Come on, Robert,' it said, 'you'll be late for breakfast again -
unless you mean to shirk your bath like you did on Tuesday.'
 
'I say, come here a sec,' Robert replied.  'I didn't shirk it; I
had it after brekker in father's dressing-room, because ours was
emptied away.'
 
Cyril appeared in the doorway, partially clothed.
 
'Look here,' said Anthea, 'we've all had such an odd dream.  We've
all dreamed we found a Sand-fairy.'
 
Her voice died away before Cyril's contemptuous glance.  'Dream?'
he said, 'you little sillies, it's TRUE.  I tell you it all
happened.  That's why I'm so keen on being down early.  We'll go up
there directly after brekker, and have another wish.  Only we'll
make up our minds, solid, before we go, what it is we do want, and
no one must ask for anything unless the others agree first.  No
more peerless beauties for this child, thank you.  Not if I know
it!'
 
The other three dressed, with their mouths open.  If all that dream
about the Sand-fairy was real, this real dressing seemed very like
a dream, the girls thought.  Jane felt that Cyril was right, but
Anthea was not sure, till after they had seen Martha and heard her
full and plain reminders about their naughty conduct the day
before.  Then Anthea was sure.  'Because,' said she, 'servants
never dream anything but the things in the Dream-book, like snakes
and oysters and going to a wedding - that means a funeral, and
snakes are a false female friend, and oysters are babies.'
 
'Talking of babies,' said Cyril, 'where's the Lamb?'
'Martha's going to take him to Rochester to see her cousins. 
Mother said she might.  She's dressing him now,' said Jane, 'in his
very best coat and hat.  Bread-and-butter, please.'
 
'She seems to like taking him too,' said Robert in a tone of
wonder.
 
'Servants do like taking babies to see their relations,' Cyril
said.  'I've noticed it before - especially in their best things.'
 
'I expect they pretend they're their own babies, and that they're
not servants at all, but married to noble dukes of high degree, and
they say the babies are the little dukes and duchesses,' Jane
suggested dreamily, taking more marmalade.  'I expect that's what
Martha'll say to her cousin.  She'll enjoy herself most
frightfully-'
 
'She won't enjoy herself most frightfully carrying our infant duke
to Rochester,' said Robert, 'not if she's anything like me - she
won't.'
 
'Fancy walking to Rochester with the Lamb on your back!  Oh,
crikey!' said Cyril in full agreement.
 
'She's going by carrier,' said Jane.  'Let's see them off, then we
shall have done a polite and kindly act, and we shall be quite sure
we've got rid of them for the day.'
 
So they did.
 
Martha wore her Sunday dress of two shades of purple, so tight in
the chest that it made her stoop, and her blue hat with the pink
cornflowers and white ribbon.  She had a yellow-lace collar with a
green bow.  And the Lamb had indeed his very best cream-coloured
silk coat and hat.  It was a smart party that the carrier's cart
picked up at the Cross Roads.  When its white tilt and red wheels
had slowly vanished in a swirl of chalk-dust -
 
'And now for the Sammyadd!' said Cyril, and off they went.
 
As they went they decided on the wish they would ask for.  Although
they were all in a great hurry they did not try to climb down the
sides of the gravel-pit, but went round by the safe lower road, as
if they had been carts.  They had made a ring of stones round the
place where the Sand-fairy had disappeared, so they easily found
the spot.  The sun was burning and bright, and the sky was deep
blue - without a cloud.  The sand was very hot to touch.
 
'Oh - suppose it was only a dream, after all,' Robert said as the
boys uncovered their spades from the sand-heap where they had
buried them and began to dig.
 
'Suppose you were a sensible chap,' said Cyril; 'one's quite as
likely as the other!'
'Suppose you kept a civil tongue in your head,' Robert snapped.
 
'Suppose we girls take a turn,' said Jane, laughing.  'You boys
seem to be getting very warm.'
 
'Suppose you don't come shoving your silly oar in,' said Robert,
who was now warm indeed.
 
'We won't,' said Anthea quickly.  'Robert dear, don't be so grumpy
- we won't say a word, you shall be the one to speak to the Fairy
and tell him what we've decided to wish for.  You'll say it much
better than we shall.'
 
'Suppose you drop being a little humbug,' said Robert, but not
crossly.  'Look out - dig with your hands, now!'
 
So they did, and presently uncovered the spider-shaped brown hairy
body, long arms and legs, bat's ears and snail's eyes of the
Sand-fairy himself.  Everyone drew a deep breath of satisfaction,
for now of course it couldn't have been a dream.
 
The Psammead sat up and shook the sand out of its fur.
 
'How's your left whisker this morning?' said Anthea politely.
 
'Nothing to boast of,' said it, 'it had rather a restless night. 
But thank you for asking.'
 
'I say,' said Robert, 'do you feel up to giving wishes to-day,
because we very much want an extra besides the regular one?  The
extra's a very little one,' he added reassuringly.
 
'Humph!' said the Sand-fairy.  (If you read this story aloud,
please pronounce 'humph' exactly as it is spelt, for that is how he
said it.) 'Humph!  Do you know, until I heard you being
disagreeable to each other just over my head, and so loud too, I
really quite thought I had dreamed you all.  I do have very odd
dreams sometimes.'
 
'Do you?'Jane hurried to say, so as to get away from the subject of
disagreeableness.  'I wish,' she added politely, 'you'd tell us
about your dreams - they must be awfully interesting.'
 
'Is that the day's wish?' said the Sand-fairy, yawning.
 
Cyril muttered something about 'just like a girl,' and the rest
stood silent.  If they said 'Yes,' then good-bye to the other
wishes they had decided to ask for.  If they said 'No,' it would be
very rude, and they had all been taught manners, and had learned a
little too, which is not at all the same thing.  A sigh of relief
broke from all lips when the Sand-fairy said:
 
'If I do I shan't have strength to give you a second wish; not even
good tempers, or common sense, or manners, or little things like
that.'
 
'We don't want you to put yourself out at all about these things,
we can manage them quite well ourselves,' said Cyril eagerly; while
the others looked guiltily at each other, and wished the Fairy
would not keep all on about good tempers, but give them one good
rowing if it wanted to, and then have done with it.
 
'Well,' said the Psammead, putting out his long snail's eyes so
suddenly that one of them nearly went into the round boy's eyes of
Robert, 'let's have the little wish first.'
 
'We don't want the servants to notice the gifts you give us.'
 
'Are kind enough to give us,' said Anthea in a whisper.
 
'Are kind enough to give us, I mean,' said Robert.
 
The Fairy swelled himself out a bit, let his breath go, and said -
 
'I've done THAT for you - it was quite easy.  People don't notice
things much, anyway.  What's the next wish?'
 
'We want,' said Robert slowly, 'to be rich beyond the dreams of
something or other.'
 
'Avarice,' said Jane.
 
'So it is,' said the Fairy unexpectedly.  'But it won't do you much
good, that's one comfort,' it muttered to itself.  'Come - I can't
go beyond dreams, you know!  How much do you want, and will you
have it in gold or notes?'
 
'Gold, please - and millions of it.'
 
'This gravel-pit full be enough?' said the Fairy in an off-hand
manner.
 
'Oh YES!'
 
'Then get out before I begin, or you'll be buried alive in it.'
 
It made its skinny arms so long, and waved them so frighteningly,
that the children ran as hard as they could towards the road by
which carts used to come to the gravel-pits.  Only Anthea had
presence of mind enough to shout a timid 'Good-morning, I hope your
whisker will be better to-morrow,' as she ran.
 
 
On the road they turned and looked back, and they had to shut their
eyes, and open them very slowly, a little bit at a time, because
the sight was too dazzling for their eyes to be able to bear it. 
It was something like trying to look at the sun at high noon on
Midsummer Day.  For the whole of the sand-pit was full, right up to
the very top, with new shining gold pieces, and all the little
sand-martins' little front doors were covered out of sight.  Where
the road for the carts wound into the gravel-pit the gold lay in
heaps like stones lie by the roadside, and a great bank of shining
gold shelved down from where it lay flat and smooth between the
tall sides of the gravel-pit.  And all the gleaming heap was minted
gold.  And on the sides and edges of these countless coins the
midday sun shone and sparkled, and glowed and gleamed till the
quarry looked like the mouth of a smelting furnace, or one of the
fairy halls that you see sometimes in the sky at sunset.
 
The children stood with their mouths open, and no one said a word.
 
At last Robert stopped and picked up one of the loose coins from
the edge of the heap by the cart-road, and looked at it.  He looked
on both sides.  Then he said in a low voice, quite different to his
own, 'It's not sovereigns.'
 
'It's gold, anyway,' said Cyril.  And now they all began to talk at
once.  They all picked up the golden treasure by handfuls, and let
it run through their fingers like water, and the chink it made as
it fell was wonderful music.  At first they quite forgot to think
of spending the money, it was so nice to play with.  Jane sat down
between two heaps of gold and Robert began to bury her, as you bury
your father in sand when you are at the seaside and he has gone to
sleep on the beach with his newspaper over his face.  But Jane was
not half buried before she cried out, 'Oh, stop, it's too heavy! 
It hurts!
 
Robert said 'Bosh!' and went on.
 
'Let me out, I tell you,' cried Jane, and was taken out, very
white, and trembling a little.
 
'You've no idea what it's like,' said she; 'it's like stones on you
- or like chains.'
 
'Look here,' Cyril said, 'if this is to do us any good, it's no
good our staying gasping at it like this.  Let's fill our pockets
and go and buy things.  Don't you forget, it won't last after
sunset.  I wish we'd asked the Sammyadd why things don't turn to
stone.  Perhaps this will.  I'll tell you what, there's a pony and
cart in the village.'
 
'Do you want to buy that?' asked Jane.
 
'No, silly - we'll HIRE it.  And then we'll go to Rochester and buy
heaps and heaps of things.  Look here, let's each take as much as
we can carry.  But it's not sovereigns.  They've got a man's head
on one side and a thing like the ace of spades on the other.  Fill
your pockets with it, I tell you, and come along.  You can jaw as
we go - if you must jaw.'
 
Cyril sat down and began to fill his pockets.
'You made fun of me for getting father to have nine pockets in my
Norfolks,' said he, 'but now you see!'
 
They did.  For when Cyril had filled his nine pockets and his
handkerchief and the space between himself and his shirt front with
the gold coins, he had to stand up.  But he staggered, and had to
sit down again in a hurry-
 
'Throw out some of the cargo,' said Robert.  'You'll sink the ship,
old chap.  That comes of nine pockets.'
 
And Cyril had to.
 
Then they set off to walk to the village.  It was more than a mile,
and the road was very dusty indeed, and the sun seemed to get
hotter and hotter, and the gold in their pockets got heavier and
heavier.
 
It was Jane who said, 'I don't see how we're to spend it all. 
There must be thousands of pounds among the lot of us.  I'm going
to leave some of mine behind this stump in the hedge.  And directly
we get to the village we'll buy some biscuits; I know it's long
past dinner-time.'  She took out a handful or two of gold and hid
it in the hollows of an old hornbeam.  'How round and yellow they
are,' she said.  'Don't you wish they were gingerbread nuts and we
were going to eat them?'
 
'Well, they're not, and we're not,' said Cyril.  'Come on!'
 
But they came on heavily and wearily.  Before they reached the
village, more than one stump in the hedge concealed its little
hoard of hidden treasure.  Yet they reached the village with about
twelve hundred guineas in their pockets.  But in spite of this
inside wealth they looked quite ordinary outside, and no one would
have thought they could have more than a half-crown each at the
outside.  The haze of heat, the blue of the wood smoke, made a sort
of dim misty cloud over the red roofs of the village.  The four sat
down heavily on the first bench they came to- It happened to be
outside the Blue Boar Inn.
 
It was decided that Cyril should go into the Blue Boar and ask for
ginger-beer, because, as Anthea said, 'It is not wrong for men to
go into public houses, only for children.  And Cyril is nearer to
being a man than us, because he is the eldest.'  So he went.  The
others sat in the sun and waited.
 
'Oh, hats, how hot it is!' said Robert.  'Dogs put their tongues
out when they're hot; I wonder if it would cool us at all to put
out ours?'
 
'We might try,'Jane said; and they all put their tongues out as far
as ever they could go, so that it quite stretched their throats,
but it only seemed to make them thirstier than ever, besides
annoying everyone who went by.  So they took their tongues in
again, just as Cyril came back with the ginger-beer.
 
'I had to pay for it out of my own two-and-sevenpence, though, that
I was going to buy rabbits with,' he said.  'They wouldn't change
the gold.  And when I pulled out a handful the man just laughed and
said it was card-counters.  And I got some sponge-cakes too, out of
a glass jar on the bar-counter.  And some biscuits with caraways
in.'
 
The sponge-cakes were both soft and dry and the biscuits were dry
too, and yet soft, which biscuits ought not to be.  But the
ginger-beer made up for everything.
 
'It's my turn now to try to buy something with the money,' Anthea
said, 'I'm next eldest.  Where is the pony-cart kept?'
 
It was at The Chequers, and Anthea went in the back way to the
yard, because they all knew that little girls ought not to go into
the bars of public-houses.  She came out, as she herself said,
'pleased but not proud'.
 
'He'll be ready in a brace of shakes, he says,' she remarked, 'and
he's to have one sovereign - or whatever it is - to drive us in to
Rochester and back, besides waiting there till we've got everything
we want.  I think I managed very well.'
 
'You think yourself jolly clever, I daresay,' said Cyril moodily. 
'How did you do it?'
 
'I wasn't jolly clever enough to go taking handfuls of money out of
my pocket, to make it seem cheap, anyway,' she retorted.  'I just
found a young man doing something to a horse's leg with a sponge
and a pail.  And I held out one sovereign, and I said, "Do you know
what this is?" He said, "No," and he'd call his father.  And the
old man came, and he said it was a spade guinea; and he said was it
my own to do as I liked with, and I said "Yes"; and I asked about
the pony-cart, and I said he could have the guinea if he'd drive us
in to Rochester.  And his name is S.  Crispin.  And he said, "Right
oh".'
 
It was a new sensation to be driven in a smart pony-trap along
pretty country roads, it was very pleasant too (which is not always
the case with new sensations), quite apart from the beautiful plans
of spending the money which each child made as they went along,
silently of course and quite to itself, for they felt it would
never have done to let the old innkeeper hear them talk in the
affluent sort of way they were thinking.  The old man put them down
by the bridge at their request.
 
'If you were going to buy a carriage and horses, where would you
go?' asked Cyril, as if he were only asking for the sake of
something to say.
 
'Billy Peasemarsh, at the Saracen's Head,' said the old man
promptly.  'Though all forbid I should recommend any man where it's
a question of horses, no more than I'd take anybody else's
recommending if I was a-buying one.  But if your pa's thinking of
a turnout of any sort, there ain't a straighter man in Rochester,
nor a civiller spoken, than Billy, though I says it.'
 
'Thank you,' said Cyril.  'The Saracen's Head.'
 
And now the children began to see one of the laws of nature turn
upside down and stand on its head like an acrobat.  Any grown-up
persons would tell you that money is hard to get and easy to spend. 
But the fairy money had been easy to get, and spending it was not
only hard, it was almost impossible.  The tradespeople of Rochester
seemed to shrink, to a trades-person, from the glittering fairy
gold ('furrin money' they called it, for the most part).  To begin
with, Anthea, who had had the misfortune to sit on her hat earlier
in the day, wished to buy another.  She chose a very beautiful one,
trimmed with pink roses and the blue breasts of peacocks.  It was
marked in the window, 'Paris Model, three guineas'.
 
'I'm glad,' she said, 'because, if it says guineas, it means
guineas, and not sovereigns, which we haven't got.'
 
But when she took three of the spade guineas in her hand, which was
by this time rather dirty owing to her not having put on gloves
before going to the gravel-pit, the black-silk young lady in the
shop looked very hard at her, and went and whispered something to
an older and uglier lady, also in black silk, and then they gave
her back the money and said it was not current coin.
 
'It's good money,' said Anthea, 'and it's my own.'
 
'I daresay,' said the lady, 'but it's not the kind of money that's
fashionable now, and we don't care about taking it.'
 
'I believe they think we've stolen it,' said Anthea, rejoining the
others in the street; 'if we had gloves they wouldn't think we were
so dishonest.  It's my hands being so dirty fills their minds with
doubts.'
 
So they chose a humble shop, and the girls bought cotton gloves,
the kind at sixpence three-farthings, but when they offered a
guinea the woman looked at it through her spectacles and said she
had no change; so the gloves had to be paid for out of Cyril's
two-and-sevenpence that he meant to buy rabbits with, and so had
the green imitation crocodile-skin purse at ninepence-halfpenny
which had been bought at the same time.  They tried several more
shops, the kinds where you buy toys and scent, and silk
handkerchiefs and books, and fancy boxes of stationery, and
photographs of objects of interest in the vicinity.  But nobody
cared to change a guinea that day in Rochester, and as they went
from shop to shop they got dirtier and dirtier, and their hair got
more and more untidy, and Jane slipped and fell down on a part of
the road where a water-cart had just gone by.  Also they got very
hungry, but they found no one would give them anything to eat for
their guineas.  After trying two pastrycooks in vain, they became
so hungry, perhaps from the smell of the cake in the shops, as
Cyril suggested, that they formed a plan of campaign in whispers
and carried it out in desperation.  They marched into a third
pastrycook's - Beale his name was - and before the people behind
the counter could interfere each child had seized three new penny
buns, clapped the three together between its dirty hands, and taken
a big bite out of the triple sandwich.  Then they stood at bay,
with the twelve buns in their hands and their mouths very full
indeed.  The shocked pastrycook bounded round the corner.
 
'Here,' said Cyril, speaking as distinctly as he could, and holding
out the guinea he got ready before entering the shop, 'pay yourself
out of that.'
 
Mr Beale snatched the coin, bit it, and put it in his pocket.
 
'Off you go,' he said, brief and stern like the man in the song.
 
'But the change?' said Anthea, who had a saving mind.
 
'Change!' said the man.  'I'll change you!  Hout you goes; and you
may think yourselves lucky I don't send for the police to find out
where you got it!'
 
In the Castle Gardens the millionaires finished the buns, and
though the curranty softness of these were delicious, and acted
like a charm in raising the spirits of the party, yet even the
stoutest heart quailed at the thought of venturing to sound Mr
Billy Peasemarsh at the Saracen's Head on the subject of a horse
and carriage.  The boys would have given up the idea, but Jane was
always a hopeful child, and Anthea generally an obstinate one, and
their earnestness prevailed.
 
The whole party, by this time indescribably dirty, therefore betook
itself to the Saracen's Head.  The yard-method of attack having
been successful at The Chequers was tried again here.  Mr
Peasemarsh was in the yard, and Robert opened the business in these
terms -
 
'They tell me you have a lot of horses and carriages to sell.'  It
had been agreed that Robert should be spokesman, because in books
it is always the gentlemen who buy horses, and not ladies, and
Cyril had had his go at the Blue Boar.
 
'They tell you true, young man,' said Mr Peasemarsh.  He was a long
lean man, with very blue eyes and a tight mouth and narrow lips.
 
'We should like to buy some, please,' said Robert politely.
 
'I daresay you would.'
 
'Will you show us a few, please?  To choose from.'
'Who are you a-kiddin of?' inquired Mr Billy Peasemarsh.  'Was you
sent here of a message?'
 
'I tell you,' said Robert, 'we want to buy some horses and
carriages, and a man told us you were straight and civil spoken,
but I shouldn't wonder if he was mistaken.'
 
'Upon my sacred!' said Mr Peasemarsh.  'Shall I trot the whole
stable out for your Honour's worship to see?  Or shall I send round
to the Bishop's to see if he's a nag or two to dispose of?'
 
'Please do,' said Robert, 'if it's not too much trouble.  It would
be very kind of you.'
 
Mr Peasemarsh put his hands in his pockets and laughed, and they
did not like the way he did it.  Then he shouted 'Willum!'
 
A stooping ostler appeared in a stable door.
 
'Here, Willum, come and look at this 'ere young dook!  Wants to buy
the whole stud, lock, stock, and bar'l.  And ain't got tuppence in
his pocket to bless hisself with, I'll go bail!'
 
Willum's eyes followed his master's pointing thumb with
contemptuous interest.
 
'Do 'e, for sure?' he said.
 
But Robert spoke, though both the girls were now pulling at his
jacket and begging him to 'come along'.  He spoke, and he was very
angry; he said:
 
'I'm not a young duke, and I never pretended to be.  And as for
tuppence - what do you call this?'  And before the others could
stop him he had pulled out two fat handfuls of shining guineas, and
held them out for Mr Peasemarsh to look at.  He did look.  He
snatched one up in his finger and thumb.  He bit it, and Jane
expected him to say, 'The best horse in my stables is at your
service.'  But the others knew better.  Still it was a blow, even
to the most desponding, when he said shortly:
 
'Willum, shut the yard doors,' and Willum grinned and went to shut
them.
 
'Good-afternoon,' said Robert hastily; 'we shan't buy any of your
horses now, whatever you say, and I hope it'll be a lesson to you.' 
He had seen a little side gate open, and was moving towards it as
he spoke.  But Billy Peasemarsh put himself in the way.
 
'Not so fast, you young off-scouring!' he said.  'Willum, fetch the
pleece.'
 
Willum went.  The children stood huddled together like frightened
sheep, and Mr Peasemarsh spoke to them till the pleece arrived.  He
said many things.  Among other things he said:
 
'Nice lot you are, aren't you, coming tempting honest men with your
guineas!'
 
'They ARE our guineas,' said Cyril boldly.
 
'Oh, of course we don't know all about that, no more we don't - oh
no - course not!  And dragging little gells into it, too.  'Ere -
I'll let the gells go if you'll come along to the pleece quiet.'
 
'We won't be let go,' said Jane heroically; 'not without the boys. 
It's our money just as much as theirs, you wicked old man.'
 
'Where'd you get it, then?' said the man, softening slightly, which
was not at all what the boys expected when Jane began to call
names.
 
Jane cast a silent glance of agony at the others.
 
'Lost your tongue, eh?  Got it fast enough when it's for calling
names with.  Come, speak up!  Where'd you get it?'
 
'Out of the gravel-pit,' said truthful Jane.
 
'Next article,' said the man.
 
'I tell you we did,' Jane said.  'There's a fairy there - all over
brown fur - with ears like a bat's and eyes like a snail's, and he
gives you a wish a day, and they all come true.'
 
'Touched in the head, eh?' said the man in a low voice, 'all the
more shame to you boys dragging the poor afflicted child into your
sinful burglaries.'
 
'She's not mad; it's true,' said Anthea; 'there is a fairy.  If I
ever see him again I'll wish for something for you; at least I
would if vengeance wasn't wicked - so there!'
 
'Lor' lumme,' said Billy Peasemarsh, 'if there ain't another on
'em!'
 
And now Willum came -back with a spiteful grin on his face, and at
his back a policeman, with whom Mr Peasemarsh spoke long in a
hoarse earnest whisper.
 
'I daresay you're right,' said the policeman at last.  'Anyway,
I'll take 'em up on a charge of unlawful possession, pending
inquiries.  And the magistrate will deal with the case.  Send the
afflicted ones to a home, as likely as not, and the boys to a
reformatory.  Now then, come along, youngsters!  No use making a
fuss.  You bring the gells along, Mr Peasemarsh, sir, and I'll
shepherd the boys.'
 
Speechless with rage and horror, the four children were driven
along the streets of Rochester.  Tears of anger and shame blinded
them, so that when Robert ran right into a passer-by he did not
recognize her till a well--known voice said, 'Well, if ever I did!
Oh, Master Robert, whatever have you been a doing of now?'  And
another voice, quite as well known, said, 'Panty; want go own
Panty!'
 
They had run into Martha and the baby!
 
Martha behaved admirably.  She refused to believe a word of the
policeman's story, or of Mr Peasemarsh's either, even when they
made Robert turn out his pockets in an archway and show the
guineas.
 
'I don't see nothing,' she said.  'You've gone out of your senses,
you two!  There ain't any gold there - only the poor child's hands,
all over crock and dirt, and like the very chimbley.  Oh, that I
should ever see the day!'
 
And the children thought this very noble of Martha, even if rather
wicked, till they remembered how the Fairy had promised that the
servants should never notice any of the fairy gifts.  So of course
Martha couldn't see the gold, and so was only speaking the truth,
and that was quite right, of course, but not extra noble.
 
It was getting dusk when they reached the police-station.  The
policeman told his tale to an inspector, who sat in a large bare
room with a thing like a clumsy nursery-fender at one end to put
prisoners in.  Robert wondered whether it was a cell or a dock.
 
'Produce the coins, officer,' said the inspector.
 
'Turn out your pockets,' said the constable.
 
Cyril desperately plunged his hands in his pockets, stood still a
moment, and then began to laugh - an odd sort of laugh that hurt,
and that felt much more like crying.  His pockets were empty.  So
were the pockets of the others.  For of course at sunset all the
fairy gold had vanished away.
 
'Turn out your pockets, and stop that noise,' said the inspector.
 
Cyril turned out his pockets, every one of the nine which enriched
his Norfolk suit.  And every pocket was empty.
 
'Well!' said the inspector.
 
'I don't know how they done it - artful little beggars!  They
walked in front of me the 'ole way, so as for me to keep my eye on
them and not to attract a crowd and obstruct the traffic.'
 
'It's very remarkable,' said the inspector, frowning.
 
'If you've quite done a-browbeating of the innocent children,' said
Martha, 'I'll hire a private carriage and we'll drive home to their
papa's mansion.  You'll hear about this again, young man! - I told
you they hadn't got any gold, when you were pretending to see it in
their poor helpless hands.  It's early in the day for a constable
on duty not to be able to trust his own eyes.  As to the other one,
the less said the better; he keeps the Saracen's Head, and he knows
best what his liquor's like.'
 
'Take them away, for goodness' sake,' said the inspector crossly. 
But as they left the police-station he said, 'Now then!' to the
policeman and Mr Pease- marsh, and he said it twenty times as
crossly as he had spoken to Martha.
 
 
Martha was as good as her word.  She took them home in a very grand
carriage, because the carrier's cart was gone, and, though she had
stood by them so nobly with the police, she was so angry with them
as soon as they were alone for 'trapseing into Rochester by
themselves', that none of them dared to mention the old man with
the pony-cart from the village who was waiting for them in
Rochester.  And so, after one day of boundless wealth, the children
found themselves sent to bed in deep disgrace, and only enriched by
two pairs of cotton gloves, dirty inside because of the state of
the hands they had been put on to cover, an imitation
crocodile-skin purse, and twelve penny buns long since digested.
 
The thing that troubled them most was the fear that the old
gentleman's guinea might have disappeared at sunset with all the
rest, so they went down to the village next day to apologize for
not meeting him in Rochester, and to see.  They found him very
friendly.  The guinea had NOT disappeared, and he had bored a hole
in it and hung it on his watch-chain.  As for the guinea the baker
took, the children felt they could not care whether it had vanished
or not, which was not perhaps very honest, but on the other hand
was not wholly unnatural.  But afterwards this preyed on Anthea's
mind, and at last she secretly sent twelve stamps by post to 'Mr
Beale, Baker, Rochester'.  Inside she wrote, 'To pay for the buns.' 
I hope the guinea did disappear, for that pastrycook was really not
at all a nice man, and, besides, penny buns are seven for sixpence
in all really respectable shops.
 
 
 
CHAPTER 3
BEING WANTED
 
 
The morning after the children had been the possessors of boundless
wealth, and had been unable to buy anything really useful or
enjoyable with it, except two pairs of cotton gloves, twelve penny
buns, an imitation crocodile-skin purse, and a ride in a pony-cart,
they awoke without any of the enthusiastic happiness which they had
felt on the previous day when they remembered how they had had the
luck to find a Psammead, or Sand-fairy; and to receive its promise
to grant them a new wish every day.  For now they had had two
wishes, Beauty and Wealth, and neither had exactly made them happy. 
But the happening of strange things, even if they are not
completely pleasant things, is more amusing than those times when
nothing happens but meals, and they are not always completely
pleasant, especially on the days when it is cold mutton or hash.
 
There was no chance of talking things over before breakfast,
because everyone overslept itself, as it happened, and it needed a
vigorous and determined struggle to get dressed so as to be only
ten minutes late for breakfast.  During this meal some efforts were
made to deal with the question of the Psammead in an impartial
spirit, but it is very difficult to discuss anything thoroughly and
at the same time to attend faithfully to your baby brother's
breakfast needs.  The Baby was particularly lively that morning. 
He not only wriggled his body through the bar of his high chair,
and hung by his head, choking and purple, but he collared a
tablespoon with desperate suddenness, hit Cyril heavily on the head
with it, and then cried because it was taken away from him.  He put
his fat fist in his bread-and-milk, and demanded 'nam', which was
only allowed for tea.  He sang, he put his feet on the table - he
clamoured to 'go walky'.  The conversation was something like this:
 
 
'Look here - about that Sand-fairy - Look out! - he'll have the
milk over.'
 
Milk removed to a safe distance.
 
'Yes - about that Fairy - No, Lamb dear, give Panther the narky
poon.'
 
Then Cyril tried.  'Nothing we've had yet has turned out - He
nearly had the mustard that time!'
 
'I wonder whether we'd better wish - Hullo! you've done it now, my
boy!'  And, in a flash of glass and pink baby-paws, the bowl of
golden carp in the middle of the table rolled on its side, and
poured a flood of mixed water and goldfish into the Baby's lap and
into the laps of the others.
 
Everyone was almost as much upset as the goldfish: the Lamb only
remaining calm.  When the pool on the floor had been mopped up, and
the leaping, gasping goldfish had been collected and put back in
the water, the Baby was taken away to be entirely redressed by
Martha, and most of the others had to change completely.  The
pinafores and jackets that had been bathed in goldfish-and-water
were hung out to dry, and then it turned out that Jane must either
mend the dress she had torn the day before or appear all day in her
best petticoat.  It was white and soft and frilly, and trimmed with
lace, and very, very pretty, quite as pretty as a frock, if not
more so.  Only it was NOT a frock, and Martha's word was law.  She
wouldn't let Jane wear her best frock, and she refused to listen
for a moment to Robert's suggestion that Jane should wear her best
petticoat and call it a dress.
 
'It's not respectable,' she said.  And when people say that, it's
no use anyone's saying anything.  You will find this out for
yourselves some day.
 
So there was nothing for it but for Jane to mend her frock.  The
hole had been torn the day before when she happened to tumble down
in the High Street of Rochester, just where a water-cart had passed
on its silvery way.  She had grazed her knee, and her stocking was
much more than grazed, and her dress was cut by the same stone
which had attended to the knee and the stocking.  Of course the
others were not such sneaks as to abandon a comrade in misfortune,
so they all sat on the grass-plot round the sundial, and Jane
darned away for dear life.  The Lamb was still in the hands of
Martha having its clothes changed, so conversation was possible.
 
Anthea and Robert timidly tried to conceal their inmost thought,
which was that the Psammead was not to be trusted; but Cyril said:
 
'Speak out - say what you've got to say - I hate hinting, and
"don't know", and sneakish ways like that.'
 
So then Robert said, as in honour bound: 'Sneak yourself - Anthea
and me weren't so goldfishy as you two were, so we got changed
quicker, and we've had time to think it over, and if you ask me -'
 
'I didn't ask you,' said Jane, biting off a needleful of thread as
she had always been strictly forbidden to do.
 
'I don't care who asks or who doesn't,' said Robert, but Anthea and
I think the Sammyadd is a spiteful brute.  If it can give us our
wishes I suppose it can give itself its own, and I feel almost sure
it wishes every time that our wishes shan't do us any good.  Let's
let the tiresome beast alone, and just go and have a jolly good
game of forts, on our own, in the chalk-pit.'
 
(You will remember that the happily situated house where these
children were spending their holidays lay between a chalk-quarry
and a gravel-pit.)
 
Cyril and Jane were more hopeful - they generally were.
 
'I don't think the Sammyadd does it on purpose,' Cyril said; 'and,
after all, it WAS silly to wish for boundless wealth.  Fifty pounds
in two-shilling pieces would have been much more sensible.  And
wishing to be beautiful as the day was simply donkeyish.  I don't
want to be disagreeable, but it was.  We must try to find a really
useful wish, and wish it.'
 
Jane dropped her work and said:
 
'I think so too, it's too silly to have a chance like this and not
use it.  I never heard of anyone else outside a book who had such
a chance; there must be simply heaps of things we could wish for
that wouldn't turn out Dead Sea fish, like these two things have. 
Do let's think hard, and wish something nice, so that we can have
a real jolly day - what there is left of it.'
 
Jane darned away again like mad, for time was indeed getting on,
and everyone began to talk at once.  If you had been there you
could not possibly have made head or tail of the talk, but these
children were used to talking 'by fours', as soldiers march, and
each of them could say what it had to say quite comfortably, and
listen to the agreeable sound of its own voice, and at the same
time have three-quarters of two sharp ears to spare for listening
to what the others said.  That is an easy example in multiplication
of vulgar fractions, but, as I daresay you can't do even that, I
won't ask you to tell me whether 3/4 X 2 = 1 1/2, but I will ask
you to believe me that this was the amount of ear each child was
able to lend to the others.  Lending ears was common in Roman
times, as we learn from Shakespeare; but I fear I am getting too
instructive.
 
When the frock was darned, the start for the gravel-pit was delayed
by Martha's insisting on everybody's washing its hands - which was
nonsense, because nobody had been doing anything at all, except
Jane, and how can you get dirty doing nothing?  That is a difficult
question, and I cannot answer it on paper.  In real life I could
very soon show you - or you me, which is much more likely.
 
During the conversation in which the six ears were lent (there were
four children, so THAT sum comes right), it had been decided that
fifty pounds in two-shilling pieces was the right wish to have. 
And the lucky children, who could have anything in the wide world
by just wishing for it, hurriedly started for the gravel-pit to
express their wishes to the Psammead.  Martha caught them at the
gate, and insisted on their taking the Baby with them.
 
'Not want him indeed!  Why, everybody 'ud want him, a duck!  with
all their hearts they would; and you know you promised your ma to
take him out every blessed day,' said Martha.
 
'I know we did,' said Robert in gloom, 'but I wish the Lamb wasn't
quite so young and small.  It would be much better fun taking him
out.'
 
'He'll mend of his youngness with time,' said Martha; 'and as for
his smallness, I don't think you'd fancy carrying of him any more,
however big he was.  Besides he can walk a bit, bless his precious
fat legs, a ducky!  He feels the benefit of the new-laid air, so he
does, a pet!'  With this and a kiss, she plumped the Lamb into
Anthea's arms, and went back to make new pinafores on the
sewing-machine.  She was a rapid performer on this instrument.
 
The Lamb laughed with pleasure, and said, 'Walky wif Panty,' and
rode on Robert's back with yells of joy, and tried to feed Jane
with stones, and altogether made himself so agreeable that nobody
could long be sorry that he was of the party.
 
The enthusiastic Jane even suggested that they should devote a
week's wishes to assuring the Baby's future, by asking such gifts
for him as the good fairies give to Infant Princes in proper
fairy-tales, but Anthea soberly reminded her that as the
Sand-fairy's wishes only lasted till sunset they could not ensure
any benefit to the Baby's later years; and Jane owned that it would
be better to wish for fifty pounds in two-shilling pieces, and buy
the Lamb a three-pound-fifteen rocking-horse, like those in the
Army and Navy Stores list, with part of the money.
 
It was settled that, as soon as they had wished for the money and
got it, they would get Mr Crispin to drive them into Rochester
again, taking Martha with them, if they could not get out of taking
her.  And they would make a list of the things they really wanted
before they started.  Full of high hopes and excellent resolutions,
they went round the safe slow cart-road to the gravel-pits, and as
they went in between the mounds of gravel a sudden thought came to
them, and would have turned their ruddy cheeks pale if they had
been children in a book.  Being real live children, it only made
them stop and look at each other with rather blank and silly
expressions.  For now they remembered that yesterday, when they had
asked the Psammead for boundless wealth, and it was getting ready
to fill the quarry with the minted gold of bright guineas -
millions of them - it had told the children to run along outside
the quarry for fear they should be buried alive in the heavy
splendid treasure.  And they had run.  And so it happened that they
had not had time to mark the spot where the Psammead was, with a
ring of stones, as before.  And it was this thought that put such
silly expressions on their faces.
 
'Never mind,' said the hopeful Jane, 'we'll soon find him.'
 
But this, though easily said, was hard in the doing.  They looked
and they looked, and though they found their seaside spades,
nowhere could they find the Sand-fairy.
 
At last they had to sit down and rest - not at all because they
were weary or disheartened, of course, but because the Lamb
insisted on being put down, and you cannot look very carefully
after anything you may have happened to lose in the sand if you
have an active baby to look after at the same time.  Get someone to
drop your best knife in the sand next time you go to the seaside,
and then take your baby brother with you when you go to look for
it, and you will see that I am right.
 
The Lamb, as Martha had said, was feeling the benefit of the
country air, and he was as frisky as a sandhopper.  The elder ones
longed to go on talking about the new wishes they would have when
(or if) they found the Psammead again.  But the Lamb wished to
enjoy himself.
 
He watched his opportunity and threw a handful of sand into
Anthea's face, and then suddenly burrowed his own head in the sand
and waved his fat legs in the air.  Then of course the sand got
into his eyes, as it had into Anthea's, and he howled.
 
The thoughtful Robert had brought one solid brown bottle of
ginger-beer with him, relying on a thirst that had never yet failed
him.  This had to be uncorked hurriedly - it was the only wet thing
within reach, and it was necessary to wash the sand out of the
Lamb's eyes somehow.  Of course the ginger hurt horribly, and he
howled more than ever.  And, amid his anguish of kicking, the
bottle was upset and the beautiful ginger-beer frothed out into the
sand and was lost for ever.
 
It was then that Robert, usually a very patient brother, so far
forgot himself as to say:
 
'Anybody would want him, indeed!  Only they don't; Martha doesn't,
not really, or she'd jolly well keep him with her.  He's a little
nuisance, that's what he is.  It's too bad.  I only wish everybody
DID want him with all their hearts; we might get some peace in our
lives.'
 
The Lamb stopped howling now, because Jane had suddenly remembered
that there is only one safe way of taking things out of little
children's eyes, and that is with your own soft wet tongue.  It is
quite easy if you love the Baby as much as you ought to.
 
Then there was a little silence.  Robert was not proud of himself
for having been so cross, and the others were not proud of him
either.  You often notice that sort of silence when someone has
said something it ought not to - and everyone else holds its tongue
and waits for the one who oughtn't to have said it is sorry.
 
The silence was broken by a sigh - a breath suddenly let out.  The
children's heads turned as if there had been a string tied to each
nose, and someone had pulled all the strings at once.
 
And everyone saw the Sand-fairy sitting quite close to them, with
the expression which it used as a smile on its hairy face.
 
'Good-morning,' it said; 'I did that quite easily!  Everyone wants
him now.'
 
'It doesn't matter,' said Robert sulkily, because he knew he had
been behaving rather like a pig.  'No matter who wants him -
there's no one here to - anyhow.'
 
'Ingratitude,' said the Psammead, 'is a dreadful vice.'
 
'We're not ungrateful,'Jane made haste to say, 'but we didn't
REALLY want that wish.  Robert only just said it.  Can't you take
it back and give us a new one?'
 
'No - I can't,' the Sand-fairy said shortly; 'chopping and changing
- it's not business.  You ought to be careful what you do wish. 
There was a little boy once, he'd wished for a Plesiosaurus instead
of an Ichthyosaurus, because he was too lazy to remember the easy
names of everyday things, and his father had been very vexed with
him, and had made him go to bed before tea-time, and wouldn't let
him go out in the nice flint boat along with the other children -
it was the annual school-treat next day - and he came and flung
himself down near me on the morning of the treat, and he kicked his
little prehistoric legs about and said he wished he was dead.  And
of course then he was.'
 
'How awful!' said the children all together.
 
'Only till sunset, of course,' the Psammead said; 'still it was
quite enough for his father and mother.  And he caught it when he
woke up - I can tell you.  He didn't turn to stone - I forget why
- but there must have been some reason.  They didn't know being
dead is only being asleep, and you're bound to wake up somewhere or
other, either where you go to sleep or in some better place.  You
may be sure he caught it, giving them such a turn.  Why, he wasn't
allowed to taste Megatherium for a month after that.  Nothing but
oysters and periwinkles, and common things like that.'
 
All the children were quite crushed by this terrible tale.  They
looked at the Psammead in horror.  Suddenly the Lamb perceived that
something brown and furry was near him.
 
'Poof, poof, poofy,' he said, and made a grab.
 
'It's not a pussy,' Anthea was beginning, when the Sand-fairy
leaped back.
 
'Oh, my left whisker!' it said; 'don't let him touch me.  He's
wet.'
 
Its fur stood on end with horror - and indeed a good deal of the
ginger-beer had been spilt on the blue smock of the Lamb.
 
The Psammead dug with its hands and feet, and vanished in an
instant and a whirl of sand.
 
The children marked the spot with a ring of stones.
 
'We may as well get along home,' said Robert.  'I'll say I'm sorry;
but anyway if it's no good it's no harm, and we know where the
sandy thing is for to-morrow.'
 
The others were noble.  No one reproached Robert at all.  Cyril
picked up the Lamb, who was now quite himself again, and off they
went by the safe cart-road.
 
The cart-road from the gravel-pits joins the road almost directly.
 
At the gate into the road the party stopped to shift the Lamb from
Cyril's back to Robert's.  And as they paused a very smart open
carriage came in sight, with a coachman and a groom on the box, and
inside the carriage a lady - very grand indeed, with a dress all
white lace and red ribbons and a parasol all red and white - and a
white fluffy dog on her lap with a red ribbon round its neck.  She
looked at the children, and particularly at the Baby, and she
smiled at him.  The children were used to this, for the Lamb was,
as all the servants said, a 'very taking child'.  So they waved
their hands politely to the lady and expected her to drive on.  But
she did not.  Instead she made the coachman stop.  And she beckoned
to Cyril, and when he went up to the carriage she said:
 
'What a dear darling duck of a baby!  Oh, I SHOULD so like to adopt
it!  Do you think its mother would mind?'
 
'She'd mind very much indeed,' said Anthea shortly.
 
'Oh, but I should bring it up in luxury, you know.  I am Lady
Chittenden.  You must have seen my photograph in the illustrated
papers.  They call me a beauty, you know, but of course that's all
nonsense.  Anyway -'
 
She opened the carriage door and jumped out.  She had the
wonderfullest red high-heeled shoes with silver buckles.  'Let me
hold him a minute,' she said.  And she took the Lamb and held him
very awkwardly, as if she was not used to babies.
 
Then suddenly she jumped into the carriage with the Lamb in her
arms and slammed the door and said, 'Drive on!'
 
The Lamb roared, the little white dog barked, and the coachman
hesitated.
 
'Drive on, I tell you!' cried the lady; and the coachman did, for,
as he said afterwards, it was as much as his place was worth not
to.
 
The four children looked at each other, and then with one accord
they rushed after the carriage and held on behind.  Down the dusty
road went the smart carriage, and after it, at double-quick time,
ran the twinkling legs of the Lamb's brothers and sisters.
 
The Lamb howled louder and louder, but presently his howls changed
by slow degree to hiccupy gurgles, and then all was still and they
knew he had gone to sleep.
 
The carriage went on, and the eight feet that twinkled through the
dust were growing quite stiff and tired before the carriage stopped
at the lodge of a grand park.  The children crouched down behind
the carriage, and the lady got out.  She looked at the Baby as it
lay on the carriage seat, and hesitated.
 
'The darling - I won't disturb it,' she said, and went into the
lodge to talk to the woman there about a setting of Buff Orpington
eggs that had not turned out well.
 
The coachman and footman sprang from the box and bent over the
sleeping Lamb.
 
'Fine boy - wish he was mine,' said the coachman.
 
'He wouldn't favour YOU much,' said the groom sourly; 'too
'andsome.'
 
The coachman pretended not to hear.  He said:
 
'Wonder at her now - I do really!  Hates kids.  Got none of her
own, and can't abide other folkses'.'
 
The children, crouching in the white dust under the carriage,
exchanged uncomfortable glances.
 
'Tell you what,' the coachman went on firmly, 'blowed if I don't
hide the little nipper in the hedge and tell her his brothers took
'im!  Then I'll come back for him afterwards.'
 
'No, you don't,' said the footman.  'I've took to that kid so as
never was.  If anyone's to have him, it's me - so there!'
 
'Stow your gab!' the coachman rejoined.  'You don't want no kids,
and, if you did, one kid's the same as another to you.  But I'm a
married man and a judge of breed.  I knows a first-rate yearling
when I sees him.  I'm a-goin' to 'ave him, an' least said soonest
mended.'
 
'I should 'a' thought,' said the footman sneeringly, you'd a'most
enough.  What with Alfred, an' Albert, an' Louise, an' Victor
Stanley, and Helena Beatrice, and another -'
 
The coachman hit the footman in the chin - the foot- man hit the
coachman in the waistcoat - the next minute the two were fighting
here and there, in and out, up and down, and all over everywhere,
and the little dog jumped on the box of the carriage and began
barking like mad.
 
Cyril, still crouching in the dust, waddled on bent legs to the
side of the carriage farthest from the battlefield.  He unfastened
the door of the carriage - the two men were far too much occupied
with their quarrel to notice anything - took the Lamb in his arms,
and, still stooping, carried the sleeping baby a dozen yards along
the road to where a stile led into a wood.  The others followed,
and there among the hazels and young oaks and sweet chestnuts,
covered by high strong-scented bracken, they all lay hidden till
the angry voices of the men were hushed at the angry voice of the
red-and-white lady, and, after a long and anxious search, the
carriage at last drove away.
 
'My only hat!' said Cyril, drawing a deep breath as the sound of
wheels at last died away.  'Everyone DOES want him now - and no
mistake!  That Sammyadd has done us again!  Tricky brute!  For any
sake, let's get the kid safe home.'
 
So they peeped out, and finding on the right hand only lonely white
road, and nothing but lonely white road on the left, they took
courage, and the road, Anthea carrying the sleeping Lamb.
 
Adventures dogged their footsteps.  A boy with a bundle of faggots
on his back dropped his bundle by the roadside and asked to look at
the Baby, and then offered to carry him; but Anthea was not to be
caught that way twice.  They all walked on, but the boy followed,
and Cyril and Robert couldn't make him go away till they had more
than once invited him to smell their fists.  Afterwards a little
girl in a blue-and-white checked pinafore actually followed them
for a quarter of a mile crying for 'the precious Baby', and then
she was only got rid of by threats of tying her to a tree in the
wood with all their pocket-handkerchiefs.  'So that the bears can
come and eat you as soon as it gets dark,' said Cyril severely. 
Then she went off crying.  It presently seemed wise, to the
brothers and sisters of the Baby, who was wanted by everyone, to
hide in the hedge whenever they saw anyone coming, and thus they
managed to prevent the Lamb from arousing the inconvenient
affection of a milkman, a stone-breaker, and a man who drove a cart
with a paraffin barrel at the back of it.  They were nearly home
when the worst thing of all happened.  Turning a corner suddenly
they came upon two vans, a tent, and a company of gipsies encamped
by the side of the road.  The vans were hung all round with wicker
chairs and cradles, and flower-stands and feather brushes.  A lot
of ragged children were industriously making dust-pies in the road,
two men lay on the grass smoking, and three women were doing the
family washing in an old red watering-can with the top broken off.
 
In a moment all the gipsies, men, women, and children, surrounded
Anthea and the Baby.
 
'Let me hold him, little lady,' said one of the gipsy women, who
had a mahogany-coloured face and dust-coloured hair; 'I won't hurt
a hair of his head, the little picture!'
 
'I'd rather not,' said Anthea.
 
'Let me have him,' said the other woman, whose face was also of the
hue of mahogany, and her hair jet-black, in greasy curls.  'I've
nineteen of my own, so I have.'
 
'No,' said Anthea bravely, but her heart beat so that it nearly
choked her.
 
Then one of the men pushed forward.
 
'Swelp me if it ain't!' he cried, 'my own long-lost cheild!  Have
he a strawberry mark on his left ear?  No?  Then he's my own babby,
stolen from me in hinnocent hinfancy.  'And 'im over - and we'll
not 'ave the law on yer this time.'
 
He snatched the Baby from Anthea, who turned scarlet and burst into
tears of pure rage.
 
The others were standing quite still; this was much the most
terrible thing that had ever happened to them.  Even being taken up
by the police in Rochester was nothing to this.  Cyril was quite
white, and his hands trembled a little, but he made a sign to the
others to shut up.  He was silent a minute, thinking hard.  Then he
said:
 
'We don't want to keep him if he's yours.  But you see he's used to
us.  You shall have him if you want him.'
 
'No, no!' cried Anthea - and Cyril glared at her.
 
'Of course we want him,' said the women, trying to get the Baby out
of the man's arms.  The Lamb howled loudly.
 
'Oh, he's hurt!' shrieked Anthea; and Cyril, in a savage undertone,
bade her 'Stow it!'
 
'You trust to me,' he whispered.  'Look here,' he went on, 'he's
awfully tiresome with people he doesn't know very well.  Suppose we
stay here a bit till he gets used to you, and then when it's
bedtime I give you my word of honour we'll go away and let you keep
him if you want to.  And then when we're gone you can decide which
of you is to have him, as you all want him so much.'
 
'That's fair enough,' said the man who was holding the Baby, trying
to loosen the red neckerchief which the Lamb had caught hold of and
drawn round his mahogany throat so tight that he could hardly
breathe.  The gipsies whispered together, and Cyril took the chance
to whisper too.  He said, 'Sunset! we'll get away then.'
 
And then his brothers and sisters were filled with wonder and
admiration at his having been so clever as to remember this.
 
'Oh, do let him come to us!' said Jane.  'See we'll sit down here
and take care of him for you till he gets used to you.'
 
'What about dinner?' said Robert suddenly.  The others looked at
him with scorn.  'Fancy bothering about your beastly dinner when
your br - I mean when the Baby' - Jane whispered hotly.  Robert
carefully winked at her and went on:
 
'You won't mind my just running home to get our dinner?' he said to
the gipsy; 'I can bring it out here in a basket.'
 
His brother and sisters felt themselves very noble, and despised
him.  They did not know his thoughtful secret intention.  But the
gipsies did in a minute.
'Oh yes!' they said; 'and then fetch the police with a pack of lies
about it being your baby instead of ours!  D'jever catch a weasel
asleep?' they asked.
 
'If you're hungry you can pick a bit along of us,' said the
light-haired gipsy woman, not unkindly.  'Here, Levi, that blessed
kid'll howl all his buttons off.  Give him to the little lady, and
let's see if they can't get him used to us a bit.'
 
So the Lamb was handed back; but the gipsies crowded so closely
that he could not possibly stop howling.  Then the man with the red
handkerchief said:
 
'Here, Pharaoh, make up the fire; and you girls see to the pot. 
Give the kid a chanst.'  So the gipsies, very much against their
will, went off to their work, and the children and the Lamb were
left sitting on the grass.
 
'He'll be all right at sunset,'Jane whispered.  'But, oh, it is
awful!  Suppose they are frightfully angry when they come to their
senses!  They might beat us, or leave us tied to trees, or
something.'
 
'No, they won't,' Anthea said.  ('Oh, my Lamb, don't cry any more,
it's all right, Panty's got oo, duckie!) They aren't unkind people,
or they wouldn't be going to give us any dinner.'
 
'Dinner?' said Robert.  'I won't touch their nasty dinner.  It
would choke me!'
 
The others thought so too then.  But when the dinner was ready - it
turned out to be supper, and happened between four and five - they
were all glad enough to take what they could get.  It was boiled
rabbit, with onions, and some bird rather like a chicken, but
stringier about its legs and with a stronger taste.  The Lamb had
bread soaked in hot water and brown sugar sprinkled on the top.  He
liked this very much, and consented to let the two gipsy women feed
him with it, as he sat on Anthea's lap.  All that long hot
afternoon Robert and Cyril and Anthea and Jane had to keep the Lamb
amused and happy, while the gipsies looked eagerly on.  By the time
the shadows grew long and black across the meadows he had really
'taken to' the woman with the light hair, and even consented to
kiss his hand to the children, and to stand up and bow, with his
hand on his chest - 'like a gentleman' - to the two men.  The whole
gipsy camp was in raptures with him, and his brothers and sisters
could not help taking some pleasure in showing off his
accomplishments to an audience so interested and enthusiastic.  But
they longed for sunset.
 
'We're getting into the habit of longing for sunset,' Cyril
whispered.  'How I do wish we could wish something really sensible,
that would be of some use, so that we should be quite sorry when
sunset came.'
 
The shadows got longer and longer, and at last there were no
separate shadows any more, but one soft glowing shadow over
everything; for the sun was out of sight - behind the hill - but he
had not really set yet.  The people who make the laws about
lighting bicycle lamps are the people who decide when the sun sets;
he has to do it, too, to the minute, or they would know the reason
why!
 
But the gipsies were getting impatient.
 
'Now, young uns,' the red-handkerchief man said,'it's time you were
laying of your heads on your pillowses - so it is!  The kid's all
right and friendly with us now - so you just hand him over and
sling that hook o' yours like you said.'
 
The women and children came crowding round the Lamb, arms were held
out, fingers snapped invitingly, friendly faces beaming with
admiring smiles; but all failed to tempt the loyal Lamb.  He clung
with arms and legs to Jane, who happened to be holding him, and
uttered the gloomiest roar of the whole day.
 
'It's no good,' the woman said, 'hand the little poppet over, miss. 
We'll soon quiet him.'
 
And still the sun would not set.
 
'Tell her about how to put him to bed,' whispered Cyril; 'anything
to gain time - and be ready to bolt when the sun really does make
up its silly old mind to set.'
 
'Yes, I'll hand him over in just one minute,' Anthea began, talking
very fast - 'but do let me just tell you he has a warm bath every
night and cold in the morning, and he has a crockery rabbit to go
into the warm bath with him, and little Samuel saying his prayers
in white china on a red cushion for the cold bath; and if you let
the soap get into his eyes, the Lamb -'
 
'Lamb kyes,' said he - he had stopped roaring to listen.
 
The woman laughed.  'As if I hadn't never bath'd a babby!'  she
said.  'Come - give us a hold of him.  Come to 'Melia, my
precious.'
 
'G'way, ugsie!' replied the Lamb at once.
 
'Yes, but,' Anthea went on, 'about his meals; you really MUST let
me tell you he has an apple or a banana every morning, and
bread-and-milk for breakfast, and an egg for his tea sometimes, and
-'
 
'I've brought up ten,' said the black-ringleted woman, 'besides the
others.  Come, miss, 'and 'im over - I can't bear it no longer.  I
just must give him a hug.'
 
'We ain't settled yet whose he's to be, Esther,' said one of the
men.
 
'It won't be you, Esther, with seven of 'em at your tail a'ready.'
 
'I ain't so sure of that,' said Esther's husband.
 
'And ain't I nobody, to have a say neither?' said the husband of
'Melia.
 
Zillah, the girl, said, 'An' me?  I'm a single girl - and no one
but 'im to look after - I ought to have him.'
 
'Hold yer tongue!'
 
'Shut your mouth!'
 
'Don't you show me no more of your imperence!'
 
Everyone was getting very angry.  The dark gipsy faces were
frowning and anxious-looking.  Suddenly a change swept over them,
as if some invisible sponge had wiped away these cross and anxious
expressions, and left only a blank.
 
The children saw that the sun really HAD set.  But they were afraid
to move.  And the gipsies were feeling so muddled, because of the
invisible sponge that had washed all the feelings of the last few
hours out of their hearts, that they could not say a word.
 
The children hardly dared to breathe.  Suppose the gipsies, when
they recovered speech, should be furious to think how silly they
had been all day.
 
It was an awkward moment.  Suddenly Anthea, greatly daring, held
out the Lamb to the red-handkerchief man.
 
'Here he is!' she said.
 
The man drew back.  'I shouldn't like to deprive you, miss,' he
said hoarsely.
 
'Anyone who likes can have my share of him,' said the other man.
 
'After all, I've got enough of my own,' said Esther.
 
'He's a nice little chap, though,' said Amelia.  She was the only
one who now looked affectionately at the whimpering Lamb.
 
Zillah said, 'If I don't think I must have had a touch of the sun. 
I don't want him.'
 
'Then shall we take him away?' said Anthea.
 
'Well, suppose you do,' said Pharaoh heartily, 'and we'll say no
more about it!'
 
And with great haste all the gipsies began to be busy about their
tents for the night.  All but Amelia.  She went with the children
as far as the bend in the road - and there she said:
 
'Let me give him a kiss, miss - I don't know what made us go for to
behave so silly.  Us gipsies don't steal babies, whatever they may
tell you when you're naughty.  We've enough of our own, mostly. 
But I've lost all mine.'
 
She leaned towards the Lamb; and he, looking in her eyes,
unexpectedly put up a grubby soft paw and stroked her face.
 
'Poor, poor!' said the Lamb.  And he let the gipsy woman kiss him,
and, what is more, he kissed her brown cheek in return - a very
nice kiss, as all his kisses are, and not a wet one like some
babies give.  The gipsy woman moved her finger about on his
forehead, as if she had been writing something there, and the same
with his chest and his hands and his feet; then she said:
 
'May he be brave, and have the strong head to think with, and the
strong heart to love with, and the strong hands to work with, and
the strong feet to travel with, and always come safe home to his
own.'  Then she said something in a strange language no one could
understand, and suddenly added:
 
'Well, I must be saying "so long" - and glad to have made your
acquaintance.'  And she turned and went back to her home - the tent
by the grassy roadside.
 
The children looked after her till she was out of sight.  Then
Robert said, 'How silly of her!  Even sunset didn't put her right. 
What rot she talked!'
 
'Well,' said Cyril, 'if you ask me, I think it was rather decent of
her -'
 
'Decent?' said Anthea; 'it was very nice indeed of her.  I think
she's a dear.'
 
'She's just too frightfully nice for anything,' said Jane.
 
And they went home - very late for tea and unspeakably late for
dinner.  Martha scolded, of course.  But the Lamb was safe.
 
'I say - it turned out we wanted the Lamb as much as anyone,' said
Robert, later.
 
'Of course.'
 
'But do you feel different about it now the sun's set?'
 
'No,' said all the others together.
'Then it's lasted over sunset with us.'
 
'No, it hasn't,' Cyril explained.  'The wish didn't do anything to
US.  We always wanted him with all our hearts when we were our
proper selves, only we were all pigs this morning; especially you,
Robert.'  Robert bore this much with a strange calm.
 
'I certainly THOUGHT I didn't want him this morning,' said he. 
'Perhaps I was a pig.  But everything looked so different when we
thought we were going to lose him.'
 
 
 
CHAPTER 4
WINGS
 
 
The next day was very wet - too wet to go out, and far too wet to
think of disturbing a Sand-fairy so sensitive to water that he
still, after thousands of years, felt the pain of once having had
his left whisker wetted.  It was a long day, and it was not till
the afternoon that all the children suddenly decided to write
letters to their mother.  It was Robert who had the misfortune to
upset the ink-pot - an unusually deep and full one - straight into
that part of Anthea's desk where she had long pretended that an
arrangement of gum and cardboard painted with Indian ink was a
secret drawer.  It was not exactly Robert's fault; it was only his
misfortune that he chanced to be lifting the ink across the desk
just at the moment when Anthea had got it open, and that that same
moment should have been the one chosen by the Lamb to get under the
table and break his squeaking bird.  There was a sharp convenient
wire inside the bird, and of course the Lamb ran the wire into
Robert's leg at once; and so, without anyone's meaning to, the
secret drawer was flooded with ink.  At the same time a stream was
poured over Anthea's half-finished letter.  So that her letter was
something like this:
 
 
DARLING MOTHER, I hope you are quite well, and I hope Granny is
better.  The other day we ...
 
 
Then came a flood of ink, and at the bottom these words in pencil
-
 
 
It was not me upset the ink, but it took such a time clearing up,
so no more as it is post-time.  - From your loving daughter,
                                   ANTHEA.
 
 
Robert's letter had not even been begun.  He had been drawing a
ship on the blotting-paper while he was trying to think of what to
say.  And of course after the ink was upset he had to help Anthea
to clean out her desk, and he promised to make her another secret
drawer, better than the other.  And she said, 'Well, make it now.' 
So it was post-time and his letter wasn't done.  And the secret
drawer wasn't done either.
 
Cyril wrote a long letter, very fast, and then went to set a trap
for slugs that he had read about in the Home-made Gardener, and
when it was post-time the letter could not be found, and it never
was found.  Perhaps the slugs ate it.
 
jane's letter was the only one that went.  She meant to tell her
mother all about the Psammead - in fact -they had all meant to do
this - but she spent so long thinking how to spell the word that
there was no time to tell the story properly, and it is useless to
tell a story unless you do tell it properly, so she had to be
contented with this -
 
 
MY DEAR MOTHER DEAR,
 
We are all as as good as we can, like you told us to, and the Lamb
has a little cold, but Martha says it is nothing, only he upset the
goldfish into himself yesterday morning.  When we were up at the
sand-pit the other day we went round by the safe way where carts
go, and we found a --
 
 
Half an hour went by before Jane felt quite sure that they could
none of them spell Psammead.  And they could not find it in the
dictionary either, though they looked.  Then Jane hastily finished
her letter.
 
 
 
We found a strange thing, but it is nearly post-time, so no more at
present from your little girl,
                         JANE.
 
Ps.  - If you could have a wish come true, what would you have?
 
 
Then the postman was heard blowing his horn, and Robert rushed out
in the rain to stop his cart and give him the letter.  And that was
how it happened that, though all the children meant to tell their
mother about the Sand-fairy, somehow or other she never got to
know.  There were other reasons why she never got to know, but
these come later.
 
The next day Uncle Richard came and took them all to Maidstone in
a wagonette - all except the Lamb.  Uncle Richard was the very best
kind of uncle.  He bought them toys at Maidstone.  He took them
into a shop and let them choose exactly what they wanted, without
any restrictions about price, and no nonsense about things being
instructive.  It is very wise to let children choose exactly what
they like, because they are very foolish and inexperienced, and
sometimes they will choose a really instructive thing without
meaning to.  This happened to Robert, who chose, at the last
moment, and in a great hurry, a box with pictures on it of winged
bulls with men's heads and winged men with eagles' heads.  He
thought there would be animals inside, the same as on the box. 
When he got it home it was a Sunday puzzle about ancient Nineveh!
The others chose in haste, and were happy at leisure.  Cyril had a
model engine, and the girls had two dolls, as well as a china
tea-set with forget-me-nots on it, to be 'between them'.  The boys'
'between them' was bow and arrows.
 
Then Uncle Richard took them on the beautiful Medway in a boat, and
then they all had tea at a beautiful pastrycook's, and when they
reached home it was far too late to have any wishes that day.
 
They did not tell Uncle Richard anything about the Psammead.  I do
not know why.  And they do not know why.  But I daresay you can
guess.
 
The day after Uncle Richard had behaved so handsomely was a very
hot day indeed.  The people who decide what the weather is to be,
and put its orders down for it in the newspapers every morning,
said afterwards that it was the hottest day there had been for
years.  They had ordered it to be 'warmer - some showers', and
warmer it certainly was.  In fact it was so busy being warmer that
it had no time to attend to the order about showers, so there
weren't any.
 
Have you ever been up at five o'clock on a fine summer morning?  It
is very beautiful.  The sunlight is pinky and yellowy, and all the
grass and trees are covered with dew-diamonds.  And all the shadows
go the opposite way to the way they do in the evening, which is
very interesting and makes you feel as though you were in a new
other world.
 
Anthea awoke at five.  She had made herself wake, and I must tell
you how it is done, even if it keeps you waiting for the story to
go on.
 
You get into bed at night, and lie down quite flat on your little
back with your hands straight down by your sides.  Then you say 'I
must wake up at five' (or six, or seven, or eight, or nine, or
whatever the time is that you want), and as you say it you push
your chin down on to your chest and then bang your head back on the
pillow.  And you do this as many times as there are ones in the
time you want to wake up at.  (It is quite an easy sum.) Of course
everything depends on your really wanting to get up at five (or
six, or seven, or eight, or nine); if you don't really want to,
it's all of no use.  But if you do - well, try it and see.  Of
course in this, as in doing Latin proses or getting into mischief,
practice makes perfect.  Anthea was quite perfect.
 
At the very moment when she opened her eyes she heard the
black-and-gold clock down in the dining-room strike eleven.  So she
knew it was three minutes to five.  The black-and-gold clock always
struck wrong, but it was all right when you knew what it meant.  It
was like a person talking a foreign language.  If you know the
language it is just as easy to understand as English.  And Anthea
knew the clock language.  She was very sleepy, but she jumped out
of bed and put her face and hands into a basin of cold water.  This
is a fairy charm that prevents your wanting to get back into bed
again.  Then she dressed, and folded up her nightgown.  She did not
tumble it together by the sleeves, but folded it by the seams from
the hem, and that will show you the kind of well-brought-up little
girl she was.
 
Then she took her shoes in her hand and crept softly down the
stairs.  She opened the dining-room window and climbed out.  It
would have been just as easy to go out by the door, but the window
was more romantic, and less likely to be noticed by Martha.
 
'I will always get up at five,' she said to herself.  'It was quite
too awfully pretty for anything.'
 
Her heart was beating very fast, for she was carrying out a plan
quite her own.  She could not be sure that it was a good plan, but
she was quite sure that it would not be any better if she were to
tell the others about it.  And she had a feeling that, right or
wrong, she would rather go through with it alone.  She put on her
shoes under the iron veranda, on the red-and-yellow shining tiles,
and then she ran straight to the sand-pit, and found the Psammead's
place, and dug it out; it was very cross indeed.
 
'It's too bad,' it said, fluffing up its fur like pigeons do their
feathers at Christmas time.  'The weather's arctic, and it's the
middle of the night.'
 
'I'm so sorry,' said Anthea gently, and she took off her white
pinafore and covered the Sand-fairy up with it, all but its head,
its bat's ears, and its eyes that were like a snail's eyes.
 
'Thank you,' it said, 'that's better.  What's the wish this
morning?'
 
'I don't know,' said she; 'that's just it.  You see we've been very
unlucky, so far.  I wanted to talk to you about it.  But - would
you mind not giving me any wishes till after breakfast?  It's so
hard to talk to anyone if they jump out at you with wishes you
don't really want!'
 
'You shouldn't say you wish for things if you don't wish for them. 
In the old days people almost always knew whether it was
Megatherium or Ichthyosaurus they really wanted for dinner.'
 
'I'll try not,' said Anthea, 'but I do wish -'
 
'Look out!' said the Psammead in a warning voice, and it began to
blow itself out.
 
'Oh, this isn't a magic wish - it's just - I should be so glad if
you'd not swell yourself out and nearly burst to give me anything
just now.  Wait till the others are here.'
 
'Well, well,' it said indulgently, but it shivered.
 
'Would you,' asked Anthea kindly - 'would you like to come and sit
on my lap?  You'd be warmer, and I could turn the skirt of my frock
up round you.  I'd be very careful.'
 
Anthea had never expected that it would, but it did.
 
'Thank you,' it said; 'you really are rather thoughtful.'  It crept
on to her lap and snuggled down, and she put her arms round it with
a rather frightened gentleness.  'Now then!' it said.
 
'Well then,' said Anthea, 'everything we have wished has turned out
rather horrid.  I wish you would advise us.  You are so old, you
must be very wise.'
 
'I was always generous from a child,' said the Sand-fairy.  'I've
spent the whole of my waking hours in giving.  But one thing I
won't give - that's advice.'
 
'You see,' Anthea went on, it's such a wonderful thing - such a
splendid, glorious chance.  It's so good and kind and dear of you
to give us our wishes, and it seems such a pity it should all be
wasted just because we are too silly to know what to wish for.'
 
Anthea had meant to say that - and she had not wanted to say it
before the others.  It's one thing to say you're silly, and quite
another to say that other people are.
 
'Child,' said the Sand-fairy sleepily, 'I can only advise you to
think before you speak -'
 
'But I thought you never gave advice.'
 
'That piece doesn't count,' it said.  'You'll never take it!
Besides, it's not original.  It's in all the copy-books.'
 
'But won't you just say if you think wings would be a silly wish?'
 
'Wings?' it said.  'I should think you might do worse.  Only, take
care you aren't flying high at sunset.  There was a little Ninevite
boy I heard of once.  He was one of King Sennacherib's sons, and a
traveller brought him a Psammead.  He used to keep it in a box of
sand on the palace terrace.  It was a dreadful degradation for one
of us, of course; still the boy was the Assyrian King's son.  And
one day he wished for wings and got them.  But he forgot that they
would turn into stone at sunset, and when they did he fell slap on
to one of the winged lions at the top of his father's great
staircase; and what with HIS stone wings and the lions' stone wings
- well, it's not a pretty story!  But I believe the boy enjoyed
himself very much till then.'
 
'Tell me,' said Anthea, 'why don't our wishes turn into stone now?
Why do they just vanish?'
 
'Autres temps, autres moeurs,' said the creature.
 
'Is that the Ninevite language?' asked Anthea, who had learned no
foreign language at school except French.
 
'What I mean is,' the Psammead went on, 'that in the old days
people wished for good solid everyday gifts - Mammoths and
Pterodactyls and things - and those could be turned into stone as
easy as not.  But people wish such high-flying fanciful things
nowadays.  How are you going to turn being beautiful as the day, or
being wanted by everybody, into stone?  You see it can't be done. 
And it would never do to have two rules, so they simply vanish.  If
being beautiful as the day COULD be turned into stone it would last
an awfully long time, you know - much longer than you would.  just
look at the Greek statues.  It's just as well as it is.  Good-bye. 
I AM so sleepy.'
 
It jumped off her lap - dug frantically, and vanished.
 
Anthea was late for breakfast.  It was Robert who quietly poured a
spoonful of treacle down the Lamb's frock, so that he had to be
taken away and washed thoroughly directly after breakfast.  And it
was of course a very naughty thing to do; yet it served two
purposes - it delighted the Lamb, who loved above all things to be
completely sticky, and it engaged Martha's attention so that the
others could slip away to the sand-pit without the Lamb.
 
They did it, and in the lane Anthea, breathless from the scurry of
that slipping, panted out -
 
'I want to propose we take turns to wish.  Only, nobody's to have
a wish if the others don't think it's a nice wish.  Do you agree?'
 
'Who's to have first wish?' asked Robert cautiously.
 
'Me, if you don't mind,' said Anthea apologetically.  'And I've
thought about it - and it's wings.'
 
There was a silence.  The others rather wanted to find fault, but
it was hard, because the word 'wings' raised a flutter of joyous
excitement in every breast.
 
'Not so dusty,' said Cyril generously; and Robert added, 'Really,
Panther, you're not quite such a fool as you look.'
 
Jane said, 'I think it would be perfectly lovely.  It's like a
bright dream of delirium.'
They found the Sand-fairy easily.  Anthea said:
 
'I wish we all had beautiful wings to fly with.'
 
The Sand-fairy blew himself out, and next moment each child felt a
funny feeling, half heaviness and half lightness, on its shoulders. 
The Psammead put its head on one side and turned its snail's eyes
from one to the other.
 
'Not so dusty,' it said dreamily.  'But really, Robert, you're not
quite such an angel as you look.'  Robert almost blushed.
 
The wings were very big, and more beautiful than you can possibly
imagine - for they were soft and smooth, and every feather lay
neatly in its place.  And the feathers were of the most lovely
mixed changing colours, like the rainbow, or iridescent glass, or
the beautiful scum that sometimes floats on water that is not at
all nice to drink.
 
'Oh - but can we fly?'Jane said, standing anxiously first on one
foot and then on the other.
 
'Look out!' said Cyril; 'you're treading on my wing.'
 
'Does it hurt?' asked Anthea with interest; but no one answered,
for Robert had spread his wings and jumped up, and now he was
slowly rising in the air.  He looked very awkward in his
knickerbocker suit - his boots in particular hung helplessly, and
seemed much larger than when he was standing in them.  But the
others cared but little how he looked - or how they looked, for
that matter.  For now they all spread out their wings and rose in
the air.  Of course you all know what flying feels like, because
everyone has dreamed about flying, and it seems so beautifully easy
- only, you can never remember how you did it; and as a rule you
have to do it without wings, in your dreams, which is more clever
and uncommon, but not so easy to remember the rule for.  Now the
four children rose flapping from the ground, and you can't think
how good the air felt running against their faces.  Their wings
were tremendously wide when they were spread out, and they had to
fly quite a long way apart so as not to get in each other's way. 
But little things like this are easily learned.
 
All the words in the English Dictionary, and in the Greek Lexicon
as well, are, I find, of no use at all to tell you exactly what it
feels like to be flying, so I Will not try.  But I will say that to
look DOWN on the fields and woods, instead of along at them, is
something like looking at a beautiful live map, where, instead of
silly colours on paper, you have real moving sunny woods and green
fields laid out one after the other.  As Cyril said, and I can't
think where he got hold of such a strange expression, 'It does you
a fair treat!'  It was most wonderful and more like real magic than
any wish the children had had yet.  They flapped and flew and
sailed on their great rainbow wings, between green earth and blue
sky; and they flew right over Rochester and then swerved round
towards Maidstone, and presently they all began to feel extremely
hungry.  Curiously enough, this happened when they were flying
rather low, and just as they were crossing an orchard where some
early plums shone red and ripe.
 
They paused on their wings.  I cannot explain to you how this is
done, but it is something like treading water when you are
swimming, and hawks do it extremely well.
 
'Yes, I daresay,' said Cyril, though no one had spoken.  'But
stealing is stealing even if you've got wings.'
 
'Do you really think so?' said Jane briskly.  'If you've got wings
you're a bird, and no one minds birds breaking the commandments. 
At least, they MAY mind, but the birds always do it, and no one
scolds them or sends them to prison.'
 
It was not so easy to perch on a plum-tree as you might think,
because the rainbow wings were so very large; but somehow they all
managed to do it, and the plums were certainly very sweet and
juicy.
 
Fortunately, it was not till they had all had quite as many plums
as were good for them that they saw a stout man, who looked exactly
as though he owned the plum-trees, come hurrying through the
orchard gate with a thick stick, and with one accord they
disentangled their wings from the plum-laden branches and began to
fly.
 
The man stopped short, with his mouth open.  For he had seen the
boughs of his trees moving and twitching, and he had said to
himself, 'The young varmints - at it again!'  And he had come out
at once, for the lads of the village had taught him in past seasons
that plums want looking after.  But when he saw the rainbow wings
flutter up out of the plum-tree he felt that he must have gone
quite mad, and he did not like the feeling at all.  And when Anthea
looked down and saw his mouth go slowly open, and stay so, and his
face become green and mauve in patches, she called out:
 
'Don't be frightened,' and felt hastily in her pocket for a
threepenny-bit with a hole in it, which she had meant to hang on a
ribbon round her neck, for luck.  She hovered round the unfortunate
plum-owner, and said, 'We have had some of your plums; we thought
it wasn't stealing, but now I am not so sure.  So here's some money
to pay for them.'
 
She swooped down towards the terror-stricken grower of plums, and
slipped the coin into the pocket of his jacket, and in a few flaps
she had rejoined the others.
 
The farmer sat down on the grass, suddenly and heavily.
 
'Well - I'm blessed!' he said.  'This here is what they call
delusions, I suppose.  But this here threepenny' - he had pulled it
out and bitten it - 'THAT'S real enough.  Well, from this day forth
I'll be a better man.  It's the kind of thing to sober a chap for
life, this is.  I'm glad it was only wings, though.  I'd rather see
birds as aren't there, and couldn't be, even if they pretend to
talk, than some things as I could name.'
 
He got up slowly and heavily, and went indoors, and he was so nice
to his wife that day that she felt quite happy, and said to
herself, 'Law, whatever have a-come to the man!' and smartened
herself up and put a blue ribbon bow at the place where her collar
fastened on, and looked so pretty that he was kinder than ever.  So
perhaps the winged children really did do one good thing that day. 
If so, it was the only one; for really there is nothing like wings
for getting you into trouble.  But, on the other hand, if you arc
in trouble, there is nothing like wings for getting you out of it.
 
This was the case in the matter of the fierce dog who sprang out at
them when they had folded up their wings as small as possible and
were going up to a farm door to ask for a crust of bread and
cheese, for in spite of the plums they were soon just as hungry as
ever again.
 
Now there is no doubt whatever that, if the four had been ordinary
wingless children, that black and fierce dog would have had a good
bite out of the brown-stockinged leg of Robert, who was the
nearest.  But at first growl there was a flutter of wings, and the
dog was left to strain at his chain and stand on his hind-legs as
if he were trying to fly too.
 
They tried several other farms, but at those where there were no
dogs the people were far too frightened to do anything but scream;
and at last when it was nearly four o'clock, and their wings were
getting miserably stiff and tired, they alighted on a church-tower
and held a council of war.
 
'We can't possibly fly all the way home without dinner or tea,'
said Robert with desperate decision.
 
'And nobody will give us any dinner, or even lunch, let alone tea,'
said Cyril.
 
'Perhaps the clergyman here might,' suggested Anthea.  'He must
know all about angels -'
 
'Anybody could see we're not that,' said Jane.  'Look at Robert's
boots and Squirrel's plaid necktie.'
 
'Well,' said Cyril firmly, 'if the country you're in won't SELL
provisions, you TAKE them.  In wars I mean.  I'm quite certain you
do.  And even in other stories no good brother would allow his
little sisters to starve in the midst of plenty.'
 
'Plenty?' repeated Robert hungrily; and the others looked vaguely
round the bare leads of the church- tower, and murmured, 'In the
midst of?'
 
'Yes,' said Cyril impressively.  'There is a larder window at the
side of the clergyman's house, and I saw things to eat inside -
custard pudding and cold chicken and tongue - and pies - and jam. 
It's rather a high window - but with wings -'
 
'How clever of you!' said Jane.
 
'Not at all,' said Cyril modestly; 'any born general - Napoleon or
the Duke of Marlborough - would have seen it just the same as I
did.'
 
'It seems very wrong,' said Anthea.
 
'Nonsense,' said Cyril.  'What was it Sir Philip Sidney said when
the soldier wouldn't stand him a drink? - "My necessity is greater
than his".'
 
'We'll club our money, though, and leave it to pay for the things,
won't we?'  Anthea was persuasive, and very nearly in tears,
because it is most trying to feel enormously hungry and unspeakably
sinful at one and the same time.
 
'Some of it,' was the cautious reply.
 
Everyone now turned out its pockets on the lead roof of the tower,
where visitors for the last hundred and fifty years had cut their
own and their sweethearts' initials with penknives in the soft
lead.  There was five-and-sevenpence-halfpenny altogether, and even
the upright Anthea admitted that that was too much to pay for four
peoples dinners.  Robert said he thought eighteen pence.
 
And half-a-crown was finally agreed to be 'hand- some'.
 
So Anthea wrote on the back of her last term's report, which
happened to be in her pocket, and from which she first tore her own
name and that of the school, the following letter:
 
 
DEAR REVEREND CLERGYMAN,
 
We are very hungry indeed because of having to fly all day, and we
think it is not stealing when you are starving to death.  We are
afraid to ask you for fear you should say 'No', because of course
you know about angels, but you would not think we were angels.  We
will only take the nessessities of life, and no pudding or pie, to
show you it is not grediness but true starvation that makes us make
your larder stand and deliver.  But we are not highwaymen by trade.
 
 
'Cut it short,' said the others with one accord.  And Anthea
hastily added:
 
Our intentions are quite honourable if you only knew.  And here is
half-a-crown to show we are sinseer and grateful.  Thank you for
your kind hospitality.
                              FROM Us FOUR.
 
 
The half-crown was wrapped in this letter, and all the children
felt that when the clergyman had read it he would understand
everything, as well as anyone could who had not seen the wings.
 
'Now,' said Cyril,"of course there's some risk; we'd better fly
straight down the other side of the tower and then flutter low
across the churchyard and in through the shrubbery.  There doesn't
seem to be anyone about.  But you never know.  The window looks out
into the shrubbery.  It is embowered in foliage, like a window in
a story.  I'll go in and get the things.  Robert and Anthea can
take them as I hand them out through the window; and Jane can keep
watch - her eyes are sharp - and whistle if she sees anyone about. 
Shut up, Robert! she can whistle quite well enough for that,
anyway.  It ought not to be a very good whistle - it'll sound more
natural and birdlike.  Now then - off we go!'
 
I cannot pretend that stealing is right.  I can only say that on
this occasion it did not look like stealing to the hungry four, but
appeared in the light of a fair and reasonable business
transaction.  They had never happened to learn that a tongue -
hardly cut into - a chicken and a half, a loaf of bread, and a
syphon of soda-water cannot be bought in shops for half-a-crown. 
These were the necessaries of life, which Cyril handed out of the
larder window when, quite unobserved and without hindrance or
adventure, he had led the others to that happy spot.  He felt that
to refrain from jam, apple turnovers, cake, and mixed candied peel
was a really heroic act - and I agree with him.  He was also proud
of not taking the custard pudding - and there I think he was wrong
- because if he had taken it there would have been a difficulty
about returning the dish; no one, however starving, has a right to
steal china pie-dishes with little pink flowers on them.  The
soda-water syphon was different.  They could not do without
something to drink, and as the maker's name was on it they felt
sure it would be returned to him wherever they might leave it.  If
they had time they would take it back themselves.  The man appeared
to live in Rochester, which would not be much out of their way
home.
 
Everything was carried up to the top of the tower, and laid down on
a sheet of kitchen paper which Cyril had found on the top shelf of
the larder.  As he unfolded it, Anthea said, 'I don't think THAT'S
a necessity of life.'
 
'Yes, it is,' said he.  'We must put the things down somewhere to
cut them up; and I heard father say the other day people got
diseases from germans in rain-water.  Now there must be lots of
rain-water here - and when it dries up the germans are left, and
they'd get into the things, and we should all die of scarlet
fever.'
 
'What are germans?'
 
'Little waggly things you see with microscopes,' said Cyril, with
a scientific air.  'They give you every illness you can think of!
I'm sure the paper was a necessary, just as much as the bread and
meat and water.  Now then!  Oh, my eyes, I am hungry!'
 
I do not wish to describe the picnic party on the top of the tower. 
You can imagine well enough what it is like to carve a chicken and
a tongue with a knife that has only one blade - and that snapped
off short about half-way down.  But it was done.  Eating with your
fingers is greasy and difficult - and paper dishes soon get to look
very spotty and horrid.  But one thing you CAN'T imagine, and that
is how soda-water behaves when you try to drink it straight out of
a syphon - especially a quite full one.  But if imagination will
not help you, experience will, and you can easily try it for
yourself if you can get a grown-up to give you the syphon.  If you
want to have a really thorough experience, put the tube in your
mouth and press the handle very suddenly and very hard.  You had
better do it when you are alone - and out of doors is best for this
experiment.
 
However you eat them, tongue and chicken and new bread are very
good things, and no one minds being sprinkled a little with
soda-water on a really fine hot day.  So that everyone enjoyed the
dinner very much indeed, and everyone ate as much as it possibly
could: first, because it was extremely hungry; and secondly,
because, as I said, tongue and chicken and new bread are very nice.
 
Now, I daresay you will have noticed that if you have to wait for
your dinner till long after the proper time, and then eat a great
deal more dinner than usual, and sit in the hot sun on the top of
a church-tower - or even anywhere else - you become soon and
strangely sleepy.  Now Anthea and Jane and Cyril and Robert were
very like you in many ways, and when they had eaten all they could,
and drunk all there was, they became sleepy, strangely and soon -
especially Anthea, because she had got up so early.
 
One by one they left off talking and leaned back, and before it was
a quarter of an hour after dinner they had all curled round and
tucked themselves up under their large soft warm wings and were
fast asleep.  And the sun was sinking slowly in the west.  (I must
say it was in the west, because it is usual in books to say so, for
fear careless people should think it was setting in the east.  In
point of fact, it was not exactly in the west either - but that's
near enough.) The sun, I repeat, was sinking slowly in the west,
and the children slept warmly and happily on - for wings are cosier
than eiderdown quilts to sleep under.  The shadow of the
church-tower fell across the churchyard, and across the Vicarage,
and across the field beyond; and presently there were no more
shadows, and the sun had set, and the wings were gone.  And still
the children slept.  But not for long.  Twilight is very beautiful,
but it is chilly; and you know, however sleepy you are, you wake up
soon enough if your brother or sister happens to be up first and
pulls your blankets off you.  The four wingless children shivered
and woke.  And there they were - on the top of a church-tower in
the dusky twilight, with blue stars coming out by ones and twos and
tens and twenties over their heads - miles away from home, with
three-and-three-halfpence in their pockets, and a doubtful act
about the necessities of life to be accounted for if anyone found
them with the soda-water syphon.
 
They looked at each other.  Cyril spoke first, picking up the
syphon:
 
'We'd better get along down and get rid of this beastly thing. 
It's dark enough to leave it on the clergyman's doorstep, I should
think.  Come on.'
 
There was a little turret at the corner of the tower, and the
little turret had a door in it.  They had noticed this when they
were eating, but had not explored it, as you would have done in
their place.  Because, of course, when you have wings, and can
explore the whole sky, doors seem hardly worth exploring.
 
Now they turned towards it.
 
'Of course,' said Cyril, 'this is the way down.'
 
It was.  But the door was locked on the inside!
 
And the world was growing darker and darker.  And they were miles
from home.  And there was the soda-water syphon.
 
I shall not tell you whether anyone cried, nor if so, how many
cried, nor who cried.  You will be better employed in making up
your minds what you would have done if you had been in their place.
 
 
 
CHAPTER 5
NO WINGS
 
 
Whether anyone cried or not, there was certainly an interval during
which none of the party was quite itself.  When they grew calmer,
Anthea put her handkerchief in her pocket and her arm round Jane,
and said:
 
'It can't be for more than one night.  We can signal with our
handkerchiefs in the morning.  They'll be dry then.  And someone
will come up and let us out -'
 
'And find the syphon,' said Cyril gloomily; 'and we shall be sent
to prison for stealing -'
 
'You said it wasn't stealing.  You said you were sure it wasn't.'
 
'I'm not sure NOW,' said Cyril shortly.
 
'Let's throw the beastly thing slap away among the trees,' said
Robert, 'then no one can do anything to us.'
 
'Oh yes' - Cyril's laugh was not a lighthearted one - 'and hit some
chap on the head, and be murderers as well as - as the other
thing.'
 
'But we can't stay up here all night,' said Jane; 'and I want my
tea.'
 
'You CAN'T want your tea,' said Robert; 'you've only just had your
dinner.'
 
'But I do want it,' she said; 'especially when you begin talking
about stopping up here all night.  Oh, Panther - I want to go home!
I want to go home!'
 
'Hush, hush,' Anthea said.  'Don't, dear.  It'll be all right,
somehow.  Don't, don't -'
 
'Let her cry,' said Robert desperately; 'if she howls loud enough,
someone may hear and come and let us out.'
 
'And see the soda-water thing,' said Anthea swiftly.  'Robert,
don't be a brute.  Oh, Jane, do try to be a man!  It's just the
same for all of us.'
 
Jane did try to 'be a man' - and reduced her howls to sniffs.
 
There was a pause.  Then Cyril said slowly, 'Look here.  We must
risk that syphon.  I'll button it up inside my jacket - perhaps no
one will notice it.  You others keep well in front of me.  There
are lights in the clergyman's house.  They've not gone to bed yet. 
We must just yell as loud as ever we can.  Now all scream when I
say three.  Robert, you do the yell like the railway engine, and
I'll do the coo-ee like father's.  The girls can do as they please. 
One, two, three!'
 
A fourfold yell rent the silent peace of the evening, and a maid at
one of the Vicarage windows paused with her hand on the blind-cord.
 
'One, two, three!'  Another yell, piercing and complex, startled
the owls and starlings to a flutter of feathers in the belfry
below.  The maid fled from the Vicarage window and ran down the
Vicarage stairs and into the Vicarage kitchen, and fainted as soon
as she had explained to the man-servant and the cook and the cook's
cousin that she had seen a ghost.  It was quite untrue, of course,
but I suppose the girl's nerves were a little upset by the yelling.
 
'One, two, three!'  The Vicar was on his doorstep by this time, and
there was no mistaking the yell that greeted him.
 
'Goodness me,' he said to his wife, 'my dear, someone's being
murdered in the church!  Give me my hat and a thick stick, and tell
Andrew to come after me.  I expect it's the lunatic who stole the
tongue.'
 
The children had seen the flash of light when the Vicar opened his
front door.  They had seen his dark form on the doorstep, and they
had paused for breath, and also to see what he would do.
 
When he turned back for his hat, Cyril said hastily:
 
'He thinks he only fancied he heard something.  You don't half
yell!  Now!  One, two, three!'
 
It was certainly a whole yell this time, and the Vicar's wife flung
her arms round her husband and screamed a feeble echo of it.
 
'You shan't go!' she said, 'not alone.  Jessie!' - the maid
unfainted and came out of the kitchen - 'send Andrew at once. 
There's a dangerous lunatic in the church, and he must go
immediately and catch it.'
 
'I expect he WILL catch it too,' said Jessie to herself as she went
through the kitchen door.  'Here, Andrew,' she said, there's
someone screaming like mad in the church, and the missus says
you're to go along and catch it.'
 
'Not alone, I don't,' said Andrew in low firm tones.  To his master
he merely said, 'Yes, sir.'
 
'You heard those screams?'
 
'I did think I noticed a sort of something,' said Andrew.
 
'Well, come on, then,' said the Vicar.  'My dear, I MUST go!' He
pushed her gently into the sitting-room, banged the door, and
rushed out, dragging Andrew by the arm.
 
A volley of yells greeted them.  As it died into silence Andrew
shouted, 'Hullo, you there!  Did you call?'
 
'Yes,' shouted four far-away voices.
 
'They seem to be in the air,' said the Vicar.  'Very remarkable.'
 
'Where are you?' shouted Andrew: and Cyril replied in his deepest
voice, very slow and loud:
 
'CHURCH!  TOWER!  TOP!'
 
'Come down, then!' said Andrew; and the same voice replied:
 
'CAN'T!  DOOR LOCKED!'
 
'My goodness!' said the Vicar.  'Andrew, fetch the stable lantern. 
Perhaps it would be as well to fetch another man from the village.'
 
'With the rest of the gang about, very likely.  No, sir; if this
'ere ain't a trap - well, may I never!  There's cook's cousin at
the back door now.  He's a keeper, sir, and used to dealing with
vicious characters.  And he's got his gun, sir.'
 
'Hullo there!' shouted Cyril from the church-tower; 'come up and
let us out.'
 
'We're a-coming,' said Andrew.  'I'm a-going to get a policeman and
a gun.'
 
'Andrew, Andrew,' said the Vicar, 'that's not the truth.'
 
'It's near enough, sir, for the likes of them.'
 
So Andrew fetched the lantern and the cook's cousin; and the
Vicar's wife begged them all to be very careful.
 
They went across the churchyard - it was quite dark now - and as
they went they talked.  The Vicar was certain a lunatic was on the
church-tower - the one who had written the mad letter, and taken
the cold tongue and things.  Andrew thought it was a 'trap'; the
cook's cousin alone was calm.  'Great cry, little wool,' said he;
'dangerous chaps is quieter.'  He was not at all afraid.  But then
he had a gun.  That was why he was asked to lead the way up the
worn steep dark steps of the church-tower.  He did lead the way,
with the lantern in one hand and the gun in the other.  Andrew went
next.  He pretended afterwards that this was because he was braver
than his master, but really it was because he thought of traps, and
he did not like the idea of being behind the others for fear
someone should come soffly up behind him and catch hold of his legs
in the dark.  They went on and on, and round and round the little
corkscrew staircase - then through the bell-ringers' loft, where
the bell-ropes hung with soft furry ends like giant caterpillars -
then up another stair into the belfry, where the big quiet bells
are - and then on, up a ladder with broad steps - and then up a
little stone stair.  And at the top of that there was a little
door.  And the door was bolted on the stair side.
 
The cook's cousin, who was a gamekeeper, kicked at the door, and
said:
 
'Hullo, you there!'
 
The children were holding on to each other on the other side of the
door, and trembling with anxiousness - and very hoarse with their
howls.  They could hardly speak, but Cyril managed to reply
huskily:
 
'Hullo, you there!'
 
'How did you get up there?'
 
It was no use saying 'We flew up', so Cyril said:
 
'We got up - and then we found the door was locked and we couldn't
get down.  Let us out - do.'
 
'How many of you are there?' asked the keeper.
 
'Only four,' said Cyril.
 
'Are you armed?'
 
'Are we what?'
 
'I've got my gun handy - so you'd best not try any tricks,' said
the keeper.  'If we open the door, will you promise to come quietly
down, and no nonsense?'
 
'Yes - oh YES!' said all the children together.
 
'Bless me,' said the Vicar, 'surely that was a female voice?'
 
'Shall I open the door, Sir?' said the keeper.  Andrew went down a
few steps, 'to leave room for the others' he said afterwards.
 
'Yes,' said the Vicar, 'open the door.  Remember,' he said through
the keyhole, 'we have come to release you.  You will keep your
promise to refrain from violence?'
 
'How this bolt do stick,' said the keeper; 'anyone 'ud think it
hadn't been drawed for half a year.'  As a matter of fact it
hadn't.
 
When all the bolts were drawn, the keeper spoke deep-chested words
through the keyhole.
 
'I don't open,' said he, 'till you've gone over to the other side
of the tower.  And if one of you comes at me I fire.  Now!'
 
'We're all over on the other side,' said the voices.
 
The keeper felt pleased with himself, and owned himself a bold man
when he threw open that door, and, stepping out into the leads,
flashed the full light of the stable lantern on to the group of
desperadoes standing against the parapet on the other side of the
tower.
 
He lowered his gun, and he nearly dropped the lantern.
 
'So help me,' he cried, 'if they ain't a pack of kiddies!'
 
The Vicar now advanced.
 
'How did you come here?' he asked severely.  'Tell me at once.  '
 
'Oh, take us down,' said Jane, catching at his coat, 'and we'll
tell you anything you like.  You won't believe us, but it doesn't
matter.  Oh, take us down!'
 
The others crowded round him, with the same entreaty.  All but
Cyril.  He had enough to do with the soda-water syphon, which would
keep slipping down under his jacket.  It needed both hands to keep
it steady in its place.
 
But he said, standing as far out of the lantern light as possible:
 
'Please do take us down.'
 
So they were taken down.  It is no joke to go down a strange
church-tower in the dark, but the keeper helped them - only, Cyril
had to be independent because of the soda-water syphon.  It would
keep trying to get away.  Half-way down the ladder it all but
escaped.  Cyril just caught it by its spout, and as nearly as
possible lost his footing.  He was trembling and pale when at last
they reached the bottom of the winding stair and stepped out on to
the flags of the church-porch.
 
Then suddenly the keeper caught Cyril and Robert each by an arm.
 
'You bring along the gells, sir,' said he; 'you and Andrew can
manage them.'
 
'Let go!' said Cyril; 'we aren't running away.  We haven't hurt
your old church.  Leave go!'
 
'You just come along,' said the keeper; and Cyril dared not oppose
him with violence, because just then the syphon began to slip
again.
 
So they were all marched into the Vicarage study, and the Vicar's
wife came rushing in.
 
'Oh, William, are you safe?' she cried.
 
Robert hastened to allay her anxiety.
 
'Yes,' he said, 'he's quite safe.  We haven't hurt him at all.  And
please, we're very late, and they'll be anxious at home.  Could you
send us home in your carriage?'
 
'Or perhaps there's a hotel near where we could get a carriage
from,' said Anthea.  'Martha will be very anxious as it is.'
 
The Vicar had sunk into a chair, overcome by emotion and amazement.
 
Cyril had also sat down, and was leaning forward with his elbows on
his knees because of that soda-water syphon.
 
'But how did you come to be locked up in the church-tower?' asked
the Vicar.
 
'We went up,' said Robert slowly, 'and we were tired, and we all
went to sleep, and when we woke up we found the door was locked, so
we yelled.'
 
'I should think you did!' said the Vicar's wife.  'Frightening
everybody out of their wits like this!  You ought to be ashamed of
yourselves.'
 
'We are,' said Jane gently.
 
'But who locked the door?' asked the Vicar.
 
'I don't know at all,' said Robert, with perfect truth.  'Do please
send us home.'
 
'Well, really,' said the Vicar, 'I suppose we'd better.  Andrew,
put the horse to, and you can take them home.'
 
'Not alone, I don't,' said Andrew to himself.
 
'And,' the Vicar went on, 'let this be a lesson to you ...'  He
went on talking, and the children listened miserably.  But the
keeper was not listening.  He was looking at the unfortunate Cyril. 
He knew all about poachers of course, so he knew how people look
when they're hiding something.  The Vicar had just got to the part
about trying to grow up to be a blessing to your parents, and not
a trouble and a disgrace, when the keeper suddenly said:
 
'Arst him what he's got there under his jacket'; and Cyril knew
that concealment was at an end.  So he stood up, and squared his
shoulders and tried to look noble, like the boys in books that no
one can look in the face of and doubt that they come of brave and
noble families and will be faithful to the death, and he pulled out
the soda-water syphon and said:
 
'Well, there you are, then.'
 
There was a silence.  Cyril went on - there was nothing else for
it:
 
'Yes, we took this out of your larder, and some chicken and tongue
and bread.  We were very hungry, and we didn't take the custard or
jam.  We only took bread and meat and water - and we couldn't help
its being the soda kind -just the necessaries of life; and we left
half-a-crown to pay for it, and we left a letter.  And we're very
sorry.  And my father will pay a fine or anything you like, but
don't send us to prison.  Mother would be so vexed.  You know what
you said about not being a disgrace.  Well, don't you go and do it
to us - that's all!  We're as sorry as we can be.  There!'
 
'However did you get up to the larder window?' said Mrs Vicar.
 
'I can't tell you that,' said Cyril firmly.
 
'Is this the whole truth you've been telling me?' asked the
clergyman.
 
'No,' answered Jane suddenly; 'it's all true, but it's not the
whole truth.  We can't tell you that.  It's no good asking.  Oh, do
forgive us and take us home!'  She ran to the Vicar's wife and
threw her arms round her.  The Vicar's wife put her arms round
Jane, and the keeper whispered behind his hand to the Vicar:
 
'They're all right, sir - I expect it's a pal they're standing by. 
Someone put 'em up to it, and they won't peach.  Game little kids.'
 
'Tell me,' said the Vicar kindly, 'are you screening someone else?
Had anyone else anything to do with this?'
 
'Yes,' said Anthea, thinking of the Psammead; 'but it wasn't their
fault.'
 
'Very well, my dears,' said the Vicar, 'then let's say no more
about it.  Only just tell us why you wrote such an odd letter.'
 
'I don't know,' said Cyril.  'You see, Anthea wrote it in such a
hurry, and it really didn't seem like stealing then.  But
afterwards, when we found we couldn't get down off the
church-tower, it seemed just exactly like it.  We are all very
sorry -'
 
'Say no more about it,' said the Vicar's wife; 'but another time
just think before you take other people's tongues.  Now - some cake
and milk before you go home?'
 
When Andrew came to say that the horse was put to, and was he
expected to be led alone into the trap that he had plainly seen
from the first, he found the children eating cake and drinking milk
and laughing at the Vicar's jokes.  Jane was sitting on the Vicar's
wife's lap.
 
So you see they got off better than they deserved.
 
The gamekeeper, who was the cook's cousin, asked leave to drive
home with them, and Andrew was only too glad to have someone to
protect him from the trap he was so certain of.
 
When the wagonette reached their own house, between the
chalk-quarry and the gravel-pit, the children were very sleepy, but
they felt that they and the keeper were friends for life.
 
Andrew dumped the children down at the iron gate without a word.
'You get along home,' said the Vicarage cook's cousin, who was a
gamekeeper.  'I'll get me home on Shanks' mare.'
 
So Andrew had to drive off alone, which he did not like at all, and
it was the keeper that was cousin to the Vicarage cook who went
with the children to the door, and, when they had been swept to bed
in a whirlwind of reproaches, remained to explain to Martha and the
cook and the housemaid exactly what had happened.  He explained so
well that Martha was quite amiable the next morning.
 
After that he often used to come over and see Martha; and in the
end - but that is another story, as dear Mr Kipling says.
 
Martha was obliged to stick to what she had said the night before
about keeping the children indoors the next day for a punishment. 
But she wasn't at all snarky about it, and agreed to let Robert go
out for half an hour to get something he particularly wanted. 
This, of course, was the day's wish.
 
Robert rushed to the gravel-pit, found the Psammead, and presently
wished for - But that, too, is another story.
 
 
 
CHAPTER 6
A CASTLE AND NO DINNER
 
 
The others were to be kept in as a punishment for the misfortunes
of the day before.  Of course Martha thought it was naughtiness,
and not misfortune - so you must not blame her.  She only thought
she was doing her duty.  You know grown-up people often say they do
not like to punish you, and that they only do it for your own good,
and that it hurts them as much as it hurts you - and this is really
very often the truth.
 
Martha certainly hated having to punish the children quite as much
as they hated to be punished.  For one thing, she knew what a noise
there would be in the house all day.  And she had other reasons.
 
'I declare,' she said to the cook, 'it seems almost a shame keeping
of them indoors this lovely day; but they are that audacious,
they'll be walking in with their heads knocked off some of these
days, if I don't put my foot down.  You make them a cake for tea
to-morrow, dear.  And we'll have Baby along of us soon as we've got
a bit forrard with our work.  Then they can have a good romp with
him out of the way.  Now, Eliza, come, get on with them beds. 
Here's ten o'clock nearly, and no rabbits caught!'
 
People say that in Kent when they mean 'and no work done'.
 
So all the others were kept in, but Robert, as I have said, was
allowed to go out for half an hour to get something they all
wanted.  And that, of course, was the day's wish.
He had no difficulty in finding the Sand-fairy, for the day was
already so hot that it had actually, for the first time, come out
of its own accord, and it was sitting in a sort of pool of soft
sand, stretching itself, and trimming its whiskers, and turning its
snail's eyes round and round.
 
'Ha!' it said when its left eye saw Robert; 'I've been looking out
for you.  Where are the rest of you?  Not smashed themselves up
with those wings, I hope?'
 
'No,' said Robert; 'but the wings got us into a row, just like all
the wishes always do.  So the others are kept indoors, and I was
only let out for half-an-hour - to get the wish.  So please let me
wish as quickly as I can.'
 
'Wish away,' said the Psammead, twisting itself round in the sand. 
But Robert couldn't wish away.  He forgot all the things he had
been thinking about, and nothing would come into his head but
little things for himself, like toffee, a foreign stamp album, or
a clasp- knife with three blades and a corkscrew.  He sat down to
think better, but it was no use.  He could only think of things the
others would not have cared for - such as a football, or a pair of
leg-guards, or to be able to lick Simpkins minor thoroughly when he
went back to school.
 
'Well,' said the Psammead at last, 'you'd better hurry up with that
wish of yours.  Time flies.'
 
'I know it does,' said Robert.  'I can't think what to wish for. 
I wish you could give one of the others their wish without their
having to come here to ask for it.  Oh, DON'T!'
 
But it was too late.  The Psammead had blown itself out to about
three times its proper size, and now it collapsed like a pricked
bubble, and with a deep sigh leaned back against the edge of its
sand-pool, quite faint with the effort.
 
'There!' it said in a weak voice; 'it was tremendously hard - but
I did it.  Run along home, or they're sure to wish for something
silly before you get there.'
 
They were - quite sure; Robert felt this, and as he ran home his
mind was deeply occupied with the sort of wishes he might find they
had wished in his absence.  They might wish for rabbits, or white
mice, or chocolate, or a fine day to-morrow, or even - and that was
most likely - someone might have said, 'I do wish to goodness
Robert would hurry up.'  Well, he WAS hurrying up, and so they
would have their wish, and the day would be wasted.  Then he tried
to think what they could wish for - something that would be amusing
indoors.  That had been his own difficulty from the beginning.  So
few things are amusing indoors when the sun is shining outside and
you mayn't go out, however much you want to.  Robert was running as
fast as he could, but when he turned the corner that ought to have
brought him within sight of the architect's nightmare - the
ornamental iron-work on the top of the house - he opened his eyes
so wide that he had to drop into a walk; for you cannot run with
your eyes wide open.  Then suddenly he stopped short, for there was
no house to be seen.  The front-garden railings were gone too, and
where the house had stood - Robert rubbed his eyes and looked
again.  Yes, the others HAD wished - there was no doubt about that
- and they must have wished that they lived in a castle; for there
the castle stood black and stately, and very tall and broad, with
battlements and lancet windows, and eight great towers; and, where
the garden and the orchard had been, there were white things dotted
like mushrooms.  Robert walked slowly on, and as he got nearer he
saw that these were tents) and men in armour were walking about
among the tents - crowds and crowds of them.
 
'Oh, crikey!' said Robert fervently.  'They HAVE!  They've wished
for a castle, and it's being besieged!  It's just like that
Sand-fairy!  I wish we'd never seen the beastly thing!'
 
At the little window above the great gateway, across the moat that
now lay where the garden had been but half an hour ago, someone was
waving something pale dust-coloured.  Robert thought it was one of
Cyril's handkerchiefs.  They had never been white since the day
when he had upset the bottle of 'Combined Toning and Fixing
Solution' into the drawer where they were.  Robert waved back, and
immediately felt that he had been unwise.  For his signal had been
seen by the besieging force, and two men in steel-caps were coming
towards him.  They had high brown boots on their long legs, and
they came towards him with such great strides that Robert
remembered the shortness of his own legs and did not run away.  He
knew it would be useless to himself, and he feared it might be
irritating to the foe.  So he stood still, and the two men seemed
quite pleased with him.
 
'By my halidom,' said one, 'a brave varlet this!'
 
Robert felt pleased at being CALLED brave, and somehow it made him
FEEL brave.  He passed over the 'varlet'.  It was the way people
talked in historical romances for the young, he knew, and it was
evidently not meant for rudeness.  He only hoped he would be able
to understand what they said to him.  He had not always been able
quite to follow the conversations in the historical romances for
the young.
 
'His garb is strange,' said the other.  'Some outlandish treachery,
belike.'
 
'Say, lad, what brings thee hither?'
 
Robert knew this meant, 'Now then, youngster, what are you up to
here, eh?' - so he said:
 
'If you please, I want to go home.'
 
'Go, then!' said the man in the longest boots; 'none hindereth, and
nought lets us to follow.  Zooks!' he added in a cautious
undertone, 'I misdoubt me but he beareth tidings to the besieged.'
 
'Where dwellest thou, young knave?' inquired the man with the
largest steel-cap.
 
'Over there,' said Robert; and directly he had said it he knew he
ought to have said 'Yonder!'
 
'Ha - sayest so?' rejoined the longest boots.  'Come hither, boy. 
This is a matter for our leader.'
 
And to the leader Robert was dragged forthwith - by the reluctant
ear.
 
The leader was the most glorious creature Robert had ever seen.  He
was exactly like the pictures Robert had so often admired in the
historical romances.  He had armour, and a helmet, and a horse, and
a crest, and feathers, and a shield, and a lance, and a sword.  His
armour and his weapons were all, I am almost sure, of quite
different periods.  The shield was thirteenth-century, while the
sword was of the pattern used in the Peninsular War.  The cuirass
was of the time of Charles I, and the helmet dated from the Second
Crusade.  The arms on the shield were very grand - three red
running lions on a blue ground.  The tents were of the latest brand
and the whole appearance of camp, army, and leader might have been
a shock to some.  But Robert was dumb with admiration, and it all
seemed to him perfectly correct, because he knew no more of
heraldry or archaeology than the gifted artists who usually drew
the pictures for the historical romances.  The scene was indeed
'exactly like a picture'.  He admired it all so much that he felt
braver than ever.
 
'Come hither, lad,' said the glorious leader, when the men in
Cromwellian steel-caps had said a few low eager words.  And he took
off his helmet, because he could not see properly with it on.  He
had a kind face, and long fair hair.  'Have no fear; thou shalt
take no scathe,' he said.
 
Robert was glad of that.  He wondered what 'scathe' was, and if it
was nastier than the senna tea which he had to take sometimes.
 
'Unfold thy tale without alarm,' said the leader kindly.  'Whence
comest thou, and what is thine intent?'
 
'My what?' said Robert.
 
'What seekest thou to accomplish?  What is thine errand, that thou
wanderest here alone among these rough men-at-arms?  Poor child,
thy mother's heart aches for thee e'en now, I'll warrant me.'
 
'I don't think so,' said Robert; 'you see, she doesn't know I'm
out.'
 
The leader wiped away a manly tear, exactly as a leader in a
historical romance would have done, and said:
 
'Fear not to speak the truth, my child; thou hast nought to fear
from Wulfric de Talbot.'
 
Robert had a wild feeling that this glorious leader of the
besieging party - being himself part of a wish - would be able to
understand better than Martha, or the gipsies, or the policeman in
Rochester, or the clergyman of yesterday, the true tale of the
wishes and the Psammead.  The only difficulty was that he knew he
could never remember enough 'quothas' and 'beshrew me's', and
things like that, to make his talk sound like the talk of a boy in
a historical romance.  However, he began boldly enough, with a
sentence straight out of Ralph de Courcy; or, The Boy Crusader.  He
said:
 
'Grammercy for thy courtesy, fair sir knight.  The fact is, it's
like this - and I hope you're not in a hurry, because the story's
rather a breather.  Father and mother are away, and when we were
down playing in the sand-pits we found a Psammead.'
 
'I cry thee mercy!  A Sammyadd?' said the knight.
 
'Yes, a sort of - of fairy, or enchanter - yes, that's it, an
enchanter; and he said we could have a wish every day, and we
wished first to be beautiful.'
 
'Thy wish was scarce granted,' muttered one of the men-at-arms,
looking at Robert, who went on as if he had not heard, though he
thought the remark very rude indeed.
 
'And then we wished for money - treasure, you know; but we couldn't
spend it.  And yesterday we wished for wings, and we got them, and
we had a ripping time to begin with -'
 
'Thy speech is strange and uncouth,' said Sir Wulfric de Talbot. 
'Repeat thy words - what hadst thou?'
 
'A ripping - I mean a jolly - no - we were contented with our lot
- that's what I mean; only, after that we got into an awful fix.'
 
'What is a fix?  A fray, mayhap?'
 
'No - not a fray.  A - a - a tight place.'
 
'A dungeon?  Alas for thy youthful fettered limbs!' said the
knight, with polite sympathy.
 
'It wasn't a dungeon.  We just - just encountered undeserved
misfortunes,' Robert explained, 'and to-day we are punished by not
being allowed to go out.  That's where I live,' - he pointed to the
castle.  'The others are in there, and they're not allowed to go
out.  It's all the Psammead's - I mean the enchanter's fault.  I
wish we'd never seen him.'
 
'He is an enchanter of might?'
 
'Oh yes - of might and main.  Rather!'
 
'And thou deemest that it is the spells of the enchanter whom thou
hast angered that have lent strength to the besieging party,' said
the gallant leader; 'but know thou that Wulfric de Talbot needs no
enchanter's aid to lead his followers to victory.'
 
'No, I'm sure you don't,' said Robert, with hasty courtesy; 'of
course not - you wouldn't, you know.  But, all the same, it's
partly his fault, but we're most to blame.  You couldn't have done
anything if it hadn't been for us.'
 
'How now, bold boy?' asked Sir Wulfric haughtily.  'Thy speech is
dark, and eke scarce courteous.  Unravel me this riddle!'
 
'Oh,' said Robert desperately, 'of course you don't know it, but
you're not REAL at all.  You're only here because the others must
have been idiots enough to wish for a castle - and when the sun
sets you'll just vanish away, and it'll be all right.'
 
The captain and the men-at-arms exchanged glances, at first
pitying, and then sterner, as the longest-booted man said, 'Beware,
noble my lord; the urchin doth but feign madness to escape from our
clutches.  Shall we not bind him?'
 
'I'm no more mad than you are,' said Robert angrily, 'perhaps not
so much - only, I was an idiot to think you'd understand anything. 
Let me go - I haven't done anything to you.'
 
'Whither?' asked the knight, who seemed to have believed all the
enchanter story till it came to his own share in it.  'Whither
wouldst thou wend?'
 
'Home, of course.'  Robert pointed to the castle.
 
'To carry news of succour?  Nay!'
 
'All right then,' said Robert, struck by a sudden idea; 'then let
me go somewhere else.'  His mind sought eagerly among his memories
of the historical romance.
 
'Sir Wulfric de Talbot,' he said slowly, 'should think foul scorn
to - to keep a chap - I mean one who has done him no hurt - when he
wants to cut off quietly - I mean to depart without violence.'
 
'This to my face!  Beshrew thee for a knave!' replied Sir Wulfric. 
But the appeal seemed to have gone home.  'Yet thou sayest sooth,'
he added thoughtfully.  'Go where thou wilt,' he added nobly, 'thou
art free.  Wulfric de Talbot warreth not with babes, and Jakin here
shall bear thee company.'
'All right,' said Robert wildly.  'Jakin will enjoy himself, I
think.  Come on, Jakin.  Sir Wulfric, I salute thee.'
 
He saluted after the modern military manner, and set off running to
the sand-pit, Jakin's long boots keeping up easily.
 
He found the Fairy.  He dug it up, he woke it up,
 
he implored it to give him one more wish.
 
'I've done two to-day already,' it grumbled, 'and one was as stiff
a bit of work as ever I did.'
 
'Oh, do, do, do, do, DO!' said Robert, while Jakin looked on with
an expression of open-mouthed horror at the strange beast that
talked, and gazed with its snail's eyes at him.
 
'Well, what is it?' snapped the Psammead, with cross sleepiness.
 
'I wish I was with the others,' said Robert.  And the Psammead
began to swell.  Robert never thought of wishing the castle and the
siege away.  Of course he knew they had all come out of a wish, but
swords and daggers and pikes and lances seemed much too real to be
wished away.  Robert lost consciousness for an instant.  When he
opened his eyes the others were crowding round him.
 
'We never heard you come in,' they said.  'How awfully jolly of you
to wish it to give us our wish!'
 
'Of course we understood that was what you'd done.'
 
'But you ought to have told us.  Suppose we'd wished something
silly.'
 
'Silly?' said Robert, very crossly indeed.  'How much sillier could
you have been, I'd like to know?  You nearly settled ME - I can
tell you.'
 
Then he told his story, and the others admitted that it certainly
had been rough on him.  But they praised his courage and cleverness
so much that he presently got back his lost temper, and felt braver
than ever, and consented to be captain of the besieged force.
 
'We haven't done anything yet,' said Anthea comfortably; 'we waited
for you.  We're going to shoot at them through these little
loopholes with the bow and arrows uncle gave you, and you shall
have first shot.'
 
'I don't think I would,' said Robert cautiously; 'you don't know
what they're like near to.  They've got REAL bows and arrows - an
awful length - and swords and pikes and daggers, and all sorts of
sharp things.  They're all quite, quite real.  It's not just a - a
picture, or a vision, or anything; they can hurt us - or kill us
even, I shouldn't wonder.  I can feel my ear all sore still.  Look
here - have you explored the castle?  Because I think we'd better
let them alone as long as they let us alone.  I heard that Jakin
man say they weren't going to attack till just before sundown.  We
can be getting ready for the attack.  Are there any soldiers in the
castle to defend it?'
 
'We don't know,' said Cyril.  'You see, directly I'd wished we were
in a besieged castle, everything seemed to go upside down, and,when
it came straight we looked out of the window, and saw the camp and
things and you - and of course we kept on looking at everything. 
Isn't this room jolly?  It's as real as real!'
 
It was.  It was square, with stone walls four feet thick, and great
beams for ceiling.  A low door at the corner led to a flight of
steps, up and down.  The children went down; they found themselves
in a great arched gatehouse - the enormous doors were shut and
barred.  There was a window in a little room at the bottom of the
round turret up which the stair wound, rather larger than the other
windows, and looking through it they saw that the drawbridge was up
and the portcullis down; the moat looked very wide and deep. 
Opposite the great door that led to the moat was another great
door, with a little door in it.  The children went through this,
and found themselves in a big paved courtyard, with the great grey
walls of the castle rising dark and heavy on all four sides.
 
Near the middle of the courtyard stood Martha, moving her right
hand backwards and forwards in the air.  The cook was stooping down
and moving her hands, also in a very curious way.  But.  the oddest
and at the same time most terrible thing was the Lamb, who was
sitting on nothing, about three feet from the ground, laughing
happily.
 
The children ran towards him.  Just as Anthea was reaching out her
arms to take him, Martha said crossly, 'Let him alone - do, miss,
when he is good.'
 
'But what's he DOING?' said Anthea.
 
'Doing?  Why, a-setting in his high chair as good as gold, a
precious, watching me doing of the ironing.  Get along with you, do
- my iron's cold again.'
 
She went towards the cook, and seemed to poke an invisible fire
with an unseen poker - the cook seemed to be putting an unseen dish
into an invisible oven.
 
'Run along with you, do,' she said; 'I'm behindhand as it is.  You
won't get no dinner if you come a-hindering of me like this.  Come,
off you goes, or I'll pin a dishcloth to some of your tails.'
 
'You're sure the Lamb's all right?' asked Jane anxiously.
 
'Right as ninepence, if you don't come unsettling of him.  I
thought you'd like to be rid of him for to-day; but take him, if
you want him, for gracious' sake.'
 
'No, no,' they said, and hastened away.  They would have to defend
the castle presently, and the Lamb was safer even suspended in
mid-air in an invisible kitchen than in the guardroom of a besieged
castle.  They went through the first doorway they came to, and sat
down helplessly on a wooden bench that ran along the room inside.
 
'How awful!' said Anthea and Jane together; and Jane added, 'I feel
as if I was in a mad asylum.'
 
'What does it mean?' Anthea said.  'It's creepy; I don't like it. 
I wish we'd wished for something plain - a rocking-horse, or a
donkey, or something.'
 
'It's no use wishing NOW,' said Robert bitterly; and Cyril said:
 
'Do dry up a sec; I want to think.'
 
He buried his face in his hands, and the others looked about them. 
They were in a long room with an arched roof.  There were wooden
tables along it, and one across at the end of the room, on a sort
of raised platform.  The room was very dim and dark.  The floor was
strewn with dry things like sticks, and they did not smell nice.
 
Cyril sat up suddenly and said:
 
'Look here - it's all right.  I think it's like this.  You know, we
wished that the servants shouldn't notice any difference when we
got wishes.  And nothing happens to the Lamb unless we specially
wish it to.  So of course they don't notice the castle or anything. 
But then the castle is on the same place where our house was - is,
I mean - and the servants have to go on being in the house, or else
they would notice.  But you can't have a castle mixed up with our
house - and so we can't see the house, because we see the castle;
and they can't see the castle, because they go on seeing the house;
and so -'
 
'Oh, DON'T!' said Jane; 'you make my head go all swimmy, like being
on a roundabout.  It doesn't matter!  Only, I hope we shall be able
to see our dinner, that's all - because if it's invisible it'll be
unfeelable as well, and then we can't eat it!  I KNOW it will,
because I tried to feel if I could feel the Lamb's chair, and there
was nothing under him at all but air.  And we can't eat air, and I
feel just as if I hadn't had any breakfast for years and years.'
 
'It's no use thinking about it,' said Anthea.  'Let's go on
exploring.  Perhaps we might find something to eat.'
 
This lighted hope in every breast, and they went on exploring the
castle.  But though it was the most perfect and delightful castle
you can possibly imagine, and furnished in the most complete and
beautiful manner, neither food nor men-at-arms were to be found in
it.
'If only you'd thought of wishing to be besieged in a castle
thoroughly garrisoned and provisioned!' said Jane reproachfully.
 
'You can't think of everything, you know,' said Anthea.  'I should
think it must be nearly dinner-time by now.'
 
It wasn't; but they hung about watching the strange movements of
the servants in the middle of the courtyard, because, of course,
they couldn't be sure where the dining-room of the invisible house
was.  Presently they saw Martha carrying an invisible tray across
the courtyard, for it seemed that, by the most fortunate accident,
the dining-room of the house and the banqueting-hall of the castle
were in the same place.  But oh, how their hearts sank when they
perceived that the tray was invisible!
 
They waited in wretched silence while Martha went through the form
of carving an unseen leg of mutton and serving invisible greens and
potatoes with a spoon that no one could see.  When she had left the
room, the children looked at the empty table, and then at each
other.
 
'This is worse than anything,' said Robert, who had not till now
been particularly keen on his dinner.
 
'I'm not so very hungry,' said Anthea, trying to make the best of
things, as usual.
 
Cyril tightened his belt ostentatiously.  Jane burst into tears.
 
 
 
CHAPTER 7
A SIEGE AND BED
 
 
The children were sitting in the gloomy banqueting-hall, at the end
of one of the long bare wooden tables.  There was now no hope. 
Martha had brought in the dinner, and the dinner was invisible, and
unfeelable too; for, when they rubbed their hands along the table,
they knew but too well that for them there was nothing there BUT
table.
 
Suddenly Cyril felt in his pocket.
 
'Right, oh!' he cried.  'Look here!  Biscuits.'
 
Rather broken and crumbled, certainly, but still biscuits.  Three
whole ones, and a generous handful of crumbs and fragments.
 
'I got them this morning - cook - and I'd quite forgotten,' he
explained as he divided them with scrupulous fairness into four
heaps.
 
They were eaten in a happy silence, though they tasted a little
oddly, because they had been in Cyril's pocket all the morning with
a hank of tarred twine, some green fir-cones, and a ball of
cobbler's wax.
 
'Yes, but look here, Squirrel,' said Robert; 'you're so clever at
explaining about invisibleness and all that.  How is it the
biscuits are here, and all the bread and meat and things have
disappeared?'
 
'I don't know,' said Cyril after a pause, 'unless it's because WE
had them.  Nothing about us has changed.  Everything's in my pocket
all right.'
 
'Then if we HAD the mutton it would be real,' said Robert.  'Oh,
don't I wish we could find it!'
 
'But we can't find it.  I suppose it isn't ours till we've got it
in our mouths.'
 
'Or in our pockets,' said Jane, thinking of the biscuits.
 
'Who puts mutton in their pockets, goose-girl?' said Cyril.  'But
I know - at any rate, I'll try it!'
 
He leaned over the table with his face about an inch from it, and
kept opening and shutting his mouth as if he were taking bites out
of air.
 
'It's no good,' said Robert in deep dejection.  'You'll only -
Hullo!'
 
Cyril stood up with a grin of triumph, holding a square piece of
bread in his mouth.  It was quite real.  Everyone saw it.  It is
true that, directly he bit a piece off, the rest vanished; but it
was all right, because he knew he had it in his hand though he
could neither see nor feel it.  He took another bite from the air
between his fingers, and it turned into bread as he bit.  The next
moment all the others were following his example, and opening and
shutting their mouths an inch or so from the bare-looking table. 
Robert captured a slice of mutton, and - but I think I will draw a
veil over the rest of this painful scene.  It is enough to say that
they all had enough mutton, and that when Martha came to change the
plates she said she had never seen such a mess in all her born
days.
 
The pudding was, fortunately, a plain suet roly-poly, and in answer
to Martha's questions the children all with one accord said that
they would NOT have treacle on it - nor jam, nor sugar - 'Just
plain, please,' they said.  Martha said, 'Well, I never - what
next, I wonder!' and went away.
 
Then ensued another scene on which I will not dwell, for nobody
looks nice picking up slices of suet pudding from the table in its
mouth, like a dog.
The great thing, after all, was that they had had dinner; and now
everyone felt more courage to prepare for the attack that was to be
delivered before sunset.  Robert, as captain, insisted on climbing
to the top of one of the towers to reconnoitre, so up they all
went.  And now they could see all round the castle, and could see,
too, that beyond the moat, on every side, the tents of the
besieging party were pitched.  Rather uncomfortable shivers ran
down the children's backs as they saw that all the men were very
busy cleaning or sharpening their arms, re-stringing their bows,
and polishing their shields.  A large party came along the road,
with horses dragging along the great trunk of a tree; and Cyril
felt quite pale, because he knew this was for a battering-ram.
 
'What a good thing we've got a moat,' he said; 'and what a good
thing the drawbridge is up - I should never have known how to work
it.'
 
'Of course it would be up in a besieged castle.'
 
'You'd think there ought to have been soldiers in it, wouldn't
you?' said Robert.
 
'You see you don't know how long it's been besieged,' said Cyril
darkly; 'perhaps most of the brave defenders were killed quite
early in the siege and all the provisions eaten, and now there are
only a few intrepid survivors - that's us, and we are going to
defend it to the death.'
 
'How do you begin - defending to the death, I mean?' asked Anthea.
 
'We ought to be heavily armed - and then shoot at them when they
advance to the attack.'
 
'They used to pour boiling lead down on besiegers when they got too
close,' said Anthea.  'Father showed me the holes on purpose for
pouring it down through at Bodiam Castle.  And there are holes like
it in the gate-tower here.'
 
'I think I'm glad it's only a game; it IS only a game, isn't it?'
said Jane.
 
But no one answered.
 
The children found plenty of strange weapons in the castle, and if
they were armed at all it was soon plain that they would be, as
Cyril said, 'armed heavily' - for these swords and lances and
crossbows were far too weighty even for Cyril's manly strength; and
as for the longbows, none of the children could even begin to bend
them.  The daggers were better; but Jane hoped that the besiegers
would not come close enough for daggers to be of any use.
 
'Never mind, we can hurl them like javelins,' said Cyril, 'or drop
them on people's heads.  I say - there are lots of stones on the
other side of the courtyard.  If we took some of those up, just to
drop on their heads if they were to try swimming the moat.'
 
So a heap of stones grew apace, up in the room above the gate; and
another heap, a shiny spiky dangerous-looking heap, of daggers and
knives.
 
As Anthea was crossing the courtyard for more stones, a sudden and
valuable idea came to her.  She went to Martha and said, 'May we
have just biscuits for tea?  We're going to play at besieged
castles, and we'd like the biscuits to provision the garrison.  Put
mine in my pocket, please, my hands are so dirty.  And I'll tell
the others to fetch theirs.'
 
This was indeed a happy thought, for now with four generous
handfuls of air, which turned to biscuit as Martha crammed it into
their pockets, the garrison was well provisioned till sundown.
 
They brought up some iron pots of cold water to pour on the
besiegers instead of hot lead, with which the castle did not seem
to be provided.
 
The afternoon passed with wonderful quickness.  It was very
exciting; but none of them, except Robert, could feel all the time
that this was real deadly dangerous work.  To the others, who had
only seen the camp and the besiegers from a distance, the whole
thing seemed half a game of make-believe, and half a splendidly
distinct and perfectly safe dream.  But it was only now and then
that Robert could feel this.
 
When it seemed to be tea-time the biscuits were eaten with water
from the deep well in the courtyard, drunk out of horns.  Cyril
insisted on putting by eight of the biscuits, in case anyone should
feel faint in stress of battle.
 
just as he was putting away the reserve biscuits in a sort of
little stone cupboard without a door, a sudden sound made him drop
three.  It was the loud fierce cry of a trumpet.
 
'You see it IS real,' said Robert, 'and they are going to attack.'
 
All rushed to the narrow windows.
 
'Yes,' said Robert, 'they're all coming out of their tents and
moving about like ants.  There's that Jakin dancing about where the
bridge joins on.  I wish he could see me put my tongue out at him!
Yah!'
 
The others were far too pale to wish to put their tongues out at
anybody.  They looked at Robert with surprised respect.  Anthea
said:
 
'You really ARE brave, Robert.'
 
'Rot!' Cyril's pallor turned to redness now, all in a minute. 
'He's been getting ready to be brave all the afternoon.  And I
wasn't ready, that's all.  I shall be braver than he is in half a
jiffy.'
 
'Oh dear!' said Jane, 'what does it matter which of
you is the bravest?  I think Cyril was a perfect silly to wish for
a castle, and I don't want to play.'
 
'It ISN'T' - Robert was beginning sternly, but Anthea
interrupted -
 
 
'Oh yes, you do,' she said coaxingly; 'it's a very nice game,
really, because they can't possibly get in, and if they do the
women and children are always spared by civilized armies.'
 
'But are you quite, quite sure they ARE civilized?' asked Jane,
panting.  'They seem to be such a long time ago.'
 
'Of course they are.'  Anthea pointed cheerfully through the narrow
window.  'Why, look at the little flags on their lances, how bright
they are - and how fine the leader is!  Look, that's him - isn't
it, Robert? - on the grey horse.'
 
Jane consented to look, and the scene was almost too pretty to be
alarming.  The green turf, the white tents, the flash of pennoned
lances, the gleam of armour, and the bright colours of scarf and
tunic - it was just like a splendid coloured picture.  The trumpets
were sounding, and when the trumpets stopped for breath the
children could hear the cling-clang of armour and the murmur of
voices.
 
A trumpeter came forward to the edge of the moat, which now seemed
very much narrower than at first, and blew the longest and loudest
blast they had yet heard.  When the blaring noise had died away, a
man who was with the trumpeter shouted:
 
'What ho, within there!' and his voice came plainly to the garrison
in the gate-house.
 
'Hullo there!' Robert bellowed back at once.
 
'In the name of our Lord the King, and of our good lord and trusty
leader Sir Wulfric de Talbot, we summon this castle to surrender -
on pain of fire and sword and no quarter.  Do ye surrender?'
 
'No,' bawled Robert, 'of course we don't!  Never,
 
Never, NEVER!'
 
The man answered back:
 
'Then your fate be on your own heads.'
 
'Cheer,' said Robert in a fierce whisper.  'Cheer to show them we
aren't afraid, and rattle the daggers to make more noise.  One,
two, three!  Hip, hip, hooray!  Again - Hip, hip, hooray!  One more
- Hip, hip, hooray!'  The cheers were rather high and weak, but the
rattle of the daggers lent them strength and depth.
 
There was another shout from the camp across the moat - and then
the beleaguered fortress felt that the attack had indeed begun.
 
It was getting rather dark in the room above the great gate, and
Jane took a very little courage as she remembered that sunset
couldn't be far off now.
 
'The moat is dreadfully thin,' said Anthea.
 
'But they can't get into the castle even if they do swim over,'
said Robert.  And as he spoke he heard feet on the stair outside -
heavy feet and the clank of steel.  No one breathed for a moment. 
The steel and the feet went on up the turret stairs.  Then Robert
sprang softly to the door.  He pulled off his shoes.
 
'Wait here,' he whispered, and stole quickly and softly after the
boots and the spur-clank.  He peeped into the upper room.  The man
was there - and it was Jakin, all dripping with moat-water, and he
was fiddling about with the machinery which Robert felt sure worked
the drawbridge.  Robert banged the door suddenly, and turned the
great key in the lock, just as Jakin sprang to the inside of the
door.  Then he tore downstairs and into the little turret at the
foot of the tower where the biggest window was.
 
'We ought to have defended THIS!' he cried to the others as they
followed him.  He was just in time.  Another man had swum over, and
his fingers were on the window-ledge.  Robert never knew how the
man had managed to climb up out of the water.  But he saw the
clinging fingers, and hit them as hard as he could with an iron bar
that he caught up from the floor.  The man fell with a plop-plash
into the moat-water.  In another moment Robert was outside the
little room, had banged its door and was shooting home the enormous
bolts, and calling to Cyril to lend a hand.
 
Then they stood in the arched gate-house, breathing hard and
looking at each other.  jane's mouth was open.
 
'Cheer up, jenny,' said Robert - 'it won't last much longer.'
 
There was a creaking above, and something rattled and shook.  The
pavement they stood on seemed to tremble.  Then a crash told them
that the drawbridge had been lowered to its place.
 
'That's that beast Jakin,' said Robert.  'There's still the
portcullis; I'm almost certain that's worked from lower down.'
 
And now the drawbridge rang and echoed hollowly to the hoofs of
horses and the tramp of armed men.
'Up - quick!' cried Robert.  'Let's drop things on them.'
 
Even the girls were feeling almost brave now.  They followed Robert
quickly, and under his directions began to drop stones out through
the long narrow windows.  There was a confused noise below, and
some groans.
 
'Oh dear!' said Anthea, putting down the stone she was just going
to drop out.  'I'm afraid we've hurt somebody!'
 
Robert caught up the stone in a fury.
 
'I should just hope we HAD!' he said; 'I'd give something for a
jolly good boiling kettle of lead.  Surrender, indeed!'
 
And now came more tramping, and a pause, and then the thundering
thump of the battering-ram.  And the little room was almost quite
dark.
 
'We've held it,' cried Robert, 'we won't surrender!  The sun MUST
set in a minute.  Here - they're all jawing underneath again.  Pity
there's no time to get more stones!  Here, pour that water down on
them.  It's no good, of course, but they'll hate it.'
 
'Oh dear!' said Jane; 'don't you think we'd better surrender?'
 
'Never!' said Robert; 'we'll have a parley if you like, but we'll
never surrender.  Oh, I'll be a soldier when I grow up - you just
see if I don't.  I won't go into the Civil Service, whatever anyone
says.'
 
'Let's wave a handkerchief and ask for a parley,' Jane pleaded.  'I
don't believe the sun's going to set to-night at all.'
 
'Give them the water first - the brutes!' said the bloodthirsty
Robert.  So Anthea tilted the pot over the nearest lead-hole, and
poured.  They heard a splash below, but no one below seemed to have
felt it.  And again the ram battered the great door.  Anthea
paused.
 
'How idiotic,' said Robert, lying flat on the floor and putting one
eye to the lead hole.  'Of course the holes go straight down into
the gate-house - that's for when the enemy has got past the door
and the portcullis, and almost all is lost.  Here, hand me the
pot.'  He crawled on to the three-cornered window-ledge in the
middle of the wall, and, taking the pot from Anthea, poured the
water out through the arrow-slit.
 
And as he began to pour, the noise of the battering-ram and the
trampling of the foe and the shouts of 'Surrender!' and 'De Talbot
for ever!' all suddenly stopped and went out like the snuff of a
candle; the little dark room seemed to whirl round and turn
topsy-turvy, and when the children came to themselves there they
were safe and sound, in the big front bedroom of their own house -
the house with the ornamental nightmare iron-top to the roof.
 
They all crowded to the window and looked out.  The moat and the
tents and the besieging force were all gone - and there was the
garden with its tangle of dahlias and marigolds and asters and late
roses, and the spiky iron railings and the quiet white road.
 
Everyone drew a deep breath.
 
'And that's all right!' said Robert.  'I told you so!  And, I say,
we didn't surrender, did we?'
 
'Aren't you glad now I wished for a castle?' asked Cyril.
 
'I think I am NOW,' said Anthea slowly.  'But I wouldn't wish for
it again, I think, Squirrel dear!'
 
'Oh, it was simply splendid!' said Jane unexpectedly.  'I wasn't
frightened a bit.'
 
'Oh, I say!' Cyril was beginning, but Anthea stopped him.
 
'Look here,' she said, 'it's just come into my head.  This is the
very first thing we've wished for that hasn't got us into a row. 
And there hasn't been the least little scrap of a row about this. 
Nobody's raging downstairs, we're safe and sound, we've had an
awfully jolly day - at least, not jolly exactly, but you know what
I mean.  And we know now how brave Robert is - and Cyril too, of
course,' she added hastily, 'and Jane as well.  And we haven't got
into a row with a single grown-up.'
 
The door was opened suddenly and fiercely.
 
'You ought to be ashamed of yourselves,' said the voice of Martha,
and they could tell by her voice that she was very angry indeed. 
'I thought you couldn't last through the day without getting up to
some doggery!  A person can't take a breath of air on the front
doorstep but you must be emptying the wash-hand jug on to their
heads!  Off you go to bed, the lot of you, and try to get up better
children in the morning.  Now then - don't let me have to tell you
twice.  If I find any of you not in bed in ten minutes I'll let you
know it, that's all!  A new cap, and everything!'
 
She flounced out amid a disregarded chorus of regrets and
apologies.  The children were very sorry, but really it was not
their faults.  You can't help it if you are pouring water on a
besieging foe, and your castle suddenly changes into your house -
and everything changes with it except the water, and that happens
to fall on somebody else's clean cap.
 
'I don't know why the water didn't change into nothing, though,'
said Cyril.
 
'Why should it?' asked Robert.  'Water's water all the world over.'
'I expect the castle well was the same as ours in the stable-yard,'
said Jane.  And that was really the case.
 
'I thought we couldn't get through a wish-day without a row,' said
Cyril; 'it was much too good to be true.  Come on, Bobs, my
military hero.  If we lick into bed sharp she won't be so frumious,
and perhaps she'll bong us up some supper.  I'm jolly hungry!
Good-night, kids.'
 
'Good-night.  I hope the castle won't come creeping back in the
night,' said Jane.
 
'Of course it won't,' said Anthea briskly, 'but Martha will - not
in the night, but in a minute.  Here, turn round, I'll get that
knot out of your pinafore strings.'
 
'Wouldn't it have been degrading for Sir Wulfric de Talbot,' said
Jane dreamily, 'if he could have known that half the besieged
garrison wore pinafores?'
 
'And the other half knickerbockers.  Yes - frightfully.  Do stand
still - you're only tightening the knot,' said Anthea.
 
 
 
CHAPTER 8
BIGGER THAN THE BAKER'S BOY
 
 
'Look here,' said Cyril.  'I've got an idea.'
 
'Does it hurt much?' said Robert sympathetically.
 
'Don't be a jackape!  I'm not humbugging.'
 
'Shut up, Bobs!' said Anthea.
 
'Silence for the Squirrel's oration,' said Robert.
 
Cyril balanced himself on the edge of the water-butt in the
backyard, where they all happened to be, and spoke.
 
'Friends, Romans, countrymen - and women - we found a Sammyadd.  We
have had wishes.  We've had wings, and being beautiful as the day
- ugh! - that was pretty jolly beastly if you like - and wealth and
castles, and that rotten gipsy business with the Lamb.  But we're
no forrader.  We haven't really got anything worth having for our
wishes.'
 
'We've had things happening,' said Robert; 'that's always
something.'
 
'It's not enough, unless they're the right things,' said Cyril
firmly.  'Now I've been thinking -'
'Not really?' whispered Robert.
 
'In the silent what's-its-names of the night.  It's like suddenly
being asked something out of history - the date of the Conquest or
something; you know it all right all the time, but when you're
asked it all goes out of your head.  Ladies and gentlemen, you know
jolly well that when we're all rotting about in the usual way heaps
of things keep cropping up, and then real earnest wishes come into
the heads of the beholder -'
 
'Hear, hear!' said Robert.
 
'- of the beholder, however stupid he is,' Cyril went on.  'Why,
even Robert might happen to think of a really useful wish if he
didn't injure his poor little brains trying so hard to think.  -
Shut up, Bobs, I tell you! - You'll have the whole show over.'
 
A struggle on the edge of a water-butt is exciting, but damp.  When
it was over, and the boys were partially dried, Anthea said:
 
'It really was you began it, Bobs.  Now honour is satisfied) do let
Squirrel go on.  We're wasting the whole morning.'
 
'Well then,' said Cyril, still wringing the water out of the tails
of his jacket, 'I'll call it pax if Bobs will.'
 
'Pax then,' said Robert sulkily.  'But I've got a lump as big as a
cricket ball over my eye.'
 
Anthea patiently offered a dust-coloured handkerchief, and Robert
bathed his wounds in silence.  'Now, Squirrel,' she said.
 
'Well then - let's just play bandits, or forts, or soldiers, or any
of the old games.  We're dead sure to think of something if we try
not to.  You always do.'
 
The others consented.  Bandits was hastily chosen for the game. 
'It's as good as anything else,' said Jane gloomily.  It must be
owned that Robert was at first but a half-hearted bandit, but when
Anthea had borrowed from Martha the red-spotted handkerchief in
which the keeper had brought her mushrooms that morning, and had
tied up Robert's head with it so that he could be the wounded hero
who had saved the bandit captain's life the day before, he cheered
up wonderfully.  All were soon armed.  Bows and arrows slung on the
back look well; and umbrellas and cricket stumps stuck through the
belt give a fine impression of the wearer's being armed to the
teeth.  The white cotton hats that men wear in the country nowadays
have a very brigandish effect when a few turkey's feathers are
stuck in them.  The Lamb's mail-cart was covered with a
red-and-blue checked tablecloth, and made an admirable
baggage-wagon.  The Lamb asleep inside it was not at all in the
way.  So the banditti set out along the road that led to the
sand-pit.
 
'We ought to be near the Sammyadd,' said Cyril, 'in case we think
of anything suddenly.'
 
It is all very well to make up your minds to play bandits - or
chess, or ping-pong, or any other agreeable game - but it is not
easy to do it with spirit when all the wonderful wishes you can
think of, or can't think of, are waiting for you round the corner. 
The game was dragging a little, and some of the bandits were
beginning to feel that the others were disagreeable things, and
were saying so candidly, when the baker's boy came along the road
with loaves in a basket.  The opportunity was not one to be lost.
 
'Stand and deliver!' cried Cyril.
 
'Your money or your life!' said Robert.
 
And they stood on each side of the baker's boy.  Unfortunately, he
did not seem to enter into the spirit of the thing at all.  He was
a baker's boy of an unusually large size.  He merely said:
 
'Chuck it now, d'ye hear!' and pushed the bandits aside most
disrespectfully.
 
Then Robert lassoed him with jane's skipping-rope, and instead of
going round his shoulders, as Robert intended, it went round his
feet and tripped him up.  The basket was upset, the beautiful new
loaves went bumping and bouncing all over the dusty chalky road. 
The girls ran to pick them up, and all in a moment Robert and the
baker's boy were fighting it out, man to man, with Cyril to see
fair play, and the skipping-rope twisting round their legs like an
interested snake that wished to be a peacemaker.  It did not
succeed; indeed the way the boxwood handles sprang up and hit the
fighters on the shins and ankles was not at all peace-making.  I
know this is the second fight - or contest - in this chapter, but
I can't help it.  It was that sort of day.  You know yourself there
are days when rows seem to keep on happening, quite without your
meaning them to.  If I were a writer of tales of adventure such as
those which used to appear in The Boys of England when I was young,
of course I should be able to describe the fight, but I cannot do
it.  I never can see what happens during a fight, even when it is
only dogs.  Also, if I had been one of these Boys of England
writers, Robert would have got the best of it.  But I am like
George Washington - I cannot tell a lie, even about a cherry-tree,
much less about a fight, and I cannot conceal from you that Robert
was badly beaten, for the second time that day.  The baker's boy
blacked his other eye, and, being ignorant of the first rules of
fair play and gentlemanly behaviour, he also pulled Robert's hair,
and kicked him on the knee.  Robert always used to say he could
have licked the butcher if it hadn't been for the girls.  But I am
not sure.  Anyway, what happened was this, and very painful it was
to self-respecting boys.
 
Cyril was just tearing off his coat so as to help his brother in
proper style, when Jane threw her arms round his legs and began to
cry and ask him not to go and be beaten too.  That 'too' was very
nice for Robert, as you can imagine - but it was nothing to what he
felt when Anthea rushed in between him and the baker's boy, and
caught that unfair and degraded fighter round the waist, imploring
him not to fight any more.
 
'Oh, don't hurt my brother any more!' she said in floods of tears. 
'He didn't mean it - it's only play.  And I'm sure he's very
sorry.'
 
You see how unfair this was to Robert.  Because, if the baker's boy
had had any right and chivalrous instincts, and had yielded to
Anthea's pleading and accepted her despicable apology, Robert could
not, in honour, have done anything to him at a future time.  But
Robert's fears, if he had any, were soon dispelled.  Chivalry was
a stranger to the breast of the baker's boy.  He pushed Anthea away
very roughly, and he chased Robert with kicks and unpleasant
conversation right down the road to the sand-pit, and there, with
one last kick, he landed him in a heap of sand.
 
'I'D larn you, you young varmint!' he said, and went off to pick up
his loaves and go about his business.  Cyril, impeded by Jane,
could do nothing without hurting her, for she clung round his legs
with the strength of despair.  The baker's boy went off red and
damp about the face; abusive to the last, he called them a pack of
silly idiots, and disappeared round the corner.  Then jane's grasp
loosened.  Cyril turned away in silent dignity to follow Robert,
and the girls followed him, weeping without restraint.
 
It was not a happy party that flung itself down in the sand beside
the sobbing Robert.  For Robert was sobbing - mostly with rage. 
Though of course I know that a really heroic boy is always dry-eyed
after a fight.  But then he always wins, which had not been the
case with Robert.
 
Cyril was angry with Jane; Robert was furious with Anthea; the
girls were miserable; and not one of the four was pleased with the
baker's boy.  There was, as French writers say, 'a silence full of
emotion'.
 
Then Robert dug his toes and his hands into the sand and wriggled
in his rage.  'He'd better wait till I'm grown up - the cowardly
brute!  Beast! - I hate him!  But I'll pay him out.  just because
he's bigger than me.'
 
'You began,' said Jane incautiously.
 
'I know I did, silly - but I was only rotting - and he kicked me -
look here -'
 
Robert tore down a stocking and showed a purple bruise touched up
with red.  'I only wish I was bigger than him, that's all.'
 
He dug his fingers in the sand, and sprang up, for his hand had
touched something furry.  It was the Psammead, of course - 'On the
look-out to make sillies of them as usual,' as Cyril remarked
later.  And of course the next moment Robert's wish was granted,
and he was bigger than the baker's boy.  Oh, but much, much bigger. 
He was bigger than the big policeman who used to be at the crossing
at the Mansion House years ago - the one who was so kind in helping
old ladies over the crossing - and he was the biggest man I have
ever seen, as well as the kindest.  No one had a foot-rule in its
pocket, so Robert could not be measured - but he was taller than
your father would be if he stood on your mother's head, which I am
sure he would never be unkind enough to do.  He must have been ten
or eleven feet high, and as broad as a boy of that height ought to
be.  his Norfolk suit had fortunately grown too, and now he stood
up in it - with one of his enormous stockings turned down to show
the gigantic bruise on his vast leg.  Immense tears of fury still
stood on his flushed giant face.  He looked so surprised, and he
was so large to be wearing an Eton collar, that the others could
not help laughing.
 
'The Sammyadd's done us again,' said Cyril.
 
'Not us - ME,' said Robert.  'If you'd got any decent feeling you'd
try to make it make you the same size.  You've no idea how silly it
feels,' he added thoughtlessly.
 
'And I don't want to; I can jolly well see how silly it looks,'
Cyril was beginning; but Anthea said:
 
'Oh, DON'T!  I don't know what's the matter with you boys to-day. 
Look here, Squirrel, let's play fair.  It is hateful for poor old
Bobs, all alone up there.  Let's ask the Sammyadd for another wish,
and, if it will, I do really think we ought to be made the same
size.'
 
The others agreed, but not gaily; but when they found the Psammead,
it wouldn't.
 
'Not I,' it said crossly, rubbing its face with its feet.  He's a
rude violent boy, and it'll do him good to be the wrong size for a
bit.  What did he want to come digging me out with his nasty wet
hands for?  He nearly touched me!  He's a perfect savage.  A boy of
the Stone Age would have had more sense.'
 
Robert's hands had indeed been wet - with tears.
 
'Go away and leave me in peace, do,' the Psammead went on.  'I
can't think why you don't wish for something sensible - something
to eat or drink, or good manners, or good tempers.  Go along with
you, do!'
 
It almost snarled as it shook its whiskers, and turned a sulky
brown back on them.  The most hopeful felt that further parley was
vain.  They turned again to the colossal Robert.
 
'Whatever shall we do?' they said; and they all said it.
 
'First,' said Robert grimly, 'I'm going to reason with that baker's
boy.  I shall catch him at the end of the road.'
 
'Don't hit a chap littler than yourself, old man,' said Cyril.
 
'Do I look like hitting him?' said Robert scornfully.  'Why, I
should KILL him.  But I'll give him something to remember.  Wait
till I pull up my stocking.'  He pulled up his stocking, which was
as large as a small bolster-case, and strode off.  His strides were
six or seven feet long, so that it was quite easy for him to be at
the bottom of the hill, ready to meet the baker's boy when he came
down swinging the empty basket to meet his master's cart, which had
been leaving bread at the cottages along the road.
 
Robert crouched behind a haystack in the farmyard, that is at the
corner, and when he heard the boy come whistling along, he jumped
out at him and caught him by the collar.
 
'Now,' he said, and his voice was about four times its usual size,
just as his body was four times its, 'I'm going to teach you to
kick boys smaller than you.'
 
He lifted up the baker's boy and set him on the top of the
haystack, which was about sixteen feet from the ground, and then he
sat down on the roof of the cowshed and told the baker's boy
exactly what he thought of him.  I don't think the boy heard it all
- he was in a sort of trance of terror.  When Robert had said
everything he could think of, and some things twice over, he shook
the boy and said:
 
'And now get down the best way you can,' and left him.
 
I don't know how the baker's boy got down, but I do know that he
missed the cart, and got into the very hottest of hot water when he
turned up at last at the bakehouse.  I am sorry for him, but, after
all, it was quite right that he should be taught that English boys
mustn't use their feet when they fight, but their fists.  Of course
the water he got into only became hotter when he tried to tell his
master about the boy he had licked and the giant as high as a
church, because no one could possibly believe such a tale as that. 
Next day the tale was believed - but that was too late to be of any
use to the baker's boy.
 
When Robert rejoined the others he found them in the garden. 
Anthea had thoughtfully asked Martha to let them have dinner out
there - because the dining-room was rather small, and it would have
been so awkward to have a brother the size of Robert in there.  The
Lamb, who had slept peacefully during the whole stormy morning, was
now found to be sneezing, and Martha said he had a cold and would
be better indoors.
 
'And really it's just as well,' said Cyril, 'for I don't believe
he'd ever have stopped screaming if he'd once seen you the awful
size you are!'
 
Robert was indeed what a draper would call an 'out-size' in boys. 
He found himself able to step right over the iron gate in the front
garden.
 
Martha brought out the dinner - it was cold veal and baked
potatoes, with sago pudding and stewed plums to follow.
 
She of course did not notice that Robert was anything but the usual
size, and she gave him as much meat and potatoes as usual and no
more.  You have no idea how small your usual helping of dinner
looks when you are many times your proper size.  Robert groaned,
and asked for more bread.  But Martha would not go on giving more
bread for ever.  She was in a hurry, because the keeper intended to
call on his way to Benenhurst Fair, and she wished to be dressed
smartly before he came.
 
'I wish WE were going to the Fair,' said Robert.
 
'You can't go anywhere that size,' said Cyril.
 
'Why not?' said Robert.  'They have giants at fairs, much bigger
ones than me.'
 
'Not much, they don't,' Cyril was beginning, when Jane screamed
'Oh!' with such loud suddenness that they all thumped her on the
back and asked whether she had swallowed a plum-stone.
 
'No,' she said, breathless from being thumped, 'it's - it's not a
plum-stone.  it's an idea.  Let's take Robert to the Fair, and get
them to give us money for showing him!  Then we really shall get
something out of the old Sammyadd at last!'
 
'Take me, indeed!' said Robert indignantly.  'Much more likely me
take you!'
 
And so it turned out.  The idea appealed irresistibly to everyone
but Robert, and even he was brought round by Anthea's suggestion
that he should have a double share of any money they might make. 
There was a little old pony-trap in the coach-house - the kind that
is called a governess-cart.  It seemed desirable to get to the Fair
as quickly as possible, so Robert - who could now take enormous
steps and so go very fast indeed - consented to wheel the others in
this.  It was as easy to him now as wheeling the Lamb in the
mail-cart had been in the morning.  The Lamb's cold prevented his
being of the party.
 
It was a strange sensation being wheeled in a pony-carriage by a
giant.  Everyone enjoyed the journey except Robert and the few
people they passed on the way.  These mostly went into what looked
like some kind of standing-up fits by the roadside, as Anthea said. 
just outside Benenhurst, Robert hid in a barn, and the others went
on to the Fair.
 
There were some swings, and a hooting tooting blaring
merry-go-round, and a shooting-gallery and coconut shies. 
Resisting an impulse to win a coconut - or at least to attempt the
enterprise - Cyril went up to the woman who was loading little guns
before the array of glass bottles on strings against a sheet of
canvas.
 
'Here you are, little gentleman!' she said.  'Penny a shot!'
 
'No, thank you,' said Cyril, 'we are here on business, not on
pleasure.  Who's the master?'
 
'The what?'
 
'The master - the head - the boss of the show.'
 
'Over there,' she said, pointing to a stout man in a dirty linen
jacket who was sleeping in the sun; 'but I don't advise you to wake
him sudden.  His temper's contrary, especially these hot days. 
Better have a shot while you're waiting.'
 
'It's rather important,' said Cyril.  'It'll be very profitable to
him.  I think he'll be sorry if we take it away.'
 
'Oh, if it's money in his pocket,' said the woman.  'No kid now?
What is it?'
 
'It's a GIANT.'
 
'You ARE kidding?'
 
'Come along and see,' said Anthea.
 
The woman looked doubtfully at them, then she called to a ragged
little girl in striped stockings and a dingy white petticoat that
came below her brown frock, and leaving her in charge of the
'shooting-gallery' she turned to Anthea and said, 'Well, hurry up!
But if you ARE kidding, you'd best say so.  I'm as mild as milk
myself, but my Bill he's a fair terror and -'
 
Anthea led the way to the barn.  'It really IS a giant,' she said. 
'He's a giant little boy - in Norfolks like my brother's there. 
And we didn't bring him up to the Fair because people do stare so,
and they seem to go into kind of standing-up fits when they see
him.  And we thought perhaps you'd like to show him and get
pennies; and if you like to pay us something, you can - only, it'll
have to be rather a lot, because we promised him he should have a
double share of whatever we made.'
 
The woman murmured something indistinct, of which the children
could only hear the words, 'Swelp me!' 'balmy,' and 'crumpet,'
which conveyed no definite idea to their minds.
She had taken Anthea's hand, and was holding it very firmly; and
Anthea could not help wondering what would happen if Robert should
have wandered off or turned his proper size during the interval. 
But she knew that the Psammead's gifts really did last till sunset,
however inconvenient their lasting might be; and she did not think,
somehow, that Robert would care to go out alone while he was that
size.
 
When they reached the barn and Cyril called 'Robert!' there was a
stir among the loose hay, and Robert began to come out.  His hand
and arm came first - then a foot and leg.  When the woman saw the
hand she said 'My!' but when she saw the foot she said 'Upon my
civvy!' and when, by slow and heavy degrees, the whole of Robert's
enormous bulk was at last completely disclosed, she drew a long
breath and began to say many things, compared with which 'balmy'
and 'crumpet' seemed quite ordinary.  She dropped into
understandable English at last.
 
'What'll you take for him?' she said excitedly.  'Anything in
reason.  We'd have a special van built - leastways, I know where
there's a second-hand one would do up handsome - what a baby
elephant had, as died.  What'll you take?  He's soft, ain't he?
Them giants mostly is - but I never see - no, never!  What'll you
take?  Down on the nail.  We'll treat him like a king, and give him
first-rate grub and a doss fit for a bloomin' dook.  He must be
dotty or he wouldn't need you kids to cart him about.  What'll you
take for him?'
 
'They won't take anything,' said Robert sternly.  'I'm no more soft
than you are - not so much, I shouldn't wonder.  I'll come and be
a show for to-day if you'll give me' - he hesitated at the enormous
price he was about to ask - 'if you'll give me fifteen shillings.'
 
'Done,' said the woman, so quickly that Robert felt he had been
unfair to himself, and wished he had asked thirty.  'Come on now -
and see my Bill - and we'll fix a price for the season.  I dessay
you might get as much as two quid a week reg'lar.  Come on - and
make yourself as small as you can, for gracious' sake!'
 
This was not very small, and a crowd gathered quickly, so that it
was at the head of an enthusiastic procession that Robert entered
the trampled meadow where the Fair was held, and passed over the
stubbly yellow dusty grass to the door of the biggest tent.  He
crept in, and the woman went to call her Bill.  He was the big
sleeping man, and he did not seem at all pleased at being awakened. 
Cyril, watching through a slit in the tent, saw him scowl and shake
a heavy fist and a sleepy head.  Then the woman went on speaking
very fast.  Cyril heard 'Strewth,' and 'biggest draw you ever, so
help me!' and he began to share Robert's feeling that fifteen
shillings was indeed far too little.  Bill slouched up to the tent
and entered.  When he beheld the magnificent proportions of Robert
he said but little - 'Strike me pink!' were the only words the
children could afterwards remember - but he produced fifteen
shillings, mainly in sixpences and coppers, and handed it to
Robert.
 
'We'll fix up about what you're to draw when the show's over
to-night,' he said with hoarse heartiness.  'Lor' love a duck!
you'll be that happy with us you'll never want to leave us.  Can
you do a song now - or a bit of a breakdown?'
 
'Not to-day,' said Robert, rejecting the idea of trying to sing 'As
once in May', a favourite of his mother's, and the only song he
could think of at the moment.
 
'Get Levi and clear them bloomin' photos out.  Clear the tent. 
Stick up a curtain or suthink,' the man went on.  'Lor', what a
pity we ain't got no tights his size!  But we'll have 'em before
the week's out.  Young man, your fortune's made.  It's a good thing
you came to me, and not to some chaps as I could tell you on.  I've
known blokes as beat their giants, and starved 'em too; so I'll
tell you straight, you're in luck this day if you never was afore. 
'Cos I'm a lamb, I am - and I don't deceive you.'
 
'I'm not afraid of anyone's beating ME,' said Robert, looking down
on the 'lamb'.  Robert was crouched on his knees, because the tent
was not big enough for him to stand upright in, but even in that
position he could still look down on most people.  'But I'm awfully
hungry I wish you'd get me something to eat.'
 
'Here, 'Becca,' said the hoarse Bill.  'Get him some grub - the
best you've got, mind!'  Another whisper followed, of which the
children only heard, 'Down in black and white - first thing
to-morrow.'
 
Then the woman went to get the food - it was only bread and cheese
when it came, but it was delightful to the large and empty Robert;
and the man went to post sentinels round the tent, to give the
alarm if Robert should attempt to escape with his fifteen
shillings.
 
'As if we weren't honest,' said Anthea indignantly when the meaning
of the sentinels dawned on her.
 
Then began a very strange and wonderful afternoon.
 
Bill was a man who knew his business.  In a very little while, the
photographic views, the spyglasses you look at them through, so
that they really seem rather real, and the lights you see them by,
were all packed away.  A curtain - it was an old red-and-black
carpet really - was run across the tent.  Robert was concealed
behind, and Bill was standing on a trestle-table outside the tent
making a speech.  It was rather a good speech.  It began by saying
that the giant it was his privilege to introduce to the public that
day was the eldest son of the Emperor of San Francisco, compelled
through an unfortunate love affair with the Duchess of the Fiji
Islands to leave his own country and take refuge in England - the
land of liberty - where freedom was the right of every man, no
matter how big he was.  It ended by the announcement that the first
twenty who came to the tent door should see the giant for
threepence apiece.  'After that,' said Bill, 'the price is riz, and
I don't undertake to say what it won't be riz to.  So now's yer
time.'
 
A young man squiring his sweetheart on her afternoon out was the
first to come forward.  For that occasion his was the princely
attitude - no expense spared - money no object.  His girl wished to
see the giant?  Well, she should see the giant, even though seeing
the giant cost threepence each and the other entertainments were
all penny ones.
 
The flap of the tent was raised - the couple entered.  Next moment
a wild shriek from the girl thrilled through all present.  Bill
slapped his leg.  'That's done the trick!' he whispered to 'Becca. 
It was indeed a splendid advertisement of the charms of Robert. 
When the girl came out she was pale and trembling, and a crowd was
round the tent.
 
 
'What was it like?' asked a bailiff.
 
'Oh! - horrid! - you wouldn't believe,' she said.  'It's as big as
a barn, and that fierce.  It froze the blood in my bones.  I
wouldn't ha' missed seeing it for anything.'
 
The fierceness was only caused by Robert's trying not to laugh. 
But the desire to do that soon left him, and before sunset he was
more inclined to cry than to laugh, and more inclined to sleep than
either.  For, by ones and twos and threes, people kept coming in
all the afternoon, and Robert had to shake hands with those who
wished it, and allow himself to be punched and pulled and patted
and thumped, so that people might make sure he was really real.
 
The other children sat on a bench and watched and waited, and were
very bored indeed.  It seemed to them that this was the hardest way
of earning money that could have been invented.  And only fifteen
shillings!  Bill had taken four times that already, for the news of
the giant had spread, and tradespeople in carts, and gentlepeople
in carriages, came from far and near.  One gentleman with an
eyeglass, and a very large yellow rose in his buttonhole, offered
Robert, in an obliging whisper, ten pounds a week to appear at the
Crystal Palace.  Robert had to say 'No'.
 
'I can't,' he said regretfully.  'It's no use promising what you
can't do.'
 
'Ah, poor fellow, bound for a term of years, I suppose!  Well,
here's my card; when your time's up come to me.'
 
'I will - if I'm the same size then,' said Robert truthfully.
 
'If you grow a bit, so much the better,' said the gentleman.
When he had gone, Robert beckoned Cyril and said:
 
'Tell them I must and will have an easy.  And I want my tea.'
 
Tea was provided, and a paper hastily pinned on the tent.  It said:
 
     CLOSED FOR HALF AN HOUR
     WHILE THE GIANT GETS HIS TEA
 
Then there was a hurried council.
 
'How am I to get away?' said Robert.  'I've been thinking about it
all the afternoon.'
 
'Why, walk out when the sun sets and you're your right size.  They
can't do anything to us.'
 
Robert opened his eyes.  'Why, they'd nearly kill us,' he said,
'when they saw me get my right size.  No, we must think of some
other way.  We MUST be alone when the sun sets.'
 
'I know,' said Cyril briskly, and he went to the door, outside
which Bill was smoking a clay pipe and talking in a low voice to
'Becca.  Cyril heard him say - 'Good as havin' a fortune left you.'
 
'Look here,' said Cyril, 'you can let people come in again in a
minute.  He's nearly finished his tea.  But he must be left alone
when the sun sets.  He's very queer at that time of day, and if
he's worried I won't answer for the consequences.'
 
'Why - what comes over him?' asked Bill.
 
'I don't know; it's - it's a sort of a change,' said Cyril
candidly.  'He isn't at all like himself - you'd hardly know him. 
He's very queer indeed.  Someone'll get hurt if he's not alone
about sunset.'  This was true.
 
'He'll pull round for the evening, I s'pose?'
 
'Oh yes - half an hour after sunset he'll be quite himself again.'
 
'Best humour him,' said the woman.
 
And so, at what Cyril judged was about half an hour before sunset,
the tent was again closed 'whilst the giant gets his supper'.
 
The crowd was very merry about the giant's meals and their coming
so close together.
 
'Well, he can pick a bit,' Bill owned.  'You see he has to eat
hearty, being the size he is.'
 
Inside the tent the four children breathlessly arranged a plan of
retreat.
'You go NOW,' said Cyril to the girls, 'and get along home as fast
as you can.  Oh, never mind the beastly pony-cart; we'll get that
to-morrow.  Robert and I are dressed the same.  We'll manage
somehow, like Sydney Carton did.  Only, you girls MUST get out, or
it's all no go.  We can run, but you can't - whatever you may
think.  No, Jane, it's no good Robert going out and knocking people
down.  The police would follow him till he turned his proper size,
and then arrest him like a shot.  Go you must!  If you don't, I'll
never speak to you again.  It was you got us into this mess really,
hanging round people's legs the way you did this morning.  Go, I
tell you!'
 
And Jane and Anthea went.
 
'We're going home,' they said to Bill.  'We're leaving the giant
with you.  Be kind to him.'  And that, as Anthea said afterwards,
was very deceitful, but what were they to do?
 
When they had gone, Cyril went to Bill.
 
'Look here,' he said, 'he wants some ears of corn - there's some in
the next field but one.  I'll just run and get it.  Oh, and he says
can't you loop up the tent at the back a bit?  He says he's
stifling for a breath of air.  I'll see no one peeps in at him. 
I'll cover him up, and he can take a nap while I go for the corn. 
He WILL have it - there's no holding him when he gets like this.'
 
The giant was made comfortable with a heap of sacks and an old
tarpaulin.  The curtain was looped up, and the brothers were left
alone.  They matured their plan in whispers.  Outside, the
merry-go-round blared out its comic tunes, screaming now and then
to attract public notice.
 
Half a minute after the sun had set, a boy in a Norfolk suit came
out past Bill.
 
'I'm off for the corn,' he said, and mingled quickly with the
crowd.
 
At the same instant a boy came out of the back of the tent past
'Becca, posted there as sentinel.
 
'I'm off after the corn,' said this boy also.  And he, too, moved
away quietly and was lost in the crowd.  The front-door boy was
Cyril; the back-door was Robert - now, since sunset, once more his
proper size.  They walked quickly through the field, and along the
road, where Robert caught Cyril up.  Then they ran.  They were home
as soon as the girls were, for it was a long way, and they ran most
of it.  It was indeed a very long way, as they found when they had
to go and drag the pony-trap home next morning, with no enormous
Robert to wheel them in it as if it were a mail-cart, and they were
babies and he was their gigantic nursemaid.
 
 
I cannot possibly tell you what Bill and 'Becca said when they
found that the giant had gone.  For one thing, I do not know.
 
 
 
CHAPTER 9
GROWN UP
 
 
Cyril had once pointed out that ordinary life is full of occasions
on which a wish would be most useful.  And this thought filled his
mind when he happened to wake early on the morning after the
morning after Robert had wished to be bigger than the baker's boy,
and had been it.  The day that lay between these two days had been
occupied entirely by getting the governess-cart home from
Benenhurst.
 
Cyril dressed hastily; he did not take a bath, because tin baths
are so noisy, and he had no wish to rouse Robert, and he slipped
off alone, as Anthea had once done, and ran through the dewy
morning to the sand-pit.  He dug up the Psammead very carefully and
kindly, and began the conversation by asking it whether it still
felt any ill effects from the contact with the tears of Robert the
day before yesterday.  The Psammead was in a good temper.  It
replied politely.
 
'And now, what can I do for you?' it said.  'I suppose you've come
here so early to ask for something for yourself, something your
brothers and sisters aren't to know about eh?  Now, do be persuaded
for your own good!  Ask for a good fat Megatherium and have done
with it.'
 
'Thank you - not to-day, I think,' said Cyril cautiously.  'What I
really wanted to say was - you know how you're always wishing for
things when you're playing at anything?'
 
'I seldom play,' said the Psammead coldly.
 
'Well, you know what I mean,' Cyril went on impatiently.  'What I
want to say is: won't you let us have our wish just when we think
of it, and just where we happen to be?  So that we don't have to
come and disturb you again,' added the crafty Cyril.
 
'It'll only end in your wishing for something you don't really
want, like you did about the castle,' said the Psammead, stretching
its brown arms and yawning.  'It's always the same since people
left off eating really wholesome things.  However, have it your own
way.  Good-bye.'
 
'Good-bye,' said Cyril politely.
 
'I'll tell you what,' said the Psammead suddenly, shooting out its
long snail's eyes - 'I'm getting tired of you - all of you.  You
have no more sense than so many oysters.  Go along with you!'
And Cyril went.
 
'What an awful long time babies STAY babies,' said Cyril after the
Lamb had taken his watch out of his pocket while he wasn't
noticing, and with coos and clucks of naughty rapture had opened
the case and used the whole thing as a garden spade, and when even
immersion in a wash-hand basin had failed to wash the mould from
the works and make the watch go again.  Cyril had said several
things in the heat of the moment; but now he was calmer, and had
even consented to carry the Lamb part of the way to the woods. 
Cyril had persuaded the others to agree to his plan, and not to
wish for anything more till they really did wish it.  Meantime it
seemed good to go to the woods for nuts, and on the mossy grass
under a sweet chestnut-tree the five were sitting.  The Lamb was
pulling up the moss by fat handfuls, and Cyril was gloomily
contemplating the ruins of his watch.
 
'He does grow,' said Anthea.  'Doesn't oo, precious?'
 
'Me grow,' said the Lamb cheerfully - 'me grow big boy, have guns
an' mouses - an' - an' ...'  Imagination or vocabulary gave out
here.  But anyway it was the longest speech the Lamb had ever made,
and it charmed everyone, even Cyril, who tumbled the Lamb over and
rolled him in the moss to the music of delighted squeals.
 
'I suppose he'll be grown up some day,' Anthea was saying, dreamily
looking up at the blue of the sky that showed between the long
straight chestnut-leaves.  But at that moment the Lamb, struggling
gaily with Cyril, thrust a stoutly-shod little foot against his
brother's chest; there was a crack! - the innocent Lamb had broken
the glass of father's second-best Waterbury watch, which Cyril had
borrowed without leave.
 
'Grow up some day!' said Cyril bitterly, plumping the Lamb down on
the grass.  'I daresay he will when nobody wants him to.  I wish to
goodness he would -'
 
'OH, take care!' cried Anthea in an agony of apprehension.  But it
was too late - like music to a song her words and Cyril's came out
together - Anthea - 'Oh, take care!' Cyril - 'Grow up now!'
 
The faithful Psammead was true to its promise, and there, before
the horrified eyes of its brothers and sisters, the Lamb suddenly
and violently grew up.  It was the most terrible moment.  The
change was not so sudden as the wish-changes usually were.  The
Baby's face changed first.  It grew thinner and larger, lines came
in the forehead, the eyes grew more deep-set and darker in colour,
the mouth grew longer and thinner; most terrible of all, a little
dark moustache appeared on the lip of one who was still - except as
to the face - a two-year-old baby in a linen smock and white
open-work socks.
 
'Oh, I wish it wouldn't!  Oh, I wish it wouldn't!  You boys might
wish as well!'  They all wished hard, for the sight was enough to
dismay the most heartless.  They all wished so hard, indeed, that
they felt quite giddy and almost lost consciousness; but the
wishing was quite vain, for, when the wood ceased to whirl round,
their dazzled eyes were riveted at once by the spectacle of a very
proper-looking young man in flannels and a straw hat - a young man
who wore the same little black moustache which just before they had
actually seen growing upon the Baby's lip.  This, then, was the
Lamb - grown up!  Their own Lamb!  It was a terrible moment.  The
grown-up Lamb moved gracefully across the moss and settled himself
against the trunk of the sweet chestnut.  He tilted the straw hat
over his eyes.  He was evidently weary.  He was going to sleep. 
The Lamb - the original little tiresome beloved Lamb often went to
sleep at odd times and in unexpected places.  Was this new Lamb in
the grey flannel suit and the pale green necktie like the other
Lamb? or had his mind grown up together with his body?
 
That was the question which the others, in a hurried council held
among the yellowing bracken a few yards from the sleeper, debated
eagerly.
 
'Whichever it is, it'll be just as awful,' said Anthea.  'If his
inside senses are grown up too, he won't stand our looking after
him; and if he's still a baby inside of him how on earth are we to
get him to do anything?  And it'll be getting on for dinner-time in
a minute 'And we haven't got any nuts,' said Jane.
 
'Oh, bother nuts!' said Robert; 'but dinner's different - I didn't
have half enough dinner yesterday.  Couldn't we tie him to the tree
and go home to our dinners and come back afterwards?'
 
'A fat lot of dinner we should get if we went back without the
Lamb!' said Cyril in scornful misery.  'And it'll be just the same
if we go back with him in the state he is now.  Yes, I know it's my
doing; don't rub it in!  I know I'm a beast, and not fit to live;
you can take that for settled, and say no more about it.  The
question is, what are we going to do?'
 
'Let's wake him up, and take him into Rochester or Maidstone and
get some grub at a pastrycook's,' said Robert hopefully.
 
'Take him?' repeated Cyril.  'Yes - do!  It's all MY fault - I
don't deny that - but you'll find you've got your work cut out for
you if you try to take that young man anywhere.  The Lamb always
was spoilt, but now he's grown up he's a demon - simply.  I can see
it.  Look at his mouth.'
 
'Well then,' said Robert, 'let's wake him up and see what HE'LL do. 
Perhaps HE'LL take us to Maidstone and stand Sam.  He ought to have
a lot of money in the pockets of those extra-special bags.  We MUST
have dinner, anyway.'
 
They drew lots with little bits of bracken.  It fell to jane's lot
to waken the grown-up Lamb.
 
She did it gently by tickling his nose with a twig of wild
honeysuckle.  He said 'Bother the flies!' twice, and then opened
his eyes.
 
'Hullo, kiddies!' he said in a languid tone, 'still here?  What's
the giddy hour?  You'll be late for your grub!'
 
'I know we shall,' said Robert bitterly.
 
'Then cut along home,' said the grown-up Lamb.
 
'What about your grub, though?' asked Jane.
 
'Oh, how far is it to the station, do you think?  I've a sort of
notion that I'll run up to town and have some lunch at the club.'
 
Blank misery fell like a pall on the four others.  The Lamb - alone
- unattended - would go to town and have lunch at a club!  Perhaps
he would also have tea there.  Perhaps sunset would come upon him
amid the dazzling luxury of club-land, and a helpless cross sleepy
baby would find itself alone amid unsympathetic waiters, and would
wail miserably for 'Panty' from the depths of a club arm-chair! 
The picture moved Anthea almost to tears.
 
'Oh no, Lamb ducky, you mustn't do that!' she cried incautiously.
 
The grown-up Lamb frowned.  'My dear Anthea,' he said, 'how often
am I to tell you that my name is Hilary or St Maur or Devereux? -
any of my baptismal names are free to my little brothers and
sisters, but NOT "Lamb" - a relic of foolish and far-off
childhood.'
 
This was awful.  He was their elder brother now, was he?  Well, of
course he was, if he was grown up - since they weren't.  Thus, in
whispers, Anthea and Robert.
 
But the almost daily adventures resulting from the Psammead wishes
were making the children wise beyond their years.
 
'Dear Hilary,' said Anthea, and the others choked at the name, 'you
know father didn't wish you to go to London.  He wouldn't like us
to be left alone without you to take care of us.  Oh, deceitful
beast that I am!' she added to herself.
 
'Look here,' said Cyril, 'if you're our elder brother, why not
behave as such and take us over to Maidstone and give us a jolly
good blow-out, and we'll go on the river afterwards?'
 
'I'm infinitely obliged to you,' said the Lamb courteously, 'but I
should prefer solitude.  Go home to your lunch - I mean your
dinner.  Perhaps I may look in about tea-time - or I may not be
home till after you are in your beds.'
 
Their beds!  Speaking glances flashed between the wretched four. 
Much bed there would be for them if they went home without the
Lamb.
 
'We promised mother not to lose sight of you if we took you
out,'Jane said before the others could stop her.
 
'Look here, Jane,' said the grown-up Lamb, putting his hands in his
pockets and looking down at her, 'little girls should be seen and
not heard.  You kids must learn not to make yourselves a nuisance. 
Run along home now - and perhaps, if you're good, I'll give you
each a penny to-morrow.'
 
'Look here,' said Cyril, in the best 'man to man' tone at his
command, 'where are you going, old man?  You might let Bobs and me
come with you - even if you don't want the girls.'
 
This was really rather noble of Cyril, for he never did care much
about being seen in public with the Lamb, who of course after
sunset would be a baby again.
 
The 'man to man' tone succeeded.
 
'I shall just run over to Maidstone on my bike,' said the new Lamb
airily, fingering the little black moustache.  'I can lunch at The
Crown - and perhaps I'll have a pull on the river; but I can't take
you all on the machine - now, can I?  Run along home, like good
children.'
 
The position was desperate.  Robert exchanged a despairing look
with Cyril.  Anthea detached a pin from her waistband, a pin whose
withdrawal left a gaping chasm between skirt and bodice, and handed
it furtively to Robert - with a grimace of the darkest and deepest
meaning.  Robert slipped away to the road.  There, sure enough,
stood a bicycle - a beautiful new free-wheel.  Of course Robert
understood at once that if the Lamb was grown up he MUST have a
bicycle.  This had always been one of Robert's own reasons for
wishing to be grown up.  He hastily began to use the pin - eleven
punctures in the back tyre, seven in the front.  He would have made
the total twenty-two but for the rustling of the yellow
hazel-leaves, which warned him of the approach of the others.  He
hastily leaned a hand on each wheel, and was rewarded by the
'whish' of what was left of the air escaping from eighteen neat
pin-holes.
 
'Your bike's run down,' said Robert, wondering how he could so soon
have learned to deceive.
 
'So it is,' said Cyril.
 
'It's a puncture,' said Anthea, stooping down, and standing up
again with a thorn which she had got ready for the purpose.  'Look
here.'
 
The grown-up Lamb (or Hilary, as I suppose one must now call him)
fixed his pump and blew up the tyre.  The punctured state of it was
soon evident.
 
'I suppose there's a cottage somewhere near - where one could get
a pail of water?' said the Lamb.
 
There was; and when the number of punctures had been made manifest,
it was felt to be a special blessing that the cottage provided
'teas for cyclists'.  It provided an odd sort of tea-and-hammy meal
for the Lamb and his brothers.  This was paid for out of the
fifteen shillings which had been earned by Robert when he was a
giant - for the Lamb, it appeared, had unfortunately no money about
him.  This was a great disappointment for the others; but it is a
thing that will happen, even to the most grown-up of us.  However,
Robert had enough to eat, and that was something.  Quietly but
persistently the miserable four took it in turns to try to persuade
the Lamb (or St Maur) to spend the rest of the day in the woods. 
There was not very much of the day left by the time he had mended
the eighteenth puncture.  He looked up from the completed work with
a sigh of relief, and suddenly put his tie straight.
 
'There's a lady coming,' he said briskly - 'for goodness' sake, get
out of the way.  Go home - hide - vanish somehow!  I can't be seen
with a pack of dirty kids.'  His brothers and sisters were indeed
rather dirty, because, earlier in the day, the Lamb, in his infant
state, had sprinkled a good deal of garden soil over them.  The
grown-up Lamb's voice was so tyrant-like, as Jane said afterwards,
that they actually retreated to the back garden, and left him with
his little moustache and his flannel suit to meet alone the young
lady, who now came up the front garden wheeling a bicycle.
 
The woman of the house came out, and the young lady spoke to her -
the Lamb raised his hat as she passed him - and the children could
not hear what she said, though they were craning round the corner
by the pig-pail and listening with all their ears.  They felt it to
be 'perfectly fair,' as Robert said, 'with that wretched Lamb in
that condition.'
 
When the Lamb spoke in a languid voice heavy with politeness, they
heard well enough.
 
'A puncture?' he was saying.  'Can I not be of any assistance?  If
you could allow me -?'
 
There was a stifled explosion of laughter behind the pig-pail - the
grown-up Lamb (otherwise Devereux) turned the tail of an angry eye
in its direction.
 
'You're very kind,' said the lady, looking at the Lamb.  She looked
rather shy, but, as the boys put it, there didn't seem to be any
nonsense about her.
 
'But oh,' whispered Cyril behind the pig-pail, 'I should have
thought he'd had enough bicycle-mending for one day - and if she
only knew that really and truly he's only a whiny-piny, silly
little baby!'
 
'He's not,' Anthea murmured angrily.  'He's a dear - if people only
let him alone.  It's our own precious Lamb still, whatever silly
idiots may turn him into - isn't he, Pussy?'
 
Jane doubtfully supposed so.
 
Now, the Lamb - whom I must try to remember to call St Maur - was
examining the lady's bicycle and talking to her with a very
grown-up manner indeed.  No one could possibly have supposed, to
see and hear him, that only that very morning he had been a chubby
child of two years breaking other people's Waterbury watches. 
Devereux (as he ought to be called for the future) took out a gold
watch when he had mended the lady's bicycle, and all the onlookers
behind the pig-pail said 'Oh!' - because it seemed so unfair that
the Baby, who had only that morning destroyed two cheap but honest
watches, should now, in the grown-upness Cyril's folly had raised
him to, have a real gold watch - with a chain and seals!
 
Hilary (as I will now term him) withered his brothers and sisters
with a glance, and then said to the lady - with whom he seemed to
be quite friendly:
 
'If you will allow me, I will ride with you as far as the Cross
Roads; it is getting late, and there are tramps about.'
 
No one will ever know what answer the young lady intended to give
to this gallant offer, for, directly Anthea heard it made, she
rushed out, knocking against the pig-pail, which overflowed in a
turbid stream, and caught the Lamb (I suppose I ought to say
Hilary) by the arm.  The others followed, and in an instant the
four dirty children were visible, beyond disguise.
 
'Don't let him,' said Anthea to the lady, and she spoke with
intense earnestness; 'he's not fit to go with anyone!'
 
'Go away, little girl!' said St Maur (as we will now call him) in
a terrible voice.  'Go home at once!'
 
'You'd much better not have anything to do with him,' the now
reckless Anthea went on.  'He doesn't know who he is.  He's
something very different from what you think he is.'
 
'What do you mean?' asked the lady not unnaturally, while Devereux
(as I must term the grown-up Lamb) tried vainly to push Anthea
away.  The others backed her up, and she stood solid as a rock.
 
'You just let him go with you,' said Anthea, 'you'll soon see what
I mean!  How would you like to suddenly see a poor little helpless
baby spinning along downhill beside you with its feet up on a
bicycle it had lost control Of?'
 
The lady had turned rather pale.
 
'Who are these very dirty children?' she asked the grown-up Lamb
(sometimes called St Maur in these pages).
 
'I don't know,' he lied miserably.
 
'Oh, Lamb! how can you?' cried Jane - 'when you know perfectly well
you're our own little baby brother that we're so fond of.  We're
his big brothers and sisters,' she explained, turning to the lady,
who with trembling hands was now turning her bicycle towards the
gate, 'and we've got to take care of him.  And we must get him home
before sunset, or I don't know whatever will become of us.  You
see, he's sort of under a spell - enchanted - you know what I
mean!'
 
Again and again the Lamb (Devereux, I mean) had tried to stop
Jane's eloquence, but Robert and Cyril held him, one by each leg,
and no proper explanation was possible.  The lady rode hastily
away, and electrified her relatives at dinner by telling them of
her escape from a family of dangerous lunatics.  'The little girl's
eyes were simply those of a maniac.  I can't think how she came to
be at large,' she said.
 
When her bicycle had whizzed away down the road, Cyril spoke
gravely.
 
'Hilary, old chap,' he said, 'you must have had a sunstroke or
something.  And the things you've been saying to that lady!  Why,
if we were to tell you the things you've said when you are yourself
again, say to- morrow morning, you wouldn't even understand them -
let alone believe them!  You trust to me, old chap, and come home
now, and if you're not yourself in the morning we'll ask the
milkman to ask the doctor to come.'
 
The poor grown-up Lamb (St Maur was really one of his Christian
names) seemed now too bewildered to resist.
 
'Since you seem all to be as mad as the whole worshipful company of
hatters,' he said bitterly, 'I suppose I HAD better take you home. 
But you're not to suppose I shall pass this over.  I shall have
something to say to you all to-morrow morning.'
 
'Yes, you will, my Lamb,' said Anthea under her breath, 'but it
won't be at all the sort of thing you think it's going to be.'
 
In her heart she could hear the pretty, soft little loving voice of
the baby Lamb - so different from the affected tones of the
dreadful grown-up Lamb (one of whose names was Devereux) - saying,
'Me love Panty - wants to come to own Panty.'
 
'Oh, let's get home, for goodness' sake,' she said.  'You shall say
whatever you like in the morning - if you can,' she added in a
whisper.
It was a gloomy party that went home through the soft evening. 
During Anthea's remarks Robert had again made play with the pin and
the bicycle tyre and the Lamb (whom they had to call St Maur or
Devereux or Hilary) seemed really at last to have had his fill of
bicycle-mending.  So the machine was wheeled.
 
The sun was just on the point of setting when they arrived at the
White House.  The four elder children would have liked to linger in
the lane till the complete sunsetting turned the grown-up Lamb
(whose Christian names I will not further weary you by repeating)
into their own dear tiresome baby brother.  But he, in his
grown-upness, insisted on going on, and thus he was met in the
front garden by Martha.
 
Now you remember that, as a special favour, the Psammead had
arranged that the servants in the house should never notice any
change brought about by the wishes of the children.  Therefore
Martha merely saw the usual party, with the baby Lamb, about whom
she had been desperately anxious all the afternoon, trotting beside
Anthea on fat baby legs, while the children, of course, still saw
the grown-up Lamb (never mind what names he was christened by), and
Martha rushed at him and caught him in her arms, exclaiming:
 
'Come to his own Martha, then - a precious poppet!'
 
The grown-up Lamb (whose names shall now be buried in oblivion)
struggled furiously.  An expression of intense horror and annoyance
was seen on his face.  But Martha was stronger than he.  She lifted
him up and carried him into the house.  None of the children will
ever forget that picture.  The neat grey-flannel-suited grown-up
young man with the green tie and the little black moustache -
fortunately, he was slightly built, and not tall - struggling in
the sturdy arms of Martha, who bore him away helpless, imploring
him, as she went, to be a good boy now, and come and have his nice
bremmilk!  Fortunately, the sun set as they reached the doorstep,
the bicycle disappeared, and Martha was seen to carry into the
house the real live darling sleepy two-year-old Lamb.  The grown-up
Lamb (nameless hence- forth) was gone for ever.
 
'For ever,' said Cyril, 'because, as soon as ever the Lamb's old
enough to be bullied, we must jolly well begin to bully him, for
his own sake - so that he mayn't grow up like that.'
 
'You shan't bully him,' said Anthea stoutly; 'not if I can stop
it.'
 
'We must tame him by kindness,' said Jane.
 
'You see,' said Robert, 'if he grows up in the usual way, there'll
be plenty of time to correct him as he goes along.  The awful thing
to-day was his growing up so suddenly.  There was no time to
improve him at all.'
 
'He doesn't want any improving,' said Anthea as the voice of the
Lamb came cooing through the open door, just as she had heard it in
her heart that afternoon:
 
'Me loves Panty - wants to come to own Panty!'
 
 
 
CHAPTER 10
SCALPS
 
 
Probably the day would have been a greater success if Cyril had not
been reading The Last of the Mohicans.  The story was running in
his head at breakfast, and as he took his third cup of tea he said
dreamily, 'I wish there were Red Indians in England - not big ones,
you know, but little ones, just about the right size for us to
fight.'
 
Everyone disagreed with him at the time, and no one attached any
importance to the incident.  But when they went down to the
sand-pit to ask for a hundred pounds in two-shilling pieces with
Queen Victoria's head on, to prevent mistakes - which they had
always felt to be a really reasonable wish that must turn out well
- they found out that they had done it again!  For the Psammead,
which was very cross and sleepy, said:
 
'Oh, don't bother me.  You've had your wish.'
 
'I didn't know it,' said Cyril.
 
'Don't you remember yesterday?' said the Sand-fairy, still more
disagreeably.  'You asked me to let you have your wishes wherever
you happened to be, and you wished this morning, and you've got
it.'
 
'Oh, have we?' said Robert.  'What is it?'
 
'So you've forgotten?' said the Psammead, beginning to burrow. 
'Never mind; you'll know soon enough.  And I wish you joy of it! 
A nice thing you've let yourselves in for!'
 
'We always do, somehow,' said Jane sadly.
 
And now the odd thing was that no one could remember anyone's
having wished for anything that morning.  The wish about the Red
Indians had not stuck in anyone's head.  It was a most anxious
morning.  Everyone was trying to remember what had been wished for,
and no one could, and everyone kept expecting something awful to
happen every minute.  It was most agitating; they knew, from what
the Psammead had said, that they must have wished for something
more than usually undesirable, and they spent several hours in most
agonizing uncertainty.  It was not till nearly dinner-time that
Jane tumbled over The Last of the Mohicans - which had, of course,
been left face downwards on the floor - and when Anthea had picked
her and the book up she suddenly said, 'I know!' and sat down flat
on the carpet.
 
'Oh, Pussy, how awful!  It was Indians he wished for - Cyril - at
breakfast, don't you remember?  He said, "I wish there were Red
Indians in England," - and now there are, and they're going about
scalping people all over the country, like as not.'
 
'Perhaps they're only in Northumberland and Durham,' said Jane
soothingly.  It was almost impossible to believe that it could
really hurt people much to be scalped so far away as that.
 
'Don't you believe it!' said Anthea.  'The Sammyadd said we'd let
ourselves in for a nice thing.  That means they'll come HERE.  And
suppose they scalped the Lamb!'
 
'Perhaps the scalping would come right again at sunset,' said Jane;
but she did not speak so hopefully as usual.
 
'Not it!' said Anthea.  'The things that grow out of the wishes
don't go.  Look at the fifteen shillings!  Pussy, I'm going to
break something, and you must let me have every penny of money
you've got.  The Indians will come HERE, don't you see?  That
spiteful Psammead as good as said so.  You see what my plan is? 
Come on!'
 
Jane did not see at all.  But she followed her sister meekly into
their mother's bedroom.
 
Anthea lifted down the heavy water-jug - it had a pattern of storks
and long grasses on it, which Anthea never forgot.  She carried it
into the dressing-room, and carefully emptied the water out of it
into the bath.  Then she took the jug back into the bedroom and
dropped it on the floor.  You know how a jug always breaks if you
happen to drop it by accident.  If you happen to drop it on
purpose, it is quite different.  Anthea dropped that jug three
times, and it was as unbroken as ever.  So at last she had to take
her father's boot-tree and break the jug with that in cold blood. 
It was heartless work.
 
Next she broke open the missionary-box with the poker.  Jane told
her that it was wrong, of course, but Anthea shut her lips very
tight and then said:
 
'Don't be silly - it's a matter of life and death.'
 
There was not very much in the missionary-box - only
seven-and-fourpence - but the girls between them had nearly four
shillings.  This made over eleven shillings, as you will easily
see.
 
Anthea tied up the money in a corner of her pocket-handkerchief. 
'Come on, Jane!' she said, and ran down to the farm.  She knew that
the farmer was going into Rochester that afternoon.  In fact it had
been arranged that he was to take the four children with him.  They
had planned this in the happy hour when they believed that they
were going to get that hundred pounds, in two-shilling pieces, out
of the Psammead.  They had arranged to pay the farmer two shillings
each for the ride.  Now Anthea hastily explained to him that they
could not go, but would he take Martha and the Baby instead?  He
agreed, but he was not pleased to get only half-a-crown instead of
eight shillings.
 
Then the girls ran home again.  Anthea was agitated, but not
flurried.  When she came to think it over afterwards, she could not
help seeing that she had acted with the most far-seeing
promptitude, just like a born general.  She fetched a little box
from her corner drawer, and went to find Martha, who was laying the
cloth and not in the best of tempers.
 
'Look here,' said Anthea.  'I've broken the toilet-jug in mother's
room.'
 
'Just like you - always up to some mischief,' said Martha, dumping
down a salt-cellar with a bang.
 
'Don't be cross, Martha dear,' said Anthea.  'I've got enough money
to pay for a new one - if only you'll be a dear and go and buy it
for us.  Your cousins keep a china-shop, don't they?  And I would
like you to get it to-day, in case mother comes home to-morrow. 
You know she said she might, perhaps.'
 
'But you're all going into town yourselves,' said Martha.
 
'We can't afford to, if we get the new jug,' said Anthea; 'but
we'll pay for you to go, if you'll take the Lamb.  And I say,
Martha, look here - I'll give you my Liberty box, if you'll go. 
Look, it's most awfully pretty - all inlaid with real silver and
ivory and ebony like King Solomon's temple.'
 
'I see,' said Martha; 'no, I don't want your box, miss.  What you
want is to get the precious Lamb off your hands for the afternoon. 
Don't you go for to think I don't see through you!'
 
This was so true that Anthea longed to deny it at once - Martha had
no business to know so much.  But she held her tongue.
 
Martha set down the bread with a bang that made it jump off its
trencher.
 
'I DO want the jug got,' said Anthea softly.  'You WILL go, won't
you?'
 
'Well, just for this once, I don't mind; but mind you don't get
into none of your outrageous mischief while I'm gone - that's all!'
 
'He's going earlier than he thought,' said Anthea eagerly.  'You'd
better hurry and get dressed.  Do put on that lovely purple frock,
Martha, and the hat with the pink cornflowers, and the yellow-lace
collar.  Jane'll finish laying the cloth, and I'll wash the Lamb
and get him ready.'
 
As she washed the unwilling Lamb, and hurried him into his best
clothes, Anthea peeped out of the window from time to time; so far
all was well - she could see no Red Indians.  When with a rush and
a scurry and some deepening of the damask of Martha's complexion
she and the Lamb had been got off, Anthea drew a deep breath.
 
'HE'S safe!' she said, and, to jane's horror, flung herself down on
the floor and burst into floods of tears.  Jane did not understand
at all how a person could be so brave and like a general, and then
suddenly give way and go flat like an air-balloon when you prick
it.  It is better not to go flat, of course, but you will observe
that Anthea did not give way till her aim was accomplished.  She
had got the dear Lamb out of danger - she felt certain the Red
Indians would be round the White House or nowhere - the farmer's
cart would not come back till after sunset, so she could afford to
cry a little.  It was partly with joy that she cried, because she
had done what she meant to do.  She cried for about three minutes,
while Jane hugged her miserably and said at five-second intervals,
'Don't cry, Panther dear!'
 
Then she jumped up, rubbed her eyes hard with the corner of her
pinafore, so that they kept red for the rest of the day, and
started to tell the boys.  But just at that moment cook rang the
dinner-bell, and nothing could be said till they had all been
helped to minced beef.  Then cook left the room, and Anthea told
her tale.  But it is a mistake to tell a thrilling tale when people
are eating minced beef and boiled potatoes.  There seemed somehow
to be something about the food that made the idea of Red Indians
seem flat and unbelievable.  The boys actually laughed, and called
Anthea a little silly.
 
'Why,' said Cyril, 'I'm almost sure it was before I said that, that
Jane said she wished it would be a fine day.'
 
'It wasn't,' said Jane briefly.
 
'Why, if it was Indians,' Cyril went on - 'salt, please, and
mustard - I must have something to make this mush go down - if it
was Indians, they'd have been infesting the place long before this
- you know they would.  I believe it's the fine day.'
 
'Then why did the Sammyadd say we'd let ourselves in for a nice
thing?' asked Anthea.  She was feeling very cross.  She knew she
had acted with nobility and discretion, and after that it was very
hard to be called a little silly, especially when she had the
weight of a burglared missionary-box and about seven-and-fourpence,
mostly in coppers, lying like lead upon her conscience.
 
There was a silence, during which cook took away the mincy plates
and brought in the treacle-pudding.  As soon as she had retired,
Cyril began again.
 
'Of course I don't mean to say,' he admitted, 'that it wasn't a
good thing to get Martha and the Lamb out of the light for the
afternoon; but as for Red Indians - why, you know jolly well the
wishes always come that very minute.  If there was going to be Red
Indians, they'd be here now.'
 
'I expect they are,' said Anthea; 'they're lurking amid the
undergrowth, for anything you know.  I do think you're most beastly
unkind.'
 
'Indians almost always DO lurk, really, though, don't they?' put in
Jane, anxious for peace.
 
No, they don't,' said Cyril tartly.  'And I'm not unkind, I'm only
truthful.  And I say it was utter rot breaking the water-jug; and
as for the missionary-box, I believe it's a treason-crime, and I
shouldn't wonder if you could be hanged for it, if any of us was to
split -'
 
'Shut up, can't you?' said Robert; but Cyril couldn't.  You see, he
felt in his heart that if there SHOULD be Indians they would be
entirely his own fault, so he did not wish to believe in them.  And
trying not to believe things when in your heart you are almost sure
they are true, is as bad for the temper as anything I know.
 
'It's simply idiotic,' he said, 'talking about Indians, when you
can see for yourselves that it's Jane who's got her wish.  Look
what a fine day it is - OH - '
 
He had turned towards the window to point out the fineness of the
day - the others turned too - and a frozen silence caught at Cyril,
and none of the others felt at all like breaking it.  For there,
peering round the corner of the window, among the red leaves of the
Virginia creeper, was a face - a brown face, with a long nose and
a tight mouth and very bright eyes.  And the face was painted in
coloured patches.  It had long black hair, and in the hair were
feathers!
 
Every child's mouth in the room opened, and stayed open.  The
treacle-pudding was growing white and cold on their plates.  No one
could move.
 
Suddenly the feathered head was cautiously withdrawn, and the spell
was broken.  I am sorry to say that Anthea's first words were very
like a girl.
 
'There, now!' she said.  'I told you so!'
 
Treacle-pudding had now definitely ceased to charm.  Hastily
wrapping their portions in a Spectator of the week before the week
before last, they hid them behind the crinkled-paper
stove-ornament, and fled upstairs to reconnoitre and to hold a
hurried council.
 
'Pax,' said Cyril handsomely when they reached their mother's
bedroom.  'Panther, I'm sorry if I was a brute.'
 
'All right,' said Anthea, 'but you see now!'
 
No further trace of Indians, however, could be discerned from the
windows.
 
'Well,' said Robert, 'what are we to do?'
 
'The only thing I can think of,' said Anthea, who was now generally
admitted to be the heroine of the day, 'is - if we dressed up as
like Indians as we can, and looked out of the windows, or even went
out.  They might think we were the powerful leaders of a large
neighbouring tribe, and - and not do anything to us, you know, for
fear of awful vengeance.'
 
'But Eliza, and the cook?' said Jane.
 
'You forget - they can't notice anything,' said Robert.  'They
wouldn't notice anything out of the way, even if they were scalped
or roasted at a slow fire.'
 
'But would they come right at sunset?'
 
'Of course.  You can't be really scalped or burned to death without
noticing it, and you'd be sure to notice it next day, even if it
escaped your attention at the time,' said Cyril.  'I think Anthea's
right, but we shall want a most awful lot of feathers.'
 
'I'll go down to the hen-house,' said Robert.  'There's one of the
turkeys in there - it's not very well.  I could cut its feathers
without it minding much.  It's very bad - doesn't seem to care what
happens to it.  Get me the cutting-out scissors.'
 
Earnest reconnoitring convinced them all that no Indians were in
the poultry-yard.  Robert went.  In five minutes he came back -
pale, but with many feathers.
 
'Look here,' he said, 'this is jolly serious.  I cut off the
feathers, and when I turned to come out there was an Indian
squinting at me from under the old hen-coop.  I just brandished the
feathers and yelled, and got away before he could get the coop off
the top of himself.  Panther, get the coloured blankets off our
beds, and look slippy, can't you?'
 
It is wonderful how like an Indian you can make yourselves with
blankets and feathers and coloured scarves.  Of course none of the
children happened to have long black hair, but there was a lot of
black calico that had been got to cover school-books with.  They
cut strips of this into a sort of fine fringe, and fastened it
round their heads with the amber-coloured ribbons off the girls'
Sunday dresses.  Then they stuck turkeys' feathers in the ribbons. 
The calico looked very like long black hair, especially when the
strips began to curl up a bit.
 
'But our faces,' said Anthea, 'they're not at all the right colour. 
We're all rather pale, and I'm sure I don't know why, but Cyril is
the colour of putty.'
 
'I'm not,' said Cyril.
 
'The real Indians outside seem to be brownish,' said Robert
hastily.  'I think we ought to be really RED - it's sort of
superior to have a red skin, if you are one.'
 
The red ochre cook used for the kitchen bricks seemed to be about
the reddest thing in the house.  The children mixed some in a
saucer with milk, as they had seen cook do for the kitchen floor. 
Then they carefully painted each other's faces and hands with it,
till they were quite as red as any Red Indian need be - if not
redder.
 
They knew at once that they must look very terrible when they met
Eliza in the passage, and she screamed aloud.  This unsolicited
testimonial pleased them very much.  Hastily telling her not to be
a goose, and that it was only a game, the four blanketed,
feathered, really and truly Redskins went boldly out to meet the
foe.  I say boldly.  That is because I wish to be polite.  At any
rate, they went.
 
Along the hedge dividing the wilderness from the garden was a row
of dark heads, all highly feathered.
 
'It's our only chance,' whispered Anthea.  'Much better than to
wait for their blood-freezing attack.  We must pretend like mad. 
Like that game of cards where you pretend you've got aces when you
haven't.  Fluffing they call it, I think.  Now then.  Whoop!'
 
With four wild war-whoops - or as near them as English children
could be expected to go without any previous practice - they rushed
through the gate and struck four warlike attitudes in face of the
line of Red Indians.  These were all about the same height, and
that height was Cyril's.
 
'I hope to goodness they can talk English,' said Cyril through his
attitude.
 
Anthea knew they could, though she never knew how she came to know
it.  She had a white towel tied to a walking-stick.  This was a
flag of truce, and she waved it, in the hope that the Indians would
know what it was.  Apparently they did - for one who was browner
than the others stepped forward.
 
'Ye seek a pow-wow?' he said in excellent English.  'I am Golden
Eagle, of the mighty tribe of Rock-dwellers.'
'And I,' said Anthea, with a sudden inspiration, 'am the Black
Panther - chief of the - the - the - Mazawattee tribe.  My brothers
- I don't mean - yes, I do - the tribe - I mean the Mazawattees -
are in ambush below the brow of yonder hill.'
 
'And what mighty warriors be these?' asked Golden Eagle, turning to
the others.
 
Cyril said he was the great chief Squirrel, of the Moning Congo
tribe, and, seeing that Jane was sucking her thumb and could
evidently think of no name for herself, he added, 'This great
warrior is Wild Cat - Pussy Ferox we call it in this land - leader
of the vast Phiteezi tribe.'
 
And thou, valorous Redskin?' Golden Eagle inquired suddenly of
Robert, who, taken unawares, could only reply that he was Bobs,
leader of the Cape Mounted Police.
 
'And now,' said Black Panther, 'our tribes, if we just whistle them
up, will far outnumber your puny forces; so resistance is useless. 
Return, therefore, to your own land, O brother, and smoke pipes of
peace in your wampums with your squaws and your medicine-men, and
dress yourselves in the gayest wigwams, and eat happily of the
juicy fresh-caught moccasins.'
 
'You've got it all wrong,' murmured Cyril angrily.  But Golden
Eagle only looked inquiringly at her.
 
'Thy customs are other than ours, O Black Panther,' he said. 
'Bring up thy tribe, that we may hold pow-wow in state before them,
as becomes great chiefs.'
 
'We'll bring them up right enough,' said Anthea, 'with their bows
and arrows, and tomahawks, and scalping-knives, and everything you
can think of, if you don't look sharp and go.'
 
She spoke bravely enough, but the hearts of all the children were
beating furiously, and their breath came in shorter and shorter
gasps.  For the little real Red Indians were closing up round them
- coming nearer and nearer with angry murmurs - so that they were
the centre of a crowd of dark, cruel faces.
 
'It's no go,' whispered Robert.  'I knew it wouldn't be.  We must
make a bolt for the Psammead.  It might help us.  If it doesn't -
well, I suppose we shall come alive again at sunset.  I wonder if
scalping hurts as much as they say.'
 
'I'll wave the flag again,' said Anthea.  'If they stand back,
we'll run for it.'
 
She waved the towel, and the chief commanded his followers to stand
back.  Then, charging wildly at the place where the line of Indians
was thinnest, the four children started to run.  Their first rush
knocked down some half-dozen Indians, over whose blanketed bodies
the children leaped, and made straight for the sand-Pit.  This was
no time for the safe easy way by which carts go down - right over
the edge of the sand-pit they went, among the yellow and pale
purple flowers and dried grasses, past the little sand-martins'
little front doors, skipping, clinging, bounding, stumbling,
sprawling, and finally rolling.
 
Yellow Eagle and his followers came up with them just at the very
spot where they had seen the Psammead that morning.
 
Breathless and beaten, the wretched children now awaited their
fate.  Sharp knives and axes gleamed round them, but worse than
these was the cruel light in the eyes of Golden Eagle and his
followers.
 
'Ye have lied to us, O Black Panther of the Mazawattees - and thou,
too, Squirrel of the Moning Congos.  These also, Pussy Ferox of the
Phiteezi, and Bobs of the Cape Mounted Police - these also have
lied to us, if not with their tongue, yet by their silence.  Ye
have lied under the cover of the Truce-flag of the Pale-face.  Ye
have no followers.  Your tribes are far away - following the
hunting trail.  What shall be their doom?' he concluded, turning
with a bitter smile to the other Red Indians.
 
'Build we the fire!' shouted his followers; and at once a dozen
ready volunteers started to look for fuel.  The four children, each
held between two strong little Indians, cast despairing glances
round them.  Oh, if they could only see the Psammead!
 
'Do you mean to scalp us first and then roast us?' asked Anthea
desperately.
 
'Of course!'  Redskin opened his eyes at her.  'It's always done.'
 
The Indians had formed a ring round the children, and now sat on
the ground gazing at their captives.  There was a threatening
silence.
 
Then slowly, by twos and threes, the Indians who had gone to look
for firewood came back, and they came back empty-handed.  They had
not been able to find a single stick of wood, for a fire!  No one
ever can, as a matter of fact, in that part of Kent.
 
The children drew a deep breath of relief, but it ended in a moan
of terror.  For bright knives were being brandished all about them. 
Next moment each child was seized by an Indian; each closed its
eyes and tried not to scream.  They waited for the sharp agony of
the knife.  It did not come.  Next moment they were released, and
fell in a trembling heap.  Their heads did not hurt at all.  They
only felt strangely cool!  Wild war-whoops rang in their ears. 
When they ventured to open their eyes they saw four of their foes
dancing round them with wild leaps and screams, and each of the
four brandished in his hand a scalp of long flowing black hair. 
They put their hands to their heads - their own scalps were safe!
The poor untutored savages had indeed scalped the children.  But
they had only, so to speak, scalped them of the black calico
ringlets!
 
The children fell into each other's arms, sobbing and laughing.
 
'Their scalps are ours,' chanted the chief; 'ill-rooted were their
ill-fated hairs!  They came off in the hands of the victors -
without struggle, without resistance, they yielded their scalps to
the conquering Rock-dwellers!  Oh, how little a thing is a scalp so
lightly won!'
 
'They'll take our real ones in a minute; you see if they don't,'
said Robert, trying to rub some of the red ochre off his face and
hands on to his hair.
 
'Cheated of our just and fiery revenge are we,' the chant went on
- 'but there are other torments than the scalping-knife and the
flames.  Yet is the slow fire the correct thing.  O strange
unnatural country, wherein a man may find no wood to burn his
enemy! - Ah, for the boundless forests of my native land, where the
great trees for thousands of miles grow but to furnish firewood
wherewithal to burn our foes.  Ah, would we were but in our native
forest once more!'
 
Suddenly, like a flash of lightning, the golden gravel shone all
round the four children instead of the dusky figures.  For every
single Indian had vanished on the instant at their leader's word. 
The Psammead must have been there all the time.  And it had given
the Indian chief his wish.
 
 
Martha brought home a jug with a pattern of storks and long grasses
on it.  Also she brought back all Anthea's money.
 
'My cousin, she give me the jug for luck; she said it was an odd
one what the basin of had got smashed.'
 
'Oh, Martha, you arc a dear!' sighed Anthea, throwing her arms
round her.
 
'Yes,' giggled Martha, 'you'd better make the most of me while
you've got me.  I shall give your ma notice directly minute she
comes back.'
 
'Oh, Martha, we haven't been so very horrid to you, have we?' asked
Anthea, aghast.
 
'Oh, it ain't that, miss.'  Martha giggled more than ever.  'I'm
a-goin' to be married.  It's Beale the gamekeeper.  He's been
a-proposin' to me off and on ever since you come home from the
clergyman's where you got locked up on the church-tower.  And
to-day I said the word an' made him a happy man.'
 
Anthea put the seven-and-fourpence back in the missionary-box, and
pasted paper over the place where the poker had broken it.  She was
very glad to be able to do this, and she does not know to this day
whether breaking open a missionary-box is or is not a hanging
matter.
 
 
 
CHAPTER 11
THE LAST WISH
 
 
Of course you, who see above that this is the eleventh (and last)
chapter, know very well that the day of which this chapter tells
must be the last on which Cyril, Anthea, Robert, and Jane will have
a chance of getting anything out of the Psammead, or Sand-fairy.
 
But the children themselves did not know this.  They were full of
rosy visions, and, whereas on other days they had often found it
extremely difficult to think of anything really nice to wish for,
their brains were now full of the most beautiful and sensible
ideas.  'This,' as Jane remarked afterwards, 'is always the way.' 
Everyone was up extra early that morning, and these plans were
hopefully discussed in the garden before breakfast.  The old idea
of one hundred pounds in modern florins was still first favourite,
but there were others that ran it close - the chief of these being
the 'pony each' idea.  This had a great advantage.  You could wish
for a pony each during the morning, ride it all day, have it vanish
at sunset, and wish it back again next day.  Which would be an
economy of litter and stabling.  But at breakfast two things
happened.  First, there was a letter from mother.  Granny was
better, and mother and father hoped to be home that very afternoon. 
A cheer arose.  And of course this news at once scattered all the
before-breakfast wish-ideas.  For everyone saw quite plainly that
the wish for the day must be something to please mother and not to
please themselves.
 
'I wonder what she WOULD like,' pondered Cyril.
 
'She'd like us all to be good,' said Jane primly.
 
'Yes - but that's so dull for us,' Cyril rejoined; 'and, besides,
I should hope we could be that without sand-fairies to help us. 
No; it must be something splendid, that we couldn't possibly get
without wishing for.'
 
'Look out,' said Anthea in a warning voice; 'don't forget
yesterday.  Remember, we get our wishes now just wherever we happen
to be when we say "I wish".  Don't let's let ourselves in for
anything silly - to-day of all days.'
 
'All right,' said Cyril.  'You needn't jaw.'
 
just then Martha came in with a jug full of hot water for the
teapot - and a face full of importance for the children.
 
'A blessing we're all alive to eat our breakfasses!' she said
darkly.
 
'Why, whatever's happened?' everybody asked.
 
'Oh, nothing,' said Martha, 'only it seems nobody's safe from being
murdered in their beds nowadays.'
 
'Why,' said Jane as an agreeable thrill of horror ran down her back
and legs and out at her toes, 'has anyone been murdered in their
beds?'
 
'Well - not exactly,' said Martha; 'but they might just as well. 
There's been burglars over at Peasmarsh Place - Beale's just told
me - and they've took every single one of Lady Chittenden's
diamonds and jewels and things, and she's a-goin' out of one
fainting fit into another, with hardly time to say "Oh, my
diamonds!" in between.  And Lord Chittenden's away in London.'
 
'Lady Chittenden,' said Anthea; 'we've seen her.  She wears a
red-and-white dress, and she has no children of her own and can't
abide other folkses'.'
 
'That's her,' said Martha.  'Well, she's put all her trust in
riches, and you see how she's served.  They say the diamonds and
things was worth thousands of thousands of pounds.  There was a
necklace and a river - whatever that is - and no end of bracelets;
and a tarrer and ever so many rings.  But there, I mustn't stand
talking and all the place to clean down afore your ma comes home.'
 
'I don't see why she should ever have had such lots of diamonds,'
said Anthea when Martha had Bounced off.  'She was rather a nasty
lady, I thought.  And mother hasn't any diamonds, and hardly any
jewels - the topaz necklace, and the sapphire ring daddy gave her
when they were engaged, and the garnet star, and the little pearl
brooch with great-grandpapa's hair in it - that's about all.'
 
'When I'm grown up I'll buy mother no end of diamonds,' said
Robert, 'if she wants them.  I shall make so much money exploring
in Africa I shan't know what to do with it.'
 
'Wouldn't it be jolly,' said Jane dreamily, 'if mother could find
all those lovely things, necklaces and rivers of diamonds and
tarrers?'
 
'TI--ARAS,' said Cyril.
 
'Ti--aras, then - and rings and everything in her room when she
came home?  I wish she would.'  The others gazed at her in horror.
 
'Well, she WILL,' said Robert; 'you've wished, my good Jane - and
our only chance now is to find the Psammead, and if it's in a good
temper it MAY take back the wish and give us another.  If not -
well - goodness knows what we're in for! - the police, of course,
and - Don't cry, silly!  We'll stand by you.  Father says we need
never be afraid if we don't do anything wrong and always speak the
truth.'
 
But Cyril and Anthea exchanged gloomy glances.  They remembered how
convincing the truth about the Psammead had been once before when
told to the police.
 
It was a day of misfortunes.  Of course the Psammead could not be
found.  Nor the jewels, though every one Of the children searched
their mother's room again and again.
 
'Of course,' Robert said, 'WE couldn't find them.  It'll be mother
who'll do that.  Perhaps she'll think they've been in the house for
years and years, and never know they are the stolen ones at all.'
 
'Oh yes!' Cyril was very scornful; 'then mother will be a receiver
of stolen goods, and you know jolly well what THAT'S worse than.'
 
Another and exhaustive search of the sand-pit failed to reveal the
Psammead, so the children went back to the house slowly and sadly.
 
'I don't care,' said Anthea stoutly, 'we'll tell mother the truth,
and she'll give back the jewels - and make everything all right.'
 
 
'Do you think so?' said Cyril slowly.  'Do you think She'll believe
us?  Could anyone believe about a Sammyadd unless they'd seen it?
She'll think we're pretending.  Or else she'll think we're raving
mad, and then we shall be sent to Bedlam.  How would you like it?'
- he turned suddenly on the miserable Jane - 'how would you like
it, to be shut up in an iron cage with bars and padded walls, and
nothing to do but stick straws in your hair all day, and listen to
the howlings and ravings of the other maniacs?  Make up your minds
to it, all of you.  It's no use telling mother.'
 
'But it's true,' said Jane.
 
'Of course it is, but it's not true enough for grown-up people to
believe it,' said Anthea.  'Cyril's right.  Let's put flowers in
all the vases, and try not to think about diamonds.  After all,
everything has come right in the end all the other times.'
 
So they filled all the pots they could find with flowers - asters
and zinnias, and loose-leaved late red roses from the wall of the
stable-yard, till the house was a perfect bower.
 
And almost as soon as dinner was cleared away mother arrived, and
was clasped in eight loving arms.  It was very difficult indeed not
to tell her all about the Psammead at once, because they had got
into the habit of telling her everything.  But they did succeed in
not telling her.
Mother, on her side, had plenty to tell them - about Granny, and
Granny's pigeons, and Auntie Emma's lame tame donkey.  She was very
delighted with the flowery-boweryness of the house; and everything
seemed so natural and pleasant, now that she was home again, that
the children almost thought they must have dreamed the Psammead.
 
But, when mother moved towards the stairs to go UP to her bedroom
and take off her bonnet, the eight arms clung round her just as if
she only had two children, one the Lamb and the other an octopus.
 
'Don't go up, mummy darling,' said Anthea; 'let me take your things
up for you.'
 
'Or I will,' said Cyril.
 
'We want you to come and look at the rose-tree,' said Robert.
 
'Oh, don't go up!' said Jane helplessly.
 
'Nonsense, dears,' said mother briskly, 'I'm not such an old woman
yet that I can't take my bonnet off in the proper place.  Besides,
I must wash these black hands of mine.'
 
So up she went, and the children, following her, exchanged glances
of gloomy foreboding.
 
Mother took off her bonnet - it was a very pretty hat, really, with
white roses on it - and when she had taken it off she went to the
dressing-table to do her pretty hair.
 
On the table between the ring-stand and the pincushion lay a green
leather case.  Mother opened it.
 
'Oh, how lovely!' she cried.  It was a ring, a large pearl with
shining many-lighted diamonds set round it.  'Wherever did this
come from?' mother asked, trying it on her wedding finger, which it
fitted beautifully.  'However did it come here?'
 
'I don't know,' said each of the children truthfully.
 
'Father must have told Martha to put it here,' mother said.  'I'll
run down and ask her.'
 
'Let me look at it,' said Anthea, who knew Martha would not be able
to see the ring.  But when Martha was asked, of course she denied
putting the ring there, and so did Eliza and cook.
 
Mother came back to her bedroom, very much interested and pleased
about the ring.  But, when she opened the dressing-table drawer and
found a long case containing an almost priceless diamond necklace,
she was more interested still, though not so pleased.  In the
wardrobe, when she went to put away her 'bonnet', she found a tiara
and several brooches, and the rest of the jewellery turned up in
various parts of the room during the next half-hour.  The children
looked more and more uncomfortable, and now Jane began to sniff.
 
Mother looked at her gravely.
 
'Jane,' she said, 'I am sure you know something about this.  Now
think before you speak, and tell me the truth.'
 
'We found a Fairy,' said Jane obediently.
 
'No nonsense, please,' said her mother sharply.
 
'Don't be silly, Jane,' Cyril interrupted.  Then he went on
desperately.  'Look here, mother, we've never seen the things
before, but Lady Chittenden at Peasmarsh Place lost all her
jewellery by wicked burglars last night.  Could this possibly be
it?'
 
All drew a deep breath.  They were saved.
 
'But how could they have put it here?  And why should they?' asked
mother, not unreasonably.  'Surely it would have been easier and
safer to make off with it?'
 
'Suppose,' said Cyril, 'they thought it better to wait for - for
sunset - nightfall, I mean, before they went off with it.  No one
but us knew that you were coming back to-day.'
 
'I must send for the police at once,' said mother distractedly. 
'Oh, how I wish daddy were here!'
 
'Wouldn't it be better to wait till he DOES come?' asked Robert,
knowing that his father would not be home before sunset.
 
'No, no; I can't wait a minute with all this on my mind,' cried
mother.  'All this' was the heap of jewel-cases on the bed.  They
put them all in the wardrobe, and mother locked it.  Then mother
called Martha.
 
'Martha,' she said, 'has any stranger been into MY room since I've
been away?  Now, answer me truthfully.'
 
'No, mum,' answered Martha; 'leastways, what I mean to say -'
 
She stopped.
 
'Come,' said her mistress kindly; 'I see someone has.  You must
tell me at once.  Don't be frightened.  I'm sure you haven't done
anything wrong.'
 
Martha burst into heavy sobs.
 
'I was a-goin' to give you warning this very day, mum, to leave at
the end of my month, so I was - on account of me being going to
make a respectable young man happy.  A gamekeeper he is by trade,
mum - and I wouldn't deceive you - of the name of Beale.  And it's
as true as I stand here, it Was your coming home in such a hurry,
and no warning given, out of the kindness of his heart it was, as
he says, "Martha, my beauty," he says - which I ain't and never
was, but you know how them men will go on - "I can't see you
a-toiling and a-moiling and not lend a 'elping 'and; which mine is
a strong arm and it's yours, Martha, my dear," says he.  And so he
helped me a-cleanin' of the windows, but outside, mum, the whole
time, and me in; if I never say another breathing word it's the
gospel truth.'
 
'Were you with him the whole time?' asked her mistress.
 
'Him outside and me in, I was,' said Martha; 'except for fetching
up a fresh pail and the leather that that slut of a Eliza 'd hidden
away behind the mangle.'
 
'That will do,' said the children's mother.  'I am not pleased with
you, Martha, but you have spoken the truth, and that counts for
something.'
 
When Martha had gone, the children clung round their mother.
 
'Oh, mummy darling,' cried Anthea, 'it isn't Beale's fault, it
isn't really!  He's a great dear; he is, truly and honourably, and
as honest as the day.  Don't let the police take him, mummy!  oh,
don't, don't, don't!'
 
It was truly awful.  Here was an innocent man accused of robbery
through that silly wish of Jane's, and it was absolutely useless to
tell the truth.  All longed to, but they thought of the straws in
the hair and the shrieks of the other frantic maniacs, and they
could not do it.
 
'Is there a cart hereabouts?' asked mother feverishly.  'A trap of
any sort?  I must drive in to Rochester and tell the police at
once.'
 
All the children sobbed, 'There's a cart at the farm, but, oh,
don't go! - don't go! - oh, don't go! - wait till daddy comes
home!'
 
Mother took not the faintest notice.  When she had set her mind on
a thing she always went straight through with it; she was rather
like Anthea in this respect.
 
'Look here, Cyril,' she said, sticking on her hat with long sharp
violet-headed pins, 'I leave you in charge.  Stay in the
dressing-room.  You can pretend to be swimming boats in the bath,
or something.  Say I gave you leave.  But stay there, with the
landing door open; I've locked the other.  And don't let anyone go
into my room.  Remember, no one knows the jewels are there except
me, and all of you, and the wicked thieves who put them there. 
Robert, you stay in the garden and watch the windows.  If anyone
tries to get in you must run and tell the two farm men that I'll
send up to wait in the kitchen.  I'll tell them there are dangerous
characters about - that's true enough.  Now, remember, I trust you
both.  But I don't think they'll try it till after dark, so you're
quite safe.  Good-bye, darlings.'
 
And she locked her bedroom door and went off with the key in her
pocket.
 
The children could not help admiring the dashing and decided way in
which she had acted.  They thought how useful she would have been
in organizing escape from some of the tight places in which they
had found themselves of late in consequence of their ill-timed
wishes.
 
'She's a born general,' said Cyril - 'but I don't know what's going
to happen to us.  Even if the girls were to hunt for that beastly
Sammyadd and find it, and get it to take the jewels away again,
mother would only think we hadn't looked out properly and let the
burglars sneak in and nick them - or else the police will think
WE'VE got them - or else that she's been fooling them.  Oh, it's a
pretty decent average ghastly mess this time, and no mistake!'
 
 
He savagely made a paper boat and began to float it in the bath, as
he had been told to do.
 
Robert went into the garden and sat down on the worn yellow grass,
with his miserable head between his helpless hands.
 
Anthea and Jane whispered together in the passage downstairs, where
the coconut matting was - with the hole in it that you always
caught your foot in if you were not careful.  Martha's voice could
be heard in the kitchen - grumbling loud and long.
 
'It's simply quite too dreadfully awful,' said Anthea.  'How do you
know all the diamonds are there, too?  If they aren't, the police
will think mother and father have got them, and that they've only
given up some of them for a kind of desperate blind.  And they'll
be put in prison, and we shall be branded outcasts, the children of
felons.  And it won't be at all nice for father and mother either,'
she added, by a candid afterthought.
 
'But what can WE do?' asked Jane.
 
'Nothing - at least we might look for the Psammead again.  It's a
very, very hot day.  He may have come out to warm that whisker of
his.'
 
'He won't give us any more beastly wishes to-day,' said Jane
flatly.  'He gets crosser and crosser every time we see him.  I
believe he hates having to give wishes.'
 
Anthea had been shaking her head gloomily - now she stopped shaking
it so suddenly that it really looked as though she were pricking up
her ears.
 
'What is it?' asked Jane.  'Oh, have you thought of something?'
 
'Our one chance,' cried Anthea dramatically; 'the last lone-lorn
forlorn hope.  Come on.'
 
At a brisk trot she led the way to the sand-pit.  Oh, joy! - there
was the Psammead, basking in a golden sandy hollow and preening its
whiskers happily in the glowing afternoon sun.  The moment it saw
them it whisked round and began to burrow - it evidently preferred
its own company to theirs.  But Anthea was too quick for it.  She
caught it by its furry shoulders gently but firmly, and held it.
 
'Here - none of that!' said the Psammead.  'Leave go of me, will
you?'
 
But Anthea held him fast.
 
'Dear kind darling Sammyadd,' she said breathlessly.
 
'Oh yes - it's all very well,' it said; 'you want another wish, I
expect.  But I can't keep on slaving from morning till night giving
people their wishes.  I must have SOME time to myself.'
 
'Do you hate giving wishes?' asked Anthea gently, and her voice
trembled with excitement.
 
'Of course I do,' it said.  'Leave go of me or I'll bite! - I
really will - I mean it.  Oh, well, if you choose to risk it.'
 
Anthea risked it and held on.
 
'Look here,' she said, 'don't bite me - listen to reason.  If
you'll only do what we want to-day, we'll never ask you for another
wish as long as we live.'
 
The Psammead was much moved.
 
'I'd do anything,' it said in a tearful voice.  'I'd almost burst
myself to give you one wish after another, as long as I held out,
if you'd only never, never ask me to do it after to-day.  If you
knew how I hate to blow myself out with other people's wishes, and
how frightened I am always that I shall strain a muscle or
something.  And then to wake up every morning and know you've GOT
to do it.  You don't know what it is - you don't know what it is,
you don't!'  Its voice cracked with emotion, and the last 'don't'
was a squeak.
 
Anthea set it down gently on the sand.
 
'It's all over now,' she said soothingly.  'We promise faithfully
never to ask for another wish after to-day.'
'Well, go ahead,' said the Psammead; 'let's get it over.'
 
'How many can you do?'
 
'I don't know - as long as I can hold out.'
 
'Well, first, I wish Lady Chittenden may find she's never lost her
jewels.'
 
The Psammead blew itself out, collapsed, and said, 'Done.'
 
'I wish, said Anthea more slowly, 'mother mayn't get to the
police.'
 
'Done,' said the creature after the proper interval.
 
'I wish,' said Jane suddenly, 'mother could forget all about the
diamonds.'
 
'Done,' said the Psammead; but its voice was weaker.
 
'Wouldn't you like to rest a little?' asked Anthea considerately.
 
'Yes, please,' said the Psammead; 'and, before we go further, will
you wish something for me?'
 
'Can't you do wishes for yourself?'
 
'Of course not,' it said; 'we were always expected to give each
other our wishes - not that we had any to speak of in the good old
Megatherium days.  just wish, will you, that you may never be able,
any of you, to tell anyone a word about ME.'
 
'Why?' asked Jane.
 
'Why, don't you see, if you told grown-ups I should have no peace
of my life.  They'd get hold of me, and they wouldn't wish silly
things like you do, but real earnest things; and the scientific
people would hit on some way of making things last after sunset, as
likely as not; and they'd ask for a graduated income-tax, and
old-age pensions and manhood suffrage, and free secondary
education, and dull things like that; and get them, and keep them,
and the whole world would be turned topsy-turvy.  Do wish it!
Quick!'
 
Anthea repeated the Psammead's wish, and it blew itself out to a
larger size than they had yet seen it attain.
 
'And now,' it said as it collapsed, 'can I do anything more for
you?'
 
'Just one thing; and I think that clears everything up, doesn't it,
Jane?  I wish Martha to forget about the diamond ring, and mother
to forget about the keeper cleaning the windows.'
'It's like the "Brass Bottle",' said Jane.
 
'Yes, I'm glad we read that or I should never have thought of it.'
 
'Now,' said the Psammead faintly, 'I'm almost worn out.  Is there
anything else?'
 
'No; only thank you kindly for all you've done for us, and I hope
you'll have a good long sleep, and I hope we shall see you again
some day.'
 
'Is that a wish?' it said in a weak voice.
 
'Yes, please,' said the two girls together.
 
Then for the last time in this story they saw the Psammead blow
itself out and collapse suddenly.  It nodded to them, blinked its
long snail's eyes, burrowed, and disappeared, scratching fiercely
to the last, and the sand closed over it.
 
'I hope we've done right?' said Jane.
 
'I'm sure we have,' said Anthea.  'Come on home and tell the boys.'
 
Anthea found Cyril glooming over his paper boats, and told him. 
Jane told Robert.  The two tales were only just ended when mother
walked in, hot and dusty.  She explained that as she was being
driven into Rochester to buy the girls' autumn school-dresses the
axle had broken, and but for the narrowness of the lane and the
high soft hedges she would have been thrown out.  As it was, she
was not hurt, but she had had to walk home.  'And oh, my dearest
dear chicks,' she said, 'I am simply dying for a cup of tea!  Do
run and see if the kettle boils!'
 
'So you see it's all right,'Jane whispered.  'She doesn't
remember.'
 
'No more does Martha,' said Anthea, who had been to ask after the
state of the kettle.
 
As the servants sat at their tea, Beale the gamekeeper dropped in. 
He brought the welcome news that Lady Chittenden's diamonds had not
been lost at all.  Lord Chittenden had taken them to be re-set and
cleaned, and the maid who knew about it had gone for a holiday.  So
that was all right.
 
'I wonder if we ever shall see the Psammead again,' said Jane
wistfully as they walked in the garden, while mother was putting
the Lamb to bed.
 
'I'm sure we shall,' said Cyril, 'if you really wished it.'
 
'We've promised never to ask it for another wish,' said Anthea.
 
'I never want to,' said Robert earnestly.
 
They did see it again, of course, but not in this story.  And it
was not in a sand-pit either, but in a very, very, very different
place.  It was in a -- But I must say no more.
 
 
 
 
 
 

The Marvellous Land of Oz

August 16, 2009

 
 
The Marvelous Land of Oz
by L. Frank Baum
Author of Father Goose-His Book; The Wizard of Oz; The Magical Monarch of Mo; The Enchanted Isle of Yew; The Life and Adventures of Santa Claus; Dot and Tot of Merryland etc. etc.

Being an account of the further adventures of the Scarecrow and Tin Woodman
and also the strange experiences of the highly magnified Woggle-Bug, Jack Pumpkin-head, the Animated Saw-Horse and the Gump; the story being

A Sequel to The Wizard of Oz

PICTURED BY

John R. Neil
BOOKS OF WONDER
WILLIAM MORROW & COMPANY, INC.
NEW YORK
Copyright 1904
by
L. Frank Baum
All rights reserved
Published, July, 1904
 
Author’s Note
After the publication of “The Wonderful Wizard of OZ” I began to receive letters from children, telling me of their pleasure in reading the story and asking me to “write something more” about the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman. At first I considered these little letters, frank and earnest though they were, in the light of pretty compliments; but the letters continued to come during succeeding months, and even years.
Finally I promised one little girl, who made a long journey to see me and prefer her request,—and she is a “Dorothy,” by the way—that when a thousand little girls had written me a thousand little letters asking for the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman I would write the book, Either little Dorothy was a fairy in disguise, and waved her magic wand, or the success of the stage production of “The Wizard of OZ” made new friends for the story, For the thousand letters reached their destination long since—and many more followed them.
And now, although pleading guilty to long delay, I have kept my promise in this book.
L. FRANK BAUM.
Chicago, June, 1904

 

 

 

To those excellent good fellows and comedians David C. Montgomery and Frank A. Stone whose clever personations of the Tin Woodman and the Scarecrow have delighted thousands of children throughout the land, this book is gratefully dedicated by THE AUTHOR

 

LIST OF CHAPTERS
· Tip Manufactures Pumpkinhead
· The Marvelous Powder of Life 1
· The Flight of the Fugitives
· Tip Makes an Experiment in Magic
· The Awakening of the Saw-horse
· Jack Pumpkinhead’s Ride to the Emerald City
· His Majesty the Scarecrow
· Gen. Jinjur’s Army of Revolt
· The Scarecrow Plans an escape
· The Journey to the Tin Woodman
· A Nickel-Plated Emperor
· Mr. H. M. Woggle-Bug, T. E.
· A Highly Magnified History
· Old Mombi indulges in Witchcraft
· The Prisoners of the Queen
· The Scarecrow Takes Time to Think
· The Astonishing Flight of the Gump
· In the Jackdaw’s Nest
· Dr. Nikidik’s Famous Wishing Pills
· The Scarecrow Appeals to Glenda the Good
· The Tin-Woodman Plucks a Rose
· The Transformation of Old Mombi
· Princess Ozma of Oz
· The Riches of Content
 
Tip Manufactures a Pumpkinhead
In the Country of the Gillikins, which is at the North of the Land of Oz, lived a youth called Tip. There was more to his name than that, for old Mombi often declared that his whole name was Tippetarius; but no one was expected to say such a long word when “Tip” would do just as well.
This boy remembered nothing of his parents, for he had been brought when quite young to be reared by the old woman known as Mombi, whose reputation, I am sorry to say, was none of the best. For the Gillikin people had reason to suspect her of indulging in magical arts, and therefore hesitated to associate with her.
[Line-Art Drawing]
Mombi was not exactly a Witch, because the Good Witch who ruled that part of the Land of Oz had forbidden any other Witch to exist in her dominions. So Tip’s guardian, however much she might aspire to working magic, realized it was unlawful to be more than a Sorceress, or at most a Wizardess.
Tip was made to carry wood from the forest, that the old woman might boil her pot. He also worked in the corn-fields, hoeing and husking; and he fed the pigs and milked the four-horned cow that was Mombi’s especial pride.
But you must not suppose he worked all the time, for he felt that would be bad for him. When sent to the forest Tip often climbed trees for birds’ eggs or amused himself chasing the fleet white rabbits or fishing in the brooks with bent pins. Then he would hastily gather his armful of wood and carry it home. And when he was supposed to be working in the corn-fields, and the tall stalks hid him from Mombi’s view, Tip would often dig in the gopher holes, or if the mood seized him—lie upon his back between the rows of corn and take a nap. So, by taking care not to exhaust his strength, he grew as strong and rugged as a boy may be.
Mombi’s curious magic often frightened her neighbors, and they treated her shyly, yet respectfully, because of her weird powers. But Tip frankly hated her, and took no pains to hide his feelings. Indeed, he sometimes showed less respect for the old woman than he should have done, considering she was his guardian.
There were pumpkins in Mombi’s corn-fields, lying golden red among the rows of green stalks; and these had been planted and carefully tended that the four-horned cow might eat of them in the winter time. But one day, after the corn had all been cut and stacked, and Tip was carrying the pumpkins to the stable, he took a notion to make a “Jack Lantern” and try to give the old woman a fright with it.
[Line-Art Drawing]
So he selected a fine, big pumpkin—one with a lustrous, orange-red color—and began carving it. With the point of his knife he made two round eyes, a three-cornered nose, and a mouth shaped like a new moon. The face, when completed, could not have been considered strictly beautiful; but it wore a smile so big and broad, and was so Jolly in expression, that even Tip laughed as he looked admiringly at his work.
The child had no playmates, so he did not know that boys often dig out the inside of a “pumpkin-jack,” and in the space thus made put a lighted candle to render the face more startling; but he conceived an idea of his own that promised to be quite as effective. He decided to manufacture the form of a man, who would wear this pumpkin head, and to stand it in a place where old Mombi would meet it face to face.
“And then,” said Tip to himself, with a laugh, “she’ll squeal louder than the brown pig does when I pull her tail, and shiver with fright worse than I did last year when I had the ague!”
He had plenty of time to accomplish this task, for Mombi had gone to a village—to buy groceries, she said—and it was a journey of at least two days.
So he took his axe to the forest, and selected some stout, straight saplings, which he cut down and trimmed of all their twigs and leaves. From these he would make the arms, and legs, and feet of his man. For the body he stripped a sheet of thick bark from around a big tree, and with much labor fashioned it into a cylinder of about the right size, pinning the edges together with wooden pegs. Then, whistling happily as he worked, he carefully jointed the limbs and fastened them to the body with pegs whittled into shape with his knife.
By the time this feat had been accomplished it began to grow dark, and Tip remembered he must milk the cow and feed the pigs. So he picked up his wooden man and carried it back to the house with him.
During the evening, by the light of the fire in the kitchen, Tip carefully rounded all the edges of the joints and smoothed the rough places in a neat and workmanlike manner. Then he stood the figure up against the wall and admired it. It seemed remarkably tall, even for a full-grown man; but that was a good point in a small boy’s eyes, and Tip did not object at all to the size of his creation.
Next morning, when he looked at his work again, Tip saw he had forgotten to give the dummy a neck, by means of which he might fasten the pumpkinhead to the body. So he went again to the forest, which was not far away, and chopped from a tree several pieces of wood with which to complete his work. When he returned he fastened a cross-piece to the upper end of the body, making a hole through the center to hold upright the neck. The bit of wood which formed this neck was also sharpened at the upper end, and when all was ready Tip put on the pumpkin head, pressing it well down onto the neck, and found that it fitted very well. The head could be turned to one side or the other, as he pleased, and the hinges of the arms and legs allowed him to place the dummy in any position he desired.
“Now, that,” declared Tip, proudly, “is really a very fine man, and it ought to frighten several screeches out of old Mombi! But it would be much more lifelike if it were properly dressed.”
To find clothing seemed no easy task; but Tip boldly ransacked the great chest in which Mombi kept all her keepsakes and treasures, and at the very bottom he discovered some purple trousers, a red shirt and a pink vest which was dotted with white spots. These he carried away to his man and succeeded, although the garments did not fit very well, in dressing the creature in a jaunty fashion. Some knit stockings belonging to Mombi and a much worn pair of his own shoes completed the man’s apparel, and Tip was so delighted that he danced up and down and laughed aloud in boyish ecstacy.
[Line-Art Drawing]
“I must give him a name!” he cried. “So good a man as this must surely have a name. I believe,” he added, after a moment’s thought, “I will name the fellow ‘Jack Pumpkinhead!'”
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
The Marvelous Powder of Life
After considering the matter carefully, Tip decided that the best place to locate Jack would be at the bend in the road, a little way from the house. So he started to carry his man there, but found him heavy and rather awkward to handle. After dragging the creature a short distance Tip stood him on his feet, and by first bending the joints of one leg, and then those of the other, at the same time pushing from behind, the boy managed to induce Jack to walk to the bend in the road. It was not accomplished without a few tumbles, and Tip really worked harder than he ever had in the fields or forest; but a love of mischief urged him on, and it pleased him to test the cleverness of his workmanship.
“Jack’s all right, and works fine!” he said to himself, panting with the unusual exertion. But just then he discovered the man’s left arm had fallen off in the journey so he went back to find it, and afterward, by whittling a new and stouter pin for the shoulder-joint, he repaired the injury so successfully that the arm was stronger than before. Tip also noticed that Jack’s pumpkin head had twisted around until it faced his back; but this was easily remedied. When, at last, the man was set up facing the turn in the path where old Mombi was to appear, he looked natural enough to be a fair imitation of a Gillikin farmer,—and unnatural enough to startle anyone that came on him unawares.
As it was yet too early in the day to expect the old woman to return home, Tip went down into the valley below the farm-house and began to gather nuts from the trees that grew there.
However, old Mombi returned earlier than usual. She had met a crooked wizard who resided in a lonely cave in the mountains, and had traded several important secrets of magic with him. Having in this way secured three new recipes, four magical powders and a selection of herbs of wonderful power and potency, she hobbled home as fast as she could, in order to test her new sorceries.
So intent was Mombi on the treasures she had gained that when she turned the bend in the road and caught a glimpse of the man, she merely nodded and said:
“Good evening, sir.”
But, a moment after, noting that the person did not move or reply, she cast a shrewd glance into his face and discovered his pumpkin head elaborately carved by Tip’s jack-knife.
“Heh!” ejaculated Mombi, giving a sort of grunt; “that rascally boy has been playing tricks again! Very good! ve—ry good! I’ll beat him black-and-blue for trying to scare me in this fashion!”
Angrily she raised her stick to smash in the grinning pumpkin head of the dummy; but a sudden thought made her pause, the uplifted stick left motionless in the air.
“Why, here is a good chance to try my new powder!” said she, eagerly. “And then I can tell whether that crooked wizard has fairly traded secrets, or whether he has fooled me as wickedly as I fooled him.”
So she set down her basket and began fumbling in it for one of the precious powders she had obtained.
While Mombi was thus occupied Tip strolled back, with his pockets full of nuts, and discovered the old woman standing beside his man and apparently not the least bit frightened by it.
At first he was generally disappointed; but the next moment he became curious to know what Mombi was going to do. So he hid behind a hedge, where he could see without being seen, and prepared to watch.
After some search the woman drew from her basket an old pepper-box, upon the faded label of which the wizard had written with a lead-pencil:
“Powder of Life.”
“Ah—here it is!” she cried, joyfully. “And now let us see if it is potent. The stingy wizard didn’t give me much of it, but I guess there’s enough for two or three doses.”
[Full page line-art drawing: “OLD MOMBI DANCED AROUND HIM”]
Tip was much surprised when he overheard this speech. Then he saw old Mombi raise her arm and sprinkle the powder from the box over the pumpkin head of his man Jack. She did this in the same way one would pepper a baked potato, and the powder sifted down from Jack’s head and scattered over the red shirt and pink waistcoat and purple trousers Tip had dressed him in, and a portion even fell upon the patched and worn shoes.
Then, putting the pepper-box back into the basket, Mombi lifted her left hand, with its little finger pointed upward, and said:
“Weaugh!”
Then she lifted her right hand, with the thumb pointed upward, and said:
“Teaugh!”
Then she lifted both hands, with all the fingers and thumbs spread out, and cried:
“Peaugh!”
Jack Pumpkinhead stepped back a pace, at this, and said in a reproachful voice:
“Don’t yell like that! Do you think I’m deaf?”
Old Mombi danced around him, frantic with delight.
“He lives!” she screamed: “He lives! he lives!”
Then she threw her stick into the air and caught it as it came down; and she hugged herself with both arms, and tried to do a step of a jig; and all the time she repeated, rapturously:
“He lives!—he lives!—he lives!”
Now you may well suppose that Tip observed all this with amazement.
At first he was so frightened and horrified that he wanted to run away, but his legs trembled and shook so badly that he couldn’t. Then it struck him as a very funny thing for Jack to come to life, especially as the expression on his pumpkin face was so droll and comical it excited laughter on the instant. So, recovering from his first fear, Tip began to laugh; and the merry peals reached old Mombi’s ears and made her hobble quickly to the hedge, where she seized Tip’s collar and dragged him back to where she had left her basket and the pumpkinheaded man.
“You naughty, sneaking, wicked boy!” she exclaimed, furiously: “I’ll teach you to spy out my secrets and to make fun of me!”
“I wasn’t making fun of you,” protested Tip. “I was laughing at old Pumpkinhead! Look at him! Isn’t he a picture, though?”
“I hope you are not reflecting on my personal appearance,” said Jack; and it was so funny to hear his grave voice, while his face continued to wear its jolly smile, that Tip again burst into a peal of laughter.
Even Mombi was not without a curious interest in the man her magic had brought to life; for, after staring at him intently, she presently asked:
[Full page line-art drawing: OLD MOMBI PUTS JACK IN THE STABLE]
“What do you know?”
“Well, that is hard to tell,” replied Jack. “For although I feel that I know a tremendous lot, I am not yet aware how much there is in the world to find out about. It will take me a little time to discover whether I am very wise or very foolish.”
“To be sure,” said Mombi, thoughtfully.
“But what are you going to do with him, now he is alive?” asked Tip, wondering.
“I must think it over,” answered Mombi. “But we must get home at once, for it is growing dark. Help the Pumpkinhead to walk.”
“Never mind me,” said Jack; “I can walk as well as you can. Haven’t I got legs and feet, and aren’t they jointed?”
“Are they?” asked the woman, turning to Tip.
“Of course they are; I made ’em myself,” returned the boy, with pride.
So they started for the house, but when they reached the farm yard old Mombi led the pumpkin man to the cow stable and shut him up in an empty stall, fastening the door securely on the outside.
“I’ve got to attend to you, first,” she said, nodding her head at Tip.
Hearing this, the boy became uneasy; for he knew Mombi had a bad and revengeful heart, and would not hesitate to do any evil thing.
They entered the house. It was a round, domeshaped structure, as are nearly all the farm houses in the Land of Oz.
Mombi bade the boy light a candle, while she put her basket in a cupboard and hung her cloak on a peg. Tip obeyed quickly, for he was afraid of her.
After the candle had been lighted Mombi ordered him to build a fire in the hearth, and while Tip was thus engaged the old woman ate her supper. When the flames began to crackle the boy came to her and asked a share of the bread and cheese; but Mombi refused him.
“I’m hungry!” said Tip, in a sulky tone.
“You won’t be hungry long,” replied Mombi, with a grim look.
The boy didn’t like this speech, for it sounded like a threat; but he happened to remember he had nuts in his pocket, so he cracked some of those and ate them while the woman rose, shook the crumbs from her apron, and hung above the fire a small black kettle.
Then she measured out equal parts of milk and vinegar and poured them into the kettle. Next she produced several packets of herbs and powders and began adding a portion of each to the contents of the kettle. Occasionally she would draw near the candle and read from a yellow paper the recipe of the mess she was concocting.
As Tip watched her his uneasiness increased.
“What is that for?” he asked.
“For you,” returned Mombi, briefly.
Tip wriggled around upon his stool and stared awhile at the kettle, which was beginning to bubble. Then he would glance at the stern and wrinkled features of the witch and wish he were any place but in that dim and smoky kitchen, where even the shadows cast by the candle upon the wall were enough to give one the horrors. So an hour passed away, during which the silence was only broken by the bubbling of the pot and the hissing of the flames.
Finally, Tip spoke again.
“Have I got to drink that stuff?” he asked, nodding toward the pot.
“Yes,” said Mombi.
“What’ll it do to me?” asked Tip.
“If it’s properly made,” replied Mombi, “it will change or transform you into a marble statue.”
Tip groaned, and wiped the perspiration from his forehead with his sleeve.
“I don’t want to be a marble statue!” he protested.
“That doesn’t matter I want you to be one,” said the old woman, looking at him severely.
“What use’ll I be then?” asked Tip. “There won’t be any one to work for you.”
“I’ll make the Pumpkinhead work for me,” said Mombi.
Again Tip groaned.
“Why don’t you change me into a goat, or a chicken?” he asked, anxiously. “You can’t do anything with a marble statue.”
“Oh, yes, I can,” returned Mombi. “I’m going to plant a flower garden, next Spring, and I’ll put you in the middle of it, for an ornament. I wonder I haven’t thought of that before; you’ve been a bother to me for years.”
At this terrible speech Tip felt the beads of perspiration starting all over his body, but he sat still and shivered and looked anxiously at the kettle.
“Perhaps it won’t work,” he mutttered, in a voice that sounded weak and discouraged.
“Oh, I think it will,” answered Mombi, cheerfully. “I seldom make a mistake.”
Again there was a period of silence a silence so long and gloomy that when Mombi finally lifted the kettle from the fire it was close to midnight.
[Full page line-art drawing: “I DON’T WANT TO BE A MARBLE STATUE.”]
“You cannot drink it until it has become quite cold,” announced the old witch for in spite of the law she had acknowledged practising witchcraft. “We must both go to bed now, and at daybreak I will call you and at once complete your transformation into a marble statue.”
With this she hobbled into her room, bearing the steaming kettle with her, and Tip heard her close and lock the door.
The boy did not go to bed, as he had been commanded to do, but still sat glaring at the embers of the dying fire.
[Line-Art Drawing]
 
The Flight of the Fugitives
Tip reflected.
“It’s a hard thing, to be a marble statue,” he thought, rebelliously, “and I’m not going to stand it. For years I’ve been a bother to her, she says; so she’s going to get rid of me. Well, there’s an easier way than to become a statue. No boy could have any fun forever standing in the middle of a flower garden! I’ll run away, that’s what I’ll do—and I may as well go before she makes me drink that nasty stuff in the kettle.” He waited until the snores of the old witch announced she was fast asleep, and then he arose softly and went to the cupboard to find something to eat.
“No use starting on a journey without food,” he decided, searching upon the narrow shelves.
He found some crusts of bread; but he had to look into Mombi’s basket to find the cheese she had brought from the village. While turning over the contents of the basket he came upon the pepper-box which contained the “Powder of Life.”
“I may as well take this with me,” he thought, “or Mombi’ll be using it to make more mischief with.” So he put the box in his pocket, together with the bread and cheese.
Then he cautiously left the house and latched the door behind him. Outside both moon and stars shone brightly, and the night seemed peaceful and inviting after the close and ill-smelling kitchen.
“I’ll be glad to get away,” said Tip, softly; “for I never did like that old woman. I wonder how I ever came to live with her.”
He was walking slowly toward the road when a thought made him pause.
“I don’t like to leave Jack Pumpkinhead to the tender mercies of old Mombi,” he muttered. “And Jack belongs to me, for I made him even if the old witch did bring him to life.”
[Full page line-art drawing: “TIP LED HIM ALONG THE PATH.”]
He retraced his steps to the cow-stable and opened the door of the stall where the pumpkin-headed man had been left.
Jack was standing in the middle of the stall, and by the moonlight Tip could see he was smiling just as jovially as ever.
“Come on!” said the boy, beckoning.
“Where to?” asked Jack.
“You’ll know as soon as I do,” answered Tip, smiling sympathetically into the pumpkin face.
“All we’ve got to do now is to tramp.”
“Very well,” returned Jack, and walked awkwardly out of the stable and into the moonlight.
Tip turned toward the road and the man followed him. Jack walked with a sort of limp, and occasionally one of the joints of his legs would turn backward, instead of frontwise, almost causing him to tumble. But the Pumpkinhead was quick to notice this, and began to take more pains to step carefully; so that he met with few accidents.
Tip led him along the path without stopping an instant. They could not go very fast, but they walked steadily; and by the time the moon sank away and the sun peeped over the hills they had travelled so great a distance that the boy had no reason to fear pursuit from the old witch. Moreover, he had turned first into one path, and then into another, so that should anyone follow them it would prove very difficult to guess which way they had gone, or where to seek them.
Fairly satisfied that he had escaped—for a time, at least—being turned into a marble statue, the boy stopped his companion and seated himself upon a rock by the roadside.
“Let’s have some breakfast,” he said.
Jack Pumpkinhead watched Tip curiously, but refused to join in the repast. “I don’t seem to be made the same way you are,” he said.
“I know you are not,” returned Tip; “for I made you.”
“Oh! Did you?” asked Jack.
[Line-Art Drawing along the right side of the page]
“Certainly. And put you together. And carved your eyes and nose and ears and mouth,” said Tip proudly. “And dressed you.”
Jack looked at his body and limbs critically.
“It strikes me you made a very good job of it,” he remarked.
“Just so-so,” replied Tip, modestly; for he began to see certain defects in the construction of his man. “If I’d known we were going to travel together I might have been a little more particular.”
“Why, then,” said the Pumpkinhead, in a tone that expressed surprise, “you must be my creator my parent my father!”
“Or your inventor,” replied the boy with a laugh. “Yes, my son; I really believe I am!”
“Then I owe you obedience,” continued the man, “and you owe me—support.”
“That’s it, exactly”, declared Tip, jumping up. “So let us be off.”
“Where are we going?” asked Jack, when they had resumed their journey.
“I’m not exactly sure,” said the boy; “but I believe we are headed South, and that will bring us, sooner or later, to the Emerald City.”
“What city is that?” enquired the Pumpkinhead.
“Why, it’s the center of the Land of Oz, and the biggest town in all the country. I’ve never been there, myself, but I’ve heard all about its history. It was built by a mighty and wonderful Wizard named Oz, and everything there is of a green color—just as everything in this Country of the Gillikins is of a purple color.”
“Is everything here purple?” asked Jack.
“Of course it is. Can’t you see?” returned the boy.
“I believe I must be color-blind,” said the Pumpkinhead, after staring about him.
“Well, the grass is purple, and the trees are purple, and the houses and fences are purple,” explained Tip. “Even the mud in the roads is purple. But in the Emerald City everything is green that is purple here. And in the Country of the Munchkins, over at the East, everything is blue; and in the South country of the Quadlings everything is red; and in the West country of the Winkies, where the Tin Woodman rules, everything is yellow.”
“Oh!” said Jack. Then, after a pause, he asked: “Did you say a Tin Woodman rules the Winkies?”
“Yes; he was one of those who helped Dorothy to destroy the Wicked Witch of the West, and the Winkies were so grateful that they invited him to become their ruler,—just as the people of the Emerald City invited the Scarecrow to rule them.”
“Dear me!” said Jack. “I’m getting confused with all this history. Who is the Scarecrow?”
“Another friend of Dorothy’s,” replied Tip.
“And who is Dorothy?”
“She was a girl that came here from Kansas, a place in the big, outside World. She got blown to the Land of Oz by a cyclone, and while she was here the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman accompanied her on her travels.”
“And where is she now?” inquired the Pumpkinhead.
“Glinda the Good, who rules the Quadlings, sent her home again,” said the boy.
“Oh. And what became of the Scarecrow?”
“I told you. He rules the Emerald City,” answered Tip.
“I thought you said it was ruled by a wonderful Wizard,” objected Jack, seeming more and more confused.
“Well, so I did. Now, pay attention, and I’ll explain it,” said Tip, speaking slowly and looking the smiling Pumpkinhead squarely in the eye. “Dorothy went to the Emerald City to ask the Wizard to send her back to Kansas; and the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman went with her. But the Wizard couldn’t send her back, because he wasn’t so much of a Wizard as he might have been. And then they got angry at the Wizard, and threatened to expose him; so the Wizard made a big balloon and escaped in it, and no one has ever seen him since.”
“Now, that is very interesting history,” said Jack, well pleased; “and I understand it perfectly all but the explanation.”
“I’m glad you do,” responded Tip. “After the Wizard was gone, the people of the Emerald City made His Majesty, the Scarecrow, their King; and I have heard that he became a very popular ruler.”
“Are we going to see this queer King?” asked Jack, with interest.
“I think we may as well,” replied the boy; “unless you have something better to do.”
“Oh, no, dear father,” said the Pumpkinhead. “I am quite willing to go wherever you please.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
Tip Makes an Experiment in Magic
The boy, small and rather delicate in appearance seemed somewhat embarrassed at being called “father” by the tall, awkward, pumpkinheaded man, but to deny the relationship would involve another long and tedious explanation; so he changed the subject by asking, abruptly:
“Are you tired?”
“Of course not!” replied the other. “But,” he continued, after a pause, “it is quite certain I shall wear out my wooden joints if I keep on walking.”
Tip reflected, as they journeyed on, that this was true. He began to regret that he had not constructed the wooden limbs more carefully and substantially. Yet how could he ever have guessed that the man he had made merely to scare old Mombi with would be brought to life by means of a magical powder contained in an old pepper-box?
So he ceased to reproach himself, and began to think how he might yet remedy the deficiencies of Jack’s weak joints.
While thus engaged they came to the edge of a wood, and the boy sat down to rest upon an old sawhorse that some woodcutter had left there.
“Why don’t you sit down?” he asked the Pumpkinhead.
“Won’t it strain my joints?” inquired the other.
“Of course not. It’ll rest them,” declared the boy.
So Jack tried to sit down; but as soon as he bent his joints farther than usual they gave way altogether, and he came clattering to the ground with such a crash that Tip feared he was entirely ruined.
[Line-Art Drawing along right side of this page]
He rushed to the man, lifted him to his feet, straightened his arms and legs, and felt of his head to see if by chance it had become cracked. But Jack seemed to be in pretty good shape, after all, and Tip said to him:
“I guess you’d better remain standing, hereafter. It seems the safest way.”
“Very well, dear father.” just as you say, replied the smiling Jack, who had been in no wise confused by his tumble.
Tip sat down again. Presently the Pumpkinhead asked:
“What is that thing you are sitting on?”
“Oh, this is a horse,” replied the boy, carelessly.
“What is a horse?” demanded Jack.
“A horse? Why, there are two kinds of horses,” returned Tip, slightly puzzled how to explain. “One kind of horse is alive, and has four legs and a head and a tail. And people ride upon its back.”
“I understand,” said Jack, cheerfully “That’s the kind of horse you are now sitting on.”
“No, it isn’t,” answered Tip, promptly.
“Why not? That one has four legs, and a head, and a tail.” Tip looked at the saw-horse more carefully, and found that the Pumpkinhead was right. The body had been formed from a tree-trunk, and a branch had been left sticking up at one end that looked very much like a tail. In the other end were two big knots that resembled eyes, and a place had been chopped away that might easily be mistaken for the horse’s mouth. As for the legs, they were four straight limbs cut from trees and stuck fast into the body, being spread wide apart so that the saw-horse would stand firmly when a log was laid across it to be sawed.
“This thing resembles a real horse more than I imagined,” said Tip, trying to explain. “But a real horse is alive, and trots and prances and eats oats, while this is nothing more than a dead horse, made of wood, and used to saw logs upon.”
“If it were alive, wouldn’t it trot, and prance, and eat oats?” inquired the Pumpkinhead.
“It would trot and prance, perhaps; but it wouldn’t eat oats,” replied the boy, laughing at the idea. “And of course it can’t ever be alive, because it is made of wood.”
“So am I,” answered the man.
Tip looked at him in surprise.
“Why, so you are!” he exclaimed. “And the magic powder that brought you to life is here in my pocket.”
[Full page line-art drawing: THE MAGICAL POWDER OF LIFE]
He brought out the pepper box, and eyed it curiously.
“I wonder,” said he, musingly, “if it would bring the saw-horse to life.”
“If it would,” returned Jack, calmly for nothing seemed to surprise him “I could ride on its back, and that would save my joints from wearing out.”
“I’ll try it!” cried the boy, jumping up. “But I wonder if I can remember the words old Mombi said, and the way she held her hands up.”
He thought it over for a minute, and as he had watched carefully from the hedge every motion of the old witch, and listened to her words, he believed he could repeat exactly what she had said and done.
So he began by sprinkling some of the magic Powder of Life from the pepper-box upon the body of the saw-horse. Then he lifted his left hand, with the little finger pointing upward, and said: “Weaugh!”
“What does that mean, dear father?” asked Jack, curiously.
“I don’t know,” answered Tip. Then he lifted his right hand, with the thumb pointing upward and said: “Teaugh!”
“What’s that, dear father?” inquired Jack.
“It means you must keep quiet!” replied the boy, provoked at being interrupted at so important a moment.
“How fast I am learning!” remarked the Pumpkinhead, with his eternal smile.
Tip now lifted both hands above his head, with all the fingers and thumbs spread out, and cried in a loud voice: “Peaugh!”
Immediately the saw-horse moved, stretched its legs, yawned with its chopped-out mouth, and shook a few grains of the powder off its back. The rest of the powder seemed to have vanished into the body of the horse.
“Good!” called Jack, while the boy looked on in astonishment. “You are a very clever sorcerer, dear father!”
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
The Awakening of the Saw-horse
The Saw-Horse, finding himself alive, seemed even more astonished than Tip. He rolled his knotty eyes from side to side, taking a first wondering view of the world in which he had now so important an existence. Then he tried to look at himself; but he had, indeed, no neck to turn; so that in the endeavor to see his body he kept circling around and around, without catching even a glimpse of it. His legs were stiff and awkward, for there were no knee-joints in them; so that presently he bumped against Jack Pumpkinhead and sent that personage tumbling upon the moss that lined the roadside.
Tip became alarmed at this accident, as well as at the persistence of the Saw-Horse in prancing around in a circle; so he called out:
“Whoa! Whoa, there!”
The Saw-Horse paid no attention whatever to this command, and the next instant brought one of his wooden legs down upon Tip’s foot so forcibly that the boy danced away in pain to a safer distance, from where he again yelled:
“Whoa! Whoa, I say!”
Jack had now managed to raise himself to a sitting position, and he looked at the Saw-Horse with much interest.
“I don’t believe the animal can hear you,” he remarked.
“I shout loud enough, don’t I?” answered Tip, angrily.
“Yes; but the horse has no ears,” said the smiling Pumpkinhead.
“Sure enough!” exclaimed Tip, noting the fact for the first time. “How, then, am I going to stop him?”
But at that instant the Saw-Horse stopped himself, having concluded it was impossible to see his own body. He saw Tip, however, and came close to the boy to observe him more fully.
It was really comical to see the creature walk; for it moved the legs on its right side together, and those on its left side together, as a pacing horse does; and that made its body rock sidewise, like a cradle.
Tip patted it upon the head, and said “Good boy! Good Boy!” in a coaxing tone; and the Saw-Horse pranced away to examine with its bulging eyes the form of Jack Pumpkinhead.
“I must find a halter for him,” said Tip; and having made a search in his pocket he produced a roll of strong cord. Unwinding this, he approached the Saw-Horse and tied the cord around its neck, afterward fastening the other end to a large tree. The Saw-Horse, not understanding the action, stepped backward and snapped the string easily; but it made no attempt to run away.
“He’s stronger than I thought,” said the boy, “and rather obstinate, too.”
“Why don’t you make him some ears?” asked Jack. “Then you can tell him what to do.”
“That’s a splendid idea!” said Tip. “How did you happen to think of it?”
“Why, I didn’t think of it,” answered the Pumpkinhead; “I didn’t need to, for it’s the simplest and easiest thing to do.”
So Tip got out his knife and fashioned some ears out of the bark of a small tree.
“I mustn’t make them too big,” he said, as he whittled, “or our horse would become a donkey.”
“How is that?” inquired Jack, from the roadside.
“Why, a horse has bigger ears than a man; and a donkey has bigger ears than a horse,” explained Tip.
“Then, if my ears were longer, would I be a horse?” asked Jack.
“My friend,” said Tip, gravely, “you’ll never be anything but a Pumpkinhead, no matter how big your ears are.”
“Oh,” returned Jack, nodding; “I think I understand.”
“If you do, you’re a wonder,” remarked the boy “but there’s no harm in thinking you understand. I guess these ears are ready now. Will you hold the horse while I stick them on?”
“Certainly, if you’ll help me up,” said Jack.
So Tip raised him to his feet, and the Pumpkinhead went to the horse and held its head while the boy bored two holes in it with his knife-blade and inserted the ears.
“They make him look very handsome,” said Jack, admiringly.
But those words, spoken close to the Saw-Horse, and being the first sounds he had ever heard, so startled the animal that he made a bound forward and tumbled Tip on one side and Jack on the other. Then he continued to rush forward as if frightened by the clatter of his own foot-steps.
“Whoa!” shouted Tip, picking himself up; “whoa! you idiot whoa!” The Saw-Horse would probably have paid no attention to this, but just then it stepped a leg into a gopher-hole and stumbled head-over-heels to the ground, where it lay upon its back, frantically waving its four legs in the air.
Tip ran up to it.
“You’re a nice sort of a horse, I must say!” he exclaimed. “Why didn’t you stop when I yelled ‘whoa?'”
“Does ‘whoa’ mean to stop?” asked the Saw-Horse, in a surprised voice, as it rolled its eyes upward to look at the boy.
“Of course it does,” answered Tip.
“And a hole in the ground means to stop, also, doesn’t it?” continued the horse.
“To be sure; unless you step over it,” said Tip.
“What a strange place this is,” the creature exclaimed, as if amazed. “What am I doing here, anyway?”
[Full page line-art drawing: “DO KEEP THOSE LEGS STILL.”]
“Why, I’ve brought you to life,” answered the boy “but it won’t hurt you any, if you mind me and do as I tell you.”
“Then I will do as you tell me,” replied the Saw-Horse, humbly. “But what happened to me, a moment ago? I don’t seem to be just right, someway.”
“You’re upside down,” explained Tip. “But just keep those legs still a minute and I’ll set you right side up again.”
“How many sides have I?” asked the creature, wonderingly.
“Several,” said Tip, briefly. “But do keep those legs still.”
The Saw-Horse now became quiet, and held its legs rigid; so that Tip, after several efforts, was able to roll him over and set him upright.
“Ah, I seem all right now,” said the queer animal, with a sigh.
“One of your ears is broken,” Tip announced, after a careful examination. “I’ll have to make a new one.”
Then he led the Saw-Horse back to where Jack was vainly struggling to regain his feet, and after assisting the Pumpkinhead to stand upright Tip whittled out a new ear and fastened it to the horse’s head.
“Now,” said he, addressing his steed, “pay attention to what I’m going to tell you. ‘Whoa!’ means to stop; ‘Get-Up!’ means to walk forward; ‘Trot!’ means to go as fast as you can. Understand?”
“I believe I do,” returned the horse.
“Very good. We are all going on a journey to the Emerald City, to see His Majesty, the Scarecrow; and Jack Pumpkinhead is going to ride on your back, so he won’t wear out his joints.”
“I don’t mind,” said the Saw-Horse. “Anything that suits you suits me.”
Then Tip assisted Jack to get upon the horse.
“Hold on tight,” he cautioned, “or you may fall off and crack your pumpkin head.”
“That would be horrible!” said Jack, with a shudder. “What shall I hold on to?”
“Why, hold on to his ears,” replied Tip, after a moment’s hesitation.
“Don’t do that!” remonstrated the Saw-Horse; “for then I can’t hear.”
That seemed reasonable, so Tip tried to think of something else.
[Full page line-art drawing: “DOES IT HURT?” ASKED THE BOY]
“I’ll fix it!” said he, at length. He went into the wood and cut a short length of limb from a young, stout tree. One end of this he sharpened to a point, and then he dug a hole in the back of the Saw-Horse, just behind its head. Next he brought a piece of rock from the road and hammered the post firmly into the animal’s back.
“Stop! Stop!” shouted the horse; “you’re jarring me terribly.”
“Does it hurt?” asked the boy.
“Not exactly hurt,” answered the animal; “but it makes me quite nervous to be jarred.”
“Well, it’s all over now” said Tip, encouragingly. “Now, Jack, be sure to hold fast to this post and then you can’t fall off and get smashed.”
So Jack held on tight, and Tip said to the horse:
“Get up.”
The obedient creature at once walked forward, rocking from side to side as he raised his feet from the ground.
Tip walked beside the Saw-Horse, quite content with this addition to their party. Presently he began to whistle.
“What does that sound mean?” asked the horse.
“Don’t pay any attention to it,” said Tip. “I’m just whistling, and that only means I’m pretty well satisfied.”
“I’d whistle myself, if I could push my lips together,” remarked Jack. “I fear, dear father, that in some respects I am sadly lacking.”
After journeying on for some distance the narrow path they were following turned into a broad roadway, paved with yellow brick. By the side of the road Tip noticed a sign-post that read:
“NINE MILES TO THE EMERALD CITY.”
But it was now growing dark, so he decided to camp for the night by the roadside and to resume the journey next morning by daybreak. He led the Saw-Horse to a grassy mound upon which grew several bushy trees, and carefully assisted the Pumpkinhead to alight.
“I think I’ll lay you upon the ground, overnight,” said the boy. “You will be safer that way.”
“How about me?” asked the Saw-Horse.
“It won’t hurt you to stand,” replied Tip; “and, as you can’t sleep, you may as well watch out and see that no one comes near to disturb us.”
Then the boy stretched himself upon the grass beside the Pumpkinhead, and being greatly wearied by the journey was soon fast asleep.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
Jack Pumpkinhead’s Ride to the Emerald City
At daybreak Tip was awakened by the Pumpkinhead. He rubbed the sleep from his eyes, bathed in a little brook, and then ate a portion of his bread and cheese. Having thus prepared for a new day the boy said:
“Let us start at once. Nine miles is quite a distance, but we ought to reach the Emerald City by noon if no accidents happen.” So the Pumpkinhead was again perched upon the back of the Saw-Horse and the journey was resumed.
Tip noticed that the purple tint of the grass and trees had now faded to a dull lavender, and before long this lavender appeared to take on a greenish tinge that gradually brightened as they drew nearer to the great City where the Scarecrow ruled.
The little party had traveled but a short two miles upon their way when the road of yellow brick was parted by a broad and swift river. Tip was puzzled how to cross over; but after a time he discovered a man in a ferry-boat approaching from the other side of the stream.
When the man reached the bank Tip asked:
“Will you row us to the other side?”
“Yes, if you have money,” returned the ferryman, whose face looked cross and disagreeable.
“But I have no money,” said Tip.
“None at all?” inquired the man.
“None at all,” answered the boy.
“Then I’ll not break my back rowing you over,” said the ferryman, decidedly.
“What a nice man!” remarked the Pumpkinhead, smilingly.
The ferryman stared at him, but made no reply. Tip was trying to think, for it was a great disappointment to him to find his journey so suddenly brought to an end.
“I must certainly get to the Emerald City,” he said to the boatman; “but how can I cross the river if you do not take me?”
The man laughed, and it was not a nice laugh.
“That wooden horse will float,” said he; “and you can ride him across. As for the pumpkinheaded loon who accompanies you, let him sink or swim it won’t matter greatly which.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
“Don’t worry about me,” said Jack, smiling pleasantly upon the crabbed ferryman; “I’m sure I ought to float beautifully.”
Tip thought the experiment was worth making, and the Saw-Horse, who did not know what danger meant, offered no objections whatever. So the boy led it down into the water and climbed upon its back. Jack also waded in up to his knees and grasped the tail of the horse so that he might keep his pumpkin head above the water.
“Now,” said Tip, instructing the Saw-Horse, “if you wiggle your legs you will probably swim; and if you swim we shall probably reach the other side.”
The Saw-Horse at once began to wiggle its legs, which acted as oars and moved the adventurers slowly across the river to the opposite side. So successful was the trip that presently they were climbing, wet and dripping, up the grassy bank.
Tip’s trouser-legs and shoes were thoroughly soaked; but the Saw-Horse had floated so perfectly that from his knees up the boy was entirely dry. As for the Pumpkinhead, every stitch of his gorgeous clothing dripped water.
“The sun will soon dry us,” said Tip “and, anyhow, we are now safely across, in spite of the ferryman, and can continue our journey.”
“I didn’t mind swimming, at all,” remarked the horse.
“Nor did I,” added Jack.
They soon regained the road of yellow brick, which proved to be a continuation of the road they had left on the other side, and then Tip once more mounted the Pumpkinhead upon the back of the Saw-Horse.
“If you ride fast,” said he, “the wind will help to dry your clothing. I will hold on to the horse’s tail and run after you. In this way we all will become dry in a very short time.”
“Then the horse must step lively,” said Jack.
“I’ll do my best,” returned the Saw-Horse, cheerfully.
Tip grasped the end of the branch that served as tail to the Saw-Horse, and called loudly: “Get-up!”
The horse started at a good pace, and Tip followed behind. Then he decided they could go faster, so he shouted: “Trot!”
[Line-Art Drawing]
Now, the Saw-Horse remembered that this word was the command to go as fast as he could; so he began rocking along the road at a tremendous pace, and Tip had hard work—running faster than he ever had before in his life—to keep his feet.
Soon he was out of breath, and although he wanted to call “Whoa!” to the horse, he found he could not get the word out of his throat. Then the end of the tail he was clutching, being nothing more than a dead branch, suddenly broke away, and the next minute the boy was rolling in the dust of the road, while the horse and its pumpkin-headed rider dashed on and quickly disappeared in the distance.
By the time Tip had picked himself up and cleared the dust from his throat so he could say “Whoa!” there was no further need of saying it, for the horse was long since out of sight.
So he did the only sensible thing he could do. He sat down and took a good rest, and afterward began walking along the road.
“Some time I will surely overtake them,” he reflected; “for the road will end at the gates of the Emerald City, and they can go no further than that.”
Meantime Jack was holding fast to the post and the Saw-Horse was tearing along the road like a racer. Neither of them knew Tip was left behind, for the Pumpkinhead did not look around and the Saw-Horse couldn’t.
As he rode, Jack noticed that the grass and trees had become a bright emerald-green in color, so he guessed they were nearing the Emerald City even before the tall spires and domes came into sight.
At length a high wall of green stone, studded thick with emeralds, loomed up before them; and fearing the Saw-Horse would not know enough to stop and so might smash them both against this wall, Jack ventured to cry “Whoa!” as loud as he could.
So suddenly did the horse obey that had it not been for his post Jack would have been pitched off head foremost, and his beautiful face ruined.
“That was a fast ride, dear father!” he exclaimed; and then, hearing no reply, he turned around and discovered for the first time that Tip was not there.
This apparent desertion puzzled the Pumpkinhead, and made him uneasy. And while he was wondering what had become of the boy, and what he ought to do next under such trying circumstances, the gateway in the green wall opened and a man came out.
This man was short and round, with a fat face that seemed remarkably good-natured. He was clothed all in green and wore a high, peaked green hat upon his head and green spectacles over his eyes. Bowing before the Pumpkinhead he said:
“I am the Guardian of the Gates of the Emerald City. May I inquire who you are, and what is your business?”
“My name is Jack Pumpkinhead,” returned the other, smilingly; “but as to my business, I haven’t the least idea in the world what it is.”
The Guardian of the Gates looked surprised, and shook his head as if dissatisfied with the reply.
“What are you, a man or a pumpkin?” he asked, politely.
“Both, if you please,” answered Jack.
“And this wooden horse—is it alive?” questioned the Guardian.
The horse rolled one knotty eye upward and winked at Jack. Then it gave a prance and brought one leg down on the Guardian’s toes.
“Ouch!” cried the man; “I’m sorry I asked that question. But the answer is most convincing. Have you any errand, sir, in the Emerald City?”
“It seems to me that I have,” replied the Pumpkinhead, seriously; “but I cannot think what it is. My father knows all about it, but he is not here.”
“This is a strange affair very strange!” declared the Guardian. “But you seem harmless. Folks do not smile so delightfully when they mean mischief.”
“As for that,” said Jack, “I cannot help my smile, for it is carved on my face with a jack-knife.”
“Well, come with me into my room,” resumed the Guardian, “and I will see what can be done for you.”
So Jack rode the Saw-Horse through the gateway into a little room built into the wall. The Guardian pulled a bell-cord, and presently a very tall soldier—clothed in a green uniform—entered from the opposite door. This soldier carried a long green gun over his shoulder and had lovely green whiskers that fell quite to his knees. The Guardian at once addressed him, saying:
“Here is a strange gentleman who doesn’t know why he has come to the Emerald City, or what he wants. Tell me, what shall we do with him?”
The Soldier with the Green Whiskers looked at Jack with much care and curiosity. Finally he shook his head so positively that little waves rippled down his whiskers, and then he said:
“I must take him to His Majesty, the Scarecrow.”
“But what will His Majesty, the Scarecrow, do with him?” asked the Guardian of the Gates.
“That is His Majesty’s business,” returned the soldier. “I have troubles enough of my own. All outside troubles must be turned over to His Majesty. So put the spectacles on this fellow, and I’ll take him to the royal palace.”
So the Guardian opened a big box of spectacles and tried to fit a pair to Jack’s great round eyes.
“I haven’t a pair in stock that will really cover those eyes up,” said the little man, with a sigh; “and your head is so big that I shall be obliged to tie the spectacles on.”
“But why need I wear spectacles?” asked Jack.
“It’s the fashion here,” said the Soldier, “and they will keep you from being blinded by the glitter and glare of the gorgeous Emerald City.”
“Oh!” exclaimed Jack. “Tie them on, by all means. I don’t wish to be blinded.”
“Nor I!” broke in the Saw-Horse; so a pair of green spectacles was quickly fastened over the bulging knots that served it for eyes.
Then the Soldier with the Green Whiskers led them through the inner gate and they at once found themselves in the main street of the magnificent Emerald City.
Sparkling green gems ornamented the fronts of the beautiful houses and the towers and turrets were all faced with emeralds. Even the green marble pavement glittered with precious stones, and it was indeed a grand and marvelous sight to one who beheld it for the first time.
However, the Pumpkinhead and the Saw-Horse, knowing nothing of wealth and beauty, paid little attention to the wonderful sights they saw through their green spectacles. They calmly followed after the green soldier and scarcely noticed the crowds of green people who stared at them in surprise. When a green dog ran out and barked at them the Saw-Horse promptly kicked at it with its wooden leg and sent the little animal howling into one of the houses; but nothing more serious than this happened to interrupt their progress to the royal palace.
The Pumpkinhead wanted to ride up the green marble steps and straight into the Scarecrow’s presence; but the soldier would not permit that. So Jack dismounted, with much difficulty, and a servant led the Saw-Horse around to the rear while the Soldier with the Green Whiskers escorted the Pumpkinhead into the palace, by the front entrance.
The stranger was left in a handsomely furnished waiting room while the soldier went to announce him. It so happened that at this hour His Majesty was at leisure and greatly bored for want of something to do, so he ordered his visitor to be shown at once into his throne room.
Jack felt no fear or embarrassment at meeting the ruler of this magnificent city, for he was entirely ignorant of all worldly customs. But when he entered the room and saw for the first time His Majesty the Scarecrow seated upon his glittering throne, he stopped short in amazement.
[Line-Art Drawing]
 
His Majesty the Scarecrow
I suppose every reader of this book knows what a scarecrow is; but Jack Pumpkinhead, never having seen such a creation, was more surprised at meeting the remarkable King of the Emerald City than by any other one experience of his brief life.
His Majesty the Scarecrow was dressed in a suit of faded blue clothes, and his head was merely a small sack stuffed with straw, upon which eyes, ears, a nose and a mouth had been rudely painted to represent a face. The clothes were also stuffed with straw, and that so unevenly or carelessly that his Majesty’s legs and arms seemed more bumpy than was necessary. Upon his hands were gloves with long fingers, and these were padded with cotton. Wisps of straw stuck out from the monarch’s coat and also from his neck and boot-tops. Upon his head he wore a heavy golden crown set thick with sparkling jewels, and the weight of this crown caused his brow to sag in wrinkles, giving a thoughtful expression to the painted face. Indeed, the crown alone betokened majesty; in all else the, Scarecrow King was but a simple scarecrow—flimsy, awkward, and unsubstantial.
But if the strange appearance of his Majesty the Scarecrow seemed startling to Jack, no less wonderful was the form of the Pumpkinhead to the Scarecrow. The purple trousers and pink waistcoat and red shirt hung loosely over the wooden joints Tip had manufactured, and the carved face on the pumpkin grinned perpetually, as if its wearer considered life the jolliest thing imaginable.
At first, indeed, His Majesty thought his queer visitor was laughing at him, and was inclined to resent such a liberty; but it was not without reason that the Scarecrow had attained the reputation of being the wisest personage in the Land of Oz. He made a more careful examination of his visitor, and soon discovered that Jack’s features were carved into a smile and that he could not look grave if he wished to.
[Line-Art Drawing]
The King was the first to speak. After regarding Jack for some minutes he said, in a tone of wonder:
“Where on earth did you come from, and how do you happen to be alive?”
“I beg your Majesty’s pardon,” returned the Pumpkinhead; “but I do not understand you.”
“What don’t you understand?” asked the Scarecrow.
“Why, I don’t understand your language. You see, I came from the Country of the Gillikins, so that I am a foreigner.”
“Ah, to be sure!” exclaimed the Scarecrow. “I myself speak the language of the Munchkins, which is also the language of the Emerald City. But you, I suppose, speak the language of the Pumpkinheads?”
“Exactly so, your Majesty” replied the other, bowing; “so it will be impossible for us to understand one another.”
“That is unfortunate, certainly,” said the Scarecrow, thoughtfully. “We must have an interpreter.”
“What is an interpreter?” asked Jack.
“A person who understands both my language and your own. When I say anything, the interpreter can tell you what I mean; and when you say anything the interpreter can tell me what you mean. For the interpreter can speak both languages as well as understand them.”
“That is certainly clever,” said Jack, greatly pleased at finding so simple a way out of the difficulty.
So the Scarecrow commanded the Soldier with the Green Whiskers to search among his people until he found one who understood the language of the Gillikins as well as the language of the Emerald City, and to bring that person to him at once.
When the Soldier had departed the Scarecrow said:
“Won’t you take a chair while we are waiting?”
“Your Majesty forgets that I cannot understand you,” replied the Pumpkinhead. “If you wish me to sit down you must make a sign for me to do so.” The Scarecrow came down from his throne and rolled an armchair to a position behind the Pumpkinhead. Then he gave Jack a sudden push that sent him sprawling upon the cushions in so awkward a fashion that he doubled up like a jackknife, and had hard work to untangle himself.
“Did you understand that sign?” asked His Majesty, politely.
“Perfectly,” declared Jack, reaching up his arms to turn his head to the front, the pumpkin having twisted around upon the stick that supported it.
“You seem hastily made,” remarked the Scarecrow, watching Jack’s efforts to straighten himself.
“Not more so than your Majesty,” was the frank reply.
“There is this difference between us,” said the Scarecrow, “that whereas I will bend, but not break, you will break, but not bend.”
[Full page line-art drawing: “HE GAVE JACK A SUDDEN PUSH”]
At this moment the soldier returned leading a young girl by the hand. She seemed very sweet and modest, having a pretty face and beautiful green eyes and hair. A dainty green silk skirt reached to her knees, showing silk stockings embroidered with pea-pods, and green satin slippers with bunches of lettuce for decorations instead of bows or buckles. Upon her silken waist clover leaves were embroidered, and she wore a jaunty little jacket trimmed with sparkling emeralds of a uniform size.
“Why, it’s little Jellia Jamb!” exclaimed the Scarecrow, as the green maiden bowed her pretty head before him. “Do you understand the language of the Gillikins, my dear?”
“Yes, your Majesty,” she answered, “for I was born in the North Country.”
“Then you shall be our interpreter,” said the Scarecrow, “and explain to this Pumpkinhead all that I say, and also explain to me all that he says. Is this arrangement satisfactory?” he asked, turning toward his guest.
“Very satisfactory indeed,” was the reply.
“Then ask him, to begin with,” resumed the Scarecrow, turning to Jellia, “what brought him to the Emerald City”
But instead of this the girl, who had been staring at Jack, said to him:
“You are certainly a wonderful creature. Who made you?”
“A boy named Tip,” answered Jack.
“What does he say?” inquired the Scarecrow. “My ears must have deceived me. What did he say?”
“He says that your Majesty’s brains seem to have come loose,” replied the girl, demurely.
The Scarecrow moved uneasily upon his throne, and felt of his head with his left hand.
“What a fine thing it is to understand two different languages,” he said, with a perplexed sigh. “Ask him, my dear, if he has any objection to being put in jail for insulting the ruler of the Emerald City.”
“I didn’t insult you!” protested Jack, indignantly.
“Tut—tut!” cautioned the Scarecrow “wait, until Jellia translates my speech. What have we got an interpreter for, if you break out in this rash way?”
“All right, I’ll wait,” replied the Pumpkinhead, in a surly tone—although his face smiled as genially as ever. “Translate the speech, young woman.”
“His Majesty inquires if you are hungry,” said Jellia.
“Oh, not at all!” answered Jack, more pleasantly, “for it is impossible for me to eat.”
“It’s the same way with me,” remarked the Scarecrow. “What did he say, Jellia, my dear?”
“He asked if you were aware that one of your eyes is painted larger than the other,” said the girl, mischievously.
“Don’t you believe her, your Majesty,” cried Jack.
“Oh, I don’t,” answered the Scarecrow, calmly. Then, casting a sharp look at the girl, he asked:
“Are you quite certain you understand the languages of both the Gillikins and the Munchkins?”
“Quite certain, your Majesty,” said Jellia Jamb, trying hard not to laugh in the face of royalty.
“Then how is it that I seem to understand them myself?” inquired the Scarecrow.
“Because they are one and the same!” declared the girl, now laughing merrily. “Does not your Majesty know that in all the land of Oz but one language is spoken?”
“Is it indeed so?” cried the Scarecrow, much relieved to hear this; “then I might easily have been my own interpreter!”
“It was all my fault, your Majesty,” said Jack, looking rather foolish, “I thought we must surely speak different languages, since we came from different countries.”
“This should be a warning to you never to think,” returned the Scarecrow, severely. “For unless one can think wisely it is better to remain a dummy—which you most certainly are.”
“I am!—I surely am!” agreed the Pumpkinhead.
“It seems to me,” continued the Scarecrow, more mildly, “that your manufacturer spoiled some good pies to create an indifferent man.”
“I assure your Majesty that I did not ask to be created,” answered Jack.
“Ah! It was the same in my case,” said the King, pleasantly. “And so, as we differ from all ordinary people, let us become friends.”
“With all my heart!” exclaimed Jack.
“What! Have you a heart?” asked the Scarecrow, surprised.
“No; that was only imaginative—I might say, a figure of speech,” said the other.
“Well, your most prominent figure seems to be a figure of wood; so I must beg you to restrain an imagination which, having no brains, you have no right to exercise,” suggested the Scarecrow, warningly.
“To be sure!” said Jack, without in the least comprehending.
His Majesty then dismissed Jellia Jamb and the Soldier with the Green Whiskers, and when they were gone he took his new friend by the arm and led him into the courtyard to play a game of quoits.
[Full page line-art drawing.]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
Gen. Jinjur’s Army of Revolt
Tip was so anxious to rejoin his man Jack and the Saw-Horse that he walked a full half the distance to the Emerald City without stopping to rest. Then he discovered that he was hungry and the crackers and cheese he had provided for the Journey had all been eaten.
While wondering what he should do in this emergency he came upon a girl sitting by the roadside. She wore a costume that struck the boy as being remarkably brilliant: her silken waist being of emerald green and her skirt of four distinct colors—blue in front, yellow at the left side, red at the back and purple at the right side. Fastening the waist in front were four buttons—the top one blue, the next yellow, a third red and the last purple.
[Line-Art Drawing]
The splendor of this dress was almost barbaric; so Tip was fully justified in staring at the gown for some moments before his eyes were attracted by the pretty face above it. Yes, the face was pretty enough, he decided; but it wore an expression of discontent coupled to a shade of defiance or audacity.
While the boy stared the girl looked upon him calmly. A lunch basket stood beside her, and she held a dainty sandwich in one hand and a hard-boiled egg in the other, eating with an evident appetite that aroused Tip’s sympathy.
He was just about to ask a share of the luncheon when the girl stood up and brushed the crumbs from her lap.
“There!” said she; “it is time for me to go. Carry that basket for me and help yourself to its contents if you are hungry.”
Tip seized the basket eagerly and began to eat, following for a time the strange girl without bothering to ask questions. She walked along before him with swift strides, and there was about her an air of decision and importance that led him to suspect she was some great personage.
Finally, when he had satisfied his hunger, he ran up beside her and tried to keep pace with her swift footsteps—a very difficult feat, for she was much taller than he, and evidently in a hurry.
“Thank you very much for the sandwiches,” said Tip, as he trotted along. “May I ask your name?”
“I am General Jinjur,” was the brief reply.
“Oh!” said the boy surprised. “What sort of a General?”
“I command the Army of Revolt in this war,” answered the General, with unnecessary sharpness.
“Oh!” he again exclaimed. “I didn’t know there was a war.”
“You were not supposed to know it,” she returned, “for we have kept it a secret; and considering that our army is composed entirely of girls,” she added, with some pride, “it is surely a remarkable thing that our Revolt is not yet discovered.”
“It is, indeed,” acknowledged Tip. “But where is your army?”
“About a mile from here,” said General Jinjur. “The forces have assembled from all parts of the Land of Oz, at my express command. For this is the day we are to conquer His Majesty the Scarecrow, and wrest from him the throne. The Army of Revolt only awaits my coming to march upon the Emerald City.”
“Well!” declared Tip, drawing a long breath, “this is certainly a surprising thing! May I ask why you wish to conquer His Majesty the Scarecrow?”
“Because the Emerald City has been ruled by men long enough, for one reason,” said the girl.
“Moreover, the City glitters with beautiful gems, which might far better be used for rings, bracelets and necklaces; and there is enough money in the King’s treasury to buy every girl in our Army a dozen new gowns. So we intend to conquer the City and run the government to suit ourselves.”
Jinjur spoke these words with an eagerness and decision that proved she was in earnest.
“But war is a terrible thing,” said Tip, thoughtfully.
“This war will be pleasant,” replied the girl, cheerfully.
“Many of you will be slain!” continued the boy, in an awed voice.
“Oh, no”, said Jinjur. “What man would oppose a girl, or dare to harm her? And there is not an ugly face in my entire Army.”
Tip laughed.
“Perhaps you are right,” said he. “But the Guardian of the Gate is considered a faithful Guardian, and the King’s Army will not let the City be conquered without a struggle.”
“The Army is old and feeble,” replied General Jinjur, scornfully. “His strength has all been used to grow whiskers, and his wife has such a temper that she has already pulled more than half of them out by the roots. When the Wonderful Wizard reigned the Soldier with the Green Whiskers was a very good Royal Army, for people feared the Wizard. But no one is afraid of the Scarecrow, so his Royal Army don’t count for much in time of war.”
After this conversation they proceeded some distance in silence, and before long reached a large clearing in the forest where fully four hundred young women were assembled. These were laughing and talking together as gaily as if they had gathered for a picnic instead of a war of conquest.
They were divided into four companies, and Tip noticed that all were dressed in costumes similar to that worn by General Jinjur. The only real difference was that while those girls from the Munchkin country had the blue strip in front of their skirts, those from the country of the Quadlings had the red strip in front; and those from the country of the Winkies had the yellow strip in front, and the Gillikin girls wore the purple strip in front. All had green waists, representing the Emerald City they intended to conquer, and the top button on each waist indicated by its color which country the wearer came from. The uniforms were Jaunty and becoming, and quite effective when massed together.
Tip thought this strange Army bore no weapons whatever; but in this he was wrong. For each girl had stuck through the knot of her back hair two long, glittering knitting-needles.
General Jinjur immediately mounted the stump of a tree and addressed her army.
“Friends, fellow-citizens, and girls!” she said; “we are about to begin our great Revolt against the men of Oz! We march to conquer the Emerald City—to dethrone the Scarecrow King—to acquire thousands of gorgeous gems—to rifle the royal treasury—and to obtain power over our former oppressors!”
“Hurrah!” said those who had listened; but Tip thought most of the Army was too much engaged in chattering to pay attention to the words of the General.
The command to march was now given, and the girls formed themselves into four bands, or companies, and set off with eager strides toward the Emerald City.
[Line-Art Drawing on the right of this page.]
[Line-Art Drawing]
The boy followed after them, carrying several baskets and wraps and packages which various members of the Army of Revolt had placed in his care. It was not long before they came to the green granite walls of the City and halted before the gateway.
The Guardian of the Gate at once came out and looked at them curiously, as if a circus had come to town. He carried a bunch of keys swung round his neck by a golden chain; his hands were thrust carelessly into his pockets, and he seemed to have no idea at all that the City was threatened by rebels. Speaking pleasantly to the girls, he said:
“Good morning, my dears! What can I do for you?”
[Line-Art Drawing]
“Surrender instantly!” answered General Jinjur, standing before him and frowning as terribly as her pretty face would allow her to.
“Surrender!” echoed the man, astounded. “Why, it’s impossible. It’s against the law! I never heard of such a thing in my life.”
“Still, you must surrender!” exclaimed the General, fiercely. “We are revolting!”
“You don’t look it,” said the Guardian, gazing from one to another, admiringly.
“But we are!” cried Jinjur, stamping her foot, impatiently; “and we mean to conquer the Emerald City!”
“Good gracious!” returned the surprised Guardian of the Gates; “what a nonsensical idea! Go home to your mothers, my good girls, and milk the cows and bake the bread. Don’t you know it’s a dangerous thing to conquer a city?”
“We are not afraid!” responded the General; and she looked so determined that it made the Guardian uneasy.
So he rang the bell for the Soldier with the Green Whiskers, and the next minute was sorry he had done so. For immediately he was surrounded by a crowd of girls who drew the knitting-needles from their hair and began Jabbing them at the Guardian with the sharp points dangerously near his fat cheeks and blinking eyes.
The poor man howled loudly for mercy and made no resistance when Jinjur drew the bunch of keys from around his neck.
[Full page line-art drawing: GENERAL JINJUR AND HER ARMY CAPTURE THE CITY.]
Followed by her Army the General now rushed to the gateway, where she was confronted by the Royal Army of Oz—which was the other name for the Soldier with the Green Whiskers.
“Halt!” he cried, and pointed his long gun full in the face of the leader.
Some of the girls screamed and ran back, but General Jinjur bravely stood her ground and said, reproachfully:
“Why, how now? Would you shoot a poor, defenceless girl?”
“No,” replied the soldier. “for my gun isn’t loaded.”
“Not loaded?”
“No; for fear of accidents. And I’ve forgotten where I hid the powder and shot to load it with. But if you’ll wait a short time I’ll try to hunt them up.”
“Don’t trouble yourself,” said Jinjur, cheerfully. Then she turned to her Army and cried:
“Girls, the gun isn’t loaded!”
“Hooray,” shrieked the rebels, delighted at this good news, and they proceeded to rush upon the Soldier with the Green Whiskers in such a crowd that it was a wonder they didn’t stick the knitting-needles into one another.
But the Royal Army of Oz was too much afraid of women to meet the onslaught. He simply turned about and ran with all his might through the gate and toward the royal palace, while General Jinjur and her mob flocked into the unprotected City.
In this way was the Emerald City captured without a drop of blood being spilled. The Army of Revolt had become an Army of Conquerors!
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
The Scarecrow Plans an escape
Tip slipped away from the girls and followed swiftly after the Soldier with the Green Whiskers. The invading army entered the City more slowly, for they stopped to dig emeralds out of the walls and paving-stones with the points of their knitting-needles. So the Soldier and the boy reached the palace before the news had spread that the City was conquered.
The Scarecrow and Jack Pumpkinhead were still playing at quoits in the courtyard when the game was interrupted by the abrupt entrance of the Royal Army of Oz, who came flying in without his hat or gun, his clothes in sad disarray and his long beard floating a yard behind him as he ran.
“Tally one for me,” said the Scarecrow, calmly “What’s wrong, my man?” he added, addressing the Soldier.
“Oh! your Majesty—your Majesty! The City is conquered!” gasped the Royal Army, who was all out of breath.
“This is quite sudden,” said the Scarecrow. “But please go and bar all the doors and windows of the palace, while I show this Pumpkinhead how to throw a quoit.”
The Soldier hastened to do this, while Tip, who had arrived at his heels, remained in the courtyard to look at the Scarecrow with wondering eyes.
His Majesty continued to throw the quoits as coolly as if no danger threatened his throne, but the Pumpkinhead, having caught sight of Tip, ambled toward the boy as fast as his wooden legs would go.
“Good afternoon, noble parent!” he cried, delightedly. “I’m glad to see you are here. That terrible Saw-Horse ran away with me.”
“I suspected it,” said Tip. “Did you get hurt? Are you cracked at all?”
“No, I arrived safely,” answered Jack, “and his Majesty has been very kind indeed to me.”
At this moment the Soldier with the Green Whiskers returned, and the Scarecrow asked:
“By the way, who has conquered me?”
“A regiment of girls, gathered from the four corners of the Land of Oz,” replied the Soldier, still pale with fear.
“But where was my Standing Army at the time?” inquired his Majesty, looking at the Soldier, gravely.
“Your Standing Army was running,” answered the fellow, honestly; “for no man could face the terrible weapons of the invaders.”
“Well,” said the Scarecrow, after a moment’s thought, “I don’t mind much the loss of my throne, for it’s a tiresome job to rule over the Emerald City. And this crown is so heavy that it makes my head ache. But I hope the Conquerors have no intention of injuring me, just because I happen to be the King.”
“I heard them, say” remarked Tip, with some hesitation, “that they intend to make a rag carpet of your outside and stuff their sofa-cushions with your inside.”
“Then I am really in danger,” declared his Majesty, positively, “and it will be wise for me to consider a means to escape.”
“Where can you go?” asked Jack Pumpkinhead.
“Why, to my friend the Tin Woodman, who rules over the Winkies, and calls himself their Emperor,” was the answer. “I am sure he will protect me.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
Tip was looking out the window.
“The palace is surrounded by the enemy,” said he. “It is too late to escape. They would soon tear you to pieces.”
The Scarecrow sighed.
“In an emergency,” he announced, “it is always a good thing to pause and reflect. Please excuse me while I pause and reflect.”
“But we also are in danger,” said the Pumpkinhead, anxiously. “If any of these girls understand cooking, my end is not far off!”
“Nonsense!” exclaimed the Scarecrow. “they’re too busy to cook, even if they know how!”
“But should I remain here a prisoner for any length of time,” protested Jack, “I’m liable to spoil.”
“Ah! then you would not be fit to associate with,” returned the Scarecrow. “The matter is more serious than I suspected.”
“You,” said the Pumpkinhead, gloomily, “are liable to live for many years. My life is necessarily short. So I must take advantage of the few days that remain to me.”
“There, there! Don’t worry,” answered the Scarecrow soothingly; “if you’ll keep quiet long enough for me to think, I’ll try to find some way for us all to escape.”
So the others waited in patient silence while the Scarecrow walked to a corner and stood with his face to the wall for a good five minutes. At the end of that time he faced them with a more cheerful expression upon his painted face.
“Where is the Saw-Horse you rode here?” he asked the Pumpkinhead.
“Why, I said he was a jewel, and so your man locked him up in the royal treasury,” said Jack.
“It was the only place I could think of your Majesty,” added the Soldier, fearing he had made a blunder.
“It pleases me very much,” said the Scarecrow. “Has the animal been fed?”
“Oh, yes; I gave him a heaping peck of sawdust.”
“Excellent!” cried the Scarecrow. “Bring the horse here at once.”
The Soldier hastened away, and presently they heard the clattering of the horse’s wooden legs upon the pavement as he was led into the courtyard.
His Majesty regarded the steed critically. “He doesn’t seem especially graceful!” he remarked, musingly. “but I suppose he can run?”
“He can, indeed,” said Tip, gazing upon the Saw-Horse admiringly.
“Then, bearing us upon his back, he must make a dash through the ranks of the rebels and carry us to my friend the Tin Woodman,” announced the Scarecrow.
“He can’t carry four!” objected Tip.
“No, but he may be induced to carry three,” said his Majesty. “I shall therefore leave my Royal Army Behind. For, from the ease with which he was conquered, I have little confidence in his powers.”
“Still, he can run,” declared Tip, laughing.
“I expected this blow” said the Soldier, sulkily; “but I can bear it. I shall disguise myself by cutting off my lovely green whiskers. And, after all, it is no more dangerous to face those reckless girls than to ride this fiery, untamed wooden horse!”
“Perhaps you are right,” observed his Majesty. “But, for my part, not being a soldier, I am fond of danger. Now, my boy, you must mount first. And please sit as close to the horse’s neck as possible.”
Tip climbed quickly to his place, and the Soldier and the Scarecrow managed to hoist the Pumpkinhead to a seat just behind him. There remained so little space for the King that he was liable to fall off as soon as the horse started.
“Fetch a clothesline,” said the King to his Army, “and tie us all together. Then if one falls off we will all fall off.”
And while the Soldier was gone for the clothesline his Majesty continued, “it is well for me to be careful, for my very existence is in danger.”
“I have to be as careful as you do,” said Jack.
“Not exactly,” replied the Scarecrow. “for if anything happened to me, that would be the end of me. But if anything happened to you, they could use you for seed.”
The Soldier now returned with a long line and tied all three firmly together, also lashing them to the body of the Saw-Horse; so there seemed little danger of their tumbling off.
“Now throw open the gates,” commanded the Scarecrow, “and we will make a dash to liberty or to death.”
The courtyard in which they were standing was located in the center of the great palace, which surrounded it on all sides. But in one place a passage led to an outer gateway, which the Soldier had barred by order of his sovereign. It was through this gateway his Majesty proposed to escape, and the Royal Army now led the Saw-Horse along the passage and unbarred the gate, which swung backward with a loud crash.
“Now,” said Tip to the horse, “you must save us all. Run as fast as you can for the gate of the City, and don’t let anything stop you.”
[Full page line-art drawing: “WE WILL MAKE A DASH TO LIBERTY OR TO DEATH.”]
“All right!” answered the Saw-Horse, gruffly, and dashed away so suddenly that Tip had to gasp for breath and hold firmly to the post he had driven into the creature’s neck.
Several of the girls, who stood outside guarding the palace, were knocked over by the Saw-Horse’s mad rush. Others ran screaming out of the way, and only one or two jabbed their knitting-needles frantically at the escaping prisoners. Tip got one small prick in his left arm, which smarted for an hour afterward; but the needles had no effect upon the Scarecrow or Jack Pumpkinhead, who never even suspected they were being prodded.
As for the Saw-Horse, he made a wonderful record upsetting a fruit cart, overturning several meek looking men, and finally bowling over the new Guardian of the Gate—a fussy little fat woman appointed by General Jinjur.
Nor did the impetuous charger stop then. Once outside the walls of the Emerald City he dashed along the road to the West with fast and violent leaps that shook the breath out of the boy and filled the Scarecrow with wonder.
Jack had ridden at this mad rate once before, so he devoted every effort to holding, with both hands, his pumpkin head upon its stick, enduring meantime the dreadful jolting with the courage of a philosopher.
[Full page line-art drawing: THE WOODEN STEED GAVE ONE FINAL LEAP]
“Slow him up! Slow him up!” shouted the Scarecrow. “My straw is all shaking down into my legs.”
But Tip had no breath to speak, so the Saw-Horse continued his wild career unchecked and with unabated speed.
Presently they came to the banks of a wide river, and without a pause the wooden steed gave one final leap and launched them all in mid-air.
A second later they were rolling, splashing and bobbing about in the water, the horse struggling frantically to find a rest for its feet and its riders being first plunged beneath the rapid current and then floating upon the surface like corks.
[Line-Art Drawing]
 
The Journey to the Tin Woodman
Tip was well soaked and dripping water from every angle of his body. But he managed to lean forward and shout in the ear of the Saw-Horse:
“Keep still, you fool! Keep still!”
The horse at once ceased struggling and floated calmly upon the surface, its wooden body being as buoyant as a raft.
“What does that word ‘fool’ mean?” enquired the horse.
“It is a term of reproach,” answered Tip, somewhat ashamed of the expression. “I only use it when I am angry.”
“Then it pleases me to be able to call you a fool, in return,” said the horse. “For I did not make the river, nor put it in our way; so only a term of, reproach is fit for one who becomes angry with me for falling into the water.”
“That is quite evident,” replied Tip; “so I will acknowledge myself in the wrong.” Then he called out to the Pumpkinhead: “are you all right, Jack?”
There was no reply. So the boy called to the King “are you all right, your majesty?”
The Scarecrow groaned.
“I’m all wrong, somehow,” he said, in a weak voice. “How very wet this water is!”
Tip was bound so tightly by the cord that he could not turn his head to look at his companions; so he said to the Saw-Horse:
“Paddle with your legs toward the shore.”
The horse obeyed, and although their progress was slow they finally reached the opposite river bank at a place where it was low enough to enable the creature to scramble upon dry land.
With some difficulty the boy managed to get his knife out of his pocket and cut the cords that bound the riders to one another and to the wooden horse. He heard the Scarecrow fall to the ground with a mushy sound, and then he himself quickly dismounted and looked at his friend Jack.
The wooden body, with its gorgeous clothing, still sat upright upon the horse’s back; but the pumpkin head was gone, and only the sharpened stick that served for a neck was visible. As for the Scarecrow, the straw in his body had shaken down with the jolting and packed itself into his legs and the lower part of his body—which appeared very plump and round while his upper half seemed like an empty sack. Upon his head the Scarecrow still wore the heavy crown, which had been sewed on to prevent his losing it; but the head was now so damp and limp that the weight of the gold and jewels sagged forward and crushed the painted face into a mass of wrinkles that made him look exactly like a Japanese pug dog.
Tip would have laughed—had he not been so anxious about his man Jack. But the Scarecrow, however damaged, was all there, while the pumpkin head that was so necessary to Jack’s existence was missing; so the boy seized a long pole that fortunately lay near at hand and anxiously turned again toward the river.
[Full page line-art drawing: TIP RESCUES JACK’S PUMPKIN HEAD]
Far out upon the waters he sighted the golden hue of the pumpkin, which gently bobbed up and down with the motion of the waves. At that moment it was quite out of Tip’s reach, but after a time it floated nearer and still nearer until the boy was able to reach it with his pole and draw it to the shore. Then he brought it to the top of the bank, carefully wiped the water from its pumpkin face with his handkerchief, and ran with it to Jack and replaced the head upon the man’s neck.
“Dear me!” were Jack’s first words. “What a dreadful experience! I wonder if water is liable to spoil pumpkins?”
Tip did not think a reply was necessary, for he knew that the Scarecrow also stood in need of his help. So he carefully removed the straw from the King’s body and legs, and spread it out in the sun to dry. The wet clothing he hung over the body of the Saw-Horse.
“If water spoils pumpkins,” observed Jack, with a deep sigh, “then my days are numbered.”
“I’ve never noticed that water spoils pumpkins,” returned Tip; “unless the water happens to be boiling. If your head isn’t cracked, my friend, you must be in fairly good condition.”
“Oh, my head isn’t cracked in the least,” declared Jack, more cheerfully.
“Then don’t worry,” retorted the boy. “Care once killed a cat.”
“Then,” said Jack, seriously, “I am very glad indeed that I am not a cat.”
The sun was fast drying their clothing, and Tip stirred up his Majesty’s straw so that the warm rays might absorb the moisture and make it as crisp and dry as ever. When this had been accomplished he stuffed the Scarecrow into symmetrical shape and smoothed out his face so that he wore his usual gay and charming expression.
“Thank you very much,” said the monarch, brightly, as he walked about and found himself to be well balanced. “There are several distinct advantages in being a Scarecrow. For if one has friends near at hand to repair damages, nothing very serious can happen to you.”
“I wonder if hot sunshine is liable to crack pumpkins,” said Jack, with an anxious ring in his voice.
“Not at all—not at all!” replied the Scarecrow, gaily. “All you need fear, my boy, is old age. When your golden youth has decayed we shall quickly part company—but you needn’t look forward to it; we’ll discover the fact ourselves, and notify you. But come! Let us resume our journey. I am anxious to greet my friend the Tin Woodman.”
So they remounted the Saw-Horse, Tip holding to the post, the Pumpkinhead clinging to Tip, and the Scarecrow with both arms around the wooden form of Jack.
[Full page line-art drawing: TIP STUFFS THE SCARECROW WITH DRY STRAW.]
“Go slowly, for now there is no danger of pursuit,” said Tip to his steed.
“All right!” responded the creature, in a voice rather gruff.
“Aren’t you a little hoarse?” asked the Pumpkinhead politely.
The Saw-Horse gave an angry prance and rolled one knotty eye backward toward Tip.
“See here,” he growled, “can’t you protect me from insult?”
“To be sure!” answered Tip, soothingly. “I am sure Jack meant no harm. And it will not do for us to quarrel, you know; we must all remain good friends.”
“I’ll have nothing more to do with that Pumpkinhead,” declared the Saw-Horse, viciously. “he loses his head too easily to suit me.”
There seemed no fitting reply to this speech, so for a time they rode along in silence.
After a while the Scarecrow remarked:
“This reminds me of old times. It was upon this grassy knoll that I once saved Dorothy from the Stinging Bees of the Wicked Witch of the West.”
“Do Stinging Bees injure pumpkins?” asked Jack, glancing around fearfully.
“They are all dead, so it doesn’t matter,” replied the Scarecrow. “And here is where Nick Chopper destroyed the Wicked Witch’s Grey Wolves.”
“Who was Nick Chopper?” asked Tip.
“That is the name of my friend the Tin Woodman, answered his Majesty. And here is where the Winged Monkeys captured and bound us, and flew away with little Dorothy,” he continued, after they had traveled a little way farther.
“Do Winged Monkeys ever eat pumpkins?” asked Jack, with a shiver of fear.
“I do not know; but you have little cause to, worry, for the Winged Monkeys are now the slaves of Glinda the Good, who owns the Golden Cap that commands their services,” said the Scarecrow, reflectively.
Then the stuffed monarch became lost in thought recalling the days of past adventures. And the Saw-Horse rocked and rolled over the flower-strewn fields and carried its riders swiftly upon their way.
 
Twilight fell, bye and bye, and then the dark shadows of night. So Tip stopped the horse and they all proceeded to dismount.
“I’m tired out,” said the boy, yawning wearily; “and the grass is soft and cool. Let us lie down here and sleep until morning.”
“I can’t sleep,” said Jack.
“I never do,” said the Scarecrow.
“I do not even know what sleep is,” said the Saw-Horse.
“Still, we must have consideration for this poor boy, who is made of flesh and blood and bone, and gets tired,” suggested the Scarecrow, in his usual thoughtful manner. “I remember it was the same way with little Dorothy. We always had to sit through the night while she slept.”
“I’m sorry,” said Tip, meekly, “but I can’t help it. And I’m dreadfully hungry, too!”
“Here is a new danger!” remarked Jack, gloomily. “I hope you are not fond of eating pumpkins.”
“Not unless they’re stewed and made into pies,” answered the boy, laughing. “So have no fears of me, friend Jack.”
“What a coward that Pumpkinhead is!” said the Saw-Horse, scornfully.
“You might be a coward yourself, if you knew you were liable to spoil!” retorted Jack, angrily.
“There!—there!” interrupted the Scarecrow; “don’t let us quarrel. We all have our weaknesses, dear friends; so we must strive to be considerate of one another. And since this poor boy is hungry and has nothing whatever to eat, let us all remain quiet and allow him to sleep; for it is said that in sleep a mortal may forget even hunger.”
“Thank you!” exclaimed Tip, gratefully. “Your Majesty is fully as good as you are wise—and that is saying a good deal!”
He then stretched himself upon the grass and, using the stuffed form of the Scarecrow for a pillow, was presently fast asleep.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
A Nickel-Plated Emperor
Tip awoke soon after dawn, but the Scarecrow had already risen and plucked, with his clumsy fingers, a double-handful of ripe berries from some bushes near by. These the boy ate greedily, finding them an ample breakfast, and afterward the little party resumed its Journey.
After an hour’s ride they reached the summit of a hill from whence they espied the City of the Winkies and noted the tall domes of the Emperor’s palace rising from the clusters of more modest dwellings.
The Scarecrow became greatly animated at this sight, and exclaimed:
“How delighted I shall be to see my old friend the Tin Woodman again! I hope that he rules his people more successfully than I have ruled mine!”
“Is the Tin Woodman the Emperor of the Winkies?” asked the horse.
“Yes, indeed. They invited him to rule over them soon after the Wicked Witch was destroyed; and as Nick Chopper has the best heart in all the world I am sure he has proved an excellent and able emperor.”
“I thought that ‘Emperor’ was the title of a person who rules an empire,” said Tip, “and the Country of the Winkies is only a Kingdom.”
“Don’t mention that to the Tin Woodman!” exclaimed the Scarecrow, earnestly. “You would hurt his feelings terribly. He is a proud man, as he has every reason to be, and it pleases him to be termed Emperor rather than King.”
“I’m sure it makes no difference to me,” replied the boy.
The Saw-Horse now ambled forward at a pace so fast that its riders had hard work to stick upon its back; so there was little further conversation until they drew up beside the palace steps.
An aged Winkie, dressed in a uniform of silver cloth, came forward to assist them to alight. Said the Scarecrow to his personage:
“Show us at once to your master, the Emperor.”
The man looked from one to another of the party in an embarrassed way, and finally answered:
“I fear I must ask you to wait for a time. The Emperor is not receiving this morning.”
“How is that?” enquired the Scarecrow, anxiously. “I hope nothing has happened to him.”
“Oh, no; nothing serious,” returned the man. “But this is his Majesty’s day for being polished; and just now his august presence is thickly smeared with putz-pomade.”
“Oh, I see!” cried the Scarecrow, greatly reassured. “My friend was ever inclined to be a dandy, and I suppose he is now more proud than ever of his personal appearance.”
“He is, indeed,” said the man, with a polite bow. “Our mighty Emperor has lately caused himself to be nickel-plated.”
“Good Gracious!” the Scarecrow exclaimed at hearing this. “If his wit bears the same polish, how sparkling it must be! But show us in—I’m sure the Emperor will receive us, even in his present state”
“The Emperor’s state is always magnificent,” said the man. “But I will venture to tell him of your arrival, and will receive his commands concerning you.”
So the party followed the servant into a splendid ante-room, and the Saw-Horse ambled awkwardly after them, having no knowledge that a horse might be expected to remain outside.
The travelers were at first somewhat awed by their surroundings, and even the Scarecrow seemed impressed as he examined the rich hangings of silver cloth caught up into knots and fastened with tiny silver axes. Upon a handsome center-table stood a large silver oil-can, richly engraved with scenes from the past adventures of the Tin Woodman, Dorothy, the Cowardly Lion and the Scarecrow: the lines of the engraving being traced upon the silver in yellow gold. On the walls hung several portraits, that of the Scarecrow seeming to be the most prominent and carefully executed, while a the large painting of the famous Wizard of Oz, in act of presenting the Tin Woodman with a heart, covered almost one entire end of the room.
While the visitors gazed at these things in silent admiration they suddenly heard a loud voice in the next room exclaim:
“Well! well! well! What a great surprise!”
And then the door burst open and Nick Chopper rushed into their midst and caught the Scarecrow in a close and loving embrace that creased him into many folds and wrinkles.
“My dear old friend! My noble comrade!” cried the Tin Woodman, joyfully. “how delighted! I am to meet you once again.”
[Full page line-art drawing: CAUGHT THE SCARECROW IN A CLOSE AND LOVING EMBRACE]
And then he released the Scarecrow and held him at arms’ length while he surveyed the beloved, painted features.
But, alas! the face of the Scarecrow and many portions of his body bore great blotches of putz-pomade; for the Tin Woodman, in his eagerness to welcome his friend, had quite forgotten the condition of his toilet and had rubbed the thick coating of paste from his own body to that of his comrade.
“Dear me!” said the Scarecrow dolefully. “What a mess I’m in!”
“Never mind, my friend,” returned the Tin Woodman, “I’ll send you to my Imperial Laundry, and you’ll come out as good as new.”
“Won’t I be mangled?” asked the Scarecrow.
“No, indeed!” was the reply. “But tell me, how came your Majesty here? and who are your companions?”
The Scarecrow, with great politeness, introduced Tip and Jack Pumpkinhead, and the latter personage seemed to interest the Tin Woodman greatly.
“You are not very substantial, I must admit,” said the Emperor. “but you are certainly unusual, and therefore worthy to become a member of our select society.”
“I thank your Majesty,” said Jack, humbly.
[Line-Art Drawing]
“I hope you are enjoying good health?” continued the Woodman.
“At present, yes;” replied the Pumpkinhead, with a sigh; “but I am in constant terror of the day when I shall spoil.”
“Nonsense!” said the Emperor—but in a kindly, sympathetic tone. “Do not, I beg of you, dampen today’s sun with the showers of tomorrow. For before your head has time to spoil you can have it canned, and in that way it may be preserved indefinitely.”
Tip, during this conversation, was looking at the Woodman with undisguised amazement, and noticed that the celebrated Emperor of the Winkies was composed entirely of pieces of tin, neatly soldered and riveted together into the form of a man. He rattled and clanked a little, as he moved, but in the main he seemed to be most cleverly constructed, and his appearance was only marred by the thick coating of polishing-paste that covered him from head to foot.
The boy’s intent gaze caused the Tin Woodman to remember that he was not in the most presentable condition, so he begged his friends to excuse him while he retired to his private apartment and allowed his servants to polish him. This was accomplished in a short time, and when the emperor returned his nickel-plated body shone so magnificently that the Scarecrow heartily congratulated him on his improved appearance.
“That nickel-plate was, I confess, a happy thought,” said Nick; “and it was the more necessary because I had become somewhat scratched during my adventurous experiences. You will observe this engraved star upon my left breast. It not only indicates where my excellent heart lies, but covers very neatly the patch made by the Wonderful Wizard when he placed that valued organ in my breast with his own skillful hands.”
“Is your heart, then, a hand-organ?” asked the Pumpkinhead, curiously.
“By no means,” responded the emperor, with dignity. “It is, I am convinced, a strictly orthodox heart, although somewhat larger and warmer than most people possess.”
Then he turned to the Scarecrow and asked:
“Are your subjects happy and contented, my dear friend?”
“I cannot, say” was the reply. “for the girls of Oz have risen in revolt and driven me out of the emerald City.”
“Great Goodness!” cried the Tin Woodman, “What a calamity! They surely do not complain of your wise and gracious rule?”
“No; but they say it is a poor rule that don’t work both ways,” answered the Scarecrow; “and these females are also of the opinion that men have ruled the land long enough. So they have captured my city, robbed the treasury of all its jewels, and are running things to suit themselves.”
“Dear me! What an extraordinary idea!” cried the Emperor, who was both shocked and surprised.
“And I heard some of them say,” said Tip, “that they intend to march here and capture the castle and city of the Tin Woodman.”
[Full page line-art drawing: RENOVATING HIS MAJESTY, THE SCARECROW.]
“Ah! we must not give them time to do that,” said the Emperor, quickly; “we will go at once and recapture the Emerald City and place the Scarecrow again upon his throne.”
“I was sure you would help me,” remarked the Scarecrow in a pleased voice. “How large an army can you assemble?”
“We do not need an army,” replied the Woodman. “We four, with the aid of my gleaming axe, are enough to strike terror into the hearts of the rebels.”
“We five,” corrected the Pumpkinhead.
“Five?” repeated the Tin Woodman.
“Yes; the Saw-Horse is brave and fearless,” answered Jack, forgetting his recent quarrel with the quadruped.
The Tin Woodman looked around him in a puzzled way, for the Saw-Horse had until now remained quietly standing in a corner, where the Emperor had not noticed him. Tip immediately called the odd-looking creature to them, and it approached so awkwardly that it nearly upset the beautiful center-table and the engraved oil-can.
“I begin to think,” remarked the Tin Woodman as he looked earnestly at the Saw-Horse, “that wonders will never cease! How came this creature alive?”
“I did it with a magic powder,” modestly asserted the boy. “and the Saw-Horse has been very useful to us.”
“He enabled us to escape the rebels,” added the Scarecrow.
“Then we must surely accept him as a comrade,” declared the emperor. “A live Saw-Horse is a distinct novelty, and should prove an interesting study. Does he know anything?”
“Well, I cannot claim any great experience in life,” the Saw-Horse answered for himself. “but I seem to learn very quickly, and often it occurs to me that I know more than any of those around me.”
“Perhaps you do,” said the emperor; “for experience does not always mean wisdom. But time is precious just now, so let us quickly make preparations to start upon our Journey.”
The emperor called his Lord High Chancellor and instructed him how to run the kingdom during his absence. Meanwhile the Scarecrow was taken apart and the painted sack that served him for a head was carefully laundered and restuffed with the brains originally given him by the great Wizard. His clothes were also cleaned and pressed by the Imperial tailors, and his crown polished and again sewed upon his head, for the Tin Woodman insisted he should not renounce this badge of royalty. The Scarecrow now presented a very respectable appearance, and although in no way addicted to vanity he was quite pleased with himself and strutted a trifle as he walked. While this was being done Tip mended the wooden limbs of Jack Pumpkinhead and made them stronger than before, and the Saw-Horse was also inspected to see if he was in good working order.
Then bright and early the next morning they set out upon the return Journey to the emerald City, the Tin Woodman bearing upon his shoulder a gleaming axe and leading the way, while the Pumpkinhead rode upon the Saw-Horse and Tip and the Scarecrow walked upon either side to make sure that he didn’t fall off or become damaged.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
Mr. H. M. Woggle-Bug, T. E.
Now, General Jinjur—who, you will remember, commanded the Army of Revolt—was rendered very uneasy by the escape of the Scarecrow from the Emerald City. She feared, and with good reason, that if his Majesty and the Tin Woodman Joined forces, it would mean danger to her and her entire army; for the people of Oz had not yet forgotten the deeds of these famous heroes, who had passed successfully through so many startling adventures.
So Jinjur sent post-haste for old Mombi, the witch, and promised her large rewards if she would come to the assistance of the rebel army.
Mombi was furious at the trick Tip had played upon her as well as at his escape and the theft of the precious Powder of Life; so she needed no urging to induce her to travel to the Emerald City to assist Jinjur in defeating the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman, who had made Tip one of their friends.
Mombi had no sooner arrived at the royal palace than she discovered, by means of her secret magic, that the adventurers were starting upon their Journey to the Emerald City; so she retired to a small room high up in a tower and locked herself in while she practised such arts as she could command to prevent the return of the Scarecrow and his companions.
That was why the Tin Woodman presently stopped and said:
“Something very curious has happened. I ought to know by heart and every step of this Journey, yet I fear we have already lost our way.”
“That is quite impossible!” protested the Scarecrow. “Why do you think, my dear friend, that we have gone astray?”
“Why, here before us is a great field of sunflowers—and I never saw this field before in all my life.”
At these words they all looked around, only to find that they were indeed surrounded by a field of tall stalks, every stalk bearing at its top a gigantic sunflower. And not only were these flowers almost blinding in their vivid hues of red and gold, but each one whirled around upon its stalk like a miniature wind-mill, completely dazzling the vision of the beholders and so mystifying them that they knew not which way to turn.
“It’s witchcraft!” exclaimed Tip.
While they paused, hesitating and wondering, the Tin Woodman uttered a cry of impatience and advanced with swinging axe to cut down the stalks before him. But now the sunflowers suddenly stopped their rapid whirling, and the travelers plainly saw a girl’s face appear in the center of each flower. These lovely faces looked upon the astonished band with mocking smiles, and then burst into a chorus of merry laughter at the dismay their appearance caused.
“Stop! stop!” cried Tip, seizing the Woodman’s arm; “they’re alive! they’re girls!”
At that moment the flowers began whirling again, and the faces faded away and were lost in the rapid revolutions.
The Tin Woodman dropped his axe and sat down upon the ground.
“It would be heartless to chop down those pretty creatures,” said he, despondently. “and yet I do not know how else we can proceed upon our way”
“They looked to me strangely like the faces of the Army of Revolt,” mused the Scarecrow. “But I cannot conceive how the girls could have followed us here so quickly.”
“I believe it’s magic,” said Tip, positively, “and that someone is playing a trick upon us. I’ve known old Mombi do things like that before. Probably it’s nothing more than an illusion, and there are no sunflowers here at all.”
“Then let us shut our eyes and walk forward,” suggested the Woodman.
“Excuse me,” replied the Scarecrow. “My eyes are not painted to shut. Because you happen to have tin eyelids, you must not imagine we are all built in the same way.”
“And the eyes of the Saw-Horse are knot eyes,” said Jack, leaning forward to examine them.
“Nevertheless, you must ride quickly forward,” commanded Tip, “and we will follow after you and so try to escape. My eyes are already so dazzled that I can scarcely see.”
So the Pumpkinhead rode boldly forward, and Tip grasped the stub tail of the Saw-Horse and followed with closed eyes. The Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman brought up the rear, and before they had gone many yards a Joyful shout from Jack announced that the way was clear before them.
Then all paused to look backward, but not a trace of the field of sunflowers remained.
More cheerfully, now they proceeded upon their Journey; but old Mombi had so changed the appearance of the landscape that they would surely have been lost had not the Scarecrow wisely concluded to take their direction from the sun. For no witch-craft could change the course of the sun, and it was therefore a safe guide.
However, other difficulties lay before them. The Saw-Horse stepped into a rabbit hole and fell to the ground. The Pumpkinhead was pitched high into the air, and his history would probably have ended at that exact moment had not the Tin Woodman skillfully caught the pumpkin as it descended and saved it from injury.
Tip soon had it fitted to the neck again and replaced Jack upon his feet. But the Saw-Horse did not escape so easily. For when his leg was pulled from the rabbit hole it was found to be broken short off, and must be replaced or repaired before he could go a step farther.
“This is quite serious,” said the Tin Woodman. “If there were trees near by I might soon manufacture another leg for this animal; but I cannot see even a shrub for miles around.”
[Full page line-art drawing: THE TIN WOODMAN SKILLFULLY CAUGHT THE PUMPKIN]
“And there are neither fences nor houses in this part of the land of Oz,” added the Scarecrow, disconsolately.
“Then what shall we do?” enquired the boy.
“I suppose I must start my brains working,” replied his Majesty the Scarecrow; “for experience has, taught me that I can do anything if I but take time to think it out.”
“Let us all think,” said Tip; “and perhaps we shall find a way to repair the Saw-Horse.”
So they sat in a row upon the grass and began to think, while the Saw-Horse occupied itself by gazing curiously upon its broken limb.
“Does it hurt?” asked the Tin Woodman, in a soft, sympathetic voice.
“Not in the least,” returned the Saw-Horse; “but my pride is injured to find that my anatomy is so brittle.”
For a time the little group remained in silent thought. Presently the Tin Woodman raised his head and looked over the fields.
“What sort of creature is that which approaches us?” he asked, wonderingly.
The others followed his gaze, and discovered coming toward them the most extraordinary object they had ever beheld. It advanced quickly and noiselessly over the soft grass and in a few minutes stood before the adventurers and regarded them with an astonishment equal to their own.
The Scarecrow was calm under all circumstances.
“Good morning!” he said, politely.
[Line-Art Drawing]
The stranger removed his hat with a flourish, bowed very low, and then responded:
“Good morning, one and all. I hope you are, as an aggregation, enjoying excellent health. Permit me to present my card.”
With this courteous speech it extended a card toward the Scarecrow, who accepted it, turned it over and over, and handed it with a shake of his head to Tip.
The boy read aloud:
“MR. H. M. WOGGLE-BUG, T. E.”
“Dear me!” ejaculated the Pumpkinhead, staring somewhat intently.
“How very peculiar!” said the Tin Woodman.
Tip’s eyes were round and wondering, and the Saw-Horse uttered a sigh and turned away its head.
“Are you really a Woggle-Bug?” enquired the Scarecrow.
“Most certainly, my dear sir!” answered the stranger, briskly. “Is not my name upon the card?”
“It is,” said the Scarecrow. “But may I ask what ‘H. M.’ stands for?”
“‘H. M.’ means Highly Magnified,” returned the Woggle-Bug, proudly.
“Oh, I see.” The Scarecrow viewed the stranger critically. “And are you, in truth, highly magnified?”
“Sir,” said the Woggle-Bug, “I take you for a gentleman of judgment and discernment. Does it not occur to you that I am several thousand times greater than any Woggle-Bug you ever saw before? Therefore it is plainly evident that I am Highly Magnified, and there is no good reason why you should doubt the fact.”
“Pardon me,” returned the Scarecrow. “My brains are slightly mixed since I was last laundered. Would it be improper for me to ask, also, what the ‘T.E.’ at the end of your name stands for?”
“Those letters express my degree,” answered the Woggle-Bug, with a condescending smile. “To be more explicit, the initials mean that I am Thoroughly Educated.”
“Oh!” said the Scarecrow, much relieved.
Tip had not yet taken his eyes off this wonderful personage. What he saw was a great, round, buglike body supported upon two slender legs which ended in delicate feet—the toes curling upward. The body of the Woggle-Bug was rather flat, and judging from what could be seen of it was of a glistening dark brown color upon the back, while the front was striped with alternate bands of light brown and white, blending together at the edges. Its arms were fully as slender as its legs, and upon a rather long neck was perched its head—not unlike the head of a man, except that its nose ended in a curling antenna, or “feeler,” and its ears from the upper points bore antennae that decorated the sides of its head like two miniature, curling pig tails. It must be admitted that the round, black eyes were rather bulging in appearance; but the expression upon the Woggle-Bug’s face was by no means unpleasant.
For dress the insect wore a dark-blue swallowtail coat with a yellow silk lining and a flower in the button-hole; a vest of white duck that stretched tightly across the wide body; knickerbockers of fawn-colored plush, fastened at the knees with gilt buckles; and, perched upon its small head, was jauntily set a tall silk hat.
Standing upright before our amazed friends the Woggle-Bug appeared to be fully as tall as the Tin Woodman; and surely no bug in all the Land of Oz had ever before attained so enormous a size.
“I confess,” said the Scarecrow, “that your abrupt appearance has caused me surprise, and no doubt has startled my companions. I hope, however, that this circumstance will not distress you. We shall probably get used to you in time.”
“Do not apologize, I beg of you!” returned the Woggle-Bug, earnestly. “It affords me great pleasure to surprise people; for surely I cannot be classed with ordinary insects and am entitled to both curiosity and admiration from those I meet.”
“You are, indeed,” agreed his Majesty.
“If you will permit me to seat myself in your august company,” continued the stranger, “I will gladly relate my history, so that you will be better able to comprehend my unusual—may I say remarkable?—appearance.”
“You may say what you please,” answered the Tin Woodman, briefly.
[Line-Art Drawing]
So the Woggle-Bug sat down upon the grass, facing the little group of wanderers, and told them the following story:
 
A Highly Magnified History
“It is but honest that I should acknowledge at the beginning of my recital that I was born an ordinary Woggle-Bug,” began the creature, in a frank and friendly tone. “Knowing no better, I used my arms as well as my legs for walking, and crawled under the edges of stones or hid among the roots of grasses with no thought beyond finding a few insects smaller than myself to feed upon.
“The chill nights rendered me stiff and motionless, for I wore no clothing, but each morning the warm rays of the sun gave me new life and restored me to activity. A horrible existence is this, but you must remember it is the regular ordained existence of Woggle-Bugs, as well as of many other tiny creatures that inhabit the earth.
“But Destiny had singled me out, humble though I was, for a grander fate! One day I crawled near to a country school house, and my curiosity being excited by the monotonous hum of the students within, I made bold to enter and creep along a crack between two boards until I reached the far end, where, in front of a hearth of glowing embers, sat the master at his desk.
“No one noticed so small a creature as a Woggle-Bug, and when I found that the hearth was even warmer and more comfortable than the sunshine, I resolved to establish my future home beside it. So I found a charming nest between two bricks and hid myself therein for many, many months.
“Professor Nowitall is, doubtless, the most famous scholar in the land of Oz, and after a few days I began to listen to the lectures and discourses he gave his pupils. Not one of them was more attentive than the humble, unnoticed Woggle-Bug, and I acquired in this way a fund of knowledge that I will myself confess is simply marvelous. That is why I place ‘T.E.’ Thoroughly Educated upon my cards; for my greatest pride lies in the fact that the world cannot produce another Woggle-Bug with a tenth part of my own culture and erudition.”
“I do not blame you,” said the Scarecrow. “Education is a thing to be proud of. I’m educated myself. The mess of brains given me by the Great Wizard is considered by my friends to be unexcelled.”
“Nevertheless,” interrupted the Tin Woodman, “a good heart is, I believe, much more desirable than education or brains.”
“To me,” said the Saw-Horse, “a good leg is more desirable than either.”
“Could seeds be considered in the light of brains?” enquired the Pumpkinhead, abruptly.
“Keep quiet!” commanded Tip, sternly.
“Very well, dear father,” answered the obedient Jack.
The Woggle-Bug listened patiently—even respectfully—to these remarks, and then resumed his story.
“I must have lived fully three years in that secluded school-house hearth,” said he, “drinking thirstily of the ever-flowing fount of limpid knowledge before me.”
“Quite poetical,” commented the Scarecrow, nodding his head approvingly.
[Line-Art Drawing]
“But one, day” continued the Bug, “a marvelous circumstance occurred that altered my very existence and brought me to my present pinnacle of greatness. The Professor discovered me in the act of crawling across the hearth, and before I could escape he had caught me between his thumb and forefinger.
“‘My dear children,’ said he, ‘I have captured a Woggle-Bug—a very rare and interesting specimen. Do any of you know what a Woggle-Bug is?’
“‘No!’ yelled the scholars, in chorus.
“‘Then,’ said the Professor, ‘I will get out my famous magnifying-glass and throw the insect upon a screen in a highly-magnified condition, that you may all study carefully its peculiar construction and become acquainted with its habits and manner of life.’
“He then brought from a cupboard a most curious instrument, and before I could realize what had happened I found myself thrown upon a screen in a highly-magnified state—even as you now behold me.
“The students stood up on their stools and craned their heads forward to get a better view of me, and two little girls jumped upon the sill of an open window where they could see more plainly.
“‘Behold!’ cried the Professor, in a loud voice, ‘this highly-magnified Woggle-Bug; one of the most curious insects in existence!’
[Full page line-art drawing: “THEE STUDENTS STOOD UP ON THEIR STOOLS.”]
“Being Thoroughly Educated, and knowing what is required of a cultured gentleman, at this juncture I stood upright and, placing my hand upon my bosom, made a very polite bow. My action, being unexpected, must have startled them, for one of the little girls perched upon the window-sill gave a scream and fell backward out the window, drawing her companion with her as she disappeared.
“The Professor uttered a cry of horror and rushed away through the door to see if the poor children were injured by the fall. The scholars followed after him in a wild mob, and I was left alone in the school-room, still in a Highly-Magnified state and free to do as I pleased.
“It immediately occurred to me that this was a good opportunity to escape. I was proud of my great size, and realized that now I could safely travel anywhere in the world, while my superior culture would make me a fit associate for the most learned person I might chance to meet.
“So, while the Professor picked the little girls—who were more frightened than hurt—off the ground, and the pupils clustered around him closely grouped, I calmly walked out of the school-house, turned a corner, and escaped unnoticed to a grove of trees that stood near”
“Wonderful!” exclaimed the Pumpkinhead, admiringly.
“It was, indeed,” agreed the Woggle-Bug. “I have never ceased to congratulate myself for escaping while I was Highly Magnified; for even my excessive knowledge would have proved of little use to me had I remained a tiny, insignificant insect.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
“I didn’t know before,” said Tip, looking at the Woggle-Bug with a puzzled expression, “that insects wore clothes.”
“Nor do they, in their natural state,” returned the stranger. “But in the course of my wanderings I had the good fortune to save the ninth life of a tailor—tailors having, like cats, nine lives, as you probably know. The fellow was exceedingly grateful, for had he lost that ninth life it would have been the end of him; so he begged permission to furnish me with the stylish costume I now wear. It fits very nicely, does it not?” and the Woggle-Bug stood up and turned himself around slowly, that all might examine his person.
“He must have been a good tailor,” said the Scarecrow, somewhat enviously.
“He was a good-hearted tailor, at any rate,” observed Nick Chopper.
“But where were you going, when you met us?” Tip asked the Woggle-Bug.
“Nowhere in particular,” was the reply, “although it is my intention soon to visit the Emerald City and arrange to give a course of lectures to select audiences on the ‘Advantages of Magnification.'”
“We are bound for the Emerald City now,” said the Tin Woodman; “so, if it pleases you to do so, you are welcome to travel in our company.”
The Woggle-Bug bowed with profound grace.
“It will give me great pleasure,” said he “to accept your kind invitation; for nowhere in the Land of Oz could I hope to meet with so congenial a company.”
“That is true,” acknowledged the Pumpkinhead. “We are quite as congenial as flies and honey.”
“But—pardon me if I seem inquisitive—are you not all rather—ahem! rather unusual?” asked the Woggle-Bug, looking from one to another with unconcealed interest.
“Not more so than yourself,” answered the Scarecrow. “Everything in life is unusual until you get accustomed to it.”
“What rare philosophy!” exclaimed the Woggle-Bug, admiringly.
“Yes; my brains are working well today,” admitted the Scarecrow, an accent of pride in his voice.
“Then, if you are sufficiently rested and refreshed, let us bend our steps toward the Emerald City,” suggested the magnified one.
“We can’t,” said Tip. “The Saw-Horse has broken a leg, so he can’t bend his steps. And there is no wood around to make him a new limb from. And we can’t leave the horse behind because the Pumpkinhead is so stiff in his Joints that he has to ride.”
“How very unfortunate!” cried the Woggle-Bug. Then he looked the party over carefully and said:
“If the Pumpkinhead is to ride, why not use one of his legs to make a leg for the horse that carries him? I judge that both are made of wood.”
“Now, that is what I call real cleverness,” said the Scarecrow, approvingly. “I wonder my brains did not think of that long ago! Get to work, my dear Nick, and fit the Pumpkinhead’s leg to the Saw-Horse.”
Jack was not especially pleased with this idea; but he submitted to having his left leg amputated by the Tin Woodman and whittled down to fit the left leg of the Saw-Horse. Nor was the Saw-Horse especially pleased with the operation, either; for he growled a good deal about being “butchered,” as he called it, and afterward declared that the new leg was a disgrace to a respectable Saw-Horse.
“I beg you to be more careful in your speech,” said the Pumpkinhead, sharply. “Remember, if you please, that it is my leg you are abusing.”
“I cannot forget it,” retorted the Saw-Horse, “for it is quite as flimsy as the rest of your person.”
“Flimsy! me flimsy!” cried Jack, in a rage. “How dare you call me flimsy?”
“Because you are built as absurdly as a jumping-jack,” sneered the horse, rolling his knotty eyes in a vicious manner. “Even your head won’t stay straight, and you never can tell whether you are looking backwards or forwards!”
“Friends, I entreat you not to quarrel!” pleaded the Tin Woodman, anxiously. “As a matter of fact, we are none of us above criticism; so let us bear with each others’ faults.”
“An excellent suggestion,” said the Woggle-Bug, approvingly. “You must have an excellent heart, my metallic friend.”
“I have,” returned Nick, well pleased. “My heart is quite the best part of me. But now let us start upon our Journey.
They perched the one-legged Pumpkinhead upon the Saw-Horse, and tied him to his seat with cords, so that he could not possibly fall off.
And then, following the lead of the Scarecrow, they all advanced in the direction of the Emerald City.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
Old Mombi indulges in Witchcraft
They soon discovered that the Saw-Horse limped, for his new leg was a trifle too long. So they were obliged to halt while the Tin Woodman chopped it down with his axe, after which the wooden steed paced along more comfortably. But the Saw-Horse was not entirely satisfied, even yet.
“It was a shame that I broke my other leg!” it growled.
“On the contrary,” airily remarked the Woggle-Bug, who was walking alongside, “you should consider the accident most fortunate. For a horse is never of much use until he has been broken.”
“I beg your pardon,” said Tip, rather provoked, for he felt a warm interest in both the Saw-Horse and his man Jack; “but permit me to say that your joke is a poor one, and as old as it is poor.”
“Still, it is a Joke,” declared the Woggle-Bug; firmly, “and a Joke derived from a play upon words is considered among educated people to be eminently proper.”
“What does that mean?” enquired the Pumpkinhead, stupidly.
“It means, my dear friend,” explained the Woggle-Bug, “that our language contains many words having a double meaning; and that to pronounce a joke that allows both meanings of a certain word, proves the joker a person of culture and refinement, who has, moreover, a thorough command of the language.”
“I don’t believe that,” said Tip, plainly; “anybody can make a pun.”
“Not so,” rejoined the Woggle-Bug, stiffly. “It requires education of a high order. Are you educated, young sir?”
“Not especially,” admitted Tip.
“Then you cannot judge the matter. I myself am Thoroughly Educated, and I say that puns display genius. For instance, were I to ride upon this Saw-Horse, he would not only be an animal he would become an equipage. For he would then be a horse-and-buggy.”
At this the Scarecrow gave a gasp and the Tin Woodman stopped short and looked reproachfully at the Woggle-Bug. At the same time the Saw-Horse loudly snorted his derision; and even the Pumpkinhead put up his hand to hide the smile which, because it was carved upon his face, he could not change to a frown.
But the Woggle-Bug strutted along as if he had made some brilliant remark, and the Scarecrow was obliged to say:
“I have heard, my dear friend, that a person can become over-educated; and although I have a high respect for brains, no matter how they may be arranged or classified, I begin to suspect that yours are slightly tangled. In any event, I must beg you to restrain your superior education while in our society.”
“We are not very particular,” added the Tin Woodman; “and we are exceedingly kind hearted. But if your superior culture gets leaky again—” He did not complete the sentence, but he twirled his gleaming axe so carelessly that the Woggle-Bug looked frightened, and shrank away to a safe distance.
The others marched on in silence, and the Highly Magnified one, after a period of deep thought, said in an humble voice:
“I will endeavor to restrain myself.”
“That is all we can expect,” returned the Scarecrow pleasantly; and good nature being thus happily restored to the party, they proceeded upon their way.
When they again stopped to allow Tip to rest—the boy being the only one that seemed to tire—the Tin Woodman noticed many small, round holes in the grassy meadow.
“This must be a village of the Field Mice,” he said to the Scarecrow. “I wonder if my old friend, the Queen of the Mice, is in this neighborhood.”
“If she is, she may be of great service to us,” answered the Scarecrow, who was impressed by a sudden thought. “See if you can call her, my dear Nick.”
So the Tin Woodman blew a shrill note upon a silver whistle that hung around his neck, and presently a tiny grey mouse popped from a near-by hole and advanced fearlessly toward them. For the Tin Woodman had once saved her life, and the Queen of the Field Mice knew he was to be trusted.
“Good day, your Majesty,” said Nick, politely addressing the mouse; “I trust you are enjoying good health?”
“Thank you, I am quite well,” answered the Queen, demurely, as she sat up and displayed the tiny golden crown upon her head. “Can I do anything to assist my old friends?”
“You can, indeed,” replied the Scarecrow, eagerly. “Let me, I intreat you, take a dozen of your subjects with me to the Emerald City.”
“Will they be injured in any way?” asked the Queen, doubtfully.
“I think not,” replied the Scarecrow. “I will carry them hidden in the straw which stuffs my body, and when I give them the signal by unbuttoning my jacket, they have only to rush out and scamper home again as fast as they can. By doing this they will assist me to regain my throne, which the Army of Revolt has taken from me.”
“In that case,” said the Queen, “I will not refuse your request. Whenever you are ready, I will call twelve of my most intelligent subjects.”
“I am ready now” returned the Scarecrow. Then he lay flat upon the ground and unbuttoned his jacket, displaying the mass of straw with which he was stuffed.
The Queen uttered a little piping call, and in an instant a dozen pretty field mice had emerged from their holes and stood before their ruler, awaiting her orders.
What the Queen said to them none of our travelers could understand, for it was in the mouse language; but the field mice obeyed without hesitation, running one after the other to the Scarecrow and hiding themselves in the straw of his breast.
When all of the twelve mice had thus concealed themselves, the Scarecrow buttoned his Jacket securely and then arose and thanked the Queen for her kindness.
“One thing more you might do to serve us,” suggested the Tin Woodman; “and that is to run ahead and show us the way to the Emerald City. For some enemy is evidently trying to prevent us from reaching it.”
“I will do that gladly,” returned the Queen. “Are you ready?”
The Tin Woodman looked at Tip.
“I’m rested,” said the boy. “Let us start.”
Then they resumed their journey, the little grey Queen of the Field Mice running swiftly ahead and then pausing until the travelers drew near, when away she would dart again.
Without this unerring guide the Scarecrow and his comrades might never have gained the Emerald City; for many were the obstacles thrown in their way by the arts of old Mombi. Yet not one of the obstacles really existed—all were cleverly contrived deceptions. For when they came to the banks of a rushing river that threatened to bar their way the little Queen kept steadily on, passing through the seeming flood in safety; and our travelers followed her without encountering a single drop of water.
Again, a high wall of granite towered high above their heads and opposed their advance. But the grey Field Mouse walked straight through it, and the others did the same, the wall melting into mist as they passed it.
Afterward, when they had stopped for a moment to allow Tip to rest, they saw forty roads branching off from their feet in forty different directions; and soon these forty roads began whirling around like a mighty wheel, first in one direction and then in the other, completely bewildering their vision.
But the Queen called for them to follow her and darted off in a straight line; and when they had gone a few paces the whirling pathways vanished and were seen no more.
Mombi’s last trick was the most fearful of all. She sent a sheet of crackling flame rushing over the meadow to consume them; and for the first time the Scarecrow became afraid and turned to fly.
“If that fire reaches me I will be gone in no time!” said he, trembling until his straw rattled. “It’s the most dangerous thing I ever encountered.”
“I’m off, too!” cried the Saw-Horse, turning and prancing with agitation; “for my wood is so dry it would burn like kindlings.”
“Is fire dangerous to pumpkins?” asked Jack, fearfully.
“You’ll be baked like a tart—and so will I!” answered the Woggle-Bug, getting down on all fours so he could run the faster.
[Line-Art Drawing]
But the Tin Woodman, having no fear of fire, averted the stampede by a few sensible words.
“Look at the Field Mouse!” he shouted. “The fire does not burn her in the least. In fact, it is no fire at all, but only a deception.”
Indeed, to watch the little Queen march calmly through the advancing flames restored courage to every member of the party, and they followed her without being even scorched.
“This is surely a most extraordinary adventure,” said the Woggle-Bug, who was greatly amazed; “for it upsets all the Natural Laws that I heard Professor Nowitall teach in the school-house.”
“Of course it does,” said the Scarecrow, wisely. “All magic is unnatural, and for that reason is to be feared and avoided. But I see before us the gates of the Emerald City, so I imagine we have now overcome all the magical obstacles that seemed to oppose us.”
Indeed, the walls of the City were plainly visible, and the Queen of the Field Mice, who had guided them so faithfully, came near to bid them good-bye.
“We are very grateful to your Majesty for your kind assistance,” said the Tin Woodman, bowing before the pretty creature.
“I am always pleased to be of service to my friends,” answered the Queen, and in a flash she had darted away upon her journey home.
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
The Prisoners of the Queen
Approaching the gateway of the Emerald City the travelers found it guarded by two girls of the Army of Revolt, who opposed their entrance by drawing the knitting-needles from their hair and threatening to prod the first that came near.
But the Tin Woodman was not afraid.
“At the worst they can but scratch my beautiful nickel-plate,” he said. “But there will be no ‘worst,’ for I think I can manage to frighten these absurd soldiers very easily. Follow me closely, all of you!”
Then, swinging his axe in a great circle to right and left before him, he advanced upon the gate, and the others followed him without hesitation.
The girls, who had expected no resistance whatever, were terrified by the sweep of the glittering axe and fled screaming into the city; so that our travelers passed the gates in safety and marched down the green marble pavement of the wide street toward the royal palace.
“At this rate we will soon have your Majesty upon the throne again,” said the Tin Woodman, laughing at his easy conquest of the guards.
“Thank you, friend Nick,” returned the Scarecrow, gratefully. “Nothing can resist your kind heart and your sharp axe.”
As they passed the rows of houses they saw through the open doors that men were sweeping and dusting and washing dishes, while the women sat around in groups, gossiping and laughing.
“What has happened?” the Scarecrow asked a sad-looking man with a bushy beard, who wore an apron and was wheeling a baby-carriage along the sidewalk.
“Why, we’ve had a revolution, your Majesty as you ought to know very well,” replied the man; “and since you went away the women have been running things to suit themselves. I’m glad you have decided to come back and restore order, for doing housework and minding the children is wearing out the strength of every man in the Emerald City.”
“Hm!” said the Scarecrow, thoughtfully. “If it is such hard work as you say, how did the women manage it so easily?”
“I really do not know” replied the man, with a deep sigh. “Perhaps the women are made of castiron.”
No movement was made, as they passed along the street, to oppose their progress. Several of the women stopped their gossip long enough to cast curious looks upon our friends, but immediately they would turn away with a laugh or a sneer and resume their chatter. And when they met with several girls belonging to the Army of Revolt, those soldiers, instead of being alarmed or appearing surprised, merely stepped out of the way and allowed them to advance without protest.
This action rendered the Scarecrow uneasy.
“I’m afraid we are walking into a trap,” said he.
“Nonsense!” returned Nick Chopper, confidently; “the silly creatures are conquered already!”
But the Scarecrow shook his head in a way that expressed doubt, and Tip said:
“It’s too easy, altogether. Look out for trouble ahead.”
“I will,” returned his Majesty. Unopposed they reached the royal palace and marched up the marble steps, which had once been thickly crusted with emeralds but were now filled with tiny holes where the jewels had been ruthlessly torn from their settings by the Army of Revolt. And so far not a rebel barred their way.
[Full page line-art drawing: “IT’S TOO EASY, ALTOGETHER.”]
Through the arched hallways and into the magnificent throne room marched the Tin Woodman and his followers, and here, when the green silken curtains fell behind them, they saw a curious sight.
Seated within the glittering throne was General Jinjur, with the Scarecrow’s second-best crown upon her head, and the royal sceptre in her right hand. A box of caramels, from which she was eating, rested in her lap, and the girl seemed entirely at ease in her royal surroundings.
The Scarecrow stepped forward and confronted her, while the Tin Woodman leaned upon his axe and the others formed a half-circle back of his Majesty’s person.
“How dare you sit in my throne?” demanded the Scarecrow, sternly eyeing the intruder. “Don’t you know you are guilty of treason, and that there is a law against treason?”
“The throne belongs to whoever is able to take it,” answered Jinjur, as she slowly ate another caramel. “I have taken it, as you see; so just now I am the Queen, and all who oppose me are guilty of treason, and must be punished by the law you have just mentioned.”
This view of the case puzzled the Scarecrow.
“How is it, friend Nick?” he asked, turning to the Tin Woodman.
“Why, when it comes to Law, I have nothing to, say” answered that personage. “for laws were never meant to be understood, and it is foolish to make the attempt.”
“Then what shall we do?” asked the Scarecrow, in dismay.
“Why don’t you marry the Queen? And then you can both rule,” suggested the Woggle-Bug.
Jinjur glared at the insect fiercely. “Why don’t you send her back to her mother, where she belongs?” asked Jack Pumpkinhead.
Jinjur frowned.
“Why don’t you shut her up in a closet until she behaves herself, and promises to be good?” enquired Tip. Jinjur’s lip curled scornfully.
“Or give her a good shaking!” added the Saw-Horse.
“No,” said the Tin Woodman, “we must treat the poor girl with gentleness. Let us give her all the Jewels she can carry, and send her away happy and contented.”
At this Queen Jinjur laughed aloud, and the next minute clapped her pretty hands together thrice, as if for a signal.
“You are very absurd creatures,” said she; “but I am tired of your nonsense and have no time to bother with you longer.”
While the monarch and his friends listened in amazement to this impudent speech, a startling thing happened. The Tin Woodman’s axe was snatched from his grasp by some person behind him, and he found himself disarmed and helpless. At the same instant a shout of laughter rang in the ears of the devoted band, and turning to see whence this came they found themselves surrounded by the Army of Revolt, the girls bearing in either hand their glistening knitting-needles. The entire throne room seemed to be filled with the rebels, and the Scarecrow and his comrades realized that they were prisoners.
“You see how foolish it is to oppose a woman’s wit,” said Jinjur, gaily; “and this event only proves that I am more fit to rule the Emerald City than a Scarecrow. I bear you no ill will, I assure you; but lest you should prove troublesome to me in the future I shall order you all to be destroyed. That is, all except the boy, who belongs to old Mombi and must be restored to her keeping. The rest of you are not human, and therefore it will not be wicked to demolish you. The Saw-Horse and the Pumpkinhead’s body I will have chopped up for kindling-wood; and the pumpkin shall be made into tarts. The Scarecrow will do nicely to start a bonfire, and the tin man can be cut into small pieces and fed to the goats. As for this immense Woggle-Bug—”
“Highly Magnified, if you please!” interrupted the insect.
“I think I will ask the cook to make green-turtle soup of you,” continued the Queen, reflectively.
The Woggle-Bug shuddered.
“Or, if that won’t do, we might use you for a Hungarian goulash, stewed and highly spiced,” she added, cruelly.
This programme of extermination was so terrible that the prisoners looked upon one another in a panic of fear. The Scarecrow alone did not give way to despair. He stood quietly before the Queen and his brow was wrinkled in deep thought as he strove to find some means to escape.
While thus engaged he felt the straw within his breast move gently. At once his expression changed from sadness to joy, and raising his hand he quickly unbuttoned the front of his jacket.
[Line-Art Drawing]
This action did not pass unnoticed by the crowd of girls clustering about him, but none of them suspected what he was doing until a tiny grey mouse leaped from his bosom to the floor and scampered away between the feet of the Army of Revolt. Another mouse quickly followed; then another and another, in rapid succession. And suddenly such a scream of terror went up from the Army that it might easily have filled the stoutest heart with consternation. The flight that ensued turned to a stampede, and the stampede to a panic.
For while the startled mice rushed wildly about the room the Scarecrow had only time to note a whirl of skirts and a twinkling of feet as the girls disappeared from the palace—pushing and crowding one another in their mad efforts to escape.
The Queen, at the first alarm, stood up on the cushions of the throne and began to dance frantically upon her tiptoes. Then a mouse ran up the cushions, and with a terrified leap poor Jinjur shot clear over the head of the Scarecrow and escaped through an archway—never pausing in her wild career until she had reached the city gates.
So, in less time than I can explain, the throne room was deserted by all save the Scarecrow and his friends, and the Woggle-Bug heaved a deep sigh of relief as he exclaimed:
“Thank goodness, we are saved!”
“For a time, yes;” answered the Tin Woodman. “But the enemy will soon return, I fear.”
“Let us bar all the entrances to the palace!” said the Scarecrow. “Then we shall have time to think what is best to be done.”
So all except Jack Pumpkinhead, who was still tied fast to the Saw-Horse, ran to the various entrances of the royal palace and closed the heavy doors, bolting and locking them securely. Then, knowing that the Army of Revolt could not batter down the barriers in several days, the adventurers gathered once more in the throne room for a council of war.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
The Scarecrow Takes Time to Think
“It seems to me,” began the Scarecrow, when all were again assembled in the throne room, “that the girl Jinjur is quite right in claiming to be Queen. And if she is right, then I am wrong, and we have no business to be occupying her palace.”
“But you were the King until she came,” said the Woggle-Bug, strutting up and down with his hands in his pockets; “so it appears to me that she is the interloper instead of you.”
“Especially as we have just conquered her and put her to flight,” added the Pumpkinhead, as he raised his hands to turn his face toward the Scarecrow.
“Have we really conquered her?” asked the Scarecrow, quietly. “Look out of the window, and tell me what you see.”
Tip ran to the window and looked out.
“The palace is surrounded by a double row of girl soldiers,” he announced.
“I thought so,” returned the Scarecrow. “We are as truly their prisoners as we were before the mice frightened them from the palace.”
“My friend is right,” said Nick Chopper, who had been polishing his breast with a bit of chamois-leather. “Jinjur is still the Queen, and we are her prisoners.”
“But I hope she cannot get at us,” exclaimed the Pumpkinhead, with a shiver of fear. “She threatened to make tarts of me, you know.”
“Don’t worry,” said the Tin Woodman. “It cannot matter greatly. If you stay shut up here you will spoil in time, anyway. A good tart is far more admirable than a decayed intellect.”
“Very true,” agreed the Scarecrow.
“Oh, dear!” moaned Jack; “what an unhappy lot is mine! Why, dear father, did you not make me out of tin—or even out of straw—so that I would keep indefinitely.”
“Shucks!” returned Tip, indignantly. “You ought to be glad that I made you at all.” Then he added, reflectively, “everything has to come to an end, some time.”
“But I beg to remind you,” broke in the Woggle-Bug, who had a distressed look in his bulging, round eyes, “that this terrible Queen Jinjur suggested making a goulash of me—Me! the only Highly Magnified and Thoroughly Educated Woggle-Bug in the wide, wide world!”
“I think it was a brilliant idea,” remarked the Scarecrow, approvingly.
“Don’t you imagine he would make a better soup?” asked the Tin Woodman, turning toward his friend.
“Well, perhaps,” acknowledged the Scarecrow.
The Woggle-Bug groaned.
“I can see, in my mind’s eye,” said he, mournfully, “the goats eating small pieces of my dear comrade, the Tin Woodman, while my soup is being cooked on a bonfire built of the Saw-Horse and Jack Pumpkinhead’s body, and Queen Jinjur watches me boil while she feeds the flames with my friend the Scarecrow!”
This morbid picture cast a gloom over the entire party, making them restless and anxious.
“It can’t happen for some time,” said the Tin Woodman, trying to speak cheerfully; “for we shall be able to keep Jinjur out of the palace until she manages to break down the doors.”
“And in the meantime I am liable to starve to death, and so is the Woggle-Bug,” announced Tip.
“As for me,” said the Woggle-Bug, “I think that I could live for some time on Jack Pumpkinhead. Not that I prefer pumpkins for food; but I believe they are somewhat nutritious, and Jack’s head is large and plump.”
“How heartless!” exclaimed the Tin Woodman, greatly shocked. “Are we cannibals, let me ask? Or are we faithful friends?”
“I see very clearly that we cannot stay shut up in this palace,” said the Scarecrow, with decision. “So let us end this mournful talk and try to discover a means to escape.”
At this suggestion they all gathered eagerly around the throne, wherein was seated the Scarecrow, and as Tip sat down upon a stool there fell from his pocket a pepper-box, which rolled upon the floor.
“What is this?” asked Nick Chopper, picking up the box.
“Be careful!” cried the boy. “That’s my Powder of Life. Don’t spill it, for it is nearly gone.”
“And what is the Powder of Life?” enquired the Scarecrow, as Tip replaced the box carefully in his pocket.
“It’s some magical stuff old Mombi got from a crooked sorcerer,” explained the boy. “She brought Jack to life with it, and afterward I used it to bring the Saw-Horse to life. I guess it will make anything live that is sprinkled with it; but there’s only about one dose left.”
“Then it is very precious,” said the Tin Woodman.
“Indeed it is,” agreed the Scarecrow. “It may prove our best means of escape from our difficulties. I believe I will think for a few minutes; so I will thank you, friend Tip, to get out your knife and rip this heavy crown from my forehead.”
Tip soon cut the stitches that had fastened the crown to the Scarecrow’s head, and the former monarch of the Emerald City removed it with a sigh of relief and hung it on a peg beside the throne.
[Line-Art Drawing]
“That is my last memento of royalty” said he; “and I’m glad to get rid of it. The former King of this City, who was named Pastoria, lost the crown to the Wonderful Wizard, who passed it on to me. Now the girl Jinjur claims it, and I sincerely hope it will not give her a headache.”
“A kindly thought, which I greatly admire,” said the Tin Woodman, nodding approvingly.
“And now I will indulge in a quiet think,” continued the Scarecrow, lying back in the throne.
The others remained as silent and still as possible, so as not to disturb him; for all had great confidence in the extraordinary brains of the Scarecrow.
And, after what seemed a very long time indeed to the anxious watchers, the thinker sat up, looked upon his friends with his most whimsical expression, and said:
“My brains work beautifully today. I’m quite proud of them. Now, listen! If we attempt to escape through the doors of the palace we shall surely be captured. And, as we can’t escape through the ground, there is only one other thing to be done. We must escape through the air!”
He paused to note the effect of these words; but all his hearers seemed puzzled and unconvinced.
“The Wonderful Wizard escaped in a balloon,” he continued. “We don’t know how to make a balloon, of course; but any sort of thing that can fly through the air can carry us easily. So I suggest that my friend the Tin Woodman, who is a skillful mechanic, shall build some sort of a machine, with good strong wings, to carry us; and our friend Tip can then bring the Thing to life with his magical powder.”
“Bravo!” cried Nick Chopper.
“What splendid brains!” murmured Jack.
“Really quite clever!” said the Educated Woggle-Bug.
“I believe it can be done,” declared Tip; “that is, if the Tin Woodman is equal to making the Thing.”
“I’ll do my best,” said Nick, cheerily; “and, as a matter of fact, I do not often fail in what I attempt. But the Thing will have to be built on the roof of the palace, so it can rise comfortably into the air.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
“To be sure,” said the Scarecrow.
“Then let us search through the palace,” continued the Tin Woodman, “and carry all the material we can find to the roof, where I will begin my work.”
“First, however,” said the Pumpkinhead, “I beg you will release me from this horse, and make me another leg to walk with. For in my present condition I am of no use to myself or to anyone else.”
So the Tin Woodman knocked a mahogany center-table to pieces with his axe and fitted one of the legs, which was beautifully carved, on to the body of Jack Pumpkinhead, who was very proud of the acquisition.
“It seems strange,” said he, as he watched the Tin Woodman work, “that my left leg should be the most elegant and substantial part of me.”
“That proves you are unusual,” returned the Scarecrow. “and I am convinced that the only people worthy of consideration in this world are the unusual ones. For the common folks are like the leaves of a tree, and live and die unnoticed.”
“Spoken like a philosopher!” cried the Woggle-Bug, as he assisted the Tin Woodman to set Jack upon his feet.
“How do you feel now?” asked Tip, watching the Pumpkinhead stump around to try his new leg.
“As good as new” answered Jack, joyfully, “and quite ready to assist you all to escape.”
“Then let us get to work,” said the Scarecrow, in a business-like tone.
So, glad to be doing anything that might lead to the end of their captivity, the friends separated to wander over the palace in search of fitting material to use in the construction of their aerial machine.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
The Astonishing Flight of the Gump
When the adventurers reassembled upon the roof it was found that a remarkably queer assortment of articles had been selected by the various members of the party. No one seemed to have a very clear idea of what was required, but all had brought something.
The Woggle-Bug had taken from its position over the mantle-piece in the great hallway the head of a Gump, which was adorned with wide-spreading antlers; and this, with great care and greater difficulty, the insect had carried up the stairs to the roof. This Gump resembled an Elk’s head, only the nose turned upward in a saucy manner and there were whiskers upon its chin, like those of a billy-goat. Why the Woggle-Bug selected this article he could not have explained, except that it had aroused his curiosity.
Tip, with the aid of the Saw-Horse, had brought a large, upholstered sofa to the roof. It was an oldfashioned piece of furniture, with high back and ends, and it was so heavy that even by resting the greatest weight upon the back of the Saw-Horse, the boy found himself out of breath when at last the clumsy sofa was dumped upon the roof.
The Pumpkinhead had brought a broom, which was the first thing he saw. The Scarecrow arrived with a coil of clothes-lines and ropes which he had taken from the courtyard, and in his trip up the stairs he had become so entangled in the loose ends of the ropes that both he and his burden tumbled in a heap upon the roof and might have rolled off if Tip had not rescued him.
The Tin Woodman appeared last. He also had been to the courtyard, where he had cut four great, spreading leaves from a huge palm-tree that was the pride of all the inhabitants of the Emerald City.
[Full page line-art drawing: ALL BROUGHT SOMETHING TO THE ROOF.]
“My dear Nick!” exclaimed the Scarecrow, seeing what his friend had done; “you have been guilty of the greatest crime any person can commit in the Emerald City. If I remember rightly, the penalty for chopping leaves from the royal palm-tree is to be killed seven times and afterward imprisoned for life.”
“It cannot be helped now” answered the Tin Woodman, throwing down the big leaves upon the roof. “But it may be one more reason why it is necessary for us to escape. And now let us see what you have found for me to work with.”
Many were the doubtful looks cast upon the heap of miscellaneous material that now cluttered the roof, and finally the Scarecrow shook his head and remarked:
“Well, if friend Nick can manufacture, from this mess of rubbish, a Thing that will fly through the air and carry us to safety, then I will acknowledge him to be a better mechanic than I suspected.”
But the Tin Woodman seemed at first by no means sure of his powers, and only after polishing his forehead vigorously with the chamois-leather did he resolve to undertake the task.
“The first thing required for the machine,” said he, “is a body big enough to carry the entire party. This sofa is the biggest thing we have, and might be used for a body. But, should the machine ever tip sideways, we would all slide off and fall to the ground.”
“Why not use two sofas?” asked Tip. “There’s another one just like this down stairs.”
“That is a very sensible suggestion,” exclaimed the Tin Woodman. “You must fetch the other sofa at once.”
So Tip and the Saw-Horse managed, with much labor, to get the second sofa to the roof; and when the two were placed together, edge to edge, the backs and ends formed a protecting rampart all around the seats.
“Excellent!” cried the Scarecrow. “We can ride within this snug nest quite at our ease.”
The two sofas were now bound firmly together with ropes and clothes-lines, and then Nick Chopper fastened the Gump’s head to one end.
“That will show which is the front end of the Thing,” said he, greatly pleased with the idea. “And, really, if you examine it critically, the Gump looks very well as a figure-head. These great palm-leaves, for which I have endangered my life seven times, must serve us as wings.”
“Are they strong enough?” asked the boy.
“They are as strong as anything we can get,” answered the Woodman; “and although they are not in proportion to the Thing’s body, we are not in a position to be very particular.”
So he fastened the palm-leaves to the sofas, two on each side.
Said the Woggle-Bug, with considerable admiration:
“The Thing is now complete, and only needs to be brought to life.”
“Stop a moment!” exclaimed Jack. “Are you not going to use my broom?”
“What for?” asked the Scarecrow.
“Why, it can be fastened to the back end for a tail,” answered the Pumpkinhead. “Surely you would not call the Thing complete without a tail.”
“Hm!” said the Tin Woodman, “I do not see the use of a tail. We are not trying to copy a beast, or a fish, or a bird. All we ask of the Thing is to carry us through the air.”
“Perhaps, after the Thing is brought to life, it can use a tail to steer with,” suggested the Scarecrow. “For if it flies through the air it will not be unlike a bird, and I’ve noticed that all birds have tails, which they use for a rudder while flying.”
“Very well,” answered Nick, “the broom shall be used for a tail,” and he fastened it firmly to the back end of the sofa body.
Tip took the pepper-box from his pocket.
“The Thing looks very big,” said he, anxiously; “and I am not sure there is enough powder left to bring all of it to life. But I’ll make it go as far as possible.”
“Put most on the wings,” said Nick Chopper; “for they must be made as strong as possible.”
“And don’t forget the head!” exclaimed the Woggle-Bug.
“Or the tail!” added Jack Pumpkinhead.
“Do be quiet,” said Tip, nervously; “you must give me a chance to work the magic charm in the proper manner.”
Very carefully he began sprinkling the Thing with the precious powder. Each of the four wings was first lightly covered with a layer, then the sofas were sprinkled, and the broom given a slight coating.
“The head! The head! Don’t, I beg of you, forget the head!” cried the Woggle-Bug, excitedly.
“There’s only a little of the powder left,” announced Tip, looking within the box. “And it seems to me it is more important to bring the legs of the sofas to life than the head.”
“Not so,” decided the Scarecrow. “Every thing must have a head to direct it; and since this creature is to fly, and not walk, it is really unimportant whether its legs are alive or not.”
So Tip abided by this decision and sprinkled the Gump’s head with the remainder of the powder.
“Now” said he, “keep silence while I work the, charm!”
Having heard old Mombi pronounce the magic words, and having also succeeded in bringing the Saw-Horse to life, Tip did not hesitate an instant in speaking the three cabalistic words, each accompanied by the peculiar gesture of the hands.
It was a grave and impressive ceremony.
As he finished the incantation the Thing shuddered throughout its huge bulk, the Gump gave the screeching cry that is familiar to those animals, and then the four wings began flopping furiously.
[Line-Art Drawing]
Tip managed to grasp a chimney, else he would have been blown off the roof by the terrible breeze raised by the wings. The Scarecrow, being light in weight, was caught up bodily and borne through the air until Tip luckily seized him by one leg and held him fast. The Woggle-Bug lay flat upon the roof and so escaped harm, and the Tin Woodman, whose weight of tin anchored him firmly, threw both arms around Jack Pumpkinhead and managed to save him. The Saw-Horse toppled over upon his back and lay with his legs waving helplessly above him.
And now, while all were struggling to recover themselves, the Thing rose slowly from the roof and mounted into the air.
“Here! Come back!” cried Tip, in a frightened voice, as he clung to the chimney with one hand and the Scarecrow with the other. “Come back at once, I command you!”
It was now that the wisdom of the Scarecrow, in bringing the head of the Thing to life instead of the legs, was proved beyond a doubt. For the Gump, already high in the air, turned its head at Tip’s command and gradually circled around until it could view the roof of the palace.
“Come back!” shouted the boy, again.
And the Gump obeyed, slowly and gracefully waving its four wings in the air until the Thing had settled once more upon the roof and become still.
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
In the Jackdaw’s Nest
“This,” said the Gump, in a squeaky voice not at all proportioned to the size of its great body, “is the most novel experience I ever heard of. The last thing I remember distinctly is walking through the forest and hearing a loud noise. Something probably killed me then, and it certainly ought to have been the end of me. Yet here I am, alive again, with four monstrous wings and a body which I venture to say would make any respectable animal or fowl weep with shame to own. What does it all mean? Am I a Gump, or am I a juggernaut?” The creature, as it spoke, wiggled its chin whiskers in a very comical manner.
“You’re just a Thing,” answered Tip, “with a Gump’s head on it. And we have made you and brought you to life so that you may carry us through the air wherever we wish to go.”
“Very good!” said the Thing. “As I am not a Gump, I cannot have a Gump’s pride or independent spirit. So I may as well become your servant as anything else. My only satisfaction is that I do not seem to have a very strong constitution, and am not likely to live long in a state of slavery.”
“Don’t say that, I beg of you!” cried the Tin Woodman, whose excellent heart was strongly affected by this sad speech. “Are you not feeling well today?”
“Oh, as for that,” returned the Gump, “it is my first day of existence; so I cannot Judge whether I am feeling well or ill.” And it waved its broom tail to and fro in a pensive manner.
“Come, come!” said the Scarecrow, kindly. “do try, to be more cheerful and take life as you find it. We shall be kind masters, and will strive to render your existence as pleasant as possible. Are you willing to carry us through the air wherever we wish to go?”
“Certainly,” answered the Gump. “I greatly prefer to navigate the air. For should I travel on the earth and meet with one of my own species, my embarrassment would be something awful!”
“I can appreciate that,” said the Tin Woodman, sympathetically.
“And yet,” continued the Thing, “when I carefully look you over, my masters, none of you seems to be constructed much more artistically than I am.”
“Appearances are deceitful,” said the Woggle-Bug, earnestly. “I am both Highly Magnified and Thoroughly Educated.”
“Indeed!” murmured the Gump, indifferently.
“And my brains are considered remarkably rare specimens,” added the Scarecrow, proudly.
“How strange!” remarked the Gump.
“Although I am of tin,” said the Woodman, “I own a heart altogether the warmest and most admirable in the whole world.”
“I’m delighted to hear it,” replied the Gump, with a slight cough.
“My smile,” said Jack Pumpkinhead, “is worthy your best attention. It is always the same.”
“Semper idem,” explained the Woggle-Bug, pompously; and the Gump turned to stare at him.
“And I,” declared the Saw-Horse, filling in an awkward pause, “am only remarkable because I can’t help it.”
“I am proud, indeed, to meet with such exceptional masters,” said the Gump, in a careless tone. “If I could but secure so complete an introduction to myself, I would be more than satisfied.”
“That will come in time,” remarked the Scarecrow. “To ‘Know Thyself’ is considered quite an accomplishment, which it has taken us, who are your elders, months to perfect. But now,” he added, turning to the others, “let us get aboard and start upon our journey.”
“Where shall we go?” asked Tip, as he clambered to a seat on the sofas and assisted the Pumpkinhead to follow him.
“In the South Country rules a very delightful Queen called Glinda the Good, who I am sure will gladly receive us,” said the Scarecrow, getting into the Thing clumsily. “Let us go to her and ask her advice.”
“That is cleverly thought of,” declared Nick Chopper, giving the Woggle-Bug a boost and then toppling the Saw-Horse into the rear end of the cushioned seats. “I know Glinda the Good, and believe she will prove a friend indeed.”
“Are we all ready?” asked the boy.
“Yes,” announced the Tin Woodman, seating himself beside the Scarecrow.
“Then,” said Tip, addressing the Gump, “be kind enough to fly with us to the Southward; and do not go higher than to escape the houses and trees, for it makes me dizzy to be up so far.”
“All right,” answered the Gump, briefly.
It flopped its four huge wings and rose slowly into the air; and then, while our little band of adventurers clung to the backs and sides of the sofas for support, the Gump turned toward the South and soared swiftly and majestically away.
“The scenic effect, from this altitude, is marvelous,” commented the educated Woggle-Bug, as they rode along.
“Never mind the scenery,” said the Scarecrow. “Hold on tight, or you may get a tumble. The Thing seems to rock badly.”
“It will be dark soon,” said Tip, observing that the sun was low on the horizon. “Perhaps we should have waited until morning. I wonder if the Gump can fly in the night.”
“I’ve been wondering that myself,” returned the Gump quietly. “You see, this is a new experience to me. I used to have legs that carried me swiftly over the ground. But now my legs feel as if they were asleep.”
“They are,” said Tip. “We didn’t bring ’em to life.”
“You’re expected to fly,” explained the Scarecrow. “not to walk.”
“We can walk ourselves,” said the Woggle-Bug.
“I begin to understand what is required of me,” remarked the Gump; “so I will do my best to please you,” and he flew on for a time in silence.
Presently Jack Pumpkinhead became uneasy.
“I wonder if riding through the air is liable to spoil pumpkins,” he said.
“Not unless you carelessly drop your head over the side,” answered the Woggle-Bug. “In that event your head would no longer be a pumpkin, for it would become a squash.”
“Have I not asked you to restrain these unfeeling jokes?” demanded Tip, looking at the Woggle-Bug with a severe expression.
“You have; and I’ve restrained a good many of them,” replied the insect. “But there are opportunities for so many excellent puns in our language that, to an educated person like myself, the temptation to express them is almost irresistible.”
“People with more or less education discovered those puns centuries ago,” said Tip.
“Are you sure?” asked the Woggle-Bug, with a startled look.
“Of course I am,” answered the boy. “An educated Woggle-Bug may be a new thing; but a Woggle-Bug education is as old as the hills, judging from the display you make of it.”
The insect seemed much impressed by this remark, and for a time maintained a meek silence.
The Scarecrow, in shifting his seat, saw upon the cushions the pepper-box which Tip had cast aside, and began to examine it.
“Throw it overboard,” said the boy; “it’s quite empty now, and there’s no use keeping it.”
“Is it really empty?” asked the Scarecrow, looking curiously into the box.
“Of course it is,” answered Tip. “I shook out every grain of the powder.”
“Then the box has two bottoms,” announced the Scarecrow, “for the bottom on the inside is fully an inch away from the bottom on the outside.”
“Let me see,” said the Tin Woodman, taking the box from his friend. “Yes,” he declared, after looking it over, “the thing certainly has a false bottom. Now, I wonder what that is for?”
“Can’t you get it apart, and find out?” enquired Tip, now quite interested in the mystery.
“Why, yes; the lower bottom unscrews,” said the Tin Woodman. “My fingers are rather stiff; please see if you can open it.”
He handed the pepper-box to Tip, who had no difficulty in unscrewing the bottom. And in the cavity below were three silver pills, with a carefully folded paper lying underneath them.
This paper the boy proceeded to unfold, taking care not to spill the pills, and found several lines clearly written in red ink.
“Read it aloud,” said the Scarecrow. so Tip read, as follows:
“DR. NIKIDIK’S CELEBRATED WISHING PILLS.
“Directions for Use: Swallow one pill; count seventeen by twos; then make a Wish. The Wish will immediately be granted.
CAUTION: Keep in a Dry and Dark Place.”
“Why, this is a very valuable discovery!” cried the Scarecrow.
“It is, indeed,” replied Tip, gravely. “These pills may be of great use to us. I wonder if old Mombi knew they were in the bottom of the pepper-box. I remember hearing her say that she got the Powder of Life from this same Nikidik.”
“He must be a powerful Sorcerer!” exclaimed the Tin Woodman; “and since the powder proved a success we ought to have confidence in the pills.”
“But how,” asked the Scarecrow, “can anyone count seventeen by twos? Seventeen is an odd number.”
“That is true,” replied Tip, greatly disappointed. “No one can possibly count seventeen by twos.”
“Then the pills are of no use to us,” wailed the Pumpkinhead; “and this fact overwhelms me with grief. For I had intended wishing that my head would never spoil.”
“Nonsense!” said the Scarecrow, sharply. “If we could use the pills at all we would make far better wishes than that.”
“I do not see how anything could be better,” protested poor Jack. “If you were liable to spoil at any time you could understand my anxiety.”
“For my part,” said the Tin Woodman, “I sympathize with you in every respect. But since we cannot count seventeen by twos, sympathy is all you are liable to get.”
By this time it had become quite dark, and the voyagers found above them a cloudy sky, through which the rays of the moon could not penetrate.
The Gump flew steadily on, and for some reason the huge sofa-body rocked more and more dizzily every hour.
The Woggle-Bug declared he was sea-sick; and Tip was also pale and somewhat distressed. But the others clung to the backs of the sofas and did not seem to mind the motion as long as they were not tipped out.
Darker and darker grew the night, and on and on sped the Gump through the black heavens. The travelers could not even see one another, and an oppressive silence settled down upon them.
After a long time Tip, who had been thinking deeply, spoke.
“How are we to know when we come to the pallace of Glinda the Good?” he asked.
“It’s a long way to Glinda’s palace,” answered the Woodman; “I’ve traveled it.”
“But how are we to know how fast the Gump is flying?” persisted the boy. “We cannot see a single thing down on the earth, and before morning we may be far beyond the place we want to reach.”
“That is all true enough,” the Scarecrow replied, a little uneasily. “But I do not see how we can stop just now; for we might alight in a river, or on, the top of a steeple; and that would be a great disaster.”
So they permitted the Gump to fly on, with regular flops of its great wings, and waited patiently for morning.
Then Tip’s fears were proven to be well founded; for with the first streaks of gray dawn they looked over the sides of the sofas and discovered rolling plains dotted with queer villages, where the houses, instead of being dome-shaped—as they all are in the Land of Oz—had slanting roofs that rose to a peak in the center. Odd looking animals were also moving about upon the open plains, and the country was unfamiliar to both the Tin Woodman and the Scarecrow, who had formerly visited Glinda the Good’s domain and knew it well.
“We are lost!” said the Scarecrow, dolefully. “The Gump must have carried us entirely out of the Land of Oz and over the sandy deserts and into the terrible outside world that Dorothy told us about.”
“We must get back,” exclaimed the Tin Woodman, earnestly. “we must get back as soon as possible!”
“Turn around!” cried Tip to the Gump. “turn as quickly as you can!”
“If I do I shall upset,” answered the Gump. “I’m not at all used to flying, and the best plan would be for me to alight in some place, and then I can turn around and take a fresh start.”
Just then, however, there seemed to be no stopping-place that would answer their purpose. They flew over a village so big that the Woggle-Bug declared it was a city, and then they came to a range of high mountains with many deep gorges and steep cliffs showing plainly.
“Now is our chance to stop,” said the boy, finding they were very close to the mountain tops. Then he turned to the Gump and commanded: “Stop at the first level place you see!”
“Very well,” answered the Gump, and settled down upon a table of rock that stood between two cliffs.
But not being experienced in such matters, the Gump did not judge his speed correctly; and instead of coming to a stop upon the flat rock he missed it by half the width of his body, breaking off both his right wings against the sharp edge of the rock and then tumbling over and over down the cliff.
Our friends held on to the sofas as long as they could, but when the Gump caught on a projecting rock the Thing stopped suddenly—bottom side up—and all were immediately dumped out.
[Full page line-art drawing: ALL WERE IMMEDIATELY DUMPED OUT.]
By good fortune they fell only a few feet; for underneath them was a monster nest, built by a colony of Jackdaws in a hollow ledge of rock; so none of them—not even the Pumpkinhead—was injured by the fall. For Jack found his precious head resting on the soft breast of the Scarecrow, which made an excellent cushion; and Tip fell on a mass of leaves and papers, which saved him from injury. The Woggle-Bug had bumped his round head against the Saw-Horse, but without causing him more than a moment’s inconvenience.
The Tin Woodman was at first much alarmed; but finding he had escaped without even a scratch upon his beautiful nickle-plate he at once regained his accustomed cheerfulness and turned to address his comrades.
“Our Journey had ended rather suddenly,” said he; “and we cannot justly blame our friend the Gump for our accident, because he did the best he could under the circumstances. But how we are ever to escape from this nest I must leave to someone with better brains than I possess.”
Here he gazed at the Scarecrow; who crawled to the edge of the nest and looked over. Below them was a sheer precipice several hundred feet in depth. Above them was a smooth cliff unbroken save by the point of rock where the wrecked body of the Gump still hung suspended from the end of one of the sofas. There really seemed to be no means of escape, and as they realized their helpless plight the little band of adventurers gave way to their bewilderment.
“This is a worse prison than the palace,” sadly remarked the Woggle-Bug.
“I wish we had stayed there,” moaned Jack.
“I’m afraid the mountain air isn’t good for pumpkins.”
“It won’t be when the Jackdaws come back,” growled the Saw-Horse, which lay waving its legs in a vain endeavor to get upon its feet again. “Jackdaws are especially fond of pumpkins.”
“Do you think the birds will come here?” asked Jack, much distressed.
“Of course they will,” said Tip; “for this is their nest. And there must be hundreds of them,” he continued, “for see what a lot of things they have brought here!”
Indeed, the nest was half filled with a most curious collection of small articles for which the birds could have no use, but which the thieving Jackdaws had stolen during many years from the homes of men. And as the nest was safely hidden where no human being could reach it, this lost property would never be recovered.
[Full page line-art drawing: TURNED UP A BEAUTIFUL DIAMOND NECKLACE.]
The Woggle-Bug, searching among the rubbish—for the Jackdaws stole useless things as well as valuable ones—turned up with his foot a beautiful diamond necklace. This was so greatly admired by the Tin Woodman that the Woggle-Bug presented it to him with a graceful speech, after which the Woodman hung it around his neck with much pride, rejoicing exceedingly when the big diamonds glittered in the sun’s rays.
But now they heard a great jabbering and flopping of wings, and as the sound grew nearer to them Tip exclaimed:
“The Jackdaws are coming! And if they find us here they will surely kill us in their anger.”
“I was afraid of this!” moaned the Pumpkinhead. “My time has come!”
“And mine, also!” said the Woggle-Bug; “for Jackdaws are the greatest enemies of my race.”
The others were not at all afraid; but the Scarecrow at once decided to save those of the party who were liable to be injured by the angry birds. So he commanded Tip to take off Jack’s head and lie down with it in the bottom of the nest, and when this was done he ordered the Woggle-Bug to lie beside Tip. Nick Chopper, who knew from past experience Just what to do, then took the Scarecrow to pieces (all except his head) and scattered the straw over Tip and the Woggle-Bug, completely covering their bodies.
Hardly had this been accomplished when the flock of Jackdaws reached them. Perceiving the intruders in their nest the birds flew down upon them with screams of rage.
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
Dr. Nikidik’s Famous Wishing Pills
The Tin Woodman was usually a peaceful man, but when occasion required he could fight as fiercely as a Roman gladiator. So, when the Jackdaws nearly knocked him down in their rush of wings, and their sharp beaks and claws threatened to damage his brilliant plating, the Woodman picked up his axe and made it whirl swiftly around his head.
But although many were beaten off in this way, the birds were so numerous and so brave that they continued the attack as furiously as before. Some of them pecked at the eyes of the Gump, which hung over the nest in a helpless condition; but the Gump’s eyes were of glass and could not be injured. Others of the Jackdaws rushed at the Saw-Horse; but that animal, being still upon his back, kicked out so viciously with his wooden legs that he beat off as many assailants as did the Woodman’s axe.
Finding themselves thus opposed, the birds fell upon the Scarecrow’s straw, which lay at the center of the nest, covering Tip and the Woggle-Bug and Jack’s pumpkin head, and began tearing it away and flying off with it, only to let it drop, straw by straw into the great gulf beneath.
The Scarecrow’s head, noting with dismay this wanton destruction of his interior, cried to the Tin Woodman to save him; and that good friend responded with renewed energy. His axe fairly flashed among the Jackdaws, and fortunately the Gump began wildly waving the two wings remaining on the left side of its body. The flutter of these great wings filled the Jackdaws with terror, and when the Gump by its exertions freed itself from the peg of rock on which it hung, and sank flopping into the nest, the alarm of the birds knew no bounds and they fled screaming over the mountains.
When the last foe had disappeared, Tip crawled from under the sofas and assisted the Woggle-Bug to follow him.
“We are saved!” shouted the boy, delightedly.
“We are, indeed!” responded the Educated Insect, fairly hugging the stiff head of the Gump in his joy. “and we owe it all to the flopping of the Thing, and the good axe of the Woodman!”
“If I am saved, get me out of here!” called Jack; whose head was still beneath the sofas; and Tip managed to roll the pumpkin out and place it upon its neck again. He also set the Saw-Horse upright, and said to it:
“We owe you many thanks for the gallant fight you made.”
“I really think we have escaped very nicely,” remarked the Tin Woodman, in a tone of pride.
“Not so!” exclaimed a hollow voice.
At this they all turned in surprise to look at the Scarecrow’s head, which lay at the back of the nest.
“I am completely ruined!” declared the Scarecrow, as he noted their astonishment. “For where is the straw that stuffs my body?”
The awful question startled them all. They gazed around the nest with horror, for not a vestige of straw remained. The Jackdaws had stolen it to the last wisp and flung it all into the chasm that yawned for hundreds of feet beneath the nest.
“My poor, poor friend!” said the Tin Woodman, taking up the Scarecrow’s head and caressing it tenderly; “whoever could imagine you would come to this untimely end?”
“I did it to save my friends,” returned the head; “and I am glad that I perished in so noble and unselfish a manner.”
“But why are you all so despondent?” inquired the Woggle-Bug. “The Scarecrow’s clothing is still safe.”
“Yes,” answered the Tin Woodman; “but our friend’s clothes are useless without stuffing.”
“Why not stuff him with money?” asked Tip.
“Money!” they all cried, in an amazed chorus.
“To be sure,” said the boy. “In the bottom of the nest are thousands of dollar bills—and two-dollar bills—and five-dollar bills—and tens, and twenties, and fifties. There are enough of them to stuff a dozen Scarecrows. Why not use the money?”
The Tin Woodman began to turn over the rubbish with the handle of his axe; and, sure enough, what they had first thought only worthless papers were found to be all bills of various denominations, which the mischievous Jackdaws had for years been engaged in stealing from the villages and cities they visited.
There was an immense fortune lying in that inaccessible nest; and Tip’s suggestion was, with the Scarecrow’s consent, quickly acted upon.
They selected all the newest and cleanest bills and assorted them into various piles. The Scarecrow’s left leg and boot were stuffed with five-dollar bills; his right leg was stuffed with ten-dollar bills, and his body so closely filled with fifties, one-hundreds and one-thousands that he could scarcely button his jacket with comfort.
[Line-Art Drawing]
“You are now” said the Woggle-Bug, impressively, when the task had been completed, “the most valuable member of our party; and as you are among faithful friends there is little danger of your being spent.”
“Thank you,” returned the Scarecrow, gratefully. “I feel like a new man; and although at first glance I might be mistaken for a Safety Deposit Vault, I beg you to remember that my Brains are still composed of the same old material. And these are the possessions that have always made me a person to be depended upon in an emergency.”
“Well, the emergency is here,” observed Tip; “and unless your brains help us out of it we shall be compelled to pass the remainder of our lives in this nest.”
“How about these wishing pills?” enquired the Scarecrow, taking the box from his jacket pocket. “Can’t we use them to escape?”
“Not unless we can count seventeen by twos,” answered the Tin Woodman. “But our friend the Woggle-Bug claims to be highly educated, so he ought easily to figure out how that can be done.”
“It isn’t a question of education,” returned the Insect; “it’s merely a question of mathematics. I’ve seen the professor work lots of sums on the blackboard, and he claimed anything could be done with x’s and y’s and a’s, and such things, by mixing them up with plenty of plusses and minuses and equals, and so forth. But he never said anything, so far as I can remember, about counting up to the odd number of seventeen by the even numbers of twos.”
“Stop! stop!” cried the Pumpkinhead. “You’re making my head ache.”
“And mine,” added the Scarecrow. “Your mathematics seem to me very like a bottle of mixed pickles the more you fish for what you want the less chance you have of getting it. I am certain that if the thing can be accomplished at all, it is in a very simple manner.”
“Yes,” said Tip. “old Mombi couldn’t use x’s and minuses, for she never went to school.”
“Why not start counting at a half of one?” asked the Saw-Horse, abruptly. “Then anyone can count up to seventeen by twos very easily.”
They looked at each other in surprise, for the Saw-Horse was considered the most stupid of the entire party.
“You make me quite ashamed of myself,” said the Scarecrow, bowing low to the Saw-Horse.
“Nevertheless, the creature is right,” declared the Woggle-Bug; “for twice one-half is one, and if you get to one it is easy to count from one up to seventeen by twos.”
“I wonder I didn’t think of that myself,” said the Pumpkinhead.
“I don’t,” returned the Scarecrow. “You’re no wiser than the rest of us, are you? But let us make a wish at once. Who will swallow the first pill?”
“Suppose you do it,” suggested Tip.
“I can’t,” said the Scarecrow.
“Why not? You’ve a mouth, haven’t you?” asked the boy.
“Yes; but my mouth is painted on, and there’s no swallow connected with it,” answered the Scarecrow. “In fact,” he continued, looking from one to another critically, “I believe the boy and the Woggle-Bug are the only ones in our party that are able to swallow.”
Observing the truth of this remark, Tip said:
“Then I will undertake to make the first wish. Give me one of the Silver Pills.”
This the Scarecrow tried to do; but his padded gloves were too clumsy to clutch so small an object, and he held the box toward the boy while Tip selected one of the pills and swallowed it.
“Count!” cried the Scarecrow.
“One-half, one, three, five, seven, nine, eleven,” counted Tip. “thirteen, fifteen, seventeen.”
“Now wish!” said the Tin Woodman anxiously:
But Just then the boy began to suffer such fearful pains that he became alarmed.
“The pill has poisoned me!” he gasped; “O—h! O-o-o-o-o! Ouch! Murder! Fire! O-o-h!” and here he rolled upon the bottom of the nest in such contortions that he frightened them all.
“What can we do for you. Speak, I beg!” entreated the Tin Woodman, tears of sympathy running down his nickel cheeks.
“I—I don’t know!” answered Tip. “O—h! I wish I’d never swallowed that pill!”
Then at once the pain stopped, and the boy rose to his feet again and found the Scarecrow looking with amazement at the end of the pepper-box.
“What’s happened?” asked the boy, a little ashamed of his recent exhibition.
“Why, the three pills are in the box again!” said the Scarecrow.
“Of course they are,” the Woggle-Bug declared. “Didn’t Tip wish that he’d never swallowed one of them? Well, the wish came true, and he didn’t swallow one of them. So of course they are all three in the box.”
“That may be; but the pill gave me a dreadful pain, just the same,” said the boy.
“Impossible!” declared the Woggle-Bug. “If you have never swallowed it, the pill can not have given you a pain. And as your wish, being granted, proves you did not swallow the pill, it is also plain that you suffered no pain.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
“Then it was a splendid imitation of a pain,” retorted Tip, angrily. “Suppose you try the next pill yourself. We’ve wasted one wish already.”
“Oh, no, we haven’t!” protested the Scarecrow. “Here are still three pills in the box, and each pill is good for a wish.”
“Now you’re making my head ache,” said Tip. “I can’t understand the thing at all. But I won’t take another pill, I promise you!” and with this remark he retired sulkily to the back of the nest.
“Well,” said the Woggle-Bug, “it remains for me to save us in my most Highly Magnified and Thoroughly Educated manner; for I seem to be the only one able and willing to make a wish. Let me have one of the pills.”
He swallowed it without hesitation, and they all stood admiring his courage while the Insect counted seventeen by twos in the same way that Tip had done. And for some reason—perhaps because Woggle-Bugs have stronger stomachs than boys—the silver pellet caused it no pain whatever.
“I wish the Gump’s broken wings mended, and as good as new!” said the Woggle-Bug, in a slow; impressive voice.
All turned to look at the Thing, and so quickly had the wish been granted that the Gump lay before them in perfect repair, and as well able to fly through the air as when it had first been brought to life on the roof of the palace.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
The Scarecrow Appeals to Glenda the Good
“Hooray!” shouted the Scarecrow, gaily. “We can now leave this miserable Jackdaws’ nest whenever we please.”
“But it is nearly dark,” said the Tin Woodman; “and unless we wait until morning to make our flight we may get into more trouble. I don’t like these night trips, for one never knows what will happen.”
So it was decided to wait until daylight, and the adventurers amused themselves in the twilight by searching the Jackdaws’ nest for treasures.
The Woggle-Bug found two handsome bracelets of wrought gold, which fitted his slender arms very well. The Scarecrow took a fancy for rings, of which there were many in the nest. Before long he had fitted a ring to each finger of his padded gloves, and not being content with that display he added one more to each thumb. As he carefully chose those rings set with sparkling stones, such as rubies, amethysts and sapphires, the Scarecrow’s hands now presented a most brilliant appearance.
“This nest would be a picnic for Queen Jinjur,” said he, musingly. “for as nearly as I can make out she and her girls conquered me merely to rob my city of its emeralds.”
The Tin Woodman was content with his diamond necklace and refused to accept any additional decorations; but Tip secured a fine gold watch, which was attached to a heavy fob, and placed it in his pocket with much pride. He also pinned several jeweled brooches to Jack Pumpkinhead’s red waistcoat, and attached a lorgnette, by means of a fine chain, to the neck of the Saw-Horse.
“It’s very pretty,” said the creature, regarding the lorgnette approvingly; “but what is it for?”
None of them could answer that question, however; so the Saw-Horse decided it was some rare decoration and became very fond of it.
That none of the party might be slighted, they ended by placing several large seal rings upon the points of the Gump’s antlers, although that odd personage seemed by no means gratified by the attention.
Darkness soon fell upon them, and Tip and the Woggle-Bug went to sleep while the others sat down to wait patiently for the day.
Next morning they had cause to congratulate themselves upon the useful condition of the Gump; for with daylight a great flock of Jackdaws approached to engage in one more battle for the possession of the nest.
But our adventurers did not wait for the assault. They tumbled into the cushioned seats of the sofas as quickly as possible, and Tip gave the word to the Gump to start.
At once it rose into the air, the great wings flopping strongly and with regular motions, and in a few moments they were so far from the nest that the chattering Jackdaws took possession without any attempt at pursuit.
The Thing flew due North, going in the same direction from whence it had come. At least, that was the Scarecrow’s opinion, and the others agreed that the Scarecrow was the best judge of direction. After passing over several cities and villages the Gump carried them high above a broad plain where houses became more and more scattered until they disappeared altogether. Next came the wide, sandy desert separating the rest of the world from the Land of Oz, and before noon they saw the dome-shaped houses that proved they were once more within the borders of their native land.
“But the houses and fences are blue,” said the Tin Woodman, “and that indicates we are in the land of the Munchkins, and therefore a long distance from Glinda the Good.”
“What shall we do?” asked the boy, turning to their guide.
“I don’t know” replied the Scarecrow, frankly. “If we were at the Emerald City we could then move directly southward, and so reach our destination. But we dare not go to the Emerald City, and the Gump is probably carrying us further in the wrong direction with every flop of its wings.”
“Then the Woggle-Bug must swallow another pill,” said Tip, decidedly, “and wish us headed in the right direction.”
“Very well,” returned the Highly Magnified one; “I’m willing.”
But when the Scarecrow searched in his pocket for the pepper-box containing the two silver Wishing Pills, it was not to be found. Filled with anxiety, the voyagers hunted throughout every inch of the Thing for the precious box; but it had disappeared entirely.
And still the Gump flew onward, carrying them they knew not where.
“I must have left the pepper-box in the Jackdaws’ nest,” said the Scarecrow, at length.
“It is a great misfortune,” the Tin Woodman declared. “But we are no worse off than before we discovered the Wishing Pills.”
“We are better off,” replied Tip. “for the one pill we used has enabled us to escape from that horrible nest.”
“Yet the loss of the other two is serious, and I deserve a good scolding for my carelessness,” the Scarecrow rejoined, penitently. “For in such an unusual party as this accidents are liable to happen any moment, and even now we may be approaching a new danger.”
No one dared contradict this, and a dismal silence ensued.
The Gump flew steadily on.
Suddenly Tip uttered an exclamation of surprise. “We must have reached the South Country,” he cried, “for below us everything is red!”
Immediately they all leaned over the backs of the sofas to look—all except Jack, who was too careful of his pumpkin head to risk its slipping off his neck. Sure enough; the red houses and fences and trees indicated they were within the domain of Glinda the Good; and presently, as they glided rapidly on, the Tin Woodman recognized the roads and buildings they passed, and altered slightly the flight of the Gump so that they might reach the palace of the celebrated Sorceress.
[Line-Art Drawing]
“Good!” cried the Scarecrow, delightedly. “We do not need the lost Wishing Pills now, for we have arrived at our destination.”
Gradually the Thing sank lower and nearer to the ground until at length it came to rest within the beautiful gardens of Glinda, settling upon a velvety green lawn close by a fountain which sent sprays of flashing gems, instead of water, high into the air, whence they fell with a soft, tinkling sound into the carved marble basin placed to receive them.
Everything was very gorgeous in Glinda’s gardens, and while our voyagers gazed about with admiring eyes a company of soldiers silently appeared and surrounded them. But these soldiers of the great Sorceress were entirely different from those of Jinjur’s Army of Revolt, although they were likewise girls. For Glinda’s soldiers wore neat uniforms and bore swords and spears; and they marched with a skill and precision that proved them well trained in the arts of war.
The Captain commanding this troop—which was Glinda’s private Body Guard—recognized the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman at once, and greeted them with respectful salutations.
“Good day!” said the Scarecrow, gallantly removing his hat, while the Woodman gave a soldierly salute; “we have come to request an audience with your fair Ruler.”
“Glinda is now within her palace, awaiting you,” returned the Captain; “for she saw you coming long before you arrived.”
“That is strange!” said Tip, wondering.
“Not at all,” answered the Scarecrow, “for Glinda the Good is a mighty Sorceress, and nothing that goes on in the Land of Oz escapes her notice. I suppose she knows why we came as well as we do ourselves.”
“Then what was the use of our coming?” asked Jack, stupidly.
“To prove you are a Pumpkinhead!” retorted the Scarecrow. “But, if the Sorceress expects us, we must not keep her waiting.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
So they all clambered out of the sofas and followed the Captain toward the palace—even the Saw-Horse taking his place in the queer procession.
Upon her throne of finely wrought gold sat Glinda, and she could scarcely repress a smile as her peculiar visitors entered and bowed before her. Both the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman she knew and liked; but the awkward Pumpkinhead and Highly Magnified Woggle-Bug were creatures she had never seen before, and they seemed even more curious than the others. As for the Saw-Horse, he looked to be nothing more than an animated chunk of wood; and he bowed so stiffly that his head bumped against the floor, causing a ripple of laughter among the soldiers, in which Glinda frankly joined.
“I beg to announce to your glorious highness,” began the Scarecrow, in a solemn voice, “that my Emerald City has been overrun by a crowd of impudent girls with knitting-needles, who have enslaved all the men, robbed the streets and public buildings of all their emerald jewels, and usurped my throne.”
“I know it,” said Glinda.
“They also threatened to destroy me, as well as all the good friends and allies you see before you,” continued the Scarecrow. “and had we not managed to escape their clutches our days would long since have ended.”
“I know it,” repeated Glinda.
“Therefore I have come to beg your assistance,” resumed the Scarecrow, “for I believe you are always glad to succor the unfortunate and oppressed.”
“That is true,” replied the Sorceress, slowly. “But the Emerald City is now ruled by General Jinjur, who has caused herself to be proclaimed Queen. What right have I to oppose her?”
“Why, she stole the throne from me,” said the Scarecrow.
“And how came you to possess the throne?” asked Glinda.
“I got it from the Wizard of Oz, and by the choice of the people,” returned the Scarecrow, uneasy at such questioning.
“And where did the Wizard get it?” she continued gravely.
“I am told he took it from Pastoria, the former King,” said the Scarecrow, becoming confused under the intent look of the Sorceress.
“Then,” declared Glinda, “the throne of the Emerald City belongs neither to you nor to Jinjur, but to this Pastoria from whom the Wizard usurped it.”
“That is true,” acknowledged the Scarecrow, humbly; “but Pastoria is now dead and gone, and some one must rule in his place.”
“Pastoria had a daughter, who is the rightful heir to the throne of the Emerald City. Did you know that?” questioned the Sorceress.
“No,” replied the Scarecrow. “But if the girl still lives I will not stand in her way. It will satisfy me as well to have Jinjur turned out, as an impostor, as to regain the throne myself. In fact, it isn’t much fun to be King, especially if one has good brains. I have known for some time that I am fitted to occupy a far more exalted position. But where is the girl who owns the throne, and what is her name?”
“Her name is Ozma,” answered Glinda. “But where she is I have tried in vain to discover. For the Wizard of Oz, when he stole the throne from Ozma’s father, hid the girl in some secret place; and by means of a magical trick with which I am not familiar he also managed to prevent her being discovered—even by so experienced a Sorceress as myself.”
“That is strange,” interrupted the Woggle-Bug, pompously. “I have been informed that the Wonderful Wizard of Oz was nothing more than a humbug!”
“Nonsense!” exclaimed the Scarecrow, much provoked by this speech. “Didn’t he give me a wonderful set of brains?”
“There’s no humbug about my heart,” announced the Tin Woodman, glaring indignantly at the Woggle-Bug.
“Perhaps I was misinformed,” stammered the Insect, shrinking back; “I never knew the Wizard personally.”
“Well, we did,” retorted the Scarecrow, “and he was a very great Wizard, I assure you. It is true he was guilty of some slight impostures, but unless he was a great Wizard how—let me ask—could he have hidden this girl Ozma so securely that no one can find her?”
“I—I give it up!” replied the Woggle-Bug, meekly.
“That is the most sensible speech you’ve made,” said the Tin Woodman.
“I must really make another effort to discover where this girl is hidden,” resumed the Sorceress, thoughtfully. “I have in my library a book in which is inscribed every action of the Wizard while he was in our land of Oz—or, at least, every action that could be observed by my spies. This book I will read carefully tonight, and try to single out the acts that may guide us in discovering the lost Ozma. In the meantime, pray amuse yourselves in my palace and command my servants as if they were your own. I will grant you another audience tomorrow.”
With this gracious speech Glinda dismissed the adventurers, and they wandered away through the beautiful gardens, where they passed several hours enjoying all the delightful things with which the Queen of the Southland had surrounded her royal palace.
On the following morning they again appeared before Glinda, who said to them:
“I have searched carefully through the records of the Wizard’s actions, and among them I can find but three that appear to have been suspicious. He ate beans with a knife, made three secret visits to old Mombi, and limped slightly on his left foot.”
“Ah! that last is certainly suspicious!” exclaimed the Pumpkinhead.
“Not necessarily,” said the Scarecrow. “he may, have had corns. Now, it seems to me his eating beans with a knife is more suspicious.”
“Perhaps it is a polite custom in Omaha, from which great country the Wizard originally came,” suggested the Tin Woodman.
“It may be,” admitted the Scarecrow.
“But why,” asked Glinda, “did he make three secret visits to old Mombi?”
“Ah! Why, indeed!” echoed the Woggle-Bug, impressively.
“We know that the Wizard taught the old woman many of his tricks of magic,” continued Glinda; “and this he would not have done had she not assisted him in some way. So we may suspect with good reason that Mombi aided him to hide the girl Ozma, who was the real heir to the throne of the Emerald City, and a constant danger to the usurper. For, if the people knew that she lived, they would quickly make her their Queen and restore her to her rightful position.”
“An able argument!” cried the Scarecrow. “I have no doubt that Mombi was mixed up in this wicked business. But how does that knowledge help us?”
“We must find Mombi,” replied Glinda, “and force her to tell where the girl is hidden.”
“Mombi is now with Queen Jinjur, in the Emerald, City” said Tip. “It was she who threw so many obstacles in our pathway, and made Jinjur threaten to destroy my friends and give me back into the old witch’s power.”
“Then,” decided Glinda, “I will march with my army to the Emerald City, and take Mombi prisoner. After that we can, perhaps, force her to tell the truth about Ozma.”
“She is a terrible old woman!” remarked Tip, with a shudder at the thought of Mombi’s black kettle; “and obstinate, too.”
“I am quite obstinate myself,” returned the Sorceress, with a sweet smile. “so I do not fear Mombi in the least. Today I will make all necessary preparations, and we will march upon the Emerald City at daybreak tomorrow.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
 
The Tin-Woodman Plucks a Rose
The Army of Glinda the Good looked very grand and imposing when it assembled at daybreak before the palace gates. The uniforms of the girl soldiers were pretty and of gay colors, and their silver-tipped spears were bright and glistening, the long shafts being inlaid with mother-of-pearl. All the officers wore sharp, gleaming swords, and shields edged with peacock-feathers; and it really seemed that no foe could by any possibility defeat such a brilliant army.
The Sorceress rode in a beautiful palanquin which was like the body of a coach, having doors andwindows with silken curtains; but instead of wheels, which a coach has, the palanquin rested upon two long, horizontal bars, which were borne upon the shoulders of twelve servants.
The Scarecrow and his comrades decided to ride in the Gump, in order to keep up with the swift march of the army; so, as soon as Glinda had started and her soldiers had marched away to the inspiring strains of music played by the royal band, our friends climbed into the sofas and followed. The Gump flew along slowly at a point directly over the palanquin in which rode the Sorceress.
[Line-Art Drawing]
“Be careful,” said the Tin Woodman to the Scarecrow, who was leaning far over the side to look at the army below. “You might fall.”
“It wouldn’t matter,” remarked the educated Woggle-Bug. “he can’t get broke so long as he is stuffed with money.”
“Didn’t I ask you” began Tip, in a reproachful voice.
“You did!” said the Woggle-Bug, promptly. “And I beg your pardon. I will really try to restrain myself.”
“You’d better,” declared the boy. “That is, if you wish to travel in our company.”
“Ah! I couldn’t bear to part with you now,” murmured the Insect, feelingly; so Tip let the subject drop.
The army moved steadily on, but night had fallen before they came to the walls of the Emerald City. By the dim light of the new moon, however, Glinda’s forces silently surrounded the city and pitched their tents of scarlet silk upon the greensward. The tent of the Sorceress was larger than the others, and was composed of pure white silk, with scarlet banners flying above it. A tent was also pitched for the Scarecrow’s party; and when these preparations had been made, with military precision and quickness, the army retired to rest.
Great was the amazement of Queen Jinjur next morning when her soldiers came running to inform her of the vast army surrounding them. She at once climbed to a high tower of the royal palace and saw banners waving in every direction and the great white tent of Glinda standing directly before the gates.
“We are surely lost!” cried Jinjur, in despair; “for how can our knitting-needles avail against the long spears and terrible swords of our foes?”
“The best thing we can do,” said one of the girls, “is to surrender as quickly as possible, before we get hurt.”
“Not so,” returned Jinjur, more bravely. “The enemy is still outside the walls, so we must try to gain time by engaging them in parley. Go you with a flag of truce to Glinda and ask her why she has dared to invade my dominions, and what are her demands.”
So the girl passed through the gates, bearing a white flag to show she was on a mission of peace, and came to Glinda’s tent. “Tell your Queen,” said the Sorceress to the girl, “that she must deliver up to me old Mombi, to be my prisoner. If this is done I will not molest her farther.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
Now when this message was delivered to the Queen it filled her with dismay, for Mombi was her chief counsellor, and Jinjur was terribly afraid of the old hag. But she sent for Mombi, and told her what Glinda had said.
“I see trouble ahead for all of us,” muttered the old witch, after glancing into a magic mirror she carried in her pocket. “But we may even yet escape by deceiving this sorceress, clever as she thinks herself.”
“Don’t you think it will be safer for me to deliver you into her hands?” asked Jinjur, nervously.
“If you do, it will cost you the throne of the Emerald City!” answered the witch, positively. “But if you will let me have my own way, I can save us both very easily.”
“Then do as you please,” replied Jinjur, “for it is so aristocratic to be a Queen that I do not wish to be obliged to return home again, to make beds and wash dishes for my mother.”
So Mombi called Jellia Jamb to her, and performed a certain magical rite with which she was familiar. As a result of the enchantment Jellia took on the form and features of Mombi, while the old witch grew to resemble the girl so closely that it seemed impossible anyone could guess the deception.
“Now,” said old Mombi to the Queen, “let your soldiers deliver up this girl to Glinda. She will think she has the real Mombi in her power, and so will return immediately to her own country in the South.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
Therefore Jellia, hobbling along like an aged woman, was led from the city gates and taken before Glinda.
“Here is the person you demanded,” said one of the guards, “and our Queen now begs you will go away, as you promised, and leave us in peace.”
“That I will surely do,” replied Glinda, much pleased; “if this is really the person she seems to be.”
“It is certainly old Mombi,” said the guard, who believed she was speaking the truth; and then Jinjur’s soldiers returned within the city’s gates.
The Sorceress quickly summoned the Scarecrow and his friends to her tent, and began to question the supposed Mombi about the lost girl Ozma. But Jellia knew nothing at all of this affair, and presently she grew so nervous under the questioning that she gave way and began to weep, to Glinda’s great astonishment.
“Here is some foolish trickery!” said the Sorceress, her eyes flashing with anger. “This is not Mombi at all, but some other person who has been made to resemble her! Tell me,” she demanded, turning to the trembling girl, “what is your name?”
This Jellia dared not tell, having been threatened with death by the witch if she confessed the fraud. But Glinda, sweet and fair though she was, understood magic better than any other person in the Land of Oz. So, by uttering a few potent words and making a peculiar gesture, she quickly transformed the girl into her proper shape, while at the same time old Mombi, far away in Jinjur’s palace, suddenly resumed her own crooked form and evil features.
“Why, it’s Jellia Jamb!” cried the Scarecrow, recognizing in the girl one of his old friends.
“It’s our interpreter!” said the Pumpkinhead, smiling pleasantly.
[Line-Art Drawing]
Then Jellia was forced to tell of the trick Mombi had played and she also begged Glinda’s protection, which the Sorceress readily granted. But Glinda was now really angry, and sent word to Jinjur that the fraud was discovered and she must deliver up the real Mombi or suffer terrible consequences. Jinjur was prepared for this message, for the witch well understood, when her natural form was thrust upon her, that Glinda had discovered her trickery. But the wicked old creature had already thought up a new deception, and had made Jinjur promise to carry it out. So the Queen said to Glinda’s messenger:
“Tell your mistress that I cannot find Mombi anywhere, but that Glinda is welcome to enter the city and search herself for the old woman. She may also bring her friends with her, if she likes; but if she does not find Mombi by sundown, the Sorceress must promise to go away peaceably and bother us no more.”
Glinda agreed to these terms, well knowing that Mombi was somewhere within the city walls. So Jinjur caused the gates to be thrown open, and Glinda marched in at the head of a company of soldiers, followed by the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman, while Jack Pumpkinhead rode astride the Saw-Horse, and the Educated, Highly Magnified Woggle-Bug sauntered behind in a dignified manner. Tip walked by the side of the Sorceress, for Glinda had conceived a great liking for the boy.
Of course old Mombi had no intention of being found by Glinda; so, while her enemies were marching up the street, the witch transformed herself into a red rose growing upon a bush in the garden of the palace. It was a clever idea, and a trick Glinda did not suspect; so several precious hours were spent in a vain search for Mombi.
As sundown approached the Sorceress realized she had been defeated by the superior cunning of the aged witch; so she gave the command to her people to march out of the city and back to their tents.
The Scarecrow and his comrades happened to be searching in the garden of the palace just then, and they turned with disappointment to obey Glinda’s command. But before they left the garden the Tin Woodman, who was fond of flowers, chanced to espy a big red rose growing upon a bush; so he plucked the flower and fastened it securely in the tin buttonhole of his tin bosom.
As he did this he fancied he heard a low moan proceed from the rose; but he paid no attention to the sound, and Mombi was thus carried out of the city and into Glinda’s camp without anyone having a suspicion that they had succeeded in their quest.
[Line-Art Drawing]
 
The Transformation of Old Mombi
The Witch was at first frightened at finding herself captured by the enemy; but soon she decided that she was exactly as safe in the Tin Woodman’s button-hole as growing upon the bush. For no one knew the rose and Mombi to be one, and now that she was without the gates of the City her chances of escaping altogether from Glinda were much improved.
“But there is no hurry,” thought Mombi. “I will wait awhile and enjoy the humiliation of this Sorceress when she finds I have outwitted her.” So throughout the night the rose lay quietly on the Woodman’s bosom, and in the morning, when Glinda summoned our friends to a consultation, Nick Chopper carried his pretty flower with him to the white silk tent.
[Line-Art Drawing]
“For some reason,” said Glinda, “we have failed to find this cunning old Mombi; so I fear our expedition will prove a failure. And for that I am sorry, because without our assistance little Ozma will never be rescued and restored to her rightful position as Queen of the Emerald City”
“Do not let us give up so easily,” said the Pumpkinhead. “Let us do something else.”
“Something else must really be done,” replied Glinda, with a smile. “yet I cannot understand how I have been defeated so easily by an old Witch who knows far less of magic than I do myself.”
“While we are on the ground I believe it would be wise for us to conquer the Emerald City for Princess Ozma, and find the girl afterward,” said the Scarecrow. “And while the girl remains hidden I will gladly rule in her place, for I understand the business of ruling much better than Jinjur does.”
“But I have promised not to molest Jinjur,” objected Glinda.
“Suppose you all return with me to my kingdom—or Empire, rather,” said the Tin Woodman, politely including the entire party in a royal wave of his arm. “It will give me great pleasure to entertain you in my castle, where there is room enough and to spare. And if any of you wish to be nickel-plated, my valet will do it free of all expense.”
While the Woodman was speaking Glinda’s eyes had been noting the rose in his button-hole, and now she imagined she saw the big red leaves of the flower tremble slightly. This quickly aroused her suspicions, and in a moment more the Sorceress had decided that the seeming rose was nothing else than a transformation of old Mombi. At the same instant Mombi knew she was discovered and must quickly plan an escape, and as transformations were easy to her she immediately took the form of a Shadow and glided along the wall of the tent toward the entrance, thinking thus to disappear.
But Glinda had not only equal cunning, but far more experience than the Witch. So the Sorceress reached the opening of the tent before the Shadow, and with a wave of her hand closed the entrance so securely that Mombi could not find a crack big enough to creep through. The Scarecrow and his friends were greatly surprised at Glinda’s actions; for none of them had noted the Shadow. But the Sorceress said to them:
“Remain perfectly quiet, all of you! For the old Witch is even now with us in this tent, and I hope to capture her.”
These words so alarmed Mombi that she quickly transformed herself from a shadow to a Black Ant, in which shape she crawled along the ground, seeking a crack or crevice in which to hide her tiny body.
Fortunately, the ground where the tent had been pitched, being Just before the city gates, was hard and smooth; and while the Ant still crawled about, Glinda discovered it and ran quickly forward to effect its capture But, Just as her hand was descending, the Witch, now fairly frantic with fear, made her last transformation, and in the form of a huge Griffin sprang through the wall of the tent—tearing the silk asunder in her rush—and in a moment had darted away with the speed of a whirlwind.
Glinda did not hesitate to follow. She sprang upon the back of the Saw-Horse and cried:
“Now you shall prove that you have a right to be alive! Run—run—run!”
The Saw-Horse ran. Like a flash he followed the Griffin, his wooden legs moving so fast that they twinkled like the rays of a star. Before our friends could recover from their surprise both the Griffin and the Saw-Horse had dashed out of sight.
“Come! Let us follow!” cried the Scarecrow.
They ran to the place where the Gump was lying and quickly tumbled aboard.
“Fly!” commanded Tip, eagerly.
“Where to?” asked the Gump, in its calm voice.
“I don’t know,” returned Tip, who was very nervous at the delay; “but if you will mount into the air I think we can discover which way Glinda has gone.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
“Very well,” returned the Gump, quietly; and it spread its great wings and mounted high into the air.
Far away, across the meadows, they could now see two tiny specks, speeding one after the other; and they knew these specks must be the Griffin and the Saw-Horse. So Tip called the Gump’s attention to them and bade the creature try to overtake the Witch and the Sorceress. But, swift as was the Gump’s flight, the pursued and pursuer moved more swiftly yet, and within a few moments were blotted out against the dim horizon.
“Let us continue to follow them, nevertheless,” said the Scarecrow. “for the Land of Oz is of small extent, and sooner or later they must both come to a halt.”
Old Mombi had thought herself very wise to choose the form of a Griffin, for its legs were exceedingly fleet and its strength more enduring than that of other animals. But she had not reckoned on the untiring energy of the Saw-Horse, whose wooden limbs could run for days without slacking their speed. Therefore, after an hour’s hard running, the Griffin’s breath began to fail, and it panted and gasped painfully, and moved more slowly than before. Then it reached the edge of the desert and began racing across the deep sands. But its tired feet sank far into the sand, and in a few minutes the Griffin fell forward, completely exhausted, and lay still upon the desert waste.
Glinda came up a moment later, riding the still vigorous Saw-Horse; and having unwound a slender golden thread from her girdle the Sorceress threw it over the head of the panting and helpless Griffin, and so destroyed the magical power of Mombi’s transformation.
For the animal, with one fierce shudder, disappeared from view, while in its place was discovered the form of the old Witch, glaring savagely at the serene and beautiful face of the Sorceress.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
Princess Ozma of Oz
“You are my prisoner, and it is useless for you to struggle any longer,” said Glinda, in her soft, sweet voice. “Lie still a moment, and rest yourself, and then I will carry you back to my tent.”
“Why do you seek me?” asked Mombi, still scarce able to speak plainly for lack of breath. “What have I done to you, to be so persecuted?”
“You have done nothing to me,” answered the gentle Sorceress; “but I suspect you have been guilty of several wicked actions; and if I find it is true that you have so abused your knowledge of magic, I intend to punish you severely.”
“I defy you!” croaked the old hag. “You dare not harm me!”
Just then the Gump flew up to them and alighted upon the desert sands beside Glinda. Our friends were delighted to find that Mombi had finally been captured, and after a hurried consultation it was decided they should all return to the camp in the Gump. So the Saw-Horse was tossed aboard, and then Glinda still holding an end of the golden thread that was around Mombi’s neck, forced her prisoner to climb into the sofas. The others now followed, and Tip gave the word to the Gump to return.
The Journey was made in safety, Mombi sitting in her place with a grim and sullen air; for the old hag was absolutely helpless so long as the magical thread encircled her throat. The army hailed Glinda’s return with loud cheers, and the party of friends soon gathered again in the royal tent, which had been neatly repaired during their absence.
“Now,” said the Sorceress to Mombi, “I want you to tell us why the Wonderful Wizard of Oz paid you three visits, and what became of the child, Ozma, which so curiously disappeared.”
The Witch looked at Glinda defiantly, but said not a word.
“Answer me!” cried the Sorceress.
But still Mombi remained silent.
“Perhaps she doesn’t know,” remarked Jack.
“I beg you will keep quiet,” said Tip. “You might spoil everything with your foolishness.”
“Very well, dear father!” returned the Pumpkinhead, meekly.
“How glad I am to be a Woggle-Bug!” murmured the Highly Magnified Insect, softly. “No one can expect wisdom to flow from a pumpkin.”
“Well,” said the Scarecrow, “what shall we do to make Mombi speak? Unless she tells us what we wish to know her capture will do us no good at all.”
“Suppose we try kindness,” suggested the Tin Woodman. “I’ve heard that anyone can be conquered with kindness, no matter how ugly they may be.”
At this the Witch turned to glare upon him so horribly that the Tin Woodman shrank back abashed.
Glinda had been carefully considering what to do, and now she turned to Mombi and said:
“You will gain nothing, I assure you, by thus defying us. For I am determined to learn the truth about the girl Ozma, and unless you tell me all that you know, I will certainly put you to death.”
“Oh, no! Don’t do that!” exclaimed the Tin Woodman. “It would be an awful thing to kill anyone—even old Mombi!”
“But it is merely a threat,” returned Glinda. “I shall not put Mombi to death, because she will prefer to tell me the truth.”
“Oh, I see!” said the tin man, much relieved.
“Suppose I tell you all that you wish to know,”. said Mombi, speaking so suddenly that she startled them all. “What will you do with me then?”
“In that case,” replied Glinda, “I shall merely ask you to drink a powerful draught which will cause you to forget all the magic you have ever learned.”
“Then I would become a helpless old woman!”
“But you would be alive,” suggested the Pumpkinhead, consolingly.
“Do try to keep silent!” said Tip, nervously.
“I’ll try,” responded Jack; “but you will admit that it’s a good thing to be alive.”
“Especially if one happens to be Thoroughly Educated,” added the Woggle-Bug, nodding approval.
“You may make your choice,” Glinda said to old Mombi, “between death if you remain silent, and the loss of your magical powers if you tell me the truth. But I think you will prefer to live.”
Mombi cast an uneasy glance at the Sorceress, and saw that she was in earnest, and not to be trifled with. So she replied, slowly:
“I will answer your questions.”
“That is what I expected,” said Glinda, pleasantly. “You have chosen wisely, I assure you.”
She then motioned to one of her Captains, who brought her a beautiful golden casket. From this the Sorceress drew an immense white pearl, attached to a slender chain which she placed around her neck in such a way that the pearl rested upon her bosom, directly over her heart.
“Now,” said she, “I will ask my first question: Why did the Wizard pay you three visits?”
“Because I would not come to him,” answered Mombi.
“That is no answer,” said Glinda, sternly. “Tell me the truth.”
“Well,” returned Mombi, with downcast eyes, “he visited me to learn the way I make tea-biscuits.”
“Look up!” commanded the Sorceress.
Mombi obeyed.
“What is the color of my pearl?” demanded Glinda.
“Why—it is black!” replied the old Witch, in a tone of wonder.
“Then you have told me a falsehood!” cried Glinda, angrily. “Only when the truth is spoken will my magic pearl remain a pure white in color.”
Mombi now saw how useless it was to try to deceive the Sorceress; so she said, meanwhile scowling at her defeat:
“The Wizard brought to me the girl Ozma, who was then no more than a baby, and begged me to conceal the child.”
“That is what I thought,” declared Glinda, calmly. “What did he give you for thus serving him?”
“He taught me all the magical tricks he knew. Some were good tricks, and some were only frauds; but I have remained faithful to my promise.”
“What did you do with the girl?” asked Glinda; and at this question everyone bent forward and listened eagerly for the reply.
“I enchanted her,” answered Mombi.
“In what way?”
“I transformed her into—into—”
“Into what?” demanded Glinda, as the Witch hesitated.
“Into a boy!” said Mombi, in a low tone.
“A boy!” echoed every voice; and then, because they knew that this old woman had reared Tip from childhood, all eyes were turned to where the boy stood.
“Yes,” said the old Witch, nodding her head; “that is the Princess Ozma—the child brought to me by the Wizard who stole her father’s throne. That is the rightful ruler of the Emerald City!” and she pointed her long bony finger straight at the boy.
“I!” cried Tip, in amazement. “Why, I’m no Princess Ozma—I’m not a girl!”
Glinda smiled, and going to Tip she took his small brown hand within her dainty white one.
[Full page line-art drawing: MOMBI POINTED HER LONG, BONY FINGER AT THE BOY]
“You are not a girl just now” said she, gently, “because Mombi transformed you into a boy. But you were born a girl, and also a Princess; so you must resume your proper form, that you may become Queen of the Emerald City.”
“Oh, let Jinjur be the Queen!” exclaimed Tip, ready to cry. “I want to stay a boy, and travel with the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman, and the Woggle-Bug, and Jack—yes! and my friend the Saw-Horse—and the Gump! I don’t want to be a girl!”
“Never mind, old chap,” said the Tin Woodman, soothingly; “it don’t hurt to be a girl, I’m told; and we will all remain your faithful friends just the same. And, to be honest with you, I’ve always considered girls nicer than boys.”
“They’re just as nice, anyway,” added the Scarecrow, patting Tip affectionately upon the head.
“And they are equally good students,” proclaimed the Woggle-Bug. “I should like to become your tutor, when you are transformed into a girl again.”
“But—see here!” said Jack Pumpkinhead, with a gasp: “if you become a girl, you can’t be my dear father any more!”
“No,” answered Tip, laughing in spite of his anxiety. “and I shall not be sorry to escape the relationship.” Then he added, hesitatingly, as he turned to Glinda: “I might try it for awhile,-just to see how it seems, you know. But if I don’t like being a girl you must promise to change me into a boy again.”
[Line-Art Drawing]
“Really,” said the Sorceress, “that is beyond my magic. I never deal in transformations, for they are not honest, and no respectable sorceress likes to make things appear to be what they are not. Only unscrupulous witches use the art, and therefore I must ask Mombi to effect your release from her charm, and restore you to your proper form. It will be the last opportunity she will have to practice magic.”
Now that the truth about Princes Ozma had been discovered, Mombi did not care what became of Tip; but she feared Glinda’s anger, and the boy generously promised to provide for Mombi in her old age if he became the ruler of the Emerald City. So the Witch consented to effect the transformation, and preparations for the event were at once made.
Glinda ordered her own royal couch to be placed in the center of the tent. It was piled high with cushions covered with rose-colored silk, and from a golden railing above hung many folds of pink gossamer, completely concealing the interior of the couch.
The first act of the Witch was to make the boy drink a potion which quickly sent him into a deep and dreamless sleep. Then the Tin Woodman and the Woggle-Bug bore him gently to the couch, placed him upon the soft cushions, and drew the gossamer hangings to shut him from all earthly view.
The Witch squatted upon the ground and kindled a tiny fire of dried herbs, which she drew from her bosom. When the blaze shot up and burned clearly old Mombi scattered a handful of magical powder over the fire, which straightway gave off a rich violet vapor, filling all the tent with its fragrance and forcing the Saw-Horse to sneeze—although he had been warned to keep quiet.
[Full page line-art drawing: MOMBI AT HER MAGICAL INCANTATIONS.]
Then, while the others watched her curiously, the hag chanted a rhythmical verse in words which no one understood, and bent her lean body seven times back and forth over the fire. And now the incantation seemed complete, for the Witch stood upright and cried the one word “Yeowa!” in a loud voice.
The vapor floated away; the atmosphere became, clear again; a whiff of fresh air filled the tent, and the pink curtains of the couch trembled slightly, as if stirred from within.
Glinda walked to the canopy and parted the silken hangings. Then she bent over the cushions, reached out her hand, and from the couch arose the form of a young girl, fresh and beautiful as a May morning. Her eyes sparkled as two diamonds, and her lips were tinted like a tourmaline. All adown her back floated tresses of ruddy gold, with a slender jeweled circlet confining them at the brow. Her robes of silken gauze floated around her like a cloud, and dainty satin slippers shod her feet.
At this exquisite vision Tip’s old comrades stared in wonder for the space of a full minute, and then every head bent low in honest admiration of the lovely Princess Ozma. The girl herself cast one look into Glinda’s bright face, which glowed with pleasure and satisfaction, and then turned upon the others. Speaking the words with sweet diffidence, she said:
“I hope none of you will care less for me than you did before. I’m just the same Tip, you know; only—only—”
“Only you’re different!” said the Pumpkinhead; and everyone thought it was the wisest speech he had ever made.
[Line-Art Drawing]
[Full page line-art drawing.]
 
The Riches of Content
When the wonderful tidings reached the ears of Queen Jinjur—how Mombi the Witch had been captured; how she had confessed her crime to Glinda; and how the long-lost Princess Ozma had been discovered in no less a personage than the boy Tip—she wept real tears of grief and despair.
“To think,” she moaned, “that after having ruled as Queen, and lived in a palace, I must go back to scrubbing floors and churning butter again! It is too horrible to think of! I will never consent!”
So when her soldiers, who spent most of their time making fudge in the palace kitchens, counseled Jinjur to resist, she listened to their foolish prattle and sent a sharp defiance to Glinda the Good and the Princess Ozma. The result was a declaration of war, and the very next day Glinda marched upon the Emerald City with pennants flying and bands playing, and a forest of shining spears, sparkling brightly beneath the sun’s rays.
But when it came to the walls this brave assembly made a sudden halt; for Jinjur had closed and barred every gateway, and the walls of the Emerald City were builded high and thick with many blocks of green marble. Finding her advance thus baffled, Glinda bent her brows in deep thought, while the Woggle-Bug said, in his most positive tone:
“We must lay siege to the city, and starve it into submission. It is the only thing we can do.”
“Not so,” answered the Scarecrow. “We still have the Gump, and the Gump can still fly”
The Sorceress turned quickly at this speech, and her face now wore a bright smile.
“You are right,” she exclaimed, “and certainly have reason to be proud of your brains. Let us go to the Gump at once!”
So they passed through the ranks of the army until they came to the place, near the Scarecrow’s tent, where the Gump lay. Glinda and Princess Ozma mounted first, and sat upon the sofas. Then the Scarecrow and his friends climbed aboard, and still there was room for a Captain and three soldiers, which Glinda considered sufficient for a guard.
[Line-Art Drawing]
Now, at a word from the Princess, the queer Thing they had called the Gump flopped its palm-leaf wings and rose into the air, carrying the party of adventurers high above the walls. They hovered over the palace, and soon perceived Jinjur reclining in a hammock in the courtyard, where she was comfortably reading a novel with a green cover and eating green chocolates, confident that the walls would protect her from her enemies. Obeying a quick command, the Gump alighted safely in this very courtyard, and before Jinjur had time to do more than scream, the Captain and three soldiers leaped out and made the former Queen a prisoner, locking strong chains upon both her wrists.
That act really ended the war; for the Army of Revolt submitted as soon as they knew Jinjur to be a captive, and the Captain marched in safety through the streets and up to the gates of the city, which she threw wide open. Then the bands played their most stirring music while Glinda’s army marched into the city, and heralds proclaimed the conquest of the audacious Jinjur and the accession of the beautiful Princess Ozma to the throne of her royal ancestors.
[Line-Art Drawing]
At once the men of the Emerald City cast off their aprons. And it is said that the women were so tired eating of their husbands’ cooking that they all hailed the conquest of Jinjur with Joy. Certain it is that, rushing one and all to the kitchens of their houses, the good wives prepared so delicious a feast for the weary men that harmony was immediately restored in every family.
Ozma’s first act was to oblige the Army of Revolt to return to her every emerald or other gem stolen from the public streets and buildings; and so great was the number of precious stones picked from their settings by these vain girls, that every one of the royal jewelers worked steadily for more than a month to replace them in their settings.
Meanwhile the Army of Revolt was disbanded and the girls sent home to their mothers. On promise of good behavior Jinjur was likewise released.
Ozma made the loveliest Queen the Emerald City had ever known; and, although she was so young and inexperienced, she ruled her people with wisdom and Justice. For Glinda gave her good advice on all occasions; and the Woggle-Bug, who was appointed to the important post of Public Educator, was quite helpful to Ozma when her royal duties grew perplexing.
The girl, in her gratitude to the Gump for its services, offered the creature any reward it might name.
“Then,” replied the Gump, “please take me to pieces. I did not wish to be brought to life, and I am greatly ashamed of my conglomerate personality. Once I was a monarch of the forest, as my antlers fully prove; but now, in my present upholstered condition of servitude, I am compelled to fly through the air—my legs being of no use to me whatever. Therefore I beg to be dispersed.”
So Ozma ordered the Gump taken apart. The antlered head was again hung over the mantle-piece in the hall, and the sofas were untied and placed in the reception parlors. The broom tail resumed its accustomed duties in the kitchen, and finally, the Scarecrow replaced all the clotheslines and ropes on the pegs from which he had taken them on the eventful day when the Thing was constructed.
You might think that was the end of the Gump; and so it was, as a flying-machine. But the head over the mantle-piece continued to talk whenever it took a notion to do so, and it frequently startled, with its abrupt questions, the people who waited in the hall for an audience with the Queen.
The Saw-Horse, being Ozma’s personal property, was tenderly cared for; and often she rode the queer creature along the streets of the Emerald City. She had its wooden legs shod with gold, to keep them from wearing out, and the tinkle of these golden shoes upon the pavement always filled the Queen’s subjects with awe as they thought upon this evidence of her magical powers.
“The Wonderful Wizard was never so wonderful as Queen Ozma,” the people said to one another, in whispers; “for he claimed to do many things he could not do; whereas our new Queen does many things no one would ever expect her to accomplish.”
Jack Pumpkinhead remained with Ozma to the end of his days; and he did not spoil as soon as he had feared, although he always remained as stupid as ever. The Woggle-Bug tried to teach him several arts and sciences; but Jack was so poor a student that any attempt to educate him was soon abandoned.
After Glinda’s army had marched back home, and peace was restored to the Emerald City, the Tin Woodman announced his intention to return to his own Kingdom of the Winkies.
“It isn’t a very big Kingdom,” said he to Ozma, “but for that very reason it is easier to rule; and I have called myself an Emperor because I am an Absolute Monarch, and no one interferes in any way with my conduct of public or personal affairs. When I get home I shall have a new coat of nickel plate; for I have become somewhat marred and scratched lately; and then I shall be glad to have you pay me a visit.”
“Thank you,” replied Ozma. “Some day I may accept the invitation. But what is to become of the Scarecrow?”
“I shall return with my friend the Tin Woodman,” said the stuffed one, seriously. “We have decided never to be parted in the future.”
“And I have made the Scarecrow my Royal Treasurer,” explained the Tin Woodman. “For it has occurred to me that it is a good thing to have a Royal Treasurer who is made of money. What do you think?”
“I think,” said the little Queen, smiling, “that your friend must be the richest man in all the world.”
“I am,” returned the Scarecrow. “but not on account of my money. For I consider brains far superior to money, in every way. You may have noticed that if one has money without brains, he cannot use it to advantage; but if one has brains without money, they will enable him to live comfortably to the end of his days.”
“At the same time,” declared the Tin Woodman, “you must acknowledge that a good heart is a thing that brains can not create, and that money can not buy. Perhaps, after all, it is I who am the richest man in all the world.”
“You are both rich, my friends,” said Ozma, gently; “and your riches are the only riches worth having—the riches of content!”
 
The End


The Dayboy and the Night Girl

August 16, 2009

I. Watho

THERE was once a witch who desired to know everything. But the wiser a witch is, the harder she knocks her head against the wall when she comes to it. Her name was Watho, and she had a wolf in her mind. She cared for nothing in itself — only for knowing it. She was not naturally cruel, but the wolf had made her cruel.

She was tall and graceful, with a white skin, red hair, and black eyes, which had a red fire in them. She was straight and strong, but now and then would fall bent together, shudder, and sit for a moment with her head turned over her shoulder, as if the wolf had got out of her mind onto her back.
II. Aurora

THIS witch got two ladies to visit her. One of them belonged to the court, and her husband had been sent on a far and difficult embassy. The other was a young widow whose husband had lately died, and who had since lost her sight. Watho lodged them in different parts of her castle, and they did not know of each other’s existence.

The castle stood on the side of a hill sloping gently down into a arrow valley, in which was a river with a pebbly channel and a continual song. The garden went down to the bank of the river, enclosed by high walls, which crossed the river and there stopped. Each wall had a double row of battlements, and between the rows was a narrow walk.

In the topmost story of the castle, the Lady Aurora occupied a spacious apartment of several large rooms looking southward. The windows projected oriel-wise over the garden below, and there was a splendid view from them both up and down and across the river. The opposite side of the valley was steep, but not very high. Far away snowpeaks were visible. These rooms Aurora seldom left, but their airy spaces, the brilliant landscape and sky, the plentiful sunlight, the musical instruments, books, pictures, curiosities, with the company of Watho, who made herself charming, precluded all dullness. She had venison and feathered game to eat, milk and pale sunny sparkling wine to drink.

She had hair of the yellow gold, waved and rippled; her skin was fair, not white like Watho’s, and her eyes were of the blue of the heavens when bluest; her features were delicate but strong, her mouth large and finely curved, and haunted with smiles.
III. Vesper

BEHIND the castle the hill rose abruptly; the northeastern tower, indeed, was in contact with the rock and communicated with the interior of it. For in the rock was a series of chambers, known only to Watho and the one servant whom she trusted, called Falca. Some former owner had constructed these chambers after the tomb of an Egyptian king, and probably with the same design, for in the center of one of them stood what could only be a sarcophagus, but that and others were walled off. The sides and roofs of them were carved in low relief, and curiously painted. Here the witch lodged the blind lady, whose name was Vesper. Her eyes were black, with long black lashes; her skin had a look of darkened silver, but was of purest tint and grain; her hair was black and fine and straight flowing; her features were exquisitely formed, and if less beautiful yet more lovely from sadness; she always looked as if she wanted to lie down and not rise again. She did not know she was lodged in a tomb, though now and then she wondered why she never touched a window. There were many couches, covered with richest silk, and soft as her own cheek, for her to lie upon; and the carpets were so thick, she might have cast herself down anywhere — as befitted a tomb. The place was dry and warm, and cunningly pierced for air, so that it was always fresh, and lacked only sunlight. There the witch fed her upon milk, and wine dark as a carbuncle, and pomegranates, and purple grapes, and birds that dwell in marshy places; and she played to her mournful tunes, and caused wailful violins to attend her, and told her sad tales, thus holding her ever in an atmosphere of sweet sorrow.
IV. Photogen

WATHO at length had her desire, for witches often get what they want: a splendid boy was born to the fair Aurora. Just as the sun rose, he opened his eyes. Watho carried him immediately to a distant part of the castle, and persuaded the mother that he never cried but once, dying the moment he was born. Overcome with grief, Aurora left the castle as soon as she was able, and Watho never invited her again.

And now the witch’s care was that the child should not know darkness. Persistently she trained him until at last he never slept during the day and never woke during the night. She never let him see anything black, and even kept all dull colors out of his way. Never, if she could help it, would she let a shadow fall upon him, watching against shadows as if they had been live things that would hurt him. All day he basked in the full splendor of the sun, in the same large rooms his mother had occupied. Watho used him to the sun, until he could bear more of it than any dark-blooded African. In the hottest of every day, she stripped him and laid him in it, that he might ripen like a peach; and the boy rejoiced in it, and would resist being dressed again. She brought all her knowledge to bear on making his muscles strong and elastic and swiftly responsive — that his soul, she said laughingly, might sit in every fibre, be all in every part, and awake the moment of call. His hair was of the red gold, but his eyes grew darker as he grew, until they were as black as Vesper’s. He was the merriest of creatures, always laughing, always loving, for a moment raging, then laughing afresh. Watho called him Photogen.
V. Nycteris

FIVE or six months after the birth of Photogen, the dark lady also gave birth to a baby: in the windowless tomb of a blind mother, in the dead of night, under the feeble rays of a lamp in an alabaster globe, a girl came into the darkness with a wail. And just as she was born for the first time, Vesper was born for the second, and passed into a world as unknown to her as this was to her child — who would have to be born yet again before she could see her mother.

Watho called her Nycteris, and she grew as like Vesper as possible — in all but one particular. She had the same dark skin, dark eyelashes and brows, dark hair, and gentle sad look; but she had just the eyes of Aurora, the mother of Photogen, and if they grew darker as she grew older, it was only a darker blue. Watho, with the help of Falca, took the greatest possible care of her — in every way consistent with her plans, that is, — the main point in which was that she should never see any light but what came from the lamp. Hence her optic nerves, and indeed her whole apparatus for seeing, grew both larger and more sensitive; her eyes, indeed, stopped short only of being too large. Under her dark hair and forehead and eyebrows, they looked like two breaks in a cloudy night-sky, through which peeped the heaven where the stars and no clouds live. She was a sadly dainty little creature. No one in the world except those two was aware of the being of the little bat. Watho trained her to sleep during the day and wake during the night. She taught her music, in which she was herself a proficient, and taught her scarcely anything else.
VI. How Photogen Grew

THE hollow in which the castle of Watho lay was a cleft in a plain rather than a valley among hills, for at the top of its steep sides, both north and south, was a tableland, large and wide. It was covered with rich grass and flowers, with here and there a wood, the outlying colony of a great forest. These grassy plains were the finest hunting grounds in the world. Great herds of small but fierce cattle, with humps and shaggy manes, roved about them, also antelopes and gnus, and the tiny roedeer, while the woods were swarming with wild creatures. The tables of the castle were mainly supplied from them. The chief of Watho’s huntsmen was a fine fellow, and when Photogen began to outgrow the training she could give him, she handed him over to Fargu. He with a will set about teaching him all he knew. He got him pony after pony, larger and larger as he grew, every one less manageable than that which had preceded it, and advanced him from pony to horse, and from horse to horse, until he was equal to anything in that kind which the country produced. In similar fashion he trained him to the use of bow and arrow, substituting every three months a stronger bow and longer arrows; and soon he became, even on horseback, a wonderful archer. He was but fourteen when he killed his first bull, causing jubilation among the huntsmen, and indeed, through all the castle, for there too he was the favorite. Every day, almost as soon as the sun was up, he went out hunting, and would in general be out nearly the whole of the day. But Watho had laid upon Fargu just one commandment, namely, that Photogen should on no account, whatever the plea, be out until sundown, or so near it as to wake in him the desire of seeing what was going to happen; and this commandment Fargu was anxiously careful not to break; for although he would not have trembled had a whole herd of bulls come down upon him, charging at full speed across the level, and not an arrow left in his quiver, he was more than afraid of his mistress. When she looked at him in a certain way, he felt, he said, as if his heart turned to ashes in his breast, and what ran in his veins was no longer blood, but milk and water. So that, ere long, as Photogen grew older, Fargu began to tremble, for he found it steadily growing harder to restrain him. So full of life was he, as Fargu said to his mistress, much to her content, that he was more like a live thunderbolt than a human being. He did not know what fear was, and that not because he did not know danger; for he had had a severe laceration from the razor-like tusk of a boar — whose spine, however, he had severed with one blow of his hunting knife, before Fargu could reach him with defense. When he would spur his horse into the midst of a herd of bulls, carrying only his bow and his short sword, or shoot an arrow into a herd, and go after it as if to reclaim it for a runaway shaft, arriving in time to follow it with a spear thrust before the wounded animal knew which way to charge, Fargu thought with terror how it would be when he came to know the temptation of the huddle-spot leopards, and the knife-clawed lynxes, with which the forest was haunted. For the boy had been so steeped in the sun, from childhood so saturated with his influence, that he looked upon every danger from a sovereign height of courage. When, therefore, he was approaching his sixteenth year, Fargu ventured to beg Watho that she would lay her commands upon the youth himself, and release him from responsibility for him. One might as soon hold a tawny-maned lion as Photogen, he said. Watho called the youth, and in the presence of Fargu laid her command upon him never to be out when the rim of the sun should touch the horizon, accompanying the prohibition with hints of consequences, none the less awful than they were obscure. Photogen listened respectfully, but, knowing neither the taste of fear nor the temptation of the night, her words were but sounds to him.
VII. How Nycteris Grew

THE little education she intended Nycteris to have, Watho gave her by word of mouth. Not meaning she should have light enough to read by, to leave other reasons unmentioned, she never put a book in her hands. Nycteris, however, saw so much better than Watho imagined, that the light she gave her was quite sufficient, and she managed to coax Falca into teaching her the letters, after which she taught herself to read, and Falca now and then brought her a child’s book. But her chief pleasure was in her instrument. Her very fingers loved it and would wander about its keys like feeding sheep. She was not unhappy. She knew nothing of the world except the tomb in which she dwelt, and had some pleasure in everything she did. But she desired, nevertheless, something more or different. She did not know what it was, and the nearest she could come to expressing it to herself was — that she wanted more room. Watho and Falca would go from her beyond the shine of the lamp, and come again; therefore surely there must be more room somewhere. As often as she was left alone, she would fall to poring over the colored bas-reliefs on the walls. These were intended to represent various of the powers of Nature under allegorical similitudes, and as nothing can be made that does not belong to the general scheme, she could not fail at least to imagine a flicker of relationship between some of them, and thus a shadow of the reality of things found its way to her.

There was one thing, however, which moved and taught her more than all the rest — the lamp, namely, that hung from the ceiling, which she always saw alight, though she never saw the flame, only the slight condensation towards the center of the alabaster globe. And besides the operation of the light itself after its kind, the indefiniteness of the globe, and the softness of the light, giving her the feeling as if her eyes could go in and into its whiteness, were somehow also associated with the idea of space and room. She would sit for an hour together gazing up at the lamp, and her heart would swell as she gazed. She would wonder what had hurt her when she found her face wet with tears, and then would wonder how she could have been hurt without knowing it. She never looked thus at the lamp except when she was alone.
VIII. The Lamp

WATHO, having given orders, took it for granted they were obeyed, and that Falca was all night long with Nycteris, whose day it was. But Falca could not get into the habit of sleeping through the day, and would often leave her alone half the night. Then it seemed to Nycteris that the white lamp was watching over her. As it was never permitted to go out — while she was awake at least — Nycteris, except by shutting her eyes, knew less about darkness than she did about light. Also, the lamp being fixed high overhead, and in the center of everything, she did not know much about shadows either. The few there were fell almost entirely on the floor, or kept like mice about the foot of the walls.

Once, when she was thus alone, there came the noise of a far-off rumbling: she had never before heard a sound of which she did not know the origin, and here therefore was a new sign of something beyond these chambers. Then came a trembling, then a shaking; the lamp dropped from the ceiling to the floor with a great crash, and she felt as if both her eyes were hard shut and both her hands over them. She concluded that it was the darkness that had made the rumbling and the shaking, and rushing into the room, had thrown down the lamp. She sat trembling. The noise and the shaking ceased, but the light did not return. The darkness had eaten it up!

Her lamp gone, the desire at once awoke to get out of her prison. She scarcely knew what out meant; out of one room into another, where there was not even a dividing door, only an open arch, was all she knew of the world. But suddenly she remembered that she had heard Falca speak of the lamp going out: this must be what she had meant? And if the lamp had gone out, where had it gone? Surely where Falca went, and like her it would come again. But she could not wait. The desire to go out grew irresistible. She must follow her beautiful lamp! She must find it! She must see what it was about!

Now, there was a curtain covering a recess in the wall, where some of her toys and gymnastic things were kept; and from behind that curtain Watho and Falca always appeared, and behind it they vanished. How they came out of solid wall, she had not an idea, all up to the wall was open space, and all beyond it seemed wall; but clearly the first and only thing she could do was to feel her way behind the curtain. It was so dark that a cat could not have caught the largest of mice. Nycteris could see better than any cat, but now her great eyes were not of the smallest use to her. As she went she trod upon a piece of the broken lamp. She had never worn shoes or stockings, and the fragment, though, being of soft alabaster, it did not cut, yet hurt her foot. She did not know what it was, but as it had not been there before the darkness came, she suspected that it had to do with the lamp. She kneeled therefore, and searched with her hands, and bringing two large pieces together, recognized the shape of the lamp. Therefore it flashed upon her that the lamp was dead, that this brokenness was the death of which she had read without understanding, that the darkness had killed the lamp. What then could Falca have meant when she spoke of the lamp going out? There was the lamp — dead indeed, and so changed that she would never have taken it for a lamp, but for the shape! No, it was not the lamp anymore now it was dead, for all that made it a lamp was gone, namely, the bright shining of it. Then it must be the shine, the light, that had gone out! That must be what Falca meant — and it must be somewhere in the other place in the wall. She started afresh after it, and groped her way to the curtain.

Now, she had never in her life tried to get out, and did not know how; but instinctively she began to move her hands about over one of the walls behind the curtain, half expecting them to go into it, as she supposed Watho and Falca did. But the wall repelled her with inexorable hardness, and she turned to the one opposite. In so doing, she set her foot upon an ivory die, and as it met sharply the same spot the broken alabaster had already hurt, she fell forward with her outstretched hands against the wall. Something gave way, and she tumbled out of the cavern.
IX. Out

BUT alas! out was very much like in, for the same enemy, the darkness, was here also. The next moment, however, came a great gladness — a firefly, which had wandered in from the garden. She saw the tiny spark in the distance. With slow pulsing ebb and throb of light, it came pushing itself through the air, drawing nearer and nearer, with that motion which more resembles swimming than flying, and the light seemed the source of its own motion.

“My lamp! my lamp!” cried Nycteris. “It is the shiningness of my lamp, which the cruel darkness drove out. My good lamp has been waiting for me here all the time! It knew I would come after it, and waited to take me with it.”

She followed the firefly, which, like herself, was seeking the way out. If it did not know the way, it was yet light; and, because all light is one, any light may serve to guide to more light. If she was mistaken in thinking it the spirit of her lamp, it was of the same spirit as her lamp and had wings. The gold-green jet-boat, driven by light, went throbbing before her through a long narrow passage. Suddenly it rose higher, and the same moment Nycteris fell upon an ascending stair. She had never seen a stair before, and found going-up a curious sensation. Just as she reached what seemed the top, the firefly ceased to shine, and so disappeared. She was in utter darkness once more. But when we are following the light, even its extinction is a guide. If the firefly had gone on shining, Nycteris would have seen the stair turn and would have gone up to Watho’s bedroom; whereas now, feeling straight before her, she came to a latched door, which after a good deal of trying she managed to open — and stood in a maze of wondering perplexity, awe, and delight. What was it? Was it outside of her, or something taking place in her head? Before her was a very long and very narrow passage, broken up she could not tell how, and spreading out above and on all sides to an infinite height and breadth and distance — as if space itself were growing out of a trough. It was brighter than her rooms had ever been — brighter than if six alabaster lamps had been burning in them. There was a quantity of strange streaking and mottling about it, very different from the shapes on her walls. She was in a dream of pleasant perplexity, of delightful bewilderment. She could not tell whether she was upon her feet or drifting about like the firefly, driven by the pulses of an inward bliss. But she knew little as yet of her inheritance. Unconsciously, she took one step forward from the threshold, and the girl who had been from her very birth a troglodyte stood in the ravishing glory of a southern night, lit by a perfect moon — not the moon of our northern clime, but a moon like silver glowing in a furnace — a moon one could see to be a globe — not far off, a mere flat disk on the face of the blue, but hanging down halfway, and looking as if one could see all around it by a mere bending of the neck.

“It is my lamp,” she said, and stood dumb with parted lips. She looked and felt as if she had been standing there in silent ecstasy from the beginning.

“No, it is not my lamp,” she said after a while; “it is the mother of all the lamps.”

And with that she fell on her knees and spread out her hands to the moon. She could not in the least have told what was in her mind, but the action was in reality just a begging of the moon to be what she was — that precise incredible splendor hung in the far-off roof, that very glory essential to the being of poor girls born and bred in caverns. It was a resurrection — nay, a birth itself, to Nycteris. What the vast blue sky, studded with tiny sparks like the heads of diamond nails, could be; what the moon, looking so absolutely content with light — why, she knew less about them than you and I! but the greatest of astronomers might envy the rapture of such a first impression at the age of sixteen. Immeasurably imperfect it was, but false the impression could not be, for she saw with the eyes made for seeing, and saw indeed what many men are too wise to see.

As she knelt, something softly flapped her, embraced her, stroked her, fondled her. She rose to her feet but saw nothing, did not know what it was. It was likest a woman’s breath. For she knew nothing of the air even, had never breathed the still, newborn freshness of the world. Her breath had come to her only through long passages and spirals in the rock. Still less did she know of the air alive with motion — of that thrice-blessed thing, the wind of a summer night. It was like a spiritual wine, filling her whole being with an intoxication of purest joy. To breathe was a perfect existence. It seemed to her the light itself she drew into her lungs. Possessed by the power of the gorgeous night, she seemed at one and the same moment annihilated and glorified.

She was in the open passage or gallery that ran around the top of the garden walls, between the cleft battlements, but she did not once look down to see what lay beneath. Her soul was drawn to the vault above her with its lamp and its endless room. At last she burst into tears, and her heart was relieved, as the night itself is relieved by its lightning and rain.

And now she grew thoughtful. She must hoard this splendor! What a little ignorance her jailers had made of her! Life was a mighty bliss, and they had scraped hers to the bare bone! They must not know that she knew. She must hide her knowledge — hide it even from her own eyes, keeping it close in her bosom, content to know that she had it, even when she could not brood on its presence, feasting her eyes with its glory. She turned from the vision, therefore, with a sigh of utter bliss, and with soft quiet steps and groping hands stole back into the darkness of the rock. What was darkness or the laziness of Time’s feet to one who had seen what she had that night seen? She was lifted above all weariness — above all wrong.

When Falca entered, she uttered a cry of terror. But Nycteris called to her not to be afraid, and told her how there had come a rumbling and shaking, and the lamp had fallen. Then Falca went and told her mistress, and within an hour a new globe hung in the place of the old one. Nycteris thought it did not look so bright and clear as the former, but she made no lamentation over the change; she was far too rich to heed it. For now, prisoner as she knew herself, her heart was full of glory and gladness; at times she had to hold herself from jumping up, and going dancing and singing about the room. When she slept, instead of dull dreams, she had splendid visions. There were times, it is true, when she became restless, and impatient to look upon her riches, but then she would reason with herself, saying, “What does it matter if I sit here for ages with my poor pale lamp, when out there a lamp is burning at which ten thousand little lamps are glowing with wonder?”

She never doubted she had looked upon the day and the sun, of which she had read; and always when she read of the day and the sun, she had the night and the moon in her mind; and when she read of the night and the moon, she thought only of the cave and the lamp that hung there.
X. The Great Lamp

IT was some time before she had a second opportunity of going out, for Falca since the fall of the lamp had been a little more careful, and seldom left her for long. But one night, having a little headache, Nycteris lay down upon her bed, and was lying with her eyes closed, when she heard Falca come to her, and felt she was bending over her. Disinclined to talk, she did not open her eyes, and lay quite still. Satisfied that she was asleep, Falca left her, moving so softly that her very caution made Nycteris open her eyes and look after her — just in time to see her vanish — through a picture, as it seemed, that hung on the wall a long way from the usual place of issue. She jumped up, her headache forgotten, and ran in the opposite direction; got out, groped her way to the stair, climbed, and reached the top of the wall. — Alas! the great room was not so light as the little one she had left! Why? — Sorrow of sorrows! the great lamp was gone! Had its globe fallen? and its lovely light gone out upon great wings, a resplendent firefly, oaring itself through a yet grander and lovelier room? She looked down to see if it lay anywhere broken to pieces on the carpet below; but she could not even see the carpet. But surely nothing very dreadful could have happened — no rumbling or shaking; for there were all the little lamps shining brighter than before, not one of them looking as if any unusual matter had befallen. What if each of those little lamps was growing into a big lamp, and after being a big lamp for a while, had to go out and grow a bigger lamp still — out there, beyond this out? — Ah! here was the living thing that could not be seen, come to her again — bigger tonight! with such loving kisses, and such liquid strokings of her cheeks and forehead, gently tossing her hair, and delicately toying with it! But it ceased, and all was still. Had it gone out? What would happen next? Perhaps the little lamps had not to grow great lamps, but to fall one by one and go out first? — With that came from below a sweet scent, then another, and another. Ah, how delicious! Perhaps they were all coming to her only on their way out after the great lamp! — Then came the music of the river, which she had been too absorbed in the sky to note the first time. What was it? Alas! alas! another sweet living thing on its way out. They were all marching slowly out in long lovely file, one after the other, each taking its leave of her as it passed! It must be so: here were more and more sweet sounds, following and fading! The whole of the Out was going out again; it was all going after the great lovely lamp! She would be left the only creature in the solitary day! Was there nobody to hang up a new lamp for the old one, and keep the creatures from going? — She crept back to her rock very sad. She tried to comfort herself by saying that anyhow there would be room out there; but as she said it she shuddered at the thought of empty room.

When next she succeeded in getting out, a half-moon hung in the east: a new lamp had come, she thought, and all would be well.

It would be endless to describe the phases of feeling through which Nycteris passed, more numerous and delicate than those of a thousand changing moons. A fresh bliss bloomed in her soul with every varying aspect of infinite nature. Ere long she began to suspect that the new moon was the old moon, gone out and come in again like herself; also that, unlike herself, it wasted and grew again; that it was indeed a live thing, subject like herself to caverns, and keepers, and solitudes, escaping and shining when it could. Was it a prison like hers it was shut in? and did it grow dark when the lamp left it? Where could be the way into it? — With that, first she began to look below, as well as above and around her; and then first noted the tops of the trees between her and the floor. There were palms with their red-fingered hands full of fruit; eucalyptus trees crowded with little boxes of powder puffs; oleanders with their half-caste roses; and orange trees with their clouds of young silver stars and their aged balls of gold. Her eyes could see colors invisible to ours in the moonlight, and all these she could distinguish well, though at first she took them for the shapes and colors of the carpet of the great room. She longed to get down among them, now she saw they were real creatures, but she did not know how. She went along the whole length of the wall to the end that crossed the river, but found no way of going down. Above the river she stopped to gaze with awe upon the rushing water. She knew nothing of water but from what she drank and what she bathed in; and as the moon shone on the dark, swift stream, singing lustily as it flowed, she did not doubt the river was alive, a swift rushing serpent of life, going — out? — whither? And then she wondered if what was brought into her rooms had been killed that she might drink it, and have her bath in it.

Once when she stepped out upon the wall, it was into the midst of a fierce wind. The trees were all roaring. Great clouds were rushing along the skies and tumbling over the little lamps: the great lamp had not come yet. All was in tumult. The wind seized her garments and hair and shook them as if it would tear them from her. What could she have done to make the gentle creature so angry? Or was this another creature altogether — of the same kind, but hugely bigger, and of a very different temper and behavior? But the whole place was angry! Or was it that the creatures dwelling in it, the wind, and the trees, and the clouds, and the river, had all quarreled, each with all the rest? Would the whole come to confusion and disorder? But as she gazed wondering and disquieted, the moon, larger than ever she had seen her, came lifting herself above the horizon to look, broad and red, as if she, too, were swollen with anger that she had been roused from her rest by their noise, and compelled to hurry up to see what her children were about, thus rioting in her absence, lest they should rack the whole frame of things. And as she rose, the loud wind grew quieter and scolded less fiercely, the trees grew stiller and moaned with a lower complaint, and the clouds hunted and hurled themselves less wildly across the sky. And as if she were pleased that her children obeyed her very presence, the moon grew smaller as she ascended the heavenly stair; her puffed cheeks sank, her complexion grew clearer, and a sweet smile spread over her countenance, as peacefully she rose and rose. But there was treason and rebellion in her court; for ere she reached the top of her great stairs, the clouds had assembled, forgetting their late wars, and very still they were as they laid their heads together and conspired. Then combining, and lying silently in wait until she came near, they threw themselves upon her and swallowed her up. Down from the roof came spots of wet, faster and faster, and they wetted the cheeks of Nycteris; and what could they be but the tears of the moon, crying because her children were smothering her? Nycteris wept too and, not knowing what to think, stole back in dismay to her room.

The next time, she came out in fear and trembling. There was the moon still! away in the west — poor, indeed, and old, and looking dreadfully worn, as if all the wild beasts in the sky had been gnawing at her — but there she was, alive still, and able to shine!
XI. The Sunset.

KNOWING nothing of darkness, or stars, or moon, Photogen spent his days in hunting. On a great white horse he swept over the grassy plains, glorying in the sun, fighting the wind, and killing the buffaloes.

One morning, when he happened to be on the ground a little earlier than usual, and before his attendants, he caught sight of an animal unknown to him, stealing from a hollow into which the sunrays had not yet reached. Like a swift shadow it sped over the grass, slinking southward to the forest. He gave chase, noted the body of a buffalo it had half eaten, and pursued it the harder. But with great leaps and bounds the creature shot farther and farther ahead of him, and vanished. Turning therefore defeated, he met Fargu, who had been following him as fast as his horse could carry him.

“What animal was that, Fargu?” he asked. “How he did run!”

Fargu answered he might be a leopard, but he rather thought from his pace and look that he was a young lion.

“What a coward he must be!” said Photogen.

“Don’t be too sure of that,” rejoined Fargu. “He is one of the creatures the sun makes umcomfortable. As soon as the sun is down, he will be brave enough.”

He had scarcely said it, when he repented; nor did he regret it the less when he found that Photogen made no reply. But alas! said was said.

“Then,” said Photogen to himself, “that contemptible beast is one of the terrors of sundown, of which Madame Watho spoke!”

He hunted all day, but not with his usual spirit. He did not ride so hard, and did not kill one buffalo. Fargu to his dismay observed also that he took every pretext for moving farther south, nearer to the forest. But all at once, the sun now sinking in the west, he seemed to change his mind, for he turned his horse’s head and rode home so fast that the rest could not keep him in sight. When they arrived, they found his horse in the stable and concluded that he had gone into the castle. But he had in truth set out again by the back of it. Crossing the river a good way up the valley, he reascended to the ground they had left, and just before sunset reached the skirts of the forest.

The level orb shone straight in between the bare stems, and saying to himself he could not fail to find the beast, he rushed into the wood. But even as he entered, he turned and looked to the west. The rim of the red was touching the horizon, all jagged with broken hills. “Now,” said Photogen, “we shall see”; but he said it in the face of a darkness he had not proved. The moment the sun began to sink among the spikes and saw edges, with a kind of sudden flap at his heart a fear inexplicable laid hold of the youth; and as he had never felt anything of the kind before, the very fear itself terrified him. As the sun sank, it rose like the shadow of the world and grew deeper and darker. He could not even think what it might be, so utterly did it enfeeble him. When the last flaming scimitar edge of the sun went out like a lamp, his horror seemed to blossom into very madness. Like the closing lids of an eye — for there was no twilight, and this night no moon — the terror and the darkness rushed together, and he knew them for one. He was no longer the man he had known, or rather thought himself. The courage he had had was in no sense his own — he had only had courage, not been courageous; it had left him, and he could scarcely stand — certainly not stand straight, for not one of his joints could he make stiff or keep from trembling. He was but a spark of the sun, in himself nothing.

The beast was behind him — stealing upon him! He turned. All was dark in the wood, but to his fancy the darkness here and there broke into pairs of green eyes, and he had not the power even to raise his bow hand from his side. In the strength of despair he strove to rouse courage enough — not to fight — that he did not even desire — but to run. Courage to flee home was all he could ever imagine, and it would not come. But what he had not was ignominiously given him. A cry in the wood, half a screech, half a growl, sent him running like a boar-wounded cur. It was not even himself that ran, it was the fear that had come alive in his legs; he did not know that they moved. But as he ran he grew able to run — gained courage at least to be a coward. The stars gave a little light. Over the grass he sped, and nothing followed him. “How fallen, how changed,” from the youth who had climbed the hill as the sun went down! A mere contempt to himself, the self that contemned was a coward with the self it contemned! There lay the shapeless black of a buffalo, humped upon the grass. He made a wide circuit and swept on like a shadow driven in the wind. For the wind had arisen, and added to his terror: it blew from behind him. He reached the brow of the valley and shot down the steep descent like a falling star. Instantly the whole upper country behind him arose and pursued him! The wind came howling after him, filled with screams, shrieks, yells, roars, laughter, and chattering, as if all the animals of the forest were careering with it. In his ears was a trampling rush, the thunder of the hoofs of the cattle, in career from every quarter of the wide plains to the brow of the hill above him. He fled straight for the castle, scarcely with breath enough to pant.

As he reached the bottom of the valley, the moon peered up over its edge. He had never seen the moon before — except in the daytime, when he had taken her for a thin bright cloud. She was a fresh terror to him — so ghostly! so ghastly! so gruesome! — so knowing as she looked over the top of her garden wall upon the world outside! That was the night itself! the darkness alive — and after him! the horror of horrors coming down the sky to curdle his blood and turn his brain to a cinder! He gave a sob and made straight for the river, where it ran between the two walls, at the bottom of the garden. He plunged in, struggled through, clambered up the bank, and fell senseless on the grass.
XII. The Garden

ALTHOUGH Nycteris took care not to stay out long at a time, and used every precaution, she could hardly have escaped discovery so long had it not been that the strange attacks to which Watho was subject had been more frequent of late, and had at last settled into an illness which kept her to her bed. But whether from an excess of caution or from suspicion, Falca, having now to be much with her mistress both day and night, took it at length into her head to fasten the door as often as she went by her usual place of exit, so that one night, when Nycteris pushed, she found, to her surprise and dismay, that the wall pushed her again, and would not let her through; nor with all her searching could she discover wherein lay the cause of the change. Then first she felt the pressure of her prison walls, and turning, half in despair, groped her way to the picture where she had once seen Falca disappear. There she soon found the spot by pressing upon which the wall yielded. It let her through into a sort of cellar, where was a glimmer of light from a sky whose blue was paled by the moon. From the cellar she got into a long passage, into which the moon was shining, and came to a door. She managed to open it, and to her great joy found herself in the other place, not on the top of the wall, however, but in the garden she had longed to enter. Noiseless as a fluffy moth she flitted away into the covert of the trees and shrubs, her bare feet welcomed by the softest of carpets, which, by the very touch, her feet knew to be alive, whence it came that it was so sweet and friendly to them. A soft little wind was out among the trees, running now here, now there, like a child that had got its will. She went dancing over the grass, looking behind her at her shadow as she went. At first she had taken it for a little black creature that made game of her, but when she perceived that it was only where she kept the moon away, and that every tree, however great and grand a creature, had also one of these strange attendants, she soon learned not to mind it, and by and by it became the source of as much amusement to her as to any kitten its tail. It was long before she was quite at home with the trees, however. At one time they seemed to disapprove of her; at another not even to know she was there, and to be altogether taken up with their own business. Suddenly, as she went from one to another of them, looking up with awe at the murmuring mystery of their branches and leaves, she spied one a little way off, which was very different from all the rest. It was white, and dark, and sparkling, and spread like a palm — a small slender palm, without much head; and it grew very fast, and sang as it grew. But it never grew any bigger, for just as fast as she could see it growing, it kept falling to pieces. When she got close to it, she discovered that it was a water tree — made of just such water as she washed with — only it was alive of course, like the river — a different sort of water from that, doubtless, seeing the one crept swiftly along the floor, and the other shot straight up, and fell, and swallowed itself, and rose again. She put her feet into the marble basin, which was the flowerpot in which it grew. It was full of real water, living and cool — so nice, for the night was hot!

But the flowers! ah, the flowers! she was friends with them from the very first. What wonderful creatures they were! — and so kind and beautiful — always sending out such colors and such scents — red scent, and white scent, and yellow scent — for the other creatures! The one that was invisible and everywhere took such a quantity of their scents, and carried it away! yet they did not seem to mind. It was their talk, to show they were alive, and not painted like those on the walls of her rooms, and on the carpets.

She wandered along down the garden, until she reached the river. Unable then to get any further — for she was a little afraid, and justly, of the swift watery serpent — she dropped on the grassy bank, dipped her feet in the water, and felt it running and pushing against them. For a long time she sat thus, and her bliss seemed complete, as she gazed at the river and watched the broken picture of the great lamp overhead, moving up one side of the roof, to go down the other.
XIII. Something Quite New

A beautiful moth brushed across the great blue eyes of Nycteris. She sprang to her feet to follow it — not in the spirit of the hunter, but of the lover. Her heart — like every heart, if only its fallen sides were cleared away — was an inexhaustible fountain of love: she loved everything she saw. But as she followed the moth, she caught sight of something lying on the bank of the river, and not yet having learned to be afraid of anything, ran straight to see what it was. Reaching it, she stood amazed. Another girl like herself! But what a strange-looking girl! — so curiously dressed too! — and not able to move! Was she dead? Filled suddenly with pity, she sat down, lifted Photogen’s head, laid it on her lap, and began stroking his face. Her warm hands brought him to himself. He opened his black eyes, out of which had gone all the fire, and looked up with a strange sound of fear, half moan, half gasp. But when he saw her face, he drew a deep breath and lay motionless — gazing at her: those blue marvels above him, like a better sky, seemed to side with courage and assuage his terror. At length, in a trembling, awed voice, and a half whisper, he said, “Who are you?”

“I am Nycteris,” she answered

“You are a creature of the darkness, and love the night,” he said, his fear beginning to move again.

“I may be a creature of the darkness,” she replied. “I hardly know what you mean. But I do not love the night. I love the day — with all my heart; and I sleep all the night long.”

“How can that be?” said Photogen, rising on his elbow, but dropping his head on her lap again the moment he saw the moon; “– how can it be,” he repeated, “when I see your eyes there — wide awake?”

She only smiled and stroked him, for she did not understand him, and thought he did not know what he was saying.

“Was it a dream then?” resumed Photogen, rubbing his eyes. But with that his memory came clear, and he shuddered and cried, “Oh, horrible! horrible! to be turned all at once into a coward! a shameful, contemptible, disgraceful coward! I am ashamed — ashamed — and so frightened! It is all so frightful!”

“What is so frightful?” asked Nycteris, with a smile like that of a mother to her child waked from a bad dream.

“All, all,” he answered; “all this darkness and the roaring.”

“My dear,” said Nycteris, “there is no roaring. How sensitive you must be! What you hear is only the walking of the water, and the running about of the sweetest of all the creatures. She is invisible, and I call her Everywhere, for she goes through all the other creatures, and comforts them. Now she is amusing herself, and them too, with shaking them and kissing them, and blowing in their faces. Listen: do you call that roaring? You should hear her when she is rather angry though! I don’t know why, but she is sometimes, and then she does roar a little.”

“It is so horribly dark!” said Photogen, who, listening while she spoke, had satisfied himself that there was no roaring.

“Dark!” she echoed. “You should be in my room when an earthquake has killed my lamp. I do not understand. How can you call this dark? Let me see: yes, you have eyes, and big ones, bigger than Madame Watho’s or Falca’s — not so big as mine, I fancy — only I never saw mine. But then — oh, yes! — I know now what is the matter! You can’t see with them, because they are so black. Darkness can’t see, of course. Never mind: I will be your eyes, and teach you to see. Look here — at these lovely white things in the grass, with red sharp points all folded together into one. Oh, I love them so! I could sit looking at them all day, the darlings!”

Photogen looked close at the flowers, and thought he had seen something like them before, but could not make them out. As Nycteris had never seen an open daisy, so had he never seen a closed one.

Thus instinctively Nycteris tried to turn him away from his fear; and the beautiful creature’s strange lovely talk helped not a little to make him forget it.

“You call it dark!” she said again, as if she could not get rid of the absurdity of the idea; “why, I could count every blade of the green hair — I suppose it is what the books call grass — within two yards of me! And just look at the great lamp! It is brighter than usual today, and I can’t think why you should be frightened, or call it dark!”

As she spoke, she went on stroking his cheeks and hair, and trying to comfort him. But oh how miserable he was! and how plainly he looked it! He was on the point of saying that her great lamp was dreadful to him, looking like a witch, walking in the sleep of death; but he was not so ignorant as Nycteris, and knew even in the moonlight that she was a woman, though he had never seen one so young or so lovely before; and while she comforted his fear, her presence made him the more ashamed of it. Besides, not knowing her nature, he might annoy her, and make her leave him to his misery. He lay still therefore, hardly daring to move: all the little life he had seemed to come from her, and if he were to move, she might move: and if she were to leave him, he must weep like a child.

“How did you come here?” asked Nycteris, taking his face between her hands.

“Down the hill,” he answered.

“Where do you sleep?” she asked.

He signed in the direction of the house. She gave a little laugh of delight.

“When you have learned not to be frightened, you will always be wanting to come out with me,” she said.

She thought with herself she would ask her presently, when she had come to herself a little, how she had made her escape, for she must, of course, like herself, have got out of a cave, in which Watho and Falca had been keeping her.

“Look at the lovely colors,” she went on, pointing to a rose bush, on which Photogen could not see a single flower. “They are far more beautiful — are they not? — than any of the colors upon your walls. And then they are alive, and smell so sweet!”

He wished she would not make him keep opening his eyes to look at things he could not see; and every other moment would start and grasp tight hold of her, as some fresh pang of terror shot into him.

“Come, come, dear!” said Nycteris, “you must not go on this way. You must be a brave girl, and –”

“A girl!” shouted Photogen, and started to his feet in wrath. “If you were a man, I should kill you.”

“A man?” repeated Nycteris. “What is that? How could I be that? We are both girls — are we not?”

“No, I am not a girl,” he answered; “– although,” he added, changing his tone, and casting himself on the ground at her feet, “I have given you too good reason to call me one.”

“Oh, I see!” returned Nycteris. “No, of course! — you can’t be a girl: girls are not afraid — without reason. I understand now: it is because you are not a girl that you are so frightened.”

Photogen twisted and writhed upon the grass.

“No, it is not,” he said sulkily; “it is this horrible darkness that creeps into me, goes all through me, into the very marrow of my bones — that is what makes me behave like a girl. If only the sun would rise!”

“The sun! what is it?” cried Nycteris, now in her turn conceiving a vague fear.

Then Photogen broke into a rhapsody, in which he vainly sought to forget his.

“It is the soul, the life, the heart, the glory of the universe,” he said. “The worlds dance like motes in his beams. The heart of man is strong and brave in his light, and when it departs his courage gows from him — goes with the sun, and he becomes such as you see me now.”

“Then that is not the sun?” said Nycteris, thoughtfully, pointing up to the moon.

“That!” cried Photogen, with utter scorn. “I know nothing about that, except that it is ugly and horrible. At best it can be only the ghost of a dead sun. Yes, that is it! That is what makes it look so frightful.”

“No,” said Nycteris, after a long, thoughtful pause; “you must be wrong there. I think the sun is the ghost of a dead moon, and that is how he is so much more splendid as you say. — Is there, then, another big room, where the sun lives in the roof?”

“I do not know what you mean,” replied Photogen. “But you mean to be kind, I know, though you should not call a poor fellow in the dark a girl. If you will let me lie here, with my head in your lap, I should like to sleep. Will you watch me, and take care of me?”

“Yes, that I will,” answered Nycteris, forgetting all her own danger.

So Photogen fell asleep
XIV. The Sun

THERE Nycteris sat, and there the youth lay all night long, in the heart of the great cone-shadow of the earth, like two Pharaohs in one Pyramid. Photogen slept, and slept; and Nycteris sat motionless lest she should wake him, and so betray him to his fear.

The moon rode high in the blue eternity; it was a very triumph of glorious night; the river ran babble-murmuring in deep soft syllables; the fountain kept rushing moonward, and blossoming momently to a great silvery flower, whose petals were forever falling like snow, but with a continuous musical clash, into the bed of its exhaustion beneath; the wind woke, took a run among the trees, went to sleep, and woke again; the daisies slept on their feet at hers, but she did not know they slept; the roses might well seem awake, for their scent filled the air, but in truth they slept also, and the odor was that of their dreams; the oranges hung like gold lamps in the trees, and their silvery flowers were the souls of their yet unembodied children; the scent of the acacia blooms filled the air like the very odor of the moon herself.

At last, unused to the living air, and weary with sitting so still and so long, Nycteris grew drowsy. The air began to grow cool. It was getting near the time when she too was accustomed to sleep. She closed her eyes just a moment, and nodded — opened them suddenly wide, for she had promised to watch.

In that moment a change had come. The moon had got round and was fronting her from the west, and she saw that her face was altered, that she had grown pale, as if she too were wan with fear, and from her lofty place espied a coming terror. The light seemed to be dissolving out of her; she was dying — she was going out! And yet everything around looked strangely clear — clearer than ever she had seen anything before; how could the lamp be shedding more light when she herself had less? Ah, that was just it! See how faint she looked! It was because the light was forsaking her, and spreading itself over the room, that she grew so thin and pale! She was giving up everything! She was melting away from the roof like a bit of sugar in water.

Nycteris was fast growing afraid, and sought refuge with the face upon her lap. How beautiful the creature was! — what to call it she could not think, for it had been angry when she called it what Watho called her. And, wonder upon wonders! now, even in the cold change that was passing upon the great room, the color as of a red rose was rising in the wan cheek. What beautiful yellow hair it was that spread over her lap! What great huge breaths the creature took! And what were those curious things it carried? She had seen them on her walls, she was sure.

Thus she talked to herself while the lamp grew paler and paler, and everything kept growing yet clearer. What could it mean? The lamp was dying — going out into the other place of which the creature in her lap had spoken, to be a sun! But why were the things growing clearer before it was yet a sun? That was the point. Was it her growing into a sun that did it? Yes! yes! it was coming death! She knew it, for it was coming upon her also! She felt it coming! What was she about to grow into? Something beautiful, like the creature in her lap? It might be! Anyhow, it must be death; for all her strength was going out of her, while all around her was growing so light she could not bear it! She must be blind soon! Would she be blind or dead first?

For the sun was rushing up behind her. Photogen woke, lifted his head from her lap, and sprang to his feet. His face was one radiant smile. His heart was full of daring — that of the hunter who will creep into the tiger’s den. Nycteris gave a cry, covered her face with her hands, and pressed her eyelids close. Then blindly she stretched out her arms to Photogen, crying, “Oh, I am so frightened! What is this? It must be death! I don’t wish to die yet. I love this room and the old lamp. I do not want the other place. This is terrible. I want to hide. I want to get into the sweet, soft, dark hands of all the other creatures. Ah me! ah me!”

“What is the matter with you, girl?” said Photogen, with the arrogance of all male creatures until they have been taught by the other kind. He stood looking down upon her over his bow, of which he was examining the string. “There is no fear of anything now, child! It is day. The sun is all but up. Look! he will be above the brow of yon hill in one moment more! Good-bye. Thank you for my night’s lodging. I’m off. Don’t be a goose. If ever I can do anything for you — and all that, you know!”

“Don’t leave me; oh, don’t leave me!” cried Nycteris. “I am dying! I am dying! I can’t move. The light sucks all the strength out of me. And oh, I am so frightened!”

But already Photogen had splashed through the river, holding high his bow that it might not get wet. He rushed across the level and strained up the opposing hill. Hearing no answer, Nycteris removed her hands. Photogen had reached the top, and the same moment the sun rays alighted upon him; the glory of the king of day crowded blazing upon the golden-haired youth. Radiant as Apollo, he stood in mighty strength, a flashing shape in the midst of flame. He fitted a glowing arrow to a gleaming bow. The arrow parted with a keen musical twang of the bowstring, and Photogen, darting after it, vanished with a shout. Up shot Apollo himself, and from his quiver scattered astonishment and exultation. But the brain of poor Nycteris was pierced through and through. She fell down in utter darkness. All around her was a flaming furnace. In despair and feebleness and agony, she crept back, feeling her way with doubt and difficulty and enforced persistence to her cell. When at last the friendly darkness of her chamber folded her about with its cooling and consoling arms, she threw herself on her bed and fell fast asleep. And there she slept on, one alive in a tomb, while Photogen, above in the sun-glory, pursued the buffaloes on the lofty plain, thinking not once of her where she lay dark and forsaken, whose presence had been his refuge, her eyes and her hands his guardians through the night. He was in his glory and his pride; and the darkness and its disgrace had vanished for a time.
XV. The Coward Hero

But no sooner had the sun reached the noonstead, than Photogen began to remember the past night in the shadow of that which was at hand, and to remember it with shame. He had proved himself — and not to himself only, but to a girl as well — a coward! — one bold in the daylight, while there was nothing to fear, but trembling like any slave when the night arrived. There was, there must be, something unfair in it! A spell had been cast upon him! He had eaten, he had drunk something that did not agree with courage! In any case he had been taken unprepared! How was he to know what the going down of the sun would be like? It was no wonder he should have been surprised into terror, seeing it was what it was — in its very nature so terrible! Also, one could not see where danger might be coming from! You might be torn in pieces, carried off, or swallowed up, without even seeing where to strike a blow! Every possible excuse he caught at, eager as a self-lover to lighten his self-contempt. That day he astonished the huntsmen — terrified them with his reckless daring — all to prove to himself he was no coward. But nothing eased his shame. One thing only had hope in it — the resolve to encounter the dark in solemn earnest, now that he knew something of what it was. It was nobler to meet a recognized danger than to rush contemptuously into what seemed nothing — nobler still to encounter a nameless horror. He could conquer fear and wipe out disgrace together. For a marksman and swordsman like him, he said, one with his strength and courage, there was but danger. Defeat there was not. He knew the darkness now, and when it came he would meet it as fearless and cool as now he felt himself. And again he said, “We shall see!”

He stood under the boughs of a great beech as the sun was going down, far away over the jagged hills: before it was half down, he was trembling like one of the leaves behind him in the first sigh of the night wind. The moment the last of the glowing disk vanished, he bounded away in terror to gain the valley, and his fear grew as he ran. Down the side of the hill, an abject creature, he went bounding and rolling and running; fell rather than plunged into the river, and came to himself, as before, lying on the grassy bank in the garden.

But when he opened his eyes, there were no girl-eyes looking down into his; there were only the stars in the waste of the sunless Night — the awful all-enemy he had again dared, but could not encounter. Perhaps the girl was not yet come out of the water! He would try to sleep, for he dared not move, and perhaps when he woke he would find his head on her lap, and the beautiful dark face, with its deep blue eyes, bending over him. But when he woke he found his head on the grass, and although he sprang up with all his courage, such as it was, restored, he did not set out for the chase with such an élan as the day before; and, despite the sun-glory in his heart and veins, his hunting was this day less eager; he ate little, and from the first was thoughtful even to sadness. A second time he was defeated and disgraced! Was his courage nothing more than the play of the sunlight on his brain? Was he a mere ball tossed between the light and the dark? Then what a poor contemptible creature he was! But a third chance lay before him. If he failed the third time, he dared not foreshadow what he must then think of himself! It was bad enough now — but then!

Alas! it went no better. The moment the sun was down, he fled as if from a legion of devils.

Seven times in all, he tried to face the coming night in the strength of the past day, and seven times he failed — failed with such increase of failure, with such a growing sense of ignominy, overwhelming at length all the sunny hours and joining night to night, that, what with misery, self-accusation, and loss of confidence, his daylight courage too began to fade, and at length, from exhaustion, from getting wet, and then lying out of doors all night, and night after night, — worst of all, from the consuming of the deathly fear, and the shame of shame, his sleep forsook him, and on the seventh morning, instead of going to the hunt, he crawled into the castle and went to bed. The grand health, over which the witch had taken such pains, had yielded, and in an hour or two he was moaning and crying out in delirium.
XVI. An Evil Nurse

WATHO was herself ill, as I have said, and was the worse tempered; and besides, it is a peculiarity of witches that what works in others to sympathy works in them to repulsion. Also, Watho had a poor, helpless, rudimentary spleen of a conscience left, just enough to make her uncomfortable, and therefore more wicked. So, when she heard that Photogen was ill, she was angry. Ill, indeed! after all she had done to saturate him with the life of the system, with the solar might itself? He was a wretched failure, the boy! And because he was her failure, she was annoyed with him, began to dislike him, grew to hate him. She looked on him as a painter might upon a picture, or a poet upon a poem, which he had only succeeded in getting into an irrecoverable mess. In the hearts of witches, love and hate lie close together, and often tumble over each other. And whether it was that her failure with Photogen foiled also her plans in regard to Nycteris, or that her illness made her yet more of a devil’s wife, certainly Watho now got sick of the girl too, and hated to know her about the castle.

She was not too ill, however, to go to poor Photogen’s room and torment him. She told him she hated him like a serpent, and hissed like one as she said it, looking very sharp in the nose and chin, and flat in the forehead. Photogen thought she meant to kill him, and hardly ventured to take anything brought him. She ordered every ray of light to be shut out of his room; but by means of this he got a little used to the darkness. She would take one of his arrows, and now tickle him with the feather end of it, now prick him with the point till the blood ran down. What she meant finally I cannot tell, but she brought Photogen speedily to the determination of making his escape from the castle: what he should do then he would think afterwards. Who could tell but he might find his mother somewhere beyond the forest! If it were not for the broad patches of darkness that divided day from day, he would fear nothing!

But now, as he lay helpless in the dark, ever and anon would come dawning through it the face of the lovely creature who on that first awful night nursed him so sweetly: was he never to see her again? If she was, as he had concluded, the nymph of the river, why had she not reappeared? She might have taught him not to fear the night, for plainly she had no fear of it herself! But then, when the day came, she did seem frightened — why was that, seeing there was nothing to be afraid of then? Perhaps one so much at home in the darkness was correspondingly afraid of the light! Then his selfish joy at the rising of the sun, blinding him to her condition, had made him behave to her, in ill return for her kindness, as cruelly as Watho behaved to him! How sweet and dear and lovely she was! If there were wild beasts that came out only at night, and were afraid of the light, why should there not be girls too, made the same way — who could not endure the light, as he could not bear the darkness? If only he could find her again! Ah, how differently he would behave to her! But alas! perhaps the sun had killed her — melted her — burned her up! — dried her up — that was it, if she was the nymph of the river!
XVII. Watho’s Wolf

FROM that dreadful morning Nycteris had never got to be herself again. The sudden light had been almost death to her: and now she lay in the dark with the memory of a terrific sharpness — a something she dared scarcely recall, lest the very thought of it should sting her beyond endurance. But this was as nothing to the pain which the recollection of the rudeness of the shining creature whom she had nursed through his fear caused her; for the moment his suffering passed over to her, and he was free, the first use he made of his returning strength had been to scorn her! She wondered and wondered; it was all beyond her comprehension.

Before long, Watho was plotting evil against her. The witch was like a sick child weary of his toy: she would pull her to pieces and see how she liked it. She would set her in the sun and see her die, like a jelly from the salt ocean cast out on a hot rock. It would be a sight to soothe her wolf-pain. One day, therefore, a little before noon, while Nycteris was in her deepest sleep, she had a darkened litter brought to the door, and in that she made two of her men carry her to the plain above. There they took her out, laid her on the grass, and left her.

Watho watched it all from the top of her high tower, through her telescope; and scarcely was Nycteris left, when she saw her sit up, and the same moment cast herself down again with her face to the ground.

“She’ll have a sunstroke,” said Watho, “and that’ll be the end of her.”

Presently, tormented by a fly, a huge-humped buffalo, with great shaggy mane, came galloping along, straight for where she lay. At the sight of the thing on the grass, he started, swerved yards aside, stopped dead, and then came slowly up, looking malicious. Nycteris lay quite still and never even saw the animal.

“Now she’ll be trodden to death!” said Watho. “That’s the way those creatures do.”

When the buffalo reached her, he sniffed at her all over and went away; then came back and sniffed again: then all at once went off as if a demon had him by the tail.

Next came a gnu, a more dangerous animal still, and did much the same; then a gaunt wild boar. But no creature hurt her, and Watho was angry with the whole creation.

At length, in the shade of her hair, the blue eyes of Nycteris began to come to themselves a little, and the first thing they saw was a comfort. I have told already how she knew the night daisies, each a sharp-pointed little cone with a red tip; and once she had parted the rays of one of them, with trembling fingers, for she was afraid she was dreadfully rude, and perhaps was hurting it; but she did want, she said to herself, to see what secret it carried so carefully hidden; and she found its golden heart. But now, right under her eyes, inside the veil of her hair, in the sweet twilight of whose blackness she could see it perfectly, stood a daisy with its red tip opened wide into a carmine ring, displaying its heart of gold on a platter of silver. She did not at first recognize it as one of those cones come awake, but a moment’s notice revealed what it was. Who then could have been so cruel to the lovely little creature as to force it open like that, and spread it heart-bare to the terrible death-lamp? Whoever it was, it must be the same that had thrown her out there to be burned to death in its fire. But she had her hair, and could hang her head, and make a small sweet night of her own about her! She tried to bend the daisy down and away from the sun, and to make its petals hang about it like her hair, but she could not. Alas! it was burned and dead already! She did not know that it could not yield to her gentle force because it was drinking life, with all the eagerness of life, from what she called the death-lamp. Oh, how the lamp burned her!

But she went on thinking — she did not know how; and by and by began to reflect that, as there was no roof to the room except that in which the great fire went rolling about, the little Red-tip must have seen the lamp a thousand times, and must know it quite well! and it had not killed it! Nay, thinking about farther, she began to ask the question whether this, in which she now saw it, might not be its more perfect condition. For not only now did the whole seem perfect, as indeed it did before, but every part showed its own individual perfection as well, which perfection made it capable of combining with the rest into the higher perfection of a whole. The flower was a lamp itself! The golden heart was the light, and the silver border was the alabaster globe, skillfully broken, and spread wide to let out the glory. Yes: the radiant shape was plainly its perfection! If, then, it was the lamp which had opened it into that shape, the lamp could not be unfriendly to it, but must be of its own kind, seeing it made it perfect! And again, when she thought of it, there was clearly no little resemblance between them. What if the flower then was the little great-grandchild of the lamp and he was loving it all the time? And what if the lamp did not mean to hurt her, only could not help it? The red tips looked as if the flower had some time or other been hurt: what if the lamp was making the best it could of her — opening her out somehow like the flower? She would bear it patiently, and see. But how coarse the color of the grass was! Perhaps, however, her eyes not being made for the bright lamp, she did not see them as they were! Then she remembered how different were the eyes of the creature that was not a girl and was afraid of the darkness! Ah, if the darkness would only come again, all arms, friendly and soft everywhere about her! She would wait and wait, and bear, and be patient.

She lay so still that Watho did not doubt she had fainted. She was pretty sure she would be dead before the night came to revive her.
XVIII. Refuge

FIXING her telescope on the motionless form, that she might see it at once when the morning came, Watho went down from the tower to Photogen’s room. He was much better by this time, and before she left him, he had resolved to leave the castle that very night. The darkness was terrible indeed, but Watho was worse than even the darkness, and he could not escape in the day. As soon, therefore, as the house seemed still, he tightened his belt, hung to it his hunting knife, put a flask of wine and some bread in his pocket, and took his bow and arrows. He got from the house and made his way at once up to the plain. But what with his illness, the terrors of the night, and his dread of the wild beasts, when he got to the level he could not walk a step further, and sat down, thinking it better to die than to live. In spite of his fears, however, sleep contrived to overcome him, and he fell at full length on the soft grass.

He had not slept long when he woke with such a strange sense of comfort and security that he thought the dawn at last must have arrived. But it was dark night about him. And the sky — no, it was not the sky, but the blue eyes of his naiad looking down upon him! Once more he lay with his head in her lap, and all was well, for plainly the girl feared the darkness as little as he the day.

“Thank you,” he said. “You are like live armor to my heart; you keep the fear off me. I have been very ill since then. Did you come up out of the river when you saw me cross?”

“I don’t live in the water,” she answered. “I live under the pale lamp, and I die under the bright one.”

“Ah, yes! I understand now,” he returned. “I would not have behaved as I did last time if I had understood; but I thought you were mocking me; and I am so made that I cannot help being frightened at the darkness. I beg your pardon for leaving you as I did, for, as I say, I did not understand. Now I believe you were really frightened. Were you not?”

“I was, indeed,” answered Nycteris, “and shall be again. But why you should be, I cannot in the least understand. You must know how gentle and sweet the darkness is, how kind and friendly, how soft and velvety! It holds you to its bosom and loves you. A little while ago, I lay faint and dying under your hot lamp. — What is it you call it?”

“The sun,” murmured Photogen. “How I wish he would make haste!”

“Ah! do not wish that. Do not, for my sake, hurry him. I can take care of you from the darkness, but I have no one to take care of me from the light. — As I was telling you, I lay dying in the sun. All at once I drew a deep breath. A cool wind came and ran over my face. I looked up. The torture was gone, for the death-lamp itself was gone. I hope he does not die and grow brighter yet. My terrible headache was all gone, and my sight was come back. I felt as if I were new made. But I did not get up at once, for I was tired still. The grass grew cool about me and turned soft in color. Something wet came upon it, and it was now so pleasant to my feet that I rose and ran about. And when I had been running about a long time, all at once I found you lying, just as I had been lying a little while before. So I sat down beside you to take care of you, till your life — and my death — should come again.”

“How good you are, you beautiful creature! — Why, you forgave me before ever I asked you!” cried Photogen.

Thus they fell a-talking, and he told her what he knew of his history, and she told him what she knew of hers, and they agreed they must get away from Watho as far as ever they could.

“And we must set out at once,” said Nycteris.

“The moment the morning comes,” returned Photogen.

“We must not wait for the morning,” said Nycteris, “for then I shall not be able to move, and what would you do the next night? Besides, Watho sees best in the daytime. Indeed, you must come now, Photogen. — You must.”

“I cannot; I dare not,” said Photogen. “I cannot move. If I but lift my head from your lap, the very sickness of terror seizes me.”

“I shall be with you,” said Nycteris, soothingly. “I will take care of you till your dreadful sun comes, and then you may leave me, and go away as fast as you can. Only please put me in a dark place first, if there is one to be found.”

“I will never leave you again, Nycteris,” cried Photogen. “Only wait till the sun comes, and brings me back my strength, and we will go together, and never, never part anymore.”

“No, no,” persisted Nycteris; “we must go now. And you must learn to be strong in the dark as well as in the day, else you will always be only half brave. I have begun already — not to fight your sun, but to try to get at peace with him, and understand what he really is, and what he means with me — whether to hurt me or to make the best of me. You must do the same with my darkness.”

“But you don’t know what mad animals there are away there towards the south,” said Photogen. “They have huge green eyes, and they would eat you up like a bit of celery, you beautiful creature!”

“Come, come! you must,” said Nycteris, “or I shall have to pretend to leave you, to make you come. I have seen the green eyes you speak of, and I will take care of you from them.”

“You! How can you do that? If it were day now, I could take care of you from the worst of them. But as it is, I can’t even see them for this abominable darkness. I could not see your lovely eyes but for the light that is in them; that lets me see straight into heaven through them. They are windows into the very heaven beyond the sky. I believe they are the very place where the stars are made.”

“You come then, or I shall shut them,” said Nycteris, “and you shan’t see them anymore till you are good. Come. If you can’t see the wild beasts, I can.”

“You can! and you ask me to come!” cried Photogen.

“Yes,” answered Nycteris. “And more than that, I see them long before they can see me, so that I am able to take care of you.”

“But how?” persisted Photogen. “You can’t shoot with bow and arrow, or stab with a hunting knife.”

“No, but I can keep out of the way of them all. Why, just when I found you, I was having a game with two or three of them at once. I see, and scent them too, long before they are near me — long before they can see or scent me.”

“You don’t see or scent any now, do you?” said Photogen uneasily, rising on his elbow.

“No — none at present. I will look,” replied Nycteris, and sprang to her feet.

“Oh, oh! do not leave me — not for a moment,” cried Photogen, straining his eyes to keep her face in sight through the darkness.

“Be quiet, or they will hear you,” she returned. “The wind is from the south, and they cannot scent us. I have found out all about that. Ever since the dear dark came, I have been amusing myself with them, getting every now and then just into the edge of the wind, and letting one have a sniff of me.”

“Oh, horrible!” cried Photogen. “I hope you will not insist on doing so anymore. What was the consequence?”

“Always, the very instant, he turned with dashing eyes, and bounded towards me — only he could not see me, you must remember. But my eyes being so much better than his, I could see him perfectly well, and would run away around him until I scented him, and then I knew he could not find me anyhow. If the wind were to turn, and run the other way now, there might be a whole army of them down upon us, leaving no room to keep out of their way. You had better come.”

She took him by the hand. He yielded and rose, and she led him away. But his steps were feeble, and as the night went on, he seemed more and more ready to sink.

“Oh dear! I am so tired! and so frightened!” he would say.

“Lean on me,” Nycteris would return, putting her arm around him, or patting his cheek. “Take a few steps more. Every step away from the castle is clear gain. Lean harder on me. I am quite strong and well now.”

So they went on. The piercing night-eyes of Nycteris descried not a few pairs of green ones gleaming like holes in the darkness, and many a round she made to keep far out of their way; but she never said to Photogen she saw them. Carefully she kept him off the uneven places, and on the softest and smoothest of the grass, talking to him gently all the way as they went — of the lovely flowers and the stars — how comfortable the flowers looked, down in their green beds, and how happy the stars up in their blue beds!

When the morning began to come, he began to grow better, but was dreadfully tired with walking instead of sleeping, especially after being so long ill. Nycteris too, what with supporting him, what with growing fear of the light which was beginning to ooze out of the east, was very tired. At length, both equally exhausted, neither was able to help the other. As if by consent they stopped. Embracing each the other, they stood in the midst of the wide grassy land, neither of them able to move a step, each supported only by the leaning weakness of the other, each ready to fall if the other should move. But while the one grew weaker still, the other had begun to grow stronger. When the tide of the night began to ebb, the tide of the day began to flow; and now the sun was rushing to the horizon, borne upon its foaming billows. And ever as he came, Photogen revived. At last the sun shot up into the air, like a bird from the hand of the Father of Lights. Nycteris gave a cry of pain and hid her face in her hands.

“Oh me!” she sighed; “I am so frightened! The terrible light stings so!”

But the same instant, through her blindness, she heard Photogen give a low exultant laugh, and the next felt herself caught up; she who all night long had tended and protected him like a child was now in his arms, borne along like a baby, with her head lying on his shoulder. But she was the greater, for suffering more, she feared nothing.
XIX. The Werewolf

AT the very moment when Photogen caught up Nycteris, the telescope of Watho was angrily sweeping the tableland. She swung it from her in rage and, running to her room, shut herself up. There she anointed herself from top to toe with a certain ointment; shook down her long red hair, and tied it around her waist; then began to dance, whirling around and around faster and faster, growing angrier and angrier, until she was foaming at the mouth with fury. When Falca went looking for her, she could not find her anywhere.

As the sun rose, the wind slowly changed and went around, until it blew straight from the north. Photogen and Nycteris were drawing near the edge of the forest, Photogen still carrying Nycteris, when she moved a little on his shoulder uneasily and murmured in his ear.

“I smell a wild beast — that way, the way the wind is coming.”

Photogen turned back towards the castle, and saw a dark speck on the plain. As he looked, it grew larger: it was coming across the grass with the speed of the wind. It came nearer and nearer. It looked long and low, but that might be because it was running at a great stretch. He set Nycteris down under a tree, in the black shadow of its bole, strung his bow, and picked out his heaviest, longest, sharpest arrow. Just as he set the notch on the string, he saw that the creature was a tremendous wolf, rushing straight at him. He loosened his knife in its sheath, drew another arrow halfway from the quiver, lest the first should fail, and took his aim-at a good distance, to leave time for a second chance. He shot. The arrow rose, flew straight, descended, struck the beast, and started again into the air, doubled like a letter V. Quickly Photogen snatched the other, shot, cast his bow from him, and drew his knife. But the arrow was in the brute’s chest, up to the feather; it tumbled heels over head with a great thud of its back on the earth, gave a groan, made a struggle or two, and lay stretched out motionless.

“I’ve killed it, Nycteris,” cried Photogen. “It is a great red wolf.”

“Oh, thank you!” answered Nycteris feebly from behind the tree. “I was sure you would. I was not a bit afraid.”

Photogen went up to the wolf. It was a monster! But he was vexed that his first arrow had behaved so badly, and was the less willing to lose the one that had done him such good service: with a long and a strong pull, he drew it from the brute’s chest. Could he believe his eyes? There lay — no wolf, but Watho, with her hair tied around her waist! The foolish witch had made herself invulnerable, as she supposed, but had forgotten that, to torment Photogen therewith, she had handled one of his arrows. He ran back to Nycteris and told her.

She shuddered and wept, and would not look.
XX. All Is Well

THERE was now no occasion to fly a step farther. Neither of them feared anyone but Watho. They left her there and went back. A great cloud came over the sun, and rain began to fall heavily, and Nycteris was much refreshed, grew able to see a little, and with Photogen’s help walked gently over the cool wet grass.

They had not gone far before they met Fargu and the other huntsmen. Photogen told them he had killed a great red wolf, and it was Madame Watho. The huntsmen looked grave, but gladness shone through.

“Then,” said Fargu, “I will go and bury my mistress.”

But when they reached the place, they found she was already buried — in the maws of sundry birds and beasts which had made their breakfast of her.

Then Fargu, overtaking them, would, very wisely, have Photogen go to the king and tell him the whole story. But Photogen, yet wiser than Fargu, would not set out until he had married Nycteris; “for then,” he said, “the king himself can’t part us; and if ever two people couldn’t do the one without the other, those two are Nycteris and I. She has got to teach me to be a brave man in the dark, and I have got to look after her until she can bear the heat of the sun, and he helps her to see, instead of blinding her.”

They were married that very day. And the next day they went together to the king and told him the whole story. But whom should they find at the court but the father and mother of Photogen, both in high favor with the king and queen. Aurora nearly died with joy, and told them all how Watho had lied and made her believe her child was dead.

No one knew anything of the father or mother of Nycteris; but when Aurora saw in the lovely girl her own azure eyes shining through night and its clouds, it made her think strange things, and wonder how even the wicked themselves may be a link to join together the good. Through Watho, the mothers, who had never seen each other, had changed eyes in their children.

The king gave them the castle and lands of Watho, and there they lived and taught each other for many years that were not long. But hardly had one of them passed, before Nycteris had come to love the day best, because it was the clothing and crown of Photogen, and she saw that the day was greater than the night, and the sun more lordly than the moon; and Photogen had come to love the night best, because it was the mother and home of Nycteris.

“But who knows,” Nycteris would say to Photogen, “that when we go out, we shall not go into a day as much greater than your day as your day is greater than my night?”


A Little Princess

July 17, 2009
 
 
 
 
 
 

 

A Little Princess

 

by

Frances Hodgson Burnett

A LITTLE PRINCESS

Summary: Sara Crewe, a pupil at Miss Minchin’s London school, is left in poverty when her father dies, but is later rescued by a mysterious benefactor.

CONTENTS

             1.  Sara
             2.  A French Lesson
             3.  Ermengarde
             4.  Lottie
             5.  Becky
             6.  The Diamond Mines
             7.  The Diamond Mines Again
             8.  In the Attic
             9.  Melchisedec
           10.  The Indian Gentleman
           11.  Ram Dass
           12.  The Other Side of the Wall
           13.  One of the Populace
           14.  What Melchisedec Heard and Saw
           15.  The Magic
           16.  The Visitor
           17.  "It Is the Child"
           18.  "I Tried Not to Be"
           19.  Anne

A Little Princess

 

1

Sara

Once on a dark winter’s day, when the yellow fog hung so thick and heavy in the streets of London that the lamps were lighted and the shop windows blazed with gas as they do at night, an odd-looking little girl sat in a cab with her father and was driven rather slowly through the big thoroughfares.

She sat with her feet tucked under her, and leaned against her father, who held her in his arm, as she stared out of the window at the passing people with a queer old-fashioned thoughtfulness in her big eyes.

She was such a little girl that one did not expect to see such a look on her small face. It would have been an old look for a child of twelve, and Sara Crewe was only seven. The fact was, however, that she was always dreaming and thinking odd things and could not herself remember any time when she had not been thinking things about grown-up people and the world they belonged to. She felt as if she had lived a long, long time.

At this moment she was remembering the voyage she had just made from Bombay with her father, Captain Crewe. She was thinking of the big ship, of the Lascars passing silently to and fro on it, of the children playing about on the hot deck, and of some young officers’ wives who used to try to make her talk to them and laugh at the things she said.

Principally, she was thinking of what a queer thing it was that at one time one was in India in the blazing sun, and then in the middle of the ocean, and then driving in a strange vehicle through strange streets where the day was as dark as the night. She found this so puzzling that she moved closer to her father.

“Papa,” she said in a low, mysterious little voice which was almost a whisper, “papa.”

“What is it, darling?” Captain Crewe answered, holding her closer and looking down into her face. “What is Sara thinking of?”

“Is this the place?” Sara whispered, cuddling still closer to him. “Is it, papa?”

“Yes, little Sara, it is. We have reached it at last.” And though she was only seven years old, she knew that he felt sad when he said it.

It seemed to her many years since he had begun to prepare her mind for “the place,” as she always called it. Her mother had died when she was born, so she had never known or missed her. Her young, handsome, rich, petting father seemed to be the only relation she had in the world. They had always played together and been fond of each other. She only knew he was rich because she had heard people say so when they thought she was not listening, and she had also heard them say that when she grew up she would be rich, too. She did not know all that being rich meant. She had always lived in a beautiful bungalow, and had been used to seeing many servants who made salaams to her and called her “Missee Sahib,” and gave her her own way in everything. She had had toys and pets and an ayah who worshipped her, and she had gradually learned that people who were rich had these things. That, however, was all she knew about it.

During her short life only one thing had troubled her, and that thing was “the place” she was to be taken to some day. The climate of India was very bad for children, and as soon as possible they were sent away from it—generally to England and to school. She had seen other children go away, and had heard their fathers and mothers talk about the letters they received from them. She had known that she would be obliged to go also, and though sometimes her father’s stories of the voyage and the new country had attracted her, she had been troubled by the thought that he could not stay with her.

“Couldn’t you go to that place with me, papa?” she had asked when she was five years old. “Couldn’t you go to school, too? I would help you with your lessons.”

“But you will not have to stay for a very long time, little Sara,” he had always said. “You will go to a nice house where there will be a lot of little girls, and you will play together, and I will send you plenty of books, and you will grow so fast that it will seem scarcely a year before you are big enough and clever enough to come back and take care of papa.”

She had liked to think of that. To keep the house for her father; to ride with him, and sit at the head of his table when he had dinner parties; to talk to him and read his books—that would be what she would like most in the world, and if one must go away to “the place” in England to attain it, she must make up her mind to go. She did not care very much for other little girls, but if she had plenty of books she could console herself. She liked books more than anything else, and was, in fact, always inventing stories of beautiful things and telling them to herself. Sometimes she had told them to her father, and he had liked them as much as she did.

“Well, papa,” she said softly, “if we are here I suppose we must be resigned.”

He laughed at her old-fashioned speech and kissed her. He was really not at all resigned himself, though he knew he must keep that a secret. His quaint little Sara had been a great companion to him, and he felt he should be a lonely fellow when, on his return to India, he went into his bungalow knowing he need not expect to see the small figure in its white frock come forward to meet him. So he held her very closely in his arms as the cab rolled into the big, dull square in which stood the house which was their destination.

It was a big, dull, brick house, exactly like all the others in its row, but that on the front door there shone a brass plate on which was engraved in black letters:

MISS MINCHIN,
Select Seminary for Young Ladies.

 

“Here we are, Sara,” said Captain Crewe, making his voice sound as cheerful as possible. Then he lifted her out of the cab and they mounted the steps and rang the bell. Sara often thought afterward that the house was somehow exactly like Miss Minchin. It was respectable and well furnished, but everything in it was ugly; and the very armchairs seemed to have hard bones in them. In the hall everything was hard and polished—even the red cheeks of the moon face on the tall clock in the corner had a severe varnished look. The drawing room into which they were ushered was covered by a carpet with a square pattern upon it, the chairs were square, and a heavy marble timepiece stood upon the heavy marble mantel.

As she sat down in one of the stiff mahogany chairs, Sara cast one of her quick looks about her.

“I don’t like it, papa,” she said. “But then I dare say soldiers—even brave ones—don’t really LIKE going into battle.”

Captain Crewe laughed outright at this. He was young and full of fun, and he never tired of hearing Sara’s queer speeches.

“Oh, little Sara,” he said. “What shall I do when I have no one to say solemn things to me? No one else is as solemn as you are.”

“But why do solemn things make you laugh so?” inquired Sara.

“Because you are such fun when you say them,” he answered, laughing still more. And then suddenly he swept her into his arms and kissed her very hard, stopping laughing all at once and looking almost as if tears had come into his eyes.

It was just then that Miss Minchin entered the room. She was very like her house, Sara felt: tall and dull, and respectable and ugly. She had large, cold, fishy eyes, and a large, cold, fishy smile. It spread itself into a very large smile when she saw Sara and Captain Crewe. She had heard a great many desirable things of the young soldier from the lady who had recommended her school to him. Among other things, she had heard that he was a rich father who was willing to spend a great deal of money on his little daughter.

“It will be a great privilege to have charge of such a beautiful and promising child, Captain Crewe,” she said, taking Sara’s hand and stroking it. “Lady Meredith has told me of her unusual cleverness. A clever child is a great treasure in an establishment like mine.”

Sara stood quietly, with her eyes fixed upon Miss Minchin’s face. She was thinking something odd, as usual.

“Why does she say I am a beautiful child?” she was thinking. “I am not beautiful at all. Colonel Grange’s little girl, Isobel, is beautiful. She has dimples and rose-colored cheeks, and long hair the color of gold. I have short black hair and green eyes; besides which, I am a thin child and not fair in the least. I am one of the ugliest children I ever saw. She is beginning by telling a story.”

She was mistaken, however, in thinking she was an ugly child. She was not in the least like Isobel Grange, who had been the beauty of the regiment, but she had an odd charm of her own. She was a slim, supple creature, rather tall for her age, and had an intense, attractive little face. Her hair was heavy and quite black and only curled at the tips; her eyes were greenish gray, it is true, but they were big, wonderful eyes with long, black lashes, and though she herself did not like the color of them, many other people did. Still she was very firm in her belief that she was an ugly little girl, and she was not at all elated by Miss Minchin’s flattery.

“I should be telling a story if I said she was beautiful,” she thought; “and I should know I was telling a story. I believe I am as ugly as she is—in my way. What did she say that for?”

After she had known Miss Minchin longer she learned why she had said it. She discovered that she said the same thing to each papa and mamma who brought a child to her school.

Sara stood near her father and listened while he and Miss Minchin talked. She had been brought to the seminary because Lady Meredith’s two little girls had been educated there, and Captain Crewe had a great respect for Lady Meredith’s experience. Sara was to be what was known as “a parlor boarder,” and she was to enjoy even greater privileges than parlor boarders usually did. She was to have a pretty bedroom and sitting room of her own; she was to have a pony and a carriage, and a maid to take the place of the ayah who had been her nurse in India.

“I am not in the least anxious about her education,” Captain Crewe said, with his gay laugh, as he held Sara’s hand and patted it. “The difficulty will be to keep her from learning too fast and too much. She is always sitting with her little nose burrowing into books. She doesn’t read them, Miss Minchin; she gobbles them up as if she were a little wolf instead of a little girl. She is always starving for new books to gobble, and she wants grown-up books—great, big, fat ones—French and German as well as English—history and biography and poets, and all sorts of things. Drag her away from her books when she reads too much. Make her ride her pony in the Row or go out and buy a new doll. She ought to play more with dolls.”

“Papa,” said Sara, “you see, if I went out and bought a new doll every few days I should have more than I could be fond of. Dolls ought to be intimate friends. Emily is going to be my intimate friend.”

Captain Crewe looked at Miss Minchin and Miss Minchin looked at Captain Crewe.

“Who is Emily?” she inquired.

“Tell her, Sara,” Captain Crewe said, smiling.

Sara’s green-gray eyes looked very solemn and quite soft as she answered.

“She is a doll I haven’t got yet,” she said. “She is a doll papa is going to buy for me. We are going out together to find her. I have called her Emily. She is going to be my friend when papa is gone. I want her to talk to about him.”

Miss Minchin’s large, fishy smile became very flattering indeed.

“What an original child!” she said. “What a darling little creature!”

“Yes,” said Captain Crewe, drawing Sara close. “She is a darling little creature. Take great care of her for me, Miss Minchin.”

Sara stayed with her father at his hotel for several days; in fact, she remained with him until he sailed away again to India. They went out and visited many big shops together, and bought a great many things. They bought, indeed, a great many more things than Sara needed; but Captain Crewe was a rash, innocent young man and wanted his little girl to have everything she admired and everything he admired himself, so between them they collected a wardrobe much too grand for a child of seven. There were velvet dresses trimmed with costly furs, and lace dresses, and embroidered ones, and hats with great, soft ostrich feathers, and ermine coats and muffs, and boxes of tiny gloves and handkerchiefs and silk stockings in such abundant supplies that the polite young women behind the counters whispered to each other that the odd little girl with the big, solemn eyes must be at least some foreign princess—perhaps the little daughter of an Indian rajah.

And at last they found Emily, but they went to a number of toy shops and looked at a great many dolls before they discovered her.

“I want her to look as if she wasn’t a doll really,” Sara said. “I want her to look as if she LISTENS when I talk to her. The trouble with dolls, papa”—and she put her head on one side and reflected as she said it—”the trouble with dolls is that they never seem to HEAR.” So they looked at big ones and little ones—at dolls with black eyes and dolls with blue—at dolls with brown curls and dolls with golden braids, dolls dressed and dolls undressed.

“You see,” Sara said when they were examining one who had no clothes. “If, when I find her, she has no frocks, we can take her to a dressmaker and have her things made to fit. They will fit better if they are tried on.”

After a number of disappointments they decided to walk and look in at the shop windows and let the cab follow them. They had passed two or three places without even going in, when, as they were approaching a shop which was really not a very large one, Sara suddenly started and clutched her father’s arm.

“Oh, papa!” she cried. “There is Emily!”

A flush had risen to her face and there was an expression in her green-gray eyes as if she had just recognized someone she was intimate with and fond of.

“She is actually waiting there for us!” she said. “Let us go in to her.”

“Dear me,” said Captain Crewe, “I feel as if we ought to have someone to introduce us.”

“You must introduce me and I will introduce you,” said Sara. “But I knew her the minute I saw her—so perhaps she knew me, too.”

Perhaps she had known her. She had certainly a very intelligent expression in her eyes when Sara took her in her arms. She was a large doll, but not too large to carry about easily; she had naturally curling golden-brown hair, which hung like a mantle about her, and her eyes were a deep, clear, gray-blue, with soft, thick eyelashes which were real eyelashes and not mere painted lines.

“Of course,” said Sara, looking into her face as she held her on her knee, “of course papa, this is Emily.”

So Emily was bought and actually taken to a children’s outfitter’s shop and measured for a wardrobe as grand as Sara’s own. She had lace frocks, too, and velvet and muslin ones, and hats and coats and beautiful lace-trimmed underclothes, and gloves and handkerchiefs and furs.

“I should like her always to look as if she was a child with a good mother,” said Sara. “I’m her mother, though I am going to make a companion of her.”

Captain Crewe would really have enjoyed the shopping tremendously, but that a sad thought kept tugging at his heart. This all meant that he was going to be separated from his beloved, quaint little comrade.

He got out of his bed in the middle of that night and went and stood looking down at Sara, who lay asleep with Emily in her arms. Her black hair was spread out on the pillow and Emily’s golden-brown hair mingled with it, both of them had lace-ruffled nightgowns, and both had long eyelashes which lay and curled up on their cheeks. Emily looked so like a real child that Captain Crewe felt glad she was there. He drew a big sigh and pulled his mustache with a boyish expression.

“Heigh-ho, little Sara!” he said to himself “I don’t believe you know how much your daddy will miss you.”

The next day he took her to Miss Minchin’s and left her there. He was to sail away the next morning. He explained to Miss Minchin that his solicitors, Messrs. Barrow & Skipworth, had charge of his affairs in England and would give her any advice she wanted, and that they would pay the bills she sent in for Sara’s expenses. He would write to Sara twice a week, and she was to be given every pleasure she asked for.

“She is a sensible little thing, and she never wants anything it isn’t safe to give her,” he said.

Then he went with Sara into her little sitting room and they bade each other good-by. Sara sat on his knee and held the lapels of his coat in her small hands, and looked long and hard at his face.

“Are you learning me by heart, little Sara?” he said, stroking her hair.

“No,” she answered. “I know you by heart. You are inside my heart.” And they put their arms round each other and kissed as if they would never let each other go.

When the cab drove away from the door, Sara was sitting on the floor of her sitting room, with her hands under her chin and her eyes following it until it had turned the corner of the square. Emily was sitting by her, and she looked after it, too. When Miss Minchin sent her sister, Miss Amelia, to see what the child was doing, she found she could not open the door.

“I have locked it,” said a queer, polite little voice from inside. “I want to be quite by myself, if you please.”

Miss Amelia was fat and dumpy, and stood very much in awe of her sister. She was really the better-natured person of the two, but she never disobeyed Miss Minchin. She went downstairs again, looking almost alarmed.

“I never saw such a funny, old-fashioned child, sister,” she said. “She has locked herself in, and she is not making the least particle of noise.”

“It is much better than if she kicked and screamed, as some of them do,” Miss Minchin answered. “I expected that a child as much spoiled as she is would set the whole house in an uproar. If ever a child was given her own way in everything, she is.”

“I’ve been opening her trunks and putting her things away,” said Miss Amelia. “I never saw anything like them—sable and ermine on her coats, and real Valenciennes lace on her underclothing. You have seen some of her clothes. What DO you think of them?”

“I think they are perfectly ridiculous,” replied Miss Minchin, sharply; “but they will look very well at the head of the line when we take the schoolchildren to church on Sunday. She has been provided for as if she were a little princess.”

And upstairs in the locked room Sara and Emily sat on the floor and stared at the corner round which the cab had disappeared, while Captain Crewe looked backward, waving and kissing his hand as if he could not bear to stop.

2

A French Lesson

When Sara entered the schoolroom the next morning everybody looked at her with wide, interested eyes. By that time every pupil—from Lavinia Herbert, who was nearly thirteen and felt quite grown up, to Lottie Legh, who was only just four and the baby of the school—had heard a great deal about her. They knew very certainly that she was Miss Minchin’s show pupil and was considered a credit to the establishment. One or two of them had even caught a glimpse of her French maid, Mariette, who had arrived the evening before. Lavinia had managed to pass Sara’s room when the door was open, and had seen Mariette opening a box which had arrived late from some shop.

“It was full of petticoats with lace frills on them—frills and frills,” she whispered to her friend Jessie as she bent over her geography. “I saw her shaking them out. I heard Miss Minchin say to Miss Amelia that her clothes were so grand that they were ridiculous for a child. My mamma says that children should be dressed simply. She has got one of those petticoats on now. I saw it when she sat down.”

“She has silk stockings on!” whispered Jessie, bending over her geography also. “And what little feet! I never saw such little feet.”

“Oh,” sniffed Lavinia, spitefully, “that is the way her slippers are made. My mamma says that even big feet can be made to look small if you have a clever shoemaker. I don’t think she is pretty at all. Her eyes are such a queer color.”

“She isn’t pretty as other pretty people are,” said Jessie, stealing a glance across the room; “but she makes you want to look at her again. She has tremendously long eyelashes, but her eyes are almost green.”

Sara was sitting quietly in her seat, waiting to be told what to do. She had been placed near Miss Minchin’s desk. She was not abashed at all by the many pairs of eyes watching her. She was interested and looked back quietly at the children who looked at her. She wondered what they were thinking of, and if they liked Miss Minchin, and if they cared for their lessons, and if any of them had a papa at all like her own. She had had a long talk with Emily about her papa that morning.

“He is on the sea now, Emily,” she had said. “We must be very great friends to each other and tell each other things. Emily, look at me. You have the nicest eyes I ever saw—but I wish you could speak.”

She was a child full of imaginings and whimsical thoughts, and one of her fancies was that there would be a great deal of comfort in even pretending that Emily was alive and really heard and understood. After Mariette had dressed her in her dark-blue schoolroom frock and tied her hair with a dark-blue ribbon, she went to Emily, who sat in a chair of her own, and gave her a book.

“You can read that while I am downstairs,” she said; and, seeing Mariette looking at her curiously, she spoke to her with a serious little face.

“What I believe about dolls,” she said, “is that they can do things they will not let us know about. Perhaps, really, Emily can read and talk and walk, but she will only do it when people are out of the room. That is her secret. You see, if people knew that dolls could do things, they would make them work. So, perhaps, they have promised each other to keep it a secret. If you stay in the room, Emily will just sit there and stare; but if you go out, she will begin to read, perhaps, or go and look out of the window. Then if she heard either of us coming, she would just run back and jump into her chair and pretend she had been there all the time.”

“Comme elle est drole!” Mariette said to herself, and when she went downstairs she told the head housemaid about it. But she had already begun to like this odd little girl who had such an intelligent small face and such perfect manners. She had taken care of children before who were not so polite. Sara was a very fine little person, and had a gentle, appreciative way of saying, “If you please, Mariette,” “Thank you, Mariette,” which was very charming. Mariette told the head housemaid that she thanked her as if she was thanking a lady.

“Elle a l’air d’une princesse, cette petite,” she said. Indeed, she was very much pleased with her new little mistress and liked her place greatly.

After Sara had sat in her seat in the schoolroom for a few minutes, being looked at by the pupils, Miss Minchin rapped in a dignified manner upon her desk.

“Young ladies,” she said, “I wish to introduce you to your new companion.” All the little girls rose in their places, and Sara rose also. “I shall expect you all to be very agreeable to Miss Crewe; she has just come to us from a great distance—in fact, from India. As soon as lessons are over you must make each other’s acquaintance.”

The pupils bowed ceremoniously, and Sara made a little curtsy, and then they sat down and looked at each other again.

“Sara,” said Miss Minchin in her schoolroom manner, “come here to me.”

She had taken a book from the desk and was turning over its leaves. Sara went to her politely.

“As your papa has engaged a French maid for you,” she began, “I conclude that he wishes you to make a special study of the French language.”

Sara felt a little awkward.

“I think he engaged her,” she said, “because he—he thought I would like her, Miss Minchin.”

“I am afraid,” said Miss Minchin, with a slightly sour smile, “that you have been a very spoiled little girl and always imagine that things are done because you like them. My impression is that your papa wished you to learn French.”

If Sara had been older or less punctilious about being quite polite to people, she could have explained herself in a very few words. But, as it was, she felt a flush rising on her cheeks. Miss Minchin was a very severe and imposing person, and she seemed so absolutely sure that Sara knew nothing whatever of French that she felt as if it would be almost rude to correct her. The truth was that Sara could not remember the time when she had not seemed to know French. Her father had often spoken it to her when she had been a baby. Her mother had been a French woman, and Captain Crewe had loved her language, so it happened that Sara had always heard and been familiar with it.

“I—I have never really learned French, but—but—” she began, trying shyly to make herself clear.

One of Miss Minchin’s chief secret annoyances was that she did not speak French herself, and was desirous of concealing the irritating fact. She, therefore, had no intention of discussing the matter and laying herself open to innocent questioning by a new little pupil.

“That is enough,” she said with polite tartness. “If you have not learned, you must begin at once. The French master, Monsieur Dufarge, will be here in a few minutes. Take this book and look at it until he arrives.”

Sara’s cheeks felt warm. She went back to her seat and opened the book. She looked at the first page with a grave face. She knew it would be rude to smile, and she was very determined not to be rude. But it was very odd to find herself expected to study a page which told her that “le pere” meant “the father,” and “la mere” meant “the mother.”

Miss Minchin glanced toward her scrutinizingly.

“You look rather cross, Sara,” she said. “I am sorry you do not like the idea of learning French.”

“I am very fond of it,” answered Sara, thinking she would try again; “but—”

“You must not say ‘but’ when you are told to do things,” said Miss Minchin. “Look at your book again.”

And Sara did so, and did not smile, even when she found that “le fils” meant “the son,” and “le frere” meant “the brother.”

“When Monsieur Dufarge comes,” she thought, “I can make him understand.”

Monsieur Dufarge arrived very shortly afterward. He was a very nice, intelligent, middle-aged Frenchman, and he looked interested when his eyes fell upon Sara trying politely to seem absorbed in her little book of phrases.

“Is this a new pupil for me, madame?” he said to Miss Minchin. “I hope that is my good fortune.”

“Her papa—Captain Crewe—is very anxious that she should begin the language. But I am afraid she has a childish prejudice against it. She does not seem to wish to learn,” said Miss Minchin.

“I am sorry of that, mademoiselle,” he said kindly to Sara. “Perhaps, when we begin to study together, I may show you that it is a charming tongue.”

Little Sara rose in her seat. She was beginning to feel rather desperate, as if she were almost in disgrace. She looked up into Monsieur Dufarge’s face with her big, green-gray eyes, and they were quite innocently appealing. She knew that he would understand as soon as she spoke. She began to explain quite simply in pretty and fluent French. Madame had not understood. She had not learned French exactly—not out of books—but her papa and other people had always spoken it to her, and she had read it and written it as she had read and written English. Her papa loved it, and she loved it because he did. Her dear mamma, who had died when she was born, had been French. She would be glad to learn anything monsieur would teach her, but what she had tried to explain to madame was that she already knew the words in this book—and she held out the little book of phrases.

When she began to speak Miss Minchin started quite violently and sat staring at her over her eyeglasses, almost indignantly, until she had finished. Monsieur Dufarge began to smile, and his smile was one of great pleasure. To hear this pretty childish voice speaking his own language so simply and charmingly made him feel almost as if he were in his native land—which in dark, foggy days in London sometimes seemed worlds away. When she had finished, he took the phrase book from her, with a look almost affectionate. But he spoke to Miss Minchin.

“Ah, madame,” he said, “there is not much I can teach her. She has not LEARNED French; she is French. Her accent is exquisite.”

“You ought to have told me,” exclaimed Miss Minchin, much mortified, turning to Sara.

“I—I tried,” said Sara. “I—I suppose I did not begin right.”

Miss Minchin knew she had tried, and that it had not been her fault that she was not allowed to explain. And when she saw that the pupils had been listening and that Lavinia and Jessie were giggling behind their French grammars, she felt infuriated.

“Silence, young ladies!” she said severely, rapping upon the desk. “Silence at once!”

And she began from that minute to feel rather a grudge against her show pupil.

3

Ermengarde

On that first morning, when Sara sat at Miss Minchin’s side, aware that the whole schoolroom was devoting itself to observing her, she had noticed very soon one little girl, about her own age, who looked at her very hard with a pair of light, rather dull, blue eyes. She was a fat child who did not look as if she were in the least clever, but she had a good-naturedly pouting mouth. Her flaxen hair was braided in a tight pigtail, tied with a ribbon, and she had pulled this pigtail around her neck, and was biting the end of the ribbon, resting her elbows on the desk, as she stared wonderingly at the new pupil. When Monsieur Dufarge began to speak to Sara, she looked a little frightened; and when Sara stepped forward and, looking at him with the innocent, appealing eyes, answered him, without any warning, in French, the fat little girl gave a startled jump, and grew quite red in her awed amazement. Having wept hopeless tears for weeks in her efforts to remember that “la mere” meant “the mother,” and “le pere,” “the father,”—when one spoke sensible English—it was almost too much for her suddenly to find herself listening to a child her own age who seemed not only quite familiar with these words, but apparently knew any number of others, and could mix them up with verbs as if they were mere trifles.

She stared so hard and bit the ribbon on her pigtail so fast that she attracted the attention of Miss Minchin, who, feeling extremely cross at the moment, immediately pounced upon her.

“Miss St. John!” she exclaimed severely. “What do you mean by such conduct? Remove your elbows! Take your ribbon out of your mouth! Sit up at once!”

Upon which Miss St. John gave another jump, and when Lavinia and Jessie tittered she became redder than ever—so red, indeed, that she almost looked as if tears were coming into her poor, dull, childish eyes; and Sara saw her and was so sorry for her that she began rather to like her and want to be her friend. It was a way of hers always to want to spring into any fray in which someone was made uncomfortable or unhappy.

“If Sara had been a boy and lived a few centuries ago,” her father used to say, “she would have gone about the country with her sword drawn, rescuing and defending everyone in distress. She always wants to fight when she sees people in trouble.”

So she took rather a fancy to fat, slow, little Miss St. John, and kept glancing toward her through the morning. She saw that lessons were no easy matter to her, and that there was no danger of her ever being spoiled by being treated as a show pupil. Her French lesson was a pathetic thing. Her pronunciation made even Monsieur Dufarge smile in spite of himself, and Lavinia and Jessie and the more fortunate girls either giggled or looked at her in wondering disdain. But Sara did not laugh. She tried to look as if she did not hear when Miss St. John called “le bon pain,” “lee bong pang.” She had a fine, hot little temper of her own, and it made her feel rather savage when she heard the titters and saw the poor, stupid, distressed child’s face.

“It isn’t funny, really,” she said between her teeth, as she bent over her book. “They ought not to laugh.”

When lessons were over and the pupils gathered together in groups to talk, Sara looked for Miss St. John, and finding her bundled rather disconsolately in a window-seat, she walked over to her and spoke. She only said the kind of thing little girls always say to each other by way of beginning an acquaintance, but there was something friendly about Sara, and people always felt it.

“What is your name?” she said.

To explain Miss St. John’s amazement one must recall that a new pupil is, for a short time, a somewhat uncertain thing; and of this new pupil the entire school had talked the night before until it fell asleep quite exhausted by excitement and contradictory stories. A new pupil with a carriage and a pony and a maid, and a voyage from India to discuss, was not an ordinary acquaintance.

“My name’s Ermengarde St. John,” she answered.

“Mine is Sara Crewe,” said Sara. “Yours is very pretty. It sounds like a story book.”

“Do you like it?” fluttered Ermengarde. “I—I like yours.”

Miss St. John’s chief trouble in life was that she had a clever father. Sometimes this seemed to her a dreadful calamity. If you have a father who knows everything, who speaks seven or eight languages, and has thousands of volumes which he has apparently learned by heart, he frequently expects you to be familiar with the contents of your lesson books at least; and it is not improbable that he will feel you ought to be able to remember a few incidents of history and to write a French exercise. Ermengarde was a severe trial to Mr. St. John. He could not understand how a child of his could be a notably and unmistakably dull creature who never shone in anything.

“Good heavens!” he had said more than once, as he stared at her, “there are times when I think she is as stupid as her Aunt Eliza!”

If her Aunt Eliza had been slow to learn and quick to forget a thing entirely when she had learned it, Ermengarde was strikingly like her. She was the monumental dunce of the school, and it could not be denied.

“She must be MADE to learn,” her father said to Miss Minchin.

Consequently Ermengarde spent the greater part of her life in disgrace or in tears. She learned things and forgot them; or, if she remembered them, she did not understand them. So it was natural that, having made Sara’s acquaintance, she should sit and stare at her with profound admiration.

“You can speak French, can’t you?” she said respectfully.

Sara got on to the window-seat, which was a big, deep one, and, tucking up her feet, sat with her hands clasped round her knees.

“I can speak it because I have heard it all my life,” she answered. “You could speak it if you had always heard it.”

“Oh, no, I couldn’t,” said Ermengarde. “I NEVER could speak it!”

“Why?” inquired Sara, curiously.

Ermengarde shook her head so that the pigtail wobbled.

“You heard me just now,” she said. “I’m always like that. I can’t SAY the words. They’re so queer.”

She paused a moment, and then added with a touch of awe in her voice, “You are CLEVER, aren’t you?”

Sara looked out of the window into the dingy square, where the sparrows were hopping and twittering on the wet, iron railings and the sooty branches of the trees. She reflected a few moments. She had heard it said very often that she was “clever,” and she wondered if she was—and IF she was, how it had happened.

“I don’t know,” she said. “I can’t tell.” Then, seeing a mournful look on the round, chubby face, she gave a little laugh and changed the subject.

“Would you like to see Emily?” she inquired.

“Who is Emily?” Ermengarde asked, just as Miss Minchin had done.

“Come up to my room and see,” said Sara, holding out her hand.

They jumped down from the window-seat together, and went upstairs.

“Is it true,” Ermengarde whispered, as they went through the hall—”is it true that you have a playroom all to yourself?”

“Yes,” Sara answered. “Papa asked Miss Minchin to let me have one, because—well, it was because when I play I make up stories and tell them to myself, and I don’t like people to hear me. It spoils it if I think people listen.”

They had reached the passage leading to Sara’s room by this time, and Ermengarde stopped short, staring, and quite losing her breath.

“You MAKE up stories!” she gasped. “Can you do that—as well as speak French? CAN you?”

Sara looked at her in simple surprise.

“Why, anyone can make up things,” she said. “Have you never tried?”

She put her hand warningly on Ermengarde’s.

“Let us go very quietly to the door,” she whispered, “and then I will open it quite suddenly; perhaps we may catch her.”

She was half laughing, but there was a touch of mysterious hope in her eyes which fascinated Ermengarde, though she had not the remotest idea what it meant, or whom it was she wanted to “catch,” or why she wanted to catch her. Whatsoever she meant, Ermengarde was sure it was something delightfully exciting. So, quite thrilled with expectation, she followed her on tiptoe along the passage. They made not the least noise until they reached the door. Then Sara suddenly turned the handle, and threw it wide open. Its opening revealed the room quite neat and quiet, a fire gently burning in the grate, and a wonderful doll sitting in a chair by it, apparently reading a book.

“Oh, she got back to her seat before we could see her!” Sara explained. “Of course they always do. They are as quick as lightning.”

Ermengarde looked from her to the doll and back again.

“Can she—walk?” she asked breathlessly.

“Yes,” answered Sara. “At least I believe she can. At least I PRETEND I believe she can. And that makes it seem as if it were true. Have you never pretended things?”

“No,” said Ermengarde. “Never. I—tell me about it.”

She was so bewitched by this odd, new companion that she actually stared at Sara instead of at Emily—notwithstanding that Emily was the most attractive doll person she had ever seen.

“Let us sit down,” said Sara, “and I will tell you. It’s so easy that when you begin you can’t stop. You just go on and on doing it always. And it’s beautiful. Emily, you must listen. This is Ermengarde St. John, Emily. Ermengarde, this is Emily. Would you like to hold her?”

“Oh, may I?” said Ermengarde. “May I, really? She is beautiful!” And Emily was put into her arms.

Never in her dull, short life had Miss St. John dreamed of such an hour as the one she spent with the queer new pupil before they heard the lunch-bell ring and were obliged to go downstairs.

Sara sat upon the hearth-rug and told her strange things. She sat rather huddled up, and her green eyes shone and her cheeks flushed. She told stories of the voyage, and stories of India; but what fascinated Ermengarde the most was her fancy about the dolls who walked and talked, and who could do anything they chose when the human beings were out of the room, but who must keep their powers a secret and so flew back to their places “like lightning” when people returned to the room.

“WE couldn’t do it,” said Sara, seriously. “You see, it’s a kind of magic.”

Once, when she was relating the story of the search for Emily, Ermengarde saw her face suddenly change. A cloud seemed to pass over it and put out the light in her shining eyes. She drew her breath in so sharply that it made a funny, sad little sound, and then she shut her lips and held them tightly closed, as if she was determined either to do or NOT to do something. Ermengarde had an idea that if she had been like any other little girl, she might have suddenly burst out sobbing and crying. But she did not.

“Have you a—a pain?” Ermengarde ventured.

“Yes,” Sara answered, after a moment’s silence. “But it is not in my body.” Then she added something in a low voice which she tried to keep quite steady, and it was this: “Do you love your father more than anything else in all the whole world?”

Ermengarde’s mouth fell open a little. She knew that it would be far from behaving like a respectable child at a select seminary to say that it had never occurred to you that you COULD love your father, that you would do anything desperate to avoid being left alone in his society for ten minutes. She was, indeed, greatly embarrassed.

“I—I scarcely ever see him,” she stammered. “He is always in the library—reading things.”

“I love mine more than all the world ten times over,” Sara said. “That is what my pain is. He has gone away.”

She put her head quietly down on her little, huddled-up knees, and sat very still for a few minutes.

“She’s going to cry out loud,” thought Ermengarde, fearfully.

But she did not. Her short, black locks tumbled about her ears, and she sat still. Then she spoke without lifting her head.

“I promised him I would bear it,” she said. “And I will. You have to bear things. Think what soldiers bear! Papa is a soldier. If there was a war he would have to bear marching and thirstiness and, perhaps, deep wounds. And he would never say a word—not one word.”

Ermengarde could only gaze at her, but she felt that she was beginning to adore her. She was so wonderful and different from anyone else.

Presently, she lifted her face and shook back her black locks, with a queer little smile.

“If I go on talking and talking,” she said, “and telling you things about pretending, I shall bear it better. You don’t forget, but you bear it better.”

Ermengarde did not know why a lump came into her throat and her eyes felt as if tears were in them.

“Lavinia and Jessie are ‘best friends,'” she said rather huskily. “I wish we could be ‘best friends.’ Would you have me for yours? You’re clever, and I’m the stupidest child in the school, but I—oh, I do so like you!”

“I’m glad of that,” said Sara. “It makes you thankful when you are liked. Yes. We will be friends. And I’ll tell you what”—a sudden gleam lighting her face—”I can help you with your French lessons.”

4

Lottie

If Sara had been a different kind of child, the life she led at Miss Minchin’s Select Seminary for the next few years would not have been at all good for her. She was treated more as if she were a distinguished guest at the establishment than as if she were a mere little girl. If she had been a self-opinionated, domineering child, she might have become disagreeable enough to be unbearable through being so much indulged and flattered. If she had been an indolent child, she would have learned nothing. Privately Miss Minchin disliked her, but she was far too worldly a woman to do or say anything which might make such a desirable pupil wish to leave her school. She knew quite well that if Sara wrote to her papa to tell him she was uncomfortable or unhappy, Captain Crewe would remove her at once. Miss Minchin’s opinion was that if a child were continually praised and never forbidden to do what she liked, she would be sure to be fond of the place where she was so treated. Accordingly, Sara was praised for her quickness at her lessons, for her good manners, for her amiability to her fellow pupils, for her generosity if she gave sixpence to a beggar out of her full little purse; the simplest thing she did was treated as if it were a virtue, and if she had not had a disposition and a clever little brain, she might have been a very self-satisfied young person. But the clever little brain told her a great many sensible and true things about herself and her circumstances, and now and then she talked these things over to Ermengarde as time went on.

“Things happen to people by accident,” she used to say. “A lot of nice accidents have happened to me. It just HAPPENED that I always liked lessons and books, and could remember things when I learned them. It just happened that I was born with a father who was beautiful and nice and clever, and could give me everything I liked. Perhaps I have not really a good temper at all, but if you have everything you want and everyone is kind to you, how can you help but be good-tempered? I don’t know”—looking quite serious—”how I shall ever find out whether I am really a nice child or a horrid one. Perhaps I’m a HIDEOUS child, and no one will ever know, just because I never have any trials.”

“Lavinia has no trials,” said Ermengarde, stolidly, “and she is horrid enough.”

Sara rubbed the end of her little nose reflectively, as she thought the matter over.

“Well,” she said at last, “perhaps—perhaps that is because Lavinia is GROWING.” This was the result of a charitable recollection of having heard Miss Amelia say that Lavinia was growing so fast that she believed it affected her health and temper.

Lavinia, in fact, was spiteful. She was inordinately jealous of Sara. Until the new pupil’s arrival, she had felt herself the leader in the school. She had led because she was capable of making herself extremely disagreeable if the others did not follow her. She domineered over the little children, and assumed grand airs with those big enough to be her companions. She was rather pretty, and had been the best-dressed pupil in the procession when the Select Seminary walked out two by two, until Sara’s velvet coats and sable muffs appeared, combined with drooping ostrich feathers, and were led by Miss Minchin at the head of the line. This, at the beginning, had been bitter enough; but as time went on it became apparent that Sara was a leader, too, and not because she could make herself disagreeable, but because she never did.

“There’s one thing about Sara Crewe,” Jessie had enraged her “best friend” by saying honestly, “she’s never ‘grand’ about herself the least bit, and you know she might be, Lavvie. I believe I couldn’t help being—just a little—if I had so many fine things and was made such a fuss over. It’s disgusting, the way Miss Minchin shows her off when parents come.”

“‘Dear Sara must come into the drawing room and talk to Mrs. Musgrave about India,'” mimicked Lavinia, in her most highly flavored imitation of Miss Minchin. “‘Dear Sara must speak French to Lady Pitkin. Her accent is so perfect.’ She didn’t learn her French at the Seminary, at any rate. And there’s nothing so clever in her knowing it. She says herself she didn’t learn it at all. She just picked it up, because she always heard her papa speak it. And, as to her papa, there is nothing so grand in being an Indian officer.”

“Well,” said Jessie, slowly, “he’s killed tigers. He killed the one in the skin Sara has in her room. That’s why she likes it so. She lies on it and strokes its head, and talks to it as if it was a cat.”

“She’s always doing something silly,” snapped Lavinia. “My mamma says that way of hers of pretending things is silly. She says she will grow up eccentric.”

It was quite true that Sara was never “grand.” She was a friendly little soul, and shared her privileges and belongings with a free hand. The little ones, who were accustomed to being disdained and ordered out of the way by mature ladies aged ten and twelve, were never made to cry by this most envied of them all. She was a motherly young person, and when people fell down and scraped their knees, she ran and helped them up and patted them, or found in her pocket a bonbon or some other article of a soothing nature. She never pushed them out of her way or alluded to their years as a humiliation and a blot upon their small characters.

“If you are four you are four,” she said severely to Lavinia on an occasion of her having—it must be confessed—slapped Lottie and called her “a brat;” “but you will be five next year, and six the year after that. And,” opening large, convicting eyes, “it takes sixteen years to make you twenty.”

“Dear me,” said Lavinia, “how we can calculate!” In fact, it was not to be denied that sixteen and four made twenty—and twenty was an age the most daring were scarcely bold enough to dream of.

So the younger children adored Sara. More than once she had been known to have a tea party, made up of these despised ones, in her own room. And Emily had been played with, and Emily’s own tea service used—the one with cups which held quite a lot of much-sweetened weak tea and had blue flowers on them. No one had seen such a very real doll’s tea set before. From that afternoon Sara was regarded as a goddess and a queen by the entire alphabet class.

Lottie Legh worshipped her to such an extent that if Sara had not been a motherly person, she would have found her tiresome. Lottie had been sent to school by a rather flighty young papa who could not imagine what else to do with her. Her young mother had died, and as the child had been treated like a favorite doll or a very spoiled pet monkey or lap dog ever since the first hour of her life, she was a very appalling little creature. When she wanted anything or did not want anything she wept and howled; and, as she always wanted the things she could not have, and did not want the things that were best for her, her shrill little voice was usually to be heard uplifted in wails in one part of the house or another.

Her strongest weapon was that in some mysterious way she had found out that a very small girl who had lost her mother was a person who ought to be pitied and made much of. She had probably heard some grown-up people talking her over in the early days, after her mother’s death. So it became her habit to make great use of this knowledge.

The first time Sara took her in charge was one morning when, on passing a sitting room, she heard both Miss Minchin and Miss Amelia trying to suppress the angry wails of some child who, evidently, refused to be silenced. She refused so strenuously indeed that Miss Minchin was obliged to almost shout—in a stately and severe manner—to make herself heard.

“What IS she crying for?” she almost yelled.

“Oh—oh—oh!” Sara heard; “I haven’t got any mam—ma-a!”

“Oh, Lottie!” screamed Miss Amelia. “Do stop, darling! Don’t cry! Please don’t!”

“Oh! Oh! Oh! Oh! Oh!” Lottie howled tempestuously. “Haven’t—got—any—mam—ma-a!”

“She ought to be whipped,” Miss Minchin proclaimed. “You SHALL be whipped, you naughty child!”

Lottie wailed more loudly than ever. Miss Amelia began to cry. Miss Minchin’s voice rose until it almost thundered, then suddenly she sprang up from her chair in impotent indignation and flounced out of the room, leaving Miss Amelia to arrange the matter.

Sara had paused in the hall, wondering if she ought to go into the room, because she had recently begun a friendly acquaintance with Lottie and might be able to quiet her. When Miss Minchin came out and saw her, she looked rather annoyed. She realized that her voice, as heard from inside the room, could not have sounded either dignified or amiable.

“Oh, Sara!” she exclaimed, endeavoring to produce a suitable smile.

“I stopped,” explained Sara, “because I knew it was Lottie—and I thought, perhaps—just perhaps, I could make her be quiet. May I try, Miss Minchin?”

“If you can, you are a clever child,” answered Miss Minchin, drawing in her mouth sharply. Then, seeing that Sara looked slightly chilled by her asperity, she changed her manner. “But you are clever in everything,” she said in her approving way. “I dare say you can manage her. Go in.” And she left her.

When Sara entered the room, Lottie was lying upon the floor, screaming and kicking her small fat legs violently, and Miss Amelia was bending over her in consternation and despair, looking quite red and damp with heat. Lottie had always found, when in her own nursery at home, that kicking and screaming would always be quieted by any means she insisted on. Poor plump Miss Amelia was trying first one method, and then another.

“Poor darling,” she said one moment, “I know you haven’t any mamma, poor—” Then in quite another tone, “If you don’t stop, Lottie, I will shake you. Poor little angel! There—! You wicked, bad, detestable child, I will smack you! I will!”

Sara went to them quietly. She did not know at all what she was going to do, but she had a vague inward conviction that it would be better not to say such different kinds of things quite so helplessly and excitedly.

“Miss Amelia,” she said in a low voice, “Miss Minchin says I may try to make her stop—may I?”

Miss Amelia turned and looked at her hopelessly. “Oh, DO you think you can?” she gasped.

“I don’t know whether I CAN”, answered Sara, still in her half-whisper; “but I will try.”

Miss Amelia stumbled up from her knees with a heavy sigh, and Lottie’s fat little legs kicked as hard as ever.

“If you will steal out of the room,” said Sara, “I will stay with her.”

“Oh, Sara!” almost whimpered Miss Amelia. “We never had such a dreadful child before. I don’t believe we can keep her.”

But she crept out of the room, and was very much relieved to find an excuse for doing it.

Sara stood by the howling furious child for a few moments, and looked down at her without saying anything. Then she sat down flat on the floor beside her and waited. Except for Lottie’s angry screams, the room was quite quiet. This was a new state of affairs for little Miss Legh, who was accustomed, when she screamed, to hear other people protest and implore and command and coax by turns. To lie and kick and shriek, and find the only person near you not seeming to mind in the least, attracted her attention. She opened her tight-shut streaming eyes to see who this person was. And it was only another little girl. But it was the one who owned Emily and all the nice things. And she was looking at her steadily and as if she was merely thinking. Having paused for a few seconds to find this out, Lottie thought she must begin again, but the quiet of the room and of Sara’s odd, interested face made her first howl rather half-hearted.

“I—haven’t—any—ma—ma—ma-a!” she announced; but her voice was not so strong.

Sara looked at her still more steadily, but with a sort of understanding in her eyes.

“Neither have I,” she said.

This was so unexpected that it was astounding. Lottie actually dropped her legs, gave a wriggle, and lay and stared. A new idea will stop a crying child when nothing else will. Also it was true that while Lottie disliked Miss Minchin, who was cross, and Miss Amelia, who was foolishly indulgent, she rather liked Sara, little as she knew her. She did not want to give up her grievance, but her thoughts were distracted from it, so she wriggled again, and, after a sulky sob, said, “Where is she?”

Sara paused a moment. Because she had been told that her mamma was in heaven, she had thought a great deal about the matter, and her thoughts had not been quite like those of other people.

“She went to heaven,” she said. “But I am sure she comes out sometimes to see me—though I don’t see her. So does yours. Perhaps they can both see us now. Perhaps they are both in this room.”

Lottie sat bolt upright, and looked about her. She was a pretty, little, curly-headed creature, and her round eyes were like wet forget-me-nots. If her mamma had seen her during the last half-hour, she might not have thought her the kind of child who ought to be related to an angel.

Sara went on talking. Perhaps some people might think that what she said was rather like a fairy story, but it was all so real to her own imagination that Lottie began to listen in spite of herself. She had been told that her mamma had wings and a crown, and she had been shown pictures of ladies in beautiful white nightgowns, who were said to be angels. But Sara seemed to be telling a real story about a lovely country where real people were.

“There are fields and fields of flowers,” she said, forgetting herself, as usual, when she began, and talking rather as if she were in a dream, “fields and fields of lilies—and when the soft wind blows over them it wafts the scent of them into the air—and everybody always breathes it, because the soft wind is always blowing. And little children run about in the lily fields and gather armfuls of them, and laugh and make little wreaths. And the streets are shining. And people are never tired, however far they walk. They can float anywhere they like. And there are walls made of pearl and gold all round the city, but they are low enough for the people to go and lean on them, and look down onto the earth and smile, and send beautiful messages.”

Whatsoever story she had begun to tell, Lottie would, no doubt, have stopped crying, and been fascinated into listening; but there was no denying that this story was prettier than most others. She dragged herself close to Sara, and drank in every word until the end came—far too soon. When it did come, she was so sorry that she put up her lip ominously.

“I want to go there,” she cried. “I—haven’t any mamma in this school.”

Sara saw the danger signal, and came out of her dream. She took hold of the chubby hand and pulled her close to her side with a coaxing little laugh.

“I will be your mamma,” she said. “We will play that you are my little girl. And Emily shall be your sister.”

Lottie’s dimples all began to show themselves.

“Shall she?” she said.

“Yes,” answered Sara, jumping to her feet. “Let us go and tell her. And then I will wash your face and brush your hair.”

To which Lottie agreed quite cheerfully, and trotted out of the room and upstairs with her, without seeming even to remember that the whole of the last hour’s tragedy had been caused by the fact that she had refused to be washed and brushed for lunch and Miss Minchin had been called in to use her majestic authority.

And from that time Sara was an adopted mother.

5

Becky

Of course the greatest power Sara possessed and the one which gained her even more followers than her luxuries and the fact that she was “the show pupil,” the power that Lavinia and certain other girls were most envious of, and at the same time most fascinated by in spite of themselves, was her power of telling stories and of making everything she talked about seem like a story, whether it was one or not.

Anyone who has been at school with a teller of stories knows what the wonder means—how he or she is followed about and besought in a whisper to relate romances; how groups gather round and hang on the outskirts of the favored party in the hope of being allowed to join in and listen. Sara not only could tell stories, but she adored telling them. When she sat or stood in the midst of a circle and began to invent wonderful things, her green eyes grew big and shining, her cheeks flushed, and, without knowing that she was doing it, she began to act and made what she told lovely or alarming by the raising or dropping of her voice, the bend and sway of her slim body, and the dramatic movement of her hands. She forgot that she was talking to listening children; she saw and lived with the fairy folk, or the kings and queens and beautiful ladies, whose adventures she was narrating. Sometimes when she had finished her story, she was quite out of breath with excitement, and would lay her hand on her thin, little, quick-rising chest, and half laugh as if at herself.

“When I am telling it,” she would say, “it doesn’t seem as if it was only made up. It seems more real than you are—more real than the schoolroom. I feel as if I were all the people in the story—one after the other. It is queer.”

She had been at Miss Minchin’s school about two years when, one foggy winter’s afternoon, as she was getting out of her carriage, comfortably wrapped up in her warmest velvets and furs and looking very much grander than she knew, she caught sight, as she crossed the pavement, of a dingy little figure standing on the area steps, and stretching its neck so that its wide-open eyes might peer at her through the railings. Something in the eagerness and timidity of the smudgy face made her look at it, and when she looked she smiled because it was her way to smile at people.

But the owner of the smudgy face and the wide-open eyes evidently was afraid that she ought not to have been caught looking at pupils of importance. She dodged out of sight like a jack-in-the-box and scurried back into the kitchen, disappearing so suddenly that if she had not been such a poor little forlorn thing, Sara would have laughed in spite of herself. That very evening, as Sara was sitting in the midst of a group of listeners in a corner of the schoolroom telling one of her stories, the very same figure timidly entered the room, carrying a coal box much too heavy for her, and knelt down upon the hearth rug to replenish the fire and sweep up the ashes.

She was cleaner than she had been when she peeped through the area railings, but she looked just as frightened. She was evidently afraid to look at the children or seem to be listening. She put on pieces of coal cautiously with her fingers so that she might make no disturbing noise, and she swept about the fire irons very softly. But Sara saw in two minutes that she was deeply interested in what was going on, and that she was doing her work slowly in the hope of catching a word here and there. And realizing this, she raised her voice and spoke more clearly.

“The Mermaids swam softly about in the crystal-green water, and dragged after them a fishing-net woven of deep-sea pearls,” she said. “The Princess sat on the white rock and watched them.”

It was a wonderful story about a princess who was loved by a Prince Merman, and went to live with him in shining caves under the sea.

The small drudge before the grate swept the hearth once and then swept it again. Having done it twice, she did it three times; and, as she was doing it the third time, the sound of the story so lured her to listen that she fell under the spell and actually forgot that she had no right to listen at all, and also forgot everything else. She sat down upon her heels as she knelt on the hearth rug, and the brush hung idly in her fingers. The voice of the storyteller went on and drew her with it into winding grottos under the sea, glowing with soft, clear blue light, and paved with pure golden sands. Strange sea flowers and grasses waved about her, and far away faint singing and music echoed.

The hearth brush fell from the work-roughened hand, and Lavinia Herbert looked round.

“That girl has been listening,” she said.

The culprit snatched up her brush, and scrambled to her feet. She caught at the coal box and simply scuttled out of the room like a frightened rabbit.

Sara felt rather hot-tempered.

“I knew she was listening,” she said. “Why shouldn’t she?”

Lavinia tossed her head with great elegance.

“Well,” she remarked, “I do not know whether your mamma would like you to tell stories to servant girls, but I know MY mamma wouldn’t like ME to do it.”

“My mamma!” said Sara, looking odd. “I don’t believe she would mind in the least. She knows that stories belong to everybody.”

“I thought,” retorted Lavinia, in severe recollection, “that your mamma was dead. How can she know things?”

“Do you think she DOESN’T know things?” said Sara, in her stern little voice. Sometimes she had a rather stern little voice.

“Sara’s mamma knows everything,” piped in Lottie. “So does my mamma—’cept Sara is my mamma at Miss Minchin’s—my other one knows everything. The streets are shining, and there are fields and fields of lilies, and everybody gathers them. Sara tells me when she puts me to bed.”

“You wicked thing,” said Lavinia, turning on Sara; “making fairy stories about heaven.”

“There are much more splendid stories in Revelation,” returned Sara. “Just look and see! How do you know mine are fairy stories? But I can tell you”—with a fine bit of unheavenly temper—”you will never find out whether they are or not if you’re not kinder to people than you are now. Come along, Lottie.” And she marched out of the room, rather hoping that she might see the little servant again somewhere, but she found no trace of her when she got into the hall.

“Who is that little girl who makes the fires?” she asked Mariette that night.

Mariette broke forth into a flow of description.

Ah, indeed, Mademoiselle Sara might well ask. She was a forlorn little thing who had just taken the place of scullery maid—though, as to being scullery maid, she was everything else besides. She blacked boots and grates, and carried heavy coal-scuttles up and down stairs, and scrubbed floors and cleaned windows, and was ordered about by everybody. She was fourteen years old, but was so stunted in growth that she looked about twelve. In truth, Mariette was sorry for her. She was so timid that if one chanced to speak to her it appeared as if her poor, frightened eyes would jump out of her head.

“What is her name?” asked Sara, who had sat by the table, with her chin on her hands, as she listened absorbedly to the recital.

Her name was Becky. Mariette heard everyone below-stairs calling, “Becky, do this,” and “Becky, do that,” every five minutes in the day.

Sara sat and looked into the fire, reflecting on Becky for some time after Mariette left her. She made up a story of which Becky was the ill-used heroine. She thought she looked as if she had never had quite enough to eat. Her very eyes were hungry. She hoped she should see her again, but though she caught sight of her carrying things up or down stairs on several occasions, she always seemed in such a hurry and so afraid of being seen that it was impossible to speak to her.

But a few weeks later, on another foggy afternoon, when she entered her sitting room she found herself confronting a rather pathetic picture. In her own special and pet easy-chair before the bright fire, Becky—with a coal smudge on her nose and several on her apron, with her poor little cap hanging half off her head, and an empty coal box on the floor near her—sat fast asleep, tired out beyond even the endurance of her hard-working young body. She had been sent up to put the bedrooms in order for the evening. There were a great many of them, and she had been running about all day. Sara’s rooms she had saved until the last. They were not like the other rooms, which were plain and bare. Ordinary pupils were expected to be satisfied with mere necessaries. Sara’s comfortable sitting room seemed a bower of luxury to the scullery maid, though it was, in fact, merely a nice, bright little room. But there were pictures and books in it, and curious things from India; there was a sofa and the low, soft chair; Emily sat in a chair of her own, with the air of a presiding goddess, and there was always a glowing fire and a polished grate. Becky saved it until the end of her afternoon’s work, because it rested her to go into it, and she always hoped to snatch a few minutes to sit down in the soft chair and look about her, and think about the wonderful good fortune of the child who owned such surroundings and who went out on the cold days in beautiful hats and coats one tried to catch a glimpse of through the area railing.

On this afternoon, when she had sat down, the sensation of relief to her short, aching legs had been so wonderful and delightful that it had seemed to soothe her whole body, and the glow of warmth and comfort from the fire had crept over her like a spell, until, as she looked at the red coals, a tired, slow smile stole over her smudged face, her head nodded forward without her being aware of it, her eyes drooped, and she fell fast asleep. She had really been only about ten minutes in the room when Sara entered, but she was in as deep a sleep as if she had been, like the Sleeping Beauty, slumbering for a hundred years. But she did not look—poor Becky—like a Sleeping Beauty at all. She looked only like an ugly, stunted, worn-out little scullery drudge.

Sara seemed as much unlike her as if she were a creature from another world.

On this particular afternoon she had been taking her dancing lesson, and the afternoon on which the dancing master appeared was rather a grand occasion at the seminary, though it occurred every week. The pupils were attired in their prettiest frocks, and as Sara danced particularly well, she was very much brought forward, and Mariette was requested to make her as diaphanous and fine as possible.

Today a frock the color of a rose had been put on her, and Mariette had bought some real buds and made her a wreath to wear on her black locks. She had been learning a new, delightful dance in which she had been skimming and flying about the room, like a large rose-colored butterfly, and the enjoyment and exercise had brought a brilliant, happy glow into her face.

When she entered the room, she floated in with a few of the butterfly steps—and there sat Becky, nodding her cap sideways off her head.

“Oh!” cried Sara, softly, when she saw her. “That poor thing!”

It did not occur to her to feel cross at finding her pet chair occupied by the small, dingy figure. To tell the truth, she was quite glad to find it there. When the ill-used heroine of her story wakened, she could talk to her. She crept toward her quietly, and stood looking at her. Becky gave a little snore.

“I wish she’d waken herself,” Sara said. “I don’t like to waken her. But Miss Minchin would be cross if she found out. I’ll just wait a few minutes.”

She took a seat on the edge of the table, and sat swinging her slim, rose-colored legs, and wondering what it would be best to do. Miss Amelia might come in at any moment, and if she did, Becky would be sure to be scolded.

“But she is so tired,” she thought. “She is so tired!”

A piece of flaming coal ended her perplexity for her that very moment. It broke off from a large lump and fell on to the fender. Becky started, and opened her eyes with a frightened gasp. She did not know she had fallen asleep. She had only sat down for one moment and felt the beautiful glow—and here she found herself staring in wild alarm at the wonderful pupil, who sat perched quite near her, like a rose-colored fairy, with interested eyes.

She sprang up and clutched at her cap. She felt it dangling over her ear, and tried wildly to put it straight. Oh, she had got herself into trouble now with a vengeance! To have impudently fallen asleep on such a young lady’s chair! She would be turned out of doors without wages.

She made a sound like a big breathless sob.

“Oh, miss! Oh, miss!” she stuttered. “I arst yer pardon, miss! Oh, I do, miss!”

Sara jumped down, and came quite close to her.

“Don’t be frightened,” she said, quite as if she had been speaking to a little girl like herself. “It doesn’t matter the least bit.”

“I didn’t go to do it, miss,” protested Becky. “It was the warm fire—an’ me bein’ so tired. It—it WASN’T impertience!”

Sara broke into a friendly little laugh, and put her hand on her shoulder.

“You were tired,” she said; “you could not help it. You are not really awake yet.”

How poor Becky stared at her! In fact, she had never heard such a nice, friendly sound in anyone’s voice before. She was used to being ordered about and scolded, and having her ears boxed. And this one—in her rose-colored dancing afternoon splendor—was looking at her as if she were not a culprit at all—as if she had a right to be tired—even to fall asleep! The touch of the soft, slim little paw on her shoulder was the most amazing thing she had ever known.

“Ain’t—ain’t yer angry, miss?” she gasped. “Ain’t yer goin’ to tell the missus?”

“No,” cried out Sara. “Of course I’m not.”

The woeful fright in the coal-smutted face made her suddenly so sorry that she could scarcely bear it. One of her queer thoughts rushed into her mind. She put her hand against Becky’s cheek.

“Why,” she said, “we are just the same—I am only a little girl like you. It’s just an accident that I am not you, and you are not me!”

Becky did not understand in the least. Her mind could not grasp such amazing thoughts, and “an accident” meant to her a calamity in which some one was run over or fell off a ladder and was carried to “the ‘orspital.”

“A’ accident, miss,” she fluttered respectfully. “Is it?”

“Yes,” Sara answered, and she looked at her dreamily for a moment. But the next she spoke in a different tone. She realized that Becky did not know what she meant.

“Have you done your work?” she asked. “Dare you stay here a few minutes?”

Becky lost her breath again.

“Here, miss? Me?”

Sara ran to the door, opened it, and looked out and listened.

“No one is anywhere about,” she explained. “If your bedrooms are finished, perhaps you might stay a tiny while. I thought—perhaps—you might like a piece of cake.”

The next ten minutes seemed to Becky like a sort of delirium. Sara opened a cupboard, and gave her a thick slice of cake. She seemed to rejoice when it was devoured in hungry bites. She talked and asked questions, and laughed until Becky’s fears actually began to calm themselves, and she once or twice gathered boldness enough to ask a question or so herself, daring as she felt it to be.

“Is that—” she ventured, looking longingly at the rose-colored frock. And she asked it almost in a whisper. “Is that there your best?”

“It is one of my dancing-frocks,” answered Sara. “I like it, don’t you?”

For a few seconds Becky was almost speechless with admiration. Then she said in an awed voice, “Onct I see a princess. I was standin’ in the street with the crowd outside Covin’ Garden, watchin’ the swells go inter the operer. An’ there was one everyone stared at most. They ses to each other, ‘That’s the princess.’ She was a growed-up young lady, but she was pink all over—gownd an’ cloak, an’ flowers an’ all. I called her to mind the minnit I see you, sittin’ there on the table, miss. You looked like her.”

“I’ve often thought,” said Sara, in her reflecting voice, “that I should like to be a princess; I wonder what it feels like. I believe I will begin pretending I am one.”

Becky stared at her admiringly, and, as before, did not understand her in the least. She watched her with a sort of adoration. Very soon Sara left her reflections and turned to her with a new question.

“Becky,” she said, “weren’t you listening to that story?”

“Yes, miss,” confessed Becky, a little alarmed again. “I knowed I hadn’t orter, but it was that beautiful I—I couldn’t help it.”

“I liked you to listen to it,” said Sara. “If you tell stories, you like nothing so much as to tell them to people who want to listen. I don’t know why it is. Would you like to hear the rest?”

Becky lost her breath again.

“Me hear it?” she cried. “Like as if I was a pupil, miss! All about the Prince—and the little white Mer-babies swimming about laughing—with stars in their hair?”

Sara nodded.

“You haven’t time to hear it now, I’m afraid,” she said; “but if you will tell me just what time you come to do my rooms, I will try to be here and tell you a bit of it every day until it is finished. It’s a lovely long one—and I’m always putting new bits to it.”

“Then,” breathed Becky, devoutly, “I wouldn’t mind HOW heavy the coal boxes was—or WHAT the cook done to me, if—if I might have that to think of.”

“You may,” said Sara. “I’ll tell it ALL to you.”

When Becky went downstairs, she was not the same Becky who had staggered up, loaded down by the weight of the coal scuttle. She had an extra piece of cake in her pocket, and she had been fed and warmed, but not only by cake and fire. Something else had warmed and fed her, and the something else was Sara.

When she was gone Sara sat on her favorite perch on the end of her table. Her feet were on a chair, her elbows on her knees, and her chin in her hands.

“If I WAS a princess—a REAL princess,” she murmured, “I could scatter largess to the populace. But even if I am only a pretend princess, I can invent little things to do for people. Things like this. She was just as happy as if it was largess. I’ll pretend that to do things people like is scattering largess. I’ve scattered largess.”

6

The Diamond Mines

Not very long after this a very exciting thing happened. Not only Sara, but the entire school, found it exciting, and made it the chief subject of conversation for weeks after it occurred. In one of his letters Captain Crewe told a most interesting story. A friend who had been at school with him when he was a boy had unexpectedly come to see him in India. He was the owner of a large tract of land upon which diamonds had been found, and he was engaged in developing the mines. If all went as was confidently expected, he would become possessed of such wealth as it made one dizzy to think of; and because he was fond of the friend of his school days, he had given him an opportunity to share in this enormous fortune by becoming a partner in his scheme. This, at least, was what Sara gathered from his letters. It is true that any other business scheme, however magnificent, would have had but small attraction for her or for the schoolroom; but “diamond mines” sounded so like the Arabian Nights that no one could be indifferent. Sara thought them enchanting, and painted pictures, for Ermengarde and Lottie, of labyrinthine passages in the bowels of the earth, where sparkling stones studded the walls and roofs and ceilings, and strange, dark men dug them out with heavy picks. Ermengarde delighted in the story, and Lottie insisted on its being retold to her every evening. Lavinia was very spiteful about it, and told Jessie that she didn’t believe such things as diamond mines existed.

“My mamma has a diamond ring which cost forty pounds,” she said. “And it is not a big one, either. If there were mines full of diamonds, people would be so rich it would be ridiculous.”

“Perhaps Sara will be so rich that she will be ridiculous,” giggled Jessie.

“She’s ridiculous without being rich,” Lavinia sniffed.

“I believe you hate her,” said Jessie.

“No, I don’t,” snapped Lavinia. “But I don’t believe in mines full of diamonds.”

“Well, people have to get them from somewhere,” said Jessie. “Lavinia,” with a new giggle, “what do you think Gertrude says?”

“I don’t know, I’m sure; and I don’t care if it’s something more about that everlasting Sara.”

“Well, it is. One of her ‘pretends’ is that she is a princess. She plays it all the time—even in school. She says it makes her learn her lessons better. She wants Ermengarde to be one, too, but Ermengarde says she is too fat.”

“She IS too fat,” said Lavinia. “And Sara is too thin.”

Naturally, Jessie giggled again.

“She says it has nothing to do with what you look like, or what you have. It has only to do with what you THINK of, and what you DO.”

“I suppose she thinks she could be a princess if she was a beggar,” said Lavinia. “Let us begin to call her Your Royal Highness.”

Lessons for the day were over, and they were sitting before the schoolroom fire, enjoying the time they liked best. It was the time when Miss Minchin and Miss Amelia were taking their tea in the sitting room sacred to themselves. At this hour a great deal of talking was done, and a great many secrets changed hands, particularly if the younger pupils behaved themselves well, and did not squabble or run about noisily, which it must be confessed they usually did. When they made an uproar the older girls usually interfered with scolding and shakes. They were expected to keep order, and there was danger that if they did not, Miss Minchin or Miss Amelia would appear and put an end to festivities. Even as Lavinia spoke the door opened and Sara entered with Lottie, whose habit was to trot everywhere after her like a little dog.

“There she is, with that horrid child!” exclaimed Lavinia in a whisper. “If she’s so fond of her, why doesn’t she keep her in her own room? She will begin howling about something in five minutes.”

It happened that Lottie had been seized with a sudden desire to play in the schoolroom, and had begged her adopted parent to come with her. She joined a group of little ones who were playing in a corner. Sara curled herself up in the window-seat, opened a book, and began to read. It was a book about the French Revolution, and she was soon lost in a harrowing picture of the prisoners in the Bastille—men who had spent so many years in dungeons that when they were dragged out by those who rescued them, their long, gray hair and beards almost hid their faces, and they had forgotten that an outside world existed at all, and were like beings in a dream.

She was so far away from the schoolroom that it was not agreeable to be dragged back suddenly by a howl from Lottie. Never did she find anything so difficult as to keep herself from losing her temper when she was suddenly disturbed while absorbed in a book. People who are fond of books know the feeling of irritation which sweeps over them at such a moment. The temptation to be unreasonable and snappish is one not easy to manage.

“It makes me feel as if someone had hit me,” Sara had told Ermengarde once in confidence. “And as if I want to hit back. I have to remember things quickly to keep from saying something ill-tempered.”

She had to remember things quickly when she laid her book on the window-seat and jumped down from her comfortable corner.

Lottie had been sliding across the schoolroom floor, and, having first irritated Lavinia and Jessie by making a noise, had ended by falling down and hurting her fat knee. She was screaming and dancing up and down in the midst of a group of friends and enemies, who were alternately coaxing and scolding her.

“Stop this minute, you cry-baby! Stop this minute!” Lavinia commanded.

“I’m not a cry-baby … I’m not!” wailed Lottie. “Sara, Sa—ra!”

“If she doesn’t stop, Miss Minchin will hear her,” cried Jessie. “Lottie darling, I’ll give you a penny!”

“I don’t want your penny,” sobbed Lottie; and she looked down at the fat knee, and, seeing a drop of blood on it, burst forth again.

Sara flew across the room and, kneeling down, put her arms round her.

“Now, Lottie,” she said. “Now, Lottie, you PROMISED Sara.”

“She said I was a cry-baby,” wept Lottie.

Sara patted her, but spoke in the steady voice Lottie knew.

“But if you cry, you will be one, Lottie pet. You PROMISED.” Lottie remembered that she had promised, but she preferred to lift up her voice.

“I haven’t any mamma,” she proclaimed. “I haven’t—a bit—of mamma.”

“Yes, you have,” said Sara, cheerfully. “Have you forgotten? Don’t you know that Sara is your mamma? Don’t you want Sara for your mamma?”

Lottie cuddled up to her with a consoled sniff.

“Come and sit in the window-seat with me,” Sara went on, “and I’ll whisper a story to you.”

“Will you?” whimpered Lottie. “Will you—tell me—about the diamond mines?”

“The diamond mines?” broke out Lavinia. “Nasty, little spoiled thing, I should like to SLAP her!”

Sara got up quickly on her feet. It must be remembered that she had been very deeply absorbed in the book about the Bastille, and she had had to recall several things rapidly when she realized that she must go and take care of her adopted child. She was not an angel, and she was not fond of Lavinia.

“Well,” she said, with some fire, “I should like to slap YOU—but I don’t want to slap you!” restraining herself. “At least I both want to slap you—and I should LIKE to slap you—but I WON’T slap you. We are not little gutter children. We are both old enough to know better.”

Here was Lavinia’s opportunity.

“Ah, yes, your royal highness,” she said. “We are princesses, I believe. At least one of us is. The school ought to be very fashionable now Miss Minchin has a princess for a pupil.”

Sara started toward her. She looked as if she were going to box her ears. Perhaps she was. Her trick of pretending things was the joy of her life. She never spoke of it to girls she was not fond of. Her new “pretend” about being a princess was very near to her heart, and she was shy and sensitive about it. She had meant it to be rather a secret, and here was Lavinia deriding it before nearly all the school. She felt the blood rush up into her face and tingle in her ears. She only just saved herself. If you were a princess, you did not fly into rages. Her hand dropped, and she stood quite still a moment. When she spoke it was in a quiet, steady voice; she held her head up, and everybody listened to her.

“It’s true,” she said. “Sometimes I do pretend I am a princess. I pretend I am a princess, so that I can try and behave like one.”

Lavinia could not think of exactly the right thing to say. Several times she had found that she could not think of a satisfactory reply when she was dealing with Sara. The reason for this was that, somehow, the rest always seemed to be vaguely in sympathy with her opponent. She saw now that they were pricking up their ears interestedly. The truth was, they liked princesses, and they all hoped they might hear something more definite about this one, and drew nearer Sara accordingly.

Lavinia could only invent one remark, and it fell rather flat.

“Dear me,” she said, “I hope, when you ascend the throne, you won’t forget us!”

“I won’t,” said Sara, and she did not utter another word, but stood quite still, and stared at her steadily as she saw her take Jessie’s arm and turn away.

After this, the girls who were jealous of her used to speak of her as “Princess Sara” whenever they wished to be particularly disdainful, and those who were fond of her gave her the name among themselves as a term of affection. No one called her “princess” instead of “Sara,” but her adorers were much pleased with the picturesqueness and grandeur of the title, and Miss Minchin, hearing of it, mentioned it more than once to visiting parents, feeling that it rather suggested a sort of royal boarding school.

To Becky it seemed the most appropriate thing in the world. The acquaintance begun on the foggy afternoon when she had jumped up terrified from her sleep in the comfortable chair, had ripened and grown, though it must be confessed that Miss Minchin and Miss Amelia knew very little about it. They were aware that Sara was “kind” to the scullery maid, but they knew nothing of certain delightful moments snatched perilously when, the upstairs rooms being set in order with lightning rapidity, Sara’s sitting room was reached, and the heavy coal box set down with a sigh of joy. At such times stories were told by installments, things of a satisfying nature were either produced and eaten or hastily tucked into pockets to be disposed of at night, when Becky went upstairs to her attic to bed.

“But I has to eat ’em careful, miss,” she said once; “‘cos if I leaves crumbs the rats come out to get ’em.”

“Rats!” exclaimed Sara, in horror. “Are there RATS there?”

“Lots of ’em, miss,” Becky answered in quite a matter-of-fact manner. “There mostly is rats an’ mice in attics. You gets used to the noise they makes scuttling about. I’ve got so I don’t mind ’em s’ long as they don’t run over my piller.”

“Ugh!” said Sara.

“You gets used to anythin’ after a bit,” said Becky. “You have to, miss, if you’re born a scullery maid. I’d rather have rats than cockroaches.”

“So would I,” said Sara; “I suppose you might make friends with a rat in time, but I don’t believe I should like to make friends with a cockroach.”

Sometimes Becky did not dare to spend more than a few minutes in the bright, warm room, and when this was the case perhaps only a few words could be exchanged, and a small purchase slipped into the old-fashioned pocket Becky carried under her dress skirt, tied round her waist with a band of tape. The search for and discovery of satisfying things to eat which could be packed into small compass, added a new interest to Sara’s existence. When she drove or walked out, she used to look into shop windows eagerly. The first time it occurred to her to bring home two or three little meat pies, she felt that she had hit upon a discovery. When she exhibited them, Becky’s eyes quite sparkled.

“Oh, miss!” she murmured. “Them will be nice an’ fillin.’ It’s fillin’ness that’s best. Sponge cake’s a ‘evenly thing, but it melts away like—if you understand, miss. These’ll just STAY in yer stummick.”

“Well,” hesitated Sara, “I don’t think it would be good if they stayed always, but I do believe they will be satisfying.”

They were satisfying—and so were beef sandwiches, bought at a cook-shop—and so were rolls and Bologna sausage. In time, Becky began to lose her hungry, tired feeling, and the coal box did not seem so unbearably heavy.

However heavy it was, and whatsoever the temper of the cook, and the hardness of the work heaped upon her shoulders, she had always the chance of the afternoon to look forward to—the chance that Miss Sara would be able to be in her sitting room. In fact, the mere seeing of Miss Sara would have been enough without meat pies. If there was time only for a few words, they were always friendly, merry words that put heart into one; and if there was time for more, then there was an installment of a story to be told, or some other thing one remembered afterward and sometimes lay awake in one’s bed in the attic to think over. Sara—who was only doing what she unconsciously liked better than anything else, Nature having made her for a giver—had not the least idea what she meant to poor Becky, and how wonderful a benefactor she seemed. If Nature has made you for a giver, your hands are born open, and so is your heart; and though there may be times when your hands are empty, your heart is always full, and you can give things out of that—warm things, kind things, sweet things—help and comfort and laughter—and sometimes gay, kind laughter is the best help of all.

Becky had scarcely known what laughter was through all her poor, little hard-driven life. Sara made her laugh, and laughed with her; and, though neither of them quite knew it, the laughter was as “fillin'” as the meat pies.

A few weeks before Sara’s eleventh birthday a letter came to her from her father, which did not seem to be written in such boyish high spirits as usual. He was not very well, and was evidently overweighted by the business connected with the diamond mines.

“You see, little Sara,” he wrote, “your daddy is not a businessman at all, and figures and documents bother him. He does not really understand them, and all this seems so enormous. Perhaps, if I was not feverish I should not be awake, tossing about, one half of the night and spend the other half in troublesome dreams. If my little missus were here, I dare say she would give me some solemn, good advice. You would, wouldn’t you, Little Missus?”

One of his many jokes had been to call her his “little missus” because she had such an old-fashioned air.

He had made wonderful preparations for her birthday. Among other things, a new doll had been ordered in Paris, and her wardrobe was to be, indeed, a marvel of splendid perfection. When she had replied to the letter asking her if the doll would be an acceptable present, Sara had been very quaint.

“I am getting very old,” she wrote; “you see, I shall never live to have another doll given me. This will be my last doll. There is something solemn about it. If I could write poetry, I am sure a poem about ‘A Last Doll’ would be very nice. But I cannot write poetry. I have tried, and it made me laugh. It did not sound like Watts or Coleridge or Shakespeare at all. No one could ever take Emily’s place, but I should respect the Last Doll very much; and I am sure the school would love it. They all like dolls, though some of the big ones—the almost fifteen ones—pretend they are too grown up.”

Captain Crewe had a splitting headache when he read this letter in his bungalow in India. The table before him was heaped with papers and letters which were alarming him and filling him with anxious dread, but he laughed as he had not laughed for weeks.

“Oh,” he said, “she’s better fun every year she lives. God grant this business may right itself and leave me free to run home and see her. What wouldn’t I give to have her little arms round my neck this minute! What WOULDN’T I give!”

The birthday was to be celebrated by great festivities. The schoolroom was to be decorated, and there was to be a party. The boxes containing the presents were to be opened with great ceremony, and there was to be a glittering feast spread in Miss Minchin’s sacred room. When the day arrived the whole house was in a whirl of excitement. How the morning passed nobody quite knew, because there seemed such preparations to be made. The schoolroom was being decked with garlands of holly; the desks had been moved away, and red covers had been put on the forms which were arrayed round the room against the wall.

When Sara went into her sitting room in the morning, she found on the table a small, dumpy package, tied up in a piece of brown paper. She knew it was a present, and she thought she could guess whom it came from. She opened it quite tenderly. It was a square pincushion, made of not quite clean red flannel, and black pins had been stuck carefully into it to form the words, “Menny hapy returns.”

“Oh!” cried Sara, with a warm feeling in her heart. “What pains she has taken! I like it so, it—it makes me feel sorrowful.”

But the next moment she was mystified. On the under side of the pincushion was secured a card, bearing in neat letters the name “Miss Amelia Minchin.”

Sara turned it over and over.

“Miss Amelia!” she said to herself “How CAN it be!”

And just at that very moment she heard the door being cautiously pushed open and saw Becky peeping round it.

There was an affectionate, happy grin on her face, and she shuffled forward and stood nervously pulling at her fingers.

“Do yer like it, Miss Sara?” she said. “Do yer?”

“Like it?” cried Sara. “You darling Becky, you made it all yourself.”

Becky gave a hysteric but joyful sniff, and her eyes looked quite moist with delight.

“It ain’t nothin’ but flannin, an’ the flannin ain’t new; but I wanted to give yer somethin’ an’ I made it of nights. I knew yer could PRETEND it was satin with diamond pins in. _I_ tried to when I was makin’ it. The card, miss,” rather doubtfully; “‘t warn’t wrong of me to pick it up out o’ the dust-bin, was it? Miss ‘Meliar had throwed it away. I hadn’t no card o’ my own, an’ I knowed it wouldn’t be a proper presink if I didn’t pin a card on—so I pinned Miss ‘Meliar’s.”

Sara flew at her and hugged her. She could not have told herself or anyone else why there was a lump in her throat.

“Oh, Becky!” she cried out, with a queer little laugh, “I love you, Becky—I do, I do!”

“Oh, miss!” breathed Becky. “Thank yer, miss, kindly; it ain’t good enough for that. The—the flannin wasn’t new.”

7

The Diamond Mines Again

When Sara entered the holly-hung schoolroom in the afternoon, she did so as the head of a sort of procession. Miss Minchin, in her grandest silk dress, led her by the hand. A manservant followed, carrying the box containing the Last Doll, a housemaid carried a second box, and Becky brought up the rear, carrying a third and wearing a clean apron and a new cap. Sara would have much preferred to enter in the usual way, but Miss Minchin had sent for her, and, after an interview in her private sitting room, had expressed her wishes.

“This is not an ordinary occasion,” she said. “I do not desire that it should be treated as one.”

So Sara was led grandly in and felt shy when, on her entry, the big girls stared at her and touched each other’s elbows, and the little ones began to squirm joyously in their seats.

“Silence, young ladies!” said Miss Minchin, at the murmur which arose. “James, place the box on the table and remove the lid. Emma, put yours upon a chair. Becky!” suddenly and severely.

Becky had quite forgotten herself in her excitement, and was grinning at Lottie, who was wriggling with rapturous expectation. She almost dropped her box, the disapproving voice so startled her, and her frightened, bobbing curtsy of apology was so funny that Lavinia and Jessie tittered.

“It is not your place to look at the young ladies,” said Miss Minchin. “You forget yourself. Put your box down.”

Becky obeyed with alarmed haste and hastily backed toward the door.

“You may leave us,” Miss Minchin announced to the servants with a wave of her hand.

Becky stepped aside respectfully to allow the superior servants to pass out first. She could not help casting a longing glance at the box on the table. Something made of blue satin was peeping from between the folds of tissue paper.

“If you please, Miss Minchin,” said Sara, suddenly, “mayn’t Becky stay?”

It was a bold thing to do. Miss Minchin was betrayed into something like a slight jump. Then she put her eyeglass up, and gazed at her show pupil disturbedly.

“Becky!” she exclaimed. “My dearest Sara!”

Sara advanced a step toward her.

“I want her because I know she will like to see the presents,” she explained. “She is a little girl, too, you know.”

Miss Minchin was scandalized. She glanced from one figure to the other.

“My dear Sara,” she said, “Becky is the scullery maid. Scullery maids—er—are not little girls.”

It really had not occurred to her to think of them in that light. Scullery maids were machines who carried coal scuttles and made fires.

“But Becky is,” said Sara. “And I know she would enjoy herself. Please let her stay—because it is my birthday.”

Miss Minchin replied with much dignity:

“As you ask it as a birthday favor—she may stay. Rebecca, thank Miss Sara for her great kindness.”

Becky had been backing into the corner, twisting the hem of her apron in delighted suspense. She came forward, bobbing curtsies, but between Sara’s eyes and her own there passed a gleam of friendly understanding, while her words tumbled over each other.

“Oh, if you please, miss! I’m that grateful, miss! I did want to see the doll, miss, that I did. Thank you, miss. And thank you, ma’am,”—turning and making an alarmed bob to Miss Minchin—”for letting me take the liberty.”

Miss Minchin waved her hand again—this time it was in the direction of the corner near the door.

“Go and stand there,” she commanded. “Not too near the young ladies.”

Becky went to her place, grinning. She did not care where she was sent, so that she might have the luck of being inside the room, instead of being downstairs in the scullery, while these delights were going on. She did not even mind when Miss Minchin cleared her throat ominously and spoke again.

“Now, young ladies, I have a few words to say to you,” she announced.

“She’s going to make a speech,” whispered one of the girls. “I wish it was over.”

Sara felt rather uncomfortable. As this was her party, it was probable that the speech was about her. It is not agreeable to stand in a schoolroom and have a speech made about you.

“You are aware, young ladies,” the speech began—for it was a speech—”that dear Sara is eleven years old today.”

“DEAR Sara!” murmured Lavinia.

“Several of you here have also been eleven years old, but Sara’s birthdays are rather different from other little girls’ birthdays. When she is older she will be heiress to a large fortune, which it will be her duty to spend in a meritorious manner.”

“The diamond mines,” giggled Jessie, in a whisper.

Sara did not hear her; but as she stood with her green-gray eyes fixed steadily on Miss Minchin, she felt herself growing rather hot. When Miss Minchin talked about money, she felt somehow that she always hated her—and, of course, it was disrespectful to hate grown-up people.

“When her dear papa, Captain Crewe, brought her from India and gave her into my care,” the speech proceeded, “he said to me, in a jesting way, ‘I am afraid she will be very rich, Miss Minchin.’ My reply was, ‘Her education at my seminary, Captain Crewe, shall be such as will adorn the largest fortune.’ Sara has become my most accomplished pupil. Her French and her dancing are a credit to the seminary. Her manners—which have caused you to call her Princess Sara—are perfect. Her amiability she exhibits by giving you this afternoon’s party. I hope you appreciate her generosity. I wish you to express your appreciation of it by saying aloud all together, ‘Thank you, Sara!'”

The entire schoolroom rose to its feet as it had done the morning Sara remembered so well.

“Thank you, Sara!” it said, and it must be confessed that Lottie jumped up and down. Sara looked rather shy for a moment. She made a curtsy—and it was a very nice one.

“Thank you,” she said, “for coming to my party.”

“Very pretty, indeed, Sara,” approved Miss Minchin. “That is what a real princess does when the populace applauds her. Lavinia”—scathingly—”the sound you just made was extremely like a snort. If you are jealous of your fellow-pupil, I beg you will express your feelings in some more lady-like manner. Now I will leave you to enjoy yourselves.”

The instant she had swept out of the room the spell her presence always had upon them was broken. The door had scarcely closed before every seat was empty. The little girls jumped or tumbled out of theirs; the older ones wasted no time in deserting theirs. There was a rush toward the boxes. Sara had bent over one of them with a delighted face.

“These are books, I know,” she said.

The little children broke into a rueful murmur, and Ermengarde looked aghast.

“Does your papa send you books for a birthday present?” she exclaimed. “Why, he’s as bad as mine. Don’t open them, Sara.”

“I like them,” Sara laughed, but she turned to the biggest box. When she took out the Last Doll it was so magnificent that the children uttered delighted groans of joy, and actually drew back to gaze at it in breathless rapture.

“She is almost as big as Lottie,” someone gasped.

Lottie clapped her hands and danced about, giggling.

“She’s dressed for the theater,” said Lavinia. “Her cloak is lined with ermine.”

“Oh,” cried Ermengarde, darting forward, “she has an opera-glass in her hand—a blue-and-gold one!”

“Here is her trunk,” said Sara. “Let us open it and look at her things.”

She sat down upon the floor and turned the key. The children crowded clamoring around her, as she lifted tray after tray and revealed their contents. Never had the schoolroom been in such an uproar. There were lace collars and silk stockings and handkerchiefs; there was a jewel case containing a necklace and a tiara which looked quite as if they were made of real diamonds; there was a long sealskin and muff, there were ball dresses and walking dresses and visiting dresses; there were hats and tea gowns and fans. Even Lavinia and Jessie forgot that they were too elderly to care for dolls, and uttered exclamations of delight and caught up things to look at them.

“Suppose,” Sara said, as she stood by the table, putting a large, black-velvet hat on the impassively smiling owner of all these splendors—”suppose she understands human talk and feels proud of being admired.”

“You are always supposing things,” said Lavinia, and her air was very superior.

“I know I am,” answered Sara, undisturbedly. “I like it. There is nothing so nice as supposing. It’s almost like being a fairy. If you suppose anything hard enough it seems as if it were real.”

“It’s all very well to suppose things if you have everything,” said Lavinia. “Could you suppose and pretend if you were a beggar and lived in a garret?”

Sara stopped arranging the Last Doll’s ostrich plumes, and looked thoughtful.

“I BELIEVE I could,” she said. “If one was a beggar, one would have to suppose and pretend all the time. But it mightn’t be easy.”

She often thought afterward how strange it was that just as she had finished saying this—just at that very moment—Miss Amelia came into the room.

“Sara,” she said, “your papa’s solicitor, Mr. Barrow, has called to see Miss Minchin, and, as she must talk to him alone and the refreshments are laid in her parlor, you had all better come and have your feast now, so that my sister can have her interview here in the schoolroom.”

Refreshments were not likely to be disdained at any hour, and many pairs of eyes gleamed. Miss Amelia arranged the procession into decorum, and then, with Sara at her side heading it, she led it away, leaving the Last Doll sitting upon a chair with the glories of her wardrobe scattered about her; dresses and coats hung upon chair backs, piles of lace-frilled petticoats lying upon their seats.

Becky, who was not expected to partake of refreshments, had the indiscretion to linger a moment to look at these beauties—it really was an indiscretion.

“Go back to your work, Becky,” Miss Amelia had said; but she had stopped to pick up reverently first a muff and then a coat, and while she stood looking at them adoringly, she heard Miss Minchin upon the threshold, and, being smitten with terror at the thought of being accused of taking liberties, she rashly darted under the table, which hid her by its tablecloth.

Miss Minchin came into the room, accompanied by a sharp-featured, dry little gentleman, who looked rather disturbed. Miss Minchin herself also looked rather disturbed, it must be admitted, and she gazed at the dry little gentleman with an irritated and puzzled expression.

She sat down with stiff dignity, and waved him to a chair.

“Pray, be seated, Mr. Barrow,” she said.

Mr. Barrow did not sit down at once. His attention seemed attracted by the Last Doll and the things which surrounded her. He settled his eyeglasses and looked at them in nervous disapproval. The Last Doll herself did not seem to mind this in the least. She merely sat upright and returned his gaze indifferently.

“A hundred pounds,” Mr. Barrow remarked succinctly. “All expensive material, and made at a Parisian modiste’s. He spent money lavishly enough, that young man.”

Miss Minchin felt offended. This seemed to be a disparagement of her best patron and was a liberty.

Even solicitors had no right to take liberties.

“I beg your pardon, Mr. Barrow,” she said stiffly. “I do not understand.”

“Birthday presents,” said Mr. Barrow in the same critical manner, “to a child eleven years old! Mad extravagance, I call it.”

Miss Minchin drew herself up still more rigidly.

“Captain Crewe is a man of fortune,” she said. “The diamond mines alone—”

Mr. Barrow wheeled round upon her. “Diamond mines!” he broke out. “There are none! Never were!”

Miss Minchin actually got up from her chair.

“What!” she cried. “What do you mean?”

“At any rate,” answered Mr. Barrow, quite snappishly, “it would have been much better if there never had been any.”

“Any diamond mines?” ejaculated Miss Minchin, catching at the back of a chair and feeling as if a splendid dream was fading away from her.

“Diamond mines spell ruin oftener than they spell wealth,” said Mr. Barrow. “When a man is in the hands of a very dear friend and is not a businessman himself, he had better steer clear of the dear friend’s diamond mines, or gold mines, or any other kind of mines dear friends want his money to put into. The late Captain Crewe—”

Here Miss Minchin stopped him with a gasp.

“The LATE Captain Crewe!” she cried out. “The LATE! You don’t come to tell me that Captain Crewe is—”

“He’s dead, ma’am,” Mr. Barrow answered with jerky brusqueness. “Died of jungle fever and business troubles combined. The jungle fever might not have killed him if he had not been driven mad by the business troubles, and the business troubles might not have put an end to him if the jungle fever had not assisted. Captain Crewe is dead!”

Miss Minchin dropped into her chair again. The words he had spoken filled her with alarm.

“What WERE his business troubles?” she said. “What WERE they?”

“Diamond mines,” answered Mr. Barrow, “and dear friends—and ruin.”

Miss Minchin lost her breath.

“Ruin!” she gasped out.

“Lost every penny. That young man had too much money. The dear friend was mad on the subject of the diamond mine. He put all his own money into it, and all Captain Crewe’s. Then the dear friend ran away—Captain Crewe was already stricken with fever when the news came. The shock was too much for him. He died delirious, raving about his little girl—and didn’t leave a penny.”

Now Miss Minchin understood, and never had she received such a blow in her life. Her show pupil, her show patron, swept away from the Select Seminary at one blow. She felt as if she had been outraged and robbed, and that Captain Crewe and Sara and Mr. Barrow were equally to blame.

“Do you mean to tell me,” she cried out, “that he left NOTHING! That Sara will have no fortune! That the child is a beggar! That she is left on my hands a little pauper instead of an heiress?”

Mr. Barrow was a shrewd businessman, and felt it as well to make his own freedom from responsibility quite clear without any delay.

“She is certainly left a beggar,” he replied. “And she is certainly left on your hands, ma’am—as she hasn’t a relation in the world that we know of.”

Miss Minchin started forward. She looked as if she was going to open the door and rush out of the room to stop the festivities going on joyfully and rather noisily that moment over the refreshments.

“It is monstrous!” she said. “She’s in my sitting room at this moment, dressed in silk gauze and lace petticoats, giving a party at my expense.”

“She’s giving it at your expense, madam, if she’s giving it,” said Mr. Barrow, calmly. “Barrow & Skipworth are not responsible for anything. There never was a cleaner sweep made of a man’s fortune. Captain Crewe died without paying OUR last bill—and it was a big one.”

Miss Minchin turned back from the door in increased indignation. This was worse than anyone could have dreamed of its being.

“That is what has happened to me!” she cried. “I was always so sure of his payments that I went to all sorts of ridiculous expenses for the child. I paid the bills for that ridiculous doll and her ridiculous fantastic wardrobe. The child was to have anything she wanted. She has a carriage and a pony and a maid, and I’ve paid for all of them since the last cheque came.”

Mr. Barrow evidently did not intend to remain to listen to the story of Miss Minchin’s grievances after he had made the position of his firm clear and related the mere dry facts. He did not feel any particular sympathy for irate keepers of boarding schools.

“You had better not pay for anything more, ma’am,” he remarked, “unless you want to make presents to the young lady. No one will remember you. She hasn’t a brass farthing to call her own.”

“But what am I to do?” demanded Miss Minchin, as if she felt it entirely his duty to make the matter right. “What am I to do?”

“There isn’t anything to do,” said Mr. Barrow, folding up his eyeglasses and slipping them into his pocket. “Captain Crewe is dead. The child is left a pauper. Nobody is responsible for her but you.”

“I am not responsible for her, and I refuse to be made responsible!”

Miss Minchin became quite white with rage.

Mr. Barrow turned to go.

“I have nothing to do with that, madam,” he said uninterestedly. “Barrow & Skipworth are not responsible. Very sorry the thing has happened, of course.”

“If you think she is to be foisted off on me, you are greatly mistaken,” Miss Minchin gasped. “I have been robbed and cheated; I will turn her into the street!”

If she had not been so furious, she would have been too discreet to say quite so much. She saw herself burdened with an extravagantly brought-up child whom she had always resented, and she lost all self-control.

Mr. Barrow undisturbedly moved toward the door.

“I wouldn’t do that, madam,” he commented; “it wouldn’t look well. Unpleasant story to get about in connection with the establishment. Pupil bundled out penniless and without friends.”

He was a clever business man, and he knew what he was saying. He also knew that Miss Minchin was a business woman, and would be shrewd enough to see the truth. She could not afford to do a thing which would make people speak of her as cruel and hard-hearted.

“Better keep her and make use of her,” he added. “She’s a clever child, I believe. You can get a good deal out of her as she grows older.”

“I will get a good deal out of her before she grows older!” exclaimed Miss Minchin.

“I am sure you will, ma’am,” said Mr. Barrow, with a little sinister smile. “I am sure you will. Good morning!”

He bowed himself out and closed the door, and it must be confessed that Miss Minchin stood for a few moments and glared at it. What he had said was quite true. She knew it. She had absolutely no redress. Her show pupil had melted into nothingness, leaving only a friendless, beggared little girl. Such money as she herself had advanced was lost and could not be regained.

And as she stood there breathless under her sense of injury, there fell upon her ears a burst of gay voices from her own sacred room, which had actually been given up to the feast. She could at least stop this.

But as she started toward the door it was opened by Miss Amelia, who, when she caught sight of the changed, angry face, fell back a step in alarm.

“What IS the matter, sister?” she ejaculated.

Miss Minchin’s voice was almost fierce when she answered:

“Where is Sara Crewe?”

Miss Amelia was bewildered.

“Sara!” she stammered. “Why, she’s with the children in your room, of course.”

“Has she a black frock in her sumptuous wardrobe?”—in bitter irony.

“A black frock?” Miss Amelia stammered again. “A BLACK one?”

“She has frocks of every other color. Has she a black one?”

Miss Amelia began to turn pale.

“No—ye-es!” she said. “But it is too short for her. She has only the old black velvet, and she has outgrown it.”

“Go and tell her to take off that preposterous pink silk gauze, and put the black one on, whether it is too short or not. She has done with finery!”

Then Miss Amelia began to wring her fat hands and cry.

“Oh, sister!” she sniffed. “Oh, sister! What CAN have happened?”

Miss Minchin wasted no words.

“Captain Crewe is dead,” she said. “He has died without a penny. That spoiled, pampered, fanciful child is left a pauper on my hands.”

Miss Amelia sat down quite heavily in the nearest chair.

“Hundreds of pounds have I spent on nonsense for her. And I shall never see a penny of it. Put a stop to this ridiculous party of hers. Go and make her change her frock at once.”

“I?” panted Miss Amelia. “M-must I go and tell her now?”

“This moment!” was the fierce answer. “Don’t sit staring like a goose. Go!”

Poor Miss Amelia was accustomed to being called a goose. She knew, in fact, that she was rather a goose, and that it was left to geese to do a great many disagreeable things. It was a somewhat embarrassing thing to go into the midst of a room full of delighted children, and tell the giver of the feast that she had suddenly been transformed into a little beggar, and must go upstairs and put on an old black frock which was too small for her. But the thing must be done. This was evidently not the time when questions might be asked.

She rubbed her eyes with her handkerchief until they looked quite red. After which she got up and went out of the room, without venturing to say another word. When her older sister looked and spoke as she had done just now, the wisest course to pursue was to obey orders without any comment. Miss Minchin walked across the room. She spoke to herself aloud without knowing that she was doing it. During the last year the story of the diamond mines had suggested all sorts of possibilities to her. Even proprietors of seminaries might make fortunes in stocks, with the aid of owners of mines. And now, instead of looking forward to gains, she was left to look back upon losses.

“The Princess Sara, indeed!” she said. “The child has been pampered as if she were a QUEEN.” She was sweeping angrily past the corner table as she said it, and the next moment she started at the sound of a loud, sobbing sniff which issued from under the cover.

“What is that!” she exclaimed angrily. The loud, sobbing sniff was heard again, and she stooped and raised the hanging folds of the table cover.

“How DARE you!” she cried out. “How dare you! Come out immediately!”

It was poor Becky who crawled out, and her cap was knocked on one side, and her face was red with repressed crying.

“If you please, ‘m—it’s me, mum,” she explained. “I know I hadn’t ought to. But I was lookin’ at the doll, mum—an’ I was frightened when you come in—an’ slipped under the table.”

“You have been there all the time, listening,” said Miss Minchin.

“No, mum,” Becky protested, bobbing curtsies. “Not listenin’—I thought I could slip out without your noticin’, but I couldn’t an’ I had to stay. But I didn’t listen, mum—I wouldn’t for nothin’. But I couldn’t help hearin’.”

Suddenly it seemed almost as if she lost all fear of the awful lady before her. She burst into fresh tears.

“Oh, please, ‘m,” she said; “I dare say you’ll give me warnin, mum—but I’m so sorry for poor Miss Sara—I’m so sorry!”

“Leave the room!” ordered Miss Minchin.

Becky curtsied again, the tears openly streaming down her cheeks.

“Yes, ‘m; I will, ‘m,” she said, trembling; “but oh, I just wanted to arst you: Miss Sara—she’s been such a rich young lady, an’ she’s been waited on, ‘and and foot; an’ what will she do now, mum, without no maid? If—if, oh please, would you let me wait on her after I’ve done my pots an’ kettles? I’d do ’em that quick—if you’d let me wait on her now she’s poor. Oh,” breaking out afresh, “poor little Miss Sara, mum—that was called a princess.”

Somehow, she made Miss Minchin feel more angry than ever. That the very scullery maid should range herself on the side of this child—whom she realized more fully than ever that she had never liked—was too much. She actually stamped her foot.

“No—certainly not,” she said. “She will wait on herself, and on other people, too. Leave the room this instant, or you’ll leave your place.”

Becky threw her apron over her head and fled. She ran out of the room and down the steps into the scullery, and there she sat down among her pots and kettles, and wept as if her heart would break.

“It’s exactly like the ones in the stories,” she wailed. “Them pore princess ones that was drove into the world.”

Miss Minchin had never looked quite so still and hard as she did when Sara came to her, a few hours later, in response to a message she had sent her.

Even by that time it seemed to Sara as if the birthday party had either been a dream or a thing which had happened years ago, and had happened in the life of quite another little girl.

Every sign of the festivities had been swept away; the holly had been removed from the schoolroom walls, and the forms and desks put back into their places. Miss Minchin’s sitting room looked as it always did—all traces of the feast were gone, and Miss Minchin had resumed her usual dress. The pupils had been ordered to lay aside their party frocks; and this having been done, they had returned to the schoolroom and huddled together in groups, whispering and talking excitedly.

“Tell Sara to come to my room,” Miss Minchin had said to her sister. “And explain to her clearly that I will have no crying or unpleasant scenes.”

“Sister,” replied Miss Amelia, “she is the strangest child I ever saw. She has actually made no fuss at all. You remember she made none when Captain Crewe went back to India. When I told her what had happened, she just stood quite still and looked at me without making a sound. Her eyes seemed to get bigger and bigger, and she went quite pale. When I had finished, she still stood staring for a few seconds, and then her chin began to shake, and she turned round and ran out of the room and upstairs. Several of the other children began to cry, but she did not seem to hear them or to be alive to anything but just what I was saying. It made me feel quite queer not to be answered; and when you tell anything sudden and strange, you expect people will say SOMETHING—whatever it is.”

Nobody but Sara herself ever knew what had happened in her room after she had run upstairs and locked her door. In fact, she herself scarcely remembered anything but that she walked up and down, saying over and over again to herself in a voice which did not seem her own, “My papa is dead! My papa is dead!”

Once she stopped before Emily, who sat watching her from her chair, and cried out wildly, “Emily! Do you hear? Do you hear—papa is dead? He is dead in India—thousands of miles away.”

When she came into Miss Minchin’s sitting room in answer to her summons, her face was white and her eyes had dark rings around them. Her mouth was set as if she did not wish it to reveal what she had suffered and was suffering. She did not look in the least like the rose-colored butterfly child who had flown about from one of her treasures to the other in the decorated schoolroom. She looked instead a strange, desolate, almost grotesque little figure.

She had put on, without Mariette’s help, the cast-aside black-velvet frock. It was too short and tight, and her slender legs looked long and thin, showing themselves from beneath the brief skirt. As she had not found a piece of black ribbon, her short, thick, black hair tumbled loosely about her face and contrasted strongly with its pallor. She held Emily tightly in one arm, and Emily was swathed in a piece of black material.

“Put down your doll,” said Miss Minchin. “What do you mean by bringing her here?”

“No,” Sara answered. “I will not put her down. She is all I have. My papa gave her to me.”

She had always made Miss Minchin feel secretly uncomfortable, and she did so now. She did not speak with rudeness so much as with a cold steadiness with which Miss Minchin felt it difficult to cope—perhaps because she knew she was doing a heartless and inhuman thing.

“You will have no time for dolls in future,” she said. “You will have to work and improve yourself and make yourself useful.”

Sara kept her big, strange eyes fixed on her, and said not a word.

“Everything will be very different now,” Miss Minchin went on. “I suppose Miss Amelia has explained matters to you.”

“Yes,” answered Sara. “My papa is dead. He left me no money. I am quite poor.”

“You are a beggar,” said Miss Minchin, her temper rising at the recollection of what all this meant. “It appears that you have no relations and no home, and no one to take care of you.”

For a moment the thin, pale little face twitched, but Sara again said nothing.

“What are you staring at?” demanded Miss Minchin, sharply. “Are you so stupid that you cannot understand? I tell you that you are quite alone in the world, and have no one to do anything for you, unless I choose to keep you here out of charity.”

“I understand,” answered Sara, in a low tone; and there was a sound as if she had gulped down something which rose in her throat. “I understand.”

“That doll,” cried Miss Minchin, pointing to the splendid birthday gift seated near—”that ridiculous doll, with all her nonsensical, extravagant things—I actually paid the bill for her!”

Sara turned her head toward the chair.

“The Last Doll,” she said. “The Last Doll.” And her little mournful voice had an odd sound.

“The Last Doll, indeed!” said Miss Minchin. “And she is mine, not yours. Everything you own is mine.”

“Please take it away from me, then,” said Sara. “I do not want it.”

If she had cried and sobbed and seemed frightened, Miss Minchin might almost have had more patience with her. She was a woman who liked to domineer and feel her power, and as she looked at Sara’s pale little steadfast face and heard her proud little voice, she quite felt as if her might was being set at naught.

“Don’t put on grand airs,” she said. “The time for that sort of thing is past. You are not a princess any longer. Your carriage and your pony will be sent away—your maid will be dismissed. You will wear your oldest and plainest clothes—your extravagant ones are no longer suited to your station. You are like Becky—you must work for your living.”

To her surprise, a faint gleam of light came into the child’s eyes—a shade of relief.

“Can I work?” she said. “If I can work it will not matter so much. What can I do?”

“You can do anything you are told,” was the answer. “You are a sharp child, and pick up things readily. If you make yourself useful I may let you stay here. You speak French well, and you can help with the younger children.”

“May I?” exclaimed Sara. “Oh, please let me! I know I can teach them. I like them, and they like me.”

“Don’t talk nonsense about people liking you,” said Miss Minchin. “You will have to do more than teach the little ones. You will run errands and help in the kitchen as well as in the schoolroom. If you don’t please me, you will be sent away. Remember that. Now go.”

Sara stood still just a moment, looking at her. In her young soul, she was thinking deep and strange things. Then she turned to leave the room.

“Stop!” said Miss Minchin. “Don’t you intend to thank me?”

Sara paused, and all the deep, strange thoughts surged up in her breast.

“What for?” she said.

“For my kindness to you,” replied Miss Minchin. “For my kindness in giving you a home.”

Sara made two or three steps toward her. Her thin little chest heaved up and down, and she spoke in a strange un-childishly fierce way.

“You are not kind,” she said. “You are NOT kind, and it is NOT a home.” And she had turned and run out of the room before Miss Minchin could stop her or do anything but stare after her with stony anger.

She went up the stairs slowly, but panting for breath and she held Emily tightly against her side.

“I wish she could talk,” she said to herself. “If she could speak—if she could speak!”

She meant to go to her room and lie down on the tiger-skin, with her cheek upon the great cat’s head, and look into the fire and think and think and think. But just before she reached the landing Miss Amelia came out of the door and closed it behind her, and stood before it, looking nervous and awkward. The truth was that she felt secretly ashamed of the thing she had been ordered to do.

“You—you are not to go in there,” she said.

“Not go in?” exclaimed Sara, and she fell back a pace.

“That is not your room now,” Miss Amelia answered, reddening a little.

Somehow, all at once, Sara understood. She realized that this was the beginning of the change Miss Minchin had spoken of.

“Where is my room?” she asked, hoping very much that her voice did not shake.

“You are to sleep in the attic next to Becky.”

Sara knew where it was. Becky had told her about it. She turned, and mounted up two flights of stairs. The last one was narrow, and covered with shabby strips of old carpet. She felt as if she were walking away and leaving far behind her the world in which that other child, who no longer seemed herself, had lived. This child, in her short, tight old frock, climbing the stairs to the attic, was quite a different creature.

When she reached the attic door and opened it, her heart gave a dreary little thump. Then she shut the door and stood against it and looked about her.

Yes, this was another world. The room had a slanting roof and was whitewashed. The whitewash was dingy and had fallen off in places. There was a rusty grate, an old iron bedstead, and a hard bed covered with a faded coverlet. Some pieces of furniture too much worn to be used downstairs had been sent up. Under the skylight in the roof, which showed nothing but an oblong piece of dull gray sky, there stood an old battered red footstool. Sara went to it and sat down. She seldom cried. She did not cry now. She laid Emily across her knees and put her face down upon her and her arms around her, and sat there, her little black head resting on the black draperies, not saying one word, not making one sound.

And as she sat in this silence there came a low tap at the door—such a low, humble one that she did not at first hear it, and, indeed, was not roused until the door was timidly pushed open and a poor tear-smeared face appeared peeping round it. It was Becky’s face, and Becky had been crying furtively for hours and rubbing her eyes with her kitchen apron until she looked strange indeed.

“Oh, miss,” she said under her breath. “Might I—would you allow me—jest to come in?”

Sara lifted her head and looked at her. She tried to begin a smile, and somehow she could not. Suddenly—and it was all through the loving mournfulness of Becky’s streaming eyes—her face looked more like a child’s not so much too old for her years. She held out her hand and gave a little sob.

“Oh, Becky,” she said. “I told you we were just the same—only two little girls—just two little girls. You see how true it is. There’s no difference now. I’m not a princess anymore.”

Becky ran to her and caught her hand, and hugged it to her breast, kneeling beside her and sobbing with love and pain.

“Yes, miss, you are,” she cried, and her words were all broken. “Whats’ever ‘appens to you—whats’ever—you’d be a princess all the same—an’ nothin’ couldn’t make you nothin’ different.”

8

In the Attic

The first night she spent in her attic was a thing Sara never forgot. During its passing she lived through a wild, unchildlike woe of which she never spoke to anyone about her. There was no one who would have understood. It was, indeed, well for her that as she lay awake in the darkness her mind was forcibly distracted, now and then, by the strangeness of her surroundings. It was, perhaps, well for her that she was reminded by her small body of material things. If this had not been so, the anguish of her young mind might have been too great for a child to bear. But, really, while the night was passing she scarcely knew that she had a body at all or remembered any other thing than one.

“My papa is dead!” she kept whispering to herself. “My papa is dead!”

It was not until long afterward that she realized that her bed had been so hard that she turned over and over in it to find a place to rest, that the darkness seemed more intense than any she had ever known, and that the wind howled over the roof among the chimneys like something which wailed aloud. Then there was something worse. This was certain scufflings and scratchings and squeakings in the walls and behind the skirting boards. She knew what they meant, because Becky had described them. They meant rats and mice who were either fighting with each other or playing together. Once or twice she even heard sharp-toed feet scurrying across the floor, and she remembered in those after days, when she recalled things, that when first she heard them she started up in bed and sat trembling, and when she lay down again covered her head with the bedclothes.

The change in her life did not come about gradually, but was made all at once.

“She must begin as she is to go on,” Miss Minchin said to Miss Amelia. “She must be taught at once what she is to expect.”

Mariette had left the house the next morning. The glimpse Sara caught of her sitting room, as she passed its open door, showed her that everything had been changed. Her ornaments and luxuries had been removed, and a bed had been placed in a corner to transform it into a new pupil’s bedroom.

When she went down to breakfast she saw that her seat at Miss Minchin’s side was occupied by Lavinia, and Miss Minchin spoke to her coldly.

“You will begin your new duties, Sara,” she said, “by taking your seat with the younger children at a smaller table. You must keep them quiet, and see that they behave well and do not waste their food. You ought to have been down earlier. Lottie has already upset her tea.”

That was the beginning, and from day to day the duties given to her were added to. She taught the younger children French and heard their other lessons, and these were the least of her labors. It was found that she could be made use of in numberless directions. She could be sent on errands at any time and in all weathers. She could be told to do things other people neglected. The cook and the housemaids took their tone from Miss Minchin, and rather enjoyed ordering about the “young one” who had been made so much fuss over for so long. They were not servants of the best class, and had neither good manners nor good tempers, and it was frequently convenient to have at hand someone on whom blame could be laid.

During the first month or two, Sara thought that her willingness to do things as well as she could, and her silence under reproof, might soften those who drove her so hard. In her proud little heart she wanted them to see that she was trying to earn her living and not accepting charity. But the time came when she saw that no one was softened at all; and the more willing she was to do as she was told, the more domineering and exacting careless housemaids became, and the more ready a scolding cook was to blame her.

If she had been older, Miss Minchin would have given her the bigger girls to teach and saved money by dismissing an instructress; but while she remained and looked like a child, she could be made more useful as a sort of little superior errand girl and maid of all work. An ordinary errand boy would not have been so clever and reliable. Sara could be trusted with difficult commissions and complicated messages. She could even go and pay bills, and she combined with this the ability to dust a room well and to set things in order.

Her own lessons became things of the past. She was taught nothing, and only after long and busy days spent in running here and there at everybody’s orders was she grudgingly allowed to go into the deserted schoolroom, with a pile of old books, and study alone at night.

“If I do not remind myself of the things I have learned, perhaps I may forget them,” she said to herself. “I am almost a scullery maid, and if I am a scullery maid who knows nothing, I shall be like poor Becky. I wonder if I could QUITE forget and begin to drop my H’S and not remember that Henry the Eighth had six wives.”

One of the most curious things in her new existence was her changed position among the pupils. Instead of being a sort of small royal personage among them, she no longer seemed to be one of their number at all. She was kept so constantly at work that she scarcely ever had an opportunity of speaking to any of them, and she could not avoid seeing that Miss Minchin preferred that she should live a life apart from that of the occupants of the schoolroom.

“I will not have her forming intimacies and talking to the other children,” that lady said. “Girls like a grievance, and if she begins to tell romantic stories about herself, she will become an ill-used heroine, and parents will be given a wrong impression. It is better that she should live a separate life—one suited to her circumstances. I am giving her a home, and that is more than she has any right to expect from me.”

Sara did not expect much, and was far too proud to try to continue to be intimate with girls who evidently felt rather awkward and uncertain about her. The fact was that Miss Minchin’s pupils were a set of dull, matter-of-fact young people. They were accustomed to being rich and comfortable, and as Sara’s frocks grew shorter and shabbier and queerer-looking, and it became an established fact that she wore shoes with holes in them and was sent out to buy groceries and carry them through the streets in a basket on her arm when the cook wanted them in a hurry, they felt rather as if, when they spoke to her, they were addressing an under servant.

“To think that she was the girl with the diamond mines,” Lavinia commented. “She does look an object. And she’s queerer than ever. I never liked her much, but I can’t bear that way she has now of looking at people without speaking—just as if she was finding them out.”

“I am,” said Sara, promptly, when she heard of this. “That’s what I look at some people for. I like to know about them. I think them over afterward.”

The truth was that she had saved herself annoyance several times by keeping her eye on Lavinia, who was quite ready to make mischief, and would have been rather pleased to have made it for the ex-show pupil.

Sara never made any mischief herself, or interfered with anyone. She worked like a drudge; she tramped through the wet streets, carrying parcels and baskets; she labored with the childish inattention of the little ones’ French lessons; as she became shabbier and more forlorn-looking, she was told that she had better take her meals downstairs; she was treated as if she was nobody’s concern, and her heart grew proud and sore, but she never told anyone what she felt.

“Soldiers don’t complain,” she would say between her small, shut teeth, “I am not going to do it; I will pretend this is part of a war.”

But there were hours when her child heart might almost have broken with loneliness but for three people.

The first, it must be owned, was Becky—just Becky. Throughout all that first night spent in the garret, she had felt a vague comfort in knowing that on the other side of the wall in which the rats scuffled and squeaked there was another young human creature. And during the nights that followed the sense of comfort grew. They had little chance to speak to each other during the day. Each had her own tasks to perform, and any attempt at conversation would have been regarded as a tendency to loiter and lose time. “Don’t mind me, miss,” Becky whispered during the first morning, “if I don’t say nothin’ polite. Some un’d be down on us if I did. I MEANS ‘please’ an’ ‘thank you’ an’ ‘beg pardon,’ but I dassn’t to take time to say it.”

But before daybreak she used to slip into Sara’s attic and button her dress and give her such help as she required before she went downstairs to light the kitchen fire. And when night came Sara always heard the humble knock at her door which meant that her handmaid was ready to help her again if she was needed. During the first weeks of her grief Sara felt as if she were too stupefied to talk, so it happened that some time passed before they saw each other much or exchanged visits. Becky’s heart told her that it was best that people in trouble should be left alone.

The second of the trio of comforters was Ermengarde, but odd things happened before Ermengarde found her place.

When Sara’s mind seemed to awaken again to the life about her, she realized that she had forgotten that an Ermengarde lived in the world. The two had always been friends, but Sara had felt as if she were years the older. It could not be contested that Ermengarde was as dull as she was affectionate. She clung to Sara in a simple, helpless way; she brought her lessons to her that she might be helped; she listened to her every word and besieged her with requests for stories. But she had nothing interesting to say herself, and she loathed books of every description. She was, in fact, not a person one would remember when one was caught in the storm of a great trouble, and Sara forgot her.

It had been all the easier to forget her because she had been suddenly called home for a few weeks. When she came back she did not see Sara for a day or two, and when she met her for the first time she encountered her coming down a corridor with her arms full of garments which were to be taken downstairs to be mended. Sara herself had already been taught to mend them. She looked pale and unlike herself, and she was attired in the queer, outgrown frock whose shortness showed so much thin black leg.

Ermengarde was too slow a girl to be equal to such a situation. She could not think of anything to say. She knew what had happened, but, somehow, she had never imagined Sara could look like this—so odd and poor and almost like a servant. It made her quite miserable, and she could do nothing but break into a short hysterical laugh and exclaim—aimlessly and as if without any meaning, “Oh, Sara, is that you?”

“Yes,” answered Sara, and suddenly a strange thought passed through her mind and made her face flush. She held the pile of garments in her arms, and her chin rested upon the top of it to keep it steady. Something in the look of her straight-gazing eyes made Ermengarde lose her wits still more. She felt as if Sara had changed into a new kind of girl, and she had never known her before. Perhaps it was because she had suddenly grown poor and had to mend things and work like Becky.

“Oh,” she stammered. “How—how are you?”

“I don’t know,” Sara replied. “How are you?”

“I’m—I’m quite well,” said Ermengarde, overwhelmed with shyness. Then spasmodically she thought of something to say which seemed more intimate. “Are you—are you very unhappy?” she said in a rush.

Then Sara was guilty of an injustice. Just at that moment her torn heart swelled within her, and she felt that if anyone was as stupid as that, one had better get away from her.

“What do you think?” she said. “Do you think I am very happy?” And she marched past her without another word.

In course of time she realized that if her wretchedness had not made her forget things, she would have known that poor, dull Ermengarde was not to be blamed for her unready, awkward ways. She was always awkward, and the more she felt, the more stupid she was given to being.

But the sudden thought which had flashed upon her had made her over-sensitive.

“She is like the others,” she had thought. “She does not really want to talk to me. She knows no one does.”

So for several weeks a barrier stood between them. When they met by chance Sara looked the other way, and Ermengarde felt too stiff and embarrassed to speak. Sometimes they nodded to each other in passing, but there were times when they did not even exchange a greeting.

“If she would rather not talk to me,” Sara thought, “I will keep out of her way. Miss Minchin makes that easy enough.”

Miss Minchin made it so easy that at last they scarcely saw each other at all. At that time it was noticed that Ermengarde was more stupid than ever, and that she looked listless and unhappy. She used to sit in the window-seat, huddled in a heap, and stare out of the window without speaking. Once Jessie, who was passing, stopped to look at her curiously.

“What are you crying for, Ermengarde?” she asked.

“I’m not crying,” answered Ermengarde, in a muffled, unsteady voice.

“You are,” said Jessie. “A great big tear just rolled down the bridge of your nose and dropped off at the end of it. And there goes another.”

“Well,” said Ermengarde, “I’m miserable—and no one need interfere.” And she turned her plump back and took out her handkerchief and boldly hid her face in it.

That night, when Sara went to her attic, she was later than usual. She had been kept at work until after the hour at which the pupils went to bed, and after that she had gone to her lessons in the lonely schoolroom. When she reached the top of the stairs, she was surprised to see a glimmer of light coming from under the attic door.

“Nobody goes there but myself,” she thought quickly, “but someone has lighted a candle.”

Someone had, indeed, lighted a candle, and it was not burning in the kitchen candlestick she was expected to use, but in one of those belonging to the pupils’ bedrooms. The someone was sitting upon the battered footstool, and was dressed in her nightgown and wrapped up in a red shawl. It was Ermengarde.

“Ermengarde!” cried Sara. She was so startled that she was almost frightened. “You will get into trouble.”

Ermengarde stumbled up from her footstool. She shuffled across the attic in her bedroom slippers, which were too large for her. Her eyes and nose were pink with crying.

“I know I shall—if I’m found out.” she said. “But I don’t care—I don’t care a bit. Oh, Sara, please tell me. What is the matter? Why don’t you like me any more?”

Something in her voice made the familiar lump rise in Sara’s throat. It was so affectionate and simple—so like the old Ermengarde who had asked her to be “best friends.” It sounded as if she had not meant what she had seemed to mean during these past weeks.

“I do like you,” Sara answered. “I thought—you see, everything is different now. I thought you—were different.”

Ermengarde opened her wet eyes wide.

“Why, it was you who were different!” she cried. “You didn’t want to talk to me. I didn’t know what to do. It was you who were different after I came back.”

Sara thought a moment. She saw she had made a mistake.

“I AM different,” she explained, “though not in the way you think. Miss Minchin does not want me to talk to the girls. Most of them don’t want to talk to me. I thought—perhaps—you didn’t. So I tried to keep out of your way.”

“Oh, Sara,” Ermengarde almost wailed in her reproachful dismay. And then after one more look they rushed into each other’s arms. It must be confessed that Sara’s small black head lay for some minutes on the shoulder covered by the red shawl. When Ermengarde had seemed to desert her, she had felt horribly lonely.

Afterward they sat down upon the floor together, Sara clasping her knees with her arms, and Ermengarde rolled up in her shawl. Ermengarde looked at the odd, big-eyed little face adoringly.

“I couldn’t bear it any more,” she said. “I dare say you could live without me, Sara; but I couldn’t live without you. I was nearly DEAD. So tonight, when I was crying under the bedclothes, I thought all at once of creeping up here and just begging you to let us be friends again.”

“You are nicer than I am,” said Sara. “I was too proud to try and make friends. You see, now that trials have come, they have shown that I am NOT a nice child. I was afraid they would. Perhaps”—wrinkling her forehead wisely—”that is what they were sent for.”

“I don’t see any good in them,” said Ermengarde stoutly.

“Neither do I—to speak the truth,” admitted Sara, frankly. “But I suppose there MIGHT be good in things, even if we don’t see it. There MIGHT”—DOUBTFULLY—”Be good in Miss Minchin.”

Ermengarde looked round the attic with a rather fearsome curiosity.

“Sara,” she said, “do you think you can bear living here?”

Sara looked round also.

“If I pretend it’s quite different, I can,” she answered; “or if I pretend it is a place in a story.”

She spoke slowly. Her imagination was beginning to work for her. It had not worked for her at all since her troubles had come upon her. She had felt as if it had been stunned.

“Other people have lived in worse places. Think of the Count of Monte Cristo in the dungeons of the Chateau d’If. And think of the people in the Bastille!”

“The Bastille,” half whispered Ermengarde, watching her and beginning to be fascinated. She remembered stories of the French Revolution which Sara had been able to fix in her mind by her dramatic relation of them. No one but Sara could have done it.

A well-known glow came into Sara’s eyes.

“Yes,” she said, hugging her knees, “that will be a good place to pretend about. I am a prisoner in the Bastille. I have been here for years and years—and years; and everybody has forgotten about me. Miss Minchin is the jailer—and Becky”—a sudden light adding itself to the glow in her eyes—”Becky is the prisoner in the next cell.”

She turned to Ermengarde, looking quite like the old Sara.

“I shall pretend that,” she said; “and it will be a great comfort.”

Ermengarde was at once enraptured and awed.

“And will you tell me all about it?” she said. “May I creep up here at night, whenever it is safe, and hear the things you have made up in the day? It will seem as if we were more ‘best friends’ than ever.”

“Yes,” answered Sara, nodding. “Adversity tries people, and mine has tried you and proved how nice you are.”

9

Melchisedec

The third person in the trio was Lottie. She was a small thing and did not know what adversity meant, and was much bewildered by the alteration she saw in her young adopted mother. She had heard it rumored that strange things had happened to Sara, but she could not understand why she looked different—why she wore an old black frock and came into the schoolroom only to teach instead of to sit in her place of honor and learn lessons herself. There had been much whispering among the little ones when it had been discovered that Sara no longer lived in the rooms in which Emily had so long sat in state. Lottie’s chief difficulty was that Sara said so little when one asked her questions. At seven mysteries must be made very clear if one is to understand them.

“Are you very poor now, Sara?” she had asked confidentially the first morning her friend took charge of the small French class. “Are you as poor as a beggar?” She thrust a fat hand into the slim one and opened round, tearful eyes. “I don’t want you to be as poor as a beggar.”

She looked as if she was going to cry. And Sara hurriedly consoled her.

“Beggars have nowhere to live,” she said courageously. “I have a place to live in.”

“Where do you live?” persisted Lottie. “The new girl sleeps in your room, and it isn’t pretty any more.”

“I live in another room,” said Sara.

“Is it a nice one?” inquired Lottie. “I want to go and see it.”

“You must not talk,” said Sara. “Miss Minchin is looking at us. She will be angry with me for letting you whisper.”

She had found out already that she was to be held accountable for everything which was objected to. If the children were not attentive, if they talked, if they were restless, it was she who would be reproved.

But Lottie was a determined little person. If Sara would not tell her where she lived, she would find out in some other way. She talked to her small companions and hung about the elder girls and listened when they were gossiping; and acting upon certain information they had unconsciously let drop, she started late one afternoon on a voyage of discovery, climbing stairs she had never known the existence of, until she reached the attic floor. There she found two doors near each other, and opening one, she saw her beloved Sara standing upon an old table and looking out of a window.

“Sara!” she cried, aghast. “Mamma Sara!” She was aghast because the attic was so bare and ugly and seemed so far away from all the world. Her short legs had seemed to have been mounting hundreds of stairs.

Sara turned round at the sound of her voice. It was her turn to be aghast. What would happen now? If Lottie began to cry and any one chanced to hear, they were both lost. She jumped down from her table and ran to the child.

“Don’t cry and make a noise,” she implored. “I shall be scolded if you do, and I have been scolded all day. It’s—it’s not such a bad room, Lottie.”

“Isn’t it?” gasped Lottie, and as she looked round it she bit her lip. She was a spoiled child yet, but she was fond enough of her adopted parent to make an effort to control herself for her sake. Then, somehow, it was quite possible that any place in which Sara lived might turn out to be nice. “Why isn’t it, Sara?” she almost whispered.

Sara hugged her close and tried to laugh. There was a sort of comfort in the warmth of the plump, childish body. She had had a hard day and had been staring out of the windows with hot eyes.

“You can see all sorts of things you can’t see downstairs,” she said.

“What sort of things?” demanded Lottie, with that curiosity Sara could always awaken even in bigger girls.

“Chimneys—quite close to us—with smoke curling up in wreaths and clouds and going up into the sky—and sparrows hopping about and talking to each other just as if they were people—and other attic windows where heads may pop out any minute and you can wonder who they belong to. And it all feels as high up—as if it was another world.”

“Oh, let me see it!” cried Lottie. “Lift me up!”

Sara lifted her up, and they stood on the old table together and leaned on the edge of the flat window in the roof, and looked out.

Anyone who has not done this does not know what a different world they saw. The slates spread out on either side of them and slanted down into the rain gutter-pipes. The sparrows, being at home there, twittered and hopped about quite without fear. Two of them perched on the chimney top nearest and quarrelled with each other fiercely until one pecked the other and drove him away. The garret window next to theirs was shut because the house next door was empty.

“I wish someone lived there,” Sara said. “It is so close that if there was a little girl in the attic, we could talk to each other through the windows and climb over to see each other, if we were not afraid of falling.”

The sky seemed so much nearer than when one saw it from the street, that Lottie was enchanted. From the attic window, among the chimney pots, the things which were happening in the world below seemed almost unreal. One scarcely believed in the existence of Miss Minchin and Miss Amelia and the schoolroom, and the roll of wheels in the square seemed a sound belonging to another existence.

“Oh, Sara!” cried Lottie, cuddling in her guarding arm. “I like this attic—I like it! It is nicer than downstairs!”

“Look at that sparrow,” whispered Sara. “I wish I had some crumbs to throw to him.”

“I have some!” came in a little shriek from Lottie. “I have part of a bun in my pocket; I bought it with my penny yesterday, and I saved a bit.”

When they threw out a few crumbs the sparrow jumped and flew away to an adjacent chimney top. He was evidently not accustomed to intimates in attics, and unexpected crumbs startled him. But when Lottie remained quite still and Sara chirped very softly—almost as if she were a sparrow herself—he saw that the thing which had alarmed him represented hospitality, after all. He put his head on one side, and from his perch on the chimney looked down at the crumbs with twinkling eyes. Lottie could scarcely keep still.

“Will he come? Will he come?” she whispered.

“His eyes look as if he would,” Sara whispered back. “He is thinking and thinking whether he dare. Yes, he will! Yes, he is coming!”

He flew down and hopped toward the crumbs, but stopped a few inches away from them, putting his head on one side again, as if reflecting on the chances that Sara and Lottie might turn out to be big cats and jump on him. At last his heart told him they were really nicer than they looked, and he hopped nearer and nearer, darted at the biggest crumb with a lightning peck, seized it, and carried it away to the other side of his chimney.

“Now he KNOWS”, said Sara. “And he will come back for the others.”

He did come back, and even brought a friend, and the friend went away and brought a relative, and among them they made a hearty meal over which they twittered and chattered and exclaimed, stopping every now and then to put their heads on one side and examine Lottie and Sara. Lottie was so delighted that she quite forgot her first shocked impression of the attic. In fact, when she was lifted down from the table and returned to earthly things, as it were, Sara was able to point out to her many beauties in the room which she herself would not have suspected the existence of.

“It is so little and so high above everything,” she said, “that it is almost like a nest in a tree. The slanting ceiling is so funny. See, you can scarcely stand up at this end of the room; and when the morning begins to come I can lie in bed and look right up into the sky through that flat window in the roof. It is like a square patch of light. If the sun is going to shine, little pink clouds float about, and I feel as if I could touch them. And if it rains, the drops patter and patter as if they were saying something nice. Then if there are stars, you can lie and try to count how many go into the patch. It takes such a lot. And just look at that tiny, rusty grate in the corner. If it was polished and there was a fire in it, just think how nice it would be. You see, it’s really a beautiful little room.”

She was walking round the small place, holding Lottie’s hand and making gestures which described all the beauties she was making herself see. She quite made Lottie see them, too. Lottie could always believe in the things Sara made pictures of.

“You see,” she said, “there could be a thick, soft blue Indian rug on the floor; and in that corner there could be a soft little sofa, with cushions to curl up on; and just over it could be a shelf full of books so that one could reach them easily; and there could be a fur rug before the fire, and hangings on the wall to cover up the whitewash, and pictures. They would have to be little ones, but they could be beautiful; and there could be a lamp with a deep rose-colored shade; and a table in the middle, with things to have tea with; and a little fat copper kettle singing on the hob; and the bed could be quite different. It could be made soft and covered with a lovely silk coverlet. It could be beautiful. And perhaps we could coax the sparrows until we made such friends with them that they would come and peck at the window and ask to be let in.”

“Oh, Sara!” cried Lottie. “I should like to live here!”

When Sara had persuaded her to go downstairs again, and, after setting her on her way, had come back to her attic, she stood in the middle of it and looked about her. The enchantment of her imaginings for Lottie had died away. The bed was hard and covered with its dingy quilt. The whitewashed wall showed its broken patches, the floor was cold and bare, the grate was broken and rusty, and the battered footstool, tilted sideways on its injured leg, the only seat in the room. She sat down on it for a few minutes and let her head drop in her hands. The mere fact that Lottie had come and gone away again made things seem a little worse—just as perhaps prisoners feel a little more desolate after visitors come and go, leaving them behind.

“It’s a lonely place,” she said. “Sometimes it’s the loneliest place in the world.”

She was sitting in this way when her attention was attracted by a slight sound near her. She lifted her head to see where it came from, and if she had been a nervous child she would have left her seat on the battered footstool in a great hurry. A large rat was sitting up on his hind quarters and sniffing the air in an interested manner. Some of Lottie’s crumbs had dropped upon the floor and their scent had drawn him out of his hole.

He looked so queer and so like a gray-whiskered dwarf or gnome that Sara was rather fascinated. He looked at her with his bright eyes, as if he were asking a question. He was evidently so doubtful that one of the child’s queer thoughts came into her mind.

“I dare say it is rather hard to be a rat,” she mused. “Nobody likes you. People jump and run away and scream out, ‘Oh, a horrid rat!’ I shouldn’t like people to scream and jump and say, ‘Oh, a horrid Sara!’ the moment they saw me. And set traps for me, and pretend they were dinner. It’s so different to be a sparrow. But nobody asked this rat if he wanted to be a rat when he was made. Nobody said, ‘Wouldn’t you rather be a sparrow?'”

She had sat so quietly that the rat had begun to take courage. He was very much afraid of her, but perhaps he had a heart like the sparrow and it told him that she was not a thing which pounced. He was very hungry. He had a wife and a large family in the wall, and they had had frightfully bad luck for several days. He had left the children crying bitterly, and felt he would risk a good deal for a few crumbs, so he cautiously dropped upon his feet.

“Come on,” said Sara; “I’m not a trap. You can have them, poor thing! Prisoners in the Bastille used to make friends with rats. Suppose I make friends with you.”

How it is that animals understand things I do not know, but it is certain that they do understand. Perhaps there is a language which is not made of words and everything in the world understands it. Perhaps there is a soul hidden in everything and it can always speak, without even making a sound, to another soul. But whatsoever was the reason, the rat knew from that moment that he was safe—even though he was a rat. He knew that this young human being sitting on the red footstool would not jump up and terrify him with wild, sharp noises or throw heavy objects at him which, if they did not fall and crush him, would send him limping in his scurry back to his hole. He was really a very nice rat, and did not mean the least harm. When he had stood on his hind legs and sniffed the air, with his bright eyes fixed on Sara, he had hoped that she would understand this, and would not begin by hating him as an enemy. When the mysterious thing which speaks without saying any words told him that she would not, he went softly toward the crumbs and began to eat them. As he did it he glanced every now and then at Sara, just as the sparrows had done, and his expression was so very apologetic that it touched her heart.

She sat and watched him without making any movement. One crumb was very much larger than the others—in fact, it could scarcely be called a crumb. It was evident that he wanted that piece very much, but it lay quite near the footstool and he was still rather timid.

“I believe he wants it to carry to his family in the wall,” Sara thought. “If I do not stir at all, perhaps he will come and get it.”

She scarcely allowed herself to breathe, she was so deeply interested. The rat shuffled a little nearer and ate a few more crumbs, then he stopped and sniffed delicately, giving a side glance at the occupant of the footstool; then he darted at the piece of bun with something very like the sudden boldness of the sparrow, and the instant he had possession of it fled back to the wall, slipped down a crack in the skirting board, and was gone.

“I knew he wanted it for his children,” said Sara. “I do believe I could make friends with him.”

A week or so afterward, on one of the rare nights when Ermengarde found it safe to steal up to the attic, when she tapped on the door with the tips of her fingers Sara did not come to her for two or three minutes. There was, indeed, such a silence in the room at first that Ermengarde wondered if she could have fallen asleep. Then, to her surprise, she heard her utter a little, low laugh and speak coaxingly to someone.

“There!” Ermengarde heard her say. “Take it and go home, Melchisedec! Go home to your wife!”

Almost immediately Sara opened the door, and when she did so she found Ermengarde standing with alarmed eyes upon the threshold.

“Who—who ARE you talking to, Sara?” she gasped out.

Sara drew her in cautiously, but she looked as if something pleased and amused her.

“You must promise not to be frightened—not to scream the least bit, or I can’t tell you,” she answered.

Ermengarde felt almost inclined to scream on the spot, but managed to control herself. She looked all round the attic and saw no one. And yet Sara had certainly been speaking TO someone. She thought of ghosts.

“Is it—something that will frighten me?” she asked timorously.

“Some people are afraid of them,” said Sara. “I was at first—but I am not now.”

“Was it—a ghost?” quaked Ermengarde.

“No,” said Sara, laughing. “It was my rat.”

Ermengarde made one bound, and landed in the middle of the little dingy bed. She tucked her feet under her nightgown and the red shawl. She did not scream, but she gasped with fright.

“Oh! Oh!” she cried under her breath. “A rat! A rat!”

“I was afraid you would be frightened,” said Sara. “But you needn’t be. I am making him tame. He actually knows me and comes out when I call him. Are you too frightened to want to see him?”

The truth was that, as the days had gone on and, with the aid of scraps brought up from the kitchen, her curious friendship had developed, she had gradually forgotten that the timid creature she was becoming familiar with was a mere rat.

At first Ermengarde was too much alarmed to do anything but huddle in a heap upon the bed and tuck up her feet, but the sight of Sara’s composed little countenance and the story of Melchisedec’s first appearance began at last to rouse her curiosity, and she leaned forward over the edge of the bed and watched Sara go and kneel down by the hole in the skirting board.

“He—he won’t run out quickly and jump on the bed, will he?” she said.

“No,” answered Sara. “He’s as polite as we are. He is just like a person. Now watch!”

She began to make a low, whistling sound—so low and coaxing that it could only have been heard in entire stillness. She did it several times, looking entirely absorbed in it. Ermengarde thought she looked as if she were working a spell. And at last, evidently in response to it, a gray-whiskered, bright-eyed head peeped out of the hole. Sara had some crumbs in her hand. She dropped them, and Melchisedec came quietly forth and ate them. A piece of larger size than the rest he took and carried in the most businesslike manner back to his home.

“You see,” said Sara, “that is for his wife and children. He is very nice. He only eats the little bits. After he goes back I can always hear his family squeaking for joy. There are three kinds of squeaks. One kind is the children’s, and one is Mrs. Melchisedec’s, and one is Melchisedec’s own.”

Ermengarde began to laugh.

“Oh, Sara!” she said. “You ARE queer—but you are nice.”

“I know I am queer,” admitted Sara, cheerfully; “and I TRY to be nice.” She rubbed her forehead with her little brown paw, and a puzzled, tender look came into her face. “Papa always laughed at me,” she said; “but I liked it. He thought I was queer, but he liked me to make up things. I—I can’t help making up things. If I didn’t, I don’t believe I could live.” She paused and glanced around the attic. “I’m sure I couldn’t live here,” she added in a low voice.

Ermengarde was interested, as she always was. “When you talk about things,” she said, “they seem as if they grew real. You talk about Melchisedec as if he was a person.”

“He IS a person,” said Sara. “He gets hungry and frightened, just as we do; and he is married and has children. How do we know he doesn’t think things, just as we do? His eyes look as if he was a person. That was why I gave him a name.”

She sat down on the floor in her favorite attitude, holding her knees.

“Besides,” she said, “he is a Bastille rat sent to be my friend. I can always get a bit of bread the cook has thrown away, and it is quite enough to support him.”

“Is it the Bastille yet?” asked Ermengarde, eagerly. “Do you always pretend it is the Bastille?”

“Nearly always,” answered Sara. “Sometimes I try to pretend it is another kind of place; but the Bastille is generally easiest—particularly when it is cold.”

Just at that moment Ermengarde almost jumped off the bed, she was so startled by a sound she heard. It was like two distinct knocks on the wall.

“What is that?” she exclaimed.

Sara got up from the floor and answered quite dramatically:

“It is the prisoner in the next cell.”

“Becky!” cried Ermengarde, enraptured.

“Yes,” said Sara. “Listen; the two knocks meant, ‘Prisoner, are you there?'”

She knocked three times on the wall herself, as if in answer.

“That means, ‘Yes, I am here, and all is well.'”

Four knocks came from Becky’s side of the wall.

“That means,” explained Sara, “‘Then, fellow-sufferer, we will sleep in peace. Good night.'”

Ermengarde quite beamed with delight.

“Oh, Sara!” she whispered joyfully. “It is like a story!”

“It IS a story,” said Sara. “EVERYTHING’S a story. You are a story—I am a story. Miss Minchin is a story.”

And she sat down again and talked until Ermengarde forgot that she was a sort of escaped prisoner herself, and had to be reminded by Sara that she could not remain in the Bastille all night, but must steal noiselessly downstairs again and creep back into her deserted bed.

10

The Indian Gentleman

But it was a perilous thing for Ermengarde and Lottie to make pilgrimages to the attic. They could never be quite sure when Sara would be there, and they could scarcely ever be certain that Miss Amelia would not make a tour of inspection through the bedrooms after the pupils were supposed to be asleep. So their visits were rare ones, and Sara lived a strange and lonely life. It was a lonelier life when she was downstairs than when she was in her attic. She had no one to talk to; and when she was sent out on errands and walked through the streets, a forlorn little figure carrying a basket or a parcel, trying to hold her hat on when the wind was blowing, and feeling the water soak through her shoes when it was raining, she felt as if the crowds hurrying past her made her loneliness greater. When she had been the Princess Sara, driving through the streets in her brougham, or walking, attended by Mariette, the sight of her bright, eager little face and picturesque coats and hats had often caused people to look after her. A happy, beautifully cared for little girl naturally attracts attention. Shabby, poorly dressed children are not rare enough and pretty enough to make people turn around to look at them and smile. No one looked at Sara in these days, and no one seemed to see her as she hurried along the crowded pavements. She had begun to grow very fast, and, as she was dressed only in such clothes as the plainer remnants of her wardrobe would supply, she knew she looked very queer, indeed. All her valuable garments had been disposed of, and such as had been left for her use she was expected to wear so long as she could put them on at all. Sometimes, when she passed a shop window with a mirror in it, she almost laughed outright on catching a glimpse of herself, and sometimes her face went red and she bit her lip and turned away.

In the evening, when she passed houses whose windows were lighted up, she used to look into the warm rooms and amuse herself by imagining things about the people she saw sitting before the fires or about the tables. It always interested her to catch glimpses of rooms before the shutters were closed. There were several families in the square in which Miss Minchin lived, with which she had become quite familiar in a way of her own. The one she liked best she called the Large Family. She called it the Large Family not because the members of it were big—for, indeed, most of them were little—but because there were so many of them. There were eight children in the Large Family, and a stout, rosy mother, and a stout, rosy father, and a stout, rosy grandmother, and any number of servants. The eight children were always either being taken out to walk or to ride in perambulators by comfortable nurses, or they were going to drive with their mamma, or they were flying to the door in the evening to meet their papa and kiss him and dance around him and drag off his overcoat and look in the pockets for packages, or they were crowding about the nursery windows and looking out and pushing each other and laughing—in fact, they were always doing something enjoyable and suited to the tastes of a large family. Sara was quite fond of them, and had given them names out of books—quite romantic names. She called them the Montmorencys when she did not call them the Large Family. The fat, fair baby with the lace cap was Ethelberta Beauchamp Montmorency; the next baby was Violet Cholmondeley Montmorency; the little boy who could just stagger and who had such round legs was Sydney Cecil Vivian Montmorency; and then came Lilian Evangeline Maud Marion, Rosalind Gladys, Guy Clarence, Veronica Eustacia, and Claude Harold Hector.

One evening a very funny thing happened—though, perhaps, in one sense it was not a funny thing at all.

Several of the Montmorencys were evidently going to a children’s party, and just as Sara was about to pass the door they were crossing the pavement to get into the carriage which was waiting for them. Veronica Eustacia and Rosalind Gladys, in white-lace frocks and lovely sashes, had just got in, and Guy Clarence, aged five, was following them. He was such a pretty fellow and had such rosy cheeks and blue eyes, and such a darling little round head covered with curls, that Sara forgot her basket and shabby cloak altogether—in fact, forgot everything but that she wanted to look at him for a moment. So she paused and looked.

It was Christmas time, and the Large Family had been hearing many stories about children who were poor and had no mammas and papas to fill their stockings and take them to the pantomime—children who were, in fact, cold and thinly clad and hungry. In the stories, kind people—sometimes little boys and girls with tender hearts—invariably saw the poor children and gave them money or rich gifts, or took them home to beautiful dinners. Guy Clarence had been affected to tears that very afternoon by the reading of such a story, and he had burned with a desire to find such a poor child and give her a certain sixpence he possessed, and thus provide for her for life. An entire sixpence, he was sure, would mean affluence for evermore. As he crossed the strip of red carpet laid across the pavement from the door to the carriage, he had this very sixpence in the pocket of his very short man-o-war trousers; And just as Rosalind Gladys got into the vehicle and jumped on the seat in order to feel the cushions spring under her, he saw Sara standing on the wet pavement in her shabby frock and hat, with her old basket on her arm, looking at him hungrily.

He thought that her eyes looked hungry because she had perhaps had nothing to eat for a long time. He did not know that they looked so because she was hungry for the warm, merry life his home held and his rosy face spoke of, and that she had a hungry wish to snatch him in her arms and kiss him. He only knew that she had big eyes and a thin face and thin legs and a common basket and poor clothes. So he put his hand in his pocket and found his sixpence and walked up to her benignly.

“Here, poor little girl,” he said. “Here is a sixpence. I will give it to you.”

Sara started, and all at once realized that she looked exactly like poor children she had seen, in her better days, waiting on the pavement to watch her as she got out of her brougham. And she had given them pennies many a time. Her face went red and then it went pale, and for a second she felt as if she could not take the dear little sixpence.

“Oh, no!” she said. “Oh, no, thank you; I mustn’t take it, indeed!”

Her voice was so unlike an ordinary street child’s voice and her manner was so like the manner of a well-bred little person that Veronica Eustacia (whose real name was Janet) and Rosalind Gladys (who was really called Nora) leaned forward to listen.

But Guy Clarence was not to be thwarted in his benevolence. He thrust the sixpence into her hand.

“Yes, you must take it, poor little girl!” he insisted stoutly. “You can buy things to eat with it. It is a whole sixpence!”

There was something so honest and kind in his face, and he looked so likely to be heartbrokenly disappointed if she did not take it, that Sara knew she must not refuse him. To be as proud as that would be a cruel thing. So she actually put her pride in her pocket, though it must be admitted her cheeks burned.

“Thank you,” she said. “You are a kind, kind little darling thing.” And as he scrambled joyfully into the carriage she went away, trying to smile, though she caught her breath quickly and her eyes were shining through a mist. She had known that she looked odd and shabby, but until now she had not known that she might be taken for a beggar.

As the Large Family’s carriage drove away, the children inside it were talking with interested excitement.

“Oh, Donald,” (this was Guy Clarence’s name), Janet exclaimed alarmedly, “why did you offer that little girl your sixpence? I’m sure she is not a beggar!”

“She didn’t speak like a beggar!” cried Nora. “And her face didn’t really look like a beggar’s face!”

“Besides, she didn’t beg,” said Janet. “I was so afraid she might be angry with you. You know, it makes people angry to be taken for beggars when they are not beggars.”

“She wasn’t angry,” said Donald, a trifle dismayed, but still firm. “She laughed a little, and she said I was a kind, kind little darling thing. And I was!”—stoutly. “It was my whole sixpence.”

Janet and Nora exchanged glances.

“A beggar girl would never have said that,” decided Janet. “She would have said, ‘Thank yer kindly, little gentleman—thank yer, sir;’ and perhaps she would have bobbed a curtsy.”

Sara knew nothing about the fact, but from that time the Large Family was as profoundly interested in her as she was in it. Faces used to appear at the nursery windows when she passed, and many discussions concerning her were held round the fire.

“She is a kind of servant at the seminary,” Janet said. “I don’t believe she belongs to anybody. I believe she is an orphan. But she is not a beggar, however shabby she looks.”

And afterward she was called by all of them, “The-little-girl-who-is-not-a-beggar,” which was, of course, rather a long name, and sounded very funny sometimes when the youngest ones said it in a hurry.

Sara managed to bore a hole in the sixpence and hung it on an old bit of narrow ribbon round her neck. Her affection for the Large Family increased—as, indeed, her affection for everything she could love increased. She grew fonder and fonder of Becky, and she used to look forward to the two mornings a week when she went into the schoolroom to give the little ones their French lesson. Her small pupils loved her, and strove with each other for the privilege of standing close to her and insinuating their small hands into hers. It fed her hungry heart to feel them nestling up to her. She made such friends with the sparrows that when she stood upon the table, put her head and shoulders out of the attic window, and chirped, she heard almost immediately a flutter of wings and answering twitters, and a little flock of dingy town birds appeared and alighted on the slates to talk to her and make much of the crumbs she scattered. With Melchisedec she had become so intimate that he actually brought Mrs. Melchisedec with him sometimes, and now and then one or two of his children. She used to talk to him, and, somehow, he looked quite as if he understood.

There had grown in her mind rather a strange feeling about Emily, who always sat and looked on at everything. It arose in one of her moments of great desolateness. She would have liked to believe or pretend to believe that Emily understood and sympathized with her. She did not like to own to herself that her only companion could feel and hear nothing. She used to put her in a chair sometimes and sit opposite to her on the old red footstool, and stare and pretend about her until her own eyes would grow large with something which was almost like fear—particularly at night when everything was so still, when the only sound in the attic was the occasional sudden scurry and squeak of Melchisedec’s family in the wall. One of her “pretends” was that Emily was a kind of good witch who could protect her. Sometimes, after she had stared at her until she was wrought up to the highest pitch of fancifulness, she would ask her questions and find herself ALMOST feeling as if she would presently answer. But she never did.

“As to answering, though,” said Sara, trying to console herself, “I don’t answer very often. I never answer when I can help it. When people are insulting you, there is nothing so good for them as not to say a word—just to look at them and THINK. Miss Minchin turns pale with rage when I do it, Miss Amelia looks frightened, and so do the girls. When you will not fly into a passion people know you are stronger than they are, because you are strong enough to hold in your rage, and they are not, and they say stupid things they wish they hadn’t said afterward. There’s nothing so strong as rage, except what makes you hold it in—that’s stronger. It’s a good thing not to answer your enemies. I scarcely ever do. Perhaps Emily is more like me than I am like myself. Perhaps she would rather not answer her friends, even. She keeps it all in her heart.”

But though she tried to satisfy herself with these arguments, she did not find it easy. When, after a long, hard day, in which she had been sent here and there, sometimes on long errands through wind and cold and rain, she came in wet and hungry, and was sent out again because nobody chose to remember that she was only a child, and that her slim legs might be tired and her small body might be chilled; when she had been given only harsh words and cold, slighting looks for thanks; when the cook had been vulgar and insolent; when Miss Minchin had been in her worst mood, and when she had seen the girls sneering among themselves at her shabbiness—then she was not always able to comfort her sore, proud, desolate heart with fancies when Emily merely sat upright in her old chair and stared.

One of these nights, when she came up to the attic cold and hungry, with a tempest raging in her young breast, Emily’s stare seemed so vacant, her sawdust legs and arms so inexpressive, that Sara lost all control over herself. There was nobody but Emily—no one in the world. And there she sat.

“I shall die presently,” she said at first.

Emily simply stared.

“I can’t bear this,” said the poor child, trembling. “I know I shall die. I’m cold; I’m wet; I’m starving to death. I’ve walked a thousand miles today, and they have done nothing but scold me from morning until night. And because I could not find that last thing the cook sent me for, they would not give me any supper. Some men laughed at me because my old shoes made me slip down in the mud. I’m covered with mud now. And they laughed. Do you hear?”

She looked at the staring glass eyes and complacent face, and suddenly a sort of heartbroken rage seized her. She lifted her little savage hand and knocked Emily off the chair, bursting into a passion of sobbing—Sara who never cried.

“You are nothing but a DOLL!” she cried. “Nothing but a doll—doll—doll! You care for nothing. You are stuffed with sawdust. You never had a heart. Nothing could ever make you feel. You are a DOLL!” Emily lay on the floor, with her legs ignominiously doubled up over her head, and a new flat place on the end of her nose; but she was calm, even dignified. Sara hid her face in her arms. The rats in the wall began to fight and bite each other and squeak and scramble. Melchisedec was chastising some of his family.

Sara’s sobs gradually quieted themselves. It was so unlike her to break down that she was surprised at herself. After a while she raised her face and looked at Emily, who seemed to be gazing at her round the side of one angle, and, somehow, by this time actually with a kind of glassy-eyed sympathy. Sara bent and picked her up. Remorse overtook her. She even smiled at herself a very little smile.

“You can’t help being a doll,” she said with a resigned sigh, “any more than Lavinia and Jessie can help not having any sense. We are not all made alike. Perhaps you do your sawdust best.” And she kissed her and shook her clothes straight, and put her back upon her chair.

She had wished very much that some one would take the empty house next door. She wished it because of the attic window which was so near hers. It seemed as if it would be so nice to see it propped open someday and a head and shoulders rising out of the square aperture.

“If it looked a nice head,” she thought, “I might begin by saying, ‘Good morning,’ and all sorts of things might happen. But, of course, it’s not really likely that anyone but under servants would sleep there.”

One morning, on turning the corner of the square after a visit to the grocer’s, the butcher’s, and the baker’s, she saw, to her great delight, that during her rather prolonged absence, a van full of furniture had stopped before the next house, the front doors were thrown open, and men in shirt sleeves were going in and out carrying heavy packages and pieces of furniture.

“It’s taken!” she said. “It really IS taken! Oh, I do hope a nice head will look out of the attic window!”

She would almost have liked to join the group of loiterers who had stopped on the pavement to watch the things carried in. She had an idea that if she could see some of the furniture she could guess something about the people it belonged to.

“Miss Minchin’s tables and chairs are just like her,” she thought; “I remember thinking that the first minute I saw her, even though I was so little. I told papa afterward, and he laughed and said it was true. I am sure the Large Family have fat, comfortable armchairs and sofas, and I can see that their red-flowery wallpaper is exactly like them. It’s warm and cheerful and kind-looking and happy.”

She was sent out for parsley to the greengrocer’s later in the day, and when she came up the area steps her heart gave quite a quick beat of recognition. Several pieces of furniture had been set out of the van upon the pavement. There was a beautiful table of elaborately wrought teakwood, and some chairs, and a screen covered with rich Oriental embroidery. The sight of them gave her a weird, homesick feeling. She had seen things so like them in India. One of the things Miss Minchin had taken from her was a carved teakwood desk her father had sent her.

“They are beautiful things,” she said; “they look as if they ought to belong to a nice person. All the things look rather grand. I suppose it is a rich family.”

The vans of furniture came and were unloaded and gave place to others all the day. Several times it so happened that Sara had an opportunity of seeing things carried in. It became plain that she had been right in guessing that the newcomers were people of large means. All the furniture was rich and beautiful, and a great deal of it was Oriental. Wonderful rugs and draperies and ornaments were taken from the vans, many pictures, and books enough for a library. Among other things there was a superb god Buddha in a splendid shrine.

“Someone in the family MUST have been in India,” Sara thought. “They have got used to Indian things and like them. I AM glad. I shall feel as if they were friends, even if a head never looks out of the attic window.”

When she was taking in the evening’s milk for the cook (there was really no odd job she was not called upon to do), she saw something occur which made the situation more interesting than ever. The handsome, rosy man who was the father of the Large Family walked across the square in the most matter-of-fact manner, and ran up the steps of the next-door house. He ran up them as if he felt quite at home and expected to run up and down them many a time in the future. He stayed inside quite a long time, and several times came out and gave directions to the workmen, as if he had a right to do so. It was quite certain that he was in some intimate way connected with the newcomers and was acting for them.

“If the new people have children,” Sara speculated, “the Large Family children will be sure to come and play with them, and they MIGHT come up into the attic just for fun.”

At night, after her work was done, Becky came in to see her fellow prisoner and bring her news.

“It’s a’ Nindian gentleman that’s comin’ to live next door, miss,” she said. “I don’t know whether he’s a black gentleman or not, but he’s a Nindian one. He’s very rich, an’ he’s ill, an’ the gentleman of the Large Family is his lawyer. He’s had a lot of trouble, an’ it’s made him ill an’ low in his mind. He worships idols, miss. He’s an ‘eathen an’ bows down to wood an’ stone. I seen a’ idol bein’ carried in for him to worship. Somebody had oughter send him a trac’. You can get a trac’ for a penny.”

Sara laughed a little.

“I don’t believe he worships that idol,” she said; “some people like to keep them to look at because they are interesting. My papa had a beautiful one, and he did not worship it.”

But Becky was rather inclined to prefer to believe that the new neighbor was “an ‘eathen.” It sounded so much more romantic than that he should merely be the ordinary kind of gentleman who went to church with a prayer book. She sat and talked long that night of what he would be like, of what his wife would be like if he had one, and of what his children would be like if they had children. Sara saw that privately she could not help hoping very much that they would all be black, and would wear turbans, and, above all, that—like their parent—they would all be “‘eathens.”

“I never lived next door to no ‘eathens, miss,” she said; “I should like to see what sort o’ ways they’d have.”

It was several weeks before her curiosity was satisfied, and then it was revealed that the new occupant had neither wife nor children. He was a solitary man with no family at all, and it was evident that he was shattered in health and unhappy in mind.

A carriage drove up one day and stopped before the house. When the footman dismounted from the box and opened the door the gentleman who was the father of the Large Family got out first. After him there descended a nurse in uniform, then came down the steps two men-servants. They came to assist their master, who, when he was helped out of the carriage, proved to be a man with a haggard, distressed face, and a skeleton body wrapped in furs. He was carried up the steps, and the head of the Large Family went with him, looking very anxious. Shortly afterward a doctor’s carriage arrived, and the doctor went in—plainly to take care of him.

“There is such a yellow gentleman next door, Sara,” Lottie whispered at the French class afterward. “Do you think he is a Chinee? The geography says the Chinee men are yellow.”

“No, he is not Chinese,” Sara whispered back; “he is very ill. Go on with your exercise, Lottie. ‘Non, monsieur. Je n’ai pas le canif de mon oncle.'”

That was the beginning of the story of the Indian gentleman.

11

Ram Dass

There were fine sunsets even in the square, sometimes. One could only see parts of them, however, between the chimneys and over the roofs. From the kitchen windows one could not see them at all, and could only guess that they were going on because the bricks looked warm and the air rosy or yellow for a while, or perhaps one saw a blazing glow strike a particular pane of glass somewhere. There was, however, one place from which one could see all the splendor of them: the piles of red or gold clouds in the west; or the purple ones edged with dazzling brightness; or the little fleecy, floating ones, tinged with rose-color and looking like flights of pink doves scurrying across the blue in a great hurry if there was a wind. The place where one could see all this, and seem at the same time to breathe a purer air, was, of course, the attic window. When the square suddenly seemed to begin to glow in an enchanted way and look wonderful in spite of its sooty trees and railings, Sara knew something was going on in the sky; and when it was at all possible to leave the kitchen without being missed or called back, she invariably stole away and crept up the flights of stairs, and, climbing on the old table, got her head and body as far out of the window as possible. When she had accomplished this, she always drew a long breath and looked all round her. It used to seem as if she had all the sky and the world to herself. No one else ever looked out of the other attics. Generally the skylights were closed; but even if they were propped open to admit air, no one seemed to come near them. And there Sara would stand, sometimes turning her face upward to the blue which seemed so friendly and near—just like a lovely vaulted ceiling—sometimes watching the west and all the wonderful things that happened there: the clouds melting or drifting or waiting softly to be changed pink or crimson or snow-white or purple or pale dove-gray. Sometimes they made islands or great mountains enclosing lakes of deep turquoise-blue, or liquid amber, or chrysoprase-green; sometimes dark headlands jutted into strange, lost seas; sometimes slender strips of wonderful lands joined other wonderful lands together. There were places where it seemed that one could run or climb or stand and wait to see what next was coming—until, perhaps, as it all melted, one could float away. At least it seemed so to Sara, and nothing had ever been quite so beautiful to her as the things she saw as she stood on the table—her body half out of the skylight—the sparrows twittering with sunset softness on the slates. The sparrows always seemed to her to twitter with a sort of subdued softness just when these marvels were going on.

There was such a sunset as this a few days after the Indian gentleman was brought to his new home; and, as it fortunately happened that the afternoon’s work was done in the kitchen and nobody had ordered her to go anywhere or perform any task, Sara found it easier than usual to slip away and go upstairs.

She mounted her table and stood looking out. It was a wonderful moment. There were floods of molten gold covering the west, as if a glorious tide was sweeping over the world. A deep, rich yellow light filled the air; the birds flying across the tops of the houses showed quite black against it.

“It’s a Splendid one,” said Sara, softly, to herself. “It makes me feel almost afraid—as if something strange was just going to happen. The Splendid ones always make me feel like that.”

She suddenly turned her head because she heard a sound a few yards away from her. It was an odd sound like a queer little squeaky chattering. It came from the window of the next attic. Someone had come to look at the sunset as she had. There was a head and a part of a body emerging from the skylight, but it was not the head or body of a little girl or a housemaid; it was the picturesque white-swathed form and dark-faced, gleaming-eyed, white-turbaned head of a native Indian man-servant—”a Lascar,” Sara said to herself quickly—and the sound she had heard came from a small monkey he held in his arms as if he were fond of it, and which was snuggling and chattering against his breast.

As Sara looked toward him he looked toward her. The first thing she thought was that his dark face looked sorrowful and homesick. She felt absolutely sure he had come up to look at the sun, because he had seen it so seldom in England that he longed for a sight of it. She looked at him interestedly for a second, and then smiled across the slates. She had learned to know how comforting a smile, even from a stranger, may be.

Hers was evidently a pleasure to him. His whole expression altered, and he showed such gleaming white teeth as he smiled back that it was as if a light had been illuminated in his dusky face. The friendly look in Sara’s eyes was always very effective when people felt tired or dull.

It was perhaps in making his salute to her that he loosened his hold on the monkey. He was an impish monkey and always ready for adventure, and it is probable that the sight of a little girl excited him. He suddenly broke loose, jumped on to the slates, ran across them chattering, and actually leaped on to Sara’s shoulder, and from there down into her attic room. It made her laugh and delighted her; but she knew he must be restored to his master—if the Lascar was his master—and she wondered how this was to be done. Would he let her catch him, or would he be naughty and refuse to be caught, and perhaps get away and run off over the roofs and be lost? That would not do at all. Perhaps he belonged to the Indian gentleman, and the poor man was fond of him.

She turned to the Lascar, feeling glad that she remembered still some of the Hindustani she had learned when she lived with her father. She could make the man understand. She spoke to him in the language he knew.

“Will he let me catch him?” she asked.

She thought she had never seen more surprise and delight than the dark face expressed when she spoke in the familiar tongue. The truth was that the poor fellow felt as if his gods had intervened, and the kind little voice came from heaven itself. At once Sara saw that he had been accustomed to European children. He poured forth a flood of respectful thanks. He was the servant of Missee Sahib. The monkey was a good monkey and would not bite; but, unfortunately, he was difficult to catch. He would flee from one spot to another, like the lightning. He was disobedient, though not evil. Ram Dass knew him as if he were his child, and Ram Dass he would sometimes obey, but not always. If Missee Sahib would permit Ram Dass, he himself could cross the roof to her room, enter the windows, and regain the unworthy little animal. But he was evidently afraid Sara might think he was taking a great liberty and perhaps would not let him come.

But Sara gave him leave at once.

“Can you get across?” she inquired.

“In a moment,” he answered her.

“Then come,” she said; “he is flying from side to side of the room as if he was frightened.”

Ram Dass slipped through his attic window and crossed to hers as steadily and lightly as if he had walked on roofs all his life. He slipped through the skylight and dropped upon his feet without a sound. Then he turned to Sara and salaamed again. The monkey saw him and uttered a little scream. Ram Dass hastily took the precaution of shutting the skylight, and then went in chase of him. It was not a very long chase. The monkey prolonged it a few minutes evidently for the mere fun of it, but presently he sprang chattering on to Ram Dass’s shoulder and sat there chattering and clinging to his neck with a weird little skinny arm.

Ram Dass thanked Sara profoundly. She had seen that his quick native eyes had taken in at a glance all the bare shabbiness of the room, but he spoke to her as if he were speaking to the little daughter of a rajah, and pretended that he observed nothing. He did not presume to remain more than a few moments after he had caught the monkey, and those moments were given to further deep and grateful obeisance to her in return for her indulgence. This little evil one, he said, stroking the monkey, was, in truth, not so evil as he seemed, and his master, who was ill, was sometimes amused by him. He would have been made sad if his favorite had run away and been lost. Then he salaamed once more and got through the skylight and across the slates again with as much agility as the monkey himself had displayed.

When he had gone Sara stood in the middle of her attic and thought of many things his face and his manner had brought back to her. The sight of his native costume and the profound reverence of his manner stirred all her past memories. It seemed a strange thing to remember that she—the drudge whom the cook had said insulting things to an hour ago—had only a few years ago been surrounded by people who all treated her as Ram Dass had treated her; who salaamed when she went by, whose foreheads almost touched the ground when she spoke to them, who were her servants and her slaves. It was like a sort of dream. It was all over, and it could never come back. It certainly seemed that there was no way in which any change could take place. She knew what Miss Minchin intended that her future should be. So long as she was too young to be used as a regular teacher, she would be used as an errand girl and servant and yet expected to remember what she had learned and in some mysterious way to learn more. The greater number of her evenings she was supposed to spend at study, and at various indefinite intervals she was examined and knew she would have been severely admonished if she had not advanced as was expected of her. The truth, indeed, was that Miss Minchin knew that she was too anxious to learn to require teachers. Give her books, and she would devour them and end by knowing them by heart. She might be trusted to be equal to teaching a good deal in the course of a few years. This was what would happen: when she was older she would be expected to drudge in the schoolroom as she drudged now in various parts of the house; they would be obliged to give her more respectable clothes, but they would be sure to be plain and ugly and to make her look somehow like a servant. That was all there seemed to be to look forward to, and Sara stood quite still for several minutes and thought it over.

Then a thought came back to her which made the color rise in her cheek and a spark light itself in her eyes. She straightened her thin little body and lifted her head.

“Whatever comes,” she said, “cannot alter one thing. If I am a princess in rags and tatters, I can be a princess inside. It would be easy to be a princess if I were dressed in cloth of gold, but it is a great deal more of a triumph to be one all the time when no one knows it. There was Marie Antoinette when she was in prison and her throne was gone and she had only a black gown on, and her hair was white, and they insulted her and called her Widow Capet. She was a great deal more like a queen then than when she was so gay and everything was so grand. I like her best then. Those howling mobs of people did not frighten her. She was stronger than they were, even when they cut her head off.”

This was not a new thought, but quite an old one, by this time. It had consoled her through many a bitter day, and she had gone about the house with an expression in her face which Miss Minchin could not understand and which was a source of great annoyance to her, as it seemed as if the child were mentally living a life which held her above he rest of the world. It was as if she scarcely heard the rude and acid things said to her; or, if she heard them, did not care for them at all. Sometimes, when she was in the midst of some harsh, domineering speech, Miss Minchin would find the still, unchildish eyes fixed upon her with something like a proud smile in them. At such times she did not know that Sara was saying to herself:

“You don’t know that you are saying these things to a princess, and that if I chose I could wave my hand and order you to execution. I only spare you because I am a princess, and you are a poor, stupid, unkind, vulgar old thing, and don’t know any better.”

This used to interest and amuse her more than anything else; and queer and fanciful as it was, she found comfort in it and it was a good thing for her. While the thought held possession of her, she could not be made rude and malicious by the rudeness and malice of those about her.

“A princess must be polite,” she said to herself.

And so when the servants, taking their tone from their mistress, were insolent and ordered her about, she would hold her head erect and reply to them with a quaint civility which often made them stare at her.

“She’s got more airs and graces than if she come from Buckingham Palace, that young one,” said the cook, chuckling a little sometimes. “I lose my temper with her often enough, but I will say she never forgets her manners. ‘If you please, cook’; ‘Will you be so kind, cook?’ ‘I beg your pardon, cook’; ‘May I trouble you, cook?’ She drops ’em about the kitchen as if they was nothing.”

The morning after the interview with Ram Dass and his monkey, Sara was in the schoolroom with her small pupils. Having finished giving them their lessons, she was putting the French exercise-books together and thinking, as she did it, of the various things royal personages in disguise were called upon to do: Alfred the Great, for instance, burning the cakes and getting his ears boxed by the wife of the neat-herd. How frightened she must have been when she found out what she had done. If Miss Minchin should find out that she—Sara, whose toes were almost sticking out of her boots—was a princess—a real one! The look in her eyes was exactly the look which Miss Minchin most disliked. She would not have it; she was quite near her and was so enraged that she actually flew at her and boxed her ears—exactly as the neat-herd’s wife had boxed King Alfred’s. It made Sara start. She wakened from her dream at the shock, and, catching her breath, stood still a second. Then, not knowing she was going to do it, she broke into a little laugh.

“What are you laughing at, you bold, impudent child?” Miss Minchin exclaimed.

It took Sara a few seconds to control herself sufficiently to remember that she was a princess. Her cheeks were red and smarting from the blows she had received.

“I was thinking,” she answered.

“Beg my pardon immediately,” said Miss Minchin.

Sara hesitated a second before she replied.

“I will beg your pardon for laughing, if it was rude,” she said then; “but I won’t beg your pardon for thinking.”

“What were you thinking?” demanded Miss Minchin.

“How dare you think? What were you thinking?”

Jessie tittered, and she and Lavinia nudged each other in unison. All the girls looked up from their books to listen. Really, it always interested them a little when Miss Minchin attacked Sara. Sara always said something queer, and never seemed the least bit frightened. She was not in the least frightened now, though her boxed ears were scarlet and her eyes were as bright as stars.

“I was thinking,” she answered grandly and politely, “that you did not know what you were doing.”

“That I did not know what I was doing?” Miss Minchin fairly gasped.

“Yes,” said Sara, “and I was thinking what would happen if I were a princess and you boxed my ears—what I should do to you. And I was thinking that if I were one, you would never dare to do it, whatever I said or did. And I was thinking how surprised and frightened you would be if you suddenly found out—”

She had the imagined future so clearly before her eyes that she spoke in a manner which had an effect even upon Miss Minchin. It almost seemed for the moment to her narrow, unimaginative mind that there must be some real power hidden behind this candid daring.

“What?” she exclaimed. “Found out what?”

“That I really was a princess,” said Sara, “and could do anything—anything I liked.”

Every pair of eyes in the room widened to its full limit. Lavinia leaned forward on her seat to look.

“Go to your room,” cried Miss Minchin, breathlessly, “this instant! Leave the schoolroom! Attend to your lessons, young ladies!”

Sara made a little bow.

“Excuse me for laughing if it was impolite,” she said, and walked out of the room, leaving Miss Minchin struggling with her rage, and the girls whispering over their books.

“Did you see her? Did you see how queer she looked?” Jessie broke out. “I shouldn’t be at all surprised if she did turn out to be something. Suppose she should!”

12

The Other Side of the Wall

When one lives in a row of houses, it is interesting to think of the things which are being done and said on the other side of the wall of the very rooms one is living in. Sara was fond of amusing herself by trying to imagine the things hidden by the wall which divided the Select Seminary from the Indian gentleman’s house. She knew that the schoolroom was next to the Indian gentleman’s study, and she hoped that the wall was thick so that the noise made sometimes after lesson hours would not disturb him.

“I am growing quite fond of him,” she said to Ermengarde; “I should not like him to be disturbed. I have adopted him for a friend. You can do that with people you never speak to at all. You can just watch them, and think about them and be sorry for them, until they seem almost like relations. I’m quite anxious sometimes when I see the doctor call twice a day.”

“I have very few relations,” said Ermengarde, reflectively, “and I’m very glad of it. I don’t like those I have. My two aunts are always saying, ‘Dear me, Ermengarde! You are very fat. You shouldn’t eat sweets,’ and my uncle is always asking me things like, ‘When did Edward the Third ascend the throne?’ and, ‘Who died of a surfeit of lampreys?'”

Sara laughed.

“People you never speak to can’t ask you questions like that,” she said; “and I’m sure the Indian gentleman wouldn’t even if he was quite intimate with you. I am fond of him.”

She had become fond of the Large Family because they looked happy; but she had become fond of the Indian gentleman because he looked unhappy. He had evidently not fully recovered from some very severe illness. In the kitchen—where, of course, the servants, through some mysterious means, knew everything—there was much discussion of his case. He was not an Indian gentleman really, but an Englishman who had lived in India. He had met with great misfortunes which had for a time so imperilled his whole fortune that he had thought himself ruined and disgraced forever. The shock had been so great that he had almost died of brain fever; and ever since he had been shattered in health, though his fortunes had changed and all his possessions had been restored to him. His trouble and peril had been connected with mines.

“And mines with diamonds in ’em!” said the cook. “No savin’s of mine never goes into no mines—particular diamond ones”—with a side glance at Sara. “We all know somethin’ of THEM.” “He felt as my papa felt,” Sara thought. “He was ill as my papa was; but he did not die.”

So her heart was more drawn to him than before. When she was sent out at night she used sometimes to feel quite glad, because there was always a chance that the curtains of the house next door might not yet be closed and she could look into the warm room and see her adopted friend. When no one was about she used sometimes to stop, and, holding to the iron railings, wish him good night as if he could hear her.

“Perhaps you can FEEL if you can’t hear,” was her fancy. “Perhaps kind thoughts reach people somehow, even through windows and doors and walls. Perhaps you feel a little warm and comforted, and don’t know why, when I am standing here in the cold and hoping you will get well and happy again. I am so sorry for you,” she would whisper in an intense little voice. “I wish you had a ‘Little Missus’ who could pet you as I used to pet papa when he had a headache. I should like to be your ‘Little Missus’ myself, poor dear! Good night—good night. God bless you!”

She would go away, feeling quite comforted and a little warmer herself. Her sympathy was so strong that it seemed as if it MUST reach him somehow as he sat alone in his armchair by the fire, nearly always in a great dressing gown, and nearly always with his forehead resting in his hand as he gazed hopelessly into the fire. He looked to Sara like a man who had a trouble on his mind still, not merely like one whose troubles lay all in the past.

“He always seems as if he were thinking of something that hurts him NOW”, she said to herself, “but he has got his money back and he will get over his brain fever in time, so he ought not to look like that. I wonder if there is something else.”

If there was something else—something even servants did not hear of—she could not help believing that the father of the Large Family knew it—the gentleman she called Mr. Montmorency. Mr. Montmorency went to see him often, and Mrs. Montmorency and all the little Montmorencys went, too, though less often. He seemed particularly fond of the two elder little girls—the Janet and Nora who had been so alarmed when their small brother Donald had given Sara his sixpence. He had, in fact, a very tender place in his heart for all children, and particularly for little girls. Janet and Nora were as fond of him as he was of them, and looked forward with the greatest pleasure to the afternoons when they were allowed to cross the square and make their well-behaved little visits to him. They were extremely decorous little visits because he was an invalid.

“He is a poor thing,” said Janet, “and he says we cheer him up. We try to cheer him up very quietly.”

Janet was the head of the family, and kept the rest of it in order. It was she who decided when it was discreet to ask the Indian gentleman to tell stories about India, and it was she who saw when he was tired and it was the time to steal quietly away and tell Ram Dass to go to him. They were very fond of Ram Dass. He could have told any number of stories if he had been able to speak anything but Hindustani. The Indian gentleman’s real name was Mr. Carrisford, and Janet told Mr. Carrisford about the encounter with the little-girl-who-was-not-a-beggar. He was very much interested, and all the more so when he heard from Ram Dass of the adventure of the monkey on the roof. Ram Dass made for him a very clear picture of the attic and its desolateness—of the bare floor and broken plaster, the rusty, empty grate, and the hard, narrow bed.

“Carmichael,” he said to the father of the Large Family, after he had heard this description, “I wonder how many of the attics in this square are like that one, and how many wretched little servant girls sleep on such beds, while I toss on my down pillows, loaded and harassed by wealth that is, most of it—not mine.”

“My dear fellow,” Mr. Carmichael answered cheerily, “the sooner you cease tormenting yourself the better it will be for you. If you possessed all the wealth of all the Indies, you could not set right all the discomforts in the world, and if you began to refurnish all the attics in this square, there would still remain all the attics in all the other squares and streets to put in order. And there you are!”

Mr. Carrisford sat and bit his nails as he looked into the glowing bed of coals in the grate.

“Do you suppose,” he said slowly, after a pause—”do you think it is possible that the other child—the child I never cease thinking of, I believe—could be—could POSSIBLY be reduced to any such condition as the poor little soul next door?”

Mr. Carmichael looked at him uneasily. He knew that the worst thing the man could do for himself, for his reason and his health, was to begin to think in the particular way of this particular subject.

“If the child at Madame Pascal’s school in Paris was the one you are in search of,” he answered soothingly, “she would seem to be in the hands of people who can afford to take care of her. They adopted her because she had been the favorite companion of their little daughter who died. They had no other children, and Madame Pascal said that they were extremely well-to-do Russians.”

“And the wretched woman actually did not know where they had taken her!” exclaimed Mr. Carrisford.

Mr. Carmichael shrugged his shoulders.

“She was a shrewd, worldly Frenchwoman, and was evidently only too glad to get the child so comfortably off her hands when the father’s death left her totally unprovided for. Women of her type do not trouble themselves about the futures of children who might prove burdens. The adopted parents apparently disappeared and left no trace.”

“But you say ‘IF the child was the one I am in search of. You say ‘if.’ We are not sure. There was a difference in the name.”

“Madame Pascal pronounced it as if it were Carew instead of Crewe—but that might be merely a matter of pronunciation. The circumstances were curiously similar. An English officer in India had placed his motherless little girl at the school. He had died suddenly after losing his fortune.” Mr. Carmichael paused a moment, as if a new thought had occurred to him. “Are you SURE the child was left at a school in Paris? Are you sure it was Paris?”

“My dear fellow,” broke forth Carrisford, with restless bitterness, “I am SURE of nothing. I never saw either the child or her mother. Ralph Crewe and I loved each other as boys, but we had not met since our school days, until we met in India. I was absorbed in the magnificent promise of the mines. He became absorbed, too. The whole thing was so huge and glittering that we half lost our heads. When we met we scarcely spoke of anything else. I only knew that the child had been sent to school somewhere. I do not even remember, now, HOW I knew it.”

He was beginning to be excited. He always became excited when his still weakened brain was stirred by memories of the catastrophes of the past.

Mr. Carmichael watched him anxiously. It was necessary to ask some questions, but they must be put quietly and with caution.

“But you had reason to think the school WAS in Paris?”

“Yes,” was the answer, “because her mother was a Frenchwoman, and I had heard that she wished her child to be educated in Paris. It seemed only likely that she would be there.”

“Yes,” Mr. Carmichael said, “it seems more than probable.”

The Indian gentleman leaned forward and struck the table with a long, wasted hand.

“Carmichael,” he said, “I MUST find her. If she is alive, she is somewhere. If she is friendless and penniless, it is through my fault. How is a man to get back his nerve with a thing like that on his mind? This sudden change of luck at the mines has made realities of all our most fantastic dreams, and poor Crewe’s child may be begging in the street!”

“No, no,” said Carmichael. “Try to be calm. Console yourself with the fact that when she is found you have a fortune to hand over to her.”

“Why was I not man enough to stand my ground when things looked black?” Carrisford groaned in petulant misery. “I believe I should have stood my ground if I had not been responsible for other people’s money as well as my own. Poor Crewe had put into the scheme every penny that he owned. He trusted me—he LOVED me. And he died thinking I had ruined him—I—Tom Carrisford, who played cricket at Eton with him. What a villain he must have thought me!”

“Don’t reproach yourself so bitterly.”

“I don’t reproach myself because the speculation threatened to fail—I reproach myself for losing my courage. I ran away like a swindler and a thief, because I could not face my best friend and tell him I had ruined him and his child.”

The good-hearted father of the Large Family put his hand on his shoulder comfortingly.

“You ran away because your brain had given way under the strain of mental torture,” he said. “You were half delirious already. If you had not been you would have stayed and fought it out. You were in a hospital, strapped down in bed, raving with brain fever, two days after you left the place. Remember that.”

Carrisford dropped his forehead in his hands.

“Good God! Yes,” he said. “I was driven mad with dread and horror. I had not slept for weeks. The night I staggered out of my house all the air seemed full of hideous things mocking and mouthing at me.”

“That is explanation enough in itself,” said Mr. Carmichael. “How could a man on the verge of brain fever judge sanely!”

Carrisford shook his drooping head.

“And when I returned to consciousness poor Crewe was dead—and buried. And I seemed to remember nothing. I did not remember the child for months and months. Even when I began to recall her existence everything seemed in a sort of haze.”

He stopped a moment and rubbed his forehead. “It sometimes seems so now when I try to remember. Surely I must sometime have heard Crewe speak of the school she was sent to. Don’t you think so?”

“He might not have spoken of it definitely. You never seem even to have heard her real name.”

“He used to call her by an odd pet name he had invented. He called her his ‘Little Missus.’ But the wretched mines drove everything else out of our heads. We talked of nothing else. If he spoke of the school, I forgot—I forgot. And now I shall never remember.”

“Come, come,” said Carmichael. “We shall find her yet. We will continue to search for Madame Pascal’s good-natured Russians. She seemed to have a vague idea that they lived in Moscow. We will take that as a clue. I will go to Moscow.”

“If I were able to travel, I would go with you,” said Carrisford; “but I can only sit here wrapped in furs and stare at the fire. And when I look into it I seem to see Crewe’s gay young face gazing back at me. He looks as if he were asking me a question. Sometimes I dream of him at night, and he always stands before me and asks the same question in words. Can you guess what he says, Carmichael?”

Mr. Carmichael answered him in a rather low voice.

“Not exactly,” he said.

“He always says, ‘Tom, old man—Tom—where is the Little Missus?'” He caught at Carmichael’s hand and clung to it. “I must be able to answer him—I must!” he said. “Help me to find her. Help me.”

 

On the other side of the wall Sara was sitting in her garret talking to Melchisedec, who had come out for his evening meal.

“It has been hard to be a princess today, Melchisedec,” she said. “It has been harder than usual. It gets harder as the weather grows colder and the streets get more sloppy. When Lavinia laughed at my muddy skirt as I passed her in the hall, I thought of something to say all in a flash—and I only just stopped myself in time. You can’t sneer back at people like that—if you are a princess. But you have to bite your tongue to hold yourself in. I bit mine. It was a cold afternoon, Melchisedec. And it’s a cold night.”

Quite suddenly she put her black head down in her arms, as she often did when she was alone.

“Oh, papa,” she whispered, “what a long time it seems since I was your ‘Little Missus’!”

This was what happened that day on both sides of the wall.

13

One of the Populace

The winter was a wretched one. There were days on which Sara tramped through snow when she went on her errands; there were worse days when the snow melted and combined itself with mud to form slush; there were others when the fog was so thick that the lamps in the street were lighted all day and London looked as it had looked the afternoon, several years ago, when the cab had driven through the thoroughfares with Sara tucked up on its seat, leaning against her father’s shoulder. On such days the windows of the house of the Large Family always looked delightfully cozy and alluring, and the study in which the Indian gentleman sat glowed with warmth and rich color. But the attic was dismal beyond words. There were no longer sunsets or sunrises to look at, and scarcely ever any stars, it seemed to Sara. The clouds hung low over the skylight and were either gray or mud-color, or dropping heavy rain. At four o’clock in the afternoon, even when there was no special fog, the daylight was at an end. If it was necessary to go to her attic for anything, Sara was obliged to light a candle. The women in the kitchen were depressed, and that made them more ill-tempered than ever. Becky was driven like a little slave.

“‘Twarn’t for you, miss,” she said hoarsely to Sara one night when she had crept into the attic—”‘twarn’t for you, an’ the Bastille, an’ bein’ the prisoner in the next cell, I should die. That there does seem real now, doesn’t it? The missus is more like the head jailer every day she lives. I can jest see them big keys you say she carries. The cook she’s like one of the under-jailers. Tell me some more, please, miss—tell me about the subt’ranean passage we’ve dug under the walls.”

“I’ll tell you something warmer,” shivered Sara. “Get your coverlet and wrap it round you, and I’ll get mine, and we will huddle close together on the bed, and I’ll tell you about the tropical forest where the Indian gentleman’s monkey used to live. When I see him sitting on the table near the window and looking out into the street with that mournful expression, I always feel sure he is thinking about the tropical forest where he used to swing by his tail from coconut trees. I wonder who caught him, and if he left a family behind who had depended on him for coconuts.”

“That is warmer, miss,” said Becky, gratefully; “but, someways, even the Bastille is sort of heatin’ when you gets to tellin’ about it.”

“That is because it makes you think of something else,” said Sara, wrapping the coverlet round her until only her small dark face was to be seen looking out of it. “I’ve noticed this. What you have to do with your mind, when your body is miserable, is to make it think of something else.”

“Can you do it, miss?” faltered Becky, regarding her with admiring eyes.

Sara knitted her brows a moment.

“Sometimes I can and sometimes I can’t,” she said stoutly. “But when I CAN I’m all right. And what I believe is that we always could—if we practiced enough. I’ve been practicing a good deal lately, and it’s beginning to be easier than it used to be. When things are horrible—just horrible—I think as hard as ever I can of being a princess. I say to myself, ‘I am a princess, and I am a fairy one, and because I am a fairy nothing can hurt me or make me uncomfortable.’ You don’t know how it makes you forget”—with a laugh.

She had many opportunities of making her mind think of something else, and many opportunities of proving to herself whether or not she was a princess. But one of the strongest tests she was ever put to came on a certain dreadful day which, she often thought afterward, would never quite fade out of her memory even in the years to come.

For several days it had rained continuously; the streets were chilly and sloppy and full of dreary, cold mist; there was mud everywhere—sticky London mud—and over everything the pall of drizzle and fog. Of course there were several long and tiresome errands to be done—there always were on days like this—and Sara was sent out again and again, until her shabby clothes were damp through. The absurd old feathers on her forlorn hat were more draggled and absurd than ever, and her downtrodden shoes were so wet that they could not hold any more water. Added to this, she had been deprived of her dinner, because Miss Minchin had chosen to punish her. She was so cold and hungry and tired that her face began to have a pinched look, and now and then some kind-hearted person passing her in the street glanced at her with sudden sympathy. But she did not know that. She hurried on, trying to make her mind think of something else. It was really very necessary. Her way of doing it was to “pretend” and “suppose” with all the strength that was left in her. But really this time it was harder than she had ever found it, and once or twice she thought it almost made her more cold and hungry instead of less so. But she persevered obstinately, and as the muddy water squelched through her broken shoes and the wind seemed trying to drag her thin jacket from her, she talked to herself as she walked, though she did not speak aloud or even move her lips.

“Suppose I had dry clothes on,” she thought. “Suppose I had good shoes and a long, thick coat and merino stockings and a whole umbrella. And suppose—suppose—just when I was near a baker’s where they sold hot buns, I should find sixpence—which belonged to nobody. SUPPOSE if I did, I should go into the shop and buy six of the hottest buns and eat them all without stopping.”

Some very odd things happen in this world sometimes.

It certainly was an odd thing that happened to Sara. She had to cross the street just when she was saying this to herself. The mud was dreadful—she almost had to wade. She picked her way as carefully as she could, but she could not save herself much; only, in picking her way, she had to look down at her feet and the mud, and in looking down—just as she reached the pavement—she saw something shining in the gutter. It was actually a piece of silver—a tiny piece trodden upon by many feet, but still with spirit enough left to shine a little. Not quite a sixpence, but the next thing to it—a fourpenny piece.

In one second it was in her cold little red-and-blue hand.

“Oh,” she gasped, “it is true! It is true!”

And then, if you will believe me, she looked straight at the shop directly facing her. And it was a baker’s shop, and a cheerful, stout, motherly woman with rosy cheeks was putting into the window a tray of delicious newly baked hot buns, fresh from the oven—large, plump, shiny buns, with currants in them.

It almost made Sara feel faint for a few seconds—the shock, and the sight of the buns, and the delightful odors of warm bread floating up through the baker’s cellar window.

She knew she need not hesitate to use the little piece of money. It had evidently been lying in the mud for some time, and its owner was completely lost in the stream of passing people who crowded and jostled each other all day long.

“But I’ll go and ask the baker woman if she has lost anything,” she said to herself, rather faintly. So she crossed the pavement and put her wet foot on the step. As she did so she saw something that made her stop.

It was a little figure more forlorn even than herself—a little figure which was not much more than a bundle of rags, from which small, bare, red muddy feet peeped out, only because the rags with which their owner was trying to cover them were not long enough. Above the rags appeared a shock head of tangled hair, and a dirty face with big, hollow, hungry eyes.

Sara knew they were hungry eyes the moment she saw them, and she felt a sudden sympathy.

“This,” she said to herself, with a little sigh, “is one of the populace—and she is hungrier than I am.”

The child—this “one of the populace”—stared up at Sara, and shuffled herself aside a little, so as to give her room to pass. She was used to being made to give room to everybody. She knew that if a policeman chanced to see her he would tell her to “move on.”

Sara clutched her little fourpenny piece and hesitated for a few seconds. Then she spoke to her.

“Are you hungry?” she asked.

The child shuffled herself and her rags a little more.

“Ain’t I jist?” she said in a hoarse voice. “Jist ain’t I?”

“Haven’t you had any dinner?” said Sara.

“No dinner,” more hoarsely still and with more shuffling. “Nor yet no bre’fast—nor yet no supper. No nothin’.

“Since when?” asked Sara.

“Dunno. Never got nothin’ today—nowhere. I’ve axed an’ axed.”

Just to look at her made Sara more hungry and faint. But those queer little thoughts were at work in her brain, and she was talking to herself, though she was sick at heart.

“If I’m a princess,” she was saying, “if I’m a princess—when they were poor and driven from their thrones—they always shared—with the populace—if they met one poorer and hungrier than themselves. They always shared. Buns are a penny each. If it had been sixpence I could have eaten six. It won’t be enough for either of us. But it will be better than nothing.”

“Wait a minute,” she said to the beggar child.

She went into the shop. It was warm and smelled deliciously. The woman was just going to put some more hot buns into the window.

“If you please,” said Sara, “have you lost fourpence—a silver fourpence?” And she held the forlorn little piece of money out to her.

The woman looked at it and then at her—at her intense little face and draggled, once fine clothes.

“Bless us, no,” she answered. “Did you find it?”

“Yes,” said Sara. “In the gutter.”

“Keep it, then,” said the woman. “It may have been there for a week, and goodness knows who lost it. YOU could never find out.”

“I know that,” said Sara, “but I thought I would ask you.”

“Not many would,” said the woman, looking puzzled and interested and good-natured all at once.

“Do you want to buy something?” she added, as she saw Sara glance at the buns.

“Four buns, if you please,” said Sara. “Those at a penny each.”

The woman went to the window and put some in a paper bag.

Sara noticed that she put in six.

“I said four, if you please,” she explained. “I have only fourpence.”

“I’ll throw in two for makeweight,” said the woman with her good-natured look. “I dare say you can eat them sometime. Aren’t you hungry?”

A mist rose before Sara’s eyes.

“Yes,” she answered. “I am very hungry, and I am much obliged to you for your kindness; and”—she was going to add—”there is a child outside who is hungrier than I am.” But just at that moment two or three customers came in at once, and each one seemed in a hurry, so she could only thank the woman again and go out.

The beggar girl was still huddled up in the corner of the step. She looked frightful in her wet and dirty rags. She was staring straight before her with a stupid look of suffering, and Sara saw her suddenly draw the back of her roughened black hand across her eyes to rub away the tears which seemed to have surprised her by forcing their way from under her lids. She was muttering to herself.

Sara opened the paper bag and took out one of the hot buns, which had already warmed her own cold hands a little.

“See,” she said, putting the bun in the ragged lap, “this is nice and hot. Eat it, and you will not feel so hungry.”

The child started and stared up at her, as if such sudden, amazing good luck almost frightened her; then she snatched up the bun and began to cram it into her mouth with great wolfish bites.

“Oh, my! Oh, my!” Sara heard her say hoarsely, in wild delight. “OH my!”

Sara took out three more buns and put them down.

The sound in the hoarse, ravenous voice was awful.

“She is hungrier than I am,” she said to herself. “She’s starving.” But her hand trembled when she put down the fourth bun. “I’m not starving,” she said—and she put down the fifth.

The little ravening London savage was still snatching and devouring when she turned away. She was too ravenous to give any thanks, even if she had ever been taught politeness—which she had not. She was only a poor little wild animal.

“Good-bye,” said Sara.

When she reached the other side of the street she looked back. The child had a bun in each hand and had stopped in the middle of a bite to watch her. Sara gave her a little nod, and the child, after another stare—a curious lingering stare—jerked her shaggy head in response, and until Sara was out of sight she did not take another bite or even finish the one she had begun.

At that moment the baker-woman looked out of her shop window.

“Well, I never!” she exclaimed. “If that young un hasn’t given her buns to a beggar child! It wasn’t because she didn’t want them, either. Well, well, she looked hungry enough. I’d give something to know what she did it for.”

She stood behind her window for a few moments and pondered. Then her curiosity got the better of her. She went to the door and spoke to the beggar child.

“Who gave you those buns?” she asked her. The child nodded her head toward Sara’s vanishing figure.

“What did she say?” inquired the woman.

“Axed me if I was ‘ungry,” replied the hoarse voice.

“What did you say?”

“Said I was jist.”

“And then she came in and got the buns, and gave them to you, did she?”

The child nodded.

“How many?”

“Five.”

The woman thought it over.

“Left just one for herself,” she said in a low voice. “And she could have eaten the whole six—I saw it in her eyes.”

She looked after the little draggled far-away figure and felt more disturbed in her usually comfortable mind than she had felt for many a day.

“I wish she hadn’t gone so quick,” she said. “I’m blest if she shouldn’t have had a dozen.” Then she turned to the child.

“Are you hungry yet?” she said.

“I’m allus hungry,” was the answer, “but ‘t ain’t as bad as it was.”

“Come in here,” said the woman, and she held open the shop door.

The child got up and shuffled in. To be invited into a warm place full of bread seemed an incredible thing. She did not know what was going to happen. She did not care, even.

“Get yourself warm,” said the woman, pointing to a fire in the tiny back room. “And look here; when you are hard up for a bit of bread, you can come in here and ask for it. I’m blest if I won’t give it to you for that young one’s sake.”

* * *

Sara found some comfort in her remaining bun. At all events, it was very hot, and it was better than nothing. As she walked along she broke off small pieces and ate them slowly to make them last longer.

“Suppose it was a magic bun,” she said, “and a bite was as much as a whole dinner. I should be overeating myself if I went on like this.”

It was dark when she reached the square where the Select Seminary was situated. The lights in the houses were all lighted. The blinds were not yet drawn in the windows of the room where she nearly always caught glimpses of members of the Large Family. Frequently at this hour she could see the gentleman she called Mr. Montmorency sitting in a big chair, with a small swarm round him, talking, laughing, perching on the arms of his seat or on his knees or leaning against them. This evening the swarm was about him, but he was not seated. On the contrary, there was a good deal of excitement going on. It was evident that a journey was to be taken, and it was Mr. Montmorency who was to take it. A brougham stood before the door, and a big portmanteau had been strapped upon it. The children were dancing about, chattering and hanging on to their father. The pretty rosy mother was standing near him, talking as if she was asking final questions. Sara paused a moment to see the little ones lifted up and kissed and the bigger ones bent over and kissed also.

“I wonder if he will stay away long,” she thought. “The portmanteau is rather big. Oh, dear, how they will miss him! I shall miss him myself—even though he doesn’t know I am alive.”

When the door opened she moved away—remembering the sixpence—but she saw the traveler come out and stand against the background of the warmly-lighted hall, the older children still hovering about him.

“Will Moscow be covered with snow?” said the little girl Janet. “Will there be ice everywhere?”

“Shall you drive in a drosky?” cried another. “Shall you see the Czar?”

“I will write and tell you all about it,” he answered, laughing. “And I will send you pictures of muzhiks and things. Run into the house. It is a hideous damp night. I would rather stay with you than go to Moscow. Good night! Good night, duckies! God bless you!” And he ran down the steps and jumped into the brougham.

“If you find the little girl, give her our love,” shouted Guy Clarence, jumping up and down on the door mat.

Then they went in and shut the door.

“Did you see,” said Janet to Nora, as they went back to the room—”the little-girl-who-is-not-a-beggar was passing? She looked all cold and wet, and I saw her turn her head over her shoulder and look at us. Mamma says her clothes always look as if they had been given her by someone who was quite rich—someone who only let her have them because they were too shabby to wear. The people at the school always send her out on errands on the horridest days and nights there are.”

Sara crossed the square to Miss Minchin’s area steps, feeling faint and shaky.

“I wonder who the little girl is,” she thought—”the little girl he is going to look for.”

And she went down the area steps, lugging her basket and finding it very heavy indeed, as the father of the Large Family drove quickly on his way to the station to take the train which was to carry him to Moscow, where he was to make his best efforts to search for the lost little daughter of Captain Crewe.

14

What Melchisedec Heard and Saw

On this very afternoon, while Sara was out, a strange thing happened in the attic. Only Melchisedec saw and heard it; and he was so much alarmed and mystified that he scuttled back to his hole and hid there, and really quaked and trembled as he peeped out furtively and with great caution to watch what was going on.

The attic had been very still all the day after Sara had left it in the early morning. The stillness had only been broken by the pattering of the rain upon the slates and the skylight. Melchisedec had, in fact, found it rather dull; and when the rain ceased to patter and perfect silence reigned, he decided to come out and reconnoiter, though experience taught him that Sara would not return for some time. He had been rambling and sniffing about, and had just found a totally unexpected and unexplained crumb left from his last meal, when his attention was attracted by a sound on the roof. He stopped to listen with a palpitating heart. The sound suggested that something was moving on the roof. It was approaching the skylight; it reached the skylight. The skylight was being mysteriously opened. A dark face peered into the attic; then another face appeared behind it, and both looked in with signs of caution and interest. Two men were outside on the roof, and were making silent preparations to enter through the skylight itself. One was Ram Dass and the other was a young man who was the Indian gentleman’s secretary; but of course Melchisedec did not know this. He only knew that the men were invading the silence and privacy of the attic; and as the one with the dark face let himself down through the aperture with such lightness and dexterity that he did not make the slightest sound, Melchisedec turned tail and fled precipitately back to his hole. He was frightened to death. He had ceased to be timid with Sara, and knew she would never throw anything but crumbs, and would never make any sound other than the soft, low, coaxing whistling; but strange men were dangerous things to remain near. He lay close and flat near the entrance of his home, just managing to peep through the crack with a bright, alarmed eye. How much he understood of the talk he heard I am not in the least able to say; but, even if he had understood it all, he would probably have remained greatly mystified.

The secretary, who was light and young, slipped through the skylight as noiselessly as Ram Dass had done; and he caught a last glimpse of Melchisedec’s vanishing tail.

“Was that a rat?” he asked Ram Dass in a whisper.

“Yes; a rat, Sahib,” answered Ram Dass, also whispering. “There are many in the walls.”

“Ugh!” exclaimed the young man. “It is a wonder the child is not terrified of them.”

Ram Dass made a gesture with his hands. He also smiled respectfully. He was in this place as the intimate exponent of Sara, though she had only spoken to him once.

“The child is the little friend of all things, Sahib,” he answered. “She is not as other children. I see her when she does not see me. I slip across the slates and look at her many nights to see that she is safe. I watch her from my window when she does not know I am near. She stands on the table there and looks out at the sky as if it spoke to her. The sparrows come at her call. The rat she has fed and tamed in her loneliness. The poor slave of the house comes to her for comfort. There is a little child who comes to her in secret; there is one older who worships her and would listen to her forever if she might. This I have seen when I have crept across the roof. By the mistress of the house—who is an evil woman—she is treated like a pariah; but she has the bearing of a child who is of the blood of kings!”

“You seem to know a great deal about her,” the secretary said.

“All her life each day I know,” answered Ram Dass. “Her going out I know, and her coming in; her sadness and her poor joys; her coldness and her hunger. I know when she is alone until midnight, learning from her books; I know when her secret friends steal to her and she is happier—as children can be, even in the midst of poverty—because they come and she may laugh and talk with them in whispers. If she were ill I should know, and I would come and serve her if it might be done.”

“You are sure no one comes near this place but herself, and that she will not return and surprise us. She would be frightened if she found us here, and the Sahib Carrisford’s plan would be spoiled.”

Ram Dass crossed noiselessly to the door and stood close to it.

“None mount here but herself, Sahib,” he said. “She has gone out with her basket and may be gone for hours. If I stand here I can hear any step before it reaches the last flight of the stairs.”

The secretary took a pencil and a tablet from his breast pocket.

“Keep your ears open,” he said; and he began to walk slowly and softly round the miserable little room, making rapid notes on his tablet as he looked at things.

First he went to the narrow bed. He pressed his hand upon the mattress and uttered an exclamation.

“As hard as a stone,” he said. “That will have to be altered some day when she is out. A special journey can be made to bring it across. It cannot be done tonight.” He lifted the covering and examined the one thin pillow.

“Coverlet dingy and worn, blanket thin, sheets patched and ragged,” he said. “What a bed for a child to sleep in—and in a house which calls itself respectable! There has not been a fire in that grate for many a day,” glancing at the rusty fireplace.

“Never since I have seen it,” said Ram Dass. “The mistress of the house is not one who remembers that another than herself may be cold.”

The secretary was writing quickly on his tablet. He looked up from it as he tore off a leaf and slipped it into his breast pocket.

“It is a strange way of doing the thing,” he said. “Who planned it?”

Ram Dass made a modestly apologetic obeisance.

“It is true that the first thought was mine, Sahib,” he said; “though it was naught but a fancy. I am fond of this child; we are both lonely. It is her way to relate her visions to her secret friends. Being sad one night, I lay close to the open skylight and listened. The vision she related told what this miserable room might be if it had comforts in it. She seemed to see it as she talked, and she grew cheered and warmed as she spoke. Then she came to this fancy; and the next day, the Sahib being ill and wretched, I told him of the thing to amuse him. It seemed then but a dream, but it pleased the Sahib. To hear of the child’s doings gave him entertainment. He became interested in her and asked questions. At last he began to please himself with the thought of making her visions real things.”

“You think that it can be done while she sleeps? Suppose she awakened,” suggested the secretary; and it was evident that whatsoever the plan referred to was, it had caught and pleased his fancy as well as the Sahib Carrisford’s.

“I can move as if my feet were of velvet,” Ram Dass replied; “and children sleep soundly—even the unhappy ones. I could have entered this room in the night many times, and without causing her to turn upon her pillow. If the other bearer passes to me the things through the window, I can do all and she will not stir. When she awakens she will think a magician has been here.”

He smiled as if his heart warmed under his white robe, and the secretary smiled back at him.

“It will be like a story from the Arabian Nights,” he said. “Only an Oriental could have planned it. It does not belong to London fogs.”

They did not remain very long, to the great relief of Melchisedec, who, as he probably did not comprehend their conversation, felt their movements and whispers ominous. The young secretary seemed interested in everything. He wrote down things about the floor, the fireplace, the broken footstool, the old table, the walls—which last he touched with his hand again and again, seeming much pleased when he found that a number of old nails had been driven in various places.

“You can hang things on them,” he said.

Ram Dass smiled mysteriously.

“Yesterday, when she was out,” he said, “I entered, bringing with me small, sharp nails which can be pressed into the wall without blows from a hammer. I placed many in the plaster where I may need them. They are ready.”

The Indian gentleman’s secretary stood still and looked round him as he thrust his tablets back into his pocket.

“I think I have made notes enough; we can go now,” he said. “The Sahib Carrisford has a warm heart. It is a thousand pities that he has not found the lost child.”

“If he should find her his strength would be restored to him,” said Ram Dass. “His God may lead her to him yet.”

Then they slipped through the skylight as noiselessly as they had entered it. And, after he was quite sure they had gone, Melchisedec was greatly relieved, and in the course of a few minutes felt it safe to emerge from his hole again and scuffle about in the hope that even such alarming human beings as these might have chanced to carry crumbs in their pockets and drop one or two of them.

15

The Magic

When Sara had passed the house next door she had seen Ram Dass closing the shutters, and caught her glimpse of this room also.

“It is a long time since I saw a nice place from the inside,” was the thought which crossed her mind.

There was the usual bright fire glowing in the grate, and the Indian gentleman was sitting before it. His head was resting in his hand, and he looked as lonely and unhappy as ever.

“Poor man!” said Sara. “I wonder what you are supposing.”

And this was what he was “supposing” at that very moment.

“Suppose,” he was thinking, “suppose—even if Carmichael traces the people to Moscow—the little girl they took from Madame Pascal’s school in Paris is NOT the one we are in search of. Suppose she proves to be quite a different child. What steps shall I take next?”

When Sara went into the house she met Miss Minchin, who had come downstairs to scold the cook.

“Where have you wasted your time?” she demanded. “You have been out for hours.”

“It was so wet and muddy,” Sara answered, “it was hard to walk, because my shoes were so bad and slipped about.”

“Make no excuses,” said Miss Minchin, “and tell no falsehoods.”

Sara went in to the cook. The cook had received a severe lecture and was in a fearful temper as a result. She was only too rejoiced to have someone to vent her rage on, and Sara was a convenience, as usual.

“Why didn’t you stay all night?” she snapped.

Sara laid her purchases on the table.

“Here are the things,” she said.

The cook looked them over, grumbling. She was in a very savage humor indeed.

“May I have something to eat?” Sara asked rather faintly.

“Tea’s over and done with,” was the answer. “Did you expect me to keep it hot for you?”

Sara stood silent for a second.

“I had no dinner,” she said next, and her voice was quite low. She made it low because she was afraid it would tremble.

“There’s some bread in the pantry,” said the cook. “That’s all you’ll get at this time of day.”

Sara went and found the bread. It was old and hard and dry. The cook was in too vicious a humor to give her anything to eat with it. It was always safe and easy to vent her spite on Sara. Really, it was hard for the child to climb the three long flights of stairs leading to her attic. She often found them long and steep when she was tired; but tonight it seemed as if she would never reach the top. Several times she was obliged to stop to rest. When she reached the top landing she was glad to see the glimmer of a light coming from under her door. That meant that Ermengarde had managed to creep up to pay her a visit. There was some comfort in that. It was better than to go into the room alone and find it empty and desolate. The mere presence of plump, comfortable Ermengarde, wrapped in her red shawl, would warm it a little.

Yes; there Ermengarde was when she opened the door. She was sitting in the middle of the bed, with her feet tucked safely under her. She had never become intimate with Melchisedec and his family, though they rather fascinated her. When she found herself alone in the attic she always preferred to sit on the bed until Sara arrived. She had, in fact, on this occasion had time to become rather nervous, because Melchisedec had appeared and sniffed about a good deal, and once had made her utter a repressed squeal by sitting up on his hind legs and, while he looked at her, sniffing pointedly in her direction.

“Oh, Sara,” she cried out, “I am glad you have come. Melchy WOULD sniff about so. I tried to coax him to go back, but he wouldn’t for such a long time. I like him, you know; but it does frighten me when he sniffs right at me. Do you think he ever WOULD jump?”

“No,” answered Sara.

Ermengarde crawled forward on the bed to look at her.

“You DO look tired, Sara,” she said; “you are quite pale.”

“I AM tired,” said Sara, dropping on to the lopsided footstool. “Oh, there’s Melchisedec, poor thing. He’s come to ask for his supper.”

Melchisedec had come out of his hole as if he had been listening for her footstep. Sara was quite sure he knew it. He came forward with an affectionate, expectant expression as Sara put her hand in her pocket and turned it inside out, shaking her head.

“I’m very sorry,” she said. “I haven’t one crumb left. Go home, Melchisedec, and tell your wife there was nothing in my pocket. I’m afraid I forgot because the cook and Miss Minchin were so cross.”

Melchisedec seemed to understand. He shuffled resignedly, if not contentedly, back to his home.

“I did not expect to see you tonight, Ermie,” Sara said. Ermengarde hugged herself in the red shawl.

“Miss Amelia has gone out to spend the night with her old aunt,” she explained. “No one else ever comes and looks into the bedrooms after we are in bed. I could stay here until morning if I wanted to.”

She pointed toward the table under the skylight. Sara had not looked toward it as she came in. A number of books were piled upon it. Ermengarde’s gesture was a dejected one.

“Papa has sent me some more books, Sara,” she said. “There they are.”

Sara looked round and got up at once. She ran to the table, and picking up the top volume, turned over its leaves quickly. For the moment she forgot her discomforts.

“Ah,” she cried out, “how beautiful! Carlyle’s French Revolution. I have SO wanted to read that!”

“I haven’t,” said Ermengarde. “And papa will be so cross if I don’t. He’ll expect me to know all about it when I go home for the holidays. What SHALL I do?”

Sara stopped turning over the leaves and looked at her with an excited flush on her cheeks.

“Look here,” she cried, “if you’ll lend me these books, _I’ll_ read them—and tell you everything that’s in them afterward—and I’ll tell it so that you will remember it, too.”

“Oh, goodness!” exclaimed Ermengarde. “Do you think you can?”

“I know I can,” Sara answered. “The little ones always remember what I tell them.”

“Sara,” said Ermengarde, hope gleaming in her round face, “if you’ll do that, and make me remember, I’ll—I’ll give you anything.”

“I don’t want you to give me anything,” said Sara. “I want your books—I want them!” And her eyes grew big, and her chest heaved.

“Take them, then,” said Ermengarde. “I wish I wanted them—but I don’t. I’m not clever, and my father is, and he thinks I ought to be.”

Sara was opening one book after the other. “What are you going to tell your father?” she asked, a slight doubt dawning in her mind.

“Oh, he needn’t know,” answered Ermengarde. “He’ll think I’ve read them.”

Sara put down her book and shook her head slowly. “That’s almost like telling lies,” she said. “And lies—well, you see, they are not only wicked—they’re VULGAR. Sometimes”—reflectively—”I’ve thought perhaps I might do something wicked—I might suddenly fly into a rage and kill Miss Minchin, you know, when she was ill-treating me—but I COULDN’T be vulgar. Why can’t you tell your father _I_ read them?”

“He wants me to read them,” said Ermengarde, a little discouraged by this unexpected turn of affairs.

“He wants you to know what is in them,” said Sara. “And if I can tell it to you in an easy way and make you remember it, I should think he would like that.”

“He’ll like it if I learn anything in ANY way,” said rueful Ermengarde. “You would if you were my father.”

“It’s not your fault that—” began Sara. She pulled herself up and stopped rather suddenly. She had been going to say, “It’s not your fault that you are stupid.”

“That what?” Ermengarde asked.

“That you can’t learn things quickly,” amended Sara. “If you can’t, you can’t. If I can—why, I can; that’s all.”

She always felt very tender of Ermengarde, and tried not to let her feel too strongly the difference between being able to learn anything at once, and not being able to learn anything at all. As she looked at her plump face, one of her wise, old-fashioned thoughts came to her.

“Perhaps,” she said, “to be able to learn things quickly isn’t everything. To be kind is worth a great deal to other people. If Miss Minchin knew everything on earth and was like what she is now, she’d still be a detestable thing, and everybody would hate her. Lots of clever people have done harm and have been wicked. Look at Robespierre—”

She stopped and examined Ermengarde’s countenance, which was beginning to look bewildered. “Don’t you remember?” she demanded. “I told you about him not long ago. I believe you’ve forgotten.”

“Well, I don’t remember ALL of it,” admitted Ermengarde.

“Well, you wait a minute,” said Sara, “and I’ll take off my wet things and wrap myself in the coverlet and tell you over again.”

She took off her hat and coat and hung them on a nail against the wall, and she changed her wet shoes for an old pair of slippers. Then she jumped on the bed, and drawing the coverlet about her shoulders, sat with her arms round her knees. “Now, listen,” she said.

She plunged into the gory records of the French Revolution, and told such stories of it that Ermengarde’s eyes grew round with alarm and she held her breath. But though she was rather terrified, there was a delightful thrill in listening, and she was not likely to forget Robespierre again, or to have any doubts about the Princesse de Lamballe.

“You know they put her head on a pike and danced round it,” Sara explained. “And she had beautiful floating blonde hair; and when I think of her, I never see her head on her body, but always on a pike, with those furious people dancing and howling.”

It was agreed that Mr. St. John was to be told the plan they had made, and for the present the books were to be left in the attic.

“Now let’s tell each other things,” said Sara. “How are you getting on with your French lessons?”

“Ever so much better since the last time I came up here and you explained the conjugations. Miss Minchin could not understand why I did my exercises so well that first morning.”

Sara laughed a little and hugged her knees.

“She doesn’t understand why Lottie is doing her sums so well,” she said; “but it is because she creeps up here, too, and I help her.” She glanced round the room. “The attic would be rather nice—if it wasn’t so dreadful,” she said, laughing again. “It’s a good place to pretend in.”

The truth was that Ermengarde did not know anything of the sometimes almost unbearable side of life in the attic and she had not a sufficiently vivid imagination to depict it for herself. On the rare occasions that she could reach Sara’s room she only saw the side of it which was made exciting by things which were “pretended” and stories which were told. Her visits partook of the character of adventures; and though sometimes Sara looked rather pale, and it was not to be denied that she had grown very thin, her proud little spirit would not admit of complaints. She had never confessed that at times she was almost ravenous with hunger, as she was tonight. She was growing rapidly, and her constant walking and running about would have given her a keen appetite even if she had had abundant and regular meals of a much more nourishing nature than the unappetizing, inferior food snatched at such odd times as suited the kitchen convenience. She was growing used to a certain gnawing feeling in her young stomach.

“I suppose soldiers feel like this when they are on a long and weary march,” she often said to herself. She liked the sound of the phrase, “long and weary march.” It made her feel rather like a soldier. She had also a quaint sense of being a hostess in the attic.

“If I lived in a castle,” she argued, “and Ermengarde was the lady of another castle, and came to see me, with knights and squires and vassals riding with her, and pennons flying, when I heard the clarions sounding outside the drawbridge I should go down to receive her, and I should spread feasts in the banquet hall and call in minstrels to sing and play and relate romances. When she comes into the attic I can’t spread feasts, but I can tell stories, and not let her know disagreeable things. I dare say poor chatelaines had to do that in time of famine, when their lands had been pillaged.” She was a proud, brave little chatelaine, and dispensed generously the one hospitality she could offer—the dreams she dreamed—the visions she saw—the imaginings which were her joy and comfort.

So, as they sat together, Ermengarde did not know that she was faint as well as ravenous, and that while she talked she now and then wondered if her hunger would let her sleep when she was left alone. She felt as if she had never been quite so hungry before.

“I wish I was as thin as you, Sara,” Ermengarde said suddenly. “I believe you are thinner than you used to be. Your eyes look so big, and look at the sharp little bones sticking out of your elbow!”

Sara pulled down her sleeve, which had pushed itself up.

“I always was a thin child,” she said bravely, “and I always had big green eyes.”

“I love your queer eyes,” said Ermengarde, looking into them with affectionate admiration. “They always look as if they saw such a long way. I love them—and I love them to be green—though they look black generally.”

“They are cat’s eyes,” laughed Sara; “but I can’t see in the dark with them—because I have tried, and I couldn’t—I wish I could.”

It was just at this minute that something happened at the skylight which neither of them saw. If either of them had chanced to turn and look, she would have been startled by the sight of a dark face which peered cautiously into the room and disappeared as quickly and almost as silently as it had appeared. Not QUITE as silently, however. Sara, who had keen ears, suddenly turned a little and looked up at the roof.

“That didn’t sound like Melchisedec,” she said. “It wasn’t scratchy enough.”

“What?” said Ermengarde, a little startled.

“Didn’t you think you heard something?” asked Sara.

“N-no,” Ermengarde faltered. “Did you?” {another ed. has “No-no,”}

“Perhaps I didn’t,” said Sara; “but I thought I did. It sounded as if something was on the slates—something that dragged softly.”

“What could it be?” said Ermengarde. “Could it be—robbers?”

“No,” Sara began cheerfully. “There is nothing to steal—”

She broke off in the middle of her words. They both heard the sound that checked her. It was not on the slates, but on the stairs below, and it was Miss Minchin’s angry voice. Sara sprang off the bed, and put out the candle.

“She is scolding Becky,” she whispered, as she stood in the darkness. “She is making her cry.”

“Will she come in here?” Ermengarde whispered back, panic-stricken.

“No. She will think I am in bed. Don’t stir.”

It was very seldom that Miss Minchin mounted the last flight of stairs. Sara could only remember that she had done it once before. But now she was angry enough to be coming at least part of the way up, and it sounded as if she was driving Becky before her.

“You impudent, dishonest child!” they heard her say. “Cook tells me she has missed things repeatedly.”

“‘T warn’t me, mum,” said Becky sobbing. “I was ‘ungry enough, but ‘t warn’t me—never!”

“You deserve to be sent to prison,” said Miss Minchin’s voice. “Picking and stealing! Half a meat pie, indeed!”

“‘T warn’t me,” wept Becky. “I could ‘ave eat a whole un—but I never laid a finger on it.”

Miss Minchin was out of breath between temper and mounting the stairs. The meat pie had been intended for her special late supper. It became apparent that she boxed Becky’s ears.

“Don’t tell falsehoods,” she said. “Go to your room this instant.”

Both Sara and Ermengarde heard the slap, and then heard Becky run in her slipshod shoes up the stairs and into her attic. They heard her door shut, and knew that she threw herself upon her bed.

“I could ‘ave e’t two of ’em,” they heard her cry into her pillow. “An’ I never took a bite. ‘Twas cook give it to her policeman.”

Sara stood in the middle of the room in the darkness. She was clenching her little teeth and opening and shutting fiercely her outstretched hands. She could scarcely stand still, but she dared not move until Miss Minchin had gone down the stairs and all was still.

“The wicked, cruel thing!” she burst forth. “The cook takes things herself and then says Becky steals them. She DOESN’T! She DOESN’T! She’s so hungry sometimes that she eats crusts out of the ash barrel!” She pressed her hands hard against her face and burst into passionate little sobs, and Ermengarde, hearing this unusual thing, was overawed by it. Sara was crying! The unconquerable Sara! It seemed to denote something new—some mood she had never known. Suppose—suppose—a new dread possibility presented itself to her kind, slow, little mind all at once. She crept off the bed in the dark and found her way to the table where the candle stood. She struck a match and lit the candle. When she had lighted it, she bent forward and looked at Sara, with her new thought growing to definite fear in her eyes.

“Sara,” she said in a timid, almost awe-stricken voice, “are—are—you never told me—I don’t want to be rude, but—are YOU ever hungry?”

It was too much just at that moment. The barrier broke down. Sara lifted her face from her hands.

“Yes,” she said in a new passionate way. “Yes, I am. I’m so hungry now that I could almost eat you. And it makes it worse to hear poor Becky. She’s hungrier than I am.”

Ermengarde gasped.

“Oh, oh!” she cried woefully. “And I never knew!”

“I didn’t want you to know,” Sara said. “It would have made me feel like a street beggar. I know I look like a street beggar.”

“No, you don’t—you don’t!” Ermengarde broke in. “Your clothes are a little queer—but you couldn’t look like a street beggar. You haven’t a street-beggar face.”

“A little boy once gave me a sixpence for charity,” said Sara, with a short little laugh in spite of herself. “Here it is.” And she pulled out the thin ribbon from her neck. “He wouldn’t have given me his Christmas sixpence if I hadn’t looked as if I needed it.”

Somehow the sight of the dear little sixpence was good for both of them. It made them laugh a little, though they both had tears in their eyes.

“Who was he?” asked Ermengarde, looking at it quite as if it had not been a mere ordinary silver sixpence.

“He was a darling little thing going to a party,” said Sara. “He was one of the Large Family, the little one with the round legs—the one I call Guy Clarence. I suppose his nursery was crammed with Christmas presents and hampers full of cakes and things, and he could see I had nothing.”

Ermengarde gave a little jump backward. The last sentences had recalled something to her troubled mind and given her a sudden inspiration.

“Oh, Sara!” she cried. “What a silly thing I am not to have thought of it!”

“Of what?”

“Something splendid!” said Ermengarde, in an excited hurry. “This very afternoon my nicest aunt sent me a box. It is full of good things. I never touched it, I had so much pudding at dinner, and I was so bothered about papa’s books.” Her words began to tumble over each other. “It’s got cake in it, and little meat pies, and jam tarts and buns, and oranges and red-currant wine, and figs and chocolate. I’ll creep back to my room and get it this minute, and we’ll eat it now.”

Sara almost reeled. When one is faint with hunger the mention of food has sometimes a curious effect. She clutched Ermengarde’s arm.

“Do you think—you COULD?” she ejaculated.

“I know I could,” answered Ermengarde, and she ran to the door—opened it softly—put her head out into the darkness, and listened. Then she went back to Sara. “The lights are out. Everybody’s in bed. I can creep—and creep—and no one will hear.”

It was so delightful that they caught each other’s hands and a sudden light sprang into Sara’s eyes.

“Ermie!” she said. “Let us PRETEND! Let us pretend it’s a party! And oh, won’t you invite the prisoner in the next cell?”

“Yes! Yes! Let us knock on the wall now. The jailer won’t hear.”

Sara went to the wall. Through it she could hear poor Becky crying more softly. She knocked four times.

“That means, ‘Come to me through the secret passage under the wall,’ she explained. ‘I have something to communicate.'”

Five quick knocks answered her.

“She is coming,” she said.

Almost immediately the door of the attic opened and Becky appeared. Her eyes were red and her cap was sliding off, and when she caught sight of Ermengarde she began to rub her face nervously with her apron.

“Don’t mind me a bit, Becky!” cried Ermengarde.

“Miss Ermengarde has asked you to come in,” said Sara, “because she is going to bring a box of good things up here to us.”

Becky’s cap almost fell off entirely, she broke in with such excitement.

“To eat, miss?” she said. “Things that’s good to eat?”

“Yes,” answered Sara, “and we are going to pretend a party.”

“And you shall have as much as you WANT to eat,” put in Ermengarde. “I’ll go this minute!”

She was in such haste that as she tiptoed out of the attic she dropped her red shawl and did not know it had fallen. No one saw it for a minute or so. Becky was too much overpowered by the good luck which had befallen her.

“Oh, miss! oh, miss!” she gasped; “I know it was you that asked her to let me come. It—it makes me cry to think of it.” And she went to Sara’s side and stood and looked at her worshipingly.

But in Sara’s hungry eyes the old light had begun to glow and transform her world for her. Here in the attic—with the cold night outside—with the afternoon in the sloppy streets barely passed—with the memory of the awful unfed look in the beggar child’s eyes not yet faded—this simple, cheerful thing had happened like a thing of magic.

She caught her breath.

“Somehow, something always happens,” she cried, “just before things get to the very worst. It is as if the Magic did it. If I could only just remember that always. The worst thing never QUITE comes.”

She gave Becky a little cheerful shake.

“No, no! You mustn’t cry!” she said. “We must make haste and set the table.”

“Set the table, miss?” said Becky, gazing round the room. “What’ll we set it with?”

Sara looked round the attic, too.

“There doesn’t seem to be much,” she answered, half laughing.

That moment she saw something and pounced upon it. It was Ermengarde’s red shawl which lay upon the floor.

“Here’s the shawl,” she cried. “I know she won’t mind it. It will make such a nice red tablecloth.”

They pulled the old table forward, and threw the shawl over it. Red is a wonderfully kind and comfortable color. It began to make the room look furnished directly.

“How nice a red rug would look on the floor!” exclaimed Sara. “We must pretend there is one!”

Her eye swept the bare boards with a swift glance of admiration. The rug was laid down already.

“How soft and thick it is!” she said, with the little laugh which Becky knew the meaning of; and she raised and set her foot down again delicately, as if she felt something under it.

“Yes, miss,” answered Becky, watching her with serious rapture. She was always quite serious.

“What next, now?” said Sara, and she stood still and put her hands over her eyes. “Something will come if I think and wait a little”—in a soft, expectant voice. “The Magic will tell me.”

One of her favorite fancies was that on “the outside,” as she called it, thoughts were waiting for people to call them. Becky had seen her stand and wait many a time before, and knew that in a few seconds she would uncover an enlightened, laughing face.

In a moment she did.

“There!” she cried. “It has come! I know now! I must look among the things in the old trunk I had when I was a princess.”

She flew to its corner and kneeled down. It had not been put in the attic for her benefit, but because there was no room for it elsewhere. Nothing had been left in it but rubbish. But she knew she should find something. The Magic always arranged that kind of thing in one way or another.

In a corner lay a package so insignificant-looking that it had been overlooked, and when she herself had found it she had kept it as a relic. It contained a dozen small white handkerchiefs. She seized them joyfully and ran to the table. She began to arrange them upon the red table-cover, patting and coaxing them into shape with the narrow lace edge curling outward, her Magic working its spells for her as she did it.

“These are the plates,” she said. “They are golden plates. These are the richly embroidered napkins. Nuns worked them in convents in Spain.”

“Did they, miss?” breathed Becky, her very soul uplifted by the information.

“You must pretend it,” said Sara. “If you pretend it enough, you will see them.”

“Yes, miss,” said Becky; and as Sara returned to the trunk she devoted herself to the effort of accomplishing an end so much to be desired.

Sara turned suddenly to find her standing by the table, looking very queer indeed. She had shut her eyes, and was twisting her face in strange convulsive contortions, her hands hanging stiffly clenched at her sides. She looked as if she was trying to lift some enormous weight.

“What is the matter, Becky?” Sara cried. “What are you doing?”

Becky opened her eyes with a start.

“I was a-‘pretendin’,’ miss,” she answered a little sheepishly; “I was tryin’ to see it like you do. I almost did,” with a hopeful grin. “But it takes a lot o’ stren’th.”

“Perhaps it does if you are not used to it,” said Sara, with friendly sympathy; “but you don’t know how easy it is when you’ve done it often. I wouldn’t try so hard just at first. It will come to you after a while. I’ll just tell you what things are. Look at these.”

She held an old summer hat in her hand which she had fished out of the bottom of the trunk. There was a wreath of flowers on it. She pulled the wreath off.

“These are garlands for the feast,” she said grandly. “They fill all the air with perfume. There’s a mug on the wash-stand, Becky. Oh—and bring the soap dish for a centerpiece.”

Becky handed them to her reverently.

“What are they now, miss?” she inquired. “You’d think they was made of crockery—but I know they ain’t.”

“This is a carven flagon,” said Sara, arranging tendrils of the wreath about the mug. “And this”—bending tenderly over the soap dish and heaping it with roses—”is purest alabaster encrusted with gems.”

She touched the things gently, a happy smile hovering about her lips which made her look as if she were a creature in a dream.

“My, ain’t it lovely!” whispered Becky.

“If we just had something for bonbon dishes,” Sara murmured. “There!”—darting to the trunk again. “I remember I saw something this minute.”

It was only a bundle of wool wrapped in red and white tissue paper, but the tissue paper was soon twisted into the form of little dishes, and was combined with the remaining flowers to ornament the candlestick which was to light the feast. Only the Magic could have made it more than an old table covered with a red shawl and set with rubbish from a long-unopened trunk. But Sara drew back and gazed at it, seeing wonders; and Becky, after staring in delight, spoke with bated breath.

“This ‘ere,” she suggested, with a glance round the attic—”is it the Bastille now—or has it turned into somethin’ different?”

“Oh, yes, yes!” said Sara. “Quite different. It is a banquet hall!”

“My eye, miss!” ejaculated Becky. “A blanket ‘all!” and she turned to view the splendors about her with awed bewilderment.

“A banquet hall,” said Sara. “A vast chamber where feasts are given. It has a vaulted roof, and a minstrels’ gallery, and a huge chimney filled with blazing oaken logs, and it is brilliant with waxen tapers twinkling on every side.”

“My eye, Miss Sara!” gasped Becky again.

Then the door opened, and Ermengarde came in, rather staggering under the weight of her hamper. She started back with an exclamation of joy. To enter from the chill darkness outside, and find one’s self confronted by a totally unanticipated festal board, draped with red, adorned with white napery, and wreathed with flowers, was to feel that the preparations were brilliant indeed.

“Oh, Sara!” she cried out. “You are the cleverest girl I ever saw!”

“Isn’t it nice?” said Sara. “They are things out of my old trunk. I asked my Magic, and it told me to go and look.”

“But oh, miss,” cried Becky, “wait till she’s told you what they are! They ain’t just—oh, miss, please tell her,” appealing to Sara.

So Sara told her, and because her Magic helped her she made her ALMOST see it all: the golden platters—the vaulted spaces—the blazing logs—the twinkling waxen tapers. As the things were taken out of the hamper—the frosted cakes—the fruits—the bonbons and the wine—the feast became a splendid thing.

“It’s like a real party!” cried Ermengarde.

“It’s like a queen’s table,” sighed Becky.

Then Ermengarde had a sudden brilliant thought.

“I’ll tell you what, Sara,” she said. “Pretend you are a princess now and this is a royal feast.”

“But it’s your feast,” said Sara; “you must be the princess, and we will be your maids of honor.”

“Oh, I can’t,” said Ermengarde. “I’m too fat, and I don’t know how. YOU be her.”

“Well, if you want me to,” said Sara.

But suddenly she thought of something else and ran to the rusty grate.

“There is a lot of paper and rubbish stuffed in here!” she exclaimed. “If we light it, there will be a bright blaze for a few minutes, and we shall feel as if it was a real fire.” She struck a match and lighted it up with a great specious glow which illuminated the room.

“By the time it stops blazing,” Sara said, “we shall forget about its not being real.”

She stood in the dancing glow and smiled.

“Doesn’t it LOOK real?” she said. “Now we will begin the party.”

She led the way to the table. She waved her hand graciously to Ermengarde and Becky. She was in the midst of her dream.

“Advance, fair damsels,” she said in her happy dream-voice, “and be seated at the banquet table. My noble father, the king, who is absent on a long journey, has commanded me to feast you.” She turned her head slightly toward the corner of the room. “What, ho, there, minstrels! Strike up with your viols and bassoons. Princesses,” she explained rapidly to Ermengarde and Becky, “always had minstrels to play at their feasts. Pretend there is a minstrel gallery up there in the corner. Now we will begin.”

They had barely had time to take their pieces of cake into their hands—not one of them had time to do more, when—they all three sprang to their feet and turned pale faces toward the door—listening—listening.

Someone was coming up the stairs. There was no mistake about it. Each of them recognized the angry, mounting tread and knew that the end of all things had come.

“It’s—the missus!” choked Becky, and dropped her piece of cake upon the floor.

“Yes,” said Sara, her eyes growing shocked and large in her small white face. “Miss Minchin has found us out.”

Miss Minchin struck the door open with a blow of her hand. She was pale herself, but it was with rage. She looked from the frightened faces to the banquet table, and from the banquet table to the last flicker of the burnt paper in the grate.

“I have been suspecting something of this sort,” she exclaimed; “but I did not dream of such audacity. Lavinia was telling the truth.”

So they knew that it was Lavinia who had somehow guessed their secret and had betrayed them. Miss Minchin strode over to Becky and boxed her ears for a second time.

“You impudent creature!” she said. “You leave the house in the morning!”

Sara stood quite still, her eyes growing larger, her face paler. Ermengarde burst into tears.

“Oh, don’t send her away,” she sobbed. “My aunt sent me the hamper. We’re—only—having a party.”

“So I see,” said Miss Minchin, witheringly. “With the Princess Sara at the head of the table.” She turned fiercely on Sara. “It is your doing, I know,” she cried. “Ermengarde would never have thought of such a thing. You decorated the table, I suppose—with this rubbish.” She stamped her foot at Becky. “Go to your attic!” she commanded, and Becky stole away, her face hidden in her apron, her shoulders shaking.

Then it was Sara’s turn again.

“I will attend to you tomorrow. You shall have neither breakfast, dinner, nor supper!”

“I have not had either dinner or supper today, Miss Minchin,” said Sara, rather faintly.

“Then all the better. You will have something to remember. Don’t stand there. Put those things into the hamper again.”

She began to sweep them off the table into the hamper herself, and caught sight of Ermengarde’s new books.

“And you”—to Ermengarde—”have brought your beautiful new books into this dirty attic. Take them up and go back to bed. You will stay there all day tomorrow, and I shall write to your papa. What would HE say if he knew where you are tonight?”

Something she saw in Sara’s grave, fixed gaze at this moment made her turn on her fiercely.

“What are you thinking of?” she demanded. “Why do you look at me like that?”

“I was wondering,” answered Sara, as she had answered that notable day in the schoolroom.

“What were you wondering?”

It was very like the scene in the schoolroom. There was no pertness in Sara’s manner. It was only sad and quiet.

“I was wondering,” she said in a low voice, “what MY papa would say if he knew where I am tonight.”

Miss Minchin was infuriated just as she had been before and her anger expressed itself, as before, in an intemperate fashion. She flew at her and shook her.

“You insolent, unmanageable child!” she cried. “How dare you! How dare you!”

She picked up the books, swept the rest of the feast back into the hamper in a jumbled heap, thrust it into Ermengarde’s arms, and pushed her before her toward the door.

“I will leave you to wonder,” she said. “Go to bed this instant.” And she shut the door behind herself and poor stumbling Ermengarde, and left Sara standing quite alone.

The dream was quite at an end. The last spark had died out of the paper in the grate and left only black tinder; the table was left bare, the golden plates and richly embroidered napkins, and the garlands were transformed again into old handkerchiefs, scraps of red and white paper, and discarded artificial flowers all scattered on the floor; the minstrels in the minstrel gallery had stolen away, and the viols and bassoons were still. Emily was sitting with her back against the wall, staring very hard. Sara saw her, and went and picked her up with trembling hands.

“There isn’t any banquet left, Emily,” she said. “And there isn’t any princess. There is nothing left but the prisoners in the Bastille.” And she sat down and hid her face.

What would have happened if she had not hidden it just then, and if she had chanced to look up at the skylight at the wrong moment, I do not know—perhaps the end of this chapter might have been quite different—because if she had glanced at the skylight she would certainly have been startled by what she would have seen. She would have seen exactly the same face pressed against the glass and peering in at her as it had peered in earlier in the evening when she had been talking to Ermengarde.

But she did not look up. She sat with her little black head in her arms for some time. She always sat like that when she was trying to bear something in silence. Then she got up and went slowly to the bed.

“I can’t pretend anything else—while I am awake,” she said. “There wouldn’t be any use in trying. If I go to sleep, perhaps a dream will come and pretend for me.”

She suddenly felt so tired—perhaps through want of food—that she sat down on the edge of the bed quite weakly.

“Suppose there was a bright fire in the grate, with lots of little dancing flames,” she murmured. “Suppose there was a comfortable chair before it—and suppose there was a small table near, with a little hot—hot supper on it. And suppose”—as she drew the thin coverings over her—”suppose this was a beautiful soft bed, with fleecy blankets and large downy pillows. Suppose—suppose—” And her very weariness was good to her, for her eyes closed and she fell fast asleep.

 

She did not know how long she slept. But she had been tired enough to sleep deeply and profoundly—too deeply and soundly to be disturbed by anything, even by the squeaks and scamperings of Melchisedec’s entire family, if all his sons and daughters had chosen to come out of their hole to fight and tumble and play.

When she awakened it was rather suddenly, and she did not know that any particular thing had called her out of her sleep. The truth was, however, that it was a sound which had called her back—a real sound—the click of the skylight as it fell in closing after a lithe white figure which slipped through it and crouched down close by upon the slates of the roof—just near enough to see what happened in the attic, but not near enough to be seen.

At first she did not open her eyes. She felt too sleepy and—curiously enough—too warm and comfortable. She was so warm and comfortable, indeed, that she did not believe she was really awake. She never was as warm and cozy as this except in some lovely vision.

“What a nice dream!” she murmured. “I feel quite warm. I—don’t—want—to—wake—up.”

Of course it was a dream. She felt as if warm, delightful bedclothes were heaped upon her. She could actually FEEL blankets, and when she put out her hand it touched something exactly like a satin-covered eider-down quilt. She must not awaken from this delight—she must be quite still and make it last.

But she could not—even though she kept her eyes closed tightly, she could not. Something was forcing her to awaken—something in the room. It was a sense of light, and a sound—the sound of a crackling, roaring little fire.

“Oh, I am awakening,” she said mournfully. “I can’t help it—I can’t.”

Her eyes opened in spite of herself. And then she actually smiled—for what she saw she had never seen in the attic before, and knew she never should see.

“Oh, I HAVEN’T awakened,” she whispered, daring to rise on her elbow and look all about her. “I am dreaming yet.” She knew it MUST be a dream, for if she were awake such things could not—could not be.

Do you wonder that she felt sure she had not come back to earth? This is what she saw. In the grate there was a glowing, blazing fire; on the hob was a little brass kettle hissing and boiling; spread upon the floor was a thick, warm crimson rug; before the fire a folding-chair, unfolded, and with cushions on it; by the chair a small folding-table, unfolded, covered with a white cloth, and upon it spread small covered dishes, a cup, a saucer, a teapot; on the bed were new warm coverings and a satin-covered down quilt; at the foot a curious wadded silk robe, a pair of quilted slippers, and some books. The room of her dream seemed changed into fairyland—and it was flooded with warm light, for a bright lamp stood on the table covered with a rosy shade.

She sat up, resting on her elbow, and her breathing came short and fast.

“It does not—melt away,” she panted. “Oh, I never had such a dream before.” She scarcely dared to stir; but at last she pushed the bedclothes aside, and put her feet on the floor with a rapturous smile.

“I am dreaming—I am getting out of bed,” she heard her own voice say; and then, as she stood up in the midst of it all, turning slowly from side to side—”I am dreaming it stays—real! I’m dreaming it FEELS real. It’s bewitched—or I’m bewitched. I only THINK I see it all.” Her words began to hurry themselves. “If I can only keep on thinking it,” she cried, “I don’t care! I don’t care!”

She stood panting a moment longer, and then cried out again.

“Oh, it isn’t true!” she said. “It CAN’T be true! But oh, how true it seems!”

The blazing fire drew her to it, and she knelt down and held out her hands close to it—so close that the heat made her start back.

“A fire I only dreamed wouldn’t be HOT,” she cried.

She sprang up, touched the table, the dishes, the rug; she went to the bed and touched the blankets. She took up the soft wadded dressing-gown, and suddenly clutched it to her breast and held it to her cheek.

“It’s warm. It’s soft!” she almost sobbed. “It’s real. It must be!”

She threw it over her shoulders, and put her feet into the slippers.

“They are real, too. It’s all real!” she cried. “I am NOT—I am NOT dreaming!”

She almost staggered to the books and opened the one which lay upon the top. Something was written on the flyleaf—just a few words, and they were these:

“To the little girl in the attic. From a friend.”

When she saw that—wasn’t it a strange thing for her to do—she put her face down upon the page and burst into tears.

“I don’t know who it is,” she said; “but somebody cares for me a little. I have a friend.”

She took her candle and stole out of her own room and into Becky’s, and stood by her bedside.

“Becky, Becky!” she whispered as loudly as she dared. “Wake up!”

When Becky wakened, and she sat upright staring aghast, her face still smudged with traces of tears, beside her stood a little figure in a luxurious wadded robe of crimson silk. The face she saw was a shining, wonderful thing. The Princess Sara—as she remembered her—stood at her very bedside, holding a candle in her hand.

“Come,” she said. “Oh, Becky, come!”

Becky was too frightened to speak. She simply got up and followed her, with her mouth and eyes open, and without a word.

And when they crossed the threshold, Sara shut the door gently and drew her into the warm, glowing midst of things which made her brain reel and her hungry senses faint. “It’s true! It’s true!” she cried. “I’ve touched them all. They are as real as we are. The Magic has come and done it, Becky, while we were asleep—the Magic that won’t let those worst things EVER quite happen.”

16

The Visitor

Imagine, if you can, what the rest of the evening was like. How they crouched by the fire which blazed and leaped and made so much of itself in the little grate. How they removed the covers of the dishes, and found rich, hot, savory soup, which was a meal in itself, and sandwiches and toast and muffins enough for both of them. The mug from the washstand was used as Becky’s tea cup, and the tea was so delicious that it was not necessary to pretend that it was anything but tea. They were warm and full-fed and happy, and it was just like Sara that, having found her strange good fortune real, she should give herself up to the enjoyment of it to the utmost. She had lived such a life of imaginings that she was quite equal to accepting any wonderful thing that happened, and almost to cease, in a short time, to find it bewildering.

“I don’t know anyone in the world who could have done it,” she said; “but there has been someone. And here we are sitting by their fire—and—and—it’s true! And whoever it is—wherever they are—I have a friend, Becky—someone is my friend.”

It cannot be denied that as they sat before the blazing fire, and ate the nourishing, comfortable food, they felt a kind of rapturous awe, and looked into each other’s eyes with something like doubt.

“Do you think,” Becky faltered once, in a whisper, “do you think it could melt away, miss? Hadn’t we better be quick?” And she hastily crammed her sandwich into her mouth. If it was only a dream, kitchen manners would be overlooked.

“No, it won’t melt away,” said Sara. “I am EATING this muffin, and I can taste it. You never really eat things in dreams. You only think you are going to eat them. Besides, I keep giving myself pinches; and I touched a hot piece of coal just now, on purpose.”

The sleepy comfort which at length almost overpowered them was a heavenly thing. It was the drowsiness of happy, well-fed childhood, and they sat in the fire glow and luxuriated in it until Sara found herself turning to look at her transformed bed.

There were even blankets enough to share with Becky. The narrow couch in the next attic was more comfortable that night than its occupant had ever dreamed that it could be.

As she went out of the room, Becky turned upon the threshold and looked about her with devouring eyes.

“If it ain’t here in the mornin’, miss,” she said, “it’s been here tonight, anyways, an’ I shan’t never forget it.” She looked at each particular thing, as if to commit it to memory. “The fire was THERE”, pointing with her finger, “an’ the table was before it; an’ the lamp was there, an’ the light looked rosy red; an’ there was a satin cover on your bed, an’ a warm rug on the floor, an’ everythin’ looked beautiful; an'”—she paused a second, and laid her hand on her stomach tenderly—”there WAS soup an’ sandwiches an’ muffins—there WAS.” And, with this conviction a reality at least, she went away.

Through the mysterious agency which works in schools and among servants, it was quite well known in the morning that Sara Crewe was in horrible disgrace, that Ermengarde was under punishment, and that Becky would have been packed out of the house before breakfast, but that a scullery maid could not be dispensed with at once. The servants knew that she was allowed to stay because Miss Minchin could not easily find another creature helpless and humble enough to work like a bounden slave for so few shillings a week. The elder girls in the schoolroom knew that if Miss Minchin did not send Sara away it was for practical reasons of her own.

“She’s growing so fast and learning such a lot, somehow,” said Jessie to Lavinia, “that she will be given classes soon, and Miss Minchin knows she will have to work for nothing. It was rather nasty of you, Lavvy, to tell about her having fun in the garret. How did you find it out?”

“I got it out of Lottie. She’s such a baby she didn’t know she was telling me. There was nothing nasty at all in speaking to Miss Minchin. I felt it my duty”—priggishly. “She was being deceitful. And it’s ridiculous that she should look so grand, and be made so much of, in her rags and tatters!”

“What were they doing when Miss Minchin caught them?”

“Pretending some silly thing. Ermengarde had taken up her hamper to share with Sara and Becky. She never invites us to share things. Not that I care, but it’s rather vulgar of her to share with servant girls in attics. I wonder Miss Minchin didn’t turn Sara out—even if she does want her for a teacher.”

“If she was turned out where would she go?” inquired Jessie, a trifle anxiously.

“How do I know?” snapped Lavinia. “She’ll look rather queer when she comes into the schoolroom this morning, I should think—after what’s happened. She had no dinner yesterday, and she’s not to have any today.”

Jessie was not as ill-natured as she was silly. She picked up her book with a little jerk.

“Well, I think it’s horrid,” she said. “They’ve no right to starve her to death.”

When Sara went into the kitchen that morning the cook looked askance at her, and so did the housemaids; but she passed them hurriedly. She had, in fact, overslept herself a little, and as Becky had done the same, neither had had time to see the other, and each had come downstairs in haste.

Sara went into the scullery. Becky was violently scrubbing a kettle, and was actually gurgling a little song in her throat. She looked up with a wildly elated face.

“It was there when I wakened, miss—the blanket,” she whispered excitedly. “It was as real as it was last night.”

“So was mine,” said Sara. “It is all there now—all of it. While I was dressing I ate some of the cold things we left.”

“Oh, laws! Oh, laws!” Becky uttered the exclamation in a sort of rapturous groan, and ducked her head over her kettle just in time, as the cook came in from the kitchen.

Miss Minchin had expected to see in Sara, when she appeared in the schoolroom, very much what Lavinia had expected to see. Sara had always been an annoying puzzle to her, because severity never made her cry or look frightened. When she was scolded she stood still and listened politely with a grave face; when she was punished she performed her extra tasks or went without her meals, making no complaint or outward sign of rebellion. The very fact that she never made an impudent answer seemed to Miss Minchin a kind of impudence in itself. But after yesterday’s deprivation of meals, the violent scene of last night, the prospect of hunger today, she must surely have broken down. It would be strange indeed if she did not come downstairs with pale cheeks and red eyes and an unhappy, humbled face.

Miss Minchin saw her for the first time when she entered the schoolroom to hear the little French class recite its lessons and superintend its exercises. And she came in with a springing step, color in her cheeks, and a smile hovering about the corners of her mouth. It was the most astonishing thing Miss Minchin had ever known. It gave her quite a shock. What was the child made of? What could such a thing mean? She called her at once to her desk.

“You do not look as if you realize that you are in disgrace,” she said. “Are you absolutely hardened?”

The truth is that when one is still a child—or even if one is grown up—and has been well fed, and has slept long and softly and warm; when one has gone to sleep in the midst of a fairy story, and has wakened to find it real, one cannot be unhappy or even look as if one were; and one could not, if one tried, keep a glow of joy out of one’s eyes. Miss Minchin was almost struck dumb by the look of Sara’s eyes when she made her perfectly respectful answer.

“I beg your pardon, Miss Minchin,” she said; “I know that I am in disgrace.”

“Be good enough not to forget it and look as if you had come into a fortune. It is an impertinence. And remember you are to have no food today.”

“Yes, Miss Minchin,” Sara answered; but as she turned away her heart leaped with the memory of what yesterday had been. “If the Magic had not saved me just in time,” she thought, “how horrible it would have been!”

“She can’t be very hungry,” whispered Lavinia. “Just look at her. Perhaps she is pretending she has had a good breakfast”—with a spiteful laugh.

“She’s different from other people,” said Jessie, watching Sara with her class. “Sometimes I’m a bit frightened of her.”

“Ridiculous thing!” ejaculated Lavinia.

All through the day the light was in Sara’s face, and the color in her cheek. The servants cast puzzled glances at her, and whispered to each other, and Miss Amelia’s small blue eyes wore an expression of bewilderment. What such an audacious look of well-being, under august displeasure could mean she could not understand. It was, however, just like Sara’s singular obstinate way. She was probably determined to brave the matter out.

One thing Sara had resolved upon, as she thought things over. The wonders which had happened must be kept a secret, if such a thing were possible. If Miss Minchin should choose to mount to the attic again, of course all would be discovered. But it did not seem likely that she would do so for some time at least, unless she was led by suspicion. Ermengarde and Lottie would be watched with such strictness that they would not dare to steal out of their beds again. Ermengarde could be told the story and trusted to keep it secret. If Lottie made any discoveries, she could be bound to secrecy also. Perhaps the Magic itself would help to hide its own marvels.

“But whatever happens,” Sara kept saying to herself all day—”WHATEVER happens, somewhere in the world there is a heavenly kind person who is my friend—my friend. If I never know who it is—if I never can even thank him—I shall never feel quite so lonely. Oh, the Magic was GOOD to me!”

If it was possible for weather to be worse than it had been the day before, it was worse this day—wetter, muddier, colder. There were more errands to be done, the cook was more irritable, and, knowing that Sara was in disgrace, she was more savage. But what does anything matter when one’s Magic has just proved itself one’s friend. Sara’s supper of the night before had given her strength, she knew that she should sleep well and warmly, and, even though she had naturally begun to be hungry again before evening, she felt that she could bear it until breakfast-time on the following day, when her meals would surely be given to her again. It was quite late when she was at last allowed to go upstairs. She had been told to go into the schoolroom and study until ten o’clock, and she had become interested in her work, and remained over her books later.

When she reached the top flight of stairs and stood before the attic door, it must be confessed that her heart beat rather fast.

“Of course it MIGHT all have been taken away,” she whispered, trying to be brave. “It might only have been lent to me for just that one awful night. But it WAS lent to me—I had it. It was real.”

She pushed the door open and went in. Once inside, she gasped slightly, shut the door, and stood with her back against it looking from side to side.

The Magic had been there again. It actually had, and it had done even more than before. The fire was blazing, in lovely leaping flames, more merrily than ever. A number of new things had been brought into the attic which so altered the look of it that if she had not been past doubting she would have rubbed her eyes. Upon the low table another supper stood—this time with cups and plates for Becky as well as herself; a piece of bright, heavy, strange embroidery covered the battered mantel, and on it some ornaments had been placed. All the bare, ugly things which could be covered with draperies had been concealed and made to look quite pretty. Some odd materials of rich colors had been fastened against the wall with fine, sharp tacks—so sharp that they could be pressed into the wood and plaster without hammering. Some brilliant fans were pinned up, and there were several large cushions, big and substantial enough to use as seats. A wooden box was covered with a rug, and some cushions lay on it, so that it wore quite the air of a sofa.

Sara slowly moved away from the door and simply sat down and looked and looked again.

“It is exactly like something fairy come true,” she said. “There isn’t the least difference. I feel as if I might wish for anything—diamonds or bags of gold—and they would appear! THAT wouldn’t be any stranger than this. Is this my garret? Am I the same cold, ragged, damp Sara? And to think I used to pretend and pretend and wish there were fairies! The one thing I always wanted was to see a fairy story come true. I am LIVING in a fairy story. I feel as if I might be a fairy myself, and able to turn things into anything else.”

She rose and knocked upon the wall for the prisoner in the next cell, and the prisoner came.

When she entered she almost dropped in a heap upon the floor. For a few seconds she quite lost her breath.

“Oh, laws!” she gasped. “Oh, laws, miss!”

“You see,” said Sara.

On this night Becky sat on a cushion upon the hearth rug and had a cup and saucer of her own.

When Sara went to bed she found that she had a new thick mattress and big downy pillows. Her old mattress and pillow had been removed to Becky’s bedstead, and, consequently, with these additions Becky had been supplied with unheard-of comfort.

“Where does it all come from?” Becky broke forth once. “Laws, who does it, miss?”

“Don’t let us even ASK,” said Sara. “If it were not that I want to say, ‘Oh, thank you,’ I would rather not know. It makes it more beautiful.”

From that time life became more wonderful day by day. The fairy story continued. Almost every day something new was done. Some new comfort or ornament appeared each time Sara opened the door at night, until in a short time the attic was a beautiful little room full of all sorts of odd and luxurious things. The ugly walls were gradually entirely covered with pictures and draperies, ingenious pieces of folding furniture appeared, a bookshelf was hung up and filled with books, new comforts and conveniences appeared one by one, until there seemed nothing left to be desired. When Sara went downstairs in the morning, the remains of the supper were on the table; and when she returned to the attic in the evening, the magician had removed them and left another nice little meal. Miss Minchin was as harsh and insulting as ever, Miss Amelia as peevish, and the servants were as vulgar and rude. Sara was sent on errands in all weathers, and scolded and driven hither and thither; she was scarcely allowed to speak to Ermengarde and Lottie; Lavinia sneered at the increasing shabbiness of her clothes; and the other girls stared curiously at her when she appeared in the schoolroom. But what did it all matter while she was living in this wonderful mysterious story? It was more romantic and delightful than anything she had ever invented to comfort her starved young soul and save herself from despair. Sometimes, when she was scolded, she could scarcely keep from smiling.

“If you only knew!” she was saying to herself. “If you only knew!”

The comfort and happiness she enjoyed were making her stronger, and she had them always to look forward to. If she came home from her errands wet and tired and hungry, she knew she would soon be warm and well fed after she had climbed the stairs. During the hardest day she could occupy herself blissfully by thinking of what she should see when she opened the attic door, and wondering what new delight had been prepared for her. In a very short time she began to look less thin. Color came into her cheeks, and her eyes did not seem so much too big for her face.

“Sara Crewe looks wonderfully well,” Miss Minchin remarked disapprovingly to her sister.

“Yes,” answered poor, silly Miss Amelia. “She is absolutely fattening. She was beginning to look like a little starved crow.”

“Starved!” exclaimed Miss Minchin, angrily. “There was no reason why she should look starved. She always had plenty to eat!”

“Of—of course,” agreed Miss Amelia, humbly, alarmed to find that she had, as usual, said the wrong thing.

“There is something very disagreeable in seeing that sort of thing in a child of her age,” said Miss Minchin, with haughty vagueness.

“What—sort of thing?” Miss Amelia ventured.

“It might almost be called defiance,” answered Miss Minchin, feeling annoyed because she knew the thing she resented was nothing like defiance, and she did not know what other unpleasant term to use. “The spirit and will of any other child would have been entirely humbled and broken by—by the changes she has had to submit to. But, upon my word, she seems as little subdued as if—as if she were a princess.”

“Do you remember,” put in the unwise Miss Amelia, “what she said to you that day in the schoolroom about what you would do if you found out that she was—”

“No, I don’t,” said Miss Minchin. “Don’t talk nonsense.” But she remembered very clearly indeed.

Very naturally, even Becky was beginning to look plumper and less frightened. She could not help it. She had her share in the secret fairy story, too. She had two mattresses, two pillows, plenty of bed-covering, and every night a hot supper and a seat on the cushions by the fire. The Bastille had melted away, the prisoners no longer existed. Two comforted children sat in the midst of delights. Sometimes Sara read aloud from her books, sometimes she learned her own lessons, sometimes she sat and looked into the fire and tried to imagine who her friend could be, and wished she could say to him some of the things in her heart.

Then it came about that another wonderful thing happened. A man came to the door and left several parcels. All were addressed in large letters, “To the Little Girl in the right-hand attic.”

Sara herself was sent to open the door and take them in. She laid the two largest parcels on the hall table, and was looking at the address, when Miss Minchin came down the stairs and saw her.

“Take the things to the young lady to whom they belong,” she said severely. “Don’t stand there staring at them.

“They belong to me,” answered Sara, quietly.

“To you?” exclaimed Miss Minchin. “What do you mean?”

“I don’t know where they come from,” said Sara, “but they are addressed to me. I sleep in the right-hand attic. Becky has the other one.”

Miss Minchin came to her side and looked at the parcels with an excited expression.

“What is in them?” she demanded.

“I don’t know,” replied Sara.

“Open them,” she ordered.

Sara did as she was told. When the packages were unfolded Miss Minchin’s countenance wore suddenly a singular expression. What she saw was pretty and comfortable clothing—clothing of different kinds: shoes, stockings, and gloves, and a warm and beautiful coat. There were even a nice hat and an umbrella. They were all good and expensive things, and on the pocket of the coat was pinned a paper, on which were written these words: “To be worn every day. Will be replaced by others when necessary.”

Miss Minchin was quite agitated. This was an incident which suggested strange things to her sordid mind. Could it be that she had made a mistake, after all, and that the neglected child had some powerful though eccentric friend in the background—perhaps some previously unknown relation, who had suddenly traced her whereabouts, and chose to provide for her in this mysterious and fantastic way? Relations were sometimes very odd—particularly rich old bachelor uncles, who did not care for having children near them. A man of that sort might prefer to overlook his young relation’s welfare at a distance. Such a person, however, would be sure to be crotchety and hot-tempered enough to be easily offended. It would not be very pleasant if there were such a one, and he should learn all the truth about the thin, shabby clothes, the scant food, and the hard work. She felt very queer indeed, and very uncertain, and she gave a side glance at Sara.

“Well,” she said, in a voice such as she had never used since the little girl lost her father, “someone is very kind to you. As the things have been sent, and you are to have new ones when they are worn out, you may as well go and put them on and look respectable. After you are dressed you may come downstairs and learn your lessons in the schoolroom. You need not go out on any more errands today.”

About half an hour afterward, when the schoolroom door opened and Sara walked in, the entire seminary was struck dumb.

“My word!” ejaculated Jessie, jogging Lavinia’s elbow. “Look at the Princess Sara!”

Everybody was looking, and when Lavinia looked she turned quite red.

It was the Princess Sara indeed. At least, since the days when she had been a princess, Sara had never looked as she did now. She did not seem the Sara they had seen come down the back stairs a few hours ago. She was dressed in the kind of frock Lavinia had been used to envying her the possession of. It was deep and warm in color, and beautifully made. Her slender feet looked as they had done when Jessie had admired them, and the hair, whose heavy locks had made her look rather like a Shetland pony when it fell loose about her small, odd face, was tied back with a ribbon.

“Perhaps someone has left her a fortune,” Jessie whispered. “I always thought something would happen to her. She’s so queer.”

“Perhaps the diamond mines have suddenly appeared again,” said Lavinia, scathingly. “Don’t please her by staring at her in that way, you silly thing.”

“Sara,” broke in Miss Minchin’s deep voice, “come and sit here.”

And while the whole schoolroom stared and pushed with elbows, and scarcely made any effort to conceal its excited curiosity, Sara went to her old seat of honor, and bent her head over her books.

That night, when she went to her room, after she and Becky had eaten their supper she sat and looked at the fire seriously for a long time.

“Are you making something up in your head, miss?” Becky inquired with respectful softness. When Sara sat in silence and looked into the coals with dreaming eyes it generally meant that she was making a new story. But this time she was not, and she shook her head.

“No,” she answered. “I am wondering what I ought to do.”

Becky stared—still respectfully. She was filled with something approaching reverence for everything Sara did and said.

“I can’t help thinking about my friend,” Sara explained. “If he wants to keep himself a secret, it would be rude to try and find out who he is. But I do so want him to know how thankful I am to him—and how happy he has made me. Anyone who is kind wants to know when people have been made happy. They care for that more than for being thanked. I wish—I do wish—”

She stopped short because her eyes at that instant fell upon something standing on a table in a corner. It was something she had found in the room when she came up to it only two days before. It was a little writing-case fitted with paper and envelopes and pens and ink.

“Oh,” she exclaimed, “why did I not think of that before?”

She rose and went to the corner and brought the case back to the fire.

“I can write to him,” she said joyfully, “and leave it on the table. Then perhaps the person who takes the things away will take it, too. I won’t ask him anything. He won’t mind my thanking him, I feel sure.”

So she wrote a note. This is what she said:

 

I hope you will not think it is impolite that I should write this note to you when you wish to keep yourself a secret. Please believe I do not mean to be impolite or try to find out anything at all; only I want to thank you for being so kind to me—so heavenly kind—and making everything like a fairy story. I am so grateful to you, and I am so happy—and so is Becky. Becky feels just as thankful as I do—it is all just as beautiful and wonderful to her as it is to me. We used to be so lonely and cold and hungry, and now—oh, just think what you have done for us! Please let me say just these words. It seems as if I OUGHT to say them. THANK you—THANK you—THANK you!

THE LITTLE GIRL IN THE ATTIC.

 

The next morning she left this on the little table, and in the evening it had been taken away with the other things; so she knew the Magician had received it, and she was happier for the thought. She was reading one of her new books to Becky just before they went to their respective beds, when her attention was attracted by a sound at the skylight. When she looked up from her page she saw that Becky had heard the sound also, as she had turned her head to look and was listening rather nervously.

“Something’s there, miss,” she whispered.

“Yes,” said Sara, slowly. “It sounds—rather like a cat—trying to get in.”

She left her chair and went to the skylight. It was a queer little sound she heard—like a soft scratching. She suddenly remembered something and laughed. She remembered a quaint little intruder who had made his way into the attic once before. She had seen him that very afternoon, sitting disconsolately on a table before a window in the Indian gentleman’s house.

“Suppose,” she whispered in pleased excitement—”just suppose it was the monkey who got away again. Oh, I wish it was!”

She climbed on a chair, very cautiously raised the skylight, and peeped out. It had been snowing all day, and on the snow, quite near her, crouched a tiny, shivering figure, whose small black face wrinkled itself piteously at sight of her.

“It is the monkey,” she cried out. “He has crept out of the Lascar’s attic, and he saw the light.”

Becky ran to her side.

“Are you going to let him in, miss?” she said.

“Yes,” Sara answered joyfully. “It’s too cold for monkeys to be out. They’re delicate. I’ll coax him in.”

She put a hand out delicately, speaking in a coaxing voice—as she spoke to the sparrows and to Melchisedec—as if she were some friendly little animal herself.

“Come along, monkey darling,” she said. “I won’t hurt you.”

He knew she would not hurt him. He knew it before she laid her soft, caressing little paw on him and drew him towards her. He had felt human love in the slim brown hands of Ram Dass, and he felt it in hers. He let her lift him through the skylight, and when he found himself in her arms he cuddled up to her breast and looked up into her face.

“Nice monkey! Nice monkey!” she crooned, kissing his funny head. “Oh, I do love little animal things.”

He was evidently glad to get to the fire, and when she sat down and held him on her knee he looked from her to Becky with mingled interest and appreciation.

“He IS plain-looking, miss, ain’t he?” said Becky.

“He looks like a very ugly baby,” laughed Sara. “I beg your pardon, monkey; but I’m glad you are not a baby. Your mother COULDN’T be proud of you, and no one would dare to say you looked like any of your relations. Oh, I do like you!”

She leaned back in her chair and reflected.

“Perhaps he’s sorry he’s so ugly,” she said, “and it’s always on his mind. I wonder if he HAS a mind. Monkey, my love, have you a mind?”

But the monkey only put up a tiny paw and scratched his head.

“What shall you do with him?” Becky asked.

“I shall let him sleep with me tonight, and then take him back to the Indian gentleman tomorrow. I am sorry to take you back, monkey; but you must go. You ought to be fondest of your own family; and I’m not a REAL relation.”

And when she went to bed she made him a nest at her feet, and he curled up and slept there as if he were a baby and much pleased with his quarters.

17

“It Is the Child!”

The next afternoon three members of the Large Family sat in the Indian gentleman’s library, doing their best to cheer him up. They had been allowed to come in to perform this office because he had specially invited them. He had been living in a state of suspense for some time, and today he was waiting for a certain event very anxiously. This event was the return of Mr. Carmichael from Moscow. His stay there had been prolonged from week to week. On his first arrival there, he had not been able satisfactorily to trace the family he had gone in search of. When he felt at last sure that he had found them and had gone to their house, he had been told that they were absent on a journey. His efforts to reach them had been unavailing, so he had decided to remain in Moscow until their return. Mr. Carrisford sat in his reclining chair, and Janet sat on the floor beside him. He was very fond of Janet. Nora had found a footstool, and Donald was astride the tiger’s head which ornamented the rug made of the animal’s skin. It must be owned that he was riding it rather violently.

“Don’t chirrup so loud, Donald,” Janet said. “When you come to cheer an ill person up you don’t cheer him up at the top of your voice. Perhaps cheering up is too loud, Mr. Carrisford?” turning to the Indian gentleman.

But he only patted her shoulder.

“No, it isn’t,” he answered. “And it keeps me from thinking too much.”

“I’m going to be quiet,” Donald shouted. “We’ll all be as quiet as mice.”

“Mice don’t make a noise like that,” said Janet.

Donald made a bridle of his handkerchief and bounced up and down on the tiger’s head.

“A whole lot of mice might,” he said cheerfully. “A thousand mice might.”

“I don’t believe fifty thousand mice would,” said Janet, severely; “and we have to be as quiet as one mouse.”

Mr. Carrisford laughed and patted her shoulder again.

“Papa won’t be very long now,” she said. “May we talk about the lost little girl?”

“I don’t think I could talk much about anything else just now,” the Indian gentleman answered, knitting his forehead with a tired look.

“We like her so much,” said Nora. “We call her the little un-fairy princess.”

“Why?” the Indian gentleman inquired, because the fancies of the Large Family always made him forget things a little.

It was Janet who answered.

“It is because, though she is not exactly a fairy, she will be so rich when she is found that she will be like a princess in a fairy tale. We called her the fairy princess at first, but it didn’t quite suit.”

“Is it true,” said Nora, “that her papa gave all his money to a friend to put in a mine that had diamonds in it, and then the friend thought he had lost it all and ran away because he felt as if he was a robber?”

“But he wasn’t really, you know,” put in Janet, hastily.

The Indian gentleman took hold of her hand quickly.

“No, he wasn’t really,” he said.

“I am sorry for the friend,” Janet said; “I can’t help it. He didn’t mean to do it, and it would break his heart. I am sure it would break his heart.”

“You are an understanding little woman, Janet,” the Indian gentleman said, and he held her hand close.

“Did you tell Mr. Carrisford,” Donald shouted again, “about the little-girl-who-isn’t-a-beggar? Did you tell him she has new nice clothes? P’r’aps she’s been found by somebody when she was lost.”

“There’s a cab!” exclaimed Janet. “It’s stopping before the door. It is papa!”

They all ran to the windows to look out.

“Yes, it’s papa,” Donald proclaimed. “But there is no little girl.”

All three of them incontinently fled from the room and tumbled into the hall. It was in this way they always welcomed their father. They were to be heard jumping up and down, clapping their hands, and being caught up and kissed.

Mr. Carrisford made an effort to rise and sank back again.

“It is no use,” he said. “What a wreck I am!”

Mr. Carmichael’s voice approached the door.

“No, children,” he was saying; “you may come in after I have talked to Mr. Carrisford. Go and play with Ram Dass.”

Then the door opened and he came in. He looked rosier than ever, and brought an atmosphere of freshness and health with him; but his eyes were disappointed and anxious as they met the invalid’s look of eager question even as they grasped each other’s hands.

“What news?” Mr. Carrisford asked. “The child the Russian people adopted?”

“She is not the child we are looking for,” was Mr. Carmichael’s answer. “She is much younger than Captain Crewe’s little girl. Her name is Emily Carew. I have seen and talked to her. The Russians were able to give me every detail.”

How wearied and miserable the Indian gentleman looked! His hand dropped from Mr. Carmichael’s.

“Then the search has to be begun over again,” he said. “That is all. Please sit down.”

Mr. Carmichael took a seat. Somehow, he had gradually grown fond of this unhappy man. He was himself so well and happy, and so surrounded by cheerfulness and love, that desolation and broken health seemed pitifully unbearable things. If there had been the sound of just one gay little high-pitched voice in the house, it would have been so much less forlorn. And that a man should be compelled to carry about in his breast the thought that he had seemed to wrong and desert a child was not a thing one could face.

“Come, come,” he said in his cheery voice; “we’ll find her yet.”

“We must begin at once. No time must be lost,” Mr. Carrisford fretted. “Have you any new suggestion to make—any whatsoever?”

Mr. Carmichael felt rather restless, and he rose and began to pace the room with a thoughtful, though uncertain face.

“Well, perhaps,” he said. “I don’t know what it may be worth. The fact is, an idea occurred to me as I was thinking the thing over in the train on the journey from Dover.”

“What was it? If she is alive, she is somewhere.”

“Yes; she is SOMEWHERE. We have searched the schools in Paris. Let us give up Paris and begin in London. That was my idea—to search London.”

“There are schools enough in London,” said Mr. Carrisford. Then he slightly started, roused by a recollection. “By the way, there is one next door.”

“Then we will begin there. We cannot begin nearer than next door.”

“No,” said Carrisford. “There is a child there who interests me; but she is not a pupil. And she is a little dark, forlorn creature, as unlike poor Crewe as a child could be.”

Perhaps the Magic was at work again at that very moment—the beautiful Magic. It really seemed as if it might be so. What was it that brought Ram Dass into the room—even as his master spoke—salaaming respectfully, but with a scarcely concealed touch of excitement in his dark, flashing eyes?

“Sahib,” he said, “the child herself has come—the child the sahib felt pity for. She brings back the monkey who had again run away to her attic under the roof. I have asked that she remain. It was my thought that it would please the sahib to see and speak with her.”

“Who is she?” inquired Mr. Carmichael.

“God knows,” Mr. Carrrisford answered. “She is the child I spoke of. A little drudge at the school.” He waved his hand to Ram Dass, and addressed him. “Yes, I should like to see her. Go and bring her in.” Then he turned to Mr. Carmichael. “While you have been away,” he explained, “I have been desperate. The days were so dark and long. Ram Dass told me of this child’s miseries, and together we invented a romantic plan to help her. I suppose it was a childish thing to do; but it gave me something to plan and think of. Without the help of an agile, soft-footed Oriental like Ram Dass, however, it could not have been done.”

Then Sara came into the room. She carried the monkey in her arms, and he evidently did not intend to part from her, if it could be helped. He was clinging to her and chattering, and the interesting excitement of finding herself in the Indian gentleman’s room had brought a flush to Sara’s cheeks.

“Your monkey ran away again,” she said, in her pretty voice. “He came to my garret window last night, and I took him in because it was so cold. I would have brought him back if it had not been so late. I knew you were ill and might not like to be disturbed.”

The Indian gentleman’s hollow eyes dwelt on her with curious interest.

“That was very thoughtful of you,” he said.

Sara looked toward Ram Dass, who stood near the door.

“Shall I give him to the Lascar?” she asked.

“How do you know he is a Lascar?” said the Indian gentleman, smiling a little.

“Oh, I know Lascars,” Sara said, handing over the reluctant monkey. “I was born in India.”

The Indian gentleman sat upright so suddenly, and with such a change of expression, that she was for a moment quite startled.

“You were born in India,” he exclaimed, “were you? Come here.” And he held out his hand.

Sara went to him and laid her hand in his, as he seemed to want to take it. She stood still, and her green-gray eyes met his wonderingly. Something seemed to be the matter with him.

“You live next door?” he demanded.

“Yes; I live at Miss Minchin’s seminary.”

“But you are not one of her pupils?”

A strange little smile hovered about Sara’s mouth. She hesitated a moment.

“I don’t think I know exactly WHAT I am,” she replied.

“Why not?”

“At first I was a pupil, and a parlor boarder; but now—”

“You were a pupil! What are you now?”

The queer little sad smile was on Sara’s lips again.

“I sleep in the attic, next to the scullery maid,” she said. “I run errands for the cook—I do anything she tells me; and I teach the little ones their lessons.”

“Question her, Carmichael,” said Mr. Carrisford, sinking back as if he had lost his strength. “Question her; I cannot.”

The big, kind father of the Large Family knew how to question little girls. Sara realized how much practice he had had when he spoke to her in his nice, encouraging voice.

“What do you mean by ‘At first,’ my child?” he inquired.

“When I was first taken there by my papa.”

“Where is your papa?”

“He died,” said Sara, very quietly. “He lost all his money and there was none left for me. There was no one to take care of me or to pay Miss Minchin.”

“Carmichael!” the Indian gentleman cried out loudly. “Carmichael!”

“We must not frighten her,” Mr. Carmichael said aside to him in a quick, low voice. And he added aloud to Sara, “So you were sent up into the attic, and made into a little drudge. That was about it, wasn’t it?”

“There was no one to take care of me,” said Sara. “There was no money; I belong to nobody.”

“How did your father lose his money?” the Indian gentleman broke in breathlessly.

“He did not lose it himself,” Sara answered, wondering still more each moment. “He had a friend he was very fond of—he was very fond of him. It was his friend who took his money. He trusted his friend too much.”

The Indian gentleman’s breath came more quickly.

“The friend might have MEANT to do no harm,” he said. “It might have happened through a mistake.”

Sara did not know how unrelenting her quiet young voice sounded as she answered. If she had known, she would surely have tried to soften it for the Indian gentleman’s sake.

“The suffering was just as bad for my papa,” she said. “It killed him.”

“What was your father’s name?” the Indian gentleman said. “Tell me.”

“His name was Ralph Crewe,” Sara answered, feeling startled. “Captain Crewe. He died in India.”

The haggard face contracted, and Ram Dass sprang to his master’s side.

“Carmichael,” the invalid gasped, “it is the child—the child!”

For a moment Sara thought he was going to die. Ram Dass poured out drops from a bottle, and held them to his lips. Sara stood near, trembling a little. She looked in a bewildered way at Mr. Carmichael.

“What child am I?” she faltered.

“He was your father’s friend,” Mr. Carmichael answered her. “Don’t be frightened. We have been looking for you for two years.”

Sara put her hand up to her forehead, and her mouth trembled. She spoke as if she were in a dream.

“And I was at Miss Minchin’s all the while,” she half whispered. “Just on the other side of the wall.”

18

“I Tried Not to Be”

It was pretty, comfortable Mrs. Carmichael who explained everything. She was sent for at once, and came across the square to take Sara into her warm arms and make clear to her all that had happened. The excitement of the totally unexpected discovery had been temporarily almost overpowering to Mr. Carrisford in his weak condition.

“Upon my word,” he said faintly to Mr. Carmichael, when it was suggested that the little girl should go into another room. “I feel as if I do not want to lose sight of her.”

“I will take care of her,” Janet said, “and mamma will come in a few minutes.” And it was Janet who led her away.

“We’re so glad you are found,” she said. “You don’t know how glad we are that you are found.”

Donald stood with his hands in his pockets, and gazed at Sara with reflecting and self-reproachful eyes.

“If I’d just asked what your name was when I gave you my sixpence,” he said, “you would have told me it was Sara Crewe, and then you would have been found in a minute.” Then Mrs. Carmichael came in. She looked very much moved, and suddenly took Sara in her arms and kissed her.

“You look bewildered, poor child,” she said. “And it is not to be wondered at.”

Sara could only think of one thing.

“Was he,” she said, with a glance toward the closed door of the library—”was HE the wicked friend? Oh, do tell me!”

Mrs. Carmichael was crying as she kissed her again. She felt as if she ought to be kissed very often because she had not been kissed for so long.

“He was not wicked, my dear,” she answered. “He did not really lose your papa’s money. He only thought he had lost it; and because he loved him so much his grief made him so ill that for a time he was not in his right mind. He almost died of brain fever, and long before he began to recover your poor papa was dead.”

“And he did not know where to find me,” murmured Sara. “And I was so near.” Somehow, she could not forget that she had been so near.

“He believed you were in school in France,” Mrs. Carmichael explained. “And he was continually misled by false clues. He has looked for you everywhere. When he saw you pass by, looking so sad and neglected, he did not dream that you were his friend’s poor child; but because you were a little girl, too, he was sorry for you, and wanted to make you happier. And he told Ram Dass to climb into your attic window and try to make you comfortable.”

Sara gave a start of joy; her whole look changed.

“Did Ram Dass bring the things?” she cried out. “Did he tell Ram Dass to do it? Did he make the dream that came true?”

“Yes, my dear—yes! He is kind and good, and he was sorry for you, for little lost Sara Crewe’s sake.”

The library door opened and Mr. Carmichael appeared, calling Sara to him with a gesture.

“Mr. Carrisford is better already,” he said. “He wants you to come to him.”

Sara did not wait. When the Indian gentleman looked at her as she entered, he saw that her face was all alight.

She went and stood before his chair, with her hands clasped together against her breast.

“You sent the things to me,” she said, in a joyful emotional little voice, “the beautiful, beautiful things? YOU sent them!”

“Yes, poor, dear child, I did,” he answered her. He was weak and broken with long illness and trouble, but he looked at her with the look she remembered in her father’s eyes—that look of loving her and wanting to take her in his arms. It made her kneel down by him, just as she used to kneel by her father when they were the dearest friends and lovers in the world.

“Then it is you who are my friend,” she said; “it is you who are my friend!” And she dropped her face on his thin hand and kissed it again and again.

“The man will be himself again in three weeks,” Mr. Carmichael said aside to his wife. “Look at his face already.”

In fact, he did look changed. Here was the “Little Missus,” and he had new things to think of and plan for already. In the first place, there was Miss Minchin. She must be interviewed and told of the change which had taken place in the fortunes of her pupil.

Sara was not to return to the seminary at all. The Indian gentleman was very determined upon that point. She must remain where she was, and Mr. Carmichael should go and see Miss Minchin himself.

“I am glad I need not go back,” said Sara. “She will be very angry. She does not like me; though perhaps it is my fault, because I do not like her.”

But, oddly enough, Miss Minchin made it unnecessary for Mr. Carmichael to go to her, by actually coming in search of her pupil herself. She had wanted Sara for something, and on inquiry had heard an astonishing thing. One of the housemaids had seen her steal out of the area with something hidden under her cloak, and had also seen her go up the steps of the next door and enter the house.

“What does she mean!” cried Miss Minchin to Miss Amelia.

“I don’t know, I’m sure, sister,” answered Miss Amelia. “Unless she has made friends with him because he has lived in India.”

“It would be just like her to thrust herself upon him and try to gain his sympathies in some such impertinent fashion,” said Miss Minchin. “She must have been in the house for two hours. I will not allow such presumption. I shall go and inquire into the matter, and apologize for her intrusion.”

Sara was sitting on a footstool close to Mr. Carrisford’s knee, and listening to some of the many things he felt it necessary to try to explain to her, when Ram Dass announced the visitor’s arrival.

Sara rose involuntarily, and became rather pale; but Mr. Carrisford saw that she stood quietly, and showed none of the ordinary signs of child terror.

Miss Minchin entered the room with a sternly dignified manner. She was correctly and well dressed, and rigidly polite.

“I am sorry to disturb Mr. Carrisford,” she said; “but I have explanations to make. I am Miss Minchin, the proprietress of the Young Ladies’ Seminary next door.”

The Indian gentleman looked at her for a moment in silent scrutiny. He was a man who had naturally a rather hot temper, and he did not wish it to get too much the better of him.

“So you are Miss Minchin?” he said.

“I am, sir.”

“In that case,” the Indian gentleman replied, “you have arrived at the right time. My solicitor, Mr. Carmichael, was just on the point of going to see you.”

Mr. Carmichael bowed slightly, and Miss Minchin looked from him to Mr. Carrisford in amazement.

“Your solicitor!” she said. “I do not understand. I have come here as a matter of duty. I have just discovered that you have been intruded upon through the forwardness of one of my pupils—a charity pupil. I came to explain that she intruded without my knowledge.” She turned upon Sara. “Go home at once,” she commanded indignantly. “You shall be severely punished. Go home at once.”

The Indian gentleman drew Sara to his side and patted her hand.

“She is not going.”

Miss Minchin felt rather as if she must be losing her senses.

“Not going!” she repeated.

“No,” said Mr. Carrisford. “She is not going home—if you give your house that name. Her home for the future will be with me.”

Miss Minchin fell back in amazed indignation.

“With YOU! With YOU sir! What does this mean?”

“Kindly explain the matter, Carmichael,” said the Indian gentleman; “and get it over as quickly as possible.” And he made Sara sit down again, and held her hands in his—which was another trick of her papa’s.

Then Mr. Carmichael explained—in the quiet, level-toned, steady manner of a man who knew his subject, and all its legal significance, which was a thing Miss Minchin understood as a business woman, and did not enjoy.

“Mr. Carrisford, madam,” he said, “was an intimate friend of the late Captain Crewe. He was his partner in certain large investments. The fortune which Captain Crewe supposed he had lost has been recovered, and is now in Mr. Carrisford’s hands.”

“The fortune!” cried Miss Minchin; and she really lost color as she uttered the exclamation. “Sara’s fortune!”

“It WILL be Sara’s fortune,” replied Mr. Carmichael, rather coldly. “It is Sara’s fortune now, in fact. Certain events have increased it enormously. The diamond mines have retrieved themselves.”

“The diamond mines!” Miss Minchin gasped out. If this was true, nothing so horrible, she felt, had ever happened to her since she was born.

“The diamond mines,” Mr. Carmichael repeated, and he could not help adding, with a rather sly, unlawyer-like smile, “There are not many princesses, Miss Minchin, who are richer than your little charity pupil, Sara Crewe, will be. Mr. Carrisford has been searching for her for nearly two years; he has found her at last, and he will keep her.”

After which he asked Miss Minchin to sit down while he explained matters to her fully, and went into such detail as was necessary to make it quite clear to her that Sara’s future was an assured one, and that what had seemed to be lost was to be restored to her tenfold; also, that she had in Mr. Carrisford a guardian as well as a friend.

Miss Minchin was not a clever woman, and in her excitement she was silly enough to make one desperate effort to regain what she could not help seeing she had lost through her worldly folly.

“He found her under my care,” she protested. “I have done everything for her. But for me she should have starved in the streets.”

Here the Indian gentleman lost his temper.

“As to starving in the streets,” he said, “she might have starved more comfortably there than in your attic.”

“Captain Crewe left her in my charge,” Miss Minchin argued. “She must return to it until she is of age. She can be a parlor boarder again. She must finish her education. The law will interfere in my behalf.”

“Come, come, Miss Minchin,” Mr. Carmichael interposed, “the law will do nothing of the sort. If Sara herself wishes to return to you, I dare say Mr. Carrisford might not refuse to allow it. But that rests with Sara.”

“Then,” said Miss Minchin, “I appeal to Sara. I have not spoiled you, perhaps,” she said awkwardly to the little girl; “but you know that your papa was pleased with your progress. And—ahem—I have always been fond of you.”

Sara’s green-gray eyes fixed themselves on her with the quiet, clear look Miss Minchin particularly disliked.

“Have YOU, Miss Minchin?” she said. “I did not know that.”

Miss Minchin reddened and drew herself up.

“You ought to have known it,” said she; “but children, unfortunately, never know what is best for them. Amelia and I always said you were the cleverest child in the school. Will you not do your duty to your poor papa and come home with me?”

Sara took a step toward her and stood still. She was thinking of the day when she had been told that she belonged to nobody, and was in danger of being turned into the street; she was thinking of the cold, hungry hours she had spent alone with Emily and Melchisedec in the attic. She looked Miss Minchin steadily in the face.

“You know why I will not go home with you, Miss Minchin,” she said; “you know quite well.”

A hot flush showed itself on Miss Minchin’s hard, angry face.

“You will never see your companions again,” she began. “I will see that Ermengarde and Lottie are kept away—”

Mr. Carmichael stopped her with polite firmness.

“Excuse me,” he said; “she will see anyone she wishes to see. The parents of Miss Crewe’s fellow-pupils are not likely to refuse her invitations to visit her at her guardian’s house. Mr. Carrisford will attend to that.”

It must be confessed that even Miss Minchin flinched. This was worse than the eccentric bachelor uncle who might have a peppery temper and be easily offended at the treatment of his niece. A woman of sordid mind could easily believe that most people would not refuse to allow their children to remain friends with a little heiress of diamond mines. And if Mr. Carrisford chose to tell certain of her patrons how unhappy Sara Crewe had been made, many unpleasant things might happen.

“You have not undertaken an easy charge,” she said to the Indian gentleman, as she turned to leave the room; “you will discover that very soon. The child is neither truthful nor grateful. I suppose”—to Sara—”that you feel now that you are a princess again.”

Sara looked down and flushed a little, because she thought her pet fancy might not be easy for strangers—even nice ones—to understand at first.

“I—TRIED not to be anything else,” she answered in a low voice—”even when I was coldest and hungriest—I tried not to be.”

“Now it will not be necessary to try,” said Miss Minchin, acidly, as Ram Dass salaamed her out of the room.

 

She returned home and, going to her sitting room, sent at once for Miss Amelia. She sat closeted with her all the rest of the afternoon, and it must be admitted that poor Miss Amelia passed through more than one bad quarter of an hour. She shed a good many tears, and mopped her eyes a good deal. One of her unfortunate remarks almost caused her sister to snap her head entirely off, but it resulted in an unusual manner.

“I’m not as clever as you, sister,” she said, “and I am always afraid to say things to you for fear of making you angry. Perhaps if I were not so timid it would be better for the school and for both of us. I must say I’ve often thought it would have been better if you had been less severe on Sara Crewe, and had seen that she was decently dressed and more comfortable. I KNOW she was worked too hard for a child of her age, and I know she was only half fed—”

“How dare you say such a thing!” exclaimed Miss Minchin.

“I don’t know how I dare,” Miss Amelia answered, with a kind of reckless courage; “but now I’ve begun I may as well finish, whatever happens to me. The child was a clever child and a good child—and she would have paid you for any kindness you had shown her. But you didn’t show her any. The fact was, she was too clever for you, and you always disliked her for that reason. She used to see through us both—”

“Amelia!” gasped her infuriated elder, looking as if she would box her ears and knock her cap off, as she had often done to Becky.

But Miss Amelia’s disappointment had made her hysterical enough not to care what occurred next.

“She did! She did!” she cried. “She saw through us both. She saw that you were a hard-hearted, worldly woman, and that I was a weak fool, and that we were both of us vulgar and mean enough to grovel on our knees for her money, and behave ill to her because it was taken from her—though she behaved herself like a little princess even when she was a beggar. She did—she did—like a little princess!” And her hysterics got the better of the poor woman, and she began to laugh and cry both at once, and rock herself backward and forward.

“And now you’ve lost her,” she cried wildly; “and some other school will get her and her money; and if she were like any other child she’d tell how she’s been treated, and all our pupils would be taken away and we should be ruined. And it serves us right; but it serves you right more than it does me, for you are a hard woman, Maria Minchin, you’re a hard, selfish, worldly woman!”

And she was in danger of making so much noise with her hysterical chokes and gurgles that her sister was obliged to go to her and apply salts and sal volatile to quiet her, instead of pouring forth her indignation at her audacity.

And from that time forward, it may be mentioned, the elder Miss Minchin actually began to stand a little in awe of a sister who, while she looked so foolish, was evidently not quite so foolish as she looked, and might, consequently, break out and speak truths people did not want to hear.

That evening, when the pupils were gathered together before the fire in the schoolroom, as was their custom before going to bed, Ermengarde came in with a letter in her hand and a queer expression on her round face. It was queer because, while it was an expression of delighted excitement, it was combined with such amazement as seemed to belong to a kind of shock just received.

“What IS the matter?” cried two or three voices at once.

“Is it anything to do with the row that has been going on?” said Lavinia, eagerly. “There has been such a row in Miss Minchin’s room, Miss Amelia has had something like hysterics and has had to go to bed.”

Ermengarde answered them slowly as if she were half stunned.

“I have just had this letter from Sara,” she said, holding it out to let them see what a long letter it was.

“From Sara!” Every voice joined in that exclamation.

“Where is she?” almost shrieked Jessie.

“Next door,” said Ermengarde, “with the Indian gentleman.”

“Where? Where? Has she been sent away? Does Miss Minchin know? Was the row about that? Why did she write? Tell us! Tell us!”

There was a perfect babel, and Lottie began to cry plaintively.

Ermengarde answered them slowly as if she were half plunged out into what, at the moment, seemed the most important and self-explaining thing.

“There WERE diamond mines,” she said stoutly; “there WERE!” Open mouths and open eyes confronted her.

“They were real,” she hurried on. “It was all a mistake about them. Something happened for a time, and Mr. Carrisford thought they were ruined—”

“Who is Mr. Carrisford?” shouted Jessie.

“The Indian gentleman. And Captain Crewe thought so, too—and he died; and Mr. Carrisford had brain fever and ran away, and HE almost died. And he did not know where Sara was. And it turned out that there were millions and millions of diamonds in the mines; and half of them belong to Sara; and they belonged to her when she was living in the attic with no one but Melchisedec for a friend, and the cook ordering her about. And Mr. Carrisford found her this afternoon, and he has got her in his home—and she will never come back—and she will be more a princess than she ever was—a hundred and fifty thousand times more. And I am going to see her tomorrow afternoon. There!”

Even Miss Minchin herself could scarcely have controlled the uproar after this; and though she heard the noise, she did not try. She was not in the mood to face anything more than she was facing in her room, while Miss Amelia was weeping in bed. She knew that the news had penetrated the walls in some mysterious manner, and that every servant and every child would go to bed talking about it.

So until almost midnight the entire seminary, realizing somehow that all rules were laid aside, crowded round Ermengarde in the schoolroom and heard read and re-read the letter containing a story which was quite as wonderful as any Sara herself had ever invented, and which had the amazing charm of having happened to Sara herself and the mystic Indian gentleman in the very next house.

Becky, who had heard it also, managed to creep up stairs earlier than usual. She wanted to get away from people and go and look at the little magic room once more. She did not know what would happen to it. It was not likely that it would be left to Miss Minchin. It would be taken away, and the attic would be bare and empty again. Glad as she was for Sara’s sake, she went up the last flight of stairs with a lump in her throat and tears blurring her sight. There would be no fire tonight, and no rosy lamp; no supper, and no princess sitting in the glow reading or telling stories—no princess!

She choked down a sob as she pushed the attic door open, and then she broke into a low cry.

The lamp was flushing the room, the fire was blazing, the supper was waiting; and Ram Dass was standing smiling into her startled face.

“Missee sahib remembered,” he said. “She told the sahib all. She wished you to know the good fortune which has befallen her. Behold a letter on the tray. She has written. She did not wish that you should go to sleep unhappy. The sahib commands you to come to him tomorrow. You are to be the attendant of missee sahib. Tonight I take these things back over the roof.”

And having said this with a beaming face, he made a little salaam and slipped through the skylight with an agile silentness of movement which showed Becky how easily he had done it before.

19

Anne

Never had such joy reigned in the nursery of the Large Family. Never had they dreamed of such delights as resulted from an intimate acquaintance with the little-girl-who-was-not-a-beggar. The mere fact of her sufferings and adventures made her a priceless possession. Everybody wanted to be told over and over again the things which had happened to her. When one was sitting by a warm fire in a big, glowing room, it was quite delightful to hear how cold it could be in an attic. It must be admitted that the attic was rather delighted in, and that its coldness and bareness quite sank into insignificance when Melchisedec was remembered, and one heard about the sparrows and things one could see if one climbed on the table and stuck one’s head and shoulders out of the skylight.

Of course the thing loved best was the story of the banquet and the dream which was true. Sara told it for the first time the day after she had been found. Several members of the Large Family came to take tea with her, and as they sat or curled up on the hearth-rug she told the story in her own way, and the Indian gentleman listened and watched her. When she had finished she looked up at him and put her hand on his knee.

“That is my part,” she said. “Now won’t you tell your part of it, Uncle Tom?” He had asked her to call him always “Uncle Tom.” “I don’t know your part yet, and it must be beautiful.”

So he told them how, when he sat alone, ill and dull and irritable, Ram Dass had tried to distract him by describing the passers by, and there was one child who passed oftener than any one else; he had begun to be interested in her—partly perhaps because he was thinking a great deal of a little girl, and partly because Ram Dass had been able to relate the incident of his visit to the attic in chase of the monkey. He had described its cheerless look, and the bearing of the child, who seemed as if she was not of the class of those who were treated as drudges and servants. Bit by bit, Ram Dass had made discoveries concerning the wretchedness of her life. He had found out how easy a matter it was to climb across the few yards of roof to the skylight, and this fact had been the beginning of all that followed.

“Sahib,” he had said one day, “I could cross the slates and make the child a fire when she is out on some errand. When she returned, wet and cold, to find it blazing, she would think a magician had done it.”

The idea had been so fanciful that Mr. Carrisford’s sad face had lighted with a smile, and Ram Dass had been so filled with rapture that he had enlarged upon it and explained to his master how simple it would be to accomplish numbers of other things. He had shown a childlike pleasure and invention, and the preparations for the carrying out of the plan had filled many a day with interest which would otherwise have dragged wearily. On the night of the frustrated banquet Ram Dass had kept watch, all his packages being in readiness in the attic which was his own; and the person who was to help him had waited with him, as interested as himself in the odd adventure. Ram Dass had been lying flat upon the slates, looking in at the skylight, when the banquet had come to its disastrous conclusion; he had been sure of the profoundness of Sara’s wearied sleep; and then, with a dark lantern, he had crept into the room, while his companion remained outside and handed the things to him. When Sara had stirred ever so faintly, Ram Dass had closed the lantern-slide and lain flat upon the floor. These and many other exciting things the children found out by asking a thousand questions.

“I am so glad,” Sara said. “I am so GLAD it was you who were my friend!”

There never were such friends as these two became. Somehow, they seemed to suit each other in a wonderful way. The Indian gentleman had never had a companion he liked quite as much as he liked Sara. In a month’s time he was, as Mr. Carmichael had prophesied he would be, a new man. He was always amused and interested, and he began to find an actual pleasure in the possession of the wealth he had imagined that he loathed the burden of. There were so many charming things to plan for Sara. There was a little joke between them that he was a magician, and it was one of his pleasures to invent things to surprise her. She found beautiful new flowers growing in her room, whimsical little gifts tucked under pillows, and once, as they sat together in the evening, they heard the scratch of a heavy paw on the door, and when Sara went to find out what it was, there stood a great dog—a splendid Russian boarhound—with a grand silver and gold collar bearing an inscription. “I am Boris,” it read; “I serve the Princess Sara.”

There was nothing the Indian gentleman loved more than the recollection of the little princess in rags and tatters. The afternoons in which the Large Family, or Ermengarde and Lottie, gathered to rejoice together were very delightful. But the hours when Sara and the Indian gentleman sat alone and read or talked had a special charm of their own. During their passing many interesting things occurred.

One evening, Mr. Carrisford, looking up from his book, noticed that his companion had not stirred for some time, but sat gazing into the fire.

“What are you ‘supposing,’ Sara?” he asked.

Sara looked up, with a bright color on her cheek.

“I WAS supposing,” she said; “I was remembering that hungry day, and a child I saw.”

“But there were a great many hungry days,” said the Indian gentleman, with rather a sad tone in his voice. “Which hungry day was it?”

“I forgot you didn’t know,” said Sara. “It was the day the dream came true.”

Then she told him the story of the bun shop, and the fourpence she picked up out of the sloppy mud, and the child who was hungrier than herself. She told it quite simply, and in as few words as possible; but somehow the Indian gentleman found it necessary to shade his eyes with his hand and look down at the carpet.

“And I was supposing a kind of plan,” she said, when she had finished. “I was thinking I should like to do something.”

“What was it?” said Mr. Carrisford, in a low tone. “You may do anything you like to do, princess.”

“I was wondering,” rather hesitated Sara—”you know, you say I have so much money—I was wondering if I could go to see the bun-woman, and tell her that if, when hungry children—particularly on those dreadful days—come and sit on the steps, or look in at the window, she would just call them in and give them something to eat, she might send the bills to me. Could I do that?”

“You shall do it tomorrow morning,” said the Indian gentleman.

“Thank you,” said Sara. “You see, I know what it is to be hungry, and it is very hard when one cannot even PRETEND it away.”

“Yes, yes, my dear,” said the Indian gentleman. “Yes, yes, it must be. Try to forget it. Come and sit on this footstool near my knee, and only remember you are a princess.”

“Yes,” said Sara, smiling; “and I can give buns and bread to the populace.” And she went and sat on the stool, and the Indian gentleman (he used to like her to call him that, too, sometimes) drew her small dark head down on his knee and stroked her hair.

The next morning, Miss Minchin, in looking out of her window, saw the things she perhaps least enjoyed seeing. The Indian gentleman’s carriage, with its tall horses, drew up before the door of the next house, and its owner and a little figure, warm with soft, rich furs, descended the steps to get into it. The little figure was a familiar one, and reminded Miss Minchin of days in the past. It was followed by another as familiar—the sight of which she found very irritating. It was Becky, who, in the character of delighted attendant, always accompanied her young mistress to her carriage, carrying wraps and belongings. Already Becky had a pink, round face.

A little later the carriage drew up before the door of the baker’s shop, and its occupants got out, oddly enough, just as the bun-woman was putting a tray of smoking-hot buns into the window.

When Sara entered the shop the woman turned and looked at her, and, leaving the buns, came and stood behind the counter. For a moment she looked at Sara very hard indeed, and then her good-natured face lighted up.

“I’m sure that I remember you, miss,” she said. “And yet—”

“Yes,” said Sara; “once you gave me six buns for fourpence, and—”

“And you gave five of ’em to a beggar child,” the woman broke in on her. “I’ve always remembered it. I couldn’t make it out at first.” She turned round to the Indian gentleman and spoke her next words to him. “I beg your pardon, sir, but there’s not many young people that notices a hungry face in that way; and I’ve thought of it many a time. Excuse the liberty, miss,”—to Sara—”but you look rosier and—well, better than you did that—that—”

“I am better, thank you,” said Sara. “And—I am much happier—and I have come to ask you to do something for me.”

“Me, miss!” exclaimed the bun-woman, smiling cheerfully. “Why, bless you! Yes, miss. What can I do?”

And then Sara, leaning on the counter, made her little proposal concerning the dreadful days and the hungry waifs and the buns.

The woman watched her, and listened with an astonished face.

“Why, bless me!” she said again when she had heard it all; “it’ll be a pleasure to me to do it. I am a working-woman myself and cannot afford to do much on my own account, and there’s sights of trouble on every side; but, if you’ll excuse me, I’m bound to say I’ve given away many a bit of bread since that wet afternoon, just along o’ thinking of you—an’ how wet an’ cold you was, an’ how hungry you looked; an’ yet you gave away your hot buns as if you was a princess.”

The Indian gentleman smiled involuntarily at this, and Sara smiled a little, too, remembering what she had said to herself when she put the buns down on the ravenous child’s ragged lap.

“She looked so hungry,” she said. “She was even hungrier than I was.”

“She was starving,” said the woman. “Many’s the time she’s told me of it since—how she sat there in the wet, and felt as if a wolf was a-tearing at her poor young insides.”

“Oh, have you seen her since then?” exclaimed Sara. “Do you know where she is?”

“Yes, I do,” answered the woman, smiling more good-naturedly than ever. “Why, she’s in that there back room, miss, an’ has been for a month; an’ a decent, well-meanin’ girl she’s goin’ to turn out, an’ such a help to me in the shop an’ in the kitchen as you’d scarce believe, knowin’ how she’s lived.”

She stepped to the door of the little back parlor and spoke; and the next minute a girl came out and followed her behind the counter. And actually it was the beggar-child, clean and neatly clothed, and looking as if she had not been hungry for a long time. She looked shy, but she had a nice face, now that she was no longer a savage, and the wild look had gone from her eyes. She knew Sara in an instant, and stood and looked at her as if she could never look enough.

“You see,” said the woman, “I told her to come when she was hungry, and when she’d come I’d give her odd jobs to do; an’ I found she was willing, and somehow I got to like her; and the end of it was, I’ve given her a place an’ a home, and she helps me, an’ behaves well, an’ is as thankful as a girl can be. Her name’s Anne. She has no other.”

The children stood and looked at each other for a few minutes; and then Sara took her hand out of her muff and held it out across the counter, and Anne took it, and they looked straight into each other’s eyes.

“I am so glad,” Sara said. “And I have just thought of something. Perhaps Mrs. Brown will let you be the one to give the buns and bread to the children. Perhaps you would like to do it because you know what it is to be hungry, too.”

“Yes, miss,” said the girl.

And, somehow, Sara felt as if she understood her, though she said so little, and only stood still and looked and looked after her as she went out of the shop with the Indian gentleman, and they got into the carriage and drove away.

 
 
 
 
 
 

The Wonderful Wizard of Oz

July 11, 2009
  

The Wonderful Wizard of Oz

 

by

L. Frank Baum

 

Contents

         Introduction
    1.  The Cyclone
    2.  The Council with the Munchkins
    3.  How Dorothy Saved the Scarecrow
    4.  The Road Through the Forest
    5.  The Rescue of the Tin Woodman
    6.  The Cowardly Lion
    7.  The Journey to the Great Oz
    8.  The Deadly Poppy Field
    9.  The Queen of the Field Mice
  10.  The Guardian of the Gates
  11.  The Emerald City of Oz
  12.  The Search for the Wicked Witch
  13.  The Rescue
  14.  The Winged Monkeys
  15.  The Discovery of Oz, the Terrible
  16.  The Magic Art of the Great Humbug
  17.  How the Balloon Was Launched
  18.  Away to the South
  19.  Attacked by the Fighting Trees
  20.  The Dainty China Country
  21.  The Lion Becomes the King of Beasts
  22.  The Country of the Quadlings
  23.  Glinda The Good Witch Grants Dorothy's Wish
  24.  Home Again

Introduction

Folklore, legends, myths and fairy tales have followed childhood through the ages, for every healthy youngster has a wholesome and instinctive love for stories fantastic, marvelous and manifestly unreal. The winged fairies of Grimm and Andersen have brought more happiness to childish hearts than all other human creations.

Yet the old time fairy tale, having served for generations, may now be classed as “historical” in the children’s library; for the time has come for a series of newer “wonder tales” in which the stereotyped genie, dwarf and fairy are eliminated, together with all the horrible and blood-curdling incidents devised by their authors to point a fearsome moral to each tale. Modern education includes morality; therefore the modern child seeks only entertainment in its wonder tales and gladly dispenses with all disagreeable incident.

Having this thought in mind, the story of “The Wonderful Wizard of Oz” was written solely to please children of today. It aspires to being a modernized fairy tale, in which the wonderment and joy are retained and the heartaches and nightmares are left out.

 

L. Frank Baum
Chicago, April, 1900.

THE WONDERFUL WIZARD OF OZ

 

1. The Cyclone

Dorothy lived in the midst of the great Kansas prairies, with Uncle Henry, who was a farmer, and Aunt Em, who was the farmer’s wife. Their house was small, for the lumber to build it had to be carried by wagon many miles. There were four walls, a floor and a roof, which made one room; and this room contained a rusty looking cookstove, a cupboard for the dishes, a table, three or four chairs, and the beds. Uncle Henry and Aunt Em had a big bed in one corner, and Dorothy a little bed in another corner. There was no garret at all, and no cellar–except a small hole dug in the ground, called a cyclone cellar, where the family could go in case one of those great whirlwinds arose, mighty enough to crush any building in its path. It was reached by a trap door in the middle of the floor, from which a ladder led down into the small, dark hole.

When Dorothy stood in the doorway and looked around, she could see nothing but the great gray prairie on every side. Not a tree nor a house broke the broad sweep of flat country that reached to the edge of the sky in all directions. The sun had baked the plowed land into a gray mass, with little cracks running through it. Even the grass was not green, for the sun had burned the tops of the long blades until they were the same gray color to be seen everywhere. Once the house had been painted, but the sun blistered the paint and the rains washed it away, and now the house was as dull and gray as everything else.

When Aunt Em came there to live she was a young, pretty wife. The sun and wind had changed her, too. They had taken the sparkle from her eyes and left them a sober gray; they had taken the red from her cheeks and lips, and they were gray also. She was thin and gaunt, and never smiled now. When Dorothy, who was an orphan, first came to her, Aunt Em had been so startled by the child’s laughter that she would scream and press her hand upon her heart whenever Dorothy’s merry voice reached her ears; and she still looked at the little girl with wonder that she could find anything to laugh at.

Uncle Henry never laughed. He worked hard from morning till night and did not know what joy was. He was gray also, from his long beard to his rough boots, and he looked stern and solemn, and rarely spoke.

It was Toto that made Dorothy laugh, and saved her from growing as gray as her other surroundings. Toto was not gray; he was a little black dog, with long silky hair and small black eyes that twinkled merrily on either side of his funny, wee nose. Toto played all day long, and Dorothy played with him, and loved him dearly.

Today, however, they were not playing. Uncle Henry sat upon the doorstep and looked anxiously at the sky, which was even grayer than usual. Dorothy stood in the door with Toto in her arms, and looked at the sky too. Aunt Em was washing the dishes.

From the far north they heard a low wail of the wind, and Uncle Henry and Dorothy could see where the long grass bowed in waves before the coming storm. There now came a sharp whistling in the air from the south, and as they turned their eyes that way they saw ripples in the grass coming from that direction also.

Suddenly Uncle Henry stood up.

“There’s a cyclone coming, Em,” he called to his wife. “I’ll go look after the stock.” Then he ran toward the sheds where the cows and horses were kept.

Aunt Em dropped her work and came to the door. One glance told her of the danger close at hand.

“Quick, Dorothy!” she screamed. “Run for the cellar!”

Toto jumped out of Dorothy’s arms and hid under the bed, and the girl started to get him. Aunt Em, badly frightened, threw open the trap door in the floor and climbed down the ladder into the small, dark hole. Dorothy caught Toto at last and started to follow her aunt. When she was halfway across the room there came a great shriek from the wind, and the house shook so hard that she lost her footing and sat down suddenly upon the floor.

Then a strange thing happened.

The house whirled around two or three times and rose slowly through the air. Dorothy felt as if she were going up in a balloon.

The north and south winds met where the house stood, and made it the exact center of the cyclone. In the middle of a cyclone the air is generally still, but the great pressure of the wind on every side of the house raised it up higher and higher, until it was at the very top of the cyclone; and there it remained and was carried miles and miles away as easily as you could carry a feather.

It was very dark, and the wind howled horribly around her, but Dorothy found she was riding quite easily. After the first few whirls around, and one other time when the house tipped badly, she felt as if she were being rocked gently, like a baby in a cradle.

Toto did not like it. He ran about the room, now here, now there, barking loudly; but Dorothy sat quite still on the floor and waited to see what would happen.

Once Toto got too near the open trap door, and fell in; and at first the little girl thought she had lost him. But soon she saw one of his ears sticking up through the hole, for the strong pressure of the air was keeping him up so that he could not fall. She crept to the hole, caught Toto by the ear, and dragged him into the room again, afterward closing the trap door so that no more accidents could happen.

Hour after hour passed away, and slowly Dorothy got over her fright; but she felt quite lonely, and the wind shrieked so loudly all about her that she nearly became deaf. At first she had wondered if she would be dashed to pieces when the house fell again; but as the hours passed and nothing terrible happened, she stopped worrying and resolved to wait calmly and see what the future would bring. At last she crawled over the swaying floor to her bed, and lay down upon it; and Toto followed and lay down beside her.

In spite of the swaying of the house and the wailing of the wind, Dorothy soon closed her eyes and fell fast asleep.

2. The Council with the Munchkins

She was awakened by a shock, so sudden and severe that if Dorothy had not been lying on the soft bed she might have been hurt. As it was, the jar made her catch her breath and wonder what had happened; and Toto put his cold little nose into her face and whined dismally. Dorothy sat up and noticed that the house was not moving; nor was it dark, for the bright sunshine came in at the window, flooding the little room. She sprang from her bed and with Toto at her heels ran and opened the door.

The little girl gave a cry of amazement and looked about her, her eyes growing bigger and bigger at the wonderful sights she saw.

The cyclone had set the house down very gently–for a cyclone–in the midst of a country of marvelous beauty. There were lovely patches of greensward all about, with stately trees bearing rich and luscious fruits. Banks of gorgeous flowers were on every hand, and birds with rare and brilliant plumage sang and fluttered in the trees and bushes. A little way off was a small brook, rushing and sparkling along between green banks, and murmuring in a voice very grateful to a little girl who had lived so long on the dry, gray prairies.

While she stood looking eagerly at the strange and beautiful sights, she noticed coming toward her a group of the queerest people she had ever seen. They were not as big as the grown folk she had always been used to; but neither were they very small. In fact, they seemed about as tall as Dorothy, who was a well-grown child for her age, although they were, so far as looks go, many years older.

Three were men and one a woman, and all were oddly dressed. They wore round hats that rose to a small point a foot above their heads, with little bells around the brims that tinkled sweetly as they moved. The hats of the men were blue; the little woman’s hat was white, and she wore a white gown that hung in pleats from her shoulders. Over it were sprinkled little stars that glistened in the sun like diamonds. The men were dressed in blue, of the same shade as their hats, and wore well-polished boots with a deep roll of blue at the tops. The men, Dorothy thought, were about as old as Uncle Henry, for two of them had beards. But the little woman was doubtless much older. Her face was covered with wrinkles, her hair was nearly white, and she walked rather stiffly.

When these people drew near the house where Dorothy was standing in the doorway, they paused and whispered among themselves, as if afraid to come farther. But the little old woman walked up to Dorothy, made a low bow and said, in a sweet voice:

“You are welcome, most noble Sorceress, to the land of the Munchkins. We are so grateful to you for having killed the Wicked Witch of the East, and for setting our people free from bondage.”

Dorothy listened to this speech with wonder. What could the little woman possibly mean by calling her a sorceress, and saying she had killed the Wicked Witch of the East? Dorothy was an innocent, harmless little girl, who had been carried by a cyclone many miles from home; and she had never killed anything in all her life.

But the little woman evidently expected her to answer; so Dorothy said, with hesitation, “You are very kind, but there must be some mistake. I have not killed anything.”

“Your house did, anyway,” replied the little old woman, with a laugh, “and that is the same thing. See!” she continued, pointing to the corner of the house. “There are her two feet, still sticking out from under a block of wood.”

Dorothy looked, and gave a little cry of fright. There, indeed, just under the corner of the great beam the house rested on, two feet were sticking out, shod in silver shoes with pointed toes.

“Oh, dear! Oh, dear!” cried Dorothy, clasping her hands together in dismay. “The house must have fallen on her. Whatever shall we do?”

“There is nothing to be done,” said the little woman calmly.

“But who was she?” asked Dorothy.

“She was the Wicked Witch of the East, as I said,” answered the little woman. “She has held all the Munchkins in bondage for many years, making them slave for her night and day. Now they are all set free, and are grateful to you for the favor.”

“Who are the Munchkins?” inquired Dorothy.

“They are the people who live in this land of the East where the Wicked Witch ruled.”

“Are you a Munchkin?” asked Dorothy.

“No, but I am their friend, although I live in the land of the North. When they saw the Witch of the East was dead the Munchkins sent a swift messenger to me, and I came at once. I am the Witch of the North.”

“Oh, gracious!” cried Dorothy. “Are you a real witch?”

“Yes, indeed,” answered the little woman. “But I am a good witch, and the people love me. I am not as powerful as the Wicked Witch was who ruled here, or I should have set the people free myself.”

“But I thought all witches were wicked,” said the girl, who was half frightened at facing a real witch. “Oh, no, that is a great mistake. There were only four witches in all the Land of Oz, and two of them, those who live in the North and the South, are good witches. I know this is true, for I am one of them myself, and cannot be mistaken. Those who dwelt in the East and the West were, indeed, wicked witches; but now that you have killed one of them, there is but one Wicked Witch in all the Land of Oz–the one who lives in the West.”

“But,” said Dorothy, after a moment’s thought, “Aunt Em has told me that the witches were all dead–years and years ago.”

“Who is Aunt Em?” inquired the little old woman.

“She is my aunt who lives in Kansas, where I came from.”

The Witch of the North seemed to think for a time, with her head bowed and her eyes upon the ground. Then she looked up and said, “I do not know where Kansas is, for I have never heard that country mentioned before. But tell me, is it a civilized country?”

“Oh, yes,” replied Dorothy.

“Then that accounts for it. In the civilized countries I believe there are no witches left, nor wizards, nor sorceresses, nor magicians. But, you see, the Land of Oz has never been civilized, for we are cut off from all the rest of the world. Therefore we still have witches and wizards amongst us.”

“Who are the wizards?” asked Dorothy.

“Oz himself is the Great Wizard,” answered the Witch, sinking her voice to a whisper. “He is more powerful than all the rest of us together. He lives in the City of Emeralds.”

Dorothy was going to ask another question, but just then the Munchkins, who had been standing silently by, gave a loud shout and pointed to the corner of the house where the Wicked Witch had been lying.

“What is it?” asked the little old woman, and looked, and began to laugh. The feet of the dead Witch had disappeared entirely, and nothing was left but the silver shoes.

“She was so old,” explained the Witch of the North, “that she dried up quickly in the sun. That is the end of her. But the silver shoes are yours, and you shall have them to wear.” She reached down and picked up the shoes, and after shaking the dust out of them handed them to Dorothy.

“The Witch of the East was proud of those silver shoes,” said one of the Munchkins, “and there is some charm connected with them; but what it is we never knew.”

Dorothy carried the shoes into the house and placed them on the table. Then she came out again to the Munchkins and said:

“I am anxious to get back to my aunt and uncle, for I am sure they will worry about me. Can you help me find my way?”

The Munchkins and the Witch first looked at one another, and then at Dorothy, and then shook their heads.

“At the East, not far from here,” said one, “there is a great desert, and none could live to cross it.”

“It is the same at the South,” said another, “for I have been there and seen it. The South is the country of the Quadlings.”

“I am told,” said the third man, “that it is the same at the West. And that country, where the Winkies live, is ruled by the Wicked Witch of the West, who would make you her slave if you passed her way.”

“The North is my home,” said the old lady, “and at its edge is the same great desert that surrounds this Land of Oz. I’m afraid, my dear, you will have to live with us.”

Dorothy began to sob at this, for she felt lonely among all these strange people. Her tears seemed to grieve the kind-hearted Munchkins, for they immediately took out their handkerchiefs and began to weep also. As for the little old woman, she took off her cap and balanced the point on the end of her nose, while she counted “One, two, three” in a solemn voice. At once the cap changed to a slate, on which was written in big, white chalk marks:

 

“LET DOROTHY GO TO THE CITY OF EMERALDS”

 

The little old woman took the slate from her nose, and having read the words on it, asked, “Is your name Dorothy, my dear?”

“Yes,” answered the child, looking up and drying her tears.

“Then you must go to the City of Emeralds. Perhaps Oz will help you.”

“Where is this city?” asked Dorothy.

“It is exactly in the center of the country, and is ruled by Oz, the Great Wizard I told you of.”

“Is he a good man?” inquired the girl anxiously.

“He is a good Wizard. Whether he is a man or not I cannot tell, for I have never seen him.”

“How can I get there?” asked Dorothy.

“You must walk. It is a long journey, through a country that is sometimes pleasant and sometimes dark and terrible. However, I will use all the magic arts I know of to keep you from harm.”

“Won’t you go with me?” pleaded the girl, who had begun to look upon the little old woman as her only friend.

“No, I cannot do that,” she replied, “but I will give you my kiss, and no one will dare injure a person who has been kissed by the Witch of the North.”

She came close to Dorothy and kissed her gently on the forehead. Where her lips touched the girl they left a round, shining mark, as Dorothy found out soon after.

“The road to the City of Emeralds is paved with yellow brick,” said the Witch, “so you cannot miss it. When you get to Oz do not be afraid of him, but tell your story and ask him to help you. Good-bye, my dear.”

The three Munchkins bowed low to her and wished her a pleasant journey, after which they walked away through the trees. The Witch gave Dorothy a friendly little nod, whirled around on her left heel three times, and straightway disappeared, much to the surprise of little Toto, who barked after her loudly enough when she had gone, because he had been afraid even to growl while she stood by.

But Dorothy, knowing her to be a witch, had expected her to disappear in just that way, and was not surprised in the least.

3. How Dorothy Saved the Scarecrow

When Dorothy was left alone she began to feel hungry. So she went to the cupboard and cut herself some bread, which she spread with butter. She gave some to Toto, and taking a pail from the shelf she carried it down to the little brook and filled it with clear, sparkling water. Toto ran over to the trees and began to bark at the birds sitting there. Dorothy went to get him, and saw such delicious fruit hanging from the branches that she gathered some of it, finding it just what she wanted to help out her breakfast.

Then she went back to the house, and having helped herself and Toto to a good drink of the cool, clear water, she set about making ready for the journey to the City of Emeralds.

Dorothy had only one other dress, but that happened to be clean and was hanging on a peg beside her bed. It was gingham, with checks of white and blue; and although the blue was somewhat faded with many washings, it was still a pretty frock. The girl washed herself carefully, dressed herself in the clean gingham, and tied her pink sunbonnet on her head. She took a little basket and filled it with bread from the cupboard, laying a white cloth over the top. Then she looked down at her feet and noticed how old and worn her shoes were.

“They surely will never do for a long journey, Toto,” she said. And Toto looked up into her face with his little black eyes and wagged his tail to show he knew what she meant.

At that moment Dorothy saw lying on the table the silver shoes that had belonged to the Witch of the East.

“I wonder if they will fit me,” she said to Toto. “They would be just the thing to take a long walk in, for they could not wear out.”

She took off her old leather shoes and tried on the silver ones, which fitted her as well as if they had been made for her.

Finally she picked up her basket.

“Come along, Toto,” she said. “We will go to the Emerald City and ask the Great Oz how to get back to Kansas again.”

She closed the door, locked it, and put the key carefully in the pocket of her dress. And so, with Toto trotting along soberly behind her, she started on her journey.

There were several roads near by, but it did not take her long to find the one paved with yellow bricks. Within a short time she was walking briskly toward the Emerald City, her silver shoes tinkling merrily on the hard, yellow road-bed. The sun shone bright and the birds sang sweetly, and Dorothy did not feel nearly so bad as you might think a little girl would who had been suddenly whisked away from her own country and set down in the midst of a strange land.

She was surprised, as she walked along, to see how pretty the country was about her. There were neat fences at the sides of the road, painted a dainty blue color, and beyond them were fields of grain and vegetables in abundance. Evidently the Munchkins were good farmers and able to raise large crops. Once in a while she would pass a house, and the people came out to look at her and bow low as she went by; for everyone knew she had been the means of destroying the Wicked Witch and setting them free from bondage. The houses of the Munchkins were odd-looking dwellings, for each was round, with a big dome for a roof. All were painted blue, for in this country of the East blue was the favorite color.

Toward evening, when Dorothy was tired with her long walk and began to wonder where she should pass the night, she came to a house rather larger than the rest. On the green lawn before it many men and women were dancing. Five little fiddlers played as loudly as possible, and the people were laughing and singing, while a big table near by was loaded with delicious fruits and nuts, pies and cakes, and many other good things to eat.

The people greeted Dorothy kindly, and invited her to supper and to pass the night with them; for this was the home of one of the richest Munchkins in the land, and his friends were gathered with him to celebrate their freedom from the bondage of the Wicked Witch.

Dorothy ate a hearty supper and was waited upon by the rich Munchkin himself, whose name was Boq. Then she sat upon a settee and watched the people dance.

When Boq saw her silver shoes he said, “You must be a great sorceress.”

“Why?” asked the girl.

“Because you wear silver shoes and have killed the Wicked Witch. Besides, you have white in your frock, and only witches and sorceresses wear white.”

“My dress is blue and white checked,” said Dorothy, smoothing out the wrinkles in it.

“It is kind of you to wear that,” said Boq. “Blue is the color of the Munchkins, and white is the witch color. So we know you are a friendly witch.”

Dorothy did not know what to say to this, for all the people seemed to think her a witch, and she knew very well she was only an ordinary little girl who had come by the chance of a cyclone into a strange land.

When she had tired watching the dancing, Boq led her into the house, where he gave her a room with a pretty bed in it. The sheets were made of blue cloth, and Dorothy slept soundly in them till morning, with Toto curled up on the blue rug beside her.

She ate a hearty breakfast, and watched a wee Munchkin baby, who played with Toto and pulled his tail and crowed and laughed in a way that greatly amused Dorothy. Toto was a fine curiosity to all the people, for they had never seen a dog before.

“How far is it to the Emerald City?” the girl asked.

“I do not know,” answered Boq gravely, “for I have never been there. It is better for people to keep away from Oz, unless they have business with him. But it is a long way to the Emerald City, and it will take you many days. The country here is rich and pleasant, but you must pass through rough and dangerous places before you reach the end of your journey.”

This worried Dorothy a little, but she knew that only the Great Oz could help her get to Kansas again, so she bravely resolved not to turn back.

She bade her friends good-bye, and again started along the road of yellow brick. When she had gone several miles she thought she would stop to rest, and so climbed to the top of the fence beside the road and sat down. There was a great cornfield beyond the fence, and not far away she saw a Scarecrow, placed high on a pole to keep the birds from the ripe corn.

Dorothy leaned her chin upon her hand and gazed thoughtfully at the Scarecrow. Its head was a small sack stuffed with straw, with eyes, nose, and mouth painted on it to represent a face. An old, pointed blue hat, that had belonged to some Munchkin, was perched on his head, and the rest of the figure was a blue suit of clothes, worn and faded, which had also been stuffed with straw. On the feet were some old boots with blue tops, such as every man wore in this country, and the figure was raised above the stalks of corn by means of the pole stuck up its back.

While Dorothy was looking earnestly into the queer, painted face of the Scarecrow, she was surprised to see one of the eyes slowly wink at her. She thought she must have been mistaken at first, for none of the scarecrows in Kansas ever wink; but presently the figure nodded its head to her in a friendly way. Then she climbed down from the fence and walked up to it, while Toto ran around the pole and barked.

“Good day,” said the Scarecrow, in a rather husky voice.

“Did you speak?” asked the girl, in wonder.

“Certainly,” answered the Scarecrow. “How do you do?”

“I’m pretty well, thank you,” replied Dorothy politely. “How do you do?”

“I’m not feeling well,” said the Scarecrow, with a smile, “for it is very tedious being perched up here night and day to scare away crows.”

“Can’t you get down?” asked Dorothy.

“No, for this pole is stuck up my back. If you will please take away the pole I shall be greatly obliged to you.”

Dorothy reached up both arms and lifted the figure off the pole, for, being stuffed with straw, it was quite light.

“Thank you very much,” said the Scarecrow, when he had been set down on the ground. “I feel like a new man.”

Dorothy was puzzled at this, for it sounded queer to hear a stuffed man speak, and to see him bow and walk along beside her.

“Who are you?” asked the Scarecrow when he had stretched himself and yawned. “And where are you going?”

“My name is Dorothy,” said the girl, “and I am going to the Emerald City, to ask the Great Oz to send me back to Kansas.”

“Where is the Emerald City?” he inquired. “And who is Oz?”

“Why, don’t you know?” she returned, in surprise.

“No, indeed. I don’t know anything. You see, I am stuffed, so I have no brains at all,” he answered sadly.

“Oh,” said Dorothy, “I’m awfully sorry for you.”

“Do you think,” he asked, “if I go to the Emerald City with you, that Oz would give me some brains?”

“I cannot tell,” she returned, “but you may come with me, if you like. If Oz will not give you any brains you will be no worse off than you are now.”

“That is true,” said the Scarecrow. “You see,” he continued confidentially, “I don’t mind my legs and arms and body being stuffed, because I cannot get hurt. If anyone treads on my toes or sticks a pin into me, it doesn’t matter, for I can’t feel it. But I do not want people to call me a fool, and if my head stays stuffed with straw instead of with brains, as yours is, how am I ever to know anything?”

“I understand how you feel,” said the little girl, who was truly sorry for him. “If you will come with me I’ll ask Oz to do all he can for you.”

“Thank you,” he answered gratefully.

They walked back to the road. Dorothy helped him over the fence, and they started along the path of yellow brick for the Emerald City.

Toto did not like this addition to the party at first. He smelled around the stuffed man as if he suspected there might be a nest of rats in the straw, and he often growled in an unfriendly way at the Scarecrow.

“Don’t mind Toto,” said Dorothy to her new friend. “He never bites.”

“Oh, I’m not afraid,” replied the Scarecrow. “He can’t hurt the straw. Do let me carry that basket for you. I shall not mind it, for I can’t get tired. I’ll tell you a secret,” he continued, as he walked along. “There is only one thing in the world I am afraid of.”

“What is that?” asked Dorothy; “the Munchkin farmer who made you?”

“No,” answered the Scarecrow; “it’s a lighted match.”

4. The Road Through the Forest

After a few hours the road began to be rough, and the walking grew so difficult that the Scarecrow often stumbled over the yellow bricks, which were here very uneven. Sometimes, indeed, they were broken or missing altogether, leaving holes that Toto jumped across and Dorothy walked around. As for the Scarecrow, having no brains, he walked straight ahead, and so stepped into the holes and fell at full length on the hard bricks. It never hurt him, however, and Dorothy would pick him up and set him upon his feet again, while he joined her in laughing merrily at his own mishap.

The farms were not nearly so well cared for here as they were farther back. There were fewer houses and fewer fruit trees, and the farther they went the more dismal and lonesome the country became.

At noon they sat down by the roadside, near a little brook, and Dorothy opened her basket and got out some bread. She offered a piece to the Scarecrow, but he refused.

“I am never hungry,” he said, “and it is a lucky thing I am not, for my mouth is only painted, and if I should cut a hole in it so I could eat, the straw I am stuffed with would come out, and that would spoil the shape of my head.”

Dorothy saw at once that this was true, so she only nodded and went on eating her bread.

“Tell me something about yourself and the country you came from,” said the Scarecrow, when she had finished her dinner. So she told him all about Kansas, and how gray everything was there, and how the cyclone had carried her to this queer Land of Oz.

The Scarecrow listened carefully, and said, “I cannot understand why you should wish to leave this beautiful country and go back to the dry, gray place you call Kansas.”

“That is because you have no brains” answered the girl. “No matter how dreary and gray our homes are, we people of flesh and blood would rather live there than in any other country, be it ever so beautiful. There is no place like home.”

The Scarecrow sighed.

“Of course I cannot understand it,” he said. “If your heads were stuffed with straw, like mine, you would probably all live in the beautiful places, and then Kansas would have no people at all. It is fortunate for Kansas that you have brains.”

“Won’t you tell me a story, while we are resting?” asked the child.

The Scarecrow looked at her reproachfully, and answered:

“My life has been so short that I really know nothing whatever. I was only made day before yesterday. What happened in the world before that time is all unknown to me. Luckily, when the farmer made my head, one of the first things he did was to paint my ears, so that I heard what was going on. There was another Munchkin with him, and the first thing I heard was the farmer saying, `How do you like those ears?’

“`They aren’t straight,'” answered the other.

“`Never mind,'” said the farmer. “`They are ears just the same,'” which was true enough.

“`Now I’ll make the eyes,'” said the farmer. So he painted my right eye, and as soon as it was finished I found myself looking at him and at everything around me with a great deal of curiosity, for this was my first glimpse of the world.

“`That’s a rather pretty eye,'” remarked the Munchkin who was watching the farmer. “`Blue paint is just the color for eyes.’

“`I think I’ll make the other a little bigger,'” said the farmer. And when the second eye was done I could see much better than before. Then he made my nose and my mouth. But I did not speak, because at that time I didn’t know what a mouth was for. I had the fun of watching them make my body and my arms and legs; and when they fastened on my head, at last, I felt very proud, for I thought I was just as good a man as anyone.

“`This fellow will scare the crows fast enough,’ said the farmer. `He looks just like a man.’

“`Why, he is a man,’ said the other, and I quite agreed with him. The farmer carried me under his arm to the cornfield, and set me up on a tall stick, where you found me. He and his friend soon after walked away and left me alone.

“I did not like to be deserted this way. So I tried to walk after them. But my feet would not touch the ground, and I was forced to stay on that pole. It was a lonely life to lead, for I had nothing to think of, having been made such a little while before. Many crows and other birds flew into the cornfield, but as soon as they saw me they flew away again, thinking I was a Munchkin; and this pleased me and made me feel that I was quite an important person. By and by an old crow flew near me, and after looking at me carefully he perched upon my shoulder and said:

“`I wonder if that farmer thought to fool me in this clumsy manner. Any crow of sense could see that you are only stuffed with straw.’ Then he hopped down at my feet and ate all the corn he wanted. The other birds, seeing he was not harmed by me, came to eat the corn too, so in a short time there was a great flock of them about me.

“I felt sad at this, for it showed I was not such a good Scarecrow after all; but the old crow comforted me, saying, `If you only had brains in your head you would be as good a man as any of them, and a better man than some of them. Brains are the only things worth having in this world, no matter whether one is a crow or a man.’

“After the crows had gone I thought this over, and decided I would try hard to get some brains. By good luck you came along and pulled me off the stake, and from what you say I am sure the Great Oz will give me brains as soon as we get to the Emerald City.”

“I hope so,” said Dorothy earnestly, “since you seem anxious to have them.”

“Oh, yes; I am anxious,” returned the Scarecrow. “It is such an uncomfortable feeling to know one is a fool.”

“Well,” said the girl, “let us go.” And she handed the basket to the Scarecrow.

There were no fences at all by the roadside now, and the land was rough and untilled. Toward evening they came to a great forest, where the trees grew so big and close together that their branches met over the road of yellow brick. It was almost dark under the trees, for the branches shut out the daylight; but the travelers did not stop, and went on into the forest.

“If this road goes in, it must come out,” said the Scarecrow, “and as the Emerald City is at the other end of the road, we must go wherever it leads us.”

“Anyone would know that,” said Dorothy.

“Certainly; that is why I know it,” returned the Scarecrow. “If it required brains to figure it out, I never should have said it.”

After an hour or so the light faded away, and they found themselves stumbling along in the darkness. Dorothy could not see at all, but Toto could, for some dogs see very well in the dark; and the Scarecrow declared he could see as well as by day. So she took hold of his arm and managed to get along fairly well.

“If you see any house, or any place where we can pass the night,” she said, “you must tell me; for it is very uncomfortable walking in the dark.”

Soon after the Scarecrow stopped.

“I see a little cottage at the right of us,” he said, “built of logs and branches. Shall we go there?”

“Yes, indeed,” answered the child. “I am all tired out.”

So the Scarecrow led her through the trees until they reached the cottage, and Dorothy entered and found a bed of dried leaves in one corner. She lay down at once, and with Toto beside her soon fell into a sound sleep. The Scarecrow, who was never tired, stood up in another corner and waited patiently until morning came.

5. The Rescue of the Tin Woodman

When Dorothy awoke the sun was shining through the trees and Toto had long been out chasing birds around him and squirrels. She sat up and looked around her. Scarecrow, still standing patiently in his corner, waiting for her.

“We must go and search for water,” she said to him.

“Why do you want water?” he asked.

“To wash my face clean after the dust of the road, and to drink, so the dry bread will not stick in my throat.”

“It must be inconvenient to be made of flesh,” said the Scarecrow thoughtfully, “for you must sleep, and eat and drink. However, you have brains, and it is worth a lot of bother to be able to think properly.”

They left the cottage and walked through the trees until they found a little spring of clear water, where Dorothy drank and bathed and ate her breakfast. She saw there was not much bread left in the basket, and the girl was thankful the Scarecrow did not have to eat anything, for there was scarcely enough for herself and Toto for the day.

When she had finished her meal, and was about to go back to the road of yellow brick, she was startled to hear a deep groan near by.

“What was that?” she asked timidly.

“I cannot imagine,” replied the Scarecrow; “but we can go and see.”

Just then another groan reached their ears, and the sound seemed to come from behind them. They turned and walked through the forest a few steps, when Dorothy discovered something shining in a ray of sunshine that fell between the trees. She ran to the place and then stopped short, with a little cry of surprise.

One of the big trees had been partly chopped through, and standing beside it, with an uplifted axe in his hands, was a man made entirely of tin. His head and arms and legs were jointed upon his body, but he stood perfectly motionless, as if he could not stir at all.

Dorothy looked at him in amazement, and so did the Scarecrow, while Toto barked sharply and made a snap at the tin legs, which hurt his teeth.

“Did you groan?” asked Dorothy.

“Yes,” answered the tin man, “I did. I’ve been groaning for more than a year, and no one has ever heard me before or come to help me.”

“What can I do for you?” she inquired softly, for she was moved by the sad voice in which the man spoke.

“Get an oil-can and oil my joints,” he answered. “They are rusted so badly that I cannot move them at all; if I am well oiled I shall soon be all right again. You will find an oil-can on a shelf in my cottage.”

Dorothy at once ran back to the cottage and found the oil-can, and then she returned and asked anxiously, “Where are your joints?”

“Oil my neck, first,” replied the Tin Woodman. So she oiled it, and as it was quite badly rusted the Scarecrow took hold of the tin head and moved it gently from side to side until it worked freely, and then the man could turn it himself.

“Now oil the joints in my arms,” he said. And Dorothy oiled them and the Scarecrow bent them carefully until they were quite free from rust and as good as new.

The Tin Woodman gave a sigh of satisfaction and lowered his axe, which he leaned against the tree.

“This is a great comfort,” he said. “I have been holding that axe in the air ever since I rusted, and I’m glad to be able to put it down at last. Now, if you will oil the joints of my legs, I shall be all right once more.”

So they oiled his legs until he could move them freely; and he thanked them again and again for his release, for he seemed a very polite creature, and very grateful.

“I might have stood there always if you had not come along,” he said; “so you have certainly saved my life. How did you happen to be here?”

“We are on our way to the Emerald City to see the Great Oz,” she answered, “and we stopped at your cottage to pass the night.”

“Why do you wish to see Oz?” he asked.

“I want him to send me back to Kansas, and the Scarecrow wants him to put a few brains into his head,” she replied.

The Tin Woodman appeared to think deeply for a moment. Then he said:

“Do you suppose Oz could give me a heart?”

“Why, I guess so,” Dorothy answered. “It would be as easy as to give the Scarecrow brains.”

“True,” the Tin Woodman returned. “So, if you will allow me to join your party, I will also go to the Emerald City and ask Oz to help me.”

“Come along,” said the Scarecrow heartily, and Dorothy added that she would be pleased to have his company. So the Tin Woodman shouldered his axe and they all passed through the forest until they came to the road that was paved with yellow brick.

The Tin Woodman had asked Dorothy to put the oil-can in her basket. “For,” he said, “if I should get caught in the rain, and rust again, I would need the oil-can badly.”

It was a bit of good luck to have their new comrade join the party, for soon after they had begun their journey again they came to a place where the trees and branches grew so thick over the road that the travelers could not pass. But the Tin Woodman set to work with his axe and chopped so well that soon he cleared a passage for the entire party.

Dorothy was thinking so earnestly as they walked along that she did not notice when the Scarecrow stumbled into a hole and rolled over to the side of the road. Indeed he was obliged to call to her to help him up again.

“Why didn’t you walk around the hole?” asked the Tin Woodman.

“I don’t know enough,” replied the Scarecrow cheerfully. “My head is stuffed with straw, you know, and that is why I am going to Oz to ask him for some brains.”

“Oh, I see,” said the Tin Woodman. “But, after all, brains are not the best things in the world.”

“Have you any?” inquired the Scarecrow.

“No, my head is quite empty,” answered the Woodman. “But once I had brains, and a heart also; so, having tried them both, I should much rather have a heart.”

“And why is that?” asked the Scarecrow.

“I will tell you my story, and then you will know.”

So, while they were walking through the forest, the Tin Woodman told the following story:

“I was born the son of a woodman who chopped down trees in the forest and sold the wood for a living. When I grew up, I too became a woodchopper, and after my father died I took care of my old mother as long as she lived. Then I made up my mind that instead of living alone I would marry, so that I might not become lonely.

“There was one of the Munchkin girls who was so beautiful that I soon grew to love her with all my heart. She, on her part, promised to marry me as soon as I could earn enough money to build a better house for her; so I set to work harder than ever. But the girl lived with an old woman who did not want her to marry anyone, for she was so lazy she wished the girl to remain with her and do the cooking and the housework. So the old woman went to the Wicked Witch of the East, and promised her two sheep and a cow if she would prevent the marriage. Thereupon the Wicked Witch enchanted my axe, and when I was chopping away at my best one day, for I was anxious to get the new house and my wife as soon as possible, the axe slipped all at once and cut off my left leg.

“This at first seemed a great misfortune, for I knew a one-legged man could not do very well as a wood-chopper. So I went to a tinsmith and had him make me a new leg out of tin. The leg worked very well, once I was used to it. But my action angered the Wicked Witch of the East, for she had promised the old woman I should not marry the pretty Munchkin girl. When I began chopping again, my axe slipped and cut off my right leg. Again I went to the tinsmith, and again he made me a leg out of tin. After this the enchanted axe cut off my arms, one after the other; but, nothing daunted, I had them replaced with tin ones. The Wicked Witch then made the axe slip and cut off my head, and at first I thought that was the end of me. But the tinsmith happened to come along, and he made me a new head out of tin.

“I thought I had beaten the Wicked Witch then, and I worked harder than ever; but I little knew how cruel my enemy could be. She thought of a new way to kill my love for the beautiful Munchkin maiden, and made my axe slip again, so that it cut right through my body, splitting me into two halves. Once more the tinsmith came to my help and made me a body of tin, fastening my tin arms and legs and head to it, by means of joints, so that I could move around as well as ever. But, alas! I had now no heart, so that I lost all my love for the Munchkin girl, and did not care whether I married her or not. I suppose she is still living with the old woman, waiting for me to come after her.

“My body shone so brightly in the sun that I felt very proud of it and it did not matter now if my axe slipped, for it could not cut me. There was only one danger–that my joints would rust; but I kept an oil-can in my cottage and took care to oil myself whenever I needed it. However, there came a day when I forgot to do this, and, being caught in a rainstorm, before I thought of the danger my joints had rusted, and I was left to stand in the woods until you came to help me. It was a terrible thing to undergo, but during the year I stood there I had time to think that the greatest loss I had known was the loss of my heart. While I was in love I was the happiest man on earth; but no one can love who has not a heart, and so I am resolved to ask Oz to give me one. If he does, I will go back to the Munchkin maiden and marry her.”

Both Dorothy and the Scarecrow had been greatly interested in the story of the Tin Woodman, and now they knew why he was so anxious to get a new heart.

“All the same,” said the Scarecrow, “I shall ask for brains instead of a heart; for a fool would not know what to do with a heart if he had one.”

“I shall take the heart,” returned the Tin Woodman; “for brains do not make one happy, and happiness is the best thing in the world.”

Dorothy did not say anything, for she was puzzled to know which of her two friends was right, and she decided if she could only get back to Kansas and Aunt Em, it did not matter so much whether the Woodman had no brains and the Scarecrow no heart, or each got what he wanted.

What worried her most was that the bread was nearly gone, and another meal for herself and Toto would empty the basket. To be sure neither the Woodman nor the Scarecrow ever ate anything, but she was not made of tin nor straw, and could not live unless she was fed.

6. The Cowardly Lion

All this time Dorothy and her companions had been walking through the thick woods. The road was still paved with yellow brick, but these were much covered by dried branches and dead leaves from the trees, and the walking was not at all good.

There were few birds in this part of the forest, for birds love the open country where there is plenty of sunshine. But now and then there came a deep growl from some wild animal hidden among the trees. These sounds made the little girl’s heart beat fast, for she did not know what made them; but Toto knew, and he walked close to Dorothy’s side, and did not even bark in return.

“How long will it be,” the child asked of the Tin Woodman, “before we are out of the forest?”

“I cannot tell,” was the answer, “for I have never been to the Emerald City. But my father went there once, when I was a boy, and he said it was a long journey through a dangerous country, although nearer to the city where Oz dwells the country is beautiful. But I am not afraid so long as I have my oil-can, and nothing can hurt the Scarecrow, while you bear upon your forehead the mark of the Good Witch’s kiss, and that will protect you from harm.”

“But Toto!” said the girl anxiously. “What will protect him?”

“We must protect him ourselves if he is in danger,” replied the Tin Woodman.

Just as he spoke there came from the forest a terrible roar, and the next moment a great Lion bounded into the road. With one blow of his paw he sent the Scarecrow spinning over and over to the edge of the road, and then he struck at the Tin Woodman with his sharp claws. But, to the Lion’s surprise, he could make no impression on the tin, although the Woodman fell over in the road and lay still.

Little Toto, now that he had an enemy to face, ran barking toward the Lion, and the great beast had opened his mouth to bite the dog, when Dorothy, fearing Toto would be killed, and heedless of danger, rushed forward and slapped the Lion upon his nose as hard as she could, while she cried out:

“Don’t you dare to bite Toto! You ought to be ashamed of yourself, a big beast like you, to bite a poor little dog!”

“I didn’t bite him,” said the Lion, as he rubbed his nose with his paw where Dorothy had hit it.

“No, but you tried to,” she retorted. “You are nothing but a big coward.”

“I know it,” said the Lion, hanging his head in shame. “I’ve always known it. But how can I help it?”

“I don’t know, I’m sure. To think of your striking a stuffed man, like the poor Scarecrow!”

“Is he stuffed?” asked the Lion in surprise, as he watched her pick up the Scarecrow and set him upon his feet, while she patted him into shape again.

“Of course he’s stuffed,” replied Dorothy, who was still angry.

“That’s why he went over so easily,” remarked the Lion. “It astonished me to see him whirl around so. Is the other one stuffed also?”

“No,” said Dorothy, “he’s made of tin.” And she helped the Woodman up again.

“That’s why he nearly blunted my claws,” said the Lion. “When they scratched against the tin it made a cold shiver run down my back. What is that little animal you are so tender of?”

“He is my dog, Toto,” answered Dorothy.

“Is he made of tin, or stuffed?” asked the Lion.

“Neither. He’s a–a–a meat dog,” said the girl.

“Oh! He’s a curious animal and seems remarkably small, now that I look at him. No one would think of biting such a little thing, except a coward like me,” continued the Lion sadly.

“What makes you a coward?” asked Dorothy, looking at the great beast in wonder, for he was as big as a small horse.

“It’s a mystery,” replied the Lion. “I suppose I was born that way. All the other animals in the forest naturally expect me to be brave, for the Lion is everywhere thought to be the King of Beasts. I learned that if I roared very loudly every living thing was frightened and got out of my way. Whenever I’ve met a man I’ve been awfully scared; but I just roared at him, and he has always run away as fast as he could go. If the elephants and the tigers and the bears had ever tried to fight me, I should have run myself–I’m such a coward; but just as soon as they hear me roar they all try to get away from me, and of course I let them go.”

“But that isn’t right. The King of Beasts shouldn’t be a coward,” said the Scarecrow.

“I know it,” returned the Lion, wiping a tear from his eye with the tip of his tail. “It is my great sorrow, and makes my life very unhappy. But whenever there is danger, my heart begins to beat fast.”

“Perhaps you have heart disease,” said the Tin Woodman.

“It may be,” said the Lion.

“If you have,” continued the Tin Woodman, “you ought to be glad, for it proves you have a heart. For my part, I have no heart; so I cannot have heart disease.”

“Perhaps,” said the Lion thoughtfully, “if I had no heart I should not be a coward.”

“Have you brains?” asked the Scarecrow.

“I suppose so. I’ve never looked to see,” replied the Lion.

“I am going to the Great Oz to ask him to give me some,” remarked the Scarecrow, “for my head is stuffed with straw.”

“And I am going to ask him to give me a heart,” said the Woodman.

“And I am going to ask him to send Toto and me back to Kansas,” added Dorothy.

“Do you think Oz could give me courage?” asked the Cowardly Lion.

“Just as easily as he could give me brains,” said the Scarecrow.

“Or give me a heart,” said the Tin Woodman.

“Or send me back to Kansas,” said Dorothy.

“Then, if you don’t mind, I’ll go with you,” said the Lion, “for my life is simply unbearable without a bit of courage.”

“You will be very welcome,” answered Dorothy, “for you will help to keep away the other wild beasts. It seems to me they must be more cowardly than you are if they allow you to scare them so easily.”

“They really are,” said the Lion, “but that doesn’t make me any braver, and as long as I know myself to be a coward I shall be unhappy.”

So once more the little company set off upon the journey, the Lion walking with stately strides at Dorothy’s side. Toto did not approve this new comrade at first, for he could not forget how nearly he had been crushed between the Lion’s great jaws. But after a time he became more at ease, and presently Toto and the Cowardly Lion had grown to be good friends.

During the rest of that day there was no other adventure to mar the peace of their journey. Once, indeed, the Tin Woodman stepped upon a beetle that was crawling along the road, and killed the poor little thing. This made the Tin Woodman very unhappy, for he was always careful not to hurt any living creature; and as he walked along he wept several tears of sorrow and regret. These tears ran slowly down his face and over the hinges of his jaw, and there they rusted. When Dorothy presently asked him a question the Tin Woodman could not open his mouth, for his jaws were tightly rusted together. He became greatly frightened at this and made many motions to Dorothy to relieve him, but she could not understand. The Lion was also puzzled to know what was wrong. But the Scarecrow seized the oil-can from Dorothy’s basket and oiled the Woodman’s jaws, so that after a few moments he could talk as well as before.

“This will serve me a lesson,” said he, “to look where I step. For if I should kill another bug or beetle I should surely cry again, and crying rusts my jaws so that I cannot speak.”

Thereafter he walked very carefully, with his eyes on the road, and when he saw a tiny ant toiling by he would step over it, so as not to harm it. The Tin Woodman knew very well he had no heart, and therefore he took great care never to be cruel or unkind to anything.

“You people with hearts,” he said, “have something to guide you, and need never do wrong; but I have no heart, and so I must be very careful. When Oz gives me a heart of course I needn’t mind so much.”

7. The Journey to the Great Oz

They were obliged to camp out that night under a large tree in the forest, for there were no houses near. The tree made a good, thick covering to protect them from the dew, and the Tin Woodman chopped a great pile of wood with his axe and Dorothy built a splendid fire that warmed her and made her feel less lonely. She and Toto ate the last of their bread, and now she did not know what they would do for breakfast.

“If you wish,” said the Lion, “I will go into the forest and kill a deer for you. You can roast it by the fire, since your tastes are so peculiar that you prefer cooked food, and then you will have a very good breakfast.”

“Don’t! Please don’t,” begged the Tin Woodman. “I should certainly weep if you killed a poor deer, and then my jaws would rust again.”

But the Lion went away into the forest and found his own supper, and no one ever knew what it was, for he didn’t mention it. And the Scarecrow found a tree full of nuts and filled Dorothy’s basket with them, so that she would not be hungry for a long time. She thought this was very kind and thoughtful of the Scarecrow, but she laughed heartily at the awkward way in which the poor creature picked up the nuts. His padded hands were so clumsy and the nuts were so small that he dropped almost as many as he put in the basket. But the Scarecrow did not mind how long it took him to fill the basket, for it enabled him to keep away from the fire, as he feared a spark might get into his straw and burn him up. So he kept a good distance away from the flames, and only came near to cover Dorothy with dry leaves when she lay down to sleep. These kept her very snug and warm, and she slept soundly until morning.

When it was daylight, the girl bathed her face in a little rippling brook, and soon after they all started toward the Emerald City.

This was to be an eventful day for the travelers. They had hardly been walking an hour when they saw before them a great ditch that crossed the road and divided the forest as far as they could see on either side. It was a very wide ditch, and when they crept up to the edge and looked into it they could see it was also very deep, and there were many big, jagged rocks at the bottom. The sides were so steep that none of them could climb down, and for a moment it seemed that their journey must end.

“What shall we do?” asked Dorothy despairingly.

“I haven’t the faintest idea,” said the Tin Woodman, and the Lion shook his shaggy mane and looked thoughtful.

But the Scarecrow said, “We cannot fly, that is certain. Neither can we climb down into this great ditch. Therefore, if we cannot jump over it, we must stop where we are.”

“I think I could jump over it,” said the Cowardly Lion, after measuring the distance carefully in his mind.

“Then we are all right,” answered the Scarecrow, “for you can carry us all over on your back, one at a time.”

“Well, I’ll try it,” said the Lion. “Who will go first?”

“I will,” declared the Scarecrow, “for, if you found that you could not jump over the gulf, Dorothy would be killed, or the Tin Woodman badly dented on the rocks below. But if I am on your back it will not matter so much, for the fall would not hurt me at all.”

“I am terribly afraid of falling, myself,” said the Cowardly Lion, “but I suppose there is nothing to do but try it. So get on my back and we will make the attempt.”

The Scarecrow sat upon the Lion’s back, and the big beast walked to the edge of the gulf and crouched down.

“Why don’t you run and jump?” asked the Scarecrow.

“Because that isn’t the way we Lions do these things,” he replied. Then giving a great spring, he shot through the air and landed safely on the other side. They were all greatly pleased to see how easily he did it, and after the Scarecrow had got down from his back the Lion sprang across the ditch again.

Dorothy thought she would go next; so she took Toto in her arms and climbed on the Lion’s back, holding tightly to his mane with one hand. The next moment it seemed as if she were flying through the air; and then, before she had time to think about it, she was safe on the other side. The Lion went back a third time and got the Tin Woodman, and then they all sat down for a few moments to give the beast a chance to rest, for his great leaps had made his breath short, and he panted like a big dog that has been running too long.

They found the forest very thick on this side, and it looked dark and gloomy. After the Lion had rested they started along the road of yellow brick, silently wondering, each in his own mind, if ever they would come to the end of the woods and reach the bright sunshine again. To add to their discomfort, they soon heard strange noises in the depths of the forest, and the Lion whispered to them that it was in this part of the country that the Kalidahs lived.

“What are the Kalidahs?” asked the girl.

“They are monstrous beasts with bodies like bears and heads like tigers,” replied the Lion, “and with claws so long and sharp that they could tear me in two as easily as I could kill Toto. I’m terribly afraid of the Kalidahs.”

“I’m not surprised that you are,” returned Dorothy. “They must be dreadful beasts.”

The Lion was about to reply when suddenly they came to another gulf across the road. But this one was so broad and deep that the Lion knew at once he could not leap across it.

So they sat down to consider what they should do, and after serious thought the Scarecrow said:

“Here is a great tree, standing close to the ditch. If the Tin Woodman can chop it down, so that it will fall to the other side, we can walk across it easily.”

“That is a first-rate idea,” said the Lion. “One would almost suspect you had brains in your head, instead of straw.”

The Woodman set to work at once, and so sharp was his axe that the tree was soon chopped nearly through. Then the Lion put his strong front legs against the tree and pushed with all his might, and slowly the big tree tipped and fell with a crash across the ditch, with its top branches on the other side.

They had just started to cross this queer bridge when a sharp growl made them all look up, and to their horror they saw running toward them two great beasts with bodies like bears and heads like tigers.

“They are the Kalidahs!” said the Cowardly Lion, beginning to tremble.

“Quick!” cried the Scarecrow. “Let us cross over.”

So Dorothy went first, holding Toto in her arms, the Tin Woodman followed, and the Scarecrow came next. The Lion, although he was certainly afraid, turned to face the Kalidahs, and then he gave so loud and terrible a roar that Dorothy screamed and the Scarecrow fell over backward, while even the fierce beasts stopped short and looked at him in surprise.

But, seeing they were bigger than the Lion, and remembering that there were two of them and only one of him, the Kalidahs again rushed forward, and the Lion crossed over the tree and turned to see what they would do next. Without stopping an instant the fierce beasts also began to cross the tree. And the Lion said to Dorothy:

“We are lost, for they will surely tear us to pieces with their sharp claws. But stand close behind me, and I will fight them as long as I am alive.”

“Wait a minute!” called the Scarecrow. He had been thinking what was best to be done, and now he asked the Woodman to chop away the end of the tree that rested on their side of the ditch. The Tin Woodman began to use his axe at once, and, just as the two Kalidahs were nearly across, the tree fell with a crash into the gulf, carrying the ugly, snarling brutes with it, and both were dashed to pieces on the sharp rocks at the bottom.

“Well,” said the Cowardly Lion, drawing a long breath of relief, “I see we are going to live a little while longer, and I am glad of it, for it must be a very uncomfortable thing not to be alive. Those creatures frightened me so badly that my heart is beating yet.”

“Ah,” said the Tin Woodman sadly, “I wish I had a heart to beat.”

This adventure made the travelers more anxious than ever to get out of the forest, and they walked so fast that Dorothy became tired, and had to ride on the Lion’s back. To their great joy the trees became thinner the farther they advanced, and in the afternoon they suddenly came upon a broad river, flowing swiftly just before them. On the other side of the water they could see the road of yellow brick running through a beautiful country, with green meadows dotted with bright flowers and all the road bordered with trees hanging full of delicious fruits. They were greatly pleased to see this delightful country before them.

“How shall we cross the river?” asked Dorothy.

“That is easily done,” replied the Scarecrow. “The Tin Woodman must build us a raft, so we can float to the other side.”

So the Woodman took his axe and began to chop down small trees to make a raft, and while he was busy at this the Scarecrow found on the riverbank a tree full of fine fruit. This pleased Dorothy, who had eaten nothing but nuts all day, and she made a hearty meal of the ripe fruit.

But it takes time to make a raft, even when one is as industrious and untiring as the Tin Woodman, and when night came the work was not done. So they found a cozy place under the trees where they slept well until the morning; and Dorothy dreamed of the Emerald City, and of the good Wizard Oz, who would soon send her back to her own home again.

8. The Deadly Poppy Field

Our little party of travelers awakened the next morning refreshed and full of hope, and Dorothy breakfasted like a princess off peaches and plums from the trees beside the river. Behind them was the dark forest they had passed safely through, although they had suffered many discouragements; but before them was a lovely, sunny country that seemed to beckon them on to the Emerald City.

To be sure, the broad river now cut them off from this beautiful land. But the raft was nearly done, and after the Tin Woodman had cut a few more logs and fastened them together with wooden pins, they were ready to start. Dorothy sat down in the middle of the raft and held Toto in her arms. When the Cowardly Lion stepped upon the raft it tipped badly, for he was big and heavy; but the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman stood upon the other end to steady it, and they had long poles in their hands to push the raft through the water.

They got along quite well at first, but when they reached the middle of the river the swift current swept the raft downstream, farther and farther away from the road of yellow brick. And the water grew so deep that the long poles would not touch the bottom.

“This is bad,” said the Tin Woodman, “for if we cannot get to the land we shall be carried into the country of the Wicked Witch of the West, and she will enchant us and make us her slaves.”

“And then I should get no brains,” said the Scarecrow.

“And I should get no courage,” said the Cowardly Lion.

“And I should get no heart,” said the Tin Woodman.

“And I should never get back to Kansas,” said Dorothy.

“We must certainly get to the Emerald City if we can,” the Scarecrow continued, and he pushed so hard on his long pole that it stuck fast in the mud at the bottom of the river. Then, before he could pull it out again–or let go–the raft was swept away, and the poor Scarecrow left clinging to the pole in the middle of the river.

“Good-bye!” he called after them, and they were very sorry to leave him. Indeed, the Tin Woodman began to cry, but fortunately remembered that he might rust, and so dried his tears on Dorothy’s apron.

Of course this was a bad thing for the Scarecrow.

“I am now worse off than when I first met Dorothy,” he thought. “Then, I was stuck on a pole in a cornfield, where I could make-believe scare the crows, at any rate. But surely there is no use for a Scarecrow stuck on a pole in the middle of a river. I am afraid I shall never have any brains, after all!”

Down the stream the raft floated, and the poor Scarecrow was left far behind. Then the Lion said:

“Something must be done to save us. I think I can swim to the shore and pull the raft after me, if you will only hold fast to the tip of my tail.”

So he sprang into the water, and the Tin Woodman caught fast hold of his tail. Then the Lion began to swim with all his might toward the shore. It was hard work, although he was so big; but by and by they were drawn out of the current, and then Dorothy took the Tin Woodman’s long pole and helped push the raft to the land.

They were all tired out when they reached the shore at last and stepped off upon the pretty green grass, and they also knew that the stream had carried them a long way past the road of yellow brick that led to the Emerald City.

“What shall we do now?” asked the Tin Woodman, as the Lion lay down on the grass to let the sun dry him.

“We must get back to the road, in some way,” said Dorothy.

“The best plan will be to walk along the riverbank until we come to the road again,” remarked the Lion.

So, when they were rested, Dorothy picked up her basket and they started along the grassy bank, to the road from which the river had carried them. It was a lovely country, with plenty of flowers and fruit trees and sunshine to cheer them, and had they not felt so sorry for the poor Scarecrow, they could have been very happy.

They walked along as fast as they could, Dorothy only stopping once to pick a beautiful flower; and after a time the Tin Woodman cried out: “Look!”

Then they all looked at the river and saw the Scarecrow perched upon his pole in the middle of the water, looking very lonely and sad.

“What can we do to save him?” asked Dorothy.

The Lion and the Woodman both shook their heads, for they did not know. So they sat down upon the bank and gazed wistfully at the Scarecrow until a Stork flew by, who, upon seeing them, stopped to rest at the water’s edge.

“Who are you and where are you going?” asked the Stork.

“I am Dorothy,” answered the girl, “and these are my friends, the Tin Woodman and the Cowardly Lion; and we are going to the Emerald City.”

“This isn’t the road,” said the Stork, as she twisted her long neck and looked sharply at the queer party.

“I know it,” returned Dorothy, “but we have lost the Scarecrow, and are wondering how we shall get him again.”

“Where is he?” asked the Stork.

“Over there in the river,” answered the little girl.

“If he wasn’t so big and heavy I would get him for you,” remarked the Stork.

“He isn’t heavy a bit,” said Dorothy eagerly, “for he is stuffed with straw; and if you will bring him back to us, we shall thank you ever and ever so much.”

“Well, I’ll try,” said the Stork, “but if I find he is too heavy to carry I shall have to drop him in the river again.”

So the big bird flew into the air and over the water till she came to where the Scarecrow was perched upon his pole. Then the Stork with her great claws grabbed the Scarecrow by the arm and carried him up into the air and back to the bank, where Dorothy and the Lion and the Tin Woodman and Toto were sitting.

When the Scarecrow found himself among his friends again, he was so happy that he hugged them all, even the Lion and Toto; and as they walked along he sang “Tol-de-ri-de-oh!” at every step, he felt so gay.

“I was afraid I should have to stay in the river forever,” he said, “but the kind Stork saved me, and if I ever get any brains I shall find the Stork again and do her some kindness in return.”

“That’s all right,” said the Stork, who was flying along beside them. “I always like to help anyone in trouble. But I must go now, for my babies are waiting in the nest for me. I hope you will find the Emerald City and that Oz will help you.”

“Thank you,” replied Dorothy, and then the kind Stork flew into the air and was soon out of sight.

They walked along listening to the singing of the brightly colored birds and looking at the lovely flowers which now became so thick that the ground was carpeted with them. There were big yellow and white and blue and purple blossoms, besides great clusters of scarlet poppies, which were so brilliant in color they almost dazzled Dorothy’s eyes.

“Aren’t they beautiful?” the girl asked, as she breathed in the spicy scent of the bright flowers.

“I suppose so,” answered the Scarecrow. “When I have brains, I shall probably like them better.”

“If I only had a heart, I should love them,” added the Tin Woodman.

“I always did like flowers,” said the Lion. “They of seem so helpless and frail. But there are none in the forest so bright as these.”

They now came upon more and more of the big scarlet poppies, and fewer and fewer of the other flowers; and soon they found themselves in the midst of a great meadow of poppies. Now it is well known that when there are many of these flowers together their odor is so powerful that anyone who breathes it falls asleep, and if the sleeper is not carried away from the scent of the flowers, he sleeps on and on forever. But Dorothy did not know this, nor could she get away from the bright red flowers that were everywhere about; so presently her eyes grew heavy and she felt she must sit down to rest and to sleep.

But the Tin Woodman would not let her do this.

“We must hurry and get back to the road of yellow brick before dark,” he said; and the Scarecrow agreed with him. So they kept walking until Dorothy could stand no longer. Her eyes closed in spite of herself and she forgot where she was and fell among the poppies, fast asleep.

“What shall we do?” asked the Tin Woodman.

“If we leave her here she will die,” said the Lion. “The smell of the flowers is killing us all. I myself can scarcely keep my eyes open, and the dog is asleep already.”

It was true; Toto had fallen down beside his little mistress. But the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman, not being made of flesh, were not troubled by the scent of the flowers.

“Run fast,” said the Scarecrow to the Lion, “and get out of this deadly flower bed as soon as you can. We will bring the little girl with us, but if you should fall asleep you are too big to be carried.”

So the Lion aroused himself and bounded forward as fast as he could go. In a moment he was out of sight.

“Let us make a chair with our hands and carry her,” said the Scarecrow. So they picked up Toto and put the dog in Dorothy’s lap, and then they made a chair with their hands for the seat and their arms for the arms and carried the sleeping girl between them through the flowers.

On and on they walked, and it seemed that the great carpet of deadly flowers that surrounded them would never end. They followed the bend of the river, and at last came upon their friend the Lion, lying fast asleep among the poppies. The flowers had been too strong for the huge beast and he had given up at last, and fallen only a short distance from the end of the poppy bed, where the sweet grass spread in beautiful green fields before them.

“We can do nothing for him,” said the Tin Woodman, sadly; “for he is much too heavy to lift. We must leave him here to sleep on forever, and perhaps he will dream that he has found courage at last.”

“I’m sorry,” said the Scarecrow. “The Lion was a very good comrade for one so cowardly. But let us go on.”

They carried the sleeping girl to a pretty spot beside the river, far enough from the poppy field to prevent her breathing any more of the poison of the flowers, and here they laid her gently on the soft grass and waited for the fresh breeze to waken her.

9. The Queen of the Field Mice

“We cannot be far from the road of yellow brick, now,” remarked the Scarecrow, as he stood beside the girl, “for we have come nearly as far as the river carried us away.”

The Tin Woodman was about to reply when he heard a low growl, and turning his head (which worked beautifully on hinges) he saw a strange beast come bounding over the grass toward them. It was, indeed, a great yellow Wildcat, and the Woodman thought it must be chasing something, for its ears were lying close to its head and its mouth was wide open, showing two rows of ugly teeth, while its red eyes glowed like balls of fire. As it came nearer the Tin Woodman saw that running before the beast was a little gray field mouse, and although he had no heart he knew it was wrong for the Wildcat to try to kill such a pretty, harmless creature.

So the Woodman raised his axe, and as the Wildcat ran by he gave it a quick blow that cut the beast’s head clean off from its body, and it rolled over at his feet in two pieces.

The field mouse, now that it was freed from its enemy, stopped short; and coming slowly up to the Woodman it said, in a squeaky little voice:

“Oh, thank you! Thank you ever so much for saving my life.”

“Don’t speak of it, I beg of you,” replied the Woodman. “I have no heart, you know, so I am careful to help all those who may need a friend, even if it happens to be only a mouse.”

“Only a mouse!” cried the little animal, indignantly. “Why, I am a Queen–the Queen of all the Field Mice!”

“Oh, indeed,” said the Woodman, making a bow.

“Therefore you have done a great deed, as well as a brave one, in saving my life,” added the Queen.

At that moment several mice were seen running up as fast as their little legs could carry them, and when they saw their Queen they exclaimed:

“Oh, your Majesty, we thought you would be killed! How did you manage to escape the great Wildcat?” They all bowed so low to the little Queen that they almost stood upon their heads.

“This funny tin man,” she answered, “killed the Wildcat and saved my life. So hereafter you must all serve him, and obey his slightest wish.”

“We will!” cried all the mice, in a shrill chorus. And then they scampered in all directions, for Toto had awakened from his sleep, and seeing all these mice around him he gave one bark of delight and jumped right into the middle of the group. Toto had always loved to chase mice when he lived in Kansas, and he saw no harm in it.

But the Tin Woodman caught the dog in his arms and held him tight, while he called to the mice, “Come back! Come back! Toto shall not hurt you.”

At this the Queen of the Mice stuck her head out from underneath a clump of grass and asked, in a timid voice, “Are you sure he will not bite us?”

“I will not let him,” said the Woodman; “so do not be afraid.”

One by one the mice came creeping back, and Toto did not bark again, although he tried to get out of the Woodman’s arms, and would have bitten him had he not known very well he was made of tin. Finally one of the biggest mice spoke.

“Is there anything we can do,” it asked, “to repay you for saving the life of our Queen?”

“Nothing that I know of,” answered the Woodman; but the Scarecrow, who had been trying to think, but could not because his head was stuffed with straw, said, quickly, “Oh, yes; you can save our friend, the Cowardly Lion, who is asleep in the poppy bed.”

“A Lion!” cried the little Queen. “Why, he would eat us all up.”

“Oh, no,” declared the Scarecrow; “this Lion is a coward.”

“Really?” asked the Mouse.

“He says so himself,” answered the Scarecrow, “and he would never hurt anyone who is our friend. If you will help us to save him I promise that he shall treat you all with kindness.”

“Very well,” said the Queen, “we trust you. But what shall we do?”

“Are there many of these mice which call you Queen and are willing to obey you?”

“Oh, yes; there are thousands,” she replied.

“Then send for them all to come here as soon as possible, and let each one bring a long piece of string.”

The Queen turned to the mice that attended her and told them to go at once and get all her people. As soon as they heard her orders they ran away in every direction as fast as possible.

“Now,” said the Scarecrow to the Tin Woodman, “you must go to those trees by the riverside and make a truck that will carry the Lion.”

So the Woodman went at once to the trees and began to work; and he soon made a truck out of the limbs of trees, from which he chopped away all the leaves and branches. He fastened it together with wooden pegs and made the four wheels out of short pieces of a big tree trunk. So fast and so well did he work that by the time the mice began to arrive the truck was all ready for them.

They came from all directions, and there were thousands of them: big mice and little mice and middle-sized mice; and each one brought a piece of string in his mouth. It was about this time that Dorothy woke from her long sleep and opened her eyes. She was greatly astonished to find herself lying upon the grass, with thousands of mice standing around and looking at her timidly. But the Scarecrow told her about everything, and turning to the dignified little Mouse, he said:

“Permit me to introduce to you her Majesty, the Queen.”

Dorothy nodded gravely and the Queen made a curtsy, after which she became quite friendly with the little girl.

The Scarecrow and the Woodman now began to fasten the mice to the truck, using the strings they had brought. One end of a string was tied around the neck of each mouse and the other end to the truck. Of course the truck was a thousand times bigger than any of the mice who were to draw it; but when all the mice had been harnessed, they were able to pull it quite easily. Even the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman could sit on it, and were drawn swiftly by their queer little horses to the place where the Lion lay asleep.

After a great deal of hard work, for the Lion was heavy, they managed to get him up on the truck. Then the Queen hurriedly gave her people the order to start, for she feared if the mice stayed among the poppies too long they also would fall asleep.

At first the little creatures, many though they were, could hardly stir the heavily loaded truck; but the Woodman and the Scarecrow both pushed from behind, and they got along better. Soon they rolled the Lion out of the poppy bed to the green fields, where he could breathe the sweet, fresh air again, instead of the poisonous scent of the flowers.

Dorothy came to meet them and thanked the little mice warmly for saving her companion from death. She had grown so fond of the big Lion she was glad he had been rescued.

Then the mice were unharnessed from the truck and scampered away through the grass to their homes. The Queen of the Mice was the last to leave.

“If ever you need us again,” she said, “come out into the field and call, and we shall hear you and come to your assistance. Good-bye!”

“Good-bye!” they all answered, and away the Queen ran, while Dorothy held Toto tightly lest he should run after her and frighten her.

After this they sat down beside the Lion until he should awaken; and the Scarecrow brought Dorothy some fruit from a tree near by, which she ate for her dinner.

10. The Guardian of the Gate

It was some time before the Cowardly Lion awakened, for he had lain among the poppies a long while, breathing in their deadly fragrance; but when he did open his eyes and roll off the truck he was very glad to find himself still alive.

“I ran as fast as I could,” he said, sitting down and yawning, “but the flowers were too strong for me. How did you get me out?”

Then they told him of the field mice, and how they had generously saved him from death; and the Cowardly Lion laughed, and said:

“I have always thought myself very big and terrible; yet such little things as flowers came near to killing me, and such small animals as mice have saved my life. How strange it all is! But, comrades, what shall we do now?”

“We must journey on until we find the road of yellow brick again,” said Dorothy, “and then we can keep on to the Emerald City.”

So, the Lion being fully refreshed, and feeling quite himself again, they all started upon the journey, greatly enjoying the walk through the soft, fresh grass; and it was not long before they reached the road of yellow brick and turned again toward the Emerald City where the Great Oz dwelt.

The road was smooth and well paved, now, and the country about was beautiful, so that the travelers rejoiced in leaving the forest far behind, and with it the many dangers they had met in its gloomy shades. Once more they could see fences built beside the road; but these were painted green, and when they came to a small house, in which a farmer evidently lived, that also was painted green. They passed by several of these houses during the afternoon, and sometimes people came to the doors and looked at them as if they would like to ask questions; but no one came near them nor spoke to them because of the great Lion, of which they were very much afraid. The people were all dressed in clothing of a lovely emerald-green color and wore peaked hats like those of the Munchkins.

“This must be the Land of Oz,” said Dorothy, “and we are surely getting near the Emerald City.”

“Yes,” answered the Scarecrow. “Everything is green here, while in the country of the Munchkins blue was the favorite color. But the people do not seem to be as friendly as the Munchkins, and I’m afraid we shall be unable to find a place to pass the night.”

“I should like something to eat besides fruit,” said the girl, “and I’m sure Toto is nearly starved. Let us stop at the next house and talk to the people.”

So, when they came to a good-sized farmhouse, Dorothy walked boldly up to the door and knocked.

A woman opened it just far enough to look out, and said, “What do you want, child, and why is that great Lion with you?”

“We wish to pass the night with you, if you will allow us,” answered Dorothy; “and the Lion is my friend and comrade, and would not hurt you for the world.”

“Is he tame?” asked the woman, opening the door a little wider.

“Oh, yes,” said the girl, “and he is a great coward, too. He will be more afraid of you than you are of him.”

“Well,” said the woman, after thinking it over and taking another peep at the Lion, “if that is the case you may come in, and I will give you some supper and a place to sleep.”

So they all entered the house, where there were, besides the woman, two children and a man. The man had hurt his leg, and was lying on the couch in a corner. They seemed greatly surprised to see so strange a company, and while the woman was busy laying the table the man asked:

“Where are you all going?”

“To the Emerald City,” said Dorothy, “to see the Great Oz.”

“Oh, indeed!” exclaimed the man. “Are you sure that Oz will see you?”

“Why not?” she replied.

“Why, it is said that he never lets anyone come into his presence. I have been to the Emerald City many times, and it is a beautiful and wonderful place; but I have never been permitted to see the Great Oz, nor do I know of any living person who has seen him.”

“Does he never go out?” asked the Scarecrow.

“Never. He sits day after day in the great Throne Room of his Palace, and even those who wait upon him do not see him face to face.”

“What is he like?” asked the girl.

“That is hard to tell,” said the man thoughtfully. “You see, Oz is a Great Wizard, and can take on any form he wishes. So that some say he looks like a bird; and some say he looks like an elephant; and some say he looks like a cat. To others he appears as a beautiful fairy, or a brownie, or in any other form that pleases him. But who the real Oz is, when he is in his own form, no living person can tell.”

“That is very strange,” said Dorothy, “but we must try, in some way, to see him, or we shall have made our journey for nothing.”

“Why do you wish to see the terrible Oz?” asked the man.

“I want him to give me some brains,” said the Scarecrow eagerly.

“Oh, Oz could do that easily enough,” declared the man. “He has more brains than he needs.”

“And I want him to give me a heart,” said the Tin Woodman.

“That will not trouble him,” continued the man, “for Oz has a large collection of hearts, of all sizes and shapes.”

“And I want him to give me courage,” said the Cowardly Lion.

“Oz keeps a great pot of courage in his Throne Room,” said the man, “which he has covered with a golden plate, to keep it from running over. He will be glad to give you some.”

“And I want him to send me back to Kansas,” said Dorothy.

“Where is Kansas?” asked the man, with surprise.

“I don’t know,” replied Dorothy sorrowfully, “but it is my home, and I’m sure it’s somewhere.”

“Very likely. Well, Oz can do anything; so I suppose he will find Kansas for you. But first you must get to see him, and that will be a hard task; for the Great Wizard does not like to see anyone, and he usually has his own way. But what do YOU want?” he continued, speaking to Toto. Toto only wagged his tail; for, strange to say, he could not speak.

The woman now called to them that supper was ready, so they gathered around the table and Dorothy ate some delicious porridge and a dish of scrambled eggs and a plate of nice white bread, and enjoyed her meal. The Lion ate some of the porridge, but did not care for it, saying it was made from oats and oats were food for horses, not for lions. The Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman ate nothing at all. Toto ate a little of everything, and was glad to get a good supper again.

The woman now gave Dorothy a bed to sleep in, and Toto lay down beside her, while the Lion guarded the door of her room so she might not be disturbed. The Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman stood up in a corner and kept quiet all night, although of course they could not sleep.

The next morning, as soon as the sun was up, they started on their way, and soon saw a beautiful green glow in the sky just before them.

“That must be the Emerald City,” said Dorothy.

As they walked on, the green glow became brighter and brighter, and it seemed that at last they were nearing the end of their travels. Yet it was afternoon before they came to the great wall that surrounded the City. It was high and thick and of a bright green color.

In front of them, and at the end of the road of yellow brick, was a big gate, all studded with emeralds that glittered so in the sun that even the painted eyes of the Scarecrow were dazzled by their brilliancy.

There was a bell beside the gate, and Dorothy pushed the button and heard a silvery tinkle sound within. Then the big gate swung slowly open, and they all passed through and found themselves in a high arched room, the walls of which glistened with countless emeralds.

Before them stood a little man about the same size as the Munchkins. He was clothed all in green, from his head to his feet, and even his skin was of a greenish tint. At his side was a large green box.

When he saw Dorothy and her companions the man asked, “What do you wish in the Emerald City?”

“We came here to see the Great Oz,” said Dorothy.

The man was so surprised at this answer that he sat down to think it over.

“It has been many years since anyone asked me to see Oz,” he said, shaking his head in perplexity. “He is powerful and terrible, and if you come on an idle or foolish errand to bother the wise reflections of the Great Wizard, he might be angry and destroy you all in an instant.”

“But it is not a foolish errand, nor an idle one,” replied the Scarecrow; “it is important. And we have been told that Oz is a good Wizard.”

“So he is,” said the green man, “and he rules the Emerald City wisely and well. But to those who are not honest, or who approach him from curiosity, he is most terrible, and few have ever dared ask to see his face. I am the Guardian of the Gates, and since you demand to see the Great Oz I must take you to his Palace. But first you must put on the spectacles.”

“Why?” asked Dorothy.

“Because if you did not wear spectacles the brightness and glory of the Emerald City would blind you. Even those who live in the City must wear spectacles night and day. They are all locked on, for Oz so ordered it when the City was first built, and I have the only key that will unlock them.”

He opened the big box, and Dorothy saw that it was filled with spectacles of every size and shape. All of them had green glasses in them. The Guardian of the Gates found a pair that would just fit Dorothy and put them over her eyes. There were two golden bands fastened to them that passed around the back of her head, where they were locked together by a little key that was at the end of a chain the Guardian of the Gates wore around his neck. When they were on, Dorothy could not take them off had she wished, but of course she did not wish to be blinded by the glare of the Emerald City, so she said nothing.

Then the green man fitted spectacles for the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman and the Lion, and even on little Toto; and all were locked fast with the key.

Then the Guardian of the Gates put on his own glasses and told them he was ready to show them to the Palace. Taking a big golden key from a peg on the wall, he opened another gate, and they all followed him through the portal into the streets of the Emerald City.

11. The Wonderful City of Oz

Even with eyes protected by the green spectacles, Dorothy and her friends were at first dazzled by the brilliancy of the wonderful City. The streets were lined with beautiful houses all built of green marble and studded everywhere with sparkling emeralds. They walked over a pavement of the same green marble, and where the blocks were joined together were rows of emeralds, set closely, and glittering in the brightness of the sun. The window panes were of green glass; even the sky above the City had a green tint, and the rays of the sun were green.

There were many people–men, women, and children–walking about, and these were all dressed in green clothes and had greenish skins. They looked at Dorothy and her strangely assorted company with wondering eyes, and the children all ran away and hid behind their mothers when they saw the Lion; but no one spoke to them. Many shops stood in the street, and Dorothy saw that everything in them was green. Green candy and green pop corn were offered for sale, as well as green shoes, green hats, and green clothes of all sorts. At one place a man was selling green lemonade, and when the children bought it Dorothy could see that they paid for it with green pennies.

There seemed to be no horses nor animals of any kind; the men carried things around in little green carts, which they pushed before them. Everyone seemed happy and contented and prosperous.

The Guardian of the Gates led them through the streets until they came to a big building, exactly in the middle of the City, which was the Palace of Oz, the Great Wizard. There was a soldier before the door, dressed in a green uniform and wearing a long green beard.

“Here are strangers,” said the Guardian of the Gates to him, “and they demand to see the Great Oz.”

“Step inside,” answered the soldier, “and I will carry your message to him.”

So they passed through the Palace Gates and were led into a big room with a green carpet and lovely green furniture set with emeralds. The soldier made them all wipe their feet upon a green mat before entering this room, and when they were seated he said politely:

“Please make yourselves comfortable while I go to the door of the Throne Room and tell Oz you are here.”

They had to wait a long time before the soldier returned. When, at last, he came back, Dorothy asked:

“Have you seen Oz?”

“Oh, no,” returned the soldier; “I have never seen him. But I spoke to him as he sat behind his screen and gave him your message. He said he will grant you an audience, if you so desire; but each one of you must enter his presence alone, and he will admit but one each day. Therefore, as you must remain in the Palace for several days, I will have you shown to rooms where you may rest in comfort after your journey.”

“Thank you,” replied the girl; “that is very kind of Oz.”

The soldier now blew upon a green whistle, and at once a young girl, dressed in a pretty green silk gown, entered the room. She had lovely green hair and green eyes, and she bowed low before Dorothy as she said, “Follow me and I will show you your room.”

So Dorothy said good-bye to all her friends except Toto, and taking the dog in her arms followed the green girl through seven passages and up three flights of stairs until they came to a room at the front of the Palace. It was the sweetest little room in the world, with a soft comfortable bed that had sheets of green silk and a green velvet counterpane. There was a tiny fountain in the middle of the room, that shot a spray of green perfume into the air, to fall back into a beautifully carved green marble basin. Beautiful green flowers stood in the windows, and there was a shelf with a row of little green books. When Dorothy had time to open these books she found them full of queer green pictures that made her laugh, they were so funny.

In a wardrobe were many green dresses, made of silk and satin and velvet; and all of them fitted Dorothy exactly.

“Make yourself perfectly at home,” said the green girl, “and if you wish for anything ring the bell. Oz will send for you tomorrow morning.”

She left Dorothy alone and went back to the others. These she also led to rooms, and each one of them found himself lodged in a very pleasant part of the Palace. Of course this politeness was wasted on the Scarecrow; for when he found himself alone in his room he stood stupidly in one spot, just within the doorway, to wait till morning. It would not rest him to lie down, and he could not close his eyes; so he remained all night staring at a little spider which was weaving its web in a corner of the room, just as if it were not one of the most wonderful rooms in the world. The Tin Woodman lay down on his bed from force of habit, for he remembered when he was made of flesh; but not being able to sleep, he passed the night moving his joints up and down to make sure they kept in good working order. The Lion would have preferred a bed of dried leaves in the forest, and did not like being shut up in a room; but he had too much sense to let this worry him, so he sprang upon the bed and rolled himself up like a cat and purred himself asleep in a minute.

The next morning, after breakfast, the green maiden came to fetch Dorothy, and she dressed her in one of the prettiest gowns, made of green brocaded satin. Dorothy put on a green silk apron and tied a green ribbon around Toto’s neck, and they started for the Throne Room of the Great Oz.

First they came to a great hall in which were many ladies and gentlemen of the court, all dressed in rich costumes. These people had nothing to do but talk to each other, but they always came to wait outside the Throne Room every morning, although they were never permitted to see Oz. As Dorothy entered they looked at her curiously, and one of them whispered:

“Are you really going to look upon the face of Oz the Terrible?”

“Of course,” answered the girl, “if he will see me.”

“Oh, he will see you,” said the soldier who had taken her message to the Wizard, “although he does not like to have people ask to see him. Indeed, at first he was angry and said I should send you back where you came from. Then he asked me what you looked like, and when I mentioned your silver shoes he was very much interested. At last I told him about the mark upon your forehead, and he decided he would admit you to his presence.”

Just then a bell rang, and the green girl said to Dorothy, “That is the signal. You must go into the Throne Room alone.”

She opened a little door and Dorothy walked boldly through and found herself in a wonderful place. It was a big, round room with a high arched roof, and the walls and ceiling and floor were covered with large emeralds set closely together. In the center of the roof was a great light, as bright as the sun, which made the emeralds sparkle in a wonderful manner.

But what interested Dorothy most was the big throne of green marble that stood in the middle of the room. It was shaped like a chair and sparkled with gems, as did everything else. In the center of the chair was an enormous Head, without a body to support it or any arms or legs whatever. There was no hair upon this head, but it had eyes and a nose and mouth, and was much bigger than the head of the biggest giant.

As Dorothy gazed upon this in wonder and fear, the eyes turned slowly and looked at her sharply and steadily. Then the mouth moved, and Dorothy heard a voice say:

“I am Oz, the Great and Terrible. Who are you, and why do you seek me?”

It was not such an awful voice as she had expected to come from the big Head; so she took courage and answered:

“I am Dorothy, the Small and Meek. I have come to you for help.”

The eyes looked at her thoughtfully for a full minute. Then said the voice:

“Where did you get the silver shoes?”

“I got them from the Wicked Witch of the East, when my house fell on her and killed her,” she replied.

“Where did you get the mark upon your forehead?” continued the voice.

“That is where the Good Witch of the North kissed me when she bade me good-bye and sent me to you,” said the girl.

Again the eyes looked at her sharply, and they saw she was telling the truth. Then Oz asked, “What do you wish me to do?”

“Send me back to Kansas, where my Aunt Em and Uncle Henry are,” she answered earnestly. “I don’t like your country, although it is so beautiful. And I am sure Aunt Em will be dreadfully worried over my being away so long.”

The eyes winked three times, and then they turned up to the ceiling and down to the floor and rolled around so queerly that they seemed to see every part of the room. And at last they looked at Dorothy again.

“Why should I do this for you?” asked Oz.

“Because you are strong and I am weak; because you are a Great Wizard and I am only a little girl.”

“But you were strong enough to kill the Wicked Witch of the East,” said Oz.

“That just happened,” returned Dorothy simply; “I could not help it.”

“Well,” said the Head, “I will give you my answer. You have no right to expect me to send you back to Kansas unless you do something for me in return. In this country everyone must pay for everything he gets. If you wish me to use my magic power to send you home again you must do something for me first. Help me and I will help you.”

“What must I do?” asked the girl.

“Kill the Wicked Witch of the West,” answered Oz.

“But I cannot!” exclaimed Dorothy, greatly surprised.

“You killed the Witch of the East and you wear the silver shoes, which bear a powerful charm. There is now but one Wicked Witch left in all this land, and when you can tell me she is dead I will send you back to Kansas–but not before.”

The little girl began to weep, she was so much disappointed; and the eyes winked again and looked upon her anxiously, as if the Great Oz felt that she could help him if she would.

“I never killed anything, willingly,” she sobbed. “Even if I wanted to, how could I kill the Wicked Witch? If you, who are Great and Terrible, cannot kill her yourself, how do you expect me to do it?”

“I do not know,” said the Head; “but that is my answer, and until the Wicked Witch dies you will not see your uncle and aunt again. Remember that the Witch is Wicked–tremendously Wicked–and ought to be killed. Now go, and do not ask to see me again until you have done your task.”

Sorrowfully Dorothy left the Throne Room and went back where the Lion and the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman were waiting to hear what Oz had said to her. “There is no hope for me,” she said sadly, “for Oz will not send me home until I have killed the Wicked Witch of the West; and that I can never do.”

Her friends were sorry, but could do nothing to help her; so Dorothy went to her own room and lay down on the bed and cried herself to sleep.

The next morning the soldier with the green whiskers came to the Scarecrow and said:

“Come with me, for Oz has sent for you.”

So the Scarecrow followed him and was admitted into the great Throne Room, where he saw, sitting in the emerald throne, a most lovely Lady. She was dressed in green silk gauze and wore upon her flowing green locks a crown of jewels. Growing from her shoulders were wings, gorgeous in color and so light that they fluttered if the slightest breath of air reached them.

When the Scarecrow had bowed, as prettily as his straw stuffing would let him, before this beautiful creature, she looked upon him sweetly, and said:

“I am Oz, the Great and Terrible. Who are you, and why do you seek me?”

Now the Scarecrow, who had expected to see the great Head Dorothy had told him of, was much astonished; but he answered her bravely.

“I am only a Scarecrow, stuffed with straw. Therefore I have no brains, and I come to you praying that you will put brains in my head instead of straw, so that I may become as much a man as any other in your dominions.”

“Why should I do this for you?” asked the Lady.

“Because you are wise and powerful, and no one else can help me,” answered the Scarecrow.

“I never grant favors without some return,” said Oz; “but this much I will promise. If you will kill for me the Wicked Witch of the West, I will bestow upon you a great many brains, and such good brains that you will be the wisest man in all the Land of Oz.”

“I thought you asked Dorothy to kill the Witch,” said the Scarecrow, in surprise.

“So I did. I don’t care who kills her. But until she is dead I will not grant your wish. Now go, and do not seek me again until you have earned the brains you so greatly desire.”

The Scarecrow went sorrowfully back to his friends and told them what Oz had said; and Dorothy was surprised to find that the Great Wizard was not a Head, as she had seen him, but a lovely Lady.

“All the same,” said the Scarecrow, “she needs a heart as much as the Tin Woodman.”

On the next morning the soldier with the green whiskers came to the Tin Woodman and said:

“Oz has sent for you. Follow me.”

So the Tin Woodman followed him and came to the great Throne Room. He did not know whether he would find Oz a lovely Lady or a Head, but he hoped it would be the lovely Lady. “For,” he said to himself, “if it is the head, I am sure I shall not be given a heart, since a head has no heart of its own and therefore cannot feel for me. But if it is the lovely Lady I shall beg hard for a heart, for all ladies are themselves said to be kindly hearted.”

But when the Woodman entered the great Throne Room he saw neither the Head nor the Lady, for Oz had taken the shape of a most terrible Beast. It was nearly as big as an elephant, and the green throne seemed hardly strong enough to hold its weight. The Beast had a head like that of a rhinoceros, only there were five eyes in its face. There were five long arms growing out of its body, and it also had five long, slim legs. Thick, woolly hair covered every part of it, and a more dreadful-looking monster could not be imagined. It was fortunate the Tin Woodman had no heart at that moment, for it would have beat loud and fast from terror. But being only tin, the Woodman was not at all afraid, although he was much disappointed.

“I am Oz, the Great and Terrible,” spoke the Beast, in a voice that was one great roar. “Who are you, and why do you seek me?”

“I am a Woodman, and made of tin. Therefore I have no heart, and cannot love. I pray you to give me a heart that I may be as other men are.”

“Why should I do this?” demanded the Beast.

“Because I ask it, and you alone can grant my request,” answered the Woodman.

Oz gave a low growl at this, but said, gruffly: “If you indeed desire a heart, you must earn it.”

“How?” asked the Woodman.

“Help Dorothy to kill the Wicked Witch of the West,” replied the Beast. “When the Witch is dead, come to me, and I will then give you the biggest and kindest and most loving heart in all the Land of Oz.”

So the Tin Woodman was forced to return sorrowfully to his friends and tell them of the terrible Beast he had seen. They all wondered greatly at the many forms the Great Wizard could take upon himself, and the Lion said:

“If he is a Beast when I go to see him, I shall roar my loudest, and so frighten him that he will grant all I ask. And if he is the lovely Lady, I shall pretend to spring upon her, and so compel her to do my bidding. And if he is the great Head, he will be at my mercy; for I will roll this head all about the room until he promises to give us what we desire. So be of good cheer, my friends, for all will yet be well.”

The next morning the soldier with the green whiskers led the Lion to the great Throne Room and bade him enter the presence of Oz.

The Lion at once passed through the door, and glancing around saw, to his surprise, that before the throne was a Ball of Fire, so fierce and glowing he could scarcely bear to gaze upon it. His first thought was that Oz had by accident caught on fire and was burning up; but when he tried to go nearer, the heat was so intense that it singed his whiskers, and he crept back tremblingly to a spot nearer the door.

Then a low, quiet voice came from the Ball of Fire, and these were the words it spoke:

“I am Oz, the Great and Terrible. Who are you, and why do you seek me?”

And the Lion answered, “I am a Cowardly Lion, afraid of everything. I came to you to beg that you give me courage, so that in reality I may become the King of Beasts, as men call me.”

“Why should I give you courage?” demanded Oz.

“Because of all Wizards you are the greatest, and alone have power to grant my request,” answered the Lion.

The Ball of Fire burned fiercely for a time, and the voice said, “Bring me proof that the Wicked Witch is dead, and that moment I will give you courage. But as long as the Witch lives, you must remain a coward.”

The Lion was angry at this speech, but could say nothing in reply, and while he stood silently gazing at the Ball of Fire it became so furiously hot that he turned tail and rushed from the room. He was glad to find his friends waiting for him, and told them of his terrible interview with the Wizard.

“What shall we do now?” asked Dorothy sadly.

“There is only one thing we can do,” returned the Lion, “and that is to go to the land of the Winkies, seek out the Wicked Witch, and destroy her.”

“But suppose we cannot?” said the girl.

“Then I shall never have courage,” declared the Lion.

“And I shall never have brains,” added the Scarecrow.

“And I shall never have a heart,” spoke the Tin Woodman.

“And I shall never see Aunt Em and Uncle Henry,” said Dorothy, beginning to cry.

“Be careful!” cried the green girl. “The tears will fall on your green silk gown and spot it.”

So Dorothy dried her eyes and said, “I suppose we must try it; but I am sure I do not want to kill anybody, even to see Aunt Em again.”

“I will go with you; but I’m too much of a coward to kill the Witch,” said the Lion.

“I will go too,” declared the Scarecrow; “but I shall not be of much help to you, I am such a fool.”

“I haven’t the heart to harm even a Witch,” remarked the Tin Woodman; “but if you go I certainly shall go with you.”

Therefore it was decided to start upon their journey the next morning, and the Woodman sharpened his axe on a green grindstone and had all his joints properly oiled. The Scarecrow stuffed himself with fresh straw and Dorothy put new paint on his eyes that he might see better. The green girl, who was very kind to them, filled Dorothy’s basket with good things to eat, and fastened a little bell around Toto’s neck with a green ribbon.

They went to bed quite early and slept soundly until daylight, when they were awakened by the crowing of a green cock that lived in the back yard of the Palace, and the cackling of a hen that had laid a green egg.

12. The Search for the Wicked Witch

The soldier with the green whiskers led them through the streets of the Emerald City until they reached the room where the Guardian of the Gates lived. This officer unlocked their spectacles to put them back in his great box, and then he politely opened the gate for our friends.

“Which road leads to the Wicked Witch of the West?” asked Dorothy.

“There is no road,” answered the Guardian of the Gates. “No one ever wishes to go that way.”

“How, then, are we to find her?” inquired the girl.

“That will be easy,” replied the man, “for when she knows you are in the country of the Winkies she will find you, and make you all her slaves.”

“Perhaps not,” said the Scarecrow, “for we mean to destroy her.”

“Oh, that is different,” said the Guardian of the Gates. “No one has ever destroyed her before, so I naturally thought she would make slaves of you, as she has of the rest. But take care; for she is wicked and fierce, and may not allow you to destroy her. Keep to the West, where the sun sets, and you cannot fail to find her.”

They thanked him and bade him good-bye, and turned toward the West, walking over fields of soft grass dotted here and there with daisies and buttercups. Dorothy still wore the pretty silk dress she had put on in the palace, but now, to her surprise, she found it was no longer green, but pure white. The ribbon around Toto’s neck had also lost its green color and was as white as Dorothy’s dress.

The Emerald City was soon left far behind. As they advanced the ground became rougher and hillier, for there were no farms nor houses in this country of the West, and the ground was untilled.

In the afternoon the sun shone hot in their faces, for there were no trees to offer them shade; so that before night Dorothy and Toto and the Lion were tired, and lay down upon the grass and fell asleep, with the Woodman and the Scarecrow keeping watch.

Now the Wicked Witch of the West had but one eye, yet that was as powerful as a telescope, and could see everywhere. So, as she sat in the door of her castle, she happened to look around and saw Dorothy lying asleep, with her friends all about her. They were a long distance off, but the Wicked Witch was angry to find them in her country; so she blew upon a silver whistle that hung around her neck.

At once there came running to her from all directions a pack of great wolves. They had long legs and fierce eyes and sharp teeth.

“Go to those people,” said the Witch, “and tear them to pieces.”

“Are you not going to make them your slaves?” asked the leader of the wolves.

“No,” she answered, “one is of tin, and one of straw; one is a girl and another a Lion. None of them is fit to work, so you may tear them into small pieces.”

“Very well,” said the wolf, and he dashed away at full speed, followed by the others.

It was lucky the Scarecrow and the Woodman were wide awake and heard the wolves coming.

“This is my fight,” said the Woodman, “so get behind me and I will meet them as they come.”

He seized his axe, which he had made very sharp, and as the leader of the wolves came on the Tin Woodman swung his arm and chopped the wolf’s head from its body, so that it immediately died. As soon as he could raise his axe another wolf came up, and he also fell under the sharp edge of the Tin Woodman’s weapon. There were forty wolves, and forty times a wolf was killed, so that at last they all lay dead in a heap before the Woodman.

Then he put down his axe and sat beside the Scarecrow, who said, “It was a good fight, friend.”

They waited until Dorothy awoke the next morning. The little girl was quite frightened when she saw the great pile of shaggy wolves, but the Tin Woodman told her all. She thanked him for saving them and sat down to breakfast, after which they started again upon their journey.

Now this same morning the Wicked Witch came to the door of her castle and looked out with her one eye that could see far off. She saw all her wolves lying dead, and the strangers still traveling through her country. This made her angrier than before, and she blew her silver whistle twice.

Straightway a great flock of wild crows came flying toward her, enough to darken the sky.

And the Wicked Witch said to the King Crow, “Fly at once to the strangers; peck out their eyes and tear them to pieces.”

The wild crows flew in one great flock toward Dorothy and her companions. When the little girl saw them coming she was afraid.

But the Scarecrow said, “This is my battle, so lie down beside me and you will not be harmed.”

So they all lay upon the ground except the Scarecrow, and he stood up and stretched out his arms. And when the crows saw him they were frightened, as these birds always are by scarecrows, and did not dare to come any nearer. But the King Crow said:

“It is only a stuffed man. I will peck his eyes out.”

The King Crow flew at the Scarecrow, who caught it by the head and twisted its neck until it died. And then another crow flew at him, and the Scarecrow twisted its neck also. There were forty crows, and forty times the Scarecrow twisted a neck, until at last all were lying dead beside him. Then he called to his companions to rise, and again they went upon their journey.

When the Wicked Witch looked out again and saw all her crows lying in a heap, she got into a terrible rage, and blew three times upon her silver whistle.

Forthwith there was heard a great buzzing in the air, and a swarm of black bees came flying toward her.

“Go to the strangers and sting them to death!” commanded the Witch, and the bees turned and flew rapidly until they came to where Dorothy and her friends were walking. But the Woodman had seen them coming, and the Scarecrow had decided what to do.

“Take out my straw and scatter it over the little girl and the dog and the Lion,” he said to the Woodman, “and the bees cannot sting them.” This the Woodman did, and as Dorothy lay close beside the Lion and held Toto in her arms, the straw covered them entirely.

The bees came and found no one but the Woodman to sting, so they flew at him and broke off all their stings against the tin, without hurting the Woodman at all. And as bees cannot live when their stings are broken that was the end of the black bees, and they lay scattered thick about the Woodman, like little heaps of fine coal.

Then Dorothy and the Lion got up, and the girl helped the Tin Woodman put the straw back into the Scarecrow again, until he was as good as ever. So they started upon their journey once more.

The Wicked Witch was so angry when she saw her black bees in little heaps like fine coal that she stamped her foot and tore her hair and gnashed her teeth. And then she called a dozen of her slaves, who were the Winkies, and gave them sharp spears, telling them to go to the strangers and destroy them.

The Winkies were not a brave people, but they had to do as they were told. So they marched away until they came near to Dorothy. Then the Lion gave a great roar and sprang towards them, and the poor Winkies were so frightened that they ran back as fast as they could.

When they returned to the castle the Wicked Witch beat them well with a strap, and sent them back to their work, after which she sat down to think what she should do next. She could not understand how all her plans to destroy these strangers had failed; but she was a powerful Witch, as well as a wicked one, and she soon made up her mind how to act.

There was, in her cupboard, a Golden Cap, with a circle of diamonds and rubies running round it. This Golden Cap had a charm. Whoever owned it could call three times upon the Winged Monkeys, who would obey any order they were given. But no person could command these strange creatures more than three times. Twice already the Wicked Witch had used the charm of the Cap. Once was when she had made the Winkies her slaves, and set herself to rule over their country. The Winged Monkeys had helped her do this. The second time was when she had fought against the Great Oz himself, and driven him out of the land of the West. The Winged Monkeys had also helped her in doing this. Only once more could she use this Golden Cap, for which reason she did not like to do so until all her other powers were exhausted. But now that her fierce wolves and her wild crows and her stinging bees were gone, and her slaves had been scared away by the Cowardly Lion, she saw there was only one way left to destroy Dorothy and her friends.

So the Wicked Witch took the Golden Cap from her cupboard and placed it upon her head. Then she stood upon her left foot and said slowly:

“Ep-pe, pep-pe, kak-ke!”

Next she stood upon her right foot and said:

“Hil-lo, hol-lo, hel-lo!”

After this she stood upon both feet and cried in a loud voice:

“Ziz-zy, zuz-zy, zik!”

Now the charm began to work. The sky was darkened, and a low rumbling sound was heard in the air. There was a rushing of many wings, a great chattering and laughing, and the sun came out of the dark sky to show the Wicked Witch surrounded by a crowd of monkeys, each with a pair of immense and powerful wings on his shoulders.

One, much bigger than the others, seemed to be their leader. He flew close to the Witch and said, “You have called us for the third and last time. What do you command?”

“Go to the strangers who are within my land and destroy them all except the Lion,” said the Wicked Witch. “Bring that beast to me, for I have a mind to harness him like a horse, and make him work.”

“Your commands shall be obeyed,” said the leader. Then, with a great deal of chattering and noise, the Winged Monkeys flew away to the place where Dorothy and her friends were walking.

Some of the Monkeys seized the Tin Woodman and carried him through the air until they were over a country thickly covered with sharp rocks. Here they dropped the poor Woodman, who fell a great distance to the rocks, where he lay so battered and dented that he could neither move nor groan.

Others of the Monkeys caught the Scarecrow, and with their long fingers pulled all of the straw out of his clothes and head. They made his hat and boots and clothes into a small bundle and threw it into the top branches of a tall tree.

The remaining Monkeys threw pieces of stout rope around the Lion and wound many coils about his body and head and legs, until he was unable to bite or scratch or struggle in any way. Then they lifted him up and flew away with him to the Witch’s castle, where he was placed in a small yard with a high iron fence around it, so that he could not escape.

But Dorothy they did not harm at all. She stood, with Toto in her arms, watching the sad fate of her comrades and thinking it would soon be her turn. The leader of the Winged Monkeys flew up to her, his long, hairy arms stretched out and his ugly face grinning terribly; but he saw the mark of the Good Witch’s kiss upon her forehead and stopped short, motioning the others not to touch her.

“We dare not harm this little girl,” he said to them, “for she is protected by the Power of Good, and that is greater than the Power of Evil. All we can do is to carry her to the castle of the Wicked Witch and leave her there.”

So, carefully and gently, they lifted Dorothy in their arms and carried her swiftly through the air until they came to the castle, where they set her down upon the front doorstep. Then the leader said to the Witch:

“We have obeyed you as far as we were able. The Tin Woodman and the Scarecrow are destroyed, and the Lion is tied up in your yard. The little girl we dare not harm, nor the dog she carries in her arms. Your power over our band is now ended, and you will never see us again.”

Then all the Winged Monkeys, with much laughing and chattering and noise, flew into the air and were soon out of sight.

The Wicked Witch was both surprised and worried when she saw the mark on Dorothy’s forehead, for she knew well that neither the Winged Monkeys nor she, herself, dare hurt the girl in any way. She looked down at Dorothy’s feet, and seeing the Silver Shoes, began to tremble with fear, for she knew what a powerful charm belonged to them. At first the Witch was tempted to run away from Dorothy; but she happened to look into the child’s eyes and saw how simple the soul behind them was, and that the little girl did not know of the wonderful power the Silver Shoes gave her. So the Wicked Witch laughed to herself, and thought, “I can still make her my slave, for she does not know how to use her power.” Then she said to Dorothy, harshly and severely:

“Come with me; and see that you mind everything I tell you, for if you do not I will make an end of you, as I did of the Tin Woodman and the Scarecrow.”

Dorothy followed her through many of the beautiful rooms in her castle until they came to the kitchen, where the Witch bade her clean the pots and kettles and sweep the floor and keep the fire fed with wood.

Dorothy went to work meekly, with her mind made up to work as hard as she could; for she was glad the Wicked Witch had decided not to kill her.

With Dorothy hard at work, the Witch thought she would go into the courtyard and harness the Cowardly Lion like a horse; it would amuse her, she was sure, to make him draw her chariot whenever she wished to go to drive. But as she opened the gate the Lion gave a loud roar and bounded at her so fiercely that the Witch was afraid, and ran out and shut the gate again.

“If I cannot harness you,” said the Witch to the Lion, speaking through the bars of the gate, “I can starve you. You shall have nothing to eat until you do as I wish.”

So after that she took no food to the imprisoned Lion; but every day she came to the gate at noon and asked, “Are you ready to be harnessed like a horse?”

And the Lion would answer, “No. If you come in this yard, I will bite you.”

The reason the Lion did not have to do as the Witch wished was that every night, while the woman was asleep, Dorothy carried him food from the cupboard. After he had eaten he would lie down on his bed of straw, and Dorothy would lie beside him and put her head on his soft, shaggy mane, while they talked of their troubles and tried to plan some way to escape. But they could find no way to get out of the castle, for it was constantly guarded by the yellow Winkies, who were the slaves of the Wicked Witch and too afraid of her not to do as she told them.

The girl had to work hard during the day, and often the Witch threatened to beat her with the same old umbrella she always carried in her hand. But, in truth, she did not dare to strike Dorothy, because of the mark upon her forehead. The child did not know this, and was full of fear for herself and Toto. Once the Witch struck Toto a blow with her umbrella and the brave little dog flew at her and bit her leg in return. The Witch did not bleed where she was bitten, for she was so wicked that the blood in her had dried up many years before.

Dorothy’s life became very sad as she grew to understand that it would be harder than ever to get back to Kansas and Aunt Em again. Sometimes she would cry bitterly for hours, with Toto sitting at her feet and looking into her face, whining dismally to show how sorry he was for his little mistress. Toto did not really care whether he was in Kansas or the Land of Oz so long as Dorothy was with him; but he knew the little girl was unhappy, and that made him unhappy too.

Now the Wicked Witch had a great longing to have for her own the Silver Shoes which the girl always wore. Her bees and her crows and her wolves were lying in heaps and drying up, and she had used up all the power of the Golden Cap; but if she could only get hold of the Silver Shoes, they would give her more power than all the other things she had lost. She watched Dorothy carefully, to see if she ever took off her shoes, thinking she might steal them. But the child was so proud of her pretty shoes that she never took them off except at night and when she took her bath. The Witch was too much afraid of the dark to dare go in Dorothy’s room at night to take the shoes, and her dread of water was greater than her fear of the dark, so she never came near when Dorothy was bathing. Indeed, the old Witch never touched water, nor ever let water touch her in any way.

But the wicked creature was very cunning, and she finally thought of a trick that would give her what she wanted. She placed a bar of iron in the middle of the kitchen floor, and then by her magic arts made the iron invisible to human eyes. So that when Dorothy walked across the floor she stumbled over the bar, not being able to see it, and fell at full length. She was not much hurt, but in her fall one of the Silver Shoes came off; and before she could reach it, the Witch had snatched it away and put it on her own skinny foot.

The wicked woman was greatly pleased with the success of her trick, for as long as she had one of the shoes she owned half the power of their charm, and Dorothy could not use it against her, even had she known how to do so.

The little girl, seeing she had lost one of her pretty shoes, grew angry, and said to the Witch, “Give me back my shoe!”

“I will not,” retorted the Witch, “for it is now my shoe, and not yours.”

“You are a wicked creature!” cried Dorothy. “You have no right to take my shoe from me.”

“I shall keep it, just the same,” said the Witch, laughing at her, “and someday I shall get the other one from you, too.”

This made Dorothy so very angry that she picked up the bucket of water that stood near and dashed it over the Witch, wetting her from head to foot.

Instantly the wicked woman gave a loud cry of fear, and then, as Dorothy looked at her in wonder, the Witch began to shrink and fall away.

“See what you have done!” she screamed. “In a minute I shall melt away.”

“I’m very sorry, indeed,” said Dorothy, who was truly frightened to see the Witch actually melting away like brown sugar before her very eyes.

“Didn’t you know water would be the end of me?” asked the Witch, in a wailing, despairing voice.

“Of course not,” answered Dorothy. “How should I?”

“Well, in a few minutes I shall be all melted, and you will have the castle to yourself. I have been wicked in my day, but I never thought a little girl like you would ever be able to melt me and end my wicked deeds. Look out–here I go!”

With these words the Witch fell down in a brown, melted, shapeless mass and began to spread over the clean boards of the kitchen floor. Seeing that she had really melted away to nothing, Dorothy drew another bucket of water and threw it over the mess. She then swept it all out the door. After picking out the silver shoe, which was all that was left of the old woman, she cleaned and dried it with a cloth, and put it on her foot again. Then, being at last free to do as she chose, she ran out to the courtyard to tell the Lion that the Wicked Witch of the West had come to an end, and that they were no longer prisoners in a strange land.

13. The Rescue

The Cowardly Lion was much pleased to hear that the Wicked Witch had been melted by a bucket of water, and Dorothy at once unlocked the gate of his prison and set him free. They went in together to the castle, where Dorothy’s first act was to call all the Winkies together and tell them that they were no longer slaves.

There was great rejoicing among the yellow Winkies, for they had been made to work hard during many years for the Wicked Witch, who had always treated them with great cruelty. They kept this day as a holiday, then and ever after, and spent the time in feasting and dancing.

“If our friends, the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman, were only with us,” said the Lion, “I should be quite happy.”

“Don’t you suppose we could rescue them?” asked the girl anxiously.

“We can try,” answered the Lion.

So they called the yellow Winkies and asked them if they would help to rescue their friends, and the Winkies said that they would be delighted to do all in their power for Dorothy, who had set them free from bondage. So she chose a number of the Winkies who looked as if they knew the most, and they all started away. They traveled that day and part of the next until they came to the rocky plain where the Tin Woodman lay, all battered and bent. His axe was near him, but the blade was rusted and the handle broken off short.

The Winkies lifted him tenderly in their arms, and carried him back to the Yellow Castle again, Dorothy shedding a few tears by the way at the sad plight of her old friend, and the Lion looking sober and sorry. When they reached the castle Dorothy said to the Winkies:

“Are any of your people tinsmiths?”

“Oh, yes. Some of us are very good tinsmiths,” they told her.

“Then bring them to me,” she said. And when the tinsmiths came, bringing with them all their tools in baskets, she inquired, “Can you straighten out those dents in the Tin Woodman, and bend him back into shape again, and solder him together where he is broken?”

The tinsmiths looked the Woodman over carefully and then answered that they thought they could mend him so he would be as good as ever. So they set to work in one of the big yellow rooms of the castle and worked for three days and four nights, hammering and twisting and bending and soldering and polishing and pounding at the legs and body and head of the Tin Woodman, until at last he was straightened out into his old form, and his joints worked as well as ever. To be sure, there were several patches on him, but the tinsmiths did a good job, and as the Woodman was not a vain man he did not mind the patches at all.

When, at last, he walked into Dorothy’s room and thanked her for rescuing him, he was so pleased that he wept tears of joy, and Dorothy had to wipe every tear carefully from his face with her apron, so his joints would not be rusted. At the same time her own tears fell thick and fast at the joy of meeting her old friend again, and these tears did not need to be wiped away. As for the Lion, he wiped his eyes so often with the tip of his tail that it became quite wet, and he was obliged to go out into the courtyard and hold it in the sun till it dried.

“If we only had the Scarecrow with us again,” said the Tin Woodman, when Dorothy had finished telling him everything that had happened, “I should be quite happy.”

“We must try to find him,” said the girl.

So she called the Winkies to help her, and they walked all that day and part of the next until they came to the tall tree in the branches of which the Winged Monkeys had tossed the Scarecrow’s clothes.

It was a very tall tree, and the trunk was so smooth that no one could climb it; but the Woodman said at once, “I’ll chop it down, and then we can get the Scarecrow’s clothes.”

Now while the tinsmiths had been at work mending the Woodman himself, another of the Winkies, who was a goldsmith, had made an axe-handle of solid gold and fitted it to the Woodman’s axe, instead of the old broken handle. Others polished the blade until all the rust was removed and it glistened like burnished silver.

As soon as he had spoken, the Tin Woodman began to chop, and in a short time the tree fell over with a crash, whereupon the Scarecrow’s clothes fell out of the branches and rolled off on the ground.

Dorothy picked them up and had the Winkies carry them back to the castle, where they were stuffed with nice, clean straw; and behold! here was the Scarecrow, as good as ever, thanking them over and over again for saving him.

Now that they were reunited, Dorothy and her friends spent a few happy days at the Yellow Castle, where they found everything they needed to make them comfortable.

But one day the girl thought of Aunt Em, and said, “We must go back to Oz, and claim his promise.”

“Yes,” said the Woodman, “at last I shall get my heart.”

“And I shall get my brains,” added the Scarecrow joyfully.

“And I shall get my courage,” said the Lion thoughtfully.

“And I shall get back to Kansas,” cried Dorothy, clapping her hands. “Oh, let us start for the Emerald City tomorrow!”

This they decided to do. The next day they called the Winkies together and bade them good-bye. The Winkies were sorry to have them go, and they had grown so fond of the Tin Woodman that they begged him to stay and rule over them and the Yellow Land of the West. Finding they were determined to go, the Winkies gave Toto and the Lion each a golden collar; and to Dorothy they presented a beautiful bracelet studded with diamonds; and to the Scarecrow they gave a gold-headed walking stick, to keep him from stumbling; and to the Tin Woodman they offered a silver oil-can, inlaid with gold and set with precious jewels.

Every one of the travelers made the Winkies a pretty speech in return, and all shook hands with them until their arms ached.

Dorothy went to the Witch’s cupboard to fill her basket with food for the journey, and there she saw the Golden Cap. She tried it on her own head and found that it fitted her exactly. She did not know anything about the charm of the Golden Cap, but she saw that it was pretty, so she made up her mind to wear it and carry her sunbonnet in the basket.

Then, being prepared for the journey, they all started for the Emerald City; and the Winkies gave them three cheers and many good wishes to carry with them.

14. The Winged Monkeys

You will remember there was no road–not even a pathway–between the castle of the Wicked Witch and the Emerald City. When the four travelers went in search of the Witch she had seen them coming, and so sent the Winged Monkeys to bring them to her. It was much harder to find their way back through the big fields of buttercups and yellow daisies than it was being carried. They knew, of course, they must go straight east, toward the rising sun; and they started off in the right way. But at noon, when the sun was over their heads, they did not know which was east and which was west, and that was the reason they were lost in the great fields. They kept on walking, however, and at night the moon came out and shone brightly. So they lay down among the sweet smelling yellow flowers and slept soundly until morning–all but the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman.

The next morning the sun was behind a cloud, but they started on, as if they were quite sure which way they were going.

“If we walk far enough,” said Dorothy, “I am sure we shall sometime come to some place.”

But day by day passed away, and they still saw nothing before them but the scarlet fields. The Scarecrow began to grumble a bit.

“We have surely lost our way,” he said, “and unless we find it again in time to reach the Emerald City, I shall never get my brains.”

“Nor I my heart,” declared the Tin Woodman. “It seems to me I can scarcely wait till I get to Oz, and you must admit this is a very long journey.”

“You see,” said the Cowardly Lion, with a whimper, “I haven’t the courage to keep tramping forever, without getting anywhere at all.”

Then Dorothy lost heart. She sat down on the grass and looked at her companions, and they sat down and looked at her, and Toto found that for the first time in his life he was too tired to chase a butterfly that flew past his head. So he put out his tongue and panted and looked at Dorothy as if to ask what they should do next.

“Suppose we call the field mice,” she suggested. “They could probably tell us the way to the Emerald City.”

“To be sure they could,” cried the Scarecrow. “Why didn’t we think of that before?”

Dorothy blew the little whistle she had always carried about her neck since the Queen of the Mice had given it to her. In a few minutes they heard the pattering of tiny feet, and many of the small gray mice came running up to her. Among them was the Queen herself, who asked, in her squeaky little voice:

“What can I do for my friends?”

“We have lost our way,” said Dorothy. “Can you tell us where the Emerald City is?”

“Certainly,” answered the Queen; “but it is a great way off, for you have had it at your backs all this time.” Then she noticed Dorothy’s Golden Cap, and said, “Why don’t you use the charm of the Cap, and call the Winged Monkeys to you? They will carry you to the City of Oz in less than an hour.”

“I didn’t know there was a charm,” answered Dorothy, in surprise. “What is it?”

“It is written inside the Golden Cap,” replied the Queen of the Mice. “But if you are going to call the Winged Monkeys we must run away, for they are full of mischief and think it great fun to plague us.”

“Won’t they hurt me?” asked the girl anxiously.

“Oh, no. They must obey the wearer of the Cap. Good-bye!” And she scampered out of sight, with all the mice hurrying after her.

Dorothy looked inside the Golden Cap and saw some words written upon the lining. These, she thought, must be the charm, so she read the directions carefully and put the Cap upon her head.

“Ep-pe, pep-pe, kak-ke!” she said, standing on her left foot.

“What did you say?” asked the Scarecrow, who did not know what she was doing.

“Hil-lo, hol-lo, hel-lo!” Dorothy went on, standing this time on her right foot.

“Hello!” replied the Tin Woodman calmly.

“Ziz-zy, zuz-zy, zik!” said Dorothy, who was now standing on both feet. This ended the saying of the charm, and they heard a great chattering and flapping of wings, as the band of Winged Monkeys flew up to them.

The King bowed low before Dorothy, and asked, “What is your command?”

“We wish to go to the Emerald City,” said the child, “and we have lost our way.”

“We will carry you,” replied the King, and no sooner had he spoken than two of the Monkeys caught Dorothy in their arms and flew away with her. Others took the Scarecrow and the Woodman and the Lion, and one little Monkey seized Toto and flew after them, although the dog tried hard to bite him.

The Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman were rather frightened at first, for they remembered how badly the Winged Monkeys had treated them before; but they saw that no harm was intended, so they rode through the air quite cheerfully, and had a fine time looking at the pretty gardens and woods far below them.

Dorothy found herself riding easily between two of the biggest Monkeys, one of them the King himself. They had made a chair of their hands and were careful not to hurt her.

“Why do you have to obey the charm of the Golden Cap?” she asked.

“That is a long story,” answered the King, with a Winged laugh; “but as we have a long journey before us, I will pass the time by telling you about it, if you wish.”

“I shall be glad to hear it,” she replied.

“Once,” began the leader, “we were a free people, living happily in the great forest, flying from tree to tree, eating nuts and fruit, and doing just as we pleased without calling anybody master. Perhaps some of us were rather too full of mischief at times, flying down to pull the tails of the animals that had no wings, chasing birds, and throwing nuts at the people who walked in the forest. But we were careless and happy and full of fun, and enjoyed every minute of the day. This was many years ago, long before Oz came out of the clouds to rule over this land.

“There lived here then, away at the North, a beautiful princess, who was also a powerful sorceress. All her magic was used to help the people, and she was never known to hurt anyone who was good. Her name was Gayelette, and she lived in a handsome palace built from great blocks of ruby. Everyone loved her, but her greatest sorrow was that she could find no one to love in return, since all the men were much too stupid and ugly to mate with one so beautiful and wise. At last, however, she found a boy who was handsome and manly and wise beyond his years. Gayelette made up her mind that when he grew to be a man she would make him her husband, so she took him to her ruby palace and used all her magic powers to make him as strong and good and lovely as any woman could wish. When he grew to manhood, Quelala, as he was called, was said to be the best and wisest man in all the land, while his manly beauty was so great that Gayelette loved him dearly, and hastened to make everything ready for the wedding.

“My grandfather was at that time the King of the Winged Monkeys which lived in the forest near Gayelette’s palace, and the old fellow loved a joke better than a good dinner. One day, just before the wedding, my grandfather was flying out with his band when he saw Quelala walking beside the river. He was dressed in a rich costume of pink silk and purple velvet, and my grandfather thought he would see what he could do. At his word the band flew down and seized Quelala, carried him in their arms until they were over the middle of the river, and then dropped him into the water.

“`Swim out, my fine fellow,’ cried my grandfather, `and see if the water has spotted your clothes.’ Quelala was much too wise not to swim, and he was not in the least spoiled by all his good fortune. He laughed, when he came to the top of the water, and swam in to shore. But when Gayelette came running out to him she found his silks and velvet all ruined by the river.

“The princess was angry, and she knew, of course, who did it. She had all the Winged Monkeys brought before her, and she said at first that their wings should be tied and they should be treated as they had treated Quelala, and dropped in the river. But my grandfather pleaded hard, for he knew the Monkeys would drown in the river with their wings tied, and Quelala said a kind word for them also; so that Gayelette finally spared them, on condition that the Winged Monkeys should ever after do three times the bidding of the owner of the Golden Cap. This Cap had been made for a wedding present to Quelala, and it is said to have cost the princess half her kingdom. Of course my grandfather and all the other Monkeys at once agreed to the condition, and that is how it happens that we are three times the slaves of the owner of the Golden Cap, whosoever he may be.”

“And what became of them?” asked Dorothy, who had been greatly interested in the story.

“Quelala being the first owner of the Golden Cap,” replied the Monkey, “he was the first to lay his wishes upon us. As his bride could not bear the sight of us, he called us all to him in the forest after he had married her and ordered us always to keep where she could never again set eyes on a Winged Monkey, which we were glad to do, for we were all afraid of her.

“This was all we ever had to do until the Golden Cap fell into the hands of the Wicked Witch of the West, who made us enslave the Winkies, and afterward drive Oz himself out of the Land of the West. Now the Golden Cap is yours, and three times you have the right to lay your wishes upon us.”

As the Monkey King finished his story Dorothy looked down and saw the green, shining walls of the Emerald City before them. She wondered at the rapid flight of the Monkeys, but was glad the journey was over. The strange creatures set the travelers down carefully before the gate of the City, the King bowed low to Dorothy, and then flew swiftly away, followed by all his band.

“That was a good ride,” said the little girl.

“Yes, and a quick way out of our troubles,” replied the Lion. “How lucky it was you brought away that wonderful Cap!”

15. The Discovery of Oz, the Terrible

The four travelers walked up to the great gate of Emerald City and rang the bell. After ringing several times, it was opened by the same Guardian of the Gates they had met before.

“What! are you back again?” he asked, in surprise.

“Do you not see us?” answered the Scarecrow.

“But I thought you had gone to visit the Wicked Witch of the West.”

“We did visit her,” said the Scarecrow.

“And she let you go again?” asked the man, in wonder.

“She could not help it, for she is melted,” explained the Scarecrow.

“Melted! Well, that is good news, indeed,” said the man. “Who melted her?”

“It was Dorothy,” said the Lion gravely.

“Good gracious!” exclaimed the man, and he bowed very low indeed before her.

Then he led them into his little room and locked the spectacles from the great box on all their eyes, just as he had done before. Afterward they passed on through the gate into the Emerald City. When the people heard from the Guardian of the Gates that Dorothy had melted the Wicked Witch of the West, they all gathered around the travelers and followed them in a great crowd to the Palace of Oz.

The soldier with the green whiskers was still on guard before the door, but he let them in at once, and they were again met by the beautiful green girl, who showed each of them to their old rooms at once, so they might rest until the Great Oz was ready to receive them.

The soldier had the news carried straight to Oz that Dorothy and the other travelers had come back again, after destroying the Wicked Witch; but Oz made no reply. They thought the Great Wizard would send for them at once, but he did not. They had no word from him the next day, nor the next, nor the next. The waiting was tiresome and wearing, and at last they grew vexed that Oz should treat them in so poor a fashion, after sending them to undergo hardships and slavery. So the Scarecrow at last asked the green girl to take another message to Oz, saying if he did not let them in to see him at once they would call the Winged Monkeys to help them, and find out whether he kept his promises or not. When the Wizard was given this message he was so frightened that he sent word for them to come to the Throne Room at four minutes after nine o’clock the next morning. He had once met the Winged Monkeys in the Land of the West, and he did not wish to meet them again.

The four travelers passed a sleepless night, each thinking of the gift Oz had promised to bestow on him. Dorothy fell asleep only once, and then she dreamed she was in Kansas, where Aunt Em was telling her how glad she was to have her little girl at home again.

Promptly at nine o’clock the next morning the green-whiskered soldier came to them, and four minutes later they all went into the Throne Room of the Great Oz.

Of course each one of them expected to see the Wizard in the shape he had taken before, and all were greatly surprised when they looked about and saw no one at all in the room. They kept close to the door and closer to one another, for the stillness of the empty room was more dreadful than any of the forms they had seen Oz take.

Presently they heard a solemn Voice, that seemed to come from somewhere near the top of the great dome, and it said:

“I am Oz, the Great and Terrible. Why do you seek me?”

They looked again in every part of the room, and then, seeing no one, Dorothy asked, “Where are you?”

“I am everywhere,” answered the Voice, “but to the eyes of common mortals I am invisible. I will now seat myself upon my throne, that you may converse with me.” Indeed, the Voice seemed just then to come straight from the throne itself; so they walked toward it and stood in a row while Dorothy said:

“We have come to claim our promise, O Oz.”

“What promise?” asked Oz.

“You promised to send me back to Kansas when the Wicked Witch was destroyed,” said the girl.

“And you promised to give me brains,” said the Scarecrow.

“And you promised to give me a heart,” said the Tin Woodman.

“And you promised to give me courage,” said the Cowardly Lion.

“Is the Wicked Witch really destroyed?” asked the Voice, and Dorothy thought it trembled a little.

“Yes,” she answered, “I melted her with a bucket of water.”

“Dear me,” said the Voice, “how sudden! Well, come to me tomorrow, for I must have time to think it over.”

“You’ve had plenty of time already,” said the Tin Woodman angrily.

“We shan’t wait a day longer,” said the Scarecrow.

“You must keep your promises to us!” exclaimed Dorothy.

The Lion thought it might be as well to frighten the Wizard, so he gave a large, loud roar, which was so fierce and dreadful that Toto jumped away from him in alarm and tipped over the screen that stood in a corner. As it fell with a crash they looked that way, and the next moment all of them were filled with wonder. For they saw, standing in just the spot the screen had hidden, a little old man, with a bald head and a wrinkled face, who seemed to be as much surprised as they were. The Tin Woodman, raising his axe, rushed toward the little man and cried out, “Who are you?”

“I am Oz, the Great and Terrible,” said the little man, in a trembling voice. “But don’t strike me–please don’t–and I’ll do anything you want me to.”

Our friends looked at him in surprise and dismay.

“I thought Oz was a great Head,” said Dorothy.

“And I thought Oz was a lovely Lady,” said the Scarecrow.

“And I thought Oz was a terrible Beast,” said the Tin Woodman.

“And I thought Oz was a Ball of Fire,” exclaimed the Lion.

“No, you are all wrong,” said the little man meekly. “I have been making believe.”

“Making believe!” cried Dorothy. “Are you not a Great Wizard?”

“Hush, my dear,” he said. “Don’t speak so loud, or you will be overheard–and I should be ruined. I’m supposed to be a Great Wizard.”

“And aren’t you?” she asked.

“Not a bit of it, my dear; I’m just a common man.”

“You’re more than that,” said the Scarecrow, in a grieved tone; “you’re a humbug.”

“Exactly so!” declared the little man, rubbing his hands together as if it pleased him. “I am a humbug.”

“But this is terrible,” said the Tin Woodman. “How shall I ever get my heart?”

“Or I my courage?” asked the Lion.

“Or I my brains?” wailed the Scarecrow, wiping the tears from his eyes with his coat sleeve.

“My dear friends,” said Oz, “I pray you not to speak of these little things. Think of me, and the terrible trouble I’m in at being found out.”

“Doesn’t anyone else know you’re a humbug?” asked Dorothy.

“No one knows it but you four–and myself,” replied Oz. “I have fooled everyone so long that I thought I should never be found out. It was a great mistake my ever letting you into the Throne Room. Usually I will not see even my subjects, and so they believe I am something terrible.”

“But, I don’t understand,” said Dorothy, in bewilderment. “How was it that you appeared to me as a great Head?”

“That was one of my tricks,” answered Oz. “Step this way, please, and I will tell you all about it.”

He led the way to a small chamber in the rear of the Throne Room, and they all followed him. He pointed to one corner, in which lay the great Head, made out of many thicknesses of paper, and with a carefully painted face.

“This I hung from the ceiling by a wire,” said Oz. “I stood behind the screen and pulled a thread, to make the eyes move and the mouth open.”

“But how about the voice?” she inquired.

“Oh, I am a ventriloquist,” said the little man. “I can throw the sound of my voice wherever I wish, so that you thought it was coming out of the Head. Here are the other things I used to deceive you.” He showed the Scarecrow the dress and the mask he had worn when he seemed to be the lovely Lady. And the Tin Woodman saw that his terrible Beast was nothing but a lot of skins, sewn together, with slats to keep their sides out. As for the Ball of Fire, the false Wizard had hung that also from the ceiling. It was really a ball of cotton, but when oil was poured upon it the ball burned fiercely.

“Really,” said the Scarecrow, “you ought to be ashamed of yourself for being such a humbug.”

“I am–I certainly am,” answered the little man sorrowfully; “but it was the only thing I could do. Sit down, please, there are plenty of chairs; and I will tell you my story.”

So they sat down and listened while he told the following tale.

“I was born in Omaha–”

“Why, that isn’t very far from Kansas!” cried Dorothy.

“No, but it’s farther from here,” he said, shaking his head at her sadly. “When I grew up I became a ventriloquist, and at that I was very well trained by a great master. I can imitate any kind of a bird or beast.” Here he mewed so like a kitten that Toto pricked up his ears and looked everywhere to see where she was. “After a time,” continued Oz, “I tired of that, and became a balloonist.”

“What is that?” asked Dorothy.

“A man who goes up in a balloon on circus day, so as to draw a crowd of people together and get them to pay to see the circus,” he explained.

“Oh,” she said, “I know.”

“Well, one day I went up in a balloon and the ropes got twisted, so that I couldn’t come down again. It went way up above the clouds, so far that a current of air struck it and carried it many, many miles away. For a day and a night I traveled through the air, and on the morning of the second day I awoke and found the balloon floating over a strange and beautiful country.

“It came down gradually, and I was not hurt a bit. But I found myself in the midst of a strange people, who, seeing me come from the clouds, thought I was a great Wizard. Of course I let them think so, because they were afraid of me, and promised to do anything I wished them to.

“Just to amuse myself, and keep the good people busy, I ordered them to build this City, and my Palace; and they did it all willingly and well. Then I thought, as the country was so green and beautiful, I would call it the Emerald City; and to make the name fit better I put green spectacles on all the people, so that everything they saw was green.”

“But isn’t everything here green?” asked Dorothy.

“No more than in any other city,” replied Oz; “but when you wear green spectacles, why of course everything you see looks green to you. The Emerald City was built a great many years ago, for I was a young man when the balloon brought me here, and I am a very old man now. But my people have worn green glasses on their eyes so long that most of them think it really is an Emerald City, and it certainly is a beautiful place, abounding in jewels and precious metals, and every good thing that is needed to make one happy. I have been good to the people, and they like me; but ever since this Palace was built, I have shut myself up and would not see any of them.

“One of my greatest fears was the Witches, for while I had no magical powers at all I soon found out that the Witches were really able to do wonderful things. There were four of them in this country, and they ruled the people who live in the North and South and East and West. Fortunately, the Witches of the North and South were good, and I knew they would do me no harm; but the Witches of the East and West were terribly wicked, and had they not thought I was more powerful than they themselves, they would surely have destroyed me. As it was, I lived in deadly fear of them for many years; so you can imagine how pleased I was when I heard your house had fallen on the Wicked Witch of the East. When you came to me, I was willing to promise anything if you would only do away with the other Witch; but, now that you have melted her, I am ashamed to say that I cannot keep my promises.”

“I think you are a very bad man,” said Dorothy.

“Oh, no, my dear; I’m really a very good man, but I’m a very bad Wizard, I must admit.”

“Can’t you give me brains?” asked the Scarecrow.

“You don’t need them. You are learning something every day. A baby has brains, but it doesn’t know much. Experience is the only thing that brings knowledge, and the longer you are on earth the more experience you are sure to get.”

“That may all be true,” said the Scarecrow, “but I shall be very unhappy unless you give me brains.”

The false Wizard looked at him carefully.

“Well,” he said with a sigh, “I’m not much of a magician, as I said; but if you will come to me tomorrow morning, I will stuff your head with brains. I cannot tell you how to use them, however; you must find that out for yourself.”

“Oh, thank you–thank you!” cried the Scarecrow. “I’ll find a way to use them, never fear!”

“But how about my courage?” asked the Lion anxiously.

“You have plenty of courage, I am sure,” answered Oz. “All you need is confidence in yourself. There is no living thing that is not afraid when it faces danger. The True courage is in facing danger when you are afraid, and that kind of courage you have in plenty.”

“Perhaps I have, but I’m scared just the same,” said the Lion. “I shall really be very unhappy unless you give me the sort of courage that makes one forget he is afraid.”

“Very well, I will give you that sort of courage tomorrow,” replied Oz.

“How about my heart?” asked the Tin Woodman.

“Why, as for that,” answered Oz, “I think you are wrong to want a heart. It makes most people unhappy. If you only knew it, you are in luck not to have a heart.”

“That must be a matter of opinion,” said the Tin Woodman. “For my part, I will bear all the unhappiness without a murmur, if you will give me the heart.”

“Very well,” answered Oz meekly. “Come to me tomorrow and you shall have a heart. I have played Wizard for so many years that I may as well continue the part a little longer.”

“And now,” said Dorothy, “how am I to get back to Kansas?”

“We shall have to think about that,” replied the little man. “Give me two or three days to consider the matter and I’ll try to find a way to carry you over the desert. In the meantime you shall all be treated as my guests, and while you live in the Palace my people will wait upon you and obey your slightest wish. There is only one thing I ask in return for my help–such as it is. You must keep my secret and tell no one I am a humbug.”

They agreed to say nothing of what they had learned, and went back to their rooms in high spirits. Even Dorothy had hope that “The Great and Terrible Humbug,” as she called him, would find a way to send her back to Kansas, and if he did she was willing to forgive him everything.

16. The Magic Art of the Great Humbug

Next morning the Scarecrow said to his friends:

“Congratulate me. I am going to Oz to get my brains at last. When I return I shall be as other men are.”

“I have always liked you as you were,” said Dorothy simply.

“It is kind of you to like a Scarecrow,” he replied. “But surely you will think more of me when you hear the splendid thoughts my new brain is going to turn out.” Then he said good-bye to them all in a cheerful voice and went to the Throne Room, where he rapped upon the door.

“Come in,” said Oz.

The Scarecrow went in and found the little man sitting down by the window, engaged in deep thought.

“I have come for my brains,” remarked the Scarecrow, a little uneasily.

“Oh, yes; sit down in that chair, please,” replied Oz. “You must excuse me for taking your head off, but I shall have to do it in order to put your brains in their proper place.”

“That’s all right,” said the Scarecrow. “You are quite welcome to take my head off, as long as it will be a better one when you put it on again.”

So the Wizard unfastened his head and emptied out the straw. Then he entered the back room and took up a measure of bran, which he mixed with a great many pins and needles. Having shaken them together thoroughly, he filled the top of the Scarecrow’s head with the mixture and stuffed the rest of the space with straw, to hold it in place.

When he had fastened the Scarecrow’s head on his body again he said to him, “Hereafter you will be a great man, for I have given you a lot of bran-new brains.”

The Scarecrow was both pleased and proud at the fulfillment of his greatest wish, and having thanked Oz warmly he went back to his friends.

Dorothy looked at him curiously. His head was quite bulged out at the top with brains.

“How do you feel?” she asked.

“I feel wise indeed,” he answered earnestly. “When I get used to my brains I shall know everything.”

“Why are those needles and pins sticking out of your head?” asked the Tin Woodman.

“That is proof that he is sharp,” remarked the Lion.

“Well, I must go to Oz and get my heart,” said the Woodman. So he walked to the Throne Room and knocked at the door.

“Come in,” called Oz, and the Woodman entered and said, “I have come for my heart.”

“Very well,” answered the little man. “But I shall have to cut a hole in your breast, so I can put your heart in the right place. I hope it won’t hurt you.”

“Oh, no,” answered the Woodman. “I shall not feel it at all.”

So Oz brought a pair of tinsmith’s shears and cut a small, square hole in the left side of the Tin Woodman’s breast. Then, going to a chest of drawers, he took out a pretty heart, made entirely of silk and stuffed with sawdust.

“Isn’t it a beauty?” he asked.

“It is, indeed!” replied the Woodman, who was greatly pleased. “But is it a kind heart?”

“Oh, very!” answered Oz. He put the heart in the Woodman’s breast and then replaced the square of tin, soldering it neatly together where it had been cut.

“There,” said he; “now you have a heart that any man might be proud of. I’m sorry I had to put a patch on your breast, but it really couldn’t be helped.”

“Never mind the patch,” exclaimed the happy Woodman. “I am very grateful to you, and shall never forget your kindness.”

“Don’t speak of it,” replied Oz.

Then the Tin Woodman went back to his friends, who wished him every joy on account of his good fortune.

The Lion now walked to the Throne Room and knocked at the door.

“Come in,” said Oz.

“I have come for my courage,” announced the Lion, entering the room.

“Very well,” answered the little man; “I will get it for you.”

He went to a cupboard and reaching up to a high shelf took down a square green bottle, the contents of which he poured into a green-gold dish, beautifully carved. Placing this before the Cowardly Lion, who sniffed at it as if he did not like it, the Wizard said:

“Drink.”

“What is it?” asked the Lion.

“Well,” answered Oz, “if it were inside of you, it would be courage. You know, of course, that courage is always inside one; so that this really cannot be called courage until you have swallowed it. Therefore I advise you to drink it as soon as possible.”

The Lion hesitated no longer, but drank till the dish was empty.

“How do you feel now?” asked Oz.

“Full of courage,” replied the Lion, who went joyfully back to his friends to tell them of his good fortune.

Oz, left to himself, smiled to think of his success in giving the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman and the Lion exactly what they thought they wanted. “How can I help being a humbug,” he said, “when all these people make me do things that everybody knows can’t be done? It was easy to make the Scarecrow and the Lion and the Woodman happy, because they imagined I could do anything. But it will take more than imagination to carry Dorothy back to Kansas, and I’m sure I don’t know how it can be done.”

17. How the Balloon Was Launched

For three days Dorothy heard nothing from Oz. These were sad days for the little girl, although her friends were all quite happy and contented. The Scarecrow told them there were wonderful thoughts in his head; but he would not say what they were because he knew no one could understand them but himself. When the Tin Woodman walked about he felt his heart rattling around in his breast; and he told Dorothy he had discovered it to be a kinder and more tender heart than the one he had owned when he was made of flesh. The Lion declared he was afraid of nothing on earth, and would gladly face an army or a dozen of the fierce Kalidahs.

Thus each of the little party was satisfied except Dorothy, who longed more than ever to get back to Kansas.

On the fourth day, to her great joy, Oz sent for her, and when she entered the Throne Room he greeted her pleasantly:

“Sit down, my dear; I think I have found the way to get you out of this country.”

“And back to Kansas?” she asked eagerly.

“Well, I’m not sure about Kansas,” said Oz, “for I haven’t the faintest notion which way it lies. But the first thing to do is to cross the desert, and then it should be easy to find your way home.”

“How can I cross the desert?” she inquired.

“Well, I’ll tell you what I think,” said the little man. “You see, when I came to this country it was in a balloon. You also came through the air, being carried by a cyclone. So I believe the best way to get across the desert will be through the air. Now, it is quite beyond my powers to make a cyclone; but I’ve been thinking the matter over, and I believe I can make a balloon.”

“How?” asked Dorothy.

“A balloon,” said Oz, “is made of silk, which is coated with glue to keep the gas in it. I have plenty of silk in the Palace, so it will be no trouble to make the balloon. But in all this country there is no gas to fill the balloon with, to make it float.”

“If it won’t float,” remarked Dorothy, “it will be of no use to us.”

“True,” answered Oz. “But there is another way to make it float, which is to fill it with hot air. Hot air isn’t as good as gas, for if the air should get cold the balloon would come down in the desert, and we should be lost.”

“We!” exclaimed the girl. “Are you going with me?”

“Yes, of course,” replied Oz. “I am tired of being such a humbug. If I should go out of this Palace my people would soon discover I am not a Wizard, and then they would be vexed with me for having deceived them. So I have to stay shut up in these rooms all day, and it gets tiresome. I’d much rather go back to Kansas with you and be in a circus again.”

“I shall be glad to have your company,” said Dorothy.

“Thank you,” he answered. “Now, if you will help me sew the silk together, we will begin to work on our balloon.”

So Dorothy took a needle and thread, and as fast as Oz cut the strips of silk into proper shape the girl sewed them neatly together. First there was a strip of light green silk, then a strip of dark green and then a strip of emerald green; for Oz had a fancy to make the balloon in different shades of the color about them. It took three days to sew all the strips together, but when it was finished they had a big bag of green silk more than twenty feet long.

Then Oz painted it on the inside with a coat of thin glue, to make it airtight, after which he announced that the balloon was ready.

“But we must have a basket to ride in,” he said. So he sent the soldier with the green whiskers for a big clothes basket, which he fastened with many ropes to the bottom of the balloon.

When it was all ready, Oz sent word to his people that he was going to make a visit to a great brother Wizard who lived in the clouds. The news spread rapidly throughout the city and everyone came to see the wonderful sight.

Oz ordered the balloon carried out in front of the Palace, and the people gazed upon it with much curiosity. The Tin Woodman had chopped a big pile of wood, and now he made a fire of it, and Oz held the bottom of the balloon over the fire so that the hot air that arose from it would be caught in the silken bag. Gradually the balloon swelled out and rose into the air, until finally the basket just touched the ground.

Then Oz got into the basket and said to all the people in a loud voice:

“I am now going away to make a visit. While I am gone the Scarecrow will rule over you. I command you to obey him as you would me.”

The balloon was by this time tugging hard at the rope that held it to the ground, for the air within it was hot, and this made it so much lighter in weight than the air without that it pulled hard to rise into the sky.

“Come, Dorothy!” cried the Wizard. “Hurry up, or the balloon will fly away.”

“I can’t find Toto anywhere,” replied Dorothy, who did not wish to leave her little dog behind. Toto had run into the crowd to bark at a kitten, and Dorothy at last found him. She picked him up and ran towards the balloon.

She was within a few steps of it, and Oz was holding out his hands to help her into the basket, when, crack! went the ropes, and the balloon rose into the air without her.

“Come back!” she screamed. “I want to go, too!”

“I can’t come back, my dear,” called Oz from the basket. “Good-bye!”

“Good-bye!” shouted everyone, and all eyes were turned upward to where the Wizard was riding in the basket, rising every moment farther and farther into the sky.

And that was the last any of them ever saw of Oz, the Wonderful Wizard, though he may have reached Omaha safely, and be there now, for all we know. But the people remembered him lovingly, and said to one another:

“Oz was always our friend. When he was here he built for us this beautiful Emerald City, and now he is gone he has left the Wise Scarecrow to rule over us.”

Still, for many days they grieved over the loss of the Wonderful Wizard, and would not be comforted.

18. Away to the South

Dorothy wept bitterly at the passing of her hope to get home to Kansas again; but when she thought it all over she was glad she had not gone up in a balloon. And she also felt sorry at losing Oz, and so did her companions.

The Tin Woodman came to her and said:

“Truly I should be ungrateful if I failed to mourn for the man who gave me my lovely heart. I should like to cry a little because Oz is gone, if you will kindly wipe away my tears, so that I shall not rust.”

“With pleasure,” she answered, and brought a towel at once. Then the Tin Woodman wept for several minutes, and she watched the tears carefully and wiped them away with the towel. When he had finished, he thanked her kindly and oiled himself thoroughly with his jeweled oil-can, to guard against mishap.

The Scarecrow was now the ruler of the Emerald City, and although he was not a Wizard the people were proud of him. “For,” they said, “there is not another city in all the world that is ruled by a stuffed man.” And, so far as they knew, they were quite right.

The morning after the balloon had gone up with Oz, the four travelers met in the Throne Room and talked matters over. The Scarecrow sat in the big throne and the others stood respectfully before him.

“We are not so unlucky,” said the new ruler, “for this Palace and the Emerald City belong to us, and we can do just as we please. When I remember that a short time ago I was up on a pole in a farmer’s cornfield, and that now I am the ruler of this beautiful City, I am quite satisfied with my lot.”

“I also,” said the Tin Woodman, “am well-pleased with my new heart; and, really, that was the only thing I wished in all the world.”

“For my part, I am content in knowing I am as brave as any beast that ever lived, if not braver,” said the Lion modestly.

“If Dorothy would only be contented to live in the Emerald City,” continued the Scarecrow, “we might all be happy together.”

“But I don’t want to live here,” cried Dorothy. “I want to go to Kansas, and live with Aunt Em and Uncle Henry.”

“Well, then, what can be done?” inquired the Woodman.

The Scarecrow decided to think, and he thought so hard that the pins and needles began to stick out of his brains. Finally he said:

“Why not call the Winged Monkeys, and ask them to carry you over the desert?”

“I never thought of that!” said Dorothy joyfully. “It’s just the thing. I’ll go at once for the Golden Cap.”

When she brought it into the Throne Room she spoke the magic words, and soon the band of Winged Monkeys flew in through the open window and stood beside her.

“This is the second time you have called us,” said the Monkey King, bowing before the little girl. “What do you wish?”

“I want you to fly with me to Kansas,” said Dorothy.

But the Monkey King shook his head.

“That cannot be done,” he said. “We belong to this country alone, and cannot leave it. There has never been a Winged Monkey in Kansas yet, and I suppose there never will be, for they don’t belong there. We shall be glad to serve you in any way in our power, but we cannot cross the desert. Good-bye.”

And with another bow, the Monkey King spread his wings and flew away through the window, followed by all his band.

Dorothy was ready to cry with disappointment. “I have wasted the charm of the Golden Cap to no purpose,” she said, “for the Winged Monkeys cannot help me.”

“It is certainly too bad!” said the tender-hearted Woodman.

The Scarecrow was thinking again, and his head bulged out so horribly that Dorothy feared it would burst.

“Let us call in the soldier with the green whiskers,” he said, “and ask his advice.”

So the soldier was summoned and entered the Throne Room timidly, for while Oz was alive he never was allowed to come farther than the door.

“This little girl,” said the Scarecrow to the soldier, “wishes to cross the desert. How can she do so?”

“I cannot tell,” answered the soldier, “for nobody has ever crossed the desert, unless it is Oz himself.”

“Is there no one who can help me?” asked Dorothy earnestly.

“Glinda might,” he suggested.

“Who is Glinda?” inquired the Scarecrow.

“The Witch of the South. She is the most powerful of all the Witches, and rules over the Quadlings. Besides, her castle stands on the edge of the desert, so she may know a way to cross it.”

“Glinda is a Good Witch, isn’t she?” asked the child.

“The Quadlings think she is good,” said the soldier, “and she is kind to everyone. I have heard that Glinda is a beautiful woman, who knows how to keep young in spite of the many years she has lived.”

“How can I get to her castle?” asked Dorothy.

“The road is straight to the South,” he answered, “but it is said to be full of dangers to travelers. There are wild beasts in the woods, and a race of queer men who do not like strangers to cross their country. For this reason none of the Quadlings ever come to the Emerald City.”

The soldier then left them and the Scarecrow said:

“It seems, in spite of dangers, that the best thing Dorothy can do is to travel to the Land of the South and ask Glinda to help her. For, of course, if Dorothy stays here she will never get back to Kansas.”

“You must have been thinking again,” remarked the Tin Woodman.

“I have,” said the Scarecrow.

“I shall go with Dorothy,” declared the Lion, “for I am tired of your city and long for the woods and the country again. I am really a wild beast, you know. Besides, Dorothy will need someone to protect her.”

“That is true,” agreed the Woodman. “My axe may be of service to her; so I also will go with her to the Land of the South.”

“When shall we start?” asked the Scarecrow.

“Are you going?” they asked, in surprise.

“Certainly. If it wasn’t for Dorothy I should never have had brains. She lifted me from the pole in the cornfield and brought me to the Emerald City. So my good luck is all due to her, and I shall never leave her until she starts back to Kansas for good and all.”

“Thank you,” said Dorothy gratefully. “You are all very kind to me. But I should like to start as soon as possible.”

“We shall go tomorrow morning,” returned the Scarecrow. “So now let us all get ready, for it will be a long journey.”

19. Attacked by the Fighting Trees

The next morning Dorothy kissed the pretty green girl good-bye, and they all shook hands with the soldier with the green whiskers, who had walked with them as far as the gate. When the Guardian of the Gate saw them again he wondered greatly that they could leave the beautiful City to get into new trouble. But he at once unlocked their spectacles, which he put back into the green box, and gave them many good wishes to carry with them.

“You are now our ruler,” he said to the Scarecrow; “so you must come back to us as soon as possible.”

“I certainly shall if I am able,” the Scarecrow replied; “but I must help Dorothy to get home, first.”

As Dorothy bade the good-natured Guardian a last farewell she said:

“I have been very kindly treated in your lovely City, and everyone has been good to me. I cannot tell you how grateful I am.”

“Don’t try, my dear,” he answered. “We should like to keep you with us, but if it is your wish to return to Kansas, I hope you will find a way.” He then opened the gate of the outer wall, and they walked forth and started upon their journey.

The sun shone brightly as our friends turned their faces toward the Land of the South. They were all in the best of spirits, and laughed and chatted together. Dorothy was once more filled with the hope of getting home, and the Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman were glad to be of use to her. As for the Lion, he sniffed the fresh air with delight and whisked his tail from side to side in pure joy at being in the country again, while Toto ran around them and chased the moths and butterflies, barking merrily all the time.

“City life does not agree with me at all,” remarked the Lion, as they walked along at a brisk pace. “I have lost much flesh since I lived there, and now I am anxious for a chance to show the other beasts how courageous I have grown.”

They now turned and took a last look at the Emerald City. All they could see was a mass of towers and steeples behind the green walls, and high up above everything the spires and dome of the Palace of Oz.

“Oz was not such a bad Wizard, after all,” said the Tin Woodman, as he felt his heart rattling around in his breast.

“He knew how to give me brains, and very good brains, too,” said the Scarecrow.

“If Oz had taken a dose of the same courage he gave me,” added the Lion, “he would have been a brave man.”

Dorothy said nothing. Oz had not kept the promise he made her, but he had done his best, so she forgave him. As he said, he was a good man, even if he was a bad Wizard.

The first day’s journey was through the green fields and bright flowers that stretched about the Emerald City on every side. They slept that night on the grass, with nothing but the stars over them; and they rested very well indeed.

In the morning they traveled on until they came to a thick wood. There was no way of going around it, for it seemed to extend to the right and left as far as they could see; and, besides, they did not dare change the direction of their journey for fear of getting lost. So they looked for the place where it would be easiest to get into the forest.

The Scarecrow, who was in the lead, finally discovered a big tree with such wide-spreading branches that there was room for the party to pass underneath. So he walked forward to the tree, but just as he came under the first branches they bent down and twined around him, and the next minute he was raised from the ground and flung headlong among his fellow travelers.

This did not hurt the Scarecrow, but it surprised him, and he looked rather dizzy when Dorothy picked him up.

“Here is another space between the trees,” called the Lion.

“Let me try it first,” said the Scarecrow, “for it doesn’t hurt me to get thrown about.” He walked up to another tree, as he spoke, but its branches immediately seized him and tossed him back again.

“This is strange,” exclaimed Dorothy. “What shall we do?”

“The trees seem to have made up their minds to fight us, and stop our journey,” remarked the Lion.

“I believe I will try it myself,” said the Woodman, and shouldering his axe, he marched up to the first tree that had handled the Scarecrow so roughly. When a big branch bent down to seize him the Woodman chopped at it so fiercely that he cut it in two. At once the tree began shaking all its branches as if in pain, and the Tin Woodman passed safely under it.

“Come on!” he shouted to the others. “Be quick!” They all ran forward and passed under the tree without injury, except Toto, who was caught by a small branch and shaken until he howled. But the Woodman promptly chopped off the branch and set the little dog free.

The other trees of the forest did nothing to keep them back, so they made up their minds that only the first row of trees could bend down their branches, and that probably these were the policemen of the forest, and given this wonderful power in order to keep strangers out of it.

The four travelers walked with ease through the trees until they came to the farther edge of the wood. Then, to their surprise, they found before them a high wall which seemed to be made of white china. It was smooth, like the surface of a dish, and higher than their heads.

“What shall we do now?” asked Dorothy.

“I will make a ladder,” said the Tin Woodman, “for we certainly must climb over the wall.”

20. The Dainty China Country

While the Woodman was making a ladder from wood which he found in the forest Dorothy lay down and slept, for she was tired by the long walk. The Lion also curled himself up to sleep and Toto lay beside him.

The Scarecrow watched the Woodman while he worked, and said to him:

“I cannot think why this wall is here, nor what it is made of.”

“Rest your brains and do not worry about the wall,” replied the Woodman. “When we have climbed over it, we shall know what is on the other side.”

After a time the ladder was finished. It looked clumsy, but the Tin Woodman was sure it was strong and would answer their purpose. The Scarecrow waked Dorothy and the Lion and Toto, and told them that the ladder was ready. The Scarecrow climbed up the ladder first, but he was so awkward that Dorothy had to follow close behind and keep him from falling off. When he got his head over the top of the wall the Scarecrow said, “Oh, my!”

“Go on,” exclaimed Dorothy.

So the Scarecrow climbed farther up and sat down on the top of the wall, and Dorothy put her head over and cried, “Oh, my!” just as the Scarecrow had done.

Then Toto came up, and immediately began to bark, but Dorothy made him be still.

The Lion climbed the ladder next, and the Tin Woodman came last; but both of them cried, “Oh, my!” as soon as they looked over the wall. When they were all sitting in a row on the top of the wall, they looked down and saw a strange sight.

Before them was a great stretch of country having a floor as smooth and shining and white as the bottom of a big platter. Scattered around were many houses made entirely of china and painted in the brightest colors. These houses were quite small, the biggest of them reaching only as high as Dorothy’s waist. There were also pretty little barns, with china fences around them; and many cows and sheep and horses and pigs and chickens, all made of china, were standing about in groups.

But the strangest of all were the people who lived in this queer country. There were milkmaids and shepherdesses, with brightly colored bodices and golden spots all over their gowns; and princesses with most gorgeous frocks of silver and gold and purple; and shepherds dressed in knee breeches with pink and yellow and blue stripes down them, and golden buckles on their shoes; and princes with jeweled crowns upon their heads, wearing ermine robes and satin doublets; and funny clowns in ruffled gowns, with round red spots upon their cheeks and tall, pointed caps. And, strangest of all, these people were all made of china, even to their clothes, and were so small that the tallest of them was no higher than Dorothy’s knee.

No one did so much as look at the travelers at first, except one little purple china dog with an extra-large head, which came to the wall and barked at them in a tiny voice, afterwards running away again.

“How shall we get down?” asked Dorothy.

They found the ladder so heavy they could not pull it up, so the Scarecrow fell off the wall and the others jumped down upon him so that the hard floor would not hurt their feet. Of course they took pains not to light on his head and get the pins in their feet. When all were safely down they picked up the Scarecrow, whose body was quite flattened out, and patted his straw into shape again.

“We must cross this strange place in order to get to the other side,” said Dorothy, “for it would be unwise for us to go any other way except due South.”

They began walking through the country of the china people, and the first thing they came to was a china milkmaid milking a china cow. As they drew near, the cow suddenly gave a kick and kicked over the stool, the pail, and even the milkmaid herself, and all fell on the china ground with a great clatter.

Dorothy was shocked to see that the cow had broken her leg off, and that the pail was lying in several small pieces, while the poor milkmaid had a nick in her left elbow.

“There!” cried the milkmaid angrily. “See what you have done! My cow has broken her leg, and I must take her to the mender’s shop and have it glued on again. What do you mean by coming here and frightening my cow?”

“I’m very sorry,” returned Dorothy. “Please forgive us.”

But the pretty milkmaid was much too vexed to make any answer. She picked up the leg sulkily and led her cow away, the poor animal limping on three legs. As she left them the milkmaid cast many reproachful glances over her shoulder at the clumsy strangers, holding her nicked elbow close to her side.

Dorothy was quite grieved at this mishap.

“We must be very careful here,” said the kind-hearted Woodman, “or we may hurt these pretty little people so they will never get over it.”

A little farther on Dorothy met a most beautifully dressed young Princess, who stopped short as she saw the strangers and started to run away.

Dorothy wanted to see more of the Princess, so she ran after her. But the china girl cried out:

“Don’t chase me! Don’t chase me!”

She had such a frightened little voice that Dorothy stopped and said, “Why not?”

“Because,” answered the Princess, also stopping, a safe distance away, “if I run I may fall down and break myself.”

“But could you not be mended?” asked the girl.

“Oh, yes; but one is never so pretty after being mended, you know,” replied the Princess.

“I suppose not,” said Dorothy.

“Now there is Mr. Joker, one of our clowns,” continued the china lady, “who is always trying to stand upon his head. He has broken himself so often that he is mended in a hundred places, and doesn’t look at all pretty. Here he comes now, so you can see for yourself.”

Indeed, a jolly little clown came walking toward them, and Dorothy could see that in spite of his pretty clothes of red and yellow and green he was completely covered with cracks, running every which way and showing plainly that he had been mended in many places.

The Clown put his hands in his pockets, and after puffing out his cheeks and nodding his head at them saucily, he said:

“My lady fair,
   Why do you stare
At poor old Mr. Joker?
    You’re quite as stiff
And prim as if
    You’d eaten up a poker!”

 

“Be quiet, sir!” said the Princess. “Can’t you see these are strangers, and should be treated with respect?”

“Well, that’s respect, I expect,” declared the Clown, and immediately stood upon his head.

“Don’t mind Mr. Joker,” said the Princess to Dorothy. “He is considerably cracked in his head, and that makes him foolish.”

“Oh, I don’t mind him a bit,” said Dorothy. “But you are so beautiful,” she continued, “that I am sure I could love you dearly. Won’t you let me carry you back to Kansas, and stand you on Aunt Em’s mantel? I could carry you in my basket.”

“That would make me very unhappy,” answered the china Princess. “You see, here in our country we live contentedly, and can talk and move around as we please. But whenever any of us are taken away our joints at once stiffen, and we can only stand straight and look pretty. Of course that is all that is expected of us when we are on mantels and cabinets and drawing-room tables, but our lives are much pleasanter here in our own country.”

“I would not make you unhappy for all the world!” exclaimed Dorothy. “So I’ll just say good-bye.”

“Good-bye,” replied the Princess.

They walked carefully through the china country. The little animals and all the people scampered out of their way, fearing the strangers would break them, and after an hour or so the travelers reached the other side of the country and came to another china wall.

It was not so high as the first, however, and by standing upon the Lion’s back they all managed to scramble to the top. Then the Lion gathered his legs under him and jumped on the wall; but just as he jumped, he upset a china church with his tail and smashed it all to pieces.

“That was too bad,” said Dorothy, “but really I think we were lucky in not doing these little people more harm than breaking a cow’s leg and a church. They are all so brittle!”

“They are, indeed,” said the Scarecrow, “and I am thankful I am made of straw and cannot be easily damaged. There are worse things in the world than being a Scarecrow.”

21. The Lion Becomes the King of Beasts

After climbing down from the china wall the travelers found themselves in a disagreeable country, full of bogs and marshes and covered with tall, rank grass. It was difficult to walk without falling into muddy holes, for the grass was so thick that it hid them from sight. However, by carefully picking their way, they got safely along until they reached solid ground. But here the country seemed wilder than ever, and after a long and tiresome walk through the underbrush they entered another forest, where the trees were bigger and older than any they had ever seen.

“This forest is perfectly delightful,” declared the Lion, looking around him with joy. “Never have I seen a more beautiful place.”

“It seems gloomy,” said the Scarecrow.

“Not a bit of it,” answered the Lion. “I should like to live here all my life. See how soft the dried leaves are under your feet and how rich and green the moss is that clings to these old trees. Surely no wild beast could wish a pleasanter home.”

“Perhaps there are wild beasts in the forest now,” said Dorothy.

“I suppose there are,” returned the Lion, “but I do not see any of them about.”

They walked through the forest until it became too dark to go any farther. Dorothy and Toto and the Lion lay down to sleep, while the Woodman and the Scarecrow kept watch over them as usual.

When morning came, they started again. Before they had gone far they heard a low rumble, as of the growling of many wild animals. Toto whimpered a little, but none of the others was frightened, and they kept along the well-trodden path until they came to an opening in the wood, in which were gathered hundreds of beasts of every variety. There were tigers and elephants and bears and wolves and foxes and all the others in the natural history, and for a moment Dorothy was afraid. But the Lion explained that the animals were holding a meeting, and he judged by their snarling and growling that they were in great trouble.

As he spoke several of the beasts caught sight of him, and at once the great assemblage hushed as if by magic. The biggest of the tigers came up to the Lion and bowed, saying:

“Welcome, O King of Beasts! You have come in good time to fight our enemy and bring peace to all the animals of the forest once more.”

“What is your trouble?” asked the Lion quietly.

“We are all threatened,” answered the tiger, “by a fierce enemy which has lately come into this forest. It is a most tremendous monster, like a great spider, with a body as big as an elephant and legs as long as a tree trunk. It has eight of these long legs, and as the monster crawls through the forest he seizes an animal with a leg and drags it to his mouth, where he eats it as a spider does a fly. Not one of us is safe while this fierce creature is alive, and we had called a meeting to decide how to take care of ourselves when you came among us.”

The Lion thought for a moment.

“Are there any other lions in this forest?” he asked.

“No; there were some, but the monster has eaten them all. And, besides, they were none of them nearly so large and brave as you.”

“If I put an end to your enemy, will you bow down to me and obey me as King of the Forest?” inquired the Lion.

“We will do that gladly,” returned the tiger; and all the other beasts roared with a mighty roar: “We will!”

“Where is this great spider of yours now?” asked the Lion.

“Yonder, among the oak trees,” said the tiger, pointing with his forefoot.

“Take good care of these friends of mine,” said the Lion, “and I will go at once to fight the monster.”

He bade his comrades good-bye and marched proudly away to do battle with the enemy.

The great spider was lying asleep when the Lion found him, and it looked so ugly that its foe turned up his nose in disgust. Its legs were quite as long as the tiger had said, and its body covered with coarse black hair. It had a great mouth, with a row of sharp teeth a foot long; but its head was joined to the pudgy body by a neck as slender as a wasp’s waist. This gave the Lion a hint of the best way to attack the creature, and as he knew it was easier to fight it asleep than awake, he gave a great spring and landed directly upon the monster’s back. Then, with one blow of his heavy paw, all armed with sharp claws, he knocked the spider’s head from its body. Jumping down, he watched it until the long legs stopped wiggling, when he knew it was quite dead.

The Lion went back to the opening where the beasts of the forest were waiting for him and said proudly:

“You need fear your enemy no longer.”

Then the beasts bowed down to the Lion as their King, and he promised to come back and rule over them as soon as Dorothy was safely on her way to Kansas.

22. The Country of the Quadlings

The four travelers passed through the rest of the forest in safety, and when they came out from its gloom saw before them a steep hill, covered from top to bottom with great pieces of rock.

“That will be a hard climb,” said the Scarecrow, “but we must get over the hill, nevertheless.”

So he led the way and the others followed. They had nearly reached the first rock when they heard a rough voice cry out, “Keep back!”

“Who are you?” asked the Scarecrow.

Then a head showed itself over the rock and the same voice said, “This hill belongs to us, and we don’t allow anyone to cross it.”

“But we must cross it,” said the Scarecrow. “We’re going to the country of the Quadlings.”

“But you shall not!” replied the voice, and there stepped from behind the rock the strangest man the travelers had ever seen.

He was quite short and stout and had a big head, which was flat at the top and supported by a thick neck full of wrinkles. But he had no arms at all, and, seeing this, the Scarecrow did not fear that so helpless a creature could prevent them from climbing the hill. So he said, “I’m sorry not to do as you wish, but we must pass over your hill whether you like it or not,” and he walked boldly forward.

As quick as lightning the man’s head shot forward and his neck stretched out until the top of the head, where it was flat, struck the Scarecrow in the middle and sent him tumbling, over and over, down the hill. Almost as quickly as it came the head went back to the body, and the man laughed harshly as he said, “It isn’t as easy as you think!”

A chorus of boisterous laughter came from the other rocks, and Dorothy saw hundreds of the armless Hammer-Heads upon the hillside, one behind every rock.

The Lion became quite angry at the laughter caused by the Scarecrow’s mishap, and giving a loud roar that echoed like thunder, he dashed up the hill.

Again a head shot swiftly out, and the great Lion went rolling down the hill as if he had been struck by a cannon ball.

Dorothy ran down and helped the Scarecrow to his feet, and the Lion came up to her, feeling rather bruised and sore, and said, “It is useless to fight people with shooting heads; no one can withstand them.”

“What can we do, then?” she asked.

“Call the Winged Monkeys,” suggested the Tin Woodman. “You have still the right to command them once more.”

“Very well,” she answered, and putting on the Golden Cap she uttered the magic words. The Monkeys were as prompt as ever, and in a few moments the entire band stood before her.

“What are your commands?” inquired the King of the Monkeys, bowing low.

“Carry us over the hill to the country of the Quadlings,” answered the girl.

“It shall be done,” said the King, and at once the Winged Monkeys caught the four travelers and Toto up in their arms and flew away with them. As they passed over the hill the Hammer-Heads yelled with vexation, and shot their heads high in the air, but they could not reach the Winged Monkeys, which carried Dorothy and her comrades safely over the hill and set them down in the beautiful country of the Quadlings.

“This is the last time you can summon us,” said the leader to Dorothy; “so good-bye and good luck to you.”

“Good-bye, and thank you very much,” returned the girl; and the Monkeys rose into the air and were out of sight in a twinkling.

The country of the Quadlings seemed rich and happy. There was field upon field of ripening grain, with well-paved roads running between, and pretty rippling brooks with strong bridges across them. The fences and houses and bridges were all painted bright red, just as they had been painted yellow in the country of the Winkies and blue in the country of the Munchkins. The Quadlings themselves, who were short and fat and looked chubby and good-natured, were dressed all in red, which showed bright against the green grass and the yellowing grain.

The Monkeys had set them down near a farmhouse, and the four travelers walked up to it and knocked at the door. It was opened by the farmer’s wife, and when Dorothy asked for something to eat the woman gave them all a good dinner, with three kinds of cake and four kinds of cookies, and a bowl of milk for Toto.

“How far is it to the Castle of Glinda?” asked the child.

“It is not a great way,” answered the farmer’s wife. “Take the road to the South and you will soon reach it.”

Thanking the good woman, they started afresh and walked by the fields and across the pretty bridges until they saw before them a very beautiful Castle. Before the gates were three young girls, dressed in handsome red uniforms trimmed with gold braid; and as Dorothy approached, one of them said to her:

“Why have you come to the South Country?”

“To see the Good Witch who rules here,” she answered. “Will you take me to her?”

“Let me have your name, and I will ask Glinda if she will receive you.” They told who they were, and the girl soldier went into the Castle. After a few moments she came back to say that Dorothy and the others were to be admitted at once.

23. Glinda The Good Witch Grants Dorothy’s Wish

Before they went to see Glinda, however, they were taken to a room of the Castle, where Dorothy washed her face and combed her hair, and the Lion shook the dust out of his mane, and the Scarecrow patted himself into his best shape, and the Woodman polished his tin and oiled his joints.

When they were all quite presentable they followed the soldier girl into a big room where the Witch Glinda sat upon a throne of rubies.

She was both beautiful and young to their eyes. Her hair was a rich red in color and fell in flowing ringlets over her shoulders. Her dress was pure white but her eyes were blue, and they looked kindly upon the little girl.

“What can I do for you, my child?” she asked.

Dorothy told the Witch all her story: how the cyclone had brought her to the Land of Oz, how she had found her companions, and of the wonderful adventures they had met with.

“My greatest wish now,” she added, “is to get back to Kansas, for Aunt Em will surely think something dreadful has happened to me, and that will make her put on mourning; and unless the crops are better this year than they were last, I am sure Uncle Henry cannot afford it.”

Glinda leaned forward and kissed the sweet, upturned face of the loving little girl.

“Bless your dear heart,” she said, “I am sure I can tell you of a way to get back to Kansas.” Then she added, “But, if I do, you must give me the Golden Cap.”

“Willingly!” exclaimed Dorothy; “indeed, it is of no use to me now, and when you have it you can command the Winged Monkeys three times.”

“And I think I shall need their service just those three times,” answered Glinda, smiling.

Dorothy then gave her the Golden Cap, and the Witch said to the Scarecrow, “What will you do when Dorothy has left us?”

“I will return to the Emerald City,” he replied, “for Oz has made me its ruler and the people like me. The only thing that worries me is how to cross the hill of the Hammer-Heads.”

“By means of the Golden Cap I shall command the Winged Monkeys to carry you to the gates of the Emerald City,” said Glinda, “for it would be a shame to deprive the people of so wonderful a ruler.”

“Am I really wonderful?” asked the Scarecrow.

“You are unusual,” replied Glinda.

Turning to the Tin Woodman, she asked, “What will become of you when Dorothy leaves this country?”

He leaned on his axe and thought a moment. Then he said, “The Winkies were very kind to me, and wanted me to rule over them after the Wicked Witch died. I am fond of the Winkies, and if I could get back again to the Country of the West, I should like nothing better than to rule over them forever.”

“My second command to the Winged Monkeys,” said Glinda “will be that they carry you safely to the land of the Winkies. Your brain may not be so large to look at as those of the Scarecrow, but you are really brighter than he is–when you are well polished–and I am sure you will rule the Winkies wisely and well.”

Then the Witch looked at the big, shaggy Lion and asked, “When Dorothy has returned to her own home, what will become of you?”

“Over the hill of the Hammer-Heads,” he answered, “lies a grand old forest, and all the beasts that live there have made me their King. If I could only get back to this forest, I would pass my life very happily there.”

“My third command to the Winged Monkeys,” said Glinda, “shall be to carry you to your forest. Then, having used up the powers of the Golden Cap, I shall give it to the King of the Monkeys, that he and his band may thereafter be free for evermore.”

The Scarecrow and the Tin Woodman and the Lion now thanked the Good Witch earnestly for her kindness; and Dorothy exclaimed:

“You are certainly as good as you are beautiful! But you have not yet told me how to get back to Kansas.”

“Your Silver Shoes will carry you over the desert,” replied Glinda. “If you had known their power you could have gone back to your Aunt Em the very first day you came to this country.”

“But then I should not have had my wonderful brains!” cried the Scarecrow. “I might have passed my whole life in the farmer’s cornfield.”

“And I should not have had my lovely heart,” said the Tin Woodman. “I might have stood and rusted in the forest till the end of the world.”

“And I should have lived a coward forever,” declared the Lion, “and no beast in all the forest would have had a good word to say to me.”

“This is all true,” said Dorothy, “and I am glad I was of use to these good friends. But now that each of them has had what he most desired, and each is happy in having a kingdom to rule besides, I think I should like to go back to Kansas.”

“The Silver Shoes,” said the Good Witch, “have wonderful powers. And one of the most curious things about them is that they can carry you to any place in the world in three steps, and each step will be made in the wink of an eye. All you have to do is to knock the heels together three times and command the shoes to carry you wherever you wish to go.”

“If that is so,” said the child joyfully, “I will ask them to carry me back to Kansas at once.”

She threw her arms around the Lion’s neck and kissed him, patting his big head tenderly. Then she kissed the Tin Woodman, who was weeping in a way most dangerous to his joints. But she hugged the soft, stuffed body of the Scarecrow in her arms instead of kissing his painted face, and found she was crying herself at this sorrowful parting from her loving comrades.

Glinda the Good stepped down from her ruby throne to give the little girl a good-bye kiss, and Dorothy thanked her for all the kindness she had shown to her friends and herself.

Dorothy now took Toto up solemnly in her arms, and having said one last good-bye she clapped the heels of her shoes together three times, saying:

“Take me home to Aunt Em!”

Instantly she was whirling through the air, so swiftly that all she could see or feel was the wind whistling past her ears.

The Silver Shoes took but three steps, and then she stopped so suddenly that she rolled over upon the grass several times before she knew where she was.

At length, however, she sat up and looked about her.

“Good gracious!” she cried.

For she was sitting on the broad Kansas prairie, and just before her was the new farmhouse Uncle Henry built after the cyclone had carried away the old one. Uncle Henry was milking the cows in the barnyard, and Toto had jumped out of her arms and was running toward the barn, barking furiously.

Dorothy stood up and found she was in her stocking-feet. For the Silver Shoes had fallen off in her flight through the air, and were lost forever in the desert.

24. Home Again

Aunt Em had just come out of the house to water the cabbages when she looked up and saw Dorothy running toward her.

“My darling child!” she cried, folding the little girl in her arms and covering her face with kisses. “Where in the world did you come from?”

“From the Land of Oz,” said Dorothy gravely. “And here is Toto, too. And oh, Aunt Em! I’m so glad to be at home again!”

 
 
 
 
 
End of The Wonderful Wizard of Oz, by L. Frank Baum
 

Winnie-the-Pooh

July 10, 2009

Winnie-The-Pooh

by A. A. Milne

 

 

To her

Hand in hand we come

Christopher Robin and I

To lay this book in your lap.

Say you’re surprised?

Say it’s just what you wanted?

Because it’s yours –

because we love you.

 

 

 

INTRODUCTION

 

IF you happen to have read another book about Christopher Robin, you may

remember that he once had a swan (or the swan had Christopher Robin, I don’t

know which) and that he used to call this swan Pooh. That was a long time ago,

and when we said good-bye, we took the name

with us, as we didn’t think the swan would want it any more. Well, when Edward

Bear said that he would like an exciting name all to himself, Christopher Robin

said at once, without stopping to think, that he was Winnie-the-Pooh. And he

was. So, as I have explained the Pooh part, I will now explain the rest of it.

You can’t be in London for long without going to the Zoo. There are some people

who begin the Zoo at the beginning, called WAYIN, and walk as quickly as they

can past every cage until they get to the one called WAYOUT, but the nicest

people go straight to the animal they love the most, and stay there. So when

Christopher Robin goes to the Zoo, he goes to where the Polar Bears are, and he

whispers something to the third keeper from the left, and doors are unlocked,

and we wander through dark passages and up steep stairs, until at last we come

to the special cage, and the cage is opened, and out trots something brown and

furry, and with a happy cry of “Oh, Bear!” Christopher Robin rushes into its

arms. Now this bear’s name is Winnie, which shows what a good name for bears it

is, but the funny thing is that we can’t remember whether Winnie is called after

Pooh,

or Pooh after Winnie. We did know once, but we have forgotten. . . .

I had written as far as this when Piglet looked up and said in his squeaky

voice, “What about Me?” “My dear Piglet,” I said, “the whole book is about you.”

“So it is about Pooh,” he squeaked. You see what it is. He is jealous because he

thinks Pooh is having a Grand Introduction all to himself. Pooh is the

favourite, of course, there’s no denying it, but Piglet comes in for a good many

things which Pooh misses; because you can’t take Pooh to school without

everybody knowing it, but Piglet is so small that he slips into a pocket, where

it is very comforting to feel him when you are not quite sure whether twice

seven is twelve or twenty-two. Sometimes he slips out and has a good look in the

ink-pot, and in this way he has got more education than Pooh, but Pooh doesn’t

mind. Some have brains, and some haven’t, he says, and there it is.

And now all the others are saying, “What about Us?” So perhaps the best thing to

do is to stop writing Introductions and get on with the book.

A. A. M.

 

 

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 1

…IN WHICH WE ARE INTRODUCED TO WINNIE-THE-POOH AND SOME BEES, AND THE STORIES BEGIN

 

 

 

HERE is Edward Bear, coming downstairs now, bump, bump, bump, on the back of his

head, behind Christopher Robin. It is, as far as he knows, the

only way of coming downstairs, but sometimes he feels that there really is

another way, if only he could stop bumping for a moment and think of it.

And then he feels that perhaps there isn’t. Anyhow, here he is at the bottom,

and ready to be introduced to you. Winnie-the-Pooh.

When I first heard his name, I said, just as you are going to say, “But I

thought he was a boy?”

“So did I,” said Christopher Robin.

“Then you can’t call him Winnie?”

“I don’t.”

“But you said–”

“He’s Winnie-ther-Pooh. Don’t you know what ‘ther’ means?”

“Ah, yes, now I do,” I said quickly; and I hope you do too, because it is all

the explanation you are going to get.

Sometimes Winnie-the-Pooh likes a game of some sort when he comes downstairs,

and sometimes he likes to sit quietly in front of the fire and listen to a

story. This evening–

“What about a story?” said Christopher Robin.

“What about a story?” I said.

“Could you very sweetly tell Winnie-the-Pooh one?”

“I suppose I could,” I said. “What sort of stories does he like?”

“About himself. Because he’s that sort of Bear.”

“Oh, I see.”

“So could you very sweetly?”

“I’ll try,” I said.

So I tried.

Once upon a time, a very long time ago now, about last Friday, Winnie-the-Pooh

lived in a forest all by himself under the name of Sanders.

(“What does ‘under the name’ mean?” asked Christopher Robin. “It means he had

the name over the door in gold letters, and lived under it.”

“Winnie-the-Pooh wasn’t quite sure,” said Christopher Robin.

“Now I am,” said a growly voice.

“Then I will go on,” said I.)

One day when he was out walking, he came to an open place in the middle of the

forest, and in the middle of this place was a large oak-tree, and, from the top

of the tree, there came a loud buzzing-noise.

Winnie-the-Pooh sat down at the foot of the tree, put his head between his paws

and began to think.

First of all he said to himself: “That buzzing-noise means something. You don’t

get a buzzing-noise like that, just buzzing and buzzing, without its meaning

something. If there’s a buzzing-noise, somebody’s making a buzzing-noise, and

the only reason for making a buzzing-noise that I know of is because you’re a

bee.”

Then he thought another long time, and said: “And the only reason for being a

bee that I know of is making honey.”

And then he got up, and said: “And the only reason for making honey is so as I

can eat it.” So he began to climb the tree

He climbed and he climbed and he climbed and as he climbed he sang a little song

to himself. It went like this:

Isn’t it funny

How a bear likes honey?

Buzz! Buzz! Buzz!

I wonder why he does?

Then he climbed a little further. . . and a little further . . . and then just a

little further. By that time he had thought of another song.

 

 

It’s a very funny thought that, if Bears were Bees,

They’d build their nests at the bottom of trees.

And that being so (if the Bees were Bears),

We shouldn’t have to climb up all these stairs.

He was getting rather tired by this time, so that is why he sang a Complaining

Song. He was nearly there now, and if he just s t o o d o n t h a t branch . . .

Crack !

“Oh, help!” said Pooh, as he dropped ten feet on the branch below him.

“If only I hadn’t–” he said, as he bounced twenty feet on to the next branch.

“You see, what I meant to do,” he explained, as he turned head-over-heels, and

crashed on to another branch thirty feet below, “what I meant to do–”

“Of course, it was rather–” he admitted, as he slithered very quickly through

the next six branches.

“It all comes, I suppose,” he decided, as he said good-bye to the last branch,

spun round three times, and flew gracefully into a gorse-bush, “it all comes of

liking honey so much. Oh, help!”

He crawled out of the gorse-bush, brushed the prickles from his nose, and began

to think again. And the first person he thought of was Christopher Robin.

(“Was that me?” said Christopher Robin in an awed voice, hardly daring to

believe it.

“That was you.”

Christopher Robin said nothing, but his eyes got larger and larger, and his face

got pinker and pinker.)

So Winnie-the-Pooh went round to his friend Christopher Robin, who lived behind

a green door in another part of the Forest.

“Good morning, Christopher Robin,” he said.

“Good morning, Winnie-ther-Pooh,” said you.

“I wonder if you’ve got such a thing as a balloon about you?”

“A balloon?”

“Yes, I just said to myself coming along: ‘I wonder if Christopher Robin has

such a thing as a balloon about him?’ I just said it to myself, thinking of

balloons, and wondering.”

“What do you want a balloon for?” you said.

Winnie-the-Pooh looked round to see that nobody was listening, put his paw to

his mouth, and said in a deep whisper: “Honey!”

“But you don’t get honey with balloons!”

“I do,” said Pooh.

Well, it just happened that you had been to a party the day before at the house

of your friend Piglet, and you had balloons at the party. You had had a big

green balloon; and one of Rabbit’s relations had had a big blue one, and had

left it behind, being really too young to go to a party at all; and so you had

brought the green one and the blue one home with you.

“Which one would you like?” you asked Pooh. He put his head between his paws and

thought very carefully.

“It’s like this,” he said. “When you go after honey with a balloon, the great

thing is not to let the bees know you’re coming. Now, if you have a

green balloon, they might think you were only part of the tree, and not notice

you, and if you have a blue balloon, they might think you were only part of the

sky, and not notice you, and the question is: Which is most likely?”

“Wouldn’t they notice you underneath the balloon?” you asked.

“They might or they might not,” said Winnie-the-Pooh. “You never can tell with

bees.” He thought for a moment and said: “I shall try to look like a small black

cloud. That will deceive them.”

“Then you had better have the blue balloon,” you said; and so it was decided.

Well, you both went out with the blue balloon, and you took your gun with you,

just in case, as you always did, and Winnie-the-Pooh went to a very muddy place

that he knew of, and rolled and rolled until he was black all over; and then,

when the balloon was blown up as big as big, and you and Pooh were both holding

on to the string, you let go suddenly, and Pooh Bear floated gracefully up into

 

the sky, and stayed there–level with the top of the tree and about twenty feet

away from it.

“Hooray!” you shouted.

“Isn’t that fine?” shouted Winnie-the-Pooh down to you. “What do I look like?”

“You look like a Bear holding on to a balloon,” you said.

“Not,” said Pooh anxiously, “–not like a small black cloud in a blue sky?”

“Not very much.”

“Ah, well, perhaps from up here it looks different. And, as I say, you never can

tell with bees.”

There was no wind to blow him nearer to the tree, so there he stayed. He could

see the honey, he could smell the honey, but he couldn’t quite reach the honey.

After a little while he called down to you.

“Christopher Robin!” he said in a loud whisper.

“Hallo!”

“I think the bees suspect something!”

“What sort of thing?”

“I don’t know. But something tells me that they’re suspicious!”

“Perhaps they think that you’re after their honey?”

“It may be that. You never can tell with bees.”

There was another little silence, and then he called down to you again.

“Christopher Robin!”

“Yes?”

“Have you an umbrella in your house?”

“I think so.”

“I wish you would bring it out here, and walk up and down with it, and look up

at me every now and then, and say ‘Tut-tut, it looks like rain.’ I think, if you

did that, it would help the deception which we are practising on these bees.”

Well, you laughed to yourself, “Silly old Bear !” but you didn’t say it aloud

because you were so fond of him, and you went home for your umbrella.

“Oh, there you are!” called down Winnie-the-Pooh, as soon as you got back to the

tree. “I was beginning to get anxious. I have discovered that the bees are now

definitely Suspicious.”

“Shall I put my umbrella up?” you said.

“Yes, but wait a moment. We must be practical. The important bee to deceive is

the Queen Bee. Can you see which is the Queen Bee from down

there?”

“No.”

“A pity. Well, now, if you walk up and down with your umbrella, saying,

‘Tut-tut, it looks like rain,’ I shall do what I can by singing a little Cloud

Song, such as a cloud might sing. . . . Go!”

So, while you walked up and down and wondered if it would rain, Winnie-the-Pooh

sang this song:

How sweet to be a Cloud

Floating in the Blue!

Every little cloud

Always sings aloud.

“How sweet to be a Cloud

Floating in the Blue!”

It makes him very proud

To be a little cloud.

The bees were still buzzing as suspiciously as ever. Some of them, indeed, left

their nests and flew all round the cloud as it began the second verse of this

song, and one bee sat down on the nose of the cloud for a moment, and then got

up again.

“Christopher–ow!–Robin,” called out the cloud.

“Yes?”

“I have just been thinking, and I have come to a very important decision. These

are the wrong sort of bees.”

“Are they?”

 

“Quite the wrong sort. So I should think they would make the wrong sort of

honey, shouldn’t you?”

“Would they?”

“Yes. So I think I shall come down.”

“How?” asked you.

Winnie-the-Pooh hadn’t thought about this. If he let go of the string, he would

fall–bump–and he didn’t like the idea of that. So he thought for a long time,

and then he said:

“Christopher Robin, you must shoot the balloon with your gun. Have you got your

gun?”

“Of course I have,” you said. “But if I do that, it will spoil the balloon,” you

said. But if you don’t” said Pooh, “I shall have to let go, and that would spoil

me.”

When he put it like this, you saw how it was, and you aimed very carefully at

the balloon, and fired.

“Ow!” said Pooh.

“Did I miss?” you asked.

“You didn’t exactly miss,” said Pooh, “but you missed the balloon.”

“I’m so sorry,” you said, and you fired again, and this time you hit the balloon

and the air came slowly out, and Winnie-the-Pooh floated down to the ground.

But his arms were so stiff from holding on to the string of the balloon all that

time that they stayed up straight in the air for more than a week, and whenever

a fly came and settled on his nose he had to blow it off. And I think–but I am

not sure–that that is why he was always called Pooh.

“Is that the end of the story?” asked Christopher Robin.

“That’s the end of that one. There are others.”

“About Pooh and Me?”

“And Piglet and Rabbit and all of you. Don’t you remember?”

“I do remember, and then when I try to remember, I forget.”

“That day when Pooh and Piglet tried to catch the Heffalump–”

“They didn’t catch it, did they?”

“No.”

“Pooh couldn’t, because he hasn’t any brain. Did I catch it?”

“Well, that comes into the story.”

Christopher Robin nodded.

“I do remember,” he said, “only Pooh doesn’t very well, so that’s why he likes

having it told to him again. Because then it’s a real story and not just a

remembering.”

“That’s just how I feel,” I said.

Christopher Robin gave a deep sigh, picked his Bear up by the leg, and walked

off to the door, trailing Pooh behind him. At the door he turned and said,

“Coming to see me have my bath?” “I didn’t hurt him when I shot him, did I?”

“Not a bit.” He nodded and went out, and in a moment I heard

Winnie-the-Pooh–bump, bump, bump–going up the stairs behind him.

 

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 2

…IN WHICH POOH GOES VISITING AND GETS INTO A TIGHT PLACE

 

 

EDWARD BEAR, known to his friends as Winnie-the-Pooh, or Pooh for short, was

walking through the forest one day, humming proudly to himself. He had made up a

little hum that very morning, as he was doing his Stoutness Exercises in front

of the glass: Tra-la-la, tra-la-la, as he stretched up as high as he could go,

and then Tra-la-la, tra-la–oh, help!–la, as he tried to reach his toes. After

breakfast he had said it over and over to himself until he had learnt it off by

heart, and now he was humming it right through, properly. It went like this:

Tra-la-la, tra-la-la,

 

Tra-la-la, tra-la-la,

Rum-tum-tiddle-um-tum.

Tiddle-iddle, tiddle-iddle,

Tiddle-iddle, tiddle-iddle,

Rum-tum-tum-tiddle-um.

Well, he was humming this hum to himself, and walking along gaily, wondering

what everybody else was doing, and what it felt like, being somebody else, when

suddenly he came to a sandy bank, and in the bank was a large hole.

“Aha !” said Pooh. (Rum-tum-tiddle-um-tum.) “If I know anything about anything,

that hole means Rabbit,” he said, “and Rabbit means Company,” he said, “and

Company means Food and Listening-to-Me-Humming and such like.

Rum-tum-tum-tiddle-um.

So he bent down, put his head into the hole, and called out:

“Is anybody at home?”

There was a sudden scuffling noise from inside the hole, and then silence.

“What I said was, ‘Is anybody at home?'” called out Pooh very loudly.

“No!” said a voice; and then added, “You needn’t shout so loud. I heard you

quite well the first time.”

“Bother!” said Pooh. “Isn’t there anybody here at all?”

“Nobody.”

Winnie-the-Pooh took his head out of the hole, and thought for a little, and he

thought to himself, “There must be somebody there, because somebody must have

said ‘Nobody.'” So he put his head back in the hole, and said: “Hallo, Rabbit,

isn’t that you?”

“No,” said Rabbit, in a different sort of voice this time.

“But isn’t that Rabbit’s voice?”

“I don’t think so,” said Rabbit. “It isn’t meant to be.”

“Oh!” said Pooh.

He took his head out of the hole, and had another think, and then he put it

back, and said:

“Well, could you very kindly tell me where Rabbit is?”

“He has gone to see his friend Pooh Bear, who is a great friend of his.”

“But this is Me!” said Bear, very much surprised.

“What sort of Me?”

“Pooh Bear.”

“Are you sure?” said Rabbit, still more surprised.

“Quite, quite sure,” said Pooh.

“Oh, well, then, come in.”

So Pooh pushed and pushed and pushed his way through the hole, and at last he

got in.

“You were quite right,” said Rabbit, looking at him all over. “It is you. Glad

to see you.”

“Who did you think it was?”

“Well, I wasn’t sure. You know how it is in the Forest. One can’t have anybody

coming into one’s house. One has to be careful. What about a mouthful of

something?”

Pooh always liked a little something at eleven o’clock in the morning, and he

was very glad to see Rabbit getting out the plates and mugs; and when Rabbit

said, “Honey or condensed milk with your bread?” he was so excited that he said,

“Both,” and then, so as not to seem greedy, he added, “But don’t bother about

the bread, please.” And for a long time after that he said nothing . . . until

at last, humming to himself in a rather sticky voice, he got up, shook Rabbit

lovingly by the paw, and said that he must be going on.

“Must you?” said Rabbit politely

“Well,” said Pooh, “I could stay a little longer if it–if you—-” and he tried

very hard to look in the direction of the larder.

“As a matter of fact,” said Rabbit, “I was going out myself directly.”

 

 

“Oh well, then, I’ll be going on. Good-bye.”

“Well, good-bye, if you’re sure you won’t have any more.”

“Is there any more?” asked Pooh quickly.

Rabbit took the covers off the dishes, and said, “No, there wasn’t.”

“I thought not,” said Pooh, nodding to himself “Well, good-bye. I must be going

on.”

So he started to climb out of the hole. He pulled with his front paws, and

pushed with his back paws, and in a little while his nose was out in the open

again . . . and then his ears . . . and then his front paws . . . and then his

shoulders . . . and then–

“Oh, help!” said Pooh. “I’d better go back.”

“Oh, bother!” said Pooh. “I shall have to go on.”

“I can’t do either!” said Pooh. “Oh, help and bother!”

Now, by this time Rabbit wanted to go for a walk too, and finding the front door

full, he went out by the back door, and came round to Pooh, and looked at him.

“Hallo, are you stuck?” he asked.

“N-no,” said Pooh carelessly. “Just resting and thinking and humming to myself.”

“Here, give us a paw.”

Pooh Bear stretched out a paw, and Rabbit pulled and pulled and pulled….

“0w!” cried Pooh. “You’re hurting!”

“The fact is,” said Rabbit, “you’re stuck.”

“It all comes,” said Pooh crossly, “of not having front doors big enough.”

“It all comes,” said Rabbit sternly, “of eating too much. I thought at the

time,” said Rabbit, “only I didn’t like to say anything,” said Rabbit, “that one

of us has eating too much,” said Rabbit, “and I knew it wasn’t me,” he said.

“Well, well, I shall go and fetch Christopher Robin.”

Christopher Robin lived at the other end of the Forest, and when he came back

with Rabbit, and saw the front half of Pooh, he said, “Silly old Bear,” in such

a loving voice that everybody felt quite hopeful again.

“I was just beginning to think,” said Bear, sniffing slightly, “that Rabbit

might never be able to use his front door again. And I should hate that,” he

said.

“So should I,” said Rabbit.

“Use his front door again?” said Christopher Robin. “Of course he’ll use his

front door again. “Good,” said Rabbit.

“If we can’t pull you out, Pooh, we might push you back.”

Rabbit scratched his whiskers thoughtfully, and pointed out that, when once Pooh

was pushed back, he was back, and of course nobody was

more glad to see Pooh than he was, still there it was, some lived in trees and

some lived underground, and–

“You mean I’d never get out?” said Pooh.

“I mean,” said Rabbit, “that having got so far, it seems a pity to waste it.”

Christopher Robin nodded.

“Then there’s only one thing to be done,” he said. “We shall have to wait for

you to get thin again.”

“How long does getting thin take?” asked Pooh anxiously.

“About a week, I should think.”

“But I can’t stay here for a week!”

“You can stay here all right, silly old Bear. It’s getting you out which is so

difficult.”

“We’ll read to you,” said Rabbit cheerfully. “And I hope it won’t snow,” he

added. “And I say, old fellow, you’re taking up a good deal of room in my

house–do you mind if I use your back legs as a towel-horse? Because, I mean,

there they are–doing nothing–and it would be very convenient just to hang the

towels on them.”

“A week!” said Pooh gloomily. “What about meals?”

“I’m afraid no meals,” said Christopher Robin, “because of getting thin quicker.

But we will read to you.”

Bear began to sigh, and then found he couldn’t because he was so tightly stuck;

and a tear rolled down his eye, as he said:

“Then would you read a Sustaining Book, such as would help and comfort a Wedged

 

Bear in Great Tightness?” So for a week Christopher

Robin read that sort of book at the North end of Pooh, and Rabbit hung his

washing on the South end . . . and in between Bear felt himself getting

slenderer and slenderer. And at the end of the week Christopher Robin said,

“Now!”

So he took hold of Pooh’s front paws and Rabbit took hold of Christopher Robin,

and all Rabbit’s friends and relations took hold of Rabbit, and they all pulled

together….

And for a long time Pooh only said “Ow!” . . .

And “Oh!” . . .

And then, all of a sudden, he said “Pop!” just as if a cork were coming out of

bottle.

And Christopher Robin and Rabbit and all Rabbit’s friends and relations went

head-over-heels backwards . . . and on the top of them came

Winnie-the-Pooh–free!

So, with a nod of thanks to his friends, he went on with his walk through the

forest, humming proudly to himself. But, Christopher Robin looked after him

lovingly, and said to himself, “Silly old Bear!”

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 3

…IN WHICH POOH AND PIGLET GO HUNTING AND NEARLY CATCH A WOOZLE

 

 

THE Piglet lived in a very grand house in the middle of a beech-tree, and the

beech-tree was in the middle of the forest, and the Piglet lived in the middle

of the house. Next to his house was a piece of broken board which had:

“TRESPASSERS W” on it. When Christopher Robin asked the Piglet what it meant, he

said it was his grandfather’s name, and had been in the family for a long time.

Christopher Robin said you couldn’t be called Trespassers W, and Piglet said

yes, you could, because his grandfather was, and it was short for Trespassers

Will, which was short for Trespassers William. And his grandfather had had two

names in case he lost one–Trespassers after an uncle, and William after

Trespassers.

“I’ve got two names,” said Christopher Robin carelessly.

“Well, there you are, that proves it,” said Piglet.

One fine winter’s day when Piglet was brushing away the snow in front of his

house, he happened to look up, and there was Winnie-the-Pooh. Pooh was walking

round and round in a circle, thinking of something else, and when Piglet called

to him, he just went on walking.

“Hallo!” said Piglet, “what are you doing?”

“Hunting,” said Pooh.

“Hunting what?”

“Tracking something,” said Winnie-the-Pooh very mysteriously.

“Tracking what?” said Piglet, coming closer

“That’s just what I ask myself. I ask myself, What?”

“What do you think you’ll answer?”

“I shall have to wait until I catch up with it,” said Winnie-the-Pooh. “Now,

look there.” He pointed to the ground in front of him. “What do you see there?”

“Tracks,” said Piglet. “Paw-marks.” He gave a little squeak of excitement. “Oh,

Pooh! Do you think it’s a–a–a Woozle?”

“It may be,” said Pooh. “Sometimes it is, and sometimes it isn’t. You never can

tell with paw- marks.”

With these few words he went on tracking, and Piglet, after watching him for a

minute or two, ran after him. Winnie-the-Pooh had come to a sudden stop, and was

bending over the tracks in a puzzled sort of way.

“What’s the matter?” asked Piglet.

“It’s a very funny thing,” said Bear, “but there seem to be two animals now.

 

This–whatever-it-was–has been joined by another–whatever-it-is–

and the two of them are now proceeding in company. Would you mind coming with

me, Piglet, in case they turn out to be Hostile Animals?”

Piglet scratched his ear in a nice sort of way, and said that he had nothing to

do until Friday, and would be delighted to come, in case it really was a Woozle.

“You mean, in case it really is two Woozles,” said Winnie-the-Pooh, and Piglet

said that anyhow he had nothing to do until Friday. So off they went together.

There was a small spinney of larch trees just here, and it seemed as if the two

Woozles, if that is what they were, had been going round this spinney; so round

this spinney went Pooh and Piglet after them; Piglet passing the time by telling

Pooh what his Grandfather Trespassers W had done to Remove Stiffness after

Tracking, and how his Grandfather Trespassers W had suffered in his later years

from Shortness of Breath, and other matters of interest, and Pooh wondering what

a Grandfather was like, and if perhaps this was Two Grandfathers they were after

now, and, if so, whether he would be allowed to take one home and keep it, and

what Christopher Robin would say. And still the tracks went on in front of

them….

Suddenly Winnie-the-Pooh stopped, and pointed excitedly in front of him. “Look!”

“What?” said Piglet, with a jump. And then, to show that he hadn’t been

frightened, he jumped up and down once or twice more in an exercising sort of

way.

“The tracks!” said Pooh. “A third animal has joined the other two!” “Pooh!”

cried Piglet “Do you think it is another Woozle?”

“No,” said Pooh, “because it makes different marks. It is either Two Woozles and

one, as it might be, Wizzle, or Two, as it might be, Wizzles and one, if so it

is, Woozle. Let us continue to follow them.”

So they went on, feeling just a little anxious now, in case the three animals in

front of them were of Hostile Intent. And Piglet wished very much that his

Grandfather T. W. were there, instead of elsewhere, and Pooh thought how nice it

would be if they met Christopher Robin suddenly but quite accidentally, and only

because he liked Christopher Robin so much. And then, all of a sudden,

Winnie-the-Pooh stopped again, and licked the tip of his nose in a cooling

manner, for he was feeling more hot and anxious than ever in his life before.

There were four animals in front of them!

“Do you see, Piglet? Look at their tracks! Three, as it were, Woozles, and one,

as it was, Wizzle. Another Woozle has joined them!”

And so it seemed to be. There were the tracks; crossing over each other here,

getting muddled up with each other there; but, quite plainly every now and then,

the tracks of four sets of paws.

“I think,” said Piglet, when he had licked the tip of his nose too, and found

that it brought very little comfort, “I think that I have just remembered

something. I have just remembered something that I forgot to do yesterday and

sha’n’t be able to do to-morrow. So I suppose I really ought to go back and do

it now.”

FACE=”Arial”> “We’ll do it this afternoon, and I’ll come with you,” said Pooh.

“It isn’t the sort of thing you can do in the afternoon,” said Piglet quickly.

“It’s a very particular morning thing, that has to be done in the morning, and,

if possible, between the hours of What would you say the time was?”

“About twelve,” said Winnie-the-Pooh, looking at the sun.

“Between, as I was saying, the hours of twelve and twelve five. So, really, dear

old Pooh, if you’ll excuse me– What’s that.”

Pooh looked up at the sky, and then, as he heard the whistle again, he looked up

into the branches of a big oak-tree, and then he saw a friend of his.

“It’s Christopher Robin,” he said.

“Ah, then you’ll be all right,” said Piglet.

“You’ll be quite safe with him. Good-bye,” and he trotted off home as quickly as

he could, very glad to be Out of All Danger again.

Christopher Robin came slowly down his tree.

“Silly old Bear,” he said, “what were you doing? First you went round the

spinney twice by yourself, and then Piglet ran after you and you went round

again together, and then you were just going round a fourth time”

 

“Wait a moment,” said Winnie-the-Pooh, holding up his paw.

He sat down and thought, in the most thoughtful way he could think. Then he

fitted his paw into one of the Tracks . . . and then he scratched his nose

twice, and stood up.

“Yes,” said Winnie-the-Pooh.

“I see now,” said Winnie-the-Pooh.

“I have been Foolish and Deluded,” said he, “and I am a Bear of No Brain at

All.”

“You’re the Best Bear in All the World,” said Christopher Robin soothingly.

“Am I?” said Pooh hopefully. And then he brightened up suddenly.

“Anyhow,” he said, “it is nearly Luncheon Time.”

So he went home for it.

 

 

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 4

…IN WHICH EEYORE LOSES A TAIL AND POOH FINDS ONE

 

 

 

THE Old Grey Donkey, Eeyore, stood by himself in a thistly corner of the forest,

his front feet well apart, his head on one side, and thought about things.

Sometimes he thought sadly to himself, “Why?” and sometimes he thought,

“Wherefore?” and sometimes he thought, “Inasmuch as which?”–and sometimes he

didn’t quite know what he was thinking about. So when Winnie-the-Pooh came

stumping along, Eeyore was very glad to be able to stop thinking for a little,

in order to say “How do you do?” in a gloomy manner to him.

“And how are you?” said Winnie-the-Pooh.

Eeyore shook his head from side to side.

“Not very how,” he said. “I don’t seem to have felt at all how for a long time.”

“Dear, dear,” said Pooh, “I’m sorry about that. Let’s have a look at you.” So

Eeyore stood there, gazing sadly at the ground, and Winnie-the-Pooh walked all

round him once.

“Why, what’s happened to your tail?” he said in surprise.

“What has happened to it?” said Eeyore.

“It isn’t there!”

“Are you sure?”

“Well, either a tail is there or it isn’t there You can’t make a mistake about

it. And yours isn’t there!”

“Then what is?”

“Nothing.”

“Let’s have a look,” said Eeyore, and he turned slowly round to the place where

his tail had been a little while ago, and then, finding that he couldn’t catch

it up, he turned round the other way, until he came back to where he was at

first, and then he put his head down and looked between his front legs, and at

last he said, with a long, sad sigh, “I believe you’re right”

“Of course I’m right,” said Pooh

“That accounts for a Good Deal,” said Eeyore gloomily. “It explains Everything.

No Wonder.”

“You must have left it somewhere,” said Winnie-the-Pooh.

“Somebody must have taken it,” said Eeyore.

“How Like Them,” he added, after a long silence. Pooh felt that he ought to say

something helpful about it, but didn’t quite know what.

So he decided to do something helpful instead.

“Eeyore,” he said solemnly, “I, Winnie-the-Pooh, will find your tail for you.”

“Thank you, Pooh,” answered Eeyore. “You’re a real friend,” said he. “Not like

Some,” he said.

So Winnie-the-Pooh went off to find Eeyore’s tail.

It was a fine spring morning in the forest as he started out. Little soft clouds

played happily in a blue sky, skipping from time to time in front of the sun as

if they had come to put it out, and then sliding away suddenly so that the next

 

might have his turn. Through them and between them the sun shone bravely, and a

copse which had worn its firs all the year round seemed old and dowdy now beside

the new green lace which the beeches had put on so prettily. Through copse and

spinney marched Bear; down open slopes of gorse and heather, over rocky beds of

streams, up steep banks of sandstone into the heather again; and so at last,

tired and hungry, to the Hundred Acre Wood. For it was in the Hundred Acre Wood

that Owl lived.

“And if anyone knows anything about anything,” said Bear to himself, “it’s Owl

who knows something about something,” he said, “or my name’s not

Winnie-the-Pooh,” he said. “Which it is,” he added. “So there you are.”

Owl lived at The Chestnuts, and old-world residence of great charm, which was

grander than anybody else’s, or seemed so to Bear, because it had both a knocker

and a bell-pull. Underneath the knocker there was a notice which said:

PLES RING IF AN RNSER IS REQIRD.

Underneath the bell-pull there was a notice which said:

PLEZ CNOKE IF AN RNSR IS NOT REQID.

These notices had been written by Christopher Robin, who was the only one in the

forest who could spell; for Owl, wise though he was in many ways, able to read

and write and spell his own name WOL, yet somehow went all to pieces over

delicate words like MEASLES and BUTTEREDTOAST.

Winnie-the-Pooh read the two notices very carefully, first from left to right,

and afterwards, in case he had missed some of it, from right to left. Then, to

make quite sure, he knocked and pulled the knocker, and he pulled and knocked

the bell-rope, and he called out in a very loud voice, “Owl! I require an

answer! It’s Bear speaking.” And the door opened, and Owl looked out.

“Hallo, Pooh,” he said. “How’s things?”

“Terrible and Sad,” said Pooh, “because Eeyore, who is a friend of mine, has

lost his tail. And he’s Moping about it. So could you very kindly tell me how to

find it for him?”

“Well,” said Owl, “the customary procedure in such cases is as follows.”

“What does Crustimoney Proseedcake mean?” said Pooh. “For I am a Bear of Very

Little Brain, and long words Bother me.”

“It means the Thing to Do.”

“As long as it means that, I don’t mind,” said Pooh humbly.

“The thing to do is as follows. First, Issue a Reward. Then–”

“Just a moment,” said Pooh, holding up his paw. “What do we do to this–what you

were saying? You sneezed just as you were going to tell me.”

“I didn’t sneeze.”

“Yes, you did, Owl.”

“Excuse me, Pooh, I didn’t. You can’t sneeze without knowing it.”

“Well, you can’t know it without something having been sneezed.”

“What I said was, ‘First Issue a Reward’.”

“You’re doing it again,” said Pooh sadly.

“A Reward!” said Owl very loudly. “We write a notice to say that we will give a

large something to anybody who finds Eeyore’s tail.”

“I see, I see,” said Pooh, nodding his head. “Talking about large somethings,”

he went on dreamily, “I generally have a small something about now–about this

time in the morning,” and he looked wistfully at the cupboard in the corner of

Owl’s parlour; “just a mouthful of condensed milk or whatnot, with perhaps a

lick of honey–”

“Well, then,” said Owl, “we write out this notice, and we put it up all over the

Forest.”

“A lick of honey,” murmured Bear to himself, “or–or not, as the case may be.”

And he gave a deep sigh, and tried very hard to listen to what Owl was saying.

But Owl went on and on, using longer and longer words, until at last he came

back to where he started, and he explained that the person to write out this

 

notice was Christopher Robin.

“It was he who wrote the ones on my front door for me. Did you see them, Pooh?”

For some time now Pooh had been saying “Yes” and “No” in turn, with his eyes

shut, to all that Owl was saying, and having said, “Yes, yes,” last time, he

said “No, not at all,” now, without really knowing what Owl was talking about?

“Didn’t you see them?” said Owl, a little surprised. “Come and look at them

now.”

So they went outside. And Pooh looked at the knocker and the notice below it,

and he looked at the bell-rope and the notice below it, and the more he looked

at the bell-rope, the more he felt that he had seen something like it, somewhere

else, sometime before.

“Handsome bell-rope, isn’t it?” said Owl.

Pooh nodded.

“It reminds me of something,” he said, “but I can’t think what. Where did you

get it?”

“I just came across it in the Forest. It was hanging over a bush, and I thought

at first somebody lived there, so I rang it, and nothing happened, and then I

rang it again very loudly, and it came off in my hand, and as nobody seemed to

want it, I took it home, and”

“Owl,” said Pooh solemnly, “you made a mistake. Somebody did want it.”

“Who?”

“Eeyore. My dear friend Eeyore. He was–he was fond of it.”

“Fond of it?”

“Attached to it,” said Winnie-the-Pooh sadly.

So with these words he unhooked it, and carried it back to Eeyore; and when

Christopher Robin had nailed it on its right place again, Eeyore frisked about

the forest, waving his tail so happily that Winnie-the-Pooh came over all funny,

and had to hurry home for a little snack of something to sustain him. And wiping

his mouth half an hour afterwards, he sang to himself proudly:

Who found the Tail?

“I,” said Pooh,

“At a quarter to two

(Only it was quarter to eleven really),

I found the Tail!”

 

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 5

…IN WHICH PIGLET MEETS A HEFFALUMP

 

 

ONE day, when Christopher Robin and Winnie-the-Pooh and Piglet were all talking

together, Christopher Robin finished the mouthful he was eating and said

carelessly: “I saw a Heffalump to-day, Piglet.”

“What was it doing?” asked Piglet.

“Just lumping along,” said Christopher Robin. “I don’t think it saw me.”

“I saw one once,” said Piglet. “At least, I think I did,” he said. “Only perhaps

it wasn’t.”

“So did I,” said Pooh, wondering what a Heffalump was like.

“You don’t often see them,” said Christopher Robin carelessly.

“Not now,” said Piglet.

“Not at this time of year,” said Pooh.

Then they all talked about something else, until it was time for Pooh and Piglet

to go home together. At first as they stumped along the path which edged the

Hundred Acre Wood, they didn’t say much to each other; but when they came to the

stream, and had helped each other across the stepping stones, and were able to

walk side by side again over the heather, they began to talk in a friendly way

about this and that, and Piglet said, “If you see what I mean, Pooh,” and Pooh

said, “It’s just what I think myself, Piglet,” and Piglet said, “But, on the

other hand, Pooh, we must remember,” and Pooh said, “Quite true, Piglet,

 

although I had forgotten it for the moment.” And then, just as they came to the

Six Pine Trees, Pooh looked round to see that nobody else was listening, and

said in a very solemn voice: “Piglet, I have decided something.’

“What have you decided, Pooh?”

“I have decided to catch a Heffalump.”

Pooh nodded his head several times as he said this, and waited for Piglet to say

“How?” or “Pooh, you couldn’t!” or something helpful of that sort, but Piglet

said nothing. The fact was Piglet was wishing that he had thought about it

first.

“I shall do it,” said Pooh, after waiting a little longer, “by means of a trap.

And it must be a Cunning Trap, so you will have to help me, Piglet.”

“Pooh,” said Piglet, feeling quite happy again now, “I will.” And then he said,

“How shall we do it?” and Pooh said, “That’s just it. How?” And then they sat

down together to think it out.

Pooh’s first idea was that they should dig a Very Deep Pit, and then the

Heffalump would come along and fall into the Pit, and–

“Why?” said Piglet.

“Why what?” said Pooh.

“Why would he fall in?”

Pooh rubbed his nose with his paw, and said that the Heffalump might be walking

along, humming a little song, and looking up at the sky, wondering if it would

rain, and so he wouldn’t see the Very Deep Pit until he was half-way down, when

it would be too late.

Piglet said that this was a very good Trap, but supposing it were raining

already?

Pooh rubbed his nose again, and said that he hadn’t thought of that. And then he

brightened up, and said that, if it were raining already, the Heffalump would be

looking at the sky wondering if it would clear up, and so he wouldn’t see the

Very Deep Pit until he was half-way down…. When it would be too late.

Piglet said that, now that this point had been explained, he thought it was a

Cunning Trap.

Pooh was very proud when he heard this, and he felt that the Heffalump was as

good as caught already, but there was just one other thing which had to be

thought about, and it was this. Where should they dig the Very Deep Pit?

Piglet said that the best place would be somewhere where a Heffalump was, just

before he fell into it, only about a foot farther on.

“But then he would see us digging it,” said Pooh.

“Not if he was looking at the sky.”

“He would Suspect,” said Pooh, “if he happened to look down.” He thought for a

long time and then added sadly, “It isn’t as easy as I thought. I suppose that’s

why Heffalumps hardly ever get caught.”

“That must be it,” said Piglet.

They sighed and got up; and when they had taken a few gorse prickles out of

themselves they sat down again; and all the time Pooh was saying to himself, “If

only I could think of something!” For he felt sure that a Very Clever Brain

could catch a Heffalump if only he knew the right way to go about it. “Suppose,”

he said to Piglet, “you wanted to catch me, how would you do it?”

“Well,” said Piglet, “I should do it like this. I should make a Trap, and I

should put a Jar of Honey in the Trap, and you would smell it, and you would go

in after it, and–”

“And I would go in after it,” said Pooh excitedly, “only very carefully so as

not to hurt myself, and I would get to the Jar of Honey, and I should lick round

the edges first of all, pretending that there wasn’t any more, you know, and

then I should walk away and think about it a little, and then I should come back

and start licking in the middle of the jar, and then–”

“Yes, well never mind about that where you would be, and there I should catch

you. Now the first thing to think of is, What do Heffalumps like? I should think

acorns, shouldn’t you? We’ll get a lot of– I say, wake up, Pooh!”

Pooh, who had gone into a happy dream, woke up with a start, and said that Honey

was a much more trappy thing than Haycorns. Piglet didn’t think so; and they

were just going to argue about it, when Piglet remembered that, if they put

 

acorns in the Trap, he would have to find the acorns, but if they put honey,

then Pooh would have to give up some of his own honey, so he said, “All right,

honey then,” just as Pooh remembered it too, and was going to say, “All right,

haycorns.” “Honey,” said Piglet to himself in a thoughtful way, as if it were

now settled. “I’ll dig the pit, while you go and get the honey.”

“Very well,” said Pooh, and he stumped off.

As soon as he got home, he went to the larder; and he stood on a chair, and took

down a very large jar of honey from the top shelf. It had HUNNY written on it,

but, just to make sure, he took off the paper cover and looked at it, and it

looked just like honey. “But you never can tell,” said Pooh. “I remember my

uncle saying once that he had seen cheese just this colour.” So he put his

tongue in, and took a large lick. “Yes,” he said, “it is. No doubt about that.

And honey, I should say, right down to the bottom of the jar. Unless, of

course,” he said, “somebody put cheese in at the bottom just for a joke. Perhaps

I had better go a little further . . . just in case . . . in case Heffalumps

don’t like cheese . . . same as me. . . . Ah!” And he

gave a deep sigh. “I was right. It is honey, right the way down.”

Having made certain of this, he took the jar back to Piglet, and Piglet looked

up from the bottom of his Very Deep Pit, and said, “Got it?” and Pooh said,

“Yes, but it isn’t quite a full jar,” and he threw it down to Piglet, and Piglet

said, “No, it isn’t! Is that all you’ve got left?” and Pooh said, “Yes.” Because

it was. So Piglet put the jar at the bottom of the Pit, and climbed out, and

they went off home together.

“Well, good night, Pooh,” said Piglet, when they had got to Pooh’s house. “And

we meet at six o’clock to-morrow morning by the Pine Trees, and see how many

Heffalumps we’ve got in our Trap.”

“Six o’clock, Piglet. And have you got any string?”

“No. Why do you want string?”

“To lead them home with.”

“Oh! . . . I think Heffalumps come if you whistle.”

“Some do and some don’t. You never can tell with Heffalumps. Well, good night!”

“Good night!”

And off Piglet trotted to his house TRESPASSERS W, while Pooh made his

preparations for bed.

Some hours later, just as the night was beginning to steal away, Pooh woke up

suddenly with a sinking feeling. He had had that sinking feeling before, and he

knew what it meant. He was hungry. So he went to the larder, and he stood on a

chair and reached up to the top shelf, and

found–nothing.

“That’s funny,” he thought. “I know I had a jar of honey there. A full jar, full

of honey right up to the top, and it had HUNNY written on it, so that I should

know it was honey. That’s very funny.” And then he began to wander up and down,

wondering where it was and murmuring a murmur to himself. Like this:

It’s very, very funny,

‘Cos I know I had some honey :

‘Cos it had a label on,

Saying HUNNY,

A goloptious full-up pot too,

And I don’t know where it’s got to,

No, I don’t know where it’s gone–

Well, it’s funny.

He had murmured this to himself three times in a singing sort of way, when

suddenly he remembered. He had put it into the Cunning Trap to catch the

Heffalump.

“Bother!” said Pooh. “It all comes of trying to be kind to Heffalumps.” And he

got back into bed.

But he couldn’t sleep. The more he tried to sleep, the more he couldn’t. He

tried Counting Sheep, which is sometimes a good way of getting to sleep, and, as

that was no good, he tried counting Heffalumps. And that was worse. Because

 

every Heffalump that he counted was making straight for a pot of Pooh’s honey,

and eating it all. For some minutes he lay there miserably, but when the five

hundred and eighty-seventh Heffalump was licking its jaws, and saying to itself,

“Very good honey this, I don’t know when I’ve tasted better,” Pooh could bear it

no longer. He jumped out of bed, he ran out of the house, and he ran straight to

the Six Pine Trees.

The Sun was still in bed, but there was a lightness in the sky over the Hundred

Acre Wood which seemed to show that it was waking up and would soon be kicking

off the clothes. In the half-light the Pine Trees looked cold and lonely, and

the Very Deep Pit seemed deeper than it was, and Pooh’s jar of honey at the

bottom was something mysterious, a shape and no more. But as he got nearer lo it

his nose told him that it was indeed honey, and his tongue came out and began to

polish up his mouth, ready for it.

“Bother!” said Pooh, as he got his nose inside the jar. “A Heffalump has been

eating it!” And then he thought a little and said, “Oh, no, I did. I forgot.”

Indeed, he had eaten most of it. But there was a little left at the very bottom

of the jar, and he pushed his head right in, and began to lick….

By and by Piglet woke up. As soon as he woke he said to himself, “Oh!” Then he

said bravely, “Yes,” and then, still more bravely, “Quite so.” But he didn’t

feel very brave, for the word which was really jiggeting about in his brain was

“Heffalumps.”

What was a Heffalump like?

Was it Fierce?

Did it come when you whistled? And how did it come?

Was it Fond of Pigs at all?

If it was Fond of Pigs, did it make any difference what sort of Pig?

Supposing it was Fierce with Pigs, would it make any difference if the Pig had a

grandfather called TRESPASSERS WILLIAM?

He didn’t know the answer to any of these questions . . . and he was going to

see his first Heffalump in about an hour from now!

Of course Pooh would be with him, and it was much more Friendly with two. But

suppose Heffalumps were Very Fierce with Pigs and Bears?

Wouldn’t it be better to pretend that he had a headache, and couldn’t go up to

the Six Pine Trees this morning? But then suppose that it was a very fine day,

and there was no Heffalump in the trap, here he would be, in bed all the

morning, simply wasting his time for nothing. What should he do?

And then he had a Clever Idea. He would go up very quietly to the Six Pine Trees

now, peep very cautiously into the Trap, and see if there was a Heffalump there.

And if there was, he would go back to bed, and if there wasn’t, he wouldn’t.

So off he went. At first he thought that there wouldn’t be a Heffalump in the

Trap, and then he thought that there would, and as he got nearer he was sure

that there would, because he could hear it heffalumping about it like anything.

“Oh, dear, oh, dear, oh, dear!” said Piglet to himself. And he wanted to run

away. But somehow, having got so near, he felt that he must just see what a

Heffalump was like. So he crept to the side of the Trap and looked in.

And all the time Winnie-the-Pooh had been trying to get the honey-jar off his

head. The more he shook it, the more tightly it stuck. “Bother!” he said, inside

the jar, and “Oh, help!” and, mostly, “Ow!” And he tried bumping it against

things, but as he couldn’t see what he was bumping it against, it didn’t help

him; and he tried to climb out of the Trap, but as he could see nothing but jar,

and not much of that, he couldn’t find his way. So at last he lifted up his

head, jar and all, and made a loud, roaring noise of Sadness and Despair . . .

and it was at that moment that Piglet looked down.

“Help, help!” cried Piglet, “a Heffalump, a Horrible Heffalump!” and he

scampered off as hard as he could, still crying out, “Help, help, a Herrible

Hoffalump! Hoff, Hoff, a Hellible Horralump! Holl, Holl, a Hoffable Hellerump!”

And he didn’t stop crying and scampering until he got to Christopher Robin’s

house.

 

“Whatever’s the matter, Piglet?” said Christopher Robin, who was just getting

up.

“Heff,” said Piglet, breathing so hard that he could hardly speak, “a Heff–a

Heff–a Heffalump.”

“Where?”

“Up there,” said Piglet, waving his paw.

“What did it look like?”

“Like–like—- It had the biggest head you ever saw, Christopher Robin. A great

enormous thing, like–like nothing. A huge big–well, like a–I don’t know–like

an enormous big nothing. Like a jar.”

“Well,” said Christopher Robin, putting on his shoes, “I shall go and look at

it. Come on.”

Piglet wasn’t afraid if he had Christopher Robin with him, so off they went….

“I can hear it, can’t you?” said Piglet anxiously, as they got near.

“I can hear something,” said Christopher Robin.

It was Pooh bumping his head against a tree-root he had found.

“There!” said Piglet. “Isn’t it awful?” And he held on tight to Christopher

Robin’s hand.

Suddenly Christopher Robin began to laugh . . . and he laughed . . and he

laughed . . . and he laughed. And while he was still laughing– Crash went the

Heffalump’s head against the tree-root, Smash went the jar, and out came Pooh’s

head again….

Then Piglet saw what a Foolish Piglet he had been, and he was so ashamed of

himself that he ran straight off home and went to bed with a headache. But

Christopher Robin and Pooh went home to breakfast together.

“Oh, Bear!” said Christopher Robin. “How I do love you!”

“So do I,” said Pooh.

 

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 6

…IN WHICH EEYORE HAS A BIRTHDAY AND GETS TWO PRESENTS

 

 

 

EEYORE, the old grey Donkey, stood by the side of the stream, and looked at

himself in the water.

“Pathetic,” he said. s’ That’s what it is. Pathetic.”

He turned and walked slowly down the stream for twenty yards, splashed across

it, and walked slowly back on the other side. Then he looked at himself in the

water again.

“As I thought,” he said. “No better from this side. But nobody minds. Nobody

cares. Pathetic, that’s what it is.”

There was a crackling noise in the bracken behind him, and out came Pooh.

“Good morning, Eeyore,” said Pooh.

“Good morning, Pooh Bear,” said Eeyore gloomily. “If it is a good morning,” he

said. “Which I doubt,” said he.

“Why, what’s the matter?”

“Nothing, Pooh Bear, nothing. We can’t all, and some of us don’t. That’s all

there is to it.”

“Can’t all what?” said Pooh, rubbing his nose.

“Gaiety. Song-and-dance. Here we go round the mulberry bush.”

“Oh!” said Pooh. He thought for a long time, and then asked, “What mulberry bush

is that?”

“Bon-hommy,” went on Eeyore gloomily. “French word meaning bonhommy,” he

explained. “I’m not complaining, but There It Is.”

Pooh sat down on a large stone, and tried to think this out. It sounded to him

like a riddle, and he was never much good at riddles, being a Bear of Very

Little Brain. So he sang Cottleston Pie instead:

Cottleslon, Cottleston, Cottleston Pie.

A fly can’t bird, but a bird can fly.

Ask me a riddle and I reply:

 

“Cottleston, Cottleston, Cottleston Pie.”

That was the first verse. When he had finished it, Eeyore didn’t actually say

that he didn’t like it, so Pooh very kindly sang the second verse to him:

Cottleston, Cottleston, Cottleston Pie,

A fish can’t whistle and neither can I.

Ask me a riddle and I reply:

“Cottleston, Cottleston, Cottleston Pie.”

Eeyore still said nothing at all, so Pooh hummed the third verse quietly to

himself:

Cottleston, Cottleston, Cottleston Pie,

Why does a chicken, I don’t know why.

Ask me a riddle and I reply:

“Cottleston, Cottleston, Cottleston Pie.”

“That’s right,” said Eeyore. “Sing. Umty-tiddly, umty-too. Here we go gathering

Nuts and May. Enjoy yourself.”

“I am,” said Pooh.

“Some can,” said Eeyore.

“Why, what’s the matter?”

“Is anything the matter?”

“You seem so sad, Eeyore.”

“Sad? Why should I be sad? It’s my birthday. The happiest day of the year.”

“Your birthday?” said Pooh in great surprise.

“Of course it is. Can’t you see? Look at all the presents I have had.” He waved

a foot from side to side. “Look at the birthday cake. Candles and pink sugar.”

Pooh looked–first to the right and then to the left.

“Presents?” said Pooh. “Birthday cake?” said Pooh. “Where?”

“Can’t you see them?”

“No,” said Pooh.

“Neither can I,” said Eeyore. “Joke,” he explained. “Ha ha!”

Pooh scratched his head, being a little puzzled by all this.

“But is it really your birthday?” he asked.

“It is.”

“Oh! Well, Many happy returns of the day, Eeyore.”

“And many happy returns to you, Pooh Bear.”

“But it isn’t my birthday.”

“No, it’s mine.”

“But you said ‘Many happy returns’–”

“Well, why not? You don’t always want to be miserable on my birthday, do you?”

“Oh, I see,” said Pooh.

“It’s bad enough.” said Eeyore. almost breaking down “being miserable myself,

what with no presents and no cake and no candles, and no proper notice taken of

me at all, but if everybody else is going to be miserable too—-”

This was too much for Pooh. “Stay there!” he called to Eeyore, as he turned and

hurried back home as quick as he could; for he felt that he must get poor Eeyore

a present of some sort at once, and he could always think of a proper one

afterwards.

Outside his house he found Piglet, jumping up and down trying to reach the

knocker.

“Hallo, Piglet,” he said.

“Hallo, Pooh,” said Piglet.

“What are you trying to do?”

“I was trying to reach the knocker,” said Piglet. “I just came round—-”

“Let me do it for you,” said Pooh kindly. So he reached up and knocked at the

door. “I have just seen Eeyore is in a Very Sad Condition, because it’s his

birthday, and nobody has taken any notice of it, and he’s very Gloomy–you know

what Eeyore is–and there he was, and—- What a long time whoever lives here is

 

answering this door.” And he knocked again.

“But Pooh,” said Piglet, “it’s your own house!”

“Oh!” said Pooh. “So it is,” he said. “Well, let’s go in.”

So in they went. The first thing Pooh did was to go to the cupboard to see if he

had quite a small jar of honey left; and he had, so he took it down.

“I’m giving this to Eeyore,” he explained, “as a present. What are you going to

give?”

“Couldn’t I give it too?” said Piglet. “From both of us?”

“No,” said Pooh. “That would not be a good plan.”

“All right, then, I’ll give him a balloon. I’ve got one left from my party. I’ll

go and get it now, shall I?”

“That, Piglet, is a very good idea. It is just what Eeyore wants to cheer him

up. Nobody can be uncheered with a balloon.”

So off Piglet trotted; and in the other direction went Pooh, with his jar of

honey.

It was a warm day, and he had a long way to go. He hadn’t gone more than

half-way when a sort of funny feeling began to creep all over him. It began at

the tip of his nose and trickled all through him and out at the soles of his

feet. It was just as if somebody inside him were saying, “Now then, Pooh, time

for a little something.”

“Dear, dear,” said Pooh, “I didn’t know it was as late as that.” So he sat down

and took the top off his jar of honey. “Lucky I brought this with me,” he

thought. “Many a bear going out on a warm day like this would never have thought

of bringing a little something with him.” And he began to eat.

“Now let me see,” he thought! as he took his last lick of the inside of the jar,

“Where was I going? Ah, yes, Eeyore.” He got up

slowly.

And then, suddenly, he remembered. He had eaten Eeyore’s birthday present!

“Bother!” said Pooh. “What shall I do? I must give him something.”

For a little while he couldn’t think of anything. Then he thought: “Well, it’s a

very nice pot, even if there’s no honey in it, and if I washed it clean, and got

somebody to write ‘A Happy Birthday’ on it, Eeyore could keep things in it,

which might be Useful.” So, as he was just passing the Hundred Acre Wood, he

went inside to call on Owl, who lived there.

“Good morning, Owl,” he said.

“Good morning, Pooh,” said Owl.

“Many happy returns of Eeyore’s birthday,” said Pooh.

“Oh, is that what it is?”

“What are you giving him, Owl?”

“What are you giving him, Pooh?”

“I’m giving him a Useful Pot to Keep Things In, and I wanted to ask you ”

“Is this it?” said Owl, taking it out of Pooh’s paw.

“Yes, and I wanted to ask you–”

“Somebody has been keeping honey in it,” said Owl.

“You can keep anything in it,” said Pooh earnestly. “It’s Very Useful like that.

And I wanted to ask you—-”

“You ought to write ‘A Happy Birthday’ on it.”

“That was what I wanted to ask you,” said Pooh. “Because my spelling is Wobbly.

It’s good spelling but it Wobbles, and the letters get in the wrong places.

Would you write ‘A Happy Birthday’ on it for me?”

“It’s a nice pot,” said Owl, looking at it all round. “Couldn’t I give it too?

From both of us?”

“No,” said Pooh. “That would not be a good plan. Now I’ll just wash it first,

and then you can write on it.”

Well, he washed the pot out, and dried it, while Owl licked the end of his

pencil, and wondered how to spell “birthday.”

“Can you read, Pooh?” he asked a little anxiously. “There’s a notice about

knocking and ringing outside my door, which Christopher Robin wrote. Could you

read it?”

“Christopher Robin told me what it said, and then I could.”

“Well, I’ll tell you what this says, and then you’ll be able to.”

So Owl wrote . . . and this is what he wrote:

HIPY PAPY BTHUTHDTH THUTHDA

BTHUTHDY.

Pooh looked on admiringly.

“I’m just saying ‘A Happy Birthday’,” said Owl carelessly.

“It’s a nice long one,” said Pooh, very much impressed by it.

“Well, actually, of course, I’m saying ‘A Very Happy Birthday with love from

Pooh.’ Naturally it takes a good deal of pencil to say a long thing like that.”

“Oh, I see,” said Pooh.

While all this was happening, Piglet had gone back to his own house to get

Eeyore’s balloon. He held it very tightly against himself, so that it shouldn’t

blow away, and he ran as fast as he could so as to get to Eeyore before Pooh

did; for he thought that he would like to be the first one to give a present,

just as if he had thought of it without being told by anybody. And running

along, and thinking how pleased Eeyore would be, he didn’t look where he was

going . . . and suddenly he put his foot in a rabbit hole, and fell down flat on

his face.

BANG!!!???***!!!

Piglet lay there, wondering what had happened. At first he thought that the

whole world had blown up; and then he thought that perhaps only the Forest part

of it had; and then he thought that perhaps only he had, and he was now alone in

the moon or somewhere, and would never see Christopher Robin or Pooh or Eeyore

again. And then he thought, “Well, even if I’m in the moon, I needn’t be face

downwards all the time,” so he got cautiously up and looked about him.

CE=”Arial”> He was still in the Forest!

“Well, that’s funny,” he thought. “I wonder what that bang was. I couldn’t have

made such a noise just falling down. And where’s my balloon? And what’s that

small piece of damp rag doing?”

It was the balloon!

“Oh, dear!” said Piglet. “Oh, dear, oh, dearie, dearie, dear! Well, it’s too

late now. I can’t go back, and I haven’t another balloon, and perhaps Eeyore

doesn’t like balloons so very much.”

So he trotted on, rather sadly now, and down he came to the side of the stream

where Eeyore was, and called out to him.

“Good morning, Eeyore,” shouted Piglet.

“Good morning, Little Piglet,” said Eeyore. “If it is a good morning,” he said.

“Which I doubt,” said he. “Not that it matters,” he said.

“Many happy returns of the day,” said Piglet, having now got closer.

Eeyore stopped looking at himself in the stream, and turned to stare at Piglet.

“Just say that again,” he said.

“Many hap–”

“Wait a moment.”

Balancing on three legs, he began to bring his fourth leg very cautiously up to

his ear. “I did this yesterday,” he explained, as he fell down for the third

time. “It’s quite easy. It’s so as I can hear better. … There, that’s done it!

Now then, what were you saying?” He pushed his ear forward with his hoof.

“Many happy returns of the day,” said Piglet again.

“Meaning me?”

“Of course, Eeyore.”

“My birthday?”

“Yes.”

“Me having a real birthday?”

“Yes, Eeyore, and I’ve brought you a present.”

Eeyore took down his right hoof from his right ear, turned round, and with great

difficulty put up his left hoof.

“I must have that in the other ear,” he said. “Now then.”

“A present,” said Piglet very loudly.

“Meaning me again?”

“Yes.”

“My birthday still?”

“Of course, Eeyore.”

“Me going on having a real birthday?”

“Yes, Eeyore, and I brought you a balloon.”

“Balloon?” said Eeyore. “You did say balloon? One of those big coloured things

you blow up? Gaiety, song-and-dance, here we are and there we are?”

“Yes, but I’m afraid–I’m very sorry, Eeyore– but when I was running along to

bring it you, I fell down.”

“Dear, dear, how unlucky! You ran too fast, I expect. You didn’t hurt yourself,

Little Piglet?”

“No, but I–I–oh, Eeyore, I burst the balloon!”

There was a very long silence.

“My balloon?” said Eeyore at last.

Piglet nodded.

“My birthday balloon?”

“Yes, Eeyore,” said Piglet sniffing a little. “Here it is. With–with many happy

returns of the day.” And he gave Eeyore the small piece of damp rag.

“Is this it?” said Eeyore, a little surprised.

Piglet nodded.

“My present?”

Piglet nodded again.

“The balloon?”

“Yes.”

“Thank you, Piglet,” said Eeyore. “You don’t mind my asking,” he went on, “but

what colour was this balloon when it–when it was a balloon?”

“Red.”

“I just wondered. … Red,” he murmured to himself. “My favourite colour. …

How big was it?”

“About as big as me.”

“I just wondered. … About as big as Piglet,” he said to himself sadly. “My

favourite size. Well, well.”

Piglet felt very miserable, and didn’t know what to say. He was still opening

his mouth to begin something, and then deciding that it wasn’t any good saying

that, when he heard a shout from the other side of the river, and there was

Pooh.

“Many happy returns of the day,” called out Pooh, forgetting that he had said it

already.

“Thank you, Pooh, I’m having them,” said Eeyore gloomily.

“I’ve brought you a little present,” said Pooh excitedly.

“I’ve had it,” said Eeyore.

Pooh had now splashed across the stream to Eeyore, and Piglet was sitting a

little way off, his head in his paws, snuffling to himself.

“It’s a Useful Pot,” said Pooh. “Here it is. And it’s got ‘A Very Happy Birthday

with love from Pooh’ written on it. That’s what all that writing is. And it’s

for putting things in. There!”

When Eeyore saw the pot, he became quite excited.

“Why!” he said. “I believe my Balloon will just go into that Pot!”

“Oh, no, Eeyore,” said Pooh. “Balloons are much too big to go into Pots. What

you do with a balloon is, you hold the balloon ”

“Not mine,” said Eeyore proudly. “Look, Piglet!” And as Piglet looked

sorrowfully round, Eeyore picked the balloon up with his teeth, and placed it

carefully in the pot; picked it out and put it on the ground; and then picked it

up again and put it carefully back.

“So it does!” said Pooh. “It goes in!”

“So it does!” said Piglet. “And it comes out!”

“Doesn’t it?” said Eeyore. “It goes in and out like anything.”

 

“I’m very glad,” said Pooh happily, “that I thought of giving you a Useful Pot

to put things in.”

“I’m very glad,” said Piglet happily, “that thought of giving you something to

put in a Useful Pot.”

But Eeyore wasn’t listening. He was taking the balloon out, and putting it back

again, as happy as could be….

“And didn’t I give him anything?” asked Christopher Robin sadly.

“Of course you did,” I said. “You gave him don’t you remember–a little–a

little ”

“I gave him a box of paints to paint things with.”

“That was it.”

“Why didn’t I give it to him in the morning?”

“You were so busy getting his party ready for him. He had a cake with icing on

the top, and three candles, and his name in pink sugar? and ”

“Yes, I remember,” said Christopher Robin?

 

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 7

…IN WHICH KANGA AND BABY ROO COME TO THE FOREST, AND PIGLET HAS A BATH

 

 

 

NOBODY seemed to know where they came from, but there they were in the Forest:

Kanga and Baby Roo. When Pooh asked Christopher Robin,

“How did they come here?” Christopher Robin said, “In the Usual Way, if you know

what I mean, Pooh,” and Pooh, who didn’t, said “Oh!” Then he nodded his head

twice and said, “In the Usual Way. Ah!” Then he went to call upon his friend

Piglet to see what he thought about it. And at Piglet’s house he found Rabbit.

So they all talked about it together.

“What I don’t like about it is this,” said Rabbit.

“Here are we–you, Pooh, and you, Piglet, and Me –and suddenly ”

“And Eeyore,” said Pooh.

“And Eeyore–and then suddenly–”

“And Owl,” said Pooh

“And Owl–and then all of a sudden–”

“Oh, and Eeyore,” said Pooh. “I was forgetting him.”

“Here–we–are,” said Rabbit very slowly and carefully, all–or–us, and then,

suddenly, we wake up one morning, and what do we find? We find a Strange Animal

among us. An animal of whom we had never even heard before! An animal who

carries her family about with her in her pocket! Suppose I carried my family

about with me in my pocket, how many pockets should I want?”

“Sixteen,” said Piglet.

“Seventeen, isn’t it?” said Rabbit. “And one more for a handkerchief–that’s

eighteen. Eighteen pockets in one suit! I haven’t time.”

There was a long and thoughtful silence? . . and then Pooh, who had been

frowning very hard for some minutes, said: “I make it fifteen.”

“What?” said Rabbit.

“Fifteen.”

“Fifteen what?”

“Your family.”

“What about them?”

Pooh rubbed his nose and said that he thought Rabbit had been talking about his

family.

“Did I?” said Rabbit carelessly.

“Yes, you said–”

“Never mind, Pooh,” said Piglet impatiently. “The question is, What are we to do

about Kanga?”

“Oh, I see,” said Pooh.

“The best way,” said Rabbit, “would be this. The best way would be to steal Baby

Roo and hide him, and then when Kanga says, ‘Where’s Baby Roo?’ we say, ‘Aha!'”

 

“Aha!” said Pooh, practising. “Aha! Aha! . . . Of course,” he went on, “we could

say ‘Aha!’ even if we hadn’t stolen Baby Roo.”

“Pooh,” said Rabbit kindly, “you haven’t any brain.”

“I know,” said Pooh humbly.

“We say ‘Aha!’ so that Kanga knows that we know where Baby Roo is. ‘Aha!’ means

‘We’ll tell you where Baby Roo is, if you promise to go away from the Forest and

never come back.’ Now don’t talk while I think.”

Pooh went into a corner and tried saying ‘Aha!’ in that sort of voice. Sometimes

it seemed to him that it did mean what Rabbit said, and sometimes it seemed to

him that it didn’t. “I suppose it’s just practice,” he thought. “I wonder if

Kanga will have to practise too so as to understand it.”

“There’s just one thing,” said Piglet, fidgeting a bit. “I was talking to

Christopher Robin, and he said that a Kanga was Generally Regarded as One of the

Fiercer Animals I am not frightened of Fierce Animals in the ordinary way, but

it is well known that if One of the Fiercer Animals is Deprived of Its Young, it

becomes as fierce as Two of the Fiercer Animals. In which case ‘Aha!’ is perhaps

a foolish thing to say.”

“Piglet,” said Rabbit, taking out a pencil, and licking the end of it, “you

haven’t any pluck.”

“It is hard to be brave,” said Piglet, sniffing slightly, “when you’re only a

Very Small Animal.”

Rabbit, who had begun to write very busily, looked up and said:

“It is because you are a very small animal that you will be Useful in the

adventure before us.”

Piglet was so excited at the idea of being Useful that he forgot to be

frightened any more, and when Rabbit went on to say that Kangas were only Fierce

during the winter months, being at other times of an Affectionate Disposition,

he could hardly sit still, he was so eager to begin being useful at once.

“What about me?” said Pooh sadly “I suppose I shan’t be useful?”

“Never mind, Pooh,” said Piglet comfortingly. “Another time perhaps ”

“Without Pooh,” said Rabbit solemnly as he sharpened his pencil, “the adventure

would be impossible.”

“Oh!” said Piglet, and tried not to look disappointed. But Pooh went into a

corner of the room and said proudly to himself, “Impossible without Me! That

sort of Bear.”

“Now listen all of you,” said Rabbit when he had finished writing, and Pooh and

Piglet sat listening very eagerly with their mouths

open. This was what Rabbit read out:

PLAN TO CAPTURE BABY ROO

I. General Remarks. Kanga runs faster than any of Us, even Me.

2. More General Remarks. Kanga never takes her eye off Baby Roo, except when

he’s safely buttoned up in her pocket.

3. Therefore. If we are to capture Baby Roo, we must get a Long Start, because

Kanga runs faster than any of Us, even Me. (See I.)

4. A Thought. If Roo had jumped out of Kanga’s pocket and Piglet had jumped in,

Kanga wouldn’t know the difference, because Piglet is a Very

Small Animal.

5. Like Roo.

6. But Kanga would have to be looking the other way first, so as not to see

Piglet jumping in.

7. See 2.

8. Another Thought. But if Pooh was talking to her very excitedly, she might

look the other way for a moment.

9. And then I could run away with Roo.

IO. Quickly.

II. And Kanga wouldn’t discover the difference until Afterwards

Well, Rabbit read this out proudly, and for a little while after he had read it

nobody said anything And then Piglet, who had been opening and shutting his

mouth without making any noise, managed to say very huskily:

“And–Afterwards?”

“How do you mean?”

“When Kanga does Discover the Difference?”

“Then we all say ‘Aha!'”

“All three of us?”

“Yes.”

“Oh!”

“Why, what’s the trouble, Piglet?”

“Nothing,” said Piglet, “as long as we all three say it. As long as we all three

say it,” said Piglet, “I don’t mind,” he said, “but I shouldn’t care to say

‘Aha!’ by myself. It wouldn’t sound nearly so well. By the way,” he said, “you

are quite sure about what you said about the winter months?”

“The winter months?”

“Yes, only being Fierce in the Winter Months.”

“Oh, yes, yes, that’s all right. Well, Pooh You see what you have to do?”

“No,” said Pooh Bear. “Not yet,” he said? “What do I do?”

“Well, you just have to talk very hard to Kanga? so as she doesn’t notice

anything.”

“Oh! What about?”

“Anything you like.”

“You mean like telling her a little bit of poetry or something?”

“That’s it,” said Rabbit. “Splendid Now come along.”

So they all went out to look for Kanga.

Kanga and Roo were spending a quiet afternoon in a sandy part of the Forest.

Baby Roo was practising very small jumps in the sand, and falling down

mouse-holes and climbing out of them, and Kanga was fidgeting about and saying

“Just one more jump, dear, and then we must go home.” And at that moment who

should come stumping up the hill but Pooh.

“Good afternoon, Kanga.”

“Good afternoon, Pooh.”

“Look at me jumping,” squeaked Roo, and fell into another mouse-hole.

“Hallo, Roo, my little fellow!”

“We were just going home,” said Kanga. “Good afternoon, Rabbit. Good afternoon,

Piglet.”

Rabbit and Piglet, who had now come up from the other side of the hill, said

“Good afternoon,” and “Hallo, Roo,” and Roo asked them to look at him jumping,

so they stayed and looked.

And Kanga looked too….

“Oh, Kanga,” said Pooh, after Rabbit had winked at him twice, “I don’t know if

you are interested in Poetry at all?”

“Hardly at all,” said Kanga.

“Oh!” said Pooh.

“Roo, dear, just one more jump and then we must go home.”

There was a short silence while Roo fell down another mouse-hole.

“Go on,” said Rabbit in a loud whisper behind his paw.

“Talking of Poetry,” said Pooh, “I made up a little piece as I was coming along.

It went like this. Er–now let me see–”

“Fancy!” said Kanga. “Now Roo, dear–”

“You’ll like this piece of poetry,” said Rabbit.

“You’ll love it,” said Piglet.

“You must listen very carefully,” said Rabbit.

“So as not to miss any of it,” said Piglet.

“Oh, yes,” said Kanga, but she still looked at Baby Roo.

“How did it go, Pooh?” said Rabbit.

Pooh gave a little cough and began.

LINES WRITTEN BY A BEAR OF VERY LITTLE BRAIN

On Monday, when the sun is hot

I wonder to myself a lot:

“Now is it true, or is it not,”

“That what is which and which is what?”

On Tuesday, when it hails and snows,

The feeling on me grows and grows

That hardly anybody knows

If those are these or these are those.

On Wednesday, when the sky is blue,

And I have nothing else to do,

I sometimes wonder if it’s true

That who is what and what is who.

On Thursday, when it starts to freeze

And hoar-frost twinkles on the trees,

How very readily one sees

That these are whose–but whose are these?

On Friday—-

“Yes, it is, isn’t it?” said Kanga, not waiting to hear what happened on Friday.

“Just one more jump, Roo, dear, and then we really must be going.”

Rabbit gave Pooh a hurrying-up sort of nudge.

“Talking of Poetry,” said Pooh quickly “have you ever noticed that tree right

over there?”

“Where?” said Kanga. “Now, Roo–” “Right over there,” said Pooh, pointing behind

Kanga’s back.

“No,” said Kanga. “Now jump in, Roo, dear, and we’ll go home.”

“You ought to look at that tree right over there,” said Rabbit. “Shall I lift

you in, Roo?” And he picked up Roo in his paws.

“I can see a bird in it from here,” said Pooh. “Or is it a fish?”

“You ought to see that bird from here,” said Rabbit. “Unless it’s a fish.”

“It isn’t a fish, it’s a bird,” said Piglet.

“So it is,” said Rabbit.

“Is it a starling or a blackbird?” said Pooh.

“That’s the whole question,” said Rabbit. “Is it a blackbird or a starling?”

And then at last Kanga did turn her head to look. And the moment that her head

was turned, Rabbit said in a loud voice “In you go, Roo!” and in jumped Piglet

into Kanga’s pocket, and off scampered Rabbit, with Roo in his paws, as fast as

he could.

“Why, where’s Rabbit?” said Kanga, turning round again. “Are you all right, Roo,

dear?”

Piglet made a squeaky Roo-noise from the bottom of Kanga’s pocket.

“Rabbit had to go away,” said Pooh. “I think he thought of something he had to

do and see about suddenly.”

“And Piglet?”

“I think Piglet thought of something at the same time. Suddenly.”

“Well, we must be getting home,” said Kanga. “Good-bye, Pooh.” And in three

large jumps she was gone.

Pooh looked after her as she went.

“I wish I could jump like that,” he thought. “Some can and some can’t. That’s

how it is.”

But there were moments when Piglet wished that Kanga couldn’t. Often, when he

had had a long walk home through the Forest, he had wished that he were a bird;

but now he thought jerkily to himself at the bottom of Kanga’s pocket,

this take

“If is shall really to

flying I never it.”

And as he went up in the air he said, “Ooooooo!” and as he came down he said,

“Ow!” And he was saying, “Ooooooo-ow, ooooooo-ow,

 

ooooooo-ow” all the way to Kanga’s house.

Of course as soon as Kanga unbuttoned her pocket, she saw what had happened.

Just for a moment, she thought she was frightened, and then

she knew she wasn’t: for she felt quite sure that Christopher Robin could never

let any harm happen to Roo. So she said to herself, “If they are having a joke

with me, I will have a joke with them.”

“Now then, Roo, dear,” she said, as she took Piglet out of her pocket.

“Bed-time.”

“Aha!” said Piglet, as well as he could after his Terrifying Journey. But it

wasn’t a very good “Aha!” and Kanga didn’t seem to understand what it meant.

“Bath first,” said Kanga in a cheerful voice.

“Aha!” said Piglet again, looking round anxiously for the others. But the others

weren’t there. Rabbit was playing with Baby Roo in his own house, and feeling

more fond of him every minute, and Pooh, who had decided to be a Kanga, was

still at the sandy place on the top of the Forest, practising jumps.

“I am not at all sure,” said Kanga in a thoughtful voice, “that it wouldn’t be a

good idea to have a cold bath this evening. Would you like that, Roo, dear?”

Piglet, who had never been really fond of baths, shuddered a long indignant

shudder, and said in as brave a voice as he could:

“Kanga, I see that the time has come to speak plainly.”

“Funny little Roo,” said Kanga, as she got the bath-water ready.

“I am not Roo,” said Piglet loudly. “I am Piglet!”

“Yes, dear, yes,” said Kanga soothingly. “And imitating Piglet’s voice too! So

clever of him,” she went on, as she took a large bar of yellow soap out of the

cupboard. “What will he be doing next”

“Can’t you see?” shouted Piglet “Haven’t you got eyes? Look at me!”

“I am looking, Roo, dear,” said Kanga rather severely. “And you know what I told

you yesterday about making faces. If you go on making faces like Piglet’s, you

will grow up to look like Piglet–and then think how sorry you will be. Now

then, into the bath, and don’t let me have to speak to you about it again.”

Before he knew where he was, Piglet was in the bath, and Kanga was scrubbing him

firmly with a large lathery flannel.

“Ow!” cried Piglet. “Let me out! I’m Piglet!”

“Don’t open the mouth, dear, or the soap goes in,” said Kanga. “There! What did

I tell you?”

“You–you–you did it on purpose,” spluttered Piglet, as soon as he could speak

again . . . and then accidentally had another mouthful of lathery flannel.

“That’s right, dear, don’t say anything,” said Kanga, and in another minute

Piglet was out of the bath, and being rubbed dry with a towel.

“Now,” said Kanga, “there’s your medicine, and then bed.”

“W-w-what medicine?” said Piglet.

“To make you grow big and strong, dear. You don’t want to grow up small and weak

like Piglet, do you? Well, then!”

At that moment there was a knock at the door.

“Come in,” said Kanga, and in came Christopher Robin.

“Christopher Robin, Christopher Robin!” cried Piglet. “Tell Kanga who I am! She

keeps saying I’m Roo. I’m not Roo, am I?”

Christopher Robin looked at him very carefully, and shook his head.

“You can’t be Roo,” he said, “because I’ve just seen Roo playing in Rabbit’s

house.”

“Well!” said Kanga. “Fancy that! Fancy my making a mistake like that.”

“There you are!” said Piglet. “I told you so. I’m Piglet.”

Christopher Robin shook his head again.

“Oh, you’re not Piglet,” he said. “I know Piglet well, and he’s quite a

different colour.”

Piglet began to say that this was because he had just had a bath, and then he

thought that perhaps he wouldn’t say that, and as he opened his mouth to say

something else, Kanga slipped the medicine spoon in, and then patted him on the

back and told him that it was really quite a nice taste when you got used to it.

“I knew it wasn’t Piglet,” said Kanga. “I wonder who it can be.”

“Perhaps it’s some relation of Pooh’s,” said Christopher Robin. “What about a

nephew or an uncle or something?”

Kanga agreed that this was probably what it was, and said that they would have

to call it by some name.

“I shall call it Pootel,” said Christopher Robin. “Henry Pootel for short.”

And just when it was decided, Henry Pootel wriggled out of Kanga’s arms and

jumped to the ground. To his great joy Christopher Robin had left the door open.

Never had Henry Pootel Piglet run so fast as he ran then, and he didn’t stop

running until he had got quite close to his house. But when he was a hundred

yards away he stopped running, and rolled the rest of the way home, so as to get

his own nice comfortable colour again.

So Kanga and Roo stayed in the Forest. And every Tuesday Roo spent the day with

his great friend Rabbit, and every Tuesday Kanga spent the day with her great

friend Pooh, teaching him to jump, and every Tuesday Piglet spent the day with

his great friend Christopher Robin. So they were all happy again.

 

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 8

…IN WHICH CHRISTOPHER ROBIN LEADS AN EXPOTITION TO THE NORTH POLE

 

 

 

ONE fine day Pooh had stumped up to the top of the Forest to see if his friend

Christopher Robin was interested in Bears at all. At breakfast that morning (a

simple meal of marmalade spread lightly over a honeycomb or two) he had suddenly

thought of a new song. It began like this:

“Sing Ho! For the life of a Bear.”

When he had got as far as this, he scratched his head, and thought to himself

“That’s a very good start for a song, but what about the second line?” He tried

singing “Ho,” two or three times, but it didn’t seem to help. “Perhaps it would

be better,” he thought, “if I sang Hi for the life of a Bear.” So he sang it . .

. but it wasn’t. “Very well, then,” he said, “I shall sing that first line

twice, and perhaps if I sing it very quickly, I shall find myself singing the

third and fourth lines before I have time to think of them, and that will be a

Good Song. Now then:”

Sing Ho! for the life of a Bear!

Sing Ho! for the life of a Bear!

I don’t much mind if it rains or snows,

‘Cos I’ve got a lot of honey on my nice new nose!

I don’t much care if it snows or thaws,

‘Cos I’ve got a lot of honey on my nice clean paws!

Sing Ho! for a Bear!

Sing Ho! for a Pooh!

And I’ll have a little something in an hour or two!

He was so pleased with this song that he sang it all the way to the top of the

Forest, “and if I go on singing it much longer,” he thought, “it will be time

for the little something, and then the last line won’t be true.” So he turned it

into a hum instead.

Christopher Robin was sitting outside his door, putting on his Big Boots. As

soon as he saw the Big Boots, Pooh knew that an Adventure was going to happen,

and he brushed the honey off his nose with the back of his paw, and spruced

himself up as well as he could, so as to look Ready for Anything.

“Good morning, Christopher Robin,” he called out.

“Hallo, Pooh Bear. I can’t get this boot on.”

“That’s bad,” said Pooh.

“Do you think you could very kindly lean against me, ‘cos I keep pulling so hard

that I fall over backwards.”

Pooh sat down, dug his feet into the ground, and pushed hard against Christopher

Robin’s back, and Christopher Robin pushed hard against his, and pulled and

pulled at his boot until he had got it on.

 

“And that’s that,” said Pooh. “What do we do next?”

“We are all going on an Expedition,” said Christopher Robin, as he got up and

brushed himself. “Thank you, Pooh.”

“Going on an Expotition?” said Pooh eagerly. “I don’t think I’ve ever been on

one of those. Where are we going to on this Expotition?”

“Expedition, silly old Bear. It’s got an ‘x’ in it.”

“Oh!” said Pooh. “I know.” But he didn’t really.

“We’re going to discover the North Pole.”

“Oh!” said Pooh again. “What is the North Pole?” he asked.

“It’s just a thing you discover,” said Christopher Robin carelessly, not being

quite sure himself.

“Oh! I see,” said Pooh. “Are bears any good at discovering it?”

“Of course they are. And Rabbit and Kanga and all of you. It’s an Expedition.

That’s what an Expedition means. A long line of everybody. You’d better tell the

others to get ready, while I see if my gun’s all right. And we must all bring

Provisions.”

“Bring what?”

“Things to eat.”

“Oh!” said Pooh happily. “I thought you said Provisions. I’ll go and tell them.”

And he stumped off.

The first person he met was Rabbit.

“Hallo, Rabbit,” he said, “is that you?”

“Let’s pretend it isn’t,” said Rabbit, “and see what happens.”

“I’ve got a message for you.”

“I’ll give it to him.”

“We’re all going on an. Expotition with Christopher Robin!”

“What is it when we’re on it?”

“A sort of boat, I think,” said Pooh.

“Oh! that sort.”

“Yes. And we’re going to discover a Pole or something. Or was it a Mole? Anyhow

we’re going to discover it.”

“We are, are we?” said Rabbit.

“Yes. And we’ve got to bring Pro-things to eat with us. In case we want to eat

them. Now I’m going down to Piglet’s. Tell Kanga, will you?”

He left Rabbit and hurried down to Piglet’s house.

The Piglet was sitting on the ground at the door of his house blowing happily at

a dandelion, and wondering whether it would be this year, next year, some time

or never. He had just discovered that it would be never, and was trying to

remember what “it” was, and hoping it wasn’t anything nice, when Pooh came up.

“Oh! Piglet,” said Pooh excitedly, we’re going on an Expotition, all of us, with

things to eat. To discover something.”

“To discover what?” said Piglet anxiously.

“Oh! just something.”

“Nothing fierce?”

“Christopher Robin didn’t say anything about fierce. He just said it had an

‘x’.”

“It isn’t their necks I mind,” said Piglet earnestly. “It’s their teeth. But if

Christopher Robin is coming I don’t mind anything.”

In a little while they were all ready at the top of the Forest, and the

Expotition started. First came Christopher Robin and Rabbit, then Piglet and

Pooh; ther Kanga, with Roo in her pocket, and Owl; then Eeyore; and, at the end,

in a long line, all Rabbit’s friends-and-relations.

“I didn’t ask them,” explained Rabbit carelessly. “They just came. They always

do. They can march at the end, after Eeyore.”

“What I say,” said Eeyore, “is that it’s unsettling. I didn’t want to come on

this Expo–what Pooh said. I only came to oblige. But here I am; and if I am the

end of the Expo–what we’re talking about–then let me be the end. But if, every

time I want to sit down for a little rest, I have to brush away half a dozen of

Rabbit’s smaller friends-and-relations first, then this isn’t an Expo–whatever

it is–at all, it’s simply a Confused Noise. That’s what I say.”

 

“I see what Eeyore means,” said Owl. “If you ask me–”

“I’m not asking anybody,” said Eeyore. “I’m just telling everybody. We can look

for the North Pole, or we can play ‘Here we go gathering Nuts and May’ with the

end part of an ants’ nest. It’s all the same to me.”

There was a shout from the top of the line.

“Come on!” called Christopher Robin.

“Come on!” called Owl.

“We’re starting,” said Rabbit. “I must go.” And he hurried off to the front of

the Expotition with Christopher Robin.

“All right,” said Eeyore. “We’re going. Only Don’t Blame Me.”

So off they all went to discover the Pole. And as they walked, they chattered to

each other of this and that, all except Pooh, who was making up a song.

“This is the first verse,” he said to Piglet, when he was ready with it.

“First verse of what?”

“My song.”

“What song?”

“This one.”

“Which one?”

“Well, if you listen, Piglet, you’ll hear it.”

“How do you know I’m not listening?” Pooh couldn’t answer that one, so he began

to sing.

They all went off to discover the Pole,

Owl and Piglet and Rabbit and all;

It’s a Thing you Discover, as I’ve been tole

By Owl and Piglet and Rabbit and all.

Eeyore, Christopher Robin and Pooh

And Rabbit’s relations all went too–

And where the Pole was none of them knew….

Sing Hey! for Owl and Rabbit and all!

“Hush!” said Christopher Robin turning round to Pooh, “we’re just coming to a

Dangerous Place.”

“Hush!” said Pooh turning round quickly to Piglet.

“Hush!” said Piglet to Kanga.

“Hush!” said Kanga to Owl, while Roo said

“Hush!” several times to himself, very quietly.

“Hush!” said Owl to Eeyore.

“Hush!” said Eeyore in a terrible voice to all Rabbit’s friends-and-relations,

and “Hush!” they said hastily to each other all down the line, until it got to

the last one of all. And the last and smallest friend-and-relation was so upset

to find that the whole Expotition was saying “Hush!” to him, that he buried

himself head downwards in a crack in the ground, and stayed there for two days

until the danger was over, and then went home in a great hurry, and lived

quietly with his Aunt ever-afterwards. His name was Alexander Beetle.

They had come to a stream which twisted and tumbled between high rocky banks,

and Christopher Robin saw at once how dangerous it was.

“It’s just the place,” he explained, “for an Ambush.”

“What sort of bush?” whispered Pooh to Piglet. “A gorse-bush?”

“My dear Pooh,” said Owl in his superior way, “don’t you know what an Ambush

is?”

“Owl,” said Piglet, looking round at him severely, “Pooh’s whisper was a

perfectly private whisper, and there was no need—-”

“An Ambush,” said Owl, “is a sort of Surprise.”

“So is a gorse-bush sometimes,” said Pooh.

“An Ambush, as I was about to explain to Pooh,” said Piglet, “is a sort of

Surprise.”

“If people jump out at you suddenly, that’s an Ambush,” said Owl.

“It’s an Ambush, Pooh, when people jump at you suddenly,” explained Piglet.

Pooh, who now knew what an Ambush was, said that a gorse-bush had sprung at him

suddenly one day when he fell off a tree, and he had taken six days to get all

the prickles out of himself.

“We are not talking about gorse-bushes,” said Owl a little crossly.

“I am,” said Pooh.

They were climbing very cautiously up the stream now, going from rock to rock,

and after they had gone a little way they came to a place where the banks

widened out at each side, so that on each side of the water there was a level

strip of grass on which they could sit down and rest. As soon as he saw this,

Christopher Robin called “Halt!” and they all sat down and rested.

“I think,” said Christopher Robin, “that we ought to eat all our Provisions now,

so that we shan’t have so much to carry.”

“Eat all our what?” said Pooh.

“All that we’ve brought,” said Piglet, getting to work.

“That’s a good idea,” said Pooh, and he got to work too.

“Have you all got something?” asked Christopher Robin with his mouth full.

“All except me,” said Eeyore. “As Usual.” He looked round at them in his

melancholy way.

I suppose none of you are sitting on a thistle by any chance?”

“I believe I am,” said Pooh. “Ow!” He got up, and looked behind him. “Yes, I

was. I thought so.”

“Thank you, Pooh. If you’ve quite finished with it.” He moved across to Pooh’s

place, and began to eat.

“It doesn’t do them any Good, you know, sitting on them,” he went on, as he

looked up munching. “Takes all the Life out of them. Remember that another time,

all of you. A little Consideration, a little Thought for Others, makes all the

difference.”

As soon as he had finished his lunch Christopher Robin whispered to Rabbit, and

Rabbit said “Yes, yes, of course,” and they walked a little way up the stream

together.

“I didn’t want the others to hear,” said Christopher Robin.

“Quite so,” said Rabbit, looking important.

“It’s–I wondered–It’s only–Rabbit, I suppose you don’t know, What does the

North Pole look like?”

“Well,” said Rabbit, stroking his whiskers. “Now you’re asking me.”

“I did know once, only I’ve sort of forgotten,” said Christopher Robin

carelessly.

“It’s a funny thing,” said Rabbit, “but I’ve sort of forgotten too, although I

did know once.”

“I suppose it’s just a pole stuck in the ground?”

“Sure to be a pole,” said Rabbit, “because of calling it a pole, and if it’s a

pole, well, I should think it would be sticking in the ground, shouldn’t you,

because there’d be nowhere else to stick it.”

“Yes, that’s what I thought.”

“The only thing,” said Rabbit, “is, where is it sticking?”

“That’s what we’re looking for,” said Christopher Robin.

They went back to the others. Piglet was lying on his back, sleeping peacefully.

Roo was washing his face and paws in the stream, while Kanga explained to

everybody proudly that this was the first time he had ever washed his face

himself, and Owl was telling Kanga an Interesting Anecdote full of long words

like Encyclopedia and Rhododendron to which Kanga wasn’t listening.

“I don’t hold with all this washing,” grumbled Eeyore. “This modern

Behind-the-ears nonsense. What do you think, Pooh?”

“Well, said Pooh, “I think—-”

But we shall never know what Pooh thought, for there came a sudden squeak from

Roo, a splash, and a loud cry of alarm from Kanga.

“So much for washing,” said Eeyore.

“Roo’s fallen in!” cried Rabbit, and he and Christopher Robin came rushing down

to the rescue.

“Look at me swimming!” squeaked Roo from the middle of his pool, and was hurried

down a waterfall into the next pool.

“Are you all right, Roo dear?” called Kanga anxiously.

“Yes!” said Roo. “Look at me sw–” and down he went over the next waterfall into

another pool.

Everybody was doing something to help. Piglet, wide awake suddenly, was jumping

up and down and making “Oo, I say” noises; Owl was explaining that in a case of

Sudden and Temporary Immersion the Important Thing was to keep the Head Above

Water; Kanga was jumping along the bank, saying “Are you sure you’re all right,

Roo dear?” to which Roo, from whatever pool he was in at the moment, was

answering “Look at me swimming!” Eeyore had turned round and hung his tail over

the first pool into which Roo fell, and with his back to the accident was

grumbling quietly to himself, and saying, “All this washing; but catch on to my

tail, little Roo, and you’ll be all right”; and,Christopher Robin and Rabbit

came hurrying past Eeyore, and were calling out to the others in front of them.

“All right, Roo, I’m coming,” called Christopher Robin.

“Get something across the stream lower down, some of you fellows,” called

Rabbit.

But Pooh was getting something. Two pools below Roo he was standing with a long

pole in his paws, and Kanga came up and took one end of it, and between them

they held it across the lower part of the pool; and Roo, still bubbling proudly,

“Look at me swimming,” drifted up against it, and climbed out.

“Did you see me swimming?” squeaked Roo excitedly, while Kanga scolded him and

rubbed him down. “Pooh, did you see me swimming? That’s called swimming, what I

was doing. Rabbit, did you see what I was doing? Swimming. Hallo, Piglet! I say,

Piglet! What do you think I was doing! Swimming! Christopher Robin, did you see

me–”

But Christopher Robin wasn’t listening. He was looking at Pooh.

“Pooh,” he said, “where did you find that pole?”

Pooh looked at the pole in his hands.

“I just found it,” he said. “I thought it ought to be useful. I just picked it

up.”

“Pooh,” said Christopher Robin solemnly, “the Expedition is over. You have found

the North Pole!”

“Oh!” said Pooh.

Eeyore was sitting with his tail in the water when they all got back to him.

“Tell Roo to be quick, somebody,” he said. “My tail’s getting cold. I don’t want

to mention it, but I just mention it. I don’t want to complain, but there it is.

My tail’s cold.”

“Here I am!” squeaked Roo.

“Oh, there you are.”

“Did you see me swimming?”

Eeyore took his tail out of the water, and swished it from side to side.

“As I expected,” he said. “Lost all feeling. Numbed it. That’s what it’s done.

Numbed it. Well, as long as nobody minds, I suppose it’s all right.”

“Poor old Eeyore! I’ll dry it for you,” said Christopher Robin, and he took out

his handkerchief and rubbed it up.

“Thank you, Christopher Robin. You’re the only one who seems to understand about

tails. They don’t think–that’s what’s the matter with some of these others.

They’ve no imagination. A tail isn’t a tail to them, it’s just a Little Bit

Extra at the back.”

“Never mind, Eeyore,” said Christopher Robin, rubbing his hardest. “Is that

better?”

“It’s feeling more like a tail perhaps. It Belongs again, if you know what I

mean.”

“Hullo, Eeyore,” said Pooh, coming up to them with his pole.

“Hullo, Pooh. Thank you for asking, but I shall be able to use it again in a day

or two.”

“Use what?” said Pooh.

“What we are talking about.”

“I wasn’t talking about anything,” said Pooh, looking puzzled.

“My mistake again. I thought you were saying how sorry you were about my tail,

being all numb, and could you do anything to help?”

“No,” said Pooh. “That wasn’t me,” he said. He thought for a little and then

suggested helpfully: “Perhaps it was somebody else.”

“Well, thank him for me when you see him.”

Pooh looked anxiously at Christopher Robin.

“Pooh’s found the North Pole,” said Christopher Robin. “Isn’t that lovely?”

Pooh looked modestly down.

“Is that it?” said Eeyore.

“Yes,” said Christopher Robin.

“Is that what we were looking for?”

“Yes,” said Pooh.

“Oh!” said Eeyore. “Well, anyhow–it didn’t rain,” he said.

They stuck the pole in the ground, and Christopher Robin tied a message on to

it:

NorTH PoLE

DICSovERED By

PooH

PooH FouND IT

Then they all went home again. And I think, but I am not quite sure, that Roo

had a hot bath and went straight to bed. But Pooh went back to his own house,

and feeling very proud of what he had done, had a little something to revive

himself.

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 9

…IN WHICH PIGLET IS ENTIRELY SURROUNDED BY WATER

IT rained and it rained and it rained. Piglet told himself that never in all his

life, and he was goodness knows how old–three, was it, or four?–never had he

seen so much rain. Days and days and days.

“If only,” he thought, as he looked out of the window, “I had been in Pooh’s

house, or Christopher Robin’s house, or Rabbit’s house when it began to rain,

then I should have had Company all this time, instead of being here all alone,

with nothing to do except wonder when it will stop.” And he imagined himself

with Pooh, saying, “Did you ever see such rain, Pooh?” and Pooh saying, “Isn’t

it awful, Piglet?” and Piglet saying, “I wonder how it is over Christopher

Robin’s way,” and Pooh saying, “I should think poor old Rabbit is about flooded

out by this time.” It would have been jolly to talk like this, and really, it

wasn’t much good having anything exciting like floods, if you couldn’t share

them with somebody.

For it was rather exciting. The little dry ditches in which Piglet had nosed

about so often had become streams, the little streams across which he had

splashed were rivers, and the river, between whose steep banks they had played

so happily, had sprawled out of its own bed and was taking up so much room

everywhere, that Piglet was beginning to wonder whether it would be coming into

his bed soon.

“It’s a little Anxious,” he said to himself, “to be a Very Small Animal Entirely

Surrounded by Water. Christopher Robin and Pooh could escape by Climbing Trees,

and Kanga could escape by Jumping, and Rabbit could escape by Burrowing, and Owl

could escape by Flying, and Eeyore could escape by–by Making a Loud Noise Until

Rescued, and here am I, surrounded by water and I can’t do anything.”

It went on raining, and every day the water got a little higher, until now it

was nearly up to Piglet’s window . . . and still he hadn’t done anything.

“There’s Pooh,” he thought to himself. “Pooh hasn’t much Brain, but he never

comes to any harm. He does silly things and they turn out right. There’s Owl.

Owl hasn’t exactly got Brain, but he Knows Things. He would know the Right Thing

to Do when Surrounded by Water. There’s Rabbit. He hasn’t Learnt in Books, but

he can always Think of a Clever Plan. There’s Kanga. She isn’t Clever, Kanga

isn’t, but she would be so anxious about Roo that she would do a Good Thing to

Do without thinking about it. And then there’s Eeyore And Eeyore is so miserable

anyhow that he wouldn’t mind about this. But I wonder what Christopher Robin

would do?”

Then suddenly he remembered a story which Christopher Robin had told him about a

man on a desert island who had written something in a bottle and thrown it in

the sea; and Piglet thought that if he wrote something in a bottle and threw it

in the water, perhaps somebody would come and rescue him!

He left the window and began to search his house, all of it that wasn’t under

water, and at last he found a pencil and a small piece of dry paper, and a

bottle with a cork to it. And he wrote on one side of the paper:

HELP!

PIGLIT (ME)

and on the other side:

IT’S ME PIGLIT, HELP HELP!

Then he put the paper in the bottle, and he corked the bottle up as tightly as

he could, and he leant out of his window as far as he could lean without falling

in, and he threw the bottle as far as he could throw –splash!–and in a little

while it bobbed up again on the water; and he watched it floating slowly away in

the distance, until his eyes ached with looking, and sometimes he thought it was

the bottle, and sometimes he thought it was just a ripple on the water which he

was following, and then suddenly he knew that he would never see it again and

that he had done all that he could do to save himself.

“So now,” he thought, “somebody else will have to do something, and I hope they

will do it soon, because if they don’t I shall have to swim, which I can’t, so I

hope they do it soon.” And then he gave a very long sigh and said, “I wish Pooh

were here. It’s so much more friendly with two.”

When the rain began Pooh was asleep. It rained, and it rained, and it rained,

and he slept and he slept and he slept. He had had a tiring day. You remember

how he discovered the North Pole; well, he was so proud of this that he asked

Christopher Robin if there were any other Poles such as a Bear of Little Brain

might discover.

“There’s a South Pole,” said Christopher Robin, “and I expect there’s an East

Pole and a West Pole, though people don’t like talking about them.” Pooh was

very excited when he heard this, and suggested that they should have an

Expotition to discover the East Pole, but Christopher Robin had thought of

something else to do with Kanga; so Pooh went out to discover the East Pole by

himself. Whether he discovered it or not, I forget; but he was so tired when he

got home that, in the very middle of his supper, after he had been eating for

little more than half-an-hour, he fell fast asleep in his chair, and slept and

slept and slept.

Then suddenly he was dreaming. He was at the East Pole, and it was a very cold

pole with the coldest sort of snow and ice all over it. He had found a bee-hive

to sleep in, but there wasn’t room for his legs, so he had left them outside.

And Wild Woozles, such as inhabit the East Pole, came and nibbled all the fur

off his legs to make Nests for their Young. And the more they nibbled, the

colder his legs got, until suddenly he woke up with an Ow!–and there he was,

sitting in his chair with his feet in the water, and water all round him!

He splashed to his door and looked out….

“This is Serious,” said Pooh. “I must have an Escape.”

So he took his largest pot of honey and escaped with it to a broad branch of his

tree, well above the water, and then he climbed down again and escaped with

another pot . . . and when the whole Escape was finished, there was Pooh sitting

on his branch dangling his legs, and there, beside him, were ten pots of

honey….

Two days later, there was Pooh, sitting on his branch, dangling his legs, and

there, beside him, were four pots of honey….

Three days later, there was Pooh, sitting on his branch, dangling his legs, and

there beside him, was one pot of honey.

Four days later, there was Pooh . . .

And it was on the morning of the fourth day that Piglet’s bottle came floating

past him, and with one loud cry of “Honey!” Pooh plunged into the water, seized

the bottle, and struggled back to his tree again.

“Bother!” said Pooh, as he opened it. “All that wet for nothing. What’s that bit

of paper doing?”

He took it out and looked at it.

“It’s a Missage,” he said to himself, “that’s what it is. And that letter is a

‘P,’ and so is that, and so is that, and ‘P’ means ‘Pooh,’ so it’s a very

important Missage to me, and I can’t read it. I must find Christopher Robin or

Owl or Piglet, one of those Clever Readers who can read things, and they will

tell me what this missage means. Only I can’t swim. Bother!”

Then he had an idea, and I think that for a Bear of Very Little Brain, it was a

good idea. He said to himself:

“If a bottle can float, then a jar can float, and if a jar floats, I can sit on

the top of it, if it’s a very big jar.”

So he took his biggest jar, and corked it up.

“All boats have to have a name,” he said, “so I shall call mine The Floating

Bear.” And with these words he dropped his boat into the water and jumped in

after it.

For a little while Pooh and The Floating Bear were uncertain as to which of them

was meant to be on the top, but after trying one or two different positions,

they settled down with The Floating Bear underneath and Pooh triumphantly

astride it, paddling vigorously with his feet.

Christopher Robin lived at the very top of the Forest. It rained, and it rained,

and it rained, but the water couldn’t come up to his house. It was rather jolly

to look down into the valleys and see the water all round him, but it rained so

hard that he stayed indoors most of the time, and thought about things. Every

morning he went out with his umbrella and put a stick in the place where the

water came up to, and every next morning he went out and couldn’t see his stick

any more, so he put another stick in the place where the water came up to, and

then he walked home again, and each morning he had a shorter way to walk than he

had had the morning before. On the morning of the fifth day he saw the water all

round him, and he new that for the first time in his life he was on a real

island. Which is very exciting. It was on this morning that Owl came flying over

the water to say “How do you do?” to his friend Christopher Robin.

“I say, Owl,” said Christopher Robin, “isn’t this fun? I’m on an island!”

“The atmospheric conditions have been very unfavourable lately,” said Owl.

“The what?”

“It has been raining,” explained Owl.

“Yes,” said Christopher Robin. “It has.”

“The flood-level has reached an unprecedented height.”

“The who?”

“There’s a lot of water about,” explained Owl.

“Yes,” said Christopher Robin, “there is.”

“However, the prospects are rapidly becoming more favourable. At any moment–”

“Have you seen Pooh?”

“No. At any moment–”

“I hope he’s all right,” said Christopher Robin. “I’ve been wondering about him.

I expect Piglet’s with him. Do you think they’re all right, Owl?”

“I expect so. You see, at any moment–”

“Do go and see, Owl. Because Pooh hasn’t got very much brain, and he might do

something silly, and I do love him so, Owl. Do you see, Owl?”

“That’s all right,” said Owl. “I’ll go. Back directly.” And he flew off.

In a little while he was back again. Pooh isn’t there,” he said.

“Not there?”

“He’s been there. He’s been sitting on a branch of his tree outside his house

with nine pots of honey. But he isn’t there now.”

“Oh, Pooh!” cried Christopher Robin. “Where are you?”

“Here I am,” said a growly voice behind him.

 

“Pooh!”

They rushed into each other’s arms.

“How did you get here, Pooh?” asked Christopher Robin, when he was ready to talk

again.

“On my boat,” said Pooh proudly. “I had a Very Important Missage sent me in a

bottle, and owing to having got some water in my eyes, I couldn’t read it, so I

brought it to you. On my boat.”

With these proud words he gave Christopher Robin the missage.

“But it’s from Piglet!” cried Christopher Robin when he had read it.

“Isn’t there anything about Pooh in it?” asked Bear, looking over his shoulder.

Christopher Robin read the message aloud.

“Oh, are those ‘P’s’ piglets? I thought they were poohs.”

“We must rescue him at once! I thought he was with you, Pooh. Owl, could you

rescue him on your back?”

“I don’t think so,” said Owl, after grave thought. “It is doubtful if the

necessary dorsal muscles ”

“Then would you fly to him at once and say that Rescue is Coming? And Pooh and I

will think of a Rescue and come as quick as ever we can. Oh, don’t talk, Owl, go

on quick!” And, still thinking of something to say, Owl flew off.

“Now then, Pooh,” said Christopher Robin, “where’s your boat?”

“I ought to say,” explained Pooh as they walked down to the shore of the island,

“that it isn’t just an ordinary sort of boat. Sometimes it’s a Boat, and

sometimes it’s more of an Accident. It all depends.”

“Depends on what?”

“On whether I’m on top of it or underneath it.”

“Oh! Well, where is it?”

“There!” said Pooh, pointing proudly to The Floating Bear.

It wasn’t what Christopher Robin expected, and the more he looked at it, the

more he thought what a Brave and Clever Bear Pooh was, and the more Christopher

Robin thought this, the more Pooh looked modestly down his nose and tried to

pretend he wasn’t.

“But it’s too small for two of us,” said Christopher Robin sadly.

“Three of us with Piglet.”

“That makes it smaller still Oh, Pooh Bear, what shall we do?”

And then this Bear, Pooh Bear, Winnie-the-Pooh, F.O.P. (Friend of Piglet’s),

R.C. (Rabbit’s Companion), P.D. (Pole Discoverer), E.C. and T.F. (Eeyore’s

Comforter and Tail-finder)–in fact, Pooh himself–said something so clever that

Christopher Robin could only look at him with mouth open and eyes staring,

wondering if this was really the Bear of Very Little Brain whom he had know and

loved so long.

“We might go in your umbrella,” said Pooh.

“?”

“We might go in your umbrella,” said Pooh?

“??”

“We might go in your umbrella,” said Pooh.

“!!!!!!”

For suddenly Christopher Robin saw that they might. He opened his umbrella and

put it point downwards in the water. It floated but wobbled.

Pooh got in. He was just beginning to say that it was all right now, when he

found that it wasn’t, so after a short drink, which he didn’t really want, he

waded back to Christopher Robin. Then they both got in together, and it wobbled

no longer.

“I shall call this boat The Brain of Pooh,” said Christopher Robin, and The

Brain of Pooh set sail forthwith in a south-westerly direction, revolving

gracefully.

You can imagine Piglet’s joy when at last the ship came in sight of him. In

after-years he liked to think that he had been in Very Great Danger during the

Terrible Flood, but the only danger he had really been in was the last half-hour

of his imprisonment, when Owl, who had just flown up, sat on a branch of his

tree to comfort him, and told him a very long story about an aunt who had once

laid a seagull’s egg by mistake, and the story went on and on, rather like this

sentence, until Piglet who was listening out of his window without much hope,

went to sleep quietly and naturally, slipping slowly out of the window towards

the water until he was only hanging on by his toes, at which moment, luckily, a

sudden loud squawk from Owl, which was really part of the story, being what his

aunt said, woke the Piglet up and just gave him time to jerk himself back into

safety and say, “How

interesting, and did she?” when–well, you can imagine his joy when at last he

saw the good ship, Brain of Pooh (Captain, C. Robin; Ist Mate,

P. Bear) coming over the sea to rescue him.. ..

And as that is really the end of the story, and I am very tired after that last

sentence, I think I shall stop there.

 

 

 

Winnie-The-Pooh – Chapter 10

…IN WHICH CHRISTOPHER ROBIN GIVES A POOH PARTY, AND WE SAY GOOD-BYE

 

 

 

ONE day when the sun had come back over the Forest, bringing with it the scent

of may, and all the streams of the Forest were tinkling happily to find

themselves their own pretty shape again, and the little pools lay dreaming of

the life they had seen and the big things they had done, and in the warmth and

quiet of the Forest the cuckoo was trying over his voice carefully and listening

to see if he liked it, and wood-pigeons were complaining gently to themselves in

their lazy comfortable way that it was the other fellow’s fault, but it didn’t

matter very much; on such a day as this Christopher Robin whistled in a special

way he had, and Owl came flying out of the Hundred Acre Wood to see what was

wanted.

“Owl,” said Christopher Robin, “I am going to give a party.”

“You are, are you?” said Owl.

“And it’s to be a special sort of party, because it’s because of what Pooh did

when he did what he did to save Piglet from the flood.”

“Oh, that’s what it’s for, is it?” said Owl.

“Yes, so will you tell Pooh as quickly as you can, and all the others, because

it will be to-morrow?”

“Oh, it will, will it?” said Owl, still being as helpful as possible.

“So will you go and tell them, Owl?”

Owl tried to think of something very wise to say, but couldn’t, so he flew off

to tell the others. And the first person he told was Pooh.

“Pooh,” he said, “Christopher Robin is giving a party.”

“Oh!” said Pooh And then seeing that Owl expected him to say something else, he

said, “Will there be those little cake things with pink sugar icing?”

Owl felt that it was rather beneath him to talk about little cake things with

pink sugar icing, so he told Pooh exactly what Christopher Robin had said, and

flew off to Eeyore.

“Party for Me?” thought Pooh to himself. “How grand!” And he began to wonder if

all the other animals would know that it was a special Pooh Party, and if

Christopher Robin had told them about The Floating Bear and the Brain of Pooh,

and all the wonderful ships he had invented and sailed on, and he began to think

how awful it would be if everybody had forgotten about it, and nobody quite knew

what the party was for; and the more he thought like this, the more the party

got muddled in his mind, like a dream when nothing goes right.

And the dream began to sing itself over in his head until it became a sort of

song. It was an

ANXIOUS POOH SONG.

3 Cheers for Pooh

(For Who?)

For Pooh–

(Why what did he do?)

I thought you knew;

 

He saved his friend from a wetting!

3 Cheers for Bear!

(For where?)

For Bear–

He couldn’t swim,

But he rescued him!

(He rescued who?)

Oh, listen, do!

I am talking of Pooh?

(Of who?)

Of Pooh!

(I’m sorry I keep forgetting).

Well. Pooh was a Bear of Enormous Brain–

(Just say it again!)

Of enormous brain–

(Of enormous what?)

Well, he ate a lot,

And I don’t know if he could swim or not,

But he managed to float

On a sort of boat

(On a sort of what?)

Well, a sort of pot–

So now let’s give him three hearty cheers

(So now let’s give him three hearty whitches?)

And hope he’ll be with us for years and years,

And grow in health and wisdom and riches!

3 Cheers for Pooh!

(For who?)

For Pooh–

3 Cheers for Bear

(For where?)

For Bear–

3 Cheers for the wonderful Winnie-the-Pooh!

(Just tell me, somebody–WHAT DID HE DO?)

While this was going on inside him, Owl was talking to Eeyore.

“Eeyore,” said Owl, “Christopher Robin is giving a party.”

“Very interesting,” said Eeyore. “I suppose they will be sending me down the odd

bits which got trodden on. Kind and Thoughtful. Not at all, don’t mention it.”

“There is an Invitation for you.”

“What’s that like?”

“An Invitation!”

“Yes, I heard you. Who dropped it?”

“This isn’t anything to eat, it’s asking you to the party. To-morrow.”

Eeyore shook his head slowly.

“You mean Piglet. The little fellow with the exited ears. That’s Piglet. I’ll

tell him.”

“No, no!” said Owl, getting quite fussy. “It’s you!”

“Are you sure?”

“Of course I’m sure. Christopher Robin said ‘All of them! Tell all of them.'”

“All of them, except Eeyore?”

“All of them,” said Owl sulkily.

“Ah!” said Eeyore. “A mistake, no doubt, but still, I shall come. Only don’t

blame me if it rains.”

But it didn’t rain. Christopher Robin had made a long table out of some long

pieces of wood, and they all sat round it. Christopher Robin sat at one end, and

Pooh sat at the other, and between them on one side were Owl and Eeyore and

Piglet, and between them on the other side were Rabbit, and Roo and Kanga. And

all Rabbit’s friends and relations spread themselves about on the grass, and

waited hopefully in case anybody spoke to them, or dropped anything, or asked

them the time.

 

It was the first party to which Roo had ever been, and he was very excited. As

soon as ever they had sat down he began to talk.

“Hallo, Pooh!” he squeaked.

“Hallo, Roo!” said Pooh.

Roo jumped up and down in his seat for a little while and then began again.

“Hallo, Piglet!” he squeaked.

Piglet waved a paw at him, being too busy to say anything.

“Hallo, Eeyore!” said Roo.

Eeyore nodded gloomily at him. “It will rain soon, you see if it doesn’t,” he

said.

Roo looked to see if it didn’t, and it didn’t, so he said “Hallo, Owl!”–and Owl

said “Hallo, my little fellow,” in a kindly way, and went on telling Christopher

Robin about an accident which had nearly happened to a friend of his whom

Christopher Robin didn’t know, and Kanga said to Roo, “Drink up your milk first,

dear, and talk afterwards.” So Roo, who was drinking his milk, tried to say that

he could do both at once . . . and had to be patted on the back and dried for

quite a long time afterwards.

When they had all nearly eaten enough, Christopher Robin banged on the table

with his spoon, and everybody stopped talking and was very silent, except Roo

who was just finishing a loud attack of hiccups and trying to look as if it was

one of Rabbit’s relations.

“This party,” said Christopher Robin, “is a party because of what someone did,

and we all know who it was, and it’s his party, because of what he did, and I’ve

got a present for him and here it is.” Then he felt about a little and

whispered, “Where is it?”

While he was looking, Eeyore coughed in an impressive way and began to speak.

“Friends,” he said, “including oddments, it is a great pleasure, or perhaps I

had better say it has been a pleasure so far, to see you at my party. What I did

was nothing. Any of you-except Rabbit and Owl and Kanga–would have done the

same. Oh, and Pooh. My remarks do not, of course, apply to Piglet and Roo,

because they are too small. Any of you would have done the same. But it just

happened to be Me. It was not, I need hardly say, with an idea of getting what

Christopher Robin is looking for now”–and he put his front leg to his mouth and

said in a loud whisper, “Try under the table”–“that I did what I did–but

because I feel that we should all do what we can to help. I feel that we should

all—-”

“H–hup!” said Roo accidentally.

“Roo, dear!” said Kanga reproachfully.

“Was it me?” asked Roo, a little surprised.

“What’s Eeyore talking about?” Piglet whispered to Pooh.

“I don’t know,” said Pooh rather dolefully.

“I thought this was your party.”

“I thought it was once. But I suppose it isn’t.”

“I’d sooner it was yours than Eeyore’s,” said Piglet.

“So would I,” said Pooh.

“H–hup!” said Roo again.

“AS–I–WAS–SAYING,” said Eeyore loudly and sternly, “as I was saying when I

was interrupted by various Loud Sounds, I feel that–”

“Here it is!” cried Christopher Robin excitedly. “Pass it down to silly old

Pooh. It’s for Pooh.”

“For Pooh?” said Eeyore.

“Of course it is. The best bear in all the world.”

“I might have known,” said Eeyore. “After all, one can’t complain. I have my

friends. Somebody spoke to me only yesterday. And was it last week or the week

before that Rabbit bumped into me and said ‘Bother!’ The Social Round. Always

something going on.”

Nobody was listening, for they were all saying, “Open it, Pooh,” “What is it,

Pooh?” “I know what it is,” “No, you don’t,” and other helpful remarks of this

sort. And of course Pooh was opening it as quickly as ever he could, but without

cutting the string, because you never know when a bit of string might be Useful.

At last it was undone.

When Pooh saw what it was, he nearly fell down, he was so pleased. It was a

Special Pencil Case. There were pencils in it marked “B” for Bear, and pencils

marked “HB ” for Helping Bear, and pencils marked “BB” for Brave Bear. There was

a knife for sharpening the pencils, and indiarubber for rubbing out anything

which you had spelt wrong, and a ruler for ruling lines for the words to walk

on, and inches marked on the ruler in case you wanted to know how many inches

anything was, and Blue Pencils and Red Pencils and Green Pencils for saying

special things in blue and red and green. And all these lovely things were in

little pockets of their own in a Special Case which shut with a click when you

clicked it. And they were all for Pooh.

“Oh!” said Pooh.

“Oh, Pooh!” said everybody else except Eeyore.

“Thank-you,” growled Pooh.

But Eeyore was saying to himself, “This writing business. Pencils and what-not.

Over-rated, if you ask me. Silly stuff. Nothing in it.”

Later on, when they had all said “Good-bye” and “Thank-you” to Christopher

Robin, Pooh and Piglet walked home thoughtfully together in the golden evening,

and for a long time they were silent.

“When you wake up in the morning, Pooh,” said Piglet at last, “what’s the first

thing you say to yourself?”

“What’s for breakfast?” said Pooh. “What do you say, Piglet?”

“I say, I wonder what’s going to happen exciting to-day?” said Piglet. Pooh

nodded thoughtfully.

“It’s the same thing,” he said.

“And what did happen?” asked Christopher Robin.

“When?”

“Next morning.”

“I don’t know.”

“Could you think, and tell me and Pooh some time?”

“If you wanted it very much.”

“Pooh does,” said Christopher Robin.

He gave a deep sigh, picked his bear up by the leg and walked off to the door,

trailing Winnie-the-Pooh behind him. At the door he turned and said, “Coming to

see me have my bath?”

“I might,” I said.

“Was Pooh’s pencil case any better than mine?”

“It was just the same,” I said.

He nodded and went out . . . and in a moment I heard Winnie-the-Pooh–bump,

bump, bump–going up the stairs behind him.

 

THE END


The Neverending Story

July 10, 2009

The Neverending Story
by Michael Ende

 

Conrad Carl Coriander’s Old Books

This inscription could be seen on the glass door of a small shop, but naturally this
was only the way it looked if you were inside the dimly lit shop, looking out at the street
through the plate-glass door.
Outside, it was a gray, cold, rainy November morning. The rain ran down the
glass and over the ornate lters. Through the glass there was nothing to be seen but the
rain-splotched wall across the street.
Suddenly the door was opened so violently that a little cluster of brass bells
tinkled wildly, taking quite some time to calm down. The cause of this hubbub was a fat
little boy of ten or twelve. His wet, dark-brown hair hung down over his face, his coat
was soaked and dripping, and he was carrying a school satchel slung over his shoulder.
He was rather pale and out of breath, but, despite the hurry he had been in a moment
before, he was standing in the open doorway as though rooted to the spot.
Before him lay a long, narrow room, the back of which was lost in the half-light.
The walls were lined with shelves filled with books of all shapes and sizes. Large folios
were piled high on the floor, and on several tables lay heaps of smaller, leather-bound
books, whose spines glittered with gold. The far end of the room was blocked off by a
shoulder-high wall of books, behind which the light of a lamp could be seen. From time
to time a ring of smoke rose up in the lamplight, expanded, and vanished in darkness.

One was reminded of the smoke signals that Indians used for sending news from hilltop
to hilltop. Apparently someone was sitting there, and, sure enough, the little boy heard a
cross voice from behind the wall of books: “Do your wondering inside or outside, but
shut the door. There’s a draft.”
The boy obeyed and quietly shut the door. Then he approached the wall of books
and looked cautiously around the corner. There, in a high worn leather wing chair sat a
short, stout man in a rumpled black suit that looked frayed and somehow dusty. His
paunch was held in by a vest with a flower design. He was bald except for outcroppings
of white hair over his ears. His red face suggested a vicious bulldog. A gold-rimmed
pince-nez was perched on his bulbous nose. He was smoking a curved pipe, which
dangled from one corner of his mouth and pulled his whole cheek out of shape. On his
lap he held a book, which he had evidently been reading, for in closing it he had left the
thick forefinger of his left hand between the leaves as a kind of bookmark.
With his right hand he now removed his spectacles and examined the fat little boy,
who stood there dripping. After a while, the man narrowed his eyes, which made him look
more vicious than ever, and muttered: “Goodness gracious.” Then he opened his book
and went on reading.
The little boy didn’t know quite what to do, so he just stood there, gaping. Finally
the man closed his book — as before, with his finger between the pages — and growled:
“Listen, my boy, I can’t abide children. I know it’s the style nowadays to make a terrible
fuss over you — but I don’t go for it. I simply have no use for children. As far as I’m
concerned, they’re no good for anything but screaming, torturing people, breaking
things, smearing books with jam and tearing the pages. It never dawns on them that
grown-ups may also have their troubles and cares. I’m only telling you this so you’ll know
where you’re at. Anyway, I have no children’s books and I wouldn’t sell you the other
kind. So now we understand each other, I hope!”
After saying all this without taking his pipe out of his mouth, he opened his book
again and went on reading.
The boy nodded silently and turned to go, but somehow he felt that he couldn’t
take this last remark lying down. He turned around and said softly: “All children aren’t
like that.”
Slowly the man looked up and again removed his spectacles. “You still here?
What must one do to be rid of you? And what was this terribly important thing you had to
tell me?”
“It wasn’t terribly important,” said the boy still more softly. “I only wanted. . . to
say that all children aren’t the way you said.”
“Really?” The man raised his eyebrows in affected surprise. “Then you must be
the big exception, I presume?”
The fat boy didn’t know what to say. He only shrugged his shoulders a little, and
turned to go.
“And anyway,” he heard the gruff voice behind him, “where are your manners? If
you had any, you’d have introduced yourself.”
“My name is Bastian,” said the boy. “Bastian Balthazar Bux.”
“That’s a rather odd name,” the man grumbled. “All those Bs. Oh well, you can’t
help it. You didn’t choose it. My name is Carl Conrad Coreander.”
“That makes three Cs.”

“Hmm,” the man grumbled. “Quite right.”
He puffed a few clouds. “Oh well, our names don’t really matter, as we’ll never
see each other again. But before you leave, there’s just one thing I’d like to know: What
made you come bursting into my shop like that? It looked to me as if you were running
away from something. Am I right?”
Bastian nodded. Suddenly his round face was a little paler than before and his
eyes a little larger.
“I suppose you made off with somebody’s cashbox,” Mr. Coreander conjectured,
“or knocked an old woman down, or whatever little scamps like you do nowadays. Are
the police after you, boy?”
Bastian shook his head.
“Speak up,” said Mr. Coreander. “Whom were you running away from?”
“The others.”
“What others?”
“The children in my class.”
“Why?”
“They won’t leave me alone.”
“What do they do to you?”
“They wait for me outside the schoolhouse.”
“And then what?”
“Then they shout all sorts of things. And push me around and laugh at me.”
“And you just put up with it?”
Mr. Coreander looked at the boy for a while disapprovingly. Then he asked: “Why
don’t you just give them a punch on the nose?”
Bastian gaped. “No, I wouldn’t want to do that. And besides, I can’t box.”
“How about wrestling?” Mr. Coreander asked. “Or running, swimming, football,
gymnastics? Are you no good at any of them?”
The boy shook his head.
“In other words,” said Mr. Coreander, “you’re a weakling.”
Bastian shrugged his shoulders.
“But you can still talk,” said Mr. Coreander. “Why don’t you talk back at them
when they make fun of you?”
“I tried. . .”
“Well. . .?”
“They threw me into a garbage can and tied the lid on. I yelled for two hours
before somebody heard me.”
“Hmm,” Mr. Coreander grumbled. “And now you don’t dare?”
Bastian nodded.
“In that case,” Mr. Coreander concluded, “you’re a scaredy-cat too.”
Bastian hung his head.
“And probably a hopeless grind? Best in the class, teacher’s pet? Is that it?”
“No,” said Bastian, still looking down. “I was put back last year.”
“Good Lord!” cried Mr. Coreander. “A failure all along the line.”
Bastian said nothing, he just stood there in his dripping coat. His arms hung limp
at his sides.
“What kind of things do they yell when they make fun of you?” Mr. Coreander

wanted to know.
“Oh, all kinds.”
“For instance?”
“Namby Pamby sits on the pot. The pot cracks up, says Namby Pamby: I guess it’s
’cause I weigh a lot!”
“Not very clever,” said Mr. Coreander. “What else?”
Bastian hesitated before listing: “Screwball, nitwit, braggart, liar. . .”
“Screwball? Why do they call you that?”
“I talk to my self sometimes.”
“What kind of things do you say?”
“I think up stories. I invent names and words that don’t exist. That kind of thing.”
“And you say these things to yourself? Why?”
“Well, nobody else would be interested.”
Mr. Coreander fell into a thoughtful silence.
“What do your parents say about this?”
Bastian didn’t answer right away. After a while he mumbled: “Father doesn’t say
anything. He never says anything. It’s all the same to him.”
“And your mother?”
“She — she’s gone.”
“Your parents are divorced?”
“No,” said Bastian. “She’s dead.”
At that moment the telephone rang. With some difficulty Mr. Coreander pulled
himself out of his armchair and shuffled into a small room behind the shop. He picked up
the receiver and indistinctly Bastian heard him saying his name. After that there was
nothing to be heard but a low mumbling.
Bastian stood there. He didn’t quite know why he had said all he had and
admitted so much. He hated being questioned like that. He broke into a sweat as it
occurred to him that he was already late for school. He’d have to hurry, oh yes, he’d have
to run — but he just stood there, unable to move. Something held him fast, he didn’t know
what.
He could still hear the muffled voice from the back room. It was a long telephone
conversation.
It came to Bastian that he had been staring the whole time at the book that Mr.
Coreander had been holding and that was now lying on the armchair. He couldn’t take
his eyes off it. It seemed to have a kind of magnetic power that attracted him irresistibly.
He went over to the chair, slowly held out his hand, and touched the book. In that
moment something inside him went click!, as though a trap had shut. Bastian had a
vague feeling that touching the book had started something irrevocable, which would
now take its course.
He picked up the book and examined it from all sides. It was bound in copper-
colored silk that shimmered when he moved it about. Leafing through the pages, he saw
the book was printed in two colors. There seemed to be no pictures, but there were large,
beautiful capital letters at the beginning of the chapters. Examining the binding more
closely, he discovered two snakes on it, one light and one dark. They were biting each
other’s tail, so forming an oval. And inside the oval, in strangely intricate letters, he saw
the title:

The Neverending Story
Human passions have mysterious ways, in children as well as grown-ups. Those
affected by them can’t explain them, and those who haven’t known them have no
understanding of them at all. Some people risk their lives to conquer a mountain peak.
No one, not even they themselves, can really explain why. Others ruin themselves trying
to win the heart of a certain person who wants nothing to do with them. Still others are
destroyed by their devotion to the pleasures of the table. Some are so bent on winning a
game of chance that they lose everything they own, and some sacrifice every thing for a
dream that can never come true. Some think their only hope of happiness lies in being
somewhere else, and spend their whole lives traveling from place to place. And some find
no rest until they have become powerful. In short, there are as many different passions as
there are people.
Bastian Balthazar Bux’s passion was books.
If you have never spent whole afternoons with burning ears and rumpled hair,
forgetting the world around you over a book, forgetting cold and hunger —
If you have never read secretly under the bedclothes with a flashlight, because
your father or mother or some other well-meaning person has switched off the lamp on
the plausible ground that it was time to sleep because you had to get up so early —
If you have never wept bitter tears because a wonderful story has come to an end
and you must take your leave of the characters with whom you have shared so many
adventures, whom you have loved and admired, for whom you have hoped and feared,
and without whose company life seems empty and meaningless —
If such things have not been part of your own experience, you probably won’t
understand what Bastian did next.
Staring at the title of the book, he turned hot and cold, cold and hot. Here was just
what he had dreamed of, what he had longed for ever since the passion for books had
taken hold of him: A story that never ended! The book of books!
He had to have this book — at any price.
At any price? That was easily said. Even if he had had more to offer than the bit
of pocket money he had on him — this cranky Mr. Coreander had given him clearly to
understand that he would never sell him a single book. And he certainly wouldn’t give it
away. The situation was hopeless.
Yet Bastian knew he couldn’t leave without the book. It was clear to him that he
had only come to the shop because of this book. It had called him in some mysterious
way, because it wanted to be his, because it had somehow always belonged to him.
Bastian listened to the mumbling from the little back room. In a twinkling, before
he knew it, he had the book under his coat and was hugging it with both arms. Without a
sound he backed up to the street door, keeping an anxious eye on the other door, the one
leading to the back room. Cautiously he turned the door handle. To keep the brass bells
from ringing, he opened the glass door just wide enough for him to slip through. He
quietly closed the door behind him.
Only then did he start running.
The books, copybooks, pens and pencils in his satchel jiggled and rattled to the
rhythm of his steps. He had a stitch in his side. But he kept on running.

The rain ran down his face and into his collar. The wet cold passed through his
coat, but Bastian didn’t feel it. He felt hot all over, but not from running.
His conscience, which hadn’t let out a peep in the bookshop, had suddenly woken
up. All the arguments that had seemed so convincing melted away like snowmen under
the fiery breath of a dragon.
He had stolen. He was a thief!
What he had done was worse than common theft. That book was certainly the only
one of its kind and impossible to replace. It was surely Mr. Coreander’s greatest
treasure. Stealing a violinist’s precious violin or a king’s crown wasn’t at all the same as
filching money from a cash drawer.
As he ran, he hugged the book tight under his coat. Regardless of what this book
might cost him, he couldn’t bear to lose it. It was all he had left in the world.
Because naturally he couldn’t go home anymore.
He tried to imagine his father at work in the big room he had furnished as a
laboratory. Around him lay dozens of plaster casts of human teeth, for his father was a
dental technician. Bastian had never stopped to ask himself whether his father enjoyed
his work. It occurred to him now for the first time, but now he would never be able to ask
him.
If he went home now, his father would come out of his lab in a white smock,
possibly holding a plaster cast, and he would ask: “Home so soon?” “Yes,” Bastian
would answer. “No school today?” He saw his father’s quiet, sad face, and he knew he
couldn’t possibly lie to him. Much less could he tell him the truth. No, the only thing left
for him was to go away somewhere. Far, far away. His father must never find out that his
son was a thief. And maybe he wouldn’t even notice that Bastian wasn’t there anymore.
Bastian found this thought almost comforting.
He had stopped running. Walking slowly, he saw the schoolhouse at the end of the
street. Without thinking, he was taking his usual route to school. He passed a few people
here and there, yet the street seemed deserted. But to a schoolboy arriving very, very late,
the world around the schoolhouse always seems to have gone dead. At every step he felt
the fear rising within him. Under the best of circumstances he was afraid of school, the
place of his daily defeats, afraid of his teachers, who gently appealed to his conscience or
made him the butt of their rages, afraid of the other children, who made fun of him and
never missed a chance to show him how clumsy and defenseless he was. He had always
thought of his school years as a prison term with no end in sight, a misery that would
continue until he grew up, something he would just have to live through.
But when he now passed through the echoing corridors with their smell of floor
wax and wet overcoats, when the lurking stillness suddenly stopped his ears like cotton,
and when at last he reached the door of his classroom, which was painted the same old
spinach color as the walls around it, he realized that this, too, was no place for him. He
would have to go away. So he might as well go at once.
But where to?
Bastian had read stories about boys who ran away to sea and sailed out into the
world to make their fortune. Some became pirates or heroes, others grew rich and when
they returned home years later no one could guess who they were.
But Bastian didn’t feel up to that kind of thing. He couldn’t conceive of anyone
taking him on as a cabin boy. Besides, he had no idea how to reach a seaport with

suitable ships for such an undertaking.
So where could he go?
Suddenly he thought of the right place, the only place where — at least far the
time being — no one would find him or even look for him.
The attic of the school was large and dark. It smelled of dust and mothballs. Not a
sound to be heard, except for the muffled drumming of the rain on the enormous tin roof.
Great beams blackened with age rose at regular intervals from the plank floor, joined
with other beams at head height, and lost themselves in the darkness. Here and there
spider webs as big as hammocks swayed gently in the air currents. A milky light fell from
a skylight in the roof.
The one living thing in this place where time seemed to stand still was a little
mouse that came hobbling across the floor, leaving tiny footprints in the dust — and
between them a fine line, a tailprint. Suddenly it stopped and pricked up its ears. And
then it vanished — whoosh! — into a hole in the floor.
The mouse had heard the sound of a key in a big lock. The attic door opened
slowly, with a loud squeak. For a moment a long strip of light crossed the room. Bastian
slipped in. Then, again with a squeak, the door closed. Bastian put the big key in the lock
from inside and turned it. Then he pushed the bolt and heaved a sigh of relief. Now no
one could possibly find him. No one would look for him here. The place was seldom used
— he was pretty sure of that — and even if by chance someone had something to do in the
attic, today or tomorrow, he would simply find the door locked. And the key would be
gone. And even if they somehow got the door open, Bastian would have time to hide
behind the junk that was stored here.
Little by little, his eyes got used to the dim light. He knew the place. Some months
before, he had helped the janitor to carry a laundry basket full of old copybooks up here.
And then he had seen where the key to the attic door was kept — in a wall cupboard next
to the topmost flight of stairs. He hadn’t thought of it since. But today he had
remembered.
Bastian began to shiver, his coat was soaked through and it was cold in the attic.
The first thing to do was find a place where he could make himself more or less
comfortable, because he took it for granted that he’d have to stay here a long time. How
long? The question didn’t enter his head, nor did it occur to him that he would soon be
hungry and thirsty.
He looked around for a while. The place was crammed with junk of all kinds;
there were shelves full of old files and records, benches and ink-stained desks were
heaped up every which way, a dozen old maps were hanging on an iron frame, there were
blackboards that had lost a good deal of their black, and cast-iron stoves, broken-down
pieces of gymnasium equipment — including a horse with the stuffing coming out through
the cracks in its hide — and a number of soiled mats. There were also quite a few stuffed
animals — at least what the moths had left of them — a big owl, a golden eagle, a fox, and
so on, cracked retorts and other chemical equipment, a galvanometer, a human skeleton
hanging on a clothes rack, and a large number of cartons full of old books and papers.
Bastian finally decided to make his home on the pile of old gym mats. When he stretched
out on them, it was almost like lying on a sofa. He dragged them to the place under the
skylight where the light was best. Not far away he found a pile of gray army blankets;
they were dusty and ragged but that didn’t matter now. He carried them over to his nest.

He took off his wet coat and hung it on the clothes rack beside the skeleton. The skeleton
jiggled and swayed, but Bastian had no fear of it, maybe because he was used to such
things at home. He also removed his wet shoes. In his stocking feet he squatted down on
the mats and wrapped himself in the gray blankets like an Indian. Beside him lay his
school satchel — and the copper-colored book.
It passed through his mind that the rest of them down in the classroom would be
having history just then. Maybe they’d be writing a composition on some deadly dull
subject.
Bastian looked at the book.
“I wonder,” he said to himself, “what’s in a book while it’s closed. Oh, I know it’s
full of letters printed on paper, but all the same, something must be happening, because
as soon as I open it, there’s a whole story with people I don’t know yet and all kinds of
adventures and deeds and battles. And sometimes there are storms at sea, or it takes you
to strange cities and countries. All those things are somehow shut up in a book. Of course
you have to read it to find out. But it’s already there, that’s the funny thing. I just wish I
knew how it could be.”
Suddenly an almost festive mood came over him.
He settled himself, picked up the book, opened it to the first page, and began to
read
The Neverending Story
I
Fantastica in Danger
ll the beasts in Howling Forest were safe in their caves, nests, and burrows.
It was midnight, the storm wind was whistling through the tops of the great
ancient trees. The towering trunks creaked and groaned.
Suddenly a faint light came zigzagging through the woods, stopped here and
there, trembling fitfully, flew up into the air, rested on a branch, and a moment later
hurried on. It was a glittering sphere about the size of a child’s ball; it moved in long
leaps, touched the ground now and then, then bounded up again. But it wasn’t a ball.
It was a will-o’-the-wisp. It had lost its way. And that’s something quite unusual
even in Fantastica, because ordinarily will-o’-the-wisps make others lose their way.
Inside this ball of light there was a small, exceedingly active figure, which ran and
jumped with all its might. It was neither male nor female, for such distinctions don’t exist
among will-o’-the-wisps. In its right hand it carried a tiny white flag, which glittered
behind it. That meant it was either a messenger or a flag-of-truce bearer.
You’d think it would have bumped into a tree, leaping like that in the darkness,

but there was no danger of that, for will-o’-the-wisps are incredibly nimble and can
change directions in the middle of a leap. That explains the zigzagging, but in a general
sort of way it moved in a definite direction.
Up to the moment when it came to a jutting crag and started back in a fright.
Whimpering like a puppy, it sat down on the fork of a tree and pondered awhile before
venturing out and cautiously looking around the crag.
Up ahead it saw a clearing in the woods, and there in the light of a campfire sat
three figures of different sizes and shapes. A giant, who looked as if the whole of him
were made of gray stone, lay stretched out on his belly. He was almost ten feet long.
Propped up on one elbow, he was looking into the fire. In his weather-beaten stone face,
which seemed strangely small in comparison with his powerful shoulders, his teeth stood
out like a row of steel chisels. The will-o’-the-wisp recognized him as belonging to the
family of rock chewers. These were creatures who lived in a mountain range
inconceivably far from Howling Forest — but they not only lived in the mountain range,
they also lived on it, for little by little they were eating it up. Rocks were their only food.
Luckily a little went a long way. They could live for weeks and months on a single bite of
this — for them — extremely nutritious fare. There weren’t very many rock chewers, and
besides it was a large mountain range. But since these giants had been there a long time —
they lived to a greater age than most of the inhabitants of Fantastica — those mountains
had come, over the years, to look very strange — like an enormous Swiss cheese, full of
holes and grottoes. And that is why they were known as the Cheesiewheezies.
But the rock chewers not only fed on stone, they made everything they needed out
of it: furniture, hats, shoes, tools, even cuckoo clocks. So it was not surprising that the
vehicle of this particular giant, which was now leaning against a tree behind him, was a
sort of bicycle made entirely of this material, with two wheels that looked like enormous
millstones. On the whole, it suggested a steamroller with pedals.
The second figure, who was sitting to the right of the first, was a little night-hob.
No more than twice the size of the will-o’-the-wisp, he looked like a pitch-black, furry
caterpillar sitting up. He had little pink hands, with which he gestured violently as he
spoke, and below his tousled black hair two big round eyes glowed like moons in what
was presumably his face.
Since there were night-hobs of all shapes and sizes in every part of Fantastica, it
was hard to tell by the sight of him whether this one had come from far or near. But one
could guess that he was traveling, because the usual mount of the night-hobs, a large bat,
wrapped in its wings like a closed umbrella, was hanging head-down from a nearby
branch.
It took the will-o’-the-wisp some time to discover the third person on the left side
of the fire, for he was so small as to be scarcely discernible from that distance. He was
one of the tinies, a delicately built little fellow in a bright-colored suit and a top hat.
The will-o’-the-wisp knew next to nothing about tinies. But it had once heard that
these people built whole cities in the branches of trees and that the houses were
connected by stairways, ropeladders, and ramps. But the tinies lived in an entirely
different part of the boundless Fantastican Empire, even farther away than the rock
chewers. Which made it all the more amazing that the mount which had evidently carried
the tiny all this way was, of all things, a snail. Its pink shell was surmounted by a
gleaming silver saddle, and its bridle, as well as the reins fastened to its feelers, glittered

like silver threads.
The will-o’-the-wisp couldn’t get over it that three such different creatures should
be sitting there so peacefully, for harmony between different species was by no means the
rule in Fantastica. Battles and wars were frequent, and certain of the species had been
known to feud for hundreds of years. Moreover, not all the inhabitants of Fantastica were
good and honorable, there were also thieving, wicked, and cruel ones. The will-o’-the-
wisp itself belonged to a family that was hardly reputed for truthfulness or reliability.
After observing the scene in the firelight for some time, the will-o’-the-wisp
noticed that each of the three had something white, either a flag or a white scarf worn
across his chest. Which meant that they were messengers or flag-of-truce bearers, and
that of course accounted for the peaceful atmosphere.
Could they be traveling on the same business as the will-o’-the-wisp?
What they were saying couldn’t be heard from a distance because of the howling
wind in the treetops. But since they respected one another as messengers, mightn’t they
recognize the will-o’-the-wisp in the same capacity and refrain from harming him? It had
to ask someone the way, and there seemed little likelihood of finding a better opportunity
at this hour in the middle of the woods. So plucking up courage, it ventured out of its
hiding place and hovered trembling in mid-air, waving its white flag.
The rock chewer, whose face was turned in that direction, was first to notice the
will-o’-the-wisp.
“Lots of traffic around here tonight,” he crackled. “Here comes another one.”
“Hoo, it’s a will-o’-the-wisp,” whispered the night-hob, and his moon eyes
glowed. “Pleased to meet you!”
The tiny stood up, took a few steps toward the newcomer, and chirped: “If my
eyes don’t deceive me, you are here as a messenger.”
“Yes indeed,” said the will-o’-the-wisp.
The tiny removed his red top hat, made a slight bow, and twittered: “Oh, do join
us. We, too, are messengers. Won’t you be seated?”
And with his hat he motioned toward an empty place by the fire.
“Many thanks,” said the will-o’-the-wisp, coming timidly closer.
“Allow me to introduce myself. My name is Blubb.”
“Delighted,” said the tiny. “Mine is Gluckuk.”
The night-hob bowed without getting up.”My name is Vooshvazool.”
“And mine,” the rock chewer crackled, “is Pyornkrachzark.”
All three looked at the will-o’-the-wisp, who was wriggling with embarrassment.
Will-o’-the-wisps find it most unpleasant to be looked full in the face.
“Won’t you sit down, dear Blubb?” said the tiny.
“To tell the truth,” said the will-o’-the-wisp, “I’m in a terrible hurry. I only wanted
to ask if by any chance you knew the way to the Ivory Tower.”
“Hoo,” said the night-hob. “Could you be going to see the Childlike Empress?”
“Exactly,” said the will-o’-the-wisp. “I have an important message for her.”
“What does it say?” the rock chewer crackled.
“But you see,” said the will-o’-the-wisp, shifting its weight from foot to foot, “it’s
a secret message.”
“All three of us — hoo — have the same mission as you,” replied Vooshvazool, the
night-hob. “That makes us partners.”

“Maybe we even have the same message,” said Gluckuk, the tiny.
“Sit down and tell us,” Pyornkrachzark crackled.
The will-o’-the-wisp sat down in the empty place.
“My home,” it began after a moment’s hesitation, “is a long way from here. I don’t
know if any of those present has heard of it. It’s called Moldymoor.”
“Hoo!” cried the night-hob delightedly. “A lovely country!”
The will-o’-the-wisp smiled faintly.
“Yes, isn’t it?”
“Is that all you have to say, Blubb?” Pyornkrachzark crackled. “What is the
purpose of your trip?”
“Something has happened in Moldymoor,” said the will-o’-the-wisp haltingly,
“something impossible to understand. Actually, it’s still happening. It’s hard to describe —
the way it began was — well, in the east of our country there’s a lake — that is, there was a
lake — Lake Foamingbroth we called it. Well, the way it began was like this. One day
Lake Foamingbroth wasn’t there anymore — it was gone. See?”
“You mean it dried up?” Gluckuk inquired.
“No,” said the will-o’-the-wisp. “Then there’d be a dried-up lake. But there isn’t.
Where the lake used to be there’s nothing — absolutely nothing. Now do you see?”
“A hole?” the rock chewer grunted.
“No, not a hole,” said the will-o’-the-wisp despairingly. “A hole, after all, is
something. This is nothing at all.”
The three other messengers exchanged glances.
“What — hoo — does this nothing look like?” asked the night-hob.
“That’s just what’s so hard to describe,” said the will-o’-the-wisp unhappily. “It
doesn’t look like anything. It’s — it’s like — oh, there’s no word for it.”
“Maybe,” the tiny suggested, “when you look at the place, it’s as if you were
blind.”
The will-o’-the-wisp stared openmouthed.
“Exactly!” it cried. “But where — I mean how — I mean, have you had the same. .
.?”
“Wait a minute,” the rock chewer crackled. “Was it only this one place?”
“At first, yes,” the will-o’-the-wisp explained. “That is, the place got bigger little
by little. And then all of a sudden Foggle, the father of the frogs, who lived in Lake
Foamingbroth with his family, was gone too. Some of the inhabitants started running
away. But little by little the same thing happened to other parts of Moldymoor. It usually
started with just a little chunk, no bigger than a partridge egg. But then these chunks got
bigger and bigger. If somebody put his foot into one of them by mistake, the foot — or
hand — or whatever else he put in — would be gone too. It didn’t hurt — it was just that a
part of whoever it was would be missing. Some would even fall in on purpose if they got
too close to the Nothing. It has an irresistible attraction — the bigger the place, the
stronger the pull. None of us could imagine what this terrible thing might be, what caused
it, and what we could do about it. And seeing that it didn’t go away by itself but kept
spreading, we finally decided to send a messenger to the Childlike Empress to ask her for
advice and help. Well, I’m the messenger.”
The three others gazed silently into space.
After a while, the night-hob sighed: “Hoo! It’s the same where I come from. And

I’m traveling on the exact same errand — hoo hoo!”
The tiny turned to the will-o’-the-wisp. “Each one of us,” he chirped, “comes from
a different province of Fantastica. We’ve met here entirely by chance. But each one of us
is going to the Childlike Empress with the same message.”
“And the message,” grated the rock chewer, “is that all Fantastica is in danger.”
The will-o’-the-wisp cast a terrified look at each one in turn.
“If that’s the case,” it cried, jumping up, “we haven’t a moment to lose.”
“We were just going to start,” said the tiny. “We only stopped to rest because it’s
so awfully dark here in Howling Forest. But now that you’ve joined us, Blubb, you can
light the way.”
“Impossible,” said the will-o’-the-wisp. “Would you expect me to wait for
someone who rides a snail? Sorry.”
“But it’s a racing snail,” said the tiny, somewhat miffed.
“Otherwise — hoo hoo –” the night-hob sighed, “we won’t tell you which way to
go.”
“Who are you people talking to?” the rock chewer crackled.
And sure enough, the will-o’-the-wisp hadn’t even heard the other messengers’ last
words, for it was already flitting through the forest in long leaps.
“Oh well,” said the tiny, pushing his top hat onto the back of his head, “maybe it
wouldn’t have been such a good idea to follow a will-o’-the-wisp.”
“To tell the truth,” said the night-hob, “I prefer to travel on my own. Because I,
for one, fly.”
With a quick “hoo hoo” he ordered his bat to make ready. And whish! Away he
flew.
The rock chewer put out the campfire with the palm of his hand.
“I, too, prefer to go by myself,” he crackled in the darkness. “Then I don’t need to
worry about squashing some wee creature.”
Rattling and grinding, he rode his stone bicycle straight into the woods, now and
then thudding into a tree giant. Slowly the clatter receded in the distance.
Gluckuk, the tiny, was last to set out. He seized the silvery reins and said: “All
right, we’ll see who gets there first. Geeyap, old-timer, geeyap.” And he clicked his
tongue.
And then there was nothing to be heard but the storm wind howling in the
treetops.
The clock in the belfry struck nine. Reluctantly Bastian’s thought turned back to
reality. He was glad the Neverending Story had nothing to do with that.
He didn’t like books in which dull, cranky writers describe humdrum events in the
very humdrum lives of humdrum people. Reality gave him enough of that kind of thing,
why should he read about it? Besides, he couldn’t stand it when a writer tried to convince
him of something. And these humdrum books, it seemed to him, were always trying to do
just that.
Bastion liked books that were exciting or funny, or that made him dream. Books
where made-up characters had marvelous adventures, books that made him imagine all
sorts of things.
Because one thing he was good at, possibly the only thing, was imagining things

so clearly that he almost saw and heard them. When he told himself stories, he sometimes
forgot everything around him and awoke — as though from a dream — only when the
story was finished. And this book was just like his own stories! In reading it, he had
heard not only the creaking of the big trees and the howling of the wind in the treetops,
but also the different voices of the four comical messengers. And he almost seemed to
catch the smell of moss and forest earth.
Down in the classroom they were starting in on nature study. That consisted
almost entirely in counting pistils and stamens. Bastian was glad to be up here in his
hiding place, where he could read. This, he thought, was just the right book for him!
A week later Vooshvazool, the little night-hob, arrived at his destination. He was
the first. Or rather, he thought he was first, because he was riding through the air.
Just as the setting sun turned the clouds to liquid gold, he noticed that his bat was
circling over the Labyrinth. That was the name of an enormous garden, extending from
horizon to horizon and filled with the most bewitching scents and dreamlike colors.
Broad avenues and narrow paths twined their way among copses, lawns, and beds of the
rarest, strangest flowers in a design so artful and intricate that the whole plain resembled
an enormous maze. Of course, it had been designed only for pleasure and amusement,
with no intention of endangering anyone, much less of warding off an enemy. It would
have been useless for such purposes, and the Childlike Empress required no such
protection, because in all the unbounded reaches of Fantastica there was no one who
would have thought of attacking her. For that there was a reason, as we shall soon see.
While gliding soundlessly over the flowery maze, the night-hob sighted all sorts
of animals. In a small clearing between lilacs and laburnum, a group of young unicorns
was playing in the evening sun, and once, glancing under a giant bluebell, he even
thought he saw the famous phoenix in its nest, but he wasn’t quite certain, and such was
his haste that he didn’t want to turn back to make sure. For at the center of the Labyrinth
there now appeared, shimmering in fairy whiteness, the Ivory Tower, the heart of
Fantastica and the residence of the Childlike Empress.
The word “tower” might give someone who has never seen it the wrong idea. It
had nothing of the church or castle about it. The Ivory Tower was as big as a whole city.
From a distance it looked like a pointed mountain peak twisted like a snail shell. Its
highest point was deep in the clouds. Only on coming closer could you notice that this
great sugarloaf consisted of innumerable towers, turrets, domes, roofs, oriels, terraces,
arches, stairways, and balustrades, all marvelously fitted together. The whole was made
of the whitest Fantastican ivory, so delicately carved in every detail that it might have
been taken for the latticework of the finest lace.
These buildings housed the Childlike Empress’s court, her chamberlains and
maidservants, wise women and astrologers, magicians and jesters, messengers, cooks and
acrobats, her tightrope walkers and storytellers, heralds, gardeners, watchmen, tailors,
shoemakers and alchemists. And at the very summit of the great tower lived the Childlike
Empress in a pavilion shaped like a magnolia blossom. On certain nights, when the full
moon shone most gloriously in the starry sky, the ivory petals opened wide, and the
Childlike Empress would be sitting in the middle of the glorious flower.
Riding on his bat, the little night-hob landed on one of the lower terraces, where
the stables were located. Someone must have announced his arrival, for five imperial

grooms were there waiting for him. They helped him out of his saddle, bowed to him, and
held out the ceremonial welcome cup. As etiquette demanded, Vooshvazool took only a
sip and then returned the cup. Each of the grooms took a sip, then they bowed again and
led the bat to the stables. All this was done in silence. On reaching its appointed place,
the bat touched neither food nor drink, but immediately rolled up, hung itself head-down
on a hook, and fell into a deep sleep. The little night-hob had demanded a bit too much of
his mount. The grooms left it alone and crept away from the stable on tiptoes.
In this stable there were many other mounts: two elephants, one pink and one
blue, a gigantic griffon with the forequarters of an eagle and the hindquarters of a lion, a
winged horse, whose name was once known even outside of Fantastica but is now
forgotten, several flying dogs, a few other bats, and several dragonflies and butterflies for
especially small riders. In other stables there were still other mounts, which didn’t fly but
ran, crawled, hopped, or swam. And each had a groom of its own to feed and take care of
it.
Ordinarily one would have expected to hear quite a cacophony of different voices:
roaring, screeching, piping, chirping, croaking, and chattering. But that day there was
utter silence.
The little night-hob was still standing where the grooms had left him. Suddenly,
without knowing why, he felt dejected and discouraged. He too was exhausted after the
long trip. And not even the knowledge that he had arrived first could cheer him up.
Suddenly he heard a chirping voice. “Hello, hello! If it isn’t my good friend
Vooshvazool! So glad you’ve finally made it!”
The night-hob looked around, and his moon eyes flared with amazement, for on a
balustrade, leaning negligently against a flower pot, stood Gluckuk, the tiny, tipping his
red top hat.
“Hoo hoo!” went the bewildered night-hob. And again: “Hoo hoo!” He just
couldn’t think of anything better to say.
“The other two haven’t arrived yet. I’ve been here since yesterday morning.”
“How — hoo hoo — how did you do it?”
“Simple,” said the tiny with a rather condescending smile. “Didn’t I tell you I had
a racing snail?”
The night-hob scratched his tangled black head fur with his little pink hand.
“I must go to the Childlike Empress at once,” he said mournfully.
The tiny gave him a pensive look.
“Hmm,” he said. “I put in for an appointment yesterday.”
“Put in for an appointment?” asked the night-hob. “Can’t we just go in and see
her?”
“I’m afraid not,” chirped the tiny. “We’ll have a long wait. You can’t imagine how
many messengers have turned up.”
“Hoo hoo,” the night-hob sighed. “How come?”
“You’d better take a look for yourself,” the tiny twittered. “Come with me, my
dear Vooshvazool. Come with me!”
The two of them started out.
The High Street, which wound around the Ivory Tower in a narrowing spiral, was
clogged with a dense crowd of the strangest creatures. Enormous beturbaned djinns, tiny
kobolds, three-headed trolls, bearded dwarfs, glittering fairies, goat-legged fauns, nixies

with wavy golden hair, sparkling snow sprites, and countless others were milling about,
standing in groups, or sitting silently on the ground, discussing the situation or gazing
glumly into the distance.
Vooshvazool stopped still when he saw them.
“Hoo hoo,” he said. “What’s going on? What are they all doing here?”
“They’re all messengers,” Gluckuk explained. “Messengers from all over
Fantastica. All with the same message as ours. I’ve spoken with several of them. The
same menace seems to have broken out everywhere.”
The night-hob gave vent to a long wheezing sigh.
“Do they know,” he asked, “what it is and where it comes from?”
“I’m afraid not. Nobody knows.”
“What about the Childlike Empress?”
“The Childlike Empress,” said the tiny in an undertone, “is ill, very ill. Maybe
that’s the cause of this mysterious calamity that’s threatening all Fantastica. But so far
none of the many doctors who’ve been conferring in the Magnolia Pavilion has
discovered the nature of her illness or found a cure for it.”
“That,” said the night-hob breathlessly, “is — hoo hoo — terrible.”
“So it is,” said the tiny.
In view of the circumstances, Vooshvazool decided not to put in for an
appointment.
Two days later Blubb, the will-o’-the-wisp, arrived. Of course, he had hopped in
the wrong direction and made an enormous detour.
And finally — three days after that — Pyornkrachzark, the rock chewer, appeared.
He came plodding along on foot, for in a sudden frenzy of hunger he had eaten his stone
bicycle.
During the long waiting period, the four so unalike messengers became good
friends. From then on they stayed together.
But that’s another story and shall be told another time.
II
Atreyu’s Mission
ecause of their special importance, deliberations concerning the welfare of all
Fantastica were held in the great throne room of the palace, which was situated only a
few floors below the Magnolia Pavilion.
The large circular room was filled with muffled voices. The four hundred and
ninety-nine best doctors in Fantastica had assembled there and were whispering or
mumbling with one another in groups of varying sizes. Each one had examined the

Childlike Empress — some more recently than others — and each had tried to help her
with his skill. But none had succeeded, none knew the nature or cause of her illness, and
none could think of a cure for it. Just then the five hundredth doctor, the most famous in
all Fantastica, whose knowledge was said to embrace every existing medicinal herb,
every magic philtre and secret of nature, was examining the patient. He had been with her
for several hours, and all his assembled colleagues were eagerly awaiting the result of his
examination.
Of course, this assembly was nothing like a human medical congress. To be sure,
a good many of the inhabitants of Fantastica were more or less human in appearance, but
at least as many resembled animals or were even farther from the human. The doctors
inside the hall were just as varied as the crowd of messengers milling about outside.
There were dwarf doctors with white beards and humps, there were fairy doctoresses in
shimmering silvery-blue robes and with glittering stars in their hair, there were water
sprites with big round bellies and webbed hands and feet (sitz baths had been installed for
them) . There were white snakes, who had coiled up on the long table at the center of the
room; there were witches, vampires, and ghosts, none of whom are generally reputed to
be especially benevolent or conducive to good health.
If you are to understand why these last were present, there is one thing you have
to know:
The Childlike Empress — as her title indicates — was looked upon as the ruler
over all the innumerable provinces of the Fantastican Empire, but in reality she was far
more than a ruler; she was something entirely different.
She didn’t rule, she had never used force or made use of her power. She never
issued commands and she never judged anyone. She never interfered with anyone and
never had to defend herself against any assailant; for no one would have thought of
rebelling against her or of harming her in any way. In her eyes all her subjects were
equal.
She was simply there in a special way. She was the center of all life in Fantastica.
And every creature, whether good or bad, beautiful or ugly, merry or solemn,
foolish or wise — all owed their existence to her existence. Without her, nothing could
have lived, any more than a human body can live if it has lost its heart.
All knew this to be so, though no one fully understood her secret. Thus she was
respected by all the creatures of the Empire, and her health was of equal concern to them
all. For her death would have meant the end of them all, the end of the boundless
Fantastican realm.
Bastian’s thoughts wandered.
Suddenly he remembered the long corridor in the hospital where his mother had
been operated on. He and his father had sat waiting for hours outside the operating
room. Doctors and nurses hurried this way and that. When his father asked about his
wife, the answer was always evasive. No one really seemed to know how she was doing.
Finally a bald-headed man in a white smock had come out to them. He looked tired and
sad. Much as he regretted it, he said, his efforts had been in vain. He had pressed their
hands and mumbled something about “heartfelt sympathy.”
After that, everything had changed between Bastion and his father. Not
outwardly. Bastion had everything he could have wished for. He had a three-speed

bicycle, an electric train, plenty of vitamin pills, fifty-three books, a golden hamster, an
aquarium with tropical fish in it, a small camera, six pocketknives, and so forth and so
on. But none of all this really meant anything to him.
Bastian remembered that his father had often played with him in the past. He had
even told him stories. No longer. He couldn’t talk to his father anymore. There was an
invisible wall around his father, and no one could get through to him. He never found
fault and he never praised. Even when Bastian was put back in school, his father hadn’t
said anything. He had only looked at him in his sad, absent way, and Bastian felt that as
far as his father was concerned he wasn’t there at all. That was how his father usually
made him feel. When they sat in front of the television screen in the evening, Bastian saw
that his father wasn’t even looking at it, that his thoughts were far away. Or when they
both sat there with books, Bastian saw that his father wasn’t reading at all. He’d been
looking at the same page for hours and had forgotten to turn it.
Bastian knew his father was sad. He himself had cried for many nights —
sometimes he had been so shaken by sobs that he had to vomit — but little by little it had
passed. And after all he was still there. Why didn’t his father ever speak to him, not about
his mother, not about important things, but just for the feel of talking together?
“If only we knew,” said a tall, thin fire sprite, with a beard of red flames, “if only
we knew what her illness is. There’s no fever, no swelling, no rash, no inflammation. She
just seems to be fading away — no one knows why.”
As he spoke, little clouds of smoke came out of his mouth and formed figures.
This time they were question marks.
A bedraggled old raven, who looked like a potato with feathers stuck onto it every
which way, answered in a croaking voice (he was a head cold and sore throat specialist):
“She doesn’t cough, she hasn’t got a cold. Medically speaking, it’s no disease at all.” He
adjusted the big spectacles on his beak and a cast a challenging look around.
“One thing seems obvious,” buzzed a scarab (a beetle, sometimes known as a pill
roller): “There is some mysterious connection between her illness and the terrible
happenings these messengers from all Fantastica have been reporting.”
“Oh yes!” scoffed an ink goblin. “You see mysterious connections everywhere.”
“My dear colleague!” pleaded a hollow-cheeked ghost in a long white gown.
“Let’s not get personal. Such remarks are quite irrelevant. And please — lower your
voices.”
Conversations of this kind were going on in every part of the throne room. It may
seem strange that creatures of so many different kinds were able to communicate with
one another. But nearly all the inhabitants of Fantastica, even the animals, knew at least
two languages: their own, which they spoke only with members of their own species and
which no outsider understood, and the universal language known as High Fantastican. All
Fantasticans used it, though some in a rather peculiar way.
Suddenly all fell silent, for the great double door had opened. In stepped Cairon,
the far-famed master of the healer’s art.
He was what in older times had been called a centaur. He had the body of a man
from the waist up, and that of a horse from the waist down. And Cairon was furthermore
a black centaur. He hailed from a remote region far to the south, and his human half was
the color of ebony. Only his curly hair and beard were white, while the horselike half of

him was striped like a zebra. He was wearing a strange hat plaited of reeds. A large
golden amulet hung from a chain around his neck, and on this amulet one could make out
two snakes, one light and one dark, which were biting each other’s tail and so forming an
oval.
Everyone in Fantastica knew what the medallion meant. It was the badge of one
acting on orders from the Childlike Empress, acting in her name as though she herself
were present.
It was said to give the bearer mysterious powers, though no one knew exactly
what these powers were. Everyone knew its name: AURYN.
But many, who feared to pronounce the name, called it the “Gem” or the “Glory”.
In other words, the book bore the mark of the Childlike Empress!
A whispering passed through the throne room, and some of the doctors were
heard to cry out. The Gem had not been entrusted to anyone for a long, long time.
Cairon stamped his hooves two or three times. When the disorder subsided, he
said in a deep voice: “Friends, don’t be too upset. I shall only be wearing AURYN for a
short time. I am merely a go-between. Soon I shall pass the Gem on to one worthier.”
A breathless silence filled the room.
“I won’t try to misrepresent our defeat with high-sounding words. The Childlike
Empress’s illness has baffled us all. The one thing we know is that the destruction of
Fantastica began at the same time as this illness. We can’t even be sure that medical
science can save her. But it is possible — and I hope none of you will be offended at what
I am going to say — it is possible that we, we who are gathered here, do not possess all
knowledge, all wisdom. Indeed it is my last and only hope that somewhere in this
unbounded realm there is a being wiser than we are, who can give us help and advice. Of
course, this is no more than a possibility. But one thing is certain: The search for this
savior calls for a pathfinder, someone who is capable of finding paths in the pathless
wilderness and who will shrink from no danger or hardship. In other words: a hero. And
the Childlike Empress has given me the name of this hero, to whom she entrusts her
salvation and ours. His name is Atreyu, and he lives in the Grassy Ocean beyond the
Silver Mountains. I shall transmit AURYN to him and send him on the Great Quest. Now
you know all there is to know.”
With that, the old centaur thumped out of the room.
Those who remained behind exchanged looks of bewilderment.
“What was this hero’s name?” one of them asked.
“Atreyu or something of the kind,” said another.
“Never heard of him,” said the third. And all four hundred and ninety-nine doctors
shook their heads in dismay.
The clock in the belfry struck ten. Bastian was amazed at how quickly the time
had passed. In class, every hour seemed to drag on for an eternity. Down below, they
would be having history with Mr. Drone, a gangling, ordinarily ill-tempered man, who
delighted in holding Bastian up to ridicule because he couldn’t remember the dates when
certain battles had been fought or when someone or other had reigned.

The Grassy Ocean behind the Silver Mountains was many days’ journey from the
Ivory Tower. It was actually a prairie, as long and wide and flat as an ocean. Its whole
expanse was covered with tall, juicy grass, and when the wind blew, great waves passed
over it with a sound like troubled water.
The people who lived there were known as “Grass People” or “Greenskins”. They
had blue-black hair, which the men as well as the women wore long and often in pigtails,
and their skin was olive green. They led a hard, frugal life, and their children, girls as
well as boys, were brought up to be brave, proud, and generous. They learned to bear
heat, cold, and great hardship and were tested for courage at an early age. This was
necessary because the Greenskins were a nation of hunters. They obtained everything
they needed either from the hard, fibrous prairie grass or from the purple buffaloes, great
herds of which roamed the Grassy Ocean.
These purple buffaloes were about twice the size of common bulls or cows; they
had long, purplish-red hair with a silky sheen and enormous horns with tips as hard and
sharp as daggers. They were peaceful as a rule, but when they scented danger or thought
they were being attacked, they could be as terrible as a natural cataclysm. Only a
Greenskin would have dared to hunt these beasts, and moreover they used no other
weapons than bows and arrows. The Greenskins were believers in chivalrous combat, and
often it was not the hunted but the hunter who lost his life. The Greenskins loved and
honored the purple buffaloes and held that only those willing to be killed by them had the
right to kill them.
News of the Childlike Empress’s illness and the danger threatening all Fantastica
had not yet reached the Grassy Ocean. It was a long, long time since any traveler had
visited the tent colonies of the Greenskins. The grass was juicier than ever, the days were
bright, and the nights full of stars. All seemed to be well.
But one day a white-haired black centaur appeared. His hide was dripping with
sweat, he seemed totally exhausted, and his bearded face was haggard. On his head he
wore a strange hat plaited of reeds, and around his neck a chain with a large golden
amulet hanging from it. It was Cairon.
He stood in the open space at the center of the successive rings of tents. It was
there that the elders held their councils and that the people danced and sang old songs on
feast days. He waited for the Greenskins to assemble, but it was only very old men and
women and small children wide-eyed with curiosity who crowded around him. He
stamped his hooves impatiently.
“Where are the hunters and huntresses?” he panted, removing his hat and wiping
his forehead.
A white-haired woman with a baby in her arms replied: “They are still hunting.
They won’t be back for three or four days.”
“Is Atreyu with them?” the centaur asked.
“Yes, stranger, but how can it be that you know him?”
“I don’t know him. Go and get him.”
“Stranger,” said an old man on crutches, “he will come unwillingly, because this
is his hunt. It starts at sunset. Do you know what that means?”
Cairon shook his mane and stamped his hooves.
“I don’t know, and it doesn’t matter. He has something more important to do now.

You know this sign I am wearing. Go and get him.”
“We see the Gem,” said a little girl. “And we know you have come from the
Childlike Empress. But who are you?”
“My name is Cairon,” the centaur growled. “Cairon the physician, if that means
anything to you.”
A bent old woman pushed forward and cried out: “Yes, it’s true. I recognize him. I
saw him once when I was young. He is the greatest and most famous doctor in all
Fantastica.”
The centaur nodded. “Thank you, my good woman,” he said. “And now perhaps
one of you will at last be kind enough to bring this Atreyu here. It’s urgent. The life of the
Childlike Empress is at stake.”
“I’ll go,” cried a little girl of five or six.
She ran away and a few seconds later she could be seen between the tents
galloping away on a saddleless horse.
“At last!” Cairon grumbled. Then he fell into a dead faint. When he revived, he
didn’t know where he was, for all was dark around him. It came to him only little by little
that he was in a large tent, lying on a bed of soft furs. It seemed to be night, for through a
cleft in the door curtain he saw flickering firelight.
“Holy horseshoes!” he muttered, and tried to sit up. “How long have I been lying
here?”
A head looked in through the door opening and pulled back again. Someone said:
“Yes, he seems to be awake.”
Then the curtain was drawn aside and a boy of about ten stepped in. His long
trousers and shoes were of soft buffalo leather. His body was bare from the waist up, but
a long purple-red cloak, evidently woven from buffalo hair, hung from his shoulders. His
long blue-black hair was gathered together and held back by leather thongs. A few simple
white designs were painted on the olive-green skin of his cheeks and forehead. His dark
eyes flashed angrily at the intruder; otherwise his features betrayed no emotion of any
kind.
“What do you want of me, stranger?” he asked. “Why have you come to my tent?
And why have you robbed me of my hunt? If I had killed the big buffalo today — and my
arrow was already fitted to my bowstring — I’d have been a hunter tomorrow. Now I’ll
have to wait a whole year. Why?”
The old centaur stared at him in consternation. “Am I to take it,” he asked, “that
you are Atreyu?”
“That’s right, stranger.”
“Isn’t there someone else of the same name? A grown man, an experienced
hunter?”
“No. I and no one else am Atreyu.”
Sinking back on his bed of furs, old Cairon gasped: “A child! A little boy! Really,
the decisions of the Childlike Empress are hard to fathom.”
Atreyu waited in impassive silence.
“Forgive me, Atreyu,” said Cairon, controlling his agitation with the greatest
difficulty. “I didn’t mean to hurt your feelings, but the surprise has been just too great.
Frankly, I’m horrified. I don’t know what to think. I can’t help wondering: Did the
Childlike Empress really know what she was doing when she chose a youngster like you?

It’s sheer madness! And if she did it intentionally, then. . . then. . .”
With a violent shake of his head, he blurted out: “No! No! If I had known whom
she was sending me to, I’d have refused to entrust you with the mission. I’d have
refused!”
“What mission?” Atreyu asked.
“It’s monstrous!” cried Cairon indignantly. “It’s doubtful whether even the
greatest, most experienced of heroes could carry out this mission. . . and you!. . . She’s
sending you into the unfathomable to look for the unknown. . . No one can help you, no
one can advise you, no one can foresee what will befall you. And yet you must decide at
once, immediately, whether or not you accept the mission. There’s not a moment to be
lost. For ten days and nights I have galloped almost without rest to reach you. But now —
I almost wish I hadn’t got here. I’m very old, I’m at the end of my strength. Give me a
drink of water, please.”
Atreyu brought a pitcher of fresh spring water. The centaur drank deeply, then he
wiped his beard and said somewhat more calmly: “Thank you. That was good. I feel
better already. Listen to me, Atreyu. You don’t have to accept this mission. The Childlike
Empress leaves it entirely up to you. She never gives orders. I’ll tell her how it is and
she’ll find someone else. She can’t have known you were a little boy. She must have got
you mixed up with someone else. That’s the only possible explanation.”
“What is this mission?” Atreyu asked.
“To find a cure for the Childlike Empress,” the centaur answered, “and save
Fantastica.”
“Is she sick?” Atreyu asked in amazement.
Cairon told him how it was with the Childlike Empress and what the messengers
had reported from all parts of Fantastica. Atreyu asked many questions and the centaur
answered them to the best of his ability. They talked far into the night. And the more
Atreyu learned of the menace facing Fantastica, the more his face, which at first had been
so impassive, expressed unveiled horror.
“To think,” he murmured finally with pale lips, “that I knew nothing about it!”
Cairon cast a grave, anxious look at the boy from under his bushy white
eyebrows.
“Now you know the lie of the land,” he said. “And now perhaps you understand
why I was so upset when I first laid eyes on you. Still, it was you the Childlike Empress
named. ‘Go and find Atreyu,’ she said to me. ‘I put all my trust in him,’ she said. ‘Ask him
if he’s willing to attempt the Great Quest for me and for Fantastica.’ I don’t know why she
chose you. Maybe only a little boy like you can do whatever has to be done. I don’t know,
and I can’t advise you.”
Atreyu sat there with bowed head, and made no reply. He realized that this was a
far greater task than his hunt. It was doubtful whether the greatest hunter and pathfinder
could succeed; how then could he hope. . .?
“Well?” the centaur asked. “Will you?”
Atreyu raised his head and looked at him.
“I will,” he said firmly.
Cairon nodded gravely. Then he took the chain with the golden amulet from his
neck and put it around Atreyu’s.
“AURYN gives you great power,” he said solemnly, “but you must not make use

of it. For the Childlike Empress herself never makes use of her power. AURYN will
protect you and guide you, but whatever comes your way you must never interfere,
because from this moment on your own opinion ceases to count. For that same reason
you must go unarmed. You must let what happens happen. Everything must be equal in
your eyes, good and evil, beautiful and ugly, foolish and wise, just as it is in the eyes of
the Childlike Empress. You may only search and inquire, never judge. Always remember
that, Atreyu!”
“AURYN!” Atreyu repeated with awe. “I will be worthy of the Glory. When
should I start?”
“Immediately,” said Cairon. “No one knows how long your Great Quest will be.
Every hour may count, even now. Say goodbye to your parents and your brothers and
sisters.”
“I have none,” said Atreyu. “My parents were both killed by a buffalo, soon after I
was born.”
“Who brought you up?”
“All the men and women together. That’s why they called me Atreyu, which in
our language means ‘Son of All’!”
No one knew better than Bastion what that meant. Even though his father was still
alive and Atreyu had neither father nor mother. To make up for it, Atreyu had been
brought up by all the men and women together and was the “son of all”, while Bastian
had no one — and was really “nobody’s son”. All the same, Bastian was glad to have this
much in common with Atreyu, because otherwise he resembled him hardly at all, neither
physically nor in courage and determination. Yet Bastian, too, was engaged in a Great
Quest and didn’t know where it would lead him or how it would end.
“In that case,” said the old centaur, “you’d better go without saying goodbye. I’ll
stay here and explain.”
Atreyu’s face became leaner and harder than ever.
“Where should I begin?” he asked.
“Everywhere and nowhere,” said Cairon. “From now on you will be on your own,
with no one to advise you. And that’s how it will be until the end of the Great Quest —
however it may end.”
Atreyu nodded.
“Farewell, Cairon.”
“Farewell, Atreyu. And — much luck!”
The boy turned away and was leaving the tent when the centaur called him back.
As they stood face to face, the old centaur put both hands on Atreyu’s shoulders, looked
him in the eye with a respectful smile, and said slowly: “I think I’m beginning to see why
the Childlike Empress chose you, Atreyu.”
The boy lowered his head just a while. Then he went out quickly.
His horse, Artax, was standing outside the tent. He was small and spotted like a
wild horse. His legs were short and stocky, but he was the fastest, most tireless runner far
and wide. He was still saddled as Atreyu had ridden him back from the hunt.
“Artax,” Atreyu whispered, patting his neck. “We’re going away, far, far away.
No one knows if we shall ever come back!”

The horse nodded his head and gave a brief snort.
“Yes, master,” he said. “But what about your hunt?”
“We’re going on a much greater hunt,” said Atreyu, swinging himself into the
saddle.
“Wait, master,” said the horse. “You’ve forgotten your weapons. Are you going
without your bow and arrow?”
“Yes, Artax,” said Atreyu. “I have to go unarmed because I am bearing the Gem.”
“Humph!” snorted the horse. “And where are we going?”
“Wherever you like, Artax,” said Atreyu. “From this moment on we shall be on
the Great Quest.”
With that they galloped away and were swallowed up by the darkness.
At the same time, in a different part of Fantastica, something happened which
went completely unnoticed. Neither Atreyu nor Artax had the slightest inkling of it.
On a remote night-black heath the darkness condensed into a great shadowy form.
It became so dense that even in that moonless, starless night it came to look like a big
black body. Its outlines were still unclear, but it stood on four legs and green fire glowed
in the eyes of its huge shaggy head. It lifted up its great snout and stood for a long while,
sniffing the air. Then suddenly it seemed to find the scent it was looking for, and a deep,
triumphant growl issued from its throat.
And off it ran through the starless night, in long, soundless leaps.
The clock in the belfry struck eleven. From the downstairs corridors arose the
shouts of children running out to the playground.
Bastian was still squatting cross-legged on the mats. His legs had fallen asleep.
He wasn’t an Indian after all. He stood up, took his sandwich and an apple out of his
satchel, and paced the floor. He had pins and needles in his feet, which took some time to
wake up.
Then he climbed onto the horse and straddled it. He imagined he was Atreyu
galloping through the night on Artax’s back. He leaned forward and rested his head on
his horse’s neck.
“Gee!” he cried. “Run, Artax! Gee! Gee!”
Then he became frightened. It had been foolish of him to shout so loud. What if
someone had heard him? He waited awhile and listened. But all he heard was the
intermingled shouts from the yard.
Feeling rather foolish, he climbed down off the horse. Really, he was behaving
like a small child!
He unwrapped his sandwich and shined the apple on his trousers. But just as he
was biting into it, he stopped himself.
“No,” he said to himself aloud. “I must carefully apportion my provisions. Who
knows how long they will have to last me.”
With a heavy heart he rewrapped his sandwich and returned it to his satchel
along with the apple. Then with a sigh he settled down on the mats and reached for the
book.

III
Morla the Aged One
airon, the old black centaur, sank back on his bed of furs as Artax’s hoofbeats
were dying away. After so much exertion he was at the end of his strength. The women
who found him next day in Atreyu’s tent feared for his life. And when the hunters came
home a few days later, he was hardly any better, but he managed nevertheless to tell them
why Atreyu had ridden away and would not be back soon. As they were all fond of the
boy, their concern for him made them grave. Still, they were proud that the Childlike
Empress had chosen him for the Great Quest — though none claimed to understand her
choice.
Old Cairon never went back to the Ivory Tower. But he didn’t die and he didn’t
stay with the Greenskins in the Grassy Ocean. His destiny was to lead him over very
different and unexpected pathways. But that is another story and shall be told another
time.
That same night Atreyu rode to the foot of the Silver Mountains. It was almost
morning when he finally stopped to rest. Artax grazed a while and drank water from a
small mountain stream. Atreyu wrapped himself in his red cloak and slept a few hours.
But when the sun rose, they were already on their way.
On the first day they crossed the Silver Mountains, where every road and trail was
known to them, and they made quick progress. When he felt hungry, the boy ate a chunk
of dried buffalo meat and two little grass-seed cakes that he had been carrying in his
saddlebag — originally they had been intended for his hunt.
“Exactly,” said Bastian. “A man has to eat now and then.”
He took his sandwich out of his satchel, unwrapped it, broke it carefully in two
pieces, wrapped one of them up again and put it away. Then he ate the other.
Recess was over. Bastian wondered what his class would be doing next. Oh yes,
geography, with Mrs Flint. You had to reel off rivers and their tributaries, cities,
population figures, natural resources, and industries. Bastian shrugged his shoulders and
went on reading.
By sunset the Silver Mountains lay behind them, and again they stopped to rest.
That night Atreyu dreamed of purple buffaloes. He saw them in the distance, roaming
over the Grassy Ocean, and he tried to get near them on his horse. In vain. He galloped,
he spurred his horse, but they were always the same distance away.
The second day they passed through the Singing Tree Country. Each tree had a
different shape, different leaves, different bark, but all of them in growing — and this was
what gave the country its name — made soft music that sounded from far and near and
joined in a mighty harmony that hadn’t its like for beauty in all Fantastica. Riding through

this country wasn’t entirely devoid of danger, for many a traveler had stopped still as
though spellbound and forgotten everything else. Atreyu felt the power of these
marvelous sounds, but didn’t let himself be tempted to stop.
The following night he dreamed again of purple buffaloes. This time he was on
foot, and a great herd of them was passing. But they were beyond the range of his bow,
and when he tried to come closer, his feet clung to the ground and he couldn’t move them.
His frantic efforts to tear them loose woke him up. He started out at once, though the sun
had not yet risen.
The third day, he saw the Glass Tower of Eribo, where the inhabitants of the
region caught and stored starlight. Out of the starlight they made wonderfully decorative
objects, the purpose of which, however, was known to no one in all Fantastica but their
makers.
He met some of these folk; little creatures they were, who seemed to have been
blown from glass. They were extremely friendly and provided him with food and drink,
but when he asked them who might know something about the Childlike Empress’s
illness, they sank into a gloomy, perplexed silence.
The next night Atreyu dreamed again that the herd of purple buffaloes was
passing. One of the beasts, a particularly large, imposing bull, broke away from his
fellows and slowly, with no sign of either fear or anger, approached Atreyu. Like all true
hunters, Atreyu knew every creature’s vulnerable spot, where an arrow wound would be
fatal. The purple buffalo put himself in such a position as to offer a perfect target. Atreyu
fitted an arrow to his bow and pulled with all his might. But he couldn’t shoot. His fingers
seemed to have grown into the bowstring, and he couldn’t release it.
Each of the following nights he dreamed something of the sort. He got closer and
closer to the same purple buffalo — he recognized him by a white spot on his forehead —
but for some reason he was never able to shoot the deadly arrow.
During the days he rode farther and farther, without knowing where he was going
or finding anyone to advise him. The golden amulet he wore was respected by all who
met him, but none had an answer to his question.
One day he saw from afar the flaming streets of Salamander, the city whose
inhabitants’ bodies are of fire, but he preferred to keep away from it. He crossed the broad
plateau of the Sassafranians, who are born old and die when they become babies. He
came to the jungle temple of Muwamath, where a great moonstone pillar hovers in
midair, and he spoke to the monks who lived there. And again no one could tell him
anything.
He had been traveling aimlessly for almost a week, when on the seventh day and
the following night two very different encounters changed his situation and state of mind.
Cairon’s story of the terrible happenings in all parts of Fantastica had made an
impression on him, but thus far the disaster was something he had only heard about. On
the seventh day he was to see it with his own eyes.
Toward noon, he was riding through a dense dark forest of enormous gnarled
trees. This was the same Howling Forest where the four messengers had met some time
before. That region, as Atreyu knew, was the home of bark trolls. These, as he had been
told, were giants and giantesses, who themselves looked like gnarled tree trunks. As long
as they stood motionless, as they usually did, you could easily mistake them for trees and
ride on unsuspecting. Only when they moved could you see that they had branchlike arms

and crooked, rootlike legs. Though exceedingly powerful, they were not dangerous — at
most they liked to play tricks on travelers who had lost their way.
Atreyu had just discovered a woodland meadow with a brook twining through it,
and had dismounted to let Artax drink and graze. Suddenly he heard a loud crackling and
thudding in the woods behind him.
Three bark trolls emerged from the woods and came toward him. A cold shiver
ran down his spine at the sight of them. The first, having no legs or haunches, was
obliged to walk on his hands. The second had a hole in his chest, so big you could see
through it. The third hopped on his right foot, because the whole left half of him was
missing, as if he had been cut through the middle.
When they saw the amulet hanging from Atreyu’s neck, they nodded to one
another and came slowly closer.
“Don’t be afraid,” said the one who was walking on his hands, and his voice
sounded like the groaning of a tree. “We’re not exactly pretty to look at, but in this part of
Howling Forest there’s no one else left who might warn you. That’s why we’ve come.”
“Warn?” Atreyu asked. “Against what?”
“We’ve heard about you,” moaned the one with the hole in his chest. “And we’ve
been told about your Quest. Don’t go any further in this direction, or you’ll be lost.”
“The same thing will happen to you as happened to us,” sighed the halved one.
“Would you like that?”
“What has happened to you?” Atreyu asked.
“The Nothing is spreading,” groaned the first. “It’s growing and growing, there’s
more of it every day, if it’s possible to speak of more nothing. All the others fled from
Howling Forest in time, but we didn’t want to leave our home. The Nothing caught us in
our sleep and this is what it did to us.”
“Is it very painful?” Atreyu asked.
“No,” said the second bark troll, the one with the hole in his chest. “You don’t feel
a thing. There’s just something missing. And once it gets hold of you, something more is
missing every day. Soon there won’t be anything left of us.”
“In what part of the woods did it begin?” Atreyu asked.
“Would you like to see it?” The third troll, who was only half a troll, turned to his
fellow sufferers with a questioning look. When they nodded, he said: “We’ll take you to a
place where there’s a good view of it. But you must promise not to go any closer. If you
do, it will pull you in.”
“All right,” said Atreyu. “I promise.”
The three turned about and made for the edge of the forest. Leading Artax by the
bridle, Atreyu followed them. For a while they went this way and that way between
enormous trees, then finally they stopped at the foot of a giant tree so big that five grown
men holding hands could scarcely have girdled it.
“Climb as high as you can,” said the legless troll, “and look in the direction of the
sunrise. Then you’ll see — or rather not see it.”
Atreyu pulled himself up by the knots and bumps on the tree. He reached the
lower branches, hoisted himself to the next, climbed and climbed until he lost sight of the
ground below him. Higher and higher he went; the trunk grew thinner and the more
closely spaced side branches made it easier to climb. When at last he reached the crown,
he turned toward the sunrise. And then he saw it:

The tops of the trees nearest him were still green, but the leaves of those farther
away seemed to have lost all color; they were gray. A little farther on, the foliage seemed
to become strangely transparent, misty, or, better still, unreal. And farther still there was
nothing, absolutely nothing. Not a bare stretch, not darkness, not some lighter color; no, it
was something the eyes could not bear, something that made you feel you had gone blind.
For no eye can bear the sight of utter nothingness. Atreyu held his hand before his face
and nearly fell off his branch. He clung tight for a moment, then climbed down as fast as
he could. He had seen enough. At last he really understood the horror that was spreading
through Fantastica.
When he reached the foot of the great tree, the three bark trolls had vanished.
Atreyu swung himself into the saddle and galloped as fast as Artax would carry him in
the direction that would take him away from this slowly but irresistibly spreading
Nothing. By nightfall he had left Howling Forest far behind him; only then did he stop to
rest.
That night a second encounter, which was to give his Great Quest a new direction,
awaited him.
He dreamed — much more distinctly than before — of the purple buffalo he had
wanted to kill. This time Atreyu was without his bow and arrow. He felt very, very small
and the buffalo’s face filled the whole sky. And the face spoke to him. He couldn’t
understand every word, but this is the gist of what it said:
“If you had killed me, you would be a hunter now. But because you let me live, I
can help you, Atreyu. Listen to me! There is, in Fantastica, a being older than all other
beings. In the north, far, far from here, lie the Swamps of Sadness. In the middle of those
swamps there is a mountain, Tortoise Shell Mountain it’s called. There lives Morla the
Aged One. Go and see Morla the Aged One.”
Then Atreyu woke up.
The clock in the belfry struck twelve. Soon Bastian’s classmates would be going
down to the gym for their last class. Today they’d probably be playing with the big, heavy
medicine ball which Bastian handled so awkwardly that neither of the two teams ever
wanted him. And sometimes they played with a small hard rubber ball that hurt terribly
when it hit you. Bastian was an easy mark and was always getting hit full force. Or
perhaps they’d be climbing rope — an exercise that Bastian especially detested. Most of
the others would be all the way to the top while he, with his face as red as a beet, would
be dangling like a sack of flour at the very bottom of the rope, unable to climb as much as
a foot. They’d all be laughing their heads off. And Mr. Menge, the gym teacher, had a
special stock of gibes just for Bastian.
Bastian would have given a good deal to be like Atreyu. He’d have shown them.
He heaved a deep sigh.
Atreyu rode northward, ever northward. He allowed himself and his little horse
only the most necessary stops for sleep and food. He rode by day and he rode by night, in
the scorching sun and the pelting rain. He looked neither to the left nor the right and
asked no more questions.
The farther northward he went, the darker it grew. An unchanging, leaden-gray
twilight filled the days. At night the northern lights played across the sky.

One morning, when time seemed to be standing still in the murky light, he looked
out from a hilltop and finally glimpsed the Swamps of Sadness. Clouds of mist drifted
over them. Here and there he distinguished little clumps of trees. Their trunks divided at
the bottom into four, five, or more crooked stilts, which made the trees look like great
many-legged crabs standing in the black water. From the brown foliage hung aerial roots
resembling motionless tentacles. It was next to impossible to make out where there was
solid ground between the pools of water and where there was only a covering of water
plants.
Artax whinnied with horror.
“Are we going in there, master?”
“Yes,” said Atreyu. “We must find Tortoise Shell Mountain. It’s at the center of
those swamps.”
He urged Artax on and Artax obeyed. Step by step, he tested the firmness of the
ground, but that made progress very slow. At length Atreyu dismounted and led Artax by
the bridle. Several times the horse sank in, but managed to pull himself loose. But the
farther they went into the Swamps of Sadness, the more sluggish became his movements.
He let his head droop and barely dragged himself forward.
“Artax,” said Atreyu. “What’s the matter?”
“I don’t know, master. I think we should turn back. There’s no sense in all this.
We’re chasing after something you only dreamed about. We won’t find anything. Maybe
it’s too late even now. Maybe the Childlike Empress is already dead, and everything we’re
doing is useless. Let us turn back, master.”
Atreyu was astonished. “Artax,” he said. “You’ve never spoken like this. What’s
the matter? Are you sick?”
“Maybe I am,” said Artax. “With every step we take, the sadness grows in my
heart. I’ve lost hope, master. And I feel so heavy, so heavy. I can’t go on!”
“But we must go on!” cried Atreyu. “Come along, Artax!”
He tugged at the bridle, but Artax stood still. He had sunk in up to his belly. And
he made no further effort to extricate himself.
“Artax!” cried Atreyu. “You mustn’t let yourself go. Come. Pull yourself out or
you’ll sink.”
“Leave me, master,” said the little horse. “I can’t make it. Go on alone. Don’t
bother about me. I can’t stand the sadness anymore. I want to die!”
Desperately Atreyu pulled at the bridle, but the horse sank deeper and deeper.
When only his head emerged from the black water, Atreyu took it in his arms.
“I’ll hold you, Artax,” he whispered. “I won’t let you go under.”
The little horse uttered one last soft neigh.
“You can’t help me, master. It’s all over for me. Neither of us knew what we were
getting into. Now we know why they are called the Swamps of Sadness. It’s the sadness
that has made me so heavy. That’s why I’m sinking. There’s no help.”
“But I’m here, too,” said Atreyu, “and I don’t feel anything.”
“You’re wearing the Gem, master,” said Artax. “It protects you.”
“Then I’ll hang it around your neck!” Atreyu cried. “Maybe it will protect you
too.”
He started taking the chain off his neck.
“No,” the little horse whinnied. “You mustn’t do that, master. The Glory was

entrusted to you, you weren’t given permission to pass it on as you see fit. You must carry
on the Quest without me.”
Atreyu pressed his face into the horse’s cheek. “Artax,” he whispered. “Oh, my
Artax!”
“Will you grant my last wish?” the little horse asked.
Atreyu nodded in silence.
“Then I beg you to go away. I don’t want you to see my end. Will you do me that
favor?”
Slowly Atreyu arose. Half the horse’s head was already in the black water.
“Farewell, Atreyu, my master!” he said. “And thank you.”
Atreyu pressed his lips together. He couldn’t speak. Once again he nodded to
Artax, then he turned away.
Bastion was sobbing. He couldn’t help it. His eyes filled with tears and he couldn’t
go on reading. He had to take out his handkerchief and blow his nose before he could go
on.
Atreyu waded and waded. For how long he didn’t know. The mist grew thicker
and he felt as if he were blind and deaf. It seemed to him that he had been wandering
around in circles for hours. He stopped worrying about where to set his foot down, and
yet he never sank in above his knees. By some mysterious means, the Childlike
Empress’s amulet led him the right way.
Then suddenly he saw a high, steep mountain ahead of him. Pulling himself up
from crag to crag, he climbed to the rounded top. At first he didn’t notice what this
mountain was made of. But from the top he overlooked the whole mountain, and then he
saw that it consisted of great slabs of tortoise shell, with moss growing in the crevices
between them.
He had found Tortoise Shell Mountain.
But the discovery gave him no pleasure. Now that his faithful little horse was
gone, it left him almost indifferent. Still, he would have to find out who this Morla the
Aged One was, and where she actually lived.
While he was mulling it over, he felt a slight tremor shaking the mountain. Then
he heard a hideous wheezing and lip-smacking, and a voice that seemed to issue from the
innermost bowels of the earth: “Sakes alive, old woman, somebody’s crawling around on
us.”
In hurrying to the end of the ridge, where the sounds had come from, Atreyu had
slipped on a bed of moss. Since there was nothing for him to hold on to, he slid faster and
faster and finally fell off the mountain. Luckily he landed on a tree, which caught him in
its branches.
Looking back at the mountain, he saw an enormous cave. Water was splashing
and gushing inside, and something was moving. Slowly the something came out. It
looked like a boulder as big as a house. When it came into full sight, Atreyu saw that it
was a head attached to a long wrinkled neck, the head of a turtle. Its eyes were black and
as big as ponds. The mouth was dripping with muck and water weeds. This whole
Tortoise Shell Mountain — it suddenly dawned on Atreyu — was one enormous beast, a
giant swamp turtle; Morla the Aged One.

The wheezing, gurgling voice spoke again: “What are you doing here, son?”
Atreyu reached for the amulet on his chest and held it in such a way that the great
eyes couldn’t help seeing it.
“Do you recognize this, Morla?”
She took a while to answer: “Sakes alive! AURYN. We haven’t seen that in a long
time, have we, old woman? The emblem of the Childlike Empress — not in a long time.”
“The Childlike Empress is sick,” said Atreyu. “Did you know that?”
“It’s all the same to us. Isn’t it, old woman?” Morla replied. She seemed to be
talking to herself, perhaps because she had had no one else to talk to for heaven knows
how long.
“If we don’t save her, she’ll die,” Atreyu cried out. “The Nothing is spreading
everywhere. I’ve seen it myself.”
Morla stared at him out of her great empty eyes.
“We don’t mind, do we, old woman?”
“But then we shall all die!” Atreyu screamed. “Every last one of us!”
“Sakes alive!” said Morla. “But what do we care? Nothing matters to us anymore.
It’s all the same to us.”
“But you’ll be destroyed too, Morla!” cried Atreyu angrily. “Or do you expect,
because you’re so old, to outlive Fantastica?”
“Sakes alive!” Morla gurgled. “We’re old, son, much too old. Lived long enough.
Seen too much. When you know as much as we do, nothing matters. Things just repeat.
Day and night, summer and winter. The world is empty and aimless. Everything circles
around. Whatever starts up must pass away, whatever is born must die. It all cancels out,
good and bad, beautiful and ugly. Everything’s empty. Nothing is real. Nothing matters.”
Atreyu didn’t know what to answer. The Aged One’s dark, empty, pond-sized eyes
paralyzed his thoughts. After a while, he heard her speak again:
“You’re young, son. If you were as old as we are, you’d know there’s nothing but
sadness. Why shouldn’t we die, you and I, the Childlike Empress, the whole lot of us?
Anyway, it’s all flim-flam, meaningless games. Nothing matters. Leave us in peace, son.
Go away.”
Atreyu tensed his will to fight off the paralysis that flowed from her eyes.
“If you know so much,” he said, “you must know what the Childlike Empress’s
illness is and whether there’s a cure for it.”
“We do, we do! Don’t we, old woman?” Morla wheezed. “But it’s all the same to
us whether she’s saved or not. So why should we tell you?”
“If it’s really all the same to you,” Atreyu argued, “you might just as well tell me.”
“We could, we could! Couldn’t we, old woman?” Morla grunted.”But we don’t
feel like it.”
“Then it’s not all the same to you. Then you yourself don’t believe what you’re
saying.”
After a long silence he heard a deep gurgling and belching. That must have been
some kind of laughter, if Morla the Aged One was still capable of laughing. In any case,
she said: “You’re a sly one, son. Really sly. We haven’t had so much fun in a long time.
Have we, old woman? Sakes alive, it’s true. We might just as well tell you. Makes no
difference. Should we tell him, old woman?”
A long silence followed. Atreyu waited anxiously for Morla’s answer, taking care

not to interrupt the slow, cheerless flow of her thoughts. At last she spoke:
“Your life is short, son. Ours is long. Much too long. But we both live in time.
You a short time. We a long time. The Childlike Empress has always been there. But
she’s not old. She has always been young. She still is. Her life isn’t measured by time, but
by names. She needs a new name. She keeps needing new names. Do you know her
name, son?”
“No,” Atreyu admitted. “I never heard it.”
“You couldn’t have,” said Morla. “Not even we can remember it. Yet she has had
many names. But they’re all forgotten. Over and done with. But without a name she can’t
live. All the Childlike Empress needs is a new name, then she’ll get well. But it makes no
difference whether she gets well or not.”
She closed her pond-sized eyes and began slowly to pull in her head.
“Wait!” cried Atreyu. “Where can she get a name? Who can give her one? Where
can I find the name?”
“None of us,” Morla gurgled. “No inhabitant of Fantastica can give her a new
name. So it’s hopeless. Sakes alive! It doesn’t matter. Nothing matters.”
“Who then?” cried Atreyu in despair. “Who can give her the name that will save
her and save us all?”
“Don’t make so much noise!” said Morla. “Leave us in peace and go away. Even
we don’t know who can give her a name.”
“If you don’t know,” Atreyu screamed even louder, “who does?”
She opened her eyes a last time.
“If you weren’t wearing the Gem,” she wheezed, “we’d eat you up, just to have
peace and quiet. Sakes alive!”
“Who?” Atreyu insisted. “Tell me who knows, and I’ll leave you in peace
forever.”
“It doesn’t matter,” she replied. “But maybe Uyulala in the Southern Oracle
knows. She may know. It’s all the same to us.”
“How can I get there?”
“You can’t get there at all, son. Not in ten thousand days’ journey. Your life is too
short. You’d die first. It’s too far. In the south. Much too far. So it’s all hopeless. We told
you so in the first place, didn’t we, old woman? Sakes alive, son. Give it up. And most
important, leave us in peace.”
With that she closed her empty-gazing eyes and pulled her head back into the
cave for good. Atreyu knew he would learn no more from her.
At that same time the shadowy being which had condensed out of the darkness of
the heath picked up Atreyu’s trail and headed for the Swamps of Sadness. Nothing and no
one in all Fantastica would deflect it from that trail.
Bastian had propped his head on his hand and was looking thoughtfully into
space.
“Strange,” he said aloud, “that no one in all Fantastica can give the Childlike
Empress a new name.” If it had been just a matter of giving her a name, Bastian could
easily have helped her. He was tops at that. But unfortunately he was not in Fantastica,
where his talents were needed and would even have won him friends and admirers. On

the other hand, he was glad not to be there. Not for anything in the world would he have
ventured into such a place as the Swamps of Sadness. And then this spooky creature of
darkness that was chasing Atreyu without his knowing it. Bastian would have liked to
warn him, but that was impossible. All he could do was hope, and go on reading.
IV
Ygramul the Many
ire hunger and thirst pursued Atreyu. It was two days since he had left the
Swamps of Sadness, and since then he had been wandering through an empty rocky
wilderness. What little provisions he had taken with him had sunk beneath the black
waters with Artax. In vain, Atreyu dug his fingers into the clefts between stones in the
hope of finding some little root, but nothing grew there, not even moss or lichen.
At first he was glad to feel solid ground beneath his feet, but little by little it came
to him that he was worse off than ever. He was lost. He didn’t even know what direction
he was going in, for the dusky grayness was the same all around him. A cold wind blew
over the needlelike rocks that rose up on all sides, blew and blew.
Uphill and downhill he plodded, but all he saw was distant mountains with still
more distant ranges behind them, and so on to the horizon on all sides. And nothing
living, not a beetle, not an ant, not even the vultures which ordinarily follow the weary
traveler until he falls by the wayside.
Doubt was no longer possible. This was the Land of the Dead Mountains. Few
had seen them, and fewer still escaped from them alive. But they figured in the legends of
Atreyu’s people. He remembered an old song:
Better the huntsman
Should perish in the swamps,
For in the Dead Mountains
There is a deep, deep chasm,
Where dwelleth Ygramul the Many,
The horror of horrors.
Even if Atreyu had wanted to turn back and had known what direction to take, it would
not have been possible. He had gone too far and could only keep on going. If only he
himself had been involved, he might have sat down in a cave and quietly waited for
death, as the Greenskin hunters did. But he was engaged in the Great Quest: the life of
the Childlike Empress and of all Fantastica was at stake. He had no right to give up.
And so he kept at it. Uphill and down. From time to time he realized that he had
long been walking as though in his sleep, that his mind had been in other realms, from

which they had returned none too willingly.
Bastion gave a start. The clock in the belfry struck one. School was over for the
day.
He heard the shouts and screams of the children running into the corridors from
the classrooms and the clatter of many feet on the stairs. For a while there were isolated
shouts from the street. And then the schoolhouse was engulfed in silence.
The silence descended on Bastian like a great heavy blanket and threatened to
smother him. From then on he would be all alone in the big schoolhouse — all that day,
all that night, there was no knowing how long. This adventure of his was getting serious.
The other children were going home for lunch. Bastian was hungry too, and he
was cold in spite of the army blankets he was wrapped in. Suddenly he lost heart, his
whole plan seemed crazy, senseless. He wanted to go home, that very minute. He could
just be in time. His father wouldn’t have noticed anything yet. Bastian wouldn’teven have
to tell him he had played hooky. Of course, it would come out sooner or later, but there
was time to worry about that. But the stolen book? Yes, he’d have to own up to that too.
In the end, his father would resign himself as he did to all the disappointments Bastian
had given him. Anyway, there was nothing to be afraid of. Most likely his father wouldn’t
say anything, but just go and see Mr. Coreander and straighten things out.
Bastian was about to put the copper-colored book into his satchel. But then he
stopped.
“No,” he said aloud in the stillness of the attic. “Atreyu wouldn’t give up just
because things were getting a little rough. What I’ve started I must finish. I’ve gone too
far to turn back. Regardless of what may happen, I have to go forward.”
He felt very lonely, yet there was a kind of pride in his loneliness. He was proud
of standing firm in the face of temptation.
He was a little like Atreyu after all.
A time came when Atreyu really could not go forward. Before him lay the Deep
Chasm.
The grandiose horror of the sight cannot be described in words. A yawning cleft,
perhaps half a mile wide, twined its way through the Land of the Dead Mountains. How
deep it might be there was no way of knowing.
Atreyu lay on a spur at the edge of the chasm and stared down into darkness
which seemed to extend to the innermost heart of the earth. He picked up a stone the size
of a tennis ball and hurled it as far as he could. The stone fell and fell, until it was
swallowed up in the darkness. Though Atreyu listened a long while, he heard no sound of
impact.
There was only one thing Atreyu could do, and he did it. He skirted the Deep
Chasm. Every second he expected to meet the “horrors of horrors”, known to him from
the old song. He had no idea what sort of creature this might be. All he knew was that its
name was Ygramul.
The Deep Chasm twisted and turned through the mountain waste, and of course
there was no path at its edge. Here too there were abrupt rises and falls, and sometimes
the ground swayed alarmingly under Atreyu’s feet. Sometimes his path was barred by
gigantic rock formations and he would have to feel his way, painfully, step by step,

around them. Or there would be slopes covered with smooth stones that would start
rolling toward the Chasm as soon as he set foot on them. More than once he was within a
hairbreadth of the edge.
If he had known that a pursuer was close behind him and coming closer by the
hour, he might have hurried and taken dangerous risks. It was that creature of darkness
which had been after him since the start of his journey. Since then its body had taken on
recognizable outlines. It was a pitch-black wolf, the size of an ox. Nose to the ground, it
trotted along, following Atreyu’s trail through the stony desert of the Dead Mountains. Its
tongue hung far out of its mouth and its terrifying fangs were bared. The freshness of the
scent told the wolf that its prey was only a few miles ahead.
But suspecting nothing of his pursuer, Atreyu picked his way slowly and
cautiously.
As he was groping through the darkness of a tunnel under a mountain, he
suddenly heard a noise that he couldn’t identify because it bore no resemblance to any
sound he had ever heard. It was a kind of jangling roar. At the same time Atreyu felt that
the whole mountain about him was trembling, and he heard blocks of stone crashing
down its outer walls. For a time he waited to see whether the earthquake, or whatever it
might be, would abate. Then, since it did not, he crawled to the end of the tunnel and
cautiously stuck his head out.
And then he saw: An enormous spider web was stretched from edge to edge of the
Deep Chasm. And in the sticky threads of the web, which were as thick as ropes, a great
white luckdragon was struggling, becoming more and more entangled as he thrashed
about with his tail and claws.
Luckdragons are among the strangest animals in Fantastica. They bear no
resemblance to ordinary dragons, which look like loathsome snakes and live in deep
caves, diffusing a noxious stench and guarding some real or imaginary treasure. Such
spawn of chaos are usually wicked or ill-tempered, they have batlike wings with which
they can rise clumsily and noisily into the air, and they spew fire and smoke.
Luckdragons are creatures of air, warmth, and pure joy. Despite their great size, they are
as light as a summer cloud, and consequently need no wings for flying. They swim in the
air of heaven as fish swim in water. Seen from the earth, they look like slow lightning
flashes. The most amazing thing about them is their song. Their voice sounds like the
golden note of a large bell, and when they speak softly the bell seems to be ringing in the
distance. Anyone who has heard this sound will remember it as long as he lives and tell
his grandchildren about it.
But the luckdragon Atreyu saw could hardly have been in a mood for singing. His
long, graceful body with its pearly, pink-and-white scales hung tangled and twisted in the
great spider web. His bristling fangs, his thick, luxuriant mane, and the fringes on his tail
and limbs were all caught in the sticky ropes. He could hardly move. The eyeballs in his
lionlike head glistened ruby-red.
The splendid beast bled from many wounds, for there was something else,
something very big, that descended like a dark cloud on the dragon’s white body. It rose
and fell, rose and fell, all the while changing its shape. Sometimes it resembled a gigantic
long-legged spider with many fiery eyes and a fat body encased in shaggy black hair;
then it became a great hand with long claws that tried to crush the luckdragon, and in the
next moment it changed to a giant scorpion, piercing its unfortunate victim with its

venomous sting.
The battle between the two giants was fearsome. The luckdragon was still
defending himself, spewing blue fire that singed the cloud-monster’s bristles. Smoke
came whirling through the crevices in the rock, so foul-smelling that Atreyu could hardly
breathe. Once the luckdragon managed to bite off one of the monster’s long legs. But
instead of falling into the chasm, the severed leg hovered for a time in mid-air, then
returned to its old place in the black cloud-body. And several times the dragon seemed to
seize one of the monster’s limbs between its teeth, but bit into the void.
Only then did Atreyu notice that the monster was not a single, solid body, but was
made up of innumerable small steel-blue insects which buzzed like angry hornets. It was
their compact swarm that kept taking different shapes.
This was Ygramul, and now Atreyu knew why she was called “the Many”.
He sprang from his hiding place, reached for the Gem, and shouted at the top of
his lungs: “Stop! In the name of the Childlike Empress, stop!”
But the hissing and roaring of the combatants drowned out his voice. He himself
could barely hear it.
Without stopping to think, he set foot on the sticky ropes of the web, which
swayed beneath him as he ran. He lost his balance, fell, clung by his hands to keep from
falling into the dark chasm, pulled himself up again, caught himself in the ropes, fought
free and hurried on.
At last Ygramul sensed that something was coming toward her.With the speed of
lightning, she turned about, confronting Atreyu with an enormous steel-blue face. Her
single eye had a vertical pupil, which stared at Atreyu with inconceivable malignancy.
A cry of fear escaped Bastian.
A cry of terror passed through the ravine and echoed from side to side. Ygramul
turned her eye to left and right, to see if someone else had arrived, for that sound could
not have been made by the boy who stood there as though paralyzed with horror.
Could she have heard my cry? Bastion wondered in alarm. But that’s not possible.
And then Atreyu heard Ygramul’s voice. It was very high and slightly hoarse, not
at all the right kind of voice for that enormous face. Her lips did not move as she spoke. It
was the buzzing of a great swarm of hornets that shaped itself into words.
“A Twolegs,” Atreyu heard. “Years upon years of hunger, and now two tasty
morsels at once! A lucky day for Ygramul!”
Atreyu needed all his strength to keep his composure. He held the Gem up to the
monster’s one eye and asked: “Do you know this emblem?”
“Come closer, Twolegs!” buzzed the many voices. “Ygramul doesn’t see well.”
Atreyu took one step closer to the face. The mouth opened, showing innumerable
glittering feelers, hooks, and claws in place of a tongue.
“Still closer,” the swarm buzzed.
He took one more step, which brought him near enough to distinguish the
innumerable steel-blue insects which whirled around in seeming confusion. Yet the face
as a whole remained motionless.

“I am Atreyu,” he said. “I have come on a mission from the Childlike Empress.”
“Most inopportune!” said the angry buzzing after a time. “What do you want of
Ygramul? As you can see, she is very busy.”
“I want this luckdragon,” said Atreyu. “Let me have him.”
“What do you want him for, Atreyu Twolegs?”
“I lost my horse in the Swamps of Sadness. I must go to the Southern Oracle,
because only Uyulala can tell me who can give the Childlike Empress a new name. If she
doesn’t get one, she will die and all Fantastica with her — you too, Ygramul.”
“Ah!” the face drawled. “Is that the reason for all the places where there is
nothing?”
“Yes,” said Atreyu. “So you too know of them. But the Southern Oracle is too
long a journey for a lifetime. That’s why I’m asking you for this luckdragon. If he carries
me through the air, I may get there before it’s too late.”
Out of the whirling swarm that made up the face came a sound suggesting the
giggling of many voices.
“You’re all wrong, Atreyu Twolegs. We know nothing of the Southern Oracle and
nothing of Uyulala, but we do know that this dragon cannot carry you. And even if he
were in the best of health, the trip would take so long that the Childlike Empress would
die of her illness in the meantime. You must measure your Quest, Atreyu, in terms not of
your own life but of hers.”
The gaze of the eye with the vertical pupil was almost unbearable.
“That’s true,” he said in a small voice.
“Besides,” the motionless face went on, “the luckdragon has Ygramul’s poison in
his body. He has less than an hour to live.”
“Then there’s no hope,” Atreyu murmured. “Not for him, not for me, and not for
you either, Ygramul.”
“Oh well,” the voice buzzed. “Ygramul would at least have had one good meal.
But who says it’s Ygramul’s last meal? She knows a way of getting you to the Southern
Oracle in a twinkling. But the question is: Will you like it?”
“What is that way?”
“That is Ygramul’s secret. The creatures of darkness have their secrets too, Atreyu
Twolegs. Ygramul has never revealed hers. And you too must swear you’ll never tell a
soul. For it would be greatly to Ygramul’s disadvantage if it were known, yes, greatly to
her disadvantage.”
“I swear! Speak!”
The great steel-blue face leaned forward just a little and buzzed almost inaudibly.
“You must let Ygramul bite you.”
Atreyu shrank back in horror.
“Ygramul’s poison,” the voice went on, “kills within an hour. But to one who has
it inside him it gives the power to wish himself in any part of Fantastica he chooses.
Imagine if that were known! All Ygramul’s victims would escape her.”
“An hour?” cried Atreyu. “What can I do in an hour?”
“Well,” buzzed the swarm, “at least it’s more than all the hours remaining to you
here.”
Atreyu struggled with himself.
“Will you set the luckdragon free if I ask it in the name of the Childlike

Empress?” he finally asked.
“No!” said the face. “You have no right to ask that of Ygramul even if you are
wearing AURYN, the Gem. The Childlike Empress takes us all as we are. That’s why
Ygramul respects her emblem.”
Atreyu was still standing with bowed head. Ygramul had spoken the truth. He
couldn’t save the white luckdragon. His own wishes didn’t count.
He looked up and said: “Do what you suggested.”
Instantly the steel-blue cloud descended on him and enveloped him on all sides.
He felt a numbing pain in the left shoulder. His last thought was: “To the Southern
Oracle!”
Then the world went black before his eyes.
When the wolf reached the spot a short time later, he saw the giant spider web —
but there was no one in sight. There the trail he had been following broke off, and try as
he might, he could not find it again.
Bastian stopped reading. He felt miserable, as though he himself had Ygramul’s
poison inside him.
“Thank God I’m not in Fantastica,” he muttered. “Luckily, such monsters don’t
exist in reality. Anyway, it’s only a story.”
But was it only a story? How did it happen that Ygramul, and probably Atreyu as
well, had heard Bastian’s cry of terror?
Little by little, this book was beginning to give him a spooky feeling.
V
The Gnomics
ver so slowly Atreyu awoke to the world. He saw that he was still in the
mountains, and for a terrible moment he suspected that Ygramul had deceived him.
But these, he soon realized, were entirely different mountains. They seemed to
consist of great rust-red blocks of stone, piled in such a way as to form strange towers
and pyramids. In between these structures the ground was covered with bushes and
shrubbery. The air was blazing hot. The country was bathed in glaring sunlight.
Shading his eyes with his hand, Atreyu looked around him and discovered, about
a mile away, an irregularly shaped arch, perhaps a hundred feet high. It too appeared to
consist of piled stone blocks.
Could that be the entrance to the Southern Oracle? As far as he could see, there
was nothing behind the arch, only an endless empty plain, no building, no temple, no

grove, nothing suggesting an oracle.
Suddenly, while he was wondering what to do, he heard a deep, bronzelike voice:
“Atreyu!” And then again: “Atreyu!”
Turning around, he saw the white luckdragon emerging from one of the rust-red
towers. Blood was pouring from his wounds, and he was so weak he could barely drag
himself along.
“Here I am, Atreyu,” he said, merrily winking one of his ruby-red eyes. “And you
needn’t be so surprised. I was pretty well paralyzed when I was caught in that spider web,
but I heard everything Ygramul said to you. So I thought to myself: She has bitten me
too, after all, so why shouldn’t I take advantage of the secret as well? That’s how I got
away from her.”
Atreyu was overjoyed.
“I hated leaving you to Ygramul,” said. “But what could I do?”
“Nothing,” said the luckdragon. “You’ve saved my life all the same — even if I
had something to do with it.”
And again he winked, this time with the other eye.
“Saved your life,” Atreyu repeated, “for an hour. That’s all we have left. I can feel
Ygramul’s poison burning my heart away.”
“Every poison has its antidote,” said the white dragon. “Everything will turn out
all right. You’ll see.”
“I can’t imagine how,” said Atreyu.
“Neither can I,” said the luckdragon. “But that’s the wonderful part of it. From
now on you’ll succeed in everything you attempt. Because I’m a luckdragon. Even when I
was caught in the web, I didn’t give up hope. And as you see, I was right.”
Atreyu smiled.
“Tell me, why did you wish yourself here and not in some other place where you
might have been cured?”
“My life belongs to you,” said the dragon, “if you’ll accept it. I thought you’d need
a mount for this Great Quest of yours. And you’ll soon see that crawling around the
country on two legs, or even galloping on a good horse, can’t hold a candle to whizzing
through the air on the back of a luckdragon. Are we partners?” “We’re partners,” said
Atreyu.
“By the way,” said the dragon. “My name is Falkor.”
“Glad to meet you,” said Atreyu, “but while we’re talking, what little time we
have left is seeping away. I’ve got to do something. But what?”
“Have luck,” said Falkor. “What else?”
But Atreyu heard no more. He had fallen down and lay motionless in the soft
folds of the dragon’s body.
Ygramul’s poison was taking effect.
When Atreyu — no one knows how much later — opened his eyes again, he saw
nothing but a very strange face bent over him. It was the wrinkliest, shriveledest face he
had ever seen, and only about the size of a fist. It was as brown as a baked apple, and the
eyes in it glittered like stars. The head was covered with a bonnet made of withered
leaves.
Atreyu felt a little drinking cup held to his lips.
“Nice medicine! Good medicine!” mumbled the wrinkled little lips in the

shriveled face. “Just drink, child. Do you good.”
Atreyu sipped. It tasted strange. Kind of sweet and sour.
Atreyu found it painful to speak. “What about the white dragon?” he asked.
“Doing fine!” the voice whispered. “Don’t worry, my boy. You’ll get well. You’ll
both get well. The worst is over. Just drink. Drink.”
Atreyu took another swallow and again sleep overcame him, but this time it was
the deep, refreshing sleep of recovery.
The clock in the belfry struck two.
Bastian couldn’t hold it in any longer. He simply had to go. He had felt the need
for quite some time, but he hadn’t been able to stop reading. Besides, he had been afraid
to go downstairs. He told himself that there was nothing to worry about, that the building
was deserted, that no one would see him. But still he was afraid, as if the school were a
person watching him.
But in the end there was no help for it; he just had to go!
He set the open book down on the mat, went to the door and listened with
pounding heart. Nothing. He slid the bolt and slowly turned the big key in the lock. When
he pressed the handle, the door opened, creaking loudly.
He padded out in his stocking feet, leaving the door behind him open to avoid
unnecessary noise. He crept down the stairs to the second floor. The students’ toilet was
at the other end of the long corridor with the spinach-green classroom doors. Racing
against time, Bastian ran as fast as he could — and just made it.
As he sat there, he wondered why heroes in stories like the one he was reading
never had to worry about such problems. Once — when he was much younger — he had
asked his religion teacher if Jesus Christ had had to go like an ordinary person. After all,
he had taken food and drink like everyone else. The class had howled with laughter, and
the teacher, instead of an answer, had given him several demerits for “insolence”. He
hadn’t meant to be insolent.
“Probably,” Bastian now said to himself, “these things are just too unimportant to
be mentioned in stories.”
Yet for him they could be of the most pressing and embarrassing importance.
He was finished. He pulled the chain and was about to leave when he heard steps
in the corridor outside. One classroom door after another was opened and closed, and
the steps came closer and closer.
Bastian’s heart pounded in his throat. Where could he hide? He stood glued to the
spot as though paralyzed.
The washroom door opened, luckily in such a way as to shield Bastian. The
janitor came in. One by one, he looked into the stalls. When he came to the one where the
water was still running and the chain swaying a little, he hesitated for a moment and
mumbled something to himself. But when the water stopped running he shrugged his
shoulders and went out. His steps died away on the stairs.
Bastian hadn’t dared breathe the whole time, and now he gasped for air. He
noticed that his knees were trembling.
As fast as possible he padded down the corridor with the spinach-green doors, up
the stairs, and back into the attic. Only when the door was locked and bolted behind him
did he relax.

With a deep sigh he settled back on his pile of mats, wrapped himself in his army
blankets, and reached for the book.
When Atreyu awoke for the second time, he felt perfectly rested and well. He sat
up.
It was night. The moon was shining bright, and Atreyu saw he was in the same
place where he and the white dragon had collapsed. Falkor was still lying there. His
breathing came deep and easy and he seemed to be fast asleep. His wounds had been
dressed.
Atreyu noticed that his own shoulder had been dressed in the same way, not with
cloth but with herbs and plant fibers.
Only a few steps away there was a small cave, from which issued a faint beam of
light.
Taking care not to move his left arm, Atreyu stood up cautiously and approached
the cave. Bending down — for the entrance was very low — he saw a room that looked
like an alchemist’s workshop in miniature. At the back an open fire was crackling
merrily. Crucibles, retorts, and strangely shaped flasks were scattered all about. Bundles
of dried plants were piled on shelves. The little table in the middle of the room and the
other furniture seemed to be made of root wood, crudely nailed together.
Atreyu heard a cough, and then he saw a little man sitting in an armchair by the
fire. The little man’s hat had been carved from a root and looked like an inverted pipe
bowl. The face was as brown and shriveled as the face Atreyu had seen leaning over him
when he first woke up. But this one was wearing big eyeglasses, and the features seemed
sharper and more anxious. The little man was reading a big book that was lying in his lap.
Then a second little figure, which Atreyu recognized as the one that had bent over
him, came waddling out of another room. Now Atreyu saw that this little person was a
woman. Apart from her bonnet of leaves, she — like the man in the armchair — was
wearing a kind of monk’s robe, which also seemed to be made of withered leaves.
Humming merrily, she rubbed her hands and busied herself with a kettle that was hanging
over the fire. Neither of the little people would have reached up to Atreyu’s knee.
Obviously they belonged to the widely ramified family of the gnomes, though to a rather
obscure branch.
“Woman!” said the little man testily. “Get out of my light. You are interfering
with my research!”
“You and your research!” said the woman. “Who cares about that? The important
thing is my health elixir. Those two outside are in urgent need of it.”
“Those two,” said the man irritably, “will be far more in need of my help and
advice.”
“Maybe so,” said the little woman. “But not until they are well. Move over, old
man!”
Grumbling, the little man moved his chair a short distance from the fire.
Atreyu cleared his throat to call attention to his presence. The two gnomes looked
around.
“He’s already well,” said the little man. “Now it’s my turn.”
“Certainly not!” the little woman hissed. “He’ll be well when I say so. It’ll be your
turn when I say it’s your turn.”

She turned to Atreyu.
“We would invite you in, but it’s not quite big enough, is it? Just a moment. We
shall come out to you.”
Taking a small mortar, she ground something or other into a powder, which she
tossed in the kettle. Then she washed her hands, dried them on her robe, and said to the
little man: “Stay here until I call you, Engywook. Understand?”
“Yes, Urgl, I understand,” the little man grumbled. “I understand only too well.”
The female gnome came out of the cave and looked up at Atreyu from under
knitted brows.
“Well, well. We seem to be getting better, don’t we?”
Atreyu nodded.
The gnome climbed up on a rocky ledge, level with Atreyu’s face, and sat down.
“No pain?” she asked.
“None worth mentioning,” Atreyu answered.
“Nonsense!” the old woman snapped. “Does it hurt or doesn’t it?”
“It still hurts,” said Atreyu, “but it doesn’t matter.”
“Not to you, perhaps, but it does to me! Since when does the patient tell the
doctor what matters? What do you know about it? If it’s to get well, it has to hurt. If it
stopped hurting, your arm would be dead.”
“I’m sorry,” said Atreyu, who felt like a scolded child. “I only wanted to say. . .
that is, I wanted to thank you.”
“What for?” said Urgl impatiently. “I’m a healer, after all. I’ve only done my
professional duty. Besides, Engywook, that’s my old man, saw the Glory hanging on your
neck. So what would you expect?”
“What about Falkor?” Atreyu asked. “How’s he getting along?”
“Falkor? Who’s that?”
“The white luckdragon.”
“Oh. I don’t know yet. Took a little more punishment than you. But then he’s
bigger and stronger, so he ought to make it. Why not? Needs a little more rest. Where did
you ever pick up that poison? And where have you come from all of a sudden? And
where are you going? And who are you in the first place?”
Engywook was standing in the mouth of the cave. He listened as Atreyu answered
Urgl’s questions. When Urgl opened her mouth to speak again, he shouted: “Hold your
tongue, woman! Now it’s my turn.”
Removing his pipe-bowl hat, he scratched his bald head, and said: “Don’t let her
tone bother you, Atreyu. Old Urgl is a little crude, but she means no harm. My name is
Engywook. We are the well-known Gnomics. Ever hear of us?”
“No,” Atreyu confessed. Engywook seemed rather offended.
“Oh well,” he said. “Apparently you don’t move in scientific circles, or someone
would undoubtedly have told you that you couldn’t find a better adviser than yours truly
if you’re looking for Uyulala in the Southern Oracle. You’ve come to the right address,
my boy.”
“Don’t give yourself airs,” Urgl broke in. Then she climbed down from her ledge
and, grumbling to herself, vanished into the cave.
Engywook ignored her comment.
“I can explain everything,” he went on. “I’ve studied the question all my life.

Inside and out. I set up my observatory just for that. I’m in the last stage of a great
scientific work on the Oracle. “The Riddle of Uyulala, solved by Professor Engywook.”
That’s the title. Sounds all right, doesn’t it? To be published in the very near future.
Unfortunately a few details are still lacking. You can help me, my boy.”
“An observatory?” asked Atreyu, who had never heard the word.
Engywook nodded and, beaming with pride, motioned Atreyu to follow him.
A narrow path twined its way upward between great stone blocks. In some places
where the grade was especially steep, tiny steps had been cut out of the stone. Of course,
they were much too small for Atreyu’s feet and he simply stepped over them. Even so, he
had a hard time keeping up with the gnome.
“Bright moonlight tonight,” said Engywook. “You’ll see them all right.”
“See who?” Atreyu asked. “Uyulala?”
Engywook only frowned and shook his head.
At last they came to the top of the hill. The ground was flat, but on one side there
was a natural stone parapet. In the middle of this wall there was a hole, obviously the
work of gnomian hands. And behind the hole, on a stand made of root wood, stood a
small telescope.
Engywook looked through the telescope and made a slight adjustment by turning
some screws. Then he nodded with satisfaction and invited Atreyu to look. To put
himself on a level with it, Atreyu had to lie down on the ground and prop himself on his
elbows.
The telescope was aimed at the great stone arch, or more specifically at the lower
part of the left pillar. And beside this pillar, as Atreyu now saw, an enormous sphinx was
sitting motionless in the moonlight. The forepaws, on which she was propped, were those
of a lion, the hindquarters were those of a bull; on her back she bore the wings of an
eagle, and her face was that of a human woman — in form at any rate, for the expression
was far from human. I was hard to tell whether this face was smiling or whether it
expressed deep grief or utter indifference. After looking at it for some time, Atreyu
seemed to see abysmal wickedness and cruelty, but a moment later he had to correct his
impression, for he found only unruffled calm.
“Don’t bother!” he heard the gnome’s deep voice in his ear. “You won’t solve it.
It’s the same with everyone. I’ve observed it all my life and I haven’t found the answer.
Now for the other one.”
He turned one of the screws. The image passed the opening of the arch, through
which one saw only the empty plain. Then the right-hand pillar came into Atreyu’s view.
And there, in the same posture, sat a second sphinx. The enormous body shimmered like
liquid silver in the moonlight. She seemed to be staring fixedly at the first, just as the first
was gazing fixedly at her.
“Are they statues?” asked Atreyu, unable to avert his eyes.
“Oh no!” said Engywook with a giggle. “They are real live sphinxes — very much
alive! You’ve seen enough for now. Come, we’ll go down. I’ll explain everything.”
And he held his hand in front of the telescope, so that Atreyu could see no more.
Neither spoke on the way back.

VI
The Three Magic Gates
alkor was still sound asleep when Engywook brought Atreyu back to the gnomes’
cave. In the meantime Urgl had moved the little table into the open and put on all sorts of
sweets and fruit and herb jellies.
There were also little drinking cups and a pitcher of fragrant herb tea. The table
was lit by two tiny oil lamps.
“Sit down!” Urgl commanded. “Atreyu must eat and drink something to give him
strength. Medicine alone is not enough.”
“Thank you,” said Atreyu. “I’m feeling fine already.”
“No back talk!” Urgl snapped. “As long as you’re here, you’ll do as you’re told.
The poison in your body has been neutralized. So there’s no reason to hurry, my boy.
You’ve all the time you need. Just take it easy.”
“It’s not on my account,” said Atreyu. “But the Childlike Empress is dying. Even
now, every hour may count.”
“Rubbish!” the old woman grumbled. “Haste makes waste. Sit down! Eat! Drink!”
“Better give in,” Engywook whispered. “I know the woman from A to Z. When
she wants something, she gets it. Besides, you and I have a lot to talk about.”
Atreyu squatted cross-legged at the tiny table and fell to. Every bite and every
swallow made him feel as if warm, golden life were flowing into his veins. Only then did
he notice how weak he had been.
Bastion’s mouth watered. It seemed to him that he could smell the aroma of the
gnomes’ meal. He sniffed the air, but of course it was only imagination.
His stomach growled audibly. In the end he couldn’t stand it any longer. He took
his apple and the rest of his sandwich out of his satchel and ate them both. After that,
though far from full, he felt a little better.
Then he realized that this was his last meal. The word “last” terrified him. He
tried not to think of it.
“Where do you get all these good things?” Atreyu asked Urgl.
“Ah, sonny,” she said. “It takes lots of running around to find the right plants. But
he — this knuckleheaded Engywook of mine — insists on living here because of his all-
important studies. Where the food is to come from is the least of his worries.”
“Woman,” said Engywook with dignity, “how would you know what’s important
and what isn’t? Be off with you now, and let us talk.”
Mumbling and grumbling, Urgl withdrew into the little cave and a moment later
Atreyu heard a great clatter of pots and pans.
“Don’t mind her,” said Engywook under his breath. “She’s a good old soul, she

just needs something to grumble about now and then. Listen to me, Atreyu. I’m going to
let you in on a few things you need to know about the Southern Oracle. It’s not easy to
get to Uyulala. In fact, it’s rather difficult. But I don’t want to give you a scientific lecture.
Maybe it will be better if you ask questions. I tend to lose myself in details. Just fire
away.”
“All right,” said Atreyu. “Who or what is Uyulala?”
Engywook gave him an angry look. “Botheration!” he spluttered. “You’re so
blunt, so direct. Just like my old woman. Couldn’t you start with something else?”
Atreyu thought a while. Then he asked:. “That big stone gate with the sphinxes. Is
that the entrance?”
“That’s better,” said Engywook. “Now we’ll get somewhere. Yes, that gate is the
entrance, but then come two more gates. And Uyulala’s home is behind the third — if one
can speak of her having a home.”
“Have you yourself ever been with her?”
“Don’t be absurd!” replied Engywook, again somewhat nettled. “I am a scientist. I
have collected and collated the statements of all the individuals who have been there. The
ones who have come back, that is. Very important work. I can’t afford to take personal
risks. It could interfere with my work.”
“I see,” said Atreyu. “Now what about these three gates?”
Engywook stood up, folded his hands behind his back, and paced.
“The first,” he lectured, “is known as the Great Riddle Gate; the second is the
Magic Mirror Gate; and the third is the No-Key Gate. . .”
“Strange,” Atreyu broke in. “As far as I could see, there was nothing behind that
stone gate but an empty plain. Where are the other gates?”
“Be still!” Engywook scolded. “How can I make myself clear if you keep
interrupting? It’s very complicated: The second gate isn’t there until a person has gone
through the first. And the third isn’t there until the person has the second behind him. And
Uyulala isn’t there until he has passed through the third. Simply not there. Do you
understand?”
Atreyu nodded, but preferred to say nothing for fear of irritating the gnome.
“Through my telescope you have seen the first, the Great Riddle Gate. And the
two sphinxes. That gate is always open. Obviously. There’s nothing to close. But even so,
no one can get through” — here Engywook raised a tiny forefinger — “unless the sphinxes
close their eyes. And do you know why? The gaze of a sphinx is different from the gaze
of any other creature. You and I and everyone else — our eyes take something in. We see
the world. A sphinx sees nothing. In a sense she is blind. But her eyes send something
out. And what do her eyes send out? All the riddles of the universe. That’s why these
sphinxes are always looking at each other. Because only another sphinx can stand a
sphinx’s gaze. So try to imagine what happens to one who ventures into the area where
those two gazes meet. He freezes to the spot, unable to move until he has solved all the
riddles of the world. If you go there, you’ll find the remains of those poor devils.”
“But,” said Atreyu, ‘didn’t you say that their eyes sometimes close? Don’t they
have to sleep now and then?”
“Sleep?” Engywook was shaken with giggles. “Goodness gracious! A sphinx
sleep? I should say not. You really are an innocent. Still, there’s some point to your
question. All my research, in fact, hinges on that particular point. The sphinxes shut their

eyes for some travelers and let them through. The question that no one has answered up
until now is this: Why one traveler and not another? Because you mustn’t suppose they let
wise, brave, or good people through, and keep the stupid, cowardly, and wicked out. Not
a bit of it! With my own eyes I’ve seen them admit stupid fools and treacherous knaves,
while decent, sensible people have given up after being kept waiting for months. And it
seems to make no difference whether a person has some serious reason for consulting the
Oracle, or whether he’s just come for the fun of it.”
“Haven’t your investigations suggested some explanation?” Atreyu asked.
Angry flashes darted from Engywook’s eyes.
“Have you been listening or haven’t you? Didn’t I just say that so far no one has
answered that question? Of course, I’ve worked up a few theories over the years. At first I
thought the sphinxes’ judgment might be guided by certain physical characteristics — size,
beauty, strength, and so on. But I soon had to drop that idea. Then I toyed with numerical
patterns. The idea, for instance, that three out of five were regularly excluded, or that
only prime-numbered candidates were admitted. That worked pretty well for the past, but
for forecasting it was no use at all. Since then I’ve come to the conclusion that the
sphinxes’ decision is based on pure chance and that no principle whatever is involved.
But my wife calls my conclusion scandalous, un-Fantastican, and absolutely
unscientific.”
“Are you starting your old nonsense again?” came Urgl’s angry voice from the
cave. “Shame on you! Such skepticism only shows that the bit of brain you once had has
dried up on you.”
“Hear that?” said Engywook with a sigh. “And the worst of it is that she’s right.”
“What about the Childlike Empress’s amulet?” Atreyu asked. “Do you think
they’ll respect it? They too are natives of Fantastica, after all.”
“Yes, I suppose they are,” said Engywook, shaking his apple-sized head. “But to
respect it they’d have to see it. And they don’t see anything. But their gaze would strike
you. And I’m not so sure the sphinxes would obey the Childlike Empress. Maybe they are
greater than she is. I don’t know, I don’t know. Anyway, it’s most worrisome.”
“Then what do you advise?” Atreyu asked.
“You will have to do what all the others have done. Wait and see what the
sphinxes decide — without hoping to know why.”
Atreyu nodded thoughtfully.
Urgl came out of the cave. In one hand she held a bucket with some steaming
liquid in it, and under her other arm she was carrying a bundle of dried plants. Muttering
to herself, she went to the luckdragon, who was still lying motionless, fast asleep. She
started climbing around on him and changing the dressings on his wounds. Her enormous
patient heaved one contented sigh and stretched; otherwise he seemed unaware of her
ministrations.
“Couldn’t you make yourself a little useful?” she said to Engywook as she was
hurrying back to the kitchen, “instead of sitting around like this, talking rubbish?”
“I am making myself extremely useful,” her husband called after her. “Possibly
more useful than you, but that’s more than a simple-minded woman like you will ever
understand!”
Turning to Atreyu, he went on: “She can only think of practical matters. She has
no feeling for the great overarching ideas.”

The clock in the belfry struck three.
By now Bastian’s father must have noticed — if he was ever going to — that
Bastian hadn’t come home. Would he worry? Maybe he’d go looking for him. Maybe he
had already notified the police. Maybe calls had gone out over the radio. Bastian felt a
sick pain in the pit of his stomach.
But if the police had been notified, where would they look for him? Could they
possibly come to this attic?
Had he locked the door when he came back from the toilet? He couldn’t
remember. He got up and checked. Yes, the door was locked and bolted.
Outside, the November afternoon was drawing to a close. Ever so slowly the light
was failing.
To steady his nerves, Bastian paced the floor for a while. Looking about him, he
discovered quite a few things one wouldn’t have expected to find in a school. For
instance, a battered old Victrola with a big horn attached — God only knew when and by
whom it had been brought here. In one corner there were some paintings in ornate gilt
frames. They were so faded that hardly anything could be made out — only here and there
a pale, solemn-looking face that shimmered against a dark background. And then there
was a rusty, seven-armed candelabrum, still holding the stumps of thick wax candles,
bearded with drippings.
Bastian gave a sudden start, for looking into a dark corner he saw someone
moving. But when he looked again, it dawned on him that he had only seen himself,
reflected in a large mirror that had lost half its silvering. He went closer and looked at
himself for a while. He was really nothing much to look at, with his pudgy build and his
bowlegs and pasty face. He shook his head and said aloud: “No!”
Then he went back to his mats. By then it was so dark that he had to hold the book
up to his eyes.
“Where were we?” Engywook asked.
“At the Great Riddle Gate,” Atreyu reminded him.
“Right. Now suppose you’ve managed to get through. Then — and only then — the
second gate will be there for you. The Magic Mirror Gate. As I’ve said, I myself have not
been able to observe it, what I tell you has been gleaned from travelers’ accounts. This
second gate is both open and closed. Sounds crazy, doesn’t it? It might be better to say:
neither closed nor open. Though that doesn’t make it any less crazy. The point is that this
gate seems to be a big mirror or something of the kind, though it’s made neither of glass
nor of metal. What it is made of, no one has ever been able to tell me. Anyway, when you
stand before it, you see yourself. But not as you would in an ordinary mirror. You don’t
see your outward appearance; what you see is your real innermost nature. If you want to
go through, you have to — in a manner of speaking — go into yourself.”
“Well,” said Atreyu. “It seems to me that this Magic Mirror Gate is easier to get
through than the first.”
“Wrong!” cried Engywook. Once again he began to trot back and forth in
agitation. “Dead wrong, my friend! I’ve known travelers who considered themselves
absolutely blameless to yelp with horror and run away at the sight of the monster
grinning out of the mirror at them. We had to care for some of them for weeks before

they were even able to start home.”
“We!” growled Urgl, who was passing with another bucket. “I keep hearing ‘we’.
When did you ever take care of anybody?”
Engywook waved her away.
“Others,” he went on lecturing, “appear to have seen something even more
horrible, but had the courage to go through. What some saw was not so frightening, but it
still cost every one of them an inner struggle. Nothing I can say would apply to all. It’s a
different experience each time.”
“Good,” said Atreyu. “Then at least it’s possible to go through this Magic Mirror
Gate?”
“Oh yes, of course it’s possible, or it wouldn’t be a gate. Where’s your logic, my
boy?”
“But it’s also possible to go around it,” said Atreyu. “Or isn’t it?”
“Yes indeed,” said Engywook. “Of course it is. But if you do that, there’s nothing
more behind it. The third gate isn’t there until you’ve gone through the second. How often
do I have to tell you that?”
“I understand. But what about this third gate?”
“That’s where things get really difficult! Because, you see, the No-Key Gate is
closed. Simply closed. And that’s that! There’s no handle and no doorknob and no
keyhole. Nothing. My theory is that this single, hermetically closed door is made of
Fantastican selenium. You may know that there’s no way of destroying, bending or
dissolving Fantastican selenium. It’s absolutely indestructible.”
“Then there’s no way of getting through?”
“Not so fast. Not so fast, my boy. Certain individuals have got through and
spoken with Uyulala. So the door can be opened.”
“But how?”
“Just listen. Fantastican selenium reacts to our will. It’s our will that makes it
unyielding. But if someone succeeds in forgetting all purpose, in wanting nothing at all —
to him the gate will open of its own accord.”
Atreyu looked down and said in an undertone: “If that’s the case — how can I
possibly get through? How can I manage not to want to get through?”
Engywook sighed and nodded, nodded and sighed.
“Just what I’ve been saying. The No-Key Gate is the hardest.”
“But if I succeed after all,” Atreyu asked, “will I then be in the Southern Oracle?”
“Yes,” said the gnome.
“But who or what is Uyulala?”
“No idea,” said the gnome, and his eyes sparkled with fury. “None of those who
have reached her has been willing to tell me. How can I be expected to complete my
scientific work if everyone cloaks himself in mysterious silence? I could tear my hair out
— if I had any left. If you reach her, Atreyu, will you tell me? Will you? One of these
days my thirst for knowledge will be the death of me, and no one, no one is willing to
help. I beg you, promise you’ll tell me.”
Atreyu stood up and looked at the Great Riddle Gate, which lay bathed in
moonlight.
“I can’t promise that, Engywook,” he said softly, “though I’d be glad to show my
gratitude. But if no one has told you who or what Uyulala is, there must be a reason. And

before I know what that reason is, I can’t decide whether someone who hasn’t seen her
with his own eyes has a right to know.”
“In that case, get away from me!” screamed the gnome, his eyes literally spewing
sparks. “All I get is ingratitude! All my life I wear myself out trying to reveal a secret of
universal interest. And no one helps me. I should never have bothered with you.”
With that he ran into the little cave, and a door could be heard slamming within.
Urgl passed Atreyu and said with a titter: “The old fool means no harm. But he’s
always running into such disappointments with this ridiculous investigation of his. He
wants to go down in history as the one who has solved the great riddle. The world-
famous gnome Engywook. You mustn’t mind him.”
“Of course not,” said Atreyu. “Just tell him I thank him with all my heart for what
he has done for me. And I thank you too. If it’s allowed, I will tell him the secret — if I
come back.”
“Then you’re leaving us?” Urgl asked.
“I have to,” said Atreyu. “There’s no time to be lost. Now I shall go to the Oracle.
Farewell! And in the meantime take good care of Falkor, the luckdragon.”
With that he turned away and strode toward the Great Riddle Gate.
Urgl watched the erect figure with the blowing cloak vanish among the rocks and
ran after him, crying: “Lots of luck, Atreyu!”
But she didn’t know whether he had heard or not. As she waddled back to her
little cave, she muttered to herself: “He’ll need it all right — he’ll need lots of luck.”
Atreyu was now within fifty feet of the great stone gate. It was much larger than
he had judged from a distance. Behind it lay a deserted plain. There was nothing to stop
the eye, and Atreyu’s gaze seemed to plunge into an abyss of emptiness. In front of the
gate and between the two pillars Atreyu saw only innumerable skulls and skeletons — all
that was left of the varied species of Fantasticans who had tried to pass through the gate
but had been frozen forever by the gaze of the sphinxes.
But it wasn’t these gruesome reminders that stopped Atreyu. What stopped him
was the sight of the sphinxes.
He had been through a good deal in the course of the Great Quest — he had seen
beautiful things and horrible things — but up until now he had not known that one and the
same creature can be both, that beauty can be terrifying.
The two monsters were bathed in moonlight, and as Atreyu approached them,
they seemed to grow beyond measure. Their heads seemed to touch the moon, and their
expression as they looked at each other seemed to change with every step he took.
Currents of a terrible, unknown force flashed through the upraised bodies and still more
through the almost human faces. It was as though these beings did not merely exist, in the
way marble for instance exists, but as if they were on the verge of vanishing, but would
recreate themselves at the same time. For that very reason they seemed far more real than
anything made of stone.
Fear gripped Atreyu.
Fear not so much of the danger that threatened him as of something above and
beyond his own self. It hardly grazed his mind that if the sphinxes’ gaze should strike him
he would freeze to the spot forever. No, what made his steps heavier and heavier, until he
felt as though he were made of cold gray lead, was fear of the unfathomable, of

something intolerably vast.
Yet he went on. He stopped looking up. He kept his head bowed and walked very
slowly, foot by foot, towards the stone gate. Heavier and heavier grew his burden of fear.
He thought it would crush him, but still he went on. He didn’t know whether the sphinxes
had closed their eyes or not. Would he be admitted? Or would this be the end of his Great
Quest? He had no time to lose in worrying. He just had to take his chances.
At a certain point he felt sure that he had not enough will power left to carry him a
single step forward. And just then he heard the echo of his footfalls within the great
vaulted gate. Instantly every last shred of fear fell from him, and he knew that whatever
might happen he would never again be afraid.
Looking up, he saw that the Great Riddle Gate lay behind him. The sphinxes had
let him through.
Up ahead, no more than twenty paces away, where previously there had been
nothing but the great empty plain, he saw the Magic Mirror Gate. This gate was large and
round like a second moon (for the real moon was still shining high in the sky) and it
glittered like polished silver. It was hard to imagine how anyone could pass through a
metal surface, but Atreyu didn’t hesitate for a moment. After what Engywook had said, he
expected a terrifying image of himself to come toward him out of the mirror, but now that
he had left all fear behind him, he hardly gave the matter a thought.
What he saw was something quite unexpected, which wasn’t the least bit
terrifying, but which baffled him completely. He saw a fat little boy with a pale face — a
boy his own age — and this little boy was sitting on a pile of mats, reading a book. The
little boy had large, sad-looking eyes, and he was wrapped in frayed gray blankets.
Behind him a few motionless animals could be distinguished in the half-light — an eagle,
an owl, and a fox — and farther off there was something that looked like a white skeleton.
He couldn’t make out exactly what it was.
Bastian gave a start when he realized what he had just read. Why, that was him!
The description was right in every detail. The book trembled in his hands. This was going
too far. How could there be something in a book that applied only to this particular
moment and, only to him? It could only be a crazy accident. But a very remarkable
accident.
“Bastian,” he said aloud, “you really are a screwball. Pull your self together.”
He had meant to say this very sternly, but his voice quavered a little, for he was
not quite sure that what had happened was an accident.
Just imagine, he thought. What if they’ve really heard of me in Fantastica!
Wouldn’t that be wonderful?
But he didn’t dare say it aloud.
A faint smile of astonishment played over Atreyu’s lips as he passed into the
mirror image — he was rather surprised that he was succeeding so easily in something
that others had found insuperably difficult. But on the way through he felt a strange,
prickly shudder. He had no suspicion of what had really happened to him.
For when he emerged on the far side of the Magic Mirror Gate, he had lost all
memory of himself, of his past life, aims, and purposes. He had forgotten the Great Quest
that had brought him there, and he didn’t even know his own name. He was like a

newborn child.
Up ahead of him, only a few steps away, he saw the No-Key Gate, but he had
forgotten its name and forgotten that his purpose in passing through it was to reach the
Southern Oracle. He had no idea why he was there or what he was supposed to do. He
felt light and cheerful and he laughed for no reason, for the sheer pleasure of it.
The gate he saw before him was as small and low as a common door and stood all
by itself — with no walls around it — on the empty plain. And this door was closed.
Atreyu looked at it for a while. It seemed to be made of some material with a
coppery sheen. It was nice to look at, but Atreyu soon lost interest. He went around the
gate and examined it from behind, but the back looked no different than the front. And
there was neither handle nor knob nor keyhole. Obviously this door could not be opened,
and anyway why would anyone want to open it, since it led nowhere and was just
standing there. For behind the gate there was only the wide, flat, empty plain.
Atreyu felt like leaving. He turned back, went around the Magic Mirror Gate, and
looked at it for some time without realizing what it was. He decided to go away,
“No, no, don’t go away,” said Bastian aloud. “Turn around. You have to go
through the No-Key Gate!”
but then turned back to the No-Key Gate. He wanted to look at its coppery sheen again.
Once more, he stood in front of the gate, bending his head to the left, bending it to the
right, enjoying himself. Tenderly he stroked the strange material. It felt warm and almost
alive. And the door opened by a crack.
Atreyu stuck his head through, and then he saw something he hadn’t seen on the
other side when he had walked around the gate. He pulled his head back, looked past the
gate, and saw only the empty plain. He looked again through the crack in the door and
saw a long corridor formed by innumerable huge columns. And farther off there were
stairs and more pillars and terraces and more stairs and a whole forest of columns. But
none of these columns supported a roof. For above them Atreyu could see the night sky.
He passed through the gate and looked around him with wonderment. The door
closed behind him.
The clock in the belfry struck four.
Little by little, the murky light was failing. It was getting too dark to read by.
Bastian put the book down.
What was he to do now?
There was bound to be electric light in this attic. He groped his way to the door
and ran his hand along the wall, but couldn’t find a switch. He looked on the opposite
side, and again there was none.
He took a box of matches from his trouser pocket (he always had matches on him,
for he had a weakness for making little fires), but they were damp and the first three
wouldn’t light. In the faint glow of the fourth he tried to locate a light switch, but there
wasn’t any. The thought of having to spend the whole evening and night here in total
darkness gave him the cold shivers. He was no baby, and at home or in any other
familiar place he had no fear of the dark, but this enormous attic with all these weird
things in it was something else again.

The match burned his fingers and he threw it away.
For a while he just stood there and listened. The rain had let up and now he could
barely hear the drumming on the big tin roof.
Then he remembered the rusty, seven-armed candelabrum he had seen. He
groped his way across the room, found the candelabrum, and dragged it to his pile of
mats.
He lit the wicks in the thick stubs — all seven — and a golden light spread. The
flames crackled faintly and wavered now and then in the draft.
With a sigh of relief, Bastian picked up the book.
VII
The Voice of Silence
ladness buoyed Atreyu’s heart as he strode into the forest of columns which cast
black shadows in the bright moonlight. In the deep silence that surrounded him he barely
heard his own footfalls. He no longer knew who he was or what his name was, how he
had got there or what he was looking for. He was full of wonder, but quite undismayed.
The floor was made of mosaic tiles, showing strange ornamental designs or
mysterious scenes and images. Atreyu passed over it, climbed broad steps, came to a vast
terrace, descended another set of steps, and passed down a long avenue of stone columns.
He examined them, one after another, and it gave him pleasure to see that each was
decorated with different signs and symbols. Farther and farther he went from the No-Key
Gate.
At last, when he had gone heaven knows how far, he heard a hovering sound in
the distance and stopped to listen. The sound came closer, it was a singing voice, but it
seemed very, very sad, almost like a sob at times. This lament passed over the columns
like a breeze, then stopped in one place, rose and fell, came and went, and seemed to
move in a wide circle around Atreyu.
He stood still and waited.
Little by little, the circle became smaller, and after a while he was able to
understand the words the voice was singing:
“Oh, nothing can happen more than once,
But all things must happen one day.
Over hill and dale, over wood and stream,
My dying voice will blow away . . .”
Atreyu turned in the direction of the voice, which darted fitfully among the
columns, but he could see no one.

“Who are you?” he cried.
The voice came back to him like an echo: “Who are you?”
Atreyu pondered.
“Who am I?” he murmured. “I don’t know. I have a feeling that I once knew. But
does it matter?”
The singing voice answered:
“If questions you would ask of me,
You must speak in poetry,
For rhymeless talk that strikes my ear
I cannot hear, I cannot hear. . .”
Atreyu hadn’t much practice in rhyming. This would be a difficult conversation,
he thought, if the voice only understood poetry. He racked his brains for a while, then he
came out with:
“I hope it isn’t going too far,
But could you tell me who you are?”
This time the voice answered at once:
“I hear you now, your words are clear,
I understand as well as hear.”
And then, coming from a different direction, it sang:
“I thank you, friend, for your good will.
I’m glad that you have come to me.
I am Uyulala, the voice of silence.
In the Palace of Deep Mystery.”
Atreyu noticed that the voice rose and fell, but was never wholly silent. Even
when it sang no words or when he was speaking, a sound hovered in the air.
For a time it seemed to stand still; then it moved slowly away from him. He ran
after it and asked:
“Oh, Uyulala, tell me where you’re hid.
I cannot see you and so wish I did.”
Passing him by, the voice breathed into his ear:
“Never has anyone seen me,
Never do I appear.
You will never see me,
And yet I am here.”
“Then you’re invisible?” he asked. But when no answer came, he remembered that
he had to speak in rhyme, and asked:
“Have you no body, is that what you mean?

Or is it only that you can’t be seen?”
He heard a soft, bell-like sound, which might have been a laugh or a sob. And the
voice sang:
“Yes and no and neither one.
I do not appear
In the brightness of the sun
As you appear,
For my body is but sound
That one can hear but never see,
And this voice you’re hearing now
Is all there is of me.”
In amazement, Atreyu followed the sound this way and that way through the
forest of columns. It took him some time to get a new question ready:
“Do I understand you right?
Your body is this melody?
But what if you should cease to sing?
Would you cease to be?”
The answer came to him from very near:
“Once my song is ended,
What comes to others soon or late,
When their bodies pass away,
Will also be my fate.
My life will last the time of my song,
But that will not be long.”
Now it seemed certain that the voice was sobbing, and Atreyu, who could not
understand why, hastened to ask:
“Why are you so sad? Why are you crying?
You sound so young. Why speak of dying?”
And the voice came back like an echo:
“I am only a song of lament,
The wind will blow me away.
But tell me now why you were sent.
What have you come to say?”
The voice died away among the columns, and Atreyu turned in all directions,
trying to pick it up again. For a little while he heard nothing, then, starting in the distance,
the voice came quickly closer. It sounded almost impatient:
“Uyulala is answer. Answers on questions feed.
So ask me what you’ve come to ask,
For questions are her need.”

Atreyu cried out:
“Then help me, Uyulala, tell me why
You sing a plaint as if you soon must die.”
And the voice sang:
“The Childlike Empress is sick,
And with her Fantastica will die.
The Nothing will swallow this place,
It will perish and so will I.
We shall vanish into the Nowhere and Never,
As though we had never been.
The Empress needs a new name
To make her well again.”
Atreyu pleaded:
“Oh, tell me, Uyulala, oh, tell me who can give
The Childlike Empress the name, which alone will let her live.”
The voice replied:
“Listen and listen well
To the truth I have to tell.
Though your spirit may be blind
To the sense of what I say,
Print my words upon your mind
Before you go away.
Later you may dredge them up
From the depths of memory,
Raise them to the light of day
Exactly as they flow from me.
Everything depends on whether
You remember faithfully.”
For a time he heard only a plaintive sound without words. Then suddenly the
voice came from right next to him, as though someone were whispering into his ear:
“Who can give the Childlike Empress
The new name that will make her well?
Not you, not I, no elf, no djinn,
Can save us from the evil spell.
For we are figures in a book —
We do what we were invented for,
But we can fashion nothing new
And cannot change from what we are.
But there’s a realm outside Fantastica,
The Outer World is its name,
The people who live there are rich indeed
And not at all the same.
Born of the Word, the children of man,

Or humans, as they’re sometimes called,
Have had the gift of giving names
Ever since our worlds began,
In every age it’s they who gave
The Childlike Empress life,
For wondrous new names have the power to save.
But now for many and many a day,
No human has visited Fantastica,
For they no longer know the way.
They have forgotten how real we are,
They don’t believe in us anymore.
Oh, if only one child of man would come,
Oh, then at last the thing would be done.
If only one would hear our plea.
For them it is near, but for us too far,
Never can we go out to them,
For theirs is the world of reality.
But tell me, my hero, you so young,
Will you remember what I have sung?”
“Oh yes!” cried Atreyu in his bewilderment. He was determined to imprint every
word on his memory, though he had forgotten what for. He merely had a feeling that it
was very, very important. But the singsong voice and the effort of hearing and speaking
in rhymes made him sleepy. He murmured:
“I will remember. I will remember every word.
But tell me, what shall I do with what I’ve heard?”
And the voice answered:
“That is for you alone to decide.
I’ve told you what was in my heart.
So this is when our ways divide,
When you and I must part.”
Almost half asleep, Atreyu asked:
“But if you go away,
Where will you stay?”
Again he heard the sobbing in the voice, which receded more and more as it sang:
“The Nothing has come near,
The Oracle is dying.
No one again will hear
Uyulala laughing, sighing.
You are the last to hear
My voice among the columns,
Sounding far and near.
Perhaps you will accomplish
What no one else has done,
But to succeed, young hero,
Remember what I have sung.”

And then, farther and farther in the distance, Atreyu heard the words:
“Oh, nothing can happen more than once,
But all things must happen one day.
Over hill and dale, over wood and stream,
My dying voice will blow away.”
That was the last Atreyu heard.
He sat down, propped his back against a column, looked up at the night sky, and
tried to understand what he had heard. Silence settled around him like a soft, warm cloak,
and he fell asleep.
When he awoke in the cold dawn, he was lying on his back, looking up at the sky.
The last stars paled. Uyulala’s voice still sounded in his thoughts. And then suddenly he
remembered everything that had gone before and the purpose of his Great Quest.
At last he knew what was to be done. Only a human, a child of man, someone
from the world beyond the borders of Fantastica, could give the Childlike Empress a new
name. He would just have to find a human and bring him to her.
Briskly he sat up.
Ah, thought Bastion. How gladly I would help her! Her and Atreyu too. What a
beautiful name I would think up! If I only knew how to reach Atreyu. I’d go this minute.
Wouldn’t he be amazed if I were suddenly standing before him! But it’s impossible. Or is
it?
And then he said under his breath: “If there’s any way of my getting to you in
Fantastica, tell me, Atreyu. I’ll come without fail. You’ll see.”
When Atreyu looked around, he saw that the forest of columns with its stairways
and terraces had vanished. Whichever way he looked there was only the empty plain that
he had seen behind each of the three gates before going through. But now the gates were
gone, all three of them.
He stood up and again looked in all directions. It was then that he discovered, in
the middle of the plain, a patch of Nothing like those he had seen in Howling Forest. But
this time it was much nearer. He turned around and ran the other way as fast as he could.
He had been running for some time when he saw, far in the distance, a rise in the
ground and thought it might be the stony rust-red mountains where the Great Riddle Gate
was.
He started toward it, but he had a long way to go before he was close enough to
make out any details. Then he began to have doubts. The landscape looked about right,
but there was no gate to be seen. And the stones were not red, but dull gray.
Then, when he had gone much farther, he saw two great stone pillars with a space
between them. The lower part of a gate, he thought. But there was no arch above it. What
had happened?
Hours later, he reached the spot and discovered the answer. The great stone arch
had collapsed and the sphinxes were gone.
Atreyu threaded his way through the ruins, then climbed to the top of a stone
pyramid and looked out, trying to locate the place where he had left the Gnomics and the

luckdragon. Or had they fled from the Nothing in the meantime?
At last he saw a tiny flag moving this way and that behind the balustrade of
Engywook’s observatory. Atreyu waved both arms, cupped his hands around his mouth,
and shouted: “Ho! Are you still there?”
The sound of his voice had hardly died away when a pearly-white luckdragon
rose from the hollow where the gnomes had their cave and flew through the air with lazy,
sinuous movements. He must have been feeling playful, for now and then he turned over
on his back and looped-the-loop so fast that he looked like a burst of white flame. And
then he landed not far from the pyramid where Atreyu was standing. When he propped
himself on his forepaws, he was so high above Atreyu that to bring his head close to him,
he had to bend his long, supple neck sharply downward. Rolling his ruby-red eyeballs for
joy, stretching his tongue far out of his wide-open gullet, he boomed in his bronze-bell
voice: “Atreyu, my friend and master! So you’ve finally come back! I’m so glad! We had
almost given up hope — the gnomes, that is, not I.”
“I’m glad too!” said Atreyu. “But what has happened in this one night?”
“One night?” cried Falkor. “Do you think it’s been only one night? You’re in for a
surprise. Climb on, I’ll carry you.”
Atreyu swung himself up on the enormous animal’s back. It was his first time
aboard a luckdragon. And though he had ridden wild horses and was anything but timid,
this first short ride through the air took his breath away. He clung fast to Falkor’s flowing
mane, and Falkor called back with a resounding laugh: “You’ll just have to get used to it.”
“At least,” Atreyu called back, gasping for air, “you seem to be well again.”
“Pretty near,” said the dragon. “Not quite.”
Then they landed outside the gnomes’ cave, and there in the entrance were
Engywook and Urgl waiting for them.
Engywook’s tongue went right to work: “What have you seen and done? Tell us
all about it! Those gates, for instance? Do they bear out my theories? And who or what is
Uyulala?”
But Urgl cut him off. “That’ll do! Let the boy eat and drink. What do you think
I’ve cooked and baked for? Plenty of time later for your idle curiosity.”
Atreyu climbed down off the dragon’s back and exchanged greetings with the
gnomes. Again the little table was set with all sorts of delicacies and a steaming pot of
herb tea.
The clock in the belfry struck five. Bastian thought sadly of the two chocolate nut
bars that he kept in his bedside table at home in case he should be hungry at night. If he
had suspected that he would never go back there, he could have brought them along as
an iron ration. But it was too late to think of that now.
Falkor stretched out in the little gully in such a way that his huge head was near
Atreyu and he could hear everything.
“Just imagine,” he said. “My friend and master thinks he was gone for only one
night.”
“Was it longer?” Atreyu asked.
“Seven days and seven nights,” said Falkor. “Look, my wounds are almost
healed.”

Then for the first time Atreyu noticed that his own wound too was healed. The
herb dressing had fallen off. He was amazed. “How can it be? I passed through three
magic gates. I talked with Uyulala, then I fell asleep. But I can’t possibly have slept that
long.”
“Space and time,” said Engywook, “must be different in there. Anyway, no one
had ever stayed in the Oracle as long as you. What happened? Are you finally going to
speak?”
“First,” said Atreyu, “I’d like to know what has happened here.”
“You can see for yourself,” said Engywook. “The colors are all fading. Everything
is getting more and more unreal. The Great Riddle Gate isn’t there anymore. It looks as if
the Nothing were taking over.”
“What about the sphinxes? Where have they gone? Did they fly away? Did you
see them go?”
“We saw nothing,” Engywook lamented. “We hoped you could tell us something.
Suddenly the stone gate was in ruins, but none of us saw or heard a thing. I even went
over and examined the wreckage. And do you know what I found? The fragments are as
old as the hills and overgrown with gray moss, as if they had been lying there for
hundreds of years, as if the Great Riddle Gate had never existed.”
“It was there, though,” said Atreyu under his breath, “because I went through it.
And then I went through the Magic Mirror Gate and the No-Key Gate.”
And then Atreyu reported everything that had happened to him. Now he
remembered every last detail.
As Atreyu told them his story, Engywook, who at first had impatiently demanded
further information, became more and more subdued. And when Atreyu repeated almost
word for word what Uyulala had told him, the gnome said nothing at all. His shriveled
little face had taken on a look of deepest gloom.
“Well,” said Atreyu in conclusion. “Now you know the secret. Uyulala is just a
voice. She can only be heard. She is where she sings.”
For a time Engywook was silent. When he spoke, his voice was husky: “You
mean she was.”
“Yes,” said Atreyu. “She herself said no one else would ever hear her speak. I was
the last.”
Two little tears flowed down Engywook’s wrinkled cheeks.
“All for nothing!” he croaked. “My whole life work, all my research, my year-
long observations. At last someone brings me the last stone for my scientific edifice,
finally I’m in a position to complete my work, to write the last chapter — and it’s
absolutely futile and superfluous. It’s no longer of the slightest interest to anyone, because
the object under investigation has ceased to exist. There go my hopes. All shattered.”
He seemed to break into a fit of coughing, but actually he was shaken with sobs.
Moved to sympathy, Urgl stroked his bald little head and mumbled: “Poor old
Engywook! Poor old Engywook! Don’t let it get you down. You’ll find something else to
occupy you.”
“Woman!” Engywook fumed at her. “What you see before you is not a poor old
Engywook, but a tragic figure.”
Once again he ran into the cave, and again a door was heard slamming within.
Urgl shook her head and sighed. “He means no harm,” she muttered. “He’s a good old

sort. If only he weren’t plumb crazy!”
When they had. finished eating, Urgl stood up and said: “I’ve got to pack now. We
can’t take much with us, but we will need a few things. I’d better hurry.”
“You’re going away?” Atreyu asked.
Urgl nodded. “We have no choice,” she said sadly. “Where the Nothing takes
hold, nothing grows. And now, my poor old man has no reason to stay. We’ll just have to
see how we make out. We’ll find a place somewhere. But what about you? What are your
plans?”
“I have to do as Uyulala told me,” said Atreyu. “Try and find a human and take
him to the Childlike Empress to give her a new name.”
“Where will you look for this human?” Urgl asked.
“I don’t know,” said Atreyu. “Somewhere beyond the borders of Fantastica.”
“We’ll get there!” came Falkor’s bell-like voice. I’ll carry you. You’ll see, we’ll be
lucky.”
“In that case,” Urgl grunted, “you’d better get started.”
“Maybe we could give you a lift,” Atreyu suggested. “For part of the way.”
“That’s all I need,” said Urgl. “You won’t catch me gallivanting around in the air.
A self-respecting gnome keeps his feet on the ground. Besides, you mustn’t let us delay
you. You have more important things to do — for us all.”
“But I want to show my gratitude,” said Atreyu.
“The best way of doing that is to get started and stop frittering the time away with
useless jibber-jabber.”
“She’s got something there,” said Falkor. “Let’s go, Atreyu.”
Atreyu swung himself up on the luckdragon’s back. One last time he turned back
and shouted: “Goodbye!”
But Urgl was already inside the cave, packing.
When some hours later she and Engywook stepped out into the open, each was
carrying an overloaded back-basket, and again they were busily quarreling. Off they
waddled on their tiny, crooked legs, and never once looked back.
Later on, Engywook became very famous, in fact, he became the most famous
gnome in the world, but not because of his scientific investigations. That, however, is
another story and shall be told another time.
At the moment when the two gnomes were starting out, Atreyu was far away,
whizzing through the skies of Fantastica on the back of Falkor, the white luckdragon.
Involuntarily Bastian looked up at the skylight, trying to imagine how it would be
if Falkor came cutting through the darkening sky like a dancing white flame, if he and
Atreyu were coming to get him.
“Oh my,” he sighed. “Wouldn’t that be something!”
He could help them, and they could help him. He would be saved and so would
Fantastica.

VIII
The Wind Giants
igh in the air rode Atreyu, his red cloak flowing behind him. His blue-black hair
fluttered in the wind. With steady, wavelike movements, Falkor, the white luckdragon,
glided through the mists and tatters of clouds. . .
Up and down and up and down and up and down. . .
How long had they been flying? For days and nights and more days — Atreyu had
lost track. The dragon had the gift of flying in his sleep. Farther and farther they flew.
Sometimes Atreyu dozed off, clinging fast to the dragon’s white mane. But it was only a
light, restless sleep. And more and more his waking became a dream, all hazy and
blurred.
Shadowy mountains passed below him, lands and seas, islands and rivers. . .
Atreyu had lost interest in them, and gave up trying to hurry Falkor as he had done on
first leaving the Southern Oracle. For then he had been impatient, thinking it a simple
matter, for one with a dragon to ride, to reach the border of Fantastica and cross it to the
Outer World.
He hadn’t known how very large Fantastica was.
Now he had to fight the leaden weariness that was trying to overpower him. His
eyes, once as keen as a young eagle’s, had lost their distant vision. From time to time he
would pull himself upright and try to look around, but then he would sink back and stare
straight ahead at the dragon’s long, supple body with its pearly pink-and-white scales.
Falkor was tired too. His strength, which had seemed inexhaustible, was running out.
More than once in the course of their long flight they had seen below them spots
which the Nothing had invaded and which gave them the feeling that they were going
blind. Seen from that height, many of these spots seemed relatively small, but others were
as big as whole countries. Fear gripped the luckdragon and his rider, and at first they
changed direction to avoid looking at the horror. But, strange as it may seem, horror loses
it’s power to frighten when repeated too often. And since the patches of Nothing became
more and more frequent, the travelers were gradually getting used to them.
They had been flying in silence for quite some time when suddenly Falkor’s
bronze-bell tone rang out: “Atreyu, my little master. Are you asleep?”
“No,” said Atreyu, though actually he had been caught up in a terrifying dream.
“What is it, Falkor?”
“I’ve been wondering if it wouldn’t be wiser to turn back.”
“Turn back? Where to?”
“To the Ivory Tower. To the Childlike Empress.”
“You want us to go to her empty-handed?”
“I wouldn’t call it that, Atreyu. What was your mission?”
“To discover the cause of her illness and find out what would cure it.”
“But,” said Falkor, “nothing was said about your bringing her the cure.”
“What do you mean?”

“Maybe it’s a mistake, trying to cross the border of Fantastica in search of a
human.”
“I don’t see what you’re driving at, Falkor. Explain yourself.”
“The Childlike Empress is deathly sick,” said the dragon, “because she needs a
new name. Morla the Aged One told you that. But only a human, only a child of man
from the Outer World can give her this name. Uyulala told you that. So you’ve actually
completed your mission. It seems to me you should let the Childlike Empress know it as
soon as possible.”
“But it won’t do her a bit of good,” Atreyu protested, “unless I bring her the
human who can save her.”
“Don’t be so sure,” said Falkor. “She has much greater power than you or I.
Maybe she would have no difficulty in bringing a human to Fantastica. Maybe she has
ways that are unknown to you and me and everyone else in Fantastica. But to do so she
needs to know what you have found out. If that’s the way it is, there’s no point in our
trying to find a human on our own. She might even die while we’re looking. But maybe if
we turn back in time, we can save her.”
Atreyu made no answer. The dragon could be right, he reflected. But then he
could be wrong. If he went back now with his message, the Childlike Empress might very
well say: What good does that do me? And now it’s too late to send you out again.
He didn’t know what to do. And he was tired, much too tired to decide anything.
“You know, Falkor,” he said, hardly above a whisper, “you may be right. Or you
may be wrong. Let’s fly on a little further. Then if we haven’t come to a border, we’ll turn
back.”
“What do you mean by a little further?” the dragon asked.
“A few hours,” Atreyu murmured. “Oh well, just one hour.”
“All right,” said Falkor, “just one hour.”
But that one hour was one hour too many.
They hadn’t noticed that the sky in the north was black with clouds. In the west
the sky was aflame, and ugly-looking clouds hung down over the horizon like seaweed.
In the east a storm was rising like a blanket of gray lead, and all around it there were
tatters of cloud that looked like blue ink blots. And from the south came a sulfur-yellow
mist, streaked with lightning.
“We seem to be getting into bad weather,” said Falkor.
Atreyu looked in all directions.
“Yes,” he said. “It looks bad. But what can we do but fly on?”
“It would be more sensible,” said Falkor, “to look for shelter. If this is what I
think, it’s no joke.”
“What do you think?” Atreyu asked.
“I think it’s the four Wind Giants, starting one of their battles. They’re almost
always fighting to see which is the strongest and should rule over the others. To them it’s
a sort of game, because they have nothing to fear. But God help anyone who gets caught
in their little tiffs.”
“Can’t you fly higher?” Atreyu asked.
“Beyond their reach, you mean? No, I can’t fly that high. And as far as I can see,
there’s nothing but water below us. Some enormous ocean. I don’t see any place to hide

in.”
“Then,” said Atreyu, “we’ll just have to wait till they get here. Anyway, there’s
something I want to ask them.”
“What?!” cried the dragon, so terrified that he jumped, in a manner of speaking,
sky-high.
“If they are the four Wind Giants,” Atreyu explained, “they must know all four
corners of Fantastica. If anyone can tell us where the borders are, it’s them.”
“Good Lord!” cried the dragon. “You think you can just stop and chat with Wind
Giants?”
“What are their names?” Atreyu asked.
“The one from the north,” said Falkor, “is called Lirr, the one from the east is
Baureo, the one from the south is Sheerek, and the one from the west is Mayestril. But
tell me, Atreyu. What are you? Are you a little boy or a bar of iron? How come you’re not
afraid?”
“When I passed through the sphinxes’ gate,” Atreyu replied, “I lost all my fear.
And besides, I’m wearing the emblem of the Childlike Empress. Everyone in Fantastica
respects it. Why shouldn’t the Wind Giants?”
“Oh, they will,” cried Falkor, “they will. But they’re stupid, and nothing can make
them stop fighting one another. You’ll see.”
Meanwhile the storm clouds from all four directions had converged. It seemed to
Atreyu that he was at the center of a huge funnel, which was revolving faster and faster,
mixing the sulfur-yellow, the leaden gray, the blood-red, and the deep black all together.
He and his white dragon were spun about in a circle like a matchstick in a great
whirlpool. And then he saw the Wind Giants.
Actually all he saw was faces, because their limbs kept changing in every possible
way — from long to short, from clear-cut to misty — and they were so knotted together in
a monstrous free-for-all that it was impossible to make out their real shapes, or even how
many of them there were. The faces too were constantly changing; now they were round
and puffed, now stretched from top to bottom or from side to side. But at all times they
could be told apart. They opened their mouths and bellowed and roared and howled and
laughed at one another. They didn’t even seem to notice the dragon and his rider, who
were gnats in comparison to the Wind Giants.
Atreyu raised himself as high as he could. With his right hand he reached for the
golden amulet on his chest and shouted at the top of his lungs: “In the name of the
Childlike Empress, be still and listen.”
And the unbelievable happened!
As though suddenly stricken dumb, they fell silent. Their mouths closed, and
eight gigantic goggle-eyes were directed at AURYN. The tempest stopped and the air
was deathly still.
“Answer me!” cried Atreyu. “Where are the borders of Fantastica? Do you know,
Lirr?”
“Not in the north,” said the black cloud face.
“And you, Baureo?”
“Not in the east,” said the leaden-gray cloud face.
“You tell me, Sheerek!”
“There is no border in the south,” said the sulfur-yellow cloud face.

“Mayestril, do you know?”
“No border in the west,” said the fiery-red cloud face.
And then they all spoke as with one mouth: “Who are you, who bear the emblem
of the Childlike Empress and don’t know that Fantastica has no borders?”
Atreyu made no reply. He was stunned. It had never occurred to him that
Fantastica might have no borders whatsoever. Then his whole Quest had been for
nothing.
He hardly noticed it when the Wind Giants resumed their war game. He had given
up caring what would happen to him. He clung fast to the dragon’s mane when they were
hurled upward by a whirlwind. The lightning played around them, they were spun in a
circle and almost drowned in a downpour of rain. They were sucked into a fiery wind that
nearly burned them up, but a moment later a hailstorm, consisting not of stones but of
icicles as long as spears, flung them downward. So it went: up and down, down and up,
this way and that. The Wind Giants were fighting for power.
A gust of wind turned Falkor over on his back. “Hold tight!” he shouted.
But it was too late. Atreyu had lost his hold and fell. He fell and fell, and then he
lost consciousness.
When he came to, Atreyu was lying on white sand. He heard the sound of waves,
and when he looked around he saw that he had been washed up on a beach. It was a gray,
foggy day, but there was no wind. The sea was calm and there was no sign that the Wind
Giants had been fighting a battle only a short time before. The beach was flat and there
were no hills or rocks in sight, only a few gnarled and crooked trees which, seen through
the mist, looked like great clawed hands.
Atreyu sat up. Seeing his red buffalo-hair cloak a few steps away he crawled over
to it and threw it over his shoulders. To his surprise, it was almost dry. So he must have
been lying there for quite a while.
How had he got there? Why hadn’t he drowned?
Dimly he remembered arms that had carried him, and strange singing voices. Poor
child, beautiful child! Hold him! Don’t let him go under!
Perhaps it had only been the sound of the waves.
Or could it have been sea nymphs and water sprites? Probably they had seen the
Glory and that was why they had saved him.
Involuntarily, he reached for the amulet — it was gone. There was no chain around
his neck. He had lost the Gem.
“Falkor!” he shouted as loud as he could. He jumped up and ran back and forth,
shouting in all directions: “Falkor! Falkor! Where are you?”
No answer came — only the slow, steady sound of the waves breaking against the
beach.
Heaven only knew where the Wind Giants had driven the white dragon. Maybe
Falkor was looking for his little master in an entirely different place, miles and miles
away. Maybe he wasn’t even alive.
No longer was Atreyu a dragon rider, and no longer was he the Childlike
Empress’s messenger. He was only a little boy. And all alone.
The clock in the belfry struck six.

By then it was dark outside. The rain had stopped. Not a sound to be heard.
Bastian stared into the candle flames.
Then he gave a start. The floor had creaked.
He thought he heard someone breathing. He held his breath and listened. Except
for the small circle of light shed by the candles, it was dark in the big attic.
Didn’t he hear soft steps on the stairs? Hadn’t the handle of the attic door moved
ever so slowly?
Again the floor creaked.
What if there were ghosts in this attic!
“Nonsense!” said Bastian none too loudly. “There’s no such thing! Everyone
knows that.”
Then why were there so many stories about them?
Maybe all the people who say ghosts don’t exist are just afraid to admit that they
do.
Atreyu wrapped himself up tight in his red cloak, for he was cold, and started
inland. The country, as far as he could see through the fog, was flat and monotonous. The
only change he noticed as he strode along was the appearance among the stunted trees of
bushes which looked as if they were made of rusty sheet metal and were almost as hard.
You could easily hurt yourself brushing against them if you weren’t careful.
About an hour later, Atreyu came to a road paved with bumpy, irregularly shaped
stones. Thinking it was bound to lead somewhere, he decided to follow it but preferred to
walk on the soft ground beside the bumpy paving stones. The road kept twisting and
turning, though it was hard to see why, for there was no sign of any hill, pond, or stream.
In that part of the country everything seemed to be crooked.
Atreyu hadn’t been skirting the road for very long when he heard a strange
thumping sound. It was far away but coming closer. It sounded like the muffled beat of a
big drum. In between beats he heard a tinkling of bells and a shrill piping that could have
been made by fifes. He hid behind a bush by the side of the road and waited to see what
would happen.
Slowly the strange music came closer, and then the first shapes emerged from the
fog. They seemed to be dancing, but it was a dance without charm or gaiety. The dancers
jumped grotesquely, rolled on the ground, crawled on all fours, leapt into the air, and
carried on like crazy people. But all Atreyu could hear was the slow, muffled drumbeats,
the shrill fifes, and a whimpering and panting from many throats.
More and more figures appeared, the procession seemed endless. Atreyu looked at
the dancers’ faces; they were ashen gray and bathed in sweat, and the eyes had a wild
feverish glow. Some of the dancers lashed themselves with whips.
They’re mad, Atreyu thought, and a cold shiver ran down his spine.
The procession consisted mostly of night-hobs, kobolds, and ghosts. There were
vampires as well, and quite a few witches, old ones with great humps and beards, but also
young ones who looked beautiful and wicked. If he had had AURYN, he would have
approached them and asked what was going on. As it was, he preferred to stay in his
hiding place until the mad procession had passed and the last straggler vanished hopping
and limping in the fog.
Only then did he venture out on the road and look after the ghostly procession.

Should he follow them? He couldn’t make up his mind. By that time, to tell the truth, he
didn’t know if there was anything that he should or should not do.
For the first time he was fully aware of how much he needed the Childlike
Empress’s amulet and how helpless he was without it. And not only or even mainly
because of the protection it had given him — it was thanks to his own strength, after all,
that he had stood up to all the hardships and terrors and the loneliness of his Quest — but
as long as he had carried the emblem, he had never been at a loss for what to do. Like a
mysterious compass, it had guided his thoughts in the right direction. And now that was
changed, now he had no secret power to lead him.
He had no idea what to do, but he couldn’t bear to stand there as though
paralyzed. So he made himself follow the muffled drumming, which could still be heard
in the distance.
While making his way through the fog — always careful to keep a suitable
distance between himself and the last stragglers — he tried to put his thoughts in order.
Why, oh, why hadn’t he listened when Falkor advised him to fly straight to the
Childlike Empress? He would have brought her Uyulala’s message and returned the Gem.
Without AURYN and without Falkor, he would never be able to reach her. She would
wait for him till her last moment, hoping he would come, trusting him to save her and
Fantastica — but in vain.
That in itself was bad enough, but still worse was what he had learned from the
Wind Giants, that Fantastica had no borders. If there was no way of leaving Fantastica,
then it would be impossible to call in a human form across the border. Because Fantastica
was endless, its end was inevitable.
But while he was stumbling over the bumpy paving stones in the fog, Uyulala’s
gentle voice resounded in his memory, and a spark of hope was kindled in his heart.
Lots of humans had come to Fantastica in the past and given the Childlike
Empress glorious new names. That’s what she had sung. So there was a way from the one
world to the other!
“For them it is near, but for us too far,
Never can we go out to them.”
Yes, those were Uyulala’s words. Humans, the children of man, had forgotten the
way. But mightn’t just one of them, a single one, remember?
His own hopeless situation mattered little to Atreyu. What mattered was that a
human should hear Fantastica’s cry of distress and come to the rescue, as had happened
many times before. Perhaps, perhaps one had already started out and was on his way.
“Yes! Yes!” Bastian shouted. Then, terrified of his own voice, he added more
softly: “I’d go and help you if I knew how. I don’t know the way, Atreyu. I honestly don’t.”
The muffled drumbeats and the shrill piping had stopped. Without noticing it,
Atreyu had come so close to the procession that he almost ran into the last stragglers.
Since he was barefoot, his steps were soundless — but that wasn’t why those creatures
took no notice of him. He could have been stomping with hobnailed boots and shouting at
the top of his lungs without attracting their attention.
By that time the procession had broken up and the spooks were scattered over a

large muddy field interspersed with gray grass. Some swayed from side to side, others
stood or sat motionless, but in all their eyes there was a feverish glow, and they were all
looking in the same direction.
Then Atreyu saw what they were staring at in fascinated horror. On the far side of
the field lay the Nothing.
It was the selfsame Nothing that he had seen from the bark trolls’ treetop, or on
the plain where the Magic Gates of the South; Oracle had stood, or looking down from
Falkor’s back — but until then he had always seen it from a distance. This time it was
close by. It cut across the entire landscape and was coming slowly but irresistibly closer.
Atreyu saw that the spooks in the field ahead of him were twitching and
quivering. Their limbs were convulsed and their mouths were wide open, as though they
had wanted to scream or laugh, though not a sound came out of them. And then all at
once — like leaves driven by a gust of wind — they rushed toward the Nothing. They
leapt, they rolled, they flung themselves into it.
The last of the ghostly crowd had just vanished when Atreyu felt to his horror that
his own body was beginning to take short, convulsive steps in the direction of the
Nothing. He felt drawn to it by an unreasoning desire, and braced his will against it. He
commanded himself to stand still. Slowly, very slowly, he managed to turn around and
step by step, as though bucking a powerful current, to struggle forward. The force of
attraction weakened and he ran, ran with all his might over the bumpy paving stones. He
slipped, fell, picked himself up, and ran on. He had no time to wonder where this foggy
road would lead him.
He followed the senseless twists and turns of the road until high pitch-black
ramparts appeared in the fog ahead of him. Behind them several crooked towers jutted
into the gray sky. The heavy wooden wings of the town gate were rotting away and hung
loose on rusty hinges.
Atreyu went in.
It was growing colder and colder in the attic. Bastion’s teeth were chattering.
What if he should get sick — what would become of him then? He might come
down with pneumonia, like Willy, a boy in his class. Then he would die all alone in this
attic. There’d be no one to help him.
He’d have been very glad just then to have his father come and save him.
But go home? No, he couldn’t. He’d rather die.
He took the rest of the army blankets and wrapped them around him.
After a while he felt warmer.
IX
Spook City

n the endless sky, somewhere above the roaring waves, Falkor’s voice rang out
like a great bronze bell:
“Atreyu! Where are you, Atreyu?” The Wind Giants had long finished their war
game and had stormed apart. They would meet again in this or some other place, to
continue their battle as they had done since time immemorial. They had already forgotten
the white dragon and his little rider, for they remembered nothing and knew nothing
except their own enormous power.
When Atreyu fell, Falkor tried to reach him and catch him. But a sudden
whirlwind had driven the dragon upward and far away. When he returned, the Wind
Giants were raging over another part of the sea. Falkor tried desperately to find the place
where Atreyu had fallen, but even a white luckdragon can’t possibly find anything as tiny
as a little boy in the seething foam of an angry ocean.
But Falkor wouldn’t give up. He flew high into the air to get a better view, then he
skimmed the waves or flew in larger and larger circles, all the while calling Atreyu by
name.
Being a luckdragon, he never doubted for a moment that everything would come
out all right in the end. And his mighty voice resounded amid the roaring of the waves:
“Atreyu! Atreyu, where are you?”
Atreyu wandered through the deathly stillness of a deserted city. The place
seemed to be under a curse, a city of haunted castles and houses, inhabited only by
ghosts. Like everything else in this country, the streets were crooked. Enormous spider
webs were suspended over them, and a foul smell rose from the cellars and well shafts.
At first Atreyu darted from wall to wall for fear that someone would see him, but
after a while he didn’t even bother to hide. The streets and squares were deserted, and
nothing stirred in the houses. He went into some of them, but found only overturned
furniture, tattered curtains, broken china and glassware — signs of devastation but no
inhabitants. On one table there was still a half-eaten meal, dishes with black soup in
them, and some sticky chunks of something that may have been bread. He ate some of
both. The taste was disgusting, but he was very hungry. It struck him as almost fitting
that he should end up in this town. Just the place, he thought, for someone who had given
up hope.
Bastian was weak with hunger.
For some strange reason his thoughts turned to Anna’s apple strudel — the best
apple strudel in the whole world.
Anna came three times a week. She would do a bit of typing for Bastian’s father
and put the house in order. And usually she would cook or bake something. She was a
strapping, bouncy woman with an unrestrained, cheery laugh. Bastian’s father was polite
to her but seemed hardly aware of her presence. She was seldom able to bring a smile to
his worried face. But when she was there, the place was a little more cheerful.
Though unmarried, Anna had a little daughter. Her name was Christa, she was
three years younger than Bastian, and she had beautiful blond hair. At first Anna had

brought Christa with her almost every time. Christa was very shy. Bastian spent hours
telling her his stories, and she would sit there still as a mouse, watching him wide-eyed.
She looked up to Bastian, and he was very fond of her.
But a year ago Anna had sent her daughter to a boarding school in the country.
Since then she and Bastian had seldom seen each other.
Bastian had been rather cross with Anna. She had tried to explain why it was
better for Christa, but he wasn’t convinced.
Even so, he could never resist her apple strudel.
He wondered in his distress how long a person could go without eating. Three
days? Two? Maybe you’d get hallucinations after twenty-four hours. On his fingers
Bastian counted the hours he had been there. At least ten. Maybe more. If only he had
saved his sandwich, or at least his apple.
In the flickering candlelight the glass eyes of the fox, the owl, and the huge eagle
looked almost alive. Their moving shadows loomed large on the attic wall.
Atreyu went out into the street again and wandered aimlessly about. He passed
through neighborhoods where all the houses were small and so low that he could reach up
to the eaves, and others lined with mansions many stories high, the fronts of which were
adorned with statues. But all these statues were of skeletons or demons, which grimaced
down at the forlorn wanderer.
Then suddenly he stopped stock-still.
From not far away he heard a raucous wailing that sounded so plaintive, so
hopeless that it cut him to the heart. All the despair, all the desolation of the creatures of
darkness was in that lament, which echoed back from the walls of distant buildings, until
in the end it sounded like the howling of a scattered wolf pack.
Atreyu followed the sound, which gradually grew weaker and ended in a hoarse
sob. He had to search for some time. He passed a gateway, entered a narrow, lightless
court, passed through an arch, and finally came to a damp, grimy backyard. And there,
chained, lay a gigantic, half-starved werewolf. Each rib stood out separately under its
mangy fur, the vertebrae looked like the teeth of a saw, and its tongue dangled from its
half-open mouth.
Slowly Atreyu approached him. When the werewolf noticed him, it raised its
great head with a jerk. A greenish light flared up in its eyes.
For a time the two looked at each other without a word, without a sound. Finally
the wolf let out a soft, dangerous-sounding growl: “Go away. Let me die in peace.”
Atreyu didn’t stir. Just as softly he answered: “I heard your call. That’s why I
came.”
The werewolf’s head sank back. “I didn’t call anyone,” he growled. “I was singing
my own dirge.”
“Who are you?” Atreyu asked, taking a step closer.
“I am Gmork, the werewolf.”
“Why are you lying here chained?”
“They forgot me when they went away.”
“Who are they?”
“The ones who chained me.”
“Where did they go?”

Gmork made no answer. He watched Atreyu from under half-closed lids. After a
long silence, he said: “You don’t belong here, little stranger. Neither in this city, nor in
this country. What have you come here for?”
Atreyu bowed his head.
“I don’t know how I got here. What is the name of this city?”
“It is the capital of the most famous country in all Fantastica,” said Gmork. “More
stories are told about this country and this city than about any other. Surely you’ve heard
of Spook City and the Land of Ghosts?”
Atreyu noded slowly.
Gmork hadn’t taken his eyes off the boy. He was amazed that this green-skinned
boy should look at him so quietly out of his black eyes and show no sign of fear.
“And who are you?” he asked.
Atreyu thought a while before answering.
“I’m Nobody.”
“What do you mean by that?”
“I mean that I once had a name. It can’t be named anymore. That makes me
Nobody.”
The werewolf bared his hideous fangs for a moment in what was no doubt
intended as a smile. He was familiar with mental anguish of every kind and sensed a
certain kinship in the boy.
“If that’s the case,” he said, “then Nobody has heard me and Nobody has come to
me, and Nobody is speaking to me in my last hour.”
Atreyu nodded again. Then he asked: “Can Nobody free you from your chain?”
The greenish light in the werewolf’s eyes flickered. He began to growl and to lick
his chops.
“You’d really do that?” he blurted out. “You’d really set a hungry werewolf free?
Do you know what that means? Nobody would be safe from me.”
“I know,” said Atreyu. “But I’m Nobody. Why should I be afraid of you?”
He wanted to approach Gmork. But again the wolf uttered his deep, terrifying
growl. The boy shrank back.
“Don’t you want me to set you free?” he asked.
All at once the werewolf seemed very tired.
“You can’t do that. But if you come within my reach, I’ll have to tear you to
pieces, my boy. That would delay my end a little, an hour or two. So keep away from me
and let me die in peace.”
Atreyu thought it over.
“Maybe,” he said finally. “Maybe I can find you something to eat. I’ll look
around.”
Slowly Gmork opened his eyes. The greenish fire had gone out of them.
“Go to hell, you little fool! Do you want to keep me alive until the Nothing gets
here?”
“I thought,” Atreyu stammered, “that maybe if I brought you food and you were
full, I could get close enough to take off your chain. . .”
Gmork gnashed his teeth.
“Do you think I wouldn’t have bitten through it myself if this were an ordinary
chain?”

As though to prove his point, he clamped his jaws on the chain. The chain jangled
as he tugged and pulled at it. After a while he let it go.
“It’s a magic chain. Only the person who put it on can take it off. But she will
never come back.”
“Who is that?”
Gmork whimpered like a whipped dog. It was some time before he was calm
enough to answer.
“It was Gaya, the Dark Princess.”
“Where has she gone?”
“She has leapt into the Nothing — like everyone else around here.”
Atreyu remembered the mad dancers he had seen outside the city in the foggy
countryside.
“Why didn’t they run away?” he murmured.
“Because they had given up hope. That makes you beings weak. The Nothing
pulls at you, and none of you has the strength to resist it for long.”
Gmork gave a deep, malignant laugh.
“What about yourself?” Atreyu asked. “You speak as if you weren’t one of us?”
Gmork watched him out of the corner of his eye.
“I am not one of you.”
“Then where are you from?”
“Don’t you know what a werewolf is?
Atreyu shook his head.
“You know only Fantastica,” said Gmork. “There are other worlds. The world of
humans, for instance. But there are creatures who have no world of their own, but are
able to go in and out of many worlds. I am one of those. In the human world, I appear in
human form, but I’m not human. And in Fantastica, I take on a Fantastican form — but I’m
not one of you.”
Atreyu sat down on the ground and gazed at the dying werewolf out of great dark
eyes.
“You’ve been in the world of humans?”
“I’ve often gone back and forth between their world and yours.”
“Gmork,” Atreyu stammered, and he couldn’t keep his lips from trembling, “can
you tell me the way to the world of humans?”
A green spark shone in Gmork’s eyes. He seemed to be laughing deep inside.
“For you and your kind it’s easy to get there. There’s only one hitch: You can
never come back. You’ll have to stay forever. Do you want to?”
“What must I do?” Atreyu asked. His mind was made up.
“What everyone else around here has done before you. You must leap into the
Nothing. But there’s no hurry. Because you’ll do it sooner or later in any case, when the
last parts of Fantastica go.”
Atreyu stood up.
Gmork saw that the boy was trembling all over. Not knowing why, he spoke
reassuringly: “Don’t be afraid. It doesn’t hurt.”
“I’m not afraid,” said Atreyu. “But I never expected to get my hope back in a
place like this. And thanks to you!”
Gmork’s eyes glowed like two thin green moons.

“You have nothing to hope for, sonny — whatever your plans may be. When you
turn up in the world of humans, you won’t be what you are here. That’s the secret that no
one in Fantastica can know.”
Atreyu stood there with his arms dangling. “What will I be? Tell me the secret.”
For a long time Gmork neither spoke nor moved. Atreyu was beginning to fear
that the answer would never come, but at length the werewolf breathed heavily and
spoke:
“What do you think I am, sonny? Your friend? Take care. I’m only passing the
time with you. At the moment you can’t even leave here. I hold you fast with your hope.
But as I speak, the Nothing is creeping in from all sides and closing around Spook City.
Soon there will be no way out. Then you will be lost. If you stay and listen, your decision
is already made. But you can still escape if you choose.”
The cruel line around Gmork’s mouth deepened. Atreyu hesitated for just a
moment. Then he whispered: “Tell me the secret. What will I be in the world of
humans?”
Again Gmork sank into a long silence. His breath came in convulsive gasps. Then
suddenly he raised himself on his forepaws. Atreyu had to look up at him. And then for
the first time he saw how big and terrifying the werewolf was. When Gmork spoke, his
voice was like the jangling of chains.
“Have you seen the Nothing, sonny?”
“Yes, many times.”
“What does it look like?”
“As if one were blind.”
“That’s right — and when you get to the human world, the Nothing will cling to
you. You’ll be like a contagious disease that makes humans blind, so they can no longer
distinguish between reality and illusion. Do you know what you and your kind are called
there?”
“No,” Atreyu whispered.
“Lies!” Gmork barked.
Atreyu shook his head. All the blood had gone out of his lips.
“How can that be?”
Gmork was enjoying Atreyu’s consternation. This little talk was cheering him up.
After a while, he went on:
“You ask me what you will be there. But what are you here? What are you
creatures of Fantastica? Dreams, poetic inventions, characters in a neverending story. Do
you think you’re real? Well yes, here in your world you are. But when you’ve been
through the Nothing, you won’t be real anymore. You’ll be unrecognizable. And you will
be in another world. In that world, you Fantasticans won’t be anything like yourselves.
You will bring delusion and madness into the human world. Tell me, sonny, what do you
suppose will become of all the Spook City folk who have jumped into the Nothing?”
“I don’t know,” Atreyu stammered.
“They will become delusions in the minds of human beings, fears where there is
nothing to fear, desires for vain, hurtful things, despairing thoughts where there is no
reason to despair.”
“All of us?” asked Atreyu in horror.
“No,” said Gmork, “there are many kinds of delusion. According to what you are

here, ugly or beautiful, stupid or clever, you will become ugly or beautiful, stupid or
clever lies.”
“What about me?” Atreyu asked. “What will I be?”
Gmork grinned.
“I won’t tell you that. You’ll see. Or rather, you won’t see, because you won’t be
yourself anymore.”
Atreyu stared at the werewolf with wide-open eyes. Gmork went on:
“That’s why humans hate Fantastica and everything that comes from here. They
want to destroy it. And they don’t realize that by trying to destroy it they multiply the lies
that keep flooding the human world. For these lies are nothing other than creatures of
Fantastica who have ceased to be themselves and survive only as living corpses,
poisoning the souls of men with their fetid smell. But humans don’t know it. Isn’t that a
good joke?”
“And there’s no one left in the human world,” Atreyu asked in a whisper, “who
doesn’t hate and fear us?”
“I know of none,” said Gmork. “And it’s not surprising, because you yourselves,
once you’re there, can’t help working to make humans believe that Fantastica doesn’t
exist.”
“Doesn’t exist?” the bewildered Atreyu repeated.
“That’s right, sonny,” said Gmork. “In fact, that’s the heart of the matter. Don’t
you see? If humans believe Fantastica doesn’t exist, they won’t get the idea of visiting
your country. And as long as they don’t know you creatures of Fantastica as you really
are, the Manipulators do what they like with them.”
“What can they do?”
“Whatever they please. When it comes to controlling human beings there is no
better instrument than lies. Because, you see, humans live by beliefs. And beliefs can be
manipulated. The power to manipulate beliefs is the only thing that counts. That’s why I
sided with the powerful and served them — because I wanted to share their power.”
“I want no part in it!” Atreyu cried out.
“Take it easy, you little fool,” the werewolf growled. “When your turn comes to
jump into the Nothing, you too will be a nameless servant of power, with no will of your
own. Who knows what use they will make of you? Maybe you’ll help them persuade
people to buy things they don’t need, or hate things they know nothing about, or hold
beliefs that make them easy to handle, or doubt the truths that might save them. Yes, you
little Fantastican, big things will be done in the human world with your help, wars started,
empires founded. . .”
For a time Gmork peered at the boy out of half-closed eyes. Then he added: “The
human world is full of weak-minded people, who think they’re as clever as can be and are
convinced that it’s terribly important to persuade even the children that Fantastica
doesn’texist. Maybe they will be able to make good use of you.”
Atreyu stood there with bowed head.
Now he knew why humans had stopped coming to Fantastica and why none
would come to give the Childlike Empress new names. The more of Fantastica that was
destroyed, the more lies flooded the human world, and the more unlikely it became that a
child of man should come to Fantastica. It was a vicious circle from which there was no
escape. Now Atreyu knew it.

And so did someone else: Bastian Balthazar Bux.
He now realized that not only was Fantastica sick, but the human world as well.
The two were connected. He had always felt this, though he could not have explained why
it was so. He had never been willing to believe that life had to be as gray and dull as
people claimed. He heard them saying: “Life is like that,” but he couldn’t agree. He never
stopped believing in mysteries and miracles.
And now he knew that someone would have to go to Fantastica to make both
worlds well again.
If no human knew the way, it was precisely because of the lies and delusions that
came into the world because Fantastica was being destroyed. It was these lies and
delusions that made people blind.
With horror and shame Bastian thought of his own lies. He didn’t count the
stories he made up. That was something entirely different. But now and then he had told
deliberate lies — sometimes out of fear, sometimes as a way of getting something he
wanted, sometimes just to puff himself up. What inhabitants of Fantastica might he have
maimed and destroyed with his lies?
One thing was plain: He too had contributed to the sad state of Fantastica. And
he was determined to do something to make it well again. He owed it to Atreyu, who was
prepared to make any sacrifice to bring Bastian to Fantastica. He had to find the way.
The clock in the belfry struck eight.
The werewolf had been watching Atreyu closely.
“Now you know how you can get to the human world,” he said. “Do you still want
to go, sonny?”
Atreyu shook his head.
“I don’t want to turn into a lie,” he said.
“You’ll do that whether you like it or not,” said Gmork almost cheerfully.
“But what about you? Why are you here?”
“I had a mission,” Gmork said reluctantly.
“You too?”
Atreyu looked at the werewolf with interest, almost with sympathy.
“Were you successful?”
“No. If I had been, I wouldn’t be lying here chained. Everything went pretty well
until I came to this city. The Dark Princess, who ruled here, received me with every
honor. She invited me to her palace, fed me royally, and did everything to make me think
she was on my side. And naturally the inhabitants of this Land of Ghosts rather appealed
to me, they made me feel at home, so to speak. The Dark Princess was very beautiful in
her way — to my taste at least. She stroked me and ran her fingers through my coat. No
one had ever caressed me like that. In short, I lost my head and let my tongue get out of
hand. She pretended to admire me; I lapped it up, and in the end I told her about my
mission. She must have cast a spell on me, because I am ordinarily a light sleeper. When
I woke up, I had this chain on me. And the Dark Princess was standing there. ‘Gmork,’
she said. ‘You forgot that I too am one of the creatures of Fantastica. And that to fight
against Fantastica is to fight against me. That makes you my enemy, and I’ve outsmarted
you. This chain can never be undone by anyone but me. But I am going into the Nothing

with all my menservants and maidservants, and I shall never come back.’ Then she turned
on her heel and left me. But all the spooks didn’t follow her example. It was only when
the Nothing came closer that more and more of them were unable to resist its attraction.
If I’m not mistaken, the last of them have just gone. Yes, sonny, I fell into a trap, I
listened too long to that woman. But you have fallen into the same trap, you’ve listened
too long to me. For in these moments the Nothing has closed around the city like a ring.
You’re caught and there’s no escape.”
“Then we’ll die together,” said Atreyu.
“So we will,” said Gmork, “but in very different ways, you little fool. For I shall
die before the Nothing gets here, but you will be swallowed up by it. There’s a big
difference. Because I die first, my story is at an end. But yours will go on forever, in the
form of a lie.”
“Why are you so wicked?” Atreyu asked.
“Because you creatures had a world,” Gmork replied darkly, “and I didn’t.”
“What was your mission?”
Up until then Gmork had been sitting up. Now he slumped to the ground. He was
plainly at the end of his strength, and he spoke in raucous gasps.
“Those whom I serve decided that Fantastica must be destroyed. But then they
saw that their plan was endangered. They had learned that the Childlike Empress had sent
out a messenger, a great hero — and it looked as if he might succeed in bringing a human
to Fantastica. They wanted to have him killed before it was too late. That was why they
sent me, because I had been in Fantastica and knew my way around. I picked up his trail
right away, I tracked him day and night — gradually coming closer — through the Land of
the Sassafranians — the jungle temple of Muwamath — Howling Forest — the Swamps of
Sadness — the Dead Mountains — but then in the Deep Chasm by Ygramul’s net, I lost the
track, he seemed to have dissolved into thin air. I went on searching, he had to be
somewhere. But I never found his trail again, and this is were I ended up. I’ve failed. But
so has he, for Fantastica is going under! I forgot to tell you, his name was Atreyu.”
Gmork raised his head. The boy had taken a step back.
“I am Atreyu,” he said.
A tremor ran through the werewolf’s shrunken body. It came again and again and
grew stronger and stronger. Then from his throat came a panting cough. It grew louder
and more rasping; it swelled to a roar that echoed back from the city’s walls. The
werewolf was laughing.
It was the most horrible sound Atreyu had ever heard. Never again was he to hear
anything like it.
And then suddenly it stopped.
Gmork was dead.
For a long time Atreyu stood motionless. At length he approached the dead
werewolf — he himself didn’t know why — bent over the head and touched the shaggy
black fur. And in that moment, quicker than thought, Gmork’s teeth snapped on Atreyu’s
leg. Even in death, the evil in him had lost none of its power.
Desperately Atreyu tried to break open the jaws. In vain. The gigantic teeth, as
though held in place by steel clamps, dug into his flesh. Atreyu sank to the grimy
pavement beside the werewolf’s corpse.
And step by step, soundless and irresistible, the Nothing advanced from all sides,

through the high black wall surrounding the city.
X
The Flight to the Ivory Tower
ust as Atreyu passed through the somber gateway of Spook City and started on
the exploration that was to end so dismally in a squalid backyard, Falkor, the luckdragon,
was making an astonishing discovery.
While searching tirelessly for his little friend and master, he had flown high into
the clouds. On every side lay the sea, which was gradually growing calmer after the great
storm that had churned it from top to bottom. Suddenly, far in the distance, Falkor caught
sight of something that puzzled and intrigued him. It was as though a beam of golden
light were going on and off, on and off, at regular intervals. And that beam of light
seemed to point directly at him, Falkor.
He flew toward it as fast as he could, and when he was directly over it he saw that
the light signal came from deep down in the water, perhaps from the bottom of the sea.
Luckdragons, as we know, are creatures of air and fire. Not only is the liquid
element alien to them; it is also their enemy. Water can extinguish them like a flame, or it
can asphyxiate them, for they never stop breathing in air through their thousands of
pearly scales. They feed on air and heat and require no other nourishment, but without air
and heat they can only live a short time.
Falkor didn’t know what to do. He didn’t even know what the strange blinking
under the sea was, or whether it had anything to do with Atreyu.
But he didn’t hesitate for long. He flew high into the sky, turned around, and head
down, pressing his legs close to his body, which he held stiff and straight as a telegraph
pole, he plummeted. The water spouted like a fountain as he hit the sea at top speed. The
shock was so great that he almost lost consciousness, but he forced himself to open his
ruby-red eyes. By then the blinking beam was close, only a few body lengths ahead of
him. Air bubbles were forming around his body, as in a saucepan full of water just before
it boils. He felt that he was cooling and weakening. With his last strength he dived still
deeper — and then the source of light was within reach. It was AURYN, the Gem.
Luckily the chain of the amulet had got caught on a coral branch growing out of the wall
of an under-sea chasm. Otherwise the Gem would have fallen into the bottomless depths.
Falkor seized it and put the chain around his neck for fear of losing it — for he felt
that he was about to faint.
When he came to, he didn’t know where he was, for to his amazement he was
flying through the air, and when he looked down, there was the sea again. He was flying

in a very definite direction and very fast, faster than would have seemed possible in his
weakened condition. He tried to slow down, but soon found that his body would not obey
him. An outside will far stronger than his own had taken possession of his body and was
guiding it. That will came from AURYN, the amulet suspended from a chain around his
neck.
The day was drawing to a close when at last Falkor sighted a beach in the
distance. He couldn’t see much of the country beyond, it seemed to be hidden by fog. But
when he came closer, he saw that most of the land had been swallowed up by the
Nothing, which hurt his eyes and gave him the feeling of being blind.
At that point Falkor would probably have turned back if he had been able to do as
he wanted. But the mysterious power of the gem forced him to fly straight ahead. And
soon he knew why, for in the midst of the endless Nothing he discovered a small island
that was still holding out, an island covered with high-gabled houses and crooked towers.
Falkor had a strong suspicion whom he would find there, and from then on it was not
only the powerful will of the amulet that spurred him on but his own as well. It was
almost dark in the somber backyard where Atreyu lay beside the dead werewolf. The
luckdragon was barely able to distinguish the boy’s light-colored body from the monster’s
black coat. And the darker it grew, the more they looked like one body.
Atreyu had long given up trying to break loose from the steel vise of the
werewolf’s jaws. Dazed with fear and weakness, he was back in the Grass Ocean. Before
him stood the purple buffalo he had not killed. He called to the other children, his
companions of the hunt, who by then had no doubt become real hunters. But no one
answered. Only the giant buffalo stood there motionless, looking at him. Atreyu called
Artax, his horse, but he didn’t come, and his cheery neigh was nowhere to be heard. He
called the Childlike Empress, but in vain. He wouldn’t be able to tell her anything. He
hadn’t become a hunter, and he was no longer a messenger. He was Nobody.
Atreyu had given up.
But then he felt something else: the Nothing. It must be very near, he thought.
Again he felt its terrible force of attraction. It made him dizzy. He sat up and, groaning,
tugged at his leg. But the fangs held fast.
And in that he was lucky. For if Gmork’s jaws had not held him, Falkor would
have come too late.
As it was, Atreyu suddenly heard the luckdragon’s bronze voice in the sky above
him: “Atreyu! Are you there, Atreyu?”
“Falkor!” Atreyu shouted. And then he cupped his hands around his mouth and
shouted: “Falkor! Falkor! I’m here. Help me! I’m here!”
And then he saw Falkor’s white body darting like a living streak of lightning
through the square of darkening sky, far away at first, then closer. Atreyu kept shouting
and Falkor answered in his bell-like voice. Then at last the dragon in the sky caught sight
of the boy down below, no bigger than a bright speck in a dark hole.
Falkor prepared for a landing, but the backyard was small, there was hardly any
light left, and the dragon brushed against one of the high-gabled houses. The roof
collapsed with a roar. Falkor felt an agonizing pain; the sharp edge of the roof had cut
deep into his body. This wasn’t one of his usual graceful landings. He came tumbling
down on the grimy wet pavement next to Atreyu and the dead Gmork.
He shook himself, sneezed like a dog coming out of the water, and said: “At last!

So this is where you are! Oh well, I seem to have got here on time!”
Atreyu said nothing. He threw his arms around Falkor’s neck and buried his face
in the dragon’s silvery-white mane.
“Come!” said Falkor. “Climb on my back. We have no time to lose.”
Atreyu only shook his head. And then Falkor saw that Atreyu’s leg was
imprisoned in the werewolf’s jaws.
“Don’t worry,” he said, rolling his ruby-red eyeballs. “We’ll fix that in a jiffy.”
He set to with both paws, trying to pry Gmork’s teeth apart. They didn’t budge by
a hairbreadth.
Falkor heaved and panted. It was no use. Most likely he would never have set his
young friend free if luck hadn’t come to his help. But luckdragons, as we know, are
lucky, and so are those they are fond of.
When Falkor stopped to rest, he bent over Gmork’s head to get a better look at it
in the dark, and it so happened that the Childlike Empress’s amulet, which was hanging
from the chain on the dragon’s neck, touched the werewolf’s forehead. Instantly the jaws
opened, releasing Atreyu’s leg.
“Hey!” cried Falkor. “What do you think of that?”
There was no answer from Atreyu.
“What’s wrong?” cried Falkor. “Atreyu, where are you?”
He groped in the darkness for his friend, but Atreyu wasn’t there. And while the
dragon was trying to pierce the darkness with his glowing red eyes, he himself felt the
pull that had snatched Atreyu away from him. The Nothing was coming too close for
comfort. But AURYN protected the luckdragon from the pull.
Atreyu was free from the werewolf’s jaws, but not from the pull of the Nothing.
He tried to fight it, to kick, to push, but his limbs no longer obeyed him. A few feet more,
and he would have been lost forever.
In that moment, quick as lightning, Falkor grabbed him by his long blue-black
hair, and carried him up into the night-black sky.
The clock in the belfry struck nine.
Neither Atreyu nor Falkor could say later how long they had flown through the
impenetrable darkness. Had it been only one night? Perhaps time had stopped for them
and they were hovering motionless in the limitless blackness. It was the longest night
Atreyu had ever known; and the same was true for Falkor, who was much older.
But even the longest and darkest of nights passes sooner or later. And when the
pale dawn came, they glimpsed the Ivory Tower on the horizon.
Here it seems necessary to pause for a moment and explain a special feature of
Fantastican geography. Continents and oceans, mountains and watercourses, have no
fixed locations as in the real world. Thus it would be quite impossible to draw a map of
Fantastica. In Fantastica you can never be sure in advance what will be next to what.
Even the directions — north, south, east, and west — change from one part of the country
to another. And the same goes for summer and winter, day and night. You can step out of
a blazing hot desert straight into snowfields. In Fantastica there are no measurable
distances, so that “near” and “far” don’t at all mean what they do in the real world. They
vary with the traveler’s wishes and state of mind. Since Fantastica has no boundaries, its

center can be anywhere — or to put it another way, it is equally near to, or far from,
anywhere. It all depends on who is trying to reach the center. And the innermost center of
Fantastica is the Ivory Tower.
To his surprise Atreyu found himself sitting on the luckdragon’s back. He couldn’t
remember how he had got there. All he remembered was that Falkor had pulled him up
by the hair. Feeling cold, he gathered in his cloak, which was fluttering behind him. And
then he saw that it was gray. It had lost its color, and so had his skin and hair. And
Falkor, as Atreyu discovered in the rising light, was no better off. The dragon looked
unreal, more like a swath of gray mist than anything else. They had both come too close
to the Nothing.
“Atreyu, my little master,” the dragon said softly. “Does your wound hurt very
badly?” About his own wound he said nothing.
“No,” said Atreyu. “I don’t feel anything anymore.”
“Have you a fever?”
“No, Falkor. I don’t think so. Why do you ask?”
“I can feel you trembling,” said the dragon. “What in the world can make Atreyu
tremble now?”
After a short silence Atreyu said: “We’ll be there soon! And then I’ll have to tell
the Childlike Empress that nothing can save her. That’s harder than anything else I’ve had
to do.”
“Yes,” said Falkor even more softly. “That’s true.”
They flew in silence, drawing steadily nearer to the Ivory Tower.
After a while the dragon spoke again.
“Have you seen her, Atreyu?”
“Who?”
“The Childlike Empress. Or rather, the Golden-eyed Commander of Wishes.
Because that’s how you must address her when you come into her presence.”
“No, I’ve never seen her.”
“I have. That was long ago. Your great-grandfather must have been a little boy at
the time. And I was a young cloud-snapper with a head full of foolishness. One night I
saw the moon, shining so big and round, and I tried to grab it out of the sky. When I
finally gave up, I dropped with exhaustion and landed near the Ivory Tower. That night
the Magnolia Pavilion had opened its petals wide, and the Childlike Empress was sitting
right in the middle of it. She cast a glance at me, just one short glance, but — I hardly
know how to put it — that glance made a new dragon of me.”
“What does she look like?”
“Like a little girl. But she’s much older than the oldest inhabitants of Fantastica.
Or rather, she’s ageless.”
“Yes,” said Atreyu. “But now she’s deathly sick. How can I tell her that there’s no
hope?”
“Don’t try to mislead her. She can’t be fooled. Tell her the truth.”
“But suppose it kills her?”
“I don’t think it will work out that way,” said Falkor.
“You wouldn’t,” said Atreyu, “because you’re a luckdragon.”
For a long while nothing was said.
When at last they spoke together for the third time, it was Atreyu who broke the

silence.
“Falkor,” he said, “I’d like to ask you one more thing.”
“Fire away.”
“Who is she?
“What do you mean?”
“AURYN has power over all the inhabitants of Fantastica, the creatures of both
light and darkness. It also has power over you and me. And yet the Childlike Empress
never exerts power. It’s as if she weren’t there. And yet she is in everything. Is she like
us?”
“No,” said Falkor, “she’s not like us. She’s not a creature of Fantastica. We all
exist because she exists. But she’s of a different kind.”
“Then is she. . .” Atreyu hesitated. “Is she human?”
“No,” said Falkor, “she’s not human.”
“Well then. . .” And Atreyu repeated his question. “Who is she?”
After a long silence Falkor answered: “No one in Fantastica knows, no one can
know. That’s the deepest secret of our world. I once heard a wise man say that if anyone
were to know the whole answer, he would cease to exist. I don’t know what he meant.
That’s all I can tell you.”
“And now,” said Atreyu, “she’ll die and we’ll die with her, and we’ll never know
her secret.”
This time Falkor made no answer, but a smile played around the corners of his
leonine mouth, as though to say: Nothing of the kind will happen.
After that they spoke no more.
A little later they flew over the outer edge of the “Labyrinth,” the maze of flower
beds, hedges, and winding paths that surrounded the Ivory Tower on all sides. To their
horror, they saw that there too the Nothing had been at work. True, it had touched only
small spots in the Labyrinth, but those spots were all about. The once bright-colored
flower beds and shrubbery in between were now gray and withered. The branches of once
graceful little trees were gnarled and bare. The green had gone out of the meadows, and a
faint smell of rot and mold rose up to the newcomers. The only colors left were those of
swollen giant mushrooms and of garish, poisonous-looking blooms that suggested
nothing so much as the figments of a maddened brain. Enfeebled and trembling, the
innermost heart of Fantastica was still resisting the inexorable encroachment of the
Nothing.
But the Ivory Tower at the center still shimmered pure, immaculately white.
Ordinarily flying messengers landed on one of the lower terraces. But Falkor
reasoned that since neither he nor Atreyu had the strength to climb the long spiraling
street leading to the top of the Tower, and since time was of the essence, the regulations
and rules of etiquette could reasonably be ignored. He therefore decided on an emergency
landing. Swooping down over the ivory buttresses, bridges, and balustrades, he located,
just in time, the uppermost end of the spiraling High Street, which lay just outside the
palace grounds. Plummeting to the roadway, he went into a skid, made several complete
turns, and finally came to a stop tail-first.
Atreyu, who had been clinging with both arms to Falkor’s neck, sat up and looked
around. He had expected some sort of reception, or at least a detachment of palace guards
to challenge them — but far and wide there was no one to be seen. All the life seemed to

have gone out of the gleaming white buildings roundabout.
“They’ve all fled!” he thought. “They’ve left the Childlike Empress alone. Or she’s
already. . .”
“Atreyu,” Falkor whispered. “You must give the Gem back to her.”
Falkor removed the golden chain from his neck. It fell to the ground.
Atreyu jumped down off Falkor’s back — and fell. He had forgotten his wound.
He reached for the Glory and put the chain around his neck. Then, leaning on the dragon,
he rose painfully to his feet.
“Falkor,” he said. “Where must I go?”
But the luckdragon made no answer. He lay as though dead.
The street ended in front of an enormous, intricately carved gate which led
through a high white wall. The gate was open.
Atreyu hobbled through it and came to a broad, gleaming-white stairway that
seemed to end in the sky. He began to climb. Now and then he stopped to rest. Drops of
his blood left a trail behind him.
At length the stairway ended. Ahead of him lay a long gallery. He staggered
ahead, clinging to the balustrade for support. Next he came to a courtyard that seemed to
be full of waterfalls and fountains, but by then he couldn’t be sure of what he was seeing.
He struggled forward as in a dream. He came to a second, smaller gate; then there was a
long, narrow stairway, which took him to a garden where everything — trees, flowers, and
animals — was carved from ivory. Crawling on all fours, he crossed several arched
bridges without railings which led to a third gate, the smallest of all. He dragged himself
through it on his belly and, slowly raising his eyes, saw a dome-shaped hall of gleaming-
white ivory, and on top of it the Magnolia Pavilion. There was no path or stairway
leading up to it.
Atreyu buried his head in his hands.
No one who reaches or has reached that pavilion can say how he got there. The
last stretch of the way must come to him as a gift.
Suddenly Atreyu was in the doorway. He went in — and found himself face to
face with the Golden-eyed Commander of Wishes.
She was sitting, propped on many cushions, on a soft round couch at the center of
the great round blossom. She was looking straight at him. She seemed infinitely frail and
delicate. Atreyu could see how ill she was by the pallor of her face, which seemed almost
transparent. Her almond-shaped eyes, the color of dark gold, were serene and untroubled.
She smiled. Her small, slight body was wrapped in an ample silken gown which gleamed
so white that the magnolia petals seemed dark beside it. She looked like an indescribably
beautiful little girl of no more than ten, but her long, smoothly combed hair, which hung
down over her shoulders, was as white as snow.
Bastian gave a start.
Something incredible had happened.
Thus far he had been able to visualize every incident of the Neverending Story.
Some of them, it couldn’t be denied, were very strange, but they could somehow be
explained. He had formed a clear picture of Atreyu riding on the luckdragon, of the
Labyrinth and the Ivory Tower.
These pictures, however, existed only in his imagination. But when he came to the

Magnolia Pavilion, he saw the face of the Childlike Empress — if only for a fraction of a
second, for the space of a lightning flash. And not only in his thoughts, but with his eyes!
It wasn’t his imagination, of that Bastian was sure. He had even seen details that were
not mentioned in the description, such as her eyebrows, two fine lines that might have
been drawn with India ink, arching over her golden eyes, or her strangely elongated
earlobes, or the way her head tilted on her slender neck. Bastion knew that he had never
in all his life seen anything so beautiful as this face. And in that same moment he knew
her name: Moon Child. Yes, beyond a doubt, that was her name.
And Moon Child had looked at him — at him, Bastian Balthazar Bux.
She had looked at him with an expression that he could not interpret. Had she too
been taken by surprise? Had there been a plea in that look? Or longing? Or. . . what
could it be?
He tried to remember Moon Child’s eyes, but was no longer able to.
He was sure of only one thing: that her glance had passed through his eyes and
down into his heart. He could still feel the burning trail it had left behind. That glance, he
felt, was embedded in his heart, and there it glittered like a mysterious jewel. And in a
strange and wonderful way it hurt.
Even if Bastian had wanted to, he couldn’t have defended himself against this
thing that had happened to him. However, he didn’t want to. Oh no, not for anything in
the world would he have parted with that jewel. All he wanted was to go on reading, to
see Moon Child again, to be with her.
It never occurred to him that he was getting into the most unusual and perhaps
the most dangerous of adventures. But even if he had known this, he wouldn’t have
dreamed of shutting the book.
With a trembling forefinger he found his place and went on reading.
The clock in the belfry struck ten.
XI
The Childlike Empress
nitting his brow, powerless to utter a single word, Atreyu stood gazing at the
Childlike Empress. He had no idea how to begin or what to do. He had often tried to
imagine this moment, he had prepared words and phrases, but they had all gone out of his
head.
At length she smiled at him. Her voice when she spoke was as soft as the voice of
a bird singing in its sleep.
“You have returned from the Great Quest, Atreyu.”
Atreyu hung his head.

“Yes,” he managed to say.
After a short silence she went on: “Your lovely cloak has turned gray. Your hair is
gray and your skin is like stone. But all that will be as it was, or better. You’ll see.”
Atreyu felt as if a band had tightened around his throat. All he could do was nod
his head. Then he heard the sweet soft voice saying: “You have carried out your mission.
. .”
Were these words meant as a question? Atreyu didn’t know. He didn’t dare look
up to read the answer in her face. Slowly he reached for the golden amulet and removed
the chain from his neck. Without raising his eyes, he held it out to the Childlike Empress.
He tried to kneel as messengers did in the stories and songs he had heard at home, but his
wounded leg refused to do his bidding. He fell at the Childlike Empress’s feet, and there
he lay with his face to the floor.
She bent forward, picked up AURYN, and let the chain glide through her fingers.
“You have done well,” she said, “and I am pleased with you.”
“No!” cried Atreyu almost savagely. “It was all in vain. There’s no hope.”
A long silence followed. Atreyu buried his face in the crook of his elbow, and his
whole body trembled. How would she react? With a cry of despair, a moan, words of
bitter reproach or even anger? Atreyu couldn’t have said what he expected. Certainly not
what he heard. Laughter. A soft, contented laugh. Atreyu’s thoughts were in a whirl, for a
moment he thought she had gone mad. But that was not the laughter of madness. Then he
heard her say: “But you’ve brought him with you.”
Atreyu looked up.
“Who?”
“Our savior.”
He looked into her eyes and found only serenity. She smiled again.
“Golden-eyed Commander of Wishes,” he stammered, now for the first time using
the official words of address that Falkor had recommended. “I. . . no, really. . . I don’t
understand.”
“I can see that by the look on your face,” she said. “But whether you understand
or not, you’ve done it. And that’s what counts, isn’t it?”
Atreyu said nothing. He couldn’t even think of a question to ask. He stood there
openmouthed, staring at the Childlike Empress. “I saw him,” she went on, “and he saw
me.”
“When?” Atreyu asked.
“Just as you came in. You brought him with you.”
Involuntarily Atreyu looked around.
“Then where is he? I don’t see anyone but you and me.”
“Oh, the world is full of things you don’t see. You can believe me. He isn’t in our
world yet. But our worlds have come close enough together for us to see each other. For a
twinkling the thin wall between us became transparent. He will be with us soon and then
he will call me by the new name that he alone can give me. Then I shall be well, and so
will Fantastica.”
As the Childlike Empress was speaking, Atreyu raised himself with difficulty. He
looked up to her as she lay on her bed of cushions. His voice was husky when he asked:
“Then you’ve known my message all along? What Morla the Aged One told me in the
Swamps of Sadness, what the mysterious voice of Uyulala in the Southern Oracle

revealed to me — you knew it all?”
“Yes,” she said. “I knew it before I sent you on the Great Quest.”
Atreyu gulped.
“Why,” he finally managed to ask, “why did you send me then? What did you
expect me to do?”
“Exactly what you did,” she replied.
“What I did. . .” Atreyu repeated slowly. His forehead clouded over. “In that
case,” he said angrily, “it was all unnecessary. There was no need of sending me on the
Great Quest. I’ve heard that your decisions are often mysterious. That may be. But after
all I’ve been through I hate to think that you were just having a joke at my expense.”
The Childlike Empress’s eyes grew grave.
“I was not having a joke at your expense, Atreyu,” she said. “I am well aware of
what I owe you. All your sufferings were necessary. I sent you on the Great Quest — not
for the sake of the message you would bring me, but because that was the only way of
calling our savior. He took part in everything you did, and he has come all that long way
with you. You heard his cry of fear when you were talking with Ygramul beside the Deep
Chasm, and you saw him when you stood facing the Magic Mirror Gate. You entered into
his image and took it with you, and he followed you, because he saw himself through
your eyes. And now, too, he can hear every word we are saying. He knows we are talking
about him, he knows we have set our hope in him and are expecting him. Perhaps he even
understands that all the hardship you, Atreyu, took upon yourself was for his sake and
that all Fantastica is calling him.”
Little by little the darkness cleared from Atreyu’s face.
After a while he asked: “How can you know all that? The cry by the Deep Chasm
and the image in the magic mirror? Did you arrange it all in advance?”
The Childlike Empress picked up AURYN, and said, while putting the chain
around her neck: “Didn’t you wear the Gem the whole time? Didn’t you know that
through it I was always with you?”
“Not always,” said Atreyu. “I lost it.”
“Yes. Then you were really alone. Tell me what happened to you then.”
Atreyu told her the story.
“Now I know why you turned gray,” said the Childlike Empress. “You were too
close to the Nothing.”
“Gmork, the werewolf, told me,” said Atreyu, “that when a Fantastican is
swallowed up by the Nothing, he becomes a lie. Is that true?”
“Yes, it is true,” said the Childlike Empress, and her golden eyes darkened. “All
lies were once creatures of Fantastica. They are made of the same stuff — but they have
lost their true nature and become unrecognizable. But, as you might expect from a half-
and-half creature like Gmork, he told you only half the truth. There are two ways of
crossing the dividing line between Fantastica and the human world, a right one and a
wrong one. When Fantasticans are cruelly dragged across it, that’s the wrong way. When
humans, children of man, come to our world of their own free will, that’s the right way.
Every human who has been here has learned something that could be learned only here,
and returned to his own world a changed person. Because he had seen you creatures in
your true form, he was able to see his own world and his fellow humans with new eyes.
Where he had seen only dull, everyday reality, he now discovered wonders and

mysteries. That is why humans were glad to come to Fantastica. And the more these
visits enriched our world, the fewer lies there were in theirs, the better it became. Just as
our two worlds can injure each other, they can also make each other whole again.”
For a time both were silent. Then she went on: “Humans are our hope. One of
them must come and give me a new name. And he will come.”
Atreyu made no answer.
“Do you understand now, Atreyu,” she asked, “why I had to ask so much of you?
Only a long story full of adventures, marvels, and dangers could bring our savior to me.
And that was your story.” Atreyu sat deep in thought. At length he nodded. “Yes,
Golden-eyed Commander of Wishes, now I understand. I thank you for choosing me.
Forgive my anger.”
“You had no way of knowing these things,” she answered. “And that too was
necessary.”
Again Atreyu nodded. After a short silence he said: “But I’m very tired.”
“You have done enough, Atreyu. Would you like to rest?”
“Not yet. First I would like to see the happy outcome of my story. If, as you say,
I’ve carried out my mission, why isn’t the savior here yet? What’s he waiting for?”
“Yes,” said the Childlike Empress softly. “What is he waiting for?”
Bastian felt his hands growing moist with excitement. “I can’t do it,” he said. “I
don’t even know what I’m supposed to do. Maybe the name I’ve thought of isn’t the right
one.”
“May I ask you another question?” said Atreyu.
“Of course,” she answered with a smile.
“Why do you need a new name to get well?”
“Only the right name gives beings and things their reality,” she said. “A wrong
name makes everything unreal. That’s what lies do.”
“Maybe the savior doesn’t yet know the right name to give you.”
“Oh yes he does,” she assured him.
Again they sat silent.
“I know it all right,” said Bastian. “I knew it the moment I laid eyes on her. But I
don’t know what I have to do.”
Atreyu looked up.
“Maybe he wants to come and just doesn’t know how to go about it.”
“All he has to do,” said the Childlike Empress, “is to call me by my new name,
which he alone knows. Nothing more.”
Bastian’s heart pounded. Should he try? What if he didn’t succeed? What if he
was wrong? What if they weren’t talking about him but about some entirely different
savior? How could he be sure they really meant him?
“Could it be,” said Atreyu after a while, “that he doesn’t know it’s him and not
somebody else we’re talking about?”

“No,” said the Childlike Empress. “Not after all the signs he has had. He can’t be
that stupid.”
“I’ll give it a try,” said Bastian. But he couldn’t get a word out of his mouth.
What if it actually worked? Then he would somehow be transported to Fantastica.
But how? Maybe he would have to go through some sort of change. And what would that
be like? Would it hurt? Would he lose consciousness? And did he really want to go to
Fantastica? He wanted to go to Atreyu and the Childlike Empress, but he wasn’t at all
keen on all those monsters the place was swarming with.
“Maybe he hasn’t got the courage,” Atreyu suggested.
“Courage?” said the Childlike Empress. “Does it take courage to say my name?”
“Then,” said Atreyu, “I can think of only one thing that may be holding him
back.”
“And what would that be?”
After some hesitation Atreyu blurted out: “He just doesn’t want to come here. He
just doesn’t care about you or Fantastica. We don’t mean a thing to him.”
The Childlike Empress stared wide-eyed at Atreyu.
“No! No!” Bastion cried out. “You mustn’t think that! It’s not that at all. Oh,
please, please, don’t think that! Can you hear me? It’s not like that, Atreyu.”
“He promised me he would come,” said the Childlike Empress. “I saw it in his
eyes.”
“Yes, that’s true. And I will come soon. I just need time to think. It’s not so
simple.”
Atreyu hung his head and the two of them waited a long while in silence. But the
savior did not appear, and there wasn’t the slightest sign to suggest that he was trying to
attract their attention.
Bastian was thinking of how it would be if he suddenly stood before them in all his
fatness, with his bowlegs and his pasty face. He could literally see the disappointment in
the Childlike Empress’s face when she said to him: “What brings you here?”
And Atreyu might even laugh.
The thought brought a blush to Bastion’s cheeks.
Obviously they were expecting a prince, or at any rate some sort of hero. He just
couldn’t appear before them. It was out of the question. He would do anything for them.
Anything but that!
When at last the Childlike Empress looked up, the expression of her face had
changed. Atreyu was almost frightened at its grandeur and severity. He knew where he
had once seen that expression: in the sphinxes.
“There is one more thing I can do,” she said. “But I don’t like it, and I wish he
wouldn’t make me.”

“What is that?” Atreyu asked in a whisper.
“Whether he knows it or not, he is already part of the Neverending Story. He can
no longer back out of it. He made me a promise and he has to keep it. But by myself I
can’t make him.”
“Who in all Fantastica,” Atreyu asked, “can do what you cannot?”
“Only one person,” she replied. “If he wants to. The Old Man of Wandering
Mountain.”
Atreyu looked at the Childlike Empress in amazement.
“The Old Man of Wandering Mountain?” he repeated, stressing every word. “You
mean he exists?”
“Did you doubt it?”
“The old folk in our tent camps tell the children about him when they’re naughty.
They say he writes everything down in a book, whatever you do or fail to do, and there it
stays in the form of a beautiful or an ugly story. When I was little, I believed it, but then I
decided it was only an old wives’ tale to frighten children.”
“You never can tell about old wives’ tales,” she said with a smile.
“Then you know him?” Atreyu asked. “You’ve seen him?”
She shook her head.
“If I find him,” she said, “it will be our first meeting.”
“Our old folk also say,” Atreyu went on, “that you never can know where the Old
Man’s mountain will be at any particular time. They say that when he appears it’s always
unexpectedly, now here, now there, and that you can only run across him by accident, or
because the meeting was fated.”
“That’s true,” said the Childlike Empress. “You can’t look for the Old Man of
Wandering Mountain. You can only find him.”
“Does that go for you too?”
“Yes,” she said, “for me too.”
“But what if you don’t find him?”
“If he exists I’ll find him,” she said with a mysterious smile.
Her answer puzzled Atreyu. Hesitantly he asked: “Is he — is he like you?”
“He is like me,” she replied, “because he is my opposite in every way.”
Atreyu saw that with such questions he would get nothing out of her. And another
thought weighed on him.
“You are deathly sick, Golden-eyed Commander of Wishes,” he said almost
sternly. “You won’t go far by yourself. All your servants and courtiers seem to have
abandoned you. Falkor and I would be glad to take you wherever you wish, but, frankly, I
don’t know if Falkor has the strength. And my foot — well, you’ve seen that it won’t carry
me.”
“Thank you, Atreyu,” she said. “Thank you for your brave and loyal offer. But I’m
not planning to take you with me. To find the Old Man of Wandering Mountain, one
must be alone. And even now Falkor is not where you left him. He has been moved to a
place where his wounds will be healed and his strength renewed. And you too, Atreyu,
will soon be in that same place.”
Her fingers played with AURYN.
“What place is that?”
“There’s no need for you to know that now. You will be moved in your sleep. And

one day you will know where you were.”
“But how can I sleep?” cried Atreyu, so shaken that he lost his sense of tact. “How
can I sleep when I know you may die any minute?”
The Childlike Empress laughed softly.
“I’m not quite as forsaken as you think. I’ve already told you that there are some
things you can’t hope to understand. I have my seven Powers, which belong to me as your
memory or courage or thoughts belong to you. They cannot be seen or heard, and yet they
are with me at this moment. I shall leave three of them with you and Falkor to look after
you, and I shall take the other four with me as my escort. You needn’t worry, Atreyu. You
can sleep easy.”
At these words, all the accumulated weariness of the Great Quest descended on
Atreyu like a dark veil. Yet it was not the leaden weariness of exhaustion, but a gentle
longing for sleep. He still had many questions to ask the Golden-eyed Commander of
Wishes, but he felt that her last words had vanquished all his wishes but one, the wish for
sleep. His eyes closed and, still in a sitting position, he glided into the darkness.
The clock in the steeple struck eleven.
As though far in the distance, Atreyu heard the Childlike Empress give an order in
a soft voice. Then he felt powerful arms lifting him gently and carrying him away.
For a long time, all was dark and warm around him. Much later he half awoke
when a soothing liquid touched his parched lips and ran down his throat. He had a vague
impression that he was in a great cave with walls of gold. He saw the white luckdragon
lying beside him. And then he saw, or thought he saw, a gushing fountain in the middle
of the cave, encircled by two snakes, a light one and a dark one, which were biting each
other’s tail.
But then an invisible hand brushed over his eyes. The feel of it was infinitely
soothing, and again he fell into a deep and dreamless sleep.
At that moment, the Childlike Empress left the Ivory Tower. She lay bedded on
soft silken cushions in a glass litter, which seemed to be moving under its own power, but
was actually being carried by four of the Empress’s invisible servants.
They crossed the Labyrinth garden, or rather, what was left of it, making frequent
detours, since many of the paths ended in the Nothing.
When at length they left the Labyrinth, the invisible carriers stopped. They
seemed to be waiting for a command.
The Childlike Empress sat up on her cushions and cast a glance back at the Ivory
Tower.
Then, sinking back, she said: “Keep going! Just keep going — no matter where.”
Blown by the wind, her snow-white hair trailed behind the glass litter like a flag.
XII
The Old Man of Wandering Mountain

ong-thundering avalanches descended from the heights, snowstorms raged
between towering ice-coated summits, dipped into hollows and ravines, and swept
howling onward over the great white expanse of the glaciers. Such weather was not at all
unusual for this part of the country, for the Mountain of Destiny — that was its name —
was the highest in all Fantastica, and its peaks literally jutted into the heights of heaven.
Not even the most intrepid mountain climbers ventured into these fields of
everlasting ice. It had been so very, very long since anyone had succeeded in climbing
this mountain that the feat had been forgotten. For one of Fantastica’s many strange laws
decreed that no one could climb the Mountain of Destiny until the last successful climber
had been utterly forgotten. Thus anyone who managed to climb it would always be the
first.
No living creature could survive in that icy waste — except for a handful of
gigantic ice-glumps — who could barely be called living creatures, for they moved so
slowly that they needed years for a single step and whole centuries for a short walk.
Which meant, of course, that they could only associate with their own kind and knew
nothing at all about the rest of Fantastica. They thought of themselves as the only living
creatures in the universe.
Consequently, they were puzzled to the point of consternation when they saw a
tiny speck twining its way upward over perilous crags and razor-sharp ridges, then
vanishing into deep chasms and crevasses, only to reappear higher up.
That speck was the Childlike Empress’s glass litter, still carried by four of her
invisible Powers. It was barely visible, for the glass it was made of looked very much like
ice, and the Childlike Empress’s white gown and white hair could hardly be distinguished
from the snow roundabout.
She had traveled many days and nights. The four Powers had carried her through
blinding rain and scorching sun, through darkness and moonlight, onward and onward,
just as she had ordered, “no matter where.” She was prepared for a long journey and all
manner of hardship, since she knew that the Old Man of Wandering Mountain could be
everywhere or nowhere.
Still, the four invisible Powers were not guided entirely by chance in their choice
of an itinerary. As often as not, the Nothing, which had already swallowed up whole
regions, left only a single path open. Sometimes the possibilities narrowed down to a
bridge, a tunnel, or a gateway, and sometimes they were forced to carry the litter with the
deathly ill Empress over the waves of the sea. These carriers saw no difference between
liquid and solid.
Tireless and persevering, they had finally reached the frozen heights of the
Mountain of Destiny. And they would go on climbing until the Childlike Empress gave
them another order. But she lay still on her cushions. Her eyes were closed and she said
nothing. The last words she had spoken were the “no matter where” she had said on
leaving the Ivory Tower.
The litter was moving through a deep ravine, so narrow that there was barely

room for it to pass. The snow was several feet deep, but the invisible carriers did not sink
in or even leave footprints. It was very dark at the bottom of this ravine, which admitted
only a narrow strip of daylight. The path was on a steady incline and the higher the litter
climbed, the nearer the daylight seemed. And then suddenly the walls leveled off,
opening up a view of a vast white expanse. This was the summit, for the Mountain of
Destiny culminated not, like most other mountains, in a single peak, but in this high
plateau, which was as large as a whole country.
But then, surprisingly enough, a smaller, odd-looking mountain arose in the midst
of the plateau. It was rather tall and narrow, something like the Ivory Tower, but
glittering blue. It consisted of innumerable strangely shaped stone teeth, which jutted into
the sky like great inverted icicles. And about halfway up the mountain three such teeth
supported an egg the size of a house.
Behind the egg large blue columns resembling the pipes of an enormous organ
rose in a semicircle. The great egg had a circular opening, which might have been a door
or a window. And in that opening a face appeared. The face was looking straight at the
litter.
The Childlike Empress opened her eyes.
“Stop!” she said softly.
The invisible Powers stopped.
The Childlike Empress sat up.
“It’s the Old Man of Wandering Mountain,” she said. “I must go the last stretch of
the way alone. Whatever may happen, wait here for me.”
The face in the circular opening vanished.
The Childlike Empress stepped out of the litter and started across the great
snowfield. It was hard going, for she was bare-footed, and there was an icy crust on the
snow. At every step she broke through, and the ice cut her tender feet. The wind tugged at
her white hair and her gown.
At last she came to the blue mountain and stood facing the smooth stone teeth.
The dark circular opening disgorged a long ladder, much longer than there could
possibly have been room for in the egg. It soon extended to the foot of the blue mountain,
and when the Childlike Empress took hold of it she saw that it consisted of letters, which
were fastened together. Each rung of the ladder was a line. The Childlike Empress started
climbing, and as she climbed from rung to rung, she read the words:
TURN BACK! TURN BACK AND GO AWAY!
FOR COME WHAT WILL AND COME WHAT MAY,
NEVER IN ANY TIME OR PLACE
MUST YOU AND I MEET FACE TO FACE.
TO YOU ALONE, O CHILDLIKE ONE,
THE WAY IS BARRED, TO YOU ALONE.
TURN BACK, TURN BACK, FOR NEVER SHALL
BEGINNING SEEK THE END OF ALL.
THE CONSEQUENCE OF YOUR INTRUSION
CAN ONLY BE EXTREME CONFUSION.
She stopped to rest and looked up. She still had a long way to go. So far she
hadn’t even gone halfway.
“Old Man of Wandering Mountain,” she said aloud. “If you don’t want us to meet,

you needn’t have written me this ladder. It’s your disinvitation that brings me.”
And she went on climbing.
WHAT YOU ACHIEVE AND WHAT YOU ARE
IS RECORDED BY ME, THE CHRONICLER.
LETTERS UNCHANGEABLE AND DEAD
FREEZE WHAT THE LIVING DID AND SAID.
THEREFORE BY COMING HERE TO ME
YOU INVITE CATASTROPHE.
THUS IS THE END OF WHAT YOU ONCE BEGAN.
YOU WILL NEVER BE OLD, AND I, OLD MAN,
WAS NEVER YOUNG. WHAT YOU AWAKEN
I LAY TO REST. BE NOT MISTAKEN:
IT IS FORBIDDEN THAT LIFE SHOULD SEE
ITSELF IN DEAD ETERNITY.
Again she had to stop to catch her breath.
By then the Childlike Empress was high up and the ladder was swaying like a
branch in the snowstorm. Clinging to the icy letters that formed the rungs of the ladder,
she climbed the rest of the way.
BUT IF YOU STILL REFUSE TO HEED
THE WARNING OF THE LADDER’S SCREED,
IF YOU ARE STILL PREPARED TO DO
WHAT IN TIME AND SPACE IS FORBIDDEN YOU,
I WON’T ATTEMPT TO HOLD YOU BACK,
THEN WELCOME TO THE OLD MAN’S SHACK.
When the Childlike Empress had those last rungs behind her, she sighed and
looked down. Her wide white gown was in tatters, for it had caught on every bend and
crossbar of the message-ladder. Oh well, she had known all along that letters were hostile
to her. She felt the same way about them.
From the ladder she stepped through the circular opening in the egg. Instantly it
closed behind her, and she stood motionless in the darkness, waiting to see what would
happen next.
Nothing at all happened for quite some time.
At length she said softly: “Here I am.” Her voice echoed as in a large empty room
— or was it another, much deeper voice that had answered her in the same words?
Little by little, she made out a faint reddish glow in the darkness. It came from an
open book, which hovered in midair at the center of the egg-shaped room. It was tilted in
such a way that she couldsee the binding, which was of copper-colored silk, and on the
binding, as on the Gem, which the Childlike Empress wore around her neck, she saw an
oval formed by two snakes biting each other’s tail. Inside this oval was printed the title:
The Neverending Story
Bastian’s thoughts were in a whirl. This was the very same book that he was
reading! He looked again. Yes, no doubt about it, it was the book he had in his hand.
How could this book exist inside itself?

The Childlike Empress had come closer. On the other side of the hovering book
she now saw a man’s face. It was bathed in a bluish light. The light came from the print of
the book, which was bluish green.
The man’s face was as deeply furrowed as if it had been carved in the bark of an
ancient tree. His beard was long and white, and his eyes were so deep in their sockets that
she could not see them. He was wearing a dark monk’s robe with a hood, and in his hand
he was holding a stylus, with which he was writing in the book. He did not look up.
The Childlike Empress stood watching him in silence. He was not really writing.
His stylus glided slowly over the empty page and the letters and words appeared as
though of their own accord.
The Childlike Empress read what was being written, and it was exactly what was
happening at that same moment: “The Childlike Empress read what was being written. .
.”
“You write down everything that happens,” she said.
“Everything that I write down happens,” was the answer, spoken in the deep, dark
voice that had come to her like an echo of her own voice.
Strange to say, the Old Man of Wandering Mountain had not opened his mouth.
He had written her words and his, and she had heard them as though merely remembering
that he had just spoken. “Are you and I and all Fantastica,” she asked, “are we all
recorded in this book?”
He wrote, and at the same time she heard his answer: “No, you’ve got it wrong.
This book is all Fantastica — and you and I.”
“But where is this book?”
And he wrote the answer: “In the book.”
“Then it’s all a reflection of a reflection?” she asked.
He wrote, and she heard him say: “What does one see in a mirror reflected in a
mirror? Do you know that, Golden-eyed Commander of Wishes?”
The Childlike Empress said nothing for a while, and the Old Man wrote that she
said nothing.
Then she said softly: “I need your help.”
“I knew it,” he said and wrote.
“Yes,” she said. “I supposed you would. You are Fantastica’s memory, you know
everything that has happened up to this moment. But couldn’t you leaf ahead in your
book and see what’s going to happen?”
“Empty pages,” was the answer. “I can only look back at what has happened. I
was able to read it while I was writing it. And I know it because I have read it. And I
wrote it because it happened. The Neverending Story writes itself by my hand.”
“Then you don’t know why I’ve come to you?”
“No.” And as he was writing, she heard the dark voice: “And I wish you hadn’t.
By my hand everything becomes fixed and final — you too, Golden-eyed Commander of
Wishes. This egg is your grave and your coffin. You have entered into the memory of
Fantastica. How do you expect to leave here?”
“Every egg,” she said, “is the beginning of new life.”
“True,” the Old Man wrote and said, “but only if its shell bursts open.”
“You can open it,” cried the Childlike Empress. “You let me in.”

“Your power let you in. But now that you’re here, your power is gone. We are
shut up here for all time. Truly, you shouldn’t have come. This is the end of the
Neverending Story.”
The Childlike Empress smiled. She didn’t seem troubled in the least.
“You and I,” she said, “can’t prolong it. But there is someone who can.”
“Only a human,” wrote the Old Man, “can make a fresh start.”
“Yes,” she replied, “a human.”
Slowly the Old Man of Wandering Mountain raised his eyes and saw the
Childlike Empress for the first time. His gaze seemed to come from the darkest distance,
from the end of the universe. She stood up to it, answered it with her golden eyes. A
silent, immobile battle was fought between them. At length the Old Man bent over his
book and wrote: “For you too there is a borderline. Respect it.”
“I will,” she said, “but the one of whom I speak, the one for whom I am waiting,
crossed it long ago. He is reading this book while you are writing it. He hears every word
we are saying. He is with us.”
“That is true!” she heard the Old Man’s voice as he was writing. “He too is part
and parcel of the Neverending Story, for it is his own story.”
“Tell me the story!” the Childlike Empress commanded. “You, who are the
memory of Fantastica — tell me the story from the beginning, word for word as you have
written it.”
The Old Man’s writing hand began to tremble.
“If I do that, I shall have to write everything all over again. And what I write will
happen again.”
“So be it!” said the Childlike Empress.
Bastian was beginning to feel uncomfortable.
What was she going to do? It had something to do with him. But if even the Old
Man of Wandering Mountain was trembling. . .
The Old Man wrote and said: “If the Neverending Story contains itself, then the
world will end with this book.”
And the Childlike Empress answered: “But if the hero comes to us, new life can
be born. Now the decision is up to him.”
“You are ruthless indeed,” the Old Man said and wrote. “We shall enter the Circle
of Eternal Return, from which there is no escape.”
“Not for us,” she replies, and her voice was no longer gentle, but as hard and clear
as a diamond. “Nor for him — unless he saves us all.”
“Do you really want to entrust everything to a human?”
“I do.”
But then she added more softly: “Or have you a better idea?”
After a long silence the Old Man’s dark voice said: “No.”
He bent low over the book in which he was writing. His face was hidden by his
hood.
“Then do what I ask.”
Submitting to her will, the Old Man of Wandering Mountain began telling the
Neverending Story from the beginning.

At that moment the light cast by the pages of the book changed color. It became
reddish like the letters that now formed under the Old Man’s stylus. His monk’s habit and
the hood also took on the color of copper. And as he wrote, his deep, dark voice
resounded.
Bastian too heard it quite clearly.
Yet he did not understand the first words the Old Man said. They sounded like:
“Skoob dlo rednaeroc darnoc Irac.”
Strange, Bastian thought. Why is the Old Man suddenly talking a foreign
language? Or was it some sort of magic spell?
The Old Man’s voice went on and Bastian couldn’t help listening.
“This inscription could be seen on the glass door of a small shop, but naturally
this was only the way it looked if you were inside the dimly lit shop, looking out at the
street through the plate-glass door.
“Outside, it was a gray, cold, rainy November morning. The rain ran down the
glass and over the ornate letters. Through the glass there was nothing to be seen but the
rain-splotched wall across the street.”
Bastian was rather disappointed. I don’t know that story, he thought. That’s not in
the book I’ve been reading. Oh well, it only goes to show that I’ve been mistaken the
whole time. I really thought the Old Man would start telling the Neverending Story from
the beginning.
“Suddenly the door was opened so violently that a little cluster of brass bells
tinkled wildly, taking quite some time to calm down. The cause of this hubbub was a fat
little boy of ten or twelve. His wet, dark-brown hair hung down over his face, his coat
was soaked and dripping, and he was carrying a school satchel slung over his shoulder.
He was rather pale and out of breath, but, despite the hurry he had been in a moment
before, he was standing in the open doorway as though rooted to the spot.”
As Bastian read this and listened to the deep, dark voice of the Old Man of
Wandering Mountain, a roaring started up in his ears and he saw spots before his eyes.
Why, this was all about him! And it was the Neverending Story. He, Bastian, was
a character in the book which until now he had thought he was reading. And heaven only
knew who else might be reading it at the exact same time, also supposing himself to be
just a reader.
And now Bastian was afraid. He felt unable to breathe, as though shut up in an
invisible prison. He didn’t want to read anymore, he wanted to stop.
But the deep, dark voice of the Old Man of Wandering Mountain went on,
and there was nothing Bastian could do about it. He held his hands over his ears, but it
was no use, because the voice came from inside him. He tried desperately to tell himself –
– though he knew it wasn’t true — that the resemblance to his own story was some crazy
accident,

but the deep, dark voice went on,
and ever so clearly he heard it saying:
” ‘Where are your manners? If you had any, you’d have introduced yourself.’ ”
” ‘My name is Bastian,’ said the boy. ‘Bastian Balthazar Bux.’ ”
In that moment Bastian made a profound discovery. You wish for something,
you’ve wanted it for years, and you’re sure you want it, as long as you know you can’t
have it. But if all at once it looks as though your wish might come true, you suddenly find
yourself wishing you had never wished for any such thing.
That is exactly how it was with Bastian.
Now that he was in danger of getting his wish, he would have liked best to run
away. But since you can’t run “away” unless you have some idea where you’re at, Bastian
did something perfectly absurd. He turned over on his back like a beetle and played dead.
He made himself as small as possible and pretended he wasn’t there.
The Old Man of Wandering Mountain went on telling and writing the story of
how Bastian had stolen the book, how he had fled to the schoolhouse attic and begun to
read. And then Atreyu’s Quest began all over again, he spoke with Morla the Aged One,
and found Falkor in Ygramul’s net beside the Deep Chasm, and heard Bastian’s cry of
fear. Once again he was cured by old Urgl and lectured by Engywook. He passed through
the three magic gates, entered into Bastian’s image, and spoke with Uyulala. And then
came the Wind Giants and Spook City and Gmork, followed by Atreyu’s rescue and the
flight to the Ivory Tower. And in between, everything that Bastian had done, how he had
lit the candles, how he had seen the Childlike Empress, and how she had waited for him
in vain. Once again she started on her way to find the Old Man of Wandering Mountain,
once again she climbed the ladder of letters and entered the egg, once again the
conversation between her and the Old Man was related word for word, and once again the
Old Man of Wandering Mountain began to write and tell the Neverending Story.
At that point the story began all over again — unchanged and unchangeable — and
ended once again with the meeting between the Childlike Empress and the Old Man of
Wandering Mountain, who began once again to write and tell the Neverending Story. . .
. . .and so it would go on for ever and ever, for any change in the sequence of events was
unthinkable. Only he, Bastian, could do anything about it. And he would have to do
something, or else he too would be included in the circle. It seemed to him that this story
had been repeated a thousand times, as though there were no before and after and
everything had happened at once. Now he realized why the Old Man’s hand trembled.
The Circle of Eternal Return was an end without an end.
Bastian was unaware of the tears that were running down his cheeks. Close to
fainting, he suddenly cried out: “Moon Child, I’m coming!”
In that moment several things happened at once.
The shell of the great egg was dashed to pieces by some overwhelming power. A

rumbling of thunder was heard. And then the storm wind came roaring from afar.
It blew from the pages of the book that Bastian was holding on his knees, and the
pages began to flutter wildly. Bastian felt the wind in his hair and face. He could scarcely
breathe. The candle flames in the seven-armed candelabrum danced, wavered, and lay
flat. Then another, still more violent wind blew into the book, and the candles went out.
The clock in the belfry struck twelve.
XIII
Perilin, the Might Forest
oon Child, I’m coming!” Bastian repeated in the darkness. He felt something
indescribably sweet and comforting flow into him from the name and fill his whole
being. So he said it again and again: “Moon Child! Moon Child! I’m coming! Moon
Child, here I am.”
But where was he?
He couldn’t see the slightest ray of light, but this was no longer the freezing
darkness of the attic. This was a warm, velvety darkness in which he felt safe and happy.
All fear and dread had left him, ceased to be anything more than a distant
memory. He felt so light and gay that he even laughed softly.
“Moon Child, where am I?” he asked.
He no longer felt the weight of his body. He groped about and realized that he
was hovering in mid-air. The mats were gone, and there was no ground under his feet.
It was a wonderful feeling, a sense of release and boundless freedom that he had
never known before. He was beyond the reach of all the things that had weighed him
down and hemmed him in.
Could he be hovering somewhere in the cosmos? But in the cosmos there were
stars and here there was nothing of the kind. There was only this velvety darkness and a
wonderful, happy feeling he hadn’t known in all his life. Could it be that he was dead?
“Moon Child, where are you?”
And then he heard a delicate, birdlike voice that answered him and that may have
answered him several times without his hearing it. It seemed very near, and yet he could
not have said from what direction it came.
“Here I am, my Bastian.”
“Is it you, Moon Child?”
She laughed in a strangely lilting way.
“Who else would I be? Why, you’ve just given me my lovely name. Thank you for
it. Welcome, my savior and my hero.”

“Where are we, Moon Child?”
“I am with you, and you are with me.”
Dream words. Yet Bastian knew for sure that he was awake and not dreaming.
“Moon Child,” he whispered. “Is this the end?”
“No,” she replied, “it’s the beginning.”
“Where is Fantastica, Moon Child? Where are all the others? Where are Atreyu
and Falkor? And what about the Old Man of Wandering Mountain and his book? Don’t
they exist anymore?”
“Fantastica will be born again from your wishes, my Bastian. Through me they
will become reality.”
“From my wishes?” Bastian repeated in amazement.
He heard the sweet voice reply: “You know they call me the Commander of
Wishes. What will you wish?”
Bastian thought a moment. Then he inquired cautiously: “How many wishes have
I got?”
“As many as you want — the more, the better, my Bastian. Fantastica will be all
the more rich and varied.”
Bastian was overjoyed. But just because so infinitely many possibilities had
suddenly been held out to him, he couldn’t think of a single wish.
“I can’t think of anything,” he said finally.
For a time there was silence. And then he heard the birdlike voice: “That’s bad.”
“Why?”
“Because then there won’t be any more Fantastica.”
Bastian made no answer. He felt confused. His sense of unlimited freedom was
somewhat marred by the thought that everything depended on him.
“Why is it so dark, Moon Child?” he asked.
“The beginning is always dark, my Bastian.”
“I’d awfully like to see you again, Moon Child. The way you were when you
looked at me.”
Again he heard the soft lilting laugh.
“Why are you laughing?”
“Because I’m happy.”
“Happy? Why?”
“You’ve just made your first wish.”
“Will you make it come true?”
He held out his hand and felt she was putting something into it. Something very
small but strangely heavy. It was very cold and felt hard and dead.
“What is it, Moon Child?”
“A grain of sand,” she replied. “All that’s left of my boundless realm. I make you
a present of it.”
“Thank you,” said Bastian, bewildered. What on earth could he do with such a
gift? If at least it had been something living.
As he was mulling it over, he felt something wriggling in his hand. He raised his
hand to see what it was.
“Look, Moon Child,” he whispered. “It’s glowing and glittering. And there —
look! a little flame is coming out of it. No, it’s not a grain of sand, it’s a seed. It’s a

luminous seed and it’s starting to sprout!”
“Well done, my Bastian!” he heard her say. “You see how easy it is for you.”
Barely perceptible at first, the glow of the speck in Bastian’s palm grew quickly,
making the two child faces, so very different from each other, gleam in the velvety
darkness.
Slowly Bastian withdrew his hand, and the glittering speck hovered between them
like a little star.
The seed sprouted so quickly that one could see it grow. It put forth leaves and a
stem and buds that burst into many-colored, phosphorescent flowers. Little fruits formed,
ripened, and exploded like miniature rockets, spraying new seeds all around them.
From the new seeds grew other plants, but these had different shapes. Some were
like ferns or small palms, others like cacti, bullrushes, or gnarled trees. Each glowed a
different color.
Soon the velvety darkness all around Bastian and Moon Child, over and under
them and on every side, was filled with rapidly growing luminous plants. A globe of
radiant colors, a new, luminous world hovered in the Nowhere, and grew and grew. And
in its innermost center Bastian and Moon Child sat hand in hand, looking around them
with eyes of wonder.
Unceasingly new shapes and colors appeared. Larger and larger blossoms opened,
richer and richer clusters formed. And all this in total silence.
Soon some of the plants were as big as fruit trees. There were fans of long
emerald-green leaves, flowers resembling peacock tails with rainbow-colored eyes,
pagodas consisting of superimposed umbrellas of violet silk. Thick stems were
interwoven like braids. Since they were transparent, they looked like pink glass lit up
from within. Some of the blooms looked like clusters of blue and yellow Japanese
lanterns. And little by little, as the luminous night growth grew denser, they intertwined
to form a tissue of soft light.
“You must give all this a name,” Moon Child whispered. Bastian nodded.
“Perilin, the Night Forest,” he said.
He looked into the Childlike Empress’s eyes. And once again, as at their first
exchange of glances, he sat spellbound, unable to take his eyes off her. The first time she
had been deathly ill. Now she was much, much more beautiful. Her torn gown was whole
again, the soft-colored light played over the pure whiteness of the silk and of her long
hair. His wish had come true.
Bastian’s eyes swam. “Moon Child,” he stammered. “Are you well again?”
She smiled, “Can’t you see that I am?”
“I wish everything would stay like this forever,” he said.
“The moment is forever,” she replied.
Bastian was silent. He didn’t understand what she had said, but he was in no mood
to puzzle it out. He wanted only to sit there looking at her.
Little by little the thicket of luminous plants had formed a thick hedge around
them. As though imprisoned in a tent of magic carpets, Bastian paid no attention to what
was happening outside. He didn’t realize that Perilin was growing and growing, that each
and every plant was getting big or bigger. Seeds no bigger than sparks kept raining down
and sprouted as they hit the ground.
Bastian sat gazing at Moon Child. He had eyes for nothing else.

He could not have said how much time had passed when Moon Child put her
hand over his eyes.
“Why did you keep me waiting so long?” he heard her ask. “Why did you make
me go to the Old Man of Wandering Mountain? Why didn’t you come when I called?”
Bastian gulped.
“It was because,” he stammered, “I thought — all sorts of reasons — fear — well, to
tell you the truth, I was ashamed to let you see me.”
She withdrew her hand and looked at him in amazement.
“Ashamed? Why?”
“B-because,” Bastian stammered, “you — you must have expected somebody who
was right for you.”
“What’s wrong with you?” she asked. “Aren’t you right for me?”
Bastian felt that he was blushing. “I mean,” he said, “somebody strong and brave
and handsome — maybe a prince — anyway, not someone like me.”
He couldn’t see her, for he had lowered his eyes, but again he heard her soft lilting
laugh.
“You see,” he said. “Now you’re laughing at me.”
There was a long silence, and when Bastian finally brought himself to look up, he
saw that she was bending very close to him. Her face was grave.
“Let me show you something, my Bastian,” she said. “Look into my eyes.”
Bastian obeyed, though his heart was pounding and he felt dizzy.
In the golden mirror of her eyes, he saw, small at first as though far in the
distance, a reflection which little by little grew larger and more distinct. It was a boy of
about his own age; but this boy was slender and wonderfully handsome. His bearing was
proud and erect, his face was noble, manly — and lean. He looked like a young prince
from the Orient. His turban was of blue silk and so was the silver-embroidered tunic
which reached down to his knees. His high boots, made of the softest red leather, were
turned up at the toes. And he was wearing a silver-glittering mantle which hung down to
the ground. But most beautiful of all were the boy’s hands, which, though delicately
shaped, gave an impression of unusual strength.
Bastian gazed at the image with wonder and admiration. He couldn’t get enough
of it. He was just going to ask who this handsome young prince might be when it came to
him in a flash that this was his very own self — his reflection in Moon Child’s golden
eyes.
In that moment he was transported, carried out of himself, and when he returned,
he found he had become the handsome boy whose image he had seen.
He looked down, and saw exactly what he had seen in Moon Child’s eyes: the
soft, red-leather boots, the blue tunic embroidered with silver, the resplendent long
mantle. He touched his turban and felt his face. His face was the same too.
And then he turned toward Moon Child.
She was gone!
He was alone in the round room which the glowing thicket hadformed.
“Moon Child!” he shouted. “Moon Child!” There was no answer.
Feeling utterly lost, he sat down. What was he to do now? Why had she left him
alone? Where should he go — that is, if he was free to go anywhere, if he wasn’t caught in
a trap?

While he was wondering why Moon Child should have vanished without a word
of explanation, without so much as bidding him goodbye, his fingers started playing with
a golden medallion that was hanging from his neck.
He looked at it and let out a cry of surprise.
It was AURYN, the Gem, the Childlike Empress’s amulet, which made its bearer
her representative. Moon Child had given him power over every creature and thing in
Fantastica. And as long as he wore that emblem, it would be as though she were with
him.
For a long while Bastian looked at the two snakes, the one light, the other dark,
which were biting each other’s tail, and formed an oval. Then he turned the amulet over
and to his surprise found an inscription on the reverse side. It consisted of four words in
strangely intricate letters:
Do
What You
Wish
There had been no mention of such an inscription in the Neverending Story.
Could it be that Atreyu hadn’t noticed it?
But that didn’t matter now. What mattered was that the words gave him
permission, ordered him in fact, to do whatever he pleased.
Bastian approached the wall of luminous plants to see if he could slip through
somewhere. To his delight he found that the wall could easily be thrust aside like a
curtain. Out he stepped.
In the meantime, the night plants had kept on growing, gently but irresistibly, and
Perilin had become a forest such as no human eye had ever beheld.
The great trunks were now as high and thick as church towers, and still growing.
In places these shimmering, milky-white pillars were so close together that it was
impossible to pass between them. And seeds were still falling like a shower of sparks.
On his way through the luminous forest, Bastian tried hard not to step on the
glittering seeds that lay on the ground, but this soon proved impossible. There simply
wasn’t a foot’s breadth of ground from which nothing was sprouting. So he stopped
worrying and went wherever the giant trees left a path open for him.
Bastian was delighted at being handsome. It didn’t bother him that there was no
one to admire him. On the contrary, he was glad to have the pleasure all to himself. He
didn’t care a fig for being admired by the lugs who had always made fun of him. If he
thought of them at all, it was almost with pity.
In this forest, where there were no seasons and no alternation of day and night, the
feeling of time was entirely different from anything Bastian had ever known. He had no
idea how long he had been on his way. But little by little his pleasure in being handsome
underwent a change. He began to take it for granted. Not that he was any less happy
about it; but now he had the feeling that he had never been any different.
For this there was a reason which Bastian was not to discover until much later.
The beauty that had been bestowed on him made him forget, little by little, that he had
ever been fat and bowlegged.
Even if he had known what was happening, he would hardly have regretted the

loss of this particular memory. As it happened, he didn’t even realize that he had
forgotten anything. And when the memory had vanished completely, it seemed to him
that he had always been as handsome as he was now.
At that point a new wish cropped up. Just being handsome wasn’t as wonderful as
he had thought. He also wanted to be strong, stronger than anybody! The strongest in the
world!
While going deeper and deeper into the Night Forest, he began to feel hungry. He
picked off a few of the strangely shaped luminous fruits and nibbled gingerly to see if
they were edible. Edible was no word for it; some were tart, some sweet, some slightly
bitter, but all were delicious. He ate as he walked, and felt a miraculous strength flowing
into his limbs.
In the meantime the glowing underbrush around him had become so dense that it
cut off his view on all sides. To make matters worse, lianas and aerial roots were
becoming inextricably tangled with the thicket below. Slashing with the side of his hand
as if it had been a machete, Bastian opened up a passage. And the breach closed directly
behind him as if it had never been.
On he went, but the wall of giant tree trunks blocked his path. Bastian grabbed
hold of two great tree trunks and bent them apart. When he had passed through, the wall
closed soundlessly behind him.
Bastian shouted for joy.
He was the Lord of the Jungle!
For a while he amused himself opening paths for himself, like an elephant that has
heard the Great Call. His strength did not abate, he had no need to stop for breath. He felt
no stitch in his side, and his heart didn’t thump or race.
But after a while he wearied of his new sport. The next thing he wanted was to
look down on his domain from above, to see how big it was.
He spat on his hands, took hold of a liana, and pulled himself up hand over hand,
without using his legs, as he had seen acrobats do in the circus. For a moment a vision —
a pale memory of the past — came to him of himself in gym class, dangling like a sack of
flour from the bottommost end of the rope, while the rest of the class cackled with glee.
He couldn’t help smiling. How they would gape if they saw him now! They’d be proud to
know him. But he wouldn’t even look at them.
Without stopping once he finally reached the branch from which the liana was
hanging, climbed up and straddled it. The branch gave off a red glow. He stood up and,
balancing himself like a tightrope walker, made his way to the trunk. Here again a dense
tangle of creepers barred his way, but he had no difficulty in opening up a passage
through it.
At that height the trunk was still so thick that five men clasping hands could not
have encircled it. Another, somewhat higher branch, jutting from the trunk in a different
direction, was beyond his reach. So he leapt through the air, caught hold of an aerial root,
swung himself into place, made another perilous leap, and grabbed the higher branch.
From there he was able to pull himself up to a still higher one. By then he was high above
the ground, at least three hundred feet, but the glowing branches and foliage still
obstructed his view.
Not until he had climbed to twice that height were there occasional spaces
through which he could look around. But then the going became difficult, because there

were fewer and fewer branches. And at last, when he had almost reached the top, he had
to stop, for there was nothing to hold on to but the smooth, bare trunk, which was still as
thick as a telegraph pole.
Bastian looked up and saw that the trunk or stalk ended some fifty feet higher up
in an enormous, glowing, dark-red blossom. He didn’tsee how he could ever reach it, but
he had to keep going, for he couldn’tvery well stay where he was. He threw his arms
around the trunk and climbed the last fifty feet like an acrobat. The trunk swayed and
bent like a blade of grass in the wind.
At length he was directly below the blossom, which was open at the top like a
tulip. He managed to slip one hand between two of the petals and take hold. Then,
pushing the petals wide apart, he pulled himself up.
For a moment he lay there, for by then he was somewhat out of breath. But then
he stood up and looked over the edge of the great, glowing blossom, as from the crow’s
nest of a ship.
The tree he had climbed was one of the tallest in the whole jungle and he was able
to see far into the distance. Above him he still saw the velvety darkness of a starless night
sky, but below him, as far as he could see, the treetops of Perilin presented a play of color
that took his breath away.
For a long time Bastian stood there, drinking in the sight. This was his domain!
He had created it! He was the lord of Perilin.
And once again he shouted for joy!
XIV
The Desert of Colors
ever had Bastian slept so soundly as in that glowing red blossom. When at last
he opened his eyes, the sky overhead was still a velvety black. He stretched and was
happy to feel miraculous strength in his limbs.
Once again, there had been a change in him. His wish to be strong had come true.
When he stood up and looked out over the edge of the great blossom, Perilin
seemed to have stopped growing. The Night Forest looked pretty much the same as when
he had last seen it. He didn’t know that this too was connected with the fulfillment of his
wish, and that his memory of his weakness and clumsiness had been blotted out at the
same time. He was handsome and strong, but somehow that wasn’t enough for him. He
also felt the need to be tough and inured to hardship like Atreyu. But how was he to come
by that quality in this luminous garden, where all manner of fruit was to be had for the
picking?

The first pearly streaks of dawn appeared over the eastern horizon. And with the
rising of the light the phosphorescence of the night plants paled.
“High time!” said Bastian aloud. “I thought the day would never come.”
He sat down on the floor of the blossom and wondered what he should do. Climb
down again and keep going? Of course, since he was lord of Perilin, no one could stop
him from wandering around in it for days, if not for months or years. This jungle was so
enormous he would never find his way out of it. But beautiful as he found the night
plants, he didn’t think this prospect would suit him in the long run. Exploring a desert —
that would be something else again. The biggest desert in Fantastica. Yes, that would be
something to be proud of.
In that same moment, a violent tremor shook the giant tree. The trunk bent, and a
crackling, groaning sound could be heard. Bastian had to hold tight to keep from rolling
out of his blossom, the stem of which tilted more and more, until at last it lay flat.
The sun, which had risen in the meantime, disclosed a vision of devastation.
Hardly anything was left of all the enormous night plants. More quickly than they had
sprung up they crumbled under the glaring sunlight into dust and fine, colored sand.
Gigantic tree trunks collapsed as sand castles do when they dry out. Bastian’s .tree
seemed to be the last still standing. But when he tried to steady himself by grasping at the
petals of his flower, they crumbled in his hands and blew away like a cloud of dust. Now
that there was nothing to obstruct the view, he saw how terrifyingly high up he was. He
knew he would have to climb down as fast as possible, for the tree was likely to collapse
at any moment.
Cautiously, he climbed out of the blossom and straddled the stem, which was now
bent like a fishing pole. No sooner had he left the blossom than it broke off behind him
and crumbled into dust in falling.
Ever so gingerly Bastian proceeded downward. Many a man would have panicked
on seeing the ground so very far below, but Bastian was free from dizziness and his
nerves were steel. Knowing that any abrupt movement might reduce the whole tree to
dust, he crept along the bough and finally reached the place where the trunk became
vertical. Hugging it, he let himself slide, inch by inch. Several times, great clouds of
colored dust fell on him from above. There were no branches left, and what towering
stumps remained crumbled when Bastian tried to use them for support. As he continued
downward, the trunk became too big for him to hold. And he was still far above the
ground. He stopped to think; How was he ever going to get down?
But then another tremor passed through the giant stump and relieved him of the
need for further thought. What was left of the tree disintegrated and settled into a great
mound of sand; Bastian rolled down the side of it in a wild whirl, turning a number of
somersaults on the way, and finally came to rest at the bottom. He came close to being
buried under an avalanche of colored dust, but he fought his way clear, spat the sand out
of his mouth, and shook it out of his ears and clothes.
Wherever he looked, the sand was moving in slow streams and eddies. It collected
into hills and dunes of every shape and size, each with a color of its own. Light-blue sand
gathered to form a light-blue hill, and the same with green and violet and so on. Perilin,
the Night Forest, was gone and a desert was taking its place; and what a desert!
Bastian had climbed a dune of purplish-red sand and all around him he saw
nothing but hill after hill of every imaginable color. Each hill revealed a shade or tint that

recurred in no other. The nearest was cobalt blue, another was saffron yellow, then came
crimson red, then indigo, apple green, sky blue, orange, peach, mauve, turquoise blue,
lilac, moss green, ruby red, burnt umber, Indian yellow, vermilion, lapis lazuli. And so on
from horizon to horizon. And between the hills, separating color from color, flowed
streams of gold and silver sand.
“This,” said Bastian aloud, “is Goab, the Desert of Colors.”
The sun rose higher and higher and the heat became murderous. The air over the
colored sand dunes shimmered, and Bastian realized that he was in a tight spot. He could
not stay in this desert, that was certain. If he didn’t get out of it soon, he would die of
hunger and thirst.
He took hold of the Childlike Empress’s emblem in the hope that it would guide
him. And then staunchly he started on his way.
He climbed dune after dune; hour after hour he plodded on, never seeing anything
but hill after hill. Only the colors kept changing. His fabulous strength was no longer of
any use to him, for desert distances cannot be vanquished with strength. The air was a
searing blast from hell. His tongue clung to the roof of his mouth and his face streamed
with sweat.
The sun was a whorl of fire in the middle of the sky. It had been in the same place
for a long time and didn’t seem to move. That day in the desert was as long as the night in
Perilin.
Bastian’s eyes burned and his tongue felt like a piece of leather. But he didn’t give
up. His body had dried out, and the blood in his veins was so thick it could hardly flow.
But on he went, slowly, with even steps, neither hurrying nor stopping to rest, as if he had
had years of experience at crossing deserts on foot. He ignored the torments of thirst. His
will had become as hard as steel, neither fatigue nor hardship could bend it.
He recalled how easily he had been discouraged in the past. He had begun all
sorts of projects and given up at the first sign of difficulty. He had always been afraid of
not getting enough to eat, or of falling ill, or having to endure pain. All that was far
behind him.
No one before him had dared to cross Goab, the Desert of Colors, on foot, nor
would anyone undertake to do so in the future. And most likely no one would ever hear
of his exploit.
This last thought saddened Bastian. Goab seemed to be so inconceivably large he
felt sure he would never come to the end of it. Despite his phenomenal endurance he was
bound to perish sooner or later. That didn’t frighten him. He would die with calm dignity
like the hunters in Atreyu’s country. But since no one ever ventured into this desert, the
news of his death would never be divulged. Either in Fantastica or at home. He would
simply be reported missing, and no one would ever know he had been in Fantastica or in
the desert of Goab. All Fantastica, he said to himself, was contained in the book that the
Old Man of Wandering Mountain had written. This book was the Neverending Story,
which he himself had read in the attic. Maybe his present adventures and sufferings were
in the book even now. And maybe someone else would read the book someday — maybe
someone was reading it at that very moment. In that case, it must be possible to give that
someone a sign.
The sand hill where Bastian was standing just then was ultramarine blue. And
separated from it by a narrow cleft there was a fiery-red dune. Bastian crossed over to it,

gathered up sand in both hands and carried it to the blue hill. Then he strewed a long line
of red sand on the hillside. He went back, brought more red sand, and repeated the
operation. Soon he had fashioned three enormous red letters against the blue ground:
B B B
He viewed his work with satisfaction. No reader of the Neverending Story could
fail to see his message. So whatever happened to him now, someone would know where
he had been.
He sat down to rest on the red hilltop. The three letters glittered bright in the
desert sun.
Another piece of his memory of the old Bastian had been wiped out. He forgot
that he had once been a namby-pamby, something of a crybaby, in fact. And he was ever
so proud of his toughness. But already a new wish was taking form.
“It’s true that I fear nothing,” he said aloud, “but what I still lack is true courage.
Being able to endure hardships is a great thing. But courage and daring are something
else again. I wish I could run into a real adventure, something calling for great courage.
How grand it would be to meet some dangerous creature — maybe not as hideous as
Ygramul, but much more dangerous. A beautiful, but very, very dangerous creature. The
most dangerous creature in all Fantastica. I’d step right up to it and. . .”
Bastian said no more, for in that same moment he heard a roaring and rumbling so
deep that the ground trembled beneath his feet.
Bastian turned around. Far in the distance he saw something that looked like a
ball of fire. Moving with incredible speed, it described a wide arc around the spot where
Bastian was sitting, then came straight toward him. In the shimmering desert air, which
made the outline of things waver like flames, the creature looked like a dancing fire-
demon.
Bastian was stricken with terror. Before he knew it, he had run down into the cleft
between the red dune and the blue dune. But no sooner had he got there than he felt
ashamed and overcame his fear.
He took hold of AURYN and felt all the courage he had wished for streaming into
his heart.
Then again he heard the deep roar that made the ground tremble, but this time it
was near him. He looked up.
A huge lion was standing on the fiery-red dune. The sun was directly behind him,
and made his great mane look like a wreath of fire. This lion was not a tawny color like
other lions, but as fiery red as the dune on which he was standing.
The beast did not seem to have noticed the boy, so much smaller than himself,
who was standing in the cleft between the two dunes, but seemed to be looking at the red
letters on the opposite hill. The great rumbling voice said: “Who did this?”
“I did,” said Bastian.
“What is it?”
“It’s my initials,” said Bastian. “My name is Bastian Balthazar Bux.”
Then for the first time the lion turned toward Bastian, who for a moment expected
to be burned to a crisp by the flames that seemed to surround the lion. But his fear soon
passed and he returned the lion’s gaze.

“I,” said the huge beast, “am Grograman, Lord of the Desert of Colors. I am also
known as the Many-Colored Death.”
Bastian felt the deadly power that flowed from the lion’s eyes. But he did not
avert his own.
When they had measured their strength for some time, the lion looked down. With
slow, majestic movements he descended from the dune. When he stepped onto the
ultramarine sand, he too changed color, his coat and mane became blue. For a moment
the huge beast stood facing Bastian, who had to look up at him as a mouse might look up
at a cat. Then suddenly Grograman lay down and touched his head to the ground.
“Master,” he said. “I am your servant, I await your commands.”
“I’d like to get out of this desert,” said Bastian. “Can you manage that?”
Grograman shook his mane.
“No, master, that I cannot do.”
“Why not?”
“Because I carry the desert with me.”
Not knowing what to make of this, Bastian asked: “Isn’t there somebody who can
get me out of here?”
“How could that be, master?” said Grograman. “Where I am no other living
creature can exist. My presence alone would suffice to reduce everybody — even the most
powerful of creatures — into ashes for thousands of miles around. That’s why I’m called
the Many-Colored Death and Lord of the Desert of Colors.”
“That’s not so,” said Bastian. “Everybody doesn’t get burned up in your desert.
Look at me.”
“Because you are bearing the Gem, master. AURYN protects you — even from
me, the deadliest creature in Fantastica.”
“You mean that if I didn’t have the Gem, I’d be reduced to ashes?”
“That’s how it is, master. That’s what would happen, though personally I’d regret
it. Because you’re the first and only being who has ever spoken to me.”
Bastian touched the amulet. “Thank you, Moon Child,” he said under his breath.
Grograman stood up to his full height and looked down at Bastian.
“I believe, master, that we have things to discuss. Perhaps I can acquaint you with
certain secrets. And perhaps you can clear up the riddle of my existence for me.”
Bastian nodded. “But first,” he said. “Could you possibly get me something to
drink? I’m very thirsty.”
“Your servant hears and obeys,” said Grograman. “Will you deign to sit on my
back? I shall carry you to my palace, where you will find everything you need.”
Bastian climbed up on the lion’s back and clutched the flaming mane in both
hands. Grograman looked back at his passenger.
“Hold on tight, master, I’m a swift runner. And one more thing: as long as you are
in my domain and especially when you are with me — promise me that you will never for
any reason lay down the amulet that protects you.”
“I promise,” said Bastian.
The lion started off, at first at a slow, dignified gait, then faster and faster. To
Bastian’s amazement, the lion’s coat and mane changed color with every new sand hill.
But soon Grograman was making great leaps from hilltop to hilltop, and his coat changed
color faster and faster. Bastian’s eyes swam, and he saw all the colors at once as in a

rainbow. The hot wind whistled around Bastian’s ears and tugged at his mantle, which
fluttered behind him. He felt the movements of the lion’s muscles and breathed the wild,
heady smell of the shaggy mane. The triumphant shout that escaped him resembled the
cry of a bird of prey, and Grograman answered with a roar that made the desert tremble.
For the moment these two different creatures were one. Bastian’s heart and mind were in
the clouds. He didn’t come to himself until he heard Grograman saying: “We have
arrived, master! Will you deign to alight?”
Bastian jumped down from the lion’s back and landed on the sandy ground.
Before him he saw a cleft mountain of black rock. Or was it a ruined building? He didn’t
know, for the stones which made up the doorframes, walls, columns, and terraces of the
building, as well as those that were lying about half buried in colored sand, were deeply
creviced and smooth, as though the sandstorms of time had smoothed away all sharp
edges and roughness.
“This, master, is my palace — and my tomb,” Bastian heard the lion’s voice
saying. “You are Grograman’s first and only guest. Enter and make yourself at home.”
The sun hung low over the horizon, a great pale-yellow disk, shorn of its searing
heat. Apparently the ride had taken much longer than it had seemed to Bastian. The
truncated columns or spurs of rock, whichever they might be, cast long shadows. It would
soon be night.
As Bastian followed the lion through a dark doorway leading into the palace, he
had the impression that Grograman’s steps sounded tired and heavy.
After passing a dark corridor and up and down a number of stairways, they came
at last to a large double door which seemed to be made of black rock. As Grograman
approached, it opened of its own accord, and when they had both gone through, it closed
behind them.
Now they were in a large hall, or rather a cave, lit by hundreds of lamps whose
flames resembled the play of colors on Grograman’s coat. The floor was of colored tiles.
At the center was a circular platform surrounded by steps, and on the platform lay an
enormous black rock. Grograman seemed spent as he turned to Bastian.
“My time is close at hand, master,” he said, hardly above a whisper. “There won’t
be time for our talk. But don’t worry, and wait for the day. What has always happened
will happen once again. And perhaps you will be able to tell me why.”
Then he pointed his head in the direction of a little gate at the other end of the
cave.
“Go in there, master. You will find everything in readiness. That room has been
waiting for you since the beginning of time.”
Bastian went to the gate, but before opening it, he glanced back. Grograman had
sat down on the black rock. He was as black as the stone. In a faint, far-off voice, he said:
“Quite possibly, master, you will hear sounds that will frighten you. Don’t be afraid. As
long as you carry the emblem, nothing can happen to you.”
Bastian nodded and passed through the gate.
The room he entered was magnificent. The floor was laid with soft, richly colored
carpets. The graceful columns supporting the vaulted ceiling were covered with gold
mosaic, which fragmented the varicolored light of the lamps. In one corner Bastian saw a
broad divan covered with soft rugs and cushions of all kinds, surmounted by a canopy of
azure-blue silk. In the opposite corner the stone floor had been hollowed to form a pool

filled with golden liquid. On a low table stood bowls and dishes of food, a carafe full of
some ruby-red drink, and a golden cup.
Bastian squatted down at the table and fell to. The drink had a tart, wild taste and
was wonderfully thirst-quenching. The dishes were unknown to Bastian. Some looked
like cakes or nuts, others like squash or melons, but the taste was entirely different. Sharp
and spicy. Everything was delicious, and Bastian ate his fill.
Then he took his clothes off — but not the amulet — and stepped into the pool. For
a while he splashed about, washed himself, dived under, and came up puffing like a
walrus. Then he discovered some strange-looking bottles at the edge of the pool.
Thinking they must be bath oils, he poured a little of each into the water. Green, red, and
yellow flames darted hissing over the surface, and a little smoke went up. It smelled of
resin and bitter herbs. And then the flames died.
After a while Bastian got out of the water, dried himself with the soft towels that
lay ready, and put his clothes on. Suddenly he noticed that the lamps were not burning as
brightly as before. And then he heard a sound that sent the cold shivers down his spine: a
cracking and grinding, as though a rock were bursting under the pressure of expanding
ice.
Bastian’s heart pounded. He remembered that Grograman had told him not to be
afraid.
The sound softened to a moan and soon stopped. It was not repeated, but the
stillness was almost more terrible.
Determined to find out what had happened, Bastian opened the door of the
bedchamber. At first he saw no change in the great hall, except that the lamplight now
seemed somber and was pulsating like a faltering heartbeat. The lion was stillsitting in
the same attitude on the black rock. He seemed to be looking at Bastian.
“Grograman!” Bastian cried. “What’s going on? What was that sound? Was it
you?”
The lion made no answer and didn’t move, but when Bastian approached him, the
lion followed him with his eyes.
Hesitantly Bastian stretched out his hand to stroke the lion’s mane, but the
moment he touched it he recoiled in horror. It was hard and ice-cold like the black rock.
And Grograman’s face and paws felt the same way.
Bastian didn’t know what to do. He saw that the black stone doors were slowly
opening. He left the hall, but it wasn’t until he had passed through the long dark corridor
and was on his way up the stairs that he started wondering what he would do when he
was outside. In this desert there couldn’t be anyone capable of saving Grograman.
But it wasn’t a desert anymore!
Whichever way Bastian looked, he saw glittering dots. Millions of tiny plants
were sprouting from the grains of sand which had become seeds again. Perilin the Night
Forest was growing once more.
Bastian sensed that Grograman’s rigidity was somehow connected with this
transformation.
He went back to the cave. The light in the lamps was barely flickering. He went
over to the lion, threw his arms around the huge neck, and pressed his face to the beast’s
face.
The lion’s eyes were black and as dead as the rock. Grograman had turned to

stone. The lights flared for an instant and went out, leaving the cave in total darkness.
Bastian wept bitterly. The stone lion was wet with his tears. In the end, the boy
curled up between the great paws and fell asleep!
XV
Grograman, the Many-Colored Death
master,” said the rumbling lion’s voice. “Have you spent the whole night like
this?”
Bastian sat up and rubbed his eyes. He had been lying between the lion’s paws,
and Grograman was watching him with a look of amazement. His fur was still as black as
the rock he was sitting on, but his eyes sparkled. The lamps in the cave were burning
again.
“Oh!” Bastian cried. “I thought you had turned to stone.”
“So I had,” the lion replied. “I die with every nightfall, and every morning I wake
up again.”
“I thought it was forever,” said Bastian.
“It always is forever,” said Grograman mysteriously.
He stood up, stretched, and trotted about the cave. His fur shone more and more
brightly in the colors of the mosaic floor. Suddenly he stopped still and looked at the boy.
“Did you shed tears over me?” he asked.
Bastian nodded.
“Then,” said the lion, “you are not only the only being who has ever slept between
the paws of the Many-Colored Death, but also the only being who has ever mourned his
death.”
Bastian looked at the lion, who was trotting about again, and finally asked him in
a whisper: “Are you always alone?”
Again the lion stood still, but this time he did not turn toward Bastian. He kept his
face averted and repeated in his rumbling voice: “Alone!”
The word echoed through the cave.
“My realm is the desert, and it is also my work. Wherever I go, everything around
me turns to desert. I carry it with me. Since I am made of deadly fire, must I not be
doomed to everlasting solitude?”
Bastian fell into a dismayed silence.
“Master,” said the lion, looking at the boy with glowing eyes. “You who bear the
emblem of the Childlike Empress, can you tell me this: Why must I always die at
nightfall?”
“So that Perilin, the Night Forest, can grow in the Desert of Colors,” said Bastian.
“Perilin?” said the lion. “What’s that?”

Then Bastian told him about the miraculous jungle that consisted of living light.
While Grograman listened in fascinated amazement, Bastian described the diversity and
beauty of the glimmering phosphorescent plants, their silent, irresistible growth, their
dreamlike beauty and incredible size. His enthusiasm grew as he spoke and Grograman’s
eyes glowed more and more brightly.
“All that,” Bastian concluded, “can happen only when you are turned to stone. But
Perilin would swallow up everything else and stifle itself if it didn’t have to die and
crumble into dust when you wake up. You and Perilin need each other.”
For a long while Grograman was silent.
“Master,” he said then. “Now I see that my dying gives life and my living death,
and both are good. Now I understand the meaning of my existence. I thank you.”
He strode slowly and solemnly into the darkest corner of the cave. Bastian
couldn’t see what he did there, but he heard a jangling of metal. When Grograman came
back, he was carrying something in his mouth. With a deep bow he laid this something at
Bastian’s feet.
It was a sword.
It didn’t look very impressive. The iron sheath was rusty, and the hilt might have
belonged to a child’s wooden sword.
“Can you give it a name?” Grograman asked.
Bastian examined it carefully.
“Sikanda,” he said.
In that same moment the sword darted from its sheath and flew into his hand. The
blade consisted of pure light and glittered so brightly that he could hardly bear to look at
it. It was double-edged and weighed no more than a feather.
“This sword has been destined for you since the beginning of time,” said
Grograman. “For only one who has ridden on my back, who has eaten and drunk of my
fire and bathed in it like you, can touch it without danger. But only because you have
given it its right name does it belong to you.”
“Sikanda!” said Bastian under his breath as, fascinated by the gleaming light, he
swung the sword slowly through the air. “It’s a magic sword, isn’t it?”
“Nothing in all Fantastica can resist it,” said Grograman, “neither rock nor steel.
But you must not use force. Whatever may threaten you, you may wield it only if it leaps
into your hand of its own accord as it did now. It will guide your hand and by its own
power will do what needs to be done. But if your will makes you draw it from its sheath,
you will bring great misfortune on yourself and on Fantastica. Never forget that.”
“I will never forget it,” Bastian promised.
The sword flew back into its sheath and again it looked old and worthless. Bastian
grasped the leather belt on which the sheath hung and slung it around his waist.
“And now, master,” Grograman suggested, “let us, if you wish, go racing through
the desert together. Climb on my back, for I must go out now.”
Bastian mounted, and the lion trotted out into the open. The Night Forest had long
since crumbled into colored sand, and the morning sun rose above the desert horizon.
Together they swept over the dunes — like a dancing flame, like a blazing tempest.
Bastian felt as though he were riding a flaming comet through light and colors.
Toward midday Grograman stopped.
“This, master, is the place where we met.”

Bastian’s head was still reeling from the wild ride. He looked around but could see
neither the ultramarine-blue nor the fiery-red hill. Nor was there any sign of the letters he
had made. Now the dunes were olive green and pink.
“It’s all entirely different,” he said.
“Yes, master,” said the lion. “That’s the way it is — different every day. Up until
now I didn’t know why. But since you told me that Perilin grows out of the sand, I
understand.”
“But how do you know it’s the same place as yesterday?”
“I feel it as I feel my own body. The desert is a part of me.”
Bastian climbed down from Grograman’s back and seated himself on the olive-
green hill. The lion lay beside him and now he too was olive green. Bastian propped his
chin on his hand and looked out toward the horizon.
“Grograman,” he said after a long silence. “May I ask you a question?”
“Your servant is listening.”
“Is it true that you’ve always been here?”
“Always!”
“And the desert of Goab has always existed?”
“Yes, the desert too. Why do you ask?”
Bastian pondered.
“I don’t get it,” he finally confessed. “I’d have bet it wasn’t here before yesterday
morning.”
“What makes you think that, master?”
Then Bastian told him everything that had happened since he met Moon Child.
“It’s all so strange,” he concluded. “A wish comes into my head, and then
something always happens that makes the wish come true. I haven’t made this up, you
know. I wouldn’t be able to. I could never have invented all the different night plants in
Perilin. Or the colors of Goab — or you! It’s all much more wonderful and real than
anything I could have made up. But all the same, nothing is there until I’ve wished it.”
“That,” said the lion, “is because you’re carrying AURYN, the Gem.”
“But does all this exist only after I’ve wished it? Or was it all there before?”
“Both,” said Grograman.
“How can that be?” Bastian cried almost impatiently. “You’ve been here in Goab,
the Desert of Colors, since heaven knows when. The room in your palace was waiting for
me since the beginning of time. So, too, was the sword Sikanda. You told me so
yourself.”
“That is true, master.”
“But I — I’ve only been in Fantastica since last night! So it can’t be true that all
these things have existed only since I came here.”
“Master,” the lion replied calmly. “Didn’t you know that Fantastica is the land of
stories? A story can be new and yet tell about olden times. The past comes into existence
with the story.”
“Then Perilin, too, must always have been there,” said the perplexed Bastian.
“Beginning at the moment when you gave it its name,” Grograman replied, “it has
existed forever.”
“You mean that I created it?”
The lion was silent for a while. Then he said: “Only the Childlike Empress can

tell you that. It is she who has given you everything.”
He arose.
“Master, it’s time we went back to my palace. The sun is low in the sky and we
have a long way to go.”
That night Grograman lay down again on the black rock, and this time Bastian
stayed with him. Few words passed between them. Bastian brought food and drink from
the bedchamber, where once again the little table had been laid by an unseen hand. He
seated himself on the steps leading to the lion’s rock, and there he ate his supper.
When the light of the lamps grew dim and began to pulsate like a faltering
heartbeat, he stood up and threw his arms around the lion’s neck. The mane was hard and
looked like congealed lava. Then the gruesome sound was repeated. Bastian was no
longer afraid, but again he wept at the thought of Grograman’s sufferings, for now he
knew they would endure for all time.
Later that night Bastian groped his way into the open and stood for a long while
watching the soundless growth of the night plants. Then he went back into the cave and
again lay down to sleep between the petrified lion’s paws.
He stayed with Grograman for many days and nights, and they became friends.
They spent many hours in the desert, playing wild games. Bastian would hide among the
sand dunes, but Grograman always found him. They ran races, but the lion was a
thousand times swifter than Bastian. They wrestled and there Bastian was the lion’s equal.
Though of course it was only in fun, Grograman needed all his strength to hold his own.
Neither could defeat the other.
Once, after they had been wrestling and tumbling, Bastian sat down, somewhat
out of breath, and said: “Couldn’t I stay with you forever?”
The lion shook his mane. “No, master.”
“Why not?”
“Here there is only life and death, only Perilin and Goab, but no story. You must
live your story. You cannot remain here.”
“But how can I leave?” Bastian asked. “The desert is much too big, I’d never get
to the end of it. And you can’t carry me out of it, because you take the desert with you.”
“Only your wishes can guide you over the pathways of Fantastica,” said
Grograman. “You must go from wish to wish. What you don’t wish for will always be
beyond your reach. That is what the words “far” and “near” mean in Fantastica. And
wishing to leave a place is not enough. You must wish to go somewhere else and let your
wishes guide you.”
“But I can’t wish to leave here,” said Bastian.
“You must find your next wish,” said Grograman almost sternly.
“And when I find it,” Bastian asked, “how will I be able to leave here?”
“I will tell you,” said Grograman gravely. “There is in Fantastica a certain place
from which one can go anywhere and which can be reached from anywhere. We call it
the Temple of a Thousand Doors. No one has ever seen it from outside. The inside is a
maze of doors. Anyone wishing to know it must dare to enter it.”
“But how is that possible if it can’t be approached from outside?”
“Every door in Fantastica,” said the lion, “even the most ordinary stable, kitchen,
or cupboard door, can become the entrance to the Temple of a Thousand Doors at the

right moment. And none of these thousand doors leads back to where one came from.
There is no return.”
“And once someone is inside,” Bastian asked, “can he get out and go
somewhere?”
“Yes,” said the lion. “But it’s not as simple as in other buildings. Only a genuine
wish can lead you through the maze of the thousand doors. Without a genuine wish, you
just have to wander around until you know what you really want. And that can take a
long time.”
“How will I find the entrance?”
“You’ve got to wish it.”
Bastian pondered a long while. Then he said: “It seems strange that we can’t just
wish what we please. Where do our wishes come from? What is a wish anyway?”
Grograman gave the boy a long, earnest look, but made no answer.
Some days later they had another serious talk.
Bastian had shown the lion the inscription on the reverse side of the Gem. “What
do you suppose it means?” he asked. ” ‘DO WHAT YOU WISH.’ That must mean I can
do anything I feel like. Don’t you think so?”
All at once Grograman’s face looked alarmingly grave, and his eyes glowed.
“No,” he said in his deep, rumbling voice. “It means that you must do what you
really and truly want. And nothing is more difficult.”
“What I really and truly want? What do you mean by that?”
“It’s your own deepest secret and you yourself don’t know it.”
“How can I find out?”
“By going the way of your wishes, from one to another, from first to last. It will
take you to what you really and truly want.”
“That doesn’t sound so hard,” said Bastian.
“It is the most dangerous of all journeys.”
“Why?” Bastian asked. “I’m not afraid.”
“That isn’t it,” Grograman rumbled. “It requires the greatest honesty and
vigilance, because there’s no other journey on which it’s so easy to lose yourself forever.”
“Do you mean because our wishes aren’t always good?” Bastian asked.
The lion lashed the sand he was lying on with his tail. His ears lay flat, he
screwed up his nose, and his eyes flashed fire. Involuntarily Bastian ducked when
Grograman’s voice once again made the earth tremble: “What do you know about wishes?
How would you know what’s good and what isn’t?”
In the days that followed Bastian thought a good deal about what the Many-
Colored Death had said. There are some things, however, that we cannot fathom by
thinking about them, but only by experience. So it was not until much later, after all
manner of adventures, that he thought back on Grograman’s words and began to
understand them.
At this time another change took place in Bastian. Since his meeting with Moon
Child he had received many gifts. Now he was favored with a new one: courage. And
again something was taken away from him, namely, the memory of his past timidity.
Since he was no longer afraid of anything, a new wish began, imperceptibly at
first, then more distinctly, to take shape within him: the wish to be alone no longer. Even

in the company of the Many-Colored Death he was alone in a way. He wanted to exhibit
his talents to others, to be admired and to become famous.
And one night as he was watching Perilin grow, it suddenly came to him that he
was doing so for the last time, that he would have to bid the grandiose Night Forest
goodbye. An inner voice was calling him away.
He cast a last glance at the magnificently glowing colors. Then he descended to
the darkness of Grograman’s palace and tomb, and sat down on the steps. He couldn’t
have said what he was waiting for, but he knew that he could not sleep that night.
He must have dozed a little, for suddenly he started as if someone had called his
name.
The door leading to the bedchamber had opened. Through the cleft a long strip of
reddish light shone into the dark cave.
Bastian stood up. Had the door been transformed for this moment into the
entrance of the Temple of a Thousand Doors? Hesitantly he approached the cleft and
tried to peer through. He couldn’t see a thing. Then slowly the cleft began to close. In a
moment his only chance would pass.
He turned back to Grograman, who lay motionless, with eyes of dead stone, on
his pedestal. The strip of light from the door fell full on him.
“Goodbye, Grograman, and thanks for everything,” he said softly. “I’ll come
again, I promise, I’ll come again.”
Then he slipped through the cleft, and instantly the door closed behind him.
Bastian didn’t know that he would not keep his promise. Much much later
someone would come in his name and keep it for him.
But that’s another story and shall be told another time.
XVI
The Silver City of Amarganth
urple light passed in slow waves across the floor and the walls of the room. It was
a hexagonal room, rather like the enlarged cell of a honeycomb. Every second wall had a
door in it, and on the intervening walls were painted strange pictures representing land-
scapes and creatures who seemed to be half plant and half animal. Bastian had entered
through one of the doors; the other two, to the right and left of it, were exactly the same
shape, but the left-hand door was black, while the right-hand one was white. Bastian
chose the white door.
In the next room the light was yellowish. Here again the walls formed a hexagon.
The pictures represented all manner of contrivances that meant nothing to Bastian. Were
they tools or weapons? The two doors leading onward to the right and left were the same

color, yellow, but the left-hand one was tall and narrow, while the one on the right was
low and wide. Bastian chose the left-hand one.
The next room was hexagonal like the others, but the light was bluish. The
pictures on the walls were of intricate ornaments or characters in a strange alphabet. Here
the two doors were the same color, but of different material, one of wood, the other of
metal. Bastian chose the wooden door.
It is not possible to describe all the doors and rooms through which Bastian
passed during his stay in the Temple of a Thousand Doors. There were doors that looked
like large keyholes, and others that resembled the entrances to caves, there were golden
doors and rusty iron doors, some were padded and some were studded with nails, some
were paper-thin and others as thick as the doors of treasure houses; there was one that
looked like a giant’s mouth and another that had to be opened like a drawbridge, one that
suggested a big ear and one that was made of gingerbread, one that was shaped like an
oven door, and one that had to be unbuttoned. The two doors leading out of a room
always had something in common — the shape, the material, the size, the color — but
there was always some essential difference between them.
Bastian had passed many times from one hexagonal room to another. Every
decision he made led to another decision that led to yet another decision. But after all
these decisions he was still in the Temple of a Thousand Doors. As he went on and on, he
began to wonder why this should be. His wish had sufficed to lead him into the maze, but
apparently it was not definite enough to enable him to find the way out. He had wished
for company. But now he realized that by company he had meant no one in particular.
This vague wish hadn’t helped him at all. Thus far his decisions had been based on mere
whim and involved very little thought. In every case he might just as well have taken the
other door. At this rate he would never find his way out.
Just then he was in a room with a greenish light. Three of the six walls had
variously shaped clouds painted on them. The door to the left was of white mother-of-
pearl, the one on the right of ebony. And suddenly he knew whom he wished for: Atreyu!
The mother-of-pearl door reminded Bastian of Falkor the luck-dragon, whose
scales glistened like mother-of-pearl. So he decided on that one.
In the next room one of the two doors was made of plaited grass, the other was an
iron grating. Just then Bastian was thinking of the Grassy Ocean where Atreyu was at
home, so he picked the grass door.
In the next room he found two doors which differed only in that one was made of
leather and the other of felt. Bastian chose the leather one.
Then he was faced with two more doors, and again he had time to think. One was
purple, the other olive green. Atreyu was a Greenskin and his cloak was made from the
hide of a purple buffalo. A symbol such as Atreyu had had on his forehead and cheeks
when Cairon came to him was painted in white on the olive-green door. But the purple
door had the same symbol on it, and Bastian didn’t know that Atreyu’s cloak had been
ornamented with just such symbols. That door, he thought, must lead to someone else,
not to Atreyu.
He opened the olive-green door — and then he was outside.
To his surprise he found himself not in the Grassy Ocean but in a bright
springtime forest. Sunbeams shone through the young foliage and played their games of
light and shade on the mossy ground. The place smelled of earth and mushrooms and the

balmy air was filled with the twittering of birds.
Bastian turned around and saw that he had just stepped out of a little forest chapel.
For that moment its door had been the way out of the Temple of a Thousand Doors.
Bastian opened it again, but all he saw was the inside of a small chapel. The roof
consisted only of a few rotten beams, and the walls were covered with moss.
Bastian started walking. He had no idea where he was going, but he felt certain
that sooner or later he would find Atreyu. The thought made him so happy that he
whistled to the birds, who answered him and sang every merry tune that entered his head.
A while later he caught sight of a group of figures in a clearing. As he came
closer, they proved to be four men in magnificent armor and a beautiful lady, who was
sitting on the grass, strumming a lute. Five richly caparisoned horses and a pack mule
were standing in the background. A white cloth laid with all manner of viands and drink
was spread out on the grass before the company.
Before joining the group, Bastian hid the Childlike Empress’s amulet under his
shirt. He thought it best to see what these people were up to before allowing himself to be
recognized.
The men stood up and bowed low at his approach, evidently taking him for an
Oriental prince or something of the kind. The fair lady nodded, smiled at him, and went
on strumming her lute. One of the men was taller than the rest and more magnificently
clad. He had fair hair that hung down over his shoulders.
“I am Hero Hynreck,” he announced, “and this lady is Princess Oglamar, daughter
of the king of Luna. These men are my friends Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn. And what
may your name be, young friend?”
“I may not say my name — not yet,” Bastian replied.
“A vow?” Princess Oglamar asked on a note of mockery. “So young, and you’ve
already made a vow?”
“Have you come a long way?” Hero Hynreck inquired.
“A very long way,” Bastian replied.
“Are you a prince?” asked the princess with a gracious smile.
“That I may not reveal,” said Bastian
“Well, welcome in any case to our gathering!” cried Hero Hynreck. “Will you
honor us by partaking of our repast?”
Bastian accepted with thanks, sat down, and began to eat.
From the conversation between the lady and the four knights Bastian learned that
a tournament was to be held in the large and magnificent Silver City of Amarganth,
which was not far distant. From far and near the boldest heroes, the most skillful hunters,
the bravest warriors, and all manner of adventurers as well, had come to take part. Only
the three bravest and best, who defeated all the others, were to have the honor of joining
in a long and perilous expedition, the aim of which was to find a certain person, the so-
called Savior, who was known to be somewhere in one of the numerous regions of
Fantastica. Thus far no one knew his name. It appeared that at some time in the past
Fantastica had been struck by disaster, but that this Savior had appeared on the scene and
saved it in the nick of time by giving the Childlike Empress the name of Moon Child, by
which she was now known to everyone in Fantastica. Since then he had been wandering
about the country unknown, and the purpose of the expedition was to find him and keep
him safe by serving him as a kind of bodyguard. Only the bravest and ablest men would

be chosen for the mission, since it seemed more than likely that formidable adventures
awaited them.
The tournament at which the three were to be chosen had been organized by
Querquobad, the Silver Sage — the city of Amarganth was always ruled by its oldest man
or woman, and Querquobad was a hundred and seven years old. The winners, however,
would not be selected by him, but by one Atreyu, a young Greenskin, who was then
visiting Sage Querquobad. This Atreyu was to lead the expedition. For he alone was
capable of recognizing the Savior, since he had seen him once in his magic mirror.
Bastian listened in silence. It wasn’t easy for him, for he soon realized that this
Savior was his very own self. And when Atreyu’s name came up, his heart laughed within
him, and he found it very hard not to give himself away. But he was determined to keep
his identity a secret for the present.
Hero Hynreck, as it turned out, was not so much concerned with the expedition as
with the heart of Princess Oglamar. Bastian had seen at a glance that he was head over
heels in love with the young lady. For no apparent reason he kept sighing and casting
mournful glances at her. And she would pretend not to notice. As Bastian learned later
on, she had vowed to marry no one but the greatest of all heroes, who proved himself
able to defeat all others. She wouldn’t be satisfied with less. But how could Hero Hynreck
prove that he was the greatest? After all, he couldn’t just go out and kill someone who
had done him no harm. And as for wars, there hadn’t been any for ages. He would gladly
have fought monsters or demons, he would gladly have brought her a fresh dragon’s tail
for breakfast every morning, but far and wide there were no monsters, demons, or
dragons to be found. So naturally, when the messenger from Querquobad, the Silver
Sage, had invited him to the tournament, he had accepted forthwith. But Princess
Oglamar had insisted on coming along, for she wanted to see his performance with her
own eyes.
“Everybody knows,” she said with a smile, “that heroes are not to be believed.
They all tend to exaggerate their achievements.”
“Exaggeration or not,” said Hero Hynreck, “I can assure you that I’m a better man
than this legendary Savior.”
“How can you know that?” Bastian asked.
“Well,” said Hero Hynreck, “if the fellow was half as strong and brave as I am, he
wouldn’t need a bodyguard to take care of him. He sounds kind of pathetic to me.”
“How can you say such a thing!” cried Oglamar with indignation. “Didn’t he save
Fantastica from destruction?”
“What of it!” said Hero Hynreck with a sneer. “That didn’t take much of a hero.”
Bastian decided to teach him a little lesson at the first opportunity.
The three other knights had merely fallen in with the couple en route. Hykrion,
who had a bristling black moustache, claimed to be the most powerful swordsman in all
Fantastica. Hysbald, who had red hair and seemed frail in comparison with the others,
claimed that no one was quicker and more nimble with a sword than he. And Hydorn was
convinced that he had no equal for endurance in combat. His exterior seemed to support
his contention, for he was tall and lean, all bone and sinew.
After the meal they prepared to resume their journey. The crockery and provisions
were packed into the saddlebags. Princess Oglamar mounted her white palfrey and trotted
off without so much as a backward look at the others. Hero Hynreck leapt on his coal-

black stallion and galloped after her. The three other knights offered Bastian a ride on
their pack mule, which he accepted. Whereupon they started through the forest on their
splendidly caparisoned steeds, while Bastian brought up the rear. Bastian’s mount, an
aged she-mule, dropped farther and farther behind. Bastian tried to goad her on, but
instead of quickening her pace, the mule stopped still, twisted her neck to look back at
him, and said: “Don’t urge me on, sire, I’ve lagged behind on purpose.”
“Why?” Bastian asked.
“Because I know who you are.”
“How can that be?”
“When a person is only half an ass like me, and not a complete one, she senses
certain things. Even the horses had an inkling. You needn’t say anything, sire. I’d have
been so glad to tell my children and grandchildren that I carried the Savior on my back
and was first to welcome him. Unfortunately mules don’t get children.”
“What’s your name?” Bastian asked.
“Yikka, sire.”
“Look here, Yikka. Don’t spoil my fun. Could you keep what you know to
yourself for the time being?”
“Gladly, sire.”
And the mule trotted off to catch up with the others.
The group were waiting on a knoll at the edge of the forest, looking down with
wonderment at the city of Amarganth, which lay gleaming in the sunlight before them.
From the height where they stood, the travelers had a broad view over a large, violet blue
lake, surrounded on all sides by similar wooded hills. In the middle of this lake lay the
Silver City of Amarganth. The houses were all supported by boats, and the larger palaces
by great barges. Every house and every ship was made of finely chiseled, delicately
ornamented silver. The windows and doors of the palaces great and small, the towers and
balconies, were all of finely wrought silver filigree, unequaled in all Fantastica. The lake
was studded with boats of all sizes, carrying visitors to the city from the mainland. Hero
Hynreck and his companions hastened down to the shore, where a silver ferry with a
magnificently curved prow was waiting. There was room in it for the whole company,
horses, pack mule, and all.
On the way over, Bastian learned from the ferryman, whose clothes were of
woven silver, that the violet-blue water of the lake was so salty and bitter that only silver,
and a special kind of silver at that, could withstand its corrosive action for any length of
time. The name of this lake was Moru, or Lake of Tears. In times long past the people of
Amarganth had ferried their city to the middle of the lake to protect it from invasion,
since ships of wood or iron were quick to disintegrate in the acrid water. And at present
there was yet another reason for leaving Amarganth in the middle of the lake, for the
inhabitants had got into the habit of regrouping their houses and moving their streets and
squares about when the fancy struck them. Suppose, for instance, that two families, living
at opposite ends of town, made friends or intermarried. Why, then they would simply
move their silver ships close together and become neighbors.
Bastian would gladly have heard more, but the ferry had reached the city, and he
had to get out with his traveling companions.
Their first concern was to find lodgings for themselves and their mounts — no
easy matter, since Amarganth was literally overrun by visitors who had come from far

and near for the tournament. At length they found lodgings in an inn.
After taking the she-mule to the stable, Bastian whispered in her ear: “Don’t forget
your promise, Yikka. I’ll be seeing you soon again.”
Yikka nodded.
Then Bastian told his traveling companions that he didn’t wish to be a burden to
them any longer and would look about the town on his own. After thanking them for their
kindness, he took his leave. Actually he was intent on finding Atreyu.
The large and small boats were connected by gangplanks, some so narrow that
only one person could cross them at a time, others as wide as good-sized streets. There
were also arched bridges with roofs over them, and in the canals between the palace-ships
hundreds of small boats were moving back and forth. But wherever you went or stood,
you felt a gentle rise and fall underfoot, just enough to remind you that the whole city
was afloat.
The visitors, who had literally flooded the city, were so varied and colorful that it
would take a whole book to describe them. The Amarganthians were easy to recognize,
for they all wore clothes of a silver fabric that was almost as fine as Bastian’s mantle.
Their hair too was silver; they were tall and well-built, and their eyes were as violet-blue
as Moru, the Lake of Tears. Most of the visitors were not quite so attractive. There were
muscle-bound giants with heads that seemed no larger than apples between their huge
shoulders. There were sinister-looking night-rowdies, bold, solitary individuals whom, as
one could see at a glance, it was best not to tangle with. There were flimflams with shifty
eyes and nimble fingers, and berserkers with smoke coming out of their mouths and
noses. There were topsy-turvies who spun like living tops and wood-goblins who trotted
about on gnarled, crooked legs, carrying stout clubs over their shoulders. Once Bastian
even saw a rock chewer, with teeth like steel chisels jutting out of his mouth. The silver
gangplank bent under his weight as he came stomping along. But before Bastian could
ask him if by any chance he was Pyornkrachzark, he had vanished in the crowd.
At length Bastian reached the center of the city, where the tournament was
already in full swing. In a circular open space that looked like a giant arena, hundreds of
contestants were measuring their strength, showing their mettle. Around the edges a
crowd of onlookers egged the participants on, and the windows and balconies of the
surrounding palace-ships were packed with enthusiasts. Some had even managed to climb
up on the filigree-ornamented roofs.
At first Bastian paid little attention to the tournament. He was looking for Atreyu,
feeling sure that he must be somewhere in the crowd. Then he noticed that the onlookers
kept turning expectantly toward one of the palaces — especially when a contestant had
performed some particularly impressive feat. But before he could get a good look at the
palace, Bastian had to thrust his way across one of the bridges and climb a sort of
lamppost.
Two silver chairs had been set up on a wide balcony. In one sat an aged man
whose silver beard and hair hung down to his waist. That must be Querquobad, the Silver
Sage. Beside him sat a boy of about Bastian’s age. He was wearing long trousers made of
soft leather, but he was bare from the waist up, and Bastian saw that his skin was olive
green. The expression of his lean face was grave, almost stern. His long, blue-black hair
was gathered together and held back by leather thongs. Over his shoulders he wore a
purple cloak. He was looking calmly and yet somehow eagerly down at the arena.

Nothing seemed to escape his dark eyes. Who could it be but Atreyu!
At that moment an enormous face appeared in the open balcony door behind
Atreyu. It looked rather like a lion’s, except that it had white mother-of-pearl scales
instead of fur, and long white fangs jutted out of the mouth. The eyeballs sparkled ruby
red, and when the head rose high above Atreyu, Bastian saw that it rested on a long,
supple neck, from which hung a mane that looked like white fire. Of course, it was Falkor
the luckdragon, and he seemed to be whispering something in Atreyu’s ear, for Atreyu
nodded.
Bastian slid down the lamppost. He had seen enough. Now he could watch the
tournament.
“Tournament” was hardly the right word. The contests that were in progress
added up to something more like a big circus. There was a wrestling match between two
giants, who twined their bodies into one huge knot that kept rolling this way and that;
individuals of like or divergent species vied with one another in swordsmanship or in
skill at handling the club or the lance, but none had any serious intention of killing his
adversary. The rules called for fair fighting and the strictest self-control. Any contestant
so misled by anger or ambition as to injure an opponent seriously would have been
automatically disqualified.
Many defeated combatants had left the arena when Bastian saw Hykrion the
Strong, Hysbald the Swift, and Hydorn the Enduring make their appearance. Hero
Hynreck and Princess Oglamar were not with them.
By then there were scarcely more than a hundred contestants left. Since these
were a selection from among the best and strongest, Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn had a
much harder time of it than they may have expected. It took all afternoon for Hykrion to
prove himself the strongest among the strong, Hysbald the swiftest among the swift, and
Hydorn the most enduring among the enduring. The onlookers applauded with a will and
all three bowed in the direction of the balcony, where Silver Sage Querquobad and
Atreyu were sitting. Atreyu was getting up to say something when yet another contestant
appeared — Hynreck. An expectant silence fell and Atreyu sat down. Since only three
men were to accompany him on his expedition, there was one too many in the field. One
would have to withdraw.
“Sires,” said Hynreck in a loud voice, “I would not suggest that your strength can
have been impaired by the little display you have just made of your abilities. Under the
circumstances, however, it would be unworthy of me to challenge you singly. Since I
have thus far seen no adversary up to my standards, I have not participated in the
contests. Consequently, I am still fresh. If any of you should feel too exhausted, he is free
to staud aside. Otherwise, I am prepared to face all three of you at once. Any objections?”
“No!” replied all three in unison.
A furious battle followed. Hykrion’s blows had lost none of their force, but Hero
Hynreck was stronger. Hysbald assailed him from all sides like streaks of lightning, but
Hynreck was quicker. Hydorn tried to wear him down, but Hero Hynreck had greater
endurance. After barely ten minutes all three were disarmed and all three bent their knees
to Hero Hynreck. He looked proudly about him, evidently hoping for an admiring glance
from his lady, who must have been somewhere in the crowd. The cheers of the onlookers
swept over the arena like a hurricane and could no doubt be heard on the farthermost
shore of Lake Moru.

When the applause died down, Querquobad, the Silver Sage, stood up and asked
in a loud voice: “Does anyone wish to oppose Hero Hynreck?”
A hush fell on the crowd. Then a boy’s voice was heard: “Yes! I do!”
All eyes turned toward Bastian. The crowd opened a path for him and he strode
into the arena. Cries of amazement and pity were heard. “How handsome he is!” “What a
shame!” “This must be stopped!”
“Who are you?” asked Silver Sage Querquobad.
“I will reveal my name afterward,” said Bastian.
He saw that Atreyu had narrowed his eyes and was studying him closely, but had
not yet made up his mind.
“Young friend,” said Hero Hynreck. “We have eaten and drunk together. Why do
you want me to put you to shame? I pray you, withdraw your challenge and go away.”
“No,” said Bastian. “I meant what I said.”
Hero Hynreck hesitated a moment. Then he said: “It would be wrong of me to
measure myself in combat with you. Let us first see who can shoot an arrow higher.”
“Very well!” said Bastian.
A stout bow and an arrow were brought for each of them. Hynreck drew the
bowstring and shot the arrow so high that the eye could not follow. At almost the same
moment Bastian pulled his bowstring and shot his arrow after it.
It was some time before the arrows came down and fell to the ground between the
two archers. Then it became evident that Bastian’s red-feathered arrow had struck Hero
Hynreck’s blue-feathered arrow at its apogee with such force as to split it open and wedge
itself into it.
Hero Hynreck stared at the telescoped arrows. He had turned rather pale, but his
cheeks had broken out in red spots.
“That can only be an accident,” he muttered. “Let’s see who does better with the
foils.”
He asked for two foils and two decks of cards. Both were brought. He shuffled
both decks of cards carefully.
Then he threw one deck high into the air, drew his blade with the speed of
lightning, and thrust. When all the other cards had fallen to the ground, it could be seen
that he had struck the ace of hearts in the center of its one heart. And holding up his foil
with the card spitted on it, he again looked about for his lady.
Then Bastian tossed the other deck into the air and his blade flashed. Not a single
card fell to the ground. He had pierced all fifty-two cards of the deck exactly in the
middle and moreover in the right order — though Hero Hynreck had shuffled them ever
so carefully.
Hero Hynreck looked at the cards. He said nothing, but his lips trembled.
“But you won’t outdo me in strength,” he stammered finally.
A number of weights were still lying about from the previous contests. He seized
the heaviest and slowly, straining every muscle, lifted it. But before he could set it down,
Bastian had grabbed hold of him and lifted him along with the weight. Hero Hynreck’s
face took on a look of such misery that some of the onlookers could not repress a smile.
“Thus far,” said Bastian, “you have chosen the nature of our contests. Will you
allow me to suggest something?”
Hero Hynreck nodded in silence. “Nothing can daunt my courage.”

“In that case,” said Bastian, “I propose a swimming race. Across the Lake of
Tears.”
A breathless silence fell on the assemblage.
Hero Hynreck turned red and pale by turns.
“That’s no test of courage,” he expostulated. “It’s madness.”
“I’m ready,” said Bastian.
At that Hero Hynreck lost his self-control.
“No!” he shouted, stamping his foot. “You know as well as I do that the water of
Moru dissolves everything. It would be certain death.”
“I’m not afraid,” said Bastian calmly. “I’ve crossed the Desert of Colors. I’ve eaten
and drunk the fire of the Many-Colored Death and bathed in it. I’m not afraid of any
water.”
“You’re lying!” roared Hero Hynreck, purple with rage. “No one in all Fantastica
can survive the Many-Colored Death. Any child knows that.”
“Hero Hynreck,” said Bastian slowly. “Instead of calling me a liar, why not admit
that you’re just plain scared?”
That was too much for Hero Hynreck. Beside himself with rage, he drew his big
sword from its sheath and flung himself on Bastian. Bastian stepped back. He was about
to say a word of warning, but Hero Hynreck didn’t leave him time. He struck out in
earnest, and in that same moment the sword Sikanda leapt from its rusty sheath into
Bastian’s hand, and began to dance.
What happened next was so amazing that not one of the onlookers would forget it
as long as he lived. Luckily Bastian couldn’t let go of the hilt and was obliged to follow
all Sikanda’s lightning-like movements. First it sliced Hero Hynreck’s lovely armor into
little pieces. They flew in all directions, but his skin was not even scratched. Hero
Hynreck swung his sword like a madman in a desperate effort to defend himself, but he
was blinded by Sikanda’s whirling light, and none of his blows struck home. At length he
was stripped to his underclothes, but still he went on fighting. And then Sikanda cut his
weapon into little bits so quickly that what had been a whole sword only a moment before
fell tinkling to the ground like a pile of coins. Hero Hynreck stared aghast at the useless
hilt, dropped it, and hung his head. Sikanda left Bastian’s hand and flew back into its
rusty sheath.
A cry of admiration rose from a thousand throats. The onlookers stormed the
arena, seized Bastian, lifted him onto their shoulders, and carried him around in triumph.
From his lofty perch Bastian looked for Hero Hynreck. He felt sorry for the poor fellow
and wanted to give him a kind word; he hadn’t intended to make such a fool out of him.
But Hero Hynreck was nowhere to be seen.
Then silence fell. The crowd moved aside. There stood Atreyu, smiling up at
Bastian. Bastian smiled back. His bearers let him down from their shoulders. For a long
while the two boys looked at each other in silence. Then Atreyu spoke:
“If I still needed someone to accompany me on the search for the Savior of
Fantastica, I would content myself with just this one, for he is worth more than a hundred
others. But I need no companion, because there will be no expedition.”
A murmur of surprise and disappointment was heard.
“The Savior of Fantastica has no need of our protection,” Atreyu went on, raising
his voice, “for he can defend himself better than all of us together could defend him. And

we have no need to look for him, because he has already found us. I didn’t recognize him
at first, for when I saw him in the Magic Mirror Gate of the Southern Oracle, he was
different from now — entirely different. But I didn’t forget the look in his eyes. It’s the
same look that I see now. I couldn’t be mistaken.”
Bastian shook his head and said with a smile: “You’re not mistaken, Atreyu. It
was you who brought me to the Childlike Empress to give her a new name. And for that I
thank you.”
An awed whisper passed over the crowd like a gust of wind.
“You promised,” Atreyu replied, “to tell me your name, which is known to no one
in Fantastica except the Golden-eyed Commander of Wishes. Will you tell us now?”
“My name is Bastian Balthazar Bux.”
At that the onlookers could contain themselves no longer. Their rejoicing
exploded in a thousand cheers. Many of them started dancing. Bridges and gangplanks,
the whole square for that matter, began to sway.
Laughing, Atreyu held out his hand to Bastian. Bastian took it, and so — hand in
hand — they went to the palace. Silver Sage Querquobad and Falkor the luckdragon were
waiting on the palace steps.
That night the city of Amarganth staged the finest celebration in all its history. All
who had legs, long or short, straight or crooked, danced, and all who had voices, sweet or
sour, high or low, sang and laughed.
When night fell, the Amarganthians lit thousands of colored lamps on their silver
ships and palaces. And at midnight there were fireworks such as had never been seen in
Fantastica. Bastian stood on the balcony with Atreyu. To the left and right of them stood
Falkor and Silver Sage Querquobad, watching as sheaves of many-colored light and the
Silver City’s thousands of lamps were reflected in the dark waters of Moru, the Lake of
Tears.
XVII
A Dragon for Hero Hynreck
uerquobad, the Silver Sage, had slumped down in his chair asleep, for already the
hour was late. Consequently, he missed an experience more beautiful and more
extraordinary than any he had known in the hundred and seven years of his life. And so
did many others in Amarganth, citizens as well as visitors, who, exhausted by the
festivities, had gone to bed. Only a few were still awake, and those few were uniquely
privileged:
Falkor, the white luckdragon, was singing.
High in the night sky, he flew in circles over the Lake of Tears, and let his bell-

like voice ring out in a song without words, a simple, grandiose song of pure joy. The
hearts of all those who heard it opened wide.
And so it was with Bastian and Atreyu, who were sitting side by side on the broad
balcony of Querquobad’s palace. Neither had ever heard the song of a luckdragon before.
Hand in hand, they listened in silent delight. Each knew that the other shared his feeling,
a feeling of joy at having found a friend. And they took care not to spoil it with idle
words.
The great hour passed. Falkor’s song grew faint and gradually died away.
When all was still, Querquobad woke up and excused himself: “I’m afraid,” he
said, “that old men like me need their sleep. I’m sure you youngsters will forgive me, I
must really be off to bed.”
They wished him a good night and Querquobad left them.
Again the two friends sat for a long while in silence, looking up at the night sky,
where the luckdragon was still flying in great slow circles. From time to time he passed
across the full moon like a drifting cloud.
“Doesn’t Falkor ever sleep?” Bastian asked finally.
“He’s asleep now,” Atreyu replied.
“In the air?”
“Oh yes. He doesn’t like to stay in houses, even when they’re as big as
Querquobad’s palace. He feels cramped. He’s just too big and he’s afraid of knocking
things over. So he usually sleeps way up in the air.”
“Do you think he’d let me ride him sometime?”
“Of course he would,” said Atreyu. “Though it’s not so easy. You’ve got to get
used to it.”
“I’ve already ridden Grograman,” said Bastian.
Atreyu nodded and looked at him with admiration.
“So you said during your contest with Hero Hynreck. How did you tame the
Many-Colored Death?”
“I have AURYN,” said Bastian.
“Oh!” said Atreyu. He seemed surprised, but he said nothing more.
Bastian took the Childlike Empress’s emblem from under his shirt and showed it
to Atreyu. Atreyu looked at it for a while. Then he muttered: “So now you are wearing
the Gem.”
Thinking he detected a note of displeasure, Bastian hastened to ask: “Would you
like to have it back?”
He started undoing the chain.
“No!”
Atreyu’s voice sounded almost harsh, and Bastian wondered what was wrong.
Atreyu smiled apologetically and repeated gently: “No, Bastian, I haven’t worn it in a
long while.”
“As you like,” said Bastian. Then he turned the amulet over. “Look,” he said.
“Have you seen the inscription?”
“Yes,” said Atreyu. “I’ve seen it, but I don’t know what it says.”
“How come?”
“Greenskins can read tracks in the forest, but not letters.”
This time it was Bastian who said: “Oh!”

” ‘DO WHAT YOU WISH,’ ” Bastian read.
Atreyu stared at the amulet.
“So that’s what it says.” His face revealed nothing, and Bastian couldn’t guess
what he was thinking.
“If you had known,” he asked, “would it have changed anything for you?”
“No,” said Atreyu. “I did what I wanted to do.”
“That’s true,” said Bastian, and nodded.
Again they were both silent for a time.
“There’s something I have to ask you,” said Bastian finally. “You said I looked
different from when you saw me in the Magic Mirror Gate.”
“Yes, entirely different.”
“In what way?”
“You were fat and pale and you were wearing different clothes.”
Bastian smiled. “Fat and pale?” he asked incredulously. “Are you sure it was me?”
“Wasn’t it?”
Bastian thought it over.
“You saw me. I know that. But I’ve always been the way I am now.”
“Really and truly?”
“I should know. Shouldn’t I?” Bastian cried.
“Yes,” said Atreyu, looking at him thoughtfully. “YOU should know.”
“Maybe it was a deforming mirror.”
Atreyu shook his head.
“I don’t think so.”
“Then how do you explain your seeing me that way?”
“I don’t know,” Atreyu admitted. “I only know that I wasn’t mistaken.”
After that they were silent for a long while, and at length they went to sleep.
As Bastian lay in his bed, the head and foot of which were made of the finest
silver filigree, his conversation with Atreyu ran through his head. Somehow it seemed to
him that Atreyu was less impressed by his victory over Hero Hynreck and even by his
stay with Grograman since he heard that he, Bastian, was wearing the Gem. And true
enough, he thought, maybe his feats didn’t amount to much, considering that he had the
amulet to protect him. But he wanted to win Atreyu’s wholehearted admiration.
He thought and thought. There had to be something that no one in Fantastica
could do, even with the amulet. Something of which only he, Bastian, was capable.
At last it came to him: making up stories.
Time and time again he had heard it said that no one in Fantastica could create
anything new. Even the voice of Uyulala had said something of the kind. And just that
was his special gift. He would show Atreyu that he, Bastian, was a great storyteller.
He resolved to prove himself to his friend at the first opportunity. Maybe the very
next day. For instance, there might be a storytelling contest, and he would put all others
in the shade with his inventions!
Or better still: suppose all the stories he told should come true! Hadn’t Grograman
said that Fantastica was the land of stories and that even something long past could be
born again if it occurred in a story.
Atreyu would be amazed!

And while picturing Atreyu’s amazement, Bastian fell asleep.
The next morning, as they were enjoying a copious breakfast in the banquet hall
of the palace, Silver Sage Querquobad said: “We have decided to hold a very special sort
of festival for the benefit of our guest, the Savior of Fantastica, and his friend, who
brought him to us. Perhaps, Bastian Balthazar Bux, it is unknown to you that in keeping
with an age-old tradition we Amarganthians have always been the ballad singers and
storytellers of Fantastica. From an early age our children are instructed in these skills.
When they grow to adulthood they journey from country to country for several years,
practising their art for the benefit of all. Everywhere they are welcomed with joy and
respect. But we have one regret: Quite frankly, our stock of stories is small. And many of
us must share this little. But word has gone round — whether true or not, I don’t know —
that you, in your world, are famous for your stories. Is that the truth?”
“Yes,” said Bastian. “They even made fun of me for it.”
Silver Sage Querquobad raised his eyebrows in disbelief.
“Made fun of you for telling stories that no one had ever heard? How is that
possible? None of us can make up new stories, and we, my fellow citizens and I, would
all be infinitely grateful if you would give us a few. Will you help us with your genius?”
“With pleasure,” said Bastian.
After breakfast Bastian, Atreyu, and the Silver Sage went out to the steps of
Querquobad’s palace, where Falkor was already waiting for them.
A large crowd had gathered, but on this occasion it included few of the outsiders
who had come for the tournament and consisted largely of Amarganthians, men, women,
and children, all comely and blue-eyed, and all clad in silver. Most were carrying stringed
instruments, harps, lyres, guitars, or lutes, all of silver. For almost everyone there hoped
to display his art in the presence of Bastian and Atreyu.
Again chairs had been put in place. Bastian sat in the middle between Querquobad
and Atreyu, and Falkor stood behind them.
Querquobad clapped his hands. When the crowd fell silent, he announced: “The
great storyteller is going to grant our wish and make us a present of some new stories.
Therefore, friends, give us your best, to put him in the right mood.”
The Amarganthians all bowed low. Then the first stepped forward and began to
recite. After him came another and still others. All had fine, resonant voices and told their
stories well.
Some of their tales were exciting, others merry or sad, but it would take us too
long to tell them here. In all, there were no more than a hundred different stories. Then
they began to repeat themselves. Those who came last could only tell what their
predecessors had told before them.
Bastian grew more and more agitated while waiting for his turn. His last night’s
wish had been fulfilled to the letter, and he could hardly bear the excitement of waiting to
see whether everything else would come true as well. He kept casting glances at Atreyu,
but Atreyu’s face was impassive, showing no sign of what he might be thinking.
At length Querquobad bade his compatriots desist and turned to Bastian with a
sigh: “I told you, Bastian Balthazar Bux, that our stock of tales was small. It’s not our
fault. Won’t you give us a few of yours?”
“I will give you all the stories I’ve ever told,” said Bastian, “For I can always think
up new ones. I told many of them to a little girl named Kris Ta, but most I thought up

only for myself. No one else has heard them. But it would take weeks and months to tell
them all, and we can’t stay with you that long. So I’ve decided to tell you a story that
contains all the others in it. It’s called ‘The Story of the Library of Amarganth,’ and it’s
very short.” Then after a moment’s thought he plunged in:
“In the gray dawn of time, the city of Amarganth was ruled by a Silver Sagess
named Quana. In those long-past days Moru, the Lake of Tears, hadn’t been made yet,
nor was Amarganth built of the special silver that withstands the water of Moru. It was
still like other cities with houses of stone and wood. And it lay in a valley among wooded
hills.
“Quana had a son named Quin, who was a great hunter. One day in the forest
Quin caught sight of a unicorn, which had a glittering stone at the end of its horn. He
killed the beast and took the stone home with him. His crime (for it is a crime to kill
unicorns) brought misfortune on the city. From then on fewer and fewer children were
born to the inhabitants. If no remedy were found, the city would die out. But the unicorn
couldn’t be brought back to life, and no one knew what to do.
“Quana, the Silver Sagess, sent a messenger to consult Uyulala in the Southern
Oracle. But the Southern Oracle was far away. The messenger was young when he started
out, but old by the time he got back. Quana had long been dead and her son Quin had
taken her place. He too, of course, was very old, as were all the other inhabitants. There
were only two children left, a boy and a girl. His name was Aquil, hers was Muqua.
“The messenger reported what Uyulala’s voice had revealed. The only way of
preserving Amarganth was to make it the most beautiful city in all Fantastica. That alone
would make amends for Quin’s crime. But to do so the Amarganthians would need the
help of the Acharis, who are the ugliest beings in Fantastica. Because they are so ugly
they weep uninterruptedly, and for that reason they are also known as the Weepers. Their
stream of tears wash the special silver deep down in the earth, and from it they make the
most wonderful filigree.
“All the Amarganthians went looking for the Acharis, but were unable to find
them, for they live deep down in the earth. At length only Aquil and Muqua were left.
They had grown up and all the others had died. Together they managed to find the
Acharis and persuade them to make Amarganth the most beautiful city in Fantastica.
“First the Acharis built a small filigree palace, set it on a silver barge, and moved
it to the marketplace of the dead city. Then they made their streams of underground tears
well up in the valley among the wooded hills. The bitter water filled the valley and
became Moru, the Lake of Tears. On it the first silver palace floated, and in the palace
dwelt Aquil and Muqua.
“But the Acharis had granted the plea of Aquil and Muqua on one condition,
namely, that they and all their descendants should devote their lives to ballad singing and
storytelling. As long as they did so, the Acharis would help them, because then their
ugliness would help to create beauty.
“So Aquil and Muqua founded a library — the famous library of Amarganth — in
which they stored up all my stories. They began with the one you have just heard, but
little by little they added all those I have ever told, and in the end there were so many
stories that their numerous descendants, who now inhabit the Silver City, will never come
to the end of them.
“If Amarganth, the most beautiful city in Fantastica, is still in existence today, it is

because the Acharis and the Amarganthians kept their promise to each other — though
today the Amarganthians have quite forgotten the Acharis and the Acharis have quite
forgotten the Amarganthians. Only the name of Moru, the Lake of Tears, recalls that
episode from the gray dawn of history.”
When Bastian had finished, Silver Sage Querquobad rose slowly from his chair.
“Bastian Balthazar Bux,” he said, smiling blissfully. “You have given us more
than a story and more than all the stories in the world. You have given us our own
history. Now we know where Moru and the silver ships and palaces on it came from.
Now we know why we have always, from the earliest times, been a people of ballad
singers and storytellers. And best of all, we know what is in that great round building in
the middle of the city, which none of us, since the founding of Amarganth, has ever
entered, because it has always been locked. It contains our greatest treasure and we never
knew it. It contains the library of Amarganth.”
Bastian himself could hardly believe it. Everything in his story had become reality
(or had it always been? Grograman would probably have said: both!). In any event he
was eager to see all this with his own eyes.
“Where is this building?” he asked.
“I will show you,” said Querquobad, and turning to the crowd, he cried: “Come
along, all of you! Perhaps we shall be favored with more wonders.”
A long procession, headed by the Silver Sage, Bastian, and Atreyu, moved over
the gangplanks connecting the silver ships with one another and finally stopped outside a
large building which rested on a circular ship and was shaped like a huge silver box. The
outside walls were smooth, without ornaments or windows. It had only one large door,
and that door was locked.
In the center of the smooth silver door there was a stone set in a kind of ring. It
looked like a piece of common glass. Over it the following inscription could be read:
Removed from the unicorn’s horn, I lost my light.
I shall keep the door locked until my light
is rekindled by him who calls me by name.
For him I will shine a hundred years.
I will guide him in the dark depths
of Yor’s Minroud.
But if he says my name a second time
from the end to the beginning,
I will glow in one moment
with the light of a hundred years.
“None of us can interpret this inscription,” said Querquobad. “None of us knows
what the words ‘Yor’s Minroud’ mean. None of us to this day has ever discovered the
stone’s name, though we have all tried time and again. For we can only use names that
already exist in Fantastica. And since these are all names of other things, none of us has
made the stone glow or opened the door. Can you find the name, Bastian Balthazar Bux?”
A deep, expectant silence fell on the Amarganthians and non-Amarganthians
alike.
“Al Tsahir!” cried Bastian.
In that moment the stone glowed bright and jumped straight from its setting into
Bastian’s hand. The door opened.

A gasp of amazement arose from a thousand throats.
Holding the glowing stone in his hand, Bastian entered the building, followed by
Querquobad and Atreyu. The crowd surged in behind them.
It was dark in the large circular room and Bastian held the stone high. Though
brighter than a candle, it was not enough to light the whole room but showed only that the
walls were lined with tier upon tier of books.
Attendants appeared with lamps. In the bright light it could be seen that the walls
of books were divided into sections, bearing signs such as “Funny Stories,” “Serious
Stories,” “Exciting Stories,” and so on.
In the center of the circular room, the floor was inlaid with an inscription so large
that no one could fail to see it:
LIBRARY
OF THE COLLECTED WORKS
OF BASTIAN BALTHAZAR BUX
Atreyu looked around in amazement. Bastian saw to his delight that his friend was
overcome with admiration.
“Is it true,” asked Atreyu, pointing at the silver shelves all around, “that you made
up all those stories?”
“Yes,” said Bastian, slipping Al Tsahir into his pocket.
Atreyu could only stand and gape.
“I just can’t understand it,” he said.
The Amarganthians had flung themselves on the books and were leafing through
them or reading to one another. Some sat down on the floor and began to learn passages
by heart.
News of the great event spread though the whole city like wildfire.
As Bastian and Atreyu were leaving the library, they ran into Hykrion, Hysbald,
and Hydorn.
“Sir Bastian,” said the red-haired Hysbald, evidently the deftest of the three not
only with the sword but with his tongue as well, “we have heard about your incomparable
gifts, and humbly pray you: Take us into your service and let us accompany you on your
further travels. Each one of us longs to acquire a story of his own. And though you surely
have no need of our protection, you may derive some advantage from the service of three
such able and willing knights. Will you have us?”
“Gladly,” said Bastian. “Anyone would be proud of such companions.”
The three knights wished to swear fealty by Bastian’s sword, but he held them
back.
“Sikanda,” he explained, “is a magic sword. No one can touch it without mortal
peril, unless he has eaten, drunk, and bathed in the fire of the Many-Colored Death.”
So they had to content themselves with a friendly handshake.
“What has become of Hero Hynreck?” Bastian asked.
“He’s a broken man,” said Hykrion.
“Because of his lady,” Hydorn added.
“Perhaps you can do something to help him,” said Hysbald.
All five of them went to the inn where they had stopped on their arrival in

Amarganth and where Bastian had brought Yikka to the stable.
When they entered, one man was sitting there, bent over the table, his hands
buried in his fair hair. The man was Hynreck.
Evidently he had had a change of armor in his luggage, for the outfit he was now
wearing was rather simpler than the one that had been cut to pieces the day before.
In response to Bastian’s greeting, he merely stared. His eyes were rimmed with
red.
When Bastian asked leave to sit down with him, he shrugged his shoulders,
nodded, and sank back in his chair. Before him on the table was a sheet of paper, which
looked as if it had been many times crumpled and smoothed out again.
“Can you forgive me?” said Bastian.
Hero Hynreck shook his head.
“It’s all over for me,” he said mournfully. “Here. Read it.”
He pushed the note across the table, and Bastian read it.
“I want only the best. You have failed me. Farewell.”
“From Princess Oglamar?” Bastian asked.
Hero Hynreck nodded.
“Immediately after our contest, she mounted her palfrey and rode off to the ferry.
God knows where she is now. I’ll never see her again.”
“Can’t we overtake her?”
“What for?”
“Maybe she’ll change her mind.”
Hero Hynreck gave a bitter laugh.
“You don’t know Princess Oglamar,” he said. “I trained more than ten years to
acquire my different skills. With iron discipline I avoided everything that could have
impaired my physique. I fenced with the greatest fencing masters and wrestled with the
greatest wrestlers, until I could beat them all. I can run faster than a horse, jump higher
than a deer. I am best at everything — or rather, I was until yesterday. At the start she
wouldn’t honor me with a glance, but little by little my accomplishments aroused her
interest. I had every reason to hope — and now I see it was all in vain. How can I live
without hope?”
“Maybe,” Bastian suggested, “you should forget Princess Oglamar. There must be
others you could love just as much.”
“No,” said Hero Hynreck. “I love Princess Oglamar just because she won’t be
satisfied with any but the greatest.”
“I see,” said Bastian. “That makes it difficult. What could you do? Maybe you
could take up a different trade. How about singing? Or poetry?”
Hynreck seemed rather annoyed. “No,” he said flatly. “I’m a hero and that’s that. I
can’t change my profession and I don’t want to. I am what I am.”
“I see,” said Bastian.
All were silent for a time. The three knights cast sympathetic glances at Hero
Hynreck. They understood his plight. Finally Hysbald cleared his throat and turned to
Bastian.
“Sir Bastian,” he said. “I think you could help him.”
Bastian looked at Atreyu, but Atreyu had put on his impenetrable face.
“A hero like Hynreck,” said Hydorn, “is really to be pitied in a world without

monsters. See what I mean?”
No, Bastian didn’t see. Not yet at any rate.
“Monsters,” said Hykrion, winking at Bastian and stroking his huge moustache,
“monsters are indispensable if a hero is to be a hero.”
At last Bastian understood.
“Listen to me, Hero Hynreck,” he said. “When I suggested giving your heart to
another lady, I was only putting your love to the test. The truth is that Princess Oglamar
needs your help right now, and that no one else can save her.”
Hero Hynreck pricked up his ears.
“Is that true, Sir Bastian?”
“It’s true, as you will soon see. Only a few minutes ago Princess Oglamar was
seized and kidnapped.”
“By whom?”
“By one of the most terrible monsters that have ever existed in Fantastica. The
dragon Smerg. She was riding across a clearing in the woods when the monster saw her
from the air, swooped down, lifted her off her palfrey’s back, and carried her away.”
Hynreck jumped up. His eyes flashed, his cheeks were aglow. He clapped his
hands for joy. But then the light went out of his eyes and he sat down.
“That’s not possible,” he said. “There are no more dragons anywhere.”
“You forget, Hero Hynreck, that I come from far away. From much farther than
you have ever been.”
“That’s true,” said Atreyu, joining in for the first time.
“And this monster really carried her away?” Hero Hynreck cried. Then he pressed
both hands to his heart and sighed: “Oh, my adored Oglamar! How you must be
suffering! But never fear, your knight is coming, he is on his way. Tell me, what must I
do? Where must I go?”
“Far, far from here,” Bastian began, “there’s a country called Morgul, or the Land
of the Cold Fire, because flames there are colder than ice. How you are to reach that
country, I can’t tell you, you must find out for yourself. In the center of Morgul there is a
petrified forest called Wodgabay. And in the center of that petrified forest stands the
leaden castle of Ragar. It is surrounded by three moats. The first is full of arsenic, the
second of steaming nitric acid, and the third is swarming with scorpions as big as your
feet. There are no bridges across them, for the lord of the leaden castle is Smerg, the
winged monster. His wings are made of slimy skin and their spread is a hundred feet.
When he isn’t flying, he stands on his hind legs like a gigantic kangaroo. He has the body
of a mangy rat and the tail of a scorpion, with a sting at the end of it. The merest touch of
that sting is fatal. He has the hind legs of a giant grasshopper. His forelegs, however,
which look small and shriveled, resemble the hands of a small child. But don’t let them
fool you, there’s a deadly power in those hands. He can pull in his long neck as a snail
does its feelers. There are three heads on it. One is large and looks like the head of a
crocodile. From its mouth he can spit icy fire. But where a crocodile has its eyes, it has
two protuberances. These are extra heads. One resembles the head of an old man. With it
he can see and hear. But he talks with the second head, which has the wrinkled face of an
old woman.”
While listening to this description, Hero Hynreck went pale.
“What was this monster’s name?” he asked.

“Smerg,” Bastian repeated. “He has been wreaking his mischief for a thousand
years. Because that’s how old he is. It’s always a beautiful maiden that he kidnaps, and
she has to keep house for him until the end of her days. When she dies, he kidnaps
another.”
“Why haven’t I ever heard of this dragon?”
“Smerg flies incredibly far and fast. Up to now he has always chosen other parts
of Fantastica for his raids. Besides, they only happen once in every fifty years or so.”
“Hasn’t any of these maidens ever been rescued?”
“No, that would take a very special sort of hero.”
These words brought the color back to Hero Hynreck’s cheeks. And remembering
what he had learned about dragons, he asked: “Has this Smerg a vulnerable spot?”
“Oh,” said Bastian, “I almost forgot. In the bottommost cellar of Ragar Castle
there’s a lead ax. It’s the only weapon Smerg can be killed with, so naturally he guards it
well. You have to cut off the two smaller heads with it.”
“How do you know all this?” asked Hero Hynreck.
Bastian didn’t have to answer, for at that moment cries of terror were heard in the
street.
“A dragon!” — “A monster!” — “Up there in the sky!” — “Horrible!” — “He’s
coming this way!” — “Run for your lives!” — “No, he’s already got somebody!”
Hero Hynreck rushed out into the street, and all the others followed.
Up in the sky something that looked like a giant bat was flapping its enormous
wings. For a moment, as it came closer, he looked exactly as Bastian had just made him
up. And in his two shriveled, but oh so dangerous little arms, he was clutching a young
lady, who was screaming and struggling with all her might.
“Hynreck!” she screamed. “Hynreck! Hynreck, my hero! Help!”
And then they were gone.
Hynreck had already brought his black stallion from the stable and boarded one of
the silver ferries that crossed to the mainland.
“Faster! Faster!” he could be heard shouting at the ferryman. “I’ll give you
anything you ask! But hurry!”
Bastian looked after him and muttered: “I only hope I haven’t made it too hard for
him.”
Atreyu cast a sidelong glance at Bastian. Then he said softly: “Maybe we should
get going too.”
“Going where?”
“I brought you to Fantastica,” said Atreyu. “I think I ought to help you find the
way back to your own world. You mean to go back sooner or later, don’tyou?”
“Oh,” said Bastian. “I hadn’t thought about it. But you’re right, Atreyu. Yes, of
course you are.”
“You saved Fantastica,” Atreyu went on. “And it seems to me you’ve received
quite a lot in return. I have a hunch that you’re aching to go home and make your own
world well again. Or is there something that keeps you here?”
Bastian, who had forgotten that he hadn’t always been strong, handsome, and
brave, replied: “No, I can’t think of anything.”
Atreyu gave his friend a thoughtful look, and said: “It may be a long, hard
journey. Who knows?”

“Yes,” Bastian agreed. “Who knows? We can start right now if you like.”
Then the three knights had a short friendly argument, because each claimed the
privilege of giving Bastian his horse. Bastian soon settled the matter by asking them for
Yikka, their pack mule. Of course, they thought her unworthy of Bastian, but he insisted,
and in the end they gave in.
While the knights were making ready for the journey, Bastian and Atreyu went to
Querquobad’s palace to thank the Silver Sage for his hospitality and bid him goodbye.
Falkor the luckdragon, who was waiting for Atreyu outside the palace, was delighted to
hear they were leaving. Cities just didn’t appeal to him — even if they were as beautiful as
Amarganth.
Silver Sage Querquobad was deep in a book he had borrowed from the Bastian
Balthazar Bux Library.
“I’m sorry you can’t stay longer,” he said rather absently. “It’s not every day that a
great author like you comes to see us. But at least we have your works to console us.”
Whereupon they took their leave.
After seating himself on Falkor’s back Atreyu asked Bastian: “Didn’t you want to
ride Falkor?”
“Later,” said Bastian. “Now Yikka is waiting for me. And I’ve given her my
promise.”
“Then we’ll wait for you on the mainland,” cried Atreyu. The luckdragon rose into
the air and was soon out of sight.
When Bastian returned to the inn, the three knights were ready. They had taken
the pack saddle off Yikka and replaced it with a richly ornamented riding saddle. Yikka
didn’t learn why until Bastian came over and whispered in her ear: “You belong to me
now, Yikka.”
As the ferry carried them away from the silver city, the old pack mule’s cries of
joy resounded over the bitter waters of Moru, the Lake of Tears.
As for Hero Hynreck he actually succeeded in reaching Morgul, the Land of the
Cold Fire. He ventured into the petrified forest of Wodgabay, crossed the three moats of
Ragar Castle, found the lead ax, and slew the dragon Smerg. Then he brought Oglamar
back to her father. At that point she would gladly have married him. But by then he didn’t
want her anymore. That, however, is another story and shall be told another time.
XVIII
The Acharis
ain was coming down in buckets. The black, wet clouds hung so low they seemed

almost to graze the heads of the riders. Then big, sticky snowflakes began to fall, and in
the end it was snowing and raining in one. The wind was so strong that even the horses
had to brace themselves against it. The riders’ cloaks were soaked through and flapped
heavily against the backs of the beasts.
For the last three days they had been riding over a desolate high plateau. The
weather had been getting steadily worse, and the ground was a mixture of mud and sharp
stones that made for hard going. Here and there the monotony of the landscape was
broken by clumps of bushes or of stunted wind-bowed trees.
Bastian, who rode in the lead on his mule Yikka, was fairly well off with his
glittering silver mantle, which, though light and thin, proved to be remarkably warm and
shed water like a duck. The low-slung body of Hykrion the Strong almost vanished in his
thick blue woolen coat. The delicately built Hysbald had pulled his great loden hood over
his red hair. And Hydorn’s gray canvas cloak clung to his gaunt frame.
Yet in their rather crude way the three knights were of good cheer. They hadn’t
expected their adventure with Sir Bastian to be a Sunday stroll. Now and then, with more
spirit than art, they sang into the storm, sometimes singly and sometimes in chorus. Their
favourite song seemed to be one that began with the words:
“When that I was a little tiny boy,
With hey, ho, the wind and the rain. . .”
As they explained, this had been sung by a human who had visited Fantastica long
years before, name of Shexper, or something of the sort.
The only one in the group who didn’t seem to mind the cold and the rain was
Atreyu. On Falkor’s back he rode high above the clouds, flying far ahead to reconnoiter
and rejoining the company from time to time to report on what he had seen.
They all, even the luckdragon, believed they were looking for the road that would
take Bastian back to his world. Bastian thought so too. He himself didn’t realize that he
had agreed to Atreyu’s suggestion only to oblige his friend and that wasn’t what he really
wanted. But the geography of Fantastica is determined by wishes, which may or may not
be conscious. And since it was Bastian who led the way, they were actually going deeper
and deeper into Fantastica, heading for the Ivory Tower at its very center. What the
consequences for him would be, he wouldn’t learn until much later. For the present,
neither he nor his companions had any idea where they were going.
Bastian’s thoughts were busy with a different problem.
On the second day of their journey, in the forests surrounding the Lake of Tears,
he had seen unmistakable traces of the dragon Smerg. Some of the trees had been turned
to stone, no doubt by contact with the monster’s ice-cold fire. And the prints of the giant
grasshopper feet were clearly discernible. Atreyu, who was skilled in woodcraft, had seen
other tracks as well, those of Hero Hynreck’s horse. Which meant that Hynreck was close
on the dragon’s heels.
“That doesn’t really thrill me,” said Falkor, rolling his ruby-red eyes. “Monster or
not, this Smerg is a relative of mine — a distant one, to be sure, but a relative all the
same.” He was only half in jest.
They had not followed Hero Hynreck’s track but had taken a different direction,
since their supposed aim was to find Bastian’s way home.
And now Bastian was asking himself: Had it really been such a good idea to

invent a dragon for Hero Hynreck? True, Hynreck had needed a chance to show his
mettle. But was it certain that he would win? What if Smerg killed him? And what about
Princess Oglamar? Yes, of course, she had been haughty, but was that a reason for getting
her into such a fix? And on top of all that, how was he to know what further damage
Smerg might do in Fantastica? Without stopping to think, Bastian had created an
unpredictable menace. It would be there long after he was gone and quite possibly kill or
maim any number of innocents. As he knew, Moon Child drew no distinction between
good and evil, beautiful and ugly. To her mind, all the creatures in Fantastica were
equally important and worthy of consideration. But had he, Bastian, the right to take the
same attitude? And above all, did he wish to?
No, Bastian said to himself, he had ho wish to go down in the history of
Fantastica as a creator of monsters and horrors. How much finer it would be to become
famous for his unselfish goodness, to be a shining model for all, to be revered as the
“good human” or the “great benefactor.” Yes, that was what he wanted.
The country became mountainous, and Atreyu, returning from a reconnaissance
flight, reported that a few miles ahead he had sighted a glen which seemed to offer shelter
from the wind. In fact, if his eyes had not deceived him, there were several caves round
about where they could take refuge from the rain and snow.
It was already late afternoon, high time to find suitable quarters for the night. So
all the others were delighted at Atreyu’s news and spurred their mounts on. They were
making their way through a valley, possibly a dried-out riverbed, enclosed in mountains
which grew higher as the travelers advanced. Some two hours later they reached the glen,
and true enough, there were several caves in the surrounding cliffs. They chose the
largest and made themselves as comfortable as they could. The three knights gathered
brushwood and branches that had been blown down by the storm, and soon they had a
splendid fire going in the cave. The wet cloaks were spread out to dry, the beasts were
brought in and unsaddled, and even Falkor, who ordinarily preferred to spend the night in
the open, curled up at the back of the cave. All in all, it wasn’t such a bad place to be in.
While Hydorn the Enduring tried to roast a big chunk of meat over the fire and the
others watched him eagerly, Atreyu turned to Bastian and said: “Tell us some more about
Kris Ta.”
“About what?” Bastian asked.
“You friend Kris Ta, the little girl you told your stories to.”
“I don’t know any little girl by that name,” said Bastian. “And what makes you
think I told her stories?”
Once again Atreyu had that thoughtful look.
“Back in your world,” he said slowly, “you used to tell lots of stories, some to her
and some to yourself.”
“How do you know that, Atreyu?”
“You said so yourself. In Amarganth. And you also said that people made fun of
you for it.”
Bastian stared into the fire.
“That’s true,” he muttered. “I did say that. But I don’t know why. I can’t
remember.”
It all seemed very strange.
Atreyu exchanged glances with Falkor and nodded gravely as though something

one of them had said had now been proved true. But he said nothing more. Evidently he
didn’t wish to discuss such matters in front of the three knights.
“The meat’s done,” Hydorn announced.
He cut off a chunk for each one and they all began to eat. “Done” was a gross
exaggeration. The meat was charred on the outside and raw on the inside, but under the
circumstances there was no point in being picky and choosy.
For a while they were all busy chewing. Then Atreyu said to Bastian: “Tell us
how you came to Fantastica.”
“You know all about that,” said Bastian. “It was you who brought me to the
Childlike Empress.”
“I mean before that,” said Atreyu. “In your world. Where did you live and how
did it all happen?”
Then Bastian told how he had stolen the book from Mr. Coreander, how he had
carried it off to the schoolhouse attic and begun to read. When he came to Atreyu’s Great
Quest, Atreyu motioned him to stop. He didn’t seem interested in what the book said
about him. What interested him in the extreme was the how and why of Bastian’s visit to
Mr. Coreander and of his flight to the attic of the schoolhouse.
Bastian racked his brains, but about those things he could remember nothing
more. He had forgotten everything connected with the fact that he had once been fat and
weak and cowardly. His memory had been broken into bits, and the bits seemed as vague
and far away as if they had concerned an entirely different person.
Atreyu asked for other memories, and Bastian spoke about the days when his
mother was still alive, about his father and his home, about school and the town he lived
in — as much as he remembered.
The three knights had fallen asleep, and Bastian was still talking. It surprised him
that Atreyu should take such an interest in the most everyday happenings. Maybe it was
because of the way Atreyu listened that these everyday things took on a new interest for
Bastian, as though they contained a secret magic that he had never noticed before.
At last he ran out of memories. It was late in the night, the fire had died down.
The three knights were snoring softly. Atreyu sat there with his inscrutable look, as
though deep in thought.
Bastian stretched out, wrapped himself in his silver mantle, and had almost fallen
asleep when Atreyu said softly: “It’s because of AURYN.”
Bastian propped his head on his hand and looked sleepily at his friend.
“What do you mean by that?”
“The Gem,” said Atreyu, as though talking to himself, “doesn’t work the same
with humans as with us.”
“What makes you think that?”
“The amulet gives you great power, it makes all your wishes come true, but at the
same time it takes something away: your memory of your world.”
Bastian thought it over. He didn’t feel as if anything had been taken away from
him.
“Grograman told me to find out what I really wanted. And the inscription on
AURYN says the same thing. But for that I have to go from one wish to the next without
ever skipping any. That’s why I need the Gem.”
“Yes,” said Atreyu. “It gives you the means, but it takes away your purpose.”

“Oh well,” said Bastian, undismayed. “Moon Child must have known what she
was doing when she gave me the amulet. You worry too much, Atreyu. I’m sure AURYN
isn’t a trap.”
“No,” said Atreyu. “I don’t think so either.”
And after a while he added: “Anyway, it’s good we’re looking for the way back to
your world. We are, aren’t we?”
“Oh yes,” said Bastian, already half asleep.
In the middle of the night he was awakened by a strange sound. He had no idea
what it was. The fire had gone out and he was lying in total darkness. Then he felt
Atreyu’s hand on his shoulder and heard him whisper: “What’s that?”
“I don’t know,” Bastian whispered back.
They crept to the mouth of the cave and listened.
A great many creatures seemed to be trying to fight back their sobs. There was
nothing human about it, and it didn’t sound like animals in pain. Starting as a whisper, it
swelled to a sigh, then ebbed and rose, ebbed and rose. Never had Bastian heard anything
so mournful.
“If at least we could see something,” Atreyu whispered.
“Wait,” said Bastian. “I’ve got Al Tsahir.”
He took the glittering stone from his pocket and held it high. It gave hardly more
light than a candle, but in its faint glow, the friends saw enough to make their skin crawl
with horror.
The whole glen was alive with hideous, foot-long worms, who looked as if they
had been wrapped in soiled rags. Slimy little limbs protruded from the folds in their skin.
At one end, two lidless eyes peered out from under the rags, and from every eye flowed
tears. Thousands of tears. The whole glen was wet with them.
The moment the light from Al Tsahir hit them, the creatures froze, and the friends
were able to see what they had been doing. At the center of the glen stood a tower of the
finest silver filigree — more beautiful and more valuable than any building Bastian had
seen in Amarganth. Some of the wormlike creatures had evidently been climbing about
on the tower, joining its innumerable parts. But at present they all stood motionless,
staring at the light of Al Tsahir.
A ghoulish whisper passed over the glen: “Alas! Alas! What light has fallen on
our ugliness? Whose eye has seen us? Cruel intruder, whoever you may be, have mercy,
take that light away.”
Bastian stood up.
“I am Bastian Balthazar Bux. Who are you?”
“We are the Acharis. We are the unhappiest beings in all Fantastica.”
Bastian said nothing and looked in dismay at Atreyu.
“Then,” he said,”it’s you who created Amarganth, the most beautiful city in
Fantastica?”
“Yes!” the creatures cried. “But take that light away! And don’t look at us! Have
mercy!”
“And with your weeping you made Moru, the Lake of Tears?”
“Master,” they groaned, “it’s true. But we’ll die of shame and horror if you make
us stand in this light. Why must you add to our torment? We’ve never done anything to
you.”

Bastian put Al Tsahir back in his pocket and again the night was as black as pitch.
“Thank you!” cried the mournful voices. “Thank you for your merciful kindness.”
“I want to talk with you,” said Bastian. “I want to help you.”
He was almost sick with disgust, but he felt very sorry for the poor things. It was
clear to him that they were the creatures he had mentioned in his story about the origin of
Amarganth, but here again he couldn’t be sure whether they had always been there or
whether they owed their existence to him. In the latter case, he was responsible for their
misery. But either way he was determined to help them.
“Oh, oh!” the plaintive voices whimpered. “No one can help us.”
“I can,” said Bastian. “I have AURYN.”
At that, they all seemed to stop weeping at once.
“Where have you come from?” Bastian asked.
A chorus of many voices whispered: “We live in the lightless depths of the earth
to hide our ugliness from the sun, and there we weep all day and all night. Our tears wash
the indestructible silver out of the bedrock, and from it we spin the filigree you have seen.
On the darkest nights we mount to the surface, and these caves are our coming-out
places. Up here we join together the sections we’ve made down below. We’ve come
tonight because it was dark enough for us to work without seeing one another. We work
to make amends to the world for our ugliness, and that comforts us a little.”
“But you’re not to blame for your ugliness,” said Bastian.
“Oh, there are different ways of being to blame,” the Acharis replied. “In what
you do. In what you think. . . We’re to blame for just living.”
“How can I help you?” Bastian asked. He felt so sorry for them that he could
hardly hold back his own tears.
“Ah, great benefactor!” the Acharis cried. “You’ve got AURYN. With AURYN
you can save us — we have only one thing to ask of you. Give us different bodies!”
“Don’t worry,” said Bastian. “I will. Here’s my wish: That you shall fall asleep.
That when you wake up, you shall crawl out of your skins and turn into bright-colored
butterflies. That you shall be lighthearted and happy. And that, beginning tomorrow, you
shall no longer be the Acharis, the Everlasting Weepers, but the Shlamoofs, the
Everlasting Laughers.”
Bastian awaited their answer, but no sound came from the darkness.
“They’ve fallen asleep,” Atreyu whispered.
The two friends went back into their cave. Hysbald, Hydorn, and Hykrion were
still snoring gently. They had slept through the whole incident.
Bastian lay down. He was extremely pleased with himself.
Soon all Fantastica would learn of the good deed he had done. It had really been
unselfish, since no one could claim that he had wished anything for himself. There would
be nothing to mar the glory of his goodness.
“What do you think, Atreyu?” he whispered.
Atreyu was silent for a while. Then he replied: “I only wonder what it may have
cost you.”
Not until somewhat later, after Atreyu had fallen asleep, did it dawn on Bastian
that his friend had been referring, not to his self-abnegation, but to his loss of memory.
But he gave the matter no further thought and fell asleep in joyful anticipation of the
morrow.

The next morning the three knights woke him up with their cries of amazement.
“Would you look at that! My word, even my old mare is giggling.”
They were standing in the mouth of the cave, and Atreyu was with them. But
Atreyu wasn’t laughing.
Bastian got up and went out.
The whole glen was crawling and flitting and tumbling with the most comical
little creatures he had ever seen. They all had bright-colored butterfly wings on their
backs and were wearing the weirdest outfits — some checkered, some striped, some
ringed, some dotted. All their clothes looked either too loose or too tight, too big or too
small, and they were pieced together every which way. Nothing was right and there were
patches all over, even on the wings. No two of these creatures were alike. They had faces
like clowns, splotched with every imaginable color, little round red noses or absurdly
long ones, and enormous rubbery mouths. Some wore top hats, others peaked caps. Some
had only three brick-red tufts of hair, and some had shiny bald heads. Most were sitting
or hopping about on the delicate filigree tower, or dangling from it, doing gymnastics,
and in general doing their best to wreck it.
Bastian ran out to them.
“Hey, you guys!” he shouted. “Cut that out! You can’t do that!”
The creatures stopped and looked down at him.
One at the very top of the tower asked: “What did he say?”
And one from further down replied: “The whatchamaycallim says we can’t do
this.”
“Why does he say we can’t do it?” asked a third.
“Because you just can’t!” Bastian screamed. “You can’t just smash everything up!”
“The whatchamaycallim says we can’t smash everything up,” the first butterfly-
clown informed the others.
“We can too!” said another, tearing a big chunk out of the tower.
Hopping about like a lunatic, the first called down to Bastian: “We can too!”
The tower swayed and creaked alarmingly.
“Hey, what are you doing?” Bastian shouted. He was angry and he was
frightened, but at the same time he had all he could do to keep from laughing.
The first butterfly-clown turned to his companions. “The whatchamaycallim
wants to know what we’re doing.”
“What are we doing?” asked another.
“We’re having fun,” said a third.
“But the tower will collapse if you don’t stop!” Bastian screamed.
“The whatchamaycallim,” the first clown informed the others,”says the tower will
collapse if we don’t stop.”
“So what?” said another.
And the first called down: “So what?”
Bastian was speechless, and before he could find a suitable answer, all the
butterfly-clowns on the tower began to do a sort of aerial round dance. But instead of
holding hands they grabbed one another by the legs or collars, while some simply whirled
head over heels through the air. And all bellowed and laughed.
The act that the winged creatures were putting on was so light-hearted and
comical that Bastian gave up trying to hold back his laughter.

“But you can’t do that,” he called to them. “The Acharis made it and it’s
beautiful.”
The first butterfly-clown turned back to the others. “The whatchamaycallim says
we can’t do it.”
“We can do anything that’s not forbidden!” cried another, turning somersaults in
the air. “And who’s going to forbid us? We’re the Shlamoofs!”
“Who’s going to forbid us anything?” all cried in chorus. “We’re the Shlamoofs!”
“I am!” cried Bastian.
“The whatchamaycallim,” the first clown explained to the others, “says ‘I’.”
“You?” said the others. “How can you forbid us anything?”
“No,” said the first. “Not I. The whatchamaycallim says ‘he’.”
“Why does the whatchamaycallim say ‘he’?” the others wanted to know. “And
who is he saying ‘he’ to in the first place?”
“Who are you saying ‘he’ to?” the first butterfly-clown called down to Bastian.
“I didn’t say ‘he’,” Bastian screamed, half fuming, half laughing. “I said I forbid
you to wreck this tower.”
“He forbids us,” said the first clown to the others, “to wreck this tower.”
“Who does?” inquired one who had just turned up from the farend of the glen.
“The whatchamaycallim,” the others replied.
“I don’t know any whatchamaycallim,” said the newcomer. “Who is he anyway?”
The first sang out: “Hey, whatchamaycallim, who are you anyway?”
“I’m not a whatchamaycallim,” said Bastian, who by then was moderately angry.
“I’m Bastian Balthazar Bux, and I turned you into Shlamoofs so you wouldn’t have to cry
and moan the whole time. Last night you were still miserable Acharis. It wouldn’t hurt to
show your benefactor some respect.”
The Shlamoofs all stopped hopping and dancing at once and stood gaping at
Bastian. A breathless silence fell.
“What did the whatchamaycallim say?” whispered a butterfly-clown at the edge of
the crowd, but his next-door neighbor cracked him on the head so hard that his hat slid
down over his eyes and ears, and all the others went: “Psst!”
“Would you be so kind as to repeat all that very slowly and distinctly,” the first
butterfly-clown requested.
“I am your benefactor!” cried Bastian.
This threw the Shlamoofs into an incredible state of agitation. One passed the
word on to the next and in the end the innumerable creatures, who up until then had been
scattered all over the glen, gathered into a knot around Bastian, shouting in one another’s
ears.
“Did you hear that? He’s our bemmafixer! His name is Nastiban Baltebux! No, it’s
Buxian Banninector. Rubbish, it’s Saratit Buxibem! No, it’s Baldrian Hix! Shlux!
Babeltran Billy-scooter! Nix! Flax! Trix!”
Beside themselves with enthusiasm, they shook hands all around, tipped their hats
to one another, and raised great clouds of dust by slapping one another on the back or
belly.
“We’re so lucky!” they cried. “Three cheers for Buxifactor Zanzibar Bastelben!”
Screaming and laughing, the whole great swarm shot upward and whirled away.
The hubbub died down in the distance.

Bastian stood there hardly knowing what his right name was.
By that time he wasn’t so sure he had really done a good deed.
XIX
The Traveling Companions
unbeams were fighting their way through the cloud cover as the travelers started
out that morning. At last the rain and wind had let up. In the course of the morning the
travelers ran into two or three sudden showers, but then there was a marked improvement
in the weather, and it seemed to grow warmer by the minute.
The three knights were in a merry mood; they laughed and joked and played all
sorts of tricks on one another. But Bastian seemed quiet and out of sorts as he rode ahead
on his mule. And the knights had far too much respect for him to break in on his
thoughts.
The rocky high plateau over which they were riding seemed endless. But little by
little the trees became larger and more frequent.
Atreyu had noticed Bastian’s bad humor. When he and Falkor started on their
usual reconnaissance flight, he asked the luckdragon what he could do to cheer his friend
up. Falkor rolled his ruby-red eyeballs and answered: “That’s easy — didn’t he want to
ride on me?
When some time later the little band rounded a jutting cliff, they found Atreyu
and the luckdragon lying comfortably in the sun.
Bastian looked at them in amazement.
“Are you tired?” he asked.
“Not at all,” said Atreyu. “I just wanted to ask if you’d let me ride Yikka for a
while. I’ve never ridden a mule. It must be wonderful, because you never seem to get sick
of it. I’ll lend you my old Falkor in return.”
Bastian flushed with pleasure.
“Is that true, Falkor?” he asked. “You wouldn’t mind carrying me?”
“Of course not, all-powerful sultan,” said the dragon with a wink. “Hop on and
hold tight.”
Without touching the ground, Bastian vaulted directly from mule to dragon back
and clutched the silvery-white mane as Falkor took off.
Bastian hadn’t forgotten how Grograman had carried him through the Desert of
Colors. But riding a white luckdragon was something else again. If sweeping over the
ground on the back of the fiery lion had been like a cry of ecstasy, this gentle rising and
falling as the dragon adjusted his movements to the air currents was like a song, now soft

and sweet, now triumphant with power. Especially when Falkor was looping the loop,
when his mane, his fangs, and the long fringes on his limbs flashed through the air like
white flames, it seemed to Bastian that the winds were singing in chorus.
Toward noon they sighted the others and landed. The ground party had pitched
camp beside a brook in a sunlit meadow. There was a flatbread to eat and a kettle of soup
was cooking over a wood fire. The horses and the mule were grazing nearby.
When the meal was over, the three knights decided to go hunting, for supplies,
especially of meat, were running low. They had heard the cry of pheasants in the thicket,
and there seemed to be hares as well. Knowing the Greenskins to be great hunters, they
asked Atreyu to join them, but he declined. Thereupon the knights took their long bows,
buckled on their quivers full of arrows, and went off to the woods.
Atreyu, Falkor, and Bastian stayed behind.
After a short silence, Atreyu suggested: “How about telling us a little more about
your world, Bastian?”
“What would interest you?” Bastian asked.
Atreyu turned to the luckdragon: “What do you say, Falkor?”
“I’d like to hear something about the children in your school,” said the dragon.
Bastian seemed bewildered. “What children?” he asked.
“The ones who made fun of you,” said Falkor.
“Children who made fun of me?” Bastian repeated. “I don’t know of any children –
– and I’m sure no child would have dared to make fun of me.”
Atreyu broke in: “But you must remember that you went to school.”
“Yes,” said Bastian thoughtfully. “I remember school. Yes, that’s right.”
Atreyu and Falkor exchanged glances.
“I was afraid of that,” Atreyu muttered.
“Afraid of what?”
“You’ve lost some more of your memory,” said Atreyu gravely. “This time it
came of changing the Acharis into Shlamoofs. You shouldn’t have done that.”
“Bastian Balthazar Bux,” said the luckdragon — and his tone seemed almost stern
— “if my advice means anything to you, stop using the power that AURYN gives you. If
you don’t, you’re likely to lose your last memories, and without memory how will you
ever find your way back to where you came from?”
“To tell the truth,” said Bastian, “I don’t want to go back anymore.”
Atreyu was horrified. “But you have to go back. You have to go back and
straighten out your world so humans will start coming to Fantastica again. Otherwise
Fantastica will disappear sooner or later, and all our trouble will have been wasted.”
At that point Bastian felt rather offended. “But I’m still here,” he protested. “It’s
been only a little while since I gave Moon Child her new name.”
Atreyu could think of nothing to say. But then Falkor spoke up. “Now,” he said, “I
see why we haven’t made the slightest progress in finding Bastian’s way back. If he
himself doesn’t want to. . .”
“Bastian,” said Atreyu almost pleadingly. “Isn’t there anything that draws you?
Something you love? Don’t you ever think of your father, who must be waiting for you
and worrying about you?”
Bastian shook his head.
“I don’t think so. Maybe he’s even glad to be rid of me.”

Atreyu looked at his friend in horror.
“The way you two carry on!” said Bastian bitterly. “You almost sound as if you
wanted to get rid of me too.”
“What do you mean by that?” asked Atreyu with a catch in his voice.
“Well,” said Bastian. “You seem to have only one thing on your minds: getting
me out of Fantastica as quickly as possible.”
Atreyu looked at Bastian and slowly shook his head. For a long while none of
them said a word. Already Bastian was beginning to regret his angry words. He himself
knew they were unjust.
Then Atreyu said softly: “I thought we were friends.”
“You were right!” Bastian cried. “We are and always will be. Forgive me. I’ve
been talking nonsense.”
Atreyu smiled. “You’ll have to forgive us, too, for hurting your feelings. We didn’t
mean it.”
“Anyway,” said Bastian. “I’m going to take your advice.”
After a while the three knights returned with several partridges, a pheasant, and a
hare. When the party started out again, Bastian was riding Yikka.
In the afternoon, they came to a forest consisting entirely of tall, straight
evergreens, which formed, high overhead, a green roof so dense that a ray of sunlight
seldom reached the ground. That may have been why there was no underbrush.
The soft, smooth forest floor was pleasant to ride on. Falkor had resigned himself
to trotting along with the company, because if he had flown above the treetops with
Atreyu, he would undoubtedly have lost sight of the others.
All afternoon they rode through the dark-green twilight. Toward nightfall they
spied a ruined castle on a hilltop. They climbed up to it and in the midst of all the
crumbling walls and turrets, halls and passageways, they found a vaulted chamber that
was in fairly good condition. There they settled down for the night. It was redheaded
Hysbald’s turn to cook, and he proved to be much better at it than his predecessor. The
pheasant he roasted over the fire was as tasty as you please.
The next morning they resumed their journey. All day they rode through the
forest, which looked the same on all sides. It was late in the day when they noticed that
they must have been riding in a great circle, for ahead of them they saw the ruins of the
castle they had left in the morning, but this time they were approaching it from a different
direction.
“This has never happened to me before!” said Hykrion, twirling his black
moustache.
“I can’t believe my eyes!” grumbled Hysbald, stalking through the ruins on his
long, thin legs.
But so it was. The remains of yesterday’s dinner left no room for doubt.
Atreyu and Falkor said nothing, but their thoughts were hard at work. How could
they have made such a mistake?
At the evening meal — this time it was roast hare, prepared more or less
competently by Hykrion — the three knights asked Bastian if he would care to impart
some of his memories of the world he came from. Bastian excused himself by saying he
had a sore throat, and since he had been very quiet all that day, the knights believed him.
After suggesting a few effective remedies, they lay down to sleep.

Only Atreyu and Falkor suspected what Bastian was thinking.
Early in the morning they started off again. All day they rode through the forest,
trying their best to keep going in a straight line. But at nightfall they were back at the
same ruined castle.
“Well, I’ll be!” Hykrion blustered.
“I’m going mad!” groaned Hysbald.
“Friends,” said Hydorn disgustedly, “we might as well throw our licenses in the
trash bin. Some knights errant we turned out to be!”
On their first night at the castle, Bastian, knowing that Yikka liked to be alone
with her thoughts now and then, had found her a special little niche. The company of the
horses, who could think of nothing to talk about but their distinguished ancestry, upset
her. That night, after Bastian had taken her back to her place, she said to him: “Master, I
know why we’re not getting ahead.”
“How can you know that, Yikka?”
“Because I carry you, master. And because I’m only half an ass, I feel certain
things.”
“So, according to you, why is it?”
“You don’t want to get ahead, master. You’ve stopped wishing for anything.”
Bastian looked at her in amazement.
“You are really a wise animal, Yikka.”
The mule flapped her long ears in embarrassment.
“Do you know which way we’ve been going?”
“No,” said Bastian. “Do you?”
Yikka nodded.
“We’ve been heading for the center of Fantastica.”
“For the Ivory Tower?”
“Yes, master. And we made good headway as long as we kept going in that
direction.”
“That’s not possible,” said Bastian. “Atreyu would have noticed it, and certainly
Falkor would have. But they didn’t.”
“We mules,” said Yikka, “are simple creatures, not in a class with luckdragons.
But we do have certain gifts. And one of them is a sense of direction. We never go
wrong. That’s how I knew for sure that you wanted to visit the Childlike Empress.”
“Moon Child. . .” Bastian murmured. “Yes, I would like to see her again. She’ll
tell me what to do.”
Then he stroked the mule’s white nose and whispered: “Thanks, Yikka. Thanks.”
Next morning Atreyu took Bastian aside.
“Listen, Bastian. Falkor and I want to apologize. The advice we gave you was
meant well — but it was stupid. We just haven’t been getting ahead. Falkor and I talked it
over last night. You’ll be stuck here and so will we, until you wish for something. It’s
bound to make you lose some more of your memory, but that can’t be helped, there’s
nothing else you can do. We can only hope that you find the way back before it’s too late.
It won’t do you any good to stay here. You’ll just have to think of your next wish and use
AURYN’s power.”

“Right,” said Bastian. “Yikka said the same thing. And I already know what my
next wish will be. Let’s go, I want you all to here it.
They rejoined the others.
“Friends,” said Bastian in a loud voice. “So far we have been looking in vain for
the way back to my world. Now I’ve decided to go and see the one person who can help
me find it. That one person is the Childlike Empress. Our destination is now the Ivory
Tower.”
“Hurrah!” cried the three knights in unison.
But then Falkor’s bronze voice rang out: “Don’t do it, Bastian Balthazar Bux.
What you wish is impossible. Don’t you know that no one can meet the Golden-eyed
Commander of Wishes more than once? You will never see her again.”
Bastian clenched his fists.
“Moon Child owes me a lot,” he said angrily. “I’m sure she won’t keep me away.”
“You’ll see,” Falkor replied, “that her decisions are sometimes hard to
understand.”
Bastian felt the color rising to his cheeks. “You and Atreyu,” he said, “are always
giving me advice. You can see where your advice has got us. From now on I’ll do the
deciding. I’ve made up my mind, and that’s that.”
He took a deep breath and went on a little more calmly: “Besides, you always
speak from your point of view. You two are Fantasticans and I’m a human. How can you
be sure that the same rules apply to me as to you? It was different when Atreyu had
AURYN. And who else but me is going to give the Gem back to Moon Child? No one
can meet her twice, you say. But I’ve already met her twice. The first time we saw each
other for only a moment, when Atreyu went into her chamber, and the second time when
the big egg exploded. With me everything is different. I will see her a third time.”
All were silent. The knights because they didn’t know what it was all about,
Atreyu and Falkor because they were beginning to have doubts.
“Well,” said Atreyu finally, “maybe you’re right. We have no way of knowing
how the Childlike Empress will deal with you.”
After that they started out, and before noon they reached the edge of the forest.
Before them lay sloping meadows as far as the eye could see. Soon they came to a
winding river and followed its course.
Again Atreyu and Falkor explored the country, describing wide circles around
their slow-moving companions. But both were troubled and their flight was not as light
and carefree as usual. Looking ahead, they saw that the country changed abruptly at a
certain point in the distance. A steep slope led from the plateau to a low-lying, densely
wooded plain and the river descended the slope in a mighty waterfall. Knowing that the
riders couldn’t hope to get that far before the next day, the two scouts turned back.
“Falkor,” Atreyu asked, “do you suppose the Childlike Empress cares what
becomes of Bastian?”
“Maybe not,” said Falkor. “She draws no distinctions.”
“Then,” said Atreyu, “she is really a. . .”
“Don’t say it,” Falkor broke in. “I know what you mean, but don’t say it.”
For a while Atreyu was silent. Then he said: “But he’s my friend, Falkor. We’ve
got to help him. Even against the Childlike Empress’s will, if we have to. But how?”
“With luck,” the dragon replied, and for the first time the bronze bell of his voice

seemed to have sprung a crack.
That evening the company chose a deserted log cabin on the riverbank as their
night lodging. For Falkor, of course, it was too small, and he preferred to sleep on the air.
The horses and Yikka also had to stay outside.
During the evening meal Atreyu told the others about the waterfall and the abrupt
change in the country. Then he added casually: “By the way, we’re being followed.”
The three knights exchanged glances.
“Oho!” cried Hykrion, giving his black moustache a martial twirl. “How many are
they?”
“I counted seven behind us,” said Atreyu. “But even if they ride all night they
can’t be here before morning.”
“Are they armed?” asked Hysbald.
“I couldn’t tell,” said Atreyu, “but there are more coming from other directions. I
saw six in the west, nine in the east, and twelve or thirteen are coming from up ahead.”
“We’ll wait and see what they want,” said Hydorn. “Thirty-five or thirty-six men
would hardly frighten the three of us — much less Sir Bastian and Atreyu.”
Ordinarily Bastian ungirt the sword Sikanda before lying down to sleep. But that
night he kept it on and slept with his hand on the hilt. In his dreams he saw Moon Child
smiling at him and her smile seemed full of promise. If there was any more to the dream,
he forgot it by the time he woke up, but his vision encouraged him in his hope of seeing
her again.
Glancing out of the door of the cabin, he saw seven blurred shapes through the
mist that had risen from the river. Two were on foot, the others mounted on different
sorts of steeds. Bastian quietly awakened his companions.
The knights unsheathed their swords, and together they stepped out of the cabin.
When the figures waiting outside caught sight of Bastian, the riders dismounted and all
seven went down on their left knees, bowed their heads and cried out: “Hail and welcome
to Bastian Balthazar Bux, the Savior of Fantastica!”
The newcomers were a weird-looking lot. One of the two who had come on foot
had an uncommonly long neck and a head with four faces, one pointed in each of the four
directions. The first was merry, the second angry, the third sad, and the fourth sleepy. All
were rigid and unchanging, but he was able at any time to face forward with the one
expressing his momentary mood. This individual was a four-quarter troll, sometimes
known as a moody-woody.
The second pedestrian was what is known in Fantastica as a head-footer. His head
was connected directly with his long, thin legs, there being neither neck nor trunk.
Headfooters are always on the go and have no fixed residence. As a rule, they roam about
in swarms of many hundreds, but from time to time one runs across a loner. They feed on
herbs and grasses. The one that was kneeling to Bastian looked young and red-cheeked.
The three creatures riding on horses no larger than goats were a gnome, a
shadowscamp, and a blondycat. The gnome had a golden circlet around his head and was
obviously a prince. The shadow-scamp was hard to recognize, because to all intents and
purposes he consisted only of a shadow cast by no one. The blondycat had a catlike face
and long golden-blond curls that clothed her like a coat. Her whole body was covered
with equally blond shaggy fur. She was no bigger than a five-year-old child.

Another, who was riding on an ox, came from the land of the Sassafranians, who
are born old and die when they have grown (that is, dwindled) to infancy. This one had a
long white beard, a bald head, and a heavily wrinkled face. By Sassafranian standards, he
was a youngster, about Bastian’s age.
A blue djinn had come on a camel. He was tall and thin and was wearing an
enormous turban. His shape was human, but his bare torso with its bulging muscles
seemed to be made of some glossy blue metal. Instead of a nose and mouth, he had a
huge, hooked eagle’s beak.
“Who are you and what do you want?” Hykrion asked rather brusquely. Despite
the ceremonious greeting, he wasn’t quite convinced of the visitors’ friendly intentions.
He still had his hand on his sword hilt.
The four-quarter troll, who up until then had been keeping his sleepy face
foremost, now switched to the merry one. Ignoring Hykrion, he addressed himself to
Bastian:
“Your Lordship,” he declared, “we are princes from many different parts of
Fantastica, and we have all come to welcome you and ask for your help. The news of
your presence has flown from country to country, the wind and the clouds speak your
name, the waves of the sea proclaim your glory, and every last brooklet is celebrating
your power.”
Bastian cast a glance at Atreyu, but Atreyu looked at the troll unsmilingly and
almost severely.
“We know,” the blue djinn broke in, and his voice sounded like the rasping cry of
an eagle, “we know that you created Perilin, the Night Forest, and Goab, the Desert of
Colors. We know you have eaten and drunk the fire of the Many-Colored Death and
bathed in it, something that no one else in Fantastica could have done and still lived. We
know that you passed through the Temple of a Thousand Doors, and we know what
happened in the Silver City of Amarganth. We know, my lord, that there is nothing you
cannot do. When you make a wish, your wishes come to pass. And so we invite you to
come and stay with us and favor us with a story of our own. For none of our nations has a
story.”
Bastian thought it over, then shook his head. “I can’t do what you ask of me just
yet. I’ll help you later on. But first I must go to the Childlike Empress. I hope you will
join us and help me to find the Ivory Tower.”
The creatures didn’t seem at all disappointed. After brief deliberation they agreed
to accompany Bastian on his journey. Whereupon the procession, which by now had the
look of a small caravan, started out again.
Throughout the day they were joined by new adherents, not only those Atreyu had
sighted the day before, but many more. There were goat-legged fauns and gigantic night-
hobs, there were elves and kobolds, beetle riders and three-legses, a man-sized rooster in
jackboots, a stag with golden antlers who walked erect and wore a Prince Albert. Many
of the new arrivals bore no resemblance whatsoever to human beings. There were
helmeted copper ants, strangely shaped wandering rocks, flute birds, who made music
with their long beaks, and there were three so-called puddlers, who moved by dissolving
into a puddle at every step and resuming their usual form a little farther on. But perhaps
the most startling of all was a twee, whose fore- and hindquarters had a way of running
about independently of one another. Except for its red and white stripes it looked rather

like a hippopotamus.
Soon the procession numbered at least a hundred. And all had come to welcome
Bastian, the Savior of Fantastica, and beg him for a story of their own. But the original
seven told the others that they would first have to go to the Ivory Tower, and all were
agreed.
Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn rode with Bastian in the lead of the now rather
impressive procession.
Toward evening they came to a waterfall. Leaving the plateau, they made their
way down a winding mountain trail, at the end of which they found themselves in a forest
of tree-sized orchids with enormous spotted blossoms. These blossoms looked so
frightening that when the travelers stopped for the night, they decided to post sentries.
Bastian and Atreyu gathered some of the deep, soft moss that lay all about and
made themselves a comfortable bed. Falkor protected the two friends by lying down in a
circle around them. The air was warm and heavy with the strange and none too pleasant
scent of the orchids. That scent seemed fraught with evil.
XX
The Seeing Hand
he dewdrops on the orchids glistened in the morning sun as the caravan started
out again. The night had been uneventful except that more and more emissaries kept
trailing in. The procession now numbered close to three hundred.
The farther they went into the orchid forest, the stranger grew the shapes and
colors of the flowers. And soon Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn discovered that the fears
which had led them to post sentries had not been entirely groundless. For many of the
orchids were carnivorous and big enough to swallow a whole calf. True, they could not
move of their own volition — it hadn’t been really necessary to post sentries — but if
something or someone touched them, they snapped shut like traps. And several times
when a blossom seized the hand, foot, or mount of a fellow traveler the knights were
obliged to draw their swords and hack the blossom to pieces.
Throughout the ride Bastian was besieged by all sorts of fantastic creatures who
tried to attract his attention or at least get a look at him. But Bastian rode on in withdrawn
silence. A new wish had come to him, and for the first time it was one that made him
seem standoffish and almost sullen.
He felt that despite their reconciliation, Atreyu and Falkor were treating him like a
child, that they felt responsible for him and thought he had to be led by the nose. But
come to think of it, hadn’t they been that way from the start? Oh yes, they were friendly
enough, but they seemed to feel superior to him for some reason, to regard him as a

harmless innocent who needed protecting. And that didn’t suit him at all. He wasn’t
innocent, he wasn’t harmless, and he’d soon show them. He wanted to be dangerous,
dangerous and feared. Feared by all — including Atreyu and Falkor.
The blue djinn — his name, incidentally, was Ilwan — elbowed his way through
the crush around Bastian, crossed his arms over his chest, and bowed.
Bastian stopped.
“What is it, Ilwan? Speak!”
“My lord,” said the djinn in his eagle’s voice. “I’ve been listening in on the
conversations of our new traveling companions. Some of them claim to know this part of
the country and their teeth are chattering with fear.”
“What are they afraid of?”
“This forest of carnivorous orchids, my lord, belongs to Xayide, the wickedest
and most powerful sorceress in all Fantastica. She lives in Horok Castle, also known as
the Seeing Hand.”
“Tell the scaredy-cats not to worry,” said Bastian, “I’m here to protect them.”
Ilwan bowed and left him.
A little later Falkor and Atreyu, who had flown far ahead, returned to Bastian.
The procession had stopped for the noon-day meal.
“I don’t know what to make of it,” said Atreyu. “Three or four hours’ journey from
here, in the middle of the orchid forest, we saw a building that looks like a big hand
jutting out of the ground. There’s something sinister about it, and it’s directly in our line
of march.”
Bastian told them what he had heard from Ilwan.
“If that’s the case,” said Atreyu, “wouldn’t it be more sensible to change our
direction?”
“No,” said Bastian.
“But there’s no reason why we should tangle with this Xayide. I think we should
steer clear of her.”
“There is a reason,” said Bastian.
“What reason?”
“Because I feel like it,” said Bastian.
Atreyu looked at him openmouthed. The conversation stopped there because
Fantasticans were crowding in from all sides to get a look at Bastian. But when the meal
was over, Atreyu rejoined Bastian. Trying to make it sound casual, he suggested: “How
about taking a ride with Falkor and me?”
Bastian realized that Atreyu wanted a private talk with him. They hoisted
themselves up on Falkor’s back, Atreyu in front, Bastian behind him, and the dragon took
off. It was the first time the two friends had flown together.
Once they were airborne, Atreyu said: “It’s been hard seeing you alone these days.
But we have to talk things over, Bastian.”
“Just as I thought,” said Bastian with a smile. “What’s on your mind?”
Atreyu began hesitantly. “Have we come to this place and are we heading where
we are because of some new wish of yours?”
“I imagine so,” said Bastian rather coldly.
“That’s what Falkor and I have been thinking,” said Atreyu. “What kind of wish is
it?”

Bastian made no answer.
“Don’t get me wrong,” said Atreyu. “It’s not that we’re afraid of anything or
anyone. But we’re your friends, and we worry about you.”
“No need to,” said Bastian still more coldly.
Falkor twisted his neck and looked back at them.
“Atreyu,” he said, “has a sensible suggestion. I advise you to listen to him, Bastian
Balthazar Bux.”
“Some more of your good advice?” said Bastian with a sardonic smile.
“No, Bastian,” said Atreyu. “No advice. A suggestion. You may not like it at first.
But think it over before you turn it down. We want to help you, and we’ve been
wondering how. The whole trouble is the way the Childlike Empress’s amulet affects you.
Without AURYN’s power you can’t wish yourself ahead, but with AURYN’s power
you’re losing yourself and forgetting where you want to go. Pretty soon, unless we do
something about it, you won’t have any idea where you’re going.”
“We’ve already been through that,” said Bastian. “So what?”
“When I was wearing the Gem,” said Atreyu, “it was entirely different. It guided
me and it didn’t take anything away from me. Maybe because I’m not a human and I have
no memory of the human world to lose. In other words, it helped me and did me no harm.
So here’s what I suggest: Let me have AURYN and trust me to guide you. What do you
say?”
Bastian replied instantly: “I say no!”
Again Falkor looked back.
“Couldn’t you at least think it over for a moment?”
“No!” said Bastian.
For the first time Atreyu grew angry.
“Bastian,” he said, “think sensibly! You can’t go on like this! Haven’t you noticed
that you’ve changed completely? You’re not yourself anymore.”
“Thanks,” said Bastian. “Thank you very much for minding my business all the
time. But frankly, I can get along without your advice. In case you’ve forgotten, I saved
Fantastica, and Moon Child entrusted her power to me. She must have had some reason
for it, because she could have let you keep AURYN. But she took it away from you and
gave it to me. I’ve changed, you say. Yes, my dear Atreyu, you may be right. I’m no
longer the harmless innocent you take me for. Shall I tell you the real reason why you
want me to give up AURYN? Because you’re just plain jealous. You don’t know me yet,
but if you go on like this — you’ll get to know me.”
Atreyu did not reply. Falkor’s flight had suddenly lost all its buoyancy, he seemed
to be dragging himself through the air, sinking lower and lower like a wounded bird.
At length Atreyu spoke with difficulty.
“Bastian,” he said. “You can’t seriously believe what you’ve said. Let’s forget
about it. As far as I’m concerned, you never said it.”
“All right,” said Bastian, “let’s forget it. Anyway, I didn’t start the argument.”
For a time they rode on in silence.
In the distance Horok Castle rose up from the orchid forest. It really did look like
a giant hand with five outstretched fingers.
“But there’s something I want to make clear once and for all,” said Bastian
suddenly. “I’ve made up my mind. I’m not going back at all. I’m going to stay in

Fantastica for good. I like it here. So I can manage without my memories. And if it’s the
future of Fantastica you’re worried about, I can give Moon Child thousands of new
names. We don’t need the human world anymore.”
Falkor banked for a U-turn.
“Hey!” Bastian shouted. “What are you doing? Fly ahead! I want to see Horok
close up!”
“I can’t,” Falkor gasped. “I honestly can’t go on!”
On their return to the caravan they found their traveling companions in a frenzy of
agitation. They had been attacked by a band of some fifty giants, covered with black
armor that made them look like enormous two-legged beetles. Many of the traveling
companions had fled and were just beginning to return singly or in groups; others had
done their best to defend themselves, but had been no match for the armored giants. The
three knights, Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn, had fought heroically, but without making
a dent in any of their assailants. In the end they had been disarmed and dragged away in
chains. One of the armored giants had shouted in a strangely metallic voice:
“Xayide, the mistress of Horok Castle, sends greetings to Bastian Balthazar Bux,
the Savior of Fantastica, and makes the following demands: “Submit to me
unconditionally and swear to serve me with body and soul as my faithful slave. Should
you refuse, or should you attempt to circumvent my will by guile or stratagem, your three
friends Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn will die a slow, shameful, and cruel death by
torture. You have until sunrise tomorrow to make up your mind.” That is the message of
Xayide, the mistress of Horok Castle. It has been duly delivered.”
Bastian bit his lips. Atreyu and Falkor had wiped all expression off their faces, but
Bastian knew exactly what they were thinking. What he minded most was their mask of
secrecy. But this was hardly the time to have it out with them. That could wait. Instead,
he addressed the company in a loud voice: “I will never give in to Xayide’s blackmail!
We must set the prisoners free, and without delay.”
“It won’t be easy,” said Ilwan, the blue djinn with the eagle beak. “All of us
together are no match for those black devils. And even if you, my lord, and Atreyu and
his luckdragon were to lead us into battle, it would take us too long to capture Horok
Castle. The lives of the three knights are in Xayide’s hands. She will kill them the
moment she finds out that we are attacking.”
“Then we mustn’t let her find out,” said Bastian. “We must take her by surprise.”
“How can we do that?” asked the four-quarter troll, putting forward his angry
face, which was rather terrifying. “Xayide is crafty. I’m sure she has an answer for
anything we can think up.”
“I agree,” said the prince of the gnomes. “There are too many of us. If we move
on Horok Castle, she’s sure to know it. Even at night so large a troop movement can’t be
kept secret. She has her spies.”
“Good,” said Bastian. “We’ll fool her with the help of her spies.”
“How can we do that, my lord?”
“The rest of you will start off in a different direction, to make her think we’ve
given up trying to free the prisoners and we’re running away.”
“And what will become of the prisoners?”
“I’ll attend to that with Atreyu and Falkor.”

“Just the three of you?”
“Yes,” said Bastian. “That is, if Atreyu and Falkor agree to come with me. If not,
I’ll go alone.”
The traveling companions looked at him with admiration. Those closest to him
passed his words on to those further back in the crowd.
“My lord,” the blue djinn cried out, “regardless of whether you conquer or die,
this will go down in the history of Fantastica.”
Bastian turned to Atreyu and Falkor. “Are you coming, or have you got some
more of your suggestions?”
“We’re coming,” said Atreyu.
“In that case,” Bastian decreed, “the caravan must start moving while it’s still
light. You must hurry — make it look as if you were in flight. We’ll wait here until dark.
We’ll join you tomorrow morning — with the three knights or not at all. Go now.”
After taking a respectful leave of Bastian, the traveling companions started out.
Bastian, Atreyu, and Falkor hid in a clump of orchid trees and waited for nightfall.
In the late afternoon a faint jangling was heard and five of the black giants
approached the abandoned camp. They seemed to be all of black metal, even their faces
were like iron masks, and their movements were strangely mechanical. All stopped at
once, all looked in the direction where the caravan had gone. Then without a word, all
marched off in step.
“My plan seems to be working,” Bastian whispered.
“There were only five,” said Atreyu. “Where are the others?”
“The five are sure to communicate with the rest,” said Bastian.
At length, when it was quite dark, Bastian, Atreyu, and Falkor crept from their
hiding place, and Falkor rose soundlessly into the air with his two riders. Flying as low as
possible over the orchid forest to avoid being seen, he headed in the direction they had
taken that afternoon. The darkness was impenetrable, and they wondered how they would
ever find the castle. But a few minutes later Horok appeared before them in a blaze of
light. There seemed to be a lamp in every one of its thousand windows. Evidently Xayide
wanted her castle to be seen. But that was only reasonable, for she was expecting
Bastian’s visit — a different sort of visit, to be sure.
To be on the safe side, Falkor glided to the ground among the orchids, for his
pearly-white scales would have reflected the glow of the castle.
Under cover of the trees they approached. Outside the gate, ten of the armored
guards were on watch. And at each of the brightly lit windows stood one of them, black,
motionless, and menacing.
Horok Castle was situated on a rise from which the orchid trees had been cleared.
True enough, it was shaped like an enormous hand. Each finger was a tower, and the
thumb was an oriel surmounted by yet another tower. The whole building was many
stories high, and the windows were like glittering eyes looking out over the countryside.
It was known with good reason as the Seeing Hand.
“The first thing we have to do,” Bastian whispered into Atreyu’s ear, “is locate the
prisoners.”
Atreyu nodded and told Bastian to stay there with Falkor. Then he crawled
soundlessly away. He was gone a long time.
When he returned, he reported: “I’ve been all around the castle. There’s only this

one entrance, and it’s too well guarded. But I’ve discovered a skylight high up at the tip of
the middle finger that seems to be unguarded. Falkor could easily take us up there, but
we’d be seen. The prisoners are probably in the cellar. At any rate, I heard a long scream
of pain that seemed to come from deep down.”
Bastian thought hard. Then he whispered: “I’ll try to reach that skylight.
Meanwhile you and Falkor must keep the guards busy. Make them think we’re trying to
get in by the gate. But don’t do any more. Don’t get into a fight. Keep them here as long
as you can. Give me a few minutes’ time before you do anything.”
Atreyu pressed his friend’s hand in silence. Then Bastian took off his silver
mantle and slipped away through the darkness. He had almost circled the castle when he
heard Atreyu shouting:
“Attention! Bastian Balthazar Bux, the Savior of Fantastica, is here. He has come
not to beg Xayide for mercy, but to give her a last chance to release the prisoners. If she
sets them free, her miserable life will be spared!”
Looking around the corner of the castle, Bastian caught a glimpse of Atreyu, who
had put on the silver mantle and coiled his blue-black hair into a kind of turban. To
anyone who didn’t know the two boys very well there was a certain resemblance between
them.
For a moment the armored giants seemed undecided. Then Bastian could hear in
the distance the metallic stamping of their feet as they rushed at Atreyu. The shadows in
the windows also began to move as the guards left their posts to see what was going on.
And many more of the armored giants poured out through the gate. When the first had
almost reached Atreyu, he slipped nimbly away and a moment later appeared over their
heads, riding Falkor. The armored giants brandished their swords and leapt high in the
air, but they couldn’t reach him.
Bastian started climbing the wall. Here and there he was helped by outcroppings
and window ledges, but more often he had to hold fast with his fingertips. Higher and
higher he climbed; once the jutting stone he had set his foot on crumbled away and left
him hanging by one hand, but he pulled himself up, found a hold for his other hand, and
kept climbing. When at last he reached the towers he made better progress, for they were
so close together that he could push himself up by bracing himself between them.
At length he reached the skylight and slipped through. True enough, there was no
guard in the tower room, heaven knows why. Opening a door, he came to a narrow
winding staircase and started down. When he reached the floor below, he saw two black
guards standing at a window watching the excitement outside. He managed to pass
behind them without attracting their notice.
On he crept, down more stairways, through passages and corridors. One thing was
certain. Those armored giants might have been great fighters, but they didn’t amount to
much as guards.
At last the cold and the musty smell told him he was in the cellar. Luckily all the
guards seemed to have raced upstairs in pursuit of the supposed Bastian Balthazar Bux.
Torches along the walls lit the way for him. Lower and lower he went. He had the
impression that there were as many floors below the ground as above. Finally he came to
the bottommost cellar and soon found the dungeon where Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn
were languishing. It was a pitiful sight.
They were hanging by their wrists over what seemed to be a bottomless pit. The

long iron chains that held them were connected by way of overhead rollers with a winch,
but the winch was fastened with a great padlock and couldn’t be budged. Bastian stood
perplexed.
The three prisoners’ eyes were closed. They seemed to be asleep or unconscious.
Then Hydorn the Enduring opened his left eye and sang out: “Hey, friends. Look who’s
here!”
The others managed to open their eyes and a smile crossed their lips.
“We knew you wouldn’t leave us in the lurch!” cried Hydorn.
“How can I get you down?” Bastian asked. “The winch is locked.”
“Just take your sword and cut the chains,” said Hysbald.
“And drop us into the pit?” said Hykrion. “That’s not such a good idea.”
“Anyway,” said Bastian, “I can’t draw my sword. I can’t use Sikanda unless it
jumps into my hand.”
“That’s the trouble with magic swords,” said Hydorn. “When you need them, they
go on strike.”
“Hey!” Hysbald whispered. “The guards had the key to that winch. Where could
they have put it?”
“I remember a loose stone,” said Hykrion. “But I couldn’t see very well while they
were hoisting me up here.”
Bastian looked and looked. The light was dim and flickering, but after a while he
discovered a stone flag that was not quite even with the rest. He lifted it cautiously, and
there indeed was the key.
He opened the big padlock and removed it from the winch. Then slowly he began
to turn. It creaked and groaned so loud that the armored giants must have heard it by then
if they weren’t totally deaf. Even so, there was nothing to be gained by stopping. Bastian
went on turning until the three knights were level with the floor, though still over the pit.
Then, after swinging them to and fro until their feet touched the ground, he let them
down. They stretched out exhausted and showed no inclination to move. Besides, they
still had the heavy chains on their wrists.
Bastian had little time to think, for metallic steps came clanking down the stone
stairs. The guards! Their armor glittered in the torchlight like the carapaces of giant
insects. All with the same movement, they drew their swords and rushed at Bastian.
Then at last Sikanda leapt from the rusty sheath and into his hand. With the speed
of lightning the blade attacked the first of the armored giants and hacked him to pieces
before Bastian himself knew what was happening. It was then that he saw what the giants
were made of. They were hollow shells of armor. There was nothing inside! He had no
time to wonder what made them move.
Bastian was in a good position, for only one giant at a time could squeeze through
the narrow doorway of the dungeon, and one at a time Sikanda chopped them to bits.
Soon their remains lay piled up on the floor like enormous black eggshells. After some
twenty of them had been disposed of, the rest withdrew, evidently in the hope of
waylaying Bastian in a position more favorable to themselves.
Taking advantage of the breathing spell, Bastian let Sikanda cut the shackles from
the knights’ wrists. Hykrion and Hydorn dragged themselves to their feet and tried to
draw their swords, which strangely enough had not been taken away from them, but their
hands were numb from the long hanging and refused to obey them. Hysbald, the most

delicate of the three, wasn’t even able to stand by himself. His two friends had to hold
him up.
“Never mind,” said Bastian. “Sikanda needs no help. Just stay behind me and
don’t get in my way.”
They left the dungeon, slowly climbed the stairs, and came to a large hall.
Suddenly all the torches went out. But Sikanda shone bright.
Again they heard the heavy metallic tread of many armored giants.
“Quick!” cried Bastian. “Back to the stairs! This is where I’m going to fight!”
He couldn’t see whether the three knights obeyed his order and there was no time
to find out, because Sikanda was already dancing in his hand. The entire hall was ablaze
with its sharp white light. The assailants managed to push Bastian back from the top of
the stairs and to attack him from all sides, yet not one of their mighty blows touched him.
Sikanda whirled around him so fast that it looked like hundreds of swords. And a few
moments later he was surrounded by a heap of shattered black armor in which nothing
stirred.
“Come on up!” Bastian cried to his companions.
The three knights stood gaping on the stairs. Hykrion’s moustache was trembling.
“I’ve never seen anything like it!” he cried.
“Something to tell my grandchildren!” Hysbald stammered.
“The only trouble,” said Hydorn mournfully, “is that they won’t believe you.”
Bastian stood there with sword in hand, wondering what to do next. Suddenly it
sprang back into its sheath.
“The danger seems to be over,” he said.
“At least the part that calls for a sword,” said Hydorn. “What do we do now?”
“Now,” said Bastian, “I want to make this Xayide’s acquaintance. I’ve got a bone
to pick with her.”
After climbing several more flights of stairs, Bastian and the knights reached the
ground floor, where Atreyu and Falkor were waiting for them in a kind of lobby.
“Well done, you two!” cried Bastian, slapping Atreyu on the back.
“What’s become of the armored giants?” asked Atreyu.
“Hollow shells!” said Bastian contemptuously. “Where’s Xayide?”
“Up in her magic throne room,” answered Atreyu.
“Come along,” said Bastian, taking the silver mantle which Atreyu held out to
him. And all together, including Falkor, they climbed the broad stairway leading to the
upper floors.
When Bastian, followed by his companions, entered the magic throne room,
Xayide arose from her red-coral throne. She was wearing a long gown of violet silk, and
her flaming red hair was coiled and braided into a fantastic edifice. Her face and her long,
thin hands were as pale as marble. There was something strangely disturbing about her
eyes. It took Bastian a few moments to figure out what it was — they were of different
colors, one green, one red. She was trembling, evidently in fear of Bastian. He looked her
straight in the face and she lowered her long lashes.
The room was full of weird objects whose purpose it was hard to determine.
There were large globes covered with designs, sidereal clocks, and pendulums hanging
from the ceiling. There were costly censers from which rose heavy clouds of different-
colored smoke, which crept over the floor like fog.

Thus far Bastian hadn’t said a word. That seemed to shatter Xayide’s composure,
for suddenly she threw herself on the floor in front of him, took one of his feet and set it
on her neck.
“My lord and master!” she said in a deep voice that sounded somehow
mysterious. “No one in Fantastica can withstand you. You are mightier than the mighty
and more dangerous than all the demons together. If you wish to take revenge on me for
being too stupid to recognize your greatness, trample me underfoot. I have earned your
anger. But if you wish once again to demonstrate your far-famed magnanimity, suffer me
to become your obedient slave, who swears to obey you body and soul. Teach me to do
what you deem desirable and I will be your humble pupil, obedient to your every hint. I
repent of the harm I tried to do you and beg your mercy!”
“Arise, Xayide!” said Bastian. He had been very angry, but her speech pleased
him. If she had really acted out of ignorance and really regretted it so bitterly, then it was
beneath his dignity to punish her. And since she even wished to learn what he deemed
desirable, he could see no reason to reject her plea.
Xayide arose and stood before him with bowed head. “Will you obey me
unconditionally,” he asked, “however hard you may find it to do my bidding? Will you
obey me without argument and without grumbling?”
“I will, my lord and master,” said Xayide. “You will see there is nothing we
cannot accomplish if we combine my artifices and your power.”
“Very well,” said Bastian. “Then I will take you into my service. You will leave
this castle and go with me to the Ivory Tower, where I am expecting to meet Moon
Child.”
For a fraction of a second Xayide’s eyes glowed red and green, but then, veiling
them with her long lashes, she said: “I am yours to command, my lord and master.”
Thereupon all descended the stairs. Once outside the castle, Bastian observed:
“The first thing to do is find our traveling companions. Goodness knows where they are.”
“Not very far from here,” said Xayide. “I’ve led them slightly astray.”
“For the last time,” said Bastian.
“For the last time,” she agreed. “But how will we get there? Do you expect me to
walk? Through the woods and at night?”
“Falkor will carry us,” said Bastian. “He’s strong enough to carry us all.”
Falkor raised his head and looked at Bastian. His ruby-red eyes glittered.
“I’m strong enough, Bastian Balthazar Bux,” boomed the bronze bell-like voice.
“But I will not carry that woman.”
“Oh yes, you will,” said Bastian. “Because I command it.”
The luckdragon looked at Atreyu, who nodded almost imperceptibly. But Bastian
had seen that nod.
All took their places on Falkor’s back, and he rose into the air.
“Which way?” he asked.
“Straight ahead,” said Xayide.
“Which way?” Falkor asked again, as if he hadn’t heard.
“Straight ahead!” Bastian shouted. “You heard her.”
“Do as she says,” said Atreyu under his breath. And Falkor complied.
Half an hour later — already the dawn was graying — they saw innumerable
campfires down below and the luckdragon landed. In the meantime many more

Fantasticans had turned up and a lot of them had brought tents. The camp, spread out on a
wide, flower-strewn meadow at the edge of the orchid forest, looked like a tent city.
“How many are you now?” Bastian asked.
Ilwan, the blue djinn, who had taken charge of the caravan in Bastian’s absence,
replied that he had not yet been able to make an exact count, but that he guessed there
were close to a thousand. “And there’s something else to report,” he added. “Something
rather strange. Soon after we pitched camp, shortly before midnight, five of those
armored giants appeared. But they were peaceful and they’ve kept to themselves. Of
course, no one dared to go near them. They brought a big litter made of red coral. But it
was empty.”
“Those are my carriers,” said Xayide in a pleading tone to Bastian. “I sent them
ahead last night. That’s the pleasantest way to travel. If it does not displease you, my
lord.”
“I don’t like the look of this,” Atreyu interrupted.
“Why not?” said Bastian. “What’s your objection?”
“She can travel any way she likes,” said Atreyu drily. “But she wouldn’t have sent
her litter here last night if she hadn’t known in advance that she’d be coming here. She
had planned the whole thing. Your victory was really a defeat. She purposely let you win.
That was her way of winning you over.”
“Enough of this!” cried Bastian, purple with anger. “I didn’t ask for your opinion.
You make me sick with your lecturing. And now you question my victory and ridicule
my magnanimity.”
Atreyu was going to say something, but Bastian screamed at him: “Shut up and
leave me be! If the two of you aren’t satisfied with what I do and the way I am, go away.
I’m not keeping you. Go where you please! I’m sick of you!”
Bastian folded his arms over his chest and turned his back on Atreyu. The
Fantasticans who had gathered around were dumbfounded. For a time Atreyu stood
silent. Up until then Bastian had never reprimanded him in the presence of others. He was
so stunned he could hardly breathe. He waited a while, then, when Bastian did not turn
back to him, he slowly walked away. Falkor followed him.
Xayide smiled. It wasn’t a pleasant smile.
In that moment, Bastian’s memory of having been a child in his world was
effaced.
XXI
The Star Cloister
ninterruptedly, new emissaries from all parts of Fantastica poured in to swell the

army of those accompanying Bastian on his march to the Ivory Tower. It proved
impossible to take a count, because new ones kept arriving while the counting was in
progress. Each morning an army several thousand strong got under way. And each night
it set up the strangest tent city imaginable. Since Bastian’s traveling companions varied
enormously in shape and size, some of their night lodgings might have been mistaken for
circus tents, while others, at the opposite end of the scale, were no bigger than a thimble.
Their vehicles also showed astonishing variety, ranging from common covered wagons
and diligences to the most extraordinary rolling barrels, bouncing balls, and crawling
containers with automotive legs.
Of all the tents the most magnificent was the one that had been procured for
Bastian. The shape and size of a small house, it was made of lustrous, many-colored silk,
embroidered with gold and silver. A flag affixed to the roof was decorated with Bastian’s
coat of arms, a seven-armed candelabrum. The inside was furnished with soft blankets
and cushions. Bastian’s tent was always set up at the center of the camp. And the blue
djinn, who had become his factotum, stood guard at the entrance.
Atreyu and Falkor were still among the host of Bastian’s companions, but since
the public reprimand he hadn’t exchanged a word with them. Secretly, he was waiting for
Atreyu to give in and apologize. But Atreyu did nothing of the kind. Nor did Falkor show
any inclination to humble himself before Bastian. And that, said Bastian to himself, was
just what they must learn to do. If they expected him to back down they had another thing
coming; his will was of steel. But if they gave in, he’d welcome them with open arms. If
Atreyu knelt down to him, he would lift him up and say: Don’t kneel to me, Atreyu, you
are and remain my friend. . .
But for the time being Atreyu and Falkor brought up the rear of the procession.
Falkor seemed to have forgotten how to fly; he trudged along on foot and Atreyu walked
beside him, most of the time with bowed head. A sad comedown for the proud reconnais-
sance flyers. Bastian wasn’t happy about it, but there was nothing he could do.
He began to be bored riding the mule Yikka in the lead of the caravan, and took to
visiting Xayide in her litter instead. She received him with a great show of respect, gave
him the most comfortable seat, and squatted down at his feet. She could always think of
something interesting to talk about, and when she noticed that he disliked speaking of his
past in the human world, she stopped questioning him about it. Most of the time she
smoked her Oriental water pipe. The stem looked like an emerald-green viper, and the
mouthpiece, which she held between her marble-white fingers, suggested a snake’s head.
She seemed to be kissing it as she smoked. The clouds of smoke which poured indolently
from her mouth and nose changed color with every puff, from blue to yellow, to pink, to
green, and so on.
“Xayide,” said Bastian on one of his visits, looking thoughtfully at the armored
giants who were carrying the litter. “There’s something I’ve been wanting to ask you.”
“Your slave is listening,” said Xayide.
“When I fought your guards,” said Bastian, “I discovered that there was nothing
inside their shell of armor. So what makes them move?”
“My will,” said Xayide with a smile. “It’s because they’re empty that they do my
will. My will can control anything that’s empty.”
She turned her red and green gaze on Bastian. For a moment it gave him a
strangely eerie feeling, but quickly she lowered her lashes.

“Could I control them with my will?” he asked.
“Of course you could, my lord and master,” she replied. “You could do it a
hundred times better than I. I am as nothing beside you. Would you care to try?”
“Not now,” said Bastian, who was rather frightened at the idea. “Maybe some
other time.”
“Tell me,” said Xayide. “Do you really enjoy riding an old mule? Wouldn’t you
rather be carried by beings you can move with your will?”
“But Yikka likes to carry me,” said Bastian almost peevishly. “It gives her
pleasure.”
“Then you do it to please her?”
“Why not?” said Bastian. “What’s wrong with that?”
Xayide let some green smoke rise from her mouth.
“Oh, nothing at all, my lord. How can anything you do be wrong?”
“What are you driving at, Xayide?”
She bowed her head of flaming red hair.
“You think of others too much, my lord and master,” she whispered. “No one is
worthy to divert your attention from your own all-important development. If you promise
not to be angry, I will venture a piece of advice: Think more of your own perfection.”
“What has that got to do with Yikka?”
“Not much, my lord. Hardly anything. Just this: she’s not a worthy mount for
someone as important as you. It grieves me to see you riding such an undistinguished
animal. All your traveling companions are surprised. You alone, my lord and master,
seem unaware of what you owe to yourself.”
Bastian said nothing, but Xayide’s words had made an impression.
Next day, as the procession with Bastian and Yikka in the lead was passing
through lush rolling meadows, interspersed here and there by small copses of fragrant
lilac, he decided to take Xayide’s advice.
At noon, when the caravan stopped to rest, he patted the old mule on the neck and
said: “Yikka, the time has come for us to part.”
Yikka let out a cry of dismay. “Why, master?” she asked. “Have I done my job so
badly?” And tears flowed from the corners of her dark eyes.
“Not at all,” Bastian hastened to reassure her. “You’ve been carrying me so gently
all this time, you’ve been so patient and willing that I’ve decided to reward you.”
“I don’t want any other reward,” said Yikka. “I just want to go on carrying you.
How could I wish for anything better?”
“Didn’t you once tell me it made you sad that mules can’t have children?”
“Yes,” said Yikka, “because when I’m very old I’d like to tell my children about
these happy days.”
“Very well,” said Bastian. “Then I’ll tell you a story that will come true. And I’ll
tell it only to you, to you and no one else, because it’s your story.”
Then he took hold of one of Yikka’s long ears and whispered into it: “Not far from
here, in a little lilac copse, the father of your son is waiting for you. He’s a white stallion
with the white wings of a swan. His mane and his tail are so long they touch the ground.
He has been following you secretly for days, because he’s immortally in love with you.”
“With me?” cried Yikka, almost frightened. “But I’m only a mule, and I’m not as
young as I used to be.”

“In his eyes,” said Bastian in an undertone, “you’re the most beautiful creature in
all Fantastica just as you are. And also perhaps because you’ve carried me. But he’s very
bashful, he doesn’t dare approach you with all these creatures about. You must go to him
or he’ll die of longing for you.”
“Myohmy!” Yikka sighed. “Is it as bad as all that?”
“Yes,” Bastian whispered in her ear. “And now, goodbye, Yikka. Just run along,
you’ll find him.”
Yikka took a few steps, but then she looked back again.
“Frankly,” she said. “I’m kind of scared.”
“There’s nothing to worry about,” said Bastian with a smile. “And don’t forget to
tell your children and grandchildren about me.”
“Thank you, master,” said Yikka, and off she went.
For a long while Bastian looked after her as she hobbled off. He wasn’t really
happy about sending her away. He went to his luxurious tent, lay down on the soft
cushions, and gazed at the ceiling. He kept telling himself that he had made Yikka’s
dearest wish come true. But that didn’t make him feel any better. A person’s reason for
doing someone a good turn matters as much as the good turn itself.
But that made no difference to Yikka, for she really did find the white, winged
stallion. They married and she had a son who was a white, winged mule. His name was
Pataplan and he made quite a name for himself in Fantastica, but that’s another story and
shall be told another time.
From then on Bastian traveled in Xayide’s litter. She even offered to get out and
walk alongside so as to give him every possible comfort, but that was more than Bastian
would accept. So they sat together in the comfortable red-coral litter, which from then on
led the procession.
Bastian was still rather gloomy and felt a certain resentment toward Xayide for
persuading him to part with his mule. He kept answering her in monosyllables, so that no
real conversation was possible. Xayide soon realized what the trouble was.
To guide his thoughts into different channels, she said brightly: “I would like to
make you a present, my lord and master, if you deign to accept one from me.”
She rummaged under her cushions and found a richly ornamented casket. As
Bastian tingled with eagerness, she opened it and took out a belt with chain links. Each
link as well as the clasp was made of clear glass.
“What is it?” Bastian asked.
“It’s a belt that makes its wearer invisible. But if you want it to belong to you, my
lord, you must give it its name.”
Bastian examined it. “The belt Ghemmal,” he said then.
Xayide nodded. “Now it is yours,” she said with a smile. Bastian took the belt and
held it irresolutely in his hand.
“Would you like to try it now?” she asked. “Just to see how it works?”
To Bastian’s surprise, the belt was a perfect fit. But it gave him a most unpleasant
feeling not to see his own body. He wanted to take the belt off, but that wasn’t so easy
since he could see neither the buckle nor his own hands.
“Help!” he cried in a panic, suddenly afraid that he would never find the buckle
and would remain invisible forever.
“You have to learn to handle it,” said Xayide. “I had the same trouble at first.

Permit me to help you, my lord and master.”
She reached into the empty air. A moment later she had unfastened the belt and
Bastian was relieved to see himself again. He laughed, while Xayide drew smoke from
her water pipe and smiled.
If nothing else, she had cheered him up.
“Now you are safe from harm,” she said gently, “and that means more to me than
you can imagine.”
“Harm?” asked Bastian, still slightly befuddled. “What sort of harm?”
“Oh, no one can contend with you,” Xayide whispered. “Not if you are wise. The
danger is inside you, and that’s why it’s hard to protect you against it.”
“Inside me? What does that mean?”
“A wise person stands above things, he neither loves nor hates. But you, my lord,
set store by friendship. Your heart should be as cold and indifferent as a snow-covered
mountain peak, and it isn’t. That’s why someone can harm you.”
“Someone? What someone?”
“Someone you still care for in spite of all his insolence.”
“Speak more plainly.”
“That rude, arrogant little savage from the Greenskin country, my lord.”
“Atreyu?”
“Yes, and that outrageous, impertinent Falkor!”
“You think they’d want to harm me?” Bastian could hardly keep from laughing.
Xayide bowed her head and said nothing.
“I’ll never believe that,” said Bastian. “I won’t listen to another word.”
Xayide still said nothing. She bowed her head still lower.
After a long silence Bastian asked: “What do you suppose Atreyu is plotting?”
“My lord,” Xayide whispered. “I wish I hadn’t spoken.”
“Well, now that you’ve started,” Bastian cried, “tell me everything. Stop beating
about the bush. What do you know?”
“I tremble at your anger, my lord,” Xayide stammered, and true enough, she was
all atremble. “But even if it costs me my life, I will tell you. Atreyu is plotting to take the
Childlike Empress’s amulet away from you, by stealth or by force.”
For a moment Bastian could hardly breathe.
“Can you prove it?” he asked.
Xayide shook her head.
“My knowledge,” she murmured, “is not of the kind that can be proved.”
“Then keep it to yourself,” said Bastian, the blood rising to his face. “And don’t
malign the truest, bravest boy in all Fantastica.”
With that he jumped out of the litter and left her.
Xayide’s fingers played with the snake’s head and her green-and-red eyes glowed.
After a while she smiled again. Violet smoke rose from her mouth and she whispered:
“You will see, my lord and master. The belt Ghemmal will show you.”
When the camp was set up that night, Bastian went to his tent. He ordered Ilwan,
the blue djinn, not to admit anyone, and especially not Xayide. He wanted to be alone and
to think.
What the sorceress had told him about Atreyu hardly seemed worth troubling his

head about. He had something else on his mind: those few words she dropped about
wisdom.
He had been through so much; he had known joy and fear, discouragement and
triumph; he had rushed from wish fulfillment to wish fulfillment, never stopping to rest.
And nothing had brought him calm and contentment. To be wise was to be above joy and
sorrow, fear and pity, ambition and humiliation. It was to hate nothing and to love
nothing, and above all to be utterly indifferent to the love and hate of others. A truly wise
man attached no importance to anything. Nothing could upset him and nothing could
harm him. Yes, to be like that would be his final wish, the wish that would bring him to
what he really wanted. Now he thought he understood what Grograman had meant by
those words. And so he wished to become wise, the wisest being in Fantastica.
A little later he stepped out of his tent.
The moon cast its light on a landscape that he had scarcely noticed up until then.
The tent city lay in a hollow ringed about by strangely shaped mountains. The silence
was complete. The hollow was fairly well wooded, while on the mountain slopes the
vegetation became more sparse and farther up there was none at all. The peaks formed all
manner of figures, almost as though a giant sculptor had shaped them. No breeze was
blowing and there wasn’t a cloud in the sky. The stars glittered and seemed nearer than
usual.
At the top of one of the highest peaks Bastian made out a sort of cupola. It seemed
to be inhabited, for it gave off a faint light.
“I’ve noticed it too, my lord,” said Ilwan in his rasping voice. He was standing at
his post by the entrance to the tent. “What can it be?”
He had no sooner spoken than Bastian heard a strange cry in the distance. It
suggested the long-drawn-out hooting of an owl, but it was deeper and louder. It sounded
a second and then a third time, but now there were several voices.
Owls they were indeed, six in number, as Bastian was soon to find out. Coming
from the direction of the cupola, they glided at an incredible speed on almost motionless
wings. Soon they were close enough for Bastian to see how amazingly large they were.
Their eyes glittered, and their erect ears were capped with bundles of down. The flight
was soundless, but as they landed, a faint whirring of their wings could be heard.
Then they were sitting on the ground in front of Bastian’s tent, swiveling their
heads with their great round eyes in all directions. Bastian went up to them.
“Who are you?” he asked, “and who are you looking for?”
“We were sent by Ushtu, the Mother of Intuition,” said one of the six owls. “We
are messengers from Ghigam, the Star Cloister.”
“What sort of cloister is that?” Bastian asked.
“It is the home of wisdom,” said another of the owls, “where the Monks of
Knowledge live.”
“And who is Ushtu?” Bastian asked.
“One of the Three Deep Thinkers who direct the cloister and instruct the monks,”
said a third owl. “We are the night messengers, which puts us in her department.”
“If it were daytime,” said the fourth owl, “Shirkry, the Father of Vision, would
have sent his messengers, who are eagles. And in the twilight hours between day and
night, Yisipu, the Son of Reason, sends his messengers, who are foxes.”
“Who are Shirkry and Yisipu?”

“They are the other Deep Thinkers, our Superiors.”
“And what are you doing here?”
“We are looking for the Great Knower,” said the sixth owl. “The Three Deep
Thinkers know he is in this tent city and have sent us to beg him for illumination.”
“The Great Knower?” asked Bastian. “Who’s that?”
“His name,” replied all six owls at once, “is Bastian Balthazar Bux.”
“You’ve found him,” said Bastian. “It’s me.”
They bowed low, which because of their jerky movements looked almost comical
in spite of their great size.
“The Three Deep Thinkers,” said the first owl, “beg you humbly and respectfully
to visit them. They hope you will solve a problem they have been trying in vain to solve
all their long lives.”
Bastian stroked his chin thoughtfully.
“Very well,” he answered after a while. “But I must take my two disciples with
me.”
“There are six of us,” said the owl. “Two of us will carry each one of you.”
Bastian turned to the blue djinn.
“Ilwan,” he said. “Bring me Atreyu and Xayide.”
The djinn bowed and went his way.
“What is this problem they want me to solve?” Bastian asked.
“O Great Knower,” said one of the owls, “we are only poor ignorant messengers.
We don’t even belong to the lowest rank of the Monks of Knowledge. How could we
possibly have cognizance of the problem which the Deep Thinkers in all their long lives
have been unable to solve?”
A few minutes later Ilwan came back with Atreyu and Xayide. On the way he had
told them what it was all about.
As he stood before Bastian, Atreyu asked in an undertone: “Why me?”
“Indeed,” said Xayide. “Why him?”
“You will find out,” said Bastian.
With admirable foresight, the owls had brought trapezes, one for every two owls.
Bastian, Atreyu, and Xayide sat on the bars, and the great night birds, each holding a
trapeze rope in its claws, rose into the air.
When the travelers reached the Star Cloister of Ghigam, they round that the great
cupola was only the uppermost part of a large building composed of many cubical
compartments. It had innumerable little windows and its outer wall might have been
taken for the continuation of a sheer cliff. An unbidden visitor could hardly have gained
admittance to the place.
The cubical compartments contained the cells of the Monks of Knowledge, the
libraries, the refectories, and the lodgings of the messengers. The meeting hall, where the
Three Deep Thinkers delivered their lectures, was situated under the cupola.
The Monks of Knowledge were Fantasticans of all kinds, from every part of the
realm. But anyone wishing to enter the cloister had to break off all contact with family
and country. The lives of these monks were hard and frugal, devoted exclusively to
knowledge. The community was far from accepting all applicants. The examinations
were difficult and the Three Deep Thinkers set the highest standards. Thus there were
seldom more than three hundred monks in the cloister at one time, but these were by far

the most intelligent persons in all Fantastica. Occasionally the community dwindled to
seven members, but even then there was no thought of relaxing the entrance
requirements. At the moment the monks and monkesses numbered roughly two hundred.
When Bastian, followed by Atreyu and Xayide, was led into the large lecture hall,
he saw a motley assortment of Fantasticans, who differed from his own retinue only in
that they all were dressed in rough dark-brown monk’s robes. A wandering cliff or a tiny
must have looked very strange in such an outfit.
The Superiors of the order, the Three Deep Thinkers, were built like humans
except for their heads. Ushtu, the Mother of Intuition, had the head of an owl; Shirkry,
the Father of Vision, the head of an eagle; and Yisipu, the Son of Reason, the head of a
fox. They sat in raised stone chairs and looked enormous. The sight of them seemed to
intimidate Atreyu and even Xayide. But Bastian stepped right up to them.
With a motion of his head, Shirkry, who was evidently the oldest of the three and
was sitting in the middle, indicated an empty chair facing the Deep Thinkers. Bastian sat
down in it.
After a prolonged silence, Shirkry spoke. He spoke softly, but his voice sounded
surprisingly deep and full.
“Since time immemorial we have been pondering the enigma of our world.
Yisipu’s reasonings in the matter are different from Ushtu’s intuitions, and Ushtu’s
intuitions differ from my vision, which in turn is different from Yisipu’s reasonings. This
is intolerable and must not be allowed to go on. That is why we have asked the Great
Knower to come here and instruct us. Are you willing?”
“I am,” said Bastian.
“Then, O Great Knower, hear our question: What is Fantastica?”
After a short silence Bastian replied: “Fantastica is the Neverending Story.”
“Give us time to understand your answer,” said Shirkry. “Let us meet again here
tomorrow at the same hour.”
Silently the Three Deep Thinkers and the Monks of Knowledge arose, and all left
the hall.
Bastian, Atreyu, and Xayide were led to guest cells, where a simple meal awaited
them. Their beds were wooden planks covered with rough woolen blankets. Though this
didn’t matter to Bastian and Atreyu, Xayide would have liked to conjure up a more
comfortable bed. But she soon found to her dismay that her magic powers were without
effect in this cloister.
Late the following night the monks and the Three Deep Thinkers met again in the
great meeting hall. Once again Bastian occupied the high seat. Xayide and Atreyu sat to
the left and right of him.
This time it was Ushtu, the Mother of Intuition, who scrutinized Bastian with her
great owl’s eyes and said: “We have meditated on your answer, O Great Knower. But a
new question has occurred to us. If, as you say, Fantastica is the Neverending Story,
where is the Neverending Story to be found?”
After a short silence Bastian replied: “In a book bound with copper-colored silk.”
“Give us time to understand your words,” said Ushtu. “Let us meet again
tomorrow at the same hour.”
When they had gathered in the meeting hall the following night, Yisipu, the Son
of Reason, took the floor.

“Again we have meditated on your answer, O Great Knower,” he said. “And again
a new question comes to perplex us. If our world, Fantastica, is a Neverending Story and
if this Neverending Story is in a book bound in copper-colored silk — where then is this
book?”
After a short silence Bastian replied: “In the attic of a schoolhouse.”
“O Great Knower,” said the fox-headed Yisipu, “we do not doubt the truth of what
you say. But now we would like to ask you to let us see this truth. Can you do that?”
Bastian thought it over. Then he said: “I believe I can.”
Atreyu looked at Bastian with surprise. Xayide too had a questioning look in her
red-and-green eyes.
“Let us meet again tomorrow night at the same hour,” said Bastian. “But not here.
Let us meet on the roof of the Star Cloister. And then you must keep your eyes fixed on
the heavens.”
The following night was as clear as the three before it. At the appointed hour the
Three Deep Thinkers and all the Monks of Knowledge were gathered on the roof of the
Star Cloister. Atreyu and Xayide, who had no idea what Bastian was up to, were there
too.
Bastian climbed to the top of the great cupola and looked around. For the first
time he saw the Ivory Tower far off on the horizon, shimmering in the moonlight.
He took the stone Al Tsahir from his pocket. It sent out a soft glow. He then
called to mind the inscription he had seen on the door of the Amarganth Library:
. . . But if he says my name a second time
from the end to the beginning,
I will glow in one moment
with the light of a hundred years.
He held the stone up high and cried out: “Rihast-la!”
At that moment there came a flash of lightning so bright that the stars paled and
the dark cosmic space behind them was illumined. And that space was the schoolhouse
attic with its age-blackened beams. In a moment the vision passed and the light of a
hundred years was gone. Al Tsahir had vanished without a trace.
It was some time before the eyes of those present, including Bastian’s, became
accustomed to the feeble light of the moon and the stars.
Shaken by what they had seen, all gathered in the great lecture hall. Bastian was
the last to enter. The Monks of Knowledge and the Three Deep Thinkers arose from their
seats and bowed low to him.
“I have no words,” said Shirkry, “with which to thank you for that flash of
illumination, O Great Knower. For in that mysterious attic I glimpsed a being of my own
kind, an eagle.”
“You are mistaken, Shirkry,” said the owl-faced Ushtu with a gentle smile. “I saw
the creature plainly. It was an owl.”
“You are both mistaken,” cried Yisipu, his eyes aflame. “That being is a relative
of mine, a fox.”
Shirkry raised his hands in horror.
“Here we are back where we started!” he said. “You alone, O Great Knower, can
answer this new question. Which of us is right?”

Smiling serenely, Bastian replied: “All three.”
“Give us time to understand your answer,” said Ushtu.
“All the time you wish,” Bastian replied, “for we shall be leaving you now.”
Bitter disappointment could be read on the faces of the Three Deep Thinkers and
of the Monks of Knowledge. They implored Bastian to stay longer, or better still, forever,
but with a rather disrespectful shrug he declined.
Whereupon the six messengers carried him and his two disciples back to the tent
city.
That night the usual harmony of the Three Deep Thinkers was disturbed by a first
radical difference of opinion, which years later led to the breakup of the community.
Then Ushtu the Mother of Intuition, Shirkry the Father of Vision, and Yisipu the Son of
Reason each founded a cloister of his own. But that is another story and shall be told
another time.
That night Bastian lost all memory of having gone to school. The attic and the
stolen book bound in copper-colored silk vanished from his mind. And he even stopped
asking himself how he had come to Fantastica.
XXII
The Battle for the Ivory Tower
igilant scouts returned to camp, reporting that the Ivory Tower was not far off and
could be reached in two or at the most three days’ marches.
But Bastian seemed irresolute. He kept ordering rest stops, but before the troops
were half settled he would make them start out again. No one knew why he was behaving
so strangely, and no one dared ask him. Since his great feat at the Star Cloister he had
been unapproachable, even for Xayide. All sorts of conjectures were rife, but most of the
traveling companions were quite willing to obey his contradictory orders. Great wise
men, they thought, often strike the common run of people as unpredictable. Atreyu and
Falkor were equally at a loss. The incident at the Star Cloister had baffled them
completely.
Within Bastian two feelings were at war, and he was unable to silence either one.
He longed to meet Moon Child. Now that he was famous and admired throughout
Fantastica, he could approach her as an equal. But at the same time he was afraid she
would ask him to return AURYN to her. And what then? Would she try to send him back
to the world he had almost forgotten? He didn’t want to go back. And he wanted to keep
the Gem. But then he had another idea. Was it so certain that she wanted it back? Maybe
she would let him have it as long as he wished. Maybe she had made him a present of it
and it was his for good. At such moments he could hardly wait to see her again. He

rushed the caravan on. But then, assailed by doubts, he would order a stop and think it all
over again.
After alternating forced marches and prolonged delays, the procession finally
reached the edge of the famous Labyrinth, the immense flower garden with its winding
avenues and pathways. On the horizon the Ivory Tower gleamed white against the gold-
shimmering evening sky.
Awed by the splendor and beauty of the sight, the army of Fantasticans stood
silent. And so did Bastian. Even Xayide’s face showed a look of wonderment, which had
never been seen before and which soon vanished. Atreyu and Falkor, who were in the
rear of the procession, remembered how different the Labyrinth had looked the last time
they had seen it: wasted with the ravages of the Nothing. Now it was greener and more
flourishing than ever before.
Bastian decided to go no farther that day and the tents were pitched for the night.
He sent out messengers to bring greetings to Moon Child and let her know that he would
be arriving at the Ivory Tower next day. Then he lay down in his tent and tried to sleep.
He tossed and turned on his cushions, his worries left him no peace. But he was far from
suspecting that this would be his worst night since coming to Fantastica.
Toward midnight, soon after falling into a restless sleep, he was awakened by
excited whisperings outside his tent. He got up and went out.
“What’s going on?” he asked sternly.
“This messenger,” replied Ilwan, the blue djinn, “claims he is bringing you news
so important that it can’t wait until tomorrow.”
The messenger, whom Ilwan had picked up by the collar, was a nimbly, a creature
bearing a certain resemblance to a rabbit, except that its coat was of bright-colored
feathers instead of fur. Nimblies are among the swiftest runners in Fantastica, and can
cover enormous distances with incredible speed. When running they become almost
invisible except for the trail of dust clouds they leave behind them. That is why the
nimbly had been chosen as messenger. After running to the Ivory Tower and back in next
to no time, he was desperately out of breath when the djinn set him down in front of
Bastian.
“Forgive me, sire,” he said, bowing and panting. “Forgive me if I make so bold as
to disturb your rest, but you would have every reason to be displeased with me if I failed
to do so. Moon Child is not in the Ivory Tower; she has not been there for a long, long
time, and no one knows where she is.”
Suddenly Bastian felt cold and empty inside. “You must be mistaken. That can’t
be.”
“The other messengers will tell you the same thing when they get back, sire.”
After a long silence Bastian said tonelessly: “Thank you. Dismissed.”
He went back into his tent, sat down on his bed, and buried his head in his hands.
This seemed impossible. Moon Child must have known he was on his way to her. Could
it be that she didn’t want to see him again? Or had something happened to her? No, how
could anything happen to her in her own realm?
But the fact remained: she was gone, which meant that he didn’t have to return
AURYN to her. At the same time he felt bitterly disappointed that he wouldn’t be seeing
her again. Whatever her reasons may have been, he found her behavior unbelievable, no,
insulting.

Then he remembered what Falkor and Atreyu had told him: that no one could
meet the Childlike Empress more than once.
The thought made him so unhappy that he suddenly longed for Atreyu and Falkor.
He needed someone to talk to, to confide in.
Then he had an idea: If he put on the belt Ghemmal and made himself invisible,
he could enjoy their comforting presence without mentioning the humiliation he felt.
He opened the ornate casket, took out the belt, and put it on. Then, after waiting
until he had got used to the unpleasant sensation of not seeing himself, he went out and
wandered about the tent city in search of Atreyu and Falkor. Wherever he went he heard
excited whispers, figures darted from tent to tent, here and there several creatures were
huddled together, talking and gesticulating. By then the other messengers had returned,
and the news that Moon Child was not in the Ivory Tower had spread like wildfire.
Atreyu and Falkor were under a flowering rosemary tree at the very edge of the
camp. Atreyu was sitting with his arms folded, looking fixedly in the direction of the
Ivory Tower. The luckdragon lay beside him with his great head on the ground.
“That was my last hope,” said Atreyu. “I thought she might make an exception for
him and let him return the amulet. Now all is lost.”
“She must know what she’s doing,” said Falkor. At that moment Bastian located
them and sat down invisibly nearby.
“Is it certain?” Atreyu murmured. “He mustn’t be allowed to keep AURYN!”
“What will you do?” Falkor asked. “He won’t give it up of his own free will.”
“Then I’ll have to take it from him,” said Atreyu.
At those words Bastian felt the ground sinking from under him.
“That won’t be easy,” he heard Falkor saying. “But if you do take it, I trust that he
won’t be able to get it back.”
“That’s not so sure,” said Atreyu. “He’ll still have his great strength and his magic
sword.”
“But the Gem would protect you,” said Falkor. “Even against him.”
“No,” said Atreyu. “I don’t think so. Not against him.”
“And to think,” said Falkor with a grim laugh, “that he himself offered it to you on
your first night in Amarganth.”
Atreyu nodded. “I didn’t realize then what would happen.”
“How are you going to take it from him?” Falkor asked.
“I’ll have to steal it,” said Atreyu.
Falkor’s head shot up. With glowing ruby-red eyes he stared at Atreyu, who hung
his head and repeated in an undertone: “I’ll have to. There’s no other way.”
After a long silence Falkor asked: “When?”
“It will have to be tonight. Tomorrow may be too late.”
Bastian had heard enough. Slowly he crept away. His only feeling was one of cold
emptiness. Everything was indifferent to him now, just as Xayide had said.
He went back to his tent and took off the belt Ghemmal. Then he bade Ilwan
bring him the three knights, Hysbald, Hykrion, and Hydorn. As he paced the ground
waiting, it came to him that Xayide had foreseen it all. He hadn’t wanted to believe her,
but now he was obliged to. Xayide, he now realized, was sincerely devoted to him. She
was his only true friend. But there was still room for doubt. Perhaps Atreyu wouldn’t
actually carry out his plan. Maybe he had already repented. In that case Bastian wouldn’t

ever mention it — though friendship now meant nothing to him. That was over and done
with.
When the three knights appeared, he told them he had reason to believe that a
thief would come to his tent that night. When they agreed to keep watch and lay hands on
the thief whoever he might be, he went to Xayide’s coral litter. She lay sound asleep,
attended by her five giants in their black armor, who stood motionless on guard. In the
darkness they looked like five boulders.
“I wish you to obey me,” Bastian said softly.
Instantly, all five turned their black iron faces toward him.
“Command us, master of our mistress,” said one in a metallic voice.
“Do you think you can handle Falkor the luckdragon?” Bastian asked.
“That depends on the will that guides us,” said the metallic voice.
“It is my will,” said Bastian.
“Then there is no one we cannot handle,” was the answer.
“Good. Then go close to where he is.” He pointed. “That way. As soon as Atreyu
leaves him, take him prisoner. But keep him there. I’ll have you called when I want you.”
“Master of our mistress,” the metallic voice replied, “it shall be done.”
The five black giants marched off in step. Xayide smiled in her sleep.
Bastian went back to his tent. But once in sight of it, he hesitated. If Atreyu
should really attempt to steal the Gem, he didn’t want to be there when they seized him.
He sat down under a tree nearby and waited, wrapped in his silver mantle. Slowly
the time passed, the sky paled in the east, it would soon be morning. Bastian was
beginning to hope that Atreyu had abandoned his project when suddenly he heard a
tumult in his tent. And a moment later Hykrion led Atreyu out with his arms chained
behind his back. The two other knights followed. Bastian dragged himself to his feet and
stood leaning against the tree.
“So he’s actually done it,” he muttered to himself.
Then he went to his tent. He couldn’t bear to look at Atreyu, and Atreyu too kept
his eyes to the ground.
“Ilwan,” said Bastian to the blue djinn. “Wake the whole camp! I want everyone
here. And tell the black giants to bring Falkor.”
The djinn hurried off with the rasping cry of an eagle. Wherever he went, the
denizens of the tents large and small began to stir.
“He didn’t defend himself at all,” said Hykrion, with a movement of his head
toward Atreyu, who was standing there motionless with eyes downcast. Bastian turned
away and sat down on a stone.
By the time the five armored giants appeared with Falkor, a large crowd had
gathered. At the approach of the stamping metallic steps, the crowd opened up a passage.
Falkor was not chained, and the armed guards were not holding him, but merely
marching to the left and right of him with drawn swords.
“He offered no resistance, master of our mistress,” said one of the metallic voices.
Falkor lay down on the ground at Atreyu’s feet and closed his eyes.
A long silence followed. Creatures poured in from the camp and craned their
necks to see what was going on. Only Xayide was absent. Little by little the whispering
died down. All eyes shuttled back and forth between Bastian and Atreyu, who stood
motionless, looking like stone statues in the gray morning light.

At length Bastian spoke.
“Atreyu,” he said. “You tried to steal Moon Child’s amulet and take it for yourself.
And you, Falkor, were an accomplice to his plan. Not only have you both been untrue to
our old friendship, you have also been guilty of disobedience to Moon Child, who gave
me the Gem. Do you confess your wrong?”
Atreyu cast a long glance at Bastian; then he nodded.
Bastian’s voice failed him. It was some time before he could go on.
“I have not forgotten, Atreyu, that it was you who brought me to Moon Child. I
have not forgotten Falkor’s singing in Amarganth. So I will spare your lives, the lives of a
thief and of a thief’s accomplice. Do what you will. Just so you go away, the farther the
better, and never let me lay eyes on you again. I banish you forever. I have never known
you.”
He bade Hykrion remove Atreyu’s chains. Then he turned away.
Atreyu stood motionless for a long while. Then he cast another glance at Bastian.
It looked as if he wanted to say something, but changed his mind. He bent down to Falkor
and whispered something in his ear. The luckdragon opened his eyes and sat up. Atreyu
jumped on his back and Falkor rose into the air. He flew straight into the brightening
morning sky, and though his movements were heavy and sluggish, he soon vanished in
the distance.
Bastian went to his tent and threw himself down on his bed.
“At last you have achieved true greatness,” said a soft voice. “Now you’ve stopped
caring for anything; now nothing can move you.”
Bastian sat up. It was Xayide. She was squatting in the darkest corner of the tent.
“You?” said Bastian. “How did you get in?”
Xayide smiled.
“O my lord and master, no guards can shut me out. Only your command can do
that. Do you wish to send me away?”
Bastian lay back and closed his eyes. After a while he muttered: “It’s all the same
to me. Go or stay!”
For a long while she watched him from under her half-lowered lids. Then she
asked: “What are you thinking about, my lord and master?”
Bastian turned away and did not reply.
It was plain to Xayide that this was no time to leave him to himself. In such a
mood he was capable of slipping away from her. She must comfort him and cheer him up
— in her own way. For she was determined to hold him to the course she had planned for
him — and for herself. And she knew that in the present juncture no magical belts or
tricks would suffice. It would take stronger medicine, the strongest medicine available to
her, namely, Bastian’s secret wishes. She sat down beside him and whispered in his ear:
“When, O lord and master, will you go to the Ivory Tower?”
“I don’t know,” said Bastian. “What can I do there if Moon Child is gone?”
“You could go and wait for her.”
Bastian turned to face Xayide.
“Do you think she’ll be back?”
He had to repeat his question more insistently before Xayide replied: “No, I don’t
believe so. I believe she has had to leave Fantastica forever, and that you, my lord and
master, are her successor.”

Slowly Bastian sat up and looked into Xayide’s red-and-greien eyes. It was some
time before he grasped the full meaning of her words.
“I!?” he gasped. And his cheeks broke out in red spots.
“Do you find the idea so frightening?” Xayide whispered. “She gave you the
emblem of her power. Now she has left you her empire. Now, my lord and master, you
will be the Childlike Emperor. It is only your right. You not only saved Fantastica by
your coming, you also created it! All of us — I too! — are your creatures. Why should
you, the Great Knower, fear to take the power that is rightfully yours?”
Bastian’s eyes glowed with a cold fever. And then Xayide spoke to him of a new
Fantastica, a world molded in every detail to Bastian’s taste, where he could create and
destroy just as he pleased, where every creature, good or bad, beautiful or ugly, wise or
foolish, would be the product of his will alone, and he would reign supreme and
inscrutable, playing an everlasting game with the destinies of his subjects.
“Then alone,” she concluded, “will you be truly free, free from all obstacles, free
to do as you please. Weren’t you trying to find out what you really and truly want? Well,
now you know.”
That same morning they broke camp, and led by Bastian and Xayide in the coral
litter, the great procession set out for the Ivory Tower. A well-nigh endless column
moved along the twining paths of the Labyrinth. In the late afternoon, when the head of
the column reached the Ivory Tower, the last stragglers had barely entered the great
flowering maze.
Bastian could not have wished for a more festive reception. On every roof and
battlement stood elves with gleaming trumpets, blaring away at the top of their lungs. The
jugglers juggled, the astrologers proclaimed Bastian’s greatness and good fortune, the
bakers baked cakes as big as mountains, the ministers and councilors escorted the coral
litter through the teeming crowd on the High Street, which wound in an ever-narrowing
spiral up the conical tower to the great gate leading into the palace. Followed by Xayide
and the dignitaries, Bastian climbed the snow-white steps of the broad stairway, traversed
halls and corridors, passed through a second gate, through a garden full of ivory animals,
trees, and flowers, mounted higher and higher, crossed a bridge, and passed through the
last gate. He was heading for the Magnolia Pavilion at the very top of the tower. But the
blossom was closed and the last stretch of the way was so steep and smooth that no one
could climb it.
Bastian remembered that the wounded Atreyu had not been able to climb that
slope, not by his own strength at least, because no one who has ever reached the
Magnolia Pavilion can say how he got there. For this victory must come as a gift.
But Bastian was not Atreyu. If anyone was now entitled to bestow the gift of this
victory, it was he. And he had no intention of letting anything stop him.
“Bring workmen,” he commanded. “I want them to cut steps in this smooth
surface. I wish to make my residence up there.”
“Sire,” one of the oldest councilors ventured to object, “that is where our Golden-
eyed Commander of Wishes lives when she is here.”
“Do as you’re told!” Bastian roared at him.
The dignitaries turned pale and shrank back from him. But they obeyed.
Workmen arrived with mallets and chisels. But try as they might, they couldn’t so much
as chip the smooth surface of the dome. The chisels leapt from their hands without

leaving the slightest dent.
“Think of something else,” said Bastian angrily. “My patience is wearing thin.”
Then he turned away, and while waiting for the Magnolia Pavilion to be made
accessible, he and his retinue, consisting chiefly of Xayide, the three knights, Hysbald,
Hykrion, and Hydorn, and Ilwan, the blue djinn, took possession of the remaining rooms
of the palace.
That same night he summoned all the ministers and councilors who had served
Moon Child to a meeting in the large, circular hall where the congress of physicians had
once met. There he informed them that the Golden-eyed Commander of Wishes had left
him, Bastian Balthazar Bux, power over the endless Fantastican Empire, and that he was
now taking her place. In conclusion he demanded perfect obedience.
“Even, or I might say especially,” he added, “when my decisions are beyond your
understanding. For I am not of your kind.”
He then announced that in exactly seventy-seven days he would crown himself
Childlike Emperor of Fantastica and that the event would be celebrated with such
splendor that it would outshine anything ever done in Fantastica. And he ordered the
councilors to send messengers forthwith to every part of the realm, for he wished every
nation of the Fantastican Empire to be represented at his coronation.
Thereupon Bastian withdrew, leaving the councilors and other dignitaries alone
with their bewilderment.
They didn’t know what to do. What they had heard sounded so monstrous that for
a long while they could only stand there silently, hanging their heads. Then they began to
deliberate. And after many hours, they came to the conclusion that they would have to
obey Bastian’s commands, for he bore the emblem of the Childlike Empress, and that that
entitled him to obedience regardless of whether Moon Child had really abdicated in his
favor or whether this was just another of her unfathomable decisions. And so the
messengers were sent and all Bastian’s orders were carried out.
He himself took no further interest in the coronation, but left all the details to
Xayide, who kept the whole court so busy that hardly anyone had time to think.
During the next days and weeks Bastian spent most of his time in the room he had
chosen, staring into space and doing nothing. He would have liked to wish for something
or make up a story to amuse himself, but nothing occurred to him. He felt hollow and
empty.
At length he hit on the idea of wishing for Moon Child to come to him. If he was
really all-powerful, if all his wishes came true, she would have to obey him. For whole
nights he sat there whispering: “Moon Child, come! You must come! I command you to
come!” He thought of her glance, which had lain in his heart like a glittering treasure. But
she did not come. And the more he tried to make her come, the fainter became his
memory of that glitter in his heart, until in the end all was darkness within him.
He convinced himself that everything would come right again if only he could be
in the Magnolia Pavilion. Time and again, he went up to the workmen and tried to spur
them with promises or threats, but all to no avail. Ladders broke, nails bent, chisels split.
Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn, with whom Bastian would gladly have chatted or
played games, were as good as useless. In the deepest cellar of the Ivory Tower they had
discovered wine. There they sat day and night, drinking, playing dice, bellowing silly
songs, or quarreling, and as often as not attacking one another with their swords.

Sometimes they staggered up and down the High Street, molesting the fairies, elves, and
other female denizens of the Tower.
“What do you expect, sire?” they said when Bastian found fault with them. “You
must give us something to do.”
But Bastian couldn’t think of anything and bade them wait until his coronation,
though he himself couldn’t have said what difference that would make.
Little by little the weather changed for the worse. Sunsets of liquid gold became
more infrequent. Almost always the sky was gray and overcast, not a breeze stirred, the
air grew sultry and lifeless.
The day appointed for the coronation was near. The messengers returned. Some
brought delegates from remote corners of Fantastica. But others arrived empty-handed,
for many of the nations refused out of hand to be represented at the ceremony. And in
some countries there had been veiled or open rebellion.
Bastian stared into space.
“Once you are emperor,” said Xayide, “you will put the house in order.”
“I want them to want what I want,” said Bastian.
But already Xayide had hurried off to make new arrangements.
And then came the day of the coronation that did not take place. It went down in
the history of Fantastica as the day of the bloody battle for the Ivory Tower.
There was no dawn that morning; the sky was too covered with thick, leaden-gray
clouds. The air was almost too heavy to breathe.
Working hand in hand with the Ivory Tower’s fourteen masters of ceremony,
Xayide had drawn up an elaborate program for the celebration.
Beginning early in the morning, bands on all the streets and squares played music
such as had never been heard in the Ivory Tower — strident yet monotonous. None who
heard it could help jiggling his feet and dancing. The musicians wore black masks. No
one knew who they were or where Xayide had found them.
Every roof and housefront was decorated with bright-colored flags and pennants,
but they hung sadly limp, for there was no wind. Along the High Street and on the wall
around the palace hundreds of pictures had been set up, ranging in size from small to
enormous, and all showed the same face — Bastian’s.
Since the Magnolia Pavilion was still inaccessible, Xayide had prepared another
site for the coronation. The throne was to be installed at the foot of the ivory steps near
the palace gate where the winding High Street ended. Thousands of golden censers were
smoldering, and the smoke, with its lulling yet exciting fragrance, drifted slowly up the
steps and down the High Street, finding its way into every last nook and cranny. The
armored giants were everywhere. Only Xayide knew how she had managed to multiply
the five she had left into such an army. And as if that were not enough, fifty of them were
mounted on gigantic horses, which were also made of black metal and moved in perfect
unison.
The armored horsemen escorted a throne up the High Street in a triumphal
procession. It was as big as a church door and consisted entirely of mirrors of every size
and shape. Only the cushion on the seat was covered with copper-colored silk. Strangely,
this enormous glittering object glided up the spiral street unaided, without being pushed
or pulled; it seemed to have a life of its own.
When it stopped at the great ivory gate, Bastian stepped out of the palace and sat

down on it. In the midst of all that glitter and splendor he looked like a tiny doll. The
crowd of onlookers, who were held back by a cordon of armored giants, burst into cheers,
but for some inexplicable reason their cheers sounded thin and shrill.
Then began the most tedious and wearisome part of the ceremony. The
messengers and delegates from all over the Fantastican Empire had to form a line, which
extended from the mirror throne down the entire spiraling High Street and deep into the
labyrinthine garden. Every single delegate, when his turn came, had to bow down before
the throne, touch the ground three times with his forehead, kiss Bastian’s right foot, and
say: “In the name of my nation and my species I beseech you, to whom we all owe our
existence, to crown yourself Childlike Emperor of Fantastica.”
This had been going on for two or three hours when a sudden tremor passed
through the crowd. A young faun came dashing up the High Street, reeled with
exhaustion, pulled himself together, ran till he reached Bastian, and threw himself on the
ground, gasping for breath. Bastian bent down to him.
“How dare you interrupt this august ceremony!”
“War, sire!” cried the faun. “Atreyu has gathered a host of rebels and is on his
way here with three armies. They demand that you give up AURYN. If you will not, they
mean to take it by force.”
The rousing music and the shrill cries of jubilation gave way to a deathly silence.
Bastian turned pale.
Then the three knights, Hysbald, Hykrion, and Hydorn, appeared on the run. They
seemed to be in a remarkably good humor.
“At last there’s something for us to do, sire,” all three cried at once. “Leave it to
us. Just get on with your celebration. We’ll round up a few good men and get after those
rebels. We’ll teach them a lesson they won’t forget so soon.”
Among the thousands of creatures present quite a few were utterly useless for
military purposes. But most were able to handle some weapon or to fight with their teeth
or claws. All these gathered around the three knights, who led their army away. Bastian
remained behind with the not-so-martial multitude, to complete the ceremony. But his
heart was no longer in it. Time and again his eyes veered toward the horizon, which he
could see from his throne. Great clouds of dust showed him that Atreyu’s army was no
joke.
“Don’t worry,” said Xayide, who had stepped up to Bastian. “My armored giants
haven’t begun to fight yet. They’ll defend your Ivory Tower. No one can stand up to them,
except for you and your sword.”
A few hours later the first battle reports came in. Atreyu had enlisted almost all
the Greenskins, at least two hundred centaurs, eight hundred and fifty rock chewers, five
luckdragons led by Falkor, who kept attacking from the air, a squadron of giant eagles,
who had flown from the Mountains of Destiny, and innumerable other creatures, even a
sprinkling of unicorns.
Though far inferior in numbers to the troops led by the knights Hykrion, Hysbald,
and Hydorn, Atreyu’s army fought so vigorously that they were soon approaching the
Ivory Tower.
Bastian wanted to go out and lead his army in person, but Xayide advised against
it.
“O lord and master,” she said, “it is unseemly for the Emperor of Fantastica to

take up arms. Leave that to your faithful subjects.”
All day the battle raged. The entire Labyrinth became a trampled, blood-soaked
battlefield. By late afternoon, despite the stubborn resistance of Bastian’s army, the rebels
had reached the foot of the Ivory Tower.
Then Xayide sent in her armored giants, both mounted and on foot, and they
wrought havoc among Atreyu’s followers.
A detailed account of the battle for the Ivory Tower would take us too far. To this
day Fantasticans sing countless songs and tell innumerable stories about that day and
night, for everyone who took part saw it in his own way. Certain of the stories have it that
Atreyu’s army included several white magicians, who had the power to oppose Xayide’s
black magic. Of this we have no certain knowledge, but that would explain how, in spite
of the armored giants, Atreyu and his followers were able to take the Ivory Tower. But
there is another, more likely explanation: Atreyu was fighting not for himself, but for his
friend, whom he was trying to save by defeating him.
The night of the battle was starless, full of smoke and flames. Fallen torches,
overturned censers, and shattered lamps had set the Tower on fire in many places. The
fighters cast eerie shadows. Weapons clashed and battle shouts resounded. Everywhere,
through the flames and the darkness, Bastian searched for Atreyu.
“Atreyu!” he shouted. “Atreyu, show yourself! Stand up and fight! Where are
you?”
But the sword Sikanda didn’t budge from its sheath.
Bastian ran from room to room of the palace, then out on the great wall, which at
that point was as wide as a street. He was heading for the outer gate where the mirror
throne stood — now shattered into a thousand pieces — when he saw Atreyu, sword in
hand, coming toward him.
They stood face to face, and still Sikanda did not budge.
Atreyu put the tip of his sword on Bastian’s chest.
“Give me the amulet,” he said. “For your own sake.”
“Traitor!” cried Bastian. “You are my creature! I created the whole lot of you!
Including you! So how can you rebel against me? Kneel down and beg forgiveness.”
“You’re mad!” cried Atreyu. “You didn’t create anything! You owe everything to
Moon Child! Give me AURYN!”
“Take it if you can.”
Atreyu hesitated.
“Bastian,” he said. “Why do you force me to defeat you in order to save you?”
Bastian tugged at the hilt of his sword. He tugged with all his might and finally
managed to draw Sikanda from its sheath. But it did not leap into his hand of its own
accord, and at the same moment a sound was heard, a sound so terrible that even the
warriors on the High Street outside the gate stood as though frozen to the spot, looking up
at the two adversaries. Bastian recognized that sound. It was the hideous cracking and
grinding he had heard when Grograman turned to stone. Sikanda’s light went out. And
then Bastian remembered how the lion had predicted what would happen if someone
were to draw the sword of his own will. But by then it was too late to turn back.
Atreyu tried to defend himself with his own sword. But wielded by Bastian,
Sikanda cut it in two and struck Atreyu in the chest. Blood spurted from a gaping wound.
Atreyu staggered back and toppled from the wall. But at that moment a white flame shot

through the swirling smoke, caught Atreyu in his fall, and carried him away. The white
flame was Falkor, the luckdragon.
Bastian wiped the sweat from his brow with his mantle and saw that its silver had
turned black, as black as the night. Still with the sword Sikanda in hand, he left the wall
and went down to the palace courtyard.
With Bastian’s victory over Atreyu, the fortunes of war shifted. The rebel army,
which had seemed sure of victory a moment before, took flight. Bastian felt as if he were
caught in a terrible dream and could not wake up. His victory left him with a bitter taste
in his mouth, but at the same time he felt wildly triumphant.
Wrapped in his black mantle, clutching the bloody sword, he passed slowly down
the High Street. The Ivory Tower was blazing like an enormous torch. Hardly aware of
the roaring flames, Bastian went on till he reached the foot of the Tower. There he found
the remnants of his army waiting for him in the devastated Labyrinth — now a far-flung
battefield strewn with the corpses of Fantasticans. Hykrion, Hysbald, and Hydorn were
there too, the last two seriously wounded. Ilwan, the blue djinn, was dead. Xayide,
holding the belt Ghemmal, was standing beside his corpse.
“He saved this for you, O lord and master,” she said.
Bastian took the belt, folded it up, and put it in his pocket.
Slowly he passed his eyes over his companions. Only a few hundred were left.
More dead than alive, they looked like a conclave of ghosts in the flickering light of the
fires.
All had their faces turned toward the Ivory Tower, which was collapsing piece by
piece. The Magnolia Pavilion at the top flared, its petals opened wide, and one could see
that it was empty. Then it too was engulfed by the flames.
Bastian pointed his sword at the heap of flaming ruins and his voice cracked as he
declared: “This is Atreyu’s doing! For this I will pursue him to the ends of the world!”
Hoisting himself up on one of the gigantic metal horses, he cried: “Follow me!”
The horse reared, but he bent it to his will and galloped off into the night.
XXIII
The City of the Old Emperors
hile Bastian was racing through the pitch-black night miles ahead, his
companions were still making preparations for departure. Most were exhausted and none
had anything approaching Bastian’s strength and endurance. Even the armored giants on
their metallic horses had a hard time getting started, and the foot sloggers couldn’t
manage to fall into their mechanical tramp-tramp-tramp. Xayide’s will, which moved
them, seemed to have reached the limits of its power. Her coral litter had been devoured
by flames. A new conveyance had been built out of shattered weapons and charred planks

from the Ivory Tower, but it looked more like a gypsy wagon than a litter. The rest of the
army hobbled and shuffled along as best they could. Even Hykrion, Hysbald, and
Hydorn, who had lost their horses, had to hold one another up. No one spoke, but they all
knew they would never be able to overtake Bastian.
On he galloped through the darkness, his black mantle flapping wildly in the
wind, the metallic limbs of his gigantic horse creaking and grinding at every movement
as the great hooves pounded the earth.
“Gee up!” cried Bastian. “Gee up! Gee up!”
The horse wasn’t running fast enough for him. He was determined to overtake
Atreyu and Falkor at all costs, even if it meant riding this metallic monster to its death.
He wanted vengeance! He would have attained the goal of all his wishes if Atreyu
hadn’t interfered. Bastian had not become Emperor of Fantastica. And for that he would
make Atreyu repent.
The joints of Bastian’s metallic steed ground and creaked louder and louder, but
still it obeyed its rider’s will.
Bastian rode for hours and hours through the endless night. In his mind’s eye he
saw the flaming Ivory Tower. Over and over he lived the moment when Atreyu had set
the point of his sword to his chest. And then for the first time he asked himself why
Atreyu had hesitated. Why, after all that had happened, couldn’t he bring himself to strike
Bastian and take AURYN by force? And suddenly Bastian thought of the wound he had
inflicted on Atreyu and the look in Atreyu’s eyes as he staggered and fell.
Bastian put Sikanda, which up until then he had been clutching in his fist, back
into its rusty sheath.
In the first light of dawn he saw he was on a heath. Dark clumps of juniper
suggested motionless groups of gigantic hooded monks or magicians with pointed hats.
And then suddenly, in the midst of a frantic gallop, Bastian’s metal steed burst
into pieces.
Bastian lay stunned by the violence of his fall. When he finally picked himself up
and rubbed his bruised limbs, he found himself in the middle of a juniper bush. He
crawled out into the open. The fragments of the horse lay scattered all about, as though an
equestrian monument had exploded.
Bastian stood up, threw his black mantle over his shoulders, and with no idea
where he was going, started walking in the direction of the rising sun.
But a glittering object was left behind in the juniper bush: the belt Ghemmal.
Bastian was unaware of his loss and never thought of the belt again. Ilwan had saved it
from the flames for nothing.
A few days later Ghemmal was found by a blackbird, who had no suspicion of
what this glittering object might be. She carried it to her nest, but that’s the beginning of
another story that shall be told another time.
At midday Bastian came to a high earthen wall that cut across the heath. He
climbed to the top of it. Behind it, in a craterlike hollow, lay a city. At least the quantity
of buildings made Bastian think of a city, but it was certainly the weirdest one he had
ever seen.
The buildings seemed to be jumbled every which way without rhyme or reason, as
though they had been emptied at random out of a giant sack. There were neither streets
nor squares nor was there any recognizable order.

And the buildings themselves were crazy; they had “front doors” in their roofs,
stairways which were quite inaccessible and ended in the middle of nowhere; towers
slanted, balconies dangled vertically, there were doors where one would have expected
windows, and floors in the place of walls. Bridges stopped halfway, as though the
builders had suddenly forgotten what they were doing. There were towers bent like
bananas and pyramids standing on their tips. In short, the whole city seemed to have gone
mad.
Then Bastian saw the inhabitants — men, women, and children. They were built
like ordinary human beings, but dressed as if they had lost the power to distinguish
between clothing and objects intended for other purposes. On their heads they wore
lampshades, sand pails, soup bowls, wastepaper baskets, or shoe boxes. Their bodies
were swathed in towels, carpets, big sheets of wrapping paper, or barrels.
Many were pushing or pulling handcarts with all sorts of junk piled up on them,
broken lamps, mattresses, dishes, rags, and knick-knacks. Others were carrying enormous
bales slung over their shoulders.
The farther Bastian went into the city, the thicker became the crowd. But none of
the people seemed to know where they were going. Several times Bastian saw someone
dragging a heavily laden cart in one direction, then after a short time doubling back, and a
few minutes later changing direction again. Everybody was feverishly Active.
Bastian decided to speak to one of these people.
“What’s the name of this place?”
The person let go his cart, straightened up, and scratched his head for a while as
though thinking it over. Then he went away, abandoning his cart, which he seemed to
have forgotten. But a few minutes later, a woman took hold of the cart and started off
with it. Bastian asked her if the junk was hers. The woman stood for a while, deep in
thought. Then she too went away.
Bastian tried a few more times but received no answer.
Suddenly he heard someone giggling. “No point in asking them,” said the giggler.
“They can’t tell you anything. One might, in a manner of speaking, call them the Know-
Nothings.”
Bastian turned toward the voice and saw a little gray monkey sitting on a window
ledge, or rather on what would have been a window ledge if the window hadn’t been
upside down. The animal was wearing a mortarboard with a dangling tassel and seemed
to be busy counting something on his fingers and toes. When he had finished, he grinned
and said: “Sorry to keep you waiting, sir, but there was something I had to figure out.”
“Who are you?” Bastian asked.
“My name is Argax,” said the little monkey, lifting his mortarboard. “Pleased to
meet you. And with whom have I the pleasure?”
“My name is Bastian Balthazar Bux.”
“Just as I thought,” said the monkey, visibly pleased.
“And what is the name of this city?” Bastian inquired.
“It hasn’t actually got a name,” said Argax. “But one might, in a manner of
speaking, call it the City of the Old Emperors.”
“Old Emperors?” Bastian repeated with consternation. “Why, I don’t see anybody
who looks like an Old Emperor.”
“You don’t?” said the monkey with a giggle. “Well, believe it or not, all the

people you’ve seen were Emperors of Fantastica in their time — or wanted to be.”
Bastian was aghast.
“How do you know that, Argax?”
The monkey lifted his mortarboard and grinned.
“I, in a manner of speaking, am the superintendent here.”
Bastian looked around. Not far away an old man had dug a pit. He put a lighted
candle into it, then shoveled earth over the candle.
The monkey giggled. “What would you say to a little tour of the town, sir? To get
acquainted, in a manner of speaking, with your future residence.”
“No,” said Bastian. “What are you talking about?”
The monkey jumped up on his shoulder. “Let’s go,” he whispered. “It’s free of
charge. You’ve already paid the admission fee.”
Bastian obeyed the monkey’s orders, though he would rather have run away. He
grew more miserable with every step. He watched the people and was struck by the fact
that they didn’t talk. They were all so busy with their own concerns that they didn’t even
seem to see one another.
“What’s wrong with them?” Bastian asked. “Why are they so odd?”
“Nothing odd about them!” said Argax. “They’re just like you, in a manner of
speaking, or rather, they were in their time.”
Bastian stopped in his tracks. “What do you mean by that? Do you mean that
they’re humans?”
Argax jumped up and down on Bastian’s shoulder. “Exactly!” he said gleefully.
Bastian saw a woman in the middle of the street trying to spear peas with a
darning needle.
“How did they get here? What are they doing here?”
“Oh, there have always been humans who couldn’t find their way back to their
world,” Argax explained. “First they didn’t want to, and now, in a manner of speaking,
they can’t.”
Bastian looked at a little girl who was struggling to push a doll’s carriage with
square wheels.
“Why can’t they?” he asked.
“They’d have to wish it. And they’ve stopped wishing. They used up their last
wish for something else.”
“Their last wish?” said Bastian, going deathly pale. “Can’t a person go on wishing
as long as he pleases?”
Argax giggled again. Then he tried to take off Bastian’s turban and pick lice out of
his hair.
“Stop that!” Bastian cried. He tried to shake the little monkey off, but Argax held
on tight and squealed with pleasure.
“No! No!” he chattered. “You can only wish as long as you remember your world.
These people here used up all their memories. Without a past you can’t have a future.
That’s why they don’t get older. Just look at them. Would you believe that some of them
have been here a thousand years and more? But they stay just as they are. Nothing can
change for them, because they themselves can’t change anymore.”
Bastian watched a man who had lathered a mirror and was starting to shave it.
Once that might have struck him as funny; now it made him break out in gooseflesh.

He hurried on and soon realized that he was going deeper into the city. He wanted
to turn back, but something drew him onward like a magnet. He began to run and tried to
get rid of the bothersome gray monkey, but Argax clung fast and even spurred him on:
“Faster! Faster!”
Bastian stopped running. He realized that he couldn’t escape. “You mean,” he
asked, gasping for breath, “that all these people here were once Emperors of Fantastica,
or wanted to be?”
“That’s it,” said Argax. “All the ones who can’t find their way back try sooner or
later to become Emperor. They didn’t all make it, but they all tried. That’s why there are
two kinds of fools here. Though the result, in a manner of speaking, is the same.”
“What two kinds? Tell me, Argax! I have to know!”
“Easy does it,” said the monkey, giggling as he tightened his grip on Bastian’s
neck. “The one kind gradually used up their memories. And when they had lost the last
one, AURYN couldn’t fulfill their wishes anymore. After that, they came here, in a
manner of speaking, automatically. The others, the ones who crowned themselves
emperor, lost all their memories at one stroke. So the same thing happened: AURYN
couldn’t fulfill their wishes anymore, because they had none left. As you see, it comes to
the same thing. Here they are, and they can’t get away.”
“Do you mean that they all had AURYN at one time?”
“Naturally!” said Argax. “But they forgot it long ago. And it wouldn’t help them
anymore, the poor fools!”
“Was it. . .” Bastian hesitated. “Was it taken away from them?”
“No,” said Argax. “When someone crowns himself emperor, it simply vanishes.
Obviously, because how, in a manner of speaking, can you use Moon Child’s power to
take her power away from her?”
Bastian felt wretched. He would have liked to sit down somewhere, but the little
gray monkey wouldn’t let him.
“No, no, our tour isn’t done yet. The best is yet to come! Keep moving!”
Bastian saw a boy with a heavy hammer trying to drive nails into a pair of socks.
A fat man was trying to paste postage stamps on soap bubbles. They kept bursting, but he
went on blowing new ones.
“Look!” Bastian heard the giggling voice of Argax and felt his head being twisted
by the monkey’s little hands. “Look over there! It’s so amusing!”
Bastian saw a large group of people, men and women, young and old, all in the
strangest clothes. They didn’t speak, each one was alone with himself. On the ground lay
a large number of cubes, and there were letters on all six sides of the cubes. The people
kept jumbling the cubes and then staring at them.
“What are they doing?” Bastian whispered. “What sort of game is that?”
“It’s called the jumble game,” answered Argax. He motioned to the players and
cried out: “Good work, children! Keep at it! Don’t give up!”
Then, turning back to Bastian, he whispered in his ear: “They can’t talk anymore.
They’ve lost the power of speech. So I thought up this game for them. As you see, it
keeps them busy. It’s very simple. If you stop to think about it, you’ll have to admit that
all the stories in the world consist essentially of twenty-six letters. The letters are always
the same, only the arrangement varies. From letters words are formed, from words
sentences, from sentences chapters, and from chapters stories. Now take a look. What do

you see there?”
Bastian read:
H G I K L O P F M W E Y V X Q
Y X C V B N M A S D F G H J K L O A
Q W E R T Z U I O P U
A S D F G H J K L O A
M N B V C X Y L K J H G F D S A
U P O I U Z T R E W Q A S
Q S E R T Z U I O P U A S D A F
A S D F G H J K L O A Y X C
U P O I U Z T R E W Q
A O L K J H G F D S A M N B V
G K H D S R Z I P
Q E T U O U S F H K O
Y C B M W R Z I P
A R C G U N I K Y O
Q W E R T Z I O P L U A S D
M N B V C X Y A S D
L K J U O N G R E F G H I
“Yes, of course,” said Argax with a giggle, “it usually makes no more sense than
that. But if you keep at it for a long time, words turn up now and then. Not very brilliant
words, but still words. “Spinachcramp,” for instance, or ‘sugarbrush,” or “nosepolish.”
And if you play for a hundred years, or a thousand or a hundred thousand, the law of
chances tells us that a poem will probably come out. And if you play it forever, every
possible poem and every possible story will have to come out, in fact every story about a
story, and even this story about the two of us chatting here. It’s only logical, don’t you
think?”
“It’s horrible,” said Bastian.
“I wouldn’t say that,” said Argax. “It depends on your point of view. It keeps these
people, in a manner of speaking, busy. And anyway, what else can we do with them in
Fantastica?”
For a long time Bastian watched the players in silence. Then he asked under his
breath: “Argax, you know who I am, don’t you?”
“Of course I do. Is there anyone in Fantastica who doesn’t?”
“Tell me one thing, Argax. If I had become emperor yesterday, would I already be
here now?”
“Today or tomorrow,” said the monkey. “Or next week. One way or another,
you’d have ended up here.”
“Then Atreyu saved me?”
“You’ve got me there,” the monkey admitted.
“But if he had succeeded in taking the Gem away from me, what would have
happened then?”
The monkey giggled again.
“You’d have ended up here, in a manner of speaking, all the same.”
“Why?”
“Because you need AURYN to find the way back. But frankly, I don’t believe
you’ll make it.”

The monkey clapped his little hands, lifted his mortarboard, and grinned.
“Tell me, Argax, what must I do?”
“Find a wish that will take you back to your world.”
After a long silence Bastian asked: “Argax, can you tell me how many wishes I
have left?”
“Not very many. In my opinion three or four at the most. And that will hardly be
enough. You’re beginning rather late, and the way back isn’t easy. You’ll have to cross the
Sea of Mist. That alone will cost you a wish. What comes next I don’t know. No one in
Fantastica knows what road you people must take to get back to your world. Maybe
you’ll find Yor’s Minroud, that’s the last hope for people like you. But I’m afraid that for
you it’s, in a manner of speaking, too far. Be that as it may, you will, just this once, find
your way out of the City of the Old Emperors.”
“Thanks, Argax,” said Bastian.
The little gray monkey grinned.
“Goodbye, Bastian Balthazar Bux.”
With one leap Argax vanished into one of the crazy houses. He had taken
Bastian’s turban with him.
For a while Bastian stood motionless. He was so stunned by what he had just
heard that he couldn’t decide what to do. All his plans had collapsed at one stroke. His
thoughts seemed to have been stood on end — like the pyramid he had seen. What he had
hoped was his ruin and what he had feared his salvation.
At the moment only one thing was clear to him: he must get out of this insane
city. And never come back!
He started through the jumble of crazy buildings. He soon discovered that it was
much harder to get out than to get in. Time and time again he lost his way and found
himself back in the center of the city. It took him all afternoon to reach the earthworks.
Then he ran out into the heath and kept going until black night — as black as the night
before — forced him to stop. Exhausted, he collapsed under a juniper tree and fell into a
deep sleep. And while he slept, the memory that he could once make up stories left him.
All night he had the same unchanging vision before his eyes: Atreyu, with the
gaping wound in his chest, stood there looking at him in silence.
Awakened by a thunderclap, Bastian started up. Deep darkness lay all around
him, but the massive clouds that had been gathering for days had been thrown into wild
disorder. Lightning flashed, thunder shook the earth, the storm wind howled over the
heath and the juniper trees were bowed to the ground. Rain fell in dense sheets.
Bastian arose and stood there wrapped in his black mantle; the water ran down his
face.
Lightning struck a tree directly in front of him and split the gnarled trunk. The
branches went up in flames, the wind blew a shower of sparks over the heath. In a
moment they were doused by the rain.
The crash had thrown Bastian to his knees. He dug into the earth with both hands.
When the hole was big enough, he unslung the sword Sikanda and put it in.
“Sikanda,” he said. “I am taking leave of you forever. Never again shall anyone
draw you against a friend. No one shall find you here, until what you and I have done is
forgotten.”
He filled in the hole and covered it over with moss and branches, lest anyone

should discover it.
And there Sikanda lies to this day. For not until far in the future will one come
who can wield it without danger — but that is another story and shall be told another time.
Bastian went his way through the darkness.
Toward morning the storm abated, the wind died down, and there was no other
sound than the rain dripping from the trees.
That night was the beginning of a long, lonely journey for Bastian. He no longer
wished to return to his traveling companions or Xayide. Now he wanted to find the way
back to the human world — but he didn’t know how or where to look for it. Was there
somewhere a gate, a bridge, a mountain pass that would take him back?
He had to wish for it, that he knew. But he had no power over his wishes. He felt
like a diver who is searching the bottom of the sea for a sunken ship, but keeps being
driven to the surface before he can find anything.
He also knew that he had few wishes left, so he was careful not to use AURYN.
He was determined to sacrifice his last few remaining memories only if he felt sure that
this would help him get back to his world.
But wishes cannot be summoned up or kept away at will. They come from deeper
within us than good or bad intentions. And they spring up unannounced.
And so, before he knew it, a new wish arose within him and little by little took
form.
For days and nights he had been wandering all alone. And because of being alone,
he yearned to belong to some sort of community, to be taken into a group, not as a master
or victor or as any special sort of person, but merely as one among many, perhaps as the
smallest or least important, provided his membership in the community was
unquestioned.
And then one day he came to a seacoast. Or so he thought at first. He was
standing on the edge of a sheer cliff, and before him lay a sea of congealed white waves.
It was some time before he realized that these waves were not really motionless, but were
moving very slowly, that there were currents and eddies that moved as imperceptibly as
the hands of a clock.
He had come to the Sea of Mist!
Bastian walked along the cliff. The air was warm and slightly damp. There was
not the slightest breeze. It was early morning and the sun shone on the snow-white
surface of the fog, which extended to the horizon.
He walked for several hours. Toward noon he espied a small town some distance
from the shore. Supported by piles, it formed a sort of island in the Sea of Mist. The long,
arching bridge connecting the town with the rocky coast swayed gently as Bastian
crossed it.
The houses were relatively small. The doors, windows, and stairways all seemed
to have been made for children. And indeed, the people moving about the streets were no
bigger than children, though they all seemed to be grown men with beards or women with
pinned-up hair. As Bastian soon noticed, these people looked so much alike that he could
hardly tell them apart. Their faces were dark brown like moist earth and they looked calm
and gentle. When they saw Bastian, they nodded to him, but none spoke. Altogether they
seemed a silent lot; the place was humming with activity, yet he seldom heard a cry or a
spoken word. And never did he see any of these people alone; they always went about in

groups if not in crowds, locking arms or holding one another by the hand.
When Bastian examined the houses more closely, he saw that they were all made
of a sort of wicker, some crude and some of a finer weave, and that the streets were paved
with the same kind of material. Even the people’s clothing, he noticed, their trousers,
skirts, jackets, and hats were of wickerwork, though these were artfully woven.
Everything in the town seemed to be made of the same material.
Here and there Bastian was able to cast a glance into the artisans’ workshops.
They were all busy weaving, making shoes, pitchers, lamps, cups, and umbrellas of
wickerwork. But never did he see anyone working alone, for these things could be made
only by several persons working together. It was a pleasure to see how cleverly they
coordinated their movements. And as they worked, they usually sang some simple
melody without words.
The town was not very large, and Bastian had soon come to the edge of it. There
he saw hundreds of ships of every size and shape. The town was a seaport, but of a most
unusual kind, for all these ships were hanging from gigantic fishing poles and hovered,
swaying gently, over a chasm full of swirling white mist. These ships, made of
wickerwork like everything else, had neither sails nor masts nor oars nor rudders.
Bastian leaned over the railing and looked down into the Sea of Mist. He was able
to gauge the length of the stakes supporting the town by the shadows they cast on the
white surface below.
“At night,” he heard a voice beside him say, “the mists rise to the level of the
town. Then we can put out to sea. In the daytime the sun reduces the mist and the level
falls. That’s what you wanted to know, isn’t it, stranger?”
Three men were leaning against the railing beside Bastian. They seemed gentle
and friendly. They got to talking and in the course of his conversation with them Bastian
learned that the town was called Yskal or Basketville. Its inhabitants were known as
Yskalnari. The word meant roughly “the partners.” The three were mist sailors. Not
wishing to give his name for fear of being recognized, Bastian introduced himself as
“Someone.” The three sailors told him the Yskalnari had no names for individuals and
didn’t find it necessary. They were all Yskalnari and that was enough for them.
Since it was lunchtime, they invited Bastian to join them, and he gratefully
accepted. They went to a nearby inn, and during the meal Bastian learned all about
Basketville and its inhabitants.
The Sea of Mist, which they called the Skaidan, was an enormous ocean of white
vapor, which divided the two parts of Fantastica from each other. No one had ever found
out how deep the Skaidan was or where all this mist came from. It was quite possible to
breathe below the surface of the mist, and to walk some distance on the bottom of the sea
near the coast, where the mist was relatively shallow, but only if one was tied to a rope
and could be pulled back. For the mist had one strange property: it fuddled one’s sense of
direction. Any number of fools and daredevils had died in the attempt to cross the
Skaidan alone and on foot. Only a few had been rescued. The only way to reach the other
side was in the ships of the Yskalnari.
The wickerwork, from which the houses, implements, clothing, and ships of
Yskal were made, was woven from a variety of rushes that grew under the surface of the
sea not far from the shore. These rushes — as can easily be gathered from the foregoing —
could be cut only at the risk of one’s life. Though unusually pliable and even limp in

ordinary air, they stood upright in the sea, because they were lighter than the mist. That
was what made the wickerwork ships mistworthy. And if any of the Yskalnari chanced to
fall into the mist, his regular clothing served the purpose of a life jacket.
But the strangest thing about the Yskalnari, so it struck Bastian, was that the word
“I” seemed unknown to them. In any case, they never used it, but in speaking of what
they thought or did always said “we.”
When he gathered from the conversation that the three sailors would be putting
out to sea that night, he asked if he could ship with them as a cabin boy. They informed
him that a voyage on the Skaidan was very different from any other ocean voyage,
because no one knew how long it would take or exactly where it would end up. When
Bastian said that didn’t worry him, they agreed to take him on.
At nightfall the mists began to rise and by midnight they had reached the level of
Basketville. The ships that had been dangling in midair were now floating on the white
surface. The moorings of the one on which Bastian found himself — a flat barge about a
hundred feet long — were cast off, and it drifted slowly out into the Sea of Mist.
The moment he laid his eyes on it, Bastian wondered what propelled this sort of
ship, since it had neither sails nor oars nor propeller. He soon found out that sails would
have been useless, for there was seldom any wind on the Skaidan, and that oars and pro-
pellers do not function in mist. These ships were moved by an entirely different sort of
power.
In the middle of the deck there was a round, slightly raised platform. Bastian had
noticed it from the start and taken it for a sort of captain’s bridge. Indeed, it was occupied
throughout the voyage by two or more sailors. (The entire crew numbered fourteen.) The
men on the platform held one another clasped by the shoulders and looked fixedly
forward. At first sight, they seemed to be standing motionless. Actually they were
swaying very slowly, in perfect unison — in a sort of dance, which they accompanied by
chanting over and over again a simple and strangely beautiful tune.
At first Bastian regarded this song and dance as some sort of ceremony, the
meaning of which escaped him. Then, on the third day of voyage, he asked one of his
three friends about it. Evidently surprised at Bastian’s ignorance, the sailor explained that
those men were propelling the ship by thought-power.
More puzzled than ever, Bastian asked if some sort of hiddenwheels were set in
motion.
“No,” one of the sailors replied. “When you want to move your legs, you have
only to think about it. You don’t need wheels, do you?”
The only difference between a person’s body and a ship was that to move a ship at
least two Yskalnari had to merge their thought-powers into one. It was this fusion of
thought-powers that propelled the ship. If greater speed was desired, more men had to
join in. Normally, thinkers worked in shifts of three; the others rested, for easy and
pleasant as it looked, thought-propulsion was hard work, demanding intense and
unbroken concentration. But there was no other way of sailing the Skaidan.
Bastian became the student of the mist navigators and learned the secret of their
cooperation: dance and song without words.
Little by little, in the course of the long voyage, he became one of them. During
the dance he felt his thought-power merging with those of his companions to form a
whole, and this gave him a strange and indescribable sense of harmony and self-

forgetfulness. He felt accepted by a community, at one with his companions — and at the
same time he totally forgot that the inhabitants of the world from which he came, and to
which he was seeking the way back, were human beings, each with his own thoughts and
opinions. Dimly he remembered his home and parents, but nothing more.
His wish to be no longer alone had come true. But now, deep in his heart, a new
wish arose and began to make itself felt.
One day it struck him that the Yskalnari lived together so harmoniously, not
because they blended different ways of thinking, but because they were so much alike
that it cost them no effort to form a community. Indeed, they were incapable of
quarreling or even disagreeing, because they did not regard themselves as individuals.
Thus there were no conflicts or differences to overcome, and it was just this sameness,
this absence of stress that gradually came to pall on Bastian. Their gentleness bored him
and the unchanging melody of their songs got on his nerves. He felt that something was
lacking, something he hungered for, but he could not yet have said what it was.
This became clear to him sometime later when a giant mist crow was sighted.
Stricken with terror, the sailors vanished below deck as fast as they could. But one was
not quick enough; the monstrous bird swooped down with a cry, seized the poor fellow,
and carried him away in its beak.
When the danger was past, the sailors emerged and resumed their song and dance,
as though nothing had happened. Their harmony was undisturbed, and far from grieving,
they didn’t waste so much as a word on the incident.
“Why should we grieve?” said one of them when Bastian inquired. “None of us is
missing.”
With them the individual counted for nothing. No one was irreplaceable, because
they drew no distinction between one man and another.
Bastian, however, wanted to be an individual, a someone, not just one among
others. He wanted to be loved for being just what he was. In this community of Yskalnari
there was harmony, but no love.
He no longer wanted to be the greatest, strongest, or cleverest. He had left all that
far behind. He longed to be loved just as he was, good or bad, handsome or ugly, clever
or stupid, with all his faults — or possibly because of them.
But what was he actually like?
He no longer knew. So much had been given to him in Fantastica, and now,
among all these gifts and powers, he could no longer find himself.
He stopped dancing with the mist sailors. All day long and sometimes all night as
well, he sat in the prow, looking out over the Skaidan.
At last the crossing was completed and the mist ship docked. Bastian thanked the
Yskalnari and went ashore.
This was a land full of roses, there were whole forests of roses of every
imaginable color. A winding path led through the endless rose garden, and Bastian
followed it.

XXIV
Dame Eyola
ayide’s end is soon told, but hard to understand and full of contradictions like
many things in Fantastica. To this day many scholars and historians are racking their
brains for an explanation of what happened, while some deny the whole incident or try to
interpret it out of existence. Here we shall simply state the facts, leaving others to explain
them as best they can.
Just as Bastian was arriving at the town of Yskal, Xayide and her black giants
reached the spot were his metallic horse had collapsed under him. In that moment she
suspected that she would never find him, and her suspicions became a certainty when she
came to the earthen wall and saw Bastian’s footprints on it. If he had reached the City of
the Old Emperors, he was lost to her plans, regardless of whether he stayed there or
whether he managed to escape. In the first case, he would become powerless like
everyone there, no longer able to wish for anything — and in the second, all wishes for
power and greatness would die within him. For her, Xayide, the game was over in either
case.
She commanded her armored giants to halt. Strangely, they did not obey but
marched on. She flew into a rage, jumped out of her litter, and ran after them with
outstretched arms. The armored giants, foot soldiers and riders alike, ignored her
commands, turned about, and trampled her with their feet and hooves. At length, when
Xayide had breathed her last, the whole column stopped like rundown clockwork.
When Hysbald, Hydorn, and Hykrion arrived with what was left of the army, they
saw what had happened. They were puzzled, because they knew it was Xayide’s will
alone that had moved the hollow giants. So, they thought, it must have been her will that
they should trample her to death. But knotty problems were not the knights’ forte, so in
the end they shrugged their shoulders and let well enough alone. But what were they to
do next? They talked it over and, deciding that the campaign was at an end, discharged
the army and advised everyone to go home. They themselves, however, felt bound by the
oath of fealty they had sworn to Bastian and resolved to search all Fantastica for him.
That was all well and good, but which way were they to go? They couldn’t agree, so
deciding that each would search separately, they parted and hobbled off each in a
different direction. All three had countless adventures, and Fantastica knows numerous
accounts of their futile quest. But these are other stories and shall be told another time.
For years the hollow, black-metal giants stood motionless on the heath not far
from the City of the Old Emperors. Rain and snow fell on them, they rusted and little by
little sank into the ground, some vertically, some at a slant. But to this day a few of them
can be seen. The place is thought to be cursed, and travelers make a wide circle around it.
But let’s get back to Bastian.
While following the winding path through the rose garden, he saw something that
amazed him, because in all his wanderings in Fantastica he had never seen anything like

it. It was a pointing hand, carved from wood. Beside it was written: “To the House of
Change.”
Without haste Bastian took the direction indicated. He breathed the fragrance of
the innumerable roses and felt more and more cheerful, as though looking forward to a
pleasant surprise.
At length he came to a straight avenue, bordered by round trees laden with red-
cheeked apples. At the end of the avenue a house appeared. As he approached it, Bastian
decided it was the funniest house he had ever seen. Under a tall, pointed roof that looked
rather like a stocking cap, the house itself suggested a giant pumpkin. The walls were
covered with large protuberances, one might almost have said bellies, that gave the house
a comfortably inviting look. There were a few windows and a front door, but they seemed
crooked, as though a clumsy child had cut them out.
On his way to the house, Bastian saw that it was slowly but steadily changing. A
small bump appeared on the right side and gradually took the shape of a dormer window.
At the same time a window on the left side closed and little by little disappeared. A
chimney grew out of the roof and a small balcony with a balustrade appeared over the
front door.
Bastian stopped still and watched the changes with surprise and amusement. Now
he understood why the place was called the House of Change.
As he stood there, he heard a warm, pleasant voice — a woman’s — singing inside.
“A hundred summers to a day
We have waited here for you.
Seeing that you’ve found the way,
It must certainly be you.
Your hunger and your thirst to still,
All is here in readiness.
You shall eat and drink your fill,
Sheltered in our tenderness.
Regardless whether good or bad,
You’ve suffered much and traveled far.
Take comfort for the trials you’ve had.
We’ll have you just the way you are.”
Ah! thought Bastian. What a lovely voice! If only that song were meant for me!
The voice began again to sing:
“Great lord, I pray, be small again,
Be a child and come right in.
Don’t keep standing at the door,
You are welcome here, and more.
Everything for many a year
Has been ready for you here.”
Bastian felt irresistibly drawn by that voice. He felt sure the singer must be a very
friendly person. He knocked at the door and the voice called out:
“Come in, come in, dear boy!”
He opened the door and saw a small but comfortable room. The sun was
streaming in through the windows. In the middle of the room there was a round table

covered with bowls and baskets full of all sorts of fruits unknown to Bastian. At the table
sat a woman as round and red-cheeked and healthy-looking as an apple.
Bastian was almost overpowered by a desire to run to her with outstretched arms
and cry: “Mama, Mama!” But he controlled himself. His mama was dead and was
certainly not here in Fantastica. This woman, it was true, had the same sweet smile and
the same trustworthy look, but between her and his mother there was little resemblance.
His mother had been small and this woman was large and imposing. She was wearing a
broad hat covered with fruits and flowers, and her dress was of some sort of bright,
flowered material. It was some time before Bastian realized that it consisted of leaves,
flowers, and fruits.
As he stood looking at her, he was overcome by a feeling that he had not known
for a long time. He could not remember when and where; he knew only that he had
sometimes felt that way when he was little.
“Sit down, dear boy,” said the woman, motioning him to a chair. “You must be
hungry. Do have a bite to eat.”
“I beg your pardon,” said Bastian. “You’re expecting a guest. I’ve only come here
by accident.”
“Really?” said the woman with a smile. “Oh well, it doesn’t matter. You can have
a bite to eat all the same. Meanwhile I’ll tell you a little story. Go on, don’t stand on
ceremony.”
Bastian took off his black mantle, laid it on a chair, and hesitantly reached for a
fruit. Before biting into it, he asked: “What about you? Aren’t you eating? Or don’t you
care for fruit?”
The woman laughed heartily, Bastian didn’t know why.
“Very well,” she said after composing herself. “If you insist, I’ll have something
to keep you company, but in my own way. Don’t be frightened.”
With that she picked up a watering can that was on the floor beside her, held it
over her head, and sprinkled herself. “Oh!” she said. “That is refreshing!”
Now it was Bastian’s turn to laugh. Then he bit into the fruit and instantly realized
that he had never eaten anything so good. He took a second fruit and that was even better.
“You like it?” asked the woman, watching him closely. Bastian couldn’t answer
because his mouth was full. He chewed and nodded.
“I’m glad,” the woman said. “I’ve taken a lot of pains with that fruit. Eat as much
as you please.”
Bastian took a third fruit, and that was a sheer delight. He sighed with well-being.
“And now I’ll tell you the story,” said the woman. “But don’t let it stop you from
eating.”
Bastian found it hard to listen, for each new fruit gave him a more rapturous
sensation than the last.
“A long, long time ago,” the flowery woman began, “our Childlike Empress was
deathly ill, for she needed a new name, and only a human could give her one. But humans
had stopped coming to Fantastica, no one knew why. And if she had died, that would
have been the end of Fantastica. Then one day — or rather one night — a human came
after all. It was a little boy, and he gave the Childlike Empress the name of Moon Child.
She recovered, and in token of her gratitude she promised the boy that all his wishes in
her empire would come true — until he found out what he really and truly wanted. Then

the little boy made a long journey from one wish to the next, and each one came true.
And each fulfillment led to a new wish. There were not only good wishes but bad ones as
well, but the Childlike Empress drew no distinction; in her eyes all things in her empire
are equally good and important. In the end the Ivory Tower was destroyed, and she did
nothing to prevent it. But with every wish fulfillment the little boy lost a part of his
memory of the world he had come from. He didn’t really mind, for he had given up
wanting to go back. So he kept on wishing, but by then he had spent all his memories,
and without memories it’s not possible to wish. So he had almost ceased to be a human
and had almost become a Fantastican. He still didn’t know what he really and truly
wanted. It seemed possible that his very last memories would be used up before he found
out. And if that happened, he would never be able to return to his own world. Then at last
he came to the House of Change, and there he would stay until he found out what he
really and truly wanted. You see, it’s called the House of Change not only because it
changes itself but also because it changes anyone who lives in it. And that was very
important to the little boy, because up until then he had always wanted to be someone
other than he was, but he didn’t want to change.”
At this point she broke off, because her visitor had stopped chewing and was
staring openmouthed.
“If that one doesn’t taste good,” she said with concern, “just put it down and take
another.”
“W-what?” Bastian stammered. “Oh no, it’s delicious.”
“Then everything’s fine,” said the woman. “But I forgot to tell you the name of the
little boy, who had been expected so long at the House of Change. Many in Fantastica
called him simply ‘the Savior,’ others ‘the Knight of the Seven-armed Candelabrum,’ or
‘the Great Knower,’ or ‘Lord and Master.’ But his real name was Bastian Balthazar Bux.”
The woman turned to Bastian with a smile. He swallowed once or twice and said
very softly: “That’s my name.”
“Well then!” said the woman, who didn’t seem the least surprised.
Suddenly the buds on her hat and dress burst into bloom.
“But,” said Bastian hesitantly. “I haven’t been in Fantastica a hundred years.”
“Oh, we’ve been waiting for you much longer than that,” said the woman. “My
grandmother and my grandmother’s grandmother waited for you. You see, now someone
is telling you a story that is new, even though it’s about the remotest past.”
Bastian remembered Grograman’s words. That had been at the beginning of his
journey. And now suddenly it seemed to him that a hundred years had indeed elapsed
since then.
“But by the way, I haven’t introduced myself. I’m Dame Eyola.”
Bastian repeated the name, several times before he was able to pronounce it
properly. Then he took another fruit. He bit into it, and as usual thought the one he was
eating was the most delicious of all. But then he noticed with some alarm that there was
only one left.
“Do you want more?” asked Dame Eyola, who had caught his glance. When
Bastian nodded, she plucked fruit from her hat and dress until the bowl was full again.
“Does the fruit grow on your hat?” Bastian asked in amazement.
“Hat? What are you talking about?” cried Dame Eyola. But then she understood
and broke into a loud, hearty laugh. “So you think it’s a hat I’ve got on my head? Not at

all, dear boy. It all grows out of me. Just as your hair grows out of you. That should show
you how glad I am that you’ve finally come. That’s why I’m flowering and bearing fruit.
If I were sad, I’d wither. But come now, don’t forget to eat.”
Bastian was embarrassed. “I don’t know,” he said. “Is it all right to eat something
that comes out of somebody?”
“Why not?” asked Dame Eyola. “Babies drink milk that comes out of their
mothers. There’s nothing better.”
“That’s true,” said Bastian with a slight blush. “But only when they’re very little.”
“In that case,” said Dame Eyola, beaming, “you’ll just have to get to be very little
again, my dear boy.”
Bastian took another fruit and bit into it. Dame Eyola was delighted and bloomed
more than ever.
After a short silence she said: “I think it would like us to move into the next room.
I believe it may have arranged something for you.”
“Who?” Bastian asked, looking around.
“The House of Change,” said Dame Eyola, as if that were the most natural thing
in the world.
And indeed a strange thing had happened. The living room had changed without
Bastian noticing that anything was going on. The ceiling had moved upward, while three
of the walls had come close to the table. There was still room on the fourth side, where
there was a door, which now stood open.
Dame Eyola rose, and then he saw how big she was.
“We’d better go,” she suggested. “It’s very stubborn. Opposition is useless if it has
thought up a surprise. We may as well let it have its way. It usually means well.”
Bastian followed her through the door, but took the fruit bowl with him as a
precaution.
He found himself in a large dining room that looked somehow familiar. Only the
furniture seemed strange — the table and especially the chairs were so large that he
couldn’t possibly have sat in them.
“Fancy that!” said Dame Eyola with a chuckle. “The House of Change is always
thinking up something new. Now for your benefit it has provided a room as it must look
to a small child.”
“You mean,” said Bastian, “that this room wasn’t here before?”
“Of course not. The House of Change is very wide-awake, you see. This is its way
of taking part in our conversation. I think it’s trying to tell you something.”
Then she sat down in one of the chairs at the table, while Bastian tried in vain to
climb up on the other. Dame Eyola had to pick him up and put him on it, but even then
his nose was barely level with the tabletop. He was glad he had taken the bowl of fruit,
and kept it on his lap. If it had been on the table, it would have been beyond his reach.
“Do you often have to change rooms this way?” he asked.
“Not often,” said Dame Eyola. “Never more than three or four times a day.
Sometimes the House of Change will have its little jokes, and then the rooms are
suddenly reversed, the floor on top and the ceiling at the bottom, that sort of thing. But
it’s only being bumptious and it stops when I give it a piece of my mind. All in all, it’s a
well-behaved house and I feel very comfortable in it. We have good laughs together.”
“But isn’t it dangerous?” Bastian asked. “For instance, if you’re asleep at night and

the room gets smaller and smaller?”
“What nonsense, dear boy!” cried Dame Eyola, pretending to be angry. “It’s very
fond of me, and it’s fond of you too. It’s glad to have you here.”
“What if it takes a dislike to somebody?”
“No idea,” she replied. “What questions you ask! There’s never been anyone here
but you and me.”
“Oh!” said Bastion. “Then I’m your first guest?”
“Of course!”
Bastian looked around the enormous room.
“This room doesn’t seem to go with the house. It didn’t look so big from outside.”
“The House of Change,” said Dame Eyola, “is bigger inside than out.”
Meanwhile night was falling, and it was growing darker and darker in the room.
Bastian leaned back in his big chair and propped his head on his hands. He felt
deliriously sleepy.
“Why,” he asked, “did you wait so long for me, Dame Eyola?”
“I always wanted a child,” she said, “a child I could spoil, who needed my
tenderness, a child I could care for — someone like you, my darling boy.”
Bastian yawned. He felt irresistibly lulled by her sweet voice.
“But,” he objected, “you said your mother and grandmother waited for me.”
Dame Eyola’s face was now in the darkness.
“Yes,” he heard her say. “My mother and my grandmother also wanted a child.
They never had one but I have one now.”
Bastian’s eyes closed. He barely managed to ask: “How can that be? Your mother
had you when you were little. And your grandmother had your mother.”
“No, my darling boy,” said the voice hardly above a whisper. “With us it’s
different. We don’t die and we’re not born. We’re always the same Dame Eyola, and then
again we’re not. When my mother grew old, she withered. All her leaves fell, as the
leaves fall from a tree in the winter. She withdrew into herself. And so she remained for a
long time. But then one day she put forth young leaves, buds, blossoms, and finally fruit.
And that’s how I came into being, for I was the new Dame Eyola. And it was just the
same with my grandmother when she brought my mother into the world. We Dames
Eyola can only have a child if we wither first. And then we’re our own child and we can’t
be a mother anymore. That’s why I’m so glad you’re here, my darling boy. . .”
Bastian spoke no more. He had slipped into a sweet half-sleep in which he heard
her words as a kind of chant. He heard her stand up and cross the room and bend over
him. She stroked his hair and kissed him on the forehead. Then he felt her pick him up
and carry him out in her arms. He buried his head in her bosom like a baby. Deeper and
deeper he sank into the warm sleepy darkness. He felt that he was being undressed and
put into a soft, sweet-smelling bed. And then he heard her lovely voice singing far in the
distance:
“Sleep, my darling, good night.
Your sufferings are past.
Great lord, be a little child at last.
Sleep, my darling, sleep tight.”
When he woke up the next morning, he felt better and happier than ever before.

He looked around and saw that he was in a cozy little room — lying in a crib. Actually, it
was a very large crib, or rather it was as large as a crib must look to a baby. For a
moment this struck him as ridiculous, because he certainly wasn’t a baby anymore, and he
was still in possession of all the powers and gifts that Fantastica had given him. The
Childlike Empress’s amulet was still hanging from his neck. But in the very next moment
he stopped caring whether it was ridiculous or not. No one but him and Dame Eyola
would ever find out, and they both knew that everything was just as it should be.
He got up, washed, dressed, and left the room, A flight of wooden steps took him
to the big dining room, which had turned into a kitchen overnight. Dame Eyola had
breakfast all ready for him. She too was in high spirits, her flowers were in full bloom.
She sang and laughed and even danced around the kitchen table with him. After breakfast
she sent him outside to get some fresh air.
In the great rose garden around the House of Change it was summer, a summer
that seemed eternal. Bastian sauntered about, watched the bees feasting on the flowers,
listened to the birds that were singing in every rosebush; played with the lizards, which
were so tame that they crawled up on his hand, and with the hares, which let him stroke
them. From time to time he crept under a bush, smelled the sweet scent of the roses,
blinked up at the sun, and thinking of nothing in particular, let the time glide by like a
brook.
Days became weeks. He paid no attention. Dame Eyola was merry, and Bastian
surrendered himself to her motherly care and tenderness. It seemed to him that without
knowing it he had long hungered for something which was now being given him in
abundance. And he just couldn’t get enough of it.
He spent whole days rummaging through the House of Change from attic to
cellar. He never got bored, because the rooms were always changing and there was
always something new to discover. Clearly the house was at pains to entertain its guest. It
produced playrooms, railway trains, puppet theaters, jungle gyms. There was even a big
merry-go-round.
Or else he would explore the surrounding country. But he never went too far from
the House of Change, for suddenly he would be overcome by a craving for Dame Eyola’s
fruit, and when that happened, he could hardly wait to get back to her and eat his fill.
In the evening they had long talks. He told her about all his adventures in
Fantastica, about Perilin and Grograman, about Xayide and Atreyu, whom he had
wounded so cruelly and perhaps even killed.
“I did everything wrong,” he said. “I misunderstood everything. Moon Child gave
me so much, and all I did with it was harm, harm to myself and harm to Fantastica.”
Dame Eyola gave him a long look.
“No,” she said. “I don’t believe so. You went the way of wishes, and that is never
straight. You went the long way around, but that was your way. And do you know why?
Because you are one of those who can’t go back until they have found the fountain from
which springs the Water of Life. And that’s the most secret place in Fantastica. There’s no
simple way of getting there.”
After a short silence she added: “But every way that leads there is the right one.”
Suddenly Bastian began to cry. He didn’t know why. He felt as if a knot in his
heart had come open and dissolved into tears. He sobbed and he sobbed and couldn’t stop.
Dame Eyola took him on her lap and stroked him. He buried his face in the flowers on

her bosom and wept until he was too tired to weep anymore.
That evening they talked no more.
But next day Bastian brought up the subject again.
“Do you know where I can find the Water of Life?”
“On the borders of Fantastica.”
“I thought Fantastica had no borders.”
“It has, though. Only they’re not outside but inside. In the place where the
Childlike Empress gets all her power from, but where she herself cannot go.”
“How am I to find the way there?” asked Bastian. “Isn’t it too late?”
“There’s only one wish that can take you there: your last.”
Bastian was terrified. “Dame Eyola — all the wishes that have come true thanks to
AURYN have made me forget something. Will it be the same with this one?”
She nodded slowly.
“But if I don’t notice it!”
“Did you notice it other times? Once you’ve forgotten something you don’t know
you ever had it.”
“What am I forgetting now?”
“I’ll tell you at the proper time. If I told you now, you’d hold on to it.”
“Must I lose everything?”
“Nothing is lost,” she said. “Everything is transformed.”
“But then,” said Bastian in alarm, “I ought to hurry. I shouldn’t be staying here.”
She stroked his hair.
“Don’t worry. It will take time, but when your last wish is awakened, you’ll know
it — and so will I.”
From that day on something began indeed to change, though Bastian himself
noticed nothing at first. The transforming power of the House of Change was taking
effect. But like all true transformations, it was as slow and gentle as the growth of a plant.
The days in the House of Change passed, and it was still summer. Bastian still
enjoyed letting Dame Eyola spoil him like a child. Her fruit still tasted as delicious to him
as at the start, but little by little his craving had been stilled. He ate less than before.
Dame Eyola noticed, though she never mentioned it. He also felt that he had had his fill
of her care and tenderness. And as his need for them dwindled, a longing of a very
different kind made itself felt, a desire that he had never felt before and that was different
in every way from all his previous wishes: the longing to be capable of loving. With
surprise and dismay he recognized that he could not love. And the wish became stronger
and stronger.
One evening as they were sitting together, he spoke of it to Dame Eyola.
After listening to him, she said nothing for a long while. She looked at Bastian
with an expression that puzzled him.
“Now you have found your last wish,” she said finally. “What you really and truly
want is to love.”
“But why can’t I, Dame Eyola?”
“You won’t be able to until you have drunk of the Water of Life,” she said. “And
you can’t go back to your own world unless you take some of it back for others.”
Bastian was bewildered. “But what about you?” he asked. “Haven’t you drunk of

it?”
“No,” said Dame Eyola. “It’s different for me. I only needed someone to whom I
could give my excess.”
“But isn’t that love?”
Dame Eyola pondered a while, then she said: “It was the effect of your wish.”
“Can’t Fantasticans love? Are they like me?” he asked anxiously.
She answered: “There are some few creatures in Fantastica, so I’m told, who get
to drink of the Water of Life. But no one knows who they are. And there is a prophecy,
which we seldom speak of, that sometime in the distant future humans will bring love to
Fantastica. Then the two worlds will be one. But what that means I don’t know.”
“Dame Eyola,” Bastian asked, “you promised that when the right moment came
you’d tell me what I had to forget to find my last wish. Has the time come?”
She nodded.
“You had to forget your father and mother. Now you have nothing left but your
name.”
Bastian pondered.
“Father and mother?” he said slowly. But the words had lost all meaning for him.
He had forgotten.
“What must I do now?” he asked.
“You must leave me. Your time in the House of Change is over.”
“Where must I go?”
“Your last wish will guide you. Don’t lose it.”
“Should I go now?”
“No, it’s late. Tomorrow at daybreak. You have one more night in the House of
Change. Now we must go to bed.”
Bastian stood up and went over to her. Only then, only when he was close to her,
did he notice that all her flowers had faded.
“Don’t let it worry you,” she said. “And don’t worry about tomorrow morning. Go
your way. Everything is just as it should be. Good night, my darling boy.”
“Good night, Dame Eyola,” Bastian murmured.
Then he went up to his room.
When he came down the next day, he saw that Dame Eyola was still in the same
place. All her leaves, flowers, and fruits had fallen from her. Her eyes were closed and
she looked like a black, dead tree. For a long time he stood there gazing at her. Then
suddenly a door opened.
Before going out, he turned around once again and said, without knowing whether
he was speaking to Dame Eyola or to the house or both: “Thank you. Thank you for
everything.”
Then he went out through the door. Winter had come overnight. The snow lay
knee-deep and nothing remained of the flowering rose garden but bare, black
thornbushes. Not a breeze stirred. It was bitter cold and very still.
Bastian wanted to go back into the house for his mantle, but the doors and
windows had vanished. It had closed itself up all around. Shivering, he started on his
way.

XXV
The Picture Mine
or, the blind miner, was standing beside his hut, listening for sounds on the snow-
covered plain around him. The silence was so complete that his sensitive hearing picked
up the crunching of footsteps in the snow far in the distance. And he knew that the steps
were coming his way.
Yor was an old man, but his face was beardless and without a wrinkle. Everything
about him, his dress, his face, his hair, was stone gray. As he stood there motionless, he
seemed carved from congealed lava. Only his blind eyes were dark, and deep within them
there was a glow, as of a small, bright flame.
The steps were Bastian’s. When he reached the hut, he said: “Good day. I’ve lost
my way. I’m looking for the fountain the Water of Life springs from. Can you help me?”
The miner replied in a whisper: “You haven’t lost your way. But speak softly, or
my pictures will crumble.”
He motioned to Bastian, who followed him into the hut.
It consisted of a single small, bare room. A wooden table, two chairs, a cot, and
two or three wooden shelves piled with food and dishes were the only furnishings. A fire
was burning on an open hearth, and over it hung a kettle of soup.
Yor ladled out soup for himself and Bastian, put the bowls on the table, and with a
motion of his hand invited his guest to eat. They ate in silence.
Then the miner leaned back. His eyes looked through Bastian and far into the
distance as he asked in a whisper: “Who are you?”
“My name is Bastian Balthazar Bux.”
“Ah, so you still know your name.”
“Yes. And who are you?”
“I am Yor; people call me the blind miner. But I am blind only in the daylight. In
the darkness of my mine, I can see.”
“What sort of mine is it?”
“The Minroud Mine, they call it. It’s a picture mine.”
“A picture mine?” said Bastian in amazement. “I never heard of such a thing.”
Yor seemed to be listening for something.
“And yet,” he said. “It’s here for just such as you. For humans who can’t find the
way to the Water of Life.”
“What kind of pictures are they?” Bastian asked.
Yor shut his eyes and was silent for a while. Bastian didn’t know whether to
repeat his question. Then he heard the miner whisper: “Nothing gets lost in the world.
Have you ever dreamed something and when you woke up not known what it was?”
“Yes,” said Bastian. “Often.”

Yor nodded. Then he stood up and beckoned Bastian to follow him. Before they
left the hut, he dug his fingers into Bastian’s shoulders and whispered: “But not a word,
not a sound, understand? What you are going to see is my work of many years. The least
sound can destroy it. So tread softly and don’t talk.”
Bastian nodded and they left the hut. Behind it there was a wooden headframe,
below which a shaft descended vertically into the earth. Passing these by, the miner led
Bastian out into the snow-covered plain. And there in the snow lay the pictures, like
jewels bedded in white silk.
They were paper-thin sheets of colored, transparent isinglass, of every size and
shape, some round, some square, some damaged, some intact, some as large as church
windows, others as small as snuffbox miniatures. They lay, arranged more or less
according to size and shape, in rows extending to the snowy horizon.
What these pictures represented it was hard to say. There were figures in weird
disguise that seemed to be flying through the air in an enormous bird’s nest, donkeys in
judge’s robes, clocks as limp as soft butter, dressmaker’s dummies standing in deserted,
glaringly lighted squares. There were faces and heads pieced together from animals and
others that made up a landscape. But there were also perfectly normal pictures, men
mowing a wheat field, women sitting on a balcony, mountain villages and seascapes,
battle scenes and circus scenes, streets and rooms and many, many faces, old and young,
wise and simple, fools and kings, cheerful and gloomy. There were gruesome pictures,
executions and death dances, and there were comical ones, such as a group of young
ladies riding a walrus or a nose walking about and being greeted by passersby.
The longer Bastian looked at the pictures, the less he could make of them. He and
Yor spent the whole day walking past row after row of them, and then dusk descended on
the great snowfield. Bastian followed the miner back to the hut. After closing the door
behind them Yor asked in a soft voice: “Did you recognize any of them?”
“No,” said Bastian.
The miner shook his head thoughtfully.
“Why?” Bastian asked. “What are they?”
“They are forgotten dreams from the human world,” Yor explained. “Once
someone dreams a dream, it can’t just drop out of existence. But if the dreamer can’t
remember it, what becomes of it? It lives on in Fantastica, deep under our earth. There
the forgotten dreams are stored in many layers. The deeper one digs, the closer together
they are. All Fantastica rests on a foundation of forgotten dreams.”
Bastian was wide-eyed with wonderment. “Are mine there too?” he asked.
Yor nodded.
“And you think I have to find them?”
“At least one,” said Yor. “One will be enough.”
“But what for?” Bastian wanted to know.
Now the miner’s face was lit only by the faint glow of the hearth fire. Again his
blind eyes looked through Bastian and far into the distance.
“Listen to me, Bastian Balthazar Bux,” he said. “I’m no great talker. I prefer
silence. But I will answer this one question. You are looking for the Water of Life. You
want to be able to love, that’s your only hope of getting back to your world. To love —
that’s easily said. But the Water of Life will ask you: Love whom? Because you can’t just
love in general. You’ve forgotten everything but your name. And if you can’t answer, it

won’t let you drink. So you’ll just have to find a forgotten dream, a picture that will guide
you to the fountain. And to find that picture you will have to forget the one thing you
have left: yourself. And that takes hard, patient work. Remember what I’ve said, for I
shall never say it again.”
After that he lay down on his wooden cot and fell asleep. Bastian had to content
himself with the hard, cold floor. But he didn’t mind.
When he woke up the next morning feeling stiff in all his joints, Yor was gone —
to the mine, no doubt, Bastian decided. He took a dish of the hot soup, which warmed
him but didn’t taste very good. Too salty. It made him think of sweat and tears.
Then he went out into the snow-covered plain and walked past the pictures. He
examined one after another attentively, for now he knew how important it was, but he
found none that meant anything in particular to him.
Toward evening Yor came up from the mine. Bastian saw him step out of the pit
cage. In a frame on his back he was carrying different-sized sheets of paper-thin isinglass.
Bastian followed him in silence as he went far out into the plain and carefully bedded his
new finds in the soft snow at the end of a row. One of the pictures represented a man
whose chest was a birdcage with two pigeons in it, another a woman of stone riding on a
large turtle. One very small picture showed a butterfly with letters on its wings. And
many more, but none meant anything to Bastian.
Back in the hut with the miner, he asked:.”What will become of the pictures when
the snow melts?”
“It’s always winter here,” said Yor.
They had no other conversation that evening.
In the following days Bastian kept searching among the pictures for one with
some special meaning for him — but in vain. In the evening he sat in the hut with the
miner. Since the miner kept silent, Bastian got into the habit of saying nothing, and little
by little he adopted Yor’s careful way of moving for fear of making the pictures crumble.
“Now I’ve seen all the pictures,” Bastian said one night. “None of them is for me.”
“That’s bad,” said Yor.
“What should I do?” Bastian asked. “Should I wait for you to bring up new ones?”
Yor thought it over, then he shook his head.
“If I were you,” he whispered, “I’d go down into the mine and dig for myself.”
“But I haven’t got your eyes,” said Bastian. “I can’t see in the dark.”
“Weren’t you given a light for your long journey?” Yor asked, looking through
Bastian. “A sparkling stone or something that might help you now?”
“Yes,” said Bastian sadly. “But I used Al Tsahir for something else.”
“That’s bad,” Yor said again.
“Then what do you advise?” Bastian asked.
After a long silence the miner replied: “Then you’ll just have to work in the dark.”
Bastian shuddered. He still had all the strength and fearlessness AURYN had
given him, but the thought of crawling on his belly in the black underground darkness
sent the shivers down his spine. He said nothing more and they both lay down to sleep.
The next morning the miner shook him by the shoulders.
Bastian sat up.
“Eat your soup and come with me,” said Yor.
Bastian obeyed.

He followed the miner to the shaft and got into the pit cage with him. Together
they rode down into the mine. At first a faint beam of light followed them down the shaft,
but it vanished as the cage went deeper. Then a jolt signaled that they had reached the
bottom.
Here below it was much warmer than on the wintry plain. The miner walked very
fast, and trying to keep up for fear of losing him in the darkness, Bastian was soon
covered with sweat. They twined their way over endless passages and galleries, which
sometimes opened out into spacious vaults, as Bastian could tell by the echo of their
footfalls. Several times Bastian bruised himself against jutting stones or wooden props,
but Yor took no notice.
On this first day and for several that followed, the miner, by wordlessly guiding
Bastian’s hand, instructed him in the art of separating the paper-thin leaves of isinglass
from one another and picking them up. There were tools for the purpose, they felt like
wooden or horn spatulas, but Bastian never saw them, for when the day’s work was done
they stayed down in the mine.
Little by little he learned to find his way in the darkness. A new sense that he
could not have accounted for taught him to distinguish one gallery from another. One day
Yor told him silently, with the mere touch of his hands, to work alone in a low gallery,
which he could enter only by crawling. Bastian obeyed. It was very close and cramped,
and above him lay a mountain of stone.
Curled up like an unborn child in its mother’s womb, he lay in the dark depths of
Fantastica’s foundations, patiently digging for a forgotten dream, a picture that might lead
him to the Water of Life.
Since he could see nothing in the eternal night of the mine, he could not choose or
come to any decision. He could only hope that chance or a merciful fate would eventually
lead him to a lucky find. Evening after evening he brought what he had managed to
gather from the Minroud Mine into the failing daylight. And evening after evening his
work had been in vain. But Bastian did not complain or rebel. He had lost all self-pity.
Though his strength was inexhaustible, he often felt tired.
How long this painful work went on it is hard to say, for such labor cannot be
measured in days and months. Be that as it may, one evening he brought to the surface a
picture. It moved him so deeply the moment he looked at it that he needed all his self-
control to keep from letting out a cry of surprise that would have crumbled the picture to
dust.
On the fragile sheet of isinglass — it was not very large, about the size of a usual
book page — he saw a man wearing a white smock and holding a plaster cast in one hand.
His posture and the troubled look on his face touched Bastian to the heart. But what
stirred him the most was that the man was shut up in a transparent but impenetrable block
of ice.
While Bastian looked at the picture that lay before him in the snow, a longing
grew in him for this man whom he did not know, a surge of feeling that seemed to come
from far away. Like a tidal wave, almost imperceptible at first, it gradually built up
strength till it submerged everything in its path. Bastian struggled for air. His heart
pounded, it was not big enough for so great a longing. That surge of feeling submerged
everything that he still remembered of himself. And he forgot the last thing he still
possessed: his own name.

Later on, when he joined Yor in the hut, he was silent. The miner was silent too,
but for a long while he faced Bastian, his eyes once again seeming to look through him
and far into the distance. And for the first time since Bastian had come, a smile passed
briefly over the miner’s stone-gray features.
That night, tired as he was, the boy who no longer had a name could not sleep. He
kept seeing the picture before his eyes. It was as though this man wanted to say
something to him but could not, because of the block of ice he was imprisoned in. The
boy without a name wanted to help him, wanted to make the ice melt. As in a waking
dream he saw himself hugging the block of ice, trying in vain to melt it with the heat of
his body.
But then all at once he heard what the man was trying to say to him; he heard it
not with his ears but deep in his heart.
“Please help me! Don’t leave me! I can’t get out of this ice alone. Help me! Only
you can help me!”
When they awoke next morning at daybreak, the boy without a name said to Yor:
“I won’t be going down into the mine with you anymore.”
“Are you going to leave me?”
The boy nodded. “I’m going to look for the Water of Life.”
“Have you found the picture that will guide you?”
“Yes.”
“Will you show it to me?”
Again the boy nodded. They went out into the snow where the picture lay. The
boy looked at it, but Yor directed his blind eyes at the boy’s face, as though looking
through it into the distance. For a long while he seemed to be listening for some sound.
At length he nodded.
“Take it with you,” he whispered, “and don’t lose it. If you lose it, or if it is
destroyed, you will have nothing left in Fantastica. You know what that means.”
The boy who no longer had a name stood with bowed head and was silent for a
while. Then he said just as softly: “Thank you, Yor, for what you have taught me.”
They pressed each other’s hands.
“You’ve been a good miner,” Yor whispered. “You’ve worked well.”
Then he turned away and went to the mine shaft. Without turning around he got
into the pit cage and descended into the depths.
The boy without a name picked the picture out of the snow and plodded out into
the snow-covered plain.
He had been walking for many hours. Yor’s hut had long since disappeared below
the horizon. On all sides there was nothing to be seen but the endless snow-covered plain.
But he felt that the picture, which he was holding carefully in both hands, was pulling
him in a certain direction.
Regardless of how far it might be, he was determined to follow this pull, for he
was convinced that it would take him to the right place. Nothing must hold him back. He
felt sure of finding the Water of Life.
Suddenly he heard a clamor in the air, as though innumerable creatures were
screaming and twittering. Looking up into the sky, he saw a dark cloud like a great flock
of birds. But when the flock came closer, he saw what it really was and terror stopped

him in his tracks.
It was the butterfly-clowns, the Shlamoofs.
Merciful heavens! thought the boy without a name. If only they haven’t seen me!
They’ll shatter the picture with their screams!
But they had seen him.
Laughing and rollicking, they shot down and landed all around him in the snow.
“Hurrah!” they croaked, opening wide their motley-colored mouths. “At last
we’ve found him! Our great benefactor!”
They tumbled in the snow, threw snowballs at one another, turned somersaults,
and stood on their heads.
“Be still! Please be still!” the boy without a name whispered in desperation.
The whole chorus screamed with enthusiasm: “What did he say?” — “He said we
were too still!” — “Nobody ever told us that before!”
“What do you want of me?” asked the boy. “Why won’t you leave me alone?”
All whirled around him, cackling: “Great benefactor! Great benefactor! Do you
remember how you saved us, when we were the Acharis? Then we were the unhappiest
creatures in all Fantastica, but now we’re fed up with ourselves. At first what you did to
us was a lot of fun, but now we’re bored to death. We flit and we flutter and we don’t
know where we’re at. We can’t even plan any decent games, because we haven’t any
rules. You’ve turned us into preposterous clowns, that’s what you’ve done. You’ve cheated
us!”
“I meant well,” said the horrified boy.
“Sure, you meant well by yourself,” the Shlamoofs shouted in chorus. “Your
kindness made you feel great, didn’t it? But we paid the bill for your kindness, you great
benefactor!”
“What should I do?” the boy asked. “What do you want of me?”
“We’ve been looking for you,” screamed the Shlamoofs with grimacing clown
faces. “We wanted to catch you before you could make yourself scarce. Now we’ve
caught you, and we won’t leave you in peace until you become our chief. We want you to
be our Head Shlamoof, our Master Shlamoof, our General Shlamoof! You name it.”
“But why?” the boy asked imploringly.
The chorus of clowns screamed back: “We want you to give us orders. We want
you to order us around, to make us do something, to forbid us to do something. We want
you to give us an aim in life!”
“I can’t do that. Why don’t you elect one of your number?”
“No, we want you. You made us what we are.”
“No,” the boy panted. “I have to go! I have to go back!”
“Not so fast, great benefactor!” cried the butterfly-clowns. “You can’t get away
from us. You think you can sneak away from Fantastica, don’t you? You’d like that,
wouldn’t you?”
“But I’m at the end of my rope,” the boy protested.
“What about us?” the chorus replied.
“Go away!” cried the boy. “I can’t bother with you anymore.”
“Then you must turn us back!” cried the shrill voices. “Then we’d rather be
Acharis. The Lake of Tears has dried up, Amarganth is on dry land now. And no one
spins fine silver filigree anymore. We want to be Acharis again.”

“I can’t!” the boy replied. “I no longer have any power in Fantastica.”
“In that case,” the whole swarm bellowed, whirling and swirling about, “we’ll
kidnap you!”
Hundreds of little hands seized him and tried to lift him off the ground. The boy
struggled with might and main and the butterflies were tossed in all directions. But like
angry wasps they kept coming back.
Suddenly in the midst of this hubbub a low yet powerful sound was heard —
something like the booming of a bronze bell.
In a twinkling the Shlamoofs took flight and their cloud soon vanished in the sky.
The boy who had no name knelt in the snow. Before him, crumbled into dust, lay
the picture. Now all was lost. Now nothing could lead him to the Water of Life.
When he looked up, he saw, blurred by his tears, two forms in the snow. One was
large, the other small. He wiped his eyes and took another look.
The two forms were Falkor, the white luckdragon, and Atreyu.
XXVI
The Water of Life
ig-zagging unsteadily, scarcely able to control his feet, the boy who had no name
took a few steps toward Atreyu. Then he stopped. Atreyu did nothing, but watched him
closely. The wound in his chest was no longer bleeding.
For a long while they faced each other. Neither said a word. It was so still they
could hear each other’s breathing.
Slowly the boy without a name reached for the gold chain around his neck and
divested himself of AURYN. He bent down and carefully laid the Gem in the snow
before Atreyu. As he did so, he took another look at the two snakes, the one light, the
other dark, which were biting each other’s tail and formed an oval. Then he let the amulet
go.
In that moment AURYN, the golden Gem, became so bright, so radiant that he
had to close his eyes as though dazzled by the sun. When he opened them again, he saw
that he was in a vaulted building, as large as the vault of the sky. It was built from blocks
of golden light. And in the middle of this immeasurable space lay, as big as the ramparts
of a town, the two snakes.
Atreyu, Falkor, and the boy without a name stood side by side, near the head of
the black snake, which held the white snake’s tail in its jaws. The rigid eye with its
vertical pupil was directed at the three of them. Compared to that eye, they were tiny;
even the luckdragon seemed no larger than a white caterpillar.
The motionless bodies of the snakes glistened like some unknown metal, the one

black as night, the other silvery white. The havoc they could wreak was checked only
because they held each other prisoner. If they let each other go, the world would end.
That was certain.
But while holding each other fast, they guarded the Water of Life. For in the
center of the edifice they encircled there was a great fountain. Its beam danced up and
down and in falling created and dispersed thousands of forms far more quickly than the
eye could follow. The foaming water burst into a fine mist, in which the golden light was
refracted with all the colors of the rainbow. The fountain roared and laughed and rejoiced
with a thousand voices.
As though parched with thirst, the boy without a name looked at the water — but
how was he to reach it? The snake’s head did not move.
Then Falkor raised his head. His ruby-red eyeballs glittered.
“Do you understand what the Water is saying?” he asked.
“No,” said Atreyu. “I don’t.”
“I don’t know why,” said Falkor. “But I understand perfectly. Maybe because I’m
a luckdragon. All the languages of joy are related.”
“What does the Water say?” Atreyu asked.
Falkor listened closely, and slowly repeated what he heard:
“I am the Water of Life,
Out of myself I grow.
The more you drink of me,
The fuller I will flow.”
Again he listened awhile. Then he said: “It keeps saying: ‘Drink! Drink! Do what
you wish!’ ”
“How can we get to it?” Atreyu asked.
“It’s asking us our names,” Falkor reported.
“I’m Atreyu!” Atreyu cried.
“I’m Falkor!” cried Falkor.
The boy without a name was silent.
Atreyu looked at him, then took him by the hand and cried: “He’s Bastian
Balthazar Bux!”
“It asks,” Falkor translated, “why he doesn’t speak for himself.”
“He can’t,” said Atreyu. “He has forgotten everything.”
Falkor listened again to the roaring of the fountain.
“Without memory, it says, he cannot come in. The snakes won’t let him through.”
Atreyu replied: “I have stored up everything he told us about himself and his
world. I vouch for him.”
Falkor listened.
“It wants to know by what right?”
“I am his friend,” said Atreyu.
Again Falkor listened attentively.
“That may not be acceptable,” he whispered to Atreyu. “Now it’s speaking of your
wound. It wants to know how that came about.”
“We were both right,” said Atreyu, “and we were both wrong. But now Bastian
has given up AURYN of his own free will.”

Falkor listened and nodded.
“Yes,” he said. “It accepts that. This place is AURYN. We are welcome, it says.”
Atreyu looked up at the enormous golden dome. “Each of us,” he whispered, “has
worn it around his neck — you too, Falkor, for a while.”
The luckdragon motioned him to be still and listened again to the sound of the
Water. Then he translated:
“AURYN is the door that Bastian has been looking for. He carried it with him
from the start. But — it says — the snakes won’t let anything belonging to Fantastica cross
the threshold. Bastian must therefore give up everything the Childlike Empress gave him.
Otherwise he cannot drink of the Water of Life.”
“But we are in her sign!” cried Atreyu. “Isn’t she herself here?”
“It says that Moon Child’s power ends here. She is the only one who can never set
foot in this place. She cannot penetrate to the center of AURYN, because she cannot cast
off her own self.”
Atreyu was too bewildered to speak.
“Now,” said Falkor, “it’s asking whether Bastian is ready.”
At that moment the enormous black snake’s head began to move very slowly,
though without releasing the white snake’s tail. The gigantic bodies arched until they
formed a gate, one half of which was black and the other white.
Atreyu took Bastian by the hand and led him through the terrible gate toward the
fountain, which now lay before them in all its grandeur. Falkor followed. As they
advanced, one after another of Bastian’s Fantastican gifts fell away from him. The strong,
handsome, fearless hero became again the small, fat, timid boy. Even his clothing, which
had been reduced almost to rags in the Minroud Mine, vanished and dissolved into
nothingness. In the end he stood naked before the great golden bowl, at the center of
which the Water of Life leapt high into the air like a crystal tree.
In this last moment, when he no longer possessed any of the Fantastican gifts but
had not yet recovered his memory of his own world and himself, he was in a state of utter
uncertainty, not knowing which world he belonged to or whether he really existed.
But then he jumped into the crystal-clear water. He splashed and spluttered and let
the sparkling rain fall into his mouth. He drank till his thirst was quenched. And joy filled
him from head to foot, the joy of living and the joy of being himself. He was newborn.
And the best part of it was that he was now the very person he wanted to be. If he had
been free to choose, he would have chosen to be no one else. Because now he knew that
there were thousands and thousands of forms of joy in the world, but that all were essen-
tially one and the same, namely, the joy of being able to love.
And much later, long after Bastian had returned to his world, in his maturity and
even in his old age, this joy never left him entirely. Even in the hardest moments of his
life he preserved a lightheartedness that made him smile and that comforted others.
“Atreyu!” he cried out to his friend, who was standing with Falkor at the edge of
the great golden bowl. “Come on in! Come and drink! It’s wonderful!”
Atreyu laughed and shook his head.
“No,” he called back. “This time we’re only here to keep you company.”
“This time?” Bastian asked. “What do you mean by that?”
Atreyu exchanged a glance with Falkor. Then he said: “Falkor and I have already
been here. We didn’t recognize the place at first, because we were asleep when we were

brought here and when we were taken away. But now we remember.”
Bastian came out of the water.
“Now I know who I am,” he said, beaming.
“Yes,” said Atreyu, and nodded. “And now I recognize you. Now you look the
way you did when I saw you in the Magic Mirror Gate.”
Bastian looked up at the foaming, sparkling water.
“I’d like to bring my father some,” he shouted. “But how?”
“I don’t think you can do that,” said Atreyu. “It’s not possible to carry anything
from Fantastica across the threshold.”
“For Bastian it is!” said Falkor, whose voice had resumed its full bronze
resonance. “He can do it.”
“You really are a luckdragon,” said Bastian.
Falkor motioned him to be still while he listened to the roaring voice of the Water.
Then he said: “The Water says you must be on your way now and so must we.”
“Which is my way?” Bastian asked.
“Out through the other gate,” Falkor answered. “Where the white snake’s head is
lying.”
“All right,” said Bastian. “But how will I get out? The white head isn’t moving.”
Indeed, the white snake’s head lay motionless. It held the black snake’s tail in its
jaws and stared at Bastian out of its great eyes.
“The Water asks you,” Falkor translated, “whether you completed all the stories
you began in Fantastica.”
“No,” said Bastian. “None of them really.”
Falkor listened awhile. His face took on a worried look.
“In that case, it says, the white snake won’t let you through. You must go back to
Fantastica and finish them all.”
“All the stories?” Bastian stammered. “Then I’ll never be able to go back. Then it’s
all been for nothing.”
Falkor listened eagerly.
“What does it say?” Bastian wanted to know.
“Hush!” said Falkor.
After a while he sighed arid said: “It says there’s no help for it unless someone
promises to do it in your place. But no one can do that.”
“I can! I will!” said Atreyu.
Bastian looked at him in silence. Then he fell on his neck and stammered:
“Atreyu! Atreyu! I’ll never forget this!”
Atreyu smiled.
“That’s good, Bastian. Then you won’t forget Fantastica either.”
He gave him a brotherly pat on the back, then quickly turned around and headed
for the black snake’s gate, which was still upraised and open as when they had entered.
“Falkor,” said Bastian. “How will you and Atreyu finish the stories I have left
behind?”
The white dragon winked one of his ruby-red eyes and replied: “With luck, my
boy! With luck!”
Then he followed his friend and master.
Bastian watched as they passed through the gate on their way back to Fantastica.

They turned again and waved to him. Then as the black snake’s head sank to the ground,
Atreyu and Falkor vanished from Bastian’s sight.
Now he was alone.
He turned towards the white snake’s head. It had risen and the snake’s body now
formed a gate just as the black snake’s body had done.
Quickly Bastian cupped his hands, gathered as much of the Water of Life as he
could hold, ran to the gate, and flung himself into the empty darkness beyond.
“Father!” he screamed. “Father! I — am — Bastian — Balthazar — Bux!”
“Father! Father! I — am — Bastian — Balthazar — Bux!”
Still screaming, he found himself in the schoolhouse attic, which long, long ago he
had left for Fantastica. At fast he didn’t recognize the place, and because of the strange
objects around him, the stuffed animals, the skeleton, and the paintings, he thought for a
brief moment that this might be a different part of Fantastica. But then, catching sight of
his school satchel and the rusty seven-armed candelabrum with the spent candles, he
knew where he was.
How long could it have been since he started on his long journey through the
Neverending Story? Weeks? Months? Years? He had once read about a man who had
spent just an hour in a magic cave. When he returned home, a hundred years had passed,
and of all the people he had known as a child he remembered only one, and he was an
old old man.
Bastian was aware of the gray daylight, but he could not make out whether it was
morning or afternoon. It was bitter cold in the attic, just as on the night of Bastian’s
departure.
He disentangled himself from the dusty army blankets, put on his shoes and coat,
and saw to his surprise that they were wet as they had been the day when it had rained so
hard.
He looked for the book he had stolen that day, the book that had started him on
his adventure. He was determined to bring it back to that grumpy Mr. Coreander. What
did he care if Mr. Coreander punished him for stealing it, or reported him to the police?
A person who had ridden on the back of the Many-Colored Death didn’t scare so easily.
But the book wasn’t there.
Bastian looked and looked. He rummaged through the blankets and looked in
every corner. Without success. The Neverending Story had disappeared.
“Oh well,” Bastian finally said to himself. I’ll have to tell him it’s gone. Of course
he won’t believe me. There’s nothing I can do about that. I’ll just have to take the
consequences. But maybe he won’t even remember the book after all this time. Maybe the
bookshop isn’t even there anymore.”
He would soon find out how much time had elapsed. If when he passed through
the schoolhouse the teachers and pupils he ran into were unknown to him, he would know
what to expect.
But when he opened the attic door and went down the stairs, there wasn’t a sound
to be heard. The building seemed deserted. And then the school clock struck nine. That
meant it was morning, so classes must have begun.
Bastian looked into several classrooms. All were empty. When he went to a
window and looked down into the street, he saw a few pedestrians and cars. So the world

hadn’t come to an end.
He ran down the steps and tried to open the big front door, but it was locked. He
went to the janitor’s office, rang the bell and knocked, but no one stirred.
What was he to do? He couldn’t just wait for someone to turn up. Even if he had
spilled the Water of Life, he wanted to go home to his father.
Should he open a window and shout until somebody heard him and had the door
opened? No, that would make him feel foolish. It occurred to him that he could climb out
of a window, since the windows could be opened from the inside. But the ground-floor
windows were all barred. Then he remembered that in looking out of the second-floor
window he had seen some scaffolding. Evidently the faqade was being refurbished.
Bastian went back up to the second floor and opened the window. The scaffolding
consisted only of uprights with boards placed horizontally between them at intervals. He
stepped out on the top board, which swayed under his weight. For a moment his head
reeled and he felt afraid, but he fought his dizziness and fear. To someone who had been
lord of Perilin, this was no problem, even if he had lost his fabulous strength and even
though the weight of his little fat body was making things rather hard for him. Calmly
and deliberately he found holds for his hands and feet and climbed down. Once he got a
splinter in his hand, but such trifles meant nothing to him now. Though slightly
overheated and out of breath, he reached the street in good shape. No one had seen him.
Bastian ran home. He ran so hard that the books and pens in his satchel jiggled
and rattled to the rhythm of his steps. He had a stitch in his side, but in his hurry to see
his father he kept on running.
When at last he came to the house where he lived, he stopped for a moment and
looked up at the window of his father’s laboratory. Then suddenly he was seized with
fear. For the fast time it occurred to him that his father might not be there anymore.
But his father was there and must have seen him coming, for when Bastian rushed
up the stairs, his father came running to meet him. He spread out his arms and Bastian
threw himself into them. His father lifted him up and carried him inside.
“Bastian, my boy!” he said over and over again. “My dear little boy, where have
you been? What happened to you?”
A few minutes later they were sitting at the kitchen table and Bastian was drinking
hot milk and eating breakfast rolls, which his father had lovingly spread with butter and
honey. Then the boy noticed that his father’s face was pale and drawn, his eyes red and
his chin unshaven. But otherwise he looked the same as he had long ago, when Bastian
went away. And Bastian told him so.
“Long ago?” his father asked in amazement. “What do you mean?”
“How long have I been gone?”
“Since yesterday, Bastian. Since you went to school. But when you didn’t come
home, I phoned your teachers and they told me you hadn’t been there. I looked for you all
day and all night, my boy. I feared the worst, I put the police on your trail. Oh God,
Bastian! What happened? I’ve been half crazy with worry. Where have you been?”
Then Bastian began to tell his father about his adventures. He told the whole
story in great detail. It took many hours.
His father listened as he had never listened before. He understood Bastian’s story.
At about midday he interrupted Bastian for a little while. First he called the
police to tell them his son had come home and that everything was all right. Then he

made lunch for both of them, and Bastian went on with his story. Night was falling by the
time Bastian came to the Water of Life and told his father how he had wanted to bring
him some but had spilled it.
It was almost dark in the kitchen. His father sat motionless. Bastian stood up and
switched on the light. And then he saw something he had never seen before.
He saw tears in his father’s eyes.
And he knew that he had brought him the Water of Life after all.
Bastian’s father sat him down on his lap and hugged him. When they had sat like
that for a long while, his father heaved a deep sigh, looked into Bastian’s face, and
smiled. It was the happiest smile Bastian had ever seen on his face.
“From now on,” said his father, “everything is going to be different between us.
Don’t you agree?”
Bastian nodded. He couldn’t speak. His heart was too full.
Next morning the winter’s first snow lay soft and clean on Bastian’s windowsill.
The street sounds that came to him were muffled.
“Do you know what, Bastian?” said his father at breakfast. “I think we two have
every reason to celebrate. A day like this happens only once in a lifetime — and some
people never have one. So I suggest that we do something really sensational. I’ll forget
about any work and you needn’t go to school. I’ll write an excuse for you. How does that
sound?”
“School?” said Bastian. “Is it still operating? When I passed through the building
yesterday, there wasn’t a soul. Not even the janitor was there.”
“Yesterday?” said his father. “Yesterday was Sunday.”
Bastian stirred his cocoa thoughtfully. Then he said in an undertone: “I think it’s
going to take me a little while to get used to things again.”
“Exactly,” said his father. “And that’s why we’re giving ourselves a little holiday.
What would you like to do? We could go for a hike in the country or we could go to the
zoo. Either way we’ll treat ourselves to the finest lunch the world has ever seen. This
afternoon we could go shopping and buy anything you like. And tonight — how about the
theater?”
Bastian’s eyes sparkled. Then he said firmly: “Wonderful! But there’s something I
must do first. I have to go and tell Mr. Coreander that I stole his book and lost it.”
Bastian’s father took his hand
“If you like,” he said, “I’ll attend to that for you.”
“No,” said Bastian. “It’s my responsibility. I want to do it myself. And I think I
should do it right away.”
He stood up and put on his coat. His father said nothing, but the look on his face
was one of surprise and respect. Such behavior in Bastian was something new.
“I believe,” he said finally, “that I too will need a little time to get used to things.”
Bastian was already in the entrance hall. “I’ll be right back,” he called. “I’m sure
it won’t take long. Not this time.”
When he came to Mr. Coreander’s bookshop, his courage failed him after all. He
looked through the pane with the ornate lettering on it. Mr. Coreander was busy with a
customer, and Bastian decided to wait. He walked up and down outside the shop. It was

snowing again.
At last the customer left.
“Now!” Bastian commanded himself.
Remembering how he had gone to meet Grograman in Goab, the Desert of
Colors, he pressed the door handle resolutely.
Behind the wall of books at the far end of the dimly lit room he heard a cough. He
went forward, then, slightly pale but with grave composure, he stepped up to Mr.
Coreander, who was sitting in his worn leather armchair as he had been at their last
meeting.
For a long time Bastian said nothing. He had expected Mr. Coreander to go red
in the face and scream at him: “Thief! Monster!” or something of the kind.
Instead, the old man deliberately lit his curved pipe, screwed up his eyes, and
studied the boy through his ridiculous little spectacles. When the pipe was finally
burning, he puffed awhile, then grumbled: “What is it this time?”
“I. . .” Bastian began haltingly. “I stole a book from you. I meant to return it, but I
can’t, because I lost it, or rather — well, I haven’t got it anymore.”
Mr. Coreander stopped puffing and took his pipe out of his mouth.
“What sort of book?” he asked.
“The one you were reading the last time I was here. I walked off with it. You were
telephoning in the back room, it was lying on the chair, and I just walked off with it.”
“I see,” said Mr. Coreander, clearing his throat. “But none of my books is
missing. What was the title of this book?”
“It’s called the Neverending Story,” said Bastian. “It’s bound in copper-colored
silk that shimmers when you move it around. There are two snakes on the cover, a light
one and a dark one, and they’re biting each other’s tails. Inside it’s printed in two
different colors — and there are big beautiful capitals at the beginning of the chapters.”
“This is extremely odd,” said Mr. Coreander. “I’ve never had such a book. You
can’t have stolen it from me. Maybe you swiped it somewhere else.”
“Oh no!” Bastian assured him. “You must remember. It’s –” He hesitated, but
then he blurted it out. “It’s a magic book. While I was reading it, I got into the
Neverending Story, and when I came out again, the book was gone.”
Mr. Coreander watched Bastian over his spectacles.
“Would you be pulling my leg, by any chance?”
“No,” said Bastian in dismay. “Of course not. I’m telling you the truth. You must
know that.”
Mr. Coreander thought for a while, then shook his head.
“Better tell me all about it. Sit down, boy. Make yourself at home.”
He pointed his pipe stem at a second armchair, facing his own, and Bastian sat
down.
“And now,” said Mr. Coreander, “tell me the whole story. But slowly, if you
please, and one thing at a time.”
And Bastian told his story.
He told it a little more briefly than he had to his father, but since MrCoreander
listened with keen interest and kept asking for details, it was more than two hours before
Bastian had done.
Heaven knows why, but in all that long time they were not disturbed by a single

customer.
When Bastian had finished, Mr. Coreander puffed for a long while, as though
deep in thought. At length he cleared his throat, straightened his little spectacles, looked
Bastian over, and said: “One thing is sure: You didn’t steal this book from me, because it
belongs neither to me nor to you nor to anyone else. If I’m not mistaken, the book itself
comes from Fantastica. Maybe at this very moment — who knows? — someone else is
reading it.”
“Then you believe me?” Bastian asked.
“Of course I believe you,” said Mr. Coreander. “Any sensible person would.”
“Frankly,” said Bastian, “I didn’t expect you to.”
“There are people who can never go to Fantastica,” said Mr. Coreander, “and
others who can, but who stay there forever. And there are just a few who go to Fantastica
and come back. Like you. And they make both worlds well again.”
“Oh,” said Bastian, blushing slightly. “I don’t deserve any credit. I almost didn’t
make it back. If it hadn’t been for Atreyu I’d have been stuck in the City of Old Emperors
for good.”
Mr. Coreander nodded and puffed at his pipe.
“Hmm,” he grumbled. “You’re lucky having a friend in Fantastica. God knows, it’s
not everybody who can say that.”
“Mr. Coreander,” Bastian asked, “how do you know all that? I mean — have you
ever been in Fantastica?”
“Of course I have,” said Mr. Coreander.
“But then,” said Bastian, “you must know Moon Child.”
“Yes, I know the Childlike Empress,” said Mr. Coreander, “though not by that
name. I called her something different. But that doesn’t matter.”
“Then you must know the book!” Bastian cried. “Then you have read the
Neverending Story!”
Mr. Coreander shook his head.
“Every real story is a Neverending Story.” He passed his eye over the many books
that covered the walls of his shop from floor to ceiling, pointed the stem of his pipe at
them, and went on:
“There are many doors to Fantastica, my boy. There are other such magic books.
A lot of people read them without noticing. It all depends on who gets his hands on such
books.”
“Then the Neverending Story is different for different people?”
“That’s right,” said Mr. Coreander. “And besides, it’s not just books. There are
other ways of getting to Fantastica and back. You’ll find out.”
“Do you think so?” Bastian asked hopefully. “But then I’d have to meet Moon
Child again, and no one can meet her more than once.”
Mr. Coreander leaned forward and lowered his voice.
“Let an old Fantastica hand tell you something, my boy. This is a secret that no
one in Fantastica can know. When you think it over, you’ll see why. You can’t visit Moon
Child a second time, that’s true. But if you can give her a new name, you’ll see her again.
And however often you manage to do that, it will be the first and only time.”
For a moment Mr. Coreander’s bulldog-face took on a soft glow, which made it
look young and almost handsome.

“Thank you, Mr. Coreander,” said Bastian.
“I have to thank you, my boy,” said Mr. Coreander. “I’d appreciate it if you
dropped in to see me now and then. We could exchange experiences. There aren’t many
people one can discuss these things with.”
He held out his hand to Bastian. “Will you?”
“Gladly,” said Bastian, taking the proffered hand. “I have to go now. My father’s
waiting. But I’ll come and see you soon.”
Mr. Coreander took him to the door. Through the reversed writing on the glass
pane, Bastian saw that his father was waiting for him across the street. His face was one
great beam.
Bastian opened the door so vigorously that the little glass bells tinkled wildly, and
ran across to his father.
Mr. Coreander closed the door gently and looked after father and son.
“Bastian Balthazar Bux,” he grumbled. “If I’m not mistaken, you will show many
others the way to Fantastica, and they will bring us the Water of Life.”
Mr. Coreander was not mistaken.
But that’s another story and shall be told another time.
About the Author:
Michael Ende was born in Garmisch-Partenkirchen, Germany, in 1929. After
attending drama school from 1948 to 1950, he worked variously as an actor, a writer of
sketches and plays, a director of the Volkstheater in Munich, and a film critic for the
Bavarian broadcasting company. His first novel for children, Jim Knopf and Lukas the
Engine Driver, was published in Germany in 1960 to great popular and critical acclaim,
and both radio and television series based on the Jim Knopf books were soon produced.
In 1973 he published another award-winning children’s novel, Mono. When The
Neverending Story was first published in Germany, in 1979, it immediately became the
number-one bestseller and remained in that position for three years. It has since been
published in many different languages all over the world, including Japanese, and has
enchanted readers in each country in which it has appeared.